Home Contents Index

NP 64

RECORD OF AMENDMENTS
The table below is to record Section IV Notice to Mariners amendments affecting this volume.
Sub paragraph numbers in the margin of the body of the book are to assist the user with corrections to this
volume from these amendments.

Weekly Notices to Mariners (Section IV)

2004 2005 2006 2007

IMPORTANT − SEE RELATED ADMIRALTY PUBLICATIONS

This is one of a series of publications produced by the United Kingdom Hydrographic Office which should be consulted by users of
Admiralty Charts. The full list of such publications is as follows:
Notices to Mariners (Annual, permanent, temporary and preliminary), Chart 5011 (Symbols and abbreviations), The Mariner’s
Handbook (especially Chapters 1 and 2 for important information on the use of UKHO products, their accuracy and limitations),
Sailing Directions (Pilots), List of Lights and Fog Signals, List of Radio Signals, Tide Tables and their digital equivalents.
All charts and publications should be kept up to date with the latest amendments.
Home Contents Index

NP 64

RED SEA
AND

GULF OF ADEN PILOT

Suez Canal
Gulf of Suez and Gulf of ‘Aqaba
Red Sea
Gulf of Aden
South−east coast of Arabia — Ra‘s Fartak to Ra‘s al Junayz
Coast of Africa — Raas Caseyr to Raas Binna
Suqu
rá and adjacent islands

FOURTEENTH EDITION
2004

PUBLISHED BY THE UNITED KINGDOM HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE

Home Contents Index

E Crown Copyright 2004

To be obtained from Agents
for the sale of Admiralty Charts and Publications

Copyright for some of the material in

this publication is owned by the authority
named under the item and permission for its
reproduction must be obtained from the owner.

First published . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1849

Second edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1873
Third edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1882
Fourth edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1892
Fifth edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1900
Sixth edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1909
Seventh edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1921
Eighth edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1932
Ninth edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1944
Tenth edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1955
Eleventh edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1967
Twelfth edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1980
Thirteenth edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2002

ii
Home Contents Index

PREFACE

The Fourteenth Edition of the Red Sea and Gulf of Aden Pilot has been compiled by M.J.Fagan, Master Mariner, Lieutenant
Commander J E J Marshall, Royal Navy and Lieutenant Commander D M Ives, Royal Navy. The United Kingdom Hydrographic
Office has used all reasonable endeavours to ensure that this Pilot contains all the appropriate information obtained by and
assessed by it at the date shown below. Information received or assessed after that date will be included in Admiralty Notices to
Mariners where appropriate. If in doubt, see The Mariner’s Handbook for details of what Admiralty Notices to Mariners are and
how to use them.

This edition supersedes the Thirteenth Edition (2002), which is cancelled.

Information on climate and currents has been based on data provided by the Met Office.

The following sources of information, other than UKHO Publications and Ministry of Defence papers, have been consulted:

Local Port Authorities

Port Handbooks produced by Port Authorities
Fairplay World Ports Directory 2003/2004
Lloyds Ports of the World 2004
Lloyds Maritime Guide 2001
The Statesman’s Yearbook 2003−04
Whitakers Almanack 2004
Red Sea Pilot (2nd Edition 2002) Morgan and Davies (Imray, Laurie, Norie and Wilson)
United States Sailing Directions (Enroute) Red Sea and Persian Gulf Publication 172 Ninth Edition (2001)
French Instructions Nautiques Mer Rouge Golfe D‘Aden (1997)

Dr D.W.Williams
United Kingdom National Hydrographer

The United Kingdom Hydrographic Office

Admiralty Way
Taunton
Somerset TA1 2DN
England
23rd December 2004

iii
Home Contents Index

PREFACE
to the Thirteenth Edition (2002)

The Thirteenth Edition of the Red Sea and Gulf of Aden Pilot has been prepared by Captain N.B.Bamford RD, Master
Mariner, and contains the latest information received in the United Kingdom Hydrographic Office to the date given below.

This edition supersedes the Twelfth Edition (1980) and Supplement No 5 which are cancelled.

Information on climate and currents has been based on data provided by the Meteorological Office, Bracknell.

The following sources of information, other than UKHO Publications and Ministry of Defence papers, have been consulted:

Local Port Authorities

Port Handbooks produced by Port Authorities
Fairplay World Ports Directory 2001
Lloyds Ports of the World 2001
Lloyds Maritime Guide 2001
The Statesman’s Yearbook 2001−02
Whitakers Almanack 2002
Davies and Morgan Red Sea Pilot 1995
United States Sailing Directions (Enroute) Red Sea and Persian Gulf Publication 172 Ninth Edition (2001)
French Instructions Nautiques Mer Rouge Golfe D‘Aden (1997)

Dr D.W.Williams
United Kingdom National Hydrographer

The United Kingdom Hydrographic Office

Admiralty Way
Taunton
Somerset TA1 2DN
England
27th June 2002

iv
Home Contents Index

CONTENTS
Pages
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Preface to the Thirteenth Edition (2002) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Explanatory notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Index chartlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . facing 1

CHAPTER 1

Navigation and regulations

Limits of the book (1.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Routes (1.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Navigational dangers and hazards (1.10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Traffic and operations (1.16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Charts (1.22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Aids to navigation (1.27) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Pilotage (1.31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Radio facilities (1.34) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Regulations (1.40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Signals (1.64) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Distress and rescue (1.69) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Countries and ports

Egypt (1.79) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Republic of Sudan (1.94) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Eritrea (1.108) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Israel (1.122) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Jordan (1.134) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Saudi Arabia (1.144) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Yemen (1.154) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Oman (1.168) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Djibouti (1.180) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Somalia (1.192) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Moslem Festivals (1.205) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Principal ports, harbours and anchorages (1.208) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Port services − summary (1.218) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Natural conditions
Maritime topography (1.229) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Currents, tidal streams and flow (1.236) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Sea level (1.246) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Sea and swell (1.247) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Sea water characteristics (1.250) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Climate and weather (1.252) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Climatic tables (1.275) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Meteorological conversion table and scales (1.295) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

CHAPTER 2
Suez Canal, Port of Suez (Bûr el Suweis) and Suez Bay (Bahr el Qulzum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

CHAPTER 3
Gulf of Suez . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

CHAPTER 4
Red Sea — central passage — Strait of Gubal to Straits of Bab El Mandeb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

CHAPTER 5
Red Sea — west side — Gifâtîn Islands to Ras Abu Fatma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

CHAPTER 6
Red Sea — west side — Ras Abu Fatma to Ras Qass
r including the Inner Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

v
Home Contents Index

CHAPTER 7
Red Sea — west side — Ras Qass
r to Ras Raheita . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

CHAPTER 8
Red Sea — north part — The south−east coast of the Sinai Peninsula
from Râs Muhammad to Râs Nurâni, and the Gulf of ‘Aqaba . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

CHAPTER 9
Red Sea — east side — Ra‘s Qibah to Jeddah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

CHAPTER 10
Red Sea — east side — Jeddah to Oreste Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

CHAPTER 11
Red Sea — east side — Oreste Point to Ra’s Shaykh Sa‘d and the Straits of Bab el Mandeb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

CHAPTER 12
Arabia — south coast — Straits of Bab el Mandeb to Ra’s Fartak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

CHAPTER 13
Arabia — south coast — Ra’s Fartak to Ra’s al Junayz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

CHAPTER 14
Gulf of Aden — south side — The coast of Africa from the
Straits of Bab el Mandeb to Raas Caseyr and thence south to Raas Binna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

CHAPTER 15
Islands eastward of Raas Caseyr — ‘Abd Al Kr, The Brothers and Suqurá . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

APPENDICES

APPENDIX I − Area dangerous due to mines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

APPENDIX II − Oman — Firing Practice Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

APPENDIX III − Mooring sites on protected reefs in Egyptian waters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

DISTANCE TABLE

DISTANCE TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

INDEX

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

vi
Home Contents Index

EXPLANATORY NOTES

Admiralty Sailing Directions are intended for use by vessels of 12 m or more in length. They amplify charted detail and contain
information needed for safe navigation which is not available from Admiralty charts, or other hydrographic publications. They are intended
to be read in conjunction with the charts quoted in the text.

This volume of the Sailing Directions will be kept up-to-date by the issue of a new edition at intervals of approximately 3 years, without
the use of supplements. In addition important corrections which cannot await the new edition are published in Section IV of the weekly
editions of Admiralty Notices to Mariners. A list of such corrections and notices in force is published in the last weekly edition for each
month. Those still in force at the end of the year are reprinted in the Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners.

This volume should not be used without reference to Section IV of the weekly editions of Admiralty Notices to Mariners.

CD−ROM

Status. A compact disc is provided at the back of this volume. The paper publication of Sailing Directions satisfies the requirements of
Chapter V of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea. The CD version does not satisfy these requirements and should only
be used in conjunction with the paper publication and any amendments affecting the paper publication. Where any discrepancy exists
between data on the CD and in the paper publication of Sailing Directions, the paper publication (inclusive of amendments) is to be relied
upon.

Disclaimer. Whilst the UKHO has made all reasonable efforts to ensure that the data on the CD was accurate at the time of production, it
has not verified the data for navigational purposes and the CD is not suitable, and is not to be relied upon, for navigation. The use of the CD for
this purpose is at the user’s own risk. The UKHO accepts no liability (except in the case of death or personal injury caused by the negligence
of the UKHO) whether in contract, tort, under any statute or otherwise and whether or not arising out of any negligence on the part of the
UKHO in respect of any inadequacy of any kind whatsoever in the data on the CD or in the means of distribution.

Conditions of Release. The material supplied on the CD−ROM is protected by Crown Copyright. No part of the data may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise
without the prior written permission of the UKHO. The copyright material, its derivatives and its outputs may not be sold or distributed or
commercially exploited in either an original or derived form without the prior written permission of the UKHO. For the avoidance of doubt,
the supplied material, its derivatives and its outputs shall not be placed, or allowed to be placed, on a computer accessible to Third Parties
whether via the Internet or otherwise. The release of the supplied material in no way implies that the UKHO will supply further material.

References to hydrographic and other publications

The Mariner’s Handbook gives general information affecting navigation and is complementary to this volume.

Ocean Passages for the World and Routeing Charts contain ocean routeing information and should be consulted for other than coastal
passages.

Admiralty List of Lights should be consulted for details of lights, lanbys and fog signals, as these are not fully described in this volume.

Admiralty List of Radio Signals should be consulted for information relating to coast and port radio stations, radio details of pilotage
services, radiobeacons and direction finding stations, meteorological services, radio navigational aids, Global Maritime Distress and Safety
System (GMDSS) and Differential Global Positioning System (DGPS) stations, as these are only briefly referred to in this volume.

Admiralty Maritime Communications is a comprehensive guide on all aspects of maritime communications for the yachtsman and small
craft user. It provides general information on Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS), the management of VHF, Maritime
Safety Information, NAVTEX, Inmarsat and Radio Facsimile, and detailed information and procedures for marinas and harbours used by
small craft.

Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners contains in addition to the temporary and preliminary notices, and amendments and
notices affecting Sailing Directions, a number of notices giving information of a permanent nature covering radio messages and navigational
warnings, distress and rescue at sea and exercise areas.

The International Code of Signals should be consulted for details of distress and life-saving signals, international ice-breaker signals as
well as international flag signals.

Remarks on subject matter

Buoys are generally described in detail only when they have special navigational significance, or where the scale of the chart is too small
to show all the details clearly.

Chart index diagrams in this volume show only those Admiralty charts of a suitable scale to give good coverage of the area. Mariners
should consult NP 131 Catalogue of Admiralty Charts and Publications for details of larger scale charts.

vii
Home Contents Index
EXPLANATORY NOTES

Chart references in the text normally refer to the largest scale Admiralty chart but occasionally a smaller scale chart may be quoted where
its use is more appropriate.

Firing, practice and exercise areas. Except for submarine exercise areas, details of firing, practice and exercise areas are not mentioned
in Sailing Directions, but signals and buoys used in connection with these areas are sometimes mentioned if significant for navigation.
Attention is invited to the Annual Notice to Mariners on this subject.

Names have been taken from the most authoritative source. When an obsolete name still appears on the chart, it is given in brackets
following the proper name at the principal description of the feature in the text and where the name is first mentioned.

Tidal information relating the daily vertical movements of the water is not given; for this Admiralty Tide Tables should be consulted.
Changes in water level of an abnormal nature are mentioned.
Time difference used in the text when applied to the time of High Water found from the Admiralty Tide Tables, gives the time of the event
being described in the Standard Time kept in the area of that event. Due allowance must be made for any seasonal daylight saving time which
may be kept.

Wreck information is included where drying or below-water wrecks are relatively permanent features having significance for
navigation or anchoring.

Units and terminology used in this volume

Latitude and Longitude given in brackets are approximate and are taken from the chart quoted.

Bearings and directions are referred to the true compass and when given in degrees are reckoned clockwise from 000° (North) to 359°.
Bearings used for positioning are given from the reference object.
Bearings of objects, alignments and light sectors are given as seen from the vessel.
Courses always refer to the course to be made good over the ground.

Winds are described by the direction from which they blow.

Tidal streams and currents are described by the direction towards which they flow.

Distances are expressed in sea miles of 60 to a degree of latitude and sub-divided into cables of one tenth of a sea mile.

Depths are given below chart datum, except where otherwise stated.

Heights of objects refer to the height of the structure above the ground and are invariably expressed as “... m in height”.

Elevations, as distinct from heights, are given above Mean High Water Springs or Mean Higher High Water whichever is quoted in
Admiralty Tide Tables, and expressed as, “an elevation of ... m”. However the elevation of natural features such as hills may alternatively be
expressed as “... m high” since in this case there can be no confusion between elevation and height.

Metric units are used for all measurements of depths, heights and short distances, but where feet/fathoms charts are referred to, these
latter units are given in brackets after the metric values for depths and heights shown on the chart.

Time is expressed in the four-figure notation beginning at midnight and is given in local time unless otherwise stated. Details of local time
kept will be found in Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.

Bands is the word used to indicate horizontal marking.

Stripes is the word used to indicate markings which are vertical, unless stated to be diagonal.

Conspicuous objects are natural and artificial marks which are outstanding, easily identifiable and clearly visible to the mariner over a
large area of sea in varying conditions of light. If the scale is large enough they will normally be shown on the chart in bold capitals and may be
marked “conspic”.

Prominent objects are those which are easily identifiable, but do not justify being classified as conspicuous.

viii
Home Contents Index

ABBREVIATIONS
The following abbreviations are used in the text.

AIS Automatic Indentification System Lanby Large automatic navigation buoy

ALC Articulated loading column LASH Lighter Aboard Ship
ALP Articulated loading platform LAT Lowest Astronomical Tide
AMVER Automated Mutual Assistance Vessel Rescue LF low frequency
System LHG Liquefied Hazardous Gas
LMT Local Mean Time
°C degrees Celsius LNG Liquefied Natural Gas
CALM Catenary anchor leg mooring LOA Length overall
CBM Conventional buoy mooring LPG Liquefied Petroleum Gas
CDC Certain Dangerous Cargo LW Low Water
CVTS Co−operative Vessel Traffic System
m metre(s)
DF direction finding mb millibar(s)
DG degaussing MCTS Marine Communications and Traffic Services
DGPS Differential Global Positioning System Centres
DW Deep Water MF medium frequency
dwt deadweight tonnage MHz megahertz
DZ danger zone MHHW Mean Higher High Water
MHLW Mean Higher Low Water
E east (easterly, eastward, eastern, easternmost) MHW Mean High Water
EEZ exclusive economic zone MHWN Mean High Water Neaps
ELSBM Exposed location single buoy mooring MHWS Mean High Water Springs
ENE east-north-east MLHW Mean Lower High Water
EPIRB Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacon MLLW Mean Lower Low Water
ESE east-south-east MLW Mean Low Water
ETA estimated time of arrival MLWN Mean Low Water Neaps
ETD estimated time of departure MLWS Mean Low Water Springs
EU European Union mm millimetre(s)
MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity
feu forty foot equivalent unit MRCC Maritime Rescue Co-ordination Centre
fm fathom(s) MRSC Maritime Rescue Sub-Centre
FPSO Floating production storage and offloading MSL Mean Sea Level
vessel MV Motor Vessel
FPU Floating production unit MW megawatt(s)
FSO Floating storage and offloading vessel MY Motor Yacht
ft foot (feet)
N north (northerly, northward, northern,
g/cm3 gram per cubic centimetre northernmost)
GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and Safety System NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organization
GPS Global Positioning System Navtex Navigational Telex System
GRP glass reinforced plastic NE north-east
grt gross register tonnage NNE north-north-east
gt gross tonnage NNW north-north-west
No number
HAT Highest Astronomical Tide nrt nett register tonnage
HF high frequency NW north-west
HMS Her (His) Majesty’s Ship
hp horse power ODAS Ocean Data Acquisition System
hPa hectopascal
HSC High Speed Craft PEL Port Entry Light
HW High Water PLEM Pipe line end manifold
POL Petrol, Oil & Lubricants
IALA International Association of Lighthouse
Authorities RCC Rescue Co−ordination Centre
IHO International Hydrographic Organization RMS Royal Mail Ship
IMO International Maritime Organization RN Royal Navy
ITCZ Intertropical Convergence Zone Ro-Ro Roll−on, Roll-off
RT radio telephony
JRCC Joint Rescue Co−ordination Centre
S south (southerly, southward, southern,
kHz kilohertz southernmost)
km kilometre(s) SALM Single anchor leg mooring system
kn knot(s) SALS Single anchored leg storage system
kW kilowatt(s) SAR Search and Rescue

ix
Home Contents Index
ABBREVIATIONS

Satnav Satellite navigation UTC Co-ordinated Universal Time

SBM Single buoy mooring
SE south-east VDR Voyage Data Recorder
SPM Single point mooring VHF very high frequency
sq square VLCC Very Large Crude Carrier
SS Steamship VMRS Vessel Movement Reporting System
SSE south-south-east VTC Vessel Traffic Centre
SSW south-south-west VTMS Vessel Traffic Management System
SW south-west VTS Vessel Traffic Services

teu twenty foot equivalent unit W west (westerly, westward, western,

TSS Traffic Separation Scheme westernmost)
WGS World Geodetic System
UHF ultra high frequency WMO World Meteorological Organization
UKHO United Kingdom Hydrographic Office WNW west-north-west
ULCC Ultra Large Crude Carrier WSW west-south-west
UN United Nations WT radio (wireless) telegraphy
UT Universal Time

x
Home Contents Index

GLOSSARY OF WORDS WHICH MAY BE FOUND ON THE CHARTS AND IN THIS VOLUME

Key to languages: 1 − Egyptian Arabic, 2 − Sudanese Arabic, 3 − Hijaz Arabic, 4 − Yemeni Arabic, 5 − Somali Arabic, 6 − Hebrew, 7 − Somali

Note. In many cases, words as spoken are common to several languages, but as written contain minor differences (eg Ras, Ra‘s and Râs). Such words
appear in the glossary in one form only, eg Ras. This glossary should not, therefore, be taken as authority for the precise form in which a word is written in
any particular language.

Word Language English Word Language English

Aari 3 shoal barr ramleh 3 sandbank

aasifa 3 sand storm barrosi 4 anchor
abu 1,2,3,4,5 father barsi 2 anchor
abyad 1,2,3,5, white b
skalb 2 shingle
aezraq 2 blue bati 1,2,3 slow
agam 6 lake baura 2 anchor
ahmar 1,2,3,4 red beer 5,6 well
ahmer 5 red behr 5 sea
ain 1,3,4,5,6 springs (of water) behr neksan 5 half−tide
aisar 4 port (side of vessel) behr seneh 5 high water
akhdar 1,2,3,4 green behr yari 5 ebb
akdher 5 green beida 2 white
ala janb 3 abeam beit 4,5 house
alama 3,4 beacon bejirah 5 lake
alama bi shaki jaras 3 bell−buoy beled 5 town
al
ma noor 3 light−buoy berosi 5 anchor
al
ma sabaya 3 buoy bet 6 house
ala wara 3 astern betihet 5 marsh
am
m 1 ahead beyt 2 house
ameeq 3 deep bilad 3 town
amik 5 deep bîr 1,2,3,4 well
amiq 1 deep biyogal 7 lake
amshi deladel 5 slow bizza 6 marsh
amwaj 4,5 breakers boat 3 boat
amwaj kubra 3 breakers bofa abu nur 4 light−buoy
ara al bahr 4 low water boja 4 buoy
aradi 7 peak boja abu jeras 4 bell−buoy
ari 2,4,5 shoal, shallow boya 5 buoy
aro 7 peak boya abu nakus 5 bell−buoy
asdaf 3 shells boya eh nur 5 light−buoy
asfar 1,2,4 yellow boya e’s siti 5 whistle−buoy
asfer 5 yellow bughaaz 3 strait
asmaret−dabab 1 fog signal bughaz 1,2,4 strait, gulf (2)
ashgar 4 wood (trees) tree buhaira 4 lake
ashtûm 1 channel buheira 1 lake

sifa 1 storm buhera 3 lake
aswad 1,2,3,4 black bukah at tin 5 mud−bank
aswed 5 black bura 3 anchor
atama 1 beacon burf 3,5 spire
atta 5 bank burg 1 tower
atta metawel 5 bar burj 3,5 tower
awama zat nûr 1 light−buoy buroosi 3 anchor
awama zat sofara 1 whistle−buoy bsla 1,2 compass
awamet−garas 1 bell−buoy bussala 3 compass
awana 1 buoy but 7 mountain
awari 5 shoal bt 4 boat
azraq 1,3,4,5 black buur, buuraha 7 hill(s), mountains(s)
byo galen 7 lake
Bâb 1,2,3,4,5 door, gate, entrance
bab 5 strait Dabâb 1,3 fog
baboor 3 steam vessel dahl 1 bank
babur 2,5 steam vessel dahl raml 1 sandbank
bahr 1,2,3,4 sea dahl tin 1 mud−bank
bahr ali 3 high water daig 2 narrow
bahr wati 3 low water daiq 1 narrow
bahri 4 south dakka 4 jetty, pier, quay, wharf
bait 3 house dala dala 4 slow
b
khira 4 steam vessel dar 5 house
balad 1,2 town daram 6 south
bandar 4 bay, harbour, port darab 2 squall
barr 3 bank, mud−bank, shore da 2 light

xi
Home Contents Index
GLOSSARY

Word Language English Word Language English

dawamirr givat 6 hill

dakhil el behr 5 rock (submerged) giz
n 2 dune
dawamir gz ramla 2 sandhill
kherej el behr 5 rock (above water) gubba 2 dome
debab 5 mist, fog gubed 7 bay
deked 7 harbour, wharf gudd
m 2,3 ahead
dekeh el amwal 5 quay gumbur 7 hillock
dekhil 5 entrance gunn 1 bay
dekhul 5 entrance, passage
dekka hak el mal 5 wharf Habba 1 squall
dekka hak en nazul 5 pier habb 4 squall
dekka saghir 5 jetty hagar 1 storm
derbah ghelfleh 5 squall hagiz 1 bar
deym 2 village hagiz 3 mole
dhabab 4 fog hajar 2,4 stone
dhayyeg 4 narrow hajar bai−yin 2 rock (above water)
dra 2,4,5 compass hajar mugatta 2 rock (submerged)
disha 1 hill h
jiz 4 mole
diyik 5 narrow hajr 3 rock, stone
doh 7 channel har 7 mountain range
dud 7 mound, embankment har 6 mountain
forest (7) hasa 1,3,4 gravel, shingle
hasba 1 gravel
Even 6 stone haudh 4 basin
eyn 2 springs (of water) h
wa 2 wind
ez 6 village hazaz 6 gravel
heb 5 coast
Faluka 2 boat hejer 5 stone
fanar 1,2,3 lighthouse helkat 5 circular
fanus nr 2 light hesah hesah 5 gravel
feluka 1 boat hilla 2 village
fenar 5 lighthouse hiqâb 1 cliff
fok el jebel 5 summit hirab 4 abeam
fosma 2 entrance, passage, channel hirsh 3 forest
hisn 1 fort
Gaan baded 5 arm of the sea hiz
1 abeam
gabal 1 mountain hd 1 basin
gadol 6 great hof 6 coast
gala 2 castle, fort, tower hol 6 sand
galaa 3 castle hori 5 canoe
galawa 2 basin houd 3 basin
gamb yamin 1 starboard (side of vessel) houri 3 canoe
gamb yasar 1 port (side of vessel) hubûb 1 sandstorm
gami 1 mosque humra 2 red
ganûb 1 south hri 1,2,4 canoe
gar
r al bahr 3 bottom hursha 6 wood (trees)
gar
r al b
har 2 bottom husen 4 tower
garib 3 boat husun 5 castle
gashirad 7 island
gazr 1 ebb I 6 island
gebel 1 mountain illin 7 entrance
gees 7 point inkhifad el madd 1 low water
gezira 1 islands ir 6 town, city
gezfret 1 island irtifa el madd 1 high water
ghâba 1,2,3 forest, wood (trees) ish
ra 2 beacon
ghabeh 5 wood (trees) isharet el debab 5 fog signal
ghalah 5 deep isharet el ghobar 5 fog signal
gham
m 2 cloud iskala 3 quay
gharb 1,3,4,5 west iskila 1,3 jetty, landing place, pier
gharbi 2 west
gharig 2 deep Jabal 3,4,7 hill, mountain
ghariq 4 deep jamia 2 mosque
ghauba 4 sandstorm janoob 3 south
ghazir 2 deep jar 7 cliff
gheim 4 mist jazr 3 ebb
ghobar 5 fog jebeh 5 forest
ghubba 1 gulf jebel 2,5,7 hill, mountain
ghubbat 3,4,5 bay, gulf jebel el hejer 5 cliff
ghubbet 1,2,7 bay jebel en nes 5 sand−hill
ghubra 2 sandstorm jebel kayem 5 peak
ghurmal 1 peak jejirah 5 island
gd
n 2 sandbank, bank jenub 5 south
gidd
m 2 ahead jezirat 2,3,4 island

xii
Home Contents Index
GLOSSARY

Word Language English Word Language English

jezr 4 ebb mahal nuzul 4 landing place

jilf 2 cliff mah
r 1 shells
jinb 2 south majar 2,3,4 channel, stream (3)
jori 7 bay makan ara 4 shingle
jurif 3,4 cliff makan en nazel 5 landing place
makhila 4 fog signal, storm (2)
Kabir 3,4 great mamalih 3 salt water
k
fab 2 cliff mamarr 1,3,4 passage
kafr 1 village manara 1 lighthouse
kalah 5 fort manzal 1 landing place
kanîsa 2 church marfaa 3 harbour
karn 5 peak, point marjan 3 coral
kasar 1 shoal markab sher
4 sailing vessel
kasr bahr 1 breakers markib shiraa 3 sailing vessel
kas−s
ra 2 breakers marsa 1,2,3 anchorage, harbour (1,2)
katah 5 rock (submerged) marso 5 harbour
kateh el behr 5 bottom marso keshef 5 roadstead
kathîb 1 dune marso saghir 5 basin
kaud 4 dune masab 1 mouth of river
kaud neis 4 sand−hill masajid 7 mosque
kebir 1,2,5 great masgid 1 mosque
kefar 6 village masjid 3,7 mosque
kenisiyya 6 church maskan 1 house
kensa 1,2 church maskid 2 mosque
kenisah 5 church matar 1,2,4 rain
keryah 5 village mattar 3 rain
ket−ket 5 shingle mauj 2,5 wave
khabt 4 forest mauja 3,4 wave
khaleej 3 gulf maya hilwa 3 freshwater
khalfa 2 sandstorm mayanot 6 springs (of water)
khalig 4 gulf, stream (1) mayeh 5 current
kharium 1 sandspit medauwar 2 circular
kharium 1 sandspit medd, el 5 tide
khashm 2 river mouth medina 1 town
khatar 1,2,3,4 danger medkhel 5 entrance, inlet, passage
khelij 5 gulf meena 3 port (harbour)
kheter 5 danger megjrib 5 west
khr 2,3,4,5 creek, inlet (3,5), channel (5) menarah 5 lighthouse
gulf (5) merkeb abu shirah 5 sailing vessel
khoor 7 bay mersa 3,4,5 anchorage, roadstead,
khba 2 mud−bank harbour (5)
khudra 2 green mesjid 4,5 mosque
khul 5 flood, spring tide meter 5 rain
kd
n 2 bank, sandbank mezah 6 mole, jetty
kidif nes 5 dune mezuda 6 fort
kineesa 3 church mifraz 6 bay
kitif en nes 5 sandbank migdal 6 tower
kob 5 marsh migdallor 6 lighthouse
kôla 1 hill mna 1,2 harbour, port, mole (1)
kom en nes 5 dune mina kharga 1 roadstead
kubbah 5 dome minara 3,4 spire, lighthouse (4)
kubbeh 5 beacon minqar 1 headland
kuddam 5 ahead miqra 1 channel
kur 7 hill mirjan 4 coral
kurum 5 ahead misgad 6 mosque
kurum 7 hill mizrah 6 east
mga 1 wave
Lis
n 3 head, headland moiya 2 shallow, shoal
moya aria 2 low water
Maarava 6 west moiya hilwa 2 fresh water
ma hali 4,5 fresh water moiya kebir 2 highwater
ma maleh 4 salt water moiya malha 1,2 salt water
m
mutawasid 5 half tide moj 2,5 wave
madd 1,4 flood,tide morg
n 1 coral
madd 2,4 current, tide (4), mowyah el behr 5 salt water
stream mowyah hali 5 fresh water
madd galeel 3 half tide moya azb 1 fresh water
madd kamel 4 high water mudawwar 1,4 circular
madd qawi 4 spring tide mudawwara 3 circular
madina 1,4 city, town mukhtqa 1 anchor
madkhal 1,2,3,4 entrance, inlet (4) murjan 2 coral
m
el behr 5 salt water murjan 5 coral (red)
magana 6 anchorage murshid 1 pilot

xiii
Home Contents Index
GLOSSARY

Word Language English Word Language English

mustanga 3 swamp sahel 4,5 beach, shore

mustanqa 1,3 marsh, swamp (1) sahil 1,2,5 beach, shore (2)
mustenka 5 marsh, swamp sakhra 1 rock (above water)
sakhra fog al ma 4 rock (above water)
Nab 3 spring (of water) sakhra taht al ma 4 rock (submerged)
nadd wâfi 1 spring tide sambk 2 sailing vessel
nahal 6 river, stream, water course sangaq 1 starboard
nahr 1,2,3,4 river sanjak 2 starboard
naliya 5 compass saqia 4 stream
namal 6 port (harbour) sar 1 fast
nataf 2 shingle sareea 3 fast
nehr 5 river sar 2,4 fast
neis 4 sand sawa sawa 5 abeam
nes 5 sand sawiyah 5 point
nes hesah 5 gravel satah 1 shallow
noor 3 light sedd 5 mole
noww 3 squall sedef 5 shells
nuksan el behr 5 low water seghir 1 small
nuqta 1 point sehab 5 cloud, mist
nûr 1,2,3,5 light sejrah 5 tree
nusif madd 4 half tide serih 5 speed
shaab 5,7 coral (white)
Qâ 1 bottom shab 1,2,5 reef
qaal al bahr 4 bottom shabur 1 mist
q
d 1,2 reef shabura 2 fog, mist
qafa 4 astern shacaabi 7 cape, point
qala 1 castle shagar 1 tree
qalaa 4 castle, fort shaikh 1,2,3,4,5 chief, leader
qaleel al ghur 3 shallow shajar 2,3 tree
qâranasla 1 peak shamal 1,3 north
qaria 4 village shamandura 2 buoy
qariya 3 village shamandura bi
qarya 1 village fanus 2 light−buoy
qatan 6 small shamandura bi
qibli 4 north suffara 2 whistle−buoy
qoor, qooriga 7 bay shargi 2 east
qubba 1,3,4 dome sharm 1,3 creek, inlet (1)
quddam 4 ahead sharq 1,3,4 east
qumma 3 summit sharqi 5 east
shatt 1,3 beach, bank (1)
Raas 7 cape, point shib 3,4 reef
rabb
n 2 pilot shim
l 2,5 north
rabia 1 hillock shita 3 rain
raml 1,3 sand shra 1 mangrove
ramla 2 sand shureh 5 mangrove
ras 1,2,3,4,5,7 cape, head, headland, summit sig
la 2 jetty, landing place, pier, wharf,
(2,4,5), peak (2,3,4) mole, port (side of vessel)
raseef 3 jetty, wharf, quay sda 2 black
raseef el mina 3 pier suffara ad−dabab 3 fog signal
ras fel 1 mole sura 1,2 speed
rasi 7 cape suraa 3,4 speed
rasif 1, 2 wharf, quay, pier (1)
razaz 3 mist Tabb 3 dune
reeh 3, 5 wind tabia 2 castle, tower, fort
resif 5 wharf t
by
3 fort
rih 1, 4 wind tall 1 hill
rooma 3 bar taraf 3,4 point
rosh 6 cape, head, headland taufan 4 storm
rubad 7 marsh tayyar 1,3 current
ruban 5 pilot tel 5 hill
rubban 3, 4 pilot tell 3,4 hill
tell ramleh 3 sand−hill
Saaina bakhur ya 1 steam vessel thaghr 1 port, harbour
sabakha 1,4 marsh, swamp (4) tin 1,2,5 mud
sadaf 2 shells tiyar 2 current
sadd 1,4 bar togga 7 dry watercourse, watercourse
sadd min at tin 4 mud−bank toofan 3 flood
safina shara iya 1 sailing vessel tufan 5 storm
sagal 2 gravel tufan en nes 5 sandstorm
sagâla 1 port (side of vessel) turab 5 mud
saghir 2,3,4,5 small
sahab 2,3,4 cloud
sahâba 1 cloud

xiv
Home Contents Index
GLOSSARY

Word Language English Word Language English

Udd 4 bank, sandbank Zafon 6 north

umm 1,2,3,4,5 mother zaimah 5 boat
zalat 1,3 shingle
Wâdi 1,3,4,5 mouth (of a river), watercourse zerga 2 blue
wahl 3,4 mud zoba ‘ah ghefleh 5 squall
war 1 rock (submerged) zoubaa 3 storm
wara 1,2 astern zuq 6 cliff
wehel 5 swamp zûrag 1 canoe
werayi 5 astern zurwa 1 summit
wust el madd 1 half tide

Xoor 7 bay

Yaar 6 forest
yam 6 sea
yameen al markib 3 starboard
yamin 1,2,4 starboard
yasar al karkib 3 port (side of vessel)
yemin el merkeb 5 starboard
yeser el merkeb 5 port (side of vessel)
yis
r 2 port (side of vessel)

xv
 Home Contents Index Chapter Index Diagram

32° 32° 33° 34° 35° 36° 37° 38° 39° 40° 41° 42° 43° 44° 32°
NP 49 MEDITERRANEAN PILOT VOL V
2578
a’îd
Bûr S
31° 31°

ISRA
2573

2 Suez Canal JORDAN

EL
30° 30°
Bûr el Suweis
5501
Mariners'
Routeing Guide Eilat El ’Aqaba
G. o

29° 29°
8 8
f

a
Su

f Aqab ah
ez

asb
lQ
3 sa
G. o

Râs Ghârib
Râ
28° 28°
St Ash Sharmah
St r.
r. of
of Tir
Gû an
ba
Hurghada l
27° 27°

26° El Quseir
¸ 26°
5 4 9

25° S A U D I 25°
Abu el Kizân
E G Y P T A R A B I A

24° 24°
Berenice

9
23°
4 159 23°

Ras Abu
Fatma
22° 22°

Jeddah
R

21° 21°
ED

S U D A N
SE

6
A

20° 157 20°

10
Sirrain I.
Fa

19° 19°
ra
sº
nB
an
k

18° 18°
r
sº
Qas 4
Ras
10
158
17° 17°
7 Farasan Is.

Oreste Point
16° 16°
143
E R I T R E A Loheiya
Jabal
at Tºir
15° 15°
11
6

14° 7 YEMEN
14°
Hanish
Is.
Continued on
E T H I O P I A Index Chart
13° NP 64(b) 13°
Ra
s Raheita
May
yøn

32° 33° 34° 35° 36° 37° 38° Longitude 40° East from Greenwich 43° 44°
0205

Red Sea & Gulf of Aden Pilot

xvi NP 64(a)
 Home Contents Index
Chapter Index Diagram

41° 42° 43° 44° 45° 46° 47° 48° 49° 50° 51° 52° 53° 54° 55° 56° 57° 58° 59° 60° 61°
23° 23°
NP 63 PERSIAN GULF
PILOT
Ra’s al Hadd
Ra’s al Junaiz
22° 22°
38

13
21° 21°

3785
Al Ma=Ørah
20° 157 S A U D I A R A B I A 2851 20°

13
19° O M A N 19°

18° 18°
13
3784
Continued on
Index Chart Juzur Al –alºniyºt Islands

NP 38 WEST COAST OF INDIA PILOT

17° NP 64(a) 17°
xvii

Oreste Pt.
16° 13 16°
143
Ra’s Fartak
Jabal
at Tºir
15° 4 15°

6
12
7 2970
14°
11 YEMEN Ras al
Kalb 14°
–anØsh
Is.
ERITREA
12
13° A R A B I A N 13°
Aden
S E A

12°
Str
aits
of B
12 OF
ADE
N
14
Suqutrá
¸
12°
ab-e GULF
DJIBOUTI l -Ma
ndeb
ey
r 15
as
Djibouti a sC
Ra Raas Binna
11° 11°
14 14
NP 3
ETHIOP IA S O M A L I A Raas Xaafuun AFRICA PILOT VOL III
10° 10°
41° 42° 43° 44° 45° 46° 47° 48° Longitude 50° East from Greenwich 53° 54° 55° 56° 57° 58° 59° 60° 61°
0205

Red Sea & Gulf of Aden Pilot

NP 64(b)
 Home Contents Index

LAWS AND REGULATIONS APPERTAINING TO NAVIGATION

While, in the interests of the safety of shipping, the United Kingdom Hydrographic Office makes every endeavour to include in its
hydrographic publications details of the laws and regulations of all countries appertaining to navigation, it must be clearly understood:-

(a) that no liability whatever will be accepted for failure to publish details of any particular law or regulation, and

(b) that publication of details of a law or regulation is solely for the safety and convenience of shipping and implies no recognition
of the international validity of the law or regulation.

RED SEA
AND
GULF OF ADEN PILOT
CHAPTER 1
NAVIGATION AND REGULATIONS
COUNTRIES AND PORTS
NATURAL CONDITIONS

NAVIGATION AND REGULATIONS

LIMITS OF THE BOOK Thence W to Ra’s al 22°26′ 59°50′

Junayz:
Thence WSW along the 12°40′ 43°20′
coast of Yemen to the
Charts 4704, 4705 entrance to the Red Sea at
1.1 the Straits of Bab el
1 This volume contains Sailing Directions contained within Mandeb:
the limits defined below:
4 Thence N along the E coast 28°05′ 34°34′
Lat N Long E of the Red Sea to the
2 From the N entrance to the 31°16′ 32°19′ entrance to the Gulf of
Suez Canal: ‘Aqaba at Ra‘s Fartak:
S along the W bank of the 29°55′ 32°32′ Thence NNE along the 29°33′ 34°57′
canal to Suez Bay: coast of Saudi Arabia and
Jordan to Eilat:
Thence S along the W coast 12°40′ 43°20′
of the Gulf of Suez and Thence SSW along the 27°44′ 34°15′
Red Sea to the entrance to coast of Israel and Egypt to
the Gulf of Aden at the the Red Sea at Râs
Straits of Bab el Mandeb: Muhammad:
3 Thence E and S along the 11°09′ 51°11′ Thence N along the E coast 29°55′ 32°32′
coast of Somalia to Raas of the Gulf of Suez to Suez
Binna: Bay:
Thence N along the E bank 31°16′ 32°19′
Thence E to position: 11°09′ 61°20′ of the Suez Canal to the
Thence N to position: 22°26′ 61°20′ N entrance of the Canal.

1
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1
ROUTES
Traffic separation schemes
1.2
1 The Gulf of Suez Traffic Separation Scheme has been
established to separate S-bound and N-bound shipping in
the Gulf of Suez and in the Strait of Gubal.
2 Traffic separation schemes are established in the Strait
of Tr
n (8.32) at the entrance to the Gulf of ‘Aqaba (8.48)
and in the Southern Red Sea, West and South of Hanish al
Kubra (4.9), East of Jabal Zuqar Island (4.9) and in the
Straits of Bab el Mandeb (4.9).
All the above traffic separation schemes are IMO
adopted and Rule 10 of the International Regulations for
Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1972, applies.
1.3
1 A TSS, which is not IMO adopted, has been established
in the Approaches to Yanbu‘ al Bar (24°04′N, 38°04′E)
(9.192).
Deep water routes
Red Sea
1.4
1 The central passage through the Red Sea between the
Strait of Gubal at the S end of the Gulf of Suez and Jazrat
a
’ir (15°33′N, 41°50′E) is free from dangers but a
direct course passes much nearer the E side of the sea than
the W side.
Gulf of Aden
1.5
1 The Gulf of Aden (12.1) extends ENE from the S end
of the Red Sea (4.2) to the meridian of Raas Caseyr
(11°50′N, 51°17′E) (14.160).
Coastal routes
1.6
1 Inshore channels exist on the NE side and S side of the
Strait of Gubal (28°45′N, 33°50′E). The channels on the S
side of the Strait of Gubal are intricate, but provide
sheltered water navigable by day.
1.7
1 An Inner Channel (6.156), situated on the W side of the
Red Sea (4.2), leads about 160 miles S from Ras Abu
Shagr
b (21°04′N, 37°19′E) (6.16) between the coast and
the outlying reefs to its termination about 9 miles E of
Trinkitat Harbour (18°41′N, 37°45′E) (6.315).
The channel varies in width from between 5 cables and
3 miles; the channel is useful for small vessels with local
knowledge.
1.8
1 Massawa Channel (7.18) leads between Dahlak Bank
(7.87) and the coast from the vicinity of Marsa Taclai
(17°32′N, 38°51′E) (7.16) to Shab Shakhs (14°39′N,
41°07′E) (7.45).
Massawa Channel is a safe and convenient passage
marked by navigational aids.
1.9
1 Another Inner Channel (10.21), situated on the E side of
the Red Sea (4.2), leads about 325 miles SSE between the
Faras
n Bank (10.14) and the coast, from Al Lth (20°09′N,
40°16′E) to Ma
q Kamar
n (15°18′N, 42°39′E) (11.14). in less populous areas near the low water mark.
The channel, which is encumbered with many dangers,
varies in width from between 5 cables and 12 miles.
2
NAVIGATIONAL DANGERS AND HAZARDS
Navigation amongst coral
General information
1.10
1 For information on navigation in coral waters see The
Mariner’s Handbook.
Red Sea
1.11
1 The Red Sea, though generally of considerable depth, is
encumbered in places with rocky islets and coral reefs
which extend far into the central or main shipping routes.
2 The S part of the Red Sea is more encumbered than the
N part. In the vicinity of latitude 16°30′N the Dahlak Bank
(7.87) extends up to 70 miles from the W shore of the sea
and the Faras
n Bank (10.14) extends about the same
distance from the E shore, leaving a deep central area some
45 miles wide.
3 Farther S the central portion of the Red Sea is partly
encumbered by Jaz
’ir az Zubayr (15°05′N, 42°10′E) (4.29)
and, in latitude 13°45′N, by the Hanish group of islands
(4.46).
1.12
1 The reefs in the Red Sea generally extend in long strips
parallel with the coast to which many are connected. There
is usually a depth of 1⋅5 m or less over the reefs but the
sea seldom breaks on them, and their outer edges are
usually steep-to. There are also many isolated reefs, but
owing to the clarity of the water they can generally easily
be seen, in a good light, from aloft or from the bridge if it
is situated a reasonable height above the water; therefore,
these reefs do not form a great obstacle to navigation by
day.
2 The water outside the reefs, especially when moved by
tidal streams or strong winds, is often of a milky
appearance caused by the stirring up of the coral sand. This
whitish water frequently indicates a reef, but some reefs, as
for instance those at Jeddah (21°28′N, 39°10′E) (9.342), are
dark green.
3 At certain times in summer, when the sea is smooth,
minute particles of seaweed cover large tracts of water with
a brown scum, but at the same time many reefs just below
water level are also covered with these particles, and have
the same appearance. Sometimes red or green
discolourations caused by algae make reef discolourations
less noticeable. These tracts of water discoloured by
seaweed have often been reported as shoals.
Gulf of Suez
1.13
1 The reefs in the Gulf of Suez have depths in general
between 0⋅6 m and 0⋅9 m over them, and, in summer, when
the level of the sea is at its lowest, they occasionally dry in
places. A slight ripple always breaks on the weather side of
these reefs.
Mine danger areas
1.14
1 A mined area lies close NW of Râs Ab Bakr (28°33′N,
32°56′E); see also 3.24.
In 1983 it was reported that in other locations within the
Gulf of Suez anti-personnel land mines may remain buried
For further information the authorities should be
consulted.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1
Piracy and armed robbery
General information
1.15
1 The British Maritime and Coastguard Agency has
brought to the attention of shipowners, masters and crews,
the risk of acts of piracy on the high seas or armed
robbery against ships at anchor off ports or when underway
through the territorial waters of certain coastal states. It
outlines steps that should be taken to reduce the risk of
such attacks, possible responses to them, and the need to
report attacks both successful and unsuccessful to the
authorities of the relevant coastal state and to the ship’s
own maritime administration.
2 Incidents of piracy and armed robbery against ships
whilst alongside and underway have been reported in areas
covered by this volume. Mariners should be aware of the
risks that may be incurred by vessels of any size whilst
alongside or on passage, especially at speeds of less than
12 kn, and are therefore advised to exercise due caution.
There has also been an increase in the use of mortars,
rocket-propelled grenades and other heavy weapons by
pirates.
3 Recommended practices, including anti-attack plans,
reporting, radio procedures and responses are outlined in
Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 1.
TRAFFIC AND OPERATIONS
Exercise areas
1.16
1 Warships may be encountered exercising in areas centred
50 miles WSW and 18 miles ENE of Aden (12°47′N,
44°57′E) (12.26).
For Omani Firing Practice Areas see Appendix II.
See also Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to
Mariners.
Marine exploitation
General information
1.17
1 Numerous oil rigs and platforms, mostly marked by
lights, and, in some cases near the traffic lanes by coded
racons, are situated in the Gulf of Suez. See 3.11.
1.18
1 In 1998 it was reported that oil exploitation had
commenced in the Red Sea off the coast of Eritrea.
1.19
1 Mobile oil rigs or exploration vessels. The positions
and details of mobile rigs or exploration vessels are not
mentioned in this volume, neither are they promulgated by
Admiralty Notices to Mariners.
The movements of these rigs and vessels are normally
made known by local radio warnings, local Notices to
Mariners and by NAVAREA IX navigation warning
messages. For further details see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 3 (1).
1.20
1 Oil and gas production platforms. Production
platforms and associated structures including tanker
moorings, storage tankers and platforms on pipelines,
generally exhibit Mo (U) lights, aircraft obstruction lights
and audible fog signals.
3
2 Unauthorised navigation is prohibited within 500 m of
such structures, including storage tankers which can swing
about their moorings.
Tankers manoeuvring in the vicinity of platforms and
moorings should be given a wide berth.
For further information see The Mariner’s Handbook.
Submarine pipelines
1.21
1 Caution. Mariners are advised not to anchor or trawl in
the vicinity of pipelines. Gas from a damaged oil or gas
pipeline could cause an explosion, loss of a vessel’s
buoyancy or other serious hazard. Pipelines are not always
buried and may effectively reduce the charted depth by up
to 2 m. They may also span seabed undulations and cause
fishing gear to become irrecoverably snagged, putting a
vessel in severe danger. See Annual Notice to Mariners
No 24 and The Mariner’s Handbook.
CHARTS
Admiralty charts
1.22
1 British Admiralty charts covering the area of this
volume are adequate for use on passage and for the
approach to the principal ports and harbours.
2 Charted information has been derived from British and
other surveys, soundings obtained from ships on passage,
other nations’ navigational charts, and various other
sources.
In several areas, such as the Strait of Gubal (28°45′N,
33°50′E) (3.311) and the Faras
n Bank (18°00′N, 41°00′E)
(10.14), the charts have been compiled from old and
imperfect surveys; see caution at 1.26.
Port development
1.23
1 It should also be borne in mind that where insufficient
information is available the latest developments of ports
and harbours may not be charted.
Descriptions
1.24
1 Many of the descriptions which mention trees and
buildings are from old reports which may no longer be
correct; trees may have been felled and new buildings
erected.
Plans
1.25
1 Many of the plans referred to in this volume date from
old surveys. There may be differences between some names
on the charts and those in this volume; the latter conform
to the most recent agreed orthography.
Caution
1.26
1 The areas on Admiralty Charts represented by upright
soundings and/or broken contours have been incompletely
surveyed. Mariners are warned that uncharted shoals may
exist within these areas and possibly elsewhere within the
charted area.
See each individual chart data source diagrams and any
individual chart notes regarding depths.
2 The Mariner’s Handbook contains guidance on the
interpretation of chart source data.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1

AIDS TO NAVIGATION Radio navigation warnings

and weather services
General information
1.27 Navigational warnings
1 IALA Maritime Buoyage System Region A (red to port) 1.37
has been introduced throughout the area covered by this 1 The area covered by this pilot lies within the limits of
volume. NAVAREA IX.
Details of warnings and a list of those in force are
Suez Canal issued by the Co-ordinator NAVAREA IX, Hydrographer of
1.28 the Pakistan Navy, Naval Headquarters, Karachi, Pakistan.
1 The aids to navigation in the Suez Canal are described For further details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals,
at 2.68. Volume 3 (1).
Lights Weather services
1.29 1.38
1 Reliability. Navigational lights in Eritrea (1.108) and 1 Weather forecasts in English are available from the
Yemen (1.154) are reported to be unreliable. following radio stations:
1.30 Station Area covered
1 Abnormal refraction. Due to abnormal refraction lights
in the Red Sea (4.2) may well be sighted from well outside ’Aqaba Gulf of ’Aqaba.
their listed range. El Quseir Red Sea N of parallel 23°N.
Jeddah Red Sea, Gulf of Aden and approaches.
PILOTAGE Djibouti Red Sea, Gulf of Aden and approaches,
General information and the majority of the S Arabian Coast.
1.31 Salalah Omani waters.
1 Licensed pilots are available at all the main ports within 2 For full broadcast details and further information see
the area covered by this volume. Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 3 (1).
Particulars of pilotage and the signals to be used are
given under the description of the individual port.
Locust reports
1.39
1.32
1 Swarms of the Desert Locust may be encountered over
1 Local pilots may occasionally be of service with their
the Red Sea and Gulf of Aden. To assist in the provision
knowledge of the positions of reefs in their own localities,
of appropriate warnings to countries threatened by locust
especially under circumstances which are unfavourable for
invasion, mariners sighting locusts are asked to make a
piloting amongst reefs by eye. For further details see
report by radio. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals,
Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Volume 1 (1) for further details.
Saudi Arabia
1.33 REGULATIONS
1 Pilotage is compulsory at all Saudi Arabian ports. The
movement of any vessel within the pilotage zone without International regulations
obtaining a pilot will result in very heavy fines, delay to Submarine cables and pipelines
the vessel, and the debarring of the master from Saudi 1.40
Arabian ports. 1 Submarine telephone cables are laid from the vicinity of
For further details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Râs Muhaggara (29°49′N, 32°29′E), through the Gulf of
Volume 6 (3). Suez (3.1) and the Red Sea (4.2) to Jeddah (21°28′N,
39°10′E) (9.342); thence to Djibouti (11°36′N, 43°09′E)
RADIO FACILITIES (14.86) and E out of the Gulf of Aden (12.1).
See The Mariner’s Handbook for information on the
Electronic position fixing systems International Convention for the Protection of Submarine
Cables.
Satellite navigation systems
1.34 Traffic separation
1 For details of Satellite Navigation Systems see Admiralty 1.41
List of Radio Signals, Volume 2. 1 See IMO Publication Ships Routeing for general
provisions on ships routeing; regulations for IMO adopted
Differential GPS schemes are contained in Rule 10 of the International
1.35 Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea 1972.
1 For information on beacons transmitting DGPS
corrections see Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 2. Pollution
1.42
Loran-C 1 See The Mariner’s Handbook for details on the
1.36 International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution
1 The Saudi Arabian Loran-C North Chain serves the from Ships 1973 (MARPOL 73) and the 1978 Protocol to
majority of the area covered by this volume with MARPOL 1973.
groundwave coverage; skywave coverage serves the 1.43
remainder of the area. 1 Special areas are designated in the Annexes to the
For further details, see Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Convention; the designated areas covered by this volume
Volume 2. are:

4
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1
The Red Sea Area. The Red Sea (4.2) including the
Gulfs of Suez and ’Aqaba bounded on the S by
the rhumb line between Ras Siyyân (12°29′N,
43°20′E) (4.83) and in Mur
d (12°40′N,
43°31′E).
2 The Gulf of Aden Area. The sea area bounded on the
W by the rhumb line between Ras Siyyân and
in Mur
d, and on the E by the rhumb line
between Raas Caseyr (11°50′N, 51°17′E) (14.160)
and Ra’s Fartak (15°38′N, 52°14′E) (12.152).
Egyptian regulations
Port entry regulations
1.44
1 Vessels bound for Egyptian ports in the Red Sea (4.2)
are requested to report to the Egyptian authorities, through
their agents, the estimated time of crossing the parallel of
23°N, at least 48 hours before doing so; and to confirm
their ETA 24 hours before arrival.
Navigation regulations
1.45
1 The following rules for ships navigating in the Gulf of
Suez have been approved by IMO:
Ships should take into account that crossing traffic
may be encountered in the traffic junction E of
Ain Sukna and in the precautionary area off Ras
Shukheir, and should be in a high state of
readiness to manoeuvre in these areas.
2 Exceptional care is needed when overtaking another
ship within a lane, not to enter the separation zone
or force the overtaken ship to do so.
Ships navigating in the Gulf of Suez are requested to
keep continuous listening watch on the Suez Gulf
Traffic Information Broadcasts and report any aids
to navigation which are malfunctioning or are out
of position and which are not included in the Suez
Gulf Traffic Information Broadcasts.
3 All ocean-going ships should have their radars in
effective use by day and night throughout the
passage between Shaker Island and Suez Port as
an aid to achieving maximum feasible lane
conformity and avoiding risk of collision.
Particular care is required for strict adherence to
the confines of the relevant traffic lanes.
4 Ships proceeding S from Suez should be alert for
tankers heading for the Sumed Oil Terminal off
Ain Sukhna.
N-bound tankers heading for Sumed Oil Terminal
should report their intention of using the traffic
junction off Ain Sukhna on the appropriate
frequencies.
5 All ships N or S-bound, when navigating through the
precautionary area off Ras Sukheir or in the
vicinity of the July Oilfield should avoid
overtaking in the traffic lanes in these areas.
6 All ships including service and supply craft serving
the oil workings in July, Ramadan and Morgan
Oilfields proceeding in and out off Ras Sukheir Oil
Terminal, should only cross the S and N-bound
traffic flow through the precautionary area off Ras
Sukheir. Within the precautionary area local rules
relating to crossing traffic apply.
7 Tankers leaving the Ras Sukheir Oil Terminal and
intending to join the N-bound traffic lane should
5
only do so when no through S-bound traffic is in
the vicinity and should always report their
movements to other ships beforehand on VHF.
8 Ships anchored in the designated waiting area for Ras
Shukheir should ensure that they are never less
than 0⋅25 miles from the edge of the S-bound
Traffic Lane and should pay special regard to their
correct signal lights for ships at anchor. They
should also show their deck lights.
Israeli regulations
Ballast water
1.46
1 In order to prevent the import of non-native aquatic
organisms into the waters of the ports of Israel from ships
ballast water discharges, all ships destined for Israeli ports
must exchange any ballast water that has not been taken on
board in open ocean.
2 The best method of protecting harbour waters from
foreign organisms that may exist in ballast water collected
in foreign harbours and near shore areas is for the ballast
water to be exchanged in open ocean, beyond any
continental shelf or fresh water current effect.
3 Special attention to this subject is to be given by vessels
calling at the Port of Eilat in which case the ballast water
exchange must be carried out outside the Red Sea, i.e. in
the Indian Ocean or in the Atlantic Ocean when
practicable.
Vessels failing to comply with the above procedure will
not be permitted to pump out their ballast water during
their stay in port, or whilst navigating along the coast of
Israel.
4 A record of the location, date and time of the ballast
water exchange should be entered in the ships log book, or
in other suitable documentation, such as an official ballast
water record book.
Masters of vessels will be requested to provide ships
inspectors (pilots) with a completed ballast water exchange
report.
Saudi Arabian regulations
Oil pollution
1.47
1 By Saudi Arabian Royal Decree the penalty for
discharging oil or oil mixtures within 100 miles of the
coasts of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia is one years
imprisonment, or a fine of 20 000 Saudi Riyals, or both.
Port entry regulations
1.48
1 ETA. Vessels bound for Saudi Arabian ports should
signal their ETA five days, two days and 24 hours before
arrival.
1.49
1 National flag. Saudi Arabian regulations require all
vessels to fly the Saudi Arabian flag from the vessels
foremast, by day and night, while in Saudi Arabian waters.
This flag is properly displayed when the Arabic writing
appears at the top of the flag and the sword at the bottom.
The hilt of the sword lies beneath the beginning of the
Arabic writing.
2 This regulation is strictly enforced by the Saudi Arabian
coastguard and failure to comply will be punished by a fine
of 6000 Saudi Riyals and four days imprisonment for the
master concerned.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1
1.50
1 Alcohol. The consumption of all alcohol, even if
considered part of the daily diet, is prohibited within the
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia (1.144).
Vessels alongside, at mooring buoys, or at anchor in
Saudi Arabian ports are considered to be within the
Kingdom.
1.51
1 Vessels more than fifteen years old are not permitted
to discharge cargo at a Saudi Arabian port unless an
approved surveyor has established that the vessel complies
with Saudi Arabian standards.
1.52
1 Dress etiquette. Special guide-lines are laid down about
standards of dress and behaviour in Saudi Arabia which are
strictly enforced.
1.53
1 Quarantine. The quarantine flag of the International
Code of Signals must be displayed by day, or the
appropriate lights exhibited at night, by all vessels
approaching a Saudi Arabian port until pratique has been
granted.
1.54
1 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels entering, or
navigating within, or leaving the pilotage zones in the
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
Vessels should call Port Control Station on VHF as soon
as the vessel is within range.
Rules and Regulations for Saudi Arabian Seaports
1.55
1 Vessels calling at Saudi Arabian ports are required to
carry on board a copy of Rules and Regulations for Saudi
Arabian Seaports, Parts 1−4 produced by the Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia Ports Authority.
It is recommended that Agents be asked to bring a copy
on board when the vessel arrives, and their advice sought
regarding the arrival regulations.
1.56
1 The Rules and Regulations for Saudi Arabian Seaports,
Parts 1−4 are very extensive.
These rules:
1.57
1 Establish:
Traffic control areas within a radius of 25 nautical
miles of port control signal stations. No vessel is
allowed to move without prior contact with, and
approval of, the port control signal station.
1.58
1 Prohibit:
Photography, fishing and swimming.
1.59
1 Require:
The use of tugs for all manoeuvres in port.
Rat guards to be fitted to every line secured ashore.
1.60
1 Prior information:
The following information should be sent to the Saudi
2 v) ETA see 1.48.
vi) Cargo particulars, including nature, weight,
tonnage and stowage by hatches. Car carriers,
Ro-Ro and Container vessels to give both number
and weight in tonnes of each type of unit.
vii) Any cargo being carried for other destinations.
viii) If dangerous cargo is being carried, the quantity
and class must be indicated in accordance with
the International Maritime Dangerous Goods
Code and it must be stated whether this cargo is
to be discharged or is in transit.
3 ix) Number, position and static weight load of
derricks and/or cranes and position and
particulars of ramps.
x) Number and nationalities of passengers to be
disembarked and in transit.
xi) Expected requirements for bunkers and water.
xii) Name of vessels agent.
xiii) Not less than 48 hours before arrival a detailed
list of arms and ammunition carried for self
defence.
1.61
1 In addition tankers are required to report:
i) The flash-point of any cargo to be discharged.
ii) If the vessel is in ballast, whether gas free or not,
or whether in an inert condition.
iii) Any other relevant information concerning special
conditions, difficulties, defective equipment or
gear, which would create special hazards when
mooring, unmooring or handling cargo.
Eritrean regulations
General information
1.62
1 When entering Eritrean territorial waters (1.111) vessels
may be challenged by naval vessels; they should be
prepared to identify themselves by their signal letters or
other means.
It is prohibited to stop, anchor, or lower boats whilst
within Eritrean territorial waters.
Vessels arriving at or leaving Eritrean ports are subject
to medical inspection.
Omani regulations
Oil pollution
1.63
1 The discharge of oil is prohibited within 50 miles of the
coast of Oman.
SIGNALS
Traffic signals
1.64
1 Suez Canal. For signals used within the Suez Canal see
2.85.
1.65
1 Harbour movements. Signals for the regulation of the
movement of vessels within harbours are in force at:
Massawa (Mits’iwa) (7.172).
Arabian ports of discharge, on completion of seb (7.230).
loading; or to the Port Authority of the Saudi Aden (12.69).
Arabian ports of loading, on receipt of orders. Djibouti (14.116).
i) Vessels name and former names, if any.
ii) Flag, port of registry and call-sign. Storm signals
iii) Length, gross register tonnage, net register 1.66
tonnage and deadweight tonnage. 1 Egypt. The following visual storm warning signals are
iv) Expected draught on arrival. displayed in Egypt.

6
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1

Mariner’s Handbook and Annual Summary of Admiralty

Notices to Mariners No 4.
2 Within the limits of this volume, a Maritime Regional
Co-ordination Centre (MRCC) is established at Jeddah and
Maritime Rescue Co-ordination Sub-Centres (MRSC) are
established at El ‘Aqaba and Port Sudan.

Egypt storm signals (1.66)
1.67
1 Israel. The International System of Visual Storm
Warning Signals is used in Israel.
1.68
1 République de Djibouti. The International System of
Visual Storm Warning Signals is used at Djibouti.
DISTRESS AND RESCUE
Global Maritime Distress and Safety System
1.69
1 Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS)
is described, and general information on distress and rescue
is given, in Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 5, The
Rescue services
1.70
1 Egypt. The Middle East Search and Rescue Centre,
JRCC Cairo, is responsible for co-ordinating search and
rescue operations. A network of Coast Radio Stations
maintains a continuous listening watch on international
distress frequencies.
1.71
1 Sudan. The Ministry of Transport is responsible for
co-ordinating maritime search and rescue operations. Port
Sudan Coast Radio Station maintains a continuous listening
watch for distress calls on 2182 kHz and VHF.
1.72
1 Eritrea. Port Harbour Master offices are responsible for
co-ordinating maritime search and rescue operations.
1.73
1 Israel. Eilat Coast Radio Station maintains a continuous
listening watch for distress calls on VHF.
1.74
1 Jordan. The El ‘Aqaba Harbour Master is responsible
for co-ordinating maritime search and rescue operations. El
‘Aqaba Coast Radio Station maintains a continuous
listening watch on international distress frequencies.
1.75
1 Saudi Arabia. A network of Coast Radio Stations
maintains a continuous listening watch on international
distress frequencies.
1.76
1 Yemen. Aden Coast Radio Station maintains a
continuous listening watch on international distress
frequencies.
1.77
1 Oman. The Royal Air Force of Oman is responsible for
co-ordinating maritime search and rescue operations.
1.78
1 Djibouti. Djibouti Coast Radio Station maintains a
continuous listening watch for distress calls on VHF.

7
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1
COUNTRIES AND PORTS
EGYPT
General description
1.79
1 The Arab Republic of Egypt lies in the SE corner of the
Mediterranean Sea on the W side of the Gulf of Suez (3.1),
and in the N part of the Red Sea (4.2) and on the W side
of the Gulf of ‘Aqaba (8.48).
Cairo (Al Qâhira) is the capital city of Egypt. The city,
which has a population of 7 200 000 (1998), stands on the
Nile about 14 miles from the head of its delta.
Climate. Dry, hot summers; moderate winters.
National limits
1.80
1 Egypt extends W from the Red Sea (4.2) into the
Libyan Desert, and S from the Mediterranean Sea to the
parallel 22°N and the border with the Republic of Sudan. It
also comprises the Sinai Peninsula and the territory E of
the Suez Canal and the Gulf of Suez extending to the S
border of Israel.
2 Gubal Island (27°39′N, 33°48′E) (3.42), Shaker Island
(27°30′N, 34°00′E) (3.42), the Gifâtîn Islands (27°14′N,
33°55′E) (3.390) and Gezîret Zabargad (23°37′N, 36°12′E)
(4.14) are also Egyptian territory.
1.81
1 Area. The total area of Egypt is 1 001 449 square
kilometres, but the settled and cultivated areas, which are
formed by the Nile valley, its delta, and oases, cover only
about 35 500 square kilometres.
1.82
1 Territorial sea. Egypt claims a 12 mile territorial sea.
Contiguous zone. Egypt claims a 24 mile contiguous
zone adjacent to the Egyptian territorial seas. Within this
zone the Egyptian authorities exercise control to prevent the
infringement of customs, immigration, sanitary and fiscal
regulations.
2 Exclusive economic zone. Egypt claims a 200 mile
exclusive economic zone.
For further information, see the Annual Summary of
Admiralty Notices to Mariners and the Mariners Handbook.
History
1.83
1 The unification of the kingdoms of Lower and Upper
Egypt under the Pharaohs in about 3100 BC marked the
establishment of the Egyptian state, with its capital at
Memphis.
Egypt was ruled for nearly 2800 years by a succession
of 31 Pharaonic dynasties who undertook the building of
the pyramids at Gizeh.
2 This was followed by a period of Hellenic rule which
began in 332 BC, then a period of rule by Rome (30 BC to
324 AD), which was then followed by rule under the
Byzantine Empire.
In 640 AD Egypt was subjugated by Arab Muslim
invaders; in 1517 the country was incorporated in the
Ottoman Empire under which it remained until the early
19th century.
3 A British Protectorate over Egypt lasted from 1914 to
1922 when Sultan Ahmed Fuad was proclaimed King of
Egypt. In 1953 the monarchy was deposed and Egypt
became a republic.
8
Government
1.84
1 The Egyptian Constitution, which was approved by
referendum on 11th September 1970, defines Egypt as an
Arab Republic with a democratic socialist system, and the
Egyptian people as part of the Arab nation.
2 The President is nominated by the Peoples Assembly
and confirmed by plebiscite for a 6 year term.
The Egyptian legislature consists of two chambers, the
Consultative Assembly and the Peoples Assembly which is
elected for a five year term by direct secret ballot, on the
basis of proportional representation.
Population
1.85
1 In 2001 the population of Egypt was reported to be
69 080 000.
Language
1.86
1 The official language is Arabic although English, and, to
a lesser extent, French, are spoken.
Rest day
1.87
1 Friday is the weekly day of rest.
Physical features
1.88
1 Except in the valley of the Nile, which is Egypt’s only
river, the country is chiefly desert.
Several ranges of mountains intersect the desert between
the Nile and the Red Sea (4.2), the higher being those
nearest the coast, which attain elevations of nearly 2200 m.
2 The land which lies between the mountains and the
coast is low, where the mountains do not approach closely
to the coast.
The geological formations are of limestone, sandstone
and granite; the latter breaks through and overspreads both
of the former; the granite region is in the SE part of the
country.
1.89
1 River Nile. The River Nile, the longest river in the
world, is estimated to be 4160 miles in length from its
source in Luvironza, Burundi, to its outflow into the E end
of the Mediterranean Sea.
In the 960 miles of its course through Egypt the Nile
does not receive a single tributary.
2 Its nearest approach to the Red Sea is at Qena (26°10′N,
32°40′E) (3.388) where it only about 80 miles distant and
from where it is connected with Safâga (26°44′N, 33°56′E)
(5.70) by road.
The river has a regular yearly rise and fall, attaining its
maximum level in about mid-September, and its minimum
level at about the end of May.
3 The Aswân High Dam (24°05′N, 32°52′E), with Lake
Nasser above it, now controls the flow of water
downstream of the dam throughout the year.
A few miles below Cairo the river divides into two main
streams which enter the Mediterranean Sea by either the
Rosetta or Damietta Mouths. The area enclosed between
these two branches is the present delta of the River Nile
and is described in Mediterranean Pilot, Volume V.
1.90
1 Sinai Peninsula. The Sinai Peninsula is a desert of rock,
gravel and boulders, with rugged granite peaks, ridges, arid
valleys, and tablelands.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1
The greater part of the peninsula is very mountainous,
the highest peak being Gebel Katherîna (28°30′N, 33°57′E)
which rises to 2637 m; Gebel Mûsa, also known as Mount
Sinai, rises to an elevation of 2285 m, 2 miles NNE.
There are some fertile spots and oases of palms where,
after thunderstorms, the water rushes down from the main
valleys.
Industry and trade
1.91
1 Despite increasing industrialisation, agriculture remains
the most important activity employing over a third of the
labour force and in 1998 producing 17% of the country’s
gross domestic product.
Egypt is still a net importer of foodstuffs, especially
grain.
2 The main cash crop is cotton of which Egypt is one of
the world’s main producers; other important crops are
maize, rice, sugar cane, wheat and potatoes. Other fruits
and vegetables are also grown.
Industrial products include crude oil, cement, petroleum
and phosphates.
1.92
1 Exports. The principle exports are petroleum, petroleum
products, cotton yarn, textiles, and clothing.
1.93
1 Imports. The principle imports are machinery and
transport equipment, foodstuffs, iron and steel products and
chemicals.
REPUBLIC OF SUDAN
General description
1.94
1 The Republic of Sudan lies on the W side of the Red
Sea (4.2) between Egypt (1.79) and Eritrea (1.108).
Khartoum is the capital; in 1999 the city was reported to
have a population of 2 628 000, a figure which also
includes the adjoining towns of North Khartoum and
Omdurman.
National limits
1.95
1 Sudan extends S from the parallel 22°N, which forms
the majority of its border with Egypt (1.79), to Uganda and
Kenya in the S where it also adjoins the W border of
Ethiopia and, farther N, the W side of Eritrea (1.108). On
its W border, from S to N, the republic borders the
Democratic Republic of the Congo, the Central African
Republic, Chad and Libya.
1.96
1 Area. The total area of the Republic of Sudan is
2 505 815 square kilometres; the greatest length of the
country from N to S is about 2100 km, and from E to W
about 1500 km.
1.97
1 Territorial sea. Sudan claims a 12 mile territorial sea.
Contiguous zone. Sudan claims an 18 mile contiguous
zone adjacent to the Sudanese territorial seas. Within this
zone the Sudanese authorities exercise control to prevent
the infringement of customs, immigration, sanitary and
fiscal regulations.
2 For further information see the Annual Summary of
Admiralty Notices to Mariners and the Mariners Handbook.
9
History
1.98
1 The territory known as Sudan was for many centuries
subservient to the Egyptians though there were periods of
independence and even a period of time in the 8th century
when Egypt came under Sudanese rule.
2 In 1881 Mohammed Ahmed proclaimed himself the
Mahdi or Messiah and led an uprising gaining control of
the country; in 1899 an Anglo-Egyptian army defeated the
Mahdi and established an Anglo-Egyptian condominium
over the country.
3 In 1956 Sudan was proclaimed a sovereign independent
republic; from then until 1996, when President al-Bashir
was elected, there have been three periods of military rule.
Government
1.99
1 The President of Sudan is elected for a 5 year term by
the people.
The National Assembly (suspended 2002) normally has
400 members, 275 of whom are directly elected for 4 years
and 125 indirectly elected by national conference.
Population
1.100
1 In 2001 the population was estimated at 31 809 000.
Language
1.101
1 The official language is Arabic; English is widely
spoken.
Rest day
1.102
1 Friday is the weekly day of rest.
Physical features
1.103
1 Generally speaking, Sudan may be divided into two
zones. The region N of the parallel of 16°N is practically a
continuation of the Sahara Desert; the S region is fertile,
abundantly watered and densely wooded, in places.
The most elevated district of the Sudan is a mountainous
range about 20 miles from the coast, W of which the land
slopes gradually towards the Nile Valley.
2 The greater part of the desert between the Red Sea (4.2)
and the Nile Valley is known as the Nubian Desert which
is a rugged, barren waste, scored with ravines and where
there is only scanty vegetation.
1.104
1 Nile. The White Nile flows from Lake Victoria through
Uganda and enters the Sudan at the frontier post of Nimule
(3°30′N, 32°02′E) as the Bahr el Jebel; it leaves the Sudan
as Wâdi Halfa on the country’s N frontier.
The Blue Nile flows from Lake Tana on the Ethiopian
Plateau, its course through Sudan being nearly 500 miles in
length before it joins the White Nile at Khartoum.
The River Atbara which also rises in the Ethiopian
highlands joins the main Nile 190 miles N of Khartoum.
Industry and trade
1.105
1 The main economic potential of the Sudan lies in
agriculture; the area under cultivation is about a quarter of
the land considered suitable for the development of arable
farming.
About 80% of the population depends on agriculture;
land is ultimately owned by the government.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1
2 The principal grain crops are dura (great millet) which
forms the staple food of the people, and dukhn (bullrush
millet).
The forests which border the Blue Nile to the frontier of
Ethiopia are rich in fibres and tanning materials; those
which border the White Nile also contain many valuable
trees.
1.106
1 Exports. The principle exports are sesame, cotton, oil
seeds, sorghum, gold, sugar and livestock; the Sudan is the
chief source of the worlds supply of gum arabic which is
obtained from the forests growing in Kordofan, Gezira and
Kassala.
1.107
1 Imports. The principal imports are petroleum products,
machinery and equipment, foodstuffs, manufactured goods,
medicines and chemicals.
ERITREA
General description
1.108
1 Eritrea is situated in the SW part of the Red Sea (4.2)
between the Sudan (1.94) and Djibouti (1.180).
Asmara is the capital city of Eritrea; in 2001 there was
an estimated population of 435 000.
Climate. Temperate in the highlands, hot in the
lowlands.
National limits
1.109
1 Eritrea’s land borders are bounded on their NW side by
the Republic of Sudan (1.94), on their S and SW sides by
Ethiopia and on their SE sides by Djibouti (1.180).
1.110
1 Area. The total area of Eritrea is 93 679 square
kilometres.
1.111
1 Territorial sea. Eritrea claims a 12 mile territorial sea.
For further information see the Annual Summary of
Admiralty Notices to Mariners and the Mariners Handbook.
History
1.112
1 Eritrea was colonised by Italy in the late 19th century
and it was from here that Italian forces launched their
invasion of Abyssinia (Ethiopia) in 1936.
2 After the defeat of the Italian forces in 1941, Eritrea
became a British protectorate, and, in 1952, in accordance
with the wishes of the UN, Eritrea was federated with
Ethiopia though retaining a high degree of political
autonomy. This autonomy was gradually eroded such that,
in 1962, Eritrea was incorporated as a province of Ethiopia.
3 The incorporation was resisted by all sections of the
Eritrean population and an armed campaign for
independence resulted, which gathered momentum through
the 1970s and 1980s.
1.113
1 A referendum was held in April 1993 in which over
99% of the electorate voted for Eritrean independence.
Independence was then declared on the 24th May 1993 and
on the 28th May 1993 Eritrea was admitted to UN
membership.
After independence the provisional government became
the transitional government.
10
1.114
1 In 1998 fighting flared up on the border with Ethiopia
with both sides accusing the other of sending troops into
each others territory.
A proposal to end the fighting, which envisaged a return
to the original borders, was brokered by the Organization
of African Unity in 1999 and was provisionally accepted
by both sides; Ethiopia later rejected some of the
provisions.
2 Fighting resumed in February 2000, which was followed
by the signing of an interim peace plan in June of that
year.
A UN peace-keeping force moved into a buffer zone
between the warring sides in April 2001; in May of that
year both countries agreed to set up regional military
commissions to solve local security issues.
Government
1.115
1 The transitional government has a four year term and
consists of the President with a 130-member National
Assembly which elects the President, who, in turn, appoints
the State Council made up of 14 ministers and the
governors of the 10 provinces.
Population
1.116
1 In 2001 the population of Eritrea was reported to be
4 298 269.
Language
1.117
1 Arabic and Tigrinya are both official languages in
Eritrea.
About 48% of the population speak Tigrinya and 31%
Tigré; seven other indigenous languages are spoken. Arabic
is spoken on the coast and along the Sudanese border.
English is used in secondary education.
Physical features
1.118
1 Eritrea is comprised of a long, narrow, low-lying coastal
strip which rises steeply to central and northern highlands
some 2000 m to 3000 m high; these highlands are an
extension of the Ethiopian highlands.
Industry and trade
1.119
1 The Eritrean economy was devastated by the war of
independence and since 1991 the government has directed
its efforts into rebuilding the country’s industry, agriculture
and infrastructure.
The majority of the Eritrean population live off
subsistence farming and livestock. Traditional agricultural
and industrial sectors include the production of sorghum,
livestock, salt, cement, fish, hides and potash; some textiles
and footwear are also produced.
1.120
1 Exports. The principal exports are drinks, leather
products, textiles and oil products.
1.121
1 Imports. The principal imports are machinery, transport
equipment, basic manufactures, food and live animals.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1
ISRAEL
General description
1.122
1 The State of Israel is situated at the E end of the
Mediterranean Sea with its S boundary at the head of the
Gulf of ‘Aqaba (8.48).
2 Most of the departments of the government are in
Jerusalem. In 1950 a resolution proclaiming Jerusalem the
capital of Israel was adopted by the Israeli Knesset, but the
city is not recognised as the capital by the UN because
East Jerusalem is part of the Occupied Territories captured
in 1967. The UN and international law continues to reject
the Israeli annexation of East Jerusalem and considers the
pre-1950 capital Tel Aviv to be the Israeli capital.
National limits
1.123
1 Israel is bounded on the N by Lebanon, on the NE by
Syria, on the E by Jordan (1.134) and the West Bank, and
on the SW by the Gaza Strip and the Egyptian province of
Sinai.
1.124
1 Area. The area of Israel, including the Golan Heights
(1150 square km) and East Jerusalem (70 square km), is
21 946 square km.
1.125
1 Territorial sea. Israel claims a 12 mile territorial sea.
For further information see the Annual Summary of
Admiralty Notices to Mariners and the Mariners Handbook.
History
1.126
1 Palestine, the name given by the Romans to the area
now known as Israel, has a long history of occupation by
foreign powers. Egyptians, Babylonians, Persians, Greeks,
Romans, Arabs, Crusaders and Turks have all, through the
centuries, conquered the country and who were, in their
turn, defeated by their successors.
2 In 1922 the country came under a British mandate.
On the 14th May 1948 the British Government
terminated its mandate and the Jewish leaders proclaimed
the State of Israel which came into being with a declaration
of independence. No independent Arab state was
established in Palestine, and the Arab States, not
recognizing this declaration, invaded the country and the
Israeli War of Independence ensued.
3 A cease-fire in January 1949 left Israel with one-third
more territory than had been originally assigned by the
United Nations. Following the armistice negotiations in the
first half of 1949, boundary lines were established, but they
were not acknowledged by the Arab States.
Further fighting, the Six Day War, broke out in 1967;
and again in 1973.
Government
1.127
1 Israel is an independent sovereign republic established
by proclamation on the 14th May 1948.
The state is governed by a Prime Minister and the
Knesset, a one-chamber parliament of 120 members elected
for a four year term by universal suffrage. The Head of
State is the President, who is elected by a simple majority
of the Knesset.
Population
1.128
1 In 2001, the population of Israel was estimated to be
6 172 000.
11
Language
1.129
1 The official languages of Israel are Hebrew and Arabic.
Physical features
1.130
1 Israel consists of a coastal plain backed by ranges of
mountains which, on their E side, descend to the rift valley
of the River Jordan and the Dead Sea.
Industry and trade
1.131
1 Eilat (29°33′N, 34°57′E) (8.81) is the only Israeli port
within the coverage of this volume and is one of the
country’s three major ports.
Israel is generally fertile but water supply for irrigation
restricts production; agriculture accounts for about 2% of
gross domestic product.
2 In addition to mixed farming, olives, tobacco, cotton,
bananas, vines and citrus fruits are grown. Many parts of
the hill country are under afforestation.
A wide range of products is manufactured, processed or
finished, including chemicals, metal products, textiles, tyres,
diamonds, paper, plastics, leather goods, glass and
ceramics, building materials, precision instruments, tobacco,
foodstuffs and electrical goods.
3 Potash, bromine and other salt deposits, as well as
natural gas, are exploited in the Dead Sea area; the only
significant hydrocarbon is oil shale.
1.132
1 Exports. The principal exports are semi-manufactures,
machinery, polished and uncut diamonds, chemicals,
chemical products, foodstuffs, textiles.
1.133
1 Imports. The principal imports are machinery, transport
equipment, semi-manufactures, uncut diamonds, chemicals
and chemical products, crude oil and foodstuffs.
JORDAN
General description
1.134
1 The Hashemite Kingdom of Jordan lies at the E side of
the head of the Gulf of ‘Aqaba (8.48).
‘Amman (31°57′N, 35°56′E) is the capital city; in 1997
the city had an estimated population of 1 751 680.
National limits
1.135
1 Jordan is bound on the N by Syria, on the E by Iraq, on
the S by Saudi Arabia (1.144) and on the W by Israel
(1.122).
1.136
1 Area. Jordan has an area of 91 860 square km.
Territorial sea. Jordan claims a 3 mile territorial sea.
For further information see the Annual Summary of
Admiralty Notices to Mariners and the Mariners Handbook.
History
1.137
1 During the First World War (1914−18) the Arabs of
Transjordan and Palestine rebelled against Turkey which
exercised a limited authority over the area. Britain
supported the rebellion and in 1920 was given a League of
Nations mandate for Transjordan and Palestine.
2 In 1921 the Amir Abdullah Ibn Hussein, the brother of
King Feisal of Iraq, became the ruler of Transjordan which
was officially separated from Palestine in 1923.
By a treaty signed in London in 1946 Britain recognised
Transjordan as a sovereign independent state. Amir
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1
Abdullah Ibn Hussein assumed the title of King, and, when
the treaty was ratified later the same year, the name of the
territory was changed to the Hashemite Kingdom of Jordan.
Government
1.138
1 The present constitution of the Hashemite Kingdom of
Jordan came into force in 1952. It provides for a Senate of
40 members, all appointed by the King, and an elected
Chamber of Deputies of 60 members elected by universal
suffrage.
In 1978 a National Consultative Council of 60 members
was established, all of which were appointed by the King.
Population
1.139
1 In 2001 the population of Jordan was estimated at
5 051 000.
Language
1.140
1 The official language of Jordan is Arabic; English is
widely spoken.
Physical features
1.141
1 The W part of the country in the vicinity of the River
Jordan valley is fertile; most of the rest of the country to
the E is arid steppe.
Industry and trade
1.142
1 The main agricultural areas are the Jordan valley, the
hills overlooking the valley and the flatter country to the S
of ‘Amman and around Madaba and Irbid. Several large
farms, which depend for irrigation on water pumped from
deep aquifers, have been established in the S desert area.
2 The principal crops are wheat, barley, vegetables, olives
and fruit; agricultural production has increased considerably
in recent years due to improvements in production and
irrigation techniques.
The most important industrial products are raw
phosphates and potash, most of which is exported, together
with fertilisers and pharmaceuticals.
1.143
1 Exports. The principal exports are phosphate, potash,
fertilizers, foodstuffs, pharmaceuticals, fruit and vegetables,
textiles, cement, plastics, detergent and soap.
SAUDI ARABIA
General description
1.144
1 The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia occupies the central part
of the Arabian Peninsula between the Red Sea (4.2) and
the Persian Gulf.
Riyadh is the political capital, with, in 2001, an
estimated population of 4 761 000; Mecca (9.1) is the
religious capital with an estimated population of 770 000.
National limits
1.145
1 Saudi Arabia is bounded on the N by Jordan (1.134),
Iraq and Kuwait, on the E by Qatar, the United Arab
Emirates and Oman (1.168), and on the S by the Yemen
(1.154).
Area. Saudi Arabia has an area of 2 149 690 square
kilometres.
12
2 Territorial sea. Saudi Arabia claims a 12 mile territorial
sea.
Contiguous zone. Saudi Arabia claims an 18 mile
contiguous zone adjacent to the Saudi Arabian territorial
seas. Within this zone the Saudi authorities exercise control
to prevent the infringement of customs, immigration,
sanitary and fiscal regulations.
For further information see the Annual Summary of
Admiralty Notices to Mariners and the Mariners Handbook.
History
1.146
1 The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia is a personal union of
two countries, the Sultan of Najd being also the King of
the Hij
z.
2 The Kingdom had its origins in about the year 1740
when the Emir of Dariya, Muhammad al Saud, extended
his patronage and support to Shaikh Muhammad ibn Abdul
Wahhab, a religious reformer. By 1806 the Saudi State had
expanded enormously reaching nearly to Damascus in the
N and including the holy cities of Makkah (Mecca) and Al
Madnah.
3 An Ottoman-Egyptian-Albanian army was raised to
eliminate the Saudi threat and by 1818 had captured the
capital Dariya, thereafter withdrawing, leaving a trail of
ruined towns and villages. After a second punitive
expedition in 1836 the Saud family resumed the building of
the Saudi State, with great determination.
4 Early in the First World War (1914−1918) Abdul Aziz
ibn Saud, the ruling member of the Saud family, entered
into treaty relations with Britain; by the 1926 Treaty of
Jeddah he was recognised as the King of Hij
z and of Najd
and its Dependencies. In 1932 the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia was proclaimed.
Government
1.147
1 Saudi Arabia is a hereditary monarchy ruled by the sons
and grandsons of Abdul Aziz ibn Saud, in accordance with
the Islamic Shari’ah law. The line of succession passes
from brother to brother according to age, although several
sons of ibn Saud renounced their right to the throne. All
sons and grandsons of ibn Saud must be consulted before a
new king accedes to the throne.
2 In 1958 a Cabinet system was instituted under which,
from 1962, effective power devolved upon the President of
the Council of Ministers. The King has the post of Prime
Minister.
In 1993 the country was reorganised into 13 provinces
each with a governor appointed by the King and a council
of prominent local citizens to advise the governor on local
government, budgetary and planning issues.
Population
1.148
1 In 2001 the estimated population of Saudi Arabia was
21 028 000.
Language
1.149
1 The official language is Arabic; English is widely
spoken.
Physical features
1.150
1 There is a coastal belt consisting of steppe with
occasional oases; inland the great majority of the country is
either desert or semi-desert which has some growth of
bushes.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1
Industry and trade
1.151
1 Before the Second World War, at about the time the
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia was proclaimed, the only source
of overseas income was the money spent by pilgrims
visiting the holy cities, but in 1938 oil was discovered in
commercial quantities. The foreign exchange received from
the annual pilgrimage to the holy cities still brings a
significant income into the Kingdom.
2 In the 1980s Saudi Arabian oil revenue fell when world
oil prices dropped and the Kingdoms financial reserves had
to be used to meet budget deficits; in recent years the
increase in world oil prices has improved the country’s
economic prospects.
Saudi Arabia accounts for about 25 per cent of the
worlds oil reserves and is the worlds largest oil exporter.
1.152
1 In 1997 agriculture accounted for 6⋅1 per cent of GDP
and employed 12⋅2 per cent of the workforce. The
productivity of traditional dry-land farming is supplemented
by extensive irrigation, desalination and the use of aquifers.
Dates are grown near Al Madnah. Wheat, barley, coffee,
limes, henna, pearls and hides are also produced.
2 The nomadic population of the inland area raise cattle
and sheep.
Exploitation of gold, silver, copper and other mineral
deposits is also beginning; in 1998 5⋅1 tonnes of gold were
produced.
1.153
1 Exports. The main export is crude oil; refined oil,
petro-chemicals, fertilisers, plastic products and wheat are
other major exports.
Imports. The principal imports include foodstuffs,
machinery and transport equipment.
There is a total ban on the importation of alcohol, pork
products, firearms and items regarded as non-Islamic or
pornographic.
YEMEN
General description
1.154
1 The Republic of Yemen is situated in the extreme SW of
the Arabian peninsula, in the SE corner of the Red Sea and
the N side of the Gulf of Aden.
There are 112 offshore islands which also form part of
the Republic of Yemen; these islands include Mayyn
(12°39′N, 43°25′E) (4.96), Kamar
n (15°21′N, 42°35′E)
(11.12) and Suqurá (12°30′N, 53°55′E) (15.37).
2 Sana’a (15°15′N, 44°27′E) is the capital city; in 2001
the city had population of 1 590 624. Aden is the
commercial capital.
Climate. Temperate in the mountainous regions in the
W of the country; very hot with little rainfall in the
remainder of the country; humid along the coast.
National limits
1.155
1 Yemen is bound on the N by Saudi Arabia (1.144) and
on the E by Oman (1.168).
1.156
1 Area. The Republic of Yemen has an area of
527 968 square kilometres.
13
1.157
1 Territorial sea. Yemen claims a 12 mile territorial sea.
Contiguous zone. Yemen claims a 24 mile contiguous
zone adjacent to the Yemen territorial seas. Within this
zone the Yemen authorities exercise control to prevent the
infringement of customs, immigration, sanitary and fiscal
regulations.
2 Exclusive economic zone. Yemen claims a 200 mile
exclusive economic zone.
For further information see the Annual Summary of
Admiralty Notices to Mariners and the Mariners Handbook.
History
1.158
1 The Turkish occupation of North Yemen (1872−1918)
was followed by the rule of the Hamid al-Din dynasty until
a revolution in 1962 overthrew the monarchy and the
Yemen Arab Republic was declared.
The Peoples Republic of South Yemen was created in
November 1967 when the British Government, after 129
years of British rule, ceded power to the National
Liberation Front.
2 Negotiations towards the merging of the two states
began in 1979, culminating in unification on the 22nd May
1990. The first general election to the House of
Representatives of the Republic of Yemen was held on the
27th April 1993.
Government
1.159
1 The country is governed by the 301-seat House of
Representatives, elected for a four year term in single seat
constituencies, through a five member Presidential Council.
Population
1.160
1 In 2001 the population of Yemen was estimated at
18 078 035.
Language
1.161
1 The official language is Arabic; English is widely
understood.
Physical features
1.162
1 The country comprises a mountainous interior with a flat
and sandy coastal plain.
The highlands and central plateau, and the highest
portions of the maritime range in the S, form the most
fertile part of Arabia with abundant but irregular rainfall.
The N of the country is largely composed of mountains
and desert where rainfall is scarce.
Industry and trade
1.163
1 Agriculture is the main occupation of the population and
is largely of a subsistence nature; in 1998 agriculture
accounted for 17⋅6 per cent of the GDP.
Sorghum, sesame and millet are the main crops; wheat
and barley are grown at higher altitudes. Fruit and
vegetables are also farmed. The traditional cultivation of
coffee is giving place to qat, a shrub containing
amphetamine. Cotton is grown on the coastal belt.
1.164
1 Fishing is a major industry with a total catch in 1998 of
110 000 tonnes.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1
1.165
1 Industry consists mainly of oil production, petroleum
refining, mining, food processing and the production of
building materials.
1.166
1 Exports. The major exports include crude oil, refined oil
products, hides, fruit, vegetables, cotton and fish.
1.167
1 Imports. The major imports include cereals, feed grains,
foodstuffs, live animals, machinery and petroleum products.
OMAN
General description
1.168
1 The Sultanate of Oman lies in the SE corner of the
Arabian Peninsula on the NW side of the Arabian Sea and
the SW side of the Gulf of Oman.
Muscat (23°35′N, 58°35′E) is the capital city of Oman;
in 2001 the city had an estimated population of 540 000.
Dhofar is governed as a separate province; Muscat has
special status.
1.169
1 Area. Oman has a total area of 212 457 square
kilometres.
1.170
1 Territorial sea. Oman claims a 12 mile territorial sea.
Contiguous zone. Oman claims a 24 mile contiguous
zone adjacent to the Omani territorial seas. Within this
zone the Omani authorities exercise control to prevent the
infringement of customs, immigration, sanitary and fiscal
regulations.
Exclusive economic zone. Oman claims a 200 mile
exclusive economic zone.
For further information see the Annual Summary of
Admiralty Notices to Mariners and the Mariners Handbook.
National limits
1.171
1 Oman is bound on the SW by the Republic of Yemen
(1.154), on the W by Saudi Arabia (1.144) and on the NW
by the United Arab Emirates.
Only that part of the SE coast of Oman bordering the
Arabian Sea, SW of Ra’s al Junayz (22°26′N, 59°50′E)
(13.230), is described in this volume. The remainder of the
coastline, which lies N and NW of this point, is described
in Persian Gulf Pilot.
2 The Juzur Al al
niy
t Islands (Kuria Muria Islands)
(17°30′N, 56°00′E) (13.122) and the island of Marah
(20°30′N, 58°50′E) (13.180), all of which lie off the SE
coast of Oman, form part of the territory of the Sultanate
of Oman.
History
1.172
1 The early history of Oman is virtually unknown until the
first waves of Arab settlers from the SW moved into the
area about 2000 years ago. A second migration probably
entered the country from the N and a loosely knit tribal
society, under an elected Imam or ruler of the Ibadhi
branch of Islam, was evolved.
2 Oman became part of the Islamic empire in the seventh
century.
The Portuguese first arrived off the coast of Oman in
1507, subsequently occupying Muscat and the coastal towns
for over a century.
14
3 In 1624 Nasr was elected Imam and, having first unified
his country, proceeded to drive out the foreigners. In 1650
his successor, Imam Sultan, completed the expulsion of the
Portuguese and pursued them down the E coast of Africa;
here he formed the Omani colonial empire which, largely
through the trade in slaves, was to enrich his country so
much over the next two centuries.
4 Following the death of Imam Sultan in 1679 a
hereditary principle of succession was established which
still continues.
5 In the early nineteenth century the British, through the
East India Company, bought pressure to bear on the
Omanis to restrict the slave trade, a disastrous blow to their
economy. Compensation for this loss of revenue was paid
by Britain between 1871 and 1956 and provided a stable
income for the economy over this period.
6 Internal tribal strife beset the country until 1920 when
the Treaty of Seeb brought peace to Oman. In 1924 the
first oil concession was granted, but oil was not discovered
in commercial quantities for 40 years, and it was not until
1967 that the first exports were made.
7 The Juzur Al al
niy
t Islands (Kuria Muria Islands)
(13.122), ceded to Britain in 1854 as a cable station, were
retro-ceded to the Sultan of Oman in 1967 in accordance
with the wishes of the population.
8 In the 1950s the Imam proclaimed an independent state
in a revolt which was put down with British assistance. A
seven-year long Marxist uprising was crushed in 1975. The
current Sultan ousted his father in a place coup in 1970
and changed the state’s name to the Sultanate of Oman.
Government
1.173
1 Oman is a hereditary absolute monarchy; the Sultan
legislates by decree and appoints a cabinet to assist him.
The Basic Statute of the State was enacted in 1996. In
1991 a new consultative assembly, the Majlis al Shura,
replaced the former State Consultative Chamber. The Majlis
consists of 83 elected members; it debates domestic issues,
but has no legislative or veto powers.
Population
1.174
1 In 2001 the population of Oman was estimated at
2 622 000.
Language
1.175
1 The official language is Arabic; English is widely
spoken.
Physical features
1.176
1 Oman extends inland to the borders of Rub’ al Khali
(Empty Quarter) across three geographical divisions, a
coastal plain, a range of hills and a plateau.
The coastal plain is up to 10 miles wide, and, in the SW
part of the country, it is highly fertile. The hills behind the
plain are barren, for the most part. The plateau, which has
an average elevation of about 300 m, has little or no
cultivation except at oases.
Industry and trade
1.177
1 There is considerable cultivation in the fertile areas and
cattle are raised on the mountains; the backbone of the
economy is the oil industry which accounts for about
40 per cent of GDP.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1
1.178
1 Exports. The principal export is oil, which makes up to
approximately 83 per cent of total exports. Principal non-oil
exports are metal, metal goods, animals and textiles.
1.179
1 Imports. The principal imports are machinery, transport
equipment, industrial goods, live animals, minerals, fuels
and foodstuffs.
DJIBOUTI
General description
1.180
1 The Republic of Djibouti, formerly known as the French
Territory of Afars and Issas, lies at the W end of the Gulf
of Aden (12.1).
Djibouti (11°36′N, 43°09′E) (14.86) is the capital city of
the Republic of Djibouti; in 1997 the city had a population
of 62 009.
National limits
1.181
1 Djibouti is bound in the SE by Somalia (1.192), in the
W by Ethiopia and in the NW by Eritrea (1.108).
The coastline extends from Ras Dumeira (12°43′N,
43°08′E) in the N to Loyada (11°28′N, 43°15′E) in the S,
including the Golfe de Tadjourah (14.20).
1.182
1 Area. Djibouti has an area of 23 200 square kilometres.
1.183
1 Territorial sea. Djibouti claims a 12 mile territorial sea.
Contiguous zone. Djibouti claims a 24 mile contiguous
zone adjacent to the Djibouti territorial seas. Within this
zone the Djibouti authorities exercise control to prevent the
infringement of customs, immigration, sanitary and fiscal
regulations.
2 Exclusive economic zone. Djibouti claims a 200 mile
exclusive economic zone.
For further information see the Annual Summary of
Admiralty Notices to Mariners and the Mariners Handbook.
History
1.184
1 The territory was formally annexed by France in the
1860s; in 1884 the territory became the colony of French
Somaliland, then the French Territory of the Afars and the
Issas.
The Republic of Djibouti became independent on 27th
June 1977; a multi-party constitution was adopted by
referendum 1992 and multi-party elections were held in
December 1992.
Government
1.185
1 The referendum of 1992 allowed for the formation of up
to four political parties which are required to maintain an
ethnic balance in their membership.
The country has a republican form of government,
acting under a President, with a Chamber of Deputies
which has 65 members.
Population
1.186
1 In 1997 the population was estimated at 648 000.
15
Language
1.187
1 French and Arabic are both official languages; Somali
and Afar are also spoken.
Physical features
1.188
1 The coastline is of coral and high cliffs; the interior is a
desert of broken hills and dry wadis with scattered thorn
scrub. It is one of the hottest and most forbidding parts of
Africa.
Industry and trade
1.189
1 There is very little industry. The economy depends
mainly on the operations of the free port which accounts
for about three-quarters of the country’s GDP.
Agriculture, which accounts for less than 4 per cent of
GDP but employs three-quarters of the workforce, is very
limited. Some dates, fruit and vegetables are grown, but the
country can only grow a fraction of the food it requires.
The largely nomadic population raises livestock.
2 Almost the only sources of government revenue are the
port of Djibouti, the railway to Addis Ababa and indirect
taxes.
1.190
1 Exports. The principal exports are foodstuffs, hides,
skins and livestock.
1.191
1 Imports. The principal imports are foodstuffs,
machinery, clothing, oil and oil derivatives.
SOMALIA
General description
1.192
1 The Somalia Democratic Republic, known as Somalia,
occupies part of the horn of Africa.
Mogadishu (2°03′N, 45°17′E) is the capital city of the
Somalia Democratic Republic; in 1995 the city had an
estimated population of 525 000.
National limits
1.193
1 Somalia is bounded on the W by Djibouti (1.180),
Ethiopia and Kenya.
The coastline of Somalia extends NE from its boundary
with Kenya (1°35′S, 41°35′E) in the Indian Ocean to Raas
Caseyr (11°50′N, 51°17′E) (14.160); thence W to its
boundary with Djibouti at the W end of the Gulf of Aden
(12.1) close W of Ras Gumarlah (11°29′N, 43°17′E)
(14.27).
1.194
1 Area. Somalia has an area of 637 657 square kilometres.
1.195
1 Territorial sea. Somalia claims a 200 mile territorial
sea.
Fishery zone. Somalia claims a 200 mile exclusive
fishery zone.
For further information see the Annual Summary of
Admiralty Notices to Mariners and the Mariners Handbook.
History
1.196
1 The Somalia Democratic Republic consists of the former
British Somaliland Protectorate and the former trust
territory of Somalia. The republic came into being on the
1st July 1960.
British rule in Somaliland lasted from 1887 until 1960,
except for a short period in 1940−41 when the Protectorate
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1

was occupied by Italian forces. In 1941 Britain occupied Muharram, meaning sacred, is the first month of the
the trust territory of Somalia which lasted until 1950 when Islamic year and is held sacred by all Moslems; the first
it was returned to Italian trusteeship. day of Muharram is widely observed as a holiday.
2 The Somali people, who have a strong sense of national 2 Ramadan is the ninth month of the Moslem calendar
unity, also inhabit the NE part of Kenya, Djibouti and the and is a period of fasting and self-purification. All
Ogadan region of Ethiopia. Moslems are required to abstain from food, drink and
tobacco between sunrise and sunset.
Government The dates of the commencement of Ramadan and the
1.197 Moslem New Year are given annually in the Nautical
1 From 1969 until 1991 Somalia was governed by a Almanac.
Supreme Revolutionary Council, the head of state being the
Religious holidays
president of the council. In 1979 a new constitution was
1.206
approved.
1 To the traditional Moslem the day begins at sunset and
In 1991 the government was overthrown by rebels
is divided into two 12 hour periods.
starting a period of civil war between rival clan-based
Holidays may be one day early or late, depending on the
movements.
sighting of the moon, and vary in length from 1 to 4 days.
2 In August 2000 the country’s first parliament for 9 years
When a holiday falls on a Friday an extra day is
was inaugurated in neighbouring Djibouti. Under an agreed
generally given.
charter the transitional assembly was to elect a president
1.207
who, in turn, was to form a government; ongoing
1 Major holidays:
wrangling between Somalia’s rival factions continues.
Eid al Fitre immediately follows the fasting of
Ramadan and is centred on family life with
Population
feasting and the giving of presents.
1.198
Eid al Adhha is a celebration following the period of
1 In 2001 the population was estimated at 7 488 773.
the annual pilgrimage to Mecca (Makka) which all
devout Moslems attempt to make at least once in
Language
their lifetime.
1.199
1 The official languages are Somali and Arabic; English
and Italian are also widely spoken. PRINCIPAL PORTS,
HARBOURS AND ANCHORAGES
Physical features Egypt
1.200 1.208
1 The geological formations of Somalia consist almost
entirely of gneiss, granite and schists. Place and position Remarks
Most of the country consists of semi-desert, with acacia Port Tewfik (Bûr Tawfîq) Commercial port; Suez
shrubs and bunch grass. (2.196) (29°56′N, 32°34′E) Canal offices; repairs; fuel;
The N and central parts of the country are almost including Qâd el Marâkib. tugs.
destitute of rivers, these being represented by fissures in (2.199), Bûr Ibrâhîm Basin
the soil which are dry for the greater part of the year. (2.304) and El Mînâ’ el
1.201 Gedîda (2.317).
1 Fauna. Somalia has numerous species of wild animals, Port of Suez (Bûr el Suweis) Waiting anchorages for the
especially in the S. In the N of the country, the wild ass (2.280) (29°54′N, 32°32′E). Suez Canal.
and rare oryx are found.
El ‘Adabîya Harbour (2.261) Commercial port; anchor-
(29°52′⋅5N, 32°28′⋅5E). age.
Industry and trade
1.202 Sokhna Port (3.76) Commercial port.
1 Raising livestock is the main occupation of the (29°39′N, 32°21′E).
population which is still largely nomadic. Ain Sukhna Terminal Terminal of the SUMED
1.203 (3.101) (29°35′N, 32°23′E). pipeline.
1 Exports. The principal exports are livestock, skins, hides
and fresh fruit; the banana crop, which accounts for 40 per Râs Ghârib Oil Terminal Oil terminal.
cent of exports, is the biggest export earner. (3.131) (28°20′N, 33°07′E).
1.204 Râs Shukheir Oil Terminal Oil terminal.
1 Imports. The principal imports are machinery, transport (3.152) (28°08′N, 33°18′E).
equipment, industrial goods, foodstuffs, cotton goods and
Zeit Bay Terminal (3.194) Oil Terminal.
oil.
(27°50′N, 33°36′E).
East Zeit Terminal (3.183) Oil terminal.
(27°51′N, 33°36′E).
MOSLEM FESTIVALS
Zeit Bay LPG Berth (3.212) LPG terminal.
Moslem calendar (27°48′N, 33°34′E).
1.205
Râs Sudr Oil Terminal Oil terminal.
1 All religious festivals are dated according to the Moslem (3.239) (29°35′N, 32°42′E).
calendar. Islamic months follow the phases of the moon
and, in consequence, come forward by about 11 days each Abu Zenîma (3.289) Anchorage and jetty.
year in relation to the Gregorian calendar. (29°02′N, 33°07′E).

16
Home Contents
Place and position
Râs Budran Oil Terminal
ub
(9.64) Commercial port.
(3.252) (28°56′N, 33°08′E).
Wâdi Feirân Oil Terminal
(3.271) (28°44′N, 33°12′E).
El Tûr Harbour (3.298)
(28°14′N, 33°37′E).
Hurghada (3.367)
(27°13′N, 33°50′E).
Safâga (5.70)
(26°44′N, 33°56′E).
Mîna amrâwein (5.20)
(26°15′N, 34°12′E).
El Queir (5.116)
(26°06′N, 34°17′E).
Sudan
1.209
Place and position
Port Sudan (6.26)
(19°37′N, 37°14′E).
Towartit Reefs Anchorage
(6.46) (19°30′N, 37°20′E).
Bashayer Oil Terminal
(6.83) (19°24′N, 37°20′E).
Saw
kin (6.118)
(19°07′N, 37°20′E).
Eritrea
1.210
Place and position
Khr Dakliyat (7.186)
(15°38′N, 39°29′E).
Massawa (Mits’iwa) (7.141)
(15°37′N, 39°28′E).
Massawa South Anchorage
(7.192) (15°36′N, 39°27′E).
Index
CHAPTER 1
Remarks Place and position Remarks
Oil terminal.
(27°34′N, 35°33′E).
Oil terminal. Yanbu‘ al Bar (9.158) Commercial port.
(24°04′N, 38°04′E).
Small commercial harbour. Mn
’ al Malik Fahd Major oil and commercial
(King Fahd Port) (9.201) port.
Commercial port. (23°57′N, 38°13′E).
R
bigh (9.306) Oil port.
Commercial port and (22°44′N, 39°00′E).
phosphate loading terminal.
Jeddah (9.342) Major commercial and
Phosphate loading terminal. (21°28′N, 39°10′E). bunkering port.
Jz
n (10.174) Commercial port.
Unsheltered anchorage and (16°54′N, 42°32′E).
phosphate loading terminal.
Yemen
Remarks 1.214
Commercial port. Place and position Remarks
Saleef (A alf) (11.60) Small commercial port.
Waiting anchorage for Port (15°18′N, 42°40′E).
Sudan.
Ra’s ‘sá Marine Terminal Oil terminal.
Oil terminal. (11.81) (15°07′N, 42°36′E).
Port of udaydah (11.185) Commercial port.
Commercial port. (14°50′N, 42°56′E).
Port of Al Mukh
(11.243) Commercial port.
(13°19′N, 43°14′E).
Little Aden Oil Harbour Oil port, crude oil imports
(12.86) (12°46′N, 44°55′E). and refined exports.
Remarks
Aden Inner Harbour (12.93) Commercial and bunkering
Anchorage and oil terminal. (12°48′N, 44°59′E). port; repairs.
Rudum Oil Terminal Oil terminal.
Commercial port. (12.153) (13°59′N,
47°55′E).
Anchorage and oil terminal.
Port of Al Mukall
(12.158) Anchorage port cargo
(14°31′N, 49°09′E). worked by lighters; oil
seb (7.202)
(13°00′N, 42°45′E).
Israel
1.211
Place and position
Eilat (8.81)
(29°33′N, 34°57′E).
Jordan
1.212
Place and position
El ‘Aqaba (8.120)
(29°31′N, 35°00′E).
Saudi Arabia
1.213
Place and position
Ash Sharmah (9.47)
(27°56′N, 35°16′E).
Commercial port and oil
terminal.
Port of Nishtn (13.30)
(15°49′N, 52°12′E).
Remarks
Commercial port.
Oman
1.215
Place and position
Port Salalah (Mn
Rayst)
Remarks
(13.61) (16°56′N, 54°00′E).
Commercial port.
Marb
 (13.54)
(16°59′N, 54°41′E).
Al Lakbi (13.118)
Remarks (18°11′N, 56°33′E).
Open roadstead and small Ra’s al Madrakah (13.104)
port. (19°00′N, 57°50′E).
17
terminal. Alongside berthing
available in Khalf Harbour
(12.195).
Small commercial and
fishing port.
Remarks
Commercial port.
Fishing harbour and
sheltered anchorage except
in winds from between S
and W.
Fishing harbour.
Anchorage, sheltered in SW
Monsoon.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1

Place and position Remarks 1.221

Ra’s ilf Inner Anchorage
(13.216) (20°41′N,
58°52′E).
Ra’s ilf Tanker Berth
(13.210) (20°43′N,
58°55′E).
Djibouti
1.216
Place and position
Djibouti (14.86)
(11°36′N, 43°09′E).
Somalia
1.217
Place and position
Berbera (14.162)
(10°26′N, 45°00′E).
Boosaaso (14.206)
(11°17′N, 49°11′E).
1 Israel
Anchorage. Eilat. Mechanical lift dock capacity 1800 tonnes
(8.116); minor repairs.
1.222
Tanker berth. 1 Jordan
El ‘Aqaba. Slipway lifting capacity 300 tonnes
(8.161); minor repairs.
1.223
1 Saudi Arabia
Jeddah. Two floating docks with lifting capacities of
19 000 tonnes and 11 000 tonnes (9.432); repairs
Remarks of all kinds.
Commercial port. Yanbu. Mechanical lift dock capacity 3396 tonnes
(9.198). Minor repairs.
1.224
1 Yemen
Aden. Floating docks with lifting capacities of 4500
tonnes and 1500 tonnes (12.116); a number of
Remarks
slips up to 900 tonnes capacity; repairs of all
Commercial port and oil kinds.
discharge terminal. 1.225
Commercial port. 1 Djibouti
Djibouti. Slipway lifting capacity 900 dwt (7.182);
minor repairs.

PORT SERVICES — SUMMARY

Docking facilities Other facilities
1.218
1 Egypt Deratting
Ismailia. Mechanical lift dock capacity 850 tonnes; 1.226
minor repairs. (2.157). 1 In accordance with the International Health Regulations,
Port Tewfik (Bûr Tawfîq). Mechanical lift dock deratting can be carried out and deratting certificates and
capacity 2000 tonnes (2.194); slipways of 85 m and deratting exemption certificates can be issued at:
35 m length. Port of Suez (Bûr el Suweis) (2.331).
2 Bûr Ibrâhîm South Basin. Dry dock maximum Port Sudan (6.78).
capacity 8128 tonnes (2.330); floating dock length Eilat (8.117).
144 m, width 22 m and a lifting capacity of Aden (12.117).
55 000 tonnes (2.312); repairs of all kinds. Djibouti (14.139).
Safâga. Mechanical lift dock capacity 940 tonnes 1.227
(5.107). 1 Deratting exemption certificates only can be issued or
1.219 extended at:
1 Sudan Massawa (Mits’iwa) (7.183).
Port Sudan. Four slipways, maximum lifting capacity seb (7.241).
600 tonnes (6.77); minor repairs.
1.220
1 Eritrea Measured distance
Massawa. Slipway, lifting capacity 914 tonnes (7.182). 1.228
seb. Minor repairs (7.240). 1 Port Sudan (6.57).

18
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1
NATURAL CONDITIONS
MARITIME TOPOGRAPHY
General remarks
1.229
1 The Red Sea (4.2) extends NW from the Straits of Bab
el Mandeb (12°40′N, 43°20′E) (4.71) for 1200 miles
separating the African continent from Arabia by a long,
narrow seaway which is only 190 miles wide at its
maximum breadth in its S sector.
At Râs Banâs (23°54′N, 35°47′E) (4.14), which lies
about two thirds of the way between the S end of the Red
Sea and the Gulfs of Suez (3.1) and ‘Aqaba (8.48), the sea
is only about 90 miles wide.
Bathymetry
1.230
1 S of Râs Banâs (23°54′N, 35°47′E) the shores are
bordered by broad, reef-studded shelves less than 50 m
deep.
These shallow shelves drop off abruptly to deeper
shelves, about 500 m deep, which in turn flank a deep,
narrow central trough in which depths frequently exceed
1500 m or 2000 m.
2 The greatest depth in the Red Sea (4.3) so far recorded,
which is over 2800 m, lies in this central trough sector of
the sea.
N of Râs Banâs the shelves are narrower and the central
trough broadens to a shallower, irregular surface where
depths seldom exceed 2000 m.
1.231
1 The Sinai Peninsula divides the N extremity of the
central trough into the Gulf of Suez (3.1) on the W and the
Gulf of ‘Aqaba (8.48) on the E. The Gulf of Suez is
shallow, but the Gulf of ‘Aqaba, although only about
10 miles wide, has faulted sides sloping steeply down to
depths of about 1800 m.
2 Sediments within the Red Sea (4.2) appear to be largely
biogenic clastic calcium carbonate derived from the
surrounding reefs and from the shells of pelagic organisms.
Land-derived material, which usually makes up only a
small fraction of the sediment, is brought in by the wind or
by intermittent run-off.
3 A development of considerable scientific importance has
been the discovery of hot, salty, and extremely dense brine
filling the lower few hundred metres of two deep isolated
basins in the central Red Sea sector. The chemical
composition of this brine suggests that it has leached out of
a sedimentary formation exposed by faulting in the wall of
the central trough.
1.232
1 The Arabian Sea is divided into two major basins, in
which the depths 3600 m; the Arabian Basin lies in the NE
part of the sea and the Somali Basin in the SW part.
2 The Carlsberg Ridge, which is part of the continuous
mid-Indian Ocean Ridge system, divides these basins and
has a mean depth between 1800 m and 3000 m. The Owen
Fracture Zone, which runs roughly parallel to the NE coast
of Africa and the SE coast of Arabia, crosses the NW end
of the Carlsberg Ridge at an oblique angle.
3 The continental shelf is narrow all along the Arabian
coast; the bottom is sand-covered being primarily of
terrigenous or eolian derivation.
4 Sediments of terrigenous origin cover the continental
slope of the Arabian Sea down to depths of about 2750 m.
Below 4000 m red clay deposits cover a large part of both
basins, the balance being covered by calcarous ooze.
19
1.233
1 Local magnetic anomalies have been observed in the
following localities:
Shaker Island (27°30′N, 34°00′E) (3.32)
Jazrat a
’ir (15°33′N, 41°50′E) (4.12).
Central part of the Red Sea (4.12).
Gulf of ‘Aqaba (29°00′N, 34°45′E) (8.52).
Aden (12°47′N, 44°57′E) (12.71).
1.234
1 Volcanic activity. There are no active volcanoes within
the area covered by this volume.
Within historic times volcanic eruptions have occurred
near Al Madnah (24°28′N, 39°36′E), in the N part of
Yemen, and in Ethiopia.
1.235
1 Seismic activity. Present-day seismic activity is
concentrated in the central trough of the Red Sea (4.2). In
general, the area covered by this book is subject to
occasional earthquake activity.
CURRENTS, TIDAL STREAMS AND FLOW
Currents
General information
1.236
1 Currents are strongest over the Arabian Sea and the Gulf
of Aden (12.1) and are associated with the changes in
direction of the NE (winter) and SW (summer) Monsoon
flows. In the Red Sea (4.2) the currents are relatively weak
and are broadly represented by the winter and summer
patterns shown in diagrams 1.236.1 and 1.236.2.
Current diagrams
1.237
1 In the current diagram 1.236.1 and 1.236.2, arrows
indicating the Predominant Direction, Average Rate and
Constancy are shown, which are defined as follows:
Predominant Direction. The mean direction within a
continuous 90 _ sector containing the highest
proportion of observations from all sectors.
2 Average Rate as indicated by the figures in the
diagrams. It is emphasised that rates above and
below those shown may be experienced.
Constancy, as indicated by the thickness of the
arrows, is a measure of its persistence; e.g. low
constancy implies marked variability in rate and,
particularly, the direction of the current.
Red Sea
1.238
1 Currents are predominantly weak in the Red Sea (4.2)
but somewhat less so in the S towards the Straits of Bab el
Mandeb (4.71). The predominate set of the current is either
NW or SE but with great variability. The pattern of the
flow shown in diagram 1.236.1 is broadly representative of
the flow between November and April and in 1.236.2 for
the period June to September. During the transitional
months of October and May there is no predominate set to
the current except S of 14°N, where the set of the current
is predominantly NW through the Straits of Bab el
Mandeb.
2 The great variability of the currents within the Red Sea
is probably due in part to the many local eddies being
superimposed on the overall SE or NW flows. The size and
positions of the eddies may vary greatly from those shown
in the current diagrams. Due to these eddies, a set towards
Home Contents Index

30° 35° 40° 45° 50° 55° 60°

30° 30°

1/4

25° 25°

1/4

CHAPTER 1
20

1/4

20° 20°

1/4

1/4

1/4
1/4

1/4
15° 15°
KEY 1/4
1/2
Average rate in knots is indicated in figures.
Arrows indicate the predominant direction.
1/4 1/4
The constancy of a current is indicated by the 1/4
thickness of the arrow thus:
1/2
High constancy >70% 3/4
1/2
Moderate constancy 30%-70% 1/2
1/2
Low constancy <30%

10° 10°
30° 35° 40° Longitude 45° East from Greenwich 50° 55° 60°

Predominant surface currents JANUARY (1. 236.1)

Home Contents Index

30° 35° 40° 45° 50° 55° 60°

30° 30°

1/4
25° 25°

1/4

CHAPTER 1
21

1/4

20° 20°
1/2
1/4
1/4

1
1/4

1 3/4

15° 1/2 15°

3/4
KEY 1
1
Average rate in knots is indicated in figures.
Arrows indicate the predominant direction.
The constancy of a current is indicated by the 1/4
thickness of the arrow thus: 1 11/2 3/4
1/2 11/2
High constancy >70%
1
Moderate constancy 30%-70%

Low constancy <30%

2
10° 10°
30° 35° 40° Longitude 45° East from Greenwich 50° 55° 60°

Predominant surface currents JULY (1.236.2)

 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1
either coast may suddenly be encountered but these onshore
sets are generally weak although they may be locally
stronger as the water shallows near reefs and shoals.
Straits of Bab el Mandeb
1.239
1 More surface water flows into the Red Sea (4.2) through
the Straits of Bab el Mandeb (4.71) than flows out, this
being due to evaporation within the Red Sea. Evaporation,
which is very high in this hot and arid region, is not offset
by any discharge from rivers in the region. In addition,
there is a persistent sub-surface outflow of highly saline
water through the straits throughout the year.
2 The current predominantly sets NW through the Strait
between October and May with an average rate of around

kn but may occasionally reach 3 kn. Between June and
q
August the set is predominantly SE with an average rate of
around  kn. In September the currents are frequently
weak and variable in direction.
Gulf of Aden
1.240
1 Currents in the Gulf of Aden (12.1) are generally
weaker and more variable in direction than in the Arabian
Sea. In general, W-setting currents prevail during the NE
Monsoon in winter but with some counter-currents
occurring at times particularly off the N coast of Somalia
(1.192). The reversal of the current associated with the
change from NE to SW Monsoon flow is later and more
gradual than in the Arabian Sea. During April the W-setting
currents still predominate although E-setting currents are
encountered with increasing frequency. In May the currents
are generally weak with no predominate set to the current;
it is during June that E sets become predominate.
2 During the height of the SW Monsoon, in summer, the
constancy of the E-setting current in the N part of the Gulf
is high and with an average rate of around 1 kn although
rates of 3 kn have occasionally been recorded. In the S part
of the Gulf of Aden, S of about 12°N, eddies or
counter-currents appear common. W-sets of have been
reported off the N coast of Somalia between 47°E and
49°E and with occasional rates of 2 kn.
3 By September, E-sets are mainly confined to the area N
of 13°N and with very variable sets to the S. During
October W-sets, associated with the NE Monsoon, become
increasingly predominant.
Arabian Sea
1.241
1 In those parts of the Arabian Sea covered by this
volume, the predominantly W-setting current associated
with the NE Monsoon has a high constancy S of 14°N but
even in this area the current occasionally sets E.
Counter-currents setting NE are not uncommon near the SE
coast of the Arabian Peninsula particularly towards the end
of the NE Monsoon in February and March.
2 During April the general NE-setting current, which is
typical of the SW Monsoon, first becomes established off
the E coast of Somalia (1.192) and the SE coast of the
Arabian Peninsular. This current then rapidly strengthens to
affect the more open parts of the Arabian Sea. Between
June and September this NE-setting current is particularly
strong in the vicinity of Raas Caseyr (11°50′N, 51°17′E)
(14.160) and Suqurá (12°30′N, 53°55′E) (15.37), where
rates of 6 kn have been reported on some occasions.
22
3 During October the currents usually become weaker and
more variable, and by November the W-setting currents of
the NE Monsoon are re-established.
Tides and tidal streams
Tides
1.242
1 Red Sea. The tide of the Indian Ocean does not enter
the Red Sea (4.2), where a local oscillatory tide, of
semi-diurnal type, is developed. This oscillation in the Red
Sea is not large, but is such that it is high water at the S
end of the sea whilst it is low water at the N end and vice
versa.
2 At Shaker Island (27°30′N, 34°00′E) (3.42), in the N
part of the Red Sea, the spring range is about 0⋅6 m, while
at Massawa (15°37′N, 39°28′E) (7.141) and Ma
Kamar
n (15°18′N, 42°39′E) (11.14) at the S end, the
spring range is about 0⋅9 m.
3 The tidal range decreases from the N and S ends to the
central area of the Red Sea, near Saw
kin (19°07′N,
37°20′E) (6.118) and Jeddah (21°28′N, 39°10′E) (9.342)
there is no appreciable semi-diurnal tide.
There is also a small diurnal tide, which does not
oscillate in the same manner as the semi-diurnal tide.
Consequently in the central area of the sea diurnal tides of
very small range occur.
1.243
1 Gulf of Suez and Gulf of ‘Aqaba. The Red Sea (4.2)
tidal oscillation enters the Gulf of Suez (3.1) and the Gulf
of ‘Aqaba (8.48) and causes tides in both of these gulfs;
see 3.8 and 8.24.
1.244
1 Gulf of Aden. In the Gulf of Aden (12.1) the tide is
generally diurnal, with a extreme range of about 2⋅7 m at
Aden (12°47′N, 44°57′E) (12.26) and about 3⋅0 m at the
port of Djibouti (11°36′N, 43°09′E) (14.86).
To the E of Khalj Al al
niy
t (Kuria Muria Bay)
(17°45′N, 55°50′E) (13.106) the tide becomes more
semi-diurnal in type, though diurnal inequality remains
great, with ranges of up to about 3⋅0 m.
Tidal streams
1.245
1 In the Gulf of Suez (3.1) the tidal stream sets N while
the tide is rising at Port of Suez (Bûr el Suweis) (29°57′N,
32°33′E) (2.280), and S while it is falling in the port.
In some of the narrow channels near the shores of the
Red Sea (4.2) there appear to be tidal streams, but there is
no perceptible stream elsewhere until near the Straits of
Bab el Mandeb (12°40′N, 43°20′E) (4.71).
2 The tidal streams in the Gulf of Aden (12.1) are
irregular, weak and frequently masked by the current. On
the N side of the gulf, as far E as longitude 54°42′E, the
in-going stream sets SE. Between this longitude and Ra’s al
Junayz (22°25′N, 59°50′E) (13.230) the in-going stream
sets NE.
SEA LEVEL
Red Sea
1.246
1 In the Red Sea (4.2) the mean sea level is about 0⋅2 m
higher in January and about 0⋅2 m to 0⋅3 m lower in
August and September, but meteorological conditions,
barometric pressure, and wind may cause appreciable local
variations; see 2.214.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1
SEA AND SWELL
General remarks
1.247
1 For definitions of sea and swell, and the terminology
used in describing their characteristics, see The Mariner’s
Handbook.
Sea conditions
1.248
1 In the Gulfs of Suez (3.1) and ‘Aqaba (8.48), sea waves
generated locally by the wind are usually lower than those
generated over the more open waters in the S. Over the
Arabian Sea and the Gulf of Aden (12.1), during the height
of the NE Monsoon in winter, sea waves of over 2 m are
reported on between 16 and 21 per cent of occasions.
During the height of the SW Monsoon, in summer, sea
waves of 2 m and over are reported on around 25 per cent
of occasions in the Gulf of Aden and with this percentage
figure steadily increasing to around 85 per cent in the
extreme E of the area. During the transitional months of
April, May, September and October, sea waves of 2 m and
over are reported on around 5 to 10 per cent of occasions.
Swell conditions
1.249
1 Diagrams 1.249.1 and 1.249.2 give swell roses for
January and July. The roses show the percentage of
observations recording swell from a number of different
directions and for various ranges of wave height. In the S
part of the Gulf of Suez (3.1) and the N part of the Red
Sea (4.2), low NNW swells are not uncommon in both
winter and summer, in the S part of the Gulf of ‘Aqaba
(8.48) low NNE swells are possible mainly in summer.
2 In central and S parts of the Red Sea, low swells from
the NNW are most frequent in summer. In central areas in
winter there is a similar frequency of both low NNW and
SSE swells, but in the S the swell is predominantly from
the SSE.
3 Over that part of the Arabian Sea, covered by this
volume, swells are predominantly low NE during the NE
Monsoon in winter, but become progressively more E in
the W part of the Gulf of Aden (12.1). In summer, during
the height of the SW Monsoon, swells are generally low
SW in the W part of the Gulf of Aden. To the E, over the
more open waters of the Arabian Sea, the swells are mainly
moderate (2 m to 4 m) SSW but with heavy swells (over
4 m) being reported on about 30 per cent of occasions.
4 An abnormal increase in swell height off the SE coast of
Arabia may indicate the approach of a tropical cyclone.
SEA WATER CHARACTERISTICS
Sea surface temperature
1.250
1 Diagrams 1.250.1 and 1.250.2 show the mean sea
surface temperature for February and August. Sea surface
temperatures are usually at their lowest in February and
highest in August.
2 In February the mean sea surface temperature is around
18°C in the N part of the Gulf of Suez (3.1) and increases
steadily S-wards across the Red Sea (4.2) to reach a
maximum of around 26⋅5°C at about 17°30′N. The mean
sea surface temperature then slowly decreases to around
24°C in the extreme NE of the area. In August the mean
sea surface temperature is around 27°C in the Gulf of Suez
23
and increases to around 31⋅5°C in the S half of the Red
Sea. The mean sea surface temperature then decreases
towards the E. The effect of up-welling of cooler water,
during the summer SW Monsoon, off the SE coast of
Arabia is shown in diagram 1.250.2. In May the mean sea
surface temperature over that part of the Arabian Sea
covered by this volume is more uniform at about 29°C and
similarly in November with a mean of around 26°C to
27°C.
Variability
1.251
1 The sea surface temperature rarely varies by more than
2°C from the monthly mean over most of the more open
waters. The variation can be significantly greater in shallow
waters and in areas of up-welling off SE Arabia in summer.
2 The average difference between the sea surface
temperature and that of the overlying air temperature is
generally no more than 1°C or 2°C but on some occasions
it can be considerable. The greatest departure occurs with
offshore winds in summer over areas of up-welling off the
SE coast of Arabia, and where the air temperature may
initially be more than 7°C above that of the sea surface
temperature.
CLIMATE AND WEATHER
General information
1.252
1 The following information on climate and weather
should be read in conjunction with the information
contained in The Mariner’s Handbook, which explains in
more detail many aspects of meteorology and climatology
of importance to the mariner.
Weather reports and forecasts, that cover the area, are
regularly broadcast in the various languages of the region
and also in English; for details see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 3.
General conditions
1.253
1 The region is hot and mainly dry in summer and very
warm in winter. The average temperatures in the coastal
areas, covered by this volume, are around the highest in the
world.
2 The weather is more variable over the very high ground
on both sides of the Red Sea (4.2) and with considerable
cloud and some rain at times. Rainfall is generally low but
with the highest amounts occurring over the S part of the
Red Sea and the W areas of the Gulf of Aden (12.1), and
around Port Salalah (16°56′N, 54°00′E) (13.61) during the
height of the summer SW Monsoon.
3 Winds are mainly NNW or SSE over the Red Sea and
with winds of force 5−6 and over occurring on around
26 per cent of occasions. Over the Arabian Sea, in winter,
winds are mainly from the NE and with force 5−6 winds
and over occurring on between 16 and 21 per cent of
occasions. In summer the winds are predominantly SW and
with force 5−6 winds and over occurring on some 65 to
85 per cent of occasions.
Visibility is generally good. During the SW Monsoon it
becomes moderate to poor at times over the Arabian Sea.
In the W of the area, blowing sand and dust reduces the
visibility to less than 1000 m. Fog is rare over the whole of
the area.
Home Contents Index

30° 35° 40° 45° 50° 55° 60°

EXPLANATION. The frequency of swell from

any direction is given according to the scale:
30° 30°
0% 10 20 30 40 50%
This scale is further subdivided to indicate the
f r e q u e n c y o f swe l l o f d i f fe r e n t h e i g h t s ( i n
0 metres) according to the legend:
0-2 4.1 - 6 >8
3
2.1 - 4 6.1 - 8
Swell direction is towards the circle centre. The
<1
figure within the circle gives the percentage of
calms.
25° 25°

CHAPTER 1
24

<1
20° 20°

<1

15° <1 15°

<1

<1

10° 10°
30° 35° 40° Longitude 45° East from Greenwich 50° 55° 60°

Swell distribution JANUARY (1.249.1)

Home Contents Index

30° 35° 40° 45° 50° 55° 60°

EXPLANATION. The frequency of swell from

any direction is given according to the scale:
30° 30°
0% 10 20 30 40 50%
This scale is further subdivided to indicate the
f r e q u e n c y o f swe l l o f d i f fe r e n t h e i g h t s ( i n
<1 metres) according to the legend:
0-2 4.1 - 6 >8
1
2.1 - 4 6.1 - 8
Swell direction is towards the circle centre. The
<1
figure within the circle gives the percentage of
calms.
25° 25°

CHAPTER 1
25

<1
20° 20°

<1

15° 15°
<1
<1

<1

10° 10°
30° 35° 40° Longitude 45° East from Greenwich 50° 55° 60°

Swell distribution JULY (1.249.2)

Home Contents Index

30° 35° 40° 45° 50° 55° 60°

30° 30°

°
18
°
19 0°
2

°
21
°
22

25° 25°
°
23

°
24

CHAPTER 1
2 4°
26

°
25
20° 20°

°
26

°
26

15° 25° 15°

10° 10°
30° 35° 40° Longitude 45° East from Greenwich 50° 55° 60°

Mean sea surface temperature FEBRUARY (1.250.1)

Home Contents Index

30° 35° 40° 45° 50° 55° 60°

30° 30°

°
27
°
28
°

29
25° 25°

30

CHAPTER 1
1°
27

20° 20°

<22

°
22
°
23

4°
2

15° 15°

25°
°

26 °
31 0°

27
°
3 <28 28
°
28 29°
29 °

>29 24 25°

°
>25
10° 10°
30° 35° 40° Longitude 45° East from Greenwich 50° 55° 60°

Mean sea surface temperature AUGUST (1.250.2)

 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1
Pressure
Average distribution
1.254
1 The average pressure distribution at mean sea level in
January, April, July and October is shown in the
accompanying diagrams 1.254.1 to 1.254.4 and illustrate
the typical mean pressure fields for the NE and SW
Monsoons over the E part of the area.
2 In winter the mean barometric pressure is generally high
in the NW of the area with a ridge of high pressure
extending SE across Arabia. Troughs of low pressure
extend NNW along the Red Sea (4.2) and WNW across the
Persian Gulf. In the E and S of the area the NE Monsoon
pattern is dominant between October and April. The
transition between winter and summer is usually gradual
during March then more rapid in April and May. In
summer the mean barometric pressure is low over Iran and
high in the W of the area. In the E and S of the area the
SW Monsoon extends from June to August with some
variations. The autumn transition occurs in September and
October.
3 Seasonal changes are generally less marked over the N
part of the Red Sea and the Gulfs of Suez and ‘Aqaba.
Variability
1.255
1 It is emphasised that the diagrams 1.254.1 to 1.254.4
depict average pressure distributions, which may change
markedly in the NW of the area. This is particularly so
when E-moving mobile depressions, troughs and ridges of
high pressure cross the E Mediterranean and Egypt (1.79).
2 There is a small diurnal variation of pressure of about
3 hPa in the NW and 4 hPa near Aden. Maxima occur at
about 1000 hrs and 2200 hrs local time and minima at
around 0400 hrs and 1600 hrs. Mobile depressions or ridges
2 Most tropical cyclones recurve to the NE before
reaching the coast of E Arabia and, of those that reach the
coast, they are very rarely of hurricane strength. For a
general description of tropical cyclones, signs of approach
and recommended evasive action see The Mariner’s
Handbook.
Fronts
1.258
1 Most depressions that affect the NW of the area, have
associated frontal systems, but, in general, the warm fronts
are usually very weak features (see The Mariner’s
Handbook for a full description of warm, cold fronts and
occlusions). The occasional cold fronts that affect the NW
part of the area can sometimes be very active and may, on
some occasions, give rise to squalls and thunderstorms.
They may also result in blowing sand and dust across the
Gulfs of Suez (3.1) and ‘Aqaba (8.48) and the N part of
the Red Sea (4.2).
Convergence zones
1.259
1 In addition to the occasional cold fronts previously
mentioned, there are two zones of converging air-streams
over some parts of the area. The Intertropical Convergence
Zone (ITCZ) separates the monsoon flow of the N and S
hemispheres. This rather diffuse zone follows the sun to
reach its N limit along the SE coast of Arabia in July and
with the SW Monsoon winds to its S. In January the ITCZ
lies well to the S of the area covered by this book, and
with the NE Monsoon prevailing to its N over the Arabian
Sea.
2 Another convergence zone occurs over the Red Sea
(4.2). It separates the predominant NNW winds in the N
and the SSE winds in the S. This discontinuity zone occurs
between October and May and moves back and forth
of high pressure in the N may obscure the diurnal
variation.
Depressions
1.256
1 Mobile depressions affect the NW of the area in winter
and are usually small in area when compared with the
major depressions of the N Atlantic but nevertheless may
be vigorous features. Most depressions move E towards
Cyprus then start to fill as they move inland over Syria and
Turkey. Other depressions, developing over Algeria or
Libya, may move ENE towards Cyprus or on a more E
track across Egypt (1.79) to Jordan (1.134) or N Arabia.
Depressions are normally less common in summer and are
usually much less intense than those of the winter months.
2 Depressions often move at around 10 kn to 15 kn but on
some occasions may move more rapidly. The movement of
some depressions can be difficult to predict when they
become slow moving or stationary before quickly
transferring elsewhere.
Tropical storms and cyclones
1.257
1 On average five to six tropical cyclones affect the
Arabian Sea each year and nearly 75 per cent of these
occur in May, June, October and November. On average
only one per year reaches hurricane strength. No storms
have been recorded between December and March or in
July and August. Of the five to six tropical cyclones that
may affect the Arabian Sea each year, only very rarely will
one move E of 60°E. No tropical cyclone has ever been
recorded in the Red Sea (4.2).
28
between seb (13°00′N, 42°45′E) (7.202) and Port Sudan
(19°37′N, 37°14′E) (6.26) depending on the relative
strength of the two air-streams. It is frequently cloudy,
some times with rain, near this discontinuity zone.
Average distribution
1.260
1 Wind roses showing the frequency of wind distribution
for several areas in January, May, July and October are
given in diagrams 1.254.1 to 1.254.4.
Gulfs of Suez and ‘Aqaba
1.261
1 The winds over the Gulf of Suez (3.1) are
predominantly NNW throughout the year, and with a
frequency of winds of force 5−6 and over on 26 per cent of
occasions in January, 30 per cent in April and above 40 per
cent in July and October. The frequency of strong winds is
higher over the S of the Gulf where they may blow for
several days particularly in summer. The winds tend to be
highest in the morning and lowest in the afternoon. When a
large depression moves E towards Cyprus, or more usually
when a small depression moves E across N Egypt, the
winds often fall light and variable before becoming SSE in
the S of the Gulf of Suez. These SSE winds are usually
around 10 kn to 15 kn but occasionally reach 20 kn. As the
depression moves E of the Gulf of Suez, the winds veer to
the NNW and can reach gale force in the S half of the
Gulf on occasions, particularly when pressure rises rapidly
to the rear of the depression.
2 Over the Gulf of ‘Aqaba (8.48) the winds are also
predominantly NNW but with a larger frequency of winds
between WNW and NNE than over the Gulf of Suez. The
Home Contents Index

30° 35° 40° 45° 50° 55° 60°

20 EXPLANATION. The frequency of wind from

10 any direction is given according to the scale:
30° 0% 10 20 30 40 50% 30°

This scale is further subdivided to indicate the

1 frequency of winds of different Beaufort force
1 according to the legend:

Wind direction is towards the circle centre. The

2
figure within the circle gives the percentage of
calms.
25° 25°

10
10 17
18

CHAPTER 1
29

10
20° 20°

16
10
14

15° 3 15°

1012 4
10°
101 10°
30° 35° 40° Longitude 45° East from Greenwich 50° 55° 60°

Mean barometric pressure (hPa) and wind distribution JANUARY (1.254.1)

Home Contents Index

30° 35° 40° 45° 50° 55° 60°

EXPLANATION. The frequency of wind from

14
any direction is given according to the scale:

10
30° 0% 10 20 30 40 50% 30°

This scale is further subdivided to indicate the

2 frequency of winds of different Beaufort force
2 according to the legend:

Wind direction is towards the circle centre. The

3 figure within the circle gives the percentage of LOW
calms.
25° 25°

1 01
10
10

10

CHAPTER 1
10
30

4
20° 20°

1 00 8

LOW
4

15° 15°
3
6

I.T.C.Z.
10° I.T.C.Z. 10°
30° 35° 40° Longitude 45° East from Greenwich 50° 55° 60°

Mean barometric pressure (hPa), wind distribution and mean position of Intertropical Convergence Zone APRIL (1.254.2)
Home Contents Index

35° 40° 45° 50° 55° 60°

EXPLANATION. The frequency of wind from

any direction is given according to the scale:
30° 0% 10 20 30 40 50%
LOW 30°

This scale is further subdivided to indicate the

3 frequency of winds of different Beaufort force
1 according to the legend:
9 96
4

Wind direction is towards the circle centre. The

2 figure within the circle gives the percentage of
1008

calms.
25° 25°

99
8

1004

CHAPTER 1
1006
31

3 00

1
20°
0 20°

00

1
2

<1
I.T.
C. Z .
.
C.Z
15° I.T. 15°
4
<1
10
08

10° 10°
30° 35° 40° Longitude 45° East from Greenwich 50° 55° 60°

Mean barometric pressure (hPa), wind distribution and mean position of Intertropical Convergence Zone JULY (1.254.3)
Home Contents Index

35° 40° 45° 50° 55° 60°

4
101
EXPLANATION. The frequency of wind from
any direction is given according to the scale:
30° 0% 10 20 30 40 50% 30°

This scale is further subdivided to indicate the

2 frequency of winds of different Beaufort force
1 according to the legend:

Wind direction is towards the circle centre. The

2 figure within the circle gives the percentage of LOW
calms.
25° 25°

101 2

CHAPTER 1
32

4
20° 20°

10 1
2
10
LOW 10
4

15° 15°
4
6
I.T.C.Z.
0
10 4 01
10

1
10° I.T.C.Z. 10°
30° 35° 40° Longitude 45° East from Greenwich 50° 55° 60°

Mean barometric pressure (hPa), wind distribution and mean position of Intertropical Convergence Zone OCTOBER (1.254.4)
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1
frequency of winds of force 5−6 and over is also slightly
less than that for the Gulf of Suez. As for the Gulf of
Suez, a similar sequence of events affects the Gulf of
‘Aqaba when depressions move E across the area, except
that the winds usually become SSW ahead of the
depression instead of SSE.
Red Sea
1.262
1 Winds in the Red Sea (4.2) are predominantly NNW
throughout the year N of 25°N, with winds of force 5−6
and over recorded on about 35 per cent of occasions.
Winds occasionally reach gale force particularly in the N in
winter after a depression has moved E into Jordan (1.134)
or N Arabia.
2 Between 18°N and 25°N, the winds are predominantly
between WNW and N but with around a 10 per cent
frequency of SSE winds in January and slightly less during
the transitional months of April and October. The frequency
of winds of force 5−6 and over are around 25 per cent in
January, 21 per cent in April, 18 per cent in July and 12 per
cent in October.
3 To the S of 18°N, the winds are predominantly SSE
between October and April but with between 6 and 14 per
cent of winds from the NNW. Between June and August
the winds are mainly from the NW. Winds of force 5−6
and over are reported on 38 per cent of occasions in
January, around 20 to 25 per cent in the transitional months
of April and October and 12 per cent in July.
Gulf of Aden
1.263
1 Between October and April the NE Monsoon winds of
the Arabian Sea turn more E over the Gulf of Aden (12.1).
The frequency of force 5−6 winds and over in April and
October is between 9 and 14 per cent of occasions and
around 20 per cent at the height of the NE Monsoon in
January.
2 SW winds predominate between late May and August
with winds of force 5−6 and over occurring on about
25 per cent of occasions. In early May and September the
winds are lighter and more variable.
Arabian Sea
1.264
1 The NE Monsoon commences in late October although
the wind direction is very variable earlier in the month.
Between November and January about 90 per cent of all
winds are from between N and E, but this decreases to
around 60 per cent in February and March. At the height of
the NE Monsoon, winds of force 5−6 and over occur on
between 16 and 21 per cent of occasions. During the
transitional months of April and October, winds of force
5−6 and over occur on around 5 to 8 per cent of occasions.
2 The SW Monsoon develops in May and is well
established between June and early September. During the
height of the SW Monsoon, winds of force 5−6 and over
occur on around 85 per cent of occasions in the far SE of
the area. In mid-September the SW Monsoon winds start to
weaken.
Coastal winds
1.265
1 The topography and the large diurnal range of
temperature over the land has a very significant effect on
both the direction and speed of the winds in coastal waters
(see The Mariner’s Handbook for a full description of these
effects). In general, winds tend to run parallel to the coast
33
and may diverge by some 30° from those over the open
sea.
The percentage frequency of different wind directions
and mean speeds for a number of coastal stations within
the area are given in the Climatic Tables (1.275).
Gales
1.266
1 Winds of force 7 and over are recorded on about 4 per
cent of occasions in winter and summer in the NW of the
area between 25°N and 30°N although the percentage is
higher for the S part of the Gulfs of Suez and ‘Aqaba.
Over the Red Sea (4.2) between 20°N and 25°N, winds of
force 7 or more are recorded on around 2 per cent of
occasions in winter and less than 1 per cent in summer.
Between 15°N and 20°N, the figures are around 3 per cent
in winter and about 1 per cent in summer.
2 In January, winds of force 7 and over are recorded on
about 1 per cent of occasions in the Gulf of Aden (12.1)
and off the SE coast of Arabia and around 2 per cent in the
SE of the area. In July the figures are around 3 per cent of
occasions for the Gulf of Aden then steadily increasing to
around 37 per cent around Suqurá (12°30′N, 53°55′E)
(15.37) and on 63 per cent of occasions in the far SE of
the area.
Land and sea breezes
1.267
1 Land and sea breezes are very pronounced in all parts of
the area throughout the year. The sea breeze usually
commences in the mid-forenoon and gradually freshens
until mid-afternoon when it starts to weaken and eventually
ceases shortly after sunset. The direction is often onshore
in the morning but will often slowly veer during the day to
blow almost parallel to the coastline. The land breeze often
begins in the late evening and reaches maximum strength
in the early hours of the morning and fades around sunset.
It is normally lighter than the sea breeze but may, on
occasions, be reinforced by katabatic winds when cooler air
drains from high ground which lies inland from the coast.
At other times the sea and land breezes may strengthen or
weaken the prevailing wind.
Local winds
1.268
1 Khamsin is a strong S wind, in Egypt (1.79), in advance
of an E-moving depression from NW Africa. They are
most common between February and May, and often result
in widespread sand and dust storms and very high
temperatures. In the Mediterranean they are referred to as
sirocco winds. In Djibouti (11°36′N, 43°09′E) (1.180), the
khamsin wind is a violent NW wind that occurs between
May and September and on occasions may blow
continuously for 3 to 4 days. The wind often sets in by late
afternoon and slackens around midnight.
2 Haboobs are violent short-lived squalls that suddenly
develop along the Sudanese coast between July and
September. They most frequently approach the coast from
between SE and W and with gusts up to force 8 or more.
3 Belat is a strong N to NW wind that blows off the
mountains of S Yemen and Oman (1.168) in winter. It is
usually felt most strongly in Khalj Al al
niy
t (Kuria
Muria Bay) (17°45′N, 55°50′E) (13.106) and may reach
force 7 during the most violent night squalls towards dawn.
It usually starts and ends quite suddenly.
4 Kharif is another katabatic wind, which occurs along the
African coast of the Gulf of Aden (12.1). It sets in
suddenly during the night and often reaches a peak
between dawn and mid-morning during the SW Monsoon,
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1
and with gusts to gale force. This wind may blow
continuously for 3 to 4 days at a time between June and
August and raise temperatures to around 45°C. The squalls
often raise large quantities of sand and dust. The wind
fades to seaward but fresh winds may be experienced up to
30 miles from the coast.
5 Whirlwinds, dust devils and waterspouts are
occasionally encountered in coastal areas.
Cloud
1.269
1 In January the average cloud amount over the whole of
the Red Sea (4.2) is around 2 oktas. Five oktas or more of
cloud are reported on around 5 per cent of occasions in the
extreme N and S of the Red Sea, on 15 per cent of
occasions on the E side of the Red Sea between 18°N and
25°N, and on 25 per cent of occasions on the W side of
the Red Sea between 15°N and 19°N. The average cloud
amount in July is less than 1 okta in the N part of the Red
Sea but increase to around 3 to 4 oktas in the S. On 15 to
20 per cent of occasions clouds amounts between 13°N and
17°N increase to 5 oktas or more.
2 Over the Gulf of Aden (12.1) and that part of the
Arabian Sea covered by this volume, the average cloud
amount is January is 2 oktas in the W and NE and 3 to
4 oktas in the SE. In July average amounts increase to
around 3 to 4 oktas in the W and NE and 4 oktas in the
SE. However, around the Horn of Africa cloud amounts
remain at around 2 to 3 oktas.
3 Average monthly cloud amounts for a number of coastal
stations within the area are given in the Climatic Tables
(1.275).
Precipitation
General information
1.270
1 Annual rainfall amounts are usually less than 55 mm
over the NW part of the area to the N of around 22°N, and
with less than 10 mm per year at El Tûr Harbour (28°14′N,
33°37′E) (3.298), Hurghada (27°14′N, 33°50′E) (3.367) and
El Queir (26°06′N, 34°17′E) (5.116). What little rainfall
there is, is usually recorded between October and March as
weakening cold fronts cross the area.
2 Annual rainfall amounts increase towards Massawa
(15°37′N, 39°28′E) (7.141) where the annual rainfall is
around 180 mm then decrease again towards the Straits of
Bab el Mandeb (12°40′N, 43°20′E) (4.71) (see Climatic
Tables 1.275). Rain is this area is due mainly to the
position of the Red Sea convergence zone and the
mountainous interior.
3 Along the SE coast of Arabia annual rainfall amounts
increase from around 45 mm at Aden (12°47′N, 44°57′E)
(12.26), to about 115 mm at Port Salalah (16°56′N,
54°00′E) (13.61) then decrease again to around 45 mm at
Marah Island (20°30′N, 58°50′E) (13.180). Rainfall is
spread fairly evenly throughout the year except at Port
Salalah where most of the rain is recorded in July and
August.
4 Along the African coast annual rainfall amounts rapidly
decrease from an average of around 165 mm at Djibouti
(11°36′N, 43°09′E) (14.86) to about 55 mm at Berbera
(10°26′N, 45°00′E) (14.162) and near 15 mm at Boosaaso
(11°17′N, 49°11′E) (14.206). Most of the rain over Suqurá
(12°30′N, 53°55′E) (15.37) is recorded between October
and March and with moderate falls in June.
34
5 There can be large variations in the monthly averages in
many areas and with several years of drought in some
places. Large falls in some months may be entirely due to
local thundery rain storms. Thunderstorms are mainly
confined to the more mountainous areas and are rare in the
N and E. Snow may cover the highest peaks at times in
winter.
Fog and visibility
1.271
1 Visibility is often good or very good and fog is rare
with a frequency of less than 1 per cent. Visibility of less
than 5 miles occur in some parts of the area between May
and September and more particularly in the area of cold
water up-welling off the SE coast of Arabia (see mean sea
surface temperature diagram 1.250.2). Sand and dust storms
may reduce the visibility to fog limits, and with the worst
affected regions being the NW of the area and off the coast
of Oman (1.168).
Refraction and mirage
1.272
1 Refraction and mirage are common in the Red Sea (4.2)
(see The Mariner’s Handbook for a full description).
See also 1.30.
Air temperature
1.273
1 Most of the area covered by this volume is hot or very
hot. In February the mean air temperature over the Gulf of
Suez (3.1) is 19⋅5°C then increases to between 25°C and
26°C near the Straits of Bab el Mandeb (12°40′N, 43°20′E)
(4.71). It then decreases to around 23°C towards Marah
Island (20°30′N, 58°50′E) (13.180) and over the open sea
to the E of Suqurá (12°30′N, 53°55′E) (15.37), between
57°E and 62°E, the mean air temperature is around 25°C.
In August, the hottest month of the year, the mean air
temperature is around 29°C over the Gulf of Suez and
between 32°C and 33°C over the Red Sea (4.2) S of 20°C.
Mean temperatures then decrease in the area of cold water
up-welling off the SE coast of Arabia to around 24°C to
26°C but to the E of Suqurá, between 57°E and 62°E, the
mean air temperature is around 27°C.
2 The mean annual temperatures over the S part of the
Red Sea are amongst the highest in the world and is
mainly due to the limited night time cooling over the water
compared with the marked drop in temperatures over land.
Sudden changes in temperature are sometimes encountered
near the convergence zone over the S part of the Red Sea.
3 Khamsin winds blowing over Egypt and around Djibouti
(14.86) can result in temperatures increasing to around
40°C to 45°C. Temperature ranges for a number of coastal
stations within the area are given in the Climatic Tables
(1.275).
The air over the water is normally around 1°C to 2°C
warmer than the sea in summer and about 1°C cooler in
winter.
Humidity
1.274
1 Humidity is inversely related to air temperature; thus
high humidity is usually associated with low temperatures
and vice versa. Maximum humidity normally occurs around
dawn and the minimum in the early afternoon. In January,
the mean value of the humidity is around 60 per cent in the
NW of the area and steadily increases to between 74 and
77 per cent over the Red Sea (4.2) S of 20°N. The mean
value then decreases to around 66 per cent in the NE of the
area and to between 72 and 74 per cent in the SE.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 1
2 In August, the mean value of the humidity is around
72 per cent in the NW of the area and between 73 and
75 per cent over the Red Sea S of 20°N. It then increases
to between 85 and 88 per cent in the NE and to about
84 per cent in the SE.
3 Air descending from mountainous interiors is usually
very dry and with a mean humidity value of less than
20 per cent. Near Port Salalah (16°56′N, 54°00′E) (13.61),
at the height of the SW Monsoon in July and August, the
humidity may persist at around 90 per cent or more.
CLIMATIC TABLES
1.275
1 The tables which follow give data for several coastal
stations that regularly undertake weather observations.
Some of these stations (see location of Climatic Tables
chartlet) have been re-sited and so the position given is the
latest available.
35
2 It is emphasised that these data are average conditions
and refer to the specific location of the observing station
and therefore may not be totally representative of the
conditions over the open sea or in approaches to ports in
their vicinity.
3 The following comments briefly list some of the
differences to be expected between conditions over the
open sea and the nearest reporting station (see The
Mariner’s Handbook for further details):
Wind speeds tend to be higher at sea than on land,
although funnelling in narrow inlets can result in
an increase in wind strength.
Precipitation along hilly wind-facing coasts can be
considerably higher than at sea to windward.
Similarly precipitation in the lee of high ground is
generally less.
Air temperature over the sea is less variable than over
the land.
Topography has a marked effect on local conditions.
Home Contents Index

30° 35° 40° 45° 50° 55° 60°

ISMAILIA
30° 1.276 30°
1.283 1.284
EILAT EL ÁQABA

1.277
EL TÛR

HURGHADA
1.278
EL QUSEIR
1.279
25° 25°

CHAPTER 1
JEDDAH AIRPORT
36

1.285 1.290
MASIRAH
20° 20°
PORT SUDAN
1.280

1.289
SALALAH

MASSAWA
15° 1.281 1.286 1.288 15°
HUDAYDAH AR RAYYAN

1.287 1.294
ASEB ADEN SUQUTRÁ (AIRFIELD)
1.282
1.291 1.293
DJIBOUTI BOOSAASO

1.292
10° BERBERA 10°
30° 35° 40° Longitude 45° East from Greenwich 50° 55° 60°

Location of climate stations (1.275)

 Home Contents Index

1.276

WMO No 62440 ISMAILIA (30° 36′ N, 32° 15′ E) Height above MSL − 13 m
Climatic Table compiled from 14 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 2000

Average Average Mean Number

Temperatures cloud Precipitation Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from wind of days
humidity
cover speed with
Average pressure
at MSL

No. of days with

Month

1 mm or more
in each month

in each month
0800 1400

Mean highest

Mean lowest
daily min.
daily max.

Thunder
Average
Mean
Mean

Gale
0800

1400

0800

1400

0800

1400

Fog
fall

Calm

Calm
NW
SW

NW
SW
NE

SE

SE
NE
W

W
E
N

S
N
hPa °C °C °C °C % % Oktas mm Knots

January 1020 19 9 24 5 81 49 3 4 7 1 3 3 2 8 7 18 13 3 43 16 18 8 4 2 10 25 16 1 3 8 | 2 |
February 1019 20 9 28 6 77 44 2 4 6 1 1 3 2 14 6 19 14 4 37 16 16 3 4 3 11 25 21 1 3 9 | 2 |
March 1017 23 11 31 7 72 39 2 4 7 1 5 10 4 10 4 13 20 7 28 23 18 6 3 2 4 24 19 | 4 8 0 | |

CHAPTER 1
April 1014 28 14 39 10 63 31 2 3 2 0 9 18 9 14 4 6 16 12 13 28 22 6 7 3 3 13 18 0 5 8 | 1 |
37

May 1013 32 17 40 14 61 30 2 2 2 0 20 22 7 7 3 3 10 19 9 35 28 2 5 1 2 10 17 | 4 9 | | |
June 1011 35 20 41 17 64 30 2 1 0 0 14 11 4 5 1 4 23 29 9 43 19 1 1 1 0 8 28 1 4 9 0 | 0
July 1009 36 22 40 20 70 34 2 <1 0 0 13 5 1 2 1 4 37 31 7 35 9 | | 0 1 11 43 0 4 9 0 | 0
August 1009 36 23 38 21 73 36 2 <1 0 0 14 3 1 | | 5 32 34 11 45 9 1 0 | 1 8 36 0 4 8 | | 0
September 1012 33 21 38 18 74 39 1 <1 0 0 12 6 2 3 | 5 23 26 23 51 19 1 0 1 1 5 22 0 3 8 | 1 0
October 1015 30 18 36 14 77 42 1 2 2 0 9 6 2 5 2 5 19 14 38 42 22 1 2 2 2 10 17 2 2 7 | 3 |
November 1017 26 14 31 9 79 45 2 3 6 0 4 3 2 8 3 13 13 6 48 28 24 2 2 1 6 18 17 2 2 7 | 3 |
December 1019 21 10 26 6 81 50 3 4 5 1 2 2 1 8 6 17 8 3 52 19 17 4 3 2 11 23 20 2 3 7 | 3 |
Means 1015 29 16 42* 4§ 73 39 2 2 _ _ 9 8 3 7 3 9 19 16 26 32 18 3 3 1 4 15 23 1 3 8 _ _ _
Totals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 37 4 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ | 15 |
Extreme values _ _ _ 46† 1‡ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

No. of years ƒ††††††††…††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„

observations 14 14 14 14 30 14 14 14 14 14 14

* Mean of highest each year † Highest recorded temperature | Rare

§ Mean of lowest each year ‡ Lowest recorded temperature { All observations
 Home Contents Index

1.277

WMO No 62459 EL TÛR (28° 14′ N, 33° 37′ E) Height above MSL − 14 m
Climatic Table compiled from 10 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 2000

Average Average Mean Number

Temperatures cloud Precipitation Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from wind of days
humidity
cover speed with
Average pressure
at MSL

No. of days with

Month

1 mm or more
in each month

in each month
0800 1400

Mean highest

Mean lowest
daily min.
daily max.

Thunder
Average
Mean
Mean

Gale
0800

1400

0800

1400

0800

1400

Fog
fall

Calm

Calm
NW
SW

NW
SW
NE

SE

SE
NE
W

W
E
N

S
N
hPa °C °C °C °C % % Oktas mm Knots

January 1017 21 10 25 7 52 47 2 2 0 0 54 23 2 1 1 0 1 13 4 3 0 1 1 2 2 10 79 3 9 15 | 0 0
February 1016 22 11 26 7 50 48 1 1 0 0 48 21 1 1 0 0 0 21 8 3 0 0 2 3 2 7 82 1 9 19 | | 0
March 1013 23 13 29 9 50 45 1 1 0 0 38 7 1 3 1 0 1 36 14 1 0 1 1 6 2 8 80 0 10 18 0 | 0

CHAPTER 1
April 1011 28 17 36 11 54 43 1 1 0 0 14 1 0 5 6 0 0 61 12 0 1 0 2 10 4 7 74 3 13 18 | 0 0
38

May 1008 31 21 38 17 64 47 1 1 0 0 1 2 1 1 1 1 4 81 8 1 1 0 1 5 3 9 76 4 15 17 | 0 0
June 1005 33 24 39 22 67 51 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 96 2 2 0 0 0 2 1 2 94 1 17 20 | 0 0
July 1003 34 25 40 22 69 51 <1 <1 0 0 1 0 0 1 2 0 2 93 1 0 0 0 0 1 2 4 92 | 16 19 | 0 0
August 1004 34 26 39 23 68 54 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 | 1 94 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 95 | 16 20 | 0 0
September 1007 32 24 38 21 65 57 0 <1 0 0 4 0 0 0 1 0 2 81 13 1 0 0 0 1 0 3 95 | 13 19 | 0 0
October 1011 30 20 35 14 58 56 <1 1 1 0 27 3 1 | 0 0 1 38 29 0 0 0 0 4 1 4 89 2 7 18 0 | |
November 1014 26 15 31 11 55 52 1 1 1 0 48 22 3 1 1 1 0 13 12 1 0 0 1 3 | 11 82 2 7 16 0 0 0
December 1017 23 11 28 7 55 49 1 1 5 0 56 23 3 1 1 0 0 12 5 3 1 0 | 3 2 12 76 3 9 15 | 0 0
Means 1011 28 18 41* 6§ 59 50 1 1 _ _ 24 8 1 1 1 | 1 54 10 1 | | 1 3 2 7 85 1 12 18 _ _ _
Totals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 7 0 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ | | |
Extreme values _ _ _ 43† 3‡ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

No. of years ƒ††††††††…††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„

observations 30 30 10 10 30 10 10 10 10 10 10

* Mean of highest each year † Highest recorded temperature | Rare

§ Mean of lowest each year ‡ Lowest recorded temperature { All observations
 Home Contents Index

1.278

WMO No 62463 HURGHADA (27° 09′ N, 33° 43′ E) Height above MSL − 14 m
Climatic Table compiled from 12 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 2000

Average Average Mean Number

Temperatures cloud Precipitation Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from wind of days
humidity
cover speed with
Average pressure
at MSL

No. of days with

Month

1 mm or more
in each month

in each month
0800 1400

Mean highest

Mean lowest
daily min.
daily max.

Thunder
Average
Mean
Mean

Gale
0800

1400

0800

1400

0800

1400

Fog
fall

Calm

Calm
NW
SW

NW
SW
NE

SE

SE
NE
W

W
E
N

S
N
hPa °C °C °C °C % % Oktas mm Knots

January 1017 22 12 25 7 51 40 2 2 0 0 1 0 | 1 | 5 72 20 1 48 6 7 1 0 1 7 27 2 12 13 | 0 0
February 1017 22 12 26 9 47 37 1 1 0 0 | 0 0 1 1 5 55 35 3 58 10 6 3 0 0 6 19 0 12 14 0 | |
March 1014 24 14 30 11 45 36 1 1 0 0 3 | 0 1 1 3 35 51 4 67 10 11 3 0 | 1 7 1 13 15 | | 0

CHAPTER 1
April 1011 29 18 36 13 37 31 1 2 0 0 15 1 2 5 2 2 10 59 5 60 11 18 4 1 0 | 6 0 12 15 1 | 0
39

May 1009 33 22 38 16 35 28 1 2 0 0 34 | 2 3 0 1 5 53 3 69 11 13 2 0 0 | 5 0 14 15 1 1 0
June 1006 35 25 41 21 36 28 0 0 0 0 37 0 1 0 0 | 3 58 1 82 4 3 1 0 0 0 10 0 16 18 | | |
July 1004 36 27 40 24 39 29 0 0 0 0 38 0 | 0 0 0 6 56 0 76 11 6 2 | 0 0 4 0 14 16 | | 0
August 1005 37 27 40 25 40 31 0 0 0 0 26 | 0 0 0 0 4 70 | 83 8 4 | 0 0 0 5 | 15 17 1 | |
September 1008 35 25 38 22 42 35 0 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 0 | 4 82 1 86 6 2 0 | 0 0 5 0 14 17 1 0 0
October 1012 32 22 35 18 46 40 <1 <1 2 0 6 1 | | 1 1 19 71 2 78 6 7 1 0 | 0 8 | 12 14 | | |
November 1015 27 18 32 14 48 41 1 2 2 0 2 0 0 0 | 2 49 44 2 64 11 9 1 1 | 1 13 0 12 12 | | 0
December 1017 23 13 27 10 51 42 2 2 1 0 | 0 0 0 0 4 63 31 1 62 7 5 1 0 | 3 22 | 12 12 | | 0
Means 1011 30 20 41* 6§ 43 35 1 1 _ _ 15 | 1 1 | 2 26 53 2 70 9 8 2 | | 1 10 | 13 15 _ _ _
Totals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 5 0 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 4 2 |
Extreme values _ _ _ 43† 5‡ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

No. of years ƒ††††††††…††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„

observations 12 30 12 12 30 12 12 12 12 12 12

* Mean of highest each year † Highest recorded temperature | Rare

§ Mean of lowest each year ‡ Lowest recorded temperature { All observations
 Home Contents Index

1.279

WMO No 62465 EL QUSEIR (26° 08′ N, 34° 09′ E) Height above MSL − 11 m
Climatic Table compiled from 18 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 2000

Average Average Mean Number

Temperatures cloud Precipitation Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from wind of days
humidity
cover speed with
Average pressure
at MSL

No. of days with

Month

1 mm or more
in each month

in each month
0800 1400

Mean highest

Mean lowest
daily min.
daily max.

Thunder
Average
Mean
Mean

Gale
0800

1400

0800

1400

0800

1400

Fog
fall

Calm

Calm
NW
SW

NW
SW
NE

SE

SE
NE
W

W
E
N

S
N
hPa °C °C °C °C % % Oktas mm Knots

January 1018 22 15 25 12 50 47 2 2 0 0 10 | 1 | | 2 35 52 0 59 22 6 2 | 0 2 8 | 8 10 | | |
February 1017 22 15 26 12 46 44 1 1 0 0 14 | 1 | 1 2 31 50 1 52 27 6 4 0 | 5 6 0 8 11 | | 0
March 1015 24 17 29 14 47 49 1 2 0 0 38 1 | | 3 1 13 41 3 56 26 8 5 1 | 3 1 0 9 10 | | 0

CHAPTER 1
April 1012 27 20 33 17 46 50 1 1 0 0 65 1 | 4 2 | 3 20 3 57 24 7 7 1 | 2 2 | 10 10 | | |
40

May 1010 30 24 35 21 47 52 1 2 0 0 75 3 1 1 1 | 2 15 1 66 19 6 5 0 | 0 4 | 10 9 | 0 |
June 1007 32 26 36 23 49 51 0 0 0 0 86 1 | 0 | 0 1 12 | 84 10 2 1 0 0 0 3 | 11 9 | 0 0
July 1006 33 27 36 25 49 54 0 0 0 0 86 1 1 0 | 0 | 11 1 73 20 2 1 | 0 | 2 | 9 8 | | 0
August 1006 33 28 36 25 51 55 0 0 0 0 84 2 0 0 0 0 0 14 | 76 19 1 | | 0 | 3 | 10 8 | | 0
September 1009 32 26 35 23 52 56 0 0 0 0 81 | 0 | 0 | 1 18 0 83 14 | | | | | 1 0 10 9 | | 0
October 1013 30 24 33 20 52 56 <1 <1 1 0 60 | 0 | 1 | 5 32 1 75 19 2 | | 1 | 2 | 9 9 | 0 |
November 1015 27 20 30 15 51 52 1 1 1 1 25 1 1 0 1 1 19 51 1 68 21 3 2 1 | 2 5 0 7 9 | | |
December 1018 24 17 27 11 50 49 2 2 1 0 12 1 | | | 2 35 50 | 69 16 4 2 | 0 3 7 0 7 10 | | 0
Means 1012 28 22 37* 10§ 49 51 _ _ 53 1 | 1 1 1 12 30 1 68 20 4 3 | | 1 4 | 9 8 _ _ _
Totals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 2 | |
Extreme values _ _ _ 45† 9‡ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

No. of years ƒ††††††††…††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„

observations 18 18 18 18 30 18 18 18 18 18 18

* Mean of highest each year † Highest recorded temperature | Rare

§ Mean of lowest each year ‡ Lowest recorded temperature { All observations
 Home Contents Index

1.280

WMO No 62641 PORT SUDAN (19° 35′ N, 37° 13′ E) Height above MSL − 2 m
Climatic Table compiled from 18 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 2000

Average Average Mean Number

Temperatures cloud Precipitation Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from wind of days
humidity
cover speed with
Average pressure
at MSL

No. of days with

Month

1 mm or more
in each month

in each month
0800 1400

Mean highest

Mean lowest
daily min.
daily max.

Thunder
Average
Mean
Mean

Gale
0800

1400

0800

1400

0800

1400

Fog
fall

Calm

Calm
NW
SW

NW
SW
NE

SE

SE
NE
W

W
E
N

S
N
hPa °C °C °C °C % % Oktas mm Knots

January 1015 27 20 29 16 66 62 5 4 7 1 71 2 1 1 0 1 3 17 5 17 61 16 4 0 1 0 2 0 9 12 | | 0
February 1014 27 18 30 14 64 61 4 3 1 0 67 5 1 0 1 0 2 16 9 10 58 28 4 1 0 1 0 0 8 10 | | 0
March 1012 29 19 33 14 60 57 2 2 1 0 51 7 2 1 3 1 4 18 13 16 48 32 2 0 1 1 1 0 7 12 | | 0

CHAPTER 1
April 1010 32 22 36 18 56 53 2 1 2 0 51 8 2 1 1 1 5 16 14 15 50 27 6 1 0 0 1 1 6 12 | 0 1
41

May 1008 35 24 39 20 44 42 2 2 1 0 40 12 4 5 6 2 3 14 15 8 49 36 6 1 0 0 1 1 5 11 | 1 0
June 1005 39 26 43 23 38 37 2 2 <1 0 26 12 6 5 5 5 5 13 23 7 44 42 5 0 0 1 1 2 4 10 1 | |
July 1004 42 29 45 25 39 37 2 3 4 1 5 4 5 5 9 16 16 5 35 5 20 36 20 3 3 8 5 0 6 10 1 2 1
August 1005 41 29 44 25 38 40 2 2 1 0 4 2 3 7 8 12 13 8 44 2 16 52 15 5 3 3 4 1 4 10 1 1 0
September 1007 38 27 42 24 48 45 3 2 <1 0 19 4 5 3 5 5 5 15 39 7 36 48 7 1 0 1 | 0 3 9 1 0 0
October 1010 34 26 38 23 67 60 3 2 14 1 43 8 3 2 2 4 2 18 17 6 47 36 9 0 0 | 1 1 5 9 | | |
November 1012 31 24 34 19 70 64 4 4 35 3 62 5 1 2 1 | 4 18 6 20 41 30 8 0 0 0 1 0 8 10 1 | 1
December 1014 29 22 31 18 68 63 5 4 10 1 68 3 2 1 | 0 1 18 6 23 43 25 6 | 0 | 2 0 9 10 1 1 0
Means 1010 34 24 45* 13§ 55 52 3 3 _ _ 43 6 3 3 3 4 5 15 18 12 43 33 7 1 1 1 2 | 6 10 _ _ _
Totals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 77 7 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 6 5 3
Extreme values _ _ _ 46† 11‡ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

No. of years ƒ††††††††…††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„

observations 18 18 18 18 30 18 18 18 18 18 18

* Mean of highest each year † Highest recorded temperature | Rare

§ Mean of lowest each year ‡ Lowest recorded temperature { All observations
 Home Contents Index

1.281

WMO No 63023 MASSAWA (15° 37′ N, 39° 27′ E) Height above MSL − 10 m
Climatic Table compiled from 10 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 1990

Average Average Mean Number

Temperatures cloud Precipitation Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from wind of days
humidity
cover speed with
Average pressure
at MSL

No. of days with

0.1 mm or more
Month

in each month

in each month
0900 1500

Mean highest

Mean lowest
daily min.
daily max.

Thunder
Average
Mean
Mean

Gale
0600

1500

0600

1500

0600

1500

Fog
fall

Calm

Calm
NW
SW

NW
SW
NE

SE

SE
NE
W

W
E
N

S
N
hPa °C °C °C °C % % Oktas mm Knots

January 1012 29 19 32 16 78 69 5 4 31 5 2 0 1 2 4 5 51 17 17 19 44 25 3 2 1 3 2 3 5 12 0 0 0
February 1010 28 19 31 17 78 67 6 4 29 7 2 1 5 1 7 4 34 29 17 19 40 21 8 0 2 2 2 5 6 12 0 | 0
March 1008 30 20 34 17 75 64 5 3 15 3 9 1 4 5 5 6 29 22 19 19 55 17 3 0 1 1 2 2 6 14 0 0 2

CHAPTER 1
April 1007 32 21 36 19 70 62 4 3 13 2 17 2 8 5 1 3 11 28 24 12 62 22 2 0 0 1 0 1 5 15 0 0 2
42

May 1006 34 21 38 20 63 54 3 3 5 1 10 9 7 5 2 7 11 23 27 9 63 21 2 0 0 3 3 0 4 14 0 0 0
June 1003 38 24 42 21 51 47 3 2 0 0 9 3 3 1 2 3 24 24 31 23 48 21 3 0 1 0 3 1 5 14 0 0 0
July 1002 39 26 42 22 54 50 4 2 6 | 5 9 6 6 5 3 27 18 20 15 45 30 2 1 2 3 1 1 4 15 1 0 1
August 1002 39 28 43 25 53 50 4 2 8 1 6 5 5 7 5 8 26 21 18 6 49 31 9 0 1 2 3 1 4 14 1 1 0
September 1004 37 24 41 23 65 55 3 2 3 | 5 6 7 5 4 3 31 14 25 9 59 30 | 0 1 0 0 1 4 14 | 0 1
October 1008 35 22 37 20 70 58 2 2 16 2 4 9 5 8 11 5 16 20 23 6 64 27 1 0 1 0 0 1 4 14 | 0 2
November 1010 32 21 34 18 72 59 2 2 19 2 3 3 1 6 7 3 19 21 36 4 58 33 3 1 0 0 1 1 5 13 0 0 0
December 1011 29 20 33 17 77 68 5 3 37 4 1 2 3 2 8 2 44 21 17 14 50 28 3 1 1 1 0 2 6 13 | 2 0
Means 1007 33 22 44* 15§ 67 59 4 3 _ _ 6 4 5 4 5 4 28 21 23 13 53 26 3 | 1 1 1 2 5 14 _ _ _
Totals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 182 27 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 2 3 8
Extreme values _ _ _ 46† 12‡ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

No. of years ƒ††††††††…††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„

observations 10 30 10 10 30 10 10 10 10 10 10

* Mean of highest each year † Highest recorded temperature | Rare

§ Mean of lowest each year ‡ Lowest recorded temperature { All observations
 Home Contents Index

1.282

WMO No 63043 ÁSEB (13° 00′ N, 42° 44′ E) Height above MSL − 14 m
Climatic Table compiled from 12 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 1994

Average Average Mean Number

Temperatures cloud Precipitation Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from wind of days
humidity
cover speed with
Average pressure
at MSL

No. of days with

1.0 mm or more
Month

in each month

in each month
0900 1500

Mean highest

Mean lowest
daily min.
daily max.

Thunder
Average
Mean
Mean

Gale
0600

1500

0600

1500

0600

1500

Fog
fall

Calm

Calm
NW
SW

NW
SW
NE

SE

SE
NE
W

W
E
N

S
N
hPa °C °C °C °C % % Oktas mm Knots

January 1015 28 23 29 21 76 60 3 2 6 1 1 1 8 67 13 1 2 3 5 4 11 44 37 0 0 1 3 1 16 23 6 0 0
February 1013 29 24 31 23 79 59 3 2 4 | 1 0 13 55 9 0 3 12 6 6 19 37 26 1 1 0 9 1 15 23 6 0 0
March 1012 30 25 32 24 73 52 3 2 2 0 4 1 12 60 3 1 5 7 6 14 14 29 35 1 0 0 8 0 15 24 6 1 0

CHAPTER 1
April 1010 31 26 34 25 68 54 3 3 2 0 2 2 14 62 8 0 2 5 6 6 12 35 38 1 0 1 6 3 10 21 4 0 1
43

May 1008 33 28 37 26 72 50 4 2 <1 0 6 8 14 41 5 1 4 9 12 19 18 32 16 1 0 1 10 3 7 17 2 0 0

June 1005 37 30 38 28 63 50 5 2 0 0 12 11 11 10 2 1 12 22 19 30 25 8 3 0 1 5 27 1 3 14 0 0 0
July 1004 39 31 43 28 58 46 5 2 9 2 9 9 8 15 1 7 21 15 15 32 25 13 3 0 1 1 24 1 4 14 0 0 0
August 1005 38 31 41 27 65 46 5 2 5 1 11 12 7 7 5 4 21 17 16 41 25 5 1 1 1 4 22 1 3 14 0 0 0
September 1007 37 30 39 26 73 52 4 3 3 | 7 7 21 22 6 1 9 10 18 27 33 17 10 1 0 1 10 0 3 15 0 0 1
October 1011 34 27 37 24 71 49 3 1 1 | 1 4 21 49 13 0 2 2 8 4 11 47 31 3 0 1 3 0 12 22 1 0 0
November 1014 30 25 33 23 72 53 1 1 4 | 0 0 10 64 24 1 0 0 1 0 2 32 55 10 0 0 1 0 13 24 1 0 0
December 1015 29 23 30 21 75 58 2 2 10 2 0 1 14 57 24 1 1 0 3 0 8 43 45 4 0 0 0 0 12 25 2 0 0
Means 1010 33 27 43* −§ 70 52 3 2 _ _ 5 4 13 43 9 1 7 8 10 15 17 29 25 2 | 1 10 1 9 20 _ _ _
Totals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 46 6 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 28 1 2
Extreme values _ _ _ 45† 18‡ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

No. of years ƒ††††††††…††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„

observations 12 12 12 12 30 12 12 12 12 12 12

* Mean of highest each year † Highest recorded temperature | Rare

§ Mean of lowest each year ‡ Lowest recorded temperature { All observations
 Home Contents Index

1.283

WMO No 40199 EILAT (29° 33′ N, 34° 57′ E) Height above MSL − 12 m
Climatic Table compiled from 18 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 2000

Average Average Mean Number

Temperatures cloud Precipitation Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from wind of days
humidity
cover speed with
Average pressure
at MSL

No. of days with

1.0 mm or more
Month

in each month

in each month
0800 1400

Mean highest

Mean lowest
daily min.
daily max.

Thunder
Average
Mean
Mean

Gale
0800

1400

0800

1400

0800

1400

Fog
fall

Calm

Calm
NW
SW

NW
SW
NE

SE

SE
NE
W

W
E
N

S
N
hPa °C °C °C °C % % Oktas mm Knots

January 1018 21 10 25 6 59 33 3 3 5 1 46 32 0 0 2 | 1 10 9 40 29 4 5 11 3 3 5 1 7 9 | | |
February 1017 22 10 28 6 54 29 2 3 5 1 44 31 1 | 2 3 3 7 8 29 29 5 6 16 5 3 6 1 7 9 | | |
March 1014 26 14 31 9 49 26 2 3 4 1 51 30 1 1 4 1 1 7 5 29 27 2 7 22 4 3 4 1 9 10 | | |

CHAPTER 1
April 1012 31 18 38 13 38 19 2 2 3 1 47 35 1 1 5 1 1 5 4 31 24 3 6 28 2 2 3 1 10 10 0 0 |
44

May 1010 36 22 42 16 33 17 2 2 1 0 52 38 1 2 3 | | 3 1 40 23 2 6 24 2 1 3 0 11 10 | | |
June 1007 39 24 44 20 33 15 0 0 0 0 53 41 1 0 | | | 3 1 49 33 2 1 11 | 1 3 0 11 13 | | 0
July 1005 40 26 44 23 35 17 0 0 0 0 44 51 1 0 1 | | 2 1 37 39 1 2 19 | | 1 0 9 11 0 | 0
August 1006 40 26 43 23 40 19 0 0 0 0 55 41 | | | 0 0 2 1 49 38 | 3 8 1 0 1 0 10 12 0 | 0
September 1009 37 25 42 22 47 23 0 0 0 0 58 37 | 0 1 0 0 5 0 54 37 1 1 3 | | 3 0 11 12 0 | |
October 1013 33 21 39 16 51 27 1 1 3 0 60 32 1 | | 0 1 4 2 48 33 2 2 10 1 1 3 1 10 11 | | 1
November 1015 28 16 33 11 52 29 2 2 4 1 58 33 1 0 | 1 0 3 4 44 29 3 4 12 2 2 2 2 8 10 | | |
December 1018 22 11 27 7 58 34 3 3 6 1 53 35 | | 1 | 1 4 4 43 32 3 3 11 1 2 3 2 7 10 | | |
Means 1012 31 19 45* 5§ 46 24 1 2 _ _ 52 36 1 | 2 1 1 4 3 41 31 2 4 15 2 1 3 1 9 11 _ _ _
Totals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 31 6 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ | | 1
Extreme values _ _ _ 47† 2‡ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

No. of years ƒ††††††††…††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„

observations 18 18 18 18 30 18 18 18 18 18 18

* Mean of highest each year † Highest recorded temperature | Rare

§ Mean of lowest each year ‡ Lowest recorded temperature { All observations
 Home Contents Index

1.284

WMO No 40340 EL ÁQABA (29° 38′ N, 35° 01′ E) Height above MSL − 51 m
Climatic Table compiled from 18 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 2000

Average Average Mean Number

Temperatures cloud Precipitation Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from wind of days
humidity
cover speed with
Average pressure
at MSL

No. of days with

1.0 mm or more
Month

in each month

in each month
0800 1400

Mean highest

Mean lowest
daily min.
daily max.

Thunder
Average
Mean
Mean

Gale
0800

1400

0800

1400

0800

1400

Fog
fall

Calm

Calm
NW
SW

NW
SW
NE

SE

SE
NE
W

W
E
N

S
N
hPa °C °C °C °C % % Oktas mm Knots

January 1017 20 9 24 4 75 39 3 3 3 1 36 15 1 2 1 | | 7 38 48 5 1 1 6 3 4 19 15 5 10 1 1 |
February 1016 21 10 27 5 71 36 3 3 3 1 38 9 3 2 2 1 1 10 34 42 5 1 2 9 5 4 18 14 6 11 | | 0
March 1013 25 13 31 8 68 34 3 3 1 | 51 5 1 1 3 1 1 13 26 39 6 2 2 14 6 5 15 11 9 12 1 1 |

CHAPTER 1
April 1011 30 17 38 12 56 28 2 2 4 | 59 5 | 2 2 2 | 14 14 44 3 1 1 14 6 5 17 9 11 12 | 1 |
45

May 1009 35 21 42 15 50 26 2 2 | 0 70 2 | 1 2 | 0 16 8 52 3 1 1 10 5 3 19 6 12 13 1 | |
June 1007 38 24 43 20 51 26 0 0 0 0 74 4 0 0 0 | 1 15 7 64 4 | 0 4 2 1 20 4 13 15 1 | |
July 1004 40 25 43 21 52 28 0 0 0 0 64 4 1 | | | | 23 8 53 8 | | 6 1 2 25 6 11 12 | 0 |
August 1005 39 26 42 22 59 30 0 0 0 0 69 5 0 0 | | | 20 5 64 4 1 | 2 1 1 23 4 12 14 1 1 |
September 1008 37 24 39 21 66 33 0 0 0 0 76 6 0 | | | 0 14 3 67 6 0 0 3 1 1 20 2 13 15 1 | |
October 1012 32 20 38 15 67 35 1 1 1 0 61 8 2 | | | | 17 12 59 5 1 | 5 2 1 21 6 10 13 1 | |
November 1015 27 15 32 12 68 37 2 2 1 | 50 11 1 1 0 0 1 10 27 52 3 1 1 6 3 2 19 14 6 11 1 1 |
December 1017 22 10 27 6 74 41 3 3 10 3 42 13 | 1 2 1 | 8 34 55 2 0 1 6 2 2 20 13 5 11 1 | |
Means 1011 31 18 45* 3§ 63 33 2 2 _ _ 57 7 1 1 1 1 | 14 18 53 4 1 1 7 3 2 20 9 9 12 _ _ _
Totals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 23 5 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 9 5 |
Extreme values _ _ _ 48† 1‡ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

No. of years ƒ††††††††…††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„

observations 18 18 18 18 30 18 18 18 18 18 18

* Mean of highest each year † Highest recorded temperature | Rare

§ Mean of lowest each year ‡ Lowest recorded temperature { All observations
 Home Contents Index

1.285

WMO No 41024 JEDDAH AIRPORT (21° 42′ N, 39° 11′ E) Height above MSL − 17 m
Climatic Table compiled from 18 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 2000

Average Average Mean Number

Temperatures cloud Precipitation Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from wind of days
humidity
cover speed with
Average pressure
at MSL

No. of days with

0.1 mm or more
Month

in each month

in each month
0900 1500

Mean highest

Mean lowest
daily min.
daily max.

Thunder
Average
Mean
Mean

Gale
0600

1500

0900

1500

0900

1500

Fog
fall

Calm

Calm
NW
SW

NW
SW
NE

SE

SE
NE
W

W
E
N

S
N
hPa °C °C °C °C % % Oktas mm Knots

January 1014 29 18 33 14 72 44 2 2 14 3 25 34 6 4 3 1 1 2 26 9 3 1 | 2 20 23 41 1 6 12 | | |
February 1013 29 17 34 14 75 42 2 2 6 1 39 26 4 4 2 1 1 3 21 6 2 | | 1 14 26 51 | 7 13 0 | |
March 1010 31 19 36 14 75 41 1 1 1 | 46 9 2 3 5 1 1 14 19 4 1 | | 4 13 28 49 | 7 14 | | |

CHAPTER 1
April 1008 35 22 40 16 71 40 1 1 5 1 38 5 4 5 8 3 1 17 17 2 | | | 3 22 36 37 | 7 13 | | 1
46

May 1007 37 24 43 20 72 40 1 1 2 | 39 2 2 2 6 2 2 32 12 2 | 0 0 1 14 34 49 | 7 13 | | |
June 1004 38 24 44 21 78 41 0 0 0 0 46 3 0 | 2 2 4 32 12 1 0 0 0 0 6 35 58 0 7 13 | | 0
July 1003 39 26 43 23 74 36 <1 <1 <1 | 45 5 | 2 4 3 7 24 11 2 0 0 0 | 7 41 51 0 6 13 | | 0
August 1003 39 27 42 24 77 42 <1 <1 0 0 38 3 | 3 4 3 10 28 11 1 0 0 0 1 8 39 51 0 7 13 | | |
September 1005 37 26 42 23 83 51 <1 <1 0 0 35 3 | 2 3 3 4 31 19 1 | 0 0 | 11 51 37 0 6 13 | 1 |
October 1009 37 24 42 21 82 49 <1 <1 2 | 42 9 3 3 3 1 1 11 28 | 1 | | 1 18 55 24 0 5 12 0 | |
November 1012 33 22 37 19 79 49 2 2 12 3 38 15 6 4 3 1 | 3 30 3 1 1 1 2 22 42 27 1 5 12 | 1 2
December 1013 31 20 34 15 74 47 2 2 12 3 33 31 8 5 2 0 | 1 20 8 3 | | 4 17 26 41 | 6 12 | | 1
Means 1008 35 22 46* 13§ 76 44 1 1 _ _ 38 12 3 3 4 2 3 17 18 3 1 | | 2 14 37 43 | 6 13 _ _ _
Totals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 54 11 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ | 3 4
Extreme values _ _ _ 49† 11‡ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

No. of years ƒ††††††††…††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„

observations 18 18 18 18 30 18 18 18 18 18 18

* Mean of highest each year † Highest recorded temperature | Rare

§ Mean of lowest each year ‡ Lowest recorded temperature { All observations
 Home Contents Index

1.286

WMO No 41431  UDAYDAH (14° 45′ N, 42° 59′ E) Height above MSL − 115 m
Climatic Table compiled from 9 to 30 years observations, 1940 to 2000

Average Average Mean Number

Temperatures cloud Precipitation Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from wind of days
humidity
cover speed with
Average pressure
at MSL

No. of days with

0.1 mm or more
Month

in each month

in each month
0900 1500

Mean highest

Mean lowest
daily min.
daily max.

Thunder
Average
Mean
Mean

Gale
0900

1500

0900

1500

0900

1500

Fog
fall

Calm

Calm
NW
SW

NW
SW
NE

SE

SE
NE
W

W
E
N

S
N
hPa °C °C °C °C % % Oktas mm Knots

January 1013 28 19 31 17 77 67 2 1 5 0 0 0 11 36 0 3 3 47 2 0 0 2 65 15 11 4 0 5 11
February 1012 28 21 32 20 72 66 3 1 5 4 0 4 4 39 4 2 2 41 0 0 0 0 43 25 27 4 2 6 11
March 1010 30 23 34 21 76 66 3 1 3 0 2 0 4 36 9 6 2 40 0 0 0 2 39 20 29 4 6 6 11

CHAPTER 1
April 1009 32 25 37 23 75 66 3 2 3 0 0 0 4 44 2 7 2 41 0 0 0 0 45 25 25 2 4 8 10
47

May 1006 35 27 39 26 78 67 2 1 2 2 2 0 0 27 11 7 7 43 0 0 0 0 17 29 42 6 6 6 11
June 1003 36 28 40 26 77 68 3 1 1 0 0 0 2 20 20 20 8 29 2 0 0 0 5 18 63 7 5 6 11
July 1003 37 30 41 28 71 65 3 3 13 7 0 0 1 10 10 18 17 38 1 0 0 0 1 12 64 16 6 6 12
August 1004 36 28 39 24 71 69 3 4 18 6 4 3 6 9 13 6 7 46 1 1 0 1 3 22 57 8 6 5 10
September 1005 36 27 40 24 73 71 2 4 3 3 1 1 0 18 7 10 7 52 0 1 1 0 10 26 54 3 4 4 10
October 1009 34 26 39 23 72 68 1 3 3 2 0 0 3 26 6 0 4 58 0 0 1 0 15 41 35 4 5 4 10
November 1011 31 22 34 20 69 63 1 1 10 0 0 1 9 56 3 0 0 31 2 0 0 0 61 36 2 0 0 7 11
December 1013 28 20 32 19 74 66 1 1 23 0 0 2 5 46 0 0 2 46 0 0 0 0 64 24 13 0 0 6 11
Means 1008 33 25 −* 17§ 74 67 2 2 _ _ 2 1 1 4 29 7 7 5 44 1 | | | 28 25 37 5 4 6 11 _ _ _
Totals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 89 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Extreme values _ _ _ 41† 16‡ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

No. of years ƒ††††††††…††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„

observations 9 30 9 9 30 9 9 9

* Mean of highest each year † Highest recorded temperature | Rare

§ Mean of lowest each year ‡ Lowest recorded temperature { All observations
 Home Contents Index

1.287

WMO No 41480 ADEN (12° 50′ N, 45° 02′ E) Height above MSL − 3 m
Climatic Table compiled from 11 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 2000

Average Average Mean Number

Temperatures cloud Precipitation Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from wind of days
humidity
cover speed with
Average pressure
at MSL

No. of days with

0.1 mm or more
Month

in each month

in each month
0900 1500

Mean highest

Mean lowest
daily min.
daily max.

Thunder
Average
Mean
Mean

Gale
0900

1500

0900

1500

0900

1500

Fog
fall

Calm

Calm
NW
SW

NW
SW
NE

SE

SE
NE
W

W
E
N

S
N
hPa °C °C °C °C % % Oktas mm Knots

January 1016 29 23 30 21 76 64 5 4 8 3 11 12 66 3 0 0 0 | 8 0 4 83 13 0 0 0 0 | 10 13 0 0 0
February 1015 29 23 30 20 78 64 4 3 4 1 10 11 60 1 0 0 0 2 15 0 1 75 23 1 0 0 0 0 9 12 0 0 0
March 1013 31 25 32 22 79 64 4 3 7 2 10 9 63 1 0 | | 3 14 0 0 71 27 1 | | 0 0 9 13 0 0 |

CHAPTER 1
April 1011 32 26 34 22 80 65 4 3 3 1 9 6 68 2 0 0 0 2 13 0 1 66 32 1 | 0 0 | 9 13 0 | |
48

May 1008 35 28 36 24 81 62 4 2 2 | 12 14 35 8 1 4 4 5 20 0 1 36 49 3 11 | 0 0 6 12 0 | |
June 1004 37 29 38 26 75 54 3 2 1 | 14 9 10 11 5 11 9 7 24 0 | 12 33 7 46 2 0 0 6 12 | 1 |
July 1003 37 29 38 27 76 57 4 2 3 1 5 8 11 11 6 27 9 3 19 0 | 4 11 6 75 2 | | 8 14 | 2 1
August 1004 36 27 38 25 77 57 4 2 3 1 4 7 11 12 4 33 10 3 16 0 | 5 11 5 74 4 1 | 8 14 | 2 2
September 1006 36 27 37 25 79 59 3 2 4 1 15 9 22 10 2 9 8 6 19 | | 21 38 2 34 4 0 0 6 12 | 1 1
October 1011 34 26 35 22 77 58 2 1 2 1 24 14 24 1 | | 3 4 30 0 | 46 48 3 3 | 0 0 6 12 0 1 |
November 1014 32 23 33 20 78 62 3 2 3 1 24 15 41 1 0 0 | 1 18 0 | 76 24 0 0 0 0 0 9 13 0 1 0
December 1017 30 23 31 19 76 63 4 3 5 2 23 13 54 1 0 0 0 2 8 0 2 80 18 0 0 0 0 0 10 13 0 0 0
Means 1009 33 26 39* 17§ 78 61 4 2 _ _ 13 10 38 5 2 8 4 3 17 | 1 47 27 3 21 1 | | 8 13 _ _ _
Totals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 45 14 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1 8 4
Extreme values _ _ _ 43† 15‡ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

No. of years ƒ††††††††…††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„

observations 20 11 11 11 30 11 11 11 11 20 20

* Mean of highest each year † Highest recorded temperature | Rare

§ Mean of lowest each year ‡ Lowest recorded temperature { All observations
 Home Contents Index

1.288

WMO No 41443 AR RAYY N (14° 39′ N, 49° 20′ E) Height above MSL − 25 m
Climatic Table compiled from 10 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 2000

Average Average Mean Number

Temperatures cloud Precipitation Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from wind of days
humidity
cover speed with
Average pressure
at MSL

No. of days with

0.1 mm or more
Month

in each month

in each month
0900 1500

Mean highest

Mean lowest
daily min.
daily max.

Thunder
Average
Mean
Mean

Gale
0900

1500

0900

1500

0900

1500

Fog
fall

Calm

Calm
NW
SW

NW
SW
NE

SE

SE
NE
W

W
E
N

S
N
hPa °C °C °C °C % % Oktas mm Knots

January 1016 28 19 31 16 58 56 2 1 8 3 8 33 16 3 2 1 0 17 21 0 0 5 82 12 1 0 0 0 5 10 0 | 0
February 1015 29 20 30 17 65 60 2 2 2 1 11 24 32 8 2 0 0 7 17 0 0 3 74 22 0 0 1 0 4 9 0 1 0
March 1013 30 21 32 19 65 61 3 1 19 2 6 18 44 13 3 2 0 0 13 2 0 4 74 20 0 0 0 0 5 9 0 | |

CHAPTER 1
April 1011 32 23 34 20 64 62 2 1 3 1 3 5 26 44 8 2 0 2 11 0 0 2 75 19 2 0 0 0 7 9 0 | 1
49

May 1008 34 25 36 22 68 65 2 1 2 1 0 4 25 51 11 0 1 1 7 0 0 2 60 32 7 0 0 0 7 10 0 | 1
June 1004 35 26 38 24 69 63 2 1 2 | 5 4 27 40 14 2 0 0 8 0 0 1 25 29 45 0 0 0 6 12 2 | |
July 1002 34 25 35 23 67 62 2 1 3 1 2 7 35 42 5 4 0 1 5 0 0 2 20 17 62 0 0 0 6 14 0 1 1
August 1003 34 24 35 22 69 68 2 1 4 1 1 12 35 37 5 4 2 0 4 0 0 2 35 21 41 0 1 0 7 12 0 | 1
September 1007 33 25 34 21 71 65 4 2 <1 1 0 6 49 33 6 1 0 1 4 0 0 7 65 20 8 0 0 0 7 10 0 1 1
October 1012 32 23 34 19 65 58 2 1 1 1 1 5 36 31 9 3 0 1 13 1 0 10 61 22 6 1 0 0 6 9 1 | 1
November 1014 31 21 33 18 55 55 1 1 12 1 9 22 21 9 8 0 0 5 24 0 0 3 70 25 2 0 0 0 4 9 0 0 0
December 1016 30 20 31 16 55 54 2 1 8 1 15 27 22 1 0 1 1 14 19 0 0 7 79 13 0 1 0 1 5 10 0 | 0
Means 1010 32 23 37* 15§ 64 61 2 1 _ _ 5 14 31 26 6 2 | 4 12 | 0 4 61 21 14 | | | 6 10 _ _ _
Totals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 64 14 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 2 6
Extreme values _ _ _ 44† 13‡ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

No. of years ƒ††††††††…††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„

observations 20 20 10 10 30 10 10 20 20 20 20

* Mean of highest each year † Highest recorded temperature | Rare

§ Mean of lowest each year ‡ Lowest recorded temperature { All observations
 Home Contents Index

1.289

WMO No 41316 SALALAH (17° 02′ N, 54° 05′ E) Height above MSL − 25 m
Climatic Table compiled from 10 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 2000

Average Average Mean Number

Temperatures cloud Precipitation Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from wind of days
humidity
cover speed with
Average pressure
at MSL

No. of days with

0.1 mm or more
Month

in each month

in each month
1000 1600

Mean highest

Mean lowest
daily min.
daily max.

Thunder
Average
Mean
Mean

Gale
0700

1600

0700

1600

0700

1600

Fog
fall

Calm

Calm
NW
SW

NW
SW
NE

SE

SE
NE
W

W
E
N

S
N
hPa °C °C °C °C % % Oktas mm Knots

January 1017 28 19 31 14 58 48 2 2 2 1 27 11 14 14 8 6 1 6 14 17 | 2 32 42 2 0 5 0 6 10 | | |
February 1015 29 20 33 17 60 50 3 2 3 1 20 6 9 17 20 10 1 3 14 10 3 1 17 58 7 1 3 0 5 10 | | 0
March 1014 30 22 35 18 65 54 3 2 5 1 13 3 4 17 32 18 1 2 10 6 | 1 15 69 8 0 2 0 4 9 | | |

CHAPTER 1
April 1011 32 24 37 21 72 60 3 2 9 1 5 2 1 8 50 24 2 1 7 1 1 0 5 73 19 0 1 | 3 10 | | 1
50

May 1008 33 26 37 24 80 68 3 2 15 3 1 0 1 5 53 36 1 | 3 1 0 | 3 68 29 0 0 0 2 12 0 | |
June 1004 32 27 36 25 86 75 6 4 7 2 1 0 | 2 61 33 1 | 2 | 0 0 1 56 42 0 0 0 4 13 0 | |
July 1003 29 25 31 23 94 82 8 7 28 20 | 1 1 16 61 18 | | 2 0 0 0 11 61 28 0 0 1 4 10 | | |
August 1005 27 23 30 23 95 84 8 7 27 18 0 | 1 24 54 14 1 0 6 0 0 0 7 66 27 0 0 0 4 9 | 2 1
September 1008 29 24 31 22 87 75 7 4 4 2 | 1 2 11 51 29 1 1 4 0 0 0 3 71 26 0 0 | 3 11 | | |
October 1012 30 23 35 19 70 61 2 1 7 2 2 1 6 14 37 29 2 | 10 0 | | 15 68 16 0 | 0 3 9 | 0 |
November 1015 31 21 35 18 59 53 1 2 4 2 16 7 14 26 15 10 | 2 9 4 1 2 50 37 5 0 | | 4 8 0 | |
December 1017 29 20 32 17 59 48 2 2 2 1 32 13 14 14 6 3 1 4 14 19 3 1 38 32 3 0 3 | 6 9 | | |
Means 1011 30 23 40* 13§ 74 63 4 3 _ _ 10 4 5 14 37 19 1 2 8 5 1 1 16 58 18 | 1 | 4 10 _ _ _
Totals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 113 54 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1 2 2
Extreme values _ _ _ 45† 10‡ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

No. of years ƒ††††††††…††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„

observations 17 17 17 17 30 17 17 17 17 17 17

* Mean of highest each year † Highest recorded temperature | Rare

§ Mean of lowest each year ‡ Lowest recorded temperature { All observations
 Home Contents Index

1.290

WMO No 41288 MARAH (20° 40′ N, 58° 54′ E) Height above MSL − 19 m
Climatic Table compiled from 17 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 2000

Average Average Mean Number

Temperatures cloud Precipitation Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from wind of days
humidity
cover speed with
Average pressure
at MSL

No. of days with

0.1 mm or more
Month

in each month

in each month
1000 1600

Mean highest

Mean lowest
daily min.
daily max.

Thunder
Average
Mean
Mean

Gale
0700

1600

0700

1600

0700

1600

Fog
fall

Calm

Calm
NW
SW

NW
SW
NE

SE

SE
NE
W

W
E
N

S
N
hPa °C °C °C °C % % Oktas mm Knots

January 1017 27 18 30 14 80 58 2 2 4 1 9 19 16 10 1 3 17 21 5 3 23 38 19 2 7 3 4 3 6 9 | | |
February 1016 28 19 31 15 82 59 2 2 7 1 4 7 15 15 3 8 24 16 8 1 10 36 32 2 12 3 2 2 6 9 | | |
March 1013 30 21 34 17 84 57 2 2 10 2 4 4 8 15 3 19 27 14 6 | 5 20 37 5 23 8 2 1 5 10 | | |

CHAPTER 1
April 1010 34 24 38 20 83 52 2 2 8 1 4 1 4 7 1 44 30 5 4 | 2 9 31 8 44 4 1 1 7 11 | | |
51

May 1007 36 26 41 24 83 52 2 1 1 | 2 1 2 2 1 70 17 3 1 0 1 4 18 13 62 2 0 0 11 12 | | 0
June 1001 35 26 40 24 88 59 4 1 2 | 2 2 3 5 3 71 9 2 3 | 1 5 17 13 62 2 | | 13 14 1 1 |
July 1000 32 24 38 22 89 64 5 2 3 | | 1 2 3 6 84 2 | 1 1 1 2 9 15 71 | | 0 16 16 2 1 |
August 1002 31 23 35 22 90 66 6 2 2 | | 1 1 8 10 77 2 | 1 0 0 2 15 21 60 | | | 13 14 | 1 0
September 1007 31 23 35 22 89 65 5 1 <1 | 0 1 4 11 6 61 15 | 2 | | 2 25 12 58 2 0 | 9 12 | | 0
October 1012 32 23 37 21 88 58 2 <1 1 | 11 12 6 7 1 19 28 12 6 0 8 20 43 4 22 2 | 2 5 9 0 1 |
November 1015 30 22 34 20 83 60 2 1 1 | 17 24 17 6 | 7 10 14 7 1 25 42 22 1 6 | | 2 5 9 | | 0
December 1017 28 20 30 17 82 62 3 2 6 1 13 29 16 9 2 4 10 11 8 2 35 36 16 1 3 3 1 4 6 9 | | |
Means 1010 31 22 42* 13§ 85 59 3 2 _ _ 5 9 8 8 3 39 16 8 4 1 9 18 24 8 36 2 1 1 8 11 _ _ _
Totals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 45 6 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 4 |
Extreme values _ _ _ 46† 9‡ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

No. of years ƒ††††††††…††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„

observations 17 17 17 17 30 17 17 17 17 17 17

* Mean of highest each year † Highest recorded temperature | Rare

§ Mean of lowest each year ‡ Lowest recorded temperature { All observations
 Home Contents Index

1.291

WMO No 63125 DJIBOUTI (11° 33′ N, 43° 09′ E) Height above MSL − 19 m
Climatic Table compiled from 16 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 2000

Average Average Mean Number

Temperatures cloud Precipitation Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from wind of days
humidity
cover speed with
Average pressure
at MSL

No. of days with

1.0 mm or more
Month

in each month

in each month
0900 1500

Mean highest

Mean lowest
daily min.
daily max.

Thunder
Average
Mean
Mean

Gale
0600

1500

0600

1500

0600

1500

Fog
fall

Calm

Calm
NW
SW

NW
SW
NE

SE

SE
NE
W

W
E
N

S
N
hPa °C °C °C °C % % Oktas mm Knots

January 1015 29 22 31 20 84 60 4 2 10 3 1 1 22 30 29 7 0 0 10 1 6 76 14 | 1 | 0 | 3 10 | 1 0
February 1013 30 23 31 19 82 61 5 2 19 4 1 6 34 38 11 2 0 1 6 1 13 75 10 1 0 0 1 1 4 9 1 2 0
March 1011 31 24 32 21 83 64 5 3 20 4 1 12 47 27 7 0 1 0 5 1 19 70 6 | 1 1 | 1 3 10 0 1 1

CHAPTER 1
April 1010 33 26 35 23 86 65 4 3 29 5 3 16 49 17 3 2 1 1 9 1 30 62 3 1 | 0 1 2 2 8 | 1 1
52

May 1007 35 27 39 24 83 60 3 2 17 3 7 18 35 11 6 5 2 4 14 1 25 64 7 1 1 0 | 1 1 9 0 1 1
June 1004 39 29 43 25 64 51 3 2 <1 | 14 20 20 7 5 2 10 17 7 4 14 61 12 0 0 | 7 2 2 9 | 1 0
July 1003 42 31 45 26 54 39 3 2 6 2 8 10 10 4 4 3 39 20 2 10 5 35 6 2 2 8 30 1 3 10 1 3 1
August 1003 42 31 44 27 53 40 3 2 6 2 10 9 9 2 3 4 39 17 5 9 10 30 7 1 2 13 28 | 5 10 1 3 |
September 1006 37 29 42 25 73 56 4 2 3 1 8 14 26 7 11 4 10 8 13 3 19 70 5 0 1 1 1 0 2 10 | 1 |
October 1011 34 26 36 23 77 56 3 2 20 4 1 4 43 35 9 2 | 0 5 0 11 81 7 | 0 0 0 | 3 9 | 1 1
November 1014 30 23 32 21 80 58 2 2 22 4 1 3 26 51 13 1 1 0 4 | 4 86 8 | | 0 | 0 3 9 | 2 0
December 1015 30 22 30 20 83 60 3 2 11 2 1 2 19 41 25 4 2 | 5 | 5 70 22 1 0 | 0 1 3 10 1 1 0
Means 1009 34 26 45* 18§ 75 56 4 2 _ _ 5 9 28 23 10 3 9 6 7 3 13 65 9 1 1 2 5 1 3 9 _ _ _
Totals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 163 34 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 4 18 5
Extreme values _ _ _ 46† 16‡ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

No. of years ƒ††††††††…††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„

observations 16 16 16 16 30 16 16 16 16 16 16

* Mean of highest each year † Highest recorded temperature | Rare

§ Mean of lowest each year ‡ Lowest recorded temperature { All observations
 Home Contents Index

1.292

WMO No 63160 BERBERA (10° 25′ N, 45° 01′ E) Height above MSL − 9 m
Climatic Table compiled from 5 to 30 years observations, 1941 to 2000

Average Average Mean Number

Temperatures cloud Precipitation Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from wind of days
humidity
cover speed with
Average pressure
at MSL

No. of days with

1.0 mm or more
Month

in each month

in each month
0900 1500

Mean highest

Mean lowest
daily min.
daily max.

Thunder
Average
Mean
Mean

Gale
0600

1500

0900

1500

0900

1500

Fog
fall

Calm

Calm
NW
SW

NW
SW
NE

SE

SE
NE
W

W
E
N

S
N
hPa °C °C °C °C % % Oktas mm Knots

January 1015 29 20 31 17 87 69 3 2 8 1 0 3 6 22 12 3 7 0 47 19 78 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 3 13 1
February 1014 29 20 31 18 87 70 3 2 3 1 2 5 2 9 7 8 5 | 63 16 80 1 0 0 0 1 2 0 3 12 1
March 1011 30 22 32 21 86 71 3 3 5 1 1 2 1 4 8 7 11 2 64 22 73 5 | 0 0 0 | 0 3 12 |

CHAPTER 1
April 1009 32 25 34 22 89 73 2 3 13 1 4 2 0 1 1 14 11 6 61 15 73 5 1 1 2 1 1 1 7 13 |
53

May 1008 36 27 42 24 80 66 2 2 8 1 2 2 2 2 2 16 7 2 65 22 61 2 1 0 3 1 9 2 − 12 1
June 1005 42 30 44 27 51 46 1 1 | | 0 | 0 1 4 80 0 | 14 22 21 0 0 0 25 11 19 2 − 13 11
July 1004 42 32 44 28 45 43 1 2 | | 0 0 0 0 1 97 0 0 2 9 1 0 0 0 44 21 24 1 − 14 19
August 1005 41 31 43 27 44 46 2 3 3 1 0 0 0 0 | 98 | 0 2 24 5 0 0 0 19 20 30 1 − 13 13
September 1007 39 29 42 25 52 50 2 3 | | 1 2 4 4 1 53 2 0 33 29 29 0 4 0 4 7 26 1 − 13 3
October 1011 33 24 37 21 78 65 3 2 3 | 1 2 3 17 9 6 2 2 58 24 71 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 5 10 0
November 1014 31 22 33 19 81 66 3 3 5 | 1 1 4 26 9 3 1 2 53 20 76 0 1 0 0 0 3 0 4 12 |
December 1015 29 20 32 18 84 68 4 3 5 | 0 7 3 24 13 2 4 0 47 23 74 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 13 |
Means 1010 34 25 44* 17§ 72 61 _ _ 1 2 2 9 6 32 4 1 43 20 54 1 1 0 8 5 10 1 − 13 _ _ _
Totals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 53 6 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 49
Extreme values _ _ _ 47† 14‡ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

No. of years ƒ††††††††…††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„

observations 30 30 30 5 30 30 30 5 −

* Mean of highest each year † Highest recorded temperature | Rare

§ Mean of lowest each year ‡ Lowest recorded temperature { All observations
 Home Contents Index

1.293

WMO No 63210 BOOSAASO (11° 17′ N, 49° 11′ E) Height above MSL − 2 m
Climatic Table compiled from 16 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 1998

Average Average Mean Number

Temperatures cloud Precipitation Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from wind of days
humidity
cover speed with
Average pressure
at MSL

No. of days with

0.1 mm or more
Month

in each month

in each month
0900

Mean highest

Mean lowest
daily min.
daily max.

Thunder
Average
Mean
Mean

Gale
0900

1500

0900

1500

0900

1500

Fog
fall

Calm

Calm
NW
SW

NW
SW
NE

SE

SE
NE
W

W
E
N

S
N
hPa °C °C °C °C % % Oktas mm Knots

January 1014 29 21 75 66 1 1 <1 | 5 3 5 16 16 11 22 8 14 7 11

February 1014 29 21 75 68 2 2 0 0 11 4 4 22 13 9 7 13 16 8 10
March 1013 31 22 70 69 <1 2 2 1 9 2 2 11 55 6 4 2 9 12 11

CHAPTER 1
April 1012 34 24 63 72 1 1 <1 | 8 15 6 12 41 6 5 2 5 13 _
54

May 1012 37 26 60 71 1 1 1 | 8 9 9 6 58 2 3 6 0 13 _
June 1008 40 31 65 61 1 1 0 0 0 6 12 44 23 2 8 2 4 21 _
July 1009 40 32 69 46 <1 1 <1 | 0 0 0 63 25 8 4 0 0 25 _
August 1012 40 30 48 61 <1 2 0 0 0 0 0 38 57 0 5 0 0 19 13
September 1011 38 28 55 67 <1 3 1 | 5 8 3 24 47 3 5 5 0 14 6
October 1011 32 23 67 73 1 4 3 1 17 13 2 8 28 18 6 2 6 9 7
November 1011 26 20 73 74 2 4 4 2 9 7 5 11 23 11 4 14 16 5 8
December 1014 26 21 76 71 2 5 1 | 12 9 12 0 21 23 0 15 9 13 12
Means 1012 34 24 _* § 66 67 1 2 _ _ 8 8 5 17 34 8 6 6 7 13 _ _ _ _
Totals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 13 4 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Extreme values _ _ _ 45† 16‡ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

No. of years ƒ††††††††…††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„

observations 16 30 16 16 30 16 16 −

* Mean of highest each year † Highest recorded temperature | Rare

§ Mean of lowest each year ‡ Lowest recorded temperature { All observations
 Home Contents Index

1.294

WMO No 41494 SUQU RÁ (AIRFIELD) (12° 38′ N, 53° 54′ E) Height above MSL − 47 m
Climatic Table compiled from 9 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 2000

Average Average Mean Number

Temperatures cloud Precipitation Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from wind of days
humidity
cover speed with
Average pressure
at MSL

No. of days with

1.0 mm or more
Month

in each month

in each month
0900

Mean highest

Mean lowest
daily min.
daily max.

Thunder
Average
Mean
Mean

Gale
0900

1500

0900

1500

0900

1500

Fog
fall

Calm

Calm
NW
SW

NW
SW
NE

SE

SE
NE
W

W
E
N

S
N
hPa °C °C °C °C % % Oktas mm Knots

January 1014 28 22 29 20 66 66 3 3 3 1 5 82 5 1 0 0 0 0 7 0 95 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 13
February 1014 28 21 31 19 67 63 2 2 3 1 8 72 9 0 0 0 0 2 9 4 86 7 0 0 0 4 0 0 10 14
March 1013 30 21 32 20 64 64 1 3 10 1 13 58 7 0 1 0 0 6 15 14 76 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 15

CHAPTER 1
April 1011 32 23 34 22 63 62 1 3 0 0 16 51 1 | 2 6 0 11 12 23 63 0 0 7 3 3 0 0 7 14
55

May 1009 34 25 38 23 57 54 2 3 3 | 9 23 2 2 14 38 5 4 3 5 21 7 2 17 43 2 0 2 13 16
June 1006 33 26 37 24 60 54 3 2 31 1 0 1 0 1 34 64 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 28 67 2 0 0 29 25
July 1004 32 25 33 23 61 55 3 3 0 0 2 0 0 0 34 61 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 28 72 0 0 0 36 30
August 1006 32 25 34 23 59 52 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 45 53 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 28 72 0 0 0 32 28
September 1007 32 25 34 24 60 54 2 2 3 | 1 0 0 1 33 60 5 0 1 0 4 2 0 20 67 2 4 0 23 20
October 1011 30 24 33 22 66 64 3 4 10 2 12 32 3 1 13 19 4 8 8 15 52 13 0 9 6 0 4 2 11 13
November 1012 29 22 31 21 67 70 3 4 51 6 12 60 21 1 0 0 0 2 5 5 77 19 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 14
December 1014 28 22 30 20 67 67 3 5 81 5 4 73 20 | 0 0 0 0 3 3 59 37 0 0 0 0 0 0 14 16
Means 1010 31 23 38* 19§ 65 60 2 3 _ _ 6 35 6 1 16 26 2 3 5 6 39 8 1 13 31 1 1 | 17 19 _ _ _
Totals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 195 16 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Extreme values _ _ _ 39† 18‡ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

No. of years ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††…†††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††††††††††††††…†††††††††††††††„ ƒ†††…†††„
observations 9 30 9/10 9 9 10 9 9 9 −

* Mean of highest each year † Highest recorded temperature | Rare

§ Mean of lowest each year ‡ Lowest recorded temperature { All observations
Home Contents Index CHAPTER 1

1.295
METEOROLOGICAL CONVERSION TABLE AND SCALES
Fahrenheit to Celsius
°Fahrenheit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

°F Degrees Celsius
−100 −73⋅3 −73⋅9 −74⋅4 −75⋅0 −75⋅6 −76⋅1 −76⋅7 −77⋅2 −77⋅8 −78⋅3
−90 −67⋅8 −68⋅3 −68⋅9 −69⋅4 −70⋅0 −70⋅6 −71⋅1 −71⋅7 −72⋅2 −72⋅8
−80 −62⋅2 −62⋅8 −63⋅3 −63⋅9 −64⋅4 −65⋅0 −65⋅6 −66⋅1 −66⋅7 −67⋅2
−70 −56⋅7 −57⋅2 −57⋅8 −58⋅3 −58⋅9 −59⋅4 −60⋅0 −60⋅6 −61⋅1 −61⋅7
−60 −51⋅1 −51⋅7 −52⋅2 −52⋅8 −53⋅3 −53⋅9 −54⋅4 −55⋅0 −55⋅6 −56⋅1
−50 −45⋅6 −46⋅1 −46⋅7 −47⋅2 −47⋅8 −48⋅3 −48⋅9 −49⋅4 −50⋅0 −50⋅6
−40 −40⋅0 −40⋅6 −41⋅1 −41⋅7 −42⋅2 −42⋅8 −43⋅3 −43⋅9 −44⋅4 −45⋅0
−30 −34⋅4 −35⋅0 −35⋅6 −36⋅1 −36⋅7 −37⋅2 −37⋅8 −38⋅3 −38⋅9 −39⋅4
−20 −28⋅9 −29⋅4 −30⋅0 −30⋅6 −31⋅1 −31⋅7 −32⋅2 −32⋅8 −33⋅3 −33⋅9
−10 −23⋅3 −23⋅9 −24⋅4 −25⋅0 −25⋅6 −26⋅1 −26⋅7 −27⋅2 −27⋅8 −28⋅3
−0 −17⋅8 −18⋅3 −18⋅9 −19⋅4 −20⋅0 −20⋅6 −21⋅1 −21⋅7 −22⋅2 −22⋅8
+0 −17⋅8 −17⋅2 −16⋅7 −16⋅1 −15⋅6 −15⋅0 −14⋅4 −13⋅9 −13⋅3 −12⋅8
10 −12⋅2 −11⋅7 −11⋅1 −10⋅6 −10⋅0 −9⋅4 −8⋅9 −8⋅3 −7⋅8 −7⋅2
20 −6⋅7 −6⋅1 −5⋅6 −5⋅0 −4⋅4 −3⋅9 −3⋅3 −2⋅8 −2⋅2 −1⋅7
30 −1⋅1 −0⋅6 0 +0⋅6 +1⋅1 +1⋅7 +2⋅2 +2⋅8 +3⋅3 +3⋅9
40 +4⋅4 +5⋅0 +5⋅6 6⋅1 6⋅7 7⋅2 7⋅8 8⋅3 8⋅9 9⋅4
50 10⋅0 10⋅6 11⋅1 11⋅7 12⋅2 12⋅8 13⋅3 13⋅9 14⋅4 15⋅0
60 15⋅6 16⋅1 16⋅7 17⋅2 17⋅8 18⋅3 18⋅9 19⋅4 20⋅0 20⋅6
70 21⋅1 21⋅7 22⋅2 22⋅8 23⋅3 23⋅9 24⋅4 25⋅0 25⋅6 26⋅1
80 26⋅7 27⋅2 27⋅8 28⋅3 28⋅9 29⋅4 30⋅0 30⋅6 31⋅1 31⋅7
90 32⋅2 32⋅8 33⋅3 33⋅9 34⋅4 35⋅0 35⋅6 36⋅1 36⋅7 37⋅2
100 37⋅8 38⋅3 38⋅9 39⋅4 40⋅0 40⋅6 41⋅1 41⋅7 42⋅2 42⋅8
110 43⋅3 43⋅9 44⋅4 45⋅0 45⋅6 46⋅1 46⋅7 47⋅2 47⋅8 48⋅3
120 48⋅9 49⋅4 50⋅0 50⋅6 51⋅1 51⋅7 52⋅2 52⋅8 53⋅3 53⋅9

Celsius to Fahrenheit
°Celsius

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

°C Degrees Fahrenheit
−70 −94⋅0 −95⋅8 −97⋅6 −99⋅4 −101⋅2 −103⋅0 −104⋅8 −106⋅6 −108⋅4 −110⋅2
−60 −76⋅0 −77⋅8 −79⋅6 −81⋅4 −83⋅2 −85⋅0 −86⋅8 −88⋅6 −90⋅4 −92⋅2
−50 −58⋅0 −59⋅8 −61⋅6 −63⋅4 −65⋅2 −67⋅0 −68⋅8 −70⋅6 −72⋅4 −74⋅2
−40 −40⋅0 −41⋅8 −43⋅6 −45⋅4 −47⋅2 −49⋅0 −50⋅8 −52⋅6 −54⋅4 −56⋅2
−30 −22⋅0 −23⋅8 −25⋅6 −27⋅4 −29⋅2 −31⋅0 −32⋅8 −34⋅6 −36⋅4 −38⋅2
−20 −4⋅0 −5⋅8 −7⋅6 −9⋅4 −11⋅2 −13⋅0 −14⋅8 −16⋅6 18⋅4 −20⋅2
−10 +14⋅0 +12⋅2 +10⋅4 +8⋅6 +6⋅8 +5⋅0 +3⋅2 +1⋅4 −0⋅4 −2⋅2
−0 32⋅0 30⋅2 28⋅4 26⋅6 24⋅8 23⋅0 21⋅2 19⋅4 +17⋅6 +15⋅8
+0 32⋅0 33⋅8 35⋅6 37⋅4 39⋅2 41⋅0 42⋅8 44⋅6 46⋅4 48⋅2
10 50⋅0 51⋅8 53⋅6 55⋅4 57⋅2 59⋅0 60⋅8 62⋅6 64⋅4 66⋅2
20 68⋅0 69⋅8 71⋅6 73⋅4 75⋅2 77⋅0 78⋅8 80⋅6 82⋅4 84⋅2
30 86⋅0 87⋅8 89⋅6 91⋅4 93⋅2 95⋅0 96⋅8 98⋅6 100⋅4 102⋅2
40 104⋅0 105⋅8 107⋅6 109⋅4 111⋅2 113⋅0 114⋅8 116⋅6 118⋅4 120⋅2
50 122⋅0 123⋅8 125⋅6 127⋅4 129⋅2 131⋅0 132⋅8 134⋅6 136⋅4 138⋅2

HECTOPASCALS TO INCHES
HECTOPASCALS
950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050

28 29 INCHES 30 31

MILLIMETRES TO INCHES (1) (for small values)

millimetres
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

0⋅5 1⋅5 2⋅5 3⋅5

0 1 2 3 4
inches

(2) (for large values)

millimetres
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000

20 30 40 60 70 80 90 110 120
0 5 10 50 100
inches

56
Home Contents Index

NOTES

57
Home Contents Index

Chapter 2 - Suez Canal

32° 20' 20' 32° 30'

5
20' 20'

2.14
233 233
Ismailia

2.152 Lake Timsah

Port
233
Said
240
240

2.1
66
30' 30'
241
ss
By-pa

10' 10'
aid
Por t S

240 Deversoir 233

By-pass
Abu Sultân

Gr eat Bi tter
Lake
20' 2.1
73 20'

31° 31°
2.139

rî t
233
K ab
El Little

233 Bitter
Lake

10' 10'

El Qantara
50' 50'
2.190

El Ballâh
By-pass

233

30° 30°
2098
2.280
Suez
2.145

40' 40' 3214

Suez Bay
233

32° 20' 20' Longitude 32° 30' East from Greenwich

0205

58
 Home Contents Index

CHAPTER 2
SUEZ CANAL, PORT OF SUEZ (BÛR EL SUWEIS) AND SUEZ BAY
(BAHR EL QULZUM)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 233, 234, 3214 the Suez Canal, to Port of Suez (Bûr el Suweis) (29°57′N,
Scope of the chapter 32°33′E) and thence into Suez Bay (Bahr el Qulzum).
2.1 It is divided into the following sections:
1 The area described in this chapter extends from Port Said Suez Canal (2.2).
Harbour (Bûr Sa‘îd Harbour) (31°16′N, 32°19′E), Suez Bay (2.202).
(Mediterranean Pilot, Volume V), S along the full length of Port of Suez (2.280).

SUEZ CANAL
GENERAL INFORMATION Free port
2.5
Charts 233, 234
1 The canal area is a free port.
2.2
History Traffic
1 The Suez Canal, known to the Egyptians as Qanât el 2.6
Suweis, was first opened for traffic on the 17th November 1 Approximately 260 000 000 tonnes of cargo are shipped
1869. through the canal annually.
By the Convention of Constantinople, which came into
force on the 29th October 1888, the canal is open to all Cautions
vessels of all nations and is free from blockade except in the 2.7
time of war. 1 Dredgers may be encountered in any part of the canal
2 In July 1956 the canal was nationalised by the Egyptian and in its approaches.
Government which action precipitated the 1956 Suez Canal 2.8
Crisis resulting in the canal being closed to traffic until April 1 Aids to navigation, particularly buoyant light-beacons,
1957. may be temporarily removed, displaced or changed within
In June 1967 the Suez Canal was once again closed to any part of the canal.
traffic as a result of the Arab/Israeli war, this time not
re-opening again to international shipping until June 1975. Canal dimensions
3 Between 1979 and 1982 extensive dredging and widening 2.9
was carried out resulting in a number of improvements 1 In 2002 the minimum dimensions of the sections of the
which included the completion of the Port Said By-pass Suez Canal were:
(2.141); the construction of El Ballâh East Branch (2.148) Width of canal at
and El Ballâh West Branch (2.149); the Lake Timsah Section Depth
14/19 m depth
By-pass (2.164) and Lake Timsah West Branch (2.160); the
Deversoir By-pass East Branch (2.170) and Deversoir Port Said to Km 17 14⋅8 m 201 m
By-pass West Branch (2.171) which both form the N Port Said By-pass 23⋅5 m 146 m
approach to the Great Bitter Lake (2.174); the East Branch Km 17 to Km 51 23⋅5 m 146 m
(2.176) and West Branch (2.177) through the Great Bitter
Lake; and El Kabrît East Branch (2.188) and El Kabrît West El Ballâh West Branch Km 51⋅5 18⋅5 m 146 m
Branch (2.189). to Km 51⋅8
El Ballâh West Branch Km 51⋅8 18⋅5 m 146 m
Regulations to Km 59⋅9
2.3
1 Regulations governing the navigation of the Suez Canal El Ballâh West Branch Km 59⋅9 18⋅5 m 146 m
and its ports are issued by the Suez Canal Authority; these to Km 60⋅5
regulations are applicable to both warships and merchant El Ballâh East Branch 23⋅5 m 146 m
vessels.
Km 61 to Km 76 23⋅5 m 162 m to 182 m
Tur‘et el Abbâsa Lake Timsah West Branch 15⋅5 m 102 m to 259 m
2.4 Km 76⋅0 to Km 79⋅8
1 The Tur‘et el Abbâsa or Sweet Water Canal extends from
the River Nile at Al Qâhira (Cairo) to meet the Suez Canal Lake Timsah West Branch 19⋅0 m 102 m to 259 m
at Ismailia (2.155); depths within the canal are about 1⋅2 m. Km 79⋅8 to Km 81⋅9
A branch of Tur‘et el Abbâsa continues from a position Lake Timsah By-pass 23⋅5 m 182 m
about 3 miles SW of Ismailia to Port of Suez (2.280)
Km 81 to Km 95 23⋅5 m 147 m to 192 m
following the line of the railway and the Suez Canal.
A second branch of the canal extends from Ismailia to Deversoir West Branch 18⋅0 m 159 m to 177 m
Port Said (31°16′N, 32°19′E). Km 95⋅0 to Km 95⋅5

59
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2

Deversoir West Branch 15⋅5 m 159 m to 177 m 3 A light-buoy (black pillar, cone topmark) with the letter
designation L, is moored on the E side of the deep-draught
Width of canal at anchorage about 1 miles WSW of Râs Diheisa (29°45′⋅5N,
Section Depth
14/19 m depth 32°40′⋅0E) (3.36) and close SW of a detached shoal patch
Deversoir East Branch 23⋅5 m 142 m with a least depth over it of 5⋅8 m.
2.15
Bitter Lakes West Branch 15⋅5 m 232 m
1 Transhipment anchorages. Two transhipment areas,
Bitter Lakes East Branch 23⋅5 m 358 m designated A and B, have been established, as shown on the
El Kabrît West Branch Km 114⋅1 15⋅0 m 152 m charts, 6 miles SSE of Conry Rock (29°48′N, 32°34′E)
to Km 122⋅1 and 3 miles SE of South Shoal (29°39′N, 32°36′E) (3.37).
2.16
El Kabrît East Branch 23⋅5 m 152 m to 162 m 1 Main anchorage. All other N-bound vessels awaiting a
Km 122 to Km 148 23⋅5 m 132 m to 162 m pilot should anchor in the designated waiting area, as shown
Km 148 to Km 150 23⋅5 m 132 m on the chart, N of Conry Rock (29°48′N, 32°34′E) (3.36).
These anchorage berths, which are numbered 1 to 29, are
Km 150 to Port Tewfîk 25⋅0 m 157 m to 187 m bounded on their N and E sides by light-buoys (special)
2.10 designated A, B, C, D, N and M.
1 Cross section. The canal cross sections are trapezoidal in 2.17
shape having side slopes of 4/1 in its N part and 3/1 in its S 1 Further waiting anchorage berths numbered W1 to W14,
part. each with a swinging radius of 300 m, have been established
All bends in the canal have a radius of 5000 m or greater. as shown on the chart, on the W side of the outer end of
2.11 Newport Rock Channel (2.221).
1 Canal length. The total length of the canal, measured Caution. A wreck (29°50′⋅2N, 32°32′⋅3E), considered
from Port Said High Light (disused) (31°15′⋅9N, 32°18′⋅8E), dangerous to navigation, lies close SE of the designated
or from Km 3E on Port Said By-pass (2.141) to Km 162⋅15 anchor berth W12.
at Port of Suez, is 87⋅5 miles. 2.18
2.12 1 Supplies. Fuel and fresh water are both available by
1 Kilometre markings, in Arabic numerals, are displayed barge to vessels at anchor.
on the W bank of the canal; where there are two channels Anchorage regulations
the suffix E is used to denote that the position referred to is 2.19
in the E channel of either the branch or by-pass. 1 Vessels at anchor, in any of the following anchorage
See kilometre markings table on Chart 233 for glossary of areas, Port Said North and South Anchorages (2.13), Suez
Arabic numerals. Roads (2.14), the Bitter Lakes Anchorages (2.178) and Lake
Timsah (2.162) are not authorised to change anchorage berth,
or make fast alongside another vessel, or carry out any cargo
WAITING ANCHORAGES operations, without explicit authorisation from the Suez
Canal Authority.
Northern approach anchorages — Port Said
SUEZ CANAL PASSAGE REQUIREMENTS
Charts 234, 2578
2.13 Arrival information and documents
1 The waiting anchorages in the Mediterranean, at the N
Charts 233, 2373
end of the canal, are designated North Anchorage (Zone
One) (31°28′N, 32°19′E), North Anchorage (Zone Two) Advance notification of transit
(31°24′N, 32°18′E), South Anchorage (31°22′N, 32°19′E), 2.20
Transhipment Anchorage (vessels exceeding 18⋅3 m draught) 1 If intending to transit the Suez Canal on a certain day
(31°26′⋅5N, 32°27′⋅5E) and Transhipment Anchorage (vessels then priority to join a convoy can be obtained if the transit
less than 18⋅3 m draught) (31°24′⋅5N, 32°26′⋅5E). is arranged 4 days in advance, or as soon as possible if
2 These N waiting anchorages are all described in coming from a near-by port.
Mediterranean Pilot, Volume V. For further information and the initial details required by
the Suez Canal Authorities, see Admiralty List of Radio
Southern approach anchorages — Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Port of Suez Transit time
2.21
Charts 2133, 3214
1 In general it is not usually possible to complete a transit
Anchorages of the canal during the hours of daylight.
2.14
The average transit time is between 11 hours and 14 hours
1 Deep-draught vessels. All N-bound deep-draught vessels
including time spent moored or at anchor.
with a draught in excess of 11⋅6 m (38 ft) including VLCCs,
bulk carriers and third and fourth generation container ships, Notice of ETA required
LASH ships over 35 000, and LPG and LNG vessels (loaded 2.22
or not gas free) awaiting a canal pilot should anchor in the 1 Further details should be sent to the Suez Canal Authority
designated Deep-Draught Vessel Anchorage, as shown on the through the company’s agent or diplomatic representative, or
chart, SSE of Conry Rock (29°48′N, 32°34′E) (3.36). to the Suez Canal Authority directly at least 48 hours and
2 These deep-draught anchorage berths, which are allocated 24 hours before arrival.
by the Suez Canal Authority, are designated V1 in the N Additional information is required if the vessel is
part of the anchorage to V9 in its S part. transiting the canal for the first time.

60
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2

For further information and the details to be included in Vessels in ballast with a beam of over 74⋅67 m (245 ft)
the required reports see Admiralty List of Radio Signals, need the prior approval of the Suez Canal Authority to
Volume 6 (3). transit the canal.
2.23
1 Vessels should report to the appropriate harbour office or,
if VHF communication is not possible, then with Ismailia Maximum permitted draughts
(SUQ) by other means: 2.28
2 a) If entering from the Mediterranean: When 15 miles 1 The maximum permitted draughts, which must not exceed
before arriving at Suez Canal Port Said By-pass the Summer Load Line or Tropical Load Line, if marked,
Fairway Light-buoy (31°21′⋅3N, 32°20′⋅7E) report are related to the beam and to the speed of the convoy as
to the Port Said Harbour Office. follows:
3 b) If entering from the Red Sea: When 5 miles before 2.29
arriving at Gulf of Suez Separation Zone No 1 1 Vessels in ballast
Light-float (29°39′⋅5N, 32°32′⋅5E) (3.36) report to Northbound and southbound
Port of Suez Harbour Office.
4 For further information and the details to be included in Beam Fwd Aft
the required report see Admiralty List of Radio Signals, 74⋅67 m 9⋅75 m (32 ft) 11⋅00 m (36 ft)
Volume 6 (3).
2 See 2.27.
2.30
1 Loaded vessels
Documents Northbound 11−16 km/hr − Southbound 14 km/hr
2.24
1 The following official documents must be produced by Beam Draught
vessels requesting transit through the canal. 49⋅98 m 164 ft 00 in 18⋅90 m 62 ft 00 in
a) Suez Canal special tonnage certificate. 50⋅59 m 166 ft 00 in 18⋅64 m 61 ft 03 in
b) Certificate of Registry.
c) Statistical Declaration. 51⋅23 m 168 ft 01 in 18⋅44 m 60 ft 06 in
d) An extract from the vessels official documents and 51⋅79 m 169 ft 11 in 18⋅24 m 59 ft 10 in
information concerning her type and cargo.
52⋅45 m 172 ft 01 in 18⋅01 m 59 ft 01 in
e) Declaration concerning the use of the vessels
double bottom tanks and the lower part of tanks 53⋅06 m 174 ft 01 in 17⋅81 m 58 ft 05 in
higher in the structure. 53⋅67 m 176 ft 01 in 17⋅60 m 57 ft 09 in
f) Declaration concerning vessels in ballast.
g) Declaration of state of navigability. 54⋅27 m 178 ft 01 in 17⋅40 m 57 ft 01 in
h) The last classification certificate issued. 54⋅86 m 180 ft 00 in 17⋅22 m 56 ft 06 in
i) Capacity plan. 55⋅49 m 182 ft 01 in 17⋅02 m 55 ft 10 in
j) General arrangement plan.
k) Piping plan of LPG and LNG vessels. 56⋅08 m 184 ft 00 in 16⋅84 m 55 ft 03 in
l) Canal searchlight certificate. 56⋅69 m 186 ft 00 in 16⋅66 m 54 ft 08 in
m) Four copies of the crew list.
57⋅30 m 188 ft 00 in 16⋅48 m 54 ft 01 in
n) Four copies of the passenger list.
2 Any other information that may be relevant to the vessels 57⋅93 m 190 ft 01 in 16⋅31 m 53 ft 06 in
transit of the canal. 58⋅57 m 192 ft 02 in 16⋅13 m 52 ft 11 in
2.25
1 The Certificate of Registry is taken ashore by the ships 59⋅13 m 194 ft 00 in 15⋅98 m 52 ft 05 in
agent and returned after completing the canal transit. 59⋅79 m 196 ft 02 in 15⋅80 m 51 ft 10 in
2.26
1 The Classification Certificate should be translated into 60⋅37 m 198 ft 01 in 15⋅65 m 51 ft 04 in
Arabic or English, if necessary, and duly certified by the 60⋅96 m 200 ft 00 in 15⋅49 m 50 ft 10 in
relevant embassy or consulate in Egypt. 61⋅56 m 202 ft 00 in 15⋅34 m 50 ft 04 in
62⋅17 m 204 ft 00 in 15⋅19 m 49 ft 10 in
62⋅81 m 206 ft 01 in 15⋅04 m 49 ft 04 in
Permissible dimensions
63⋅34 m 207 ft 10 in 14⋅91 m 48 ft 11 in
64⋅00 m 210 ft 00 in 14⋅76 m 48 ft 05 in
General information 64⋅56 m 211 ft 10 in 14⋅61 m 47 ft 11 in
2.27
65⋅25 m 214 ft 01 in 14⋅45 m 47 ft 05 in
1 Vessels with a beam of 49⋅98 m (164 ft) can transit the
canal with a draught of 18⋅9 m (62 ft). 65⋅83 m 216 ft 00 in 14⋅33 m 47 ft 00 in
Loaded vessels with a beam exceeding 49⋅98 m (164 ft) 66⋅42 m 217 ft 11 in 14⋅20 m 46 ft 07 in
may transit the canal with the draughts as shown in the table
at 2.30. 67⋅00 m 219 ft 10 in 14⋅10 m 46 ft 03 in
2 Vessels in ballast with a beam up to 74⋅67 m (245 ft) and 67⋅61 m 221 ft 10 in 13⋅97 m 45 ft 10 in
draughts of up to 9⋅75 m (32 ft) forward and up to 11 m
68⋅24 m 223 ft 11 in 13⋅84 m 45 ft 05 in
(36 ft) aft will be permitted to transit the canal in calm and
clear conditions with a wind speed of not more than 10 kn. 68⋅88 m 226 ft 00 in 13⋅72 m 45 ft 00 in

61
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2

Beam Draught additional charge of 3% of the canal dues. Vessels

arriving between 0300 and 0330 can also join the
69⋅51 m 228 ft 01 in 13⋅59 m 44 ft 07 in tanker group for an additional charge of 5% of the
70⋅18 m 230 ft 03 in 13⋅46 m 44 ft 02 in canal dues.
0300
70⋅71 m 232 ft 00 in 13⋅36 m 43 ft 10 in
Vessels in Group B must have anchored in the waiting
71⋅37 m 234 ft 02 in 13⋅23 m 43 ft 05 in area S of Newport Rock Channel (2.221) and be
71⋅93 m 236 ft 00 in 13⋅13 m 43 ft 01 in declared ready for transit by their agents. Vessels
arriving between 0300 and 0400 can join Group B
72⋅49 m 237 ft 10 in 13⋅03 m 42 ft 09 in for an additional charge of 3% of canal dues.
73⋅20 m 240 ft 02 in 12⋅90 m 42 ft 04 in Vessels arriving between 0400 and 0500 can join
73⋅78 m 242 ft 01 in 12⋅80 m 42 ft 00 in the convoy for an additional charge of 5% of the
canal dues.
74⋅37 m 244 ft 00 in 12⋅70 m 41 ft 08 in 2 0300−0430
74⋅98 m 246 ft 00 in 12⋅60 m 41 ft 04 in If the traffic situation warrants, a third group may
precede Group A (i) entering the canal between
75⋅59 m 248 ft 00 in 12⋅50 m 41 ft 00 in
0300 and 0430.
76⋅20 m 250 ft 00 in 12⋅40 m 40 ft 08 in 0600
76⋅83 m 252 ft 01 in 12⋅29 m 40 ft 04 in Vessels of Group A (i) headed by container ships enter
the canal at Km 160.
77⋅49 m 254 ft 03 in 12⋅19 m 40 ft 00 in About 0700
2 For further information and a greater interpolation Group A (ii) follows on from the last vessel of Group
between these figures see the Suez Canal Authority Rules of A (i).
Navigation handbook. Up to about 1130
2.31 Group B follows on from the the last vessel of Group
1 Sea trial. A vessel permitted by the above tables to A (ii).
transit at a draught between 15⋅20 m (50 ft) and 18⋅90 m
(62 ft) must, before entering the canal for their first passage
at that draught, carry out a satisfactory sea trial either in Port Northbound canal route
Said Roads or Port of Suez Roads. 2.35
1 The N-bound convoy usually proceeds without stopping
via:
NAVIGATION IN THE SUEZ CANAL i) El Kabrît East Branch (2.188) (Km 122 to
Km 115).
Suez Canal Convoy System ii) Great Bitter Lake East Branch (2.176).
iii) Deversoir By-pass East Branch (2.170) (Km 103 to
Chart 233 Km 195).
iv) Lake Timsah By-pass (2.164).
General information v) El Ballâh East Branch (2.148) (Km 61 to Km 51).
2.32 vi) Port Said By-pass (2.141).
1 Passage through the canal is operated on a convoy vii) Port Said By-pass Approach Channel (see
system. The S-bound and N-bound convoys are usually Mediterranean Pilot, Volume V).
timed so that they will pass in the Great Bitter Lake (2.174). 2.36
1 If the N-bound convoy has to stop in the Bitter Lakes
Northbound convoys vessels anchor in the Greater Bitter Lake East Branch (2.176)
2.33 or in the anchorages E of the channel (2.178), or make fast
1 North-bound convoys consist of two groups: in El Kabrît East Branch (2.188) where three berths are
2 Group A available for emergency use.
(i) Naval ships, third and fourth generation container
ships and similar, LASH vessels over 40 000 scgt,
LPG and LNG vessels (loaded or non gas-free), Southbound convoys
loaded chemical carriers. 2.37
(ii) Loaded VLCCs, conventional loaded tankers and 1 Southbound convoys consist of three groups:
heavy bulk carriers (draught over 11⋅6 m (38 ft) or Group A
length over 289⋅7 m (950 ft) between Vessels in Port Said Harbour.
perpendiculars). 2 Group B
Speed of transit 11−15 km/hr (6 kn to 8 kn). Vessels anchored in the Northern Anchorage Areas
3 Group B (2.13) consisting of third and fourth generation
(i) Cargo and other vessels anchored in Suez container ships, VLCCs in ballast, vessels over
Anchorages. 12⋅8 m (42 ft) draught, LPG, LNG, non gas-free
(ii) Speed of transit 13−16 km/hr (7⋅0 kn to 8⋅6 kn). vessels in ballast or loaded, and LASH vessels over
2.34 40 000 scgt.
1 Arrival and departure times 3 Group C
0100 Vessels anchored in the Southern Anchorage Area
Vessels in Group A (i) and (ii) should have anchored (2.13) that will enter through Port Said West
in the anchorage and be declared ready for transit Approach Channel in due time to join Group B at
by their agents. Vessels anchored and ready by 0300 Km 17.
can also be accepted in the tanker group for an The speed of transit of these groups is 14 km/hr (7⋅6 kn).

62
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2

2.38 Preparations for entering the canal

1 Vessels of Group B, headed by the container ships, enter 2.44
Port Said By-pass Approach Channel in due time to join 1 All vessels ready to enter the canal must have their
Group A at Km 17. See Mediterranean Pilot, Volume V. ladders and derricks swung in, their boats swung in and
2.39 have any derricks obstructing the view forward, lowered.
1 Arrival and departure times There must be a rudder angle indicator and an engine
1900 rpm indicator on the bridge in such a position that the pilot
Vessels joining Groups A and B of the S-bound may read both without having to move away from his
convoy must have arrived at the anchorage by station.
1900. The bow anchors must be ready to be let go.
1900−2100 2 Before entering the canal it must be ascertained that the
Vessels arriving between 1900 and 2100 may join the main engines, compass, steering gear, engine room
convoy (N1) for an additional charge of 3% of the telegraphs, rudder angle indicator, rpm indicator,
canal dues. communications equipment and radar are all in good
2100−2200 working order.
Vessels arriving between 2100 and 2200 may also join Masters must ascertain, before entering the canal, that any
the convoy (N1) for an additional charge of 5% of deck loads are stowed in such a manner as not to affect the
the canal dues. vessels stability or impede the view.
2.40 3 Vessels in ballast must fill spaces intended to be used for
1 Arrival and departure times of occasional second carrying water ballast in such proportion as the Suez Canal
southbound convoy Authority may direct.
A second S-bound convoy (N2) is sometimes formed Unless a vessel is fitted with an automatic device which
if the density of traffic justifies. produces a permanent legible record of every engine
0300 movement then both bridge and engine room movement
Vessels joining the second S-bound convoy must have books should be kept recording all engine movements. These
anchored in Port Said Anchorage by 0300. records may be requested by the Suez Canal Authority if
2 0300−0400 necessary.
Providing that the capacity of the canal permits vessels 4 Any vessel failing to comply with the requirements within
arriving between 0300 and 0400 may join the the Suez Canal Authority Rules of Navigation may be
second S-bound convoy (N2) for an additional delayed from joining the convoy and/or may be subjected to
charge of 3% of the canal dues. special arrangements for her transit. This includes imposing
3 0400−0500 convoying tugs. Access to the canal may also be refused.
Providing that the capacity of the canal permits vessels
arriving between 0400 and 0500 may join the Dimensions of vessels permitted to use El Ballâh West
second S-bound convoy (N2) for an additional Branch
charge of 5% of the canal dues. 2.45
4 0630−0900 1 Vessels with the following dimensions are authorised to
Convoy (N2) leaves Port Said between 0630 and 0900 berth in El Ballâh West Branch (2.149) except tankers in
and makes fast in El Ballâh West Branch (2.149) ballast of greater tonnage than 90 000 scgt.
until the last vessel of the N-bound convoy has Beam Draught
entered El Ballâh East Branch (2.148) at Km 60.
Metres Feet Metres Feet
41⋅15 135 12⋅80 42⋅00
41⋅45 136 12⋅73 41⋅67
Southbound canal route 41⋅76 137 12⋅62 41⋅42
2.41 42⋅06 138 12⋅52 41⋅08
1 The S-bound convoy (N1) has a clear run to the Bitter 42⋅37 139 12⋅42 40⋅75
Lakes and proceeds via:
i) El Ballâh East Branch (2.148). 42⋅67 140 12⋅34 40⋅50
ii) Lake Timsah By-pass (2.164). 42⋅98 141 12⋅27 40⋅67
iii) Deversoir By-pass West Branch (2.171) with the
exception of vessels with draught greater than 43⋅28 142 12⋅17 39⋅92
12⋅8 m (42 ft) which use Deversoir By-pass East 43⋅59 143 12⋅09 39⋅67
Branch (2.170). 43⋅89 144 12⋅01 39⋅42
iv) Great Bitter Lakes Anchorages (2.178) situated on
the W of the channel. 44⋅20 145 11⋅91 39⋅08
2.42 44⋅50 146 11⋅84 38⋅83
1 When the last ship of the N-bound convoy has passed El
Kabrît (2.173) the S-bound convoy, headed by naval ships 44⋅80 147 11⋅76 38⋅58
and ships in Group B, proceeds through El Kabrît West 45⋅11 148 11⋅68 38⋅33
Branch (2.189).
2.43 Vessels not permitted to join the second southbound
1 The S-bound convoy (N2) makes fast in El Ballâh West convoy
Branch (2.149), which has a capacity of 15 vessels; the 2.46
convoy continues S after the last N-bound vessel clears 1 For safety reasons the following vessels will not be
Km 60. allowed to join the second S-bound convoy.

63
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2
a) Loaded tankers or bulk carriers carrying Petroleum
Grade A or similar having a flash point below
23°C.
b) LPG, LNG or similar loaded or non gas-free
vessels.
c) Vessels not fitted with double bottom tanks
carrying chemicals in bulk.
d) Vessels carrying certain radioactive substances.
e) Vessels carrying dangerous wastes.
f) Semi-submersible heavy lift vessels carrying units
with tonnage exceeding the lifting capacity of their
individual cranes.
g) Vessels carrying deck cargo protruding more than
the allowed maximum.
h) Vessels with a beam of over 45 m (148 ft).
i) Vessels with a draught exceeding 12⋅8 m (42 ft).
j) Vessels over 90 000 scgt.
k) Warships.
Suez Canal Vessel Traffic Management System
2.47
1 The Suez Canal Vessel Traffic Management System
provides for the continuous monitoring of a vessels position
from up to 35 km offshore by radar tracking stations at Port
Said (2.1), Port Tewfîk (2.196); and also in the Great Bitter
Lake (2.174).
2 A local Loran-C chain, using equipment called CORT
(Carry On Receiver Transmitter) which is brought on board
by the pilot, receives signals (when in operation) from the
chain and transmits them to the movement system centre
giving information on a vessels position, speed, deviation
from its planned track and its separation from other vessels.
3 A television system covering the canal, controlled from
Ismailia (2.155), is in operation and monitors the movement
of traffic.
See 2.22 for reporting points for vessels approaching the
Suez Canal.
See Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3) for
further information.
Pilotage
General information
2.48
1 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels, whatever their
tonnage, when entering, leaving, moving berth or transiting
canal waters, or in Port Said and Port of Suez Harbours.
The only exemptions are certain Egyptian vessels under
300 scgt authorised to work in the canal and/or its
approaches; any other exemptions must be explicitly
authorised by the Suez Canal Authority.
2 Vessels which undertake any movement in waters under
the Suez Canal Authority jurisdiction without employing a
pilot are liable to pay extra dues up to £15 000.
The Suez Canal Authority reserves the right to assign a
tug master to vessels under 1500 scgt, and a coxswain to
vessels under 800 scgt, instead of a pilot.
Naval vessels, and vessels carrying dangerous cargoes,
must embark a pilot regardless of their tonnage.
Responsibilities
2.49
1 Masters are held solely responsible for all damage or
accidents, of whatever kind, resulting from the navigation or
handling of their vessels, directly or indirectly, by day or by
night.
64
The pilot must inform the Movement Control Office or
the Port Office if his advice regarding the safety of
navigation is not accepted, or not respected, by the vessel.
Requesting a pilot
2.50
1 The flag signal requesting a pilot should be hoisted
2 hours before the expected time of getting underway.
Pilots for navigation through the Suez Canal are due on
board 1 hours after the signal has been hoisted.
See 2.23 and pilotage signals at 2.87.
Embarkation
2.51
1 On receipt of information or seeing that a pilot is coming
out, the vessel must make ready to take him aboard and to
enter the canal without delay.
A vessel at anchor in a waiting area must shorten her
cable, and make a lee for the pilot launch to come alongside
in safety.
2 Accommodation ladders should be rigged for use by the
pilot when boarding; should the accommodation ladder be
situated near the ships propeller then a pilot ladder should be
rigged amidships. Vessels with a high freeboard should
provide a mechanical hoist for the pilot. A ships officer
should be in attendance when the pilot boards.
3 Should a pilot’s services be dispensed with after his
arrival on board, or the time of departure be postponed, or
should a pilot be compelled to sail with a vessel because of
heavy weather, or at the vessels request, additional charges
are made.
4 A spare cabin or a special space should be set aside in
which the pilot can rest during the vessels waiting periods.
Vessels unable to provide this facility will be liable to delay
and the payment of extra pilotage dues.
Pilot boarding positions
2.52
1 Vessels entering from Mediterranean. The pilot boards
the vessel types with the specified draughts in the positions
indicated. See 2.13.
2.53
1 North Anchorage Area (Zone One):
VLCCs, third and fourth generation container ships,
LASH vessels over 35 000 scgt, LPG and LNG
vessels (loaded or non gas-free) and any other
vessel with a draught of over 12⋅8 m (42 ft).
North Anchorage Area (Zone Two):
Vessels between 11⋅9 m (39 ft) and 12⋅8 m (42 ft).
Fairway Light-buoy:
All other vessels.
2.54
1 For further information see Mediterranean Pilot,
Volume V.
2.55
1 Vessels entering from Red Sea. The pilot boards the
vessel types with the specified draughts in the positions
indicated.
2.56
1 Waiting Deep-Draught Anchorage Area (2.14) SSE of
Conry Rock (295484N, 325344E) (3.36):
VLCCs, large bulk carriers, third and fourth generation
container ships, LASH vessels over 35 000 scgt,
LPG and LNG vessels (loaded or non gas free) and
any other vessel with a draught of over 11⋅6 m
(38 ft).
2 Main Anchorage Area N of Conry Rock (2.16):
Vessels of 11⋅6 m draught or less.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2
2.57
1 Pilot exchange in the canal takes place at Ismailia, see
2.159.
Pilotage stages southbound
2.58
1 Stages from Port Said:
a) From the Fairway Light-buoy (31°21′⋅3N,
32°20′⋅7E) to berths in Port Said Harbour through
Port Said Harbour Approach Channel; or from the
North Anchorages (Zone One) (31°28′N, 32°19′E)
and (Zone Two) (31°24′N, 32°18′E) (2.13) through
Port Said By-pass Approach Channel to the N
entrance to Port Said By-pass (2.141). Thence:
b) From Port Said Harbour, or the N entrance to Port
Said By-pass, to Ismailia (2.159), thence:
c) From Ismailia to the pair of light-buoys marking
the S entrance to the canal, thence:
d) From the pair of light-buoys marking the S
entrance to the canal to Km 80⋅5, the S entrance to
Newport Rock Channel (2.221). A master may,
however, request the pilotage to cease at Km 44⋅4
at Newport Rock (2.208).
Pilotage stages northbound
2.59
1 Stages from Suez:
a) From the Deep-draught Anchorages S of Conry
Rock (29°48′N, 32°34′E) (3.36), or from the Main
Anchorage waiting area (2.16), to the pair of
light-buoys marking the S entrance to the canal,
thence:
b) From the pair of light-buoys marking the S
entrance to the canal to Ismailia (2.159), thence:
c) From Ismailia to the N entrance to Port Said
By-pass, thence:
d) Through Port Said By-pass Approach Channel to
Km 80⋅0.
Second pilot
2.60
1 An extra pilot must be engaged by the following types of
vessels:
a) Vessels exceeding 80 000 scgt.
b) Vessels with a poor view from the bridge.
c) Vessels which, on account of slow speed or other
causes, have to transit the canal in stages.
d) Vessels without suitable accommodation for the
pilot to rest when not under way.
e) Third and fourth generation container ships, LASH
ships of 35 000 scgt and over.
f) By any vessel if it is deemed necessary by the
Suez Canal Authority, or on the masters request.
Foul weather pilot boarding procedure
2.61
1 If foul weather prevents pilots boarding or disembarking
in the usual places masters may be authorised by the Suez
Canal Harbour Office to proceed without a pilot as follows:
2.62
1 Southbound:
Vessel joining a S-bound convoy, via Port Said
By-pass Approach Channel, from the Mediterranean
waiting anchorages at the N end of the canal (2.13)
to the entrance to the canal at Km 0 of Port Said
By-pass Channel (2.141).
Vessels in a S-bound convoy from Km 162 to sea.
65
2.63
1 Northbound:
Vessels joining a N-bound convoy from the
Deep-draught Anchorage (2.14) or the Main
Anchorage waiting area (2.16) to the entrance to the
canal where a canal pilot will join near Km 161.
Vessels in a N-bound convoy from Km 3E in Port Said
By-pass Channel (2.141).
Masters responsibilities during pilotage
2.64
1 Pilots only give advice on manoeuvring the vessel. They
place at the disposal of masters their experience and practical
knowledge of the canal, but, as they cannot be acquainted
with the defects and difficulties in manoeuvring, stopping,
starting, etc, peculiar to each vessel, the responsibility of
handling the vessel devolves solely upon the master. It is
therefore for the master, taking into account the indications
given by the pilots, to give the necessary orders to the helm,
to the engines, and to the tugs. If, in the interest of rapid
manoeuvring the master thinks it preferable to allow the pilot
to give orders direct, manoeuvres carried out in these
circumstances shall be considered as having been carried out
on the orders of the master and engage his sole
responsibility.
2 Masters are held solely responsible for all damage or
accidents of whatever kind resulting from the navigating or
handling of their vessels by day or by night.
2.65
1 In the event of the pilot being suddenly unable to carry
on with his duties, the master must:
a) Warn the vessel astern of his intended manoeuvres
by the visual and sound signals as described at
2.85, as well as by VHF or other means via
Ismailia Radio Station (SUQ).
b) Reduce speed and contact the Movement Office at
Ismailia for advice on making fast if in the canal or
entrance channels, or anchoring if in the lakes.
c) Keep the Movement Office in Ismailia informed at
all times by UHF or VHF with confirmations by
Inmarsat or by other means through Ismailia Radio
Station (SUQ).
Tugs
Escort tugs
2.66
1 VLCC’s, ULCC’s, large bulk carriers and other designated
vessels will be accompanied by escort tugs as follows:
a) Loaded vessels of less than 130 000 dwt will be
escorted by one tug if for technical reasons the
Suez Canal Authority finds it necessary, or when
the vessels draught is more than 14⋅3 m (47 ft).
b) Loaded vessels from 130 000 dwt to 170 000 dwt
will be escorted by one tug.
c) Loaded vessels over 170 000 dwt will be escorted
by two tugs.
d) Vessels in ballast over 250 000 dwt will be escorted
by one tug.
e) LPG and LNG over 25 000 scgt will be escorted
by one tug. Gas-free vessels are treated as tankers
in ballast.
f) Vessels in ballast with a beam over 66⋅5 m (218 ft)
up to 71⋅02 m (233 ft) will be escorted by one tug.
g) Vessels in ballast with a beam over 71⋅02 m
(233 ft) will be escorted by two tugs.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2

h) Towed scrap vessels in ballast of 150 000 dwt and
over will be escorted by one tug.
i) Loaded heavy-lift ships are to be escorted by one
or more tugs.
2.67
1 In addition the Suez Canal Authority may impose
mandatory tug escorts in the following instances:
a) The Suez Canal Authority may require any vessel
to take a tug or tugs through the canal when, in its
judgement, such action is necessary to ensure safety
of the vessel or the canal.
b) Any vessel without mechanical power, or the
machinery of which is, or becomes, disabled, or
steers badly, or is liable to become unmanageable
for any reason, shall be towed through the canal.
c) Vessels having engine or steering gear trouble for
the second time during the same passage.
d) Vessels with restricted visibility due to deck cargo,
containers, cranes or construction impeding the
view from the wheelhouse and wings.
e) Vessels unable to use one or both of their bow
anchors; or vessels over 1000 scgt built with one
anchor; or vessels over 1000 scgt built with more
than one anchor if only one of them is located on
the bow.
f) Drilling vessels.
g) Vessels with two engines on one propeller one of
which is out of order for any reason and cannot
maintain a speed of at least 10 kn without current
after a sea trial to assure the speed and valid sea
worthiness certificate.
h) Vessels with two engines on two propellers one of
which is out of order.
i) On the Master’s request for one or more tugs.
The light-beacons marking the W side of the channel
have a white, elongated oval topmark with a red
boundary and exhibit a red fixed light.
3 The light-beacons marking the junctions of the channel
have a cardinal topmark over an elongated oval
topmark with yellow and black horizontal bands;
light characteristics in accordance with cardinal
markings.
The centre line light-beacons between the East (2.176)
and West (2.177) Branch channels through the Great
Bitter Lake (2.174) have a yellow St Andrews cross
topmark and exhibit a white isophase light.
2.71
1 See panel of Beacons in the Suez Canal on Chart 233.
Occasional light
2.72
1 Red and white signal lights, visible 8 miles, are shown
occasionally from the lookout station of the Suez Canal
Authority’s office (31°15′⋅4N, 32°18′⋅5E) to aid navigation
in the canal at night.
Current buoys
2.73
1 Current buoys, moored on the E side of the canal, show
the direction of the flow of the water in the canal.
The current buoys are painted with red and white
horizontal bands and one reflector on their downstream side;
and with black and white vertical stripes and two reflectors
on their upstream side.
Thus, a vessel proceeding against the flow of water will
observe a buoy showing red and white horizontal bands with
one reflector.
2.74
1 Location of current buoys:

Aids to navigation Location Canal Km position

Port Fouad Km 2⋅750
General information
2.68 Râs el‘Ish Km 12⋅800E
1 The canal is well marked through its length by buoyant Râs el‘Ish Km 14⋅304
light-beacons, the overall details of which are best seen on
El Tîna Km 24⋅775
the chart.
Caution. Light-beacons may be temporarily removed, El Câp Km 35⋅420
displaced or changed during dredging or other operations. El Qantara Km 45⋅130
See also caution at 2.8.
El Ballâh (E and W) Km 54⋅770
Local direction of buoyage El Firdân Km 64⋅894
2.69
Ismailia Km 76⋅127
1 To conform to international convention the local direction
of buoyage is the direction taken by the mariner when Tûsûn Km 86⋅780
approaching the canal from seaward. Deversoir (E and W) Km 97⋅845
In view of the double ended nature of the canal there is a
point at which the buoyage direction is reversed. This occurs El Kabrît (E and W) Km 120⋅827
at Km 4⋅0 in Port Said Harbour, and Km 2⋅8E in Port Said El Gineifa Km 133⋅950
By-pass (2.141), in the approximate latitude 31°13′⋅5N.
El Shallûfa Km 146⋅125
2 North of these positions within Port Said Harbour, in the
By-pass and in the approaches to the canal, the port hand Port Tewfîk Km 160⋅300
buoys are on the E side of the channel, and starboard hand
on the W. South of these positions the buoyage pattern is Mooring in the Suez Canal
reversed.
Mooring bollards
Light-beacons 2.75
2.70 1 Mooring bollards, with the exception of the Great Bitter
1 The 8⋅5 m depth contour throughout the canal is marked Lake (2.174), are situated on both banks of the canal about
at varying intervals by buoyant beacons. 200 m apart; these mooring bollards will bear a strain of up
2 The light-beacons marking the E side of the channel to 60 tonnes.
have a white, elongated oval topmark with a green In 1975 it was reported that a number of bollards on the
boundary and exhibit a green fixed light. E bank were missing.

66
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2
Gares
2.76
1 Gares are positions where the canal was specially widened
to enable a vessel to secure to the bank so that another
might pass.
Mooring ropes
2.77
1 Six or more flexible floating mooring ropes (manilla,
hemp, etc), in good condition, must be in readiness at
suitable points on deck in case it should be necessary to
make fast in the canal; all arrangements must be made for
their quick handling.
It is to be noted, however, that the use of synthetic
mooring ropes able to produce sparks by their manipulation
is absolutely forbidden on board petroleum tankers and LPG
or LNG carriers, or any vessels carrying flammable
substances.
Mooring boats
2.78
1 Mooring boats must be in constant readiness for lowering
to enable them to run hawsers to the mooring bollards
without delay.
The number of mooring boats required to be carried is
based on the vessel’s Suez Canal Gross Tonnage.
Suez Canal Gross Tonnage Mooring boats carried
Under 2500 1 rowing or 1 motor boat
2500 to 5000 1 motor boat
5000 to 30 000 1 rowing boat and 1 motor
boat or 2 motor boats
Above 30 000 2 motor boats
2 In cases when there are no mooring boats available then
suitable ships boats can be used. A shore crew must still be
taken on board.
A sheltered place is to be provided for the mooring boat
men who will number 4−6 persons on a vessel up to
70 000 tonnes and 9−10 persons on a vessel of over
70 000 tonnes.
3 Masters are requested to reduce speed during the lifting or
lowering operation of mooring boats; an officer must be in
charge to avoid any accidents that may endanger the lives of
the mooring men.
2.79
1 Mooring boats — sizes and weights. Rowing boats are
5⋅7 m long of 1 tonnes; motor boats are 8⋅8 m long of
3 tonnes.
Mooring boats — Lifting. Vessels must be fitted with
well maintained lifting appliances of 4 tonnes capacity,
capable of lifting the mooring boats and their crew.
If the vessel has no means of lifting mooring boats and
ships boats are not suitable for use as mooring boats (eg
fully-enclosed lifeboats), then the vessel will be refused
transit of the Canal.
Projector and lighting
General information
2.80
1 Vessels must satisfy the officials of the Suez Canal
Authority in Port Said or Port Tewfîk (2.196) that they are
provided with a projector (searchlight) and overhead lighting.
67
Night transit may be suspended in case of breakdown, or
inadequate, or defective functioning of these appliances.
Projectors
2.81
1 A projector is to be placed in an axis to show the canal
1800 m ahead and is to be so constructed as to permit rapid
splitting up of the beam of light into two separate segments
of 5° each with a dark sector of 0° to 10°. Such a projector,
weighing 1 tonnes, can be hired locally at 4 days notice.
Vessels entering the canal directly from the anchorage S
of Conry Rock (3.36) should have their own searchlight.
2 On electrically propelled vessels, or with electrically
driven steering gear, winches etc, the number of generators
and their individual power output must be sufficient to
ensure uninterrupted functioning of the searchlight in the
event of stoppage of one of the generators. No exception to
this rule will be allowed except when there is an
independent generator and circuit on board specifically set
apart for the searchlight.
3 Vessels with bulbous bows must be provided with their
own projector.
LPG and LNG vessels, and vessels entering the canal
directly from sea, must be provided with their own
projectors.
Spare lamps must be available for the projector when it is
supplied by the ship.
4 Vessels using the magnetically mounted projector facility
are required to be fitted with an unpainted steel plate
platform, square or round of 0⋅75 m diameter, placed on the
centreline on the upper part of the stem.
2.82
1 Bridge wing projectors must be fitted on each side of
the bridge to show the canal banks clearly during the transit
and mooring operations.
2.83
1 Overhead lights are required which are to be visible
from all points of the compass and powerful enough to light
up a circular area of about 200 m diameter around the vessel.
Vessels are also required to illuminate their funnels to aid
identification.
Radio
2.84
1 A vessels radio communication apparatus must be in good
working order.
Vessels must be fitted with a working VHF radio easily
operated from the bridge; if not so fitted a set must be
rented from the Suez Canal Authority.
A radio watch will be kept in accordance with the
directions of the pilot; a continual watch may be required to
be kept during the whole transit of the canal.
See Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3) for
further information.
Signals in the Suez Canal
Pilot and traffic management VHF radio stations
2.85
1 The Suez Canal Authority maintains VHF radio signal
stations at Port Said and Port Tewfîk (2.196); if VHF
communication is not possible, the shore station at Ismailia
(SUQ) should be contacted.
See Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3) for
further information.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2

Visual signals
2.86
1 The following visual signals have been laid down by the
Suez Canal Authority for use in Port Said Harbour and in
the Suez Canal; they have been extracted from the booklet
Suez Canal Authority Rules of Navigation, Part III.
2 The Suez Canal Authority Rules of Navigation, Part III
booklet should be consulted for additional signals and for
further information.
All flags and pendants referred to are those used in the
International Code of Signals.
Night signal lights should be hoisted at the foremast head
or where they can best be seen by other vessels.
2.87
1 Pilotage signals. Note:
1) In meaning (a) the signal should be displayed
30 minutes before sailing from port to sea or
before changing berth.
2) In meaning (b) the signal should be displayed
2 hours before the first vessel is expected to enter
the Canal.

Pilotage signals (2.87)

Hazardous cargo signals (2.88)

2.88
1 Special signals to be displayed by vessels carrying certain
hazardous cargoes, on arrival off Port Said or Port of Suez, long blast followed by two short blasts meaning:
and during the canal transit. Vessel not under command.
2.93
Sound signals 1 D) Vessel mooring voluntarily
2.89 During the manoeuvre, a series of six short blasts are
1 The only sound signals allowed in the Suez Canal and its to be sounded every two minutes. Once made fast a
approaches are fully listed in the booklet Suez Canal bell is to be rung rapidly at intervals not exceeding
Authority Rules of Navigation, Part III from which these 1 minute. For vessels of 100 m and over in length,
more important signals have been extracted. the bell is to be rung forward and a gong is to be
2.90 sounded in a similar manner aft. These signals may
1 A) Normal manoeuvres be stopped when all vessels concerned have been
1) The sound signals laid down in The International notified. See also 2.97.
Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea.
2) Five or six short blasts, repeated several times at Quarantine signals
short intervals meaning: I am reducing speed and 2.94
may have to stop or make fast. In addition at night
four to five long flashes with the aldis lamp or
masthead signal light.
3) One prolonged blast: To attract attention.
2.91
1 B) Obstruction in channel in all circumstances
Four long blasts meaning: The channel is not free.
This signal is to be made immediately by a vessel
which, under any circumstances, causes or finds an
obstruction in the channel; this warning must be
repeated every three minutes until vessels in the
vicinity have answered in a like manner. The vessel
should maintain radio watch until advised otherwise.
2.92
1 C) Not under command when approaching a dredger
In the case of engine or steering failure while Quarantine signals (2.94)
approaching a dredger a vessel should sound one

68
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2

Convoy signal 2 When starting to handle the mooring ropes, prior to

2.95 making fast, the vessel should switch off the canal
searchlight and switch on the vessels overhead
lights.
3 When finally made fast switch off the overhead lights
and the green and red side-lights, and place 2 or 3
white lights along the bulwark; electric lights alone
are to be used. If electric lighting is not available
no naked light is to be placed on the bulwark.
4 Any vessel which has to make fast owing to bad
Convoy signal (2.95) weather, insufficient speed, bad light, breakdown,
etc must inform all vessels in the vicinity of the
Vessel aground signals intended manoeuvre, by making the appropriate
2.96 sound signal in addition to those visual signals
described. See Sound Signals 2.89.

Ship handling in the Suez Canal

Speed
2.99
1 When piloting a vessel in the Suez Canal the principal
point of attention is the vessels speed, which is governed by
regulations set down by the Suez Canal Authority and is
normally 7 kn. See 2.115.
All vessels have a speed, suitable to their size and shape,
at which they steer best. If a vessel, which normally handles
well, steers badly in the canal it is most probable that her
speed is wrong and it should be adjusted accordingly.
2 When passing from a wide part of the canal to a narrower
section it will be necessary to reduce speed in order to
maintain good steering.
It should be noted that each vessel has a certain speed
Vessels aground signals (2.96) which it may attain in the canal, but cannot exceed, no
matter how much the power of the engines is increased. This
effect is due to the large physical displacement of water
Manoeuvring signals required for the passage of the vessel through the canal, as
2.97 compared with the width and depth of the canal; this effect
obviously does not affect a vessel to the same degree when
passing through the lakes.
2.100
1 Navigating through a curve in the canal. When passing
through a curve in the canal great caution is necessary in
very long vessels. A tug should be towing ahead and the
engines should be stopped or going as slowly as possible.
Particular attention should be paid to the proximity of the
propeller(s) to the banks of the canal, especially in a vessel
with twin screws.
2.101
1 Passing other moored vessels. When passing a canal
dredger hauled to the bank, or a vessel moored in a gare,
great caution is required. The passing vessel should proceed
at a very slow speed, as the wash from a vessel travelling
even at a moderate speed would be liable to part the
mooring lines of the moored vessel.
Steering
2.102
1 Close attention is required to steering so that only a small
amount of helm is used. The canal banks are not always
symmetrical to the centre of the dredged channel marked by
the buoyant light-beacons (2.68), unevenness in the banks
Manoeuvring signals (2.97) may also affect the vessels steering. The pilots advice is
therefore essential in maintaining the vessels position in the
2.98 centre of the channel.
1 Manoeuvring notes:
The red light, which replaces the stern lights when a Wind
vessel is moored in the canal, is to remain 2.103
displayed throughout the time the vessel is moored 1 When the wind blows across the canal care must be taken
and until she is actually under way. to prevent the vessel drifting to leeward. It is better to stop

69
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2
and secure to the bollards on the canal bank than to risk
damaging the propeller by using it near the lee bank, this
being the only serious damage that vessels are liable to
sustain in transiting the canal.
Similarly, with the wind abeam, care is required in getting
under way after mooring to the canal bank.
Tidal streams
2.104
1 The most difficult part of the canal passage, apart from
the effect of a strong wind, is between the Little Bitter Lake
(2.182) and Port Tewfîk (2.196) on account of the prevailing
tidal streams; see 2.127.
REGULATIONS FOR NAVIGATION
IN THE SUEZ CANAL
Chart 233
General information
2.105
1 Regulations for Suez Canal are contained in Suez Canal
Authority Rules of Navigation issued by the Suez Canal
Authority, a copy of the regulations is held by the pilot for
the masters use.
Masters are bound to make themselves well acquainted
with these regulations as a condition of passage through the
canal. The following extracts may be of use to vessels
approaching the canal before a copy of the rule book
becomes available.
General conditions
2.106
1 The following extracts are part of the navigation
regulations taken from the Suez Canal Authority Rules of
Navigation.
For further information consult the Suez Canal Authority
Rules of Navigation handbook.
2.107
1 Transit. Transit through the Suez Canal is open to vessels
of all nations subject to their complying with the conditions
stated in the current edition of Suez Canal Authority Rules of
Navigation.
However, the Suez Canal Authority reserves the right to
refuse access to the canal to vessels, or to order the towage
or convoying of vessels, which it may consider dangerous or
troublesome to navigation in the canal.
2 By the sole fact of using the canal waters, ie the Suez
Canal itself, Port Said Harbour (Bûr Sa‘îd Harbour) the
access channels etc. within the control of the Suez Canal
Authority, masters and owners of vessels bind themselves to
accept all the conditions of the current edition of Suez Canal
Authority Rules of Navigation; they acknowledge being well
acquainted with these conditions, to conform with those
conditions in every respect, to comply with any requisition
made with a view to their being duly carried out, and to
adhere to the Suez Canal Authorities private code of signals;
see 2.85.
2.108
1 Agents. Every vessel intending to transit the Suez Canal
or to stay at Port Said, Port of Suez or at the Suez Canal
basins or docks must have a shipping agent.
The Egyptian Authorities (Ministry of Foreign Affairs,
Ministry of Defence and the Ports and Lights
Administration) are to be notified of intended transit of naval
ships through the Suez Canal.
70
2.109
1 Suez Canal Waters mean the Suez Canal proper and its
access channels, the waters within the Suez Canal Authority
concession adjacent to the canal, Port Said Harbour and the
Port of Suez.
2.110
1 Responsibilities. When on Canal Waters or at its ports or
roads, any vessels or floating structures of any description
are responsible for any damage and consequential loss they
may cause either directly or indirectly to themselves or (to)
Suez Canal Authority properties or personnel, or to a third
party.
The vessels, or floating structures owners and/or
operators, are (to be held) responsible without (any) option
to release themselves from responsibility by limited liability.
2 Moreover, the vessel guarantees to indemnify the Suez
Canal Authority in respect of any claim against the latter by
reason of any damage whatsoever, (that) she may cause
either directly or indirectly to (a) third party.
3 When in canal waters, any vessel or floating structure of
any description is responsible for any damage and
consequential loss it may cause either directly or indirectly to
the Suez Canal Authority without option for the owners,
and/or operators, to release themselves from responsibility by
purely and simply abandoning the vessel, floating structure
or wreck.
4 The vessel waives the right to claim (from) the Suez
Canal Authority any damages caused by a third party that
she may sustain while on Suez Canal Waters.
2.111
1 Temporary delaying of vessels. The Suez Canal
Authorities may delay a vessel for the purpose of
investigating any claim or dispute that may arise, or any
formal or informal complaint, or allegation of (the) violation
of the laws of the canal or for security reasons.
2 A vessel may be delayed until, in the opinion of the Suez
Canal Authority, its tenderness (stability), trim, list, cargo,
hull, machinery have been put into such condition as will
make the vessel reasonably safe for her passage through the
canal.
No claim for damages is accepted or considered because
of any such temporary delaying of vessels.
2.112
1 Vessels carrying petroleum or dangerous cargo must
comply with these regulations and also with the Appendix
for Vessels Carrying Dangerous Cargo found in rear part of
the Suez Canal Authority Rules of Navigation, a copy of
which is given to masters on their arrival at the canal.
Vessels are not permitted to transit the canal when their
draught exceeds the maximum allowed, see 2.28, and when
they are not well found in every respect for navigation in the
canal.
Departure from a berth
2.113
1 Moorings must not be changed before the pilot is on
board.
The vessel may get under way only if there is no signal
from the Suez Canal Authority to the contrary.
Movements under way
2.114
1 When several vessels are ready to get under way at the
same time, the order of their sailing either into the canal or
out to sea will be fixed by the Suez Canal Authority.
The Suez Canal Authority will prescribe the movements
of vessels under way in order to ensure the maximum safety
to navigation. Consequently, no vessel may demand
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2
immediate passage through the canal, and no claim for delay
arising from the foregoing causes can be admitted.
Masters must avoid anchoring in the canal except in a
case of absolute necessity.
Speed
2.115
1 The normal speed of vessels through the water in the
canal is 7 kn (14 km per hour).
In the case of N-bound loaded tankers this speed is 7 kn
(13 km per hour).
Overtaking
2.116
1 Vessels proceeding in the same direction are not permitted
to overtake one another while underway in the canal and
ports unless authorised by the Suez Canal Traffic
Management Control Office.
Night transit
2.117
1 Navigation of sailing craft of every description by night is
entirely forbidden.
During night transit vessels must keep their projector
alight. They must show their regulation lights and keep a
lookout forward.
2 Vessels not provided with projectors and having no means
to use a hired projector from shore are only allowed to
transit at night in exceptional circumstances, escorted by
tugs, the master being entirely responsible. Vessels transiting
the canal under these conditions are subject to all the other
rules for night transit.
Towage and convoying
2.118
1 At Port Said Harbour (Bûr Sa‘îd) tugs may be placed at
the disposal of masters if the Suez Canal Authority deems it
necessary.
Vessels manoeuvring in the harbour are required to
provide their own hawsers; wire towage hawsers are not
allowed.
The Suez Canal Authority may order that certain defective
vessels, or vessels carrying dangerous cargoes, shall be
towed or convoyed in the canal by one of the authorities
tugs.
2 With the exception of certain cases involving fire,
grounding, etc, the master of a vessel utilising a tug placed
at his disposal has the exclusive direction and control of the
manoeuvres of both the vessel and the tug.
Shipowners are authorised to have their vessels towed or
convoyed by their own tugs, or tugs belonging to third
parties, upon their entire responsibility. Such tugs must be
approved by the Suez Canal Authority. See also 2.66.
Prohibitions
2.119
1 The following actions are prohibited:
(a) Allowing any shots to be fired.
(b) Taking boats or floating appliances of whatever
description in tow of vessels.
(c) Throwing overboard earth, ashes, cinders, or
articles of any kind into canal waters at any point
during the transit.
2 (d) Emptying or allowing oil, petrol, heavy oil, oil
fuel, or scourings or cleansing water, to flow from
tanks having contained such products. The loading,
unloading and generally the handling of liquid fuel
must be so carried out so as to avoid any fuel
leaking into canal waters; failing which the Suez
71
Canal Authority reserves the right to stop such
operations until the necessary repairs shall have
been effected.
3 (e) Picking up, without the direction of Suez Canal
Authority officials, any object that may have fallen
into the canal waters.
Whenever any object or merchandise whatsoever falls
overboard, it must be immediately reported to the
Suez Canal Authority.
2.120
1 Sound signals. In canal waters the sounding of the
whistle is only allowed as listed in the booklet Suez Canal
Authority Rules of Navigation, Part III. See 2.89.
2.121
1 Boats, other than those of the Suez Canal Authority, are
not allowed to come alongside vessels which are under way
or manoeuvring, except for the following at their own risk:
(a) Quarantine and police boats.
(b) Mooring boats.
(c) The ship’s agent’s boat.
Accidents
2.122
1 Stopping. Whenever a vessel under way is accidentally
stopped she must, if other vessels are following, attract their
attention by making the sound signals as described at
paragraph 2.89. In addition, at night, the white stern light
must be replaced by a red light.
2.123
1 Grounding. In a case of grounding the master must
immediately hoist the signal described in paragraph 2.96, and
communicate by VHF radio or other means stating whether a
tug is required or not; if a tug is required, then stating
whether or not a passage is clear for the tug, and whether
lightening of the vessel is necessary, etc.
2 When a vessel runs aground, Suez Canal Authority
officials are alone empowered to order and direct all
operations required to get the vessel afloat, and, in case of
need, to get her unloaded and towed.
All attempts on the part of other vessels to float off a
vessel aground are strictly prohibited.
2.124
1 Risk of collision. Whenever a collision appears probable
vessels must not hesitate to run aground, should it be
necessary, to avoid the collision.
Suez Canal tonnage and dues
2.125
1 The tonnage on which all dues and charges to be paid by
vessels, as specified in these regulations, are assessed is the
net tonnage resulting from the system of measurement laid
down by the International Commission held at
Constantinople in 1873 and duly entered on the special
certificates issued by the competent authorities in each
country.
2 For further information on tonnage and dues, Part IV of
the Suez Canal Authority Rules of Navigation issued by the
Suez Canal Authority should be consulted.
CURRENTS AND TIDAL STREAMS
IN THE SUEZ CANAL
Chart 233
General information
2.126
1 The interaction of the currents and the tidal streams
within the Suez Canal between the Mediterranean Sea, the
lakes and the Gulf of Suez, when combined with varied
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2

meteorological conditions, produce a complex regime of Tides and water level

water flows; rates of up to 2 kn may be encountered within 2.132
the canal. 1 In the N part of the Suez Canal from Port Said to and
including the Great and Little Bitter Lakes (2.173), there is
no perceptible tide.
Currents 2.133
1 In the S part of the canal, between the S entrance to Little
2.127
Bitter Lake (2.182) and Port Tewfîk (2.196), the spring tide
1 From November to April the level of the Great Bitter
range is:
Lake (2.174) is slightly higher than the sea level in the
Mediterranean making the general set of the current, between S end Little Bitter Lake (2.182) 0⋅2 m
Port Said and the Great Bitter Lake, N-going; from June to El Shallûfa (Km 146) 0⋅5 m
October it reverses and becomes S-going.
2 The rate of the current depends upon any variation in the El Kûbri (Km 149) 0⋅6 m
height of the level of the Mediterranean Sea; this change in Port Tewfîk (2.196) 2⋅1 m
sea level may then increase or change the direction of the 2.134
current through the canal. 1 High water at the S end of the Little Bitter Lake occurs
The average rate of the current is seldom more than 1 kn, 50 minutes later than at Port of Suez (Bûr el Suweis).
but it does vary from  kn to 2 kn, lessening towards the
Great Bitter Lake.
PASSAGE THROUGH SUEZ CANAL
PORT SAID TO PORT TAWFÎQ
Tidal streams Chart 233
2.128 General information
1 Port Said to Great Bitter Lake. There are no perceptible 2.135
tidal streams between Port Said and Lake Timsah (2.152) or 1 The general system of navigation aids throughout the
in Great Bitter Lake (2.174). Suez Canal is described in paragraph 2.68.
2.129 Readiness of main engines
1 Little Bitter Lake to Port Tewfîk. In this part of the 2.136
Suez Canal the flow of the tidal streams is as follows: 1 When anchored in the Bitter Lake anchorages (2.178),
Interval from HW Port of Tidal stream at Port Tewfîk Lake Timsah (2.152), or moored in the canal, a vessel’s
Suez main engines must be in an immediate state of readiness.
1 to 2 hours before HW S-going stream slackens Prohibited anchorages
N-going stream commences 2.137
5 hours after HW N-going stream slackens 1 The positions of submerged pipelines and submarine
S-going stream begins cables crossing the canal are indicated by notice boards.
Anchoring is strictly prohibited within 50 m N and S of
2 The streams between the Little Bitter Lake (2.182) and these notice boards.
Port Tewfîk (2.196) gradually change later in time with Natural conditions
distance N from Port Tewfîk until, at the S end of Little
2.138
Bitter Lake, they turn 50 minutes later than at Port Tewfîk. 1 Visibility. Fog, which may be encountered during the
3 This is because the N-going stream cannot begin to run in transit of the canal, can reduce visibility to about 90 m.
the Little Bitter Lake until the depth at the S entrance to the
lake has risen above the level of the lake which is a level
Port Said to El Qantara
that does not vary. This change in level at the S entrance
does not occur until about 1 hour before high water at Suez. Chart 233 plan of Suez Canal Port Said to Km 22
The N-going stream then begins to flow in the Little Bitter Description
Lake and continues until about 6 hours after high water at 2.139
Suez, when the level at the S entrance to the lake has fallen 1 Port Said (Bûr Sa‘îd) is situated at the N end of the Suez
below the level of water in the lake, the S-going stream then Canal; Port Said Harbour and the N approaches to the Suez
begins to flow. Canal are described in Mediterranean Pilot, Volume V. Port
4 Streams near the bed of the canal turn 5 minutes to Fouad (Bûr Fu’âd) lies on the E bank of Port Said Harbour.
10 minutes earlier than at the surface. 2.140
Strong S winds raise the water level in Suez Bay which 1 Port Said West Branch is entered from the S end of
affects the streams in the canal to some extent. Husein Basin (31°14′⋅4N, 32°18′⋅3E), the S-most basin of
2.130 Port Said Harbour; Port Said Branch leads straight from its
1 Rates. The greatest rate of about 1
kn is attained near entrance to its junction with Port Said By-pass (2.141) at
El Kûbri (Km 149) about 7 miles within the S entrance to Km 17.
the canal. A Suez Canal signal tower is situated on the W bank at
During strong S winds the N-going stream attains a rate Râs el ‘Ish, between Km 14 and Km 15.
of 2 kn at springs. 2 Depths. The branch is dredged to a least centreline depth
2.131 of 14⋅8 m.
1 Caution. Off the entrance to El Dars Basin (2.194) care 3 Moorings are provided between Km 4 and Km 15 for the
must be taken to guard against a strong stream setting across use of all but the largest of vessels; these moorings may be
the canal, frequently opposing the flow of the stream in the used instead of the waiting anchorages described in
canal. Mediterranean Pilot, Volume V.

72
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2
2.141
1 Port Said By-pass is entered about 2 miles SSE of Port
Said East Breakwater Head Light (31°16′⋅6N, 32°19′⋅8E);
the branch is straight from its entrance to its junction with
Port Said West Branch (2.140) at Km 17.
2 From the junction of Port Said By-Pass and the service
channel, a branch, dredged to 16⋅5 m, leads to East Port Said
Container Terminal and thence, to sea, through a channel
marked by buoys and dredged to 18⋅5 m.
A Suez Canal signal tower is situated at Km 3E, on the
W bank of the canal near the entrance to the by-pass.
3 Depths. The branch is dredged to a least centreline depth
of 23⋅5 m.
2.142
1 Lights. A light is exhibited from the Suez Canal
Authority signal tower situated at about Km 3E and also
from the head of a pier close E; a further light is exhibited
from the W bank of Port Said By-pass (position
approximate) at about Km 13E and also from the signal
tower at Km 19.
A light is also exhibited from a beacon on the shore at
the bifurcation of the canal between Port Said West Branch
and Port Said By-pass at about Km 15E; a light-beacon (S
cardinal) stands in the canal close S.
2.143
1 Service Channel. A service channel connects Port Said
West Branch at Km 8, with Port Said By-pass at Km 6E.
The channel, which is dredged to a depth of 9 m, is marked
by lights (positions approximate).
2.144
1 From Km 19 to El Qantara Km 45 (22 miles S), the canal
continues straight passing through a dry, flat and sandy plain
that was once part of Lake Manzala which now forms part
SCA Signal Tower
Suez Canal Authority Signal Tower from South − Approaches to Port Said Egypt (2.141)
(Original dated 2002)
(Photography − Lt Cdr T. Tulloch RCN)
73
of the delta at the mouth of the River Nile and is fed by the
waters of the Nile.
On the W bank of the canal lie the railway and Tur‘et el
Abbâsa (Sweet Water Canal) (2.4); the E bank is being
constantly increased by dredging spoil from the canal.
2 Suez Canal signal towers are situated on the W bank of
this stretch of the canal at Km 19; at El Tîna Km 25; at El
Câp between Km 35 and Km 36; and at El Qantara between
Km 45 and Km 46.
El Qantara to Lake Timsah
Chart 233 plans of Suez Canal Port Said to Km 22 and Km 50 to
Km 86
Description
2.145
1 Between El Qantara (30°51′N, 32°19′E) and Lake Timsah
(17 miles S) (2.152) the canal passes through slightly
higher ground.
Along this reach of the canal, which includes El Ballâh
West Branch (2.149), there are six curves situated in the
vicinity Km 51, Km 53, Km 58, Km 61, Km 73 and Km 76.
Ferry services cross the canal at Km 47 and Km 67.
A submarine water pipeline and a submarine power cable
cross the canal between Km 44 and Km 45.
2.146
1 A road bridge, with a vertical clearance of 68 m, spans
the canal between Km 48 and Km 49.
A pontoon bridge on the W side of the canal is situated
at about Km 47.
A rail and road swing bridge spans the canal at Km 68,
about 2 miles S of the Suez Canal Authority signal tower at
El Firdân.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2

Suez Canal − New Road Bridge km 48.5 (2.146)

(Original dated 2002)
(Photography Miss H.Benson)

A swing bridge is situated on the W side of the canal at
about Km 67.
2.147
1 Lights and buoys. A light is exhibited from the W bank
of the canal at Km 50; two buoys cylindrical and conical
(special) are moored close to the sides of the canal in the
vicinity of the light.
2 Another light is exhibited from a beacon on the shore at
the N bifurcation of the canal between El Ballâh East Branch
(2.148) and the West Branch (2.149) at about Km 51; a
light-beacon (N cardinal) stands in the canal close N.
A light is also exhibited from a beacon on the shore at
the S bifurcation of the canal between El Ballâh East Branch
and the West Branch at about Km 60; a light-beacon
(S cardinal) stands in the canal close S.
3 A light which is exhibited from the E bank of the canal
at Km 62 has different characteristics depending if viewed
from the N or S; buoys (cylindrical and conical; special) are
moored near the banks of the canal in this vicinity between
Km 61 and Km 63. Another light (position approximate) is
exhibited from the E bank at about Km 73; buoys
cylindrical (special) are moored close off the opposite bank
of the canal between Km 73 and Km 74.
2.148
1 El Ballâh East Branch is the name of the straight cut of
the canal situated between Km 51 and Km 61.
Depths. Between the junction of Port Said West Branch
and Port Said By-pass (2.141), and the junction of Lake
Timsah West Branch (2.160) and Lake Timsah By-pass
(2.164), the canal is dredged along its centreline to 23⋅5 m.
2.149
1 El Ballâh West Branch is the name of the cut of the
canal situated W of El Ballâh East Branch (2.148), between
Km 51 and Km 61.
There are berths, with shore bollards, situated in El Ballâh
West Branch. The chart is the best guide.
A Suez Canal signal tower is situated at Km 55 on the W
bank of the cut.

Suez Canal − Railway Swing Bridge km 68 (2.146)

(Original dated 2000)
(Photography Miss H.Benson)

74
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2
2 Depths. The cut is mostly dredged to a least centreline
depth of 15⋅5 m with dredged depths of 18⋅5 m at its N and
S ends.
2.150
1 Lights (position approximate) are exhibited from the W
bank of El Ballâh West Branch at about Km 52, Km 53,
Km 57 and Km 58.
2.151
1 Supplies. Fresh water may be obtained by S-bound
vessels moored in the cut.
Lake Timsah
Chart 233 plan of Suez Canal Lake Timsah
Description
2.152
1 Lake Timsah (Buheiret el Timsâh) (30°34′N, 32°18′E) is
situated near the middle of the Suez Canal and forms a
curve in the general line of the direction of the canal.
2 A conspicuous war memorial, about 66 m high,
representing a bayonet, stands close E of the E shore of the
lake in the vicinity of Km 77E. A beacon (triangular
topmark, 26 m high) stands about 5 cables E of the E side of
the canal between Km 78E and Km 79E.
A ferry service crosses the canal at Km 76 in the N
entrance to the lake.
A submarine water pipeline and a submarine power cable
are laid across the canal in the vicinity of Km 76.
2.153
1 An unnamed inlet indents the SW shore of the lake; a
small basin is entered from the S side of the entrance to the
unnamed inlet. Within the inlet lie two small islands; a
beacon (ball topmark) (position approximate) stands on the
W end of the S-most island. A dredged channel, in which
there is least depth of 3 m, surrounds the S-most island; a
shipyard and a floating dock are also lie within the inlet.
A beacon (triangular topmark) (position approximate)
stands on the S side of the inlet about 4 cables NW of Gebel
Maryam War Memorial (2.166).
2.154
1 Lights. A light is exhibited, at about Km 77, from a
beacon on the N point of the unnamed island lying in the N
part of Lake Timsah at the N bifurcation of the canal
between Lake Timsah West Branch (2.160) and the By-pass
(2.164); a light-beacon (N cardinal) stands in the canal close
N.
2 A further light is exhibited at about Km 79
from a
beacon on the S point of the same unnamed island at the S
bifurcation of the canal between the By-pass and Lake
Timsah West Branch; a light-beacon (S cardinal) stands in
the canal about 4 cables SSE.
2.155
1 Ismailia. The town of Ismailia (El Ismâ‘ilîya) lies on the
N shore of the lake from where a number of quays and piers
extend; the main office of the Suez Canal Authority is
situated in Ismailia.
2 A dredged channel, with a least depth of 9 m, leads NW
from the main dredged area of the lake to the berths off the
S side of Ismailia where alongside depths up to 7 m may be
obtained; a further dredged channel, with a least depth of
6 m, leads from a position at the N extremity of the main
dredged area of the lake to the quays on the E side of the
main berthing area.
3 A light (30°35′⋅1N, 32°16′⋅5E) is exhibited from a brick
building standing on the main quay which extends into the
lake from the S side of Ismailia.
75
Chevalier Island, which lies close off the N shore of the
lake SE of Ismailia, is connected to the shore by three
bridges; a radio tower (position approximate) stands close to
the S shore of the island.
Port radio
2.156
1 The Suez Canal Authority mains a shore radio station at
Ismailia.
See Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3) for
further information.
Facilities
2.157
1 A number of tugs are based in the lake; there is a
slipway; minor repairs can be undertaken; there is a hospital
in Ismailia.
Nifîsha Lagoon
2.158
1 Nifîsha Lagoon is entered from the NW part of Lake
Timsah through a small boat channel, spanned by a bridge;
the channel is marked on its N and E sides by beacons.
A number of piers are situated within the lagoon.
Pilotage
2.159
1 The pilot station for the change of canal pilots is situated
on the W bank of the N entrance to Lake Timsah.
Lake Timsah West Branch
2.160
1 The channel through Lake Timsah West Branch is marked
along its E edge by buoyant light-beacons.
In the middle part of the lake the channel has been
widened by an additional area dredged to a similar depth as
the main channel and marked by buoyant light-beacons and
spar light-buoys; further dredging to extend the area to the
W is being undertaken.
2.161
1 Depths. The branch is mostly dredged to a least depth of
15⋅5 m which increases at its S end to 19⋅0 m. See 2.9.
2.162
1 Anchorages. Three anchorage berths, numbered 1 to 3,
for use by larger vessels are situated in the main channel and
the W part of the branch; three further anchorage berths,
numbered 4 to 6, for use by smaller vessels lie close NW of
these main anchorage berths but still within the main
dredged area. The positions of all of these berths are best
seen on the chart.
2 Only vessels with a draught not exceeding 5⋅5 m are
permitted to anchor between the NW extremity of the main
dredged area and the NW shore of the lake.
2.163
1 Climatic table. See 1.275 and 1.276.
Lake Timsah By-pass
2.164
1 Lake Timsah By-pass, which lies between approximately
Km 76 and Km 82, is the E-most channel through Lake
Timsah.
The by-pass is separated from the W branch by two
unnamed islands which are themselves separated by a
narrow, buoyed channel in which there is a least depth of
4⋅6 m.
2 A memorial representing a dove, together with a flagstaff,
stand on the N part of the N-most unnamed island. A
number of moorings are laid off the E side of the S-most
unnamed island and off the bank on the E side of the
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2
by-pass; a beacon (white) (position approximate) stands on
the mid part of the E side of the island.
2.165
1 Depths. The branch is dredged to a least depth of 23⋅5 m.
Lake Timsah to Great Bitter Lake
Chart 233 plan of Suez Canal Km 75 to Km 99
Description
2.166
1 Between the S end of Lake Timsah (30°34′N, 32°18′E)
(2.152) and Tûsûn Km 87 (3 miles SE) the canal passes
through several lagoons; a buoy (special, yellow cylindrical)
is moored close off the W shore of the canal between Km 85
and Km 86, a similar buoy is moored off the same bank in
the vicinity of Tûsûn.
2 Gebel Maryam War Memorial, about 40 m high, stands
on the W bank of the canal in the vicinity of Km 82, close
S of the SW entrance to Lake Timsah.
The W bank of the canal, which curves at Tûsûn, rises to
21 m and is surmounted by a Suez Canal Authority signal
tower which comprises a lattice pylon with transverse arms.
3 A pontoon bridge, stowed on the W side of the canal, is
situated at Km 88; a car ferry crosses the canal at Sirâbiyûm
about Km 91. A submarine power cable is laid across the
canal close S of the ferry crossing; a submarine water
pipeline and a power cable are also laid across the canal in
close proximity at Km 93.
4 Between Tûsûn and Km 93, the canal runs straight
through compact sand or clay which is not, on the whole,
considered hard enough to be dangerous to a vessel
grounding.
2.167
1 Depths. This reach of the canal is dredged to a least
depth of 23⋅5 m. See 2.9.
2.168
1 Lights and buoys. A light is exhibited from the W bank
of the Canal at Km 82 and from the same bank (position
approximate) at Km 91. Further lights (positions
approximate) are exhibited from the E bank between Km 86
and 87; buoys (cylindrical special) are moored close off the
opposite bank in the vicinity of these lights.
Deversoir By-pass
2.169
1 Lights. A light is exhibited, at about Km 95, from a
beacon on the N point of the long, thin unnamed island
which divides the East Branch (2.170) of Deversoir By-pass
from the West Branch (2.171); a light-beacon (N cardinal)
stands in the canal close N.
A further light (position approximate) is exhibited from
the E shore of the canal at about Km 94.
A light is also exhibited from a beacon standing on the S
part of the unnamed island at about Km 97
.
2.170
1 Deversoir By-pass East Branch commences at Km 93
and is cut E of the original canal which leads to the N end
of the East Branch of Great Bitter Lake.
Depths. The East Branch is dredged to a least depth of
23⋅5 m.
2.171
1 Deversoir By-pass West Branch is the line of the
original canal and leads to the N end of the West Branch of
Great Bitter Lake; plantations of trees grow on the W bank
of the branch.
2 Depths. The N end of the West Branch from Km 95 to
Km 95⋅5 is dredged to 18 m; it then reduces to 15⋅5 m.
76
2.172
1 Deversoir. The town of Deversoir is situated on the W
side of Deversoir By-pass West Branch.
A Suez Canal Authority signal tower, a lattice pylon with
transverse arms, stands on the point of land on the W side
of the entrance of the branch into Great Bitter Lake (2.174).
Great and Little Bitter Lakes
Chart 233 plan of Suez Canal Great Bitter Lake to Suez Bay
Description
2.173
1 Great Bitter Lake (El Buheiret el Murra el Kubra) (2.174)
and Little Bitter Lake (El Buheiret el Murra el Sughra)
(2.182) both occupy a depression which was formerly
connected with Suez Bay; the two lakes are separated by a
point projecting N from El Kabrît (30°15′N, 32°30′E).
A Suez Canal Authority signal tower stands on the N end
of a small peninsula which projects NNE from El Kabrît; an
airfield is situated close SSW of El Kabrît.
Great Bitter Lake
2.174
1 Abu Sultân Landing Stage is situated in the NW corner
of Great Bitter Lake, about 2 miles WSW of Deversoir; it is
sheltered by the ruins of a detached breakwater; in 1966 the
stage had depths alongside from 1⋅5 to 2⋅7 m.
2 Fanâra Oil Jetty is situated in the SW corner of the
Great Bitter Lake; the jetty extends about 7 cables NE from
the shore from close NE of the town of Fanâra (30°17′N,
32°20′E); concrete dolphins lie either side of the head of the
jetty. Two beacons (triangular topmarks) stand E of the jetty
head.
Small basins, protected by breakwaters, lie off the S shore
of Great Bitter Lake close off Rasîf Fanâra (30°17′N,
32°23′E).
Great Bitter Lake Branch Channels
2.175
1 Both the channels through Great Bitter Lake are marked
by buoyant light-beacons.
Great Bitter Lake North Light-buoy (30°21′⋅4N,
32°22′⋅4E) (racon) is moored near the mid part of the lake
between the East Branch and West Branch channels at the
change in direction in the line of the canal.
Great Bitter Lake South Light-buoy (30°17′⋅1N,
32°26′⋅2E) (racon) is moored near the S end of the lake
between the East Branch and West Branch channels at the
WNW end of El Kabrît Branch Channels (2.186).
2.176
1 Great Bitter Lake East Branch has been dredged to
23⋅5 m between Deversoir East Branch and the junction of
El Kabrît East and West Branches at the N end of the Little
Bitter Lake (2.182) at Km 122.
2.177
1 Great Bitter Lake West Branch has been dredged to
15⋅5 m between Deversoir West Branch and the junction of
El Kabrît East and West Branches at the N end of the Little
Bitter Lake (2.182) at Km 122. See 2.9.
Great Bitter Lake anchorage areas
2.178
1 There are nine designated anchorage areas in the Great
Bitter Lakes all of these areas are marked, as shown on the
chart, by buoyant light-beacons.
2.179
1 Anchorage areas W1 and W5 all lie on the SW side of
West Branch and are for use by S-bound vessels.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2

Anchorage area Depth over it of less than 2 m; mooring posts are situated on this
bank.
W1 13⋅0 m A light-beacon (30°16′⋅8N, 32°26′⋅7E) (W cardinal) is
W2 13⋅5 m moored at the W end of the bank between the two branch
channels; a light-beacon (30°15′⋅5N, 32°30′⋅9E) (E cardinal)
W3 14⋅5 m
is moored at the E end of the same bank.
W4 9⋅0 m 2.187
W5 13⋅5 m 1 Both Kabrît Branch Channels are marked by buoyant
light-beacons.
2.180 2.188
1 Anchorage areas E1 and E5 all lie on the NE side of 1 Kabrît East Branch is dredged to 23⋅5 m between Great
East Branch and are for use by N-bound vessels. Bitter Lake South Light-buoy (2.175) and the point where
Anchorage area Depth the two channels rejoin in the N part of the Little Bitter
E1 18⋅0 m Lake (2.182).
2.189
E2 16⋅0 m 1 Kabrît West Branch is dredged to 15⋅0 m between Great
E3 14⋅0 m Bitter Lake South Light-buoy (2.175) and the point where
the two channels rejoin in the N part of the Little Bitter
E4 13⋅0 m
Lake (2.182). See 2.9.
2 Caution. A reduced depth of 12 m has been reported
(2002) within the anchorage area E4 in position 30°18′⋅6N, Little Bitter Lake to Suez Bay
32°25′⋅5E.
Charts 233 plan of Suez Canal Great Bitter Lake to Suez Bay,
2.181
3214
1 Supplies. Fresh water may be obtained by barge by
vessels anchored in Great Bitter Lake. Description
2.190
Little Bitter Lake 1 From the S end of the Little Bitter Lake (2.182) at about
2.182 Km 134, the canal runs straight as far as El Shallûfa Km 146
1 Description. The sides of the canal are composed of a where the canal turns about 8° to the E. After a straight
very sticky mud, and, in the case of a grounding, a vessel course for about another 5 miles, at about Km 155, the canal
may take sometime to release herself. curves gradually for the next 3 miles entering Suez Bay
Gezîret ‘Alâwi el-Fizîkh, Gezîret el Hirâba el Tawîla and between Port Tewfîk (2.196) and Qâd el Marâkib (2.199).
Gezîret el Shabâyra are three large named islands among a There are Suez Canal signal towers situated on the W
group of smaller islands all of which lie on the W side of bank of the canal at El Gineifa at Km 134, and El Shallûfa
the lake. at Km 146.
Finger Point (30°11′⋅5N, 32°34′⋅3E), High Point 2 This section of the canal passes through hard ground that
(1
miles NNW) and Danger Point (4 miles NNW) all lie is rocky in places. The rocky places, where vessels should
on the E side of Little Bitter Lake. not secure to the banks, are marked by buoys (can) and by
2.183 red posts on the banks.
1 Depths. From the point where the Kabrît Branch A pontoon bridge, stowed on the W side of the canal, is
Channels rejoin in the N part of the Little Bitter Lake the situated between Km 135 and Km 136; a similar bridge is
canal is dredged to 23⋅5 m and is marked by pairs of situated between Km 139 and Km 140.
buoyant light-beacons. 2.191
Depths in the Little Bitter Lake (30°14′N, 32°33′E), 1 An area of submarine power cables lies across the canal
outside the area through which the canal has been dredged, between Km 135 and Km 136; a submarine water pipeline is
are, in general, less than 5 m. laid across the canal between Km 136 and Km 137.
2.184 The Ahmed Hamdy Tunnel passes under the canal in the
1 Lights. A light is exhibited at about Km 124, from the vicinity of Km 143.
NE edge of the canal on the outside of the bend which leads 2 Lights are exhibited from the E bank of the canal at
from the Kabrît Branch Channels (2.186) into the main part approximately Km 154⋅5, Km 156⋅1, Km 157⋅8 and
of the Little Bitter Lake. Km 158⋅3.
A pair of lights (positions approximate) are exhibited Ferry services operate across this section of the canal at
from the E side of the canal, at about Km 131 close NNW about Km 148 and Km 149⋅3.
of Finger Point. A power transmission line supported by pylons, with a
2.185 safe overhead clearance of 135 m, spans the canal at about
1 Moorings. There are mooring bollards situated on both Km 153⋅2.
sides of the canal throughout most of its run through the 2.192
Little Bitter Lake. 1 Depths. This section of the canal is dredged to 23⋅5 m as
Vessels of less than 5 m draught should not moor in the far as Km 150, where it increases to a depth of 25⋅0 m to its
Little Bitter Lake as their draught, being about the same as S entrance at Km 162. Thence, the maintained depth again
the surrounding depths in the lake outside of the canal, risk becomes 23⋅5 m.
grounding whilst mooring. 2.193
1 Wharfs, with alongside depths of 2⋅4 m for use by
Chart 233 plan of Suez Canal El Kabrît lighters, are situated on the E bank of the canal at El-Shatt
Kabrît Branch Channels between Km 157 and Km 158.
2.186 2.194
1 Kabrît Branch Channels lie between Km 115 and Km 122 1 El Dars Basin is a basin situated on the W side of the
and are separated by a bank, up to a cable wide, with depths canal, about 2 miles within its S entrance.

77
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2

Suez Canal − Entrance to Suez Bay (2.190)

(Original dated 1999)
(Photograph − Crown Copyright)
The basin is approached through a buoyed channel,
dredged to 6 m (1986), which is entered close E of Port
Tewfîk South Basin (2.198).
2 A shipyard and a ship synchrolift lie at the head of the
basin.
A further basin, part of which is dredged to 4 m (1963),
lies N and W of the approach channel to El Dars basin.
Southern entrance to the Suez Canal
2.195
1 The S entrance to the Suez Canal, which is situated in the
NE part of Suez Bay is marked at Km 162⋅15 by a pair of
light-buoys (port and starboard hand) between which vessels
must pass when entering or leaving the canal; a beacon
(2.199) stands on the first land on the SE side of the
entrance.
2 Caution. In thick or hazy weather care should be taken
not to confuse the lights of the light-buoys at the entrance to
the canal with those exhibited at the entrance to Bûr Ibrâhîm
Basin (2.304).
PORT TEWFIK
Charts 233 plan of Suez Canal Great Bitter Lake to Suez Bay,
3214
Position
2.196
1 Port Tewfik (Bûr Tawfîq) (29°56′N, 32°34′E) is the name
given to the port area which lies within the first mile of the
S entrance to the Suez Canal.
Description
2.197
1 A Suez Canal Authority signal station, a conspicuous
metal structure with transverse arms, stands on the W side of
Port Tewfîk on the NW side of the S entrance to the canal.
A Suez Canal Authority Office is situated in the middle of
the quay on the W side of the port.
A conspicuous mosque with a golden dome stands on the
W bank close S of Port Tewfîk South Basin.
2.198
1 Port Tewfîk South Basin is entered from the N end of
Port Tewfîk; a depth of 5⋅5 m lies in the entrance to the
basin with depths of 4⋅5 m throughout the majority of the
rest of the basin.
2.199
1 Qâd el Marâkib (29°55′⋅8N, 32°34′⋅1E) is the peninsula
situated on the SE side of Port Tewfîk.
The peninsula is faced with wharfs which extend over a
length of 1000 m; these wharfs have alongside depths of
8⋅5 m at their SW end, and 2⋅4 m at their NE, allowing
vessels of up to 8⋅2 m draught to be berthed; the wharfs are
connected with the Egyptian railway system.
A beacon stands on the W extremity of Qâd el Marâkib.
Passenger vessels
2.200
1 Port Tewfîk gives priority to passenger vessels; vessels up
to 700 m in length and a draught of 8⋅2 m can be handled.
Port radio
2.201
1 See Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3).

SUEZ BAY
GENERAL INFORMATION Gulf of Suez (3.1) to its S entrance which lies between Râs
Chart 3214 el ‘Adabîya (29°52′N, 32°31′E) and a position about 6 miles
Position ENE in the vicinity of a pier, with a flagstaff at its head,
2.202 which extends about 2 cables WSW from the shore.
1 Suez Bay (Bahr el Qulzum) (29°54′N, 32°32′E) is a large Two water towers stand near the root of the pier; the Suez
bay which extends about 5 miles S from the head of the Quarantine Station is located close SE.

78
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2
Topography
2.203
1 The shores of Suez Bay are low, except on the SW and
W sides which rise steeply to Gebel ‘Atâqa (29°55′N,
32°24′E), a prominent range which attains an elevation of
870 m about 9 miles W of Port of Suez (Bûr el Suweis)
(2.280).
2 The N side of the bay is a desert plain; the E side is also
a plain, largely covered with sand, which extends about
12 miles SE rising gradually to a range of hills of moderate
elevation.
Description
2.204
1 Storage tanks extend along the N side of Suez Bay for
about 1
miles W of the Petroleum Basin (29°57′⋅2N,
32°31′⋅8E) (2.322); houses then line the shore for a farther
2 miles SW.
2 The E shores of Suez Bay extend from Qâd el Marâkib
(29°55′⋅8N, 32°34′⋅1E) (2.199) to a position about 5 miles
SE in the vicinity of a pier (29°53′⋅1N, 32°36′⋅9E) (2.202),
with a flagstaff at its head.
Off-lying dangers
2.205
1 Sha’b Itûla (Etuleh Shoals) (29°56′N, 32°30′E) is an
area of drying and dangerous shoals and wrecks which are
situated in the NW corner of Suez Bay between the pipelines
extending to the shore from Bahr el Qulzum Oil Berth
(2.240) and the Bahr el Qulzum Vegetable Oil Berth (2.245).
2 There are numerous stranded and submerged wrecks on
the NE part of these shoals.
A beacon (white, lattice construction; 15 m high) stands
on a detached coral shoal, with a least depth over it of
0⋅4 m, which lies at the S end of Sha’b Itûla Shoals about
4 cables NE of Bahr el Qulzum Vegetable Oil Berth
(29°55′⋅2N, 32°29′⋅4E).
2.206
1 Qal‘a Kebîra (29°55′N, 32°32′E) is a coral reef which
lies near the middle of the N part of the bay, about 2 miles
SW of Port Tewfîk (2.196).
The central part of the reef has been built up with
concrete to an elevation of about 5 m and is known as Green
Island.
2 Green Island Light (29°54′⋅6N, 32°31′⋅8E) (metal
framework tower) is exhibited from a position on the reef
close S of Green Island.
An obstruction, marked on its NW side by a light-buoy
(W cardinal), lies on the W side of Qal‘a Kebîra; a
light-buoy (N cardinal) is moored off the N side of the reef,
and a further light-buoy (S cardinal) is moored off its SW
corner.
2.207
1 Sha‘b Misallât (29°54′⋅5N, 32°33′⋅9E) is a drying reef
which lies close S of Qâd el Marâkib (2.199); the reef is
marked by a beacon (lattice structure on a concrete base)
standing close SW of its drying part.
Two stranded wrecks, having the appearance of vessels at
anchor, lie on the reef about 3 cables ENE of the beacon.
A disused spoil ground area lies close SE of Sha‘b
Misallât.
2.208
1 Newport Rock (29°53′N, 32°33′E), known to the
Egyptians as Zenobia Rock, is a small coral rock pinnacle,
which lies about 2 miles SSE of Green Island (2.206), on the
E side of Newport Rock Channel (2.221); a drying
79
obstruction (the remains of the old light-beacon) stands on
the rock.
2 Newport Rock Light-beacon (29°53′⋅1N, 32°33′⋅1E)
(tripod on 3 pile structure, 9 m high) stands close SE of the
obstruction.
A prominent stranded wreck lies about 6cables NE of
Newport Rock Light-beacon; in 1983 this wreck had the
appearance of a vessel at anchor and listing to port. A
further two wrecks lie about 1
miles E of the rock.
Cautions
2.209
1 Navigation lights, buoyant light-beacons and light-beacons
are at times difficult to identify within Suez Bay, especially
when there are many ships present in the bay.
The aids to navigation in the approaches to Port of Suez
(Bûr El Suweis) are reported to be unreliable. They may be
missing, unlit or out of position. Vessels should navigate
with particular caution.
Local knowledge
2.210
1 Extensive reefs border the sides of the bay; they should
not be approached without local knowledge.
Spoil ground
2.211
1 A spoil ground area (29°52′⋅5N, 32°34′⋅5E) lies N of the
main waiting anchorage area (2.16).
2.212
1 Danger area. A danger area, through which it is unsafe
to navigate and over which there is a least charted depth of
1⋅5 m, lies on the W side of the spoil ground area.
Natural conditions
2.213
1 Wind. At Suez the N wind usually freshens late in the
afternoon and continues until midnight.
2.214
1 Sea level. With a strong S wind blowing in Suez Bay the
sea level rises to between 2⋅4 m and 2⋅7 m.
Special buoy
2.215
1 A buoy (29°52′⋅9N, 32°35′⋅7E) (special yellow) is laid
between the spoil ground area (2.211) and the pier with a
flagstaff at its head (2.202).
Four mooring buoys are laid in the vicinity of the special
buoy.
Principal marks
2.216
1 Landmarks:
A cooling tower (grey, 42 m high) (29°57′⋅2N,
32°30′⋅4E), which stands on the NW shore of the
bay, is conspicuous.
A chimney (29°57′⋅0N, 32°30′⋅2E), which stands about
2 cables WSW of the cooling tower, is also
conspicuous.
Major light:
2 Birket Misallât Light (white daymark on metal
framework tower, 39 m high; racon) (29°54′⋅5N,
32°35′⋅6E) is exhibited from a position
approximately midway between Birket Misallât
(29°55′⋅3N, 32°34′⋅2E) inlet and the pier (2.202)
with a flagstaff at its head. A power station chimney
stands about 350 m N of the light; a conspicuous
water tower is situated about 1
miles ESE of the
light. A beacon (red) (position approximate) stands
about 1 mile NW of Birket el Missalât Light.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2

CHANNELS THROUGH SUEZ BAY Vessels anchor in Port of Suez Roads in the numbered
berths, as shown on the chart; the berths are allocated by the
Eastern Channel Suez Canal Authority.
2.223
Chart 3214 1 Loaded tankers of less than 18 000 tonnes anchor S of
Description Green Island (29°54′⋅7N, 32°31′⋅8E); those of more than
2.217 18 000 tonnes anchor SW of Green Island.
1 The Eastern Channel extends initially SSW then S for Other vessels anchor N of Green Island except those
about 2 miles, from the pair of light-buoys marking the S waiting to join a N-bound convoy which then anchor E of
entrance to the Suez Canal (2.195) to Newport Rock Eastern Channel (2.217), or on the S side of Western
(29°53′N, 32°33′E) (2.208). Channel (2.220).
The channel, which crosses the coastal bank, is 2.224
maintained at a depth of 23⋅5 m and is marked by 1 Caution. Vessels should not anchor S of the anchorage
light-buoys. berths 1D−6D due to the presence of seabed debris.
2 Vessels intending to anchor in the designated anchorage 2.225
berths 1C−5C may approach these anchorages through 1 Anchorage in Gûnet el ‘Adabîya (‘Adabîya Bay)
Eastern Channel as opposed to the other anchorages within (29°52′N, 32°29′E) is described at 2.272; for waiting
Suez Bay which are to be approached through Western anchorages see 2.14.
Channel (2.220).
2.218 Prohibited anchorage
1 Priority of passage in Eastern Channel. 2.226
(i) Vessels leaving the canal. 1 Anchorage is prohibited, as shown on the chart, within
(ii) Vessels leaving anchorages in Port of Suez Roads the wedge-shaped area which lies in the S approach to
and having to use Eastern Channel, see 2.217. Newport Rock Channel (2.221), N of No 2 Light-float
Vessels approaching Port of Suez from sea should wait (29°48′⋅6N, 32°32′⋅1E) (3.36) and S of the pair of buoys
outside the port until Eastern Channel is clear. marking the S end of Newport Rock Channel.
2.219 A dangerous wreck, over which the depth is unknown,
1 Prohibited anchorage. Anchorage is prohibited in the lies close E of the W edge of the prohibited area, about
channel. 1
miles N of No 2 Light-float.
Submarine cables
Western Channel 2.227
1 Mariners are cautioned not to anchor in the vicinity of the
Description numerous disused submarine cables, as shown on the charts,
2.220 which lie N, W and S of the designated anchor berths
1 The Western Channel lies NW, W and S of Green Island (2.228).
(29°54′⋅7N, 32°31′⋅8E) and leads from Eastern Channel
(2.217) to the Offshore Oil Berth (2.240), the designated Anchorage berths
anchorages 1A−10A, 1B−13B, 6C−16C and 1D−6D, and the
Group A anchorages
dredged channel approaches to El Mînâ’ el Gedîda (2.317)
2.228
and Bûr Ibrâhîm (2.304).
1 Group A anchorages lie in the middle of Suez Bay, W of
No 2A Light-buoy (port hand, pillar) (29°53′⋅6N,
Light-buoy HM 24⋅0 (29°54′⋅2N, 32°32′⋅5E) (port hand) and
32°30′⋅7E) is moored in the SW corner of the fairway.
N and NE of Western Channel (2.220).
2.229
Newport Rock Channel 1 The position of the centre of each anchorage berth is
given as a bearing towards and a distance in cables from
Description
Green Island Light (29°54′⋅6N, 32°31′⋅8E).
2.221
1 Newport Rock Channel extends about 2 miles S from the Anchorage Position Maximum- Radius of-
S end of Eastern Channel (2.217) from abreast Newport Berth No draught swinging area
Rock (29°53′N, 32°33′E) (2.208) to the outer limits of the 1A 306°x 6⋅1 11⋅3 m 274 m
Port of Suez (2.280).
The channel, which is similar to Eastern Channel, is 2A 330° x 7⋅2 11⋅3 m 274 m
maintained at a depth of 23⋅5 m and is marked by 3A 331°x 4⋅1 11⋅3 m 274 m
light-buoys. 4A 357° x 6⋅3 11⋅3 m 274 m
(Directions for the Gulf of Suez Traffic Separation
Scheme from the vicinity of No 2 Light-float 5A 018° x 3⋅8 11⋅3 m 274 m
(295484V6N, 325324V1E) through to the 6A 023° x 6⋅8 11⋅3 m 274 m
Strait of Gûbâl (3.311) are given at 3.36)
7A 050° x 5⋅8 11⋅3 m 274 m
8A 042° x 8⋅7 11⋅3 m 274 m
ANCHORAGES IN SUEZ BAY
9A 062°x 8⋅1 11⋅3 m 274 m
Charts 3214, 2133 10A 084° x 7⋅2 11⋅3 m 274 m
General information
2.222 Group B anchorages
1 Anchorage berths in the N part of Suez Bay are well 2.230
sheltered from all except S winds, which may be frequent in 1 Group B anchorages lie in the W part of Suez Bay and
winter, and are usually accompanied by a heavy sea. are approached through Western Channel (2.220).

80
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2

2.231 2.235
1 The position of the centre of each anchorage berth is 1 Caution. A dangerous wreck (29°55′⋅8N, 32°31′⋅2E) lies
given as a bearing towards and a distance in cables from close N of the anchorage areas; a light-buoy (isolated
Green Island Light (29°54′⋅6N, 32°31′⋅8E). danger) is moored close N of the wreck.
Anchorage Position Maximum- Radius of- A mooring buoy is laid about 1
cables W of the wreck.
Berth No draught swinging area Group D anchorages
1B 102°x14⋅3 11⋅3 m 290 m 2.236
1 Group D anchorages lie on the S side of Western Channel
2B 093°x12⋅0 11⋅3 m 290 m
(2.220).
3B 079°x12⋅5 11⋅3 m 290 m 2.237
4B 064°x13⋅8 11⋅3 m 350 m 1 The position of the centre of each anchorage berth is
given as a bearing towards and a distance in cables from
5B 090°x15⋅1 11⋅3 m 290 m Green Island Light (29°54′⋅6N, 32°31′⋅8E).
6B 098°x17⋅3 11⋅3 m 290 m Anchorage Position Radius of
7B 075°x16⋅8 11⋅3 m 350 m Berth No swinging area
see caution at 2.232. 1D 345°x12⋅7 360 m
8B 095°x20⋅2 10⋅7 m 290 m 2D 004°x12⋅4 360 m
9B 086°x20⋅3 11⋅3 m 290 m 3D 021°x13⋅1 360 m
10B 080°x15⋅0 11⋅3 m 213 m 4D 033°x14⋅7 260 m
11B 090°x17⋅8 11⋅3 m 198 m 5D 043°x16⋅0 260 m
12B 091°x22⋅0 11⋅3 m 198 m 6D 047°x18⋅3 230 m
13B 079°x19⋅2 11⋅3 m 213 m
Group H anchorages
2.232 2.238
1 Caution. A dangerous wreck (29°54′⋅0N, 32°29′⋅9E), 1 Group H anchorage berths lie on the E side of Eastern
with a mast visible, fouls anchorage berth 7B; a light-buoy Channel (2.217), SW of Sha‘b Misallât (29°54′⋅5N,
(isolated danger) is moored close E of the wreck. 32°33′⋅9E) (2.207).
Danger area. See 2.252. 2.239
1 The position of the centre of each anchorage berth is
Group C anchorages
given as a bearing towards and a distance in cables from
2.233
Green Island Light (29°54′⋅6N, 32°31′⋅8E).
1 Group C anchorages lie N of Green Island (29°54′⋅7N,
32°31′⋅8E). The W-most of this group of anchorage berths, Anchorage Position Maximum- Radius of-
those numbered 6C to 16C, are approached through Western Berth No draught swinging area
Channel (2.220); anchorage berths numbered 1C to 5C are 1H 296°x12⋅5 12⋅6 m 274 m
approached through Eastern Channel (2.217).
2.234 2H 306°x14⋅8 12⋅6 m 274 m
1 The position of the centre of each anchorage berth is
given as a bearing towards and a distance in cables from OIL BERTH — BAHR EL QULZUM
Green Island Light (29°54′⋅6N, 32°31′⋅8E).
Chart 3214
Anchorage Position Maximum- Radius of-
Berth No draught swinging area Position
2.240
1C 218°x11⋅8 7⋅6 m 213 m 1 An offshore Oil Berth (29°55′⋅0N, 32°30′⋅7E) is situated
2C 208°x11⋅6 7⋅6 m 213 m within Suez Bay, about 1 mile NW of Green Island (2.206)
at the N end of Western Channel (2.220), and SSE of Sha’b
3C 188°x11⋅4 7⋅6 m 213 m Itûla (2.205).
4C 234°x8⋅6 9⋅1 m 305 m
Description
5C 213°x8⋅1 7⋅6 m 244 m 2.241
6C 170°x9⋅6 7⋅6 m 183 m 1 The berth consists of four dolphins with six mooring
7C 161°x10⋅8 7⋅6 m 183 m buoys laid in a pattern around the berth; the berth is
connected to the shore by a submarine oil pipeline which is
8C 159°x9⋅0 9⋅1 m 213 m laid to a point on the shore about 2 miles N of the berth and
9C 143°x9⋅4 9⋅1 m 244 m close E of the small basin (2.242).
A light-buoy (special pillar) is moored about 1
cables
10C 143°x12⋅4 7⋅6 m 183 m
SSE of the berth at the N end of Western Channel (2.220).
11C 134°x12⋅0 7⋅6 m 183 m 2.242
12C 145°x6⋅58 10⋅7 m 244 m 1 Basin. A small basin, contained between two breakwaters
which extend in a V-shape about 1 cables S from the shore
13C 123°x6⋅5 10⋅7 m 183 m and are protected by an outer detached breakwater, is
14C 105°x 6⋅7 10⋅7 m 183 m situated close W of the landing position of the submarine oil
pipeline.
15C 100° x 4⋅7 7⋅6 m 183 m
Beacons stand on the outer end of the main breakwaters
16C 075° x 4⋅8 10⋅7 m 183 m and at each end of the detached breakwater.

81
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2
2.243
1 Light. A light is exhibited from the dolphin that lies
second from S of the four dolphins that comprise the berth
(2.241).
Maximum size of vessel handled
2.244
1 The berth can accommodate vessels of up to 60 000 dwt
with a maximum length of 228 m and a maximum draught
of 10⋅3 m.
VEGETABLE OIL BERTH —
BAHR EL QULZUM
Chart 3214
Position
2.245
1 An offshore vegetable oil discharge berth (29°55′⋅2N,
32°29′⋅4E) is situated in the NW part of Suez Bay SSW of
Sha’b Itûla (2.205).
Description
2.246
1 The berth consists of four mooring buoys connected to
the shore by a submarine oil pipeline which lands on a point
on the shore about 1 mile W of the berth. The pipeline then
continues to a palm oil factory which stands a short distance
inland.
2 A light-buoy (port hand) is moored close S of the berth.
Another light-buoy (port hand) is moored about 6 cables
E of the berth, N of Group B anchorages (2.230) and close
S of a detached shoal, with a least depth over it of 0⋅4 m.
A further light-buoy (port hand) is moored about 8 cables
SSW of the berth off the W side of the Group B anchorages.
2.247
1 Leading beacons:
Front beacon (black with white diamond topmark; 6 m
high) (29°55′⋅8N, 32°28′⋅5E).
Rear beacon (similar construction; 6 m in height)
(1
cables from front).
The alignment (302°) of these beacon marks the approach
to the berth and leads clear and SW of both Qal‘a Kebîra
(2.206) and Sha’b Itûla Shoals (2.205).
2.248
1 Basin. A small narrow basin, situated between two
breakwaters, lies about 1 mile NW of the berth; there are
depths of less than 2 m at the head of the basin.
‘ATÂQA
Chart 3214
Position
2.249
1 ‘Atâqa (29°54′N, 32°28′E) is a small town and port
situated on the W shore of Suez Bay, N of Gûnet el
‘Adabîya (2.259).
Description
2.250
1 The port of ‘Atâqa comprises of two main parts:
North part. A fish harbour, a lighter wharf, a shipyard
and quays for ‘Atâqa quarry.
South part. An enclosed basin protected by a curved
breakwater which initially extends ENE, from a point on the
shore close S of ‘Atâqa, then turns towards the N.
2.251
1 Landmark. A black water tank, standing close to a water
pumping station, is situated about 1 mile S of ‘Atâqa.
82
2.252
1 Danger area. A dangerous coral shoal area (29°54′⋅2N,
32°28′⋅6E), through which it is considered unsafe to
navigate, lies about 5 cables E of the N end of the fish
harbour (2.253) and SW of the Group B Anchorage area
(2.230).
Basins and berths
2.253
1 Fish Harbour. A fish harbour which lies in the N part of
the port is protected to the E by a detached boulder
breakwater. The small harbour so formed is approached
through an entrance channel, marked at its outer end by a
pair of light-buoys (port and starboard hand); both the
channel and harbour area are dredged to a least depth of
4⋅0 m.
Light. A light (29°53′⋅9N, 32°28′⋅0E) (green post) is
exhibited from the S end of the detached breakwater.
2.254
1 Lighter quay and shipyard. A lighter quay and shipyard
lie SW of the fish harbour; both are protected to the SE by a
further detached boulder breakwater.
Lights are exhibited from the NE (red post) and SW
(green post) ends of the detached boulder breakwater SE of
the lighter quay.
2.255
1 Quarry quays. Loading quays for ‘Atâqa quarry,
connected with the railway system by a tramway, are situated
between the enclosed basin and the shipyard.
A number of cranes between 5 tonnes and 10 tonnes
capacity stand on the quays.
Light. A light is exhibited from the head of the quarry
quay.
MARSA BADR
Chart 3214
Position
2.256
1 Marsa Badr (29°53′N, 32°28′E) is situated in the SW part
of Suez Bay, between the ports of ‘Atâqa (2.249) and El
‘Adabîya (2.261).
Description
2.257
1 The berthing complex consists of quays, dolphins and
mooring buoys all situated in the vicinity of a small
promontory on which stand a number of conspicuous silos.
Approach
2.258
1 Two buoys (29°53′⋅5N, 32°28′⋅8E) (red spar) are moored
in the NE approach to the quays.
GÛNET EL ‘ADABÎYA
Chart 3214
Description
2.259
1 Gûnet el ‘Adabîya (‘Adabîya Bay) (29°52′N, 32°29′E),
which forms the SW corner of Suez Bay, is a small bay
entered NW of Râs el ‘Adabîya, a low sandy spit fronted by
a drying bank which extends about 8 cables NE of the spit;
a light-buoy (N cardinal) marks the NE extremity of the
drying bank.
2 The bay is encumbered with rocks and shoals; its S shore
being fringed by a coral reef. A prominent stranded wreck
lies about 4 cables E of Râs el ‘Adabîya.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2

Off-lying dangers Leading beacons

2.260 2.268
1 Sha‘b ‘Atâqa (‘Atâqa Reef) (29°53′⋅1N, 32°29′⋅4E), Sha‘b 1 Two pairs of leading beacons stand in the vicinity of the
Mansîya (Mensiya Reef) (8 cables ESE) and an unnamed port assisting the approach to the harbour.
reef (1 miles NNW) are all drying reefs lying in the 2.269
approaches to Gûnet el ‘Adabîya. 1 S pair of beacons:
Lights. Sha’b Mansîya Light (black and white framework Front beacon (diamond topmark) (29°51′⋅9N,
structure, cross topmark) (29°52′⋅9N, 32°30′⋅4E) is exhibited 32°28′⋅6E).
from Sha‘b Mansîya. Rear beacon (diamond topmark) (360 m from front).
Sha‘b ‘Atâqa Light (white framework tower, black bands) The alignment (242°) of these beacons indicates the SW
is exhibited from Sha‘b ‘Atâqa. side of Gûnet el ‘Adabîya (2.259).
2.270
1 N pair of beacons:
Front beacon (pole with black and white bands)
EL ‘ADABÎYA HARBOUR (29°52′⋅3N, 32°28′⋅5E).
Rear beacon (pole with black and white bands, cross
General information topmark) (close W).
The alignment (275°) of these beacons indicates the
Chart 3214 approach to the harbour area.
Position Traffic
2.261
2.271
1 El ‘Adabîya Harbour (29°52′⋅5N, 32°28′⋅5E) is situated in
1 In 2001 the port was used by 13 vessels.
the SW part of Gûnet el ‘Adabîya (2.259).

Function Arrival information

2.262 Outer anchorages
1 The port is used for the import of bulk wheat and other 2.272
foodstuffs. 1 ‘Adabîya anchorages lie close W of Sha‘b ‘Atâqa
(29°53′⋅1N, 32°29′⋅4E) (2.260).
Port Authority The position of the centre of each anchorage berth is
2.263 given as a bearing towards and distance in miles from Green
1 ‘Adabîya Port Authority, c/o Red Sea Port Authority, PO Island Light (29°54′⋅6N, 32°31′⋅8E).
Box 1, Port Tewfik, Suez, Egypt.
Anchorage Position Maximum Radius of-
Berth No draught swinging area
Description
2.264 1 059°x2⋅83 11⋅3 m 213 m
1 The main harbour area consists of a broad main quay 2 054°x2⋅88 11⋅3 m 213 m
which extends about 3 cables SE from the coast. A lighter
2.273
wharf extends from the root of the main quay about 2 cables
1 Mooring buoys are laid close SE of the small basin
S to a small basin protected by a jetty which extends NE.
(2.264).
Mooring buoys are laid in the outer part of the harbour,
SE of the small jetty. Pilotage
2.265 2.274
1 Harbour development work is in progress (1993) on a 1 Pilotage is compulsory and is available 24 hours.
container terminal which includes the extension of the line of
the quay NNW from the N side of the broad main quay to Tugs
Marsa Badr (2.256). 2.275
1 Tugs are available.
Density of water
2.266 Berths
1 Density 1⋅030 gms/cm#.
Alongside berths
Approach 2.276
2.267 1 South west berths. Two berths are situated on the SW
1 Gûnet el ‘Adabîya (2.259), the port and the anchorages of side of the main broad quay, the outer-most berth is reported
El ‘Adabîya, should be approached through a buoyed to be 187 m in length with a depth alongside of 11 m; the
channel, situated SW of No 3A Light-buoy (29°53′⋅6N, inner-most berth is reported to be 233 m in length with a
32°29′⋅9E), which leads SE of Sha‘b ‘Atâqa (2.260). depth alongside of 9 m.
The channel, which is about 4 cables long and over Note. There is a least charted depth alongside this part of
1 cable wide, has depths from about 14⋅7 to 15⋅7 m. It is the inner quay of 7⋅3 m.
marked at its outer end by C1 and C2 light-buoys (red and Outer berth. There is a wharf head berth along the outer
green cylindrical) and at its inner end by C3 and C4 end of the main broad quay with a length of 178 m and a
light-buoys (red and green cylindrical). depth alongside of 12 m.
2 When clear of the inner end of the channel, course may 2 North east berths. Two further berths are situated along
be adjusted for the harbour (2.276) or for the anchorage the NE face of the quay, the outer-most berth is reported to
(2.272). be 187 m in length with a depth alongside of 13 m; the

83
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2

inner-most berth 233 m in length with a depth alongside of Port services

9 m.
Vessels are restricted, when using these berths, to berthing
Facilities
during the hours of daylight only and with their bows facing
2.278
W.
1 Cranes of up to 70 tonnes capacity; mobile crane
Lighter wharf. The lighter wharf has least depths
10 tonnes capacity; floating crane 8 tonnes capacity.
alongside of 2⋅4 m.
2.277
1 New berths. Berths Nos 6 to 9, with a total length of Supplies
725 m, are under construction parallel to the coast on 2.279
reclaimed land NNW of the main quay. 1 Fuel oil; fresh water; fresh provisions.

PORT OF SUEZ
General information Density of water
2.287
1 Density 1⋅030 gms/cm#.
Chart 3214
Position
2.280 Local weather
1 Port of Suez (Bûr el Suweis) (29°57′N, 32°33′E) borders 2.288
the N shore of Suez Bay (29°54′N, 32°32′E). 1 During March and April, the wind, known locally as
Khamsin (1.268) may close the port and the Suez Canal.

Port limits Arrival information

2.281
1 The limits of Port of Suez, as shown on the chart, are
bounded on the S by a line joining Râs el ‘Adabîya Anchorage
(29°52′N, 32°31′E) to the S entrance of Newport Rock 2.289
Channel (2.221), thence due E to a position on the S side of 1 See 2.222.
the entrance to Ghubbet Shadd el ‘Uyûn (29°52′N, 32°37′E).
The N limit of the port is bounded by the S entrance to Pilotage
the Suez Canal.
2.290
1 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels entering, leaving,
moving or changing berth in Port of Suez; there are no night
Approach
movements.
2.282
Pilotage in Port of Suez is undertaken by the Suez Canal
1 All N-bound vessels should pass E of No 2 Light-float
Authority; it is compulsory for all vessels except those
(29°48′⋅6N, 32°32′⋅1E) and all S-bound vessels W of the
vessels exempted by Suez Canal Authority Regulations and
float.
Egyptian vessels of less than 300 scgt.
2 Pilots are normally embarked at the main anchorage
waiting area (2.16) N of Conry Rock (3.36); vessels should
Submarine cables
be ready to stop to embark the pilot, or to anchor as
2.283
directed; a pilot or accommodation ladder should be lowered
1 See 2.227.
ready on the lee side.
Pilotage signals See 2.87.
Port Authority
2.284 Foul weather arrival
1 Red Sea Port Authority, PO Box 1, Port Tewfîk, Suez, 2.291
Egypt. 1 Vessels are recommended not to enter the Port of Suez
anchorage area when the pilot boat is prevented from
attending due to foul weather.
Limiting conditions However, masters may make a request to the Suez Canal
Authority expressing their wish to enter Suez Roads on their
own responsibility, giving their length and draught. This
Tidal levels request may be replied to by the Suez Canal Authority
2.285 confirming the closure of the port, that entering is on the
1 Mean spring range about 1⋅5 m; mean neap range about sole responsibility of the master and allocating to the vessel
0⋅9 m. See Admiralty Tide Tables, Volume 3. an available anchorage berth.
2.292
1 Vessels departing the Suez Canal. Vessels leaving the
Abnormal levels Suez Canal in foul weather will be informed if a pilot for
2.286 Port of Suez cannot be embarked and will be allocated an
1 See 2.214. anchorage berth.

84
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2
2 Vessels wishing to proceed to sea without a pilot should
request the Suez Canal Authority’s permission to do so on
their own responsibility by contacting Ismailia (SUQ) stating
‘I wish to go to sea on my own responsibility. Please
confirm’ and await a reply. They may then proceed to sea if
they receive a reply, stating ‘You may proceed to sea on
your own responsibility’.
2.293
1 In foul weather vessels may also be authorised by the
Suez Canal Authority to enter the Port of Suez anchorage
area from the main waiting anchorage area (2.16), or to
depart the Port of Suez anchorage area for sea without
embarking a pilot.
Tugs
2.294
1 Tugs are available.
Traffic regulations
2.295
1 The following extracts are part of the traffic regulations
taken from the Suez Canal Authority Rules of Navigation
published by the Suez Canal Authority.
For further information consult the Suez Canal Authority
Rules of Navigation handbook.
2.296
1 General rules. Traffic within Port of Suez is regulated by
the following:
a) All vessels shall conform to the International
Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea.
b) Navigation shall be limited to the approved
channels only.
c) Crossing or overtaking in the channels is strictly
forbidden.
d) Vessels must proceed with caution, and at reduced
speed.
e) Vessels must not anchor except in the anchorages.
2.297
1 Movements within Port of Suez. Vessels entering the
port from sea, or leaving the port for sea, should use
Western Channel (2.220) except vessels anchoring in
anchorage berths 1C to 5C (2.233) which should use the
Eastern Channel (2.217).
2.298
1 Vessels entering the canal from the Port of Suez and the
area NW of Green Island, from the anchorages in Groups A
(2.228) and B (2.230) and anchorage berths 8C to 16C
(2.233), should use Western Channel (2.220), joining Eastern
Channel (2.217) SE of Green Island (29°54′⋅7N, 32°31′⋅8E).
Vessels in anchor berths 1C to 7C (2.233) which should
proceed directly to the canal entrance.
2.299
1 Vessels leaving the canal direct to sea should proceed
through Eastern Channel (2.217).
2.300
1 Vessels entering the port from the canal should use
Eastern Channel (2.217) and then Western Channel (2.220)
except for vessels anchoring in anchor berths 1C to 7C
(2.233) which may proceed directly to these berths.
2.301
1 Priority of movement in Port of Suez:
(i) Vessels leaving the canal.
(ii) Vessels entering the canal.
(iii) Vessels coming from sea must wait outside the
port until Eastern Channel (2.217) is clear.
85
(iv) Vessels leaving the anchorages in Port of Suez.
(v) Vessels leaving Bûr Ibrâhîm Basin (2.304), El
Mînâ’ el Gedîda (2.317), El ‘Adabîya (2.261) and
the Petroleum Basin (2.322).
(vi) Vessels using the Oil Berth (2.240).
Harbour
Storm signals
2.302
1 During periods of S gales, which are most liable to occur
between October and March, a black flag is displayed by
day, and three red lights vertically disposed at night, from
the storm signal station (2.307) situated near the S corner of
South Basin.
Port closed signals
2.303
1 When Port of Suez is closed due to bad weather two
black cylinders, vertically disposed, are displayed by day; at
night a green light between two red lights are exhibited from
the Suez Canal Authority signal station (2.307) situated on
the NW side of the canal at Port Tewfîk (2.196).
Basins and berths
Bûr Ibrâhîm Basin
2.304
1 Description. Bûr Ibrâhîm Basin (29°56′⋅4N, 32°33′⋅6E) is
the port area of the town of Suez (El Suweis) which is
situated about 1 miles N.
2.305
1 Function. The port is mainly concerned in the import and
export of general cargo. The principal imports are coffee,
coal, flour, coal, machinery and grain.
2.306
1 In 1998 the estimated population of Suez was 437 000.
2.307
1 Description. Bûr Ibrâhîm Basin consists of North Basin
and South Basin which are separated by a central mole
extending WSW from the NE side of the harbour.
A storm signal station stands close to the edge of the
outer wall on the S corner of South Basin, about 2 cables S
of the front leading light; a Suez Canal Authority signal
station stands about 2 cables farther ESE.
2.308
1 North Basin. Depths within the basin vary between 3⋅7 m
and 8⋅8 m. North Quay, situated on the NW side of the
basin, is constructed of stone and has depths alongside of
8⋅8 m.
The middle part of the NW side of the central mole is
faced with a wooden wharf about 80 m in length with
depths alongside from 6⋅4 to 8⋅5 m. Several short spurs
situated NE of this wooden wharf have depths from about
3⋅7 to 6 m outside them; there are depths of 8⋅2 m off the
SW end of the central mole.
2.309
1 South Basin. Depths within the basin vary between 4⋅4
and 8⋅5 m. South Quay, situated on the SE side of the basin,
is constructed of stone and has depths alongside from 4⋅4 to
6⋅4 m; a small jetty is situated about 100 m inside its SW
end.
The SE side of the central mole generally has alongside
depths of 8⋅2 m.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2

2.310 2 Immediately within the W entrance to the harbour there

1 Berthing. Small local craft lie alongside in South Basin; are depths of over 10 m.
others anchor and secure their sterns to bollards on the In the E entrance, which leads through to the entrance to
quays. Bûr Ibrâhîm Basin there are lesser depths; depths of less than
Local knowledge. It is not safe for vessels without local 5 m encumber part of the E entrance.
knowledge to secure alongside in South Basin. 2.318
2.311 1 Lights. Lights are exhibited from the W end of the
Berth No Usage Length Draught detached breakwater (black and white metal beacon)
(29°56′⋅3N, 32°32′⋅7E); and from the E end of the same
1 General cargo/ferries 100 m 7⋅6 m breakwater (black and white metal beacon) (5cables E).
2 General cargo 100 m 7⋅9 m A further light (29°56′⋅4N, 32°32′⋅4E) is exhibited from
the S end of the W breakwater which forms the W side of
3 General cargo 150 m 7⋅9 m
El Mînâ’ el Gedîda.
4 General cargo 150 m 7⋅9 m 2.319
5 General cargo 150 m 7⋅9 m 1 Caution. In El Mînâ’ el Gedîda, obstructions and
wreckage may be encountered within the 5 m contour line.
6 General cargo/ferries 150 m 7⋅9 m Mariners are advised to keep a good lookout and navigate
7 General cargo/ferries 150 m 7⋅9 m with extreme caution when within this area.
8 General cargo/ferries 150 m 7⋅9 m 2.320
1 Approach. The W entrance to El Mînâ’ el Gedîda is
9 General cargo 110 m 7⋅3 m approached by passing close N of the NW end of the Group
10 General cargo 110 m 7⋅3 m C anchorage berths (2.233); thence through an unmarked
entrance channel dredged to 8⋅1 m (1983).
11 General cargo 110 m 6⋅7 m
A buoy (29°56′N, 32°32′E) (port hand) is moored on the
2.312 N side of the approach to the unmarked, dredged approach
1 Floating dock. Suez Odense Marine Service operate a channel.
floating dock (1.218) which is moored about 1cables S of 2.321
the entrance to Bûr Ibrâhîm Basin. 1 Moorings. A number of lighter and small craft moorings
The dock is approached through a channel, dredged to are laid in the E part of the harbour, close N of the NW side
10 m, which is entered from close to the S extremity of the of Bûr Ibrâhîm Basin (2.304).
Suez Canal; note the area of foul ground which lies W of 2.322
the inner end of the approach channel. 1 Petroleum Basin (29°57′⋅2N, 32°31′⋅8E) is situated in the
2.313 NW corner of El Mînâ’ el Gedîda (2.317).
1 A dry dock (1.218) is situated at the NE end of Bûr 2.323
Ibrâhîm South Basin. 1 Description. The Petroleum Basin is constructed of stone
2.314 quays which are 490 m long on its N side, 419 m long on
1 Approach. The entrance channel to the basin is its E side, and 685 m on its W side.
approached from the vicinity of Group C anchorages 2.324
(2.233). 1 Maximum size of vessel handled. Vessels of 18 000 dwt,
The approach then leads through a channel, dredged to with a maximum length of 169 m and a draught of 8 m can
7⋅2 m (1983), which leads between two outer moles and into be handled at the facility.
the entrance to Bûr Ibrâhîm Basin. 2.325
2.315 1 Berths. There are a total of seven berths for the use of
1 Leading lights: tankers.
Front light (black and white framework tower) Along the whole length of the W breakwater, both inside
(29°56′⋅3N, 32°33′⋅5E). and outside of the basin, there are five concrete jetties with
Rear beacon (black and white framework tower) off-lying dolphins, for use by both tankers and vessels
(200 m from front). bunkering; a concrete jetty and two small piers are also
The alignment (060°) of these light-beacons which stand situated within the basin.
on the central mole, leads through the approach channel and Depths. The Port Authority should be consulted regarding
into the outer part of the basin. depths alongside these berths.
2 Lights are also exhibited from the heads of the entrance 2.326
moles (white towers, black bands). 1 Local knowledge. Vessels should contact the harbour
2.316 authorities for the latest information regarding the Petroleum
1 Vessel traffic service. Permission to enter either of the Basin before berthing at the facility.
basins must be obtained from the Captain of the Port at the 2.327
port office situated on the SE side of the South Basin. 1 Landmarks:
A number of chimneys stand about 4 cables N of the
basin among an area of storage tanks.
Light. A light is exhibited from a lattice tower (black and
El Mînâ’ el Gedîda white bands, diamond topmark) (29°57′⋅2N, 32°32′⋅0E)
2.317 standing on the E arm of the Petroleum Jetty.
1 El Mînâ’ el Gedîda (29°57′N, 32°33′E) is a large harbour 2.328
area bounded on the N by the mainland, on the SE by Bûr 1 Leading lights:
Ibrâhîm Basin (2.304), on the W by a breakwater extending Front light (mast) (29°57′⋅4N, 32°31′⋅8E).
about 1 mile SE from W side of the Petroleum Basin Rear beacon (mast; two lights 2 m apart) (130 m from
(2.322), and fronted to the S by a detached breakwater. front).

86
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 2

The alignment (334°) of these leading light-beacons, Facilities

which stand on the central part of the N side of the basin, 2.331
indicate the track through the entrance to the Petroleum 1 Mobile cranes; floating cranes; floating workshop;
Basin. hospitals; deratting and certificates issued; oily waste disposal
Note. These lights are only exhibited when vessels are facilities into barges.
entering or leaving the basin.
2.329
1 Approach. The basin is approached through a channel
which lies between the 5 m depth contours on the W side of
the harbour basin. The channel has depths generally in Supplies
excess of 8⋅3 m. Note there is a least depth in this area of 2.332
5⋅7 m situated just outside the 5 m contour, about 1 cables 1 Fuel and diesel oil supplied alongside or by lighter; fresh
SE of the E pierhead of the basin. water alongside or by lighter; fresh provisions.
Caution. Note the shoal area, with a least depth over it of
1⋅3 m, which lies off the bend in the breakwater, on the W
side of the entrance to the basin.

Port services Motorboats and yachts

2.333
Repairs 1 Mariners are advised that motor boats and yachts transit
2.330 the Suez Canal and when they are arranging or awaiting
1 Large repairs can be undertaken; dry dock with a length transit of the canal they are required to berth at the Suez
of 148 m; ship hoist 2000 tonnes capacity; floating dock. See Canal Yacht Club which is owned by the Suez Canal
1.218. Authority.

87
Home Contents Index

Chapter 3 - Gulf of Suez

30' 33° 30' 34° 30'

30° 30°

Suez
Bay

2132
3.76
Sokhna
Port
12

30' 30'

Râs Abu el Darag 2133

Râs Abû Suweira
3.36

Râs Za'farâna

29° 29°
Râs Budran Oil Terminal
3.251
2132

2132 3.270
Wâdi Feirân Oil Terminal

Râs Abu- Bakr

2373 Râs Gihân
30' 30'
3.
39

2132
Râs Ghârib
3.130

2375
28° 333 Râs Garra 28°
Râs Zeit

EG YPT 2374
S

ai
tr

t 3.
of 41
2374 G
ub
al

30' 30'
Shaker Island

3043
5501 Mariners' Routeing Guide
Hurghada
3.367

27° 27°
30' Longitude 33° East from Greenwich 30' 34° 30'
0205

88
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
GULF OF SUEZ
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 159, 2373, 2374
Scope of the chapter
3.1
1 The area covered by this chapter comprises the waters
of the Gulf of Suez from Suez Bay (29°54′N, 32°32′E) to
Shaker Island 165 miles SSE.
The main route through the Gulf of Suez and the Strait
of Gubal (3.311) follows the IMO-adopted Gulf of Suez
TSS and is described at 3.18.
The chapter is divided into the following sections:
Gulf of Suez and Strait of Gubal Traffic Separation
Scheme (3.18).
Gulf of Suez oil and gas fields (3.43).
Gulf of Suez west side (3.72).
Gulf of Suez east side (3.233).
Strait of Gubal (3.311).
Description
3.2
1 The Gulf of Suez, which is known to the Egyptians as
Khalîg el Suweis, includes both Suez Bay and the Strait of
Gubal (3.311) and has a total length of about 175 miles and
a width between 10 and 25 miles when S of Suez Bay.
Topography
3.3
1 The Gulf of Suez is bordered by high land which, in
many places, approaches close to the coast and often
affords conspicuous landmarks.
Coral reefs front both sides of the gulf; on the E side in
particular they extend a considerable distance offshore.
Depths
3.4
1 Mariners are warned that some areas of the Gulf of Suez
are incompletely surveyed and uncharted shoals may exist.
These areas are represented on Admiralty charts by upright
soundings and broken depth contours.
In the gulf and within the Strait of Gubal there are a
number of outlying shoal patches.
2 Much of the charted hydrographic information outside
the TSS is based on old and imperfect survey information.
Most of these areas have not been surveyed since 1872,
and then only by leadline, and they may contain uncharted
coral or rock pinnacles which could be dangerous,
especially to VLCCs.
See also source data diagrams on individual charts.
Hazards
3.5
1 The Gulf of Suez is recognised as an area where special
problems for navigation exist owing to its limited width,
which is further restricted by dangerous reefs and shoals,
offshore oil and gas installations, and the volume of traffic
navigating in the area.
Attention should therefore be paid to these particular
hazards when navigating within the Gulf of Suez.
89
Radio reporting
3.6
1 A radio report is required from vessels bound for the
Suez Canal. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 6
(3) for further information.
Routeing
3.7
1 Chart 5501, Mariners’ Routeing Guide, should be
consulted when planning passage through the Gulf of Suez.
The Routeing Guide gives information on passage
planning, routeing regulations, aids to navigation, radio
reporting and other navigational advice.
Flow
3.8
1 Tides. In the N part of the Gulf of Suez between Suez
(29°57′N, 32°33′E) and Râs Ghârib, 100 miles SSE, HW
occurs almost simultaneously.
In the S part HW occurs at the time of LW at Suez and
vice versa.
3.9
1 Tidal streams. With a rising tide at Suez the tidal
stream throughout the gulf is N-going and on a falling tide
at Suez it is S-going.
In mid-channel both streams tend to follow the
alignment of the Gulf with a maximum rate of 1kn at
springs and kn at neaps.
2 In the vicinity of Râs Abu el Darag (29°23′N, 32°34′E)
and near Sherâtîb Shoals (28°36′N, 33°08′E) which have
strong tide races over them even in calm weather, and
elsewhere within the gulf the direction of the stream is
uncertain.
In the Strait of Gubal (27°45′N, 33°50′E) the streams
attain rates between 1 and 2 kn setting N for longer than
they do when setting S.
3 In the vicinity of the reefs that lie within the Strait of
Gubal the stream frequently sets towards the reefs; off the
various islands within the strait, the set is uncertain.
3.10
1 Tidal levels. At Suez (29°57′N, 32°33′E) the mean
spring range is about 1⋅5 m and the mean neap range is
about 0⋅9 m.
See Admiralty Tide Tables, Volume 3 for further
information.
Oil and gas exploration and exploitation
3.11
1 The Gulf of Suez is Egypt’s most prolific area of crude
oil production which in recent years has accounted for 80%
of the country’s oil. There are over 200 platforms in the
area; these platforms are shown on large scale charts as are
all known wells.
Numerous oil installations also exist on both shores of
the Gulf of Suez.
2 The oil rigs and platforms are mostly marked by lights
and in some cases, near traffic lanes, by coded racons; see
3.44. Mariners are warned that a number of these are
temporary and they should not rely on their charted
positions. Due caution is required when navigating in the
vicinity of oil rigs and production platforms.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
3 Production platforms within the separation zones may be
situated close to the limits of the zones; other platforms are
situated at least 500 m beyond the outer limits of the traffic
separation lanes.
4 Oilfields are still being developed and mobile drilling
rigs may well be encountered. It may be difficult to
distinguish between mobile rigs and charted platforms. The
positions of mobile rigs are not charted and at times they
will drill within the traffic lanes; pipe-laying barges will
also occasionally work within the lanes. As a result vessels
may be caused to enter the separation zones or leave the
TSS.
5 The operation and movement of mobile drilling rigs are
usually made known by local radio warnings, local Notices
to Mariners, NAVAREA IX messages and by navigation
warnings broadcast by the rigs on VHF. These warnings
usually recommend that vessels reduce speed 5 miles before
reaching the area of the mobile rig, avoid overtaking in the
vicinity of the rig, and pass at least 7 cables from the rig or
pipe-laying barge.
Restricted areas surround most of the oilfields.
See cautionary notes on the relevant charts.
Visibility
3.12
1 Visibility within the Gulf of Suez may be reduced by
strong S winds, which mostly occur between February and
May, raising sand and dust storms.
Intense gas flares and bright lights within the oilfields
and at the oil terminals, particularly on the Tor Bank (3.40)
and near Râs Shukheir (3.40), may make it difficult to
identify the navigation lights of other vessels in the
vicinity.
Fixed navigational lights may sometimes be sighted well
beyond their listed range due to abnormal refraction.
Aids to navigation
3.13
1 Aids to navigation including lights, racons, light-beacons
and light-floats are established throughout the Gulf of Suez
to aid safe navigation of the TSS and the safe approach to
the major oil terminals situated within the Gulf of Suez.
The disposition and range of the lights is such that,
under normal conditions of operation and visibility, vessels
should be within sight of at least two fixing marks at all
times whilst transiting the TSS.
2 Any information regarding faults or changes to the aids
to navigation is broadcast by Serapeum Radio (SUZ).
GULF OF SUEZ AND STRAIT OF GUBAL TRAFFIC SEPARATION SCHEME
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 333, 2133, 2373, 2374, 2375
Description
3.18
1 The Gulf of Suez and Strait of Gubal TSS was
established in the Gulf of Suez to separate S-bound and
N-bound shipping. It is IMO-adopted and Rule 10 of The
International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea
(1972) applies.
The scheme, which is shown on the relevant charts,
extends from a position about 5 miles S of Râs el ‘Adabîya
(29°52′N, 32°31′E) (2.259) to a position E of Shaker Island
(27°30′N, 34°00′E).
2 Traffic Lanes and crossing places for vessels
approaching the Ain Sukhna Terminal (29°35′N, 32°23′E)
90
Mariners are requested to keep a continuous listening watch
on SUZ broadcasts and to report any aids to navigation
which are malfunctioning or are out of position, but have
not already been mentioned in the broadcasts. See
Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 3 (1).
Shore based radar surveillance is confined to the Suez
Canal, Suez Bay, and the N approaches to the TSS.
3.14
1 Caution. Mariners are warned that navigational aids in
the Gulf of Suez are reported to be unreliable. They may
be missing, unlit or out of position. Vessels should navigate
with particular caution.
Anchorages
3.15
1 An anchorage for deep draught vessels waiting to enter
the Suez Canal is established between South Shoal
(29°39′N, 32°36′E) and Conry Rock (10 miles N) (3.36).
See 2.14 for further details of S approach anchorages to the
canal.
2 There are many anchorages in the Gulf of Suez suitable
for use by small vessels in bad weather, but, as they are all
near reefs, caution is necessary when approaching them.
The sun should be astern and a lookout kept from a high
point on the vessel. See 1.10 and The Mariner’s Handbook
for information on navigation in coral waters.
When anchoring it is advisable to keep a moderate
distance offshore as wind shifts are often sudden and
unexpected.
Transhipment anchorages
3.16
1 Two transhipment areas, designated A and B, have been
established, as shown on the charts, 6 miles SSE of
Conry Rock (29°48′N, 32°34′E) and 3 miles SE of South
Shoal (29°39′N, 32°36′E).
Submarine cables
3.17
1 Submarine cables, as shown on the chart, are laid from a
position about 2 miles SSW of Râs el ‘Adabîya (29°52′N,
32°31′E) (2.259) and extend S through the Gulf of Suez
following the line of the TSS.
An area in which anchoring and fishing are prohibited
owing to submarine cables extends about 2 miles E and
12 miles S from Râs Muhaggara (29°49′N, 32°29′E), as
shown on the chart.
(3.101) from the main N and S-bound traffic separation
lanes, and for vessels departing the terminal to join the
main traffic separation lanes, are indicated on charts 2373
and 2133. Laden VLCCs cross the S-bound lane once or
twice each day to discharge at the terminal.
3 An IMO-adopted precautionary area is established in the
approaches to Râs Shukheir Oil Terminal (28°08′N,
33°18′E). The recommended direction of traffic flow
through the precautionary area for vessels using the
terminal, or transiting between the terminal and adjacent
oilfields, is shown on charts 333 and 2374.
There are no designated inshore traffic zones within the
Gulf of Suez TSS.
For further information, see the Annual Summary of
Admiralty Notices to Mariners, Notice No 17.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
Routeing
3.19
1 See 3.7.
Route
3.20
1 The route through the Gulf of Suez TSS from Suez Bay
(29°54′N, 32°32′E) to the S entrance to the Strait of Gubal
(27°30′N, 34°06′E) leads about 168 miles SSE.
Rules and recommendations
3.21
1 The fact that a vessel is on transit through the Gulf of
Suez TSS Scheme does not give that vessel any special
privilege or right of way.
Vessels using the traffic lanes must proceed at a safe
speed taking particular account of the volume of traffic and
conditions of restricted visibility.
2 Particular account should be taken of the possibility of
meeting crossing traffic in the Precautionary Area off Râs
Shukheir (3.40) and in the junction off Ain Sukhna
Terminal (3.101). Vessels should be in a heightened state of
readiness to manoeuvre in these areas.
3 The traffic lanes in the Gulf of Suez are narrow, and, in
places, the separation zone between them is only 5 cables
wide; many fixed platforms lie within the separation zones.
Exceptional care is needed when overtaking so as not to
enter the separation zone or force an overtaken ship to do
so.
Attention is drawn to Rule 10 of the International
Regulations for Preventing Collisions At Sea (1972).
Depths
3.22
1 Charted depths throughout the Gulf of Suez TSS are
generally well in excess of 20 m. However, within the
scheme, least charted depths of 23⋅5 m lie about 8 and
9 miles SE of Râs Ruahmi (28°44′N, 32°50′E) and about
6 miles SE of Râs Ghârib (28°21′N, 33°06′E).
2 A shoal depth of 12⋅5 m lies in the N corner of the
precautionary area E of Râs Shukheir (3.40), about
2 miles N of Râs Shukheir Light-float (28°10′N,
33°20′E). A light-buoy (isolated danger; racon) is moored
about 5 cables S of the shoal.
3 A shoal, with a least depth over it of 20 m, lies about
2 miles SW of Shag Rock (27°47′N, 33°53′E) (3.42), close
NE of the boundary of the N-bound lane of the TSS. A
light-buoy (isolated danger; racon) is moored close W of
the shoal.
A shoal with a depth of 29⋅5 m over it and a dangerous
wreck lie 1 mile SE.
A shoal area with a least charted depth of 27 m over it
lies about 6 miles SE of Shag Rock.
See caution at 3.4.
Caution
3.23
1 The coast between Râs Misalla (29°49′N, 32°37′E) and
Râs Sudr (14 miles S) is fringed with coral reefs. If sailing
outside the N-bound traffic separation lane vessels are
advised to remain outside the 30 m depth contour to clear
Conry Rock (3.36) and the other shoal patches which lie in
this vicinity.
91
Hazards
3.24
1 An area declared dangerous due to mines, in which
navigation is prohibited, lies NW of Râs Ab Bakr
(28°33′N, 32°56′E), as shown on the chart. See Appendix I.
An extensive marine farm lies close N of the above
prohibited area.
Pilotage
3.25
1 There are no regular pilots available for passage through
the Gulf of Suez.
Radio reporting
3.26
1 Vessels bound for the Suez Canal should, when
approaching North AS Light-float (29°35′N, 32°33′E),
report to the Port of Suez Harbour Office on VHF. See
Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3) for further
details.
Submarine cables
3.27
1 See 3.17.
Regulations
3.28
1 IMO approved regulations. The following rules for
vessels navigating in the Gulf of Suez have been approved
by the IMO.
1.1 Ships should take into account that crossing
traffic may be encountered in the traffic junction E
of Ain Sukhna (3.101) and in the precautionary
area off Râs Shukheir (3.40), and should be in a
high state of readiness to manoeuvre in these
areas.
2 1.2 Exceptional care is needed, when overtaking
another ship within a lane, not to enter the
separation zone or force the overtaken ship to do
so.
1.3 Ships navigating in the Gulf of Suez are
requested to keep continuous listening watch on
the Suez Gulf Traffic Information Broadcasts and
report any aids to navigation which are
malfunctioning or are out of position and which
are not already included in the Suez Gulf Traffic
Information Broadcasts.
3 2.1 All ocean-going ships should have their radar in
effective use by day and night throughout the
passage between Shaker Island and the Port of
Suez as an aid to achieving maximum feasible lane
conformity and avoiding risk of collision.
Particular care is required for strict adherence to
the confines of relevant traffic lanes.
2.2 Ships proceeding S from Suez [Suweis] should be
alert for tankers heading for the SUMED Oil
Terminal off Ain Sukhna.
4 2.3 N-bound tankers heading for the SUMED Oil
Terminal should report their intention of using the
traffic junction off Ain Sukhna (3.101) on the
appropriate frequencies.
2.4 All ships N and S-bound when navigating through
the precautionary area off Râs Shukheir (3.40) or
in the vicinity of the July Oilfield (3.57) should
avoid overtaking in the traffic lanes in these areas.
5 2.5 All ships, including service and supply craft
serving the oil workings in July (3.57), Ramadan
(3.56) and Morgan Oilfields (3.60), proceeding in
and out of Râs Shukheir Oil Terminal (3.152)
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
should only cross the S and N-bound traffic flow
through the precautionary area off Râs Shukheir.
Within the precautionary area local rules apply
relating to crossing traffic.
6 2.6 Tankers leaving the Râs Shukheir Oil Terminal
(3.152) and intending to join the N-bound traffic
lane should only do so when no through S-bound
traffic is in the vicinity and should always report
their movements to other ships beforehand on
VHF.
7 2.7 Ships anchored in the designated waiting area for
Râs Shukheir should ensure that they are never
less than  mile from the edge of the S-bound
traffic lane and should pay special regard to their
correct light signals for ships at anchor. They
should also show their deck lights.
3.29
1 Egyptian regulations. The Egyptian authorities have
issued the following further instructions to all vessels
transiting the Gulf of Suez TSS:
1. No overtaking whatsoever between the parallels of
28°00′N and 28°20′N.
2. No overtaking near any area congested with rigs
or oil fields.
3. Reduce speed in the vicinity of, and avoid
approaching, rigs, seismic vessels and oil field
platforms.
2 4. Vessels transiting the TSS between the parallels of
29°25′N and 29°35′N, must co-ordinate their
passage with any VLCC proceeding to Ain
Sukhna Oil Terminal (3.101).
5. Keep a continuous radar watch.
6. Keep a continuous watch on VHF channel 13 for
navigational warnings broadcast by oil rigs.
Navigational warnings are broadcast by Serapeum
Radio (SUZ). See Admiralty List of Radio Signals,
Volume 3 (1) for further details.
VHF radio watch
3.30
1 Vessels within the Gulf of Suez should maintain a
continuous listening watch on VHF; see Admiralty List of
Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Prohibited area
3.31
1 It is prohibited to approach Shaker Island (27°30′N,
34°00′E) closer than 3 km (1⋅62 miles) by day and 6 km
(3⋅24 miles) by night.
This regulation does not apply to shipping using the
Gulf of Suez TSS.
Local magnetic anomaly
3.32
1 The normal magnetic variation has been observed to
decrease by 1° when passing Shaker Island (27°30′N,
34°00′E).
Principal marks
3.33
1 Major lights — east side Gulf of Suez:
Qâdd el Tawîla Light (white daymark on framework
tower, 39 m in height; racon) (29°48′N, 32°38′E).
92
Lahata Light (white daymark on framework tower,
39 m in height; racon) (29°41′N, 32°41′E).
3.34
1 Major lights — west side Gulf of Suez:
Râs Muhaggara Light (white daymark on framework
tower, 39 m in height) (29°49′N, 32°28′E).
Ain Sukhna Light (white daymark on framework
tower, 39 m in height; racon) (29°36′N, 32°21′E).
Râs Abu el Darag Light (white round tower on white
square building; racon) (29°23′N, 32°34′E).
Râs Za’farâna Light (white round stone tower and
white square dwelling, 25 m in height; racon)
(29°07′N, 32°40′E).
Râs Ruahmi Light (black GRP tower, 10 m in height;
racon) (28°43′N, 32°49′E).
False Râs Ghârib Light (white GRP tower, red stripe,
10 m in height) (28°31′N, 32°58′E).
Râs Ghârib Light (white daymark on white metal
framework tower, white dwelling, 39 m in height;
racon) (28°21′N, 33°07′E).
El Mallâha Light (red GRP tower, 10 m in height)
(28°15′N, 33°10′E).
Râs Shukheir Light (white square on framework
tower, 17 m in height) (28°08′N, 33°17′E).
Râs Dîb Light (black GRP tower, 10 m in height)
(28°02′N, 33°25′E).
Râs Zeit Light (white GRP beacon, red stripe, 10 m
in height) (27°57′N, 33°31′E).
Mersa Zeitîya Light (black GRP tower, white stripe,
10 m height) (27°50′N, 33°35′E).
3.35
1 Major lights — Strait of Gubal:
Ashrâfi Reef Light (black brick structure, white
bands) (27°47′N, 33°42′E).
Shag Rock Light (yellow beacon, black band; racon)
(27°47′N, 33°53′E).
Qâd Ibn Haddân Light (white rectangle on framework
tower, 39 m in height; racon) (27°48′N, 34°06′E).
Bluff Point Light (white GRP tower, 10 m in height;
racon) (27°41′N, 33°49′E).
Siyûl Kebîra Light (white GRP tower, black stripe,
10 m in height) (27°34′N, 33°53′E).
Râs Muhammad Light (white round GRP tower, black
bands, 10 m in height; racon) (27°44′N, 34°15′E).
Shaker Island Light (white round stone tower, black
stripe; white dwelling, black stripes; racon)
(27°27′N, 34°02′E).
Directions
Charts 2133, 2373
Suez Bay to Râs Ab Bakr
3.36
1 From a position about 3 miles SSE of Râs ‘Adabîya
(29°52′N, 32°31′E) (2.259) in the vicinity of No 2
Light-float (safe water) (29°48′⋅6N, 32°32′⋅1E) the track
initially leads S, passing (with positions given from Râs
Abu el Darag Light (29°23′N, 32°34′E)):
2 E of Râs Muhaggara Light (26 miles N) (3.34) which
is exhibited about 1 mile SW of Râs Muhaggara,
thence:
W of Conry Rock (25 miles N), which is marked
on its S side by Conry Rock Light-float (W
cardinal). See caution at 3.23. Thence:
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
3 W of Qâdd el Tawîla Light (25 miles N) (3.33).
Qâdd el Tawîla, a drying coral reef, extends W
from the coast in front of the light; deep water lies
about 3 cables from its W extremity. Thence:
E of Râs Sâdât Terminal (24 miles NNW) (3.98),
thence:
4 W of Râs Diheisa (23 miles N). ‘L’ Light-buoy
(starboard hand) is moored about 1 miles WSW
of Râs Diheisa on the E side of the deep draught
anchorage (2.14). Thence:
W of Lahata Light (18 miles NNE) (3.33), thence:
5 W of No 1 Light-float (safe water; racon) (17 miles
N) which is moored in the traffic separation zone
about 1 miles N of the designated crossing place
for traffic bound for Ain Sukhna Terminal (3.101).
See 3.29 with regard to co-ordination of passage
through the precautionary area with any VLCC
proceeding to the terminal.
3.37
1 Thence, the track continues S and SSE, passing:
W of South Shoal (16 miles N), a detached shoal
with three heads. The shoal is marked on its W
side by South Shoal Light-buoy (W cardinal). A
further detached shoal area, with a least depth over
it of 19⋅6 m, lies about 1 miles N. Thence:
2 E of Ain Sukhna Light (18 miles NW) (3.34) and
through the W-bound crossing area which lies off
off Ain Sukhna. The green sector (260°−273°) of
Ain Sukhna Light covers this designated crossing
place for vessels proceeding towards the terminal,
thence:
3 WSW of North AS Light-float (safe water)
(12 miles N) which is moored in the traffic
separation zone. Thence:
WSW of a detached shoal patch (12 miles NNE),
with a least depth over it of 18⋅3 m, which lies
about 3 miles WSW of Râs Sudr (3.239), thence:
4 WSW of South AS Light-float (safe water) (6 miles
NNE) which is moored in the traffic separation
zone close N of the designated crossing place for
traffic departing from Ain Sukhna Terminal (3.101)
and intending to join the N-bound traffic lane,
thence:
5 WSW of Râs Matârma (9 miles ENE) a low and
sandy point; an extensive lagoon indents the coast
E of the point. Two towers stand on the hilly
slopes about 6 miles E of the point; the SE tower
is black and conspicuous. Thence:
6 ENE of Râs Abu el Darag from which Râs Abu el
Darag Light (3.34) is exhibited; a ruined
lighthouse stands close inland. Abu el Darag
Shoal, a rocky shallow spit, extends about 8 cables
E from the shore from a position about 3 miles SE
of the Râs Abu el Darag Light; a stranded wreck
lies on the shoal. A conspicuous radio tower (red
obstruction lights) stands on the coast about
3 miles SSE of the light. Thence:
7 WSW of Râs Abu Suweira (14 miles ESE).
Chart 2373
3.38
1 Thence, passing (with positions given from Râs
Za’farâna Light (29°07′N, 32°40′E)):
WSW of Râs Lagia (14 miles NE). Qâd Mal’ab, a
coral bank extends up to 1 miles offshore
between Râs Lagia and Râs Mal’ab, thence:
93
ENE of Zaafarana Oilfield (4 miles NNE) (3.48),
thence:
2 ENE of Râs Za’farâna from which Râs Za’farâna
Light (3.34) is exhibited. A radio mast and a radio
tower stand close W of the point. A wind
generation complex stands on a ridge about 5 miles
NW of the point. Thence:
WSW of Râs Mal’ab (15 miles ENE) a low sandy
point; a water tower stands close N of the point.
The small harbour of Mersa Hammâm (3.286) lies
close SE of the point. Thence:
3 WSW of East Tanka Oilfield (18 miles ESE) (3.49)
which lies about 9 miles WSW of Râs Abu
Zenîma (3.289), thence:
WSW of North Amer Oilfield (24 miles SE) (3.51)
which lies within the traffic separation zone about
6 miles NE of Râs Ruahmi, and WSW of October
Oilfield (26 miles SE) (3.50) which lies on the E
side of the gulf about 8 miles SW of Râs Budran
(3.234). Thence:
4 ENE of Râs Ruahmi (24 miles SSE). Râs Ruahmi
Light (3.34) is exhibited from a position just in
from the coast, about 1 mile SSW of the point.
Submarine pipelines are laid to the North Amer
Oilfield (3.51) from a position close N of the
point. See also 3.22. Thence:
5 ENE of a shoal patch (28°36′N, 32°58′E) with a
depth of 19⋅8 m over it which lies just outside the
S-bound lane of the Gulf of Suez TSS. Two
further shoal patches, with least depths of 20 m
over them, lie about 2 miles and 1
miles W and
NW respectively. A prohibited area lies W of these
shoal patches. See also 3.24. Thence:
WSW of Râs Sherâtîb (28°40′N, 33°12′E), a low and
sandy point fringed with coral reefs, thence:
6 ENE of Râs Ab Bakr (28°33′N, 32°56′E) which is
fronted by a reef on the edge of which stands an
above-water rock. Submarine pipelines extend
NNE from the point to the October Oilfield (3.50)
and from various positions SE of the point to the
Amer Oilfield (3.54). Numerous conspicuous oil
rigs, tanks and flares together with other buildings
and settlements are situated on the flat coastal
plain which lies between Râs Ab Bakr and Râs
Ghârib (15 miles SE) (3.39). A jetty, situated about
3 miles SE of Râs Ab Bakr, is reported to be
radar conspicuous; two further jetties lie farther
SSE.
Charts 2374, 333
Râs Ab Bakr to Râs Zeit
3.39
1 From a position in the S-bound lane of the Gulf of Suez
TSS, about 5 miles ENE of Râs Ab Bakr (28°33′N,
32°56′E), the track continues for a farther 48 miles,
generally SE, passing (with positions given from Râs
Shukheir (28°08′N, 33°17′E)):
2 WSW of Sherâtîb Shoals (28°36′N, 33°08′E) a group
of rocky patches which lie about 6 miles SW of
Râs Sherâtîb (3.38) and extend up to 4 miles W of
Sha‘b el Hasa. The Belayim Oilfield (3.52) stands
in the vicinity of these shoals over which there is
a least depth of 6 m. A shallow rocky bank
extends from the coast S of Râs Sherâtîb, W
towards Sherâtîb Shoals; Sha‘b el Hasa is a drying
coral reef which lies at the W edge of this bank.
See also 3.9. Thence:
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
3 ENE of the Amer Oilfield (28°32′N, 32°58′E) (3.54),
thence:
ENE of False Râs Ghârib (28°29′N, 33°00′E). False
Râs Ghârib Light (3.34) is exhibited from a
position about 2 miles NW of the point. Thence:
WSW of Râs Gihân (22 miles N), thence:
ENE of Sha‘b Ghârib Oilfield (18 miles NW)
(3.55), thence:
4 ENE of Râs Ghârib (15 miles NW). Râs Ghârib
Light (3.34) is exhibited from a position close NW
of the point; the old light tower stands 50 m SSW
of the new light. Numerous leading lights and
beacons are situated in the vicinity of, and up to
1 miles S of, Râs Ghârib. These aids are
intended for use by vessels anchoring at the three
Sea Berths of Râs Ghârib Oil Terminal (3.131). An
oil production platform situated about 3 miles SE
of Râs Ghârib is connected by submarine pipeline
to the July Oilfield (3.57). Thence:
5 ENE of El Mallâha Light (9 miles NW) (3.34),
thence:
6 WSW of the July Oilfield (6 miles N) (3.57) which is
situated within the separation zone of the Gulf of
Suez TSS and is the centre of a complex web of
submarine pipelines whose layout can best be seen
on Chart 333. Racons transmit from platforms
J–29 and J–62 which form part of the oilfield
complex. A dangerous wreck lies close within the
separation zone NW of the oilfield.
3.40
1 Thence from Tor Bank to Râs Zeit, passing:
2 WSW of Tor Bank (8 miles NE) which lies in the
centre of the Gulf of Suez and extends about
12 miles SE from a position E of Râs Ghârib. The
bank, for the most part, has depths over it between
20 m and 30 m, sand and shell, but much lesser
depths lie over several coral patches on the bank.
Moresby Shoal (28°11′N, 33°27′E), one of the
coral patches, has a least depth over it of 5⋅5 m.
Ramadan Oilfield (3.56), Morgan Oilfield (3.60)
and Badri Oilfield (3.58) are all situated on Tor
Bank. ASMA−B (28°13′⋅2N, 33°20′⋅5E) is the
SW-most platform which stands on Tor Bank,
close NE of the boundary of the N-bound lane of
the TSS. Thence:
3 ENE of Râs Shukheir which rises in gravel cliffs to
an elevation of about 77 m. A group of brown
tanks stands on top of these cliffs together with a
number of radio masts; further installations lie at
their foot. Râs Shukheir Light (3.34) is exhibited
from a position close S of the point; flares burn
intermittently 5 cables and 1 mile SSE of the light.
Râs Shukheir Oil Terminal (3.152) lies close E of
the point, thence:
4 SW of Râs Shukheir Light-float (safe water; racon)
which is moored in the centre of the precautionary
area which lies in the approaches to Râs Shukheir
Oil Terminal. A shoal patch, with a least depth
over it of 12⋅5 m and marked by a light-buoy, lies
in the NE corner of the precautionary area, see
3.22. Thence:
5 NE of the shoal patch (6 miles ESE) with a depth
of 12⋅5 m over it, which lies just outside the limit
of the SE-bound traffic lane. A light-buoy (isolated
danger; racon) is moored ENE of the patch.
Thence:
94
SW of the Nessim Oilfield (13 miles E) (3.62),
thence:
6 NE of Râs Dîb (9 miles SE) from which Râs Dîb
Light (3.34) is exhibited. Conspicuous wrecks lie
both 8 cables WNW and about 3 and 4 miles SE
of the point; all are reported to be radar
conspicuous. The S-most of the three wrecks is by
far the largest. Thence:
7 SW of the shoal patch (16 miles ESE), with a least
depth over it of 14 m, that lies about 2 miles SW
of Felix Jones Patches. Amal Oilfield (3.64) and
Waly Oilfield (3.65) lie on Felix Jones Patches; a
charted depth of 8 m (position doubtful) lies on the
E side of the shoal, thence:
8 NE of Râs Zeit (17 miles SE) a slight projection
from the coast. Râs Zeit Light (3.34) is exhibited
from a position about 5 cables NW of the point. A
flare, whose position is approximate, stands on the
coast about 4 miles SSE of the point.
Chart 2375
Râs Zeit to Shaker Island
3.41
1 From a position in the S-bound lane of the Gulf of Suez
TSS, about 2 miles NE of Râs Zeit (27°57′N, 33°31′E), the
track continues SE for about 40 miles to a position at the
S-end of the TSS, NE of Shaker Island Light (3.35)
passing (with positions given from Shag Rock Light
(27°47′N, 33°53′E)):
2 SW of SIDKI B oil production platform (16 miles
NW) (3.66) which is connected by submarine
pipeline to Platform GS–365 which lies about
3 miles NNW. An area in which anchoring and
trawling is prohibited lies close S of platform
GS−365. Thence:
3 NE of East Zeit Terminal (16 miles WNW) (3.183)
and Zeit Bay Terminal (3.194) which lies 1 mile S.
Umm el Kimân (27°50′N, 33°35′E), a low sandy
islet, is situated on the S part of a coral reef about
9 cables SW of East Zeit Terminal. A coastguard
station stands on the islet and a large brown flat
roofed building stands on its SW point. Mersa
Zeitîya Light (3.34) is exhibited from the coast
about 2 miles SSW from Umm el Kimân. Thence:
4 SW of East Zeit Oilfield (12 miles NW) (3.67)
which lies between the traffic lanes in the middle
of the traffic separation zone; Poynder Shoal lies
about 4 miles NE. Thence:
SW of the Hilal Oilfield (9 miles WNW) (3.69)
which lies within the traffic separation zone,
thence:
5 NE of oil production platform WHP2 (light, racon
(10 miles WNW)) (see Chart 2374 plan Zeit
Terminals) part of the Ashrâfi Oilfield (3.70)
which lies off the NE side of the shoal areas N of
the Ashrâfi Islands (3.313). A further oil
production platform lies about 1
miles SE, about
5 cables SW of the boundary of the S-bound lane
of the TSS. Thence:
6 NE of Ashrâfi Reef Light (9 miles W) (3.35) which
is exhibited from the E side of a small islet that
lies on the E side of Ashrâfi Channel (3.339),
thence:
7 SW of Sha‘b Ali (4 miles NNW), a below-water coral
reef with numerous heads, which lies between
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
3 and 8 miles off the NE shore of the gulf. The N
end of the reef lies about 3 miles WSW of Râs
Kenîsa (3.235), the S end is marked by Shag Rock
Light (3.35). In thick weather the W side of Sha‘b
Ali should be given a prudent berth; a shoal, with
a least depth over it of 17⋅4 m, lies off the NW
side of the reef.
3.42
1 Thence, from Shag Rock to N end of the Red Sea,
passing:
2 SW of Shag Rock from which Shag Rock Light
(3.35) is exhibited; a racon transmits from the
light. In 1984 a line of breakers was observed
extending SE from Shag Rock indicating a
possible underwater reef in this vicinity. A shoal,
with a least depth over it of 20 m, marked by a
light-buoy (isolated danger; racon), lies about
2 miles SW of Shag Rock close NE of the of the
boundary of the N-bound lane of the TSS; a
dangerous wreck lies about 1 mile SE. See also
3.22. Thence:
3 NE of Bluff Point (7 miles SW) the NE extremity of
Gûbâl Saghîra the S-most of several islets standing
on Sha‘b Gûbâl (3.357); Bluff Point Light (3.35) is
exhibited from the point. Sha‘b Gûbâl which
extends about 3 miles NNW of Gûbâl Island
(27°39′N, 33°48′E) has some black coral
above-water rocks at its edges, its E side is
steep-to; Gûbâl Island rises to a rounded summit
123 m high; the E side of the island is steep-to. A
beacon (iron tripod, cone topmark, 9 m in height)
marks the NW edge of the reef. Thence:
4 SW of Qâd Ibn Haddân (11 miles E), Qâd Ibn
Haddân Light (3.35) is exhibited from a position
about 1 miles NNE of the point. Sha‘b Surûr lies
4 miles W of the point, thence:
5 NE of Sha‘b Abu Nuhâs (12 miles S). Sha‘b Abu
Nuhâs Light (red square on beacon; racon) stands
on the reef. Navigation in the vicinity of Sha‘b
Abu Nuhâs should be undertaken with care as the
reef only uncovers at extreme low water and there
are strong undercurrents on its N side. Siyûl
Kebîra, which stands on a drying reef that is
clearly defined and mostly steep-to, lies about
3 miles WSW; Siyûl Kebîra Light (3.35) is
GULF OF SUEZ — OIL AND GAS FIELDS
General information
Charts 2373, 2374, 2375
3.43
1 There are numerous platforms, well-heads, other
obstructions and flares in the central and southern portions
of the Gulf of Suez. Vessels should exercise special
caution, particularly at night, when navigating in these
areas.
Intense gas flares are present over the Tor Bank (3.40)
(28°13′N, 33°23′E) and Râs Shukheir (28°08′N, 33°17′E)
(3.40).
Lights and fog signals
3.44
1 Production platforms and associated structures including
tanker moorings, storage tankers and platforms on
pipelines, generally exhibit Mo (U) lights (unless otherwise
95
exhibited from the E side of the islet. Sha‘b Umm
‘Usk, a below-water reef whose edges are clearly
visible in daylight, lies 3 miles WNW of Sha‘b
Abu Nuhâs. Blind Reef, which is small and
steep-to, lies 1 miles ESE of Siyûl Kebîra; this
reef is not clearly visible. Thence:
6 SW of Beacon Rock (13 miles ESE), known locally
as Wusool Abu Mahmûd, lies at the SE end of
Sha‘b Mahmûd, a below-water coral reef. Beacon
Rock Light (S cardinal beacon) is exhibited from
the rock, thence:
7 NE of Shaker Island (15 miles SSE), which forms the
SW entrance to the Strait of Gubal (3.311). The
island is rugged and attains an elevation of over
300 m at its SE end; the hills rising on the island
are divided by ravines, the sides of which are
steep. Shaker Island Light (3.35) is exhibited from
the SE extremity of the island. For prohibited area
see 3.31. Thence:
8 SW of Râs Muhammad (19 miles E), the S
extremity of the Sinai Peninsula, from which Râs
Muhammad Light (3.35) is exhibited. The point is
an abrupt broken cliff with a flat top, about 27 m
in height which descends on its N side to a low
plain of gravel and destroyed coral that together
form a peninsula connected to the mainland by a
narrow isthmus. Râs Muhammad should be
approached with caution at night as the cliff and
land are not easily visible; to the S and E the
point is steep-to and free of dangers. Black Hill,
about 2 miles NNW of the light, is black,
rounded and rises to a height of 58 m; a flat
sand-coloured hill, of nearly the same elevation,
lies SE of Black Hill. From the SW, in the middle
of the Strait of Gubal, these hills appear as islands
with Tr
n Island (27°57′N, 34°33′E) (8.31)
showing over them. Sha‘b el ‘Utâf is an extensive
reef which extends about 6 miles W from the W
side of Râs Muhammad. For area to be avoided,
see 3.322. Thence:
9 To a position about 5 miles E of Shaker Island Light
(27°27′N, 34°02′E) (3.35).
(Directions continue at 4.14, 5.15 and 8.8)
indicated), aircraft obstruction lights and audible fog
signals.
Restricted and prohibited areas
3.45
1 Unauthorised navigation is prohibited within 500 m of
all structures including storage tankers which can swing
about their moorings. Tankers manoeuvring in the vicinity
of platforms and moorings should also be given a wide
berth.
It is prohibited for vessels, other than vessels engaged in
servicing the oilfields, to enter the restricted areas, as
shown on the charts, which surround the Belayim Oilfield
(3.52) and the Badri (3.58) and Morgan Oilfields (3.60).
2 Further restricted areas, in which anchoring and fishing
are prohibited, encompass Zaafarana Oilfield (3.48),
Belayim Oilfield; Ramadan Oilfield (3.56), July Oilfield
(3.57), Badri Oilfield, Morgan Oilfield, Nessim Oilfield
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
(3.62), Amal Oilfield (3.64), Waly Oilfield (3.65), East Zeit
Oilfield (3.67), Hilal Oilfield (3.69), Ashrâfi Oilfield (3.70),
Sha‘b Ali Oilfield (3.68) and the Geisum Oilfield (3.71).
These areas are shown on the charts.
Uncharted drilling rigs and service vessels
3.46
1 Uncharted drilling rigs may be temporarily located, both
inside and outside the Gulf of Suez TSS, in the central and
southern portions of the gulf. Details are promulgated by
local Navigation Warnings.
Other uncharted structures, both lit and unlit, and
submerged installations, some marked by buoys, may exist.
For further information, see The Mariner’s Handbook.
Service vessels may be encountered crossing the main
shipping routes.
Pipelines
3.47
1 The direction and location of the various submarine
pipelines connecting the numerous offshore oil production
platforms in the Gulf of Suez are best seen on the chart.
Zaafarana Oilfield
Chart 2373
Description
3.48
1 Zaafarana Oilfield (29°11′N, 32°42′E) lies W of the
S-bound traffic lane of the Gulf of Suez TSS, about
4 miles NNE of Râs Za’farâna (29°07′N, 32°40′E) (3.38).
2 The oilfield consists of a Production Platform HB 77–5,
which is connected by submarine pipeline to Za’farâna
Terminal (3.125); a tanker storage facility is moored close
SW.
A racon transmits from the platform.
See also 3.45.
East Tanka Oilfield
Description
3.49
1 East Tanka Oilfield (28°57′N, 32°58′E) lies E of the
N-bound traffic lane of the Gulf of Suez TSS, about
12 miles WNW of Râs Budran (3.234).
The field is connected to the October Oilfield (9 miles
SE) (3.50) by oil and gas pipelines. See caution at 1.21.
A racon transmits from the N-most platform of the
oilfield.
October Oilfield
Description
3.50
1 October Oilfield (28°51′N, 33°04′E) lies E of the
N-bound traffic lane of the Gulf of Suez TSS, about
8 miles SW of Râs Budran (3.234).
The field is connected to the East Tanka Oilfield
(9 miles NW) by oil and gas pipelines, and to Râs Ab
Bakr (20 miles SSW) (3.38) which lies on the W side of
the gulf. A further oil pipeline is laid E from the field to
land on the E side of the gulf about 7 miles S of Râs
Budran.
See caution at 1.21.
96
North Amer Oilfield
Description
3.51
1 North Amer Oilfield (28°48′N, 32°56′E) lies in the
separation zone of the Gulf of Suez TSS, about 7 miles NE
of Râs Ruahmi (3.38).
Oil pipelines have been laid leading SW from the field
to land on the W side of the gulf close N of Râs Ruahmi.
Racons transmit from Platforms FF−83−2 and GG−83−2,
the two platforms which comprise the oilfield.
Belayim Oilfield
Charts 2373, 2374
Description
3.52
1 Belayim Oilfield (28°36′N, 33°08′E) which lies about
5 miles off the E side of the Gulf of Suez, in the vicinity
of Sherâtîb Shoals (3.39), consists of numerous oil
production platforms.
Oil, gas and water submarine pipelines have been laid
from the field to land on the E side of the gulf about
2 miles SSE of Râs Sherâtîb (3.38). See caution at 1.21.
2 A light exhibited about 5 miles WSW of Râs Sherâtîb
marks an above-water drill pipe.
A light (framework beacon, 7 m in height; racon) is
exhibited from Platform D 10 on the W side of the oilfield.
3.53
1 Restricted area. A restricted area, as shown on the
chart, surrounds the whole of the oilfield; only vessels
engaged in servicing the oilfield are permitted to enter this
area.
Anchoring and fishing are prohibited within the
restricted area.
See also 3.45.
Amer Oilfield
Chart 2374
Description
3.54
1 Amer Oilfield (28°32′N, 32°58′E) lies close off the W
side of the Gulf of Suez between Râs Ab Bakr (3.38) and
False Râs Ghârib (3.39).
Submarine pipelines connect each platform individually
to the shore.
A number of the production platforms have been
removed from the oilfield; the redundant pipelines are
shown on the chart.
Sha‘b Ghârib Oilfield
Description
3.55
1 Sha‘b Ghârib Oilfield (28°24′N, 33°05′E) lies close
offshore about 3 miles NW of Râs Ghârib (3.39);
submarine pipelines are laid from the platforms to the
shore.
Several jetties project from the shore in the vicinity of
the oilfield.
Ramadan Oilfield
Charts 333, 2374
Description
3.56
1 Ramadan Oilfield (28°18′N, 33°18′E) lies at the NW end
of the Tor Bank (3.40), E of the N-bound traffic lane of
the Gulf of Suez TSS, about 7 miles SW of Râs Sheikh el
Bitân (28°23′N, 33°24′E).
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
2 Various submarine pipelines, which are best seen on the
chart, are laid between the oilfield and the July Oilfield
(3.57), the Badri Oilfield (3.58) and to the shore. Further
submarine pipelines are laid between the oilfield and
Platform GS–277 which lies about 7 miles N, and Platform
SB−305 which lies about 7 miles E, close E of a shoal area
with a least depth over it of 8⋅6 m.
A racon transmits from a platform near the centre of the
oilfield.
See also 3.45.
July Oilfield
Description
3.57
1 July Oilfield (28°15′N, 33°15′E) lies within the
separation zone of the Gulf of Suez TSS, about 6 miles N
of Râs Shukheir (3.40).
Oil, gas and water submarine pipelines are laid S from
the oilfield to land on the W side of the gulf between Râs
Shukheir and a position about 4 miles NW. Further gas
pipelines are laid between the oilfield and the Ramadan
Oilfield (3.56). See caution at 1.21.
2 Platform SG300, from which a racon transmits, is
situated about 3 miles SE of Râs Ghârib (28°21′N,
33°07′E) and is connected to the July Oilfield by a
submarine oil pipeline; platform NJ−1 (28°19′⋅2N,
33°13′⋅7E) is situated in the middle of the separation zone
of the Gulf of Suez TSS, about 2 miles NNW of the N end
of the oilfield.
3 Racons transmit from Platform J–29, the W-most
platform; and Platform J–62, the E-most platform, of the
oilfield.
A conspicuous flare (28°15′N, 33°15′E), which is
connected by walkway to the central complex of the field,
is a useful mark to identify the oilfield.
See also 3.45.
Badri Oilfield
Description
3.58
1 Badri Oilfield (28°14′N, 33°27′E) lies on the E side of
the Tor Bank (3.40) and is connected by a web of oil, gas
and water submarine pipelines to the Morgan Oilfield
(3.60) which lies close S. See caution at 1.21.
2 A submarine oil pipeline has been laid between the
oilfield and the Ramadan Oilfield (3.56); an oil pipeline
leads SW to land on the W side of the gulf in the vicinity
of Râs Shukheir (3.40); and a gas pipeline has been laid
SSW from the S part of the oilfield to land in the vicinity
of the Râs Shukheir LPG Terminal (3.176).
A flare platform is situated on the SW side of the Badri
complex, about 11 miles ENE of Râs Shukheir.
3.59
1 Restricted area. A restricted area, as shown on the
chart, in which only vessels engaged in servicing the
oilfields are permitted to enter, encloses both the Badri and
Morgan Oilfields (3.60).
See restricted and prohibited areas 3.45.
Morgan Oilfield
Description
3.60
1 Morgan Oilfield (28°11′N, 33°28′E) lies on the SE part
of the Tor Bank (3.40) and is connected by a web of oil,
97
gas and water submarine pipelines to the Badri Oilfield
(3.58) which lies close N. See also 1.21.
2 Submarine oil and gas pipelines have been laid between
the Morgan Oilfield and the Nessim Oilfield (3.62), and an
oil pipeline has been laid between the oilfield and the
South Belayim Oilfield (3.63). Further oil, gas and water
pipelines, as shown on the chart, have been laid between
the oilfield and the W shore of the Gulf of Suez and
Platform GS–327 which lies off the E side of the gulf,
about 3 miles SW of El Tûr (3.298) outside the restricted
area.
3 A racon transmits from Platform M–72 in the SW part
of the oilfield; a number of gas flares burn from the
oilfield.
3.61
1 Restricted area. A restricted area, as shown on the
chart, in which only vessels engaged in servicing the
oilfields are permitted to enter, encloses both the Badri and
Morgan Oilfields.
See also 3.45.
Nessim Oilfield
Description
3.62
1 Nessim Oilfield (28°09′N, 33°32′E) lies close SE of the
Morgan Oilfield (3.60) to which it is connected by
submarine oil and gas pipelines.
Further pipelines are laid between the oilfield and
Platform GS–345 which lies about 3 miles S of the
oilfield outside the restricted area; a gas pipeline is laid
between the field and the South Belayim Oilfield (3.63).
See also 3.45 and 1.21.
South Belayim Oilfield
Description
3.63
1 South Belayim Oilfield (28°08′N, 33°39′E) (Younis
Oilfield) lies about 2 miles S of Sheikh Riyâh Harbour
(3.308) and is connected by a submarine oil pipeline to the
Morgan Oilfield (3.60) and by a submarine gas pipeline to
the Nessim Oilfield (3.62).
Amal Oilfield
Description
3.64
1 Amal Oilfield (28°04′N, 33°35′E) lies in the NE part of
Felix Jones Patches (3.40).
A submarine oil pipeline, which is laid between the
oilfield and the W shore of the Gulf of Suez, lands about
1 mile SSE of Râs Dîb (3.40).
A racon transmits from Platform AMAL–9 the only
platform situated over the oilfield.
See also 3.45.
Waly Oilfield
Description
3.65
1 Waly Oilfield (28°03′N, 33°36′E) lies on the SE side of
Felix Jones Patches (3.40) and is connected to the Morgan
Oilfield (3.60) by a submarine oil pipeline.
See restricted and prohibited areas 3.45.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
SIDKI B platform
Charts 2374, 2375
Description
3.66
1 Platform SIDKI B (27°57′N, 33°39′E) lies close E of the
N-bound traffic lane of the Gulf of Suez TSS, about
7 miles E of Râs Zeit (3.40).
The platform is connected to Platform GS–365
(27°59′⋅8N, 33°37′⋅6E) by a submarine oil pipeline, and to
a further platform situated in the buoyed channel which
leads between Sha‘b Sebîl (3.235) and Sha‘b Garra (3.235).
Submarine oil pipelines are laid between SIDKI B
platform to the W side of the gulf where they land about
3 miles SSE of Râs Zeit.
A racon transmits from the platform.
East Zeit Oilfield
Description
3.67
1 East Zeit Oilfield (27°53′N, 33°41′E) lies in the middle
of the separation zone of the Gulf of Suez TSS, about
5 miles ENE of Zeit Bay Terminal (3.194).
A submarine oil pipeline is laid about 5 miles WSW to
land on the W side of the gulf close W of East Zeit
Terminal (3.183).
A further platform (27°51′N, 33°43′E) with an
associated submarine pipeline, lies 1⋅9 miles farther SE.
Racons transmit from two of the platforms.
Sha‘b Ali Oilfield
Description
3.68
1 Sha‘b Ali Oilfield (27°51′N, 33°52′E), which comprises
several oil production platforms, lies on the W side of
Inner Channel (3.326) which separates Sha‘b ed Deqayeq
(3.329), a reef extending about 3 miles SW from Râs el
Millân (3.329), from Sha‘b Ali (3.41).
A submarine oil pipeline has been laid N from the
oilfield through the Inner Channel, then W, to land on the
W side of the Gulf of Suez about 3 miles SSE of Râs
Zeit (27°57′N, 33°31′E).
GULF OF SUEZ — WEST SIDE
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 2373, 2374, 2375
Area covered
3.72
1 The area described in this section extends from Râs el
‘Adabîya (29°52′N, 32°31′E) (2.259), which lies on the SW
side of Suez Bay (2.202), along the W side of the Gulf of
Suez to Umm el Kimân (27°50′N, 33°35′E) (3.41), the NW
entrance point to the Strait of Gubal (3.311).
Topography
3.73
1 Râs el Adabîya to Râs Ghârib. Between Râs el
‘Adabîya (29°52′N, 32°31′E) (2.259) and Râs Abu el Darag
(29 miles S) (3.37) the coast forms a bay which is fronted
by a reef. Several shoals and reefs lie up to about 2 miles
offshore including Strickland Shoal (29°41′N, 32°25′E) and
Harris Rock (29°38′N, 32°24′E) (3.103).
98
Hilal Oilfield
Description
3.69
1 Hilal Oilfield (27°50′N, 33°44′E) comprises a single oil
production platform situated in the middle of the traffic
separation zone of the Gulf of Suez TSS.
Submarine oil and gas pipelines are laid WNW from the
platform to land on the W side of the Gulf of Suez about
4 miles SSE of Râs Zeit (27°57′N, 33°31′E); a further gas
pipeline is laid between the platform and Platform GH–376
which lies on the E side of the gulf, about 1 miles N of
Poynder Shoal (3.41). See also 1.21.
A racon transmits from the platform.
Ashrâfi Oilfield
Description
3.70
1 Ashrâfi Oilfield (27°48′N, 33°43′E) comprises two
platforms situated N of the Ashrâfi Islands (3.313) and a
further platform standing on the E side of Ashrâfi Channel.
A submarine oil pipeline is laid between the oilfield and
Zeit Bay Terminal (3.194) on the W side of the Gulf of
Suez.
A racon transmits from the N-most platform of the
oilfield.
Geisum Oilfield
Chart 2375
Description
3.71
1 Geisum Oilfield (27°38′N, 33°42′E) lies on both sides of
Qeisûm Pass (3.348) which separates on its E side North
Qeisûm Island, a flat island with a hillock about 17 m high
in its NE part and joined to South Qeisûm Island (3.357)
by a coral reef, from the reefs extending W from Umm el
Heimât Island (3.350) and Umm el Heimât Saghîra Island
(3.348) on its W side.
A submarine oil pipeline is laid between the oilfield and
Zeit Bay Terminal (3.194).
See also 3.45.
2 The coast between Ain Sukhna (29°36′N, 32°21′E) and
Râs Abu el Darag is backed by Gebel el Galâla el
Baharîya, a range of mountains which attain heights of
over 1200 m; in the vicinity of Râs Abu el Darag the range
turns SW.
From Râs Abu el Darag to Râs Za’farâna (29°07′N,
32°40′E) the land rises gradually to the W and is of a
sandy appearance; the coast is again bordered by coral
reefs.
3 Gebel el Galâla el Qiblîya is a high table land extending
SW from a position 16 miles SW of Râs Za’farâna (3.38).
A remarkable nipple-shaped hill, which lies about 8 miles
SSW of Gebel Thelemet (29°00′N, 32°34′E) and is
surmounted by a cairn, forms the NE extremity of Gebel el
Galâla el Qiblîya.
Gebel Umm Tenâssib (28°31′N, 32°33′E) is a
rugged-topped mountain with a sharp conical peak.
4 Continuing SSE from Râs Za’farâna to Râs Ghârib
(28°21′N, 33°07′E) (3.39) the coast is backed by an
undulating desert plain rising gradually to the base of a
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3

range of mountains that stand between about 3 and The harbour is entered from the vicinity of the
20 miles inland. The coast, though indented, is without light-buoy (E cardinal) (29°38′⋅9N, 32°24′⋅4E) moored at
prominent points; it is again fringed with a coral reef. the outer end of the dredged and buoyed entry channel.
3.74 The entrance channel leads W passing between a pair of
1 Râs Ghârib to Umm el Kimân. Between Râs Ghârib outer breakwaters which extend from the shore on the N
(3.39) and Râs Dîb (28°02′N, 33°25′E) (3.40) the coast is and S sides of the entrance.
low and fringed by a reef; vessels should not approach this
coast within 1 miles or within the 20 m depth contour Port Authority
line. 3.79
2 Between Râs Shukheir (28°08′N, 33°17′E) (3.40) and 1 The harbour is administered by Sokhna Port
Umm el Kimân (27°50′N, 33°35′E) (3.41) the coast is Development Co., 29 Farid Street, Heliopolis, Cairo 11341,
again fringed by a reef. Egypt.
3 Gebel Ghârib (28°07′N, 32°54′E) is a solitary
precipitous peak which rises about 18 miles SW of Râs Limiting conditions
Ghârib to a height of 1757 m. It makes a good landmark Controlling depth
and the peak can often be seen at night from within the 3.80
Gulf of Suez. 1 The inner end of the entrance channel, the turning basin
4 Gebel el Zeit, a range of coastal mountains, backs the and the initial basin are dredged to a depth of 17 m.
coast between Râs Dîb and Umm el Kimân (3.41). The
summit of the range, which rises to 450 m in height, lies Deepest and longest berth
about 7 miles SE of Râs Dîb from where the land slopes 3.81
seaward to Râs Zeit (3.40) a slight projection from the 1 The initial berthing basin has two quays of 750 m length
coast. The S end of this range projects SSE to form a with alongside depths of 17 m.
peninsula which forms the E side of Ghubbet el Zeit
(3.213).
Maximum size of vessel handled
5 An undulating desert plain stretches W from Gebel el 3.82
Zeit rising gradually to the base of a range of mountains 1 The port can handle vessels up to 170 000 dwt.
which stands between about 12 and 15 miles inland. From
a distance the Gebel el Zeit range appears as islets. Arrival information
Notice of ETA
Local weather 3.83
3.75 1 On leaving previous port and 72, 48 and 24 hours in
1 Winds from the N are prevalent for most of the year advance. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3)
with a few dust storms. for further details.
Visibility is usually excellent, fogs are infrequent and
rain storms rare. Outer anchorages
Summers are hot and dry while winters are relatively 3.84
cool. 1 Eight designated anchorages for vessels waiting to enter
During periods of strong NW winds in the Gulf of Suez port lie within a waiting area 4 miles NE of the harbour
the weather is normally calm in the bay formed between entrance, as shown on the chart.
Râs el ‘Adabîya (29°52′N, 32°31′E) (2.259) and Râs Abu
el Darag (29 miles S).
Pilotage
3.85
1 The pilot boards 1 mile E of the light-buoy (E cardinal)
SOKHNA PORT (29°38′⋅9N, 32°24′⋅4E) moored at the E end of the entrance
channel, as shown on the plan.
General information Tugs
Chart 2132 plan of Ain Sukhna − North Port (Sokhna Port) and 3.86
Oil Terminal 1 Tugs are available.
Position Caution
3.76 3.87
1 Sokhna Port (29°39′N, 32°21′E) is situated on the W 1 The depths on both sides of the entrance channel have
side of the Gulf of Suez about 20 miles SSW of the Suez not been systematically surveyed. See note on the chart. A
Canal. depth of 6⋅3 m was reported in 2004 in 29°40′⋅7N,
32°24′⋅4E.
Function
3.77 Harbour
1 Sokhna Port is a completely new port whose first basin
opened at the end of 2000. General layout
The port will eventually consist of four basins with a 3.88
total quay length of 7⋅5 km. 1 Sokhna Port is entered through an entrance channel,
about 2 miles long and marked by light-buoys, which leads
Approach and entry to a turning basin, again marked by light-buoys, which is
3.78 situated SSE of the ports completed basin.
1 Sokhna Port is approached from a position at the W end A port control tower is situated on the N side of the
of the W-bound lane which leads across the Gulf of Suez harbour entrance close W of the root of the N entrance
TSS to the vicinity of Ain Sukhna Terminal (3.101). breakwater.

99
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3

Directions for entering harbour Pilotage

3.96
Entrance channel 1 Pilotage is compulsory.
3.89
1 From a position close S of the light-buoy (E cardinal)
Râs Sâdât Terminal
(29°38′⋅9N, 32°24′⋅4E) moored E of the outer end of the
entrance channel, the track leads W for about 2 miles, Charts 2133, 2373
passing between three pairs of light-buoys to the turning Position
basin. 3.97
3.90 1 The terminal (29°46′N, 32°27′E) lies about 2 miles
1 Leading lights: SSW of Râs Muhaggara Light (3.34) and about 3 miles W
Front light (white metal column) (29°38′⋅8N, of the N end of the S-bound lane of the Gulf of Suez TSS.
32°21′⋅1E).
Rear light (similar structure) (280 m from front). Description
2 From a position at the E end of the entrance channel the 3.98
alignment (270°) of the above leading lights leads through 1 Râs Sâdât Terminal consists of a storage tanker, moored
the buoyed entrance channel, passing: on a NNW heading. A submarine oil pipeline is laid from
3 N of S Breakwater Head Light (red metal column), the tanker to the W shore of the gulf.
thence:
S of N Breakwater Head Light (green metal column). Traffic
3.99
1 In 1995 the terminal was used by 2 vessels.
Berths
Alongside berths Ain Sukhna Oil Terminal
3.91
Charts 2132 plan of Ain Sukhna − North Port (Sokhna Port) and
1 A container terminal, fertiliser terminal and a liquid
Oil Terminal, 2133
cargo berth are situated on the SW side of the basin.
A Ro-Ro berth, general cargo berth and a bulk terminal Position
are all situated on the NE side of the basin. 3.100
1 The terminal (29°35′N, 32°23′E) lies about 6 miles W of
the S-bound lane of the Gulf of Suez TSS.
TERMINALS ON THE WEST SIDE
OF THE GULF OF SUEZ Description
3.101
1 Ain Sukhna Terminal is the S terminal of the SUMED
General information pipeline and consists of four SBMs moored between 1 and
Charts 2373, 2374 2 miles offshore, S and E of Ghubbet el Bûs, the bay
Regulations which fronts Ain Sukhna. Lights are exhibited from all four
3.92 SBMs.
1 Vessels in the Red Sea, bound for Egyptian ports, should See The Mariner’s Handbook for further information
request permission to enter Egyptian waters from the regarding SBMs.
relevant port authorities 48 hours before crossing the The SUMED (Suez-Mediterranean) pipeline carries about
parallel of 23°N. 80 000 000 tonnes of crude oil annually, between Ain
Vessels within the Gulf of Suez should maintain a Sukhna and Sidi Kerir.
continuous listening watch on VHF.
Port limits
For further information see Admiralty List of Radio
3.102
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
1 The port limits, which extend SE to include the
anchorage area (3.112), are best seen on the chart.
Sokhna Port — Gas Tanker Terminal
Offshore danger
Charts 2132, 2373 3.103
Position 1 Harris Rock (29°38′N, 32°24′E), a dangerous rock, lies
3.93 about 2 miles N of No 1 SBM.
1 Sokhna Port Gas Tanker Terminal (29°41′N, 32°22′E) is
situated near the village of Bîr Odeib, on the W side of the Caution
Gulf of Suez about 2 miles N of Sokhna Port (3.76). 3.104
1 Depths at the SBM berths may be reduced by up to
Description 5⋅2 m by seabed installations.
3.94
1 The terminal is approached through a 120 m wide Approach
approach channel, dredged to 8 m, marked at its outer end 3.105
by two light-buoys (special). 1 The approach to Ain Sukhna Terminal is from the Gulf
Mooring buoys are laid on the edges of the turning of Suez TSS, as shown on the chart.
basin which lies at the inner end of the approach channel, The N-most lane is for W-bound approaching traffic, the
off the terminal quay. SE lane for departing traffic.
3.95 The crossing places, to leave or to join the N and
1 Maximum draught permitted alongside the terminal S-bound lanes of the TSS, are also shown on the chart. See
quay is 7 m. regulations at 3.28 and 3.29.

100
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3

2 The W-bound approach traffic lane and the crossing Tidal stream
place through the separation zone from the N-bound lane 3.116
are covered by the green sector (260°−273°) of Ain Sukhna 1 Tidal stream at Ain Sukhna is reported to set parallel to
Light. the coast, setting N with the in-going stream and S on the
The SE-bound departure traffic lane and the crossing out-going, at a maximum surface rate of  kn.
place to the N-bound lane are covered by the red sector Tidal range is 1⋅5 m.
(298°–306°) of Ain Sukhna Light.
Berths
Traffic 3.117
3.106 1 Nos 1 and 2 SBMs, the NE and SW buoys of the
1 Approximately 350 vessels call at the port annually. complex, can handle vessels up to 350 000 dwt with a
maximum draught of 22⋅8 m.
Port Authority No 3 SBM, the NW buoy of the complex, can handle a
3.107 vessel up to 150 000 dwt with a maximum draught of
1 Arab Petroleum Pipeline Company (SUMED), El 16⋅7 m.
Iskandarîya (Alexandria). No 4 SBM, the SE buoy of the complex, can handle a
Deepest berth vessel up to 500 000 dwt with a maximum draught of
3.108 31⋅5 m.
1 No 4 SBM has a minimum depth of water in its vicinity 2 Subject to the prevailing weather conditions and the
of 40⋅9 m. approval of the terminal operator No 2 SBM can accept
vessels up to 400 000 dwt and No 3 SBM can accept
Maximum size of vessel handled vessels up to 200 000 dwt.
3.109
1 No 4 SBM can accommodate a vessel up to a maximum Berthing operations
of 500 000 dwt. 3.118
1 Mooring and discharging operations continue 24 hours a
Port radio day throughout the year, weather permitting.
3.110 Tankers secure to the SBMs with two buoy lines and
1 There is a port radio station for Ain Sukhna Terminal embark the oil hoses on their port side using a ship’s
For further information see Admiralty List of Radio Signals, derrick or crane, with a safe working load of at least
Volume 6 (3). 10 tonnes.
2 Vessels are requested to arrive at the terminal trimmed
Notice of ETA on an even keel.
3.111
1 On leaving previous port, and 72, 48 and 24 hours in Maximum permitted weather conditions
advance. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3) 3.119
for further details. 1 The SBMs at the terminal are designed to accommodate
vessels up to the following maximum prevailing conditions:
Anchorage Wind speed 35 kn.
3.112 Tidal range 2 m.
1 An anchorage area for tankers lies between about 2 and Wave height 3⋅4 m.
5 miles SE of No 4 SBM, as shown on the chart. Current: surface 2⋅0 kn; seabed 1⋅0 kn.
Anchorage may be obtained in depths of over 50 m on a 2 These parameters are relevant to the safety of the buoy,
sandy bottom. not the ship, and as such the mooring master has the
Caution. There are disused submarine cables in the authority to decide whether the vessel should remain
central part of this area. moored or vacate the berth due to adverse weather
conditions.
Pilotage
3.113 Facilities
1 Pilotage is compulsory. 3.120
Pilot and berthing master board, as shown on the chart, 1 There is no provision for oily waste disposal; medical
about 2 miles SE of No 4 SBM (29°34′⋅0N, 32°24′⋅5E), or facilities are only available at Suez.
in the anchorage, and remain on board while the vessel is
discharging. Supplies
For further information see Admiralty List of Radio 3.121
Signals, Volume 6 (3). 1 Fresh provisions may be obtained given advance notice;
fresh water is not available.
Tugs
3.114 Local regulations
1 Tugs are available. Mooring launches to assist in 3.122
berthing are also available. 1 Main engines are required to be kept at immediate
notice and vessels must be prepared to vacate the SBMs
Quarantine immediately on instructions from the berthing master.
3.115 Shore leave is not permitted.
1 Confirmation of a healthy crew all holding valid
vaccination certificates should be sent with ETA signal. Boat harbour
A port health officer boards on arrival. 3.123
Quarantine regulations for Ain Sukhna are similar to 1 A small harbour, protected by breakwaters, is situated at
those in force at Suez. the head of Ghubbet el Bûs.

101
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3

Za’farâna Terminal Offshore dangers

Chart 2373
Position
3.124
1 The terminal (29°10′N, 32°42′E) lies W of the S-bound
traffic lane of the Gulf of Suez TSS, about 4 miles NNE of
Râs Za’farâna (29°07′N, 32°40′E) (3.38).
Description
3.125
1 Za’farâna Terminal consists of a FPSO tanker connected
by a submarine oil pipeline to Zaafarana Oilfield (3.48).
A light is exhibited from the terminal.
Traffic
3.126
1 In 1995 the terminal was used by 3 vessels.
Maximum size of vessel handled
3.127
1 The FPSO can accommodate vessels of up to
130 000 tonnes dwt, up to a maximum draught of 16⋅7 m
and a maximum LOA of 259 m.
Anchorage
3.128
1 An anchorage area for vessels waiting to berth at
Za’farâna Terminal lies about 8 miles S of Râs Za’farâna
(29°07′N, 32°40′E), as shown on the chart.
Pilotage
3.129
1 Pilots board in the anchorage.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Râs Ghârib Oil Terminal
Charts 2132 plan of Râs Ghârib, 2374
Position
3.130
1 The terminal (28°20′N, 33°07′E) lies close W of the
S-bound lane of the Gulf of Suez TSS.
Description
3.131
1 Râs Ghârib Oil Terminal is a tanker loading facility
which consists of three sea berths lying close SSE of Râs
Ghârib (3.39) between about 3 cables and 9 cables offshore.
Traffic
3.132
1 Vessels totalling approximately 3 900 000 dwt call at the
terminal annually.
Prohibited area
3.133
1 A prohibited anchorage area encloses all three sea
berths. Anchoring within this area is prohibited only until
the vessel has been boarded by the Harbour Master who
will then direct the vessel to a sea berth or an anchorage.
The area extends from close S of Râs Ghârib (3.39) to a
position on the coast about 2 miles farther S and for about
1 miles offshore, as shown on the chart.
3.134
1 A submerged wreck, over which the depth is unknown,
lies close SE of Sea Berth No 1; a dangerous wreck lies
close SSW of the berth.
A number of other wrecks lie closer inshore in the
vicinity of the sea berths.
An oil production platform (3.39) lies about 1
miles
SE of Sea Berth No 3; obstructions and wells lie in the
vicinity of this platform.
Approach
3.135
1 The terminal should be approached from SE. See 3.143.
Local aids to navigation
3.136
1 Numerous light beacons and beacons are situated on the
shore in the vicinity, and up to 1 miles S, of Râs Ghârib.
These beacons are to assist vessels when berthing at the
sea berths.
The bearings and characteristics of the beacons are best
seen on the plan.
Port Authority
3.137
1 Egyptian General Petroleum Corporation, Osman Abdel
Hafiez Street, Cairo, Egypt.
Deepest berth
3.138
1 Sea Berth No 3 can accommodate vessels up to 16⋅8 m
draught.
Density of water
3.139
1 Density 1⋅025 g/cm3.
Maximum size of vessel handled
3.140
1 Sea Berth No 3 can accommodate vessels of
130 000 dwt, 290 m in length and a maximum draught of
16⋅8 m.
Local weather
3.141
1 During most of the year the winds are from the N
between force 3 and 5, but in December and January there
are a few calms.
On very rare occasions there are S gales of short
duration which make the anchorage untenable.
Rain hardly ever falls, and the infrequent sandstorms do
not interfere with work at the terminal.
2 The N wind causes some swell at the oil berths, but it is
not normally severe enough to interfere with the working
of lighters or boats of moderate size. It is unpleasant for
small boats except alongside the jetties and quay (3.146)
which are well protected.
Except in the vicinity of the jetties and quay there is
usually some swell on the beaches.
3 Winds up to 40 kn are experienced in summer but it is
mostly calm in winter. Care should be exercised if the wind
shifts to the W and more so if it shifts to the S.
Port radio
3.142
1 There is a port radio station for Râs Ghârib Oil Terminal
located in the harbour office which is situated about 1 cable
SSW of Râs Ghârib Light (3.34). For further information
see Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3).

102
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
Pilotage
3.143
1 Pilotage is compulsory.
The Harbour Master, who acts as a pilot, boards the
vessel in the waiting area which, as shown on the chart,
lies about 1 miles SE of Râs Ghârib; berthing and
unberthing is undertaken during daylight only.
For further information see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Tugs
3.144
1 Tugs are not normally available, but may be ordered if
required by agreement between the master and the
authorities.
Service boats available for mooring and unmooring.
Berths
3.145
1 Sea Berth No 1, the N berth of the complex, can handle
vessels up to 137 m in length with a maximum draught of
7⋅3 m.
The berth has a loading rate of 650 tonnes per hour.
Sea Berth No 2, the middle berth, can handle vessels up
to 183 m in length with a maximum draught of 9⋅7 m.
The berth has a loading rate of 1200 tonnes per hour.
2 Sea Berth No 3, the SE berth, can handle vessels up to
299 m in length with a maximum draught of 16⋅7 m.
The berth has a loading rate of 2000 tonnes per hour.
Each berth is connected to the shore by oil and water
submarine pipelines.
3.146
1 Other berths. A quay, with depths alongside of 5⋅2 m,
extends about 150 m from the coast from a position about
1 miles S of Râs Ghârib.
A jetty, with a depth alongside at its head of 0⋅9 m,
extends about 150 m SSE from the coast from a position
close SW of Râs Ghârib.
2 A second jetty, which lies about 1 cable farther S with a
depth alongside of about 2 m at its head, extends about
100 m ESE.
A stranded wreck lies on the reef between these two
jetties.
Berthing operations
3.147
1 Berthing and unberthing are only undertaken during
daylight.
Berthing at the Sea Berths may be delayed by strong
winds.
Facilities
3.148
1 Oily waste reception facilities are available at Sea Berth
No 3.
A small slip lies close S of the second jetty.
Supplies
3.149
1 Fresh provisions and stores available; fresh water not
available; fuel oil available by barge.
Communications
3.150
1 An airfield, connected to the terminal by road, is
situated about 2 miles S of Râs Ghârib.
103
Râs Shukheir Oil Terminal
Chart 333
Position
3.151
1 The terminal (28°08′N, 33°18′E) lies between 1 and
1 miles E and SE of Râs Shukheir (3.40).
Description
3.152
1 Râs Shukheir Oil Terminal consists of two offshore
loading berths connected by submarine pipelines to the
shore close SW.
Several large oil tanks stand on the shore S of Râs
Shukheir; a number of intense gas flares burn from
positions close to the coast S of the point.
An airfield is situated close to the coast about 5 miles
NW of the point.
Traffic
3.153
1 Approximately 240 vessels totalling 12 800 000 dwt use
the facility annually.
Offshore dangers
3.154
1 A submarine pipeline is laid NE from the shore to a
former offshore loading berth situated about 8 cables SE of
No 2 Berth.
Further oil, gas and water submarine pipelines are laid
NE from the shore 8 cables farther S. See caution at 1.21.
A dangerous wreck of an oil rig (position doubtful) lies
about 2 miles NNW of Râs Shukheir (28°08′N, 33°17′E).
Precautionary area
3.155
1 A Precautionary Area lies in the approaches to Râs
Shukheir Oil Terminal and the July (3.57), Ramadan (3.56)
and Morgan Oilfields (3.60) as indicated on the chart.
Vessels should keep Râs Shukheir Lanby Light-buoy
(3.40), which is moored in the centre of the area, on their
port side.
Approach
3.156
1 Vessels should approach Râs Shukheir Oil Terminal
through the precautionary area E of the terminal, following
the recommended direction of traffic flow as shown on the
chart.
Departure
3.157
1 All vessels leaving the terminal should time their transit
of the Precautionary Area to avoid impeding vessels in the
traffic lanes.
Tankers intending to join the N-bound traffic lane should
only do so when no through S-bound traffic is in the
vicinity; they should report their intended movements to
other vessels on VHF before leaving the terminal.
Port Authority
3.158
1 The terminal is operated by the Egyptian General
Petroleum Corporation, Al Qâhira (Cairo).
Local regulations
3.159
1 Vessels operating between the July Oilfield (3.57) and
the terminal should use the appropriate traffic lanes and the
precautionary area, and should conform to the normal
direction of flow in the N and S-bound lanes.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
Density of water
3.160
1 Density 1⋅025 g/cm3.
Maximum size of vessel handled
3.161
1 Both loading berths can handle vessels up to 305 m in
length.
Local weather
3.162
1 During most of the year the wind is NNW. It is
strongest during the period May to August, when it
occasionally reaches gale force and raises a swell which
renders the loading berths untenable.
Anchorage
3.163
1 A designated anchorage for vessels awaiting a berth at
the terminal lies on the E side of the Gulf of Suez about
1 miles S of Râs Abû Suweira (28°18′N, 33°33′E), as
shown on the chart.
Vessels leaving the designated anchorage should time
their transit through the precautionary area to avoid
impeding vessels in the N and S-bound traffic lanes.
2 Small vessels may obtain anchorage in the small bay
about 1 miles NW of Râs Shukheir (3.40); the holding
ground is of fine sand and is reported to be poor. There are
foul areas in this vicinity and two above-water wrecks.
Caution. Vessels directed to anchor near the terminal
should never anchor N of the oil berths owing to the
numerous submarine oil and gas pipelines extending N and
E from Râs Shukheir. See also 3.47.
Port radio
3.164
1 There is a port radio station for Râs Shukheir Oil
Terminal which should be contacted 6 hours before arrival
with confirmation of ETA.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Notice of ETA
3.165
1 See Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Pilotage
3.166
1 Pilotage, which is compulsory, is available in daylight
hours only though exceptions to this rule may sometimes
be made at the discretion of the terminal authorities.
The pilot boards in position 28°09′⋅5N, 33°20′⋅4E, in the
vicinity of Râs Shukheir Light-float (3.40), from a tug.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Tugs
3.167
1 Tugs are available.
Berths
3.168
1 Offshore Oil Loading Berth No 1 lies about 8 cables E
of Râs Shukheir (3.40); Offshore Oil Loading Berth No 2
lies about 1 miles ESE of the same point.
104
Both berths can accommodate vessels up to 305 m in
length and have loading rates of up to 6000 tonnes per
hour.
Vessels berth with both anchors laid out and the stern
secured to mooring buoys; breasting buoys are also used.
Facilities
3.169
1 Dirty ballast reception facilities; 200 tonnes capacity
floating crane; divers (though limited amenities); first aid
clinic; doctor (emergency only).
Supplies
3.170
1 Fresh provisions and stores are available; fresh water is
not available.
Communications
3.171
1 Râs Shukheir Oil Terminal is served by an air service to
Al Qâhira (Cairo).
There is a heliport at Râs Shukheir.
Harbour
3.172
1 A small harbour, for the use of both coasters and service
craft up to 70 m in length, lies close SE of Râs Shukheir.
There are three berths on the inside of the N quay and a
petroleum berth on the N side of the short S quay.
Depths within the harbour are generally about 9 m but a
depth of 3⋅5 m lies in its entrance.
Lights are exhibited in the entrance to the harbour from
the head of each quay.
Larger vessels may anchor outside the harbour, clear of
the submarine pipelines, and use lighters for discharging.
3.173
1 Supplies.
Fuel; fresh water.
3.174
1 Facilities.
Mobile cranes from 15 to 20 tonnes capacity.
Râs Shukheir LPG Terminal
Position
3.175
1 The terminal (28°03′N, 33°21′E) lies about 4 cables
offshore in a small bay situated about 4 miles WNW of
Râs Dîb (3.40).
Description
3.176
1 Râs Shukheir LPG Terminal Loading Berth No 4
consists of an offshore loading facility connected to the
shore by a submarine gas pipeline.
Maximum size of vessel handled
3.177
1 The offshore loading berth can handle vessels up to
1600 dwt.
Offshore dangers
3.178
1 A submarine gas pipeline from the Badri Oilfield (3.58)
leads close W of the terminal to land on the shore about
4 cables SSW. Two spar buoys N and NW of the berth
mark the lie of the pipeline. See also 1.21.
No 1 Production Platform lies in the approaches to the
terminal, about 2 miles NW of Râs Dîb. A submarine oil
pipeline extends SSW from the platform to the shore.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
Depths
3.179
1 A buoy marks the E side of a shoal patch, with a least
depth over it of 9 m, which lies about 6 cables ENE of the
E end of the approach channel to the LPG berth.
A shoal, with a least depth over it of 12⋅5 m, lies about
4 cables WSW of the light-buoy (isolated danger; racon)
moored on the edge of the S-bound traffic lane of the Gulf
of Suez TSS.
2 Caution. The charted depths in the area of the
approaches to the entrance channel, as shown on the source
data diagram and indicated by broken depth contour lines,
are from old surveys and uncharted shoals may exist.
Approach
3.180
1 From a position about 3 miles WNW of Râs Dîb the
approach to Râs Shukheir LPG Terminal leads through a
buoyed channel.
Berth
3.181
1 Râs Shukheir LPG Terminal Offshore Loading Berth
No 4 can accommodate vessels up to 1600 dwt, 100 m in
length and a maximum draught of 5⋅2 m.
East Zeit Terminal
Chart 2374 and plan of Zeit Terminals
Position
3.182
1 The terminal SBM buoy is moored about 1 mile NE of
Umm el Kimân (3.41) in position 27°51′N, 33°36′E.
Description
3.183
1 East Zeit Terminal consists of a SPM of the Catenary
Anchor Leg Mooring (CALM) type, see The Mariner’s
Handbook for further information.
The buoy is connected by a submarine oil pipeline to
the shore 8 cables W.
A light is exhibited from the buoy.
Offshore danger
3.184
1 A submarine oil pipeline from the East Zeit Oilfield
(3.67) leads close N of East Zeit Terminal and lands on the
coast in the vicinity of the pipeline serving the berth.
Port Authority
3.185
1 The terminal is operated by Esso Suez Incorporated, Al
Qâhira (Cairo).
Maximum size of vessel handled
3.186
1 The terminal can handle vessels up to 130 000 dwt.
Maximum overall length depends on the distance from
bow to manifold which should not be greater than 137 m.
Anchorage
3.187
1 A waiting anchorage, as shown on the chart, for vessels
waiting to berth at the terminal or at Zeit Bay Terminal
(3.194) lies at the head of Zeit Channel (3.345).
This is the only anchorage that vessels should use if
waiting to berth at the terminal and they should anchor
105
within 1 mile of position 27°48′⋅5N, 33°37′⋅0E, the central
point of the anchorage area. The bottom is sandy mud.
2 Caution. A submarine oil pipeline, the line of which is
marked by light-buoys (yellow conical), passes through the
SW part of the anchorage area. See caution at 1.21.
Submarine pipelines also pass close N of this area.
Port radio
3.188
1 There is a port radio station for East Zeit Oil Terminal.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Notice of ETA
3.189
1 See Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Trim
3.190
1 Vessels must arrive trimmed about 1⋅2 m by the stern.
Pilotage
3.191
1 Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots embark in the waiting
anchorage area. Berthing is only undertaken during
daylight; unberthing is undertaken at any time.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Berth
3.192
1 The berth can handle vessels between 35 000 and
130 000 dwt up to a maximum draught of 18⋅0 m. and a
maximum distance from bow to manifold of 137 m.
Oil is loaded at a maximum rate of 3000 tonnes per
hour.
Zeit Bay Terminal
Position
3.193
1 The terminal SBM (27°50′N, 33°36′E) is located about
9 cables ESE of Umm el Kimân (3.41).
Description
3.194
1 Zeit Bay Terminal consists of a SBM berth; see The
Mariner’s Handbook for further information.
The buoy is connected by a submarine pipeline to a
point on the shore about 2 miles SW.
A light is exhibited from the buoy.
Cargo vessels can be loaded or discharged alongside the
jetty at Zeit Bay (27°50′⋅1N, 33°35′⋅0E). The jetty is 50 m
in length and the depth of water is 8 m.
Offshore danger
3.195
1 A submarine oil pipeline from the Ashrâfi Oilfield (3.70)
is laid close SE of Zeit Terminal and lands on the coast in
the vicinity of the pipeline serving the berth.
Traffic
3.196
1 In 2001 the terminal was used by 2 vessels.
Port Authority
3.197
1 The terminal is operated by the Suez Oil Company,
(SUCO), 21 Ahmed Orabi Street, PO Box 2622, El
Mohandessien, Cairo.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3

Tidal levels Berth

3.198 3.208
1 The tidal range is between 0⋅9 m and 1⋅2 m. 1 The berth can handle vessels between 35 000 and
250 000 dwt with a maximum draught of 18⋅0 m, and a
Maximum size of vessels handled maximum length of 344 m.
3.199 Facilities
1 The terminal can handle vessels up to 240 000 dwt with 3.209
a maximum draught of 18⋅5 m. 1 Dirty ballast reception facilities; doctor and medical
Maximum overall length depends on the distance from facilities are available in an emergency; helicopter services
bow to manifold which should not be greater than 198 m; available; crew changes permitted only in emergency.
trim by the stern should not exceed 2 m.
Supplies
Local weather 3.210
3.200 1 Fuel oil available by barge; fresh water is not available.
1 The climate in the vicinity of Zeit Bay is generally
good. The visibility is usually excellent with few dust Zeit Bay LPG Terminal
storms and infrequent fog. There are few rain squalls. Position
The general direction of winds is from the NNW being 3.211
steady during the summer months from May to October; 1 The LPG terminal (27°48′N, 33°34′E) is situated on the
between June and September they are almost nil. E side of Ghubbet el Zeit.
Gales can be expected from the NW between October
and May. Description
3.212
1 Zeit Bay LPG Terminal consists of a pier extending
Anchorage
WSW from the W side of the peninsula forming the E side
3.201
of Ghubbet el Zeit.
1 See 3.187.
Topography
Port radio 3.213
3.202 1 The Zeit Peninsula, which extends about 3 miles S from
1 There is a port radio station for Zeit Terminal which Umm el Kimân (27°50′N, 33°35′E) (3.41), is low at its S
should be contacted 12 and 6 hours before arrival with end. The peninsula, together with Ghânim Island, a low
confirmation of ETA. sandy island connected to the peninsula by a reef on the E
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio side of which lies a stranded wreck, forms the E side of
Signals, Volume 6 (3). the bay of Ghubbet el Zeit (27°48′N, 33°31′E). A reef
extends, in places, over 5 cables from the shores of the bay.
Notice of ETA Other aids to navigation
3.203 3.214
1 ETA should be sent 72, 48 and 24 hours prior to arrival. 1 Three beacons stand, in a rough N\S alignment, on
See the Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3). Ghânim Island.
Approach
Trim 3.215
3.204 1 The approach to Zeit Bay LPG Terminal is initially
1 Vessels must arrive on an even keel or trimmed no more through Zeit Channel (3.345), which is entered between
than 2 m by the stern. Umm el Kimân (27°50′N, 33°35′E) (3.41) and the N end
of Sha‘b Ashrâfi (3 miles ESE) (3.313), and extends about
Pilotage 11 miles S to the N end of Qeisûm Pass (3.348).
3.205 From a position about 7 miles SSE of Umm el Kimân
1 Pilotage is compulsory; the pilot embarks in the waiting the approach continues through a buoyed channel, with a
anchorage area. least depth of 4⋅2 m, which is entered from the W side of
For further information, see the Admiralty List of Radio Zeit Channel and leads due W passing S of the S end of
Signals, Volume 6 (3). Sha‘b Ghânim.
Entry
Berthing operations 3.216
3.206 1 From a position at the W end of the buoyed channel the
1 Berthing is only undertaken during daylight; unberthing entry to Ghubbet el Zeit follows the recommended tracks
is undertaken at any time. as shown on the chart, passing ENE of the unnamed
Weather conditions may prevent berthing when the wind oilfield situated on the SW side of the approaches to
speed exceeds 25 kn. Maximum wind speed for keeping the Ghubbet el Zeit.
vessel on the SBM is 40 kn. 2 It then leads through a narrow entrance channel, about
5 cables wide and with a least depth in the fairway of
Tugs 6⋅7 m, passing NE of the two light-buoys moored 8 cables
3.207 ESE and 5 cables N respectively of Râs el Bahar
1 Mooring boats are available. There is a standby (27°45′⋅8N, 33°33′⋅2E), and SW of the W side of Sha‘b
fire-fighting tug. Ghânim.

106
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3

The recommended track then continues NNW through Minor harbours

Ghubbet el Zeit to the vicinity of the Petrojet Jetty.
Submarine pipelines
3.217 Chart 2373
1 Submarine pipelines are laid across the SE and NW Mersa Thelemet
sides of the entrance to the narrow entrance channel which 3.228
leads to Ghubbet el Zeit. 1 Description. Mersa Thelemet (29°03′N, 32°38′E), a
small inlet entered about 4 miles SSW of Râs Za’farâna
Port Authority (3.38), affords good anchorage. Caution is necessary when
3.218 entering the harbour to avoid the reefs which lie on both
1 The terminal is operated by Suez Oil Company, Al sides of the entrance.
Qâhira (Cairo). A T-shaped jetty (position approximate) extends E from
the SW side of the entrance to the inlet to a position near
Maximum size of vessel handled the edge of the drying coastal reef; lights are exhibited
3.219 from the outer end of the jetty which is also floodlit. A
1 The berth can handle vessels up to 2500 dwt with a ramp jetty extends S from the N shore of the inlet and a
maximum draught of 8 m and an overall length of 108 m. L-shaped jetty from its NW shore.
2 If approaching Mersa Thelemet from the direction of
Anchorage
Râs Za’farâna, the ramp jetty and the second pair of
3.220
leading beacons are more conspicuous than the main jetty
1 A waiting anchorage (27°47′⋅2N, 33°37′⋅6E) for vessels
and the main entry beacons.
waiting to berth at the LPG jetty lies at the head of Zeit
A conspicuous building, surmounted by a radar aerial,
Channel (3.345), as shown on the chart.
stands on a low bluff ridge on the W side of the entrance
Caution. A submarine oil pipeline is laid through the
to the inlet.
SW part of this anchorage area. See 3.47.
Ruined jetties extend from the middle of the W side and
3.221
from the head of the inlet.
1 A waiting area (27°48′⋅0N, 33°31′⋅3E), as shown on the
3 A shifting patch of discoloured water lies in the middle
chart, is established in Ghubbet el Zeit.
of the inlet though there are constant depths of 11 m.
Port radio It has been reported that a new resort complex has been
3.222 constructed on the coast close S of the inlet.
1 There is a port radio station for East Zeit Terminal 3.229
which should be contacted on VHF 4 hours before arrival 1 Entry. The inlet is entered on the alignment (302°) of a
with confirmation of ETA. pair of leading beacons (lattice towers, triangular topmark
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio apex up on front beacon only) situated W of the L-shaped
Signals, Volume 6 (3). jetty; passing SW of a light-buoy (starboard hand) moored
on the NE side of the entrance. Note this alignment of
Notice of ETA beacons leads S of the L-shaped jetty.
3.223 2 The anchorage and the ramp jetty are then approached
1 See Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3). on the alignment (005°) of a second pair of beacons (lattice
towers, triangular topmarks apex up on front beacon and
Pilotage apex down on rear beacon) which lead to the head of the
3.224 inlet. This second pair of beacons also line up well with a
1 Pilotage is compulsory. water tower situated about 1 miles inland.
The pilot embarks in the designated anchorage area at 3 A beacon (lattice tower) stands on the N side of the
the head of Zeit Channel (3.345). entrance, near the S end of the drying sandspit which
Berthing and unberthing is only undertaken during forms the NE side of the bay. Note, this beacon does not
daylight. stand near the edge of the shoal reef on NE side of the
entrance, but about 5 cables farther N.
Tugs
3.230
3.225
1 Landmarks. Gebel Thelemet (29°00′N, 32°34′E), which
1 Mooring boats are available.
rises to 655 m, stands about 5 miles SW of the harbour.
Berths The mountain is surmounted by a cairn and forms a good
3.226 landmark.
1 The LPG jetty, which extends about 450 m WSW from A further cairn stands on high ground, which rises to
the shore on the E side of Ghubbet el Zeit, can handle 205 m, about 1
miles W of the head of the bay.
vessels of up to a maximum draught of 5⋅0 m and an 3.231
overall length of 108 m. 1 Anchorage, with good holding, may be obtained E of
If the wind speed exceeds 19 kn then berthing may be the ramp jetty, in depths from 5 to 6 m, sand. It has been
delayed. reported that some vessels have experienced difficulty in
2 A further jetty, with a depth of 4⋅5 m at its head and getting their anchors to bed into the bottom sand in this
known as the Petrojet Jetty, extends 3 cables SW from the vicinity.
N side of Ghubbet el Zeit from a position about 2 miles Anchorage may also be obtained by small vessels, as
WNW of the LPG jetty. shown on the chart, about 2 miles SE of Râs Za‘farâna
Light. Caution should be exercised as this area is
Supplies incompletely surveyed and uncharted shoals may exist.
3.227 2 Local knowledge is required for the use of the
1 Fresh water is not available. anchorage SE of Râs Za‘farâna.

107
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
Chart 2374 plan of Zeit Terminals
Mersa Zeitîya
3.232
1 Description. Mersa Zeitîya (27°50′N, 33°35′E) lies close
SW of Umm el Kimân (3.41); the ruins of several
buildings lie close to the shore.
GULF OF SUEZ — EAST SIDE
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 2373, 2374, 2375
Area covered
3.233
1 The area described in this section extends from Râs
Misalla (29°49′N, 32°37′E), which lies on the SE side of
Suez Bay (2.202), along the E side of the Gulf of Suez to
Râs Kenîsa (27°56′N, 33°53′E) the NE entrance point to
the Strait of Gubal (3.311).
Topography
3.234
1 Râs Misalla to Wâdi Feirân. Between Râs Misalla
(29°49′N, 32°37′E), which is fronted by a coral reef
extending 2 cables W, and Râs Sudr (14 miles S), the coast
is fringed with coral reefs. A stone pillar stands about
1 mile ENE of Râs Misalla; Qâdd el Tawîla (3.36) extends
from the coast about 1 miles S of the point.
Gebel Sinn Bîshr (29°40′N, 32°57′E) is an isolated peak,
617 m high, which appears as a white cliff and is
prominent.
2 Between Râs Sudr (29°36′N, 32°41′E) (3.239) and Râs
Mal’ab (27 miles SSE) (3.38) lies Gebel el Tîh, a great
tract of high country with a mean elevation of about
600 m, which rises about 15 miles inland from the coast. A
bold escarpment which forms the S edge of this high
ground, extends in an irregular line, for about two thirds of
the distance across the Sinai Peninsula in an approximate
latitude of 29°10′N.
3 The coast between Râs Matârma (29°27′N, 32°43′E)
(3.37) and Râs Mal’ab (18 miles SE) is bordered by reefs;
Qâd Mal’ab, a coral bank, extends about 1 miles offshore
close S of Râs Lagia (3.38) (29°15′N, 32°53′E).
4 The coast from Mersa Hammâm (29°12′N, 32°56′E)
(3.286), which lies close ESE of Râs Mal’ab, to Râs Abu
Zenîma (13 miles SE) (3.289) is fringed by a number of
small reefs. Gebel Hammâm Fara’ûn (29°11′N, 32°58′E)
which rises to a height of 493 m is surmounted by a cairn;
the W bluff of this mountain appears as a precipitous cliff
very near the coast and shows up well on a SE bearing.
Some hills near the coast, close NNW of Gebel Hammâm
Fara’ûn, are white and noticeable. Gebel Thâl is a sharp
peak which lies about 3 miles SE of Gebel Hammâm
Fara’ûn rising to a height of 516 m; this peak forms the
highest point of the coastal range. A series of small
mountain ranges, mostly of dazzling white chalk, extend
close to the coast SE of Gebel Thâl.
5 Gebel Tanka (29°05′N, 33°06′E) stands about 11 miles
SE of Râs Mal’ab and rises to a height of 173 m. The peak
forms the W extremity of a range of low hills abutting the
coast which terminate in a steep slope on the coast; this
slope extends about 5 cables NW and SE where it turns
slightly inland breaking up into hills leaving a wide plain
which extends S to Râs Abu Zenîma. Wâdi Tayiba emerges
from this range of hills, about 2 miles NW of Râs Abu
108
A well sheltered boat harbour is situated within the coral
reef near Mersa Zeitîya; a jetty extends from the shore.
Mersa Zeitîya Light (3.34) is exhibited from the coast
close S of Mersa Zeitîya.
Zenîma, its mouth being marked by dark basalt rock which
shows up against the surrounding limestone.
6 Between Cairn Point (29°02′N, 33°08′E) (3.289), which
lies close SE of Abu Zenîma Bay and Râs Abu Rudeis
(8 miles SSE) (3.252) the coastal bank extends up to
1 miles offshore. The coast in the vicinity of Râs Budran
(28°57′N, 33°10′E) is fringed by coral reefs and further
reefs extend over 1 mile offshore S of Râs Abu Rudeis.
The hills SE of Cairn Point terminate abruptly in about
latitude 29°N from where the Plain of El Markha, with an
average width of 4 miles, extends about 12 miles S. The
plain, which rises gradually from the coast, is stony with a
gravel surface and some scattered bushes.
3.235
1 Wâdi Feirân to Râs Kenîsa. The coast between Wâdi
Feirân (28°44′N, 33°13′E) (3.271) and Râs Sherâtîb
(4 miles SSW) (3.38), is fringed with coral reefs. Sha‘b el
Hasa (3.39) lies S of Râs Sherâtîb; Sherâtîb Shoals (3.39)
on which stand the Belayim Oilfield (3.52) lie close W.
2 Round Hill (28°36′N, 33°18′E), which stands about
9 miles SSE of Wâdi Feirân, has a cairn on its summit
and forms a good landmark. Gebel Abu Durba (28°32′N,
33°17′E), which rises to a height of 448 m, has a rounded
summit and forms the N end of the Abu Durba Range of
mountains.
3 The Abu Durba Range, which is formed of granite and
is partially covered with sand, extends SE along the coast
to within about 3 miles of El Tûr (3.298) terminating in
Gebel Hammâm Saidna Mûsa (28°17′N, 33°35′E) which
rises to a height of 241 m. Gebel Abu Huswa (28°29′N,
33°22′E) rises to a height of 714 m and forms the summit
of the range; from a distance Gebel Abu Durba and Gebel
Abu Huswa appear as islands. Râs el Ghub (28°19′N,
33°30′E) lies 12 miles SSE of Gebel Abu Huswa.
4 South of El Tûr Harbour (28°14′N, 33°37′E), a sandy
desert plain intersected with water courses, rises gradually
from the coast reaching an elevation of about 300 m at the
base of the mountains which rise about 12 miles inland.
This plain extends a considerable distance NW between the
coastal range and the mountains of the interior. Qurein
’Atût (28°10′N, 33°52′E), charted as 479 m in height, is a
dark sugar loaf peak which forms a good landmark.
5 Between Râs el Sebîl (28°04′N, 33°43′E) and Râs Garra
(4 miles SE), a low-lying point, a slight indentation in the
coast is almost filled by Sha‘b Sebîl, a drying reef. Sha‘b
Garra lies close SSW and is separated from Sha‘b Sebîl by
a buoyed channel which leads to an oil production platform
connected by a submarine oil pipeline to the SIDKI B
platform (3.66), and by a submarine gas pipeline to
production platform GH–376 which is itself connected to
the Hilal Oilfield (3.69) and thence to the W side of the
Gulf of Suez. See also 1.21.
6 Platforms Yuval, Dal and other unnamed production
platforms are situated in the vicinity of Sha‘b Garra.
It has been reported that an unmarked isolated pipe,
about 4 m high and probably the remains of a production
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3

platform, stands in position 28°00′⋅0N, 33°43′⋅8E about Dust storms are more likely to occur in spring and
4 cables SSE of the Yuval Production Platform. autumn than at other times.
The coast between Râs Garra (28°01′N, 33°46′E) and
Râs Kenîsa (8 miles SE), is low and sandy, and very foul Anchorage
with reefs extending over 1 mile from the shore. 3.246
1 Anchorage may be obtained in the bay SE of Râs Sudr,
Anchorage about 1 mile offshore, in depths of about 13 m.
3.236 3.247
1 Anchorage is obtainable between Râs Misalla (3.234) 1 A mooring buoy (red) is laid about 1 miles SW of Râs
and Qâdd el Tawîla (3.36) with Râs Misalla, bearing 346°, Sudr.
6 cables distant, in depths of about 7⋅0 m; or farther W in
greater depths. Pilotage
3.248
1 Pilotage is compulsory.
TERMINAL FACILITIES ON THE EAST
SIDE OF THE GULF OF SUEZ Supplies
3.249
General information 1 Fresh water is available at the berth by pipeline; fuel oil
is available by barge.
Charts 2373, 2374, 2375
Regulations Jetty
3.237 3.250
1 See 3.92. 1 A small jetty, for the use of small service vessels,
extends WSW from the coast from a position ENE of the
Râs Sudr Oil Terminal terminal.
Chart 2133
Râs Budran Oil Terminal
Position
3.238 Chart 2132 plan of Râs Budran Terminal
1 The terminal is situated ESE of the designated crossing Position
place in the Gulf of Suez TSS for W-bound traffic which is 3.251
destined for Ain Sukhna Terminal (3.101). 1 The terminal SBM (28°56′N, 33°08′E) is moored about
2 miles W of Râs Budran, in a depth of about 34 m.
Description
3.239 Description
1 Râs Sudr Oil Terminal (29°35′N, 32°42′E) consists of a 3.252
stage secured to mooring buoys which is connected to the 1 Râs Budran Oil Terminal consists of a SBM from which
shore by submarine oil and water pipelines. a submarine oil pipeline is laid to the shore close NW of
The terminal is situated about 2 miles SE of Râs Sudr a Râs Budran (3.234). See The Mariners Handbook for
low and sandy point. Two masts (red obstruction lights) further information.
stand about 8 cables ESE of the point on the E side of the 2 Three oil production platforms, interconnected by oil and
airfield located close E of the point. gas submarine pipelines, lie about 2 miles N of the berth.
Two towers stand about 5 miles ESE of Râs Sudr. The centre platform is connected by a submarine pipeline
to a position on the shore about 1 miles N of Râs
Port Authority Budran. See caution at 1.21.
3.240 Râs Abu Rudeis, which lies 3 miles S of Râs Budran,
1 The terminal is administered by the Port Authority of has some oil tanks and an airfield situated close to the
Râs Sudr, c/o The Red Sea Ports Authority. point.
Depths Port limits
3.241 3.253
1 The terminal berth has a least depth of 7⋅9 m. 1 The limits of the port enclose the SBM, the production
platforms and the anchorage, as shown on the plan.
Tidal levels
3.242 Approach
1 Tidal range is about 0⋅6 m. 3.254
1 The approach to the terminal should be made from S.
Density of water
3.243 Traffic
1 Density 1⋅025g/cm#. 3.255
1 In 1995 the terminal was used by 1 vessel.
Maximum size of vessel handled
3.244 Port Authority
1 The berth can handle vessels up a maximum draught of 3.256
9⋅1 m and a maximum length of 167⋅6 m. 1 The terminal is administered by the Suez Oil Company,
Al Qâhira (Cairo), Suez Oil Co (SUCO), 21 Ahmed Orabi
Local weather Street, PO Box 2622, Cairo, Egypt.
3.245
1 Winds from the N prevail throughout the year. S winds Tidal levels
are most likely to occur during winter or spring, 3.257
accompanied by heavy squalls. 1 Tidal range is between 0⋅9 m and 1⋅2 m.

109
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3

Density of water Tugs

3.258 3.266
1 Density 1⋅030g/cm#. 1 Two tugs available; mooring boats are available to assist
with berthing.
There is a standby fire-fighting supply vessel/tug
Maximum size of vessel handled stationed at Râs Budran.
3.259
1 The berth can handle vessels up to 250 000 dwt with a
maximum length of 345 m and a maximum draught of Facilities
18⋅0 m. 3.267
Smallest size of vessel that can be handled is 30 000 dwt 1 There are facilities for the reception of dirty ballast;
with a minimum length of 152 m. doctor and medical facilities; helicopter; crew change in
emergency only.

Local weather Supplies

3.260
1 The climate in the vicinity of the terminal is good.
Visibility is usually excellent with few dust storms and
infrequent fog. There are a few rain squalls.
The winds during the summer months are steady,
blowing predominantly from the NNW at about 20 kn, but
can increase to 45 kn especially between October and May;
between June and September they are almost nil.
Anchorage
3.261
1 A designated anchorage, as shown on the chart, is
situated about 5 miles SSW of Râs Budran, in depths from
29 to 51 m, good holding ground, muddy sand. Anchoring
outside this area is strictly prohibited.
Port radio
3.262
1 There is a port radio station for Râs Budran Oil
Terminal, which should be contacted 12 and 6 hours before
arrival. For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Notice of ETA
3.263
1 ETA should be sent 72, 48 and 24 hours prior to arrival
to SUCO. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals,
Volume 6 (3).
Prohibited anchorage
3.264
1 An area in which anchoring and fishing are prohibited
extends about 2 miles offshore, enclosing both the
terminal berth and the production platforms, as shown on
the chart.
Pilotage
3.265
1 Pilotage is compulsory; pilots and shore riggers board in
a position 2miles SSW of the terminal berth.
Berthing is undertaken during periods of daylight only,
unberthing is undertaken at any time.
Berthing is not undertaken if the wind speed exceeds
25 kn.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
3.268
1 Fresh water and stores are not available; fuel oil
available by barge.
Jetty
3.269
1 A jetty, with a depth of 6 m alongside, extends about
120 m SSE from the S side of a breakwater which extends
about 800 m SW from Râs Budran.
Wâdi Feirân Oil Terminal
Charts 2132 plan of Wâdi Feirân Teminal, 2373
Position
3.270
1 The terminal berths lie between about 6 cables and
1 miles offshore from Wâdi Feirân (28°44′N, 33°12′E).
Description
3.271
1 Wâdi Feirân Oil Terminal consists of three offshore oil
berths, numbered 1, 2 and 3, all of which are connected to
the shore by submarine oil pipelines. No 3 Berth is for
loading LPG.
Two spar buoys (position approximate) are moored NW
of No 1 Berth, S and SW of a shoal patch with a least
depth over it of 20 m.
2 Two further buoys are moored NW of No 2 Berth, W
and NW of another shoal patch with a least depth over it
of 20 m.
A further shoal patch, again with a least depth over it of
20 m, lies about 4 cables SSW of No 1 Berth.
A group of oil and spherical LPG tanks on the shore is
prominent from seaward.
3 Gebel Withr (28°48′N, 33°15′E), which lies about
4 miles NNE of Wâdi Feirân, rises to a height of 498 m
and forms the S boundary of the Plain of El Markha
(3.234).
Wâdi Feirân is a break in some light coloured hills,
about 5 miles SE of Gebel Withr, which shows prominently
against a dark range farther inland; it forms a good
landmark.
Approach
3.272
1 Vessels should keep at least 3 miles offshore until W of
the oil tanks on the shore.

110
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3

The approach to the berths should then be made with No 1 Berth, the NW berth of the complex, can handle
the tanks bearing not more than 090° to avoid the shoal vessels up to 105 000 dwt, up to 275 m in length with a
depths of 10 m or less which lie NW of the terminal. maximum draught of 16⋅1 m.
No 2 Berth, the S-most berth of the complex, can handle
vessels up to 50 000 dwt, up to 245 m in length with a
Traffic maximum draught of 12⋅2 m.
3.273 2 No 3 Berth, the E-most berth of the complex, can handle
1 In 2001 the terminal was used by 18 vessels. vessels up to 219⋅7 m in length with a maximum draught
of 8⋅0 m; this berth is used for LPG.
Caution. Care is required when berthing with winds
Port Authority from the S. During periods of strong winds mooring may
3.274 be delayed.
1 The terminal is operated by Egyptian Petroleum
Company, Osman abdel Hafiez Street, Cairo, Egypt.
Jetties
3.283
Density of water 1 A small landing jetty extends from the shore close to the
3.275 oil tanks.
1 1⋅032g/cm#. A further jetty extends about 200 m W from a position
on the shore about 1 miles N of the oil tanks.
Maximum size of vessel handled
3.276
1 The terminal can handle vessels up to 105 000 dwt with Facilities
a maximum draught of 16⋅1 m. 3.284
1 Dirty ballast reception facilities.

Anchorage
3.277 Supplies
1 Vessels waiting for a berth may obtain anchorage about 3.285
2 miles W or WSW of the conspicuous oil tanks on the 1 Fuel oil available by barge; fresh water not available.
shore.

Port radio Minor harbours

3.278
1 Vessels should contact Abu Rudeis when within range.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio Chart 2373
Signals, Volume 6 (3). Mersa Hammâm
3.286
1 Description. Mersa Hammâm (29°12′N, 32°56′E) is a
Notice of ETA bay entered close E of Râs Mal’ab (3.38) which provides a
3.279 temporary anchorage for vessels loading gypsum from the
1 Vessels should send ETA 72 and 24 hours in advance; quarries located in the area.
see Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3). The bay is sheltered from NW winds but vessels should
be prepared to leave immediately should the wind shift.
2 The white buildings of the gypsum mining company and
Pilotage a black water tower, about 9 m high, standing on a stone
3.280 base, lie close E of Râs Mal’ab and are conspicuous.
1 Pilots board about 1 mile SW of No 1 Berth in the A large rock, which resembles a sawn-off tree trunk, is
vicinity of the anchorage. situated just over 1 mile E of Râs Mal’ab and is also
Berthing and unberthing are undertaken only during conspicuous.
daylight. 3.287
Vessels must have 150 fathoms of chain on each anchor. 1 Approach. As shown on the chart, the approach should
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio be made with the cairn on the summit of Gebel Hammâm
Signals, Volume 6 (3). Fara’ûn (3.234) bearing 070°, which should not be
confused with Gebel Thâl (3.234) which stands 3 miles SE
and is slightly higher and more prominent.
Tugs 2 When the conspicuous rock bears 040°, then steer on
3.281 this bearing until a pair of leading beacons standing close
1 Two tugs are available for mooring and unmooring. E of Râs Mal’ab are in line bearing 333°, then steer on this
line for the loading berth.
3.288
Berths 1 Berth. Vessels moor with two anchors down on a SSE
3.282 heading with the stern secured to three bollards located
1 Vessels berth with their anchors down and secured to near the root of a small pier, which extends from the shore
mooring buoys. from a position about 90 m E of the front beacon.

111
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
Vessels cannot berth alongside the pier.
Three mooring buoys are laid a short distance ESE of
the pier.
There is a pipeline for loading oil.
Charts 2132 Plan of Râs Budran Terminal, 2373
Abu Zenîma
3.289
1 Description. Abu Zenîma (29°02′N, 33°07′E) is entered
between Râs Abu Zenîma, a low point composed of gravel,
and Cairn Point 2 miles ESE.
A drying sand and coral bank extends about 5 cables
offshore from Râs Abu Zenîma; a light (red metal tower)
marks the SE side of this bank. Shoal water extends up to
5 cables offshore from Cairn Point.
2 Gospel Hills stand about 1 mile NNE of Râs Abu
Zenîma; a remarkable round hill, close NNW of Cairn
Point, has well-defined stratification and a flat summit
surmounted by a cairn.
Offices, storehouses and the loading plant of a mining
company are situated 6 cables E of Râs Abu Zenîma.
3.290
1 Traffic. In 2001 the port was used by 21 vessels.
3.291
Abu Zenîma Leading Lights:
Front light (metal tower, black bands, topmark
triangle apex up) (29°02′⋅7N, 33°07′⋅1E).
Rear light (similar construction, topmark triangle apex
down) (90 m from front light).
From a position 1 miles SW of Cairn Point the
alignment (012°) of these lights leads towards the harbour.
1 Leading lights:
Front light (white metal tower, black bands, topmark
triangle apex up) (29°02′⋅8N, 33°06′⋅7E).
Rear light (similar structure, topmark triangle apex
down) (150 m from front).
2 From a position in the entrance to the bay the alignment
(334°) of these lights leads W of a buoy (starboard hand;
position approximate) moored about 8 cables WNW of
Cairn Point, and close W of a dangerous wreck marked by
a light-buoy (starboard hand), which lies about 1 cables S
of the jetty.
3.292
1 Pilotage. The pier master embarks to assist in berthing.
3.293
1 Berth. A jetty extends SW from the shore from a
position about 1 mile E of Râs Abu Zenîma (3.289). Except
during periods of S winds vessels may lie alongside the
head of the jetty, bows W, using an anchor and lines fore
and aft to the shore and to mooring buoys.
A disused pier extends 120 m SSE from the shore about
4 cables W of the jetty; a ruined jetty extends about 300 m
from the shore about 5 cables NW of Cairn Point.
3.294
1 Facilities. Hospital.
3.295
1 Communications. An airport is situated close NE of
Râs Abu Zenîma.
3.296
1 Anchorage. Good anchorage may be obtained in the bay
in depths from 22 to 26 m, sand and mud.
Vessels waiting to use the mining company jetty
generally anchor close S of the jetty; this anchor berth
should be left clear if not in use.
Landing is often impracticable during strong S winds
and the anchorage becomes untenable.
112
El Belayim
Chart 2374
Description
3.297
1 El Belayim (28°34′N, 33°15′E) is a lagoon situated on
the E side of the Gulf of Suez, ESE of the Belayim
Oilfield (3.52).
The lagoon, which has a depth of about 13 m in its
centre, is entered from its S side through a narrow channel
with depths in the fairway of 0⋅9 m.
2 Tidal streams run strongly through the entrance channel.
Two small rusty oil tanks stand on the coast about
5 miles SE of its entrance to the lagoon; the abandoned
village of Abu Durba lies close SSE of the tanks and
consists mainly of a ruined barracks.
Chart 333
El Tûr Harbour
3.298
1 Description. El Tûr Harbour (28°14′N, 33°37′E) is a
small bay entered E of Grafton Reef Light-beacon (white
square tower, black band) which marks the extremity of a
coral reef extending about 3 cables SSE from the S end of
a low-lying peninsula which forms the W side of the
harbour.
2 The township of El Tûr stands on the NE shore of the
bay and consists of stone built houses, a white mosque and
some conspicuous radio masts (red obstruction lights). A
large military airfield is situated SSE of the town.
Pilgrim accommodation and a hospital are situated on
the SE side of the village.
3 ‘Erg Riyâh is a coral reef, which dries in its centre,
situated about 8 cables SSW of Grafton Reef Light-beacon.
The reef is marked in its centre by Bey Beacon (open
ironwork structure, triangular cage topmark, 11 m in height)
and affords some shelter to the harbour from the SW.
A stranded wreck, which appears as if at anchor, lies
close SW of Bey Beacon and obscures the structure from
the W. A light (28°12′⋅8N, 33°36′⋅3E) is exhibited adjacent
to the wreck.
4 ‘Erg Riyâh does not show up well; during winter the
water over it does not appear discoloured and the sea
seldom breaks over it even during strong NW winds. The
reef must be approached with caution.
3.299
1 Climatic table. See 1.275 and 1.277.
3.300
1 Leading lights. The approach from the N is between
Grafton Reef Light-beacon and ‘Erg Riyâh on the
alignment (095°) of two leading lights (beacon, triangle
topmark apex up) which leads through a fairway with a
least depth of 11 m.
These lights are not clearly visible until nearly in line
when they appear through a gap in the trees, they are only
exhibited during the pilgrimage season or by request when
vessel is expected.
3.301
1 Northern approach. If approaching from the N steer on
the leading line until about 1
cables S of Grafton
Light-beacon when course should be altered to the NE
towards the anchorage passing about 1
cables E of the
light-beacon.
3.302
1 Southern approach. If approaching through the channel
which lies between ‘Erg Riyâh and the E shore of the Gulf
of Suez, then, from the S end of the channel steer for
Grafton Light-beacon, bearing 348°.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
When the light-beacon is about 2 cables distant steer
for the anchorage, passing about 1
cables E of the
light-beacon.
2 If Grafton Light-beacon and Bey Beacon have not been
identified in the approaches to the S end of the channel
then favour the E side of the channel where the coastal
reef shows more clearly than ‘Erg Riyâh.
3.303
1 Anchorage may be obtained with Grafton Light-beacon
bearing about 230°, distant about 2 cables, in a depth of
11 m, mud and sand.
Anchorage may also be obtained about 2 cables S of
the light-beacon in a depth of about 18 m. The holding
ground is good but the anchorage is exposed to NW winds.
3.304
1 Jetties. Two jetties extend from the NE side of the
harbour which were reported to be falling into disrepair
(2000).
3.305
1 Boat harbour. A boat harbour is formed by an opening
in the coastal reef entered about 6 cables E of Grafton Reef
Light-beacon; a jetty extends from the W side of the
harbour.
The boat harbour is well sheltered from all winds except
those from the S. Fresh water is available.
3.306
1 Fishing harbour. A fishing harbour, situated in the NW
corner of the bay, is formed by a jetty extending along the
S side of the reef at the head of the bay and by a
STRAIT OF GUBAL
GENERAL INFORMATION
Chart 2375
Area covered
3.311
1 The Strait of Gubal, known to the Egyptians as Madîq
Gûbâl, lies between Umm el Kimân (27°50′N, 33°35′E)
and the SE end of Shaker Island (34 miles SE) on its SW
side; and the SW coast of the Sinai Peninsula from Râs
Kenîsa (27°56′N, 33°53′E) to Râs Muhammad (24 miles
SE) on its NE side.
Topography
3.312
1 South-west shore of the strait. The coast between
Umm el Kimân (27°50′N, 33°35′E) and Hurghada
(27°14′N, 33°51′E) is generally low, rising to a coastal
mountain range with elevations between 200 and 400 m.
A second mountain range, which is separated from the
coastal range by an undulating desert plain intersected by
water courses, rises about 25 miles inland.
2 From Râs el Bahar (27°46′N, 33°33′E), the SW entrance
point to Ghubbet el Zeit (3.213), and Râs Gemsa (7 miles
SSE) the coast is fringed by a reef.
The peninsula, of which Râs Gemsa forms its S end,
rises in yellowish-white hills to an elevation of about 80 m.
A number of stone buildings, some warehouses and water
tanks stand on the S end of this peninsula.
3 Between the S entrance point of Ghubbet el Gemsa
(27°34′N, 33°34′E) (3.360) and Hurghada (25 miles SE) the
coast is fronted by extensive off-lying reefs extending up to
3 miles offshore.
From about 5 miles S of the entrance to Ghubbet el
Gemsa the coast becomes low-lying.
113
breakwater extending about 1 cable NE across the reef on
the E side of the peninsula which forms the W side of the
bay.
3.307
1 Communications. A military airfield is situated about
1 miles S of El Tûr village.
Charts 333, 2374
Sheikh Riyâh Harbour
3.308
1 Description. Sheikh Riyâh Harbour (28°10′N, 33°40′E)
lies E of a low sandy point which extends about 4 cables S
from the coast and is fringed on its W and S sides by the
coastal reef.
Sha‘b Riyâh, a shoal patch, lies of the mouth off the
harbour.
2 The channel, between Sha‘b Riyâh and the coast reef to
the E has a least depth of 14⋅2 m; it is about 3 cables wide
and free of dangers.
The South Belayim Oilfield (3.63) lies about 2 miles SW
of the harbour.
3.309
1 Anchorage may be obtained within Sheikh Riyâh
Harbour in depths from 9 to 13 m, sand.
3.310
1 Off-lying danger. Between Sheikh Riyâh Harbour and
Râs el Sebîl (6 miles SSE) (3.235) the coast is bordered
by Sha‘b Haddeh, a coral reef extending up to 1 mile
offshore.
3.313
1 South-west side of the strait. On the SW side of the
strait, the N part is bordered by the Ashrâfi Islands
(27°47′N, 33°41′E) which extend SE from a position about
6 miles SE of Umm el Kimân (3.41). The islands, which
consist of dead coral and sand rising to heights between 2
and 5 m, stand on Sha‘b Ashrâfi and Sha‘b Mukowarat
(3.339), two reefs which extend about 7 miles in a NW/SE
direction.
2 Close SE of these islands lies the N entrance to Tawîla
Channel (3.356) which leads SSW between South Qeisûm
Island (3.357) and Sha‘b Gûbâl (3.357) to an inner coastal
passage which continues SE to the N end of the Gifâtîn
Islands (3.390).
3 Shadwân Channel (3.331) lies farther SE and leads SW
between Gûbâl Island (3.42) and Sha‘b Umm ‘Usk (3.42).
Sha‘b Abu Nuhâs (3.42) lies between Sha‘b Umm ‘Usk
and Shaker Island (3.42) which borders the SW part of the
strait.
3.314
1 North-east shore of the strait. Between Râs Kenîsa
(27°56′N, 33°53′E) (3.235) and Râs Muhammad (24 miles
SE) (3.42) the NE shore of the Strait of Gubal is a sandy
plain extending to the base of a high mountain range.
Gebel Sahara, (1528 m in height) is the highest point of
this range.
2 The NE side of the strait is bordered by extensive coral
reefs of which little warning is given by soundings. During
daylight the change of colour of the water from deep blue
to bright green is very noticeable.
Sha‘b Ali (27°51′N, 33°51′E) (3.41) is a reef which
forms the NE side of the N entrance to the strait; Shag
Rock (3.42) lies close S of the reef.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
3 Sha‘b Surûr, a circular reef, lies close off the NE side of
the strait, about 4 miles W of Qâd Ibn Haddân (27°47′N,
34°06′E). Sha‘b Mahmûd, a reef extending SE from close
SE of Sha‘b Surûr, lies about 8 miles W of Râs
Muhammad (27°44′N, 34°15′E) and forms the NE part of
the S end of the strait.
Hazard
3.315
1 Anchoring, except in an emergency, is not recommended
in the Strait of Gubal due to the existence of a former
mined area, now declared safe, which had been laid on the
NE side of the fairway.
Cautions
3.316
1 If approaching the Strait of Gubal from the S in poor
visibility, it is important that the Gifâtîn Islands (27°13′N,
33°57′E) (3.390) are not mistaken for Shaker Island
(27°30′N, 34°00′E) (3.42), as a W-going set may have been
experienced.
Traffic separation scheme
3.317
1 See 3.18.
Tidal streams
3.318
1 The tidal streams between the Zeit Peninsula (27°49′N,
33°35′E) and Râs Gemsa (10 miles S) follow the direction
of the various channels attaining a rate of about 1 kn. Close
to the reefs the direction becomes uncertain and the rate is
considerably increased.
Local navigational information
3.319
1 The anchorages at Marsa Gemsa and Marsa Kabrît
(3.352) should be approached from Tawîla Channel (3.356)
through either Bahriya Pass (3.353), Deep Pass (3.354) or
South West Pass (3.355). Marsa Kabrît may also be
approached through Kabrît Pass (3.352).
Marsa Gemsa may also be approached from Zeit
Channel (3.345) through the buoyed channel which leads to
the approaches to Zeit Bay LPG Terminal (3.212) in
Ghubbet el Zeit (3.213).
2 Should there be much of a sea running in the Strait of
Gubal, a more sheltered passage may be obtained by
smaller vessels by passing through the N part of Zeit
Channel or Kowarat Channel (3.343), and thence between
Sandy Islet (3.342) and the N end of South Qeisûm Island
(3.357). However, the channels are intricate and require a
good lookout from aloft.
3.320
1 Local knowledge. The passages and channels leading to
these anchorages are intricate and they should not be
attempted unless all dangers and landmarks have been
identified.
The best time for arriving at Marsa Gemsa is early
morning leaving a position E of Ashrâfi Light when the
sun is first appearing above the mountains of the Sinai
Peninsula; or at about 1700 in the late afternoon. However,
at this time the glare of the sun may prevent the reefs from
being identified.
114
Protected reefs
3.321
1 Vessels should only use the fixed moorings on, or
adjacent to, the coral reefs at Sa‘al Hashîsh (27°02′N,
33°55′E) (5.32) and Qâd Ibn Haddân (27°47′N, 34°06′E).
Vessels should also only use the fixed moorings on, or
adjacent to, the coral reefs that lie between the latitudes of
26°37′N and 27°02′N and between 27°08′N and 27°26′⋅3N.
See Appendix III for further information.
Area to be avoided
3.322
1 In order to avoid the risk of severe damage to critical
ecosystems and the environment and natural resources
contained within the declared boundaries of the Râs
Muhammad National Park, all vessels carrying dangerous
or toxic cargoes, or any other vessel exceeding 500 grt
should avoid the area indicated on the chart.
2 Moorings have been laid as described in Appendix III
and its accompanying chartlets.
Anchoring on the reefs within the declared boundaries of
the park is prohibited except in cases of emergency or
force majeure.
The Râs Muhammad National Park area to be avoided
has been adopted by IMO.
Principal marks
3.323
1 Landmarks:
Gebel Sahara (28°01′N, 34°08′E) which rises to a
height of 1528 m is the highest point of the
mountain range on the NE side of the strait.
Gebel Mezra‘îya (27°56′N, 34°02′E) forms a good
landmark; the mountain is sand-covered and rises
to a height of 477 m. When seen from the W it
has the appearance of an outcrop of rock with
three small peaks lying midway between the coast
and the inland mountain range.
2 Homra el Girigâb (27°46′N, 33°19′E) part of the
coastal range rises to a height of 433 m about
15 miles WSW of Umm el Kimân (3.41) (Chart
2374).
Gebel Umm Dirra (27°34′N, 33°29′E), which rises to
a height of 296 m, forms part of the coastal range
of mountains which stand close inland. The
mountain has a remarkable nipple summit.
3 Gebel ‘Esh (27°29′N, 33°33′E), which rises to a
height of 398 m, also forms part of the coastal
range.
Gebel Abu Shar el Qibli (27°23′N, 33°35′E) forms
the abrupt SSE end of the coastal range.
3.324
1 Major lights:
Râs Zeit Light (27°57′N, 33°31′E) (3.34).
Mersa Zeitîya Light (27°50′N, 33°35′E) (3.34).
Ashrâfi Reef Light (27°47′N, 33°42′E) (3.35).
Shag Rock Light (27°47′N, 33°53′E) (3.35).
2 Bluff Point Light (27°41′N, 33°49′E) (3.35).
Qâd Ibn Haddân Light (27°48′N, 34°06′E) (3.35).
Siyûl Kebîra Light (27°34′N, 33°53′E) (3.35).
Râs Muhammad Light (27°44′N, 34°15′E) (3.35).
Shaker Island Light (27°27′N, 34°02′E) (3.35).
Umm Qamar Light (red GRP tower, white stripe;
racon) (27°22′N, 33°55′E).
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
Directions
Râs Zeit to Shaker Island
3.325
1 See directions given at 3.41.
Inner channel
Description
3.326
1 Inner Channel (27°52′N, 33°53′E) lies in the NE part of
the Strait of Gubal between Sha‘b Ali (3.41) and the
coastal reefs.
The channel is moderately deep and may be used safely
during daylight.
2 In approaching Inner Channel from the NW take care to
avoid Poynder Shoal (27°55′N, 33°44′E) (3.41). Also keep
a good lookout for Azov Patch (27°54′N, 33°51′E), a
dangerous rock lying in the NE corner of the reef, and for
any other detached rocks which may lie in this vicinity.
A stranded wreck lies on the W side of Sha‘b Ali about
6 miles NNW of Shag Rock (27°47′N, 33°53′E) (3.42).
Regulations
3.327
1 Anchoring is prohibited within Inner Channel.
Directions
3.328
1 From a position on the E side of the Gulf of Suez TSS,
ESE of SIDKI B platform (27°57′N, 33°39′E) (3.66), the
track through Inner Channel leads E then S, about 19 miles,
passing (with positions given from Shag Rock Light
(27°47′N, 33°53′E) (3.35)):
Clear of Poynder Shoal (12 miles NW) (3.41), thence:
2 N of the N end of Sha‘b Ali (8 miles NNW) (3.41); a
conspicuous stranded wreck of a barge lies on the
N end of the reef and provides an excellent mark
for vessels entering the channel from the N. In
thick weather the W side of Sha‘b Ali should be
given a prudent berth. Thence:
SW of the reefs (10 miles N) which extend W from
Râs Kenîsa (3.235), thence:
3 WSW of Sha‘b Rayis (8 miles N) a reef with two
awash coral patches that fronts the SW part of
Merset el Qâd Yahya. Thence:
3.329
1 E of Sha‘b Ali Oilfield (5 miles N) (3.68), thence:
SW of the SW corner of Sha‘b ed Deqayeq
(4 miles NNE), a reef extending about 3 miles
SW from Râs el Millân, thence:
NE of the SE end of Sha‘b Ali (2 miles NNE) (3.41).
Thence:
2 SW of Sha‘b el Meqeeda (6 miles NE) a narrow,
awash, finger of coral extending about 2 miles
ESE from the SE corner of Sha‘b ed Deqayeq.
Thence:
NE of Shag Rock (3.42), thence:
SW of Sha‘b Surûr (7 miles E) (3.314) a circular
coral reef situated about 4 miles W of Qâd Ibn
Haddân.
Anchorages
3.330
1 Merset el Qâd Yahya. Anchorage, sheltered by the
reefs, is available in Merset el Qâd Yahya (27°56′N,
33°54′E), about 1 miles E of Râs Kenîsa (3.235), and
5 cables offshore, in depths from 13 to 18 m, mud.
115
2 Directions. The best entrance channel into the bay lies
between the coral reef that extends about 1 mile ESE from
Râs Kenîsa and the N end of Sha‘b Rayis; a stranded
wreck lies on the NW part of the reef. The channel
between the S end of Sha‘b Rayis and the N end of Sha‘b
ed Deqayeq is wider but intricate and is encumbered with
shoals. It can be used if necessary with a good lookout
aloft.
3 Mersa Zaraba. Sheltered anchorage is available in
Mersa Zaraba (27°50′N, 34°00′E) in depths from 9 to
15 m, sand and coral.
Directions. The anchorage of Mersa Zaraba is entered
between the E end of Sha‘b el Meqeeda and an unnamed
coral patch (awash) about 5 cables ESE. The entrance to
this anchorage has a least depth in the fairway of 11 m and
can be navigated safely with a good lookout aloft.
4 Sha‘b el Meqeeda. Small vessels may obtain anchorage
N of Sha‘b el Meqeeda (3.329) in depths from 4 to 7 m.
This area is encumbered with coral reefs.
Local knowledge is required for the use of all of these
anchorages.
See also 3.321.
Shadwân Channel
Description
3.331
1 Shadwân Channel (27°34′N, 33°49′E) is entered from
the SW side of the Strait of Gubal and initially extends
about 4 miles SSW passing between Gûbâl Island (3.42)
and Sha‘b Umm ‘Usk (3.42).
The channel continues a farther 12 miles SE to enter the
head of the Red Sea between the SE end of Shaker Island
(27°27′N, 34°02′E) and Umm Qamar Islet (9 miles SW).
2 The channel in the fairway is deep and free from
danger. Navigation should give no difficulties using the
chart and a good lookout aloft as the difference of colour
between the deep water and the shoal water over the reefs
is very apparent, except in a calm or when the sun is
ahead.
As NW winds prevail in this locality low-powered
vessels may use Shadwân Channel with advantage when
proceeding N.
3 This channel should only be attempted during daylight.
Many convenient anchorages are available.
Directions
3.332
1 From a position on the SW side of the Strait of Gubal,
about 3 miles SE of Bluff Point (27°41′N, 33°49′E)
(3.42), the track leads initially SSW, for a distance of about
18 miles, passing (with positions given from Tawîla Island
Light (27°34′⋅8N, 33°48′⋅0E)):
2 ESE of Gûbâl Island (3 miles N) (3.42), thence:
WNW of Sha‘b Umm ‘Usk (4 miles ENE) (3.42) a
below-water reef, the edges of which are clearly
visible in daylight; a dangerous rock lies off the
NW corner of the reef. Thence:
3 ESE of the dangerous rock (1 mile NNE) which lies
on the edge of the 10 m contour line close N of a
shoal patch, with a least depth over it of 5 m,
thence:
4 WNW of Siyul el Soghira Light (red cylindrical GRP
tower; 5 m in height) (2 miles ESE) which is
exhibited from the N part of an unnamed reef; a
stranded wreck lies off the W side of the reef.
Thence:
5 ESE of Tawîla Island Light (green cylindrical GRP
tower 5 m in height) exhibited from the E
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
Siyul el Soghira Light (27°34′⋅2N 33°50′⋅1E) (3.332)
(Original dated 1998)
(Photography − Ports & Light Houses Administration Egypt)
extremity of Tawîla Island. The island is low and
flat and composed of coral, the E and highest part
rise to heights between 9 and 15 m; a small cairn
situated about 7 cables W of the light, marks the
summit of the island. Thence:
3.333
1 Passing E of the sandy cay (0⋅6 m in height) (2 miles
S) which lies close S of Endeavour Harbour
(3.334); a dangerous rock lies close SE of the cay.
Thence:
SW of the S side of the unnamed reef (3 miles ESE)
on which stands Siyul el Soghira Light, thence:
SW of the reefs extending NW off the N end of
Shaker Island (6 miles ESE) (3.42), thence:
2 NE of Sha‘b Abu Shiban Light (black cylindrical
GRP tower, yellow base, N cardinal; 5 m in
height) (6 miles S) exhibited from the NE corner
of Sha‘b Abu Shiban, a drying reef covered at
high water. Two dangerous rocks lie on the 10 m
contour about 1 mile SE of the light. South Rakau
Beacon (iron tripod, ball topmark) marks the SE
end of the reef; West Rakau Beacon (3.337) marks
the SW side. Thence:
3 NE of Melana Light (black GRP beacon, yellow
band, E cardinal; 5 m in height) (10 miles SSE)
116
Tawîla Island Light (27°34′⋅8N 33°48′⋅0E) (3.332)
(Original dated 1998)
(Photography − Ports & Light Houses Administration Egypt)
exhibited from the N end of Sha‘b el Erg, a drying
reef covered at HW. The reef is steep-to on its N
and E sides but within its concave side it is
shallow and encumbered with rocks. Thence:
4 NE of Sha‘b el Erg Light (black GRP beacon, yellow
band, E cardinal; 5 m in height) (11 miles SSE)
exhibited from the SE side of Sha‘b el Erg. A
stranded wreck (position approximate) lies in the
vicinity of the beacon. Thence:
5 NE of Umm Qamar Light (14 miles SSE) (3.324)
exhibited from the N end of Umm Qamar Islet
which stands near the S end of a steep-to coral
reef which extends about 7 cables N from the
light; a beacon stands on the reef about 4 cables N
of the light. The E side of the islet, which is its
highest part, has coral cliffs about 15 m high. And:
6 SW of Shaker Island Light (14 miles SE) (3.35) and
into the N part of the Red Sea.
(Directions for the central passage through the
Red Sea are given at 4.14)
Anchorages
3.334
1 Endeavour Harbour (27°34′N, 33°48′E), also known as
Sharm Tawîla, is situated in the SE part of Tawîla Island
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
Sha’b Abu Shiban Light (27°28′⋅6N 33°49′⋅4E) (3.333)
(Original dated 1998)
(Photography − Ports & Light Houses Administration Egypt)
(3.332) and affords sheltered anchorage to small vessels in
all winds.
The entrance to the harbour is narrow so a more
convenient anchorage may be found outside the harbour.
Two ruined jetties extend from the N shore of the
harbour.
2 Good anchorage may also be obtained in depths of
about 13 m with the 0⋅6 m high sandy cay bearing 010°,
distant 1 miles. The cay lies about 9 cables S of the
entrance to Endeavour Harbour.
3 Anchorage, as shown on the chart, may be obtained off
the SW side of Shaker Island (3.42) about 5
miles WNW
of Shaker Island Light (3.35) in depths of about 11 m, sand
and coral. Vessels should approach this anchorage with the
low W extremity of Shaker Island in line with the rounded
summit of Gûbâl Island (3.42), bearing 322°, and anchor
when the desired sounding is achieved; depths increase
rapidly S of the anchorage. This anchorage lies within the
prohibited area which surrounds Shaker Island. See
prohibited areas 3.31.
4 A drying coral rock and a rock awash lie about 3 cables
NE of the anchorage position off Shaker Island; a good
landing is available about 6 cables N of the coral rock, NE
of the charted anchorage position. A passage through the
reef is marked by leading beacons, front beacon (triangle,
apex down), rear beacon (triangle, apex up), situated about
8 cables NNE of the coral rock; two mooring buoys are
laid about 5 cables S of the front beacon.
Inner coastal passage from the south end of
Tawîla Channel to the Gifâtîn Islands
Description
3.335
1 From a position at the S end of Tawîla Channel (3.356)
the inner coastal passage leads SE for about 18 miles,
passing WNW of Sha‘b Tawîla (27°31′N, 33°44′E) (3.337),
to a position in the N approaches to Hurghada (3.367), N
of the Gifâtîn Islands (27°14′N, 33°55′E) (3.390).
117
Navigational information
3.336
1 If heading N through the inner coastal passage Shaker
Island (3.42), the round summit of Gûbâl Island, (3.42) and
the double peak of Gebel ‘Esh (3.323) will be found to be
the best points for fixing position rather than Tawîla Island
(3.332) which is low and flat.
Directions
3.337
1 From a position at the S end of Tawîla Channel (3.356),
about 5 miles SW of Tawîla Island (3.332), the track leads
SE, passing (with positions given from West Rakau Beacon
(27°27′N, 33°47′E)):
SW of Sha‘b Tawîla (5 miles NW) a drying reef
covered at HW; a beacon (tripod, cone topmark;
8 m in height) marks the SW extremity of the reef,
thence:
2 NE of Sha‘b E‘sh (6 miles W), a coral reef extending
about 2 miles E from the coast; an area of foul
ground surrounds the reef. Thence:
NE of the isolated coral patch (3 miles WSW) and
surrounding shoal water which lies in the outer
approaches to El Gouna (3.362) and marked on its
NW side by No 1 Light-buoy (can); and NE of
Sha‘b Abu Sha‘r, which lies about 2 miles SW on
the S and E sides of the approaches to El Gouna.
Thence:
3 SW of West Rakau Beacon (tripod, triangle topmark;
5 m in height) which marks the SW side of Sha‘b
Abu Shiban which is covered at HW. Sha‘b Abu
Shiban Light (3.333) is exhibited from the E side
of the reef, thence:
SW of South Rakau Beacon (2 miles E) (3.333)
which marks the SW corner of Sha‘b Abu Shiban,
thence:
Clear of the charted dangerous patch (3 miles SSE)
which lies in the fairway W of Sha‘b el Erg. This
dangerous patch should be given a clear berth.
Thence:
3.338
1 SW of Sha‘b el Erg (5 miles ESE) (3.333) from
which both Melana Light and Sha‘b el Erg Light
(3.333) are exhibited, thence:
Clear of Sha‘b Abu Nigara (6 miles SSE) which
stands on a bank extending about 8 cables E and
on which there are numerous rocks and shoal
patches. The passage NE of the reef is the more
favourable as it is marked by Umm Qamar Light
(3.324). For directions for the N approach to
Hurghada, see 3.370. Thence:
2 SW of Umm Qamar Islet (8 miles SE) (3.333) from
which Umm Qamar Light is exhibited, thence:
SW of Sha‘b Saghîr tal Umm Qamar (9 miles SE) a
small, below-water, steep-to reef lying about 1 mile
SSE of Umm Qamar Islet; a drying rock stands on
the N side of the reef, thence:
SW of Carless Reef (11 miles SE) another small
below-water reef lying a farther 2 miles SE which
is not clearly visible. A dangerous rock stands on
the reef. Thence:
3 NE of the N end of the Gifâtîn Islands (27°14′N,
33°55′E) (3.390) and into the N part of the Red
Sea.
(Directions for the central passage through
the Red Sea are given at 4.14)
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
Minor channels and passages on the south west
side of the Strait of Gubal
Charts 2374 plan of Zeit Terminals, 2375
Ashrâfi Channel
3.339
1 Description. From a position NW of the Ashrâfi Oilfield
(3.70), Ashrâfi Channel (27°47′N, 33°42′E) leads S
between the E side of Sha‘b Mukowarat, on which stand
the majority of the Ashrâfi Islands (3.313), and an
unnamed reef consisting of two coral patches which border
the SW side of the Strait of Gubal.
The channel is deep and free from dangers in the
fairway but depths in both the N and S approaches
decrease rapidly.
2 A disused lighthouse (red iron framework tower,
masonry base, 43 m in height) (27°47′⋅6N, 33°42′⋅4E),
stands near the centre of the NE islet of the group which
itself stands on the NE coral patch of the reef. An iron
jetty extends from the base of the disused lighthouse which
can be used by boats at all states of the tide.
A dangerous wreck lies 3 cables WNW of the disused
lighthouse; a shoal patch, with a least depth over it of
1⋅5 m, lies about 1 mile NNW of the lighthouse.
3 Ashrâfi Reef Light (3.35) is exhibited from the SW islet
which stands on the NE coral patch.
An oil production platform stands on the E side of the
channel.
A mooring buoy is laid in the S approach to the
channel.
3.340
1 Tidal streams. The tidal streams within 2 miles of the
Ashrâfi Islands (3.313), which includes Ashrâfi Channel,
are very uncertain in direction.
3.341
1 Sea level. The level of the sea in this area is much
affected by the wind.
3.342
1 Anchorage may be obtained by vessels, with a draught not
exceeding 3⋅7 m, in a natural basin in Sha‘b Mukowarat
situated about 1 mile N of Sandy Islet (27°43′N, 33°43′E).
The basin, which should be approached from the E, has
depths from 3⋅7 to 12⋅8 m, sand.
Chart 2374 plan of Zeit Terminals
Kowarat Channel
3.343
1 Description. From the N Kowarat Channel (27°47′N,
33°40′E) the track leads SSE between Sha‘b Ashrâfi
(3.313) and Sha‘b Mukowarat (3.339).
The channel is deep and free of dangers.
Caution. A number of rocks which lie about 6 cables
SSW of the S end of Sha‘b Ashrâfi, between Kowarat
Channel and Zeit Channel (3.345), cannot be easily
identified even from aloft under favourable conditions.
3.344
1 Depths. A shoal patch, with a least depth over it of
12⋅8 m, lies in the S approaches to the channel about
1 mile E of Sandy Islet (27°43′N, 33°43′E), close N of the
N end of South Qeisûm Island.
Caution. The area between the S end of the channel and
South Qeisûm Island (3.357) has not been completely
surveyed and mariners are warned that dangerous shoals
may exist.
118
Charts 2374 plan of Zeit Terminals, 2375
Zeit Channel
3.345
1 Description. From the N, Zeit Channel is entered
between Umm el Kimân (27°50′N, 33°35′E) (3.41) and the
N end of Sha‘b Ashrâfi reef (3 miles ESE), and extends
about 11 miles S to the N end of Qeisûm Pass (3.348).
The channel is deep and generally free from dangers.
An isolated coral patch, with a least depth of 12⋅1 m
over it, lies in the N approaches to the channel, close N of
the N end of Sha‘b Ashrâfi (3.313).
2 Two conspicuous stranded wrecks, as shown on the
chart, are situated near the N end of Sha‘b Ashrâfi.
Production Platform WP−C and Platform WP−D, which
are connected by submarine oil pipeline to the Geisum
Oilfield (3.71), are situated on the W side of the S end of
the channel in the N approach to Qeisûm Pass. A further
Platform G−16 stands on the E side of the S end of the
channel.
3.346
1 Anchorage. See 3.187.
3.347
1 Submarine pipelines. A submarine oil pipeline from the
Geisum Oilfield is laid through the channel passing, as
shown on the chart, through the SW part of the two
designated anchorage areas. The line of the pipeline
through this area is marked by light-buoys (yellow conical).
Further pipelines, as shown on the chart, are laid across
the N entrance to the channel.
Chart 2375
Qeisûm Pass
3.348
1 Description. Qeisûm Pass (27°40′N, 33°41′E) leads
between the reefs extending SW from South Qeisûm Island
(3.357) and the reef on which stands Umm el Heimât
Saghîra, an island which rises to a height of about 9 m.
From a position at the S end of Zeit Channel, in the
vicinity of production platform WP−C, the passage leads
SE to the NW side of Tawîla Channel (3.356).
The passage is tortuous and encumbered with reefs and
rocks, and is only suitable for use by small vessels.
3.349
1 Local knowledge is required for the use of Qeisûm
Pass.
Umm el Heimât Passage
3.350
1 Description. From the W side of the S end of Zeit
Channel (3.345), in the vicinity of production platform
WP−C, Umm el Heimât Passage (27°39′N, 33°39′E) leads
initially SW, passing S of an unnamed reef.
The passage then turns SE passing between the S end of
Umm el Heimât and Sha‘b Umm el Heimât, and the SW
side of the reef on which stands Umm el Heimât Saghîra
(3.348); to a position on the N side of Tawîla Channel, N
of N Tawîla Beacon.
2 The passage is tortuous and encumbered with reefs and
rocks. A dangerous underwater rock lies in the fairway
close S of the unnamed reef; an isolated coral reef lies in
mid-channel close S of the rock.
A lighted mooring buoy is laid in the N approach to the
passage.
The passage is only suitable for use by small craft.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
3.351
1 Local knowledge, is required for the use of Umm el
Heimât Passage.
Kabrît Pass
3.352
1 Description. Kabrît Pass (27°37′N, 33°36′E) is entered
passing between Kabrît Beacon (black and white tripod,
triangle topmark) which stands near the SE end of Sha‘b
Barôk a reef on the SW side of Râs Gemsa on which also
stand three small islands and some above-water rocks; and
the NW end of Sha‘b Abu Sul.
The pass which leads to the anchorage of Marsa Kabrît
has a least depth in the fairway of 6⋅7 m.
2 A beacon stands on the S side of the S-most of the
small islands on Sha‘b Barôk.
A jetty extends a short distance SSW from the shore on
the S side of Râs Gemsa; a mooring buoy is laid W of the
head of the jetty.
Bahriya Pass
3.353
1 Description. Bahriya Pass (27°36′N, 33°41′E) lies off
the SW side of the reefs which lie close SE of Sha‘b Umm
el Heimât.
The passage leads between these reefs and a dangerous
area with a least depth over it of 2⋅7 m.
The bottom of the passage is irregular and does not
appear suitable for larger vessels.
Deep Pass
3.354
1 Description. Deep Pass lies close SW of Bahriya Pass
(3.353) and leads between the dangerous area, with a least
depth over it of 2⋅7 m, and a below-water reef on which
there are a number of rocks.
The Oil Production Platform Gemsa 4/5 stands NNW of
the passage and is connected to Râs Gemsa by a submarine
oil pipeline.
The reefs on both sides of the channel show up well
when the sun is shining on them.
South West Pass
3.355
1 Description. From the S, South West Pass (27°35′N,
33°39′E) is entered passing E of the isolated shoal patch,
with depths of less than 10 m over it and marked at its N
end by Elbow Buoy (3.360), and at its S end by Turning
Buoy (3.360). The track then leads W of the buoy (pillar,
cylindrical topmark) which marks the S end of the shoal
water which lies between Deep Pass (3.354) and South
West Pass.
The SE extremity of Umm el Heimât Saghîra bearing
about 021°, leads through the passage which has a least
charted depth in the fairway of 6⋅1 m.
Tawîla Channel
3.356
1 Description. Tawîla Channel (27°39′N, 33°45′E) extends
about 14 miles SSW from the SW side of the Strait of
Gubal to a position WNW of Sha‘b Tawîla (3.337), at the
head of the inner coastal passage which then leads SE to a
position off the Gifâtîn Islands (3.390) (27°14′N, 33°55′E).
2 Tawîla Channel is used in daylight by vessels visiting
the Geisum Oilfield (3.71).
A least depth in the fairway of the channel of 11⋅4 m
lies about 7 cables S of North Tawîla Beacon (27°36′N,
33°43′E) in the narrow buoyed section of the channel.
119
3.357
1 Directions. From a position on the SW side of the Strait
of Gubal, about 3 miles NW of Bluff Point (27°41′N,
33°49′E) (3.42), the track leads SSW for about 14 miles,
passing (with positions given from North Tawîla Beacon
(27°36′N, 33°43′E)):
E of the buoy (orange can) (7 miles NNE) moored
about 1 mile NNE of the N end of South Qeisûm
Island, thence:
2 W of the beacon (tripod, cone topmark; 9 m in
height) (6
miles NNE) standing on the NE corner
of Sha‘b Gûbâl, a reef which extends about
3 miles NNW of Gûbâl Island. The reef has some
black coral above-water rocks at its edges; its E
side is steep-to. In 2000 it was reported that this
beacon no longer existed. Thence:
3 E of the buoy (orange can) (5 miles NE) moored off
the E side of South Qeisûm Island, close E of the
beacon (tripod, triangle topmark; 8 m in height)
standing on the edge of a coral reef which extends
about 3 cables off the E side of the island; in 2000
it was reported that this beacon no longer existed.
South Qeisûm Island, which is joined by a coral
reef to North Qeisûm Island (3.71), is low with a
dark brown conical hillock, about 30 m high, at its
NE end, and a white sandy hillock 11 m high
about 1 miles farther S. Sandy cliffs rise from
the N part of the island. Thence:
4 WNW of the dangerous wreck (4 miles NE) which
lies about 7 cables off the W side of Gûbâl Island
(3.42), thence:
Clear of the buoy (orange can) moored in the middle
of the fairway between the SE side of South
Qeisûm Island and the reef off the N-end of
Tawîla Island (3.332), thence:
3.358
1 NW of the shoal patch (2 miles NE), with a least
depth over it off 4⋅5 m, which lies off the NW
corner of Tawîla Island, thence:
SE of Geisum Oilfield (2 miles N) (3.71), thence:
SE of the light-buoy (red and white spherical,
spherical topmark) (8 cables NE), thence:
2 NNW of South Tawîla Beacon (cylindrical topmark,
8 m in height) (1 mile SSE) which stands on the N
side of a detached reef off the W corner of Tawîla
Island; in 2000 it was reported that this beacon no
longer existed; a white patch of sand, which dries,
is situated on the S end of the reef. Thence:
3 SSE of North Tawîla Beacon (iron tripod, triangle
topmark; 7 m in height) which stands on the SW
side of Bahriya Tawîla, a sandy islet; in 2000 it
was reported that this beacon no longer existed.
Thence:
NNW of the light-buoy (red and white spherical,
spherical topmark) (1 mile S), thence:
ESE of the S end of Bahriya Pass (1 miles SW)
(3.353) and ESE of the S end of Deep Pass
(3.354) which lies close S. Thence:
4 ESE of the buoy (3 miles SW) (spar, cylindrical
topmark) moored on the W side of the channel
marking the S end of the shoal water which lies
on the N side of South West Pass (3.355), thence:
ESE of the shoal (2
mile SSW), with a least depth
over it of 9⋅8 m, which lies about 1 mile ESE of
the spar buoy and into the N end of the inner
coastal passage, thence:
NW of Oil Production Platform WP−E (3 miles SSE).
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
Anchorage
3.359
1 Anchorage may be obtained in depths of about 20 m off
the SE corner of South Qeisûm Island.
Ghubbet el Gemsa
Description
3.360
1 Ghubbet el Gemsa (27°39′N, 33°32′E) is a bay entered
between the SE end of Sha‘b Barôk (27°38′N, 33°36′E),
marked at its S extremity by Kabrît Beacon (3.352), and a
point on the shore which lies about 4 miles SSW.
About 3 miles from the head of the bay the fairway is
reduced by reefs and the coastal bank. Depths in this area
are much reduced with a least depth in the fairway of
7⋅0 m and a detached shoal, with a least depth over it of
4⋅6 m, lying on the SW side of the entrance.
2 Elbow Buoy (barrel, black) marks the N end of this
isolated shoal area and Turning Buoy (barrel, black and
white stripes; spherical topmark) marks its S end.
Abu Sha‘r Bay
Description
3.361
1 Abu Sha‘r Bay (27°18′N, 33°46′E) lies within the
coastal coral reefs, about 6 miles NW of Hurghada (3.367).
Dishet Abu Hurghada, a remarkable flat topped hill,
55 m high, stands 4 miles SE of the bay.
A radio mast and a tower stand near the foreshore N of
Dishet Abu Hurghada; a group of four radio masts stand
about 1 mile S.
El Gouna
Description
3.362
1 Abu Tig Marina is a new marina at the resort of El
Gouna (27°23′N, 33°41′E) which is situated about 13 miles
NW of Hurghada (3.367).
The approach to the marina is by the recommended
tracks, as shown on the chart, which lead from the inner
coastal passage, passing N and W of Sha‘b Abu Sha‘r
(3.337).
No approach is possible passing S of Sha‘b Abu Sha‘r
reef.
2 No 1 Light-buoy (can) marks the SW side of an isolated
coral patch and its surrounding shoal water, which lies in
the outer approaches to the marina.
Three pairs of light-buoys are laid in the inner approach
channel which leads through the off-lying reefs to the
entrance to the marina basin; a pair of light-beacons mark
the marina entrance.
The main marina basin has a least depth of 3⋅6 m.
3.363
1 Landmark. Deir Umm Diheis is a ruined fort which
stands near to the coast close S of the marina.
3.364
1 Berths. The marina can accommodate vessels up to
40 m in length berthing stern-to in the Mediterranean style.
3.365
1 Tidal levels. Mean spring range about 1⋅2 m; mean neap
range about 0⋅3 m.
3.366
1 Facilities. Port of entry; police and customs; slipway;
ship lift up to 16 m length; dry dock.
Supplies: fresh water; fuelling berth; provisions.
120
HURGHADA
General information
Charts 3043 plan of Hurghada, 2375
Position
3.367
1 Hurghada (27°14′N, 33°50′E) is situated on the SW side
of the approaches to the Strait of Gubal.
Function
3.368
1 Hurghada is the seat of the Governor of the Red Sea
Province and is its administrative centre.
In 1992 the population was approximately 8000.
Topography
3.369
1 Between Franken Point (27°14′N, 33°51′E) and Merlin
Point (2 miles S) the coast forms a well sheltered bay.
Merlin Point is a bare, steep, coral rock rising in
precipitous ledges to about 75 m in height. The point forms
the E extremity of Dishet Abu Minqâr, a prominent hill
which rises to a height of 84 m.
Several towers between the town and the coast show up
well from N of Franken Point; several large tanks which
are situated about 3 cables WSW of the point are also
prominent.
2 Abu Minqâr Island stands on a coral reef about
1
miles SE of Franken Point and rises to a height of
about 2 m. It is composed of sand and coral, covered in
places with low bushes. A narrow creek entered from its W
side is bordered with mangroves as is a smaller creek on
its N side.
Approach and entry
3.370
1 Northern approach. From the N, the port is approached
on the alignment of the leading lights situated W of Merlin
Point (27°12′N, 33°51′E) which leads to the N end of
Minqâr Channel.
Southern approach. From the S the port is approached
through Giftûn Channel which leads between Sha‘b el Lug
(27°10′N, 33°51′E), a reef extending about 3 miles in a N/S
direction lying parallel to the coast, and Umm Agâwish el
Kebîr (27°10′N, 33°52′E) (3.383).
Traffic
3.371
1 In 2001 the port was used by 1 vessel.
Protected area
3.372
1 The coral reefs surrounding Hurghada have been
declared protected areas.
The use of anchors on, or adjacent to, protected coral
reefs is prohibited except in cases of emergency or force
majeure.
Moorings have been laid as described in Appendix III
and shown on the accompanying chartlets.
Limiting conditions
Controlling depths
3.373
1 In 2001 the least charted depth in the fairway of Minqâr
Channel was 6 m.
Depths in Giftûn Channel are generally less than those
in Minqâr Channel; a least depth of 5 m in the fairway lies
about 3 cables SE of Merlin Point (27°12′N, 33°51′E).
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3

Caution. Minqâr Channel and Giftûn Channel have been

incompletely surveyed and mariners are warned that
uncharted shoals may exist.
Recent hydrographic surveys (2004) in the N approaches
to Hurghada have revealed many depths less than charted.
Mariners are advised to navigate with caution and consult
with local authorities for the latest information.

Local weather
3.374
1 The weather in the N part of the Red Sea is controlled
in the summer months by the thermal low over Saudi
Arabia and the high pressure that ridges over the E
Mediterranean.
When the thermal low deepens and the high pressure
ridge strengthens, winds funnel through the Gulf of Suez
producing gale force winds and high seas, this funnelling is
exacerbated in the Hurghada region.
2 Visibility can be expected to be about 4 to 6 miles but
will be less in the suspended sand and heavy haze that
forms after the wind dies down.
3.375
1 Climatic table. See 1.275 and 1.278.

Arrival information
Notice of ETA
3.376
1 Vessels wishing to enter Hurghada should send their
ETA at the waiting area at least 24 hours in advance.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).

Waiting area Hurghada Port front leading light (3.379)

3.377 (Original dated 1998)
1 A waiting area, in which vessels may wait for a
(Photography − Ports & Light Houses Administration Egypt)
representative of the shore authorities, is established, as
shown on the chart, about 4 miles SSW of Umm Qamar
Islet (3.333) in the N approach to Minqâr Channel.

Anchorage leading lights, as shown on the charts, to the central part of

3.378
1 Anchorage may be obtained, as shown on the chart, in a
depth of 25 m about 2 cables ESE of Franken Point
(27°14′⋅2N, 33°50′⋅9E).
Anchorage is also obtainable off Hurghada, as shown on
the chart, with the leading lights in transit and the Harbour
Master’s Office bearing 300°, in depths from 16 to 18 m.
Care should be taken to avoid the wreck, with a least depth
over it of 33 m, which lies close N of the anchorage. This
anchorage berth is comparatively well sheltered but strong
N winds raise a considerable sea.
Directions for entering harbour
Northern entrance
3.379
1 Hurghada Leading Lights:
Front light (black and white rectangle on black
framework tower; 15 m in height) (27°12′⋅5N,
33°50′⋅6E).
Rear light (white rectangle on black framework tower;
18 m in height) (404 m from front).
These lights may be difficult to identify if the visibility
is affected by haze.
2 From a position about 2 miles N of Umm Qamar Islet
(27°21′⋅5N, 33°54′⋅5E) (3.333) the track leads about
10 miles SSW, initially on the alignment (194°) of the
the harbour, passing (with positions given from Franken
Point Light (27°14′N, 33°51′E)):
3 ESE of El Fanâdîr Islands (4 miles NNW) which
stand on the NE part of Sha‘b el Fanâdîr, a coral
reef on the W side of the approach to the harbour,
thence:
WNW of Giftûn el Kebîr Light (red cylindrical GRP
tower, 5 m in height) (2
miles NE) exhibited
from the NW part of the drying reefs which
surround Giftûn el Kebîr Island (3.390), thence:
3.380
1 Leading marks: The alignment, (199°), of Dishet Abu
Minqâr and a high hill, which lies farther SSW, leads to
the anchorages off Hurghada, passing:
2 ESE of Sha‘b el Fanâdîr Light (green cylindrical GRP
tower, 5 m in height) (27°15′⋅4N, 33°50′⋅6E)
exhibited from a small drying reef situated about
6 cables SE of Sha‘b el Fanâdîr reef (3.379),
thence:
3 ESE of Franken Point Light (green cylindrical GRP
tower, 5 m in height) which is exhibited from a
position close N of Franken Point (3.369). A
pinnacle of coral, with a least depth over it of 6 m,
lies on the alignment of the leading marks close E
of the anchorage; a further pinnacle, with a least
depth over it of 7 m, lies close N of the
anchorage.

121
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
Hurghada Port rear leading light (3.379)
(Original dated 1998)
(Photography − Ports & Light Houses Administration Egypt)
3.381
1 Approach from southeast. Pass clear of the Gifâtîn
Islands (3.390) and about 1 mile N of the reef extending N
from Giftûn el Kebîr, continue on a W course until Dishet
Abu Minqâr bears 199°, in transit with the high hill, then
proceed as described in the directions for the N entrance.
3.382
1 Departure. If leaving Hurghada by the N entrance, and
clear of Minqâr Channel (3.370), then bring the leading
lights (3.379) in transit astern, bearing 194°.
Continue NNE on this course until Umm Qamar Islet
(3.333) bears 110°, when course may be shaped to pass on
either side of Sha‘b el Erg (3.333) to enter the SW side of
Shadwân Channel (3.331); or NW to enter Tawîla Channel
(3.356).
Southern entrance
3.383
1 From a position about 1 mile E of Sa‘al Hashîsh
(27°02′N, 33°55′E) the track leads about 13 miles NNW to
the central part of the harbour, passing (with positions
given from Dishet Abu Minqâr (27°12′⋅1N, 33°50′⋅4E)):
ENE of the dangerous rock (6 miles SSE) which
lies about 6 cables offshore, thence:
2 WSW of Sha‘b Abu Rimâthi (7 miles ESE) a
below-water coral reef which is reported not to be
easily visible. Note the shoal (reported 2000), with
a least depth over it of 22⋅9 m, which lies about
2 miles SE of the reef. Thence:
3 When Dishet Abu Minqâr is seen between Umm
Agâwish el Kebîr (27°10′N, 33°52′E) and the low rocky
islet marked by a beacon, which lies about 6 cables SW of
its S end, the rocky islet should then be kept bearing more
122
Giftûn el Kebîr Light (27°16′⋅1N 33°3′⋅0E) (3.379)
(Original dated 1998)
(Photography − Ports & Light Houses Administration Egypt)
than 310°, until the W extremity of Umm Agâwish el
Kebîr bears 010°, when course may be altered N.
Passing SW of the dangerous rock (4 miles SE) and
the shoal patch, with a least depth over it of 3⋅5 m,
which lies close SE, thence:
4 NE of the isolated shoal patch (4 miles SSE) with a
least depth over it of 7 m, thence:
E of the low rocky islet (3 miles SSE) which is
marked on its W side by a beacon (triangular
topmark, apex up), thence:
5 W of the beacon (triangular topmark, apex down)
(3 miles SSE) which marks the S end of Umm
Agâwish el Kebîr, an islet about 5 m high and
composed of dead coral. A ledge of below-water
rocks extends about 1 miles E from the E side of
the islet. Thence:
3.384
1 Passing E of Sha‘b el Lug (2 miles S) a long and
narrow drying coral reef which extends about
3 miles in a N/S direction parallel to the coast,
thence:
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3

coastal bank, which extends about 6 cables SE

from the point and across the channel, is not so
easily identified as the reef on the E side of the
channel. Thence:
4 WSW of Abu Minqâr Light (red cylindrical GRP
tower, 5 m in height) (1 mile NE) which is
exhibited from the edge of the reef which
surrounds Abu Minqâr Island (3.369) and on to the
inner anchorage off Hurghada.

Berths

North Pier
3.385
1 North Pier is situated about 1 cables SSW of Franken
Point (3.369).
In 1986 the pier was reported to be in ruins.

Sha’b el Fanâdîr Light (27°15′⋅4N 33°0′⋅5E) (3.380)

(Original dated 1998)
(Photography − Ports & Light Houses Administration Egypt)

W of the beacon (triangular topmark, apex up; 8 m in

height) (2 miles SE) which marks the N edge of
the drying reef which surrounds Umm Agâwish el
Kebîr, thence:
2 E of the beacon (cylindrical topmark, 5 m in height)
(1 miles SE) which marks the NE point of Sha‘b
el Lug; care should be taken to clear this part of
the reef. Thence:
WSW of the beacon (triangular topmark, apex up;
position approximate) (1 mile E) marking the SW
edge of the reef which surrounds Abu Minqâr
Island (3.369), and:
3 ENE of Merlin Point (7 cables E) (3.369), a least
depth in the fairway of 5 m lies about 3 cables SE
of the point. The Sheraton Hotel, a conspicuous Abu Minqâr Light (27°12′⋅9N 33°1′⋅0E) (3.384)
six-storey building surrounded by trees, stands (Original dated 1998)
about 2 cables SW of the point. Caution is (Photography − Ports & Light Houses Administration Egypt)
necessary when approaching Merlin Point as the

123
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 3
South Pier
3.386
1 South Pier is situated about 2 cables SSW of Franken
Point (3.369); the pier is 15 m in length with depths
alongside of 7⋅3 m at its head.
Vessels berth alongside with an anchor laid SE.
The pier is connected by pipelines to the oil tank storage
facility.
Port services
Facilities
3.387
1 Port health officer; oil company clinic; post office; a
light railway connects the piers with the oil wells in the
vicinity of Dishet Abu Hurghada (3.361).
Supplies
3.388
1 Fresh water and fresh provisions may be obtained
through the oil company’s vessels.
Given two or three days notice limited fresh meat and
provisions may be obtained from Qena (26°10′N, 32°40′E)
which is situated about 75 miles SW in the Nile Valley.
Communications
3.389
1 An airfield is situated about 3 miles SW of the town.
Oil company vessels regularly connect Hurghada with
Suez.
Gifâtîn Islands
Chart 2375
Description
3.390
1 The Gifâtîn Islands (27°14′N, 33°55′E) are a group of
islands and islets, for the most part fringed by coral reefs,
which lie off the coast E of Hurghada.
Giftûn el Kebîr, the largest island of the group, is hilly
in its N and central parts; a rugged range extends S from
its N extremity and attains an elevation of 115 m. The S
part of the island is a plateau of dead coral between 3 and
6 m high; the W side is fringed by extensive coral reefs
which enclose a lagoon off the SW part of the island.
2 A detached below-water coral patch, with dangerous
rocks close off its W side, lies about 7 cables S of the S
end of the Giftûn el Kebîr.
124
Giftûn el Saghîr (27°12′N, 33°59′E) is a smaller island
which lies close E of the SE end of Giftûn el Kebîr. The
island is hilly and attains an elevation of 103 m near the
middle of its E side. The island is fringed by a reef which
extends about 1 miles NW of its N extremity; on its E
side the reef is steep-to. Giftûn el Saghîr Light-beacon
(4.13) is exhibited from the mid-part of the E side of the
island.
3 A T-headed pier projects from the SW extremity of
Giftûn el Saghîr. The depth at its head was reported to be
7⋅3 m.
Abu Rimâthi (27°10′N, 33°59′E) is an islet lying about
9 cables S of Giftûn el Saghîr which is fringed by a coral
reef that extends about 3 cables S of its S extremity; an
islet stands on this S part of this reef. The N end of the
islet is a narrow point which rises to a height of 19 m.
4 Sha‘b Abu Rimâthi (3.383), a coral reef, lies 2 miles SW
of Abu Rimâthi. A dangerous rock lies 1 mile NNE of the
reef between it and Abu Rimâthi; a shoal, with a least
depth over it of 22⋅9 m lies 2 miles SE of the reef.
Umm Agâwish el Kebîr (3.383) is an islet situated on
the E side of the S approaches to Hurghada, about 6 miles
W of Abu Rimâthi.
5 Abu Minqâr Island (27°13′N, 33°53′E) (3.369) stands on
part of the extensive coral reefs which extend from the W
side of Giftûn el Kebîr. In 1976 the depths off the SE side
of the island where reported to be less than charted.
Anchorage
3.391
1 During N winds small vessels may obtain emergency
anchorage close S of the T-headed pier which projects from
the SW extremity of Giftûn el Saghîr Island.
2 Small vessels may also obtain emergency anchorage in
mid-channel between Giftûn el Kebîr and Giftûn el Saghîr
with the peak of Giftûn el Saghîr bearing 072°, in depths
from 13 to 29 m, coral and sand. The width of this
anchorage is between 1 and 2 cables and both shores are
bordered by broad coral reefs with several outlying rocks
which render a good lookout necessary when entering the
anchorages. The N entrance to the anchorage is so
encumbered with reefs that its use cannot be recommended.
3 Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
See also 3.372.
Home Contents Index

NOTES

125
Home Contents Index

Chapter 4 - The Central Passage of the Red Sea

35° 40°

Râs Muhammad

El-Akhawein
(The Brothers)
4.1
4

25° 25°
EGY PT Abu el Kîzân

Berenice

Gezîret S AU D I
Zabargad ARABIA
159
-
Rabigh

Ras Hadarba
4 .1
5

Jeddah

Ras Abu Shagrab

SUDAN
-
Al Lith
20° 157 20°

Port Sudan

Masamirit I.

158
4.1

Farasan
6

Islands

ETHI O PI A 143
Mits’iwa
(Massawa)

15° 15°
4.
19
4.1

Jabal
7

Zuqar i.
ER
IT
4.8

R
2

EA
Ba
bel
M
an
de
b

35° Longitude 40° East from Greenwich

0205

126
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 4
RED SEA — CENTRAL PASSAGE — STRAIT OF GUBAL TO
STRAITS OF BAB EL MANDEB
GENERAL INFORMATION
Chart 4704
Scope of the chapter
4.1
1 The area covered by this chapter comprises the central
waters of the Red Sea from the S end of the Strait of Gubal
(27°30′N, 34°06′E) to the Straits of Bab el Mandeb
(12°40′N, 43°20′E) which lead to the Gulf of Aden (12.1).
Description
4.2
1 The Red Sea extends about 1050 miles SE from the Strait
of Gubal to the Straits of Bab el Mandeb.
In the N part it is generally free of dangers, but, in the S,
many islands and shoals lie on the coastal banks which
extend from both shores of the sea.
A chain of islands extends about 54 miles NNE from Ras
Terma Zerf Ch’af (13°14′N, 42°33′E), encumbering the S
end of the waterway.
Depths
4.3
1 The N half of the central passage through the Red Sea is
mostly deep; an isolated shoal depth of 55 m lies about
19 miles SE of El-Akhawein (26°19′N, 34°51′E).
In the central S part of the waterway the coastal banks
extend progressively from both shores such that at Jazrat a

’ir (15°33′N, 41°50′E) the 200 m depth contour lies about
11 miles E, and 10 miles W, of the island.
2 A shoal with a least depth over it of 28⋅5 m lies outside
the coastal bank about 34 miles E of Harmil (16°31′N,
40°10′E).
Another shoal, with a least depth over it of 28⋅8 m, lies
about 29 miles NW of Jazrat a
’ir. Other shoals, with
least depths over them from 33 to 55 m, lie 20 miles NW
and 17 miles N, respectively, of the island.
3 Farther S, in the narrowing part of the sea, the 200 m
depth contour of both coastal banks merges SW of Jabal
Zuqar Island (14°00′N, 42°45′E).
Caution. In general, navigation within the outer edges of
the coastal banks is dangerous.
STRAIT OF GUBAL TO THE STRAITS OF BAB EL MANDEB
General information
Charts 4704, 159
Route
4.8
1 In order to maintain N-bound and S-bound traffic
separation in the Red Sea, vessels S-bound from the Strait of
Gubal should pass W of Al-Akhawein (26°19′N, 34°51′E)
and Abu el Kizân (24°55′N, 35°52′E), before continuing SE
to the vicinity of 17°00′N, 40°40′E. Vessels N-bound from
this position towards the Strait of Gubal should pass E of
Al-Akhawein and Abu el Kizân.
127
Weather
4.4
1 In the Red Sea, N of 20°N, the wind is mainly from NW
to N throughout the year.
Over the remainder of the Red Sea NW and N winds
predominate from May to September, but from October to
April the winds are mainly from S to SE.
There is no record of any cyclone occurring in the Red
Sea. Thunderstorms are infrequent, as is rainfall.
2 It is extremely hot from June to September and the heat,
combined with the high humidity in the S part of the Red
Sea during these months, makes the climate oppressive.
Flow
4.5
1 Currents setting in any direction may be experienced
throughout the year in the central passage route of the Red
Sea.
The rates of the majority of the currents experienced in
the Red Sea do not exceed 1 kn. Only rarely do they exceed
2 kn, but mariners should bear in mind that, on occasion,
considerable currents set across the Red Sea.
Protected areas
4.6
1 The coral reefs surrounding El-Akhawein (The Brothers)
(26°19′N, 34°51′E), Abu el Kizân (Daedalus Reef) (24°55′N,
35°52′E) and Gezîret Zabargad (23°37′N, 36°12′E) have
been declared protected areas.
The use of anchors on, or adjacent to, protected coral
reefs is prohibited except in cases of emergency or force
majeure.
See Appendix III for further information.
Caution
4.7
1 Mariners are advised to exercise caution if navigating
close to the Muhabbaka Islands (13°23′N, 42°36′E). There
have been reports that the charted positions of these islands
may be incorrect by varying amounts.
2 The S-bound route then continues SE to pass W of Jazrat
a
’ir (15°33′N, 42°50′E) and Jaz
’ir az Zubayr before
proceeding either SW of ansh al Kubrá or E of Jabal
Zuqar Island via the appropriate TSS.
3 From the ansh al Kubrá and Jabal Zuqar Island TSS
the recommended routes then lead SE and SSE respectively
until they converge in the precautionary area (13°15′N,
43°02′E) at the N end of the Bab el Mandeb TSS.
Traffic separation schemes
4.9
1 TSS are in operation SW of ansh al Kubrá (13°43′N,
42°44′E); E of Jabal Zuqar Island (14°00′N, 42°45′E); and
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 4
from the vicinity of 13°13′N, 43°03′E to the SE entrance of
Bab el Mandeb.
All three schemes are IMO-adopted and Rule 10 of The
International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea
(1972) applies. See 1.2.
International boundaries
4.10
1 The political boundary between Egypt and Sudan lies
close S of Ras Hadarba (22°04′N, 36°54′E); the
administrative boundary reaches the coast close WSW of
Minear Island (23°10′⋅5N, 35°44′⋅2E).
The boundary between Sudan and Eritrea lies close to
Ras Qass
r (18°01′N, 38°35′E). The boundary between
Eritrea and Djibouti lies close SW of Dumeira Island
(12°43′N, 43°09′E).
Currents
4.11
1 Mariners should bear in mind that, on occasion,
considerable currents set across the Red Sea. See 4.5.
Magnetic anomalies
4.12
1 Magnetic anomalies have been reported in the Red Sea
between the parallels of 22°N and 24°30′N.
A local magnetic anomaly of up to 1° E has been
reported in the vicinity of Jazrat a
’ir (15°33′N,
41°50′E).
Mariners are reminded of the need to check magnetic
compass errors frequently when on passage through the Red
Sea.
Principal marks
4.13
1 Major lights:
Giftûn el Saghîr Light (black galvanised metal tower)
(27°12′N, 33°59′E) exhibited from the E part of
Giftûn el Saghîr (3.390).
El-Akhawein Light (The Brothers Light) (white round
tower on square dwellings, 31 m in height; racon)
(26°19′N, 34°51′E) exhibited from near the centre
of North Island.
2 Abu el Kizân Light (Daedalus Reef Light) (white
round stone tower, black bands on concrete base,
two storey dwelling; racon) (24°55′N, 35°52′E)
exhibited from a position 1 cables within the SW
end of the reef.
3 Jazrat a
’ir Light (white round metal tower and
lantern, 20 m in height) (15°33′N, 41°50′E)
exhibited from the W side of the summit of Jazrat
a
’ir (4.26).
Directions
(continued from 3.42)
Strait of Gubal to Gezîret Zabargad
4.14
1 From a position at the SE end of the Strait of Gubal TSS,
about 5 miles E of Shaker Island Light (27°27′N, 34°02′E)
(3.35) the track leads SSE through the central part of the
Red Sea, passing:
2 WSW of El-Akhawein (The Brothers) (26°19′N,
34°51′E) (4.22) which consists of two islands,
North Island and South Island, separated by a
channel about 1 mile wide. El-Akhawein Light
(4.13) is exhibited from near the centre of North
Island. When passing El-Akhawein, especially at
128
night, it is advisable to give the islands a wide berth
as a cross-current often sets W in their vicinity,
thence:
3 WSW of Mash
bih (25°38′N, 36°30′E) (9.118),
thence:
WSW of Abu el Kizân (Daedalus Reef) (24°55′N,
35°52′E) (4.24) a coral reef which, during periods
of low sea-level in the Red Sea, sometimes dries but
is always covered during periods of higher
sea-levels. The reef is steep-to and may be passed
on either side. Abu el Kizân Light (4.13) is
exhibited from the reef. Thence:
4 ENE of Râs Banâs (23°54′N, 35°47′E), the SE
extremity of a promontory extending about 16 miles
ESE from the main line of the coast. The hills of
the promontory are sharply divided into two groups
by difference of colour. Pale-coloured hills form a
sinuous plateau through the length of the
promontory attaining a height of 198 m WNW of
Râs Banâs, thence:
WSW of Shi’b Shu’aybah (24°26′N, 37°11′E) (9.110),
thence:
5 ENE of Gezîret Zabargad (23°37′N, 36°12′E) a barren
waterless island. A hill near its centre has a sharp
conical peak which is of volcanic origin. The island
is bordered by steep-to coral reefs, up to 4 cables
wide, which render it inaccessible except by a small
boat passage which leads through the reef on the
NE side of the island; the summit of the island
bearing 225° leads through this passage.
6 In 1950, it was reported that the island was inhabited
and that a stone jetty was situated at the inner end
of the boat passage. Two beacons (black metal
masts, rectangular red, white and black banded
topmark, 16 m in height) stand on the NE and SE
sides of the island. Rocky Island, a small, steep and
rocky island lies 3 miles SE of Gezîret Zabargad. In
1984, a dangerous reef was reported to lie 5 miles E
of Rocky Island. The coral reefs surrounding
Gezîret Zabargad have been declared protected
areas. See 4.6.
Chart 158
Gezîret Zabargad to Masamirit
4.15
1 From a position ENE of Gezîret Zabargad the track
continues SSE through the central part of the Red Sea,
passing:
ENE of Ras Hadarba (22°04′N, 36°54′E) which is
formed of quicksands. A shoal (reported 1977), with
a least depth over it of 18⋅3 m, lies about 37 miles
SE of the point, thence:
2 WSW of Shi‘b al Kabr (21°41′N, 38°50′E) (9.266)
which is marked by a directional light-beacon,
thence:
ENE of Abington Reef (20°54′N, 37°27′E) (6.16) an
above-water coral reef from which Abington Reef
Light (6.14) is exhibited. Thence:
3 WSW of Shi’b Mismar Mismar Reef) (21°20′N,
39°02′E) (9.281) a drying reef marked by a
light-beacon, thence:
WSW of Qadd Humais (20°15′N, 39°29′E) which
consists of a series of low sandy islets standing on
two steep-to reefs, thence:
4 ENE of Masamirit (18°50′N, 38°45′E) which lies,
together with Karam Masamirit (2 miles SSE), on
the E side of the Saw
kin Group (6.347). Both
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 4
islets are low, composed of sand and coral, with
bushes on them. No attempt should be made to pass
between the two islets. A shoal area, with depths of
5⋅5 m over it, extends 1 mile N from Karam
Masamirit. Masamirit Light (red metal framework
tower) is exhibited from the E side of Masamirit.
Charts 157, 143, 453
Masamirit to Jaz ’ir az Zubayr
4.16
1 From a position ENE of Masamirit the track continues SE
through the central part of the Red Sea, passing:
SW of Mubarak (19°00′N, 40°08′E) a dangerous reef,
over which the sea breaks, which lies close to the
W edge of the N end of Faras
n Bank (10.14),
thence:
2 SW of Wasalyat Islets (17°41′N, 41°02′E) which
consist of two low sandy islets standing on a coral
bank. Shi‘b al Jum
(10.66) a dangerous rock, lies
about 11 miles SW of these islets; a further
dangerous rock lies a similar distance W, thence:
3 SW of Al Baghlah (16°57′N, 41°24′E) (10.200). Al
Baghlah Light-beacon (10.67) stands on the NW
side of the island. Jz
n North Light-buoy, which
marks the entrance to Jz
n North Approach Route,
is moored about 6 miles W of the island. Thence:
4 NE of a shoal patch (16°27′N, 40°45′E), with a least
depth of 28⋅5 m over it, which lies close off the NE
side of Dahlak Bank (7.87), thence:
5 NE of a shoal patch (15°49′N, 41°25′E), with a least
depth of 28⋅8 m over it, and clear of a shoal patch,
with a least depth over it of 33 m, which lies about
11 miles E. Note the shoal patch, with a least depth
over it of 33 m (existence doubtful), which lies
close NW, and the shoal patch (reported 1984), with
a least depth of 55 m over it, which lies 10 miles E,
thence:
6 SW of Jazrat a
’ir (15°33′N, 41°50′E) (4.26).
Thence:
SW of Quoin Island (15°12′N, 42°03′E) (4.31), thence:
7 SW of Saddle Island (15°07′N, 42°06′E) (4.33) which
lies on the NW side of Jaz
’ir az Zubayr. If, when
passing SW of Jaz
’ir az Zubayr, a strong S wind is
blowing then give the islands a wide berth as there
is a strong onshore set. Strong winds are frequent
during the six months from November to April,
thence:
8 SW of Centre Peak Island (15°01′N, 42°10′E) (4.40)
the S-most island of Jaz
’ir az Zubayr. Centre Peak
Island Light (concrete tower, 14 m in height) is
exhibited from the middle of the SE side of the
island.
(Directions continue for passing SW of
–anØsh al Kubrá at 4.17, and for passing
E of Jabal Zuqar Island at 4.19)
Charts 143, 453, 452, 1925
Jaz ’ir az Zubayr to Al Mukh Precautionary Area
passing south-west of  an sh al Kubrá
(continued from 4.16)
4.17
1 From a position SW of Centre Peak Island, the track
continues SSE, passing:
2 WSW of Penguin Shoal (14°57′N, 42°21′E), a small
steep-to rocky patch. This area has not been
129
thoroughly surveyed and there may be other similar
shoals in this vicinity, hence, the passage E of
Jaz
’ir az Zubayr is not recommended. Thence:
WSW of Avocet Rock (14°22′N, 42°42′E), a steep-to
coral patch, thence:
3 WSW of the isolated shoal (14°14′N, 42°27′E),
reported in 1987 with a least depth over it of 10 m,
thence:
WSW of Jabal Zuqar Island (14°00′N, 42°45′E) (4.48)
and the ansh group of islands (4.46).
Thence, the track leads through the SSE-bound lane of
the ansh al Kubrá TSS, passing:
4 WSW of South West Rocks (13°38′N, 42°36′E) which
consist of a rock 7 m high, with an above-water and
a below-water rock close off its E side. The rocks
are steep-to and stand on the NW side of the deep
trough off the SW part of ansh al Kubrá (4.61);
they give a good radar response.
4.18
1 Thence, the track alters SE within the TSS, passing:
WSW and SW of South West Haycock (13°32′N,
42°37′E), the SW of the three islands that form the
Haycocks (4.69), thence:
2 NNE of High Island (13°27′N, 42°35′E) which is
white in appearance. Flat Island (4.70), which lies
about 3 miles SSW, is also white in appearance. A
shoal with a depth of 1⋅7 m over it, lies about
1 cables E of the island. Thence:
SSW of a shoal (13°28′N, 42°43′E) with a least depth
over it of 24⋅5 m.
3 Thence, from the termination of the TSS, the
recommended track continues SE, passing:
NNE of Harbi Island (13°21′N, 42°39′E) which rises
vertically from the sea. A depth of 0⋅6 m lies close
E. Sayal Island (4.70) lies about 5 miles WSW.
Thence:
NNE of a wreck (13°11′N, 42°53′E), with a least
depth over it of 7⋅3 m. Fieramosca Shoal, which lies
about 4 miles SSW of the wreck, is composed of
coral and has a least depth over it of 5⋅5 m.
4 Thence, the track leads through the precautionary area
(13°15′N, 43°02′E) about 14 miles WSW of Al Mukh
, and
into the SSE-bound lane of the Straits of Bab el Mandeb
TSS.
(Directions continue at 4.82)
Jaz ’ir az Zubayr to Al Mukh Precautionary Area
passing east of Jabal Zuqar Island
(continued from 4.16)
4.19
1 From a position SW of Centre Peak Island, the track
leads SE, passing:
SW of Penguin Shoal (14°57′N, 42°21′E) (4.17),
thence:
SW of Avocet Rock (14°22′N, 42°42′E) (4.17), thence:
2 NE of the reported shoal (14°14′N, 42°27′E) with a
depth of 10 m over it.
Caution. During the period of the NE monsoon there is
often a heavy sea between about 15 miles N of Ab ‘Al
Islands (14°05′N, 42°49′E) and 15 miles NW.
4.20
1 The track then leads through the SE-bound lane of the
Jabal Zuqar Island TSS, passing, (with positions given from
Quoin Island Light (14°05′N, 42°49′E)):
2 NE of High Island (3 miles W) which is steep-to and
lies close off North Point, the N extremity of Jabal
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 4
Zuqar Island (4.48), and into the Ab ‘Al Channel
(4.45), thence:
NE of North Point (3 miles W), a low and sandy point
near which grow a few green bushes, thence:
3 SW of Quoin Island from which Quoin Island Light
(white square building with name on side, 9 m in
height) is exhibited from near the islands summit.
Water tanks for the use of the lighthouse keepers are
situated nearby. An islet, 1⋅8 m in height, lies about
2 cables SW of Quoin Island; a rock awash and a
dangerous rock lie close off the S side of the islet.
The channel between Quoin Island and the islet
should not be used for navigation. A shoal, with a
least depth over it of 24 m, lies about 3 miles NE
of Quoin Island Light. Thence:
4 NE of East Point (3 miles SSW) which is low and
rocky with white sand behind it. A shoal lies close
E of the point, with a least depth over it of 4⋅5 m; a
dangerous wreck lies on this shoal. The coast of
Jabal Zuqar Island between North Point and East
Point is fringed by a reef extending up to 1 cable
offshore; a conspicuous stranded wreck lies 5 cables
NW of East Point.
5 Thence, the track leads SSE within the TSS, passing:
ENE of a shoal (3 miles S), with a least depth over it
of 17⋅8 m, lying about 1 mile ESE of East Point.
Note the 18⋅3 m shoal (reported 1963) which lies
close NNW.
4.21
1 From the S end of the Jabal Zuqar Island TSS the
recommended track continues SSE, passing:
ENE of a shoal (7
miles S), with a least depth over it
of 15 m (reported 1999), lying about 1
miles off
the E side of Jabal Zuqar Island, thence:
2 ENE of Low Island (12 miles S) (4.54). An 8 m high
islet lies off the N end of the island, and an 11 m
high rock lies off its SE side. A chain of rocks and
a narrow islet extend from the S end of the island.
Fawn Rock, a dangerous rock nearly awash, lies
about 3 cables E of the S end of the island.
Thence:
3 ENE of a rocky shoal (13 miles S), with a least
depth over it of 12⋅5 m. Shoaler depths may well
exist in this area and the E side of Low Island
should be given a wide berth. Thence:
4 ENE of Mush
jirah (13°47′N, 42°50′E), a small islet E
of the N end of ansh al Kubrá. The islet may be
approached on its W and S sides to a distance of
2 cables, but a reef extends about 90 m N and about
3 cables E. The islet only rises to a height of 7 m
and is not easily seen at night. A shoal, with a least
depth over it of 11 m, lies about 5 cables NNW of
the islet. Thence:
5 ENE of Quoin Island (13°43′N, 42°48′E) which lies
about 5 cables E of North Round Island off the E
side of ansh al Kubrá. The channels between the
islands, and between North Round Island and
ansh al Kubrá, are free from dangers. Thence:
ENE of Round Island (13°40′N, 42°48′E) which lies
2 miles SSE of North Round Island; the island is
dark in appearance, thence:
6 ENE of Parkin Rock (13°37′N, 42°49′E) which is
small and only 3⋅4 m in height. Caution is necessary
if, when near the rock, it has not been sighted.
Depths in the vicinity are almost uniform until close
to Parkin Rock, such that soundings will give no
warning of its presence. Thence:
130
7 WSW of South Shoals (13°17′N, 43°11′E) (11.250)
which lie on the coastal bank WSW of Al Mukh

(11.243).
Thence, the track leads through the precautionary area
(13°15′N, 43°02′E) to a position about 14 miles WSW of Al
Mukh
, and into the SSE-bound lane of the Straits of Bab el
Mandeb TSS.
(Directions continue at 4.82)
THE CENTRAL NORTHERN PART
OF THE RED SEA
El-Akhawein
Chart 159
4.22
1 Description. El-Akhawein, also known as The Brothers,
(26°19′N, 34°51′E) are situated about 81 miles SSE of
Shaker Island (3.42) and consist of two islands, North Island
and South Island, separated by a channel 1 mile wide.
Both islands are composed of coral, and apart from a
coral reef which fringes them, are steep-to. The reef extends
about 140 m NW of the NW end of North Island; and a spit,
with a least depth over it of 5⋅5 m, extends about 140 m NW
of the NW end of South Island.
2 El-Akhawein Light (The Brothers Light) (4.13) is
exhibited from near the centre of North Island. During
periods of abnormal refraction this light has been seen from
a distance of over 100 miles.
A bollard to which vessels may secure during N winds is
situated on the SE extremity of North Island. An iron jetty
55 m long extends from the middle of the SW side of North
Island to the edge of the reef.
4.23
1 Protected area. The coral reefs surrounding El-Akhawein
have been declared protected areas.
See 4.6 and Appendix III.
Abu el Kizân
4.24
1 Description. Abu el Kizân, also known as Daedalus Reef,
(24°55′N, 35°52′E) lies about 100 miles SSE of
El-Akhawein (4.22) and is composed of coral.
The reef sometimes dries during the low-level period of
the Red Sea but it is always covered during the high level
period; for further information on sea levels, see 1.246.
Abu el Kizân Light (4.13) is exhibited from a position
1 cables within the SW end of the reef. An iron jetty
extends S from the light-tower to the edge of the reef.
4.25
1 Protected area. The coral reefs surrounding Abu el Kizân
have been declared protected areas. See 4.6 and Appendix
III.
OFFSHORE ISLANDS IN THE CENTRAL
SOUTHERN PART OF THE RED SEA
Jaz rat a
’ir
Chart 143
Description
4.26
1 Jazrat a
’ir (15°33′N, 41°50′E), situated about
600 miles SSE of Daedalus Reef (4.24), rises to a height of
244 m.
The island is of recent volcanic origin and is composed
chiefly of lava. Sulphurous jets exist at the summit, but, for
many years, no smoke has been seen issuing.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 4
2 From its coast the island slopes gradually upward to a
range of hills about 150 m high, it then rises again to two
inland peaks, the larger central peak is brown, the other, on
some bearings, appears conical. On the SE side of the island
is a steep rocky yellow bluff.
3 From the NW and SE Jazrat a
’ir appears high and
conical, sloping gradually towards its coasts. It is steep-to
and forms a good landmark.
Jazrat a
’ir Light (4.13) is exhibited from the W side
of the summit of the island.
4 A large shed, containing water tanks, stands on the S side
of the island, but it is somewhat inconspicuous as it is
painted a similar colour to the surrounding rock. A good
landing may be obtained on the rocks near this shed from
the beginning of May to early September.
5 Water tanks servicing the lighthouse stand on the beach N
of the lighthouse, where, between September and April, a
good landing, with good shelter from SSE winds, is
obtainable.
Anchorages
4.27
1 Anchorage is obtainable, from the beginning of May to
the end of August when NW and WNW winds prevail, off
the S side of the island. The best berth is found by
approaching from the SE and anchoring in a depth of 29 m
with the E and W extremities of the island bearing 062° and
273° respectively. The nearest danger, with a least depth over
it of 5⋅5 m, lies 4 cables from this position. Discoloured
green water appears to extend some distance offshore over a
patch of white sand, but no depth of less than 10 m has
been found over this patch; there is very little current in this
anchorage berth.
2 A further anchorage berth is available, in a depth of 90 m,
2 cables offshore with the light-house bearing 157°; depths
of over 9 m were reported to lie within 45 m of the shore.
Vessels have been known to anchor W of the light-house but
here the depths are considerable.
3 Depths are considerable off the N side of the island, but,
off the beach fronting the centre of the N shore, depths
shelve more gradually. Anchoring in greater depths than
15 m should not be attempted since the bottom falls away
steeply from about 18 m. The holding ground in this
anchorage was reported as only moderate but the shelter
from strong S winds was reported as surprisingly good. This
was a traditional anchorage used by dhows seeking shelter
from S gales.
Magnetic anomaly
4.28
1 See 4.12.
Jaz ’ir az Zubayr
Chart 143
Description
4.29
1 Jaz
’ir az Zubayr (15°05′N, 42°10′E) is a group of
islands, islets and rocks extending about 13 miles SSE from
Quoin Island (15°12′N, 42°03′E) (4.31), lying at the NW
extremity of the group, to the S end of Centre Peak Island
(15°01′N, 42°10′E).
The group is rugged and almost devoid of vegetation.
131
Caution
4.30
1 Owing to the uncertainties in the positions of the off-lying
islands, mariners are advised to proceed with caution when
in their vicinity.
Quoin Island
4.31
1 Quoin Island (15°12′N, 42°03′E) is wedge-shaped, rising
to 30 m in its SW part. The island is not easily seen at
night.
The island is steep-to within 2 cables; an above-water
rock lies close SW of the island.
A shoal bank, with a least depth over it of 20 m lies
about 1 mile S of the island.
Haycock Island
4.32
1 Haycock Island (15°10′N, 42°07′E) lies about 3 miles
SE of Quoin Island and is almost steep-to.
A shoal bank, with least depth over it of 16⋅5 m, lies
between the S side of Quoin Island and Haycock Island.
Rugged Island and adjacent islands
4.33
1 Rugged Island (15°09′N, 42°06′E), Table Peak Island
(6 cables SE), Saddle Island (1 mile S) and Low Island
(1
miles S) all stand on a rocky bank, with depths of less
than 20 m over it, which is steep-to, especially on its W side.
The islands are fringed by banks, with depths of less than
5 m over them, extending up to 2 cables offshore.
2 A deep channel on the NE side of the islands separates
Rugged Island from Haycock Island (4.32).
A small group of rocks, the highest 25 m high, lie about
4 cables WNW of Saddle Island; a rock 8 m high lies
4 cables E of Low Island.
Middle Reef
4.34
1 Middle Reef (15°07′N, 42°09′E) lies about 2 miles SE of
Table Peak Island and uncovers at low water levels.
The reef is narrow, composed of coral and is steep-to; the
sea breaks on it if there is any swell.
East Rocks
4.35
1 East Rocks (15°07′N, 42°12′E) stand on a reef about
3 miles E of Middle Reef and consist of one rock, 1⋅5 m
high, and a dangerous rock, about 1 cable NW, over which
the sea often breaks.
The reef is steep-to to within a distance of 1 cable.
Saba Island
4.36
1 Saba Island (15°05′N, 42°09′E) lies near the centre of
Jaz
’ir az Zubayr Islands; the island is sandy and exceptional
in having a few stunted bushes on it; there are two
prominent hills both having craters.
Saba Island has two lagoons connected to the sea and
fringed with mangroves.
The island is bordered by a coral reef which extends
9 cables SW to Connected Island which has a rugged top.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 4
Shoe Rock, 5 m high, stands on the SE edge of the reef
about 3 cables NE of Connected Island.
Jabal Zubayr Island
4.37
1 Jabal Zubayr Island (15°03′N, 42°11′E) lies close SE of
Saba Island. The island has a central N/S range of hills
which rise to a cone-shaped summit, 224 m high, about
3 cables from its S extremity.
The channel between Jabal Zubayr Island and Saba Island
has a least width, between the 10 m depth contours close
SW of the anchorage, of 1 cables.
North Peak rises about 6 cables from the N end of the
island and is square in shape, and 162 m in height.
A stranded wreck lies close off the S end of the island.
4.38
1 Anchorage. Between September to April, the period of
prevailing SE winds, anchorage may be obtained in
mid-channel between Saba Island and Jabal Zubayr Island, in
depths of about 16 m, as shown on the chart.
This anchorage is not recommended during SW winds,
which can be frequent in winter, as it is open to both wind
and sea.
4.39
1 Off-lying dangers. Williamson Shoal lies about 8 cables
NE of the NE corner of Jabal Zubayr Island.
Evans Rock, lies about 1 mile SE of the SE side of Jabal
Zubayr Island near the centre of a bank, with depths over it
from 20 to 50 m.
A small, unnamed and steep-to coral shoal, with a least
depth over it of 5⋅5 m, lies about 8 cables SW of Evans
Rock.
Centre Peak Island
4.40
1 Centre Peak Island (15°01′N, 42°10′E), the S-most island
of Jaz
’ir az Zubayr, is steep-to and rises from a rocky coast
to three hills. The highest hill, which rises to a height of
173 m, about 4 cables N of the S end of the island, is
surmounted by a disused light-house.
Some water tanks stand on the beach of a small bay on
the SW side of the island.
Centre Peak Island Light (4.16) is exhibited from the
middle of the SE end of the island.
4.41
1 Anchorage may be obtained, as shown on the chart, in a
depth of about 22 m, mud, with the disused light-house
bearing 240°, distant 5 cables. The anchorage is suitable for
use from the beginning of May to the end of August during
the period of prevailing NW winds.
As this anchorage berth is situated close inshore, during
August, vessels should not lie here overnight as squalls of
wind and rain from the SE sometimes occur, especially at
sunset.
Off-lying shoals
4.42
1 South Shoal, a coral bank, lies about 1 miles SE of
Centre Peak Island.
Shark Shoal, a coral bank, lies about 1 miles E of South
Shoal.
Tide-rips frequently occur in the vicinity of Shark Shoal.
132
Ab ‘Al Islands
Charts 453, 1925
Description
4.43
1 Ab ‘Al Islands (14°05′N, 42°49′E) lie about 2 miles
NE of Jabal Zuqar Island in the separation zone of the Jabal
Zuqar Island TSS. They are a group of barren islands and
islets, whitish-brown in colour and therefore not easily seen
at night. Each island is bordered by reefs and rocks
extending up to about 90 m offshore.
2 Quoin Island (4.20) and Pile Island are the two main
islands of the group.
Pile island, which lies about 2 cables NE of Quoin Island,
is composed of two parts joined by a reef. The island is
fringed by rocks and reefs on its N and W sides and is
almost steep-to on its E side. The island is inaccessible.
3 Landing on the E side of Quoin Island, from the vicinity
of the anchorage (4.44), is especially good at HW. At times,
when the anchorage is unsafe, landing has been made N of
the lighthouse; in strong SE winds there is a good landing in
smooth water on a ledge on this side of the island.
4 An islet, 1⋅8 m in height, lies about 2 cables SW of Quoin
Island. A rock awash and a dangerous rock lie close off its S
side, with shoal water extending about 1 cables E of the S
end of the islet. The channel between Quoin Island and the
islet should not be used for navigation.
Quoin Island Light (4.20) is exhibited from near the
summit of Quoin Island.
4.44
1 Anchorage. Between the middle of May and the middle
of December, the period of prevailing NNW winds, a good
safe anchorage may be obtained in depths of 16 m, sand and
coral, with Quoin Island Light (4.20) bearing 270°, distant
3 cables. This anchorage is not safe at other times of the
year.
In August squalls of wind and rain from the SE
sometimes occur. During such conditions the anchorage
should be vacated.
Ab ‘Al Channel
4.45
1 Ab ‘Al Channel (14°04′N, 42°48′E) lies between the
Ab ‘Al Islands on its E side, and High Island (4.20) and
Jabal Zuqar Island (4.48) on its W side.
The fairway, which forms the SE-bound lane of the Jabal
Zuqar Island TSS, is about 1
miles wide and is deep and
free from dangers. It is advisable to keep in the middle of
the channel as the tidal streams in the channel are very
irregular and occasionally set across it.
2 At night, or in hazy weather, the high land of Jabal Zuqar
Island often has a peculiar distant appearance and East Point,
the SW entrance point to the channel, being low with white
sand behind it, may resemble water and not be identified
until dangerously close to it.
Jabal Zuqar and the  an sh group of islands
Charts 453, 1925
General information
4.46
1 The islands comprising the Jabal Zuqar and ansh group
of islands extend about 47 miles SSW from High Island
(14°05′N, 42°46′E) (4.20), which lies close N of Jabal Zuqar
Island, to within about 6 miles of the W shore of the Red
Sea.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 4
The islands mostly rise to dark brown volcanic hills, with
rocky peaks of various shapes. Craters are evident on some
of the largest islands.
4.47
1 Currents. From observations made many years ago, a
frequent E-going set of upwards of 1 kn was recorded
between Jabal Zuqar Island (14°00′N, 42°45′E), the ansh
group of islands (2 to 23 miles S) and the Arabian Coast
(25 miles E) during the strong S and SSE winds which are
prevalent in winter.
2 A N-going current with rates of  to 1 kn is generally
experienced between ansh al Kubrá (13°43′N, 42°44′E)
and Ras Terma Zerf Ch’af (13°14′N, 42°33′E) with strong
SE winds. There is reason to believe that this current is
stronger between ansh al Kubrá and the Haycocks (7 miles
SW) than between the Haycocks and Ras Terma Zerf Ch’af.
The sea is much heavier between ansh al Kubrá and
the Haycocks than farther S.
Jabal Zuqar Island
4.48
1 Jabal Zuqar Island (14°00′N, 42°45′E) rises to high,
barren-looking hills, which, on some bearings, appear as
sharp peaks. The highest peak rises to a height of 571 m
from near the middle of the island.
There are no permanent inhabitants of the island but it is
visited by fishermen, generally between February and June.
High Island (4.20) lies close N of North Point the N
extremity of the island. The NE side of the island between
ughrá
North Point and East Point forms the SE side of Ab ‘Al
Channel (4.45).
2 The NW side of Jabal Zuqar Island is bordered by a reef
extending up to 5 cables offshore; West Point forms the W
extremity of the Island.
South Bay which is situated on the SW side of the island
is entered SE of Near Island (13°57′N, 42°43′E), the bay
affords good anchorage. Two stone huts and a hut for water
tanks stand on the NE shore of the bay.
4.49
1 Tidal streams. The tidal streams around Jabal Zuqar
Island are very irregular, but they appear to set along the
coasts.
In the anchorage off the NW coast the in-going stream
has been observed to set SW at a rate of 2 kn, and NE
with the out-going stream.
Current. A strong S-going set has been experienced on
the W coasts of Jabal Zuqar Island whilst a strong
NW-going current was running in the offing.
4.50
1 Anchorages. An anchorage for larger vessels, with good
shelter from S winds, may be obtained, as shown on the
chart, about 1
miles W of North Point in depths of about
20 m, sand and coral.
2 Small vessels may obtain anchorage, as shown on the
chart, about 4 cables NNW of East Point, although a swell
sets into the bay.
Two anchorage berths, as indicated on the chart, are
obtainable in South Bay off the SW side of the island. The
best berth is in the NW part of the bay between the N part
of Near Island and the coast of Jabal Zuqar Island, in depths
of about 15 m. The anchorage in the E part of the bay is in
a depth of about 22 m, coral.
3 Anchorage may also be obtained in the unnamed bay at
the S end of Jabal Zuqar Island, as shown on the chart,
about 1 cable E of the W entrance point to the bay, in
depths of about 10 m sand and coral. The reefs fringing the
shores of the bay are generally visible.
133
Anchorage is also obtainable between 2 and 4 cables off
the reef which borders the NW side of Jabal Zuqar Island, in
depths from 13 to 18 m; and in depths from 31 to 47 m
5 cables off. The bottom is rocky in both anchorage berths.
4.51
1 Shark Island (13°57′N, 42°42′E) lies about 3 miles SSE
of West Point.
A rock awash lies off the NW tip of the island and a
dangerous rock lies off its E side. A reef fringes the SW part
of the island.
Near Island (13°57′N, 42°43′E) forms the W side of
South Bay and is mostly steep-to.
A dangerous rock lies off the NW side of the island; a
dangerous rock and a small islet lies off its SE side.
Tongue Island
4.52
1 Tongue Island (13°53′N, 42°43′E) lies about 2 miles
SW of the SW corner of the S end of Jabal Zuqar Island
(4.48) from which it is separated by a deep channel free of
dangers.
The island is semi-circular in shape and is connected from
its SW point to a low rock islet by a ridge of below-water
dangerous rocks.
The enclosed basin formed by the island, islet and rocks
has a least depth within of 11 m. Boats may enter the basin
through a passage on its E side which has a least depth of
3⋅2 m.
 an sh a
4.53
1 The island of ansh a ughrá (13°52′N, 42°47′E) lies
about 1
miles S of Jabal Zuqar Island from which it is
separated by a deep channel, free of dangers.
The island is hilly and rugged with grass in places, but
the 191 m high summit is not easily distinguished.
Tumble-down Peak, on the E side of the island, shows up
well from both N and S; the peak is so named because from
the SW it resembles a small peak in the act of falling.
A group of rocky islets stand on a shallow flat which
extends just over 1 mile NE of the island.
Low Island
4.54
1 Low Island (13°52′N, 42°49′E) lies about 5 cables E of
the N end of ansh a ughrá; an islet, 8 m in height, lies
off the N end of the island, and an 11 m high rock lies off
its SE side. A chain of rocks and a narrow islet extend from
the S end of the island.
Fawn Rock, a dangerous rock nearly awash, lies about
2 cables E of the S end of the island.
4.55
1 Tidal stream. In the channel between ansh a ughrá
and Low Island the tidal stream sets S from about HW in
Ab ‘Al Channel until about 4 hours before the next HW
there.
Many years ago a current of about 1 kn set continuously
N during a short period of anchorage in the channel between
ansh a ughrá and Low Island, whereas the tidal stream
would have been expected to set S for the last 4 hours of the
stay.
4.56
1 Anchorages. Anchorage, well sheltered from S winds and
sea, may be obtained N of ansh a ughrá in depths from
13 to 20 m, about 2 cables offshore with Tumble-down Peak
bearing due S, as shown on the chart. This anchorage is
reported to be preferable to the anchorages between ansh
a ughrá and Low Island.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 4
2 Anchorage may also be obtained in one of the two
anchorage berths shown on the chart between ansh a
ughrá and Low Island. Depths in the N berth are between
22 and 27 m, and in the S berth from 33 to 37 m.
Haycock Island
4.57
1 Haycock Island (13°47′N, 42°47′E) which lies off the NE
tip of ansh al Kubrá is separated from ansh a ughrá
by a deep channel, 3 miles wide, which is free from dangers.
The narrow channel separating Haycock Island from
ansh al Kubrá has a least depth of 12⋅8 m, but dangerous
rocks lie off both sides of the channel.
From the S, the island resembles its name, but from close
E it appears to be hollowed out like a saucer.
4.58
1 Tidal stream. Off Haycock Island the tidal stream sets SE
with the out-going stream.
4.59
1 Currents. The currents around Haycock Island are strong.
Addar Ail Islands
4.60
1 Addar Ail Islands (13°47′N, 42°48′E) lie about 1 mile
ENE of Haycock Island from which they are separated by a
deep channel which is free from dangers.
The islands form a circle within which lies a small basin
which has a narrow opening to the SW.
2 Mush
jirah (13°47′N, 42°50′E) (4.21) is a small islet,
standing on a coral reef, which lies about 1
miles ESE of
Addar Ali Islands; a shoal with a least depth over it of 11 m
lies about 5 cables NNW of the islet.
There are tide rips between Mush
jirah and Haycock
Island.
 an sh al Kubrá
4.61
1 ansh al Kubrá (13°43′N, 42°44′E) is hilly with deep
valleys between some of the hills; the highest peak, which
rises to a height of 406 m from near the centre of the island,
appears on some bearings as a prominent bluff.
A low strip of sand crosses the island about 3 miles from
its SW end; the land on both sides of this strip is high, and,
from a distance on NW and SE bearings, that part of the
island which lies SW of the strip appears as a separate
island.
2 The SW part of the island is mainly steep-to; a deep
trough with depths of over 170 m lies a short distance off
this part of the island.
The depths off the SE side of the island, outside of the
coastal reef, are fairly regular.
South East Bay lies on the E side of the S extremity of
the island.
4.62
1 Tidal stream. The tidal stream sets N off the E side of
ansh al Kubrá with the in-going stream, and off the SW
coast it sets strongly S with the out-going stream.
Current. A S-going set has been experienced off the SW
coast of the island whilst a strong NW current was running
in the offing.
Major light:
Hanish al Kubra Light (white round GRP tower, red
bands, 6 m in height) (13°40′⋅0N, 42°40′⋅6E).
134
4.63
1 Anchorages. Anchorage may be obtained about 5 cables
ESE of Peaky Islet (13°46′⋅4N, 42°45′⋅4E) in a depth of
about 18 m with good holding on a bottom of sand and
coral.
South East Bay affords anchorage in a depth of about
33 m, sand and coral, about 3 cables SW of the E entrance
point to the bay.
2 The best anchorage off ansh al Kubrá is about 6 cables
from the coastal reef off the SE part of the island in depths
from 26 to 33 m.
Anchorage, sheltered from N winds, is obtainable about
1 mile N of Chor Rock (4.64) in depths of about 20 m.
3 A further anchorage, sheltered from N winds, is
obtainable about 1 miles S of Haycock Island in depths
from 13 to 22 m.
Anchorage may be obtained in an unnamed bay about
6 cables SW of Haycock Island, in depths from 5 to 10 m.
4 Anchorage, sheltered from E can be obtained in an
unnamed bay about 1 miles N of South East Bay in a
depth of about 12 m.
All the above anchorages are shown on the charts.
 an sh al Kubrá — Off-lying islands and dangers
4.64
1 Peaky Islet lies about 1 miles WSW of the N end of
ansh al Kubrá.
Marescaux Rock (13°46′N, 42°42′E) is a dangerous rock,
over which the sea generally breaks, which lies off the NW
side of ansh al Kubrá. This rock has not been examined
and its position should be avoided.
South West Rocks (13°38′N, 42°36′E) (4.17) stand on the
NW side of the deep trough off the SW side of ansh al
Kubrá. These rocks lie in the separation zone of the TSS.
2 Cust Rock (13°38′N, 42°41′E) is a dangerous rock lying
about 1 miles SSE of the S extremity of ansh al Kubrá;
a shoal, with a least depth over it of 21⋅5 m, lies 2 miles
W of the rock.
Pin Rock, which lies about 8 cables ESE of Cust Rock, is
a small rock, 3⋅7 m high, which stands on an area of shoal
water situated about 2 miles SE of the S extremity of ansh
al Kubrá.
3 Chor Rock (13°41′N, 42°45′E) stands on a bank, with
depths of less than 20 m over it, which extends about
1 miles ESE from the middle of the SE side of ansh al
Kubrá. Some black rocks lie off the NW end of Chor Rock.
North Round Island (13°43′N, 42°48′E) and Quoin Island
(5 cables E) (4.21), lie off the E side of ansh al Kubrá.
Double Peak Island
4.65
1 Double Peak Island (13°39′N, 42°45′E) lies about 4 miles
E of the S end of ansh al Kubrá, the island is steep-to
with two small peaks standing close together.
Two small above-water rocks lie on the NE edge of a
bank which extends about 4 cables NNE of the N end of the
island. The SW end of the island is fringed by a coral reef.
A shoal (position doubtful, reported 1989), with a least
depth over it of 16⋅5 m, was reported to exist in mid-channel
between Double Peak Island and Chor Rock.
Suy l  an sh
4.66
1 Suyl ansh (13°37′N, 42°44′E) is a rugged island
situated about 6 cables SSW of Double Peak Island.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 4
Mid Island lies in mid-channel between Double Peak
Island and Suyl ansh. The channels on either side of Mid
Island are free of dangers, the N passage has a least depth of
7⋅0 m and the S passage of 16⋅5 m.
2 Rocky Islands, which lie about 1
miles E of Mid Island,
consist of three black, rugged islets and some small rocks.
Parkin Rock (4.21) lies about 2 miles ESE.
Ship Rock, a dangerous rock, lies about 1 mile SW of the
S end of Suyl ansh. Three Foot Rock, which lies about
1
miles farther SW, is 1 m high, steep-to and formed of
lava.
4.67
1 Currents. A current setting SSE at a rate of 1 kn has
been experienced off Three Foot Rock during May.
In February a current setting NW at a rate of 1 to
1 kn has been experienced off the W side of ansh al
Kubrá and between Three Foot Rock and North East
Haycock.
4.68
1 Anchorage may be obtained, as shown on the chart, off
the E and W sides of Suyl ansh in depths of over 10 m.
Anchorage may also be obtained in an unnamed bay in the
S of the island in a depth of about 10 m.
STRAITS OF BAB EL MANDEB
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 1925, 157
Area covered
4.71
1 The Straits of Bab el Mandeb are bounded on their SW
side by the coast of Africa from Ras Raheita (12°44′N,
43°07′E) to Ras Siyyân (20 miles SE) and the off-lying islets
and reefs of Saw
bi (4.84).
On their NE side the straits are bounded by the coast of
Arabia from Ra’s Shaykh Sa’d (12°42′N, 43°27′E) to
Warner Point (3 miles ESE).
Route
4.72
1 The route from the S end of the Red Sea to the Gulf of
Aden leads through the Straits of Bab el Mandeb TSS, as
shown on the chart.
From a position about 14 miles WSW of Al Mukh

(13°19′N, 43°15′E), at the N end of the SSE-bound lane of
the TSS, the route leads about 40 miles SSE to a position
about 8 miles N of Ras Siyyân (12°29′N, 43°20′E).
2 The route then continues about 9 miles SE to enter the
Gulf of Aden about 8 miles S of Ra’s B
b al Mandeb
(12°40′N, 43°28′E).
Topography
4.73
1 West side of the northern approach. The general aspect
of the land on the W side of the N approach to the Straits of
Bab el Mandeb, from Ras Terma Zerf Ch’af (13°14′N,
42°33′E) to Ras Raheita (45 miles SE), is high, rugged with
high mountains rising in the interior, and barren towards the
coast to which it descends in several successively lower
ranges.
2 Jebel Aduali (12°57′N, 42°26′E), 978 m in height, is the
highest peak in the locality. A range of well-defined and
prominent peaks extends E from this peak; it is also
connected with the high land which reaches the coast WSW
of Ras Terma Zerf Ch’af.
135
The Haycocks
4.69
1 The Haycocks, which lie about 8 miles SSW of ansh al
Kubrá, consist of three islets. South West Haycock (13°32′N,
42°37′E) is barren; Middle Haycock, cone-shaped and
remarkable, lies 8 cables NE; North East Haycock lies
8 cables NE of Middle Haycock.
Muhabbaka Islands
4.70
1 The Muhabbaka Islands (13°23′N, 42°36′E), lie between
South West Haycock (13°32′N, 42°37′E) and Ras Terma
Zerf Ch’af (18 miles SW).
The group consists of High Island (4.18), Flat Island
which lies about 3 miles SSW of High Island and has a large
hole in its N end which shows up on certain bearings, Harbi
Island (4.18), and Sayal Island which is rocky.
2 The islets have a white appearance caused by bird
droppings which makes it difficult to identify them at times.
Depths in the vicinity of the islets are fairly considerable.
See also 4.7.
3 Tag Terara (13°03′N, 42°39′E) is a conical peak rising to
a height of 291 m; Sla Terara (4 miles SE), 269 m in
height, is dark and remarkable.
Ras Raheita (12°44′N, 43°07′E) (4.82) is a good
landmark.
4.74
1 East side of the northern approach. The coast on the E
side of the N approach to the Straits of Bab el Mandeb,
between Al Mukh
(13°19′N, 43°15′E) and Ra’s Shaykh
Sa’d (40 miles SSE), is backed by a sandy plain covered
with scrub, rising gradually to the base of mountains about
15 miles inland. A number of hills and low hummocks rise
from the sandy plain.
2 Jabal an Nar (13°19′N, 43°29′E), which stands about
13 miles E of Al Mukh
, is table-topped rising to about
340 m; Jabal ath Thawb
n, which stands about 1 miles
SW of Jabal an Nar, is a long wedge-shaped hill, about
300 m high, the N edge of which forms a steep bluff.
Jabal al ’Umar (13°01′N, 43°29′E) rises to a sharp peak
about 300 m high.
3 Zi Hill (12°58′N, 43°25′E) is a remarkable,
wedge-shaped, rocky hill, 71 m in height. There is no other
hill like it in the vicinity, and it shows up better from S than
from N. A conspicuous white fort, which is reported to give
a good radar return, stands on the hill; a similar fort stands
on a white sandhill, about 1 mile S, at Dhub
b (11.280).
Charts 452, 3661
4.75
1 North side of the southern approach. The Jabal ’Arar
range of mountains extends about 26 miles SE from a
position about 12 miles NE of Jabal al ’Umar (13°01′N,
43°29′E). The outline of the range is of needle-pointed
peaks, generally irregular, which become more rounded to
the SE where, 10 miles inland, they terminate in Jabal am
Wusid (12°49′N, 43°55′E) also known as Barn Hill. Jabal
am Wusid is conspicuous and square-shaped, with a peak in
the middle rising to an elevation of 608 m. These mountains
are visible, in clear weather, from seaward when approaching
the Straits of Bab el Mandeb from either direction.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 4
2 Jabal Hajar is a range of hills which run nearly parallel to
the S coast of Arabia from about 17 miles NE of Ra’s B
b
al Mandeb. The range is dark in appearance, irregular in
outline, and, although rising to heights between 200 and
288 m, it appears low, as a sandy plain rises gradually from
the coast to an elevation of about 120 to 150 m at the base
of the hills.
4.76
1 In addition to the Straits of Bab el Mandeb TSS, new and
revised routeing measures W and S of Hanish al Kubra and
E of Jabal Zuqar Island have been adopted by IMO and
were implemented on 1st July 2003. For further information
see charts. Rule 10 of The International Regulations for
Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972) applies.
Flow
4.77
1 Current. During the SW monsoon period from June to
September the flow is out of the Red Sea, and, during the
period of the NE monsoon from November to April, the
flow enters the Red Sea. The surface set in the Straits of
Bab el Mandeb is the resultant of the current caused by the
wind and that of the tide, and is very variable. From
November to April, the period of strong SE winds, there
may be a continuous NW set with rates between  to
3 kn.
2 The current in the straits sets approximately in the
direction of the wind and attains a rate of 1 to 1
kn.
During the period from November to April the current
caused by the strong SE wind often overcomes the SE set of
the tide and there may be a NW set between  and 3 kn.
In November and December, many years ago, during a
period of strong SE winds this NW set was observed
extending from Large Strait to the parallel of 13°N at a rate
between 1 and 3 kn. The NW set close SW of Mayyn
(12°39′N, 43°25′E), turns sharply round Balfe Point, the W
extremity of the island.
3 In June and July, many years ago, during a period of
light NW winds the currents generally set SSE off Mayyn
at rates of less than  to 1 kn.
4 From observations made during January many years ago,
at a position 7 miles SW of Mayyn, it would appear that
the surface current set into the Red Sea at an average rate of
1 kn and was greatly influenced by the tide during this
period. From about 8 hours before to 4 hours after HW
springs at Mayyn, the NW set was from 1 to 2 kn;
while from 4 hours after to 8 hours before HW springs the
rate was from 0 to 1 kn.
5 Again, during a period of observations in January many
years ago, observations were made to ascertain the difference
between the set of upper and lower strata of the water in the
entrance to the Straits of Bab el Mandeb. These observations
showed a surface current setting into the Red Sea at a rate of
about 1 kn and, at the same time at a depth of 192 m, a
current setting outwards at about the same rate, both currents
were influenced by the tidal streams. The dividing plane
between the two currents appeared to be at a depth of about
137 m.
4.78
1 Tidal stream. The tidal streams are very irregular in both
rate and duration; sometimes in the middle of the strait there
is a weak SE current, while at other times it attains a rate of
4 kn causing a ruffling of the water. After strong NW or SE
winds the tidal stream setting in the same direction as the
wind may continue for up to 16 hours.
136
2 The stream sets NW with the in-going tide and SE with
the out-going tide. From observations taken in January many
years ago, the tidal streams set each way for about 12 hours,
but this is what would be expected as the tides in this area
are diurnal.
At the SE extremity of Mayyn the NW stream divides,
one part setting through Small Strait and the other, which is
stronger, setting along the SW coast of Mayyn.
3 The stream setting through Small Strait appears to divide
at the N extremity of Mayyn, one part setting NNW and
the other rounding Balfe Point (4.83). This latter stream
turns SE along the SW coast of Mayyn; between 2 and
3 hours before HW, the stream meets the branch of the NW
stream near the SW end of the island. This causes overfalls,
which generally work E to the entrance to False Bay
(12°38′⋅2N, 43°25′⋅5E). These streams are much influenced
by the wind; during the period November to April, when the
current is setting into the Red Sea, the SE stream does not
appear to run.
Caution
4.79
1 Caution is necessary if approaching the coast between Ras
Raheita (12°44′N, 43°07′E) and Ras Siyyân (20 miles SE)
within the 50 m depth contour, as there are unsurveyed areas
along this stretch of coast.
Local weather
4.80
1 In June, July and August, thick hazy weather is often
experienced on the Arabian Coast between the Straits of Bab
el Mandeb and Aden (90 miles E).
Sand storms have been experienced off Mayyn.
Charts 143, 452
Principal marks
4.81
1 Major light:
Mayyn High Light (grey stone tower with wall, white
lantern, 25 m in height) (12°39′N, 43°26′E)
exhibited from the E part of Mayyn. A flagstaff
stands nearby.
2 Landmarks:
Jebel Musali (12°28′N, 42°24′E), which rises to a
height of 2028 m, has two clefts and makes a good
landmark. Some of the mountains in this vicinity
are covered with a coarse, granular black and
light-brown earth.
3 Jabal al Manhal (12°41′N, 43°29′E), which rises to a
height of 270 m, is volcanic in origin and is the
highest land near the NE side of the Straits of Bab
el Mandeb. When approaching from the E the peak
is visible for a distance of about 34 miles; the other
peaks near Ra’s B
b al Mandeb are visible at lesser
distances.
4 Mayyn (12°39′N, 43°25′E) with its High Light, is
visible from a distance of 15 to 20 miles; its outline
is even and unbroken. It should not therefore be
mistaken for the high land of Ra’s B
b al Mandeb,
which has many irregularities.
5 Jabal as Sunnyah (12°42′N, 43°31′E), which rises to a
height of over 100 m, is a small range of hills of
irregular outline lying about 2 miles NE of Jabal al
Manhal. The intervening land is low, sandy, and
barren but a few bushes and patches of grass may
occasionally be seen.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 4
Mayyun High Light (12°39′⋅2N 43°23′⋅2E) (4.81)
(Original dated 2001)
(Photography − Lt Cdr T. Tulloch RCN)
Directions
(continued from 4.18 or 4.21)
Charts 452, 1925
4.82
1 From a position about 14 miles WSW of Al Mukh

(13°19′N, 43°15′E) the track through the Straits of Bab el
Mandeb TSS leads initially about 40 miles SSE. It then
continues a further 9 miles SE through Large Strait, to the
Gulf of Aden, passing (with positions given from Mayyn
High Light (12°39′N, 43°26′E)):
2 NNE of Ras Fatuma (13°02′N, 42°53′E), the NE
extremity of Fatuma Dest, a low wooded island.
Ras Fatuma Light (black round masonry tower,
white bands; 27 m in height) is exhibited from a
position about 5 cables NW of the point. A disused
light-structure stands nearby. Thence:
3 NNE of Scilla Shoals (13°00′N, 43°00′E) a sand and
coral ridge with a least depth over it of 4⋅0 m,
which extends about 7 miles NW/SE. The current in
the vicinity of the shoals is strong and generally sets
parallel with the ridge, but at certain times it sets
towards the shoals. In hazy weather the shoal
should not be approached within a depth of 40 m.
Ras Mukwar, the NE point of some detached islets
which stand on the reef E of the island of Halba
Desêt, lies about 3 miles SW of the shoals; a
beacon stands on the point. Thence:
4 ENE of Ras Dehaneba (12°53′N, 43°01′E) the E
entrance point to Ãseb (7.202), thence:
ENE of Ras Sintian (24 miles WNW). The coastal reef
between Ras Dehaneba and Ras Sintian extends up
to about 3 miles offshore. Thence:
5 WSW of Dhub
b (18 miles N) (11.280) a village
which stands on a small rocky projection. A white
sandhill, 20 m high, on which stands a conspicuous
white fort, is situated on the inner part of the N side
of this projection. Another conspicuous fort stands
on Zi Hill (4.74). Thence:
6 ENE of Ras Raheita (19 miles WNW), a bluff which
extends about 5 cables ENE from the coast, the
bluff is black in appearance with a white sand patch
137
on its N slope. It is a good landmark and generally
shows up well in hazy weather. The village of
Raheita lies 2 miles W of the bluff. Between Ras
Raheita and Ras Siyyân (20 miles SE) the coast is
fringed by a coral reef making landing difficult. See
caution at 4.79, thence:
7 ENE of Callida (16
miles WNW) which lies on the E
edge of the reef which borders Dumeira Island.
Dumeira Island itself lies about 5 cables E of Ras
Dumeira, which it completely obscures, from a
certain distance E; the island shows up well in hazy
weather. Ras Dumeira is a small, rocky, bluff
promontory with two or three small reddish conical
summits, one of which is flat; these summits
resemble camel humps.
8 The plain which stretches W from Ras Dumeira gives
the promontory the appearance of an island, from a
distance. The coastal reef extends as far seaward as
a line joining the extremities of Ras Raheita and
Ras Dumeira and it should not be approached
within the 10 m depth contour, even by vessels of
shallow draught. The rise and fall of the tide
completely changes the configuration of the coast
between these two points. A small creek, with a
sandy beach, on the N side of Ras Dumeira
provides a landing for boats in all seasons. Thence:
9 WSW of a shoal patch (6 miles NW), with a least
depth over it of 13⋅1 m, which lies close E of the E
extremity of the NNW-bound traffic lane of the
Straits of Bab el Mandeb TSS.
4.83
1 Thence, the track alters SE, passing:
SW of Balfe Point (2 miles W), the W extremity of
Mayyn, from which Balfe Point Light (black
lantern on stone tower, 8 m in height) is exhibited.
A prominent square tower stands NE of the point,
thence:
2 SW of Ra’s a awl (12°38′⋅8N, 43°23′⋅5E); a point
with a similar name to that point which forms the S
extremity of Mayyn, lies about 5 cables SE of
Balfe Point. Thence:
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 4
Balfe Point Light (12°39′⋅1N 43°25′⋅9E) (4.83)
(Original dated 2001)
(Photography − Lt Cdr T. Tulloch RCN)
3 NE of Siyyân Himâr (11 miles SW) which consists
of two small rocks, each of which is about 2 m
high, standing on a reef; the reef dries near its SE
end. A wreck, with a least depth over it of 14⋅9 m,
lies just over 1 mile ESE of the reef, thence:
4 SW of Pirie Point (1 miles SW) the W entrance point
of Mayyn Harbour (4.102). A number of radio
masts stand on the point; a conspicuous building is
situated about 1 cables NW of the point. A coral
head lies at the extremity of foul ground about
100 m S from the point. A shoal, with a least depth
over it of 11⋅9 m, lies about 6 cables SW of the
point.
5 SW of Lee Point (1 miles SSW) the W extremity of
a promontory which forms the E entrance point of
Mayyn Harbour. Two cairns stand on the
promontory, the front cairn at an elevation of 18 m
and the rear at an elevation of 37 m. And:
6 NE of Ras Siyyân (12 miles SSW) the E extremity
of a promontory extending NNE from the coastline.
The N side of the promontory rises to a reddish
volcanic peak, 138 m high, and is rocky and
precipitous. The promontory is connected with the
mainland by a low neck of land, on the W side of
which is a bay bordered by mangroves. Within the
bay lies Siyyân, a white above-water rock. Thence:
7 SW of Ra’s a awl (1 miles S) (4.98) the S
extremity of Mayyn, thence:
NE of Kadda Dâbali (11 miles S), part of the Saw
bi
(4.84) group of islands, which is bright yellow in
colour and rises to a summit of 114 m which is
surmounted by a masonry block; a beacon stands
near the SE end of the island. Thence:
8 Into the Gulf of Aden.
(Directions continue for the north side of the Gulf of
Aden at 12.17 and for Djibouti and the south side of
the Gulf of Aden at 14.15)
Offshore islands
Chart 452
Saw bi
4.84
1 Saw
bi (Jaz
’ir Seba), which lies between 2 and
7 miles E of Ras Siyyân (12°29′N, 43°20′E), is a group of
138
six steep rocky islets of volcanic origin which are fringed by
reefs over which the sea breaks.
2 From the W side of the group the islands are named as
Hamra, Rhounda Dâbali, Tolka, Kadda Dâbali (4.83), Horod
le Rhale and Rhounda Komaytou. All the islands, with the
exception of Kadda Dâbali which is bright yellow in colour,
are brownish.
A mooring buoy is laid close inshore off the S side
Kadda Dâbali, about 2 cables W of the SE end of the
island.
3 A dangerous pinnacle rock, with a least depth over it of
0⋅5 m, lies about 2 cables NW of the N end of Rhounda
Dâbali. The water over the rock is not discoloured, and, as
the rock is dark in colour, it is not visible. Local fishermen
state that depths in this vicinity are irregular and it is quite
possible that other dangerous rocks may well exist. Eddies
have been seen about 2 cables W of the rock, but, as similar
eddies have frequently been seen in the area in places that
were later found to be clear of obstructions, they may or
may not indicate the presence of shoal water.
4.85
1 Caution. The channels between the islets of the Saw
bi
group have never been closely examined and should be
avoided.
The currents and eddies in the vicinity of the islets are
variable. If it is necessary to pass between the islets, then
steer directly for the passage from some distance off, as the
eddies make steering difficult when turning near the islets.
LARGE STRAIT
Chart 452
Description
4.86
1 Large Strait (12°35′N, 43°20′E), which forms part of the
Straits of Bab el Mandeb, lies between the African coast and
the SW coast of Mayyn (4.96).
Large Strait is deep and free of dangers with the
exception of a shoal, with a least depth over it of 11⋅9 m,
which lies about 6 cables SW of Pirie Point (12°38′N,
43°25′E). This shoal lies clear of the TSS.
Topography
4.87
1 From the coast on the SW side of Large Strait, S of Ras
Raheita (12°44′N, 43°07′E), a low sandy plain extends W to
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 4
the mountains, the summits of which lie between 10 and
14 miles inland and are serrated with numerous peaks.
Vegetation begins about 1 miles inland becoming dense
towards the interior and to the S.
2 A small conical hill, and a smaller hill with a curious
projection to the NW, lie close to the coast between Ras
Raheita and Ras Dumeira (2 miles SE)
Mayyn (12°39′N, 43°25′E) forms the NE side of Large
Strait.
International boundary
4.88
1 The international boundary between Eritrea and the
Republic of Djibouti reaches the coast in the vicinity of Ras
Dumeira (12°43′N, 43°08′E).
Current
4.89
1 During the months of June and July, from observations
taken many years ago during a period of NW winds, the
current off the coast between Ras Dumeira (12°43′N,
43°08′E) and Ras Siyyân (18 miles SE) set SE at rates
between about  to 1 kn.
Anchorage
4.90
1 During periods of S winds anchorage may be obtained N
of Ra’s Siyyân (12°29′N, 43°20′E), in depths from 15 to
18 m, sand, but the coast cannot be closed sufficiently to
afford good shelter and the tidal streams are strong.
Landing is possible in either of the two small coves on
the N side of the promontory.
Side channel
Small Strait
4.91
1 Description. Small Strait lies between the SW coast of
Arabia and the NE coast of Mayyn (12°39′N, 43°25′E), the
channel has moderate depths and is free of dangers in the
fairway.
An area, in which entry is prohibited, surrounds Mayyn;
this prohibited area extends nearly halfway across the
fairway of Small Strait.
4.92
1 Topography. Ra’s Shaykh Sa‘d (12°41′⋅6N, 43°27′⋅2E),
the NE entrance point to Small Strait, projects about 1 cable
W from the coast and is bordered by rocks. There is a good
landing place close S of the point. A white guardhouse is
situated about 5 cables ESE of the point at an elevation of
about 60 m.
Ra’s B
b el Mandeb (1 miles SSE) is a prominent
wedge-shaped headland rising to an elevation of over 100 m,
1 mile NE of the point.
2 Shaykh M
l, which stands on the coastal bank close off
Ra’s B
b al Mandeb to which it is connected by a rocky
ledge, rises to a height of 17 m; it is inconspicuous except
when clear of the higher land in the background.
Warner Point (12°40′⋅4N, 43°29′⋅6E) lies about 2 miles E
of Ra’s B
b el Mandeb, the coast between the points is
much indented by small bays. Jabal ‘Utbah, a square dark
hill, which stands about 8 cables NNE of the point is
surmounted by the ruins of a fort.
139
4.93
1 Tidal stream. In the SE entrance to the Straits of Bab el
Mandeb the in-going stream divides off the SE extremity of
Mayyn. One branch sets along the SW coast of the island,
the other branch sets through Small Strait and appears to
divide near the N extremity of Mayyn with one part setting
NNW and the other turning around the W end of the island.
The tidal streams in Small Strait are very irregular both in
rate and duration but are very strong.
4.94
1 Caution. The fact that there are strong and irregular tidal
streams and currents in Small Strait, coupled with the
existence of a prohibited area, and the fact that many
casualties have occurred within the straits make navigation
through the straits not recommended.
Large Strait should be used in preference to Small Strait.
4.95
1 Anchorage. A good anchorage may be obtained by small
vessels either NW or SE of Shaykh M
l, according to the
prevailing wind.
The small bays which indent the coast between Ra’s B
b
el Mandeb and Warner Point afford shelter to small vessels
during N winds.
MAYY N
General information
Chart 452 plan of Mayyøn Harbour
Description
4.96
1 Mayyn (12°39′N, 43°25′E) is situated on the NE side of
the Straits of Bab el Mandeb between Large Strait (4.86) and
Small Strait (4.91).
The island is bare, rocky and rather flat in appearance
with its highest point, 69 m in height, in its SE part.
The surface of the island, which is intersected with
watercourses, is composed of basalt rock broken on the
surface into a dense layer of boulders and stones, in places
covered by wind-blown coral sand. The island is devoid of
vegetation.
4.97
1 North and east coasts. The N coast of Mayyn is mostly
bordered by boulders and patches of coral. The coastal bank,
with depths of less than 5 m over it, and on which lie
several dangerous rocks and rocks awash, extends up to
5 cables offshore.
2 Ra’s Shaykh Birkhud forms the N extremity of the island.
A disused lighthouse stands on Obstruction Point, the NE
extremity of the island.
A spit extends about 2 cables E of Azalea Point the E
extremity of the island. Azalea Rock lies at the E end of the
spit.
4.98
1 South-west coast. Between Balfe Point (12°39′⋅4N,
43°23′⋅2E) and Pirie Point (1
miles SE) the coast is
fringed, in places, by a coral reef extending up to 1 cable
offshore.
Signal Hill, which rises to an elevation of over 25 m, lies
about 7 cables SE of Balfe Point; a conspicuous building
stands about 1 cables NW of Pirie Point (4.83), the W
entrance point of Mayyn Harbour (4.102).
2 False Bay is entered between Lee Point (12°38′⋅2N,
43°25′⋅1E), the E entrance point to Mayyn Harbour, and
Ra’s Ayrat Areel (5 cables ESE). Depths of less than 5 m lie
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 4
Mayyun Harbour Leading Beacons (4.104)
(Original dated 2001)
(Photography − Lt Cdr T. Tulloch RCN)
close within the entrance to the bay where the coastal bank
is fairly steep-to; a rock awash lies in the middle of the bay,
just within its entrance. The bay is encumbered with patches
of coral and sand up to about 2 cables from its shores.
Ra’s a awl (12°37′⋅9N, 43°25′⋅9E) forms the SE corner
of the island.
Prohibited area
4.99
1 The island of Mayyn lies within a prohibited area, as
shown on the charts.
Natural conditions
4.100
1 Local weather. Throughout the summer NW winds
prevail bringing a fine dust which forms a cloud bank that
obscures the sun for about an hour before sunset.
In September, the weather is particularly unpleasant and
damp, especially at night, when clouds usually form
overhead and render the atmosphere oppressive.
4.101
1 Sea temperature. Considerable and often sudden,
changes of the surface sea temperature occur in the vicinity
of Mayyn. During these conditions the temperature of the
water inside the harbour may be as much as 11°C lower
than that of the sea N of the island.
Mayy n Harbour
Chart 452 plan of Mayyøn Harbour
Description
4.102
1 Mayyn Harbour (12°39′N, 43°25′E) is entered between
Pirie Point (4.83) and Lee Point (5 cables SE).
Murray Point (12°39′⋅0N, 43°24′⋅7E), situated at the head
of the inlet, divides the harbour into two arms. Murray Bay,
which lies W of Murray Point, forms the port area whereas
the area to the E is encumbered with shoals.
2 William Bay, James Bay and Shand Bay are all situated
on the E side of the harbour. The heads of these bays partly
140
dry out for about 1 cable; their outer parts are shallow and
filled with many scattered coral heads.
A steep-to shoal, with a least depth over it of 4 m, lies
about 1 cables WNW of Chevalier Point which forms the
extremity of a promontory that separates Shand Bay from
James Bay.
Princess Shoal lies about 1 cables SE of Murray Point.
3 Lang Point is the extremity of a promontory which
separates James Bay from William Bay; a conspicuous
building stands at an elevation of about 26 m, 1 cables
ESE of the point. A stranded wreck lies close SW of the
point.
On the N side of the harbour are situated several radio
masts and a radar scanner.
Tidal stream
4.103
1 The tidal streams in the harbour are weak and greatly
affected by the wind.
2 The in-going stream sets N into the harbour with the
main part of it turning into the NW branch of the port. A
small part sets into James Bay; it then turns W setting close
round Murray Point and then into Murray Bay whence it
turns SE along the S shore of the NW branch of the
harbour. Within 5 cables NW of Pirie Point the stream is
only perceptible in depths of less than 5 m.
3 The out-going stream appears to set fairly regularly out of
the harbour though close S of Murray Point its direction is
uncertain.
Approach and entry
4.104
1 Leading beacons:
Front beacon (white stone cone, 10 m in height)
standing on Murray Point (12°39′⋅0N, 43°24′⋅7E).
Rear beacon (white stone cone, at an elevation of
16 m) (about 90 m from front beacon).
2 From a position about 5 cables S of Lee Point
(12°38′⋅2N, 43°25′⋅1E) the approach leads NNW on the
alignment of 343° of the leading beacons on Murray Point.
This alignment leads in depths of over 10 m to the
anchorage, passing WSW of Lee Point and close ENE of the
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 4
wreck, with a least depth over it of 4⋅3 m, which lies about
1 cables ESE of Pirie Point.
4.105
1 Alternative approach. An alternative approach and entry
may be made into the harbour and that is to steer with the
conspicuous building on Lang Point (4.102) bearing 023°,
until the NE cairn on Lee Point bears about 134°, when
course may be altered NW for the anchorage.
4.106
1 Caution is necessary when entering Mayyn Harbour as
the current sets across the entrance according to the direction
of the wind.
When entering the harbour during strong S and SW
winds there is often a considerable swirl off Chevalier Point
which has a strong tendency to turn a ships head to
starboard. Mariners with low powered and less manoeuvrable
vessels should take extra care.
Anchorage
4.107
1 Anchorage may be obtained in a depth of about 10 m, as
shown on the chart, about 2 cables SSW of Murray Point.
Anchorage may also be obtained NW of the charted
anchorage position in lesser depths.
The holding ground in these anchorages is reported to be
poor.
141
Berths
4.108
1 The Water Pier, situated about 5 cables NW of Pirie
Point, has a least depth at its outer end of 1⋅8 m. The pier
adjoins the fresh water distillation plant and is in regular and
frequent use by coastal vessels and dhows.
2 There are many other jetties capable of accommodating
boats but they are situated in shallow water and approached
through coral heads and boulders. These further jetties are
mostly in a poor state of repair except for those in the
vicinity of Water Pier and the port administration office.
Facilities
4.109
1 A slipway, which is situated close W of Water Pier, is
limited in its use by the range of the tide to shallow draught
vessels only.
Supplies
4.110
1 Fresh water from Water Pier.
Communications
4.111
1 An airstrip is situated on the N side of the harbour.
Home Contents Index

Chapter 5 - Red Sea - west side. Gifâtin Islands to Ras Abu Fatma

34° 35° 36° 37°

27° 12 27°
S AU D I

5.15
Râs Abu Sôma
3043
ARABIA
Safâga
5.70 3043
2375

El-Akhawein
(The Brothers)

El Qu=eir
3043
26° 5.116 26°

- -
Ra’s Kar Kurkuma
5.1
6

5.1
7

25° 25°
Abu el Kîzân

EG YPT
158
5 .1
8

24° Râs B 24°

anâs
Berenice 3043
5.140
3043

Gezîret
Zabargad
5 .1
9

23° 159 159 23°

Ras Abu Fatma

S U DA N

22° 22°
34° Longitude 35° East from Greenwich 36° 37°
0205

142
 Home Contents Index

CHAPTER 5
RED SEA — WEST SIDE — GIFÂTÎN ISLANDS TO RAS ABU FATMA

GENERAL INFORMATION

Chart 4704 See Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3) for
Scope of the chapter further information.
5.1
1 The area described in this chapter covers the W side of
the Red Sea from the Gifâtîn Islands (27°14′N, 33°55′E) to Notice of ETA
Ras Abu Fatma (22°26′N, 36°25′E), 320 miles SSE. The 5.7
chapter also includes descriptions of the ports of Safâga 1 Vessels should send ETA, at least 24 hours in advance of
(26°44′N, 33°56′E) (5.70), El Queir (26°06′N, 34°17′E) arrival, quoting last port of call, position, course and speed.
(5.116) and Port Berenice (23°56′N, 35°29′E) (5.140); and See Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3) for further
the small phosphate loading berth of Mîna amrâwein information.
(26°15′N, 34°12′E) (5.20).
Flow
Description 5.8
5.2 1 Cross currents, setting E or W, are not infrequent and are
1 The coast is bordered by reefs with many others lying observed in all parts of the Red Sea.
some distance offshore. See 4.5.
There are also a number of off-lying islands.
Caution
International boundary 5.9
5.3 1 Excessive refraction and mirages are frequent in this part
1 The majority of the coast described in this chapter, as far of the Red Sea causing land, lights and other features to be
S as the parallel of 23°09′N, is Egyptian territory; the visible from much greater distances than would normally be
remaining 60 miles S being part of the Sudan. expected.

Topography
5.4
1 A range of mountains extends S, at various distances
inland, along this stretch of the coast from Gezirêt Safâga
(26°45′N, 33°59′E) to Ras Hardarba (22°04′N, 36°54′E)
where the range approaches the coast.
The terrain between the mountains and the sea is low and
sandy.
Weather
5.5
1 Along this part of the W shore of the Red Sea, N winds
are prevalent all the year round, but they are affected by land
and sea breezes. The prevailing winds are light and variable
with frequent calms during August and September.
Between August and October the weather is generally
fine; the rainy season extends from November to April.
Depths
5.10
1 Much of the charted depth information in the area
covered by this chapter is from old surveys or passage
soundings.
See individual chart source data diagrams for further
information.
Protected areas
5.11
1 Vessels should only use the fixed moorings on, or
adjacent to, the coral reefs that lie between the latitudes of
26°37′N and 27°02′N.
The coral reefs surrounding the coast between Râs Banâs
(23°54′N, 35°47′E) and Marsa Halaib (110 miles SSE) have
been declared protected areas. Except in an emergency,
anchoring on protected reefs is prohibited.
See Appendix III for further information.

Radio reporting
5.6 Aids to navigation
1 Vessels in the Red Sea bound for Egyptian ports should 5.12
request permission to enter Egyptian waters, from the Port 1 DGPS corrections are transmitted from El Queir, see
Authorities, 48 hours prior to crossing the parallel of 23°N. 1.35.
Vessels should contact the Port Authorities when within See Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 2 for further
24 miles of the Egyptian coast for entry instructions. details.

143
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 5
COASTAL ROUTE
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 158, 159
Route
5.13
1 The coastal route described along this N part of the W
side of the Red Sea leads, from a position about 5 miles E
of Shaker Island Light (27°27′N, 34°02′E) (3.35), at the S
end of the Gulf of Suez TSS (3.18) to a position 323 miles
SSE, about 30 miles ENE of Ras Abu Fatma (22°26′N,
36°25′E) (5.19).
Principal mark
5.14
1 Major light:
R
s Abu Sma Light (black GRP tower, white top;
racon) (26°51′N, 34°00′E).
Directions
(continued from 3.42)
Charts 159, 2375
Shaker Island to El Akhawein
5.15
1 From a position about 5 miles E of Shaker Island Light
(27°27′N, 34°02′E) (3.35), the track initially leads about
80 miles SSE to a position about 12 miles WSW of
El-Akhawein (The Brothers) (26°19′N, 34°51′E), passing:
ENE of Giftûn el Saghîr (27°12′N, 33°59′E) (3.390),
from which Giftûn el Saghîr Light (4.13) is
exhibited, thence:
2 ENE of R
s Abu Sma (26°51′N, 34°00′E) a salient
headland with a summit of gravel which stands
slightly higher than the surrounding coast; the
headland is fringed by a steep-to coral reef which
extends some 4 cables SE of the SE extremity of
the headland. R
s Abu Sma Light (5.14) is
exhibited from the NE part of the headland. Thence:
3 ENE of Panorama Reef (26°45′N, 34°05′E), a drying
reef, marked by Panorama Reef Light-beacon
(yellow GRP tower, black top, N cardinal) at its N
end; the beacon is reported to give a good radar
return from about 6 miles, but is not easy to
identify. A beacon (S cardinal), the position of
which is approximate, stands on the S end of the
reef. It has been reported that the S cardinal beacon
is missing (2003). Thence:
4 ENE of Middle Reef (26°42′N, 34°06′E) a drying reef
over which the sea breaks, marked by Middle Reef
Light-beacon (black beacon, yellow band;
N cardinal); a further dangerous reef lies about
5 cables SE. The SW part of the bank, on which
both of these reefs stand, has not been examined.
Thence:
ENE of Shi‘b Shear (26°39′N, 34°06′E) a steep-to
coral reef, marked by Shi‘b Shear Light-beacon
(black beacon, yellow band; N cardinal); a boulder
with a drying height of 1⋅2 m stands on the SW
edge of the reef, thence:
5 ENE of Kennedy Shoal (26°35′N, 34°06′E), thence:
ENE of ukhûr Quei’ (26°24′N, 34°11′E), a dangerous
off-lying reef of above and below-water rocks,
which lies between 2 and 4 miles from the coast E
of the village of Bir Quei’, thence:
WSW of El-Akhawein (The Brothers) (26°19′N,
34°51′E) (4.22).
144
Chart 159
El Akhawein to Râs Toronbi
5.16
1 From a position about 12 miles WSW of El-Akhawein
(The Brothers) (26°19′N, 34°51′E) (4.22) the track continues
about 101 miles SSE to a position about 15 miles WSW of
Abu el Kizân (Daedalus Reef) (24°55′N, 35°52′E) (4.24),
passing:
ENE of El Queir (26°06′N, 34°17′E) (5.116). El
Queir Light is exhibited from a prominent
transporter crane which stands at the head of a stone
pier abreast the town, thence:
2 ENE of the coral reef (25°58′N, 34°23′E) and the foul
ground, on which stand some dangerous rocks, that
extends about 2 miles ENE from the coast N of Bîr
Esel, thence:
ENE of Sharm el Bahari (25°52′N, 34°26′E) (5.38)
and the coral reef which extends up to nearly 1 mile
off the coast close S, thence:
3 ENE of the coral reef (25°43′N, 34°33′E) which
extends about 5 cables from the coast between
Marsa Wizr (5.39) and Râs Toronbi; foul ground on
which there is a dangerous rock extends 1 mile
farther ENE from the S end of the reef. Depths of
less than 50 m extend up to 5 miles offshore in this
vicinity. Thence:
4 ENE of Râs Toronbi (25°40′N, 34°35′E) which forms
the N entrances to the small bay of Marsa Toronbi
(5.40).
Râs Toronbi to Abu el Kizân
5.17
1 From a position ENE of Râs Toronbi, the track continues
SSE, passing:
ENE of Elphinstone Reef (25°18′N, 34°52′E) a
steep-to reef. Marsa Abu Dabbâb (5.44) is a cove in
a moderately level sandy coast which lies about
7 miles W of the reef. Thence:
2 ENE of Râs Samadâi (25°00′N, 34°57′E) a
promontory rising to a height of about 47 m and the
offshore coral reef that lies about 5 miles N of the
point. Further coral reefs and dangerous rocks,
extend 7 miles offshore, up to 15 miles SE of the
point. Marsa Tundaba (5.48), an inlet, lies about
2 miles S of Râs Samadâi. Thence:
ENE of the isolated drying coral reef (24°47′N,
35°11′E), which lies about 6 miles offshore, 4 miles
NNE of Sha’b Ghadeira, thence:
3 ENE of Sha’b Ghadeira (24°43′N, 35°08′E) a drying
coral reef which lies at the N end of an extensive
bank that extends about 5 miles W of Râs
Baghdâdi; a dangerous rock lies about 2 miles NE
of the reef. The bank, the coral reefs which stand
on the bank, and the isolated dangers in this
vicinity, are steep-to and caution should be
exercised if approaching this area within a distance
of 10 miles. Thence:
4 ENE of Gezîrat Wâdi Gimâl (24°40′N, 35°10′E) (5.65)
a low rocky island which lies about 3 miles E of
Râs Baghdâdi. A dangerous rock lies about
4 miles ENE of the island. Thence:
ENE of Râs Honkorâb (24°34′N, 35°10′E) a low point
which rises about 2 miles inland to a
sugerloaf-shaped hill; a coral reef borders the SE
part of the point.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 5

5 The track then leads to a position about 15 miles WSW Approach

of Abu el Kizân (Daedalus Reef) (24°55′N, 35°52′E) (4.24). 5.21
1 Gebel Umm Kujura (26°17′N, 34°03′E), bearing 279°, a
prominent sugarloaf peak, leads towards Mîna amrâwein.
Charts 158, 159
Vessels should approach the port to the N of the N-most
Abu El Kizân to Gezîret Mukawwa‘
mooring buoy which leads towards the pilot boarding
5.18
position.
1 From a position about 15 miles WSW of Abu el Kizân
(Daedalus Reef) (24°55′N, 35°52′E) (4.24) the track Caution
continues for a farther 149 miles SSE to a position ENE of 5.22
Gezîret Mukawwa‘ (23°50′N, 35°49′E), passing: 1 Mariners should be aware of a reported set to the S
2 ENE of Small Reef (24°29′N, 35°18′E) on which towards an unmarked reef.
stand several dangerous rocks and rocks awash,
between which overfalls occur, thence: Port Authority
ENE of the Qul‘ân Islands (24°22′N, 35°24′E) (5.68) 5.23
which stand on drying reefs that lie on a bank that 1 Red Sea Phosphate Co., PO Box 288, Dokky, Cairo,
extends about 5 miles ENE and 10 miles N of Râs Egypt.
Qul‘ân, thence: Maximum size of vessel handled
3 ENE of Fury Shoal (24°12′N, 35°40′E) which lies 5.24
between 5 and 12 miles offshore E of Marsa Wâdi 1 The port can handle vessels up to 40 000 dwt, 200 m in
Lahami (5.61). Drying reefs, dangerous rocks and length and with a maximum draught of 10 m.
rocks awash stand on the shoal. In 1996, a
dangerous rock (position approximate) was reported Port radio
to lie about 2 miles E of the NE corner of the 5.25
shoal. Thence: 1 Communicate through El Queir radio (5.127).
ENE of Râs Banâs (23°54′N, 35°47′E) (4.14).
Notice of ETA
4 The track then leads SSE to a position ENE of Gezîret
5.26
Mukawwa‘ (Mikauwa‘ Island) (23°50′N, 35°49′E) which lies
1 See 5.7.
about 18 miles ESE of Port Berenice (5.140) and rises to a
height of 34 m at its SE end; the island is of coral and is Pilotage
fringed by a steep-to coral reef which extends about 7 cables 5.27
N of its NW side. On SW bearings the island appears as an 1 Service is provided by a Red Sea Phosphate Company
inclined plane. pilot who boards 2 to 3 cables N of the mooring buoys.
Pilotage is compulsory.
Gezîret Mukawwa‘ to Ras Abu Fatma Berth
5.19 5.28
1 From a position ENE of Gezîret Mukawwa‘, the track 1 The terminal consists of a quay, 67 m in length, and two
leads SSE, passing: mooring buoys.
ENE of Gezîret Zabargad (23°37′N, 36°12′E) (4.14), The conveyor and mechanised loading achieve an average
thence: daily loading rate of 7000 tonnes.
ENE of Rocky Island (23°34′N, 36°15′E) (4.14) a
small, steep and rocky island which lies about Tugs
3 miles SE of Gezîret Zabargad. Many years ago a 5.29
cross was reported to stand on its summit. Thence: 1 No tugs are available.
2 ENE of the dangerous reef (reported 1984) (23°34′N, Supplies
36°20′E) which lies about 5 miles E of Rocky 5.30
Island, thence: 1 Fresh water; fuel oil may be obtained by road from
ENE of Sha’ab Abu Fendera (22°54′N, 36°16′E) Safâga (5.70).
(5.166) a drying reef with an above-water rock,
about 6 m high, standing on its E end, thence: Facilities
3 ENE of Abu Dara (22°40′N, 36°11′E) a low point 5.31
covered in bushes which forms the S entrance point 1 Hospitals available in El Queir (5.116).
to Foul Bay (5.157).
The track then leads to a position ENE of Ras Abu Fatma Minor bays, inlets and anchorages
(22°26′N, 36°25′E) a small projecting point. Chart 2375
(Directions continue at 6.15) 5.32
1 A small unnamed bay (27°02′N, 33°54′E) entered S of
Dishet el-Dhaba, the highest point of a promontory situated
11 miles SSE of Hurghada, has moderate depths. The bay is
Mîna el  amrâwein
sheltered from seaward by an islet named Sa‘al Hashîsh and
by a drying reef which extends about 1 miles S from the
Chart 159 islet.
Position The E edge of the reef is steep-to; a shoal area, with a
5.20 least depth over it of 5⋅5 m, extends NW from the NW
1 Mîna amrâwein (26°15′N, 34°12′E) is a phosphate corner of the reef. Dangerous rocks lie off its SW side.
loading berth situated about 10 miles NNW of El Queir 2 The coral reefs surrounding Sa‘al Hashîsh have been
(5.116). declared protected areas. See 5.11.

145
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 5
Anchorage is obtainable in the bay in depths from 28 to
37 m, mud.
Mars Ab Mukh dij
5.33
1 Mars
Ab Mukh
dij (27°00′N, 33°54′E) lies about
2 miles SSW of Sa‘al Hashîsh (5.32).
The bay forms a small, well-sheltered boat harbour; an
above-water rock lies on the S side of the entrance to the
harbour.
Between Mars
Ab Mukh
dij and R
s Abu Sma
(10 miles SSE) the coast is fringed by a steep-to coral reef.
Sharm el ‘Arab
5.34
1 Sharm el ‘Arab (26°58′N, 33°55′E) is a cove situated in
the coastal reef which, in this vicinity, extends up to 2 cables
offshore. The approach from S is clear.
A large isolated reef encumbers the entrance to the cove
except for a narrow but deep channel on its N side.
There are a number of coral heads and above-water rocks
within the cove.
2 Anchorage. An anchorage, protected from all but E
winds, is available within the cove in a depth of 10 m, sand.
Protected area. A protected area has been declared over
the coral reefs surrounding Sharm el Nâqa (26°55′N,
33°57′E). See 5.11.
Chart 159
Marsa Toronbi
5.40
1 Marsa Toronbi (25°39′N, 34°35′E) is a small bay,
somewhat sheltered from NW winds by Râs Toronbi (5.16),
where anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of about
14⋅6 m.
A small jetty extends from the coast in the S part of the
bay.
5.41
1 Landmarks:
Gebel Abu Tiyûr (25°43′N, 34°17′E) is a prominent
landmark which rises to a height of 1027 m about
17 miles WNW of Marsa Toronbi. On S bearings
the mountain appears to have several peaks, on
WSW bearings it appears flattened, on NW bearings
the N summits appear rounded with the S summits
gradually appearing as peaks.
2 Gebel Umm Shaddâd (25°39′N, 34°21′E) stands about
12 miles W of Marsa Toronbi from where a range
extends about 12 miles SE. This range has three
well defined peaks of which Gebel Umm Lasaf
(25°33′N, 34°26′E) stands towards the S end.
Marsa Mubârak
5.42
1 Marsa Mubârak (25°32′N, 34°38′E) is an inlet situated on
the S side of Râs Hamra, a steep-to, red bluff rising to a
height of about 83 m.
The reef fringing the S side of the entrance extends
Coast between Safâga Ulbur and El Qu eir
5.35
1 The coast between Safâga Ulbur (26°37′N, 34°01′E) and
El Queir (35 miles SSE) (5.116) is fringed for most of its
length by a reef in which there some openings forming good
boat harbours. The reef extends up to 5 cables offshore and
is steep-to.
The coast in this area is low, rising gradually to
mountains, about 600 m high, 5 or 6 miles inland. Gebel
Umm Huweiât (26°32′N, 33°51′E), which stands about
10 miles SW of Safâga Ulbur, has a sharp peak.
5.36
1 Anchorage south of
ukhûr Quei’. There is no sheltered good light.
anchorage on this stretch of coast. A temporary anchorage
may be obtained by small vessels with local knowledge in a
depth of 11 m off the S side of ukhûr Quei’ (26°24′N,
34°11′E) (5.15).
5.37
1 Landing. An opening in the coastal reef about 5 cables
SE of Bir Quei’ (26°22′N, 34°08′E) (5.15) allows a boat to
approach the shore at HW.
A better landing place is situated about 5 cables farther S
where there is a good boat harbour.
Sharm el Bahari
5.38
1 Sharm el Bahari (25°52′N, 34°26′E) is a small bay with a
bridge, carrying the coastal road, at its head.
On entry, give a good berth to the reef fringing the N
side of the passage.
Anchorage, with good shelter, is available in the NW
corner of the bay in a depth of 10 m, sand. A dark sugarloaf
hill marks the anchorage.
Marsa Wizr
5.39
1 Marsa Wizr (25°47′N, 34°30′E) is a small bay, easily
entered, and protected from all but E winds, with reportedly
good anchorage for small vessels.
146
farther E than that on the N, otherwise the approach is clear.
The outer part of the inlet is deep but its inner part is a
shallow lagoon.
A jetty extends S from the N side of the inlet.
Marsa Imbârak
5.43
1 Marsa Imbârak (25°30′N, 34°39′E) is a small inlet
between two reefs, entered about 2 miles SE of Marsa
Mubârak (5.42).
Depths from 11 to 12⋅8 m lie within the inlet, but there
are some coral heads which are easy enough to see in a
A few white ruins stand on the N shore.
Marsa Abu Dabbâb
5.44
1 Marsa Abu Dabbâb (25°20′N, 34°44′E) is a cove situated
in a moderately level sandy coast which must be approached
from the N due to a foul area, encumbered with coral reefs
and dangerous rocks, which extends about 5 miles NNE
from close S of the entrance to the cove.
Râs Egela (5 miles SSE), which lies between Marsa
Abu Dabbâb and Marsa arâfi, rises close inland to a
reddish and fairly prominent double hill about 42 m high.
2 Anchorage. Good anchorage may be obtained during
periods of W winds, in the centre of the cove about 2 cables
from its head, in a depth of about 29 m, sand and coral.
This anchorage is not recommended during periods of N
winds as the cove is only a shallow indent in the line of the
coast.
Marsa Tarâfi
5.45
1 Marsa arâfi (25°13′N, 34°48′E) is a cove, about 90 m
wide, which lies about 7 miles S of Elphinstone Reef (5.17).
A beacon stands on the inner part of the reef fringing the
S side of the entrance. Three tall silver silos on the N shore
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 5
are visible from several miles away; four low tanks stand
near the silos.
A jetty extends SE from the N shore.
2 Facilities. Fresh water may be obtainable from the
military base nearby.
Anchorage. The cove affords completely sheltered
anchorage to small vessels with local knowledge.
5.46
1 Offshore dangers. An offshore bank (25°04′N, 34°56′E),
on which stands a coral reef, lies about 11 miles SSE of
Marsa arâfi. Depths over the bank generally range between
18 m to 46 m. However, there are some dangerous rocks.
Anchorage, sheltered from NW winds, may be obtained
on the S side of the bank in depths from 18 to 33 m.
Local knowledge is required for use of the anchorage.
5.47
1 Landmark:
Gebel Abu Diyâb (25°12′N, 34°14′E), 1123 m in
height, which stands about 31 miles W of Marsa
arâfi, is a prominent peak with many shoulders.
Marsa Tundaba
5.48
1 Marsa Tundaba (24°58′N, 34°56′E), which lies about
2 miles S of Râs Samadâi (5.17), is entered S of a low point
of land with a reef extending about 5 cables SE from it.
The inlet affords anchorage, close offshore, to small
vessels in depths of about 18 m.
Local knowledge is required for use of the anchorage.
5.49
1 An offshore bank (24°59′N, 35°00′E), with depths over it
from 12⋅8 to 37 m lies about 4 miles ENE of Marsa
Tundaba; a dangerous coral reef stands on the N end of the
bank.
Between Râs Samadâi (25°00′N, 34°57′E) and Râs
Baghdâdi (22 miles SSE) numerous dangers lie within
8 miles of the coast.
5.50
1 Anchorage may be obtained off the S side of the
offshore bank.
Local knowledge is required for use of the anchorage.
Marsa Nakari
5.51
1 Marsa Nakari is a small boat harbour situated about
4 miles S of Râs Samadâi (25°00′N, 34°57′E) (5.17) at the
mouth of Wâdi Nakari.
Some ruins are situated on low hillocks close to the coast
a short distance S of the wâdi.
Between Marsa Nakari and Râs Dirra (3 miles SSE), a
low point, a narrow reef lies a short distance off the coast.
5.52
1 Landmarks:
Gebel Nugrus (24°48′N, 34°36′E), 1520 m in height,
which stands about 20 miles WSW of Marsa Nakari
is a red granite mountain.
Gebel Zabâra (24°46′N, 34°41′E) 1120 m in height
stands about 5 miles ESE of Gebel Nugrus.
Sharm Lûli
5.53
1 Sharm Lûli (24°37′N, 35°07′E) is a cove entered 3 miles
S of Râs Baghdâdi.
The coast on both sides of its entrance is fringed by reefs
between which there is a passage which reduces to about
50 m wide at its narrowest point. A conspicuous boulder
stands on the reef fringing the S side of the entrance,
between the seaward edge of the reef and the shore.
147
2 Dangerous underwater rocks lie off the reef fringing the
NW side of the inlet.
The head of the cove is shallow and the shore is low and
sandy.
The main coastal road runs past the head of the inlet.
About 1 mile inland, a chain of hills with an elevation of
150 m, runs parallel to the coast in the vicinity of the cove.
A table-topped hill in this chain has a large white patch
about half-way down from its summit.
5.54
1 Anchorage. Good anchorage may be obtained within the
cove by small vessels in depths from about 10 to 12 m,
mud.
Local knowledge is required for use of the anchorage.
A further anchorage for small vessels may be obtained
close inshore on the S side of Râs Honkorâb (24°34′N,
35°10′E), in depths of 18 m. This anchorage provides shelter
from NW winds but is of indifferent quality.
5.55
1 Landmark:
Gebel Sikeit (24°40′N, 34°46′E) is a rugged ridge
about 19 miles W of Sharm Lûli.
Râs Qul‘ân Cove
5.56
1 Râs Qul‘ân Cove (24°17′N, 35°22′E) is entered from the
SE through a passage, about 1 cables wide, which lies
between the reefs lying S of Mahâbîs Islands (5.68) and the
coastal reef S of Râs Qul‘ân.
The cove is suitable for use by small vessels.
Local knowledge is required.
5.57
1 Entry. Outer Beacon stands on the outside reef, on the E
side of the entrance, about 2 miles S of Mahâbîs Islands.
In 1993 this was reported only to consist of a base.
Within the entrance to the cove two detached reefs lie on
the N side of the channel reducing the width of the fairway
to about 140 m. These reefs are marked by Middle Beacon
and Inner Beacon; the edge of the coastal reef is marked by
two further beacons (stakes, black triangle topmark). In 1993
these beacons were reported either missing or consisting only
of bases.
2 The buildings of a military camp on the W side of the
cove are conspicuous.
5.58
1 Leading beacons:
Southern pair beacons (pillars on masonry bases, black
and white bands, 8 m in height) (2
miles S of
Mahâbîs Islands); the alignment (245°) of these
leading beacons leads S of the reefs on the E side
of the entrance. In 1993, these beacons were
reported to be cairns made of rocks.
2 Northern pair beacons (pillars on masonry bases; front
beacon, red, rear beacon, red and white bands,
circular topmarks; 11 m in height) (1 miles NNW
of the southern pair of beacons); the alignment
(305°) of these leading beacons leads through the
entrance channel and S of the detached reefs. In
1992, these beacons were reported as missing.
Caution is necessary when turning from one leading line
to the next as the turning room is very limited.
5.59
1 Anchorage. Good anchorage may be obtained in Râs
Qul‘ân Cove by small vessels, in depths from 9 to 10 m,
sand, abreast a jetty on the W side of the cove which
extends NE from the shore across the coastal reef.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 5

A reef extends across the N end of the anchorage between 5.67

the coastal reef and the offshore reef. This reef is not easily
identified as its sighting depends on the position of the sun.
5.60
1 Offshore dangers. Between Râs Qul‘ân Cove (24°17′N,
35°22′E) and Râs Banâs (32 miles SE) numerous dangers
which, along with Fury Shoal (5.18), include a number of
coral reefs, dangerous rocks and rocks awash, lie up to
12 miles off the coast.
Marsa Wâdi Lahami
5.61
1 Marsa Wâdi Lahami (24°14′N, 35°25′E), which is fronted
by the coastal reef, is entered 5 miles SE of Râs Qul‘ân.
Numerous dangerous rocks lie on the inner part of a
bank, with depths over it from 18 to 55 m, which fringes the
coast in this vicinity.
The entrance is very narrow and encumbered with
isolated dangerous coral heads.
5.62
1 Anchorage. Marsa Wâdi Lahami affords a good
anchorage, in depths of about 15 m, SE of the N entrance
point between the extremity of the reef which extends from
the point and the coast.
Local knowledge is required for the use of the anchorage.
5.63
1 Reef Point (24°00′N, 35°41′E), which lies about 20 miles
SE of Marsa Wâdi Lahami, has dangerous rocks and drying
reefs lying within 3 miles NNE, and 4 miles E, of the point.
An unsurveyed area lies between the point and Râs Banâs
(23°54′N, 35°47′E), all vessels should keep well offshore in
this vicinity.
Kira’ el Hartiwâi
5.64
1 Kira’ el Hartiwâi (24°08′N, 35°30′E) is an inlet within the
coastal reef.
There are a number of conspicuous wrecks lying within
the inlet.
Adjacent islands
Gezîrat Wâdi Gimâl
5.65
1 Gezîrat Wâdi Gimâl (24°40′N, 35°10′E) is a low rocky
island, which lies about 3 miles E of Râs Baghdâdi.
From the SE, the NE end of the island appears as a bluff,
but from the S, both ends of the island appear low with the
summit rising from the middle.
A coral reef extends W of the island to a position close E
of Râs Baghdâdi (24°40′N, 35°06′E), the reef fringing the
island extends well beyond its S point.
2 Sha’b Ghadeira (5.17) a drying coral reef, lies close NNW
of the island.
An extensive bank lies up to 5 miles offshore in the
vicinity of Râs Baghdâdi. A drying reef lies about 8 miles
NNE of the point; two dangerous rocks lie 6 miles NE, and
7 miles ENE, of the point.
These dangers, and the bank, are steep-to and the whole
of this area should be approached with great caution within a
distance of 10 miles.
5.66
1 Protected area. The coral reefs surrounding Gezîrat Wâdi
Gimâl have been declared protected areas.
See 5.11.
1 Inner channel. The channel between the mainland and
Gezîrat Wâdi Gimâl is encumbered with rocks and isolated
coral heads; it can only be used by small vessels.
Local knowledge is required.
Qul‘ân Islands
5.68
1 Qul‘ân Islands (24°22′N, 35°24′E) stand on drying reefs
which lie on a bank that extends about 5 miles ENE, and
10 miles N, of Râs Qul‘ân (5.18). Numerous other dangerous
rocks and rocks awash also stand on this bank.
From the NW the islands are named as Gezîrat Siyùl,
Gezîrat Showârît on which there is a clump of trees, and
Mahâbîs Islands.
5.69
1 Protected area. The coral reefs surrounding the islands
have been declared protected areas.
See 5.11.
SAFÂGA
General information
Charts 2375, 3043 plans of the approaches to Safâga and of
Safâga
Position
5.70
1 Safâga (26°44′N, 33°56′E) is situated on the W side of
the head of the Red Sea, about 208 miles S of Suez.
Description
5.71
1 Safâga is a port within a natural harbour surrounded by
coral reefs and small islands.
Function
5.72
1 Safâga is the main Egyptian deep-water port in the N part
of the Red Sea.
The principal export from the Port of Safâga is phosphate
ore; the principal imports are wheat, alumina and cement.
An Egyptian Naval base, which is the headquarters of the
Egyptian Red Sea Naval Command, is situated in the NE
part of the port. The facility is not large and forms the home
base for smaller warships and tenders, though larger vessels
are routinely deployed to the port.
Traffic
5.73
1 In 2001 the port was visited by a total of 84 vessels.
Port Authority
5.74
1 The port is administered by the Port Authority of Safâga,
Port and Lights Administration, Safâga, Egypt.
Prohibited area
5.75
1 Navigation is prohibited, as shown on the chart, to all
vessels outside the designated approach sector to Safâga.
Protected area
5.76
1 The coral reefs surrounding Safâga have been declared
protected areas.
The use of anchors on, or adjacent to, protected coral
reefs is prohibited except in cases of emergency or force
majeure. See 5.11.

148
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 5

Entry The longest berth is the Commercial Wharf which extends

5.77
1 Safâga is entered between the S end of Gezîret Safâga
(5.112), and the N end of Spit Reef (5.99).
A light (black beacon, yellow band; E cardinal) is
exhibited from the NE side of Gezîret Safâga. This light was
reported to be temporarily extinguished in 2003.
Aids to navigation
5.78
1 Caution. Mariners are advised to use caution when
approaching Safâga as, at the time of writing, the
navigational system in the port and its outer approaches is
reported to have been revised.
There is currently doubt about the exact position of all
navaids in the Safâga area and advice from the Egyptian
Authorities is being sought. In the meantime, mariners are
advised to use great care when navigating in these waters
and seek local knowledge whenever possible. See note on
chart 3043.
Approach
5.79
1 From a position about 6 miles E of R
s Abu Sma
Light (26°51′N, 34°00′E) (5.14) the initial approach is
through the designated approach sector.
The approach continues in the white sector (218°−220°)
of Safâga Island Directional Light-beacon (white GRP tower)
(26°42′⋅9N, 33°59′⋅9E).
5.80
1 Approach to the entrance of the Port of Safâga from the
S is prohibited.
Landmark
5.81
1 The alumina silo and elevator cranes on the Commercial
Wharf (5.100).
Flow
5.82
1 Strong currents exist between Shi’b Shear (26°39′N,
34°06′E), Middle Reef (3 miles N) and Panorama Reef
(3 miles farther NNW).
Caution
5.83
1 On the whole, the coastal area around the Port of Safâga
is low and sandy and consequently gives a poor radar return.
There is some possibility of confusion in mistaking the radar
return from R
s Abu Sma (5.14) to that from Gezîret
Safâga (5.112).
At a distance of 20 miles the radar picture is unusable,
Gezîret Safâga being identifiable at about 15 miles.
Limiting conditions
Controlling depth
5.84
1 In 1996, the depth over the spit through the buoyed
channel was 16 m.
The maximum safe entry draught is reported to be
10⋅3 m.
Deepest and longest berths
5.85
1 The deepest berth is No 1 Berth at the NE end of
Commercial Wharf (5.100), where there is a depth of 14 m
alongside.
about 750 m.
Maximum size of vessel handled
5.86
1 In 1992, it was reported the port could handle vessels up
to 75 000 tonnes, 274 m LOA, and maximum draught
12⋅8 m.
Local weather
5.87
1 In the early morning there is usually a calm, which is
then followed by light N winds which gain strength
thoughout the day; this increase in the strength of the wind
later in the day makes securing more difficult. In the evening
the wind is generally offshore and can be quite strong,
blowing for periods of up to an hour.
The port is sheltered from N winds; SE winds cause a
swell to set into the bay.
2 Occasionally, between November and March, strong S
winds, lasting approximately 10 days, may be experienced.
These winds cause a rough sea and hinder port operations.
Tidal levels
5.88
1 The range of tide is up to a maximum of 1⋅4 m.
Density of water
5.89
1 Density 1⋅025 gms/cm#.
Arrival information
Notice of ETA
5.90
1 Vessels must inform the Safâga Port Authority of their
ETA 7 days in advance.
Vessels should confirm their ETA at the waiting area at
least 24 hours in advance of their arrival.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Waiting area
5.91
1 A waiting area is established, as shown on the chart,
about 5 miles NNE of Safâga Island Directional
Light-beacon (26°42′⋅9N, 33°59′⋅9E) (5.79) in the Approach
Sector to the Port of Safâga.
Outer anchorage
5.92
1 Anchorage, within the limits of the Port of Safâga, may
be obtained in depths of over 10 m, sand and coral, as
shown on the chart W of R
s Abu Sma.
The anchorage may be approached from the SE, passing
between Gezîret Tûbya (26°50′N, 33°59′E) and R
s Abu
Sma; dangerous rocks, marked by a buoy (orange conical),
lie on the NW side of this entrance.
2 Caution. It should be noted that this anchorage can only
be approached through the Prohibited Area (5.75) and
permission from the Port Authority is necessary.
Pilotage
5.93
1 Pilotage is compulsory; vessels are prohibited to enter the
port without a pilot aboard.
The pilot boards, as shown on the chart, SW of El
Morewood Light-beacon (26°42′⋅0N, 33°59′⋅8E).
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).

149
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 5
Tugs
5.94
1 Tugs are available.
Regulations concerning entry
5.95
1 The port is open to movements by all vessels during
daylight, and to passenger and tourist vessels by night. It is
advisable not to enter the port at night.
Arrival time
5.96
1 Vessels intending to enter the port should try to arrive off
Gezîret Safâga by sunrise in order to have the sun astern
when proceeding through the harbour entrance.
Directions for entering harbour
5.97
1 From a position in the Approach Sector, within the white
sector of Safâga Island Directional Light-beacon (5.79), and
N of Panorama Reef (5.15), the track leads initially 219°,
passing (with positions given from Safâga Island Directional
Light-beacon (26°42′⋅9N, 33°59′⋅9E)):
NW of Panorama Reef Light-beacon (5 miles ENE)
which stands on the N end of Panorama Reef,
thence:
Clear of Arpha Bank (3 miles NE).
5.98
1 The track then leads S, passing:
W of Panorama Reef, (5 miles ENE), thence:
E of Gezîret Safâga from where Gezîret Safâga
Directional Light-beacon is exhibited from a
position on the SE end of the island, thence:
2 E of El Morewood Light-beacon (green GRP tower,
topmark green triangle apex up) (1 mile S) which
marks the SE side of some detached rocks which lie
about 2 cables S of the S end of Gezîret Safâga
(5.112), and:
3 W of Fellowes Rocks (3
miles ESE) which consist of
a number of dangerous rocks standing on a
detached bank; the SW part of the bank has not
been examined. Fellowes Rocks Light-buoy (pillar,
isolated danger; racon) is moored close SSE of the
rocks. Thence:
4 Round El Morewood Light-beacon keeping at a safe
clearing distance of not less than 3 cables.
Useful mark:
White square building, standing about 600 m SSW of
Safâga Island Directional Light-beacon is
conspicuous.
5.99
Safâga Directional Light-beacon:
1 From a position about 3 cables S of El Morewood
Light-beacon the track leads about 3 miles NW, within the
white sector (311°) of Port Safâga Directional Light-beacon
(red metal tower) (26°44′⋅2N, 33°56′⋅4E) to a position close
S of SB buoy (special, yellow), passing (with positions
given from the light):
2 SW of El Morewood Light-beacon (3
miles SE),
thence:
SW of the coral reef (3 miles SE) which extends
SSW from the S end of Gezîret Safâga (5.112),
thence:
3 NE of Spit Reef Light-beacon (red GRP tower,
topmark red square) (3 miles SSE) which stands
close to the N extremity of Spit Reef, a drying
sandy spit. Dangerous rocks lie close off the N end
150
of the spit; a rock awash lies about 5 cables NW
of the light-beacon. A shoal, with a least depth over
it of 4⋅9 m, lies about 7 cables N of the N end of
the reef. Thence:
4 Through the channel, marked by light-buoys, into the
port.
The track then leads to a position within the Port of
Safâga in the vicinity of SB Buoy (special, yellow).
Berths
Commercial Wharf
5.100
1 The Commercial Wharf is situated in the NW part of the
port.
No 1 Berth situated at the NE end of the Commercial
Wharf has a charted depth alongside of 14 m and is used as
a grain and general cargo berth; this berth can accommodate
vessels up to 290 m in length with a maximum draught of
11⋅0 m, but vessels up to a maximum draught of 12⋅8 m can
be accepted.
2 No 2 Berth, with a charted depth alongside of 10 m, lies
close SW of No 1 Berth, is used mainly for general cargo
work; this berth can accommodate vessels up to 290 m in
length with a maximum draught of 9⋅15 m.
No 3 Berth SW of the Commercial Wharf is used for the
import of alumina and cement; this berth can accommodate
vessels up to 221 m in length with a maximum draught of
9⋅45 m.
Phosphate Berth
5.101
1 The Phosphate Berth consists of a pier, 16 m wide,
situated on the W side of the port, about 3 cables SSW of
SC Light-buoy; this berth can handle vessels up to 260 m in
length with a maximum draught of 14⋅0 m.
The berth has a least depth alongside its head of 8⋅5 m; a
transporter crane stands on the pier.
5.102
1 Mooring. To secure at the Phosphate Berth, drop the
starboard anchor by the small marker buoy (red or white
flag), lay out mooring lines to two mooring buoys laid off
the pier and to two mooring posts situated N and S of the
pier.
It is important, owing to the nature of the coral bottom,
not to over-run the anchor when letting go and to veer cable
carefully when hauling alongside.
Oil Jetty
5.103
1 The Oil Jetty is situated on the W side of the S part of
the port and is reported to be part of the naval base.
The jetty is 60 m in length with a least charted depth
alongside of 11⋅9 m.
A mooring buoy has been laid close inshore about 1 mile
S of the oil jetty.
Lighter berth
5.104
1 A wharf for the use of lighters is situated about 2 cables
S of the phosphate berth (5.101).
Anchorage
5.105
1 Good anchorage is available throughout the bay fronting
the Port of Safâga in depths from 25 to 37 m, mud.
5.106
1 Mooring buoy. A mooring buoy (white) is laid about
5 cables N of the inner end of the buoyed entrance channel.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 5

Port services Hyndman Reefs

5.114
Facilities 1 Hyndman Reefs (26°39′N, 34°03′E) are awash and dry in
5.107 places, the area close SW of them has not been examined.
1 Several lighters; 15 tonne floating crane; a mechanical The NW point of the reef is marked by a light-beacon
synchrolift dock of 940 tonnes capacity (operated by the (yellow beacon, black band; W cardinal).
Egyptian Navy); alumina discharge elevator; wheat
conveyors; hospitals. Minor channel
5.115
Supplies 1 The channel between the NW side of Gezîret Safâga and
5.108 the mainland is obstructed by a bar over which there are
1 Fresh water in limited quantities by barge; fresh charted depths of less than 2 m.
provisions in season; 100 tonnes capacity fuel barge. Navigation within the channel is prohibited. See 5.75.
Communications
5.109 EL QU EIR
1 The nearest airport is at Hurghada (3.367) 60 km distant.
General information
Off-lying islands and dangers Charts 159, 3043 plan of El Quïeir
Position
Gezîret Tûbya 5.116
5.110 1 El Queir (26°06′N, 34°17′E) is situated on the W side of
1 Gezîret Tûbya (26°50′N, 33°59′E) and Sandy Islet the head of the Red Sea.
(6 cables S) stand on a coral reef situated about 1 miles The port is sometimes referred to as Kosseir.
SW of R
s Abu Sma (5.15). Gezîret Tûbya rises to a
height of 9 m but Sandy Islet is low-lying; both are reported Function
to be difficult to identify from a distance. 5.117
A small unnamed sandy cay stands on the coastal reef 1 El Queir is practically an open roadstead consisting of a
about 1 mile W of Gezîret Tûbya. small bight, open to the SE, with the town and the piers
2 Dangerous rocks, marked by a buoy (orange, conical), lie situated in its N part.
on the NE side of the outer end of the channel which leads The town is an Egyptian Government Station.
to the anchorage (5.92), W of R
s Abu Sma. The port is fronted by a sandy beach, the remaining
shores are fringed by reefs; the ruins of a fort stand on the
Fairway Reefs higher ground close NW of the town.
5.111 2 El Queir Light is exhibited from the head of the
1 North Fairway Reef (26°49′N, 34°00′E) and South phosphate transporter crane situated on the phosphate berth.
Fairway Reef (7 cables S) lie in the middle of the entrance to
the unnamed bay which lies between R
s Abu Sma (5.15)
Traffic
and Gezîret Safâga (5.112). 5.118
1 In 1995, the port was used by a total of 3 vessels.
Currents can be strong and dangerous around both of the
Fairway Reefs. Port Authority
5.119
Gezîret Safâga 1 The Queir Phosphate Company, PO Box 869, 23 Talaat
5.112 Street, Cairo.
1 Gezîret Safâga (26°45′N, 33°59′E) is a low and sandy
island with a sandy-coloured table-topped hill rising from a Prohibited area
projection on its NE side. The island is surrounded by a 5.120
coral reef. 1 Navigation is prohibited, as shown on the chart, to all
A beacon (stone pyramid, red and white bands, 11 m in vessels outside of the designated approach sector to El
height) stands on the table-topped hill. In 1994 it was Queir or the designated waiting area.
reported that a large fort stands close to this position and the
beacon is no longer recognisable. A further beacon
Approach
(1 miles NW) stands near the N end of the island. 5.121
2 The NE point of the island gives a good radar return. 1 From a position about 12 miles WSW of El-Akhawein
A light (5.77) is exhibited from the NE point of the (The Brothers) (26°19′N, 34°51′E) (4.22) the approach is
island. The light was reported to be temporarily extinguished through the designated approach sector to the waiting area.
(2003). Topography
Safâga Island Directional Light (5.79) is exhibited from 5.122
the SE end of the island. 1 The coast S of El Queir as far as Râs Baghdâdi
(24°40′N, 35°06′E) is fringed by reefs in places on which
Cannon Reef stand some dangerous rocks.
5.113 Numerous other dangers lie up to 6 miles offshore.
1 Cannon Reef (26°40′N, 33°59′E) is a detached drying
reef which lies about 1 mile E of Spit Reef (5.99) and Principal marks
extends S to within a short distance of the coastal reef, 5.123
2 miles NW of Safâga Ulbur (5.35) from which a light 1 Landmarks:
(white GRP tower; red top) is exhibited. Gebel Queir (26°08′N, 34°14′E), 135 m in height,
A number of dangerous rocks and a rock awash lie in the which stands about 3 miles NW of the town, is
vicinity of the reef. surmounted by a cairn.

151
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 5

Gebel Gihânîya (26°05′N, 34°14′E), 217 m in height, Useful marks:

stands about 2 miles WSW of the town and is Phosphate works and a conveyor belt, standing about
also surmounted by a cairn. The peak is not easy to 3 cables N of the town on a low sandy point.
identify from the S. Two radio masts standing close N of the town.
Berths
Limiting conditions Phosphate loading berth
Tidal levels 5.134
5.124 1 The phosphate loading berth is situated in the N part of
1 See information in Admiralty Tide Tables, Volume 3. Mean the small bay which fronts El Queir.
spring range about 0⋅6 m; mean neap range about 0⋅4 m. Vessels are not able to berth alongside the stone pier on
which the phosphate transporter crane stands. They are
Local weather moored under the transporter, with its fixed cantilever arm
5.125 over them, with two anchors down and ropes to the four
1 Winds from the N or NW rise at about 0500 which then mooring buoys laid S and W of the pier.
increase to force 4 or 5 at about 1100, decreasing to calm at 2 Good mooring ropes are essential; the port anchor
night. The resultant sea makes the handling of small boats and cable should be made ready to slip in the event of bad
difficult. weather.
5.126 There is a maximum depth, under the cantilever arm, of
1 Climatic table. See 1.275 and 1.279. 8⋅8 m.
Phosphates can be loaded at a rate of 150 tonnes per
hour.
Arrival information Jetties
Port radio 5.135
5.127 1 A wood and concrete jetty, about 82 m in length with a
1 There is a radio station at El Queir. depth of about 1⋅2 m at its head, is situated W of the
phosphate loading berth. The jetty is foul along both sides.
Notice of ETA Inner anchorage berths
5.128 5.136
1 Vessels should confirm their ETA, at least 24 hours in 1 There is an anchorage close to the coastal reef with the
advance of their arrival, in a position about 2 miles off the phosphate transporter bearing 220°, distant 4 cables, sand and
port within the designated waiting area. coral with moderate holding. This anchorage cannot be used
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio at night.
Signals, Volume 6 (3). Anchorage may also be obtained 3 cables E of the
transporter in depths of 22 m, soft sand.
Waiting area These anchorages afford little shelter and the holding
5.129 ground is reported not to be good. SE winds do not blow
1 A designated waiting area is established, as shown on the here as strongly as in the open sea but a heavy swell rolls in
chart, centred about 1 miles offshore at the WSW end of during bad weather.
the approach sector to El Queir.
Port services
Outer anchorage Facilities
5.130 5.137
1 There is open anchorage over a bank in depths of about 1 Minor repairs can be undertaken; hospitals.
27 m, as shown on the chart, which lies in the SW part of
the waiting area. This anchorage berth is not recommended
Supplies
due the coral bottom. 5.138
1 Fresh provisions may be obtained if several days notice
Pilotage are given; there is a limited supply of fresh water.
5.131 Oil fuel is not available.
1 Pilotage is compulsory. The pilot will meet the vessel at a Harbour regulations
position 2 miles off the port and will remain on board while 5.139
the vessel is in port. 1 Main engines must remain on 2 hours notice.
The pilot will not board until pratique has been granted.
PORT BERENICE
Regulations concerning entry
5.132 General information
1 The port is open to movements during daylight hours Charts 158, 159, 3043 plans D and E
only. Position
5.140
1 Port Berenice (23°56′N, 35°29′E) is situated on the W
Directions for entering harbour side of the Red Sea, near the head of Foul Bay (5.157).
5.133
1 Vessels should approach the waiting area and anchorage Function
through the designated approach sector. 5.141
Gebel Gihânîya (26°05′N, 34°14′E) (5.123), bearing 250°, 1 Port Berenice provides sheltered anchorage and safe
leads through the approach sector to the anchorage. landing.

152
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 5
The ancient town of Berenice, the ruins of which lie on
the W side of the port, was founded or enlarged by Ptolemy
II in the third century BC, when it was of great importance
as a seaport for trade between Africa and Asia.
2 The bay W of Râs Banâs (4.14) is encumbered with
drying reefs, close off the outer edges of which are
numerous drying, dangerous and awash rocks. This area is
largely unsurveyed.
The coast S of Port Berenice is largely unsurveyed,
numerous dangerous rocks and shoals extend up to 8 miles
from the coast in this area.
Topography
5.142
1 The hills of the promontory which extends about 17 miles
E from the line of the coast, and of which Râs Banâs
(23°54′N, 35°47′E) (4.14) forms the SE extremity, are
sharply divided into two groups by differences of colour.
Pale-coloured hills form a sinuous plateau through the length
of the promontory attaining a height of 188 m at Damon
Pythias (23°56′⋅6N, 35°36′⋅3E), a well defined double
summit with a small cairn standing on its W peak.
2 The darker hills consist of two masses, one about 185 m
in height near the junction of the promontory and the coast;
and the other, rising to a height of about 195 m, situated
about 6 miles WNW of Râs Banâs.
A low sandy plain, with hillocks in places, rises gradually
from the shores of Port Berenice to some hills standing
about 6 miles inland.
Principal marks
5.143
1 Landmarks:
Gebel Hamâta (24°12′N, 35°00′E), 1910 m in height,
and, although surrounded by other high mountains,
towers above them. The mountain is visible from
great distances.
Gebel Abu Gurdi (24°00′N, 35°05′E), 1710 m in
height, appears from most directions like a rather
flat cone surrounded by lower mountains.
Arrival information
Outer anchorages
5.144
1 Anchorage, as shown on the chart, may be obtained in
depths from 13 to 17 m, coral, about 6 cables SE of the SW
tip of the sandspit.
A further anchorage is available, as shown on the chart,
about 4 cables W of the SW tip of the sandspit in depths of
about 25 m, mud, sand and shell. Strong N winds, which are
prevalent during the day, make for a troublesome sea when
working boats.
Directions for entering harbour
Approach
5.145
1 From a position about 15 miles E of Râs Banâs (23°54′N,
35°47′E) (4.14) the initial approach leads about 14 miles
WSW to a position about 2 miles SE of Gezîret
Mukawwa‘ (23°50′N, 35°49′E) (5.18).
153
Entry
5.146
1 Entry is made following the recommended track, as
shown on the chart, which leads to the anchorages off Port
Berenice.
5.147
1 From a position about 2 miles SE of Gezîret Mukawwa‘
the track initially leads through Middle Channel, passing
(with positions given from Cygnet Rock (23°54′N,
35°40′E)):
2 NE of Endeavour Rock (9 miles SE), a rock awash,
which lies close NE of Horseshoe Reef. Horseshoe
Reef is largely unsurveyed, its NE and E sides are
steep-to and awash; a rock awash lies close off the
S end of the reef; Horseshoe Reef is marked at the
N end by Horseshoe Reef Light-beacon (metal
tower) (23°48′⋅6N, 35°47′⋅9E). The cairn standing
on Damon Pythias (23°57′N, 35°36′E) (5.142),
bearing about 304°, leads through the centre of
Middle Channel. Thence:
3 SW of Gezîret Mukawwa‘ (8
miles ESE) (5.18). The
S side of Gezîret Mukawwa‘ is marked by a
Light-beacon (metal tower), thence:
N of the shoal (7 miles SE), with a least depth over
it of 7⋅3 m, which extends about 1
miles NW of
Horseshoe Reef. The S end of Gezîret Mukawwa‘,
bearing 090° astern, leads along this second leg of
the recommended track. Thence:
4 S of Shap Ras Bnas Light-beacon (6 miles ESE)
(5 m high) (position approximate) which marks the
E side of the area of shoals and reefs which extend
SW from Râs Banâs (4.14), thence:
S of the area of shoals and reefs (5 miles SE) which
extend SW from Râs Banâs (4.14).
5.148
1 Following the recommended track, passing:
NE of the detached shoal area (3 miles S) with a
least depth over it of 9⋅7 m; noting the shoal with a
depth of 18⋅3 m over it lying close ENE, thence:
NE of the detached shoal area (2
miles S) with a
least depth over it of 18⋅3 m, thence:
SW of Farida Point (1 miles ENE), following the
recommended track WNW.
5.149
1 Leading lights:
Front light (23°56′⋅0N, 35°35′⋅1E) exhibited from the
coast about 1 mile WNW of Philadelphus Point.
Rear light (2 cables NW).
The alignment (314°) of these leading lights continues
along the next reach of the recommended track, passing:
SW of Cygnet Rock a rock awash; a good lookout
should be maintained for the rock, thence:
2 SW of the shoal (1 mile WSW) with a least depth over
it of 5⋅4 m. Patches of discoloured water have been
seen in this vicinity. Thence:
NE of the shoal finger (2
miles SW), with a least
depth over it of 6⋅7 m, which extends NE from the
area of reefs and shoals on the SW side of the entry
track. This area of shoal water is sometimes visible.
5.150
1 Leading lights:
Front light (23°55′⋅0N, 35°28′⋅9E) exhibited from the
coast about 1 miles SSW of Berenice.
Rear light (1 cable W).
From a position about 1 mile SSE of Philadelphus Point
the alignment (270°) of these leading lights continues along
the recommended track, passing:
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 5
2 S of Philadelphus Point (4 miles WNW) a somewhat
indefinite yellow cliff, 3 m in height, which rises
about 1 mile inland to Damon Pythias (5.142),
thence:
N of the shoal (6 miles W), with a least depth over it
of 7⋅4 m, which lies on the N edge of the area of
numerous shoal patches, thence:
3 To the outer anchorage, as shown on the chart, which
lies about 6 cables SE of the SW end of the
sandspit which itself extends about 3 miles SW
from the line of the coast and on which there are
some hummocks and sparse scrub; Sandy
Light-beacon (23°55′⋅5N, 35°30′⋅6E) marks the edge
of the coral reef SW of the SW tip of the sandspit.
A reef and other dangers lie up to about 3 cables
off the SE side of the spit.
Minor channels
North Channel
5.151
1 North Channel (23°52′N, 35°48′E) leads between the
reefs and other dangers which lie up to 7 cables NNW of
Gezîret Mukawwa‘ (23°50′N, 35°49′E) (5.18) and the similar
dangers which extend about 4 miles SW from Râs Banâs
(23°54′N, 35°47′E) (4.14).
Shap Ras Bnas Light-beacon (5 m high) (23°51′⋅1N,
35°46′⋅5E) (position approximate) marks the E side of the
area of shoals and reefs which extend SW from Râs Banâs
and marks the W side of the channel.
South Channel
5.152
1 South Channel (23°46′N, 35°47′E) leads between the
unsurveyed dangers on the W side of Horseshoe Reef
(23°48′N, 35°48′E) (5.147) and the unsurveyed area at the N
end of Foul Bay.
The channel may be approached with the summit of
Gezîret Zabargad (23°37′N, 36°12′E) (4.14) bearing 113°
astern. When the line of bearing of the leading lights W of
Philadelphus Point (5.150) are identified then proceed as
directed for Middle Channel (5.147).
2 Care is necessary to avoid confusing Damon Pythias for
more distant slopes.
Directions for entering harbour
5.153
1 From a position near the outer anchorage about 4 cables
W of the SW end of the sandspit, the approach and entry to
the outer harbour is to the NW.
Leading lights:
Front light (white, 3 m in height) (23°56′⋅5N,
35°29′⋅4E).
Rear light (white, 3 m in height) (200 m from front).
2 The alignment (316°) of these leading lights, which stand
on the NW shore of the harbour close W of the old leading
beacons, leads through a channel, about 68 m wide, into the
outer harbour; a least depth of 7⋅5 m lies close SW of the
leading line through the entrance fairway.
A light-beacon (23°56′⋅2N, 35°29′⋅7E) stands on the reef
close inside the entrance channel.
154
Berths
Outer Harbour
5.154
1 Description. The outer harbour of Port Berenice is
protected by the reefs which extend E from the coast farther
S.
A jetty extends about 150 m SE from a position close SE
of the leading lights.
The best landing is at a small concrete jetty, with a least
depth alongside of 4⋅6 m, which lies about 2 cables NE of
the leading lights.
2 Landing may also be effected on the N side of North
Cove, which lies about 2 cables SW of the leading
light-beacons, where the shore is steep-to. The entrance to
the cove, between the reefs fringing its entrance, is about
1 cable wide.
A shoal area, with a least depth over it of 6⋅5 m, lies in
the middle part of the outer harbour; a light-buoy (spherical)
marks the N side of this shoal. Inner Passage Light-beacon
(metal tower) (23°56′⋅2N, 35°29′⋅8E) stands near the edge of
the coral reef on the E side of the outer harbour.
Inner Harbour
5.155
1 The Inner Harbour lies on the NW side of the sandspit
and is almost land-locked. Owing to its narrow and tortuous
entrance the Inner Harbour can only be used by small
vessels with local knowledge.
There are numerous clearly defined coral reefs within the
Inner Harbour which, except when the sun is low, can easily
be seen. There are also many shoal patches.
2 If entry is to be made into the Inner Harbour, then steer a
mid-channel course with a least depth over the bar of 5⋅2 m.
Anchorage berth
5.156
1 A good anchorage, as shown on the chart, which is
sheltered from N winds is available in depths of 12 m, sand
and coral, approximately on the leading line about 2 cables
SE from the front beacon.
Anchorage for small vessels is available in North Cove
(5.154) in depths of about 6 m sand, mud and coral.
FOUL BAY
General information
Charts 158, 159
Description
5.157
1 Foul Bay, which is entered between Râs Banâs (23°54′N,
35°47′E) (4.14) and Abu Dara (22°40′N, 36°11′E), has low
rocky shores.
S of Port Berenice the bay is encumbered with reefs and
below-water rocks.
The whole coast S of Port Berenice is foul and should
not be approached except in an emergency.
2 Between Bodkin Reef (23°29′N, 35°32′E) (5.164) and
Abu Dara (60 miles SSE) (5.19) the coast is mostly fringed
by a reef which is fronted by numerous other reefs that
extend to over 18 miles offshore. Mirear Island (5.165),
Sha’ab Abu Fendera (5.166) and the Siyâl Islands (5.167) lie
in this foul area.
International boundary
5.158
1 The political boundary between Egypt and Sudan lies
close S of Ras Hadarba (22°04′N, 36°54′E); the
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 5
administrative boundary reaches the coast about 7 miles
WSW of Mirear Island (23°11′N, 35°45′E).
Topography
5.159
1 Gebel Batûga (23°50′N, 35°21′E) which stands 24 miles
W of Râs Banâs (4.14) is remarkable on account of its light
colour. The mountain has two principal peaks, the higher,
which lies to the NW, rises to a height of 650 m.
Gebel Um Etli (23°40′N, 35°22′E), which stands 28 miles
WSW of Râs Banâs (4.14), has three principal peaks the
highest rising to a height of 844 m.
5.160
1 The Mountains of Berenice are a granite range of
mountains, with numerous peaks, that stand in three main
masses between 6 and 10 miles inland from the central part
of Foul Bay. A sandy plain extends E from their base to the
coast.
2 Gebel el Farâyid (23°33′N, 35°22′E) is the collective
name for the N mass which appears like an open hand, the
E peaks resembling the fingers and the W peak the thumb.
Gebel el Farâyid, which rises to a height of 1341 m, is also
the name given to this highest peak of the mass. A
steep-sided, flat-topped, mountain, which attains an elevation
of 1259 m, stands about 3 miles farther SW of the peak.
3 El Meibar (23°29′N, 35°21′E) is a sharp pinnacle which
rises to an elevation of 1230 m. The mountain, which is the
highest of a group of peaks, is so narrow that it bears some
resemblance to a column.
Several peaks extend 7 miles SW of El Meibar attaining
elevations between 500 and 900 m.
5.161
1 Gebel Ma‘rafâi (23°23′N, 35°22′E) forms the central mass
of the Mountains of Berenice and rises to an elevation of
915 m.
Gebel Fareiyid (23°17′N, 35°23′E) is a small peaked
range with its two principal peaks standing close together,
the highest rising to 673 m. The range forms the S mass of
the Mountains of Berenice.
2 Gimeida (22°46′N, 35°38′E) is a conical, dark, prominent
hill which rises to a height of 122 m. Care should be taken
not to confuse Gimeida with another dark, but flat-topped
hill, which rises to 120 m about 5 miles NW.
Off-lying islands and reefs
Saint John’s Reef
5.162
1 Saint John’s Reef (23°25′N, 35°55′E) a detached reef,
which lies about 38 miles SE of Port Berenice (5.140), close
to the centre of the entrance to Foul Bay (5.157). Many
drying and dangerous below-water rocks stand on this reef
which extends about 12 miles E/W and 9 miles N/S.
Further detached reefs and dangerous rocks lie between
the reef and the shore.
2 Two further detached banks, on which stand reefs and
many drying and dangerous below-water rocks, lie about 14
and 24 miles S of Râs Banâs (23°54′N, 35°47′E) and NNW
of Saint John’s Reef.
El
akhra el Beida’
5.163
1 El akhra el Beida’ (White Rock) (23°42′N, 35°42′E),
which stands on the W side of the N-most of the detached
155
banks that lie S of Râs Banâs (23°54′N, 35°47′E), is shaped
like a boat and shows up well.
A smaller detached drying reef lies about 3 miles WNW
of El akhra el Beida’.
Bodkin Reef
5.164
1 Bodkin Reef (23°29′N, 35°32′E), a drying reef over
which the sea breaks, lies about 2 miles offshore from a
position N of the centre of Foul Bay (5.157).
Dangerous rocks lie in the vicinity of the reef.
Mirear Island
5.165
1 Mirear Island (23°11′N, 35°45′E) is a low and sandy
island standing on the E part of a reef which extends about
11 miles E from the coast.
Sha’b Abu Fendera
5.166
1 Sha’ab Abu Fendera (22°54′N, 36°16′E), a drying reef
with an above-water rock, about 6 m high, standing on its E
end, lies in the SE approach to Foul Bay (5.157).
Siyâl Islands
5.167
1 Siyâl Islands (22°47′N, 36°12′E) lie about 7 miles SSW
of Sha’ab Abu Fendera and consist of three sandy islets
covered with bushes.
The area in the vicinity of these islands, and between
them and the mainland, is encumbered with reefs. The whole
area should not be approached without local knowledge.
Sharm el Madfa
Description
5.168
1 Sharm el Madfa (22°58′N, 35°40′E) is a lagoon with
depths from 2 to 4 m but is only accessible through a boat
channel.
Boats must first pass through a narrow gap in the coastal
reef situated about 1 miles NNW of a sandspit which forms
the N entrance point of the lagoon, before proceeding SSE
between the coastal reef and the coast.
2 Landing may be effected on the point of the sandspit
which is steep-to with a depth of 1⋅0 m close off the beach.
The entrance channel to the lagoon leads close S of the
sandspit. The channel is tortuous with least depths of only
0⋅3 m.
Approach
5.169
1 Many years ago an approach to the lagoon was made by
a surveying ship with Gimeida (22°46′N, 35°38′E) (5.161)
bearing 224°.
This led about 9 cables S of a rock, situated about
17 miles NE of Gimeida, over which the sea occasionally
broke.
The reefs charted SE of the track were not sighted
although the light and weather conditions were good.
2 When Gimeida was 13 miles distant, course was altered
to 282° towards a large mangrove that was then situated
about 1 mile SSE of the N entrance point of the lagoon.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 5
This track passed about 7 cables S of the 14⋅3 m patch,
and then between a spit, with a least depth over it of 11 m,
and a detached shoal, with a least depth over it of 14⋅6 m.
All of these shoals are visible under good conditions.
Anchorage
5.170
1 Immediately after passing between the spit and the
detached shoal, and with Gimeida bearing 204°, the survey
ship steered 313° to an anchorage position NE of the
lagoon.
The ship then anchored with the large mangrove, that was
then situated about 1 mile SSE of the N entrance point of
156
the lagoon, bearing 190° distant about 1 miles, in a depth
of 40 m, coral and sand.
Marsa Sha’ab
Description
5.171
1 Marsa Sha’ab (22°50′N, 35°46′E) is an extensive inlet,
which lies about 9 miles SSE of Sharm el Madfa (5.168),
the entrance of which is almost closed by the coastal reef.
Many years ago a survey ship approached the inlet with
Gimeida (22°46′N, 35°38′E) bearing 224°.
See 5.169.
Home Contents Index

NOTES

157
Home Contents Index

¯
Chapter 6 - Red Sea - west side. Ras Abu Fatma to Ras Qassar

36° 37° 38° 39°

Ras Abu Fatma

Ras Hadarba
22° 22°

6.15

ah
dd
Je
Ras Abø Shagrºb
21° 21°
6.271
6
6

3722 Mu5ammad Qol

6.1

3722 Marsa Inkeifal

6.277
3722
6.175

SUDAN
6.1

20° 20°
8

82
63
6.184

6.

3492
Mar
sa G 6.81
wiy Sanganeb Anchorage 82
ai
6.21
3492 Port Sudan
6.26
6.64
3492
Bashayer Oil Terminal Hindi
6.83 Gider 81
6.19
8

Sawºkin 81
6.118
19° 19°
6.2
07

675 Marsa Esh Sheikh IbrºhØm 675

6.307 Masamirit I.

Trinkitat 675
Harbour
6.315

675
¯
Khor
Narawat

18° -
Ras Qassar 18°
6.20

36° Longitude 37° East from Greenwich 38° 39°

0205

158
 Home Contents Index

CHAPTER 6

RED SEA — WEST SIDE — RAS ABU FATMA TO RAS QASSR
INCLUDING THE INNER CHANNEL
GENERAL INFORMATION
Chart 158
Scope of the chapter
6.1
1 The area described in this chapter covers the Red Sea
coast of Sudan from Ras Abu Fatma (22°26′N, 36°25′E) to
Ras Qass
r (18°01′N, 38°35′E), 290 miles SSE. The chapter
also includes descriptions of Port Sudan (19°37′N, 37°14′E)
(6.26) and Saw
kin (19°07′N, 37°20′E) (6.118), and of
Bashayer Oil Terminal (19°24′N, 37°20′E) (6.83).
Description
6.2
1 From Abu Dara (22°40′N, 36°11′E) to Ras Hadarba
(22°04′N, 36°54′E) the coast is mostly bordered by reefs,
rocks and islets some lying up to 15 miles offshore. The
Ruwabîl Islets (22°35′N, 36°21′E) stand on the coastal reef,
about 10 miles ESE of Abu Dara.
2 Between Ras Hadarba and Ras Ab Shagr
b (21°03′N,
37°19′E) the coast is fronted with reefs, some of which
extend over several miles. The outermost of these reefs,
which lie up to 12 miles offshore, have been reported to lie
farther S than charted. Breaks in the coastal reef give access
to the many inlets which are situated along this section of
the coast.
3 The coast between Ras Ab Shagr
b and Juzur Tl
t
(Taila Islets) (20°38′N, 37°14′E), is indented by Dungun
b
Bay (6.266), and is fronted by numerous islets and other
dangers lying up to 16 miles offshore. A number of
dangerous reefs and isolated rocks lie up to 7 miles SE of
Juzur Tl
t (6.168).
6.3
1 From Marsa Salak (20°26′N, 37°10′E) (6.281) to Marsa
Figg
(Fij
b) (25 miles S) (6.291) the coastal reef extends up
to 1 mile offshore; a chain of offshore reefs extends about
19 miles S from a position 3 miles E of Marsa Salak. Several
detached reefs are situated within 2 miles of each side of this
chain. Sha‘ab Su‘
di (20°10′N, 37°15′E) (6.183) forms the S
part of this offshore chain.
2 An area encumbered with reefs and shoals extends for
about 11 miles SSE from a position E of Marsa Figg

(Fij
b); this area has not been surveyed but it appears to be
full of dangers over which the sea breaks. Sha‘ab Rumi
(19°56′N, 37°24′E) (6.186) lies off the E side of this area.
3 From a position E of Marsa Darr (19°50′N, 37°16′E)
(6.298) a chain of small broken reefs extends from the S end
of the unsurveyed area of reefs. Al Tarafaniya al Kabira
(19°46′N, 37°22′E) (6.190) is the S part of this chain of
broken reefs. Silayet (19°40′N, 37°19′E), a further chain of
broken reefs, extends S of Al Tarafaniya al Kabira to a
position about 3 miles E of Port Sudan (6.26).
6.4
1 Towartit Reefs (19°32′N, 37°20′E) (6.65) with their N
end about 6 miles SE of the entrance to Port Sudan lie
between 2 and 10 miles offshore, as far S as Saw
kin
(19°07′N, 37°20′E). The sea breaks over these reefs in a
moderate breeze.
159
2 The outer edge of Towartit Reefs extends about 15 miles
SE to Al Farana (19°21′N, 37°30′E), a shoal over which the
sea seldom breaks, thence 3 miles farther S to Williamson
Shoals (6.143).
Several breaks in the coastal reef in this vicinity afford
shelter to small vessels.
6.5
1 The Saw
kin Group (6.347) of islets, reefs and shoals
fronts the coast from Saw
kin (19°07′N, 37°20′E) to close
NNE of Ras Qass
r (18°01′N, 38°35′E).
Some of the reefs lie up to 45 miles offshore, but the
inner edge of the group, where there are many below-water
rocks and deep channels, generally lies about 10 miles
offshore.
6.6
1 The coast between Trinkitat Harbour (18°41′N, 37°45′E)
and Ras Asis (27 miles SE) is low and barren with salt water
swamps, which, in places, are covered by bushes. There are
a few low sandhills on the coast about 12 miles SE of South
Point (18°41′N, 37°45′E) (6.315).
Between Gazirat Abid (18°09′N, 38°30′E) and Ras Qass
r
(10 miles SE) the coast is low and fringed by a rocky bank,
which, at Ras Qass
 extends about 1 miles offshore.
Anchorages
6.7
1 In most of the anchorages described in this chapter it is
advisable to moor. In many places during strong winds, it
may be prudent to lay out a stream anchor on, or near, the
weather beach.
Weather
6.8
1 Along the E coast of Sudan the prevailing winds are from
the N, but they are affected by land and sea breezes; these
prevailing winds are mostly light and variable with frequent
calms during August and September.
Between August and October the weather is generally
fine; the rainy season extends from November to April.
Flow
6.9
1 Cross currents, setting E or W, are not infrequent and are
observed in all parts of the Red Sea. See 4.5.
Caution
6.10
1 Excessive refraction and mirages are frequent in this part
of the Red Sea causing land, lights and other features to be
visible from much greater distances than would normally be
expected.
Protected areas
6.11
1 The coral reefs surrounding the coast between Marsa
Halaib (22°14′N, 36°39′E) and Râs Banâs (110 miles NNW)
have been declared protected areas. Except in an emergency,
anchoring on protected reefs is prohibited.
See Appendix III for further information.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
COASTAL ROUTE — PASSING NORTH-EAST OF THE SAW KIN GROUP OF ISLANDS
GENERAL INFORMATION
Chart 158
Coastal route
6.12
1 The coastal route described in this section extends SSE
for about 290 miles along the Red Sea coast of Sudan, from
a position about 30 miles ENE of Ras Abu Fatma (22°26′N,
36°25′E) (5.19) to a position about 40 miles ENE of Ras
Qass
r (18°01′N, 38°35′E).
Depths
6.13
1 In 1977 two shoals with depths of 18⋅3 and 33 m were
reported to lie 36 miles SE, and 48 miles SSE, respectively
of Ras Hadarba (22°04′N, 36°54′E).
In the same year further shoal areas, with depths of 49 m,
53 m and 119 m, were also reported to lie within 10 miles of
the 33 m shoal patch. Their positions are best seen on the
chart.
Principal marks
6.14
1 Major lights:
Abington Reef Light (brown metal framework tower
on concrete base) (20°54′N, 37°27′E) visible all
round except where obscured by Jazrat Magarsam
(Mukawwar) (20°48′N, 37°16′E).
Sanganeb Reef Light (round concrete tower on a
masonry base and dwelling, white lantern, 55 m in
height) (19°44′N, 37°27′E).
The remains of a disused light-structure stand close W.
Directions
(continued from 5.19)
Ras Abu Fatma to Abington Reef
6.15
1 From a position about 30 miles ENE of Ras Abu Fatma
(22°26′N, 36°25′E) the track initially leads SSE for about
107 miles to a position about 15 miles ENE of Abington
Reef (20°54′N, 37°27′E), passing:
2 ENE of Gezîret el Dibia (22°24′N, 36°31′E) a small,
low, coral island which lies about 6 miles ESE of
Ras Abu Fatma (5.19) and is bordered by extensive
coral reefs. A dangerous rock lies about 1 miles
off the NE side of these reefs, another drying rock
lies about 3 miles farther E. Thence:
3 ENE of an extensive detached drying reef (22°15′N,
36°48′E) which lies about 9 miles E of Marsa
Halaib (6.224). The sea always breaks over this reef
on which stand a few drying boulders. The reef can
be seen from a distance of several miles. Thence:
4 ENE of Ras Qubbat ‘Isa (22°10′N, 36°46′E) which
lies about 7 miles SE of Marsa Halaib. Dangerous
reefs lie about 4 miles ESE and 7 miles SE of the
point.
ENE of Ras Hadarba (22°04′N, 36°54′E) (4.15),
thence:
6.16
1 From Elba Reef to Abington Reef, passing:
ENE of Elba Reef (22°00′N, 37°01′E), which lies
about 8 miles ESE of Ras Hadarba, over which
there are dangerous below-water rocks. A
conspicuous wreck lies on the N end of the reef. A
dangerous rock is situated at the SE end of the
160
passage which extends between Elba Reef and a
further extensive reef which lies closer inshore,
thence:
2 ENE of the isolated and dangerous off-lying reefs
(21°40′N, 37°08′E) that lie about 15 miles SE of
Marsa Gwilaib (6.240). These reefs are reported to
lie farther S than charted. See 6.13. Thence:
ENE of Sha‘ab Halaka (21°27′N, 37°05′E) a reef over
which the sea generally breaks. Dangerous rocks lie
on and NW of the reef, thence:
3 ENE of Sha‘ab Qumeira (21°15′N, 37°12′E) a reef on
which lie dangerous rocks. A conspicuous
above-water rock stands on the NW side of the reef.
A wreck lies on the same side. There is a narrow
passage between Sha‘ab Qumeira and the mainland
which is marked by beacons, thence:
4 ENE of Ras Ab Shagr
b (21°03′N, 37°19′E) a low
and sandy point, which forms the SE extremity of
Ras Ab Shagr
b Peninsula; two dangerous rocks
lie about 2 miles ENE of the point. From some
distance NE of the point the S part of Ras Ab
Shagr
b Peninsula appears like an island, but the
absence of outlying islets should prevent it from
being mistaken for Jazrat Magarsam (20°48′N,
37°16′E) (6.167) which lies 11 miles farther S.
Thence:
5 ENE of Abington Reef (20°54′N, 37°27′E) an
above-water coral reef which lies about 12 miles
SE of Ras Ab Shagr
b. Abington Reef Light
(6.14) is exhibited from the reef. Angarosh, a sandy
islet, stands on a reef about 2 miles SSW of
Abington Reef; a dangerous reef lies a farther
1 miles SW.
6.17
1 Landmarks:
Gebel Gash Amir (22°15′N, 36°12′E) rises abruptly
from the sandy coastal plain and is a mass of sharp
granite spikes. From about 8 miles E of Gebel Gash
Amir, a range of granite mountains extends 30 miles
SSE, parallel to the coast. These mountains rise to a
considerable elevation from the coastal plain and, in
clear weather, are visible from great distances. They
are often obscured by mist, the moisture of which
produces luxuriant vegetation close up to their
summits.
2 Jebel ‘Elba (22°10′N, 36°22′E) is the N-most summit
of this range of granite mountains and is a mass of
light-coloured granite peaks with rugged hills of
darker rocks on its S and W sides.
Jebel Shendidai (22°03′N, 36°25′E) is also part of this
range of granite mountains and has a prominent
summit.
3 Jebel Asoteriba (21°52′N, 36°31′E), is part of the
range of granite mountains; it has a greenish
appearance on account of the vegetation growing
near its summit.
Abington Reef to Ras Qass r
6.18
1 From a position about 15 miles ENE of Abington Reef
(20°54′N, 37°27′E) the track continues SSE for about
185 miles to a position about 40 miles ENE of Ras Qass
r
(18°01′N, 38°35′E), passing:
ENE of Qita el Bann
(20°42′N, 37°23′E) a detached,
drying, steep-to reef, thence:
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
2 ENE of Sanganeb Reef (19°44′N, 37°27′E) (6.21) a
steep-to atoll with an opening on its W side; the
reef is about 3 miles in length and the sea generally
breaks over it. Sanganeb Reef Light (6.14) is
exhibited from the S extremity of the atoll; beacons
mark its N and NW edges. Thence:
3 ENE of Hindi Gidir (19°23′N, 37°55′E) (Hind Kadam)
the N-most islet of the Saw
kin Group (6.347). The
islet is covered with bushes and bordered by a
steep-to reef which extends up to 1 cable offshore.
Hindi Gidir Light (red metal framework tower) is
exhibited from the middle of the islet; caution
should be exercised if approaching the islet in poor
visibility in the event the light should be exhibited
at low power. A beacon (white masonry pyramid)
stands on the reef. Peshwa (6.65), a coral reef, lies
about 5 miles E of Hindi Gidir, thence:
4 ENE of Owen Reef (19°22′N, 38°03′E) which is only
visible under good conditions. King Shoal, over
which the sea seldom breaks, lies about 5 miles
WSW of Owen Reef; this shoal is also only visible
under good conditions. A dangerous rock (position
doubtful) lies about 2 miles WSW of King Shoal.
Brisbane Reef, over which the sea breaks in a
moderate swell, lies about 1 miles farther SSE of
King Shoal and is usually visible. Thence:
6.19
1 From Barr
Ms
Kebir to Ed Domesh Shesh, passing:
ENE of Barr
Ms
Kebir (19°13′N, 38°11′E) which
lies on the NE edge of the Saw
kin Group. The
islet is steep-to, composed of sand and coral, and on
which grow a few bushes. A dangerous rock lies
about 3 miles NW of the islet. Thence:
2 ENE of Barr
Ms
Saqir (19°03′N, 38°12′E) a
steep-to coral and sand islet. Tamarshira (6.351) lies
about 9 miles SSE. Thence:
ENE of Dibsel (Hindi Seil) (18°54′N, 38°36′E) a low
coral islet fringed by a reef; two dangerous rocks lie
about 2 miles and 6 miles, respectively, NW of the
islet. A wreck lies on the NW side of the islet.
Thence:
3 ENE of Masamirit (18°50′N, 38°45′E) (4.15) from the
E side of which Masamirit Light is exhibited,
thence:
ENE of Karam Masamirit (18°48′N, 38°46′E) (4.15).
No attempt should be made to pass between
Masamirit and Karam Masamirit. Thence:
4 ENE of Ed Domesh Shesh (Dmesh Sheikh) (18°37′N,
38°50′E) the E-most island of the Saw
kin Group.
The island is low, thinly covered with bush, and
fringed by a reef which extends about 5 cables W
from it. A number of years ago a shoal (position
doubtful) with a dangerous rock near its W edge,
was reported to lie about 7 miles W of the islet,
thence:
6.20
1 From Dahrat Ed Dak Hillat to Ras Qass
 passing:
ENE of Dahrat Ed Dak Hillat (Dahrat Ed Dakhla)
(18°33′N, 38°48′E) which is bordered by a reef. A
detached, and apparently steep-to, coral reef, on
which there is a dangerous rock, lies about 1 miles
ENE. The sea occasionally breaks over this
detached reef. A further detached reef, on which
stands a dangerous rock, lies about 2 miles NNE.
Thence:
2 ENE of Qab Miyum (Ghab Miyn) (18°30′N,
38°50′E), an islet fringed by a reef; a dangerous
161
reef lies about 1 mile E of the islet. Miyum is a
further islet, fringed by a reef, which lies about
2 miles WSW of Qab Miyum, thence:
ENE of Safna Shoal (18°25′N, 38°48′E), a dangerous
shoal; a further shoal lies about 1 miles WSW,
thence:
3 ENE of Dahrat ‘Abid (18°22′N, 38°46′E), the S-most
island of the Saw
kin Group (6.347), the island is
low, composed of sand and coral, and uninhabited.
A number of years ago it was reported that a reef
extended about 5 cables E from the E extremity of
the island. A drying rock lies about 5 cables NNE,
and an above-water wreck lies about 1 mile N of
the island, thence:
4 ENE of Ras Qass
r (18°01′N, 38°35′E), a low point,
covered with sparse vegetation, which is not easily
identified from a distance; from a position some
distance N of the point the coast is covered with
bushes. The international boundary between Sudan
and Eritrea reaches the coast in the vicinity of the
point.
(Directions continue at 7.11)
Anchorages
Chart 82 and plan of Sanganeb Anchorage
Sanganeb Reef
6.21
1 General information. Sanganeb Reef (19°44′N, 37°27′E)
which is situated about 5 miles E of Al Tarafaniya al Kabira
(6.190), is a steep-to atoll with an opening in its W side; the
reef is about 3 miles long and the sea generally breaks over
it.
2 A beacon (framework tower, disc topmark, 7 m in height)
stands on the N end of the reef; a further beacon (concrete
base, red T-shaped topmark, 4 m in height) stands on the
NW corner of the reef. Sanganeb Reef Light (6.14) is
exhibited from the S extremity of the reef.
3 An opening in the W side of the reef, which is about
360 m wide, is situated about 8 cables N of Sanganeb Reef
Light and leads through to a lagoon. A beacon (concrete,
triangular topmark, apex up) stands close to the N end of the
reef situated on the S side of the entrance.
6.22
1 Directions. From a position about 2 miles WNW of
Sanganeb Reef Light, course should be shaped E towards the
entrance.
2 Leading beacons:
Front beacon (concrete, black disc topmark)
(19°44′⋅1N, 37°26′⋅9E) standing on the E side of
the reef.
Rear beacon (similar construction) (220 m from front
beacon).
3 The alignment (107°) of these beacons leads to the central
part of the entrance, with a least reported depth of 14 m,
passing:
NNE of a beacon, which shows up clearly, marking
the N end of the reef lying on the S side of the
entrance; and:
SSW of a coral patch (position approximate), with a
least depth of 3 m over it, situated about 2 cables N
of the S entrance beacon.
Anchorage
6.23
1 Anchorage may be obtained, as shown on the chart, in
the middle of the lagoon in depths from 27 to 46 m, white
clay and mud.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
Anchorage may also be obtained by small vessels in the
middle of the inner lagoon which is separated from the outer
lagoon by a reef. This inner lagoon is entered from the outer
lagoon through a channel, in which there is a least depth of
6⋅4 m and which is marked by small beacons. Local
knowledge is required for the use of this inner anchorage.
Flow
6.24
1 North and W-going currents may be experienced near
Sanganeb Reef throughout the year but especially during the
summer; the current sometimes sets in the opposite direction
but this occurs mainly during the winter.
Off-lying dangers
6.25
1 The coastal reef in the vicinity of the entrance to Marsa
Gwiyai (19°40′N, 37°15′E) (6.81) has a number of off-lying
dangers.
Several rocky heads and dangerous rocks lie between
2 and 3 cables E of the coastal reef and this whole area
should be given a good berth.
PORT SUDAN
General information
Charts 82, 3492, 158
Position
6.26
1 Port Sudan (19°37′N, 37°14′E) is situated on the central
part of the W side of the Red Sea.
Description
6.27
1 Port Sudan, which is divided into East Town, West Town
and South Town, is situated on both sides of an inlet which
extends NW forming an excellent, deep and sheltered natural
harbour.
For the most part the inlet is bordered by visible reefs;
the fairway is free from dangers.
2 A short arm, which is entered about 7 cables within the
entrance to the port, extends SW and terminates in a mud
flat which floods on occasions.
A causeway, carrying a railway, crosses the inlet about
2 miles within the entrance to the port.
Function
6.28
1 Port Sudan, also known as Shaikh Barghth, is the
principal port of the Republic of Sudan and the main
administrative centre of the Port of Sudan and Saw
kin
Districts.
In 1993 the population of Port Sudan was 305 385.
6.29
1 Trade. The main exports are ginned cotton, cotton seeds,
gum, sesame, senna, skins and hides, oil cakes, oil seed and
beeswax.
The principal imports are sugar, timber, crude oil,
gunnies, cotton goods, coffee, iron, hardware, hessian, flour,
tea and provisions.
Topography
6.30
1 Between Marsa Gwiyai (19°40′N, 37°15′E) and the
entrance to Port Sudan (3 miles S) the coast is fringed by a
reef which extends 7 cables offshore.
162
The land in the vicinity of Port Sudan, and N towards
Marsa Darr (14 miles N) (6.298) is a plain, with a few
elevations, and is mainly barren. Shrubs and other vegetation
are scanty; a few clumps of mimosa bushes grow on the
plain. The land rises gradually to the foothills of the
mountains which lie farther inland.
Port limits
6.31
1 The harbour limits are bounded by lines drawn from
Nimra Talata Light (19°39′N, 37°19′E) NW to the coast, and
SSE from the light to Towartit Reefs (6.65), as shown on the
charts. The limits include the NW corner of Towartit Reefs
and extend across the Inner Channel (6.156) to a position on
the coast, about 2 miles S of Towartit Elbow (19°29′N,
37°18′E), S of Port Sudan.
The harbour limits also include Marsa Gwiyai (6.81).
Approach and entry
6.32
1 The port is approached from seaward passing SSE of
Sanganeb Reef then SSE of Silayet, and entered on the
alignment of lights.
Traffic
6.33
1 In 2001 the port was visited by a total of 430 vessels.
Port Authority
6.34
1 Port Authority of Sudan, Sea Ports Corporation, PO Box
531, Port Sudan, Sudan. The port office is situated at the N
end of Main Quay.
Limiting conditions
Controlling depth
6.35
1 The entrance channel has depths of over 30 m. The least
charted depth on the leading line in the approaches to the
berths is 22 m. Less water has been reported (2003) in the
entrance.
Deepest and longest berths
6.36
1 Berths Nos 17 and 18 (6.73).
Tidal levels
6.37
1 The tidal range at Port Sudan is barely perceptible, being
only about 0⋅1 m.
There is a seasonal variation of about 0⋅9 m in the water
level due to the seasonal change in barometric pressure.
Density of water
6.38
1 Density 1⋅025 g/cm3.
Maximum size of vessel handled
6.39
1 It is reported that the port can handle vessels of up to
277 m in length and 11⋅3 m draught.
Local weather
6.40
1 Between October and June the prevailing winds are from
the N and NE and generally allow for safe anchorage and
boat work in the harbour.
During the rainy season, which extends from October to
January, short sharp rain squalls are accompanied by winds
which are seldom of sufficient strength to cause problems.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
2 Between July and September, haboobs, blowing from the
SE through W, occur without warning, those from the W
carrying sand. Visibility can decrease to less than 45 m
because of the dust and blowing sand and the temperature
may rise as high as 52°C. These squalls are usually of about
30 minutes duration.
6.41
1 Caution. At the season when haboobs can occur it is not
advisable for vessels to be lying to their anchors within the
harbour; they should be alongside or moored to buoys. Any
vessel which has to be moored stern-on should have a good
scope of cable ahead on both anchors and be well secured
aft.
2 Climatic table. See 1.275 and 1.280.
Arrival information
Port operations
6.42
1 All movements within the harbour are strictly controlled,
and masters of vessels should obtain permission from Port
Control on VHF before commencing any movement. For
further information, see Admiralty List of Radio Signals,
Volume 6 (3).
Cargo is not worked from ships at anchor in the harbour
during July and August; see 6.40.
Port radio
6.43
1 Vessels approaching Port Sudan, before they are within
2 miles of the port, should maintain a listening watch on
VHF to enable them to receive any instructions from Port
Control and to request the services of a pilot.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Notice of ETA
6.44
1 Vessels should notify their ETA 24 hours in advance of
their arrival.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Outer anchorages
6.45
1 When the port is full vessels may be directed to proceed
to the anchorage in Towartit Reefs (6.61), during the hours
of daylight only.
In 1990 it was reported that vessels may be directed to an
alternative anchorage N of Silayet (6.191).
Towartit Reefs Anchorage
6.46
1 Towartit Reefs Anchorage is situated about 8 miles SE of
Port Sudan, between 1 mile and 2 miles S of Towartit
Reefs North Beacon (19°31′⋅7N, 37°19′⋅6E). Anchorage is
obtainable SSE of the 22 m shoal (reported 1971) which lies
about 7 cables SSW of No 6 Beacon (19°30′⋅8N, 37°19′⋅9E)
in various depths up to 75 m, over an uneven bottom of
shells and mud.
The area of the anchorage contains a number of detached
coral reefs and below-water rocks, mostly marked by
light-beacons or beacons; the area E of No 5 Beacon has not
been examined.
6.47
1 Description. A detached reef, about 7 cables SSE of
Towartit North Beacon, is marked at its N end by No 1
163
Beacon (red triangular topmark, apex down); in its middle
part by No 5 Beacon (red square topmark), and about 1 cable
NNE of its S end by No 6 Beacon (red triangular topmark,
apex up). A chain of shoal heads and small reefs extends
about 4 cables N from close W of the N end of this reef.
2 Towartit Reefs Anchorage North Light-beacon (6.109)
stands on a detached reef about 1 miles SSW of Towartit
North Beacon. Detached reefs and a small area of foul
ground lie about 3 cables N of this light-beacon.
No 2 Beacon (black ball topmark) stands on a small
detached reef about 1
miles SSE of Towartit North Beacon;
a rock awash lies about 1 cables W of the beacon.
3 Towartit Reefs Anchorage East Light-beacon (metal
framework tower standing on a red concrete base with white
bands, 8 m in height) (19°29′⋅9N, 37°20′⋅2E) stands on a
small detached reef, situated on the E side of the anchorage,
just under 2 miles SSE of Towartit North Beacon.
6.48
1 No 7 Beacon (black triangular topmark, apex up) marks
an area of foul ground which lies about 2 miles SE of
Towartit North Beacon; a number of years ago this beacon
was reported as missing. No 3 Beacon (black ball topmark)
stands about 5 cables farther SSE on a narrow reef.
2 Towartit Reefs Anchorage South Light-beacon (black
metal framework tower on a black concrete base with white
stripes, 8 m in height) (19°28′⋅9N, 37°19′⋅7E) stands on a
detached coral reef about 2
miles S of Towartit North
Beacon. No 8 Beacon (black triangular topmark, apex down)
marks the S end of this reef; a rock awash lies 6 cables NE
of the beacon. The area E of this reef is encumbered with
shoal patches and has not been examined.
3 A conspicuous hut on pillars stands on the reef between
the light-beacon and the beacon. A wreck, with a mast
visible, lies on the SW side of the anchorage, about 7 cables
N of the light-beacon.
Prohibited anchorage
6.49
1 An area in which anchorage is prohibited lies between the
SW side of Silayet (6.191) and Marsa Gwiyai (6.81) as
shown on the chart.
Pilotage
6.50
1 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels.
Pilotage is available 24 hours for vessels up to 198 m
LOA; for vessels over this length pilotage is available during
daylight only.
The pilot boards about 1 mile ESE of Port Sudan N side
entrance light (19°36′⋅3N, 37°14′⋅3E) (6.66) as shown on the
chart.
2 The pilot lookout and traffic signal station, a white
wooden framework tower, stands at the NE end of a
causeway extending about 200 m from the SW shore of the
entrance to the port.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
6.51
1 Vessels approaching Port Sudan at night, and not wishing
to enter the harbour until daybreak, should not close the
coast within 20 miles until it is time to proceed at their
normal speed to arrive at the pilot boarding position at the
arranged time.
Tugs
6.52
1 Tugs of 2000 hp are available.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
Regulations concerning entry
6.53
1 A copy of the Port Sudan harbour regulations should be
obtained.
The berthing of vessels is regulated by the Port Manager
who also regulates the discharge, loading and storage of
explosives.
Vessels leaving the port have right of way over those
entering.
2 In any part of the harbour or entrance, tugs, with or
without tows, shall at all times keep clear of vessels of deep
draught.
Vessels carrying petroleum, on approaching Port Sudan
and during their period of stay in the port, should display a
red flag by day, and, at night, a red light at the masthead.
Further special regulations are in force and a copy of these
should be obtained.
3 During a vessels stay the main engines should not
immobilised without the permission of the Port Manager.
Vessels over 15 years old are required to produce a
Seaworthy Certificate which must include a statement that
cargo handling equipment is capable of handling all the
cargo aboard.
Flow
6.54
1 Observations made a number of years ago indicated that
the current off Port Sudan is S-going but not of any great
strength.
Harbour
General layout
6.55
1 The Main Quay extends about 800 m NW from the inner
end of the entrance breakwater.
On the E side of the harbour, from the N end of Main
Quay, the berths extend for a further 360 m N forming Nos
6 and 7 berths and a small passenger jetty; it then continues
NW with berths Nos 8, 9 and 11.
2 On the S side of the harbour No 15 Berth lies just within
the W side of the entrance, with No 16 Berth situated close
W.
Berths Nos 17 and 18 lie W of 16 Berth; bunkering and
Ro-Ro berths are situated between these two quays.
An explosives jetty lies about 100 m SW of the W corner
of No 18 Berth.
Development
6.56
1 The Green Port Development is a group of new berths
that is being constructed (2004) to the E of East Town.
There will be five berths handling bulk cargoes.
Caution. Mariners are warned that there are also changes
to the position of the coastline, new port developments, new
jetties, new wrecks, new coral patches, rocks and
obstructions and a new chart is in preparation reflecting these
changes. The port authorities should be contacted for the
latest information.
Measured distance
6.57
1 A measured distance of 926⋅6 m (3040 ft), as shown on
the chart, is situated just within the harbour entrance.
Each end of the measured distance is marked by the
alignment of a pair of beacons (triangular topmarks).
164
Traffic signals
6.58
1 Signals to indicate the port is busy and movements are
taking place within the harbour are shown from the traffic
signal station (6.50).
When the following signals are shown vessels should not
approach to within 1 mile of the entrance to the port.
Day A ball.
Night Red light over a green light.
Flow
6.59
1 The set of currents in the Red Sea is extremely variable
and is affected by several factors.
The rate of these currents increases rapidly in the vicinity
of the off-lying reefs that surround the approaches to Port
Sudan, such that they should be given a wide berth.
Submarine cables
6.60
1 An submarine power cable, marked at each end by notice
boards on the shore, is laid across the entrance of the
harbour from close E of the end of No 15 Berth to a position
close NW of the light exhibited from the S end of Main
Quay.
6.61
1 An area of disused cables, as shown on the chart, lies in
the entrance to the harbour, S of the power cable.
Principal marks
6.62
1 Landmark:
Grain silo (19°36′⋅3N, 37°13′⋅7E), marked by red
obstruction lights.
2 Major light:
Sanganeb Reef Light (19°44′N, 37°27′E) (6.14).
Directions for entering harbour
Approach from north
6.63
1 From a position on the coastal route, NE of Sanganeb
Reef, the N approach track leads initially SW then WSW,
passing:
SSE of Sanganeb Reef (19°44′N, 37°27′E) (6.21). The
best time to make the reef is just before dawn as the
lighthouse is difficult to pick up with the afternoon
sun behind it and no land marks are visible at
times. Thence:
2 SSE of Nimra Talata Light (black and white chequered
concrete tower, 7 m in height) (19°38′⋅6N,
37°19′⋅4E) exhibited from a position close to the E
extremity of Silayet (6.191), thence:
SSE of Silayet South End Light (black metal
framework tower, white hut standing on piles on a
round concrete base) (19°37′⋅0N, 37°17′⋅2E) which
is exhibited from the SW extremity of Silayet,
thence:
3 To the pilot boarding position.
Approach from south
6.64
1 From a position on the coastal route, ENE of Dibsel, the
S approach track leads initially WNW then W, passing:
NNE of Dibsel (Hindi Seil) (18°54′N, 38°36′E) (6.19),
thence:
NNE of Barr
Ms
Saqir (19°03′N, 38°12′E) (6.19),
thence:
NE of Barr
Ms
Kebir (19°13′N, 38°11′E) (6.19),
thence:
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
2 NNE of Protector Reef (19°15′N, 38°02′E), which
together with a dangerous rock situated about
7 cables NW of its N end, are the NE-most dangers
of a group of reefs. In 1983 a conspicuous stranded
wreck was reported to be lying on the W edge of
Protector Reef. Sha‘ab Qub, a coral reef, lies
3 miles WNW of Protector Reef.
3 Penzance Reef, another coral reef lies 3 miles S of
Sha‘ab Qub. Burkt Islet, which lies 4 miles SSW
of Protector Reef, is low, composed of sand and
coral, with a fringing coral reef extending about
4 cables from its shores. Preserver Reef lies about
2 miles SW of Protector Reef. Sha‘ab Burkt, a
dangerous rock, lies between them. Thence:
6.65
1 From Owen Reef to the pilot boarding position, passing:
ENE of Owen Reef (19°22′N, 38°03′E) (6.18), thence:
NNE of Peshwa (19°22′N, 38°00′E), a coral reef over
which the sea generally breaks. A dangerous rock
(position doubtful) is reported to lie between
Peshwa and Hindi Gidir. Thence:
NNE of Hindi Gidir (19°23′N, 37°55′E) (6.18), thence:
2 N of Sha‘ab Jibna (19°27′N, 37°44′E), a steep-to coral
reef over which the sea breaks, which forms the
N-most danger of the Saw
kin Group (6.347). The
reef is awash and in calm weather a few coral heads
show above water. Sha‘ab Jibna Light is exhibited
from the SW side of the reef, thence:
3 N of the N end of Towartit Reefs (19°32′N, 37°20′E).
The N part of Towartit Reefs is marked by Towartit
North Beacon (white pyramidal masonry base, red
staff, red can topmark, 9 m in height). No 4 Beacon
marks the E side of North Towartit Reefs. A
conspicuous stranded wreck lies on the reef, about
1 miles ESE of No 4 Beacon. The wreck has the
appearance of a ship at anchor with its bows
pointing NW towards Port Sudan; it gives a good
radar return. Two other wrecks, which also give
good radar returns, stand on the reef about 3 and
9 cables ESE of Towartit North Beacon, thence:
4 N of the wreck lying on the coastal reef about
3 miles SSE of Port Sudan Light. It was reported
that the wreck has the appearance of a vessel at
anchor and provides a good radar return. Thence:
S of Silayet South End Light (19°37′⋅0N, 37°17′⋅2E)
(6.63), thence:
To the pilot boarding position off Port Sudan.
(Directions for Bashayer Terminal continue at 6.109)
Entry
6.66
1 From the vicinity of the pilot boarding position, as shown
on the chart, the track leads initially W.
Port Sudan Leading Lights:
Front light (red metal framework tower, neon U-shaped
mark, 34 m in height) (19°36′⋅7N, 37°13′⋅4E).
2 Rear light (red metal framework tower, white band,
neon U-shaped mark, 48 m in height) (927 m from
front light). Three radio masts stand in the centre of
West Town about 3 cables E of the rear leading
light.
3 The alignment (305°) of these leading lights leads to the
central part of the entrance, passing:
NE of a wreck lying on the edge of the coastal reef
about 1
miles SSE of Port Sudan Light, thence:
165
NE of red obstruction lights exhibited from a tall
chimney standing at an oil refinery about 2 miles
SSW of the Port Sudan Light. A flare at this
installation was reported visible at a distance of
30 miles. Thence:
4 NE of Port Sudan Light (stone tower, white band,
22 m in height) (19°35′⋅3N, 37°14′⋅9E) exhibited
from a position close to the edge of the coastal reef
and about 1 miles SE of the harbour entrance,
thence:
NE of Damma Damma Light (19°35′⋅8N, 37°14′⋅6E)
(red and white chequered metal framework tower,
concrete base), exhibited from a position close to
the edge of the coastal reef, about 5 cables SE of
the harbour entrance, thence:
SW of the light (metal column, 9 m in height)
(19°36′⋅3N, 37°14′⋅3E) exhibited from the E end of
the breakwater on the N side of the entrance
channel, thence:
6.67
1 NE of the pilot lookout and traffic signal station (white
wooden framework tower; about 14 m in height)
(19°36′⋅2N, 37°14′⋅0E) which stands at the NE end
of a causeway extending about 200 m from the SW
shore of the entrance to the port. A light (brown
and white striped tower) is exhibited from the outer
end of the causeway. Thence:
2 SW of the light (green concrete column, white bands,
7 m in height) (19°36′⋅3N, 37°14′⋅1E) which is
exhibited from the S end of Main Quay, thence:
NE of the light (metal framework tower) (19°36′⋅3N,
37°13′⋅8E) which is exhibited from the E end of
Berth 15; a further light is exhibited from a concrete
structure at the E end of Berth 17, thence:
Into Port Sudan Harbour.
6.68
1 Caution. Care should be taken not to confuse the
entrance leading lights with the leading lights (6.69) used for
anchoring within the harbour.
2 Useful marks:
Tank farm stands within South Town close SW of the
harbour entrance.
Two water towers stand close together in East Town,
about 1 cables E of No 6 Berth; a light is
occasionally exhibited.
Berths
Anchorage
6.69
1 Anchorage may be obtained inside the harbour, as shown
on the chart, about 5 cables within the entrance in a depth of
25 m, soft coral and mud.
Leading lights:
Front light (occasional) (19°36′⋅7N, 37°13′⋅6E).
Rear light (occasional) (198 m from front).
The alignment (314°) of these lights leads to the
anchorage berth.
Lights exhibited from the Port Offices near Main Quay in
East Town are also used to assist in anchoring.
Mooring buoys are laid in the N end of the harbour.
6.70
1 Caution. From June to September, vessels not securely
berthed alongside should always keep their main engines at
short notice of readiness. See 6.40.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6

Mooring berths Communications, whether via air or rail may be unreliable

6.71 due to possible fuel shortages.
1 Steel dolphins and mooring posts are situated on the NW
shore of the harbour to which the sterns of vessels may be Marsa Gwiyai
secured after anchoring.
General information
Alongside berths 6.81
1 Description. Marsa Gwiyai (19°40′N, 37°15′E) is an inlet
6.72
within the limits of the Port of Sudan, which extends just
1 East Town. There are six berths on Main Quay with
over 1 mile WNW to a naval base.
depths from 8⋅5 to 9⋅4 m alongside; farther N are another
The inlet is entered about 3 miles N of the entrance to
five berths, the largest of which is 183 m in length and has a
Port Sudan through a gap in the coastal reef, about 1 cable
depth of 10⋅7 m alongside.
wide, which is marked by beacons.
6.73
2 The entrance channel narrows to about 90 m wide
1 South Town. There are four berths of which the largest,
between shallow banks which lie 5 cables within its entrance,
Nos 17 and 18, have a combined length of 420 m. These
SSW of the extremity of a flat sandy peninsula.
berths were reported dredged to a depth of 12⋅0 m (2002).
3 Naval base. A naval base is established on the W side of
6.74
the head of the inlet. There is a slip at the naval base.
1 North West Quay is situated on the W side of the
harbour opposite No 11 Berth. Marsa Falamingu
The berth has a depth of 1⋅8 m alongside its S end; a 6.82
section of the quay at its N end, marked by light-beacon (red 1 Marsa Falamingu (19°41′N, 37°15′E) is a small bay
and white metal framework tower) (19°37′⋅2N, 37°13′⋅5E) entered through a narrow channel from the head of Marsa
and a pair of beacons has a depth alongside of 4⋅9 m and is Gwiyai.
used solely by harbour craft. The bay is encumbered with reefs and is only suitable for
Further light-beacons are exhibited from the W side of the use by boats.
harbour N of North West Quay.
6.75
1 Minor berths. A small bunkering jetty is situated close BASHAYER OIL TERMINAL
SSE of No 17 Berth; a light (concrete structure, 5 m in
height) is exhibited between the corner of No 17 Berth and General information
the bunkering jetty. Charts 82, 3492
A number of jetties, numbered 1 to 5 and 7, extend E Position
into the harbour from West Town, from N of North West 6.83
Quay to a position close SW of the front of the anchorage 1 Bashayer Oil Terminal (19°24′N, 37°20′E) is situated on
leading lights. the W side of the central part of the Red Sea between Port
Sudan and Saw
kin.
Dama Dama Oil Terminal
6.76 Function
1 Dama Dama Oil Terminal (19°35′N, 37°15′E) is an oil 6.84
jetty situated 3 cables S of Port Sudan Light (6.66). There is 1 The terminal is an export loading facility for crude oil
a dredged basin off the jetty. cargoes.
Approach and entry
Port services 6.85
1 The terminal berth is approached from N of Towartit
Repairs Reefs, thence through that part of the Inner Channel which
6.77 leads between Port Sudan and Saw
kin and lies W of
1 Minor hull and engine repairs can be undertaken; there Towartit Reefs.
are four slipways the largest of which can accommodate
vessels of up to 600 tonnes displacement. Traffic
6.86
Other facilities 1 In 2003 the terminal was visited by a total of 59 vessels.
6.78
1 Hospital; deratting can be carried out and exemption Port Authority
certificates issued. 6.87
1 Greater Nile Petroleum Operation Co. Ltd. (GNPOC),
Supplies P.O. Box 479, Khartoum North, Palace Hotel, Sudan.
6.79
1 Fuel oil and marine diesel are available by barge and also Limiting conditions
at Nos 16, 17 and 18 Berths; fresh water is available from Controlling depth
the quays and by barge (200 tonnes capacity); fresh 6.88
provisions are available but may become scarce during the 1 A least depth of 50 m lies towards the E side of the
summer. fairway, about 5 cables WNW of South Towartit No 4
Light-beacon (19°28′N, 37°20′E).
Communications
6.80 Deepest and longest berth
1 Port Sudan airport, situated 10 miles from the town, has 6.89
international flights. 1 See 6.105.

166
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6

Tidal levels For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio

6.90
1 See information in Admiralty Tide Tables, Volume 3. The
tide is usually diurnal; mean spring range about 1⋅4 m.
Maximum size of vessels handled
6.91
1 Vessels of up to 300 000 dwt can be accepted at the berth;
40 000 dwt is the minimum size of vessel handled.
Natural conditions
6.92
1 Currents in the area set predominantly S, running parallel
to the coast; they rarely exceed 1 kn.
6.93
1 Winds. The prevailing winds are from N, gusting up to
35 kn in winter; otherwise they tend to be light to moderate,
variable. In the absence of N winds, there is a tendency for
the winds to veer towards the shore in the middle of the
morning.
In summer, the strongest winds are normally offshore and
can gust up to 60 kn.
Arrival information
Port operations
6.94
1 Mooring is permitted only during the hours of daylight;
Unmooring may be undertaken at night at the Mooring
Masters discretion.
Apart from the mooring restrictions the terminal operates
24 hours a day throughout the year, weather conditions
permitting.
6.95
1 Arrival draught and trim. Tankers should arrive with
sufficient ballast or cargo on board to ensure safe
manoeuvring and to be trimmed no more than 3 m by the
stern, with the propeller immersed. Vessels arriving with
excess trim will not be berthed.
6.96
1 Caution. No vessel in excess of 20 years of age from its
date of delivery will be accepted for loading at the terminal.
Port radio
6.97
1 Marsa Bashayer Terminal may be contacted on VHF; for
further information, see Admiralty List of Radio Signals,
Volume 6 (3).
Anchorage
6.98
1 There is no suitable anchorage in this area for the size of
vessels using the terminal.
Pilotage
6.99
1 Pilotage is provided by the Port Sudan Sea Pilots who
board in the position shown on the chart. Pilotage is
compulsory.
6.100
1 Pilot boards in position 19°35′⋅5N, 37°16′⋅0E.
6.101
1 A Mooring Master, Loading Master, three divers and a
Cargo Surveyor will board an arriving tanker about 3 miles
N of the berthing facility; they will remain on board
throughout the vessels stay.
Berthing at the terminal mooring buoy is carried out with
the advice of the Terminal Mooring Master.
See also 6.51.
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Tugs
6.102
1 Tugs are available.
Restricted area
6.103
1 A restricted area, in which navigation without a pilot
embarked is prohibited, extends for a radius of 1 mile around
the SPM facility.
Regulations
6.104
1 Main engines, and other essential machinery, must be held
at sufficient state of readiness to allow for immediate
departure from the berth.
Berth
General layout
6.105
1 The Single Point Mooring berth at Bashayer Oil Terminal
is of the Catenary Anchor Leg Mooring (CALM) type. A
light is exhibited from the mooring buoy. There is a depth
of 57 m at the berth.
For further information, see The Mariner’s Handbook.
Submarine pipeline
6.106
1 A submarine oil pipeline extends W from the berth to
land ashore in Marsa ain Harees (19°24′N, 37°18′E).
Major light
6.107
1 Sanganeb Reef Light (19°44′N, 37°27′E) (6.14).
Racon
6.108
1 A racon transmits from the terminal buoy.
Directions for entering harbour
(continued from 6.65)
Approach
6.109
1 Caution. The beacons between Port Sudan (6.26) and
Saw
kin (6.118) may be unlit and are liable to be washed
away.
2 Track. From the pilot boarding position, about 5 miles
NW of the N end of Towartit Reefs (6.65), the track leads
SSE for about 12 miles, passing (with positions given from
Towartit North Beacon (19°32′N, 37°20′E)):
3 WNW of Towartit Reefs North Beacon (6.46), thence:
W of Towartit Reefs Anchorage North Light-beacon
(white metal framework tower with black bands
standing on a black and white concrete base, 8 m in
height) (1 miles SSW) which marks a detached
reef situated in an area of foul ground, thence:
4 E of Towartit Reefs Elbow Light-beacon (red metal
framework tower on red and white chequered
concrete base) (3 miles SW) which is exhibited from
a position on the coastal reef about 5 cables NNW
of Towartit Elbow, thence:
6.110
1 W of Towartit Reefs Anchorage South Light-beacon
(2
miles S) (6.48) which is exhibited from a
detached coral reef at the S end of Towartit Reefs
Anchorage. No 8 Beacon (black triangular topmark

167
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
apex down) marks the S end of this reef. The area
E of this reef is encumbered with shoal patches and
has not been examined. A conspicuous hut on
pillars stands on the reef between the light-beacon
and the beacon. A wreck with a mast visible lies on
the SW side of the anchorage about 7 cables N of
the light-beacon on the reef. Thence:
2 W of Towartit Reefs No 4 Light-beacon (red
framework tower on red concrete base) (3
miles S)
(position approximate) which marks the N end of a
detached reef on the W side of Towartit Reefs,
passing a shoal with a depth of 50 m over it,
situated on the E side of the fairway about 5 cables
WNW of the Light-beacon, thence:
3 E of Saw
kin Channel No 1 Light-beacon (red
framework tower on white concrete base, black
band) (5
miles SSW) which marks a small islet
standing in an area of mangroves on the coastal
reef, thence:
4 W of Sha’b Towartit No 5 Light-beacon (red
framework tower on red concrete base, white bands)
(19°24′⋅6N, 37°20′⋅4E) which marks the W side of
Towartit Reefs. Thence:
To the terminal buoy.
Useful marks
6.111
1 Sha‘b Towartit No 5 Light-beacon (Towartit Reefs
No 5 Light-beacon) (red framework tower on red
concrete base, white bands) (19°24′⋅6N, 37′20′⋅4E)
exhibited from the W side of Towartit Reefs (6.65).
Bashayer Oil Terminal Harbour Entrance Light
(19°24′⋅5N, 37°18′⋅4E).
Port services
Repairs
6.112
1 There are no repair facilities at the terminal. See 6.77.
Other facilities
6.113
1 Neither medical or dental services are available except in
an emergency, there are hospital facilities at Port Sudan;
divers.
Supplies
6.114
1 No fuel or fresh water is available at the terminal.
Provisions and stores cannot be embarked at the terminal.
Jetty
6.115
1 A small jetty, for use of the terminal support craft only, is
situated close W of the terminal.
A light is exhibited from the head of the jetty.
Communications
6.116
1 Airport at Port Sudan, 12 km distant.
Rescue
6.117
1 A salvage/lifeboat is available.
168
SAW KIN
General information
Charts 81, 82
Position
6.118
1 Saw
kin (19°07′N, 37°20′E) is situated on the W side of
the central part of the of the Red Sea, about 30 miles S of
Port Sudan and 17 miles S of Bashayer Oil Terminal.
Description
6.119
1 Saw
kin, known locally as Old Saw
kin, is situated on an
island, and, except for the customs building and the guest
house which both stand at the NE end of the island, it is in
ruins. The ruins are protected as a historic monument.
A causeway at the SW end of the island connects
Saw
kin to El Kaff, the main town of the region.
2 A number of years ago the old harbour was still usable
by vessels of more than 100 m length, and over 6 m in
draught. Due to coral growth it has had to be abandoned.
The new Osman Digna Port is situated on the S side of
the outer part of the port, E of Condenser Island (19°07′⋅0N,
37°20′⋅3E).
Function
6.120
1 The main cargo handled in Osman Digna Port consists of
container traffic and Ro-Ro vessels.
Topography
6.121
1 The shores of the harbour are fringed by reefs, which dry
between May and August but are covered during December.
Approach and entry
6.122
1 The approach to Saw
kin is generally made from the
vicinity of Hindi Gidir (19°23′N, 37°55′E) (6.18), passing S
of the unsurveyed area at the S end of Towartit Reefs (6.65)
and N of Sha‘ab al Hareeq (6.143), thence N of Burns Reef
(6.207) and Fasmat al Waladab (6.207).
Entry to the port is through a gap in the coastal reef
which leads about 2 miles SW to the vicinity of Osman
Digna Port.
Traffic
6.123
1 In 1995 the port was visited by a total of 6 vessels.
Caution
6.124
1 Undue dependence must not be placed on the beacons
marking the approaches to Saw
kin as they are liable to
damage and may have been washed away.
Port Authority
6.125
1 Port Authority of Sudan, Sea Ports Corporation, PO Box
531, Port Sudan, Sudan.
Limiting conditions
Controlling depth
6.126
1 There is a minimum depth within the dredged entrance
channel of 12⋅2 m. The port authorities should be contacted
for the latest information.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
Deepest and longest berths
6.127
1 The main berths, which are numbered from 1 to 4, have a
least depth alongside of 8⋅6 m. They have a combined total
length of just over 400 m.
Local weather
6.128
1 The prevailing winds in the area are either land and sea
breezes, inclining to blow off the land at night and from
seaward in the forenoon, or winds which blow
approximately parallel to the coast.
During the day in winter, the wind almost always blows
between N and NE, with some strength. The wind decreases
considerably at night but never falls to a calm.
2 From November to January, sharp squalls from the
mountains occasionally occur, accompanied by rain.
In spring and summer the sea breeze generally sets in at
about 0900 and continues throughout the day to suddenly
subside at about 1700. Outside the harbour the breeze
continues to blow until sometime later.
6.129
1 In summer sand storms are experienced. Strong squalls,
blowing off the land, fill the air with sand for some 50 miles
offshore reducing the visibility at times to about 5 cables.
In June, July, August and September the temperature is
very high. During sandstorms the temperature may rise as
high 46°C on board ship, and to several degrees higher in
the town. Care should be taken to avoid heatstroke.
2 Between the beginning of November and March the
climate is equable and pleasant, never very hot during the
day and always cool at night.
During the winter months, when the high mountain
ranges are generally hidden by clouds, the N wind blows
along the plain between the mountains and the coast; it
carries a cloud of reddish dust which dims, when it does not
entirely obscure, the lower and nearer summits.
Arrival information
Port radio
6.130
1 There is a port services and operations radio station at
Saw
kin.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Outer anchorages
6.131
1 The recommended outer anchorage is in a designated
area, as shown on the chart, which lies about 11 miles E of
the entrance to Saw
kin.
Two further deep-water anchorages, as shown on the
chart, are situated about 1 mile NNE, and 2 miles NE, of
Sha‘ab Ata (6.132).
6.132
1 The anchorage situated 1 mile NNE of Sha‘ab Ata
(19°17′N, 37°23′E) is entered from the S between a detached
reef head, which lies close E of Sha‘ab Ata, and another
detached reef which lies 1 mile farther E; passing through a
channel which, between the 20 m depth contours, is about
6 cables wide.
2 Depths within this anchorage are about 75 m on a flat
bottom.
A bank, over which the depths are irregular and has not
been closely sounded, extends N from the detached reef,
169
which lies on the E side of the entrance to this W-most of
the two anchorages. In 1982 the least depth obtained by
sounding over this bank was 14⋅8 m.
6.133
1 The anchorage situated 2 miles NE of Sha‘ab Ata
(19°17′N, 37°23′E) is the more extensive of the two. This
anchorage is entered from the S between the detached reef,
which lies on the E side of the entrance to the W-most
anchorage, about 1 miles E of Sha‘ab Ata and the shoal
water extending SW from Williamson Shoals (19°18′N,
37°28′E) (6.143).
2 The channel leading to this anchorage is about 1 miles
wide between the 20 m depth contours, with its centreline
situated about 8 cables E of the detached reef.
Depths within this anchorage are from about 68 to 84 m,
on a relatively flat, bottom mud.
6.134
1 Caution. Reefs in the channels leading to these
anchorages are not marked.
The sea over Sha‘ab Ata, and the detached reef which lies
between the entrances to these anchorages, only breaks
occasionally.
For precautions to be taken when navigating within coral
waters, see The Mariner’s Handbook.
Pilotage
6.135
1 Pilotage is available 24 hours.
The pilot boards, as shown on the chart, about 2 miles E
of the entrance channel.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Tugs
6.136
1 Two tugs of 2000 hp available.
Tidal levels
6.137
1 The mean winter tidal level is 0⋅3 m higher than the mean
summer level.
Harbour
General layout
6.138
1 Saw
kin Harbour is a narrow inlet in the low coastal
plain which extends SW to Condenser Island (19°07′N,
37°20′E) from where it divides into two arms which then
extend NW and SW.
The NW arm of the harbour, N of Condenser Island, is
much obstructed in its inner part by shoals.
2 The island of Old Saw
kin lies in the central part of the
SW arm.
The old port was abandoned many years ago due to the
growth of coral, but a new port, the Osman Digna Port was
constructed on the S side of the inlet, E of Condenser Island.
Submarine pipeline
6.139
1 A submarine water pipeline is laid across the harbour
about 5 cables WSW of Graham Point (19°07′⋅5N,
37°21′⋅3E).
The positions where the pipeline comes ashore on the N
and S shores of the entrance channel are marked by beacons
(triangular topmarks, apex up).
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
Prohibited anchorage
6.140
1 An area, as shown on the chart, in which anchorage is
prohibited extends across the harbour about 5 cables WSW
of Graham Point (19°07′⋅5N, 37°21′⋅3E).
Approach to Saw kin from Hindi Gidir
Caution
6.141
1 The approach to Saw
kin from the vicinity of Hindi Gidir
(6.18) is reported to be somewhat difficult except in the
early morning when the sun is in the most favourable
position. At other times, the landmarks are generally
obscured by haze. This is especially so in summer, when, in
addition, the reefs are not easily distinguished owing to the
prevailing calms.
Directions
6.142
1 From a position about 1 miles N of Hindi Gidir
(19°23′N, 37°55′E) (6.18) the track leads initially W through
the offshore reefs, passing:
N of Logan Reef (19°22′N, 37°51′E) and Keary Reef
(2
miles SSW). In a moderate swell the sea breaks
over both of these reefs and they are usually visible,
thence:
2 S of Sha‘ab Jibna (19°27′N, 37°44′E) (North Jumna
Shoal) a steep-to shoal over which the sea breaks;
during periods of calm weather a few coral heads
show above the water. Sha‘ab Jibna (North Jumna)
Light-beacon (black beacon with topmark, 6 m in
height) marks the shoal. Thence:
3 NW of Sha‘ab Anbar (19°16′N, 37°42′E), which
extends about 5 miles overall in a N/S direction, its
N extremity lying on the SE side of the route. The
sea generally breaks over its N end; a stranded
wreck (position approximate) lies on the reef, close
to its SE extremity, thence:
4 NW of Sha‘ab Mobiyet (19°12′N, 37°41′E) a reef,
with its N end nearly awash, which extends
1
miles SSE with alternatively deep and shoal
water. Canara Reef (4 miles SE) has several coral
heads, some of which are dangerous; a circular
detached reef, which shows light green, and a depth
of 3 m over it, lies close off the WNW side of the
reef between it and Sha‘ab Mobiyet. Thence:
6.143
1 From Sha‘ab Quseir to No 9 Light-beacon, passing:
NW of Sha‘ab Quseir (19°11′N, 37°37′E) which has a
few above-water coral heads over which the sea
breaks. A beacon (concrete base with triangular
topmark, apex up, 6 m in height) stands on its SW
end. Nakhalat al Qaseer (1 miles E) is a rocky
shoal pinnacle. Thence:
2 SE of Williamson Shoals from which a light is
exhibited (red and white metal framework tower)
(19°18′N, 37°28′E) which lie on the E side of
Towartit Reefs (6.65) and over which the sea
seldom breaks, thence:
NW of Sha‘ab al Hareeq (19°12′N, 37°31′E) on which
there are several dangerous coral heads over which
the sea only breaks in a heavy swell. A rocky bank,
on which there are irregular depths, extends
2 miles E of the reef. Thence:
170
3 E of Al Mansooriya No 8 Light-beacon (red framework
tower on red concrete base, 6 m in height)
(19°13′N, 37°23′E) which marks Al Mansooriya, a
coral reef, and E of the reefs that extend over
2 miles E from it, thence:
E of Fikheeb (19°11′N, 37°25′E) a named reef in an
unsurveyed area of reefs and shoals, thence:
4 E of No 9 Light-beacon (red framework tower on red
concrete base, white bands) (19°10′N, 37°24′E)
which stands on a reef at the S end of Towartit
Reefs (6.65).
Entry to Saw kin Harbour
Principal marks
6.144
1 Landmarks:
Watch-tower situated on Graham Point (6.147).
Stranded wreck which lies close off NE side of
Condenser Island (6.155).
Chimney (white, 30 m in height) part of a disused
cotton factory, standing about 1 miles SSW of
Graham Point (19°07′⋅5N, 37°21′⋅3E).
Directions
6.145
1 From a position about 4 miles ESE of No 9 Beacon
(19°10′N, 37°24′E) the initial approach to the entrance
channel leads W.
2 Leading marks:
Front mark (wooden framework Sudanese naval watch
tower) standing on Graham Point (19°07′⋅5N,
37°21′⋅3E).
Rear mark, Jabal Tad-hib
Adl (small wedge-shaped
hill rising to a height of 230 m) which forms a
good mark and stands about 6 miles ESE of Jib
l
Warat
b (6.200).
3 The alignment (260°) of these leading marks leads about
1 miles S of the S end of Towartit Reefs (6.65). Once clear
of the S end of these reefs, course may be shaped to the
NW as necessary to make for the entrance channel.
6.146
1 From a position in the approaches to the harbour, about
1 mile NE of No 5 Light-beacon (19°08′⋅1N, 37°22′⋅1E), the
track to Osman Digna Port leads SW for about 2
miles,
passing (with positions given from Graham Point
(19°07′⋅5N, 37°21′⋅3E)):
SE of a light-beacon (black and white) (1 miles
NNE) standing on the edge of the reef, N of
No 1 Light-beacon, and marks the N side of the
start of the entrance channel, thence:
2 NW of No 5 Light-beacon (black and white framework
structure on black and white chequered concrete
base, 8 m in height) (1 mile NE) which marks a
position close off the E side of a detached drying
coral reef. This light-beacon marks the SE side of
the start of the entrance channel which then leads
SW, through the coastal reef, to the harbour area.
Thence:
3 SE of No 1 Light-beacon (red and white framework
structure on red and white chequered concrete base,
8 m in height) (9 cables NNE), which marks the N
side of a small coral reef, thence:
4 NW of No 6 Light-beacon (black and white framework
structure on white concrete base, black bands, 8 m
in height) (6 cables NE).
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
6.147
1 Thence, from No 7 Light-beacon to No 3 Light-beacon,
passing:
NW of No 7 Light-beacon (black and white framework
structure on white concrete base, black bands, 8 m
in height) (3 cables NE), thence:
SE of No 2 Light-beacon (red and white framework
structure on white concrete base, red bands, 8 m in
height) (3 cables NNE) which stands close to the
SE corner of a small island situated on the NW side
of the entrance channel, thence:
2 NW of Graham Point which forms the SE entrance
point of the harbour. A wooden-framed Sudanese
Navy watch tower, which is conspicuous, stands
close SW of the point. Thence:
NW of No 8 Light-beacon (red and white framework
structure on white concrete base, red bands, 8 m in
height) (3 cables SW) which stands on the SE shore
of the harbour, thence:
3 SE of No 3 Light-beacon (red and white framework
structure on white concrete base, red bands, 8 m in
height) (3 cables WSW) standing on the NW
shore of the harbour.
6.148
1 Thence, from No 3 Light-beacon to the designated berth,
passing:
Between the beacons (5 cables WSW) (6.139) which
mark the landing point of a submarine water
pipeline. Thence:
NW of No 9 Light-beacon (red and white framework
structure on white concrete base, red bands, 10 m in
height) (7 cables SW) which marks the NE corner
of Osman Digna Port, thence:
2 SE of No 4 Light-beacon (red and white framework
structure on white concrete base, red bands, 8 m in
height) (7 cables WSW) standing close off the edge
of the drying area on the N side of the harbour, N
of Osman Digna Port, thence:
To the designated berth.
Berths
Osman Digna Port
6.149
1 The Osman Digna Port consists of five berths. Alongside
depths are reported depths. The port authorities should be
contacted for the latest information.
Minor berths
6.150
1 Quarantine Pier is situated on the N side of the harbour
about 4 cables WSW of Graham Point (19°07′⋅5N,
37°21′⋅3E).
INNER CHANNEL
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 158, 3722
Route
6.156
1 The Inner Channel, from its N entrance 6 miles SSW of
Ras Ab Shagr
b (21°03′N, 37°19′E), extends about
160 miles S to its termination about 9 miles E of Trinkitat
Harbour (18°41′N, 37°45′E).
171
Cemetery Pier is situated on the N side of the harbour
about 6 cables WSW of Graham Point.
Railway Pier is situated on the S side of the harbour,
midway between Quarantine and Cemetery Piers.
Cotton Pier and two further smaller piers are situated S
of Old Saw
kin.
2 Mariners are advised that the following three new berths
have recently been constructed at Saw
kin Harbour:
Asphalt Export Berth (Berth No 12) (19°07′⋅4N,
37°21′⋅0E). Length 45 m. Depth alongside 8 m.
Livestock Export Berth (Berth No 11) (19°07′⋅4N,
37°21′⋅2E). Length 100 m. Depth alongside 9 m.
Gas Exporting Berth (Berth No 13) (19°07′⋅9N,
37°21′⋅5E). Length 90 m. Depth alongside 9 m.
3 Chart 81 will be updated as soon as more information
becomes available.
Port services
Repairs
6.151
Minor hull and engine repairs can be undertaken in Port
Sudan (6.26).
Other facilities
6.152
1 Mobile crane (50 tonne capacity); hospital; mooring boats.
Supplies
6.153
1 Fuel oil; fresh water; fresh provisions, but vegetables are
scarce except in winter; fish.
Communications
6.154
1 The nearest airport is Port Sudan Airport about 48 km
distant.
Condenser Island
6.155
1 Condenser Island (Quarantine Island) (19°07′⋅0N,
37°20′⋅3E) lies about 1 mile SW of Graham Point.
The island is separated on its W side from the mainland
by a small dredged channel which serves the large area of
salt pans situated in the W part of the harbour.
A stranded wreck lies close N of the E-most point of the
island; a further wreck, with a least depth over it of 2⋅2 m,
lies at right angles to the first wreck, close NW of the
charted shoal, with a least depth over it of 9⋅3 m.
2 The wreck of a dhow lies off the end of the slipway
which extends NNE from the N side of the island.
Description
6.157
1 The Inner Channel, a generally smooth route for use by
small vessels, lies between the coastal reef and the outlying
reefs.
For the most part, the channel is between 1 to 3 miles
wide except near Ras Ab Shagr
b (6.16), Juzur Têl
t
(6.168), and Marsa Salak (6.281) where it narrows to about
5 cables.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
The two principal alternative entrances to the Inner
Channel are off Port Sudan (6.26) and Saw
kin (6.118).
Depths
6.158
1 Depths within the Inner Channel are mainly deep.
Between Ras Ab Shagr
b (21°03′N, 37°19′E) and Marsa
Salak (37 miles S), the most intricate part of the channel, and
also between Marsa Figg
(Fij
b) (20°02′N, 37°12′E) and
Marsa Darr (12 miles SSE), depths are moderate, for the
most part.
Local knowledge
6.159
1 Local knowledge is required for the use, and passage
through the Inner Channel.
Approach and entry from north
Outer approaches
6.160
1 Description. Sha‘b al Hara, a group of detached reefs
marked by No 8 Beacon (cylindrical concrete base, metal
post, red drum topmark, 5 m in height) (21°02′N, 37°20′E),
lies 2 miles SSE of Ras Ab Shagr
b (21°03′N, 37°19′E)
(6.16).
The edge of the coastal reef, 2 miles S of Ras Ab
Shagr
b, is marked by No 7 Beacon (metal shaft on a
concrete base, black diamond topmark, 5 m in height).
2 A detached reef, about 4 miles S of Ras Ab Shagr
b, is
marked by the ruins of a beacon (21°00′⋅0N, 37°19′⋅7E),
formerly numbered 6.
A number of years ago, SE of a line joining the ruins of
the former No 6 Beacon and No 4 Beacon (6.166), no reefs
were visible and the area appeared to be clear.
Entry
6.161
1 From the N, the entry to the Inner Channel lies between
Keedan (20°58′N, 37°17′E), a small detached reef situated
2 miles SE of Ras al Keedan, and the N end of Sha‘b
Mobayeed (8 cables SSE).
Ras al Keedan is a low sandy point which forms the S
extremity of the peninsula of which Ras Ab Shagr
b (6.16)
forms the E-most point.
Aids to navigation
6.162
1 The N entrance to the Inner Channel is marked by
beacons numbered from 5 to 1.
No 1 Beacon (20°53′⋅9N, 37°16′⋅2E) stands about 5 cables
S of No 2 Beacon and marks the NE extremity of the reef
extending N from Jazrat Magarsam (6.167). A detached
coral head lies about 3 cables ENE of No 1 Beacon and is
marked at its N end by an iron rail.
Depths
6.163
1 A shoal, with a least depth over it of 8⋅5 m, lies in the
entry channel about 4 cables NW of No 3 Beacon
(20°56′⋅8N, 37°17′⋅3E).
Apart from this shoal, this part of Inner Channel has been
swept to a depth of 9⋅1 m from its N entrance between
172
No 4 Beacon (20°57′⋅4N, 37°17′⋅6E) and No 5 Beacon
(8 cables NNW) as far as Mesharifa (20°54′⋅3N, 37°13′⋅6E).
2 Between Mesharifa and Gad Mesharifa (6 cables SSE)
numerous coral heads lie in the channel; a coral head, with a
least depth over it of 4⋅0 m, lies within this section about
4 cables SE of Mesharifa.
South of Mesharifa the channel has been swept to a depth
of 4⋅6 m.
Current
6.164
1 Strong W-going currents have been experienced in the
vicinity of Mesharifa.
Principal marks
6.165
1 Landmarks:
2 Jebel Erba (20°45′N, 36°50′E) 2212 m in height,
stands about 12 miles from the N extremity of a
mountain range which extends about 34 miles S
from its N end which rises about 25 miles WSW of
Ras Ab Shagr
b (21°03′N, 37°19′E). On the N
part of this range are two small rugged peaks. The
N one is visible over a greater part of this section
of the coast. There is a small peak with a flat
summit close N of Jebel Erba.
3 Jabal Tuhdat (20°39′N, 37°06′E) 276 m in height, is
a hill which forms a good landmark N of
Muammad Qol (6.271). The hill lies at the S end
of a range of hills which extend, parallel to the
coast, to a short distance N of Muammad Qol.
Between this range of hills and the coast lies a
sandy plain, with some scrub in places, rising
gradually to an elevation of about 30 m at the foot
of these hills.
Directions
6.166
1 From a position about 5 miles SE of Ras Ab Shagr
b
(21°03′N, 37°19′E) (6.16), on the recommended track as
shown on the chart, with the fort at Muhammad Qol (6.271)
bearing 243°, the track leads initially WSW, passing:
SE of the detached reef (21°00′⋅0N, 37°19′⋅7E) on
which stands the ruins of No 6 Beacon, thence:
SE of No 5 Beacon (metal shaft on a concrete base,
black diamond topmark, 5 m in height) (20°58′⋅2N,
37°17′⋅3E) which stands on Keedan Reef, and:
2 NW of No 4 Beacon (metal shaft on a concrete base,
topmark red drum, 5 m in height) (20°57′⋅4N,
37°17′⋅6E) which stands on the N extremity of
Sha‘ab Mobayeed, about 8 cables S of Keedan Reef.
If following the recommended track then, when the
beacons are abeam, alter course as required to the
SW. Thence:
3 WNW of No 3 Beacon (metal shaft on a concrete base,
red T-shaped topmark, 5 m in height) (20°56′⋅8N,
37°17′⋅3E) which stands on the W edge of Sha‘b
Mobayeed. Teetai Aweeb, a rock 2⋅4 m in height,
stands on the coastal reef about 1 mile W of the
beacon; a detached coral head lies midway between
No 3 and No 4 Beacons. When No 3 Beacon is past
the beam, bearing about 081°, distant 6 cables,
alter course as required to the S, noting the shoal,
with a least depth over it of 8⋅5 m, which lies about
4 cables NW of the beacon.
6.167
1 From E of Karai Berer to W of Jazrat Magarsam,
passing:
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
E of Karai Berer (20°55′N, 37°16′E) part of the coastal
reef extending S from Ras al Keedan (6.161),
thence:
2 Between the S extremity of Karai Berer marked at its
S extremity by No 2 Beacon (metal shaft on a
concrete base, black diamond topmark, 5 m in
height) (20°54′⋅4N, 37°16′⋅2E), and N of the reef
extending N from Jazrat Magarsam (Mukawwar)
(20°48′N, 37°16′E) marked on the W side of its N
extremity by No 1 Beacon (metal shaft on a concrete
base, red T-shaped topmark, 5 m in height) which
stands on the opposite side of the fairway about
5 cables S of No 2 Beacon. Thence:
3 Midway between Mesharifa (20°54′⋅3N, 37°13′⋅6E), a
small islet about 2 m in height, which lies at the
SW extremity of the coastal reef which extends S
from Ras al Keedan, and Gad Mesharifa (20°53′⋅7N,
37°13′⋅9E) another small islet, about 1 m in height
and situated about 6 cables SSE of Mesharifa,
standing on the NW extremity of the reef extending
N from Jazrat Magarsam. A beacon (metal post on
a concrete base, black cone topmark, 4 m in height)
stands 1 cable SE of Mesharifa. A beacon (metal
post on a concrete base, red drum topmark, 4 m in
height) stands 1 cable W of Gad Mesharifa.
Between Mesharifa and Gad Mesharifa there are
numerous coral heads in the channel, with a least
depth over them of 4⋅0 m situated in the fairway
about 4 cables SE of Mesharifa. Thence:
Clear of a shoal patch (20°53′⋅1N, 37°12′⋅6E) with a
least depth over it of 5⋅5 m, and W of the shoal
patch (1 mile SE), with a least depth over it of
9⋅6 m. Thence:
E of the shoal patch (20°51′⋅1N, 37°11′⋅4E) with a
least depth over it of 5⋅9 m, thence:
4 W of Jazrat Magarsam (Mukawwar) (20°48′N,
37°16′E) a tableland of rocky sandstone which rises
to a conspicuous summit with steep cliffs apparently
worn away by heavy rain. The island has a sterile
appearance, and, apart from some mangroves at the
S end, there are only rocks and barren sands; a very
low spit forms its S extremity. The island is
bordered by a coral reef, the N part of which is
apparently extensive but unexamined.
6.168
1 From Brandon Rock to the Juzur Tl
t islets, passing:
E of Brandon Rock (20°45′⋅4N, 37°12′⋅3E) a shoal
area which consists of two detached shoal patches,
with least depths over them of 3⋅7 m and 5⋅5 m,
over which the sea sometimes breaks. Thence:
2 W of a beacon (concrete base, red can topmark, 4 m in
height) (20°43′⋅9N, 37°14′⋅9E) which stands at the
S end of a rocky spit which extends about 1 mile
SSW of the S end of Jazrat Magarsam (6.167). A
sandy patch, which sometimes dries, lies 1 cables
N of the beacon. Thence:
3 W of Powell Rock (20°42′⋅3N, 37°14′⋅2E), noting the
isolated rock, with a least depth over it of 2⋅7 m,
which lies about 2 miles SW of Powell Rock.
Thence:
4 Into the narrow channel which lies between Juzur
Tl
t, a group of three islets surrounded by reefs
over which the sea sometimes breaks, and the
mainland; bushes grow on the islets and on the
mainland coast to the W. The narrow channel is
marked on the E side of its N entrance by a beacon
(concrete, red can topmark, 5 m in height)
173
(20°39′⋅0N, 37°13′⋅6E) which stands on the E side
of the channel.
(Description continues of the Inner Channel at 6.175)
Alternative northern approach and entry
6.169
1 An alternative approach to the N end of the Inner
Channel may be made from the SE, passing E of the M
ytb
Islets (20°48′N, 37°20′E), two islets situated on the E side of
an extensive reef; and W of two coral heads, marked by
rails, situated 2 miles ENE and 2 miles N respectively, of
the NE extremity of Jazrat Magarsam (Mukawwar)
(20°48′N, 37°16′E) (6.167).
2 The S islet of the M
ytb Islets is the larger and rises to a
height of 37 m. The islet is covered by small trees and
shrubs except on its SE side which is barren and precipitous.
The NW islet is smaller and only rises to a height of 2 m.
The track then continues W, passing midway between
No 1 Beacon (20°53′⋅9N, 37°16′⋅2E) and No 2 Beacon
(5 cables N).
6.170
1 Offshore dangers. Jazrat B
yer (20°52′N, 37°23′E) is a
sandy islet situated near the SE end of a reef, extending
about 3 miles NW. The islet lies on the NE side of the
alternative northern approach to the Inner Channel. A further
reef lies parallel to, and close NE of, the reef on which
stands Jazrat B
yer and from which it is separated by a
narrow channel about 1 cables wide.
The SE entrance to the narrow channel between these two
reefs is marked by a pair of beacons:
2 NE beacon (concrete base, post, black cone topmark,
4 m in height).
SW beacon (concrete base, post, red cylinder topmark,
4 m in height).
Iron rails stand on both sides of the entrance channel,
close NW of these beacons, marking the inner end of the
entrance.
A detached coral head, situated about 8 cables S of Jazrat
B
yer, is marked by an iron rail.
3 Anchorage, may be obtained, in depths from 5⋅8 to
9⋅1 m, in the narrow channel which lies between the two
reefs, about 1 miles NW of Jazrat B
yer (20°52′N,
37°23′E).
6.171
1 Caution. This alternative approach route should only be
used under favourable conditions of light.
Channel south of Jaz rat Magarsam
6.172
1 The S and principal approach to Raw
ya Anchorage
(6.270) and Muammad Qol (6.271) lies S of Jazrat
Magarsam (20°48′N, 37°16′E) (6.167).
Flow. Strong W-going currents have been experienced in
the vicinity of Abington Reef (20°54′N, 37°27′E) (6.16).
Caution. This route should be taken by vessels of
moderate draught only as the depths are irregular.
The line of bearing (245°) of Jabal Tuhdat (6.165) leads
between the dangers which lie on each side of the channel.
6.173
1 Directions. From a position about 3 miles SSE of
Angarosh (20°51′⋅8N, 37°26′⋅2E) (6.16), a sandy islet, the
track leads WSW, passing (with positions given from Jazrat
M
ytb (20°47′⋅2N, 37°20′⋅3E)):
SSE of the detached reef (5
miles NE) which lies
about 2 miles ESE of Jazrat B
yer (20°52′N,
37°23′E) (6.170), thence:
SSE of Jazrat M
ytb, thence:
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
2 SSE of a beacon (concrete base, black cone topmark,
4 m in height) (2 miles SW) which stands on a
drying rocky patch. Thence:
NNW of Merlin Rock (4 miles SSW), a dangerous
below-water rock, thence:
NNW of the dangerous rock (4
miles SSW) which
lies about 2 cables N of Falcon Reefs. Numerous
shoals lie in this vicinity. Foul ground lies between
Falcon Reefs and Juzur Tl
t (20°38′N, 37°14′E)
(6.168). Thence:
3 SSE of a beacon (concrete base, red can topmark, 4 m
in height) (6 miles WSW) which stands at the S end
of a rocky spit that extends about 1 mile SSW of
the S end of Jazrat Magarsam (6.167). A sandy
patch situated about 1 mile SW of the S extremity
of Jazrat Magarsam usually shows up well with the
sun behind the observer. Thence:
N of Powell Rock (7 miles SW) (6.168) and into the
N part of the Inner Channel.
Anchorages
6.174
1 Anchorage may also be obtained by small vessels in a
depth of 22 m, mud, with the S extremity of Jazrat
Magarsam (20°48′N, 37°16′E) (6.167) bearing about 302 °
distant 1 mile, as shown on the chart.
Anchorage is obtainable off the W side of Jazrat
Magarsam in suitable depths.
Inner Channel
Juzur T l t to Marsa Figg
Charts 82, 158
Description
6.175
1 The Inner Channel, between Juzur Tl
t (Taila Islets)
(20°38′N, 37°14′E) (6.168) and the mainland to the W, has
depths from 9⋅1 to 12⋅8 m and is marked by three beacons.
The channel in this section affords a sheltered passage for
small vessels.
Local knowledge is required for passage through this
narrow section of the Inner Channel. The waters in this
vicinity are unsurveyed.
2 A beacon (concrete, red can topmark, 5m in height)
stands on the E side of the channel, about 1 miles NW of
the E-most islet of Juzur Tl
t; another beacon (concrete, red
can topmark, 5m in height) stands about 1 miles W of the
islet.
A further beacon (concrete, black diamond topmark, 5m
in height) stands on the W side of this part of the Inner
Channel, about 1
miles WSW of the E-most islet of Juzur
Tl
t.
6.176
1 The W side of the Inner Channel, 4 miles S of the Juzur
Tl
t, is marked by a beacon (red cone topmark, 5 m in
height).
Vessels using this section of the Inner Channel should
pass E of the the boiler of a wrecked tug, which, in 1985,
marked the SE extremity of the coastal reef 3 miles NE of
the entrance to Marsa Salak (6.281).
2 Dangerous rocks lie off the extremity of the coastal reef
in this vicinity. There are further scattered coral heads in this
174
area, and, as such, navigation throughout this general area
requires good conditions of light.
In this area the Inner Channel narrows to about 2 cables,
with depths from 26 to 44 m.
6.177
1 South of Marsa Salak (6.281) the Inner Channel lies
between the coastal reef and outlying dangers; about 3 miles
S of the inlet the channel widens.
This part of the Inner Channel is generally deep and is
useful to small coasting craft as it affords smooth water. The
eye is the only guide to safe navigation.
2 In cloudy weather it becomes difficult to discern
below-water rocks and shoal patches. It is then advisable to
anchor in Marsa Salak, or in some other anchorage near the
reefs until the weather clears.
Three dangerous shoals lie close together, about 5 miles
SSE of Marsa Salak and about 1 miles offshore. These
shoals show up well under good conditions of light, one or
two coral heads are usually visible. They can be passed on
either hand.
6.178
1 Rhama Sha‘b is a shoal situated on the W side of the
Inner Channel, about 6 miles SSE of Marsa Salak (6.281); a
beacon (concrete, black cone topmark, apex up, 5 m in
height) marks the shoal.
2 Another shoal, situated on the E side of the fairway,
about 5 miles SSE from Rhama Sha‘b is marked by a
beacon (concrete, red cone topmark, 5 m in height).
(Description continues of the Inner Channel at 6.184)
Principal marks
6.179
1 Landmarks:
Jebel Melangweib (20°28′N, 36°50′E) stands about
20 miles W of Marsa Salak (6.281) and has some
resemblance to a chimney.
2 Jebel Oda (20°21′N, 36°40′E) is a round, elongated
peak. Seen from Marsa Salak on a bearing of 286°
its summit is just visible above the N edge of a dip
in Jebel Saghûm (20°24′N, 37°05′E). From the ESE
Jebel Oda has the appearance of a sugarloaf with a
sharp peak, whilst from the SSE, off Port Sudan, it
appears to have a rugged peak.
3 Jebel Gumaderiba (20°04′N, 36°43′E) is a sharp rocky
peak, the appearance of which does not alter much
from seaward; there is a shoulder on its S side.
6.180
1 Jebel Bawati (19°55′N, 36°48′E) is a peak on a range
of mountains, with six summits, extending some
16 miles SSE from Jebel Gumaderiba. This range
decreases in elevation from S of Jebel Bawati until
W of Port Sudan.
2 Jib
l Astrib
(19°35′N, 36°55′E) stands W of Port
Sudan, at the S end of the mountain range with six
summits which extends SSE from Jebel
Gumaderiba. This mountain does not have a very
well defined summit but it is a good mark when not
obscured by clouds.
3 Jebel Tagwiai (19°55′N, 37°03′E) (not charted by
name) which stands in the lower range nearer the
coast, has two summits and rises to 369 m. Jib
l
Da‘nab al Abyad (19°54′N, 36°59′E) stands about
4 miles WSW of Jebel Tagwiai, and Jib
l Hr
nb
(19°50′N, 36°56′E) a farther 5 miles SSW. Both are
good marks.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
4 Jib
l Êwêt (19°46′N, 36°57′E) is a long hog-backed
range extending S and E which, from the SE off
Port Sudan, shows as a single peak and is
conspicuous.
Anchorage
6.181
1 Anchorage may be obtained along this section of the
coast, in depths of about 18 m, rock and sand, in the lee of
the many patches of coral which form part of the outer reefs,
especially NE of Marsa Arakiyai (6.286).
Local entrances to Inner Channel
6.182
1 The Inner Channel may be entered through the opening
in the offshore reefs which lies between Sha‘ab Su‘
di
(20°10′N, 37°15′E) (6.183) and the reef close N of it.
Local knowledge. This track is frequently used by local
craft trading between Marsa Arakiyai and Jeddah (9.342).
This entrance is not considered safe.
6.183
1 If bound for Marsa Arakiyai (6.286) or Marsa Aweitir
(6.289), then pass S of the beacon (concrete, red cone
topmark, 4 m in height) standing on the S end of Sha‘ab
Su‘
di (20°10′N, 37°15′E), taking care to avoid a rock
(awash) situated about 2 miles SSE of the beacon. Thence,
keep the coastal reef aboard so as to avoid the detached
rocks which lie on the inner side of Sha‘ab Su‘
di.
Inner Channel
Marsa Figg to Marsa Dar r
(continued from 6.178)
Charts 82, 158
Topography
6.184
1 The land in the vicinity of the coast near Marsa Figg

(Fij
b) (20°02′N, 37°12′E) (6.291) is 1 m or less in height,
with some bare coral ridges up to about 2 m in height. This
continues S beyond Marsa Darr (12 miles S) (6.298).
Farther inland, there is a flat sandy plain with a few
scattered bushes and several small plateaux from 3 to 6 m in
height. This plain is from 10 to 20 miles wide and rises
gradually towards the base of the mountains. During winter
the plain is thickly covered with tussock grass growing to
about 1 m high.
Description
6.185
1 The Inner Channel between Marsa Figg
(Fij
b) and
Marsa Darr is generally between 1 mile and 2 miles wide
and lies between the coastal reef and an area encumbered
with reefs and shoals that extends, from a position E of
Marsa Figg
(Fij
b) for about 11 miles SSE, parallel with the
coast.
The W edge of this area of reefs and shoals shows clearly
and is an almost continuous narrow reef, partly awash and
partly below-water, whilst its E edge is not so clearly
defined and is broken up into many small reefs, some of
which are not visible.
2 At the N and S ends of this area of reefs and shoals there
are several small, steep-to, coral heads.
This area of reefs and shoals has not been surveyed, but it
appears to be full of dangers over which the sea breaks.
175
6.186
1 Sha‘ab Rumi (19°56′N, 37°24′E) is a steep-to and
dangerous reef, situated off the SE side of the area of reefs
and shoals, which is always visible and over whose edge the
sea breaks.
A beacon (concrete base, topmark disc with red and black
bands, 7 m in height) stands towards the S part of the reef.
6.187
1 Two beacons, which mark the E side of the Inner
Channel, stand on the NW part of this area of reefs and
shoals. One beacon (concrete, red T-shaped topmark, 5 m in
height) stands 3 miles SE of Marsa Figg
(Fij
b); the other
beacon (concrete, red cone topmark, 4 m in height) stands
3 miles farther S.
A detached reef on the E side of the channel, which lies
11 miles SSE of Marsa Figg
(Fij
b), is marked by a beacon
(concrete, T-shaped topmark, 4 m in height).
6.188
1 Caution. The coastal reef in this part of the Inner
Channel has dangerous below-water rocks lying E of its
edge which lie within 5 cables of the fairway, in places.
(A description of the Inner Channel continues at 6.189)
Inner Channel
Marsa Dar r to Port Sudan
Charts 82, 3492
Description
6.189
1 The Inner Channel between Marsa Darr (19°50′N,
37°16′E) (6.298) and Port Sudan (14 miles S) (6.26) is
initially about 3 miles wide reducing to about 1 miles off
the SSW end of Silayet (19°40′N, 37°19′E) (6.191).
The passage leads S, between Al Tarafaniya al Kabira and
Silayet on the E, and the coastal reef on the W.
6.190
1 Al Tarafaniya al Kabira (Le Mercier Shoals) (19°46′N,
37°22′E) is the S part of a chain of small broken reefs
which extend about 9 miles SW from a position about
6 miles ENE of the entrance to Marsa Darr.
A beacon (framework construction, cone topmark, 8 m in
height) stands at the N end of Al Tarafaniya al Kabira; a
further beacon (concrete, drum topmark, 4 m in height)
stands on Al Tarafaniya al Saghira at the S end of the chain
of reefs.
6.191
1 Silayet (Wingate Reefs) (19°40′N, 37°19′E) is a chain of
small broken reefs which are situated S of Al Tarafaniya al
Saghira.
The E and S edges of the chain are steep-to and well
defined. The inner edge is considerably broken.
2 A beacon (concrete, T-shaped topmark, 4 m in height)
(position approximate) stands on the E side of a reef which
lies in the NW corner of Silayet. A further beacon (concrete,
cone topmark, 4 m in height) stands on the W side of of Al
Kilebiya al Dhahariya, a reef on the E side of Silayet.
Al Dawoureet is a small reef, situated on the E side of
Silayet, about 2 cables S of the S end of Al Kilebiya al
Dhahariya.
3 Nimra Talata Light (6.63) is exhibited from a position
close to the SE corner of Silayet.
Silayet South End Light (6.63) is exhibited from the S
extremity of the reef. A beacon (triangular topmark) stands
1 mile NNE of the light.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
6.192
1 The coastal reef between Marsa Halt (19°47′N, 37°16′E)
(6.301) and Marsa Gwiyai (8 miles S) (6.81) extends up to
5 cables offshore.
From about 2 miles N of the entrance to Marsa Gwiyai
dangerous rocks and shoals lie up to 3 cables E of the
edge of the coastal reef.
(Description continues of the Inner Channel at 6.198)
(Directions for this channel are given at 6.109)
Flow
6.193
1 Strong W-going currents have been experienced in the
vicinity of Silayet.
Cautionary area
6.194
1 Vessels are advised not to enter the cautionary area of
Wingate Reefs as shown on the charts.
Caution
6.195
1 It should be noted that W of Silayet South End Light
(19°37′⋅0N, 37°17′⋅2E), within the 100 m depth contour, the
bottom is irregular.
Local entrance to Inner Channel
6.196
1 See 6.63.
Inner Channel
Port Sudan to Saw kin
Charts 82, 81
Topography
6.197
1 The coast of the Inner Channel, between Port Sudan
(19°37′N, 37°14′E) and Saw
kin (30 miles S) consists of a
raised coral reef, less than 1 m in height, backed by a wide
plain which in winter is dotted with shrubs and grass tufts,
but, at other times, is a brown desert.
The coastal plain, though flat and level in appearance,
rises gently towards the mountains which lie 10 to 20 miles
inland. It becomes slightly undulating and is intersected by
many water courses which are only flooded during the rainy
season.
2 A well defined range of hills from 90 to 120 m in height
rises abruptly from the coastal plain; mountain masses, with
peaks rising to heights from 1220 to 2130 m, stand about
25 miles inland. Although from seaward they all appear
barren and brown, areas of green vegetation and streams,
which flow throughout the year, lie among the mountains.
Description
6.198
1 The Inner Channel between Port Sudan (6.26) and
Saw
kin (6.118) has a least navigable width of about 1 mile
off Towartit Elbow (19°29′N, 37°18′E) where the coastal
reef extends some 5 cables offshore.
The section of the channel between Silayet (6.191) and
North Towartit Reefs (6.65), SE of Port Sudan, is free of
dangers.
Between Towartit Elbow and Saw
kin the edge of the
coastal reef is clearly visible except off Hadaraweb Spit
(19°22′N, 37°20′E) and Sha‘ab Damath (19°14′N, 37°21′E).
176
6.199
1 Bashayer Oil Terminal (19°24′N, 37°20′E) (6.83) is
situated within this reach of the Inner Channel.
(A description of the Inner Channel continues at 6.204)
Principal marks
6.200
1 During winter the mountains are frequently obscured for
long periods by haze or rain clouds, but several summits
amongst the hills nearer the coast are generally clear and
make good landmarks.
Landmarks:
2 Jib
l Ad
r Aweb (19°21′N, 37°09′E) is a range of
irregular mountains standing about 10 miles inland,
midway between Port Sudan and Saw
kin. The
central peak of the range, which rises to a height of
500 m, is pointed and forms a good landmark.
3 Jib
l Warat
b (19°09′N, 37°08′E) is the highest and
most prominent conical mountain in this vicinity. Its
summit forms two small knobs about 640 m in
height; from a distance it resembles a truncated
cone, except from NE and ENE when it appears to
be almost sharp.
Directions
6.201
1 See 6.109.
(Directions continue for the Inner Channel at 6.207)
Local entrances to Inner Channel
6.202
1 See 6.64 and 6.122.
Inner Channel
Saw kin to Trinkitat
Charts 81, 675
Topography
6.203
1 Between Saw
kin (19°07′N, 37°20′E) and Trinkitat
(35 miles SE) a sandy plain, with some hills standing near
the coast, rises gradually to the inland mountain ranges; the
interior is mountainous.
The mountain range approaches the coast about 25 miles
S of Saw
kin where it then turns SW leaving a wide coastal
plain W of Trinkitat.
Description
6.204
1 The Inner Channel between Saw
kin (6.118) and Trinkitat
(6.315) initially extends about 13 miles SSE between the
coastal reef and Q
d Eitwid (19°00′N, 37°27′E) (6.207).
2 The coastal reef, between Saw
kin and Marsa esh Sheikh
Ibrahim (15 miles S) (6.307), extends up to 1
miles
offshore and dries in summer; the reef can usually be seen.
Several narrow islets, covered with mangroves and scrub,
front this part of the coast but they cannot be distinguished
except from aloft, and, as such, the coastline appears
unbroken.
3 The track then leads E for a farther 11 miles, passing S of
Silayet al Shubuk (6.209) and N of Middle Shoal (6.209) to
a position NE of Jinniya Reef (18°53′⋅4N, 37°36′⋅4E)
(6.209); it then continues 22 miles SE to the termination of
the Inner Channel route, about 9 miles E of the entrance to
Trinkitat Harbour.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
Flow
6.205
1 The currents within that part of the Inner Channel which
lies in the S approaches to Saw
kin are extremely variable
and occasionally strong.
Earlier in the last century, during a period between
December and April, little current was experienced in this
area, the rate seldom exceeded  kn. It would appear during
this period of the year that there is a fairly constant W and
NW set; this set is probably influenced by the S winds
which prevail in this part of the Red Sea.
2 Caution. Due to the unpredictable nature of the currents
in this area the approach to any of the islets and dangers,
which lie in the S approach to Saw
kin, should be made in
daylight hours only.
Cautions
6.206
1 The coast S of Saw
kin is frequently obscured by dust
and mirage.
That part of the coast which lies on the SW side of
Sha‘ab el Shubuk (6.214) is not visible from the seaward
side of this reef.
The area S of the chain of reefs which includes Burns
Reef (19°07′N, 37°30′E), Fasmat al Waladab (1 mile WSW)
and Waladab al Beedh (2 miles WSW) contains many reefs
and has only been partially examined. It would be dangerous
to attempt to pass through this area.
Directions
(continued from 6.201)
6.207
1 From a position about 1 miles SW of No 9
Light-beacon (19°10′N, 37°24′E), NE of the entrance
channel to Saw
kin, the track initially leads S, passing:
ENE of Graham Point (19°08′N, 37°21′E) (6.147),
thence:
2 W of Waladab al Beedh (19°06′N, 37°26′E) which lies
at the W end of a chain of reefs that extend about
5 miles WSW from Burns Reef to a position
within 2 miles of the coastal reef, on the E side of
the Inner Channel. Fasmat al Waladab, over which
the sea generally breaks, lies in the central part of
this chain; several detached reefs lie in this vicinity.
Many years ago two shoal patches (positions
doubtful) were reported to lie about 5 cables S of
this area of reefs. Thence:
3 W of the detached coral reefs (19°04′N, 37°26′E)
which stand on a shoal with a least depth over it of
5⋅5 m, which lies in the NW part of Q
d Eitwid.
Q
d Eitwid is an area of some islets, and numerous
reefs and shoals, which fronts the coast for 11 miles
S from Fasmat al Waladab (19°07′N, 37°27′E). The
sea breaks over some of these dangers. There is no
navigable passage between the reefs. Thence:
4 E of the beacon (metal post, T-shaped topmark, 3 m in
height) (19°04′N, 37°24′E) which stands close off
the E side of the coastal reef, E of Marsa Had
d
Gab
(19°04′N, 37°22′E).
6.208
1 The route continues along the recommended track, as
shown on the chart, passing (with positions given from
Jinniya Reef (18°53′⋅4N, 37°36′⋅4E)):
177
E of the beacon (13 miles WNW) (metal post,
T-shaped topmark, 3 m in height) which stands on
the edge of the coastal reef, thence:
W of a shoal patch (11 miles WNW), with a least
depth over it of 7⋅3 m, which lies on the W side of
Q
d Eitwid (6.207) about 1 mile N of South West
Islet. Thence:
2 W of South West Islet (10
miles WNW) a sandy
islet, with some coarse grass growing on it, which
lies about 3 miles SW of Q
d Eitwid Islet. Q
d
Eitwid Islet is the NE-most of a group of islets
known locally as Al Zaharat. A small unnamed
islet, which lies about 2 miles SW of Q
d Eitwid
Islet, has some coarse grass growing on it, thence:
3 W of a shoal patch (9 miles WNW), with a least
depth over it of 7⋅3 m, which lies about 1
miles
SSE of South West Islet, thence:
E of the beacon (11 miles W) (position approximate)
which stands near the centre of the coastal reef.
Thence:
6.209
1 The track then leads mainly E following the
recommended track, as shown on the chart, passing (with
positions given from Jinniya Reef (18°53′⋅4N, 37°36′⋅4E)):
S of the shoal patch (9 miles WNW), with a least
depth over it of 9⋅1 m, which lies close N of the
recommended track, and noting the patch with a
depth of 10⋅1 m over it close S. Thence:
2 S of Silayet al Shubuk (South East Reef) (8 miles
WNW) noting the shoal patch, with a least depth
over it of 9⋅1 m, which lies on the recommended
track, S of the reef. Silayet al Shubuk, over which
the sea generally breaks, is marked by a beacon
(metal post, cone topmark, 5 m in height). Thence:
N of Middle Shoal (4
miles WNW) a detached coral
head, thence:
3 S of Eitwid Islet (8 miles NNW), a sandy islet
fringed by a reef on which bushes grow on its NE
end. The islet forms a good landmark for this
section of the Inner Channel. No attempt should be
made to pass between Eitwid Islet and Q
d Eitwid
Islet (6.208). Thence:
4 N of Jinniya Reef (Corner Reef) the N-most of two
detached reefs which lie off the NE corner of
Sha‘ab el Shubuk (6.214). The reef, over which the
sea generally breaks, is marked by a beacon
(masonry base, metal post, cage topmark). During
periods of calm weather, when the sea does not
break, the reef is usually visible. A shoal bank, with
a least depth over it of 6⋅4 m, lies about 1
miles
NW of the reef. Thence:
6.210
1 The track continues SE following the recommended track,
as shown on the chart, to the S end of the Inner Channel,
passing (with positions given from Jinniya Reef (18°53′⋅4N,
37°36′⋅4E)):
2 SW of Dhanab al Qirsh (Green Reef) (6 miles ENE)
which is awash on its W and N sides, but, on its
SE side, it is submerged; two below-water coral
heads lie close off the W side of the reef. A coral
head, with a least depth over it of 4⋅6 m, lies about
2 miles NNE of Dhanab al Qirsh; depths in this
locality are shoal. Thence:
3 SW of Harorayeet (Two Islets) (8 miles E) which is
actually made up of one large, one small and one
tiny islet. The central islet is 4 m in height and has
some stunted bushes growing on it; numerous sea
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6

birds nest on this islet and it forms a good
landmark, thence:
4 NE of Q
d Hogit (8 miles SE) an extensive, partially
submerged reef marked near its centre by a
conspicuous beacon (conical stone base, diamond
topmark, 5 m in height) standing on a small coral
patch around which a sandbank sometimes forms;
the E part of this reef is usually visible but its W
part is seldom seen unless there is a swell causing
the sea to break over it, thence:
5 SW of Endeavour Shoals (10 miles ESE) which lie on
the NE side of the fairway, from about 3 to 6 miles
S of Harorayeet. A least depth over the shoals of
10⋅1 m lies about 3 miles ESE of Q
d Hogit.
Thence:
6 NE of Melita Patch (11 miles SE) and Cygnet Patch,
which lies a farther 5 cables SE, over which there
are least depths of 9⋅4 and 9⋅8 m respectively. There
are unnamed detached shoal patches on the NE side
of the fairway, over which there are least depths of
9⋅1 and 7⋅9 m respectively, lying about 2 miles E
and ENE of Melita Patch.
7 Caution. Due to the various detached shoal patches in
this vicinity it is necessary to navigate with care,
thence:
SW of Bream Patches (16 miles ESE), an area of
reduced depths which lies on the NE side of the
fairway, thence:
8 SW of Bonito Patches (22 miles ESE) another area of
reduced depths situated on the SW side of Talla
Talla Saqir. Talla Talla Saqir is an island of raised
coral with cliffs on its SW side, but sandy and
sloping on its NE side; a prominent cairn stands
6 cables N of the summit of the island, which is
bare and rises to a height of 13 m. The island is
fringed by a coral reef; a shallow bank extends up
to 6 cables from its W side.
Anchorage
6.211
1 Anchorage, which is sheltered from all except SE winds,
may be obtained as shown on the chart, S of Q
d Hogit
(18°49′N, 37°43′E) in a depth of 18 m, mud, with the
beacon bearing 018°, distant 4 cables.
Anchorage may also be obtained off the SE end of Talla
Talla Saqir (18°47′N, 38°01′E) in depths from 31 to 36 m,
mud, or, in good holding ground, 2 to 3 cables off the reef
bordering the S side of the island, as shown on the chart, in
a depth of about 18 m. During E winds a fairly good
anchorage may be obtained off the W end of the island but
keep in depths of at least 27 m.
SHUBUK CHANNEL
General information
Chart 675
Description
6.212
1 Shubuk Channel (18°47′N, 37°35′E) leads from its SE
entrance in Marsa Maqdam (6.322), about 25 miles, generally
NW, to Marsa Esh Sheikh Ibrahim (18°53′N, 37°25′E)
(6.307).
The route through Shubuk Channel is reported to be
excellent for small vessels during periods of heavy weather;
the channel is often used by tugs towing barges.
2 Many years ago, a British warship used the channel
without experiencing any serious difficulties. Nothing is
gained in distance by using Shubuk Channel as compared
with the adjacent section of Inner Channel (6.204).
Local knowledge is required for use of Shubuk Channel.
Principal mark
6.213
1 Landmark:
Jib
l Warat
b (19°09′N, 37°08′E) (6.200).
Directions
Trinkitat to Marsa esh Sheikh Ibrahim
6.214
1 From a position about 5 miles ENE of Trinkitat Harbour
(18°41′N, 37°45′E) the track leads initially WNW for
9 miles, through Marsa Maqdam (6.322), to the E entrance
of Shubuk Channel (6.212), from where the track continues
for a farther 25 miles to a position E of Marsa Esh Sheikh
Ibrahim (6.307), passing (with positions given from the
beacon standing on the NW part of Sha‘ab Simbel
(18°46′⋅5N, 37°35′⋅4E)):
NNE of Fairway Patch (11 miles ESE), a coral shoal,
thence:
2 NNE of Rambler Shoal (9
miles ESE), a coral shoal.
Maqdam Patches, which lie SSW of Rambler Shoal
and E of Ras Maqdam, consist of several shoal
patches; the sea breaks over the shoal patch with a
least depth over it of 2⋅1 m, which lies about 1 mile
ENE of Ras Maqdam. Thence:
3 SSW of a beacon (red concrete base, red post, cylinder
shape over sphere topmark, 5 m in height)
(9
miles E) which marks the SE extremity of
Sha‘ab el Shubuk. Sha‘ab el Shubuk, the NW end
of which lies about 3 miles E of Marsa esh Sheikh
Ibrahim (18°53′N, 37°25′E) is a little known area of
reefs which extend 17 miles ESE. The area, in
which there are numerous low sandy islets, many
with bushes on them, is intersected by narrow
channels. The N edge of the reef is submerged and
much broken. It should be given a wide berth; the
NE edge is usually visible, thence:
SSW of Passage Islet (9 miles E) which lies at the
SE end of of a chain of cays which includes Low
Islet and Reef Islet. Round Islet lies N of these
islets, close to the NE edge of the reef. The islet has
a small summit near its centre and is the most
conspicuous, and:
4 NNE of a shoal (9 miles ESE), with a least depth over
it of 5⋅5 m, which lies on the NNW side of
Maqdam Patches, close NE of a chain of three small
islets.
6.215
1 Thence from Reef Islet to Shubuk Channel, passing:
SSW of Reef Islet (8 miles E), thence:
SSW of the three small islets (7 miles E) situated on
the SW side of Sha‘ab el Shubuk (6.214), thence:
SSW of the unnamed islet (6 miles E), 1⋅2 m in
height, which lies on the E side of a small passage
in Sha‘ab El Shubuk. Thence:
2 NNE of the beacon (red cylinder topmark, 4 m in
height) (5
miles ESE) which stands near the edge
of the reef situated close NE of Melita Point; noting
the shoal patch, with a least depth of 9⋅4 m over it,
which lies in mid-fairway. Sandhills Point (18°44′N,
37°38′E) lies 2 miles WSW of Melita Point and is
so named for the several sandhills standing on it,
Melita Point attains heights from 3 to 5 m and is

178
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
covered with scrub. Three small islets lie NE of
Melita Point, close within the SW edge of this reef,
thence:
3 SSW of Sumar Islet (5 miles E) which is the W-most
of several islets situated on this part of Sha‘ab El
Shubuk. A beacon (masonry) stands on the edge of
the reef close W of the islet. Thence:
Into the E end of Shubuk Channel.
6.216
1 Shubuk Channel. From a position about 4 cables SSW
of Sumar Islet, the track continues, passing (positions given
from the beacon standing on the NW part of Sha‘ab Simbel
(18°46′⋅5N, 37°35′⋅4E)):
SSW of Long Island (4 miles E) which lies on the NW
side of Sumar Inlet (6.221), thence:
2 NNE of the detached coral reef (3 miles ESE) on
which stands an unnamed islet, 1⋅5 m in height.
Sheikh Mahmud Islet lies about 1 mile WSW of the
reef and is conspicuous, thence:
NNW of Sha‘ab Daydalib (2 miles ESE) a reef
which dries in patches. Sitarab stands on the S part
of this reef; two further islets lie about 6 cables
WNW of Sitarab. Thence:
3 NNW of the two unnamed islets (2 miles E), which
stand on coral reefs on the S side of the fairway; a
beacon stands on the W-most islet, thence:
SSW of the coral reef (awash) (2 miles ENE) which
lies on the W side of the area of reported foul
ground off the S side of Sha‘ab el Shubuk (6.214),
thence:
6.217
1 From Abu Terrda Islets to the inshore section of the track,
passing:
S of Abu Terrda Islets (2 miles NE) which stand on
the S side of Sha‘ab El Shubuk, thence:
N of Sha‘ab Teeta (1 mile E) which forms the E part
of a coral reef on the S side of Shubuk Channel;
two small islets stand on the E side of this reef.
Thence:
2 N of the beacon (red, can topmark) which stands on
the NW part of Sha‘ab Simbel, the W part of a
coral reef which lies on the S side of the fairway
through Shubuk Channel; two small islets stand on
this part of the reef, thence:
S of Kad Larbut Islet (2 miles NW), an islet standing
on the S side of Sha‘ab el Shubuk; a further small
islet stands on the reef about 6 cables N, thence:
3 N of Sha‘ab Ali (2
miles WSW) (position
approximate) which is nearly surrounded by an area
containing numerous dangers through which it is
unsafe to navigate; a small islet lies about 4 cables
E, on the W side of a detached reef. Thence:
S of the beacon (black and white square topmark)
(3 miles W) which stands at the SW corner of
Sha‘ab Kurne, the named S edge of Sha‘ab el
Shubuk at the W end of the Shubuk Channel.
6.218
1 Inshore channel. This close inshore section of the route
is complicated, and, as such, is marked by numerous beacons
arranged with red on the port hand and black and white on
the starboard, when proceeding N towards Port Sudan (6.26)
or Saw
kin (6.118).
The track, marked by these beacons, leads generally NW
179
between the coast and coastal reefs, and Sha‘ab el Shubuk
(6.214); its layout is best seen from the chart.
Dangerous under-water rocks lie on both sides of this
section of the fairway.
6.219
1 Southern entrance. From the W end of Shubuk Channel
(6.212) the southern entrance to the inshore channel is
through a narrow gap in the offshore coastal reef. A shoal,
with a least depth over it of 3⋅7 m, lies close E of the
E-most beacon (black and white, triangle topmark) of the
two beacons, standing on the small detached coral reef on
the N side of the entrance. A further shoal, with a least
depth over it of 7⋅3 m, lies between the two beacons (red
square topmark and red circular topmark, respectively) which
stand on the detached reef on S side of the entrance.
2 A shoal, with a least depth over it of 4⋅6 m, extends W
from the W side of the coral reef on the N side of the
entrance. A beacon stands on the shore at the W end of this
first reach of the offshore channel.
6.220
1 Northern entrance. From a position at the N end of the
inshore channel, about 1
miles E of the entrance to Marsa
esh Sheikh Ibrahim (18°53′N, 37°25′E) (6.307), the
approach is made on a leading line.
Leading beacons:
Front beacon (red, topmark triangle, apex down)
(18°49′⋅5N, 37°27′⋅3E) (position approximate).
Rear beacon (red, topmark triangle, apex up) (about
2 cables from front beacon).
2 From a position about 1
miles E of the entrance to
Marsa esh Sheikh Ibrahim at the N end of the inshore
channel, the entrance is approached on the alignment (186°)
of these leading beacons. The track leads W of a shoal with
a least depth over it of 3⋅7 m; and close E of a shoal with a
least depth over it of 8⋅3 m.
3 A dangerous rock lies about 2 cables NNW of the front
leading entrance beacon; two shoals, with least depths over
them of 5⋅5 m and 6⋅4 m, lie in the narrow section of the N
entrance to the inshore channel, close E of Ras Shabarango
(18°50′N, 37°27′E).
Sumar Inlet
Description
6.221
1 Sumar Inlet (18°47′N, 37°41′E) is a break in Sha‘ab el
Shubuk (6.214) which connects the Inner Channel (6.156)
with Shubuk Channel (6.212).
Gap Islet lies on the W side of the N entrance to the
inlet.
2 Outer Gap Beacon (white masonry) stands on a small islet
about 4 cables N of Gap Islet; Inner Gap Beacon (white
masonry) stands on the E side of the N entrance to the
channel, about 2 cables ESE of the islet.
Long Island extends along the NW side of the channel
through the inlet, about 6 cables SW of Gap Islet.
3 Other openings exist in Sha‘ab el Shubuk, between Sumar
Inlet and the SE extremity of the reef, but they should only
be attempted under favourable conditions and with local
knowledge.
Anchorage may be obtained, in depths from 11 to 16 m,
within the inlet.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
MINOR HARBOURS, INLETS AND BAYS
Marsa Girîd
Chart 158
Description
6.222
1 Marsa Girîd (22°24′N, 36°26′E) is a small inlet, entered
through a narrow passage, about 1 miles S of Ras Abu
Fatma (5.19).
The easiest approach to the inlet is to pass N of Gezîret el
Dibia (6.15). When about 5 cables off the inlet, look for the
narrow passage with depths of about 3⋅5 m which leads
through the coastal reef to the inlet.
2 The narrow entrance passage is not marked but a long,
low and narrow building stands on the shore, W of the inner
end of the entrance passage and helps to narrow the area of
search.
The eye is the best aid to navigation and to avoid the
coral outcrops.
A jetty extends E from the shore from a position towards
the N end of the long, low and narrow building.
Anchorage
6.223
1 A well sheltered anchorage, with good holding ground,
may be obtained in depths from 5 to 10 m off the shore and
the off-lying coral reefs.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this anchorage.
Marsa Halaib
Description
6.224
1 Marsa Halaib (22°14′N, 36°39′E) lies between the S side
of Gezîret Halaib and the coast to the S.
Gezîret Kwolala lies close N of Gezîret Halaib, on the
coral reef which extends about 7 miles N from the coast;
both islands are low and sandy.
The channel between James Point, the SW extremity of
Gezîret Halaib, and the coast SW has not been surveyed; it
is encumbered by a sandspit that dries, so connecting the
point with the coast SE.
2 A moderately high coral cliff rises close W of Marsa
Halaib.
The village of Halaib stands near the coast about 2 miles
S of Gezîret Halaib; a white fort, about 6 m in height, stands
in the centre of the village on low ground close to the shore.
From Sea Point, the SE extremity of Gezîret Halaib, a
reef extends about 5 cables S; numerous coral boulders,
which dry at half tide, stand on the E side of this reef. A
beacon (iron post, topmark triangle apex up, 4 m in height)
marks the S end of the reef; a rock awash lies close SE.
3 An above-water rock, 1⋅2 m in height, stands about
2 cables ESE of Sea Point; Sandy Islet lies about
2 cables S of the point.
North West Rock, a rock awash, lies 7 cables SSW of Sea
Point near the NW extremity of the offshore reef which
extends about 2
miles NW, parallel to the shore, from the
entrance to Marsa Shellâl (6.233). A spit, on which stands a
rock awash, extends about 2 cables N from North West
Rock; this spit is marked at its N extremity by a
light-beacon (metal tower, 4 m in height).
Caution
6.225
1 The shores of Marsa Halaib, except for the shore in front
of the village, are bordered by reefs which extend up to
3 cables offshore; there are also many detached shoals.
180
Protected area
6.226
1 The coral reefs surrounding the coast between Marsa
Halaib (22°14′N, 36°39′E) and Râs Banâs (110 miles NNW)
have been declared protected areas.
See 6.11 and Appendix III.
Magnetic anomaly
6.227
1 Local deflection of the compass is reported to occur off
the approaches to Marsa Halaib.
Landmark
6.228
1 A watch tower situated W of Gable Point (22°14′⋅3N,
36°38′⋅7E) makes a good landmark.
Approach
6.229
1 Steer to pass about 1 mile N of the extensive reef
(22°15′N, 36°48′E) (6.15) which lies about 9 miles E of
Marsa Halaib.
When clear of the reef, the line of bearing 253° of a
white fort on the foreshore of Halaib village leads SW
passing about 4 cables N of a shoal, with a least depth over
it of 5⋅5 m, which lies about 3 miles E of the white fort.
The offshore reef should be approached with great caution
until it is possible to identify the entrance fairway. When
approaching the entrance, the eye is the best guide.
Entry
6.230
1 The entrance channel to the harbour lies between the reef
extending S from Sea Point and the offshore reef.
The fairway through the entrance channel has a least
width of about 120 m, with a least depth of 20 m; a shoal,
with a least depth over it of 5⋅2 m, lies about 1
cables
NNW of Marsa Halaib Light-beacon.
2 A beacon (metal post, T-shaped topmark, 4 m in height)
stands on the E side of the offshore reef marking the W side
of the approach to the entrance channel. A further beacon
(metal post, T-shaped topmark) stands about 1 cables
NNW, close SE of North West Rock.
6.231
1 The E side of the entrance fairway is marked by a beacon
(iron post, topmark triangle, apex up, 4 m in height)
(22°14′⋅5N, 36°39′⋅5E) which stands on the reef extending S
from Sea Point. The reef extending S from Sea Point is
more easily identified than the offshore reef which lies on
the W side of the entrance fairway.
2 The W side of the entrance fairway is marked by a
further beacon (square topmark) which stands near the N
extremity of the offshore reef, about 1 cables S of Marsa
Halaib Light-beacon (22°14′⋅6N, 36°39′⋅3E) which marks the
N extremity of the offshore reef.
6.232
1 Within the harbour a beacon (metal post, triangular
topmark, apex up) stands near the SE end of an area of foul
ground marking the N side of a dangerous rock situated
1 cables NE of Gable Point.
A further beacon (metal post, T-shaped topmark) stands
on the W side of the offshore reef about 7 cables E of Gable
Point, and 1 cable S of the beacon (6.230) marking the W
side of the approach to the entrance channel.
6.233
1 Boat channel. Entry may also be made through a break
in the reef, about 5 cables NE of Marsa Shellâl (22°12′⋅1N,
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
36°40′⋅6E). This entrance is intricate and encumbered with
reefs and rocks.
Anchorage
6.234
1 A temporary anchorage may be obtained outside the
harbour entrance, SE of Sandy Islet (22°14′⋅7N, 36°39′⋅6E),
in depths of about 18 m.
North Anchorage is situated W of Sea Point (22°15′⋅0N,
36°39′⋅6E) where anchorage is obtainable in various depths
over mud, sand and shell.
South Anchorage lies E of the village of Halaib where
anchorage is obtainable in depths up to 35 m, mud.
Anchoring on the reefs is prohibited; see 6.226.
Jetty
6.235
1 A pier extends from a position close ENE of the fort.
Marsa Umbeila
Description
6.236
1 Marsa Umbeila (21°58′N, 36°52′E) is a small cove,
entered WSW of the offshore reef, which lies SE of Ras
Hadarba (22°04′N, 36°54′E) (4.15). A beacon stands near
the SW corner of this reef.
To enter the bay, favour the coral reef on the N side of
the approach; then proceed through the narrow entrance
which is marked on each side by black boulders.
A conspicuous tomb stands N of the N side of the
entrance to the bay.
Anchorage
6.237
1 A small anchorage, suitable for use by about three small
vessels, is available close to the head of the bay in a depth
of about 8 m, stiff mud.
Marsa Mar‘ob
Description
6.238
1 Marsa Mar‘ob (21°50′N, 36°52′E) is entered through a
gap in the coastal reef about 13 miles S of Ras Hadarba
(22°04′N, 36°54′E) (4.15). The gap is reported to be easy to
find but unmarked. The position of the inlet has been
reported to lie S of its charted position.
The inlet has two arms, the larger arm extending W and
N, and a narrower arm which extends about 5 cables S from
a position 6 cables within the entrance to the inlet.
2 Reefs fringe the entrance channel; a reef extends from the
N side of the entrance channel, about 5 cables within its the
entrance. A good lookout should be kept on both sides when
entering the inlet.
The N side of the entrance channel should be favoured
until abeam of a sandy bay on the N side of the channel. A
mid-channel course should then be favoured to avoid the
reef extending S from the N side of the entrance channel.
6.239
1 Anchorage. The inlet is reported to provide good
anchorage for vessels up to 30 m in length, in depths from 7
to 12 m, on coral, or sand and mud.
Marsa Gwilaib
Description
6.240
1 Marsa Gwilaib (21°47′N, 36°53′E) is entered through a
narrow gap in the coastal reef, which lies on a NW/SE axis,
181
about 3 miles S of Marsa Mar‘ob (6.238). The coastal reef
extends about 4 cables offshore in this vicinity.
A jetty extends SW from just inside the N side of the
entrance.
Coral reefs fringe the majority of the inlet especially on
its S and W sides; a spit extends S from the N shore in its
inner part; coral heads may be present off the N shore.
6.241
1 Anchorage may be obtained in the middle part of the
inlet, in a depth of 18 m; and also nearer the head of the
inlet in depths from 12 to 14 m, mud and sand, noting the
dangerous rock which lies about 90 m N of this anchorage
position.
6.242
1 Caution. It appears that some confusion has occurred
between Marsa Gwilaib (6.240) and Khr Abu ‘Asal (Marsa
Oseif) (6.243) with regard to accurate positioning of their
entrances. The best practical advice is that the entrance to
Marsa Gwilaib lies on a NW/SE axis whereas the entrance to
Khr Abu ‘Asal lies E/W.
Marsa Oseif
Description
6.243
1 Marsa Oseif (Khr Abu ‘Asal) (21°45′N, 36°52′E) is
entered through a gap in the coastal reef, which, in this
vicinity, extends about 3 cables offshore.
A black boulder stands near the edge of the coastal reef
on the S side of the outer end of the entrance channel.
A quay is situated on the N side of the entrance; from its
entrance the inlet extends about 1 mile W to an inner basin
with three arms.
2 Depths vary from 24 to 58 m in the entrance decreasing
to 6 to 7 m near the head of the S arm of the inlet.
A spit extends from the N shore of the entrance to the
inner basin towards to a coral reef fringing the S shore.
6.244
1 Anchorage may be obtained by vessels up to 30 m in
length in the S arm of the inlet in depths from 6 to 7 m.
Marsa Hamsiat
Description
6.245
1 Marsa Hamsiat (21°42′N, 36°54′E) is entered initially to
the SW through a gap in the coastal reef, following a spit
formed by the coastal reef which extends NE from the S
side of the entrance.
The S side of the entrance is fronted by low cliffs; a sand
spit extends a short way N from the S side of the entrance.
The approach to the inlet is reported to be clear and it is
reported to be easily accessible.
6.246
1 Anchorage may be obtained at the head of the inlet in
depths of 15 m, mud.
Marsa W si‘
Description
6.247
1 Marsa W
si‘ (21°37′N, 36°55′E) is entered through a
relatively wide and clear gap in the coastal reef which leads
to the entrance to the inlet, which then extends about
7 cables W.
Coral boulders stand on the coastal reef on the N side of
the entrance to the inlet; a small cairn stands on the low
sand cliffs which form the S entrance to the inlet.
2 The head of the inlet forms two arms; the S arm is
virtually fringed with coral reefs. The N arm is entered
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
through a very narrow fairway, about 10 m to 15 m wide,
which leads W of a sandspit extending W from the E
entrance point to the arm.
A coral spit extends N from the reef fringing the S shore
of the inlet, from a position W of the coral-filled bay in
which is situated a small rocky islet. In 1993 the spit was
reported to be marked by a stake.
6.248
1 Anchorage may be obtained, with good holding, at the
head of the inlet, S of the E entrance point to the N arm, in
depths from 12 to 16 m, fine sand and mud. The proximity
of the reef may cause concern if a swell enters the inlet
during periods of strong winds.
Marsa Gafatir
Description
6.249
1 Marsa Gafatir (21°35′N, 36°56′E) is entered through a
narrow gap in the coastal reef which appears free from
dangers; from seaward the entrance leads initially W then
SSW.
6.250
1 Anchorage may be obtained for one vessel, due to
limited swinging room, near the head of the inlet.
Local knowledge is required.
Marsa Abu ‘Im ma
Approach
6.251
1 Marsa Abu ‘Im
ma (21°29′N, 36°59′E) is approached
NW of Sha‘ab Halaka (6.16) noting the isolated and
dangerous below-water rock which lies about 1 miles NW
of the NE corner of the reef.
Leading line:
The two conical hills, from 150 to 200 m in height,
which stand W of the head of the inlet, in line
bearing 250°, lead towards the entrance to the inlet.
Principal mark
6.252
1 Landmark:
Jebel Abu ‘Im
ma (21°27′N, 36°58′E), which stands
about 2 miles S of the entrance to Marsa Abu
‘Im
ma, forms a good landmark for approaching the
inlet. The hill is flat topped and forms part of a low
range of hills which extend 10 miles S, parallel with
the coast, and terminate in small straggling
hummocks.
Entry
6.253
1 The inlet is entered through a break in the coastal reef
which extends about 4 cables E from the N and S entrance
points of the inlet.
A beacon (cone topmark, 4 m in height) stands near the
extremity of the coastal reef which extends E from North
Point, the N entrance point to the inlet. A stake stands on
the S side of the entrance, NE of South Point.
2 The entrance channel has a least width of about 1 cable in
the fairway.
The N side of the inlet should be kept aboard, as far as
the sandspit on the NE side of the entrance to North Bay, as
the reefs fringing this side of the inlet are steep-to.
182
Description
6.254
1 North Bay which is entered from the NW side of the
inlet, about 5 cables within the entrance, is encumbered with
coral reefs and has not been examined.
North West Bay, which is entered W of the head of the
inlet, is encumbered with coral reefs and has not been
examined.
2 South East Bay, which is entered E of the head of the
inlet, is encumbered with coral reefs and has not been
examined.
Middle Shoal, a dangerous sand and coral shoal lies in
the fairway about 6 cables within the entrance and is marked
with a stake.
Anchorage
6.255
1 The most convenient anchorage is NNE of Middle Shoal
and E of the entrance to North Bay, in depths of 22 m.
An inner anchorage is also available S of Middle Shoal in
depths from 14⋅6 to 18⋅3 m, mud and coral. This inner
anchorage may be approached passing either side of Middle
Shoal.
Marsa Halaka
Description
6.256
1 Marsa Halaka (21°25′N, 37°01′E) is entered through a
narrow entrance which is not easy to identify.
The inlet has a least width in the fairway, between the
fringing reefs, of 60 m; although the inlet is narrow it is
clear of dangers.
6.257
1 Landmark. A large metal framework tower, once part of
a research project, stands on the offshore reef between Khr
Shin‘
b (6.259) and Marsa Halaka.
6.258
1 Anchorage, with good holding, may be obtained about
1 miles within the inlet, in depths from 18 to 20 m, mud;
the swinging room is limited.
Small vessels may moor in the narrow part of the inlet
with lines to both the N and S shores.
Khor Shin‘ b
Position
6.259
1 Khor Shin‘
b (21°21′N, 37°03′E) is entered through a
narrow gap in the coastal reef, about 4 miles SSE of Marsa
Halaka (6.256).
In the vicinity of the inlet the coastal reef extends about
6 cables NE of the N entrance point to the inlet and 5 cables
ENE of the S point.
Description
6.260
1 The shores of Khor Shin‘
b are fringed with reefs; the
fairway has a least width of about 90 m.
The inlet terminates in three small bays. A shoal, with a
least depth over it of 3⋅7 m (12 ft), lies in the entrance to the
N bay; a drying reef lies across the entrance to the S bay.
A dangerous below-water rock lies near the head of the
inlet, about 2 cables NE of the S entrance point to the W
bay.
Approach
6.261
1 Sha‘ab Shin‘
b (21°23′N, 37°06′E) is a horseshoe-shaped
reef, over which there are dangerous rocks, situated about
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
3 miles ENE of the entrance to Khr Shin‘
b. The reef
encloses a large shallow lagoon which is open on its W side.
Anchorage, giving shelter from N winds, is available in
the N part of the lagoon in depths from 10 to 12 m, sand.
6.262
1 A dangerous, detached, below-water rock lies about
2 miles ENE of the reef; this rock is hard to identify even
from aloft as the sea seldom breaks over it.
A submerged dangerous reef lies a farther 1 miles ENE
of the rock.
Dangerous reefs, over which the sea always breaks, lie
ESE of the entrance to the inlet; an islet stands on the
coastal reef about 4 miles SE of the entrance to the inlet.
Entry
6.263
1 The best time to approach and enter Khr Shin‘
b is with
the sun in the E; when the sun is in the W the reefs ahead
are scarcely visible.
The coastal reef on the N side of the entrance is more
easily seen than on the S, as some parts of it are above
water.
Principal marks
6.264
1 Landmarks:
Quoin Hill (21°20′⋅8N, 36°59′⋅8E) stands close to the
head of the inlet; there is a projection from its S
and highest edge. The hill is sometimes difficult to
identify owing to the high land situated W of it.
2 Jebel Hamamit (21°18′N, 37°02′E), which stands
2 miles S of the inlet, is the S-most but one peak of
the range which extends S of Jebel Abu ‘Im
ma
(6.252).
Jebel Shin‘
b (21°15′N, 36°34′E), which rises 28 miles
WSW of the entrance to the inlet, has a notch in its
summit.
Anchorage
6.265
1 Anchorage may be obtained near the head of the inlet, as
shown on the chart.
Dungun b Bay
Charts 158, 3722
Description
6.266
1 Dungun
b Bay (21°05′N, 37°10′E) is an extensive bay
which extends about 15 miles N between the mainland and
the Ab Shagr
b peninsula.
The entrance to the bay, which lies SW of Ras al Keedan
(6.161) a low, sandy point forming the S extremity of Ab
Shagr
b peninsula, is encumbered with islets and other
dangers.
2 Abu Gosha (20°57′⋅3N, 37°13′⋅2E) is an above-water
rock, 2⋅4 m in height and covered with bushes, situated
3 miles SW of Ras al Keedan about 3 cables within the
edge of the coastal reef.
Sararat, a 2 m high islet standing on a reef which extends
1 mile ENE from it, lies about 1 miles farther WSW of
Abu Gosha.
3 A chain of reefs and rocks extends W from Sararat to the
mainland coast; a line of reefs and low islets also extends
about 3 miles SE. Bathing Islet stands about 1 miles SE
of Sararat on this line of reefs and low islets; both Bathing
Islet and Sararat are covered with low thick shrubs.
183
Landmark
6.267
1 A saltworks chimney (21°03′N, 37°14′E) which stands
WSW of Ras Ab Shagr
b (6.16) is conspicuous.
Pearl farms
6.268
1 It is prohibited to enter Dungan
b Bay due to the
presence of pearl farms.
Currents
6.269
1 After fresh N winds strong and unpredictable currents
funnel down from the bay.
Raw ya anchorage
6.270
1 Raw
ya Anchorage (20°54′N, 37°12′E) lies S and W of
the dangers extending from Sararat (6.266) and is well
sheltered.
The anchorage may be approached through the Inner
Channel from either the S (6.172) or E (6.166).
An anchorage berth, with good holding, may be obtained
in a depth of 12⋅8 m, sand, with the fort at Muhammad Qol
bearing 251°, and Gad Mesharifa (20°53′⋅7N, 37°13′⋅9E)
bearing 124°. A shoal, with a least depth over it of 4⋅6 m,
lies about 4 cables NNW of this berth.
Muammad Qol
Chart 3722 plan of MuÖammad Qol
Description
6.271
1 Muammad Qol (20°54′N, 37°10′E) is a village which is
situated on the NW shore of a small bay fringed with coral
reefs and fronted by numerous dangers.
The fort at Muammad Qol is conspicuous.
A jetty, which projects from in front of the village, has a
least depth alongside its head of 1⋅2 m.
Approach and entry
6.272
1 The approach to Muammad Qol is made from Raw
ya
Anchorage (6.270) as indicated by the three leading lines
shown on the chart.
The entrance channel is narrow, winding and intricate but
with careful attention to navigation and soundings a small
and handy vessel may proceed in a least depth of 8⋅2 m to
the anchorage situated off the village.
2 Two detached drying reefs lie on each side of the
entrance channel about 5 cables E, and 6 cables ESE,
respectively from the fort. A beacon (stone; 2 m in height)
stands near the E side of the W-most reef, and a similar
beacon stands towards the N end of the E-most reef.
The passage through the reefs is indicated by three pairs
of leading beacons.
Directions
6.273
1 From a position in the NW part of Raw
ya Anchorage
the approach initially leads WSW.
Outer leading beacons:
Front beacon (post on concrete base, topmark black
triangle, apex down, 4 m in height) (20°54′⋅2N,
37°10′⋅1E) standing on the NE edge of the W-most
drying reef.
2 Rear beacon (post on concrete base, topmark black
triangle, apex down, 4 m in height) (1060 m from
front beacon) which stands on the foreshore, S of
the fort.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
From Raw
ya Anchorage the alignment (245°) of these
beacons leads to a position about 2 cables N of the E-most
drying reef, at the head of the second reach of the entrance
channel.
6.274
1 Intermediate leading beacons:
Front beacon (post on concrete base, topmark black
globe, 4 m in height) (20°53′⋅7N, 37°10′⋅0E) which
stands near the edge of the coastal reef.
Rear beacon (post on concrete base, topmark black
globe, 4 m in height) (240 m from front beacon)
which stands on the foreshore.
2 From a position about 2 cables N of the E-most drying
reef, the alignment (199°) of these beacons leads through the
second reach of the entrance channel, to a position about
2 cables S of the W-most drying reef taking care not to drift
E of the leading line as a reef on which stand dangerous
below-water rocks, lies close E of the leading line, on the W
side of the E-most drying reef.
6.275
1 Inner leading beacons:
Front beacon (post on concrete base, topmark black
globe, 4 m in height) (20°54′⋅1N, 37°09′⋅6E) which
stands offshore of the drying reef fringing the coast
in front of the village.
Rear beacon (post on concrete base, topmark black
globe, 4 m in height) (90 m from front beacon)
which stands on the foreshore of the village, close S
of the fort.
2 From a position about 2 cables S of the W-most drying
reef the alignment (301°) of these beacons leads through the
third reach of the entrance channel to the anchorage off the
village noting the dangerous below-water rock, and the rock
awash, which lie NE of the leading line, about 1 cable SW
of the W-most drying reef; also the rock awash and the
dangerous below-water rock which lie about 140 m E. A
reef, on which stand further dangerous below-water rocks,
lies SW of the inner leading line about 4 cables SE of the
fort.
Anchorage
6.276
1 Anchorage may be obtained, as shown on the chart, about
2 cables SE of the fort, in a depth of about 12 m, sand and
mud. Swinging room is limited.
Marsa Inkeifal
Chart 3722 plan of Marsa Inkeifal
Description
6.277
1 Marsa Inkeifal (20°47′N, 37°10′E) is a small inlet entered
through a break in the coastal reef about 7 miles S of
Muammad Qol (6.271).
The approach to the inlet is clear; the N and S sides of
the entrance are both marked by beacons; N beacon
(concrete base, black cone topmark), S beacon (concrete
base, red drum topmark).
The shores of the inlet are fringed by reefs; the head of
the inlet dries.
Entry
6.278
1 The entry to the inlet is easy. If approaching from the N
beware of the shoal that extends S and E from the N entry
beacon.
184
It is advisable to have the entrance well open before
making the final approach, and to maintain a mid-channel
course.
Caution. The reefs fringing the inlet extend NW of the S
entry beacon. Care should be taken not to alter course, into
the main part of the inlet, before clearing the reefs on the S
side of the inlet.
Anchorage
6.279
1 A good anchorage may be obtained in the central part of
the inlet in depths of about 10 m, mud.
Local knowledge is advised.
Caution. Dramatic reversals of wind direction are not
uncommon within the anchorage. It would seem that
Dungun
b Bay funnels N winds to make the conditions
noticeably fresher in this area.
Marsa Tank f l
Chart 3722
Description
6.280
1 Marsa Tankf
l (20°45′N, 37°11′E), which is entered
through a gap in the coastal reef about 2 miles S of the
entrance to Marsa Inkeifal (6.277), has not been examined.
The approach is clear except for Brandon Rock (6.168)
which lies about 1 miles E of the entrance.
The inlet is mostly filled by a reef.
Marsa Salak
Chart 158
Description
6.281
1 Marsa Salak (20°26′N, 37°10′E) is a small, narrow and
almost landlocked inlet lying within a sandspit that has a
sandy islet lying close S.
About 1 mile within the entrance there is a narrows, with
a least depth of 2⋅0 m, where the width of the channel is
reduced to about 10 m.
Topography
6.282
1 A group of sandy, barren hillocks stand about 7 miles
inland from the inlet rising to an elevation of about 90 m
above the level of the plain.
Approach and entry
6.283
1 The approach to the inlet is difficult.
A dangerous, isolated, coral head, marked by a beacon
(red T-shaped topmark), lies close to the middle of the
approach channel, about 1
miles ESE of the S end of the
sandspit. This coral head marks the W extremity of Sha’b
Salak, a detached series of reefs. The alignment (350°) of
two beacons on the shore leads W of these reefs. Pass W of
this beacon where the channel is about 3 cables wide with a
least known depth of 11 m.
2 Note the two beacons, which mark the entrance to an
inlet situated within the coral reef now closed off by coral
growth, standing about 1 mile N of the entrance to Marsa
Salak.
The entrance to the inlet is intricate but is easily seen in
good daylight; the eye is the only guide.
Dangers
6.284
1 There are scattered coral heads in the area NE of the
entrance to Marsa Salak and off the extremity of the coastal
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
reef marked by the boiler of a wrecked tug. Navigation
within this area requires good daylight.
See 6.175.
Anchorage
6.285
1 Anchorage may be obtained in the outer part of the inlet
in depths of about 10 m, mud. There is probably not much
shelter against S winds.
Local knowledge is required for use of the anchorages.
Marsa Arakiyai
Description
6.286
1 Marsa Arakiyai (20°13′N, 37°10′E) is a nearly landlocked
cove fringed with reefs.
A coral islet stands on the coral reef on the S side of the
inner end of the entrance channel.
A conspicuous watch tower, part of an army post, stands
on the N side of the entrance.
Approach and entry
6.287
1 The N end of a steep-to detached reef, which lies 6 cables
E of the entrance to the inlet, is marked by a beacon
(concrete base, red drum topmark, 4 m in height) (reported a
stump in 1995).
Coral heads lie between the N and S ends of this steep-to
detached reef and the coastal reef, across the approaches to
the cove.
A beacon marks the N side of the entrance through the
coastal reef to the cove (black cone topmark). A similar
beacon marks the S side (red T-shaped topmark).
2 A sandspit extends S from the N side of the entrance, S
of the watch tower, where the fairway is reduced in width to
about 27 m between the spit and the coral islet.
Depths in the entrance channel are from about 18 to
27 m; depths within the cove are from about 8 to 14 m.
There are many coral heads near the surface within the cove.
Anchorage
6.288
1 Anchorage may be obtained in depths from 8 to 14 m,
sand and coral, in the N part of the cove with the buildings
just N of the watch tower roughly abeam.
Anchorage may also be obtained in depths from 18 to
24 m, mud, off the E side of the coral islet. This is close to
the entrance and there is little swinging room such that there
is only room for one vessel with a short scope of cable.
During N winds it is necessary to keep the weather reef
aboard, but the holding is good and the cove remains
smooth in all winds.
Marsa Aweitir
Description
6.289
1 Marsa Aweitir (20°10′N, 37°11′E) is a gap in the coastal
reef about 3 cables wide and about the same in length, with
depths of 47 m over mud, reducing to about 14 m close off
the reefs.
Between Marsa Arakiyai (6.286) and Marsa Aweitir the
coastal reef extends up to 5 cables offshore, there are some
below-water rocks lying close to its edge, which is steep-to.
A small stream flows into the head of the cove.
2 Anchorage. The cove provides a favourable anchorage
for local craft which anchor close inshore. There is just room
for a small vessel to lie in a depth of 37 m, moored head
185
and stern, with an anchor close to the N reef and a short
scope of cable. The cove affords scarcely any shelter.
Local knowledge is required.
6.290
1 D
ra Lagoon, not named on chart, lies about 2 miles S of
Marsa Aweitir where some disused saltworks are situated.
Marsa Figg
Description
6.291
1 Marsa Figg
(Fij
b) (20°02′N, 37°12′E) is entered
through a break in the coastal reef, passing S of a narrow
peninsula which extends SSW from the head of the inlet and
which is bordered by reefs that extend up to 6 cables off its
E and S sides.
The inlet is entered through a channel in the coastal reef,
passing S of a sandy islet which stands on the edge of the
reef extending S from the narrow peninsula; another smaller
sandy islet lies close N.
2 The inlet narrows N of the entrance reducing to a muddy
creek at its head.
The inlet is encumbered with reefs and shoals on which
stand many islets.
Landmark
6.292
1 Weihemehi Tower (19°59′N, 37°09′E) (chart 82) stands
on a small hill, about 4 miles SSW of Marsa Figg
(Fij
b).
This ancient, square topped tower, about 5 m in height, is
visible from seaward.
Approach
6.293
1 The line of bearing 310° of a prominent hill near the
coast leads towards the entrance. This hill is often visible
when the mountains inland are obscured by clouds.
Entry
6.294
1 The N side of the dog-legged entrance channel is marked
by two beacons.
The outer beacon (concrete base, black cone topmark, 4 m
in height) stands on the N side of the channel on the outer
edge of the coastal reef, about 6 cables ESE of the islet
which stands on the edge of the reef extending S from the
narrow peninsula.
2 The second beacon (concrete base, black diamond over
black bar topmark, 4 m in height) stands about 3 cables E of
the islet, on the N side of the channel near the edge of the
coastal reef.
A further beacon (concrete base, black diamond topmark,
4 m in height) stands on the N side of the inner end of the
entrance channel, close S of the islet.
6.295
1 Directions. The line of bearing 313° of the beacon
situated on the N side of the entrance, 3 cables E of the islet,
leads between the outer beacon standing on the extremity of
the coastal reef; and a coral patch, with a least depth over it
of 4 m, which lies about 1 cables WSW.
Anchorage
6.296
1 Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels, in depths of
about 23 m in the entrance to the inlet about 4 cables E of
the islet.
Anchorage may also be obtained within the inlet, W of
the islet, but here the anchorage space is limited.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
Marsa ‘Ar s
Description
6.297
1 Marsa ‘Ars (20°00′N, 37°12′E) is an inlet entered
1 miles S of the entrance to Marsa Figg
(Fij
b) (6.291). It
is only suitable for use by boats.
The coastal reef between the entrances to these two inlets
extends, in places, up to nearly 6 cables offshore; numerous
dangerous rocks and shoals lie within about 3 cables of the
edge of the coastal reef.
2 The entrance channel, which leads between the coastal
reefs, is about 90 m wide; the inner end of the channel leads
S of a spit extending SSW of the N entrance point to the
inlet. The passage S of this spit is very narrow and the inlet
shoals rapidly once inside.
The coastal reef extends about 5 cables ENE of the S
entrance point. A rock, with a least depth over it of 2⋅4 m
lies in the approach to the entrance about 1
cables NE of
the extremity of the coastal reef.
3 Several patches of coral reef lie from 2 to 5 cables S of
the rock, with a least depth over it of 2⋅4 m (8 ft), and about
1 cable E of the coastal reef.
Khr Agwatiri flows into the head of the inlet and
discharges heavy flood water, at times.
Caution. The fringing reef on the S side of the entrance
was reported (2001) to have extended further NE than
charted.
Marsa Dar r
Chart 82
Description
6.298
1 Marsa Darr (19°50′N, 37°16′E) is entered through a
break in the coastal reef, about 120 m wide, situated about
15 miles N of Port Sudan (6.26).
On its N side, the inlet lies between the coastal reef and a
sandbank. On its SE, S and W sides lie three flat islets
covered with bushes.
2 The inlet lies at the mouth of the largest valley in the
region which is formed about 3 miles inland by the junction
of two further valleys. Winter freshets bring down quantities
of mud and sand from the mountains such that the head of
the inlet is silting up.
Approach
6.299
1 The inlet is approached through the Inner Channel and is
entered through a gap in the coastal reef, opposite Tallai
Mira (19°50′N, 37°23′E) which lies on the E side of the
offshore chain of reefs.
The entrance to the inlet is difficult to identify particularly
during the afternoon when the glare of the sun on the sea
precludes good, local, offshore visibility.
2 A detached reef lies about 1 cables off the coastal reef,
close S of the entrance to the inlet. The reef dries in places,
and, except in calm weather, the sea breaks over it. A clear
channel, about 1 cable wide, lies between the detached reef
and the coastal reef.
3 Leave the detached reef clear to port then alter course W
towards the entrance to the inlet favouring the S side of the
entrance channel. The coastal reef on the S side of the
entrance is more difficult to identify especially in calm
weather.
The SE edge of the coastal reef, on the N side of the
entrance, is marked by a heap of small boulders.
186
Anchorage
6.300
1 Anchorage may be obtained about 3 cables SSE of the
entrance to the inlet, between the coastal reef and the
detached reef, in depths of about 12 m. The bottom is coral
and rock. There is little swinging room in this berth and it is
as well to have a stern anchor to the coastal reef to the SW
to guard against a squall from offshore during the night
which is not an unusual occurrence.
2 Anchorage may also be obtained NE of the entrance to
the inlet, about 2 cables N of the detached reef, in depths of
about 18 m. This anchorage berth is open especially to the
prevailing N winds.
Marsa Hal t
Description
6.301
1 Marsa Halt (19°47′N, 37°16′E) is entered, about 3 miles
S of the entrance to Marsa Darr (6.298), through a channel
which leads SSW through the coastal reef.
The channel leads to a shallow lagoon used mainly by
dhows.
Marsa Ata
Description
6.302
1 Marsa Ata (19°17′N, 37°20′E) is entered about 5 miles S
of Hadaraweb Spit (6.198).
The entrance to the inlet is best identified, under
favourable conditions of light, by a good lookout and with
the help of two beacons which stand either side of the outer
end of the entrance channel.
Depths up to 2 cables off the entrance to the inlet are
irregular. A dangerous uncharted reef is reported to lie in the
SE approach to the inlet, about 1 cables S of the beacon
marking the E side of the entrance.
Entry
6.303
1 The inlet is entered passing clear of the uncharted reef
which lies SE of the entrance, then proceeding N between
the two beacons marking the outer end of the entrance
channel; W side beacon (concrete base, red can topmark) and
E side beacon (concrete base, black triangle topmark, apex
up).
Anchorage
6.304
1 Anchorage, which is well protected, may be obtained
within the inlet, in depths of about 10 m. There is little
swinging room.
Marsa Kuwai
Description
6.305
1 Marsa Kuwai (19°14′N, 37°20′E) lies within Sha‘ab
Damath, a reef situated about 3 miles S of the entrance to
Marsa Ata.
Sha‘ab Damath is marked near its N end by Marsa Kuwai
No 3 Light-beacon (black framework tower, white bands on
black concrete base). The sea does not always break over
this reef and its S end is not always visible.
2 The mainland coast in the vicinity of the inlet consists of
a raised coral ledge, about 1 m in height, backed by desert
with some scrub.
The alternative entrance to the inlet, situated N of Sha‘ab
Damath, is very narrow; a shoal patch, with a least depth
over it of 3 m, lies in the fairway.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
Anchorage
6.306
1 Anchorage may be obtained within the N part of the inlet
where there is good protection from N winds, though depths
are irregular and swinging room is limited.
Anchorage may also be obtained off the W side of Sha‘ab
Damath in depths from 7 to 12 m.
Marsa esh Sheikh Ibrahim
Chart 675 plan of Marsa esh Sheikh Ibrahim
Description
6.307
1 Marsa esh Sheikh Ibrahim (18°53′N, 37°25′E), which is
entered about 16 miles SSE of the entrance to Saw
kin
(6.118), is formed by a break in the coastal reef, which dries
on either hand in patches.
Some high mangroves and bushes are situated in the N
part of the inlet, but the SW shore is low and sandy.
The hinterland consists of a plain covered with scrub
which stretches for some miles W.
Approach and entry
6.308
1 A shoal (position approximate), with a least depth over it
of 4⋅6 m, lies about 8 cables ESE of the entrance to the inlet.
The outer end of the entrance channel is marked by
beacons. The N entry beacon (concrete base, post with cone
topmark, 3 m in height) stands near the outer edge of the
coastal reef, about 300 m from the SE extremity of the reef.
The S entry beacon (concrete base, post, cylindrical topmark,
4 m in height) stands just off the NW side of the coastal reef
on the S side of the entrance. Shoal water extends from both
sides of the entrance.
2 Once within the entrance channel maintain a mid-channel
course. Several angle iron stakes mark the edge of the reef
on the S side of the channel.
Anchorage
6.309
1 Anchorage may be obtained about 1 cable SW of Cairn
Point, which lies on the N shore of the inlet about 7 cables
within its entrance, in good holding ground, soft mud, in
depths from 8 to 11 m.
Marsa esh Sheikh
Chart 675
Description
6.310
1 Marsa esh Sheikh (18°50′N, 37°27′E) is entered through
a break in the coastal reef about 3 miles SSE of Marsa esh
Sheikh Ibrahim (6.307).
The inlet extends about 2 miles NNW inside the reef but
it is dangerous to navigation.
The country in this vicinity is thickly covered with
brushwood. Ariel, gazelle, pigeon and sand grouse are
plentiful in summer.
Approaches
6.311
1 The inlet is approached from the S through Shubuk
Channel (6.212), and from the N through the S part of the
Inner Channel (6.203).
Approach from south. The approach from the S is rather
difficult and is best made with the sun in the E.
Two leading beacons (6.220), to assist in the approach to
the N end of Shubuk Channel, stand about 7 cables SE of
187
the entrance to the inlet, SE of Ras Shabarango (18°50′N,
37°27′E).
2 A beacon (concrete base, post, triangular topmark apex
up, 4 m in height) stands on the reef forming the N side of
the entrance. This reef dries in patches; it is steep-to, and
clearly visible under all conditions of light.
6.312
1 Approach from north. A beacon (concrete base, post,
diamond topmark, 4 m in height), which marks the E drying
edge of the coastal reef, stands about 5 cables N of the
entrance to Marsa esh Sheikh. This beacon should not be
confused with the beacon marking the N side of the entrance
to the inlet.
Entry
6.313
1 Approach the entrance from the NE, keeping the coastal
reef aboard, and maintaining a careful lookout for coral
projections from the reef.
The depths in this area are uneven and it has not been
examined; many patches of discoloured water have been
observed.
2 The entrance is encumbered by three coral shoals, which
partially obstruct the entrance. They are visible under good
conditions of light. The largest and outer-most of these three
shoals is dangerous with a least depth over it of 1⋅8 m.
Keep close to the reef forming the N entrance point to the
inlet so as to avoid the dangerous outer-most reef previously
described.
Anchorage
6.314
1 A small vessel may obtain anchorage just inside the
entrance to the inlet, NE of the creek which enters the inlet
on its SW side, in depths from about 6 to 7 m, coral and
mud.
Anchorage may also be obtained closer to the head of the
inlet, noting that depths shoal rapidly.
There are no good landing places within the inlet as
depths decrease gradually and boats may ground about 50 m
offshore.
Trinkitat Harbour
Chart 675 plan of Trinkitat Harbour
Description
6.315
1 Trinkitat Harbour (18°41′N, 37°45′E) is entered about
3 miles S of the SE end of Sha‘ab el Shubuk (6.214)
between Ras Mukden (18°41′⋅5N, 37°45′⋅0E), the N entry
point to the harbour, and South Point (5 cables S).
The coast in this vicinity is low and sandy and the
harbour entrance is not easily distinguished.
2 Qita Teronbo is a dangerous rocky shoal patch, steep-to
on its NE side, which lies about 3 miles SE of South Point.
A channel, about 2 cables wide with a least depth of 6⋅4 m,
lies between the shoal and the coast.
Tokar Shoal, with a least depth over it of 5⋅8 m, lies
across the harbour entrance.
Though the harbour is open to the NE, it is protected to a
large extent by Qita’ Kan
sha (6.318).
3 Entrance Rock, a dangerous rock, lies on the shoal spit
extending about 2 cables N of the coastal reef fringing
South Point. This spit breaks in an E swell. Two dangerous
rocks, over which the sea breaks, stand on the SW part of
this spit.
In 1977, Trinkitat, which is situated on the S shore of the
harbour, was deserted and consisted of one ruined building
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
and a ruined pier. A flagstaff stands on the SW shore about
3 cables W of the ruined pier.
4 The shores of the harbour are sandy with low bushes; a
sandy plain, which floods at times, extends for some distance
inland.
An opening in the SE side of the harbour leads to a large
shallow lagoon in which there are depths of up to 1 m
depending upon the season.
Caution
6.316
1 Trinkitat Harbour could formerly accommodate a number
of vessels of draughts up to 6⋅4 m with good holding
ground.
In 1972 the depths in the harbour had decreased
considerably, silting was taking place at the head of the
harbour which appeared to consist of a solid encroachment
of the land.
2 Charted depths within the harbour may well be from 1⋅0
to 1⋅5 m in error.
Local knowledge. It is not considered advisable, even for
shallow draught vessels, to use the harbour without local
knowledge.
Local weather
6.317
1 Between November and April the prevailing winds are
mainly from the N, but occasionally from the NE, especially
during the day. There is no dust haze with winds from the N
and E, and only occasional dust haze with winds from the E
and SE.
It was reported, many years ago, that in the winter
months the N and NE winds were accompanied by
sandstorms which blow strongest in February and March.
2 Strong N winds are occasionally preceded by a swell
from that direction but, as the islets and reefs of the Saw
kin
Group (6.347) act as a breakwater, a marked swell is not
always an accompaniment to a N wind.
Winds from the SE can usually be forecast by an increase
in the humidity of the atmosphere. It is said a swell sets in
from the SE about 12 hours to 24 hours before the shift in
the wind occurs.
3 Between June and September the winds are mainly from
the S, bringing much sand with them. In June and July,
when the winds are at their strongest, the whole area
between Trinkitat and Tokar (15 miles S) is rendered almost
uninhabitable by frequent and severe sandstorms. During and
after these sandstorms, which often blow for a considerable
distance out to sea, visibility on the coast and at sea is likely
to be much reduced by sand or dust haze.
Approach
6.318
1 If approaching from the N, steer to pass E of Rambler
Shoal (18°44′N, 37°45′E) (6.214) and Maqdam Patches
(1 miles SW) (6.214), and W of Fairway Patch (1 miles
SE) (6.214) and Qita’ Kan
sha (18°41′⋅6N, 37°45′⋅7E),
which lies about 6 cables E of the harbour entrance.
Qita’ Kan
sha is awash, always visible, steep-to, and
makes a good mark for vessels making for the harbour. A
beacon (metal post, can topmark, 3 m in height) stands near
the N end of Qita’ Kan
sha.
Entry
6.319
1 The fairway, which was about 1 cable wide, lies between
the shoal spits which extend into the entrance from Ras
Mukden (18°41′⋅5N, 37°45′⋅0E) and South Point (5 cables S).
188
Caution. It has been reported that these shoal spits,
extending from both of the harbour entry points, extend
further than charted.
The fairway through the entrance should be approached
with care. The channel should possibly be first examined by
boat prior to entry, and then buoyed.
Principal mark
6.320
1 Landmark:
Jebel Shaba (18°10′N, 37°24′E), 950 m in height is an
isolated mountain which stands about 37 miles SW
of Trinkitat Harbour.
Anchorage
6.321
1 Anchorage may be obtained within the harbour which
provides good shelter from all winds, except those from the
NE, in 6 m to 7 m, mud. See caution 6.316.
Anchorage may also be obtained outside the harbour, W
of Qita’ Kan
sha (6.318) in depths of about 11 m.
Marsa Maqdam
Chart 675
Description
6.322
1 Marsa Maqdam (18°44′N, 37°43′E) lies between the SE
part of Sha‘ab el Shubuk (6.214) and the coast between
Melita Point (18°44′N, 37°40′E) and Ras Maqdam (3 miles
SE) a low point, backed by conspicuous sandhills, which
rise to from 6 to 13 m in height.
Eagle Islet stands on a reef which extends 1 mile ESE
from Melita Point.
2 Maqdam Patches (6.214) lie about 2 miles E of Ras
Maqdam. Three islets lie on the W part of Maqdam Patches.
Rambler Shoal (6.214) lies in the E entrance to Marsa
Maqdam. Fairway Patch (6.214) lies about 1 mile SE.
6.323
1 Anchorage may be obtained in Marsa Maqdam, in depths
from 11 to 14 m, sand and mud, in the N and NW parts of
the inlet under the lee of Sha‘ab el Shubuk. The SE part
should be avoided owing to the shoals off Ras Maqdam.
Eagle Anchorage is situated in the SW part of Marsa
Maqdam, about 1 miles ESE of Melita Point, as shown on
the chart. The anchorage affords good anchorage in depths
of 9 m, sand. During E and SE winds this anchorage is
somewhat exposed to the swell.
Khalig ’Agig
Chart 81
Position
6.324
1 Khalig ’Agig is entered about 30 miles SE of Trinkitat
Harbour (6.315) between Ras Asis (18°25′N, 38°07′E) and
Ras Shekub (11 miles SE).
Description
6.325
1 Ras Asis, the NW entry point to the bay, is a low and
sandy point; a beacon (black metal framework tower,
diamond topmark, 9 m in height) stands on the extremity of
the point.
2 A rocky spit, over which there are dangerous shoal depths
and rocks, extends about 1 miles ENE of Ras Asis; depths
are uneven in its vicinity, shoal depths lie up to 4 miles N
and NNE of the point.
Ras Shekub, the SE entry point to the bay, is a low sandy
point formed by an island and two islets.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
6.326
1 A coral reef extends about 3 cables N of the N side of
Ras Shekub, and about 4 cables E of its E side. A beacon
(white masonry structure, 5 m in height) (reported missing
1993) marks the N extremity of the reef. Many years ago it
was reported difficult to distinguish the beacon against the
sandy background.
2 A shoal area, with a least depth over it of 16⋅5 m, lies
about 5 miles N of Ras Shekub beacon.
Hillat ’Agig is a village situated about 12 miles SSE of
Ras Asis which consists of a few buildings; there is a small
landing jetty.
3 A reef, on which stands some islets, extends from the
entrance to Marsa Hayyis, a small inlet, whose entrance is
situated about 6 miles S of Ras Asis.
Principal marks
6.327
1 Landmarks:
Jabal Taqdara (18°14′N, 38°06′E), which stands about
12 miles S of Ras Asis, is an isolated double hill
rising to a height of 96 m. The hill is the farthest N
of the coast hills in this vicinity and is easily
identified.
Jabal Dabranqa (18°11′N, 38°10′E), which stands
about 5 miles SE of Jabal Taqdara, rises to a large
round mass, 199 m in height, with a smooth
summit.
Dangers
6.328
1 Diamond Shoal (18°21′N, 38°13′E), lies near the middle
of the entrance to the bay.
A dangerous shoal lies about 1 mile NNW of Diamond
Shoal.
’Amar t Islands
6.329
1 ’Amar
t Islands (18°18′N, 38°14′E) which stand on a
coral reef about 9 miles SSE of Ras Asis, are low and sandy
with a few bushes growing on them.
The islands are surrounded by an area containing
numerous dangers through which it is considered unsafe to
navigate; a dangerous rock lies about 1 mile SSE of the S
end of the group.
2 Local knowledge. A passage, suitable only for use by
small vessels with local knowledge, lies between the islands
and the SE shore of Khalig ’Agig.
Anchorage
6.330
1 Anchorage may be obtained in depths from 8 to 13 m,
mud and coral, about 4 cables NE of the landing jetty at
Hillat ’Agig. This anchorage is sheltered by three low islets
and the reefs which border them.
Kh r Nawarat
Chart 675 plan of Khër Nawarat
Position
6.331
1 Khr Nawarat is entered between Ras Istahi (18°16′N,
38°19′E), which lies about 3 miles SE of Ras Shekub, and
Shatira Islet (7 cables SE).
189
Description
6.332
1 The bay is completely sheltered by a chain of low sand
and coral islets, standing on coral reefs, which front its
entrance; bushes grow on some of the islets.
The S and W sides of the bay are bordered by reefs and
detached coral boulders; the shore is low, sandy and fringed
with mangroves, and, in places, it is covered with scrub.
Fish abound near all the reefs; wildfowl and wildlife are
plentiful within the neighbourhood of the inlet.
6.333
1 Fawn Cove (18°16′N, 38°16′E) lies in the NW corner of
Khr Nawarat and is encumbered with reefs; Bluff Point
forms its S entrance point. A conspicuous sandhill, 12 m in
height, stands about 1 miles WSW of the point.
Principal marks
6.334
1 Landmarks:
Quoin Hill (18°08′N, 38°15′E) (Chart 81) which stands
about 4 miles inland from the low coastal plain, has
two distinct conical summits. It should not be
confused with Jabal Dirtit standing about 6 miles
SSE, which is higher and more rounded.
2 Jibal Hidariba (18°04′N, 38°08′E), which stands about
8 miles WSW of Quoin Hill, forms the summit of
the inland range.
Jabal Dirtit (18°03′N, 38°19′E) is the name given to
two conical hills. A prominent peak, with a rounded
summit which rises to a height of about 630 m,
stands about 5 miles SW of Jabal Dirtit; this peak
seldom stands out clearly but is unmistakable.
Local weather
6.335
1 The mountains in the vicinity of Khr Nawarat appear to
receive considerable rainfall. They are frequently hidden by
clouds, or by sandstorms which are a common occurrence
and may last for several days.
2 Haboobs, which are strong E and S winds that at times
reach force 8, are very hot and are usually accompanied by
sandstorms. These winds often set in quickly and attain a
considerable force in a few minutes; they are almost
invariably preceded by a thick atmosphere, the hills
disappear from view and it usually becomes very humid.
The barometer also tends to fall steeply from the normal
morning maximum of 1000 mb. If the signs of the approach
of a haboob are watched for, then there is usually ample
warning.
3 Clearing hills and dry weather are the precursors of fine
weather with light N breezes.
Approach and entry
6.336
1 The entrance to Khr Nawarat is difficult to distinguish
from a distance.
Approach the inlet with Black Rocks (18°16′⋅5N,
38°19′⋅3E) bearing about 190°. Black Rocks are composed
of dark coral and are visible from a distance of over 5 miles.
When the beacon (black and white post, white triangle,
apex down, 8 m in height) (18°16′⋅2N, 38°18′⋅0E) (reported
missing 1993) which stands on the summit of a small
sandhill, bears 230°, steer for the beacon, passing between
Black Rocks and Guban Islet (6.340).
2 Once clear of Entrance Shoals (18°16′⋅9N, 38°18′⋅6E),
alter course SE. The sandspit extending from the SW side of
Guban Islet in line with the beacon standing close N of Ras
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
Shekub, bearing 312° (astern), leads through the section of
the entrance channel which lies between Ras Istahi
(18°15′⋅8N, 38°18′⋅9E) and Hai Dugah Islets (6.341).
If proceeding into the inlet then keep clear of the dangers
ESE of Ras Istahi, noting the shoal area, with a least depth
over it of 5⋅5 m, that lies about 4 cables ESE of the point.
3 Thence, steer SW, passing W of the dangerous shoal
which lies about 1 cables W of Shatira Islet (18°15′⋅2N,
38°19′⋅6E); continue on a SW course, rounding the W end
of Crazirat Irj (18°13′⋅1N, 38°19′⋅5E) at a prudent distance,
and proceed to the anchorage SW of the village situated on
the W end of the island.
6.337
1 East Passage leads between the SE side of the reefs on
which stand the Hai Dugah Islets (6.341) and the N end of
Gazeirat Kalafiyya (18°15′N, 38°21′E).
The passage is a convenient route for small vessels during
periods of N winds; depths in the S entrance to the passage
are from about 5⋅8 to 7⋅3 m. In 1985 considerably less water
was reported within the passage.
Landing
6.338
1 The best landing place is 4 miles SSE of Bluff Point
(18°14′⋅8N, 38°16′⋅6E) where the reefs afford shelter and
boats can approach the beach.
Anchorage
6.339
1 Anchorage within the inlet may be obtained about
9 cables SW of Shatira Islet (18°15′⋅2N, 38°19′⋅6E), in a
depth of about 9 m.
Alternatively, continue SW, rounding the W end of
Crazirat Irj (18°13′⋅1N, 38°19′⋅5E), and anchor in depths
from 7 to 8 m SW of the village; the holding ground of
sand and mud is good everywhere.
Guban Islet
6.340
1 Guban Islet (18°17′⋅2N, 38°18′⋅3E) lies on the NW side
of the main approach to Khr Nawarat.
Guban Patches lie in the middle part of the channel which
separates the islet from the mainland; these shoals restrict the
use of the channel to small vessels.
Hai Dugah Islets
6.341
1 Hai Dugah Islets (Hagar Islets) (18°16′⋅0N, 38°20′⋅0E) are
three low sandy islets, named North West Islet, Middle Islet
and South East Islet, which are sparsely covered with grass
and scrub. The islets stand on a reef, the NW end of which
lies about 7 cables NNE of Ras Istahi.
Black Rocks, which lies close to the NW end of the reef,
are composed of dark coral and are conspicuous.
Gazeirat Kalafiyya
6.342
1 Gazeirat Kalafiyya (Farr
jn) (18°14′⋅4N, 38°21′⋅5E)
together with Shatira Islet (7 cables NW) and several
unnamed islets stand on a reef which extends 5 miles SE
from the entrance to Khr Nawarat to where it joins the
mainland shore.
A spit, with a least depth over its extremity of 3⋅4 m,
extends about 3 cables N of the E end of Shatira Islet.
2 A boat channel leads through the reef between the SE
end of Gazeirat Kalafiyya and the mainland; local knowledge
is required for the use of this channel.
190
Bushy Islet
6.343
1 Bushy Islet (18°14′⋅1N, 38°20′⋅1E) is a conspicuous islet,
fringed by a reef, which lies between the S side of Gazeirat
Kalafiyya and Crazirat Irj.
Crazirat Irj
6.344
1 Crazirat Irj (Bahdr or Ibn Abbas Island) (18°13′⋅1N,
38°19′⋅5E), which lies in the middle of the SE part of Khr
Nawarat, is composed of coral rock.
A conspicuous small fishing village lies at its W end.
The N side of the island rises in cliffs, about 4 m to 5 m
in height, to a coral plateau about 5 m to 6 m in height; the
cliffs at the E end of the island are lower, rising to heights
of only 2 to 3 m.
2 The W part of the island is sandy, the E part is wooded,
and, there are mangroves in the S, which is usually
inundated by the waters of Khr Nawarat.
The island is mostly fringed with a reef; foul ground lies
between the E end of the island and Gazeirat Kalafiyya; two
rocks awash lie in the channel between the SE end of the
island and Ras Farr
jn (18°12′⋅1N, 38°21′⋅5E).
Bay south east of Kh r Nawarat
Chart 81
Description
6.345
1 An unnamed bay, which indents the coast SE of Gazeirat
Kalafiyya (Farr
j) (6.342) is split into two parts by Gazirat
’Iri (18°10′N, 38°27′E) an island whose highest part consists
of a mound of ruins. The NW part of Gazirat ’Iri has some
trees and other vegetation along with the coral rock ruins of
the ancient Ptolemais Theron; the E part of the island is low
and sandy.
2 That part of the bay, on the W side of Gazirat ’Iri, has a
least depth of 3⋅7 m in the entrance over a bar formed by the
continuation of the coastal reef; depths from 5⋅5 to 7⋅3 m,
over mud, lie farther within this section of the bay. A
tortuous channel, which is only suitable for use by small
vessels with local knowledge, leads from the entrance to the
head of this half of the bay.
3 That part of the bay on the E side of Gazirat ’Iri has
depths from 1⋅8 to 5⋅5 m within it.
6.346
1 Gazirat Abid (18°09′N, 38°30′E) is a sandy island, with
its summit rising from its E side, standing on the coastal reef
E of Gazirat ’Iri; a beacon (metal framework) stands on an
unnamed island 1 miles SE.
A shoal, with a least depth over it of 9 m, lies 1 miles
NE of Gazirat Abid; In 1917 a bank, with a least depth over
it of 27⋅0 m, was reported 5 miles ESE of the island.
2 A shoal (position doubtful) is charted at the S end of a
bank, about 7 miles E of Ras Abu Yabis (18°07′N, 38°30′E),
this shoal has been searched for and not found.
Ras Abu Yabis (18°07′N, 38°30′E), which lies about
2 miles S of Gazirat Abid, is a low point with small white
sandhills on which some bushes grow; there are some
remarkable summits S of the point near the coast.
Seil Bahr is a rocky islet, which lies between Ras Abu
Yabis and Gazirat Abid, that forms a good landmark.
3 Caution. On account of the shoal water and dangers,
Gazirat ’Iri should not be approached from the E. If making
the coast in this vicinity it is recommended to make for
Dahrat ‘Abid (18°22′N, 38°46′E) (6.20).
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
SAW KIN GROUP
General information
Chart 158
Position
6.347
1 The Saw
kin Group of islets, reefs and shoals fronts the
coast from Saw
kin (19°07′N, 37°20′E) nearly as far as Ras
Qass
r (18°01′N, 38°35′E).
The group extends from Sha‘ab Jibna (19°27′N, 37°44′E)
(6.65) in the N to Dahrat ‘Abid (18°22′N, 38°46′E) (6.20) in
the S.
Some of the islets, reefs and other dangers lie up to
45 miles offshore. The W edge of the group, where there are
many below-water rocks and deep channels, lies generally
about 10 miles from the coast.
Flow
6.348
1 On a number of occasions, many years ago, a survey ship
experienced strong currents, setting W to SW, near the NE
end of the Saw
kin Group, but generally only when close to
islets, and not W of Hindi Gidir (19°23′N, 37°55′E).
Some years later, it was reported that NE currents had
been experienced between Hindi Gidir and Masamirit
(18°50′N, 38°45′E).
2 Again, in this area, during the months of July and
August, a SW to SSW current was observed to flow at about
1400 hours daily and continuing until about midnight, often
attaining a rate of
kn.
After a SW wind, NE sets were also occasionally
experienced but they were of short duration and erratic in
direction.
Islets, reefs and shoals
Chart 82
Northern part of the group
6.349
1 Hindi Gidir (19°23′N, 37°55′E) (6.18) along with Peshwa
(6.65), Owen Reef (6.18), King Shoal (6.18), Brisbane Reef
(6.18), Logan Reef (6.142), Keary Reef (6.142), Sha‘ab
Anbar (6.142), Sha‘ab Mobiyet (6.142), Canara Reef (6.142),
Nakhalat al Qaseer (6.143), Sha‘ab Quseir (6.143), Sha‘ab
Qub (6.64), Protector Reef (6.64), Preserver Reef (6.64),
Penzance Reef (6.64), Burkt Islet (6.64) and Sha‘ab Burkt
(6.64) all lie in the N part of the group and are described at
their cross references.
2 Seil ‘Adá aghr (19°19′N, 37°54′E) (position doubtful)
was reported in the 19th century to be a sand and coral reef.
Many years later the area was examined and it was not
found. It is possible the sand had been washed away leaving
a below-water reef.
Farquhar Reef (19°16′N, 37°52′E), which lies about
3 miles SSW of Seil ‘Adá aghr, has on it a small sand cay
about 1 m in height.
3 Seil ‘Ada Kebr Islet (19°13′N, 37°49′E) lies about
3 miles SW of Farquhar Reef and is composed of coral
and sand with a reef extending about 6 cables NNW from it.
Shoal water extends over 2 miles W of the reef and the islet.
191
6.350
1 Sha‘ab awl (19°09′N, 37°37′E) is a reef over which the
sea generally breaks, but there is little indication of the bank
which extends about 1 miles SSE from the reef and over
which there are numerous dangerous rocks. The reef is
marked near its centre by a beacon (concrete base, 6 m in
height).
2 Franks Reef (19°10′N, 37°52′E) was reported many years
ago when the sea was observed breaking over it. It was not
found during a survey of the area a few years later.
Starkey Patch (19°07′N, 37°55′E) is a shoal patch.
3 Sha‘ab Munkar (19°07′N, 37°50′E) is a crescent-shaped
reef, open on its S side, over which the sea breaks. A shoal
(position doubtful) was reported many years ago to lie about
1 mile ESE of the reef; a further shoal lies about 5 cables
SW of this shoal.
Pender Reef (19°09′N, 37°49′E) has a least depth over it
of 6 m.
Chart 81
Central part of group
6.351
1 Barr
Ms
Saqir (6.19), Dibsel (Hindi Seil) (6.19),
Masamirit (4.15) and Karam Masamirit (4.15) all lie in the
central part of of the group and are described at their cross
references.
Tamarshira (18°55′N, 38°17′E) is a low islet composed of
coral and sand, and fringed by a reef.
2 Talla Talla Kebir (18°50′N, 38°10′E) is a group of three
islets, which, from a distance, appear as one island. These
three islets, which stand on a reef, are composed of sand and
coral and are covered with bushes. Three beacons mark the
SW tip of the S islet; two further beacons stand on a shoal
area close SE of the W-most islet.
3 Falcon Shoal extends about 3 miles SSE from these
islets.
Rock Cod Bank (18°47′N, 38°06′E) lies in the W
approaches to Talla Talla Kebir.
6.352
1 Loka (18°50′N, 38°39′E) is a low islet, situated about
5 miles W of Masamirit, which is composed of coral and
fringed by a reef.
Sha’
b Loka (18°44′N, 38°29′E) is a dangerous
horseshoe-shaped reef over which the sea breaks; a wreck
lies on the central part of the reef. In 1979 breakers were
reported to have been observed extending 2 miles SW of the
reef.
2 Dahrat Qab (18°32′N, 38°40′E) is an islet surrounded by
a coral reef; dangerous shoal water extends about 2 miles
SW of the islet.
Southern part of group
6.353
1 Safna Shoal (6.20), Miyum (6.20), Qab Miyum (Ghab
Miyn) (6.20) and Dahrat ‘Abid (6.20) all lie in the S part
of the group and are described at their cross references.
Meteor Shoal (18°41′N, 38°02′E) lies about 8 miles E of
the S end of the Inner Channel; Barracouta Shoal lies
4 miles E.
Cavally Shoal (18°40′N, 38°09′E) has a least depth over
it of 9⋅1 m; a shoal patch, with a least depth over it of
5⋅5 m, lies about 1 miles SE of the shoal.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 6
2 Darraka (18°28′N, 38°44′E) is an islet bordered by a reef
which appears to extend some distance towards a detached
reef, over which the sea breaks, which lies about 1 mile NW.
3 Dar Ah Teras (Dahrat Asis) (18°37′N, 38°14′E) is a low
and sandy islet situated in the SW part of the group, about
13 miles NNE of Ras Asis (18°25′N, 38°07′E). A reef
extends about 1 mile NNW of the N end of the islet; a
dangerous rock and shoal area, lie about 1 mile E of the
islet. The area in the vicinity of the shoal patch, with a least
depth over it of 11 m, situated about 6 miles ESE of Dar
Ah Teras, has not be examined and should be avoided.
4 A group of sand and coral islets (18°27′N, 38°28′E),
which lie about 43 miles ESE of Trinkitat (6.315), consist of
Aqrab Islets, Karb Islets and Abu Marina; the sea breaks
over these islets when there is any swell. The islets stand on
a coral reef on which there are some pinnacle coral rocks
with deeper water lying between.
5 A shoal reported in 1929, with a least depth over it of
11 m, lies about 4 miles N of the N-most Aqrab Islet.
A bank, with depths over it from 4⋅5 to 18 m, extends S
from the coral reef on which stand Aqrab Islets, Karb Islets
192
and Abu Marina. This bank is probably an extension of the
reef on which these islets stand; the edge of the bank, which
lies about 5 miles S of Abu Marina is steep-to.
Anchorages
6.354
1 As a rule, the water inside the islets of the Saw
kin
Group is smooth and anchorage may be obtained, generally
in depths from 18 to 46 m, between the islets and the coast
for 40 miles SE of Trinkitat (6.315).
2 Anchorage, of a reasonable quality, may be obtained in
depths of about 16 m, sand and coral, with the W extremity
of the W islet of the Talla Talla Kebir (18°50′N, 38°10′E)
group of islets, bearing 040°, distant 5 cables.
3 Emergency anchorage is available off the S side of
Tamarshira (18°55′N, 38°17′E) in depths from 11 to 33 m,
but the anchorage is too small to afford protection from the
swell. A further emergency anchorage may be obtained in
the channel between Qita Teronbo (18°38′N, 37°48′E)
(6.315) and the coast.
Home Contents Index

NOTES

193
Home Contents Index

¯ to Ras Raheita
Chapter 7 - Red Sea - west side. Ras Qassar

38° 39° 40° 41° 42° 43°

19° 19°

S AU D I
ARABIA
164
18° -
Ras Qassar 18°

81
7.11

17° 17°
JØzºn
-
Farasan
Islands
Difnein Island
7.30

(North East
Channel)
460
12

16° 16°
7. 1

ERITREA 143

Dehalak’
7.141 168 171
Mits’iwa KebØr YEMEN
460
(Massawa) Port Smyth 168
168 Dissei Anch. - I.
Kamaran
7.4
168 Melita Bay 2

15° ol
15°
D

ph
in 168
Co
ve Anfile Bay
16
8 6
Ras Shakhs

7.
19
9
1925
14° Jabal Zuqar I.
14°

168
Bera’isolÏ Bahir Selat’Ï
The Haycocks

Al
ETHI O P I A 452 Mukha-
453
7.202
13° -
Aseb 13°
1926
Ba

1926
b
el
Ma
nd

157
eb

DJIBOUTI
12° 12°

38° 39° 40° Longitude 41° East from Greenwich 43°

0205

194
 Home Contents Index

CHAPTER 7

RED SEA — WEST SIDE — RAS QASSR TO RAS RAHEITA

GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 158, 157, 143 2 Between Ras Qass
r and Massawa (15°37′N, 39°28′E)
Scope of the chapter (7.141) the plain, on which there are scattered isolated hills
7.1 which range from about 40 m to 240 m in height, varies in
1 The area described in this chapter covers the Red Sea width from about 10 to 20 miles.
coast of Eritrea from Ras Qass
r (18°01′N, 38°35′E) to Ras SE of Massawa the plain is between 1 and 10 miles wide.
Raheita (12°44′N, 43°07′E) (4.82), 415 miles SE. The 3 The coast between Ras Shakhs (14°37′N, 41°12′E) and
chapter also includes descriptions of the ports of Massawa Ras Terma Zerf Ch’af (117 miles SSE) is backed by ranges
(15°37′N, 39°28′E) (7.141) and seb (13°00′N, 42°45′E) of high volcanic mountains sloping to the sea.
(7.202). SE of Ras Terma Zerf Ch’af the general aspect of the
land is high, rugged and mountainous towards the interior,
Topography and barren towards the coast with the mountains descending
7.2 in successive lower ranges towards the coast.
1 The coast of Eritrea is a generally low and arid plain, 4 Massawa Channel (15°50′N, 39°30′E) (7.18) lies W and
gradually rising, over a distance of 40 miles, to the first of a SW of the many islands and dangers on Dahlak Bank (7.87),
series of plateaux. which fronts the greater part of the Eritrean coast.
Mountains, some of which attain elevations of over
3000 m, form an escarpment to the plateaux; the mountains
have a generally abrupt and precipitous appearance.
RAS QASS R TO DIFNEIN
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 157, 158, 164
Route
7.3
1 The inshore route described in this section extends S,
from a position about 40 miles ENE of Ras Qass
r (18°01′N,
38°35′E), for about 100 miles along the Red Sea coast of
Eritrea to a position in the vicinity of Difnein (16°37′N,
39°20′E) at the N end of North Massawa Channel (7.22).
Topography
7.4
1 There are few easily identifiable topographical features
along this section of the coast of Eritrea between Ras Qass
r
and Marsa Taclai (17°32′N, 38°51′E).
From a position about 7 miles S of Ras Qass
r a chain of
hills, 4 miles inland, extends parallel to the coast and affords
a good landmark.
2 Middit (17°47′N, 38°36′E) is a hill, 77 m in height with
two summits, which shows up well from a distance; a
circular tomb stands on the S summit.
Noh-rat (17°36′N, 38°43′E), is a rugged range of hills
rising, towards its S end, to a height of 106 m where it
terminates in a bluff.
3 Skenat (17°31′N, 38°46′E) rises to a height of 134 m. It
resembles a fort and is a prominent feature which is easy to
identify from a distance. From Skenat, the land slopes down
towards the coast and is covered by marshy woods
interspersed with numerous sand dunes. An isolated
cone-shaped dune, standing 3 miles SSE of Skenat, makes a
good mark from seaward.
7.5
1 South of Marsa Taclai (17°32′N, 38°51′E) the
topographical features become more prominent.
195
Massawa (15°37′N, 39°28′E) and seb (13°00′N,
42°45′E) are the only ports on this stretch of coast; the
off-lying banks and islands afford numerous anchorages.
Tep-sa (17°26′N, 38°48′E) is a group of whitish coloured
hills, the highest peak of which rises from the N end of the
group to a height of 115 m (charted as 141 m). At sunrise
Tep-sa has the appearance of being a white mass with dark
rocky hills at either end, but, when the sun is behind the
group, three prominent peaks are visible at its S end.
2 Monte Baeki (17°21′N, 38°52′E) rises about 6 miles SE
of Tep-sa; a beacon (triangular pyramid structure surmounted
by a white hexagonal parapet and staff, black and white
chequers above a black base, 9 m in height) stands on the N
shoulder of the hill. Several of the hills in the vicinity of
Monte Baeki have cairns on their summits but the beacon on
Monte Baeki is quite unmistakable.
3 The Paps (16°40′N, 38°57′E) is a double peaked
mountain standing on the coastal plain about 23 miles W of
Difnein (7.12). Cabul, which rises to 342 m, forms the N
peak and Dirbait, which rises to 311 m, the S peak; smaller
hills stand in their vicinity. From some directions the two
peaks appear as three; they may often be seen when the
higher inland peaks are obscured.
Depths
7.6
1 Mariners are advised to proceed with particular caution
when navigating in the reef area E of North Massawa
Channel (7.22). This area is inadequately surveyed and
uncharted shoals may exist.
Cautions
7.7
1 The area between the Saw
kin Group (6.347) and Difnein
(16°37′N, 39°20′E) (7.12) has not been closely examined
except for a distance of 10 miles offshore from Ras Qass
r
(18°01′N, 38°35′E) (6.20).
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7

7.8 Chart 164

1 It should be borne in mind that the reefs lying close off
the mainland are not always visible, and that the reefs, on
the E side of North Massawa Channel (7.22) are steep-to.
Natural conditions
7.9
1 Flow. Many years ago off Ras Qass
r, after a period of
five days of continuous SE winds, the current was found to
be setting NW at a rate of 1 kn.
7.10
1 Local weather. The general prevalence of thick haze over
the land during winter often renders the approach, using
landmarks, from the NE difficult and sometimes impossible
towards North Massawa Channel (7.22). As a rule, when the
haze is at its thickest, the sky is clear; on the other hand
when clouds prevail, which is usually with a N wind, the
land is tolerably clear, though the highest peaks may be
capped.
Directions
(continued from 6.20)
Charts 81, 157, 164
Ras Qass r to Difnein
7.11
1 From a position about 40 miles ENE of Ras Qass
r
(18°01′N, 38°35′E) (6.20) the track leads S, passing;
2 E of the off-lying coastal bank (17°45′N, 38°50′E)
with depths of less than 20 m over it, in places. The
bank fringes the coast between Ras Qass
r and
Marsa Taclai (17°32′N, 38°51′E) and extends up to
12 miles offshore. Depths over this offshore area are
very irregular, exceeding 200 m in places. Ganadà
(17°55′N, 38°38′E), situated about 7 miles SSE of
Ras Qass
r, can be identified by a number of sand
dunes, about 9 m in height, standing on the
promontory; a number of huts stand on the coast in
this vicinity.
3 Hasmet (17°45′N, 38°44′E) (7.15) lies about midway
along this stretch of the coast. Samadrisat (17°37′N,
38°49′E) situated about 28 miles SSE of Ras
Qass
r, is a low projecting point, covered with high
trees which extends for about 1 mile along the
coast; the point is the most easily identified part of
the coast in this vicinity as there are no other trees
for 20 miles N and S. Thence:
4 E of the shoal patch (17°34′N, 39°04′E), with a least
depth over it of 8⋅7 m, which lies on the SE corner
of the coastal bank, thence:
E of the isolated shoal patch (17°28′N, 39°07′E)
(position approximate) (reported 1959) with a least
depth over it of 29 m, thence:
E of the shoal patch (17°20′N, 39°02′E), with a least
depth over it of 12⋅8 m, which lies on the edge of
the coastal bank. Thence:
5 W of Saunders Reef (17°11′N, 39°24′E) a coral reef,
situated at the NW extremity of Dahlak Bank (7.87)
over which the sea occasionally breaks; a shoal
bank, with a least depth over it of 2⋅8 m, lies off the
N side of Saunders Reef. The shoal (16 miles
ESE) with a least depth over it of 5⋅5 m, has been
searched for but not found. Note the isolated shoal
patch (17°11′N, 39°11′E) with a least depth over it
of 16 m. Thence:
7.12
1 From Saunders Reef to Difnein (16°37′N, 39°20′E) there
is a least depth in the fairway in this section of North
Massawa Channel of 16⋅5 m, over a bank situated 5 miles E
of Abrhud (16°52′N, 39°05′E), passing:
E of Kavet disused lighthouse (16°58′N, 39°03′E)
(7.13), thence:
2 W of Gannet Bank (16°59′N, 39°13′E). The position
of the bank is not always indicated by discoloured
water but a swell and ripples are apparent when a
current is setting over it. Fawn Reef (22 miles E)
has a dangerous rock on its W side; several banks
lie within this locality, the whole area in the vicinity
of Fawn Reef should be avoided. A depth of 16 m
was reported (2004) in position 16°58′⋅2N,
39°18′⋅6E). Thence:
3 Clear of the shoal area (16°52′N, 39°09′E), with a least
depth over it of 16⋅5 m, which lies on the W side
of the fairway, thence:
W of a shoal patch (16°52′N, 39°17′E), with a least
depth over it of 14⋅5 m, which lies close to the edge
of the coastal bank; note the shoal patch (5 miles
WSW) (reported 1960), with a least depth over it of
18 m. Thence:
E of Mersa Magellih (16°40′N, 39°09′E), thence:
4 W of Difnein (16°37′N, 39°20′E) the NW island on
Dahlak Bank (7.87). The island is 9 m in height,
composed of coral and sand, and covered with
mangroves; part of the N and W coasts of the
island are fringed by a reef. From the N, the island,
which is much indented, has an undulating
appearance; a water tank stands on its SW point.
5 Difnein Light (white metal tower and tripod, black
bands, 38 m in height) is exhibited from the NE
point of the island. There are many indications of
shoals NNE and NE of the island, and, as this area
has not been fully examined, caution is necessary
when approaching the island, and:
E of Kandellai (16°37′N, 39°09′E), an islet, covered
with mangroves, standing on the coastal reef. The
islet is not easily identified until close to the coast,
which, in this area, is a mangrove swamp.
Useful marks
7.13
1 Kavet disused lighthouse (white metal column; 6 m in
height) (16°58′N, 39°03′E) which stands on a sand
dune near the coast. In 1981 the structure was
reported to be inconspicuous.
A conspicuous wreck (17°03′N, 39°02′E) lies close off
the shore about 4 miles NNW of Kavet.
(Directions continue at 7.30)
Minor inlets and bays
Chart 81
Baia di Brassy
7.14
1 Description. Baia di Brassy (18°00′N, 38°34′E) is a bay
situated on the S side of Ras Qass
r (6.20).
The coastal reef, over which the sea breaks, extends up
5 cables offshore from both the N and S entrances to the
bay; a dangerous underwater rock lies in the middle of the
entrance to the bay. A further dangerous rock lies about
1 miles SSE, off the coastal reef, in the S approach to the
bay.

196
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7
2 A village is situated on the shores of the bay which are
bordered with trees; the coast in this vicinity is low, sandy,
and backed by high land.
Anchorage. Dhows and smaller vessels may obtain
anchorage outside the reef in depths from 5⋅5 to 7⋅3 m.
Chart 164
Hasmet
7.15
1 Description. Hasmet (17°45′N, 38°44′E) is a small bay,
entered between two points in the coastal reef, situated about
19 miles SE of Ras Qass
r.
The coast in this vicinity is low, swampy and backed by
high land; a salt plain lies a little way inland from the beach.
Marsa Taclai
7.16
1 Description. Marsa Taclai (17°32′N, 38°51′E) is a small
boat harbour which serves as a shelter for local craft.
DIFNEIN TO RAS SHAKHS INCLUDING DAHLAK BANK
GENERAL INFORMATION
Chart 157
Route
7.18
1 The passage from Difnein (16°37′N, 39°20′E) to Ras
Shakhs (14°37′N, 41°12′E) is through Massawa Channel
(15°50′N, 39°30′E) which extends, about 172 miles SSE,
between Dahlak Bank (7.87) and the coast of Eritrea.
The channel, which is divided into North Massawa
Channel (7.22) and South Massawa Channel (7.35) affords a
safe and convenient passage, which, being lit, may be
navigated at night. Caution is necessary as the islands are
low, steep-to, and not easily seen.
Caution. See 7.24.
Topography
7.19
1 The aspect of the Eritrean mountains is similar throughout
Massawa Channel; flat tablelands prevail with their axes
lying N and S. Here and there sharp peaks break the line
and are good landmarks when they can be identified.
A broad, sandy plain, rising gently from the coast,
extends 15 or 20 miles inland to the base of these ranges
where it attains an elevation of about 300 m.
2 The plain is dotted with small hills, generally conical in
shape, whose elevations are much dwarfed in appearance by
the mountains farther inland and by the almost imperceptible
slope of the plain, a fact which should be borne in mind
when attempting to identify the hills from the chart.
Flow
7.20
1 The direction of the currents in Massawa Channel is very
variable. In January and February, when the SE winds
blowing in the middle of the Red Sea are at their strongest,
a S-going surface current is created along the Eritrean coast,
much influenced by local winds within the channel and by
the tidal streams.
2 In South Massawa Channel (7.35) during the same
months S-going currents have been observed to prevail
against winds from the S, but in March and April the current
197
A ruined mole extends about 130 m E from the shore and
may be mistaken for a reef; a beacon (truncated cone pillar,
staff topmark) stands near the extremity of the mole. A
further mole, in rather better condition, extends 100 m NNE
from the shore, leaving an entrance about 15 m wide with a
least depth, between the heads of the moles, of 2⋅5 m. A
large part of each mole stands on dry land.
2 The depth in the centre of the harbour is 2⋅7 m which
decreases towards the shore.
The NW part of the S mole forms a quay, with a depth
alongside of 2⋅3 m, where boats may unload at a small
flights of stone steps. Two masonry buildings and a few huts
stand close S of the harbour.
7.17
1 Taclai is situated 2 miles S of Marsa Taclai where there is
a prominent one storey brick-built factory surrounded by
four smaller, similar buildings. A small tower, painted in
black and white chequers about 15 m in height, stands in the
centre of the factory.
In 1981 the factory was reported to be in ruins.
usually sets N. It seems to be much governed by local
winds.
Submarine cable
7.21
1 A submarine cable, (out of use and not charted) is laid
from the central part of the Red Sea, through Massawa
Channel, and then back into the central Red Sea.
NORTH MASSAWA CHANNEL
General information
Chart 164
Route
7.22
1 North Massawa Channel lies on the W side of the Red
Sea, and is a continuation of the Inner Channel (6.156).
This N part of Massawa Channel extends, from the
vicinity of Difnein (16°37′N, 39°20′E) about 60 miles S to a
position NE of the entrance to the port of Massawa
(15°37′N, 39°28′E).
Topography
7.23
1 Termab (16°26′N, 39°06′E), which rises to a height of
132 m, stands just in from the coast SW of Difnein
(16°37′N, 39°20′E) (7.12); a white cone stands on its
summit.
Melahat (15°59′N, 39°15′E), on which stands a beacon, is
an area backed by salt water swamps beyond which there are
ranges of low barren sandhills. Some salt works stand on the
coast about 5 miles SSE of Melahat and, being well lighted,
make a good mark at night.
2 Ras Turrik is gentle promontory on the coast which lies
5 miles farther SE.
Cautions
7.24
1 In 1981 it was reported that the lights in both North and
South Massawa Channels were extinguished and that the
distinctive colouring of their structures had deteriorated.
Mariners should be aware that individual lights may not
be exhibited and their structures not easily identified.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7
7.25
1 Mariners are advised to proceed with particular caution if
navigating within the area of the reefs which lie E of North
Massawa Channel.
This whole area is inadequately surveyed and uncharted
shoals may exist.
Natural conditions
7.26
1 Weather. In North Massawa Channel, N winds prevail
and are stronger during the day than at night. They tend to
blow off the land in the morning and veer NE during the
day. An appreciable fall in the barometer is commonly
followed, about two days later, by a N wind which
sometimes sets in suddenly and fresh, but at other times
gradually. In both cases it is preceded by light clouds; the
barometer rises and remains high as long as the wind lasts.
2 When S winds are established in the channel they
generally continue to blow during the night, blowing
strongly from SE by day, veering towards the W and falling
lighter at night. As long as the wind is from the SW it is
remarkably dry, but when it shifts S or SE the wet bulb
thermometer quickly rises several degrees; this strong S wind
seldom lasts more than four days. The barometer gives no
warning, but falls as soon as the wind begins to blow.
Off Massawa the sea breeze is generally from the E.
7.27
1 Tidal stream. In North Massawa Channel the tidal
streams set S with the in-going stream, and N with the
out-going stream; they are often very regular. At other times
the S set of the in-going stream does not cease until it is
checked by the N set of the out-going stream.
7.28
1 Currents. From June to September the general direction
of the current is SE; from November to April it is NW, with
rates of generally less than  kn. During the period between
May and October there is no predominant direction of flow.
There is a great local variability superimposed on this
general pattern, eddies may cause both onshore and offshore
sets and may even reverse the general direction of the flow.
2 In February, many years ago, in the channel W of Difnein
(16°37′N, 39°20′E) a W-going current, with a rate of 1 kn,
was experienced.
In January 1971, between Difnein and Kavet (27 miles
NW), a NW-going current, with a rate of up to 2 kn, was
experienced when the wind was from the E to SE.
Caution. Due to the local variability of the flow
experienced in North Massawa Channel great caution should
be exercised at all times, especially when near reefs and
shoals.
Anchorage
7.29
1 Anchorage is generally available throughout North
Massawa Channel off its W side. Care should be exercised
due to the existence of the uncharted submarine cable
extending the length of the channel. See 7.21.
In most places there is little or no shelter from SE winds,
but the holding ground is generally good and the fetch is too
confined for much of a sea to get up.
A fairly good anchorage during N winds may be obtained
SW of Difnein (16°37′N, 39°20′E), about 3cables
offshore, in depths of about 20 m.
2 An indifferent anchorage might be obtained about 8 cables
NW of Entesila (16°30′N, 39°19′E) in depths of 22 m, coral,
but depths increase rapidly to the NW.
198
Anchorage, sheltered from S and E winds, is obtainable
W of the S part of Harat, about 1
miles N of Sheikh el
Abu Island Light (16°02′⋅0N, 39°26′⋅2E) (7.31), as shown
on the chart, with the NW extremity of Harat in line with
the W extremity of Seil Badira (7.31), bearing 358°.
3 Small vessels, with local knowledge, may obtain
anchorage, partially sheltered from N winds, in a depth of
about 14 m, sand and mud, with the SW extremity of Harat,
bearing 004°, and Sheikh el Abu Island Light, bearing 285°.
A further anchorage berth, as shown on the chart, lies
close S of Sheikh el Abu Island.
Directions
(continued from 7.13)
Difnein to Massawa
7.30
1 From a position about 2 miles W of Difnein (16°37′N,
39°20′E), the track leads S, passing (with positions given
from Sheikh el Abu Island Light (16°02′⋅0N, 39°26′⋅2E)):
E of the shoal patch (36 miles NNW) (position
approximate) (reported 1941) with a least depth
over it of 3⋅6 m, which lies E of Mersa Mubarak
(7.32). Thence:
2 E of Jezirat Hamdan (34 miles NNW) an inlet fringed
with mangroves; an islet stands on the coastal reef
close off the inlet. Mersa Ibrahim (7.33) lies close
S, thence:
W of Entesila (29 miles NNW) a coral islet fringed by
a reef and covered with dense bush and E of the
shoal (30 miles NNW), with a least depth over it of
15⋅2 m, which lies on the W side of the fairway,
thence:
3 W of the isolated shoal (24 miles NNW), with a least
depth over it of 5⋅1 m, situated on the W side of the
fairway, noting the two shoals, with least depths
over them of 10 and 8⋅6 m, which lie respectively
3 and 6 miles SSE. Thence:
4 E of the shoal patch (25 miles NNW), with a least
depth over it of 7⋅7 m, which lies about 3 miles E
of Mersa Gulbub (7.34), and E of the shoal spit,
with a least depth over it of 7⋅8 m, which lies
2 miles S. A stranded wreck lies on the coastal reef
between these two shoal areas, thence:
5 E of Ras Kuba (23 miles NW); the coast between
Mersa Gulbub and Ras Kuba, and farther S between
Ras Kuba and Ras Arb (15°47′N, 39°27′E), is
sandy, thence:
W of the isolated shoal patch (17 miles NNW), with
a least depth over it of 10 m, which shows up
distinctly and is principally made up of sand.
Thence:
6 E of the shoal spur (19 miles NW) with a least depth
over it of 8⋅2 m, thence:
W of the detached shoal (11 miles NNW), with a least
depth over it of 14⋅6 m, which lies about 2 miles W
of Harat Reefs (7.31), thence:
Charts 164, 460
7.31
1 Passing (with positions given from Sheikh el Abu Island
Light (16°02′⋅0N, 39°26′⋅2E)):
W of Seil Badira (9 miles N), a coral islet, 5 m in
height, situated on Harat Reefs which consist of a
rocky bank, usually visible, that extends about
6 miles N of Harat; dangerous underwater rocks lie
between the islet and Harat. Thence:
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7
2 E of the shoal patch (12 miles WNW) with a least
depth over it of 7⋅8 m, thence:
W of the detached shoal patch (5 miles NW) with a
least depth over it of 11⋅6 m, thence:
3 WSW of Sheikh el Abu, a low sandy island standing
on a reef which extends about 2 miles W from the
SW end of Harat. Sheikh el Abu Light (white
framework tower, black band, 17 m in height) is
exhibited from the W point of Sheikh el Abu. Harat
presents a uniformly flat outline with a few stunted
bushes growing on it; there are a few huts on the
W side of the island, and a beacon stands near its
SE corner. Thence:
4 NE of the two shoal patches (8 miles SSW), with least
depths over them of 14⋅7 m and 14 m, which lie
close off a shoal spit extending N from the coastal
bank over which there is a least depth of 5⋅6 m,
thence:
SW of Dohul Bahut (7 miles SE) a sand and coral
islet, 11 m in height, fringed by a reef, on which
stands a prominent clump of trees, thence:
5 SW of Dahret (11 miles SE) a sandy islet, 3 m in
height, standing on the SW corner of a reef. A
beacon stands on the S coast. Thence:
6 NE of Oreste Shoal (14 miles S), a detached sand and
coral shoal, which lies about 2 miles ENE of Ras
Arb, a low rounded and sandy point. Large masses
of floating weed have been observed in this vicinity.
mbereme Tomb is situated 4 miles SSW of Ras
Arb. The tomb has a domed roof and shows up
well from the N; in clear weather it can be seen
from a considerable distance and even in hazy
weather it can usually be identified, thence:
7 To a position ENE of Ras Dogon (15°39′N, 39°29′E)
on the alignment of the leading lights in the
approaches to the port of Massawa.
(Directions for South Massawa Channel are given
at 7.42, and for entry to Massawa at 7.175)
Minor inlets and bays
Chart 164
Mersa Mubarak
7.32
1 Mersa Mubarak (16°36′N, 39°09′E) is an indentation
within the coastal reef, situated close S of Kandellai (7.12),
which forms a small boat harbour fringed by mangroves.
Mersa Ibrahim
7.33
1 Mersa Ibrahim (16°29′N, 39°10′E) is another small boat
harbour about 6 miles S of Mersa Mubarak.
Mersa Gulbub
7.34
1 Mersa Gulbub (16°25′N, 39°11′E) is a small indentation
in the coast; a plantation is situated near the shore with an
airfield close S. Otherwise, the coast is completely barren for
several miles on each side.
A stranded wreck lies about 2 miles S of Mersa Gulbub.
199
SOUTH MASSAWA CHANNEL
General information
Chart 171
Route
7.35
1 South Massawa Channel lies on the W side of the Red
Sea and is a continuation SE of North Massawa Channel
(7.22).
The channel extends about 115 miles ESE, from a
position in the approaches to Massawa to a position NE of
Ras Shakhs (14°37′N, 41°12′E).
Topography
7.36
1 Between Ras Corali (15°30′N, 39°52′E) and the SW side
of Dehalak’ Dest (8 miles NE) (7.116), South Massawa
Channel is divided into three passages by Assarca Islets
(15°32′N, 39°55′E) and Shumma (4 miles E). These passages
are deep, and the reefs fringing the mainland and the islands
are steep-to and visible.
The land on both sides of South Massawa Channel
consists of coral cliffs which rise to about 2 m in height and
are well defined.
Depths
7.37
1 Depths throughout South Massawa Channel are generally
in excess of 25 m. The least charted depth is Fawn Shoal
(7.43), and a shoal with a least depth over it of 10 m lies
about 2 miles SW of Shumma (15°32′N, 40°00′E).
Other depths of less than 20 m lie within the channel;
their positions are best seen on the chart.
Cautions
7.38
1 See 7.24 and 7.90.
Natural conditions
7.39
1 Weather. In South Massawa Channel S winds cause a
considerable swell which is experienced S of, and in the
vicinity of, Shumma (15°32′N, 40°00′E) even when the
wind is not blowing strongly. The wind is frequently SE and
fresh in this vicinity, whilst in North Massawa Channel
(7.22) off Harat (16°05′N, 39°28′E) and Difnein (16°37′N,
39°20′E) (Chart 164), it is from the N.
2 So long as the wind is from the SW it remains
remarkably dry, but if it backs S or SE the wet bulb
thermometer quickly rises several degrees; this strong S wind
seldom lasts for more than four days. The barometer gives
no warning of the shift of wind but falls as soon as the wind
begins to blow.
7.40
1 Flow. See 7.20.
7.41
1 Tidal stream. In South Massawa Channel the tidal
streams are weak and variable.
The streams appear to meet in the vicinity of Shumma
(15°32′N, 40°00′E).
Directions
(continued from 7.31)
Chart 460
Massawa to Ras Shakhs
7.42
1 From a position ENE of Ras Dogon (15°39′N, 39°29′E)
in the approaches to the port of Massawa the track leads
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7
ESE, passing (with positions given from Shumma Light
(15°32′N, 40°00′E)):
NNE of Secca Mugiunia (17 miles WNW), a rocky
patch, with a small islet in its NE part, which lies in
the approach to Zula Bahir Selat’ 7.47). Foul
ground, with a least depth over it of 1⋅6 m, lies in
the SE part of this rocky patch. Thence:
2 SSW of Banco Erc Abdulla-Abu-Madda (14 miles W)
a detached bank, lying near mid-channel, thence:
NNE of Isolotto Madote (14 miles WNW), a sandy
islet (7.58) situated N of Isola Dissei (7.63) in the
approaches to Zula Bahir Selat’. Isolotto Madote
Light (white metal framework tower, black bands,
13 m in height) is exhibited from the SW part of
NE of Isolotto Dergamman Seghr 10 miles NNW)
an island which forms the W side of the entrance to
a bay, much encumbered with reefs and islands, that
lies between the island and Howakil, thence:
3 SW of Shab Abu el Khosu (14 miles NNE) a
dangerous, steep-to coral reef, 3 miles long, which
shows up well; part of the N edge of the reef dries
when the sea level is low. Thence:
4 NE of Umm es Sahrig, a coral island dotted with low
bushes, which lies on the NE edge of the coastal
reef, on the SE side of the entrance to Howakil Bay
(7.69). Umm es Sahrig Light (white metal
framework tower, black bands, 17 m in height) is
exhibited from the NE part of the island, thence:
the islet, thence:
3 NNE of Ras Corali (8 miles W) which forms the N
extremity of Penisola di Buri; and NNE of Dilemmi
(7.61) which lies close E of Ras Corali. Thence:
4 NNE of Assarca Islets (5 miles W) which consists of
two islets. The NW islet is mostly bordered by low
cliffs. The SE islet is sandy and covered with low
scrub. A reef awash extends about 5 cables SE from
the SE part of the islet. Assarca Islets Light (white
metal framework tower, black bands, 8 m in height)
is exhibited from the NE side of the NW islet.
(Directions for entry to Massawa are given at 7.175)
Chart 171
7.43
1 Thence, the track leads SE, passing:
NE of an isolated 10 m shoal (2 miles WSW),
thence:
SW of Shumma, which is fringed by a reef and lies
close to the centre of South Massawa Channel
(7.35). Shumma Light (white round metal tower;
22 m in height) is exhibited from a position near the
S extremity of the island. Thence:
2 NE of Ras Endu (6 miles SSW) a projection near the
middle of the NE coast of Penisola di Buri which is
low and fringed by a reef, thence:
NE of Umm Namus (8 miles SSE) an islet with white
sandy patches situated at both ends and on which
grow some conspicuous trees; a reef extends
4 cables N and 7cables ESE of the islet. A shoal
with a depth over it of 4⋅5 m lies about 2 miles NW
of the islet, thence:
3 NE of Fawn Shoal (11 miles SE) an isolated coral
shoal. A well, with a depth over it of 15 m, lies
about 1
miles E of Fawn Shoal. Thence:
SW of Dahlak Reefs (15 miles E) which front the
south coast of Dehalak’ Dest (7.116) for 26 miles
ESE from a position E of Ras Cambit (15°35′N,
40°03′E) (7.137), thence:
4 NE of Isolotto Dahleid (18 miles SSE), an islet fringed
by a reef, situated in the NW part of the entrance to
Howakil Bay (7.69).
7.44
1 Thence, from Isolotto Dahleid to Midir (42 miles SE) the
track continues SE, passing (with positions given from Umm
es Sahrig Light (15°04′⋅6N, 40°30′⋅5E)):
NE of Adjuz (17 miles NW) (7.75) a wooded, coral
island which appears level. A few huts stand on its
S side. The island is fringed in places by reefs
which are visible, thence:
2 NE of Isolotto Laksu (14 miles NW) an islet
connected to Howakil (7.77) by a reef over which
boats may cross, thence:
200
5 NE of ndeba Ye Midir Zerf Ch’af (3 miles SSE),
the SE entrance point of Howakil Bay. The point
forms the NW extremity of a small promontory on
which rise two double-peaked hills similar to
another double-peaked hill standing on Ras Herbe,
thence:
6 NE of Ras Herbe (6 miles SE) on which stands a
double-peaked hill which forms a conspicuous mark
that has the appearance of an island from a distance,
as the land on which it stands is very low; other
volcanic hills which rise from the plain behind Ras
Herbe are not so prominent. Between Ras Herbe
and Ras Gurmal, 4 miles ESE, lies the entrance to a
bay which is almost filled with the coastal reef.
Thence:
7 SW of Shab Muhammed (14 miles ENE) a coral reef,
which is visible from some distance. Note the coral
shoal, with a least depth over it of 14 m, which lies
on the NE side of the fairway, about 7 miles SE of
Shab Muhammed, thence:
8 NE of Ras Gurmal (10 miles SE) a coral point, about
5 m in height, which has the appearance of an
island, even from close inshore, as it is connected to
the mainland by a low neck of sand, thence:
NE of Ras Manrec (16 miles SE) the E extremity of
a coral peninsula which presents a broad face to
seaward and is connected to the mainland by a low
neck of sand. The peninsula is backed by a
mangrove swamp, thence:
9 NE of Midir (20 miles SE) a coral island situated on
the coastal reef which forms the NW entrance to
Anfile Bay (7.259).
7.45
1 From Midir to Ras Shakhs the track continues SE,
passing (with positions given from Shab Shakhs Light
(14°39′N, 41°07′E)):
2 NE of Seil (20 miles NW) the NE of the two islets that
make up the Barm al Agi Islands which lie in the N
part of the entrance to Anfile Bay (7.259). Seil is a
flat and bare coral islet; Estam Aghe, the inner islet,
has some bushes growing on it. Both of these islets
lie on a bank which should not be approached too
closely, as reefs extend N, NE and W of Estam
Aghe. Thence:
3 SW of Three Fathom Banks (22 miles N), shoal banks
with a least depth over them of 5⋅1 m which extend
6 miles ESE, thence:
4 NE of Derbsasa Dest (14 miles WNW) an islet
covered with bushes, which lies about 1 mile N of
Ras Anfile, the SE entrance point to Anfile Bay
(7.259). A beacon (tripod, white triangle topmark)
stands on the SW part of the island. A drying coral
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7
reef extends about 5 cables WSW from the SW
point of the island. Thence:
5 NE of Ras Anrata (9 miles WNW) a low coral point
which has the appearance of an island, from close
inshore. T’’o, a settlement with several conspicuous
buildings, stands on the point. It has been reported
that lights on the coast in this vicinity may be
visible from a distance of 8 miles from seaward. A
pier extends WNW from the coast, close SW of the
point. Thence:
6 SW of Seven Fathom Banks (15 miles NNE) which
extend about 12 miles SE, thence:
7 NE of Shbshab (3 miles NNE), a shallow spit which
extends NNE of Shab Shakhs from which Shab
Shakhs Light (white metal tower on white tripod
with black band, 37 m in height) is exhibited. The
light structure is reported to be radar conspicuous.
A dangerous rock lies on the W side of this spit,
and an isolated shoal patch, with a least depth over
it of 11 m, lies in the fairway about 7 miles NNE
of the light, thence:
8 NE of Ras Shakhs (5 mile ESE) a low and sandy point
which is inconspicuous as a flat plain extends from
the point to the base of the hills which rise about
7 miles inland. Ras Shakhs should be approached
with caution due to the shoals which lie in its
vicinity. A depth of 8⋅3 m lies 2 miles N of the
point, and a depth of 4⋅8 m lies 2 miles ESE of the
point. The bottom is uneven.
(Directions continue at 7.199)
Anchorage
7.46
1 Anchorage, with reasonable shelter from SE winds, may
be obtained within the small bay situated E of Ras Anrata
(14°42′N, 40°58′E) in depths of 12⋅5 m, as shown on the
chart.
ZULA BAHIR SELAT’
General information
Chart 171
Position
7.47
1 Zula Bahir Selat’ is a gulf entered between Ras Amas
(15°32′N, 39°35′E) and Ras Corali (16 miles E); the inlet
extends about 28 miles S between the mainland and Penisola
di Buri (7.42).
Principal marks
7.48
1 Landmarks:
Monte Ghedem (15°25′N, 39°33′E), an isolated
wooded mountain range which shows up well, and
can be seen for up to 50 miles in clear weather. It is
irregular in shape and rounded, with several small
peaks of nearly the same elevation as the summit,
which is a small pyramidal peak rising near the E
side of the range and is prominent from the N.
2 Monte-Ja-Ilua (15°02′N, 39°49′E), which stands close
S of the head of Zula Bahir Selat’
Monte Dule (15°22′N, 39°56′E) is the summit of a
range of hills which extends NNW from Monte
Dule. The peak is conical in shape and a good
landmark. Care should be taken not to mistake this
201
peak with Monte Dissei (7.63) on Isola Dissei
(15°28′N, 39°45′E), which has a similar appearance
from the N, but is only half the elevation.
3 Baranlo (14°53′N, 39°37′E) is a mountain in the form
of a conspicuous cone, standing about 14 miles SW
of the head of the gulf.
Description
7.49
1 The sides of the inlet are, in many places, fringed by
reefs which can extend over 1 mile offshore.
Isola Dissei (7.63) lies close within the E side of the
entrance to the inlet.
7.50
1 West side of Zula Bahir Selat’
Ras Amas (15°32′N, 39°35′E) is a low, rounded, coral
point; a shoal, with a least depth over it of 5 m, lies
1
miles E of the point and can be identified by the
discoloured water over it.
2 Between Ras Amas and Ras Malcatto (18 miles SSE) the
land rises gently from the coast to Monte Ghedem (7.48)
and other high land. The coastal plain in the vicinity of
Monte Ghedem is dotted with small villages and affords
pasture for sheep and cattle.
3 The ruins of Adulis, an ancient Greek city dating from
the third century BC, are situated on the left bank of a river
about 16 miles S of Ras Amas. Zula, a modern village
with a fort, lies about 1 mile SE of Adulis a short distance
from the right bank of the river.
4 In clear weather a good view of the mountains inland
may be obtained from the vicinity of Ras Malcatto (15°15′N,
39°43′E). Passes cleave through the mountains from N to S,
so that the ridges appear to rise one above another in
succession. The country around Ras Malcatto appears green
but, on inspection, it will be seen to be a sandy plain,
intersected by dry water-courses and overgrown with plants
and patches of coarse grass, which extends from the coast to
the mountains. A jetty projects from the shore immediately S
of Ras Malcatto.
5 A beacon stands at Al Fat (15°08′N, 39°41′E) which lies
about 7 miles S of Ras Malcatto; between these two
positions the coast is mostly fringed by mangroves.
Arafali (15°05′N, 39°45′E) is a village, situated 10 miles
S of Ras Malcatto, which is a collection of huts at the mouth
of a valley. Three remarkable extinct craters stand close S of
the village.
7.51
1 East side of Zula Bahir Selat’
Ras Artau (15°24′N, 39°47′E) forms the NW extremity of
Penisola di Buri (7.42).
Alibarate, Macannile and Nasiracurra are three villages on
the NW part of Penisola di Buri situated S of Ras Artau.
Monte Aleita (15°18′N, 39°47′E) stands about 5 miles S of
Ras Artau and appears wedge-shaped with the bluff toward
the NW, when in line with Dissei.
2 The coast between Ras Nasiracurra (15°15′N, 39°48′E)
and Dolphin Cove (7 miles SSE) is fringed by a reef
extending up to 7 cables offshore.
Anchorage
7.52
1 Anchorage may be obtained about 5 cables offshore, E of
Ras Malcatto (15°15′N, 39°43′E), in depths of about 20 m,
mud.
Anchorage may also be obtained N of Arafali (15°05′N,
39°45′E), in depths from 9 to 37 m, mud, noting the shoal,
with a least depth over it of 5 m, which lies close E.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7
Melita Bay
Charts 171, 168 plan of Melita Bay
Description
7.53
1 Melita Bay (15°15′N, 39°49′E) is entered E of Ras
Nasiracurra which is fringed by a shoal bank which extends
about 3 cables S; a shoal with a least depth over it of 4 m
lies about 1 mile W of the point.
The bay is bordered by mangrove swamps and is backed
by a grassy plain about 6 m in height.
2 A V-shaped tree stands on the edge of the drying contour
near the middle of the W side of the bay; the bay is almost
filled by a coral reef.
A beacon (3 m in height) stands on the NE side of the
bay on the edge of the grassy plain.
Anchorage
7.54
1 Anchorage, which is sheltered from all except S or SW
winds, may be obtained in the entrance to Melita Bay in
depths of about 18 m, sand and coral, as shown on the chart;
noting the several shoal patches which lie within 5 cables of
Ras Nasiracurra.
Dolphin Cove
Charts 171, 168 plan of Dolphin Cove
Description
7.55
1 Dolphin Cove (15°08′⋅5N, 39°50′⋅3E) is an opening in
the coastal reef entered between South West Rock which lies
on the S side of the entrance, and North West Rock which
lies on the N side. The cove has low, flat shores, but about
4 cables inland, the land rises suddenly to a 150 m high
rocky ridge. The country N of the cove is open and sandy,
but SE of it lie ridges of black lava which are thickly
covered with brushwood.
2 Monte Abdur, a hill 258 m in height, stands about 1 mile
inland from the head of the cove.
Approach
7.56
1 Leading marks. The alignment (084°) of two leading
beacons leads to the anchorage position which lies just
within the entrance near the middle of the bay:
Front beacon (15°08′⋅6N, 39°50′⋅7E) stands on a ridge
of sandhills, about 2cables inland from the head
of the cove.
Rear beacon, which is very small, stands about 300 m
E at an elevation of about 120 m, on the rocky
ridge.
Anchorage
7.57
1 Anchorage, with good holding, may be obtained, as
shown on the chart, just within the entrance points to the
cove, in depths of about 12⋅8 m, sand and mud.
Adjacent islands
Chart 460
Isolotto Madote
7.58
1 Isolotto Madote (15°35′N, 39°46′E) is a sandy islet
situated on the W side of a reef which is almost connected
on its S edge to the reef extending N from Isola Dissei
(7.63). Isolotto Madote Light (7.42) is exhibited from the
islet.
202
7.59
1 Anchorage may be obtained off the NW side of Isolotto
Madote, as shown on the chart, in depths from 18 to 27 m,
with the middle of the islet in line with Monte Dule (7.48),
bearing about 145°.
Caution. This anchorage must be approached with
caution as the ledge is very narrow and the depths decrease
rapidly.
7.60
1 Anchorage may also be obtained about 1 mile NE of the
shoalest part of Secca Mugiunia (7.42), in depths of 16⋅5 m
to 20 m, sand.
Dilemmi
7.61
1 Dilemmi (15°30′N, 39°54′E) lies close E of Ras Corali on
the edge of the coastal reef.
The island is partially wooded with a village on its W
side; the central part of the island provides pasture for
domestic animals; a beacon stands on its NE coast.
7.62
1 Anchorage. A fair anchorage, during periods of S winds,
may be obtained NW of Dilemmi, as shown on the chart,
about 1 cable offshore in depths of over 20 m, mud, or
closer inshore in a depth of about 12 m. Strong SE breezes
send a troublesome swell into the outer anchorage; in the
inner anchorage the reefs are very close. Landing is difficult
at times.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Charts 460, 168 plan of Dissei Anchorage
Isola Dissei
7.63
1 Isola Dissei (15°28′N, 39°45′E) is an island with
abundant vegetation situated on the E side of the main
entrance to Zula Bahir Selat’ 7.47) and on the W side of
Canale di Dissei (7.66).
The island rises in a series of conical peaks to Monte
Dissei, 102 m in height, which stands near the centre of the
island and forms its highest point; a beacon stands on the
summit.
2 A reef extends about 4 miles N from Isola Dissei almost
connecting with the reef fringing Isolotto Madote (7.58). A
long, thin, unnamed island is also situated on this reef.
Dissei is a village standing on the shore of a small bay
on the E side of Isola Dissei.
7.64
1 Anchorage. Good anchorage may be obtained off Dissei
village, as shown on the plan, with the N entrance point of
the bay bearing 290°, and Monte Dissei bearing 218°, in
depths from about 16 to 17 m, sand.
Caution is required in approaching this anchorage as an
above-water rock lies on a rocky shoal about 3 cables S of
the anchorage. The shoal is steep-to and soundings give no
warning.
Chart 460
Isola Ota
7.65
1 Isola Ota (15°30′N, 39°49′E) is an island with a flat
summit situated 3 miles W of Ras Corali (7.42), on the E
side of Canale di Dissei (7.66) the E entrance to Zula Bahir
Selat’. The S end of the island is connected to Penisola di
Buri (7.42) by a drying reef on which stand three islets.
A beacon stands near the centre of Isola Ota. The bay
between the island and Ras Corali is mostly shoal with
patches of rock.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7
Canale di Dissei
7.66
1 Canale di Dissei (15°30′N, 39°47′E) is the E and deep
entrance channel to Zula Bahir Selat’ 7.47) which separates
Isola Dissei (7.63) from Penisola di Buri (7.42).
Seil Islet (15°27′N, 39°47′E) is a volcanic islet, 17 m in
height, lying in the middle of the fairway through Canale di
Dissei; the islet is fringed by a reef and may be passed on
either side.
7.67
1 Secca Indore is a dangerous, rocky shoal, which lies in
the middle of the S entrance to Canale di Dissei, 1 miles
SE of the S end of Isola Dissei.
Caution. It is reported that the shoal cannot be
distinguished, so, to pass clear, a vessel should keep close to
the coastal reef, which is steep-to in this vicinity.
7.68
1 Scoglio Est consists of two white rocks, 5 m in height,
lying 3 cables W of Secca Indore. Scoglio Ovest consists of
two similar rocks, 4 m in height, lies 5 cables farther WNW;
each of these groups of rocks is fringed by a reef.
A rocky shoal, with a least depth over it of 3⋅5 m, lies
mid-way between Scoglio Ovest and the S end of Isola
Dissei.
HOWAKIL BAY
General information
Chart 171
Position
7.69
1 Howakil Bay (15°10′N, 40°15′E) is an extensive bay
situated on the E side of Penisola di Buri (7.42).
Description
7.70
1 Howakil Bay is entered from the SW side of South
Massawa Channel (7.35), between Ras Ererir (15°20′N,
2 Monte Achelo (15°00′N, 40°09′E) is a small, but
prominent table-hill, surmounted by a beacon,
which stands close to the shore of Howakil Bay.
The hill makes a good mark.
Monte Ghilifilli (14°55′N, 40°14′E) is a hill which
stands near the S end of Howakil Bay, close W of
Mersa Fatma (7.82), and is another good mark.
3 Monte Mallagu (14°47′N, 40°26′E) stands about
10 miles SE of Marsa Fatma and is also a good
mark.
Caution
7.73
1 Great caution is required when approaching any of the
anchorages in Howakil Bay due to the many dangers that lie
within.
Islands within Howakil Bay
Isolotto Dahleid
7.74
1 Isolotto Dahleid (15°16′N, 40°10′E) lies about 6 miles SE
of Ras Ererir (7.70) and is fringed by a reef.
Anchorage. A temporary anchorage may be obtained, as
shown on the chart, about 7 cables W of the islet, in a depth
of about 18 m, with the SW end of the islet in line with the
summit of Howakil (15°08′N, 40°16′E) bearing 144°.
2 During periods of fine weather anchorage may be
obtained on this line of bearing anywhere between Isolotto
Dahleid and a position S of Umm Namus (7.43), in depths
from 18 to 26 m.
Adjuz
7.75
1 Adjuz (15°14′N, 40°15′E) lies on the outer part of the
bay with South Massawa Channel (7.35).
Banco Dahleid, on which there are dangerous underwater
rocks, lies about 1 miles W of Adjuz; the bank is generally
visible.
40°05′E) and ndeba Ye Midir Zerf Ch’af (31 miles SE).
The coast, on the NW side of the entrance to the bay,
between Ras Corali (15°30′N, 39°52′E) and Ras Ererir
(16 miles SE) is low and fringed by a reef.
2 The bay is much encumbered with islands and reefs, but
there are several good anchorages in the lee of the outer
islands.
There are numerous mountains and hills rising inland
from the vicinity of the bay, some in ranges, but others are
isolated volcanic cones and table-hills. During periods of
very clear weather, the main inland mountains may be seen
rising in successive ranges to elevations of over 3000 m.
Outer anchorage
7.71
1 Depending on the direction of the wind, a sheltered
anchorage may be obtained inside Umm Namus (15°24′N,
40°03′E) (7.43) in a depth of 26 m. The best berth is near
the island, both for shelter and to avoid a shoal with a depth
of 6⋅8 m over it, lying off the mainland shore.
Landmarks
7.72
1 Alid (14°53′N, 39°56′E) stands about 15 miles SW of
the middle of the head of Howakil Bay. The
mountain is the highest summit of a range of
volcanic mountains which extends from the head of
Zula Bahir Selat’ 7.47) to S of Shab Shakhs
(7.45).
203
7.76
1 Anchorage may be obtained about 6 cables off the NW
side of Adjuz, sheltered from SE winds, in either of the two
anchor berths shown on the chart, in depths of about 15⋅5 m,
or, with the sandy spit which forms the SW extremity of
Adjuz bearing 100° and its W extremity bearing 005° in a
depth of 9 m, sand. The channel that leads from the N to
these anchorages, passing E of Banco Dahleid, is free of
dangers.
2 During periods of N winds the best anchorage, for use by
small vessels, is off the SE side of Adjuz in the channel
between the island and Howakil (7.77) taking care to avoid
Secca Tahara, a drying reef about 7 cables S of the S end of
Adjuz, and the other rocks and shoals which lie in this
channel. If approaching the channel from the E, do not bring
the N extremity of Isolotto Laksu (15°13′N, 40°18′E) (7.77)
to bear less than 093° until N of a dangerous rocky patch,
with a least depth over it of 1⋅5 m, which lies in
mid-channel.
3 Anchorage is also available, as shown on the chart, about
7 cables W of Isolotto Laksu in a depth of about 16 m.
Local knowledge is required for the use of all the
anchorages off Adjuz.
Howakil
7.77
1 Howakil (15°09′N, 40°15′E) lies about 1 miles S of
Adjuz (7.75). The island attains an elevation of 207 m in its
SE part, the summit being a sharp volcanic peak on which
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7
stands a beacon; in its NE part the island is composed of
low coral.
Isolotto Laksu (15°13′N, 40°18′E) lies about 5 cables
NNE of the island and is connected to it by a reef which
may be crossed by boats.
2 Isolotto Dergamman Seghr (7.44) and Isolotto
Dergamman Kebr are two islands on the SE side of an
unnamed bay, almost filled with reefs, which lies off the E
side of Howakil. Scoglio Nord Ovest and Scoglio Sud-Est
(not charted by name) are two above-water rocks, one of
which is 27 m in height, which lie in the S part of this bay,
about 5 cables off the SE corner of Howakil.
Dufare Islet lies 1 miles SW of the SW end of Howakil.
7.78
1 Anchorage may be obtained in the entrance to the bay
on the E side of Howakil, with the summit of Howakil
bearing 234°, and the E extremity of Isolotto Laksu bearing
322°, in depths of about 18 m, mud, as shown on the chart.
This anchorage is not sheltered.
Isolotto Debel Ali
7.79
1 Isolotto Debel Ali (15°05′N, 40°16′E) is an islet situated
about 1 miles S of Howakil (7.77) to which it is connected
by a shallow bank. Umm es Seil, another islet, lies near the
SW end of a reef which extends about 1
miles SW of
Isolotto Debel Ali; Isolotto Galdina, a further islet, lies close
SSE.
That part of Howakil Bay (7.69) SW of Umm es Seil and
Isolotto Galdina is encumbered with rocks and shoals.
Baka
7.80
1 Baka (15°01′N, 40°18′E) is a large island with a flat
summit situated in the S part of Howakil Bay (7.69); a
beacon stands in the N part of the island.
Isolotto Delesen lies on a reef which extends about
4 miles NE from the N side of Baka.
2 Isolotto Abbaguba lies on the coastal reef about 4 miles E
of Baka; Scoglio Tauanich, an above-water rock, stands on
the E side of a shallow bank which extends N from the
coastal reef N of Isolotto Abbaguba.
A low sandy islet, of whitish colour and marked by a
beacon on its E side, lies in mid-channel between Isolotto
Abbaguba and Baka; a detached coral patch lies about
3 miles N of the islet in the approaches to this channel.
The coastal reef in this vicinity is visible at low water.
Umm es Sahrig
7.81
1 Umm es Sahrig (15°04′N, 40°30′E) lies on the SE side of
the entrance to Howakil Bay (7.69). Umm es Sahrig Light
(7.44) is exhibited from the NE part of the island.
Anchorage. A good anchorage during S winds may be
obtained about 1 miles NW of the island, as shown on the
chart, in depths of about 14 m, sand and mud.
DAHLAK BANK
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 157, 164
Position
7.87
1 Dahlak Bank extends from Saunders Reef (17°11′N,
39°24′E) to Seven Fathom Banks (180 miles SE) with its
outer edge lying between 30 and 80 miles offshore.
204
2 During N winds anchorage may be obtained, as shown on
the chart, about 7 cables SE of the SE side of the island, but
in approaching this anchorage berth the E extremity of the
island must not be brought to bear more than 010°, so as to
avoid the reef fringing the SE side of the island.
Mersa Fatma
Description
7.82
1 Mersa Fatma (14°55′N, 40°18′E) is a small inlet,
encumbered by a reef, situated in the S part of Howakil Bay
(7.69).
Acbaro Kebr and Acbaro Seghr are two small islets
lying on the reef.
An abandoned settlement stands at the head of the inlet.
Approach
7.83
1 The inlet may be approached from South Massawa
Channel (7.35) through the channel which lies between
Isolotto Dergamman Kebr (7.77), Isolotto Debel Ali (7.79)
and Isolotto Galdina on its NW side, and Baka (7.80) and
Isolotto Delesen on its SE.
2 The track continues through the dangers situated W of
Baka, passing E of Hedan Island (14°58′N, 40°13′E), then S
of Baka, then making the approach the anchorage berth,
situated about 8 cables from the head of the inlet, along the
E side of the reef encumbering the inlet. It should be noted
that a drying sandbank has encroached E of the reef onto the
approach track and the anchorage may not now be
accessible. The anchorage is not marked on the chart.
3 Local knowledge. No vessel should attempt this route
without local knowledge.
7.84
1 Caution. The dangers S of Baka are only visible from a
distance of about 1cables.
7.85
1 Landmarks:
Monte Achelo (15°00′N, 40°09′E) (7.72).
Monte Ghilifilli (14°55′N, 40°14′E) (7.72).
Monte Billoisin (14°53′N, 40°28′E).
Anchorage
7.86
1 A good well sheltered anchorage may be obtained within
the channel on the NW side of Isolotto Delesen (15°05′N,
40°20′E), as shown on the chart, in depths of about 10 m,
sand and mud.
Anchorage for small vessels may still be possible about
8 cables from the head of Mersa Fatma and about 5 cables
offshore, but see 7.83.
Local knowledge is required for the use of both of these
anchorages.
Description
7.88
1 The islands on Dahlak Bank are principally composed of
coral and bordered by reefs. The channels between them
have moderate depths and are encumbered with shoals.
North East Channel (16°10′N, 39°55′E) (7.105) is the
only channel across the bank.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7
Depths
7.89
1 The depths over Dahlak Bank are very variable and
numerous shoals exist whose positions may best be seen on
the charts.
Caution. The whole of the area of the bank is
inadequately surveyed and further uncharted shoals may
exist.
Caution
7.90
1 Dahlak Bank itself is composed principally of sand and
coral with occasional patches of mud. From the nature of
this bottom there is a great probability of the existence of
many shoals which are not shown on the charts. Therefore,
great caution is required when navigating through the whole
of this area, for, although the coral shoals if of large extent,
are sometimes visible, those of sand cannot be distinguished
from the light-coloured water prevalent everywhere over the
bank.
2 The visibility of the shoals on Dahlak Bank is different
from most other parts of the Red Sea, where the reefs are
steep-to and can be easily distinguished by the difference in
the colour of the water with the reefs nearly always showing
white.
See 7.25 and 7.89.
Dahlak Bank — north part
Chart 164
Area
7.91
1 The N part of Dahlak Bank, described in this sub-section,
is the area contained within Saunders Reef (17°11′N,
39°24′E), Abu Rabah (16°28′N, 39°30′E) and Harmil
(16°31′N, 40°10′E).
Description
7.92
1 Saunders Reef (7.11), Fawn Reef (7.12), Harmil (7.112),
Seil Harmil (7.112), Entaasnu (7.112) and Romiya Islet
(7.112) all lie in the N part of Dahlak Bank and are
described at their cross references.
Two Fathom Bank (16°37′N, 39°29′E) lies E of Difnein
(16°37′N, 39°20′E) (7.12). The bank is formed by coral and
extends about 3 miles in a N/S direction. Many years ago a
W-going current was experienced in the vicinity of the bank.
2 Three Fathom Bank (16°46′N, 39°38′E) lies about 10 m
NE of Two Fathom Bank. A coral shoal patch, with a least
depth over it of 6⋅7 m, lies 7 miles NW. Further shoals, best
seen on the chart, lie in the vicinity of Three Fathom Bank.
Awali Hutub (16°32′N, 39°46′E) is a coral islet standing
on a bank situated W of Harmil. Awali Shaura (6 miles
WSW) is a coral islet fringed by a reef.
3 Abu Rabah (16°28′N, 39°30′E) is a wedge-shaped coral
islet situated WSW of Awali Hutub; some above-water rocks
lie off the NE and SW ends of the islet.
7.93
1 Shoals. There are quite a number of unnamed, isolated
shoals, some with dangerous rocks standing on them, lying
in the area of Dahlak Bank covered from about 15 miles N
of Harmil (16°31′N, 40°10′E) (7.112) to about 30 miles W
of the island. Their position, and the dangers over them, are
best seen on the chart.
Once within the banks 50 m contour line, soundings give
little warning of the proximity of these shoals.
See 7.89.
205
Dahlak Bank — east central part
Charts 157, 164, 460
Area
7.94
1 The East Central Part of Dahlak Bank, described in this
sub-section, is the area lying E of a line joining the E
extremities of Harmil (16°31′N, 40°10′E) and Dohul
(48 miles SSW).
Description
7.95
1 Entaentor (7.112), Hukale (7.112), Entvedul (7.113),
Norah Adasi (7.113), Seil Adasi (7.113), Ashgar (7.113),
Dahret (7.113), Dhu-lalam (7.96), Hommed Ali (7.114),
Hommed Nuuse (7.114), Entoghodof (7.115), Adbara Seghir
(7.115), Adbara Kebir (7.115), Kad Entoghodof (7.115),
Eucus (7.115), Dalcus (7.115), Dabanet (7.115), Duliacus
(7.115) and Dar Ottun (7.115) all lie in the east central part
of Dahlak Bank and are described at their cross references.
2 Between Entaentor (16°20′N, 40°14′E) and the N side of
Dehalak’ Dest (Dahlak Island) (30 miles SSW) (7.116)
stretches a line of islands and islets all lying on a shallow
bank on which there are many rocks. Ghabbi hu (16°16′N,
40°13′E), is a low island, formed of sand and coral with a
few bushes growing on it, standing on the same coral reef as
Entaentor.
3 Dahret Kabari (16°14′N, 40°10′E) is a low island formed
by coral and fringed by a reef. Naheleg (16°09′N, 40°10′E)
is another low island formed by sand and coral which lies
immediately S of Dahret Kabari on the shallow bank.
4 Norah (16°03′N, 40°03′E) is a low island of sand and
coral with a few date groves growing on it; Sahelia is a
village on the NW coast of the island, and Norah village is a
ruined village on the W coast. Dhuladhiya, a rocky island,
lies close S of the S side of Norah.
7.96
1 Mahun (16°03′N, 40°10′E) lies close E of Norah on the
same reef and is again formed of sand and coral. Dhu-l-fidol
(6 miles ESE) is formed of sand and coral and is fringed by
a reef. The bank which extends E of the island, and on
which there are dangerous rocks, was reported a number of
years ago to be extending farther E. A shoal area reported at
the same time as the extension of the bank lies about 2 miles
NW of Dhu-l-fidol.
2 Dhu-lalam (15°57′N, 40°09′E), Martaban (2 miles SE)
and the two islets of Akrab (6 miles SE) all lie SE of Norah
and are low and sandy.
Dhu-l-ankibat (15°56′N, 40°15′E) is a sandy island
standing on a reef which extends about 3 miles E. Derom
(6 miles ESE) is a low and sandy islet standing on a
shallow rocky bank about 5 miles in length.
Hawatib (15°54′N, 40°34′E) and Hawatib Kebir (2 miles
ESE) are low and sandy islets with bushes growing on them.
7.97
1 Kad Norah (16°06′N, 39°59′E), Seil Norah (3 miles S),
Seil Betta (6 miles SSW) and Dar Solum (7 miles SSW)
are a group of rocky islets lying near the W edge of the
shallow bank which includes Norah.
A beacon stands on the W side of Dar Solum.
Umm es Seil (16°03′N, 39°53′E) is a sandy and rocky
islet which lies on a shallow bank about 5 miles W of Seil
Norah.
Charts 157, 164
Depths
7.98
1 Shoals east of Harmil. A detached shoal (16°22′N,
40°42′E) (reported 1969), lies 31 miles ESE of Harmil
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7
(16°31′N, 40°10′E). A shoal, with a least depth over it of
28⋅5 m, lies outside the charted 50 m depth contour, 7 miles
NNE of the detached shoal.
Further shoals, best seen on the chart, lie over this part of
Dahlak Bank, E of Harmil, and may indicate that water,
shallower than charted, lies over the whole of this area.
7.99
1 Shoals east of Ghabbi hu. A shoal (16°15′N, 40°34′E),
with a least depth over it of 8⋅4 m, lies about 18 miles E
of Ghabbi hu.
A further shoal (16°09′N, 40°27′E), with a least depth of
4⋅8 m over it, lies 14 miles E of the E extremity of
Naheleg (7.95). A detached shoal area, with a least depth
over it of 8⋅2 m, lies 22 miles ESE of the same point.
2 Further shoals and dangerous rocks, best seen on the
chart, lie in this vicinity and to the S of this area, and may
indicate that water, shallower than charted, lies over the
whole of this area.
7.100
1 Caution. See 7.89 and 7.90.
Dahlak Bank — west central part
Charts 164, 460
Area
7.101
1 The west central part of Dahlak Bank, described in this
sub-section, is the area lying W of a line joining the E
extremities of Harmil (16°31′N, 40°10′E) and Dohul
(48 miles SSW).
Description
7.102
1 Asbab (7.112), Seil Anber (7.112), Enta-idell (7.114),
Entufash (7.114), Umm Ali (7.115), Baradu (7.115), Dohul
(7.115) and Dohul Bahut (7.31) all lie in the west central
part of Dahlak Bank and are described at their cross
references.
2 Wusta (16°19′N, 39°49′E) and Seil Wusta (1 mile NE) lie
on a sand and coral bank W of Isratu. Seil Wusta is a rocky
islet with a reef on its SE side. Wusta is an island composed
of coral and is rather high; a beacon stands in the middle of
the SE side of the island. A beacon stands on the SE edge
of a reef which extends 1 mile SE of Wusta.
3 Tanam (16°18′N, 39°45′E) is a rather high island with a
small, but prominent peak; a beacon (4 m in height) stands
on the W side of the island. An unnamed islet lies close N
of Tanam on the same reef, which also extends about
3 miles S.
Jerom (16°12′N, 39°46′E) is an islet situated near the
centre of a shoal which lies on the same bank as Tanam.
Kad Jerom, a small islet, lies about 4 miles SSW on a
shoal bank.
4 Kad-hu (16°21′N, 39°33′E) is a rather high island fringed
by a reef and a bank; a rocky islet lies about 1 miles W of
the island near the edge of the fringing reef.
7.103
1 Malak (16°06′N, 39°35′E), Dahret (1 mile SE) and Abu
Sherayu (2 miles SE) are a group of islets situated about
7 miles E of Harat (16°05′N, 39°28′E). Malak is a low
sandy islet standing on the S end of a rocky shoal and is
separated from Dahrat by a narrow channel. Dahret and Abu
Sherayu are two coral islets situated on the E side of a shoal
bank; both islets are low and wooded. Durrum Seghir
(1 miles S) is a patch of below-water rocky heads and one
above-water rock which lies at the W end of the shoal bank.
206
2 Seil (16°02′N, 39°35′E) is a low and rocky islet, fringed
by a reef, lying about 6 miles E of the S end of Harat; Seril
Badira (1 miles SE) lies near the middle of an area of
reefs.
3 Caution. The deep channel which lies between Harat
(16°05′N, 39°28′E) and the islets and reefs which lie to the
E has not been fully surveyed. In 1972 a shoal, on which a
ship grounded, was reported to exist 4 miles NE of the NE
end of Harat.
Cautions
7.104
1 See 7.89 and 7.90.
North-East Channel
Chart 164
General information
7.105
1 Description. North-East Channel (16°10′N, 39°55′E)
forms the NE approach to the port of Massawa (7.141). The
channel leads across Dahlak Bank from a position in the
central part of the S end of the Red Sea.
North-East Channel is the only channel across Dahlak
Bank.
2 The channel is entered between Harmil (16°31′N,
40°10′E) and Entaentor (11 miles SSE); the track then leads
N of Seil Anber (16°20′N, 40°00′E) and between that islet
and Isratu (5 miles W), thence close E of Enta-idell
(16°08′N, 39°51′E) and about 1 miles E of Dohul
(15°55′N, 39°38′E).
7.106
1 Outer approaches. The bottom in the outer approach to
North-East Channel appears uneven and a number of isolated
shoal patches exist.
Two shoals, with least depths over them of 6⋅6 and 5⋅3 m,
lie on the N side of the approach to the channel, 16 miles
and 18 miles, respectively, NE of the N end of Entaentor.
2 A shoal, with a least depth over it of 8⋅4 m, lies on the S
side of the approach to the channel, 15 miles E of the N end
of Entaentor.
Further shoal areas exist whose positions are best seen on
the chart. See 7.89 and 7.90.
7.107
1 Local knowledge. North-East Channel should only be
used by vessels with local knowledge.
7.108
1 Depths. The depths throughout the channel are very
variable.
7.109
1 Other aids to navigation. Many of the beacons described
in the following text, and shown on the charts, were erected
for a survey early in the last century and may now be
damaged or destroyed.
The beacons on Seil Harmil (7.112) and Entaentor (7.112)
are excellent marks. Asbab Islet (7.112) may be identified by
its beacon.
7.110
1 Current. In the vicinity of North-East Channel the
current usually sets SE during the winter and NW in the
summer.
7.111
1 Anchorages. Anchorage may be obtained, as shown on
the chart, in a depth of about 18 m about 1 mile W of the
beacon standing on Entaentor (16°20′N, 40°14′E).
Anchorage is also available, as shown on the chart, about
1 miles SW of the beacon which marks Seil Harmil
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7
(7.112), a sandbank on the reef which extends SSE from the
S side of Harmil (16°31′N, 40°10′E).
2 Anchorage may also be obtained, as shown on the chart,
in depths from 13 to 18 m about 1 mile WNW of Ras Haral
(7.113) the S extremity of a peninsula which extends S from
the S side of Isratu (16°20′N, 39°53′E).
Directions
7.112
1 From a position about 10 miles ENE of the N end of
Entaentor (16°20′N, 40°14′E) the track leads through the N
part of Dahlak Bank, passing (with positions given from the
beacon standing on Seil Adasi (16°10′N, 39°56′E)):
N of the detached shoal (24 miles ENE), with a least
depth over it of 9⋅3 m, situated on the S side of the
outer entrance to the channel, thence:
2 S of the shoal area (25 miles NE), with a least depth
over it of 3⋅7 m, situated on the N side of the outer
entrance to the channel, thence:
N of Entaentor (20 miles ENE), a low island formed
by sand and coral on which bushes grow; the island
is bordered by a reef and bank with dangerous
shoal depths over it. A beacon (red iron framework,
staff topmark, 15 m in height) stands on the N part
of the island. Thence:
3 N of the shoal area (19 miles NE), with a least depth
over it of 3⋅6 m, which lies off the NW side of
Entaentor, and the detached shoal, with a least depth
over it of 2⋅6 m, which lies about 1 mile SW,
thence:
4 S of Harmil (24 miles NNE) a low, wooded island
formed by sand and coral and fringed in places by
a reef; a number of dangerous rocks stand on the S
side of the sand and coral bank which surrounds the
island; depths over the bank are very irregular. Seil
Harmil is a sandbank on the S edge of the reef
which extends 1 mile SSE from the SE side of
Hamil. A beacon (red iron framework, staff
topmark, 15 m in height) marks the sandbank.
5 Romiya Islet, which lies 5 miles W of the island, and
Entaasnu, which is low and lies close W of the SW
end of the island, are both formed of sand and coral
and are wooded. Note the three shoal areas, with
depths of 7⋅9, 7⋅2 and 9⋅8 m over them, which lie
on the N side of the fairway about 5 miles S of the
S side of Harmil, thence:
6 SSE of Asbab (17 miles NNE) a low, coral islet with
bushes growing on it; the islet stands on a bank and
is partially fringed by a reef. A beacon (concrete
pyramid, black and white bands, 6 m in height)
stands on the islet, thence:
7 NNW of Hukale (13 miles NE) a low, sand and coral
islet on which bushes grow, and is bordered by a
reef and the shoal area, with a least depth over it of
3⋅8 m, which lies about 2 miles WSW of the islet.
Due to the bushes growing on it, Hukale is visible
from a considerable distance. Thence:
8 SSE of the isolated shoal patch (14 miles NNE) with
a least depth over it of 3⋅5 m. This shoal can always
be identified by the light colour of the water over it,
thence:
WNW of Seil Anber (10 miles NNE) a wooded sandy
islet fringed by a reef; In 1940 shoals were reported
to lie 1 and 1 miles E of the islet, thence:
7.113
1 From Seil Anber to Seil Adasi, passing (with positions
given from the beacon on Seil Adasi (16°10′N, 39°56′E)):
207
2 ESE of Isratu (9 miles NNW) one of the largest and
highest islands on Dahlak Bank. The island is
composed principally of coral rock, and has some
small peaked hills which rise to a height of over
30 m. An inlet on the NE side of the island,
penetrates 1 mile inland. A beacon (concrete
pyramid, black and white stripes, rhomboid and
rectangular topmark, 6 m in height) stands on the E
extremity of the island. Thence:
3 ESE of Ras Haral (7 miles NNW) the S extremity of
of a peninsula, marked by a beacon (pyramid, black
and white stripes), which extends about 1
miles S
from the S side of Isratu; a similar beacon stands
about 5 cables WNW on the SW edge of the
peninsula. Another beacon, 5 m in height, stands on
a hill which rises from the middle of the SW side
of the island, and:
4 WNW of the shoal spur (5 miles N), with a least depth
over it of 3⋅2 m, which lies on the NW edge of a
shoal area extending about 4 miles NW of
Entvedul, thence:
5 WNW of Seil Adasi which, together with Entvedul,
Norah Adasi, Ashgar, Dahret, and Dhu-lalam, form
a group of islands and islets standing on a shallow
bank which extends NNW of Norah. Some of these
islands and islets of the group are low and sandy,
others are high and rocky with bushes growing on
them. A beacon (column of iron barrels, sphere
topmark, 5 m in height) stands on Seil Adasi.
Thence:
Charts 164, 460
7.114
1 From Seil Adasi to Entufash through Hommed Channel,
passing (with positions given from the beacon on Seil Adasi
(16°10′N, 39°56′E)):
ESE of Enta-idell (5 miles WSW) a sandy and rocky
island. The island is bordered by a reef which on its
E side extends only a short distance offshore and is
easily seen. A beacon (column of iron barrels, 3 m
in height) stands on the W side of the island, and:
2 WNW of a detached shoal patch (5 miles SW) with a
least depth over it of 5 m, which lies off the N end
of a shoal area with a least depth over it of 3⋅7 m.
When clear of Enta-idell, the line of bearing (033°),
astern, of the beacon on the island, leads SSW,
passing close WNW of a shoal patch, with a least
depth over it of 8⋅2 m, and thence into the N end of
Hommed Channel. Thence:
3 WNW of Hommed Ali and Hommed Nuuse (9 miles
SW) two high rocks standing on the N part of a
shoal, with a least depth over it of 2 m, thence:
ESE of Entufash (13 miles SW) a low and sandy islet
lying at the SW end of a shoal coral bank. A
dangerous shoal area lies close W of Entufash over
which there are least depths of 1⋅8 m. The shoals in
this vicinity are not easily seen due to the nature of
the bottom. See 7.90. Thence:
7.115
1 From Entufash to the S end of North Massawa Channel
(7.22), passing (with positions given from the beacon on Seil
Adasi (16°10′N, 39°56′E)):
2 WNW of Adbara Kebir (12 miles SSW) which is a
good mark and together with Adbara Seghir,
Entoghodof and Kad Entoghodof form a group of
low sandy islets lying on a shallow rocky bank. A
beacon (column of iron barrels, sphere topmark, 7 m
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7
in height) stands on Adbara Kebir. Kad Entoghodof
is easily identified, as, although low, due to its
sandy formation it has a remarkable white
appearance. Note the 9⋅2 m patch W of Adbara
Kebir. Thence:
3 ESE of the shoal patch (14 miles SW), with a least
depth over it of 5⋅0 m, which lies SSW of Entufash;
and the shoal patch, with a least depth over it of
9⋅2 m, which lies 1 mile farther SSW. Thence:
4 WNW of a detached shoal patch (15 miles SSW) with
a least depth over it of 2⋅8 m, thence:
ESE of Umm Ali (18 miles WSW), a low, sandy and
bushy islet, which itself resembles a large bush
standing on a shallow coral reef; an islet also stands
on the bank about 8 cables farther ESE. Thence:
5 WNW of a shoal patch (18 miles SSW) with a least
depth over it of 6⋅0 m. The patch lies close W of a
rocky bank on which stand Eucus, Dalcus and
Dabanet, three small islets. The bank itself is
separated by a narrow channel from two further
islets, Duliacus, and Dar Ottun which is low and
composed of sand and coral. Note the detached
shoal patch, with a least depth over it of 10⋅6 m,
which lies on the SE side of the fairway (19 miles
SW), thence:
6 ESE of Dohul (23 miles SW) which is marked on its
SE corner by a beacon. Dohul, together with
Baradu, are two small islands which lie together on
a shallow rocky bank. Baradu is sandy with some
palms near its centre. Dohul is flat with a village
containing a square white mosque on its NW side; a
grove of palms lies about 5 cables SE of the village;
a survey beacon (dark pyramid with a post
alongside) stands near the centre of the island and
shows up well from seaward, thence:
7 WNW of Dur Gaam (25 miles SSW) a sandy, coral
islet fringed by a reef; the islet is wooded and
prominent. Dur Ghella, which lies 2 miles E, is a
narrow wooded islet. Thence:
8 Into the S end of North Massawa Channel, or to a
position on the alignment of the leading lights in
the approaches to Massawa.
(Directions for North Massawa Channel are given at
7.30, for South Massawa Channel at 7.42,
and for entry to Massawa at 7.175)
Dehalak’ Des t
Chart 164
Position
7.116
1 Dehalak’ Dest (15°42′N, 40°05′E) is situated on the W
side of Dahlak Bank.
Description
7.117
1 The island, which is much indented, is composed of coral
rock interspersed with patches of land affording a supply of
good grass during the rainy season.
For the most part, the island is low.
Principal marks
7.118
1 Landmarks:
Jebel Kusum (15°48′N, 40°08′E) is a mound,
composed of coral, rising to a height of 24 m, near
the middle of the NE side of the island.
208
Jmhl (15°45′N, 39°56′E) is a small tableland situated
in the middle of the W side of the island; a beacon
stands on it.
Jebel Im Ium (15°43′N, 40°02′E) rises from the NE
shore of Gubbet Mus Nefit (7.129) and is
surmounted by a beacon; seen from the SW it
appears as a wedge-shaped mound.
North-east coast
7.119
1 Description. Ras Antalo (15°53′N, 39°57′E) is the NW
extremity of Dehalak’ Dest.
Erwa (15°42′N, 40°11′E) is a moderately high coral
island, on which there are a few huts, situated off the middle
part of the NE coast of Dehalak’ Dest; Ras Erwa is its N
extremity, and a narrow boat channel lies on its E side. Tidal
streams in the vicinity of Erwa can attain a considerable
velocity at times.
Ras Shoke (15°34′N, 40°26′E), the SE extremity of
Dehalak’ Dest, is fronted to the E by a drying reef.
Charts 157, 164, 171
Islands and dangers off north-east coast
7.120
1 A chain of islands, interspersed with dangerous rocks and
shoals, extends E from the NE side of Dehalak’ Dest
(7.116).
Dergoman Seghir (15°53′N, 40°05′E) is a low and sandy
island which lies off the N part of Dehalak’ Dest at the W
end of this chain of islands; Dergoman Kebir (2 miles SE) is
a high and rocky island, wooded in its SE part; Seil Sikan
(6 miles ESE) is a high, bare, coral islet.
2 Sayin (15°49′N, 40°16′E) is a high, rocky islet
surrounded by a fringing reef; a small islet lies near the W
edge of this reef. Dahret Dulke (2 miles NNE) is a small
islet. Dha-n-nafarik (4 miles E) is a high and rocky island
bordered by a rocky bank. Dhu-l-kuff (12 miles ENE) and
Dhu-l-bia, 3 miles farther E, are both low, sandy islands, the
former has a few bushes growing on it.
3 Seil Arabi (15°44′N, 40°18′E) is a high rocky islet of
coral formation lying near the E end of a spur of a coral reef
extending E from the N end of Erwa; Yermalkau (5 miles
ESE) is a small islet fringed by a shallow bank.
7.121
1 Gharib (15°47′N, 40°27′E) and Dhulakal (3 miles SE) are
low and sandy islets lying on a shallow, rocky bank; Senach
(5 miles SSE) is a small islet fringed by a coral reef.
Dhu Nishab (15°44′N, 40°34′E) is a low sandy islet,
mostly fringed by a reef. Rijyuma (4 miles ESE) is a low
island bordered by a reef; Raka, a low, sand and coral islet,
fringed by a reef, lies 1 mile farther E. Maharib (15°40′N,
40°38′E) is low and fringed by a reef.
2 Segala (15°45′N, 40°45′E), known locally as Farcha, is a
low sandy island, bordered by a reef, situated on a shallow
rocky bank; tidal streams near the island are weak. Dehret
Segala (2 miles SSE) is a low, sandy, bushy islet fringed
by a reef.
3 Darraka (15°36′N, 40°28′E) lies on a spur of the coastal
reef off the E side of Dehalak’ Dest; a small village is
situated on the islet. Darraka el Bahr (4 miles E) is a low
islet mostly fringed by a reef and bordered by a shallow
bank; a beacon (position approximate) stands on its NE side.
7.122
1 Umm en Nayim (15°34′N, 40°33′E) is an islet lying on
the NW edge of a rocky reef which stands on a shallow
bank; a beacon stands on the islet. A further islet (1 mile E)
also lies on the reef. Howeit (2 miles SW) is an islet
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7
partially fringed by a reef and standing on a bank; a beacon
stands on the islet.
2 Tor Island (15°36′N, 40°38′E) is a rocky islet made up of
two distinct parts joined by a narrow neck of land, mostly
fringed by a reef. Mustamila (5 miles NE) is a sandy islet on
the W side of a detached reef. Zauber, known locally as
Du-Barr, (9 miles ENE) is higher and sandy, and lies on the
W side of a reef which stands on a rocky bank that extends
mainly to the N.
3 Hatitau (15°34′N, 40°42′E) is a high, rocky island with
its E side fringed by a reef; Salima (4 miles E) is a higher
rocky island mostly fringed by a reef.
Shab Ali (15°38′N, 40°54′E) is a rocky bank which
extends about 5 miles N and 2 miles E; care should be
taken to avoid passing over this bank.
Anchorage
7.123
1 Vessels with local knowledge may obtain anchorage about
5 cables off the NW side of Tor Island (15°36′N, 40°38′E)
in depths of about 9 m, as shown on the chart.
Caution
7.124
1 See 7.89 and 7.90.
Charts 460, 168 plan of entrance to Gubbet Mus Nefit
West coast
7.125
1 Description. Ghubbet Entatu, a large bay, is entered
between Ras Antalo (15°53′N, 39°57′E), the NW extremity
of Dehalak’ Dest (7.116), and Ras Dofueur (6 miles SSW).
The bay is mostly fringed by a reef; the villages of Melill,
Aranat and Sed Daaf stand on its S shore. The village of
Kunbeiba is situated at the head of the bay; a mosque stands
close N of the village.
2 Khor Melill (15°46′N, 40°00′E) is an inlet, mostly filled
by the coastal reef, which is entered from the SE corner of
Ghubbet Entatu.
Ras Malcomma (15°37′N, 39°58′E), the SW extremity of
Dehalak’ Dest, is fringed by a reef which extends about
2 miles NW and 1 miles W. Seil Bayus (4 cables WSW)
is a low, black, rocky islet which lies near the S edge of this
reef.
Islands and dangers off the west coast
7.126
1 Dhu-rijrij (15°51′N, 39°50′E) is a low and wooded islet
standing on a reef situated about 7 miles WSW of the
entrance to Ghubbet Entatu (7.125).
Sarad (15°49′N, 39°55′E) is a moderately high, rocky
islet which lies, together with a smaller islet close NE, near
the outer extremity of a rocky bank which extends about
5 miles NNW from Ras Dofueur, the S entrance point to
Ghubbet Entatu; a beacon stands on the N side of Sarad.
2 Dur Gaam (15°47′N, 39°45′E) (7.115) a coral islet; Dur
Ghella (2 miles E) (7.115) is a further coral islet.
Shab Raia (15°43′N, 39°51′E) is a dangerous coral reef
which is nearly awash, in places, situated on the N side of
the approaches to Ghubbet Mus Nefit (7.129).
7.127
1 Cundabil (15°44′N, 39°53′E) is a wooded islet lying at
the outer end of a rocky bank which extends about 1 mile
connects ntraya Dest to Nokra Dest in the vicinity of Ras
Tarba.
2 Enteara (15°39′N, 39°54′E), which lies on the S side of
the approaches to Ghubbet Mus Nefit (7.129), is a sandy
islet whose white coast shows up well when the sun is
shining.
Anchorage
7.128
1 Anchorage may be obtained, as shown on the chart, from
close NW of Shab Raia (15°43′N, 39°51′E) to within
1 miles SE of Dur Ghella (4 miles NW) in various
depths, sand.
Anchorage may also be obtained within the channel
which is about 7 cables wide that lies between the reef
fringing Enteara (15°39′N, 39°54′E) and the coastal reef;
these reefs must be approached with caution.
2 There is an indifferent anchorage available, ESE of Shab
Raia, in depths of about 10 m, with Cundabil (15°44′N,
39°53′E) bearing 031°, and the S extremity of ntraya Dest
(15°42′N, 39°55′E) bearing 121°. These anchorages are not
shown on the chart.
Charts 171, 460, 168 plan of entrance to Gubbet Mus Nefit
Gubbet Mus Nefit
7.129
1 Description. Gubbet Mus Nefit is an inlet in Dehalak’
Dest (7.116) entered between Ras Ar-Ar (15°43′⋅5N,
39°55′⋅4E) and Ras Bulul (2 miles SSE).
2 Nokra Dest lies in the entrance to Gubbet Mus Nefit and
is composed principally of coral rock, but there are small
valleys and patches of grass with a few isolated palm trees; a
village stands in the middle of the S side of the island. A
beacon stands near the centre of the N part of the island,
about 7 cables S of the N extremity of the island.
The channel N of Nokra Dest is narrow and intricate.
7.130
1 Depths. The main entrance channel to Gubbet Mus Nefit,
which lies S of Nokra Dest, has a least charted depth in the
fairway of 9⋅8 m.
Within the inlet depths are well in excess of 100 m.
7.131
1 Tidal streams in the entrance to Gubbet Mus Nefit attain
a rate of between 1 to 3 kn. Entry or departure from the inlet
should be made about 45 minutes before the time of high or
low water, when the tidal streams do not have a rate of more
than 1 kn and the stream is setting in the opposite direction
to which the vessel is intending to proceed.
7.132
1 Directions for entry.
Entry leading beacons:
Front beacon (white pyramid, staff topmark)
(15°42′⋅1N, 39°56′⋅4E).
Rear beacon (black pyramid, white stripe, white staff
topmark) (4 cables from front beacon).
From a position about 1 miles SSW of Ras Ilet
(15°41′⋅7N, 39°55′⋅9E), the S extremity of Nokra Dest, the
alignment (031°) of these leading beacons leads through the
first reach of the entrance channel, passing (with positions
given from Ras Bulul (15°41′⋅8N, 39°56′⋅3E)):
2 WNW of a buoy (black and white stripes, triangular
topmark, apex up) (4 cables SSW) marking the edge
of the shoal water, on the E side of the entrance,
NW from ndber Dest, a much indented coral islet. A which extends S from Ras Bulul, and:
beacon stands on the N side of Cundabil ESE of a beacon (position approximate) (5 cables
ntraya Dest (15°42′N, 39°55E) lies at the S end of this WSW) marking the edge of the shoal water on the
rocky bank, close S of ndber Dest from which it is W side of the channel which extends 2cables
separated by a narrow channel. A very shallow shoal bank SSW of Ras Ilet, thence:

209
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7
3 WNW of Ras Bulul; a beacon stands on the island
about 2cables ESE of the point, thence:
SE of the front entry leading beacon (3cables N).
7.133
1 Second reach of the entrance channel:
Leading beacons:
Front beacon (white pyramid, staff topmark)
(15°42′⋅1N, 39°56′⋅4E).
Rear beacon (white pyramid, black stripe) (1
cables
from front beacon).
2 From a position in the entrance channel about 3cables
NNE of Ras Bulul, the alignment (276°), astern, of the
second set of leading beacons leads through the second reach
of the entrance channel, passing (with positions given from
Ras Bulul (15°41′⋅8N, 39°56′⋅3E)):
3 S of Ras Medat (1 mile ENE), the SE extremity of
Nokra Dest, thence:
S of a buoy (black and white stripes, triangular
topmark, apex up) (1 mile ENE) marking the edge
of shoal water extending SE from Ras Medat,
thence:
4 S of a buoy (black and white stripes, triangular
topmark, apex up) (1 miles E) which marks the S
extremity of a reef extending about 1 mile SSE
from an unnamed point on Dehalak’ Dest (7.116);
Medecheri is an islet lying near the middle of the
W edge of the reef; a beacon stands on the W side
of the islet.
7.134
1 Fede Anchorage (not named on chart) lies in the channel
between the E side of Nokra Dest and Dehalak’ Dest
(7.116) where anchorage may be obtained in depths of about
11 m, as shown on the chart, about 9 cables NNW of
Medecheri.
Wreckage from a former naval base lies about 90 m off
the E coast of Nokra Dest opposite this anchorage.
2 Anchorage may be obtained, as shown on the chart, in
Marsa Sael (15°42′⋅4N, 39°55′⋅3E) which lies close N of the
very shallow bank which connects ntraya Dest to Nokra
Dest in the vicinity of Ras Tarba (7.127).
3 Anchorage may also be obtained, as shown on the chart,
in an unnamed inlet in depths from 12 to 20 m, sand and
shell, which is entered about 5 miles SE of Ras Medat
(15°42′⋅3N, 39°57′⋅2E).
7.135
1 Kh r Soguri (15°41′N, 39°58′E) is an inlet situated on
the W side of Gubbet Mus Nefit (7.129) which is entered
about 2 miles SE of Ras Medat.
A dangerous wreck lies near the middle of the entrance to
the inlet.
Anchorage, as shown on the chart, may be obtained
within the inlet in depths of about 18 m, sand.
Khr Balaan, which is shallow and encumbered with
islets and reefs, is entered from the N side of Khr Soguri.
MASSAWA
General information
Chart 460 Approaches to Massawa and plan of Massawa
Harbour
Position
7.141
1 The port of Massawa (Mits’iwa) (15°37′N, 39°28′E) lies
at the S end of the W side of the Red Sea.
210
7.136
1 Kh r Amrac (15°38′N, 40°02′E) is an inlet situated on
the S side of Gubbet Mus Nefit (7.129) entered about
6 miles SE of Ras Medat.
Charts 171, 164
South coast
7.137
1 Between an unnamed point about 2 miles ESE of Ras
Malcomma (15°37′N, 39°58′E) (7.125), and Ras Cambit
(3 miles ESE) a low-lying point, the coast recedes to form
a bay. The coastal reef, which almost fills this bay, is fronted
by three islets, Ghidir-as-ale, Erfan and Eleaf and by several
other small islets and above-water rocks.
2 Dehalak’ Kebr, a village on the N side of the head of the
bay, consists of a number of huts together with two domed
tombs; a few palms grow in this vicinity.
Seil Umm Ali are two conspicuous wooded islets which
lie on Dahlak Reefs about 6 miles E of Ras Cambit
(15°35′N, 40°03′E).
3 Isola Museri (15°29′N, 40°21′E) is a coral island situated
near the ESE end of Dahlak Reefs. Several other islets lie in
its vicinity. A drying reef, with shoal water extending from
its NW and SE sides, lies 6 miles SE of Isola Museri.
Dahlak Bank — south-east of Dehalak’ Des t
Chart 171
Area
7.138
1 The area of Dahlak Bank SE of Dehalak’ Dest (7.116)
described in this sub-section extends about 45 miles SE from
the E end of Dehalak’ Dest.
Description
7.139
1 Howeit and Umm en Nayim both lie SE of Dehalak’
Dest and are described at 7.122.
Bullissar (15°23′N, 40°39′E) is a low, sandy islet, mostly
surrounded by a reef; a rocky bank extends W from the W
end of the islet. The islet is the farthest S on Dahlak Bank.
Aucan (15°30′N, 40°48′E), Mojeidi (1 mile E),
Dhu-l-kurush (1 mile WSW) and Mashilagha (5 miles SW)
all lie between 5 and 15 miles NE of Bullissar and are all
high and rocky. Aucan is almost steep-to on its S and W
sides.
2 An area of shoal water, over which a moderate sea is
reported to break, lies about 14 miles E of Mojeidi; its least
charted depth is 1⋅8 m.
Neghileh Reef (15°21′N, 41°06′E) lies about 24 miles E
of Bullissar.
Caution
7.140
1 See 7.89 and 7.90.
Description
7.142
1 Massawa is situated on an island of the same name which
is connected by causeways to the mainland via Taulud Island
(15°36′N, 39°28′E). Both causeways are of stone and are
constructed over the adjoining reefs.
These two causeways are about 9 m wide and carry a
roadway, railway and a footpath. Strong SE winds cause a
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7

swell within the harbour which sometimes causes the
causeways to be flooded.
Function
7.143
1 Massawa is the principal port of Eritrea. In 1992 the
population was about 40 000.
7.144
1 Trade. The principal exports are linseed, fruit and
vegetables, livestock, meat, oil cakes, hides, and salt.
The principal imports are cotton and silk goods, building
materials, petroleum products, and provisions.
Topography
7.145
1 Massawa is entered between the SE extremity of Abd el
Kader Peninsula (15°37′⋅5N, 39°28′⋅5E), which extends
about 1 mile E from the coast and forms the S side of Khr
Dakliyat (7.186) and the N side of Gherar Bay (7.174), and
Ras Mudur (15°36′⋅6N, 39°28′⋅9E) the E extremity of
Massawa Island.
2 Gherar Peninsula (15°36′⋅9N, 39°28′⋅2E) extends about
6 cables E from the shore, close S of Abd el Kader
Peninsula, and forms the N side of the inner part of the
harbour and the SW side of Gherar Bay.
Taulud Island (15°36′⋅3N, 39°27′⋅9E) forms the SW side
of the harbour and the SE side of Taulud Bay.
The peninsulas and the islands, are connected with each
other, and the mainland, by drying reefs.
Port limits
7.146
1 As shown on the chart, the harbour limits are bounded by
lines extending E from the coast from the vicinity of Ras el
Garara (15°39′N, 39°29′E), and from a position in the
vicinity of 15°35′N, 39°27′E which lies on the coast on the
S side of Harggo Bahir Selat’ 7.190), to the meridian of
39°30′E.
Approach and entry
7.147
1 The approach from seaward is either through North
Massawa Channel (7.22) or South Massawa Channel (7.35).
Entry is made on the line of the leading lights which
leads through the harbour entrance.
Traffic
7.148
1 In 2003 the port was visited by a total of 278 vessels.
Principal marks
7.152
1 Landmarks:
Jebel Karambura (15°42′N, 39°08′E) (Chart 164)
stands about 20 miles WNW of Massawa near the
NW end of a range of lower peaks which extends
SE. When the higher mountains farther inland are
visible this range appears insignificant, but it often
shows up well when the former are obscured and
Jebel Karambura, being nearly isolated and of a
bold rounded form, makes a good landmark.
7.153
1 The following landmarks which lie within, or near the
harbour, are reported conspicuous:
The two chimneys, part of the cement works situated
on the N side of Khr Dakliyat (7.186), which
stand about 2 cables W of Ras Dogon (15°38′⋅5N,
39°28′⋅7E). These chimneys are usually one of the
first landmarks sighted when making Massawa.
2 The water-tower standing 1cables W of Ras Mudur
(15°36′⋅6N, 39°28′⋅9E).
Sheikh Said Island (15°35′⋅6N, 39°28′⋅7E), a sandy
island covered with mangroves, situated on the W
part of an extensive drying reef on the S side of
Massawa; a ruined jetty extends from the W side of
the island.
7.154
1 Other marks of navigational significance:
The Governor’s palace, a white building with a dome
standing 7 cables W of Ras Mudur (15°36′⋅6N,
39°28′⋅9E). In 1994 the palace was reported
damaged.
A naval signal station, white building with tower radio
mast close by, stands at the root of the North Arm
of the breakwater (15°37′⋅1N, 39°28′⋅8E).
2 The port signal station consisting of a small
observation tower and signal mast stands on top of
the port office which is situated near the NE corner
of Massawa Island.
Red and white tower (15°36′⋅5N, 39°28′⋅3E) which
stands near the post office.
A white minaret standing about 4 cables WSW of Ras
Mudur.
Limiting conditions
Controlling depth
7.155
1 The harbour will accept vessels up to a draught of 8⋅8 m.

Port Authority Deepest and longest berths

7.149 7.156
1 The harbour is administered by the Massawa Port 1 The longest alongside berth is No 1 Berth (7.178). The
Administration: PO Box 73, Massawa, Eritrea. deepest berth is No 6 Berth (7.178).

Danger area Tidal levels

7.157
7.150
1 The mean tidal range at Massawa is about 0⋅7 m; the tides
1 Unexploded ordnance was reported (1962) to lie within a
are semidiurnal.
circular area, the approximate position of which is shown on
the chart, lying 2 miles E of Ras el Garara (15°39′N, Density of water
39°29′E). Vessels are advised not to enter this area. 7.158
1 Density 1⋅025 g/cm3.
Other aids to navigation
7.151 Maximum size of vessel handled
1 Lights: 7.159
Ras Mudur Light (black round metal tower, white 1 It is reported that the port can handle vessels of up to
bands, 22 m in height) (15°36′⋅6N, 39°28′⋅9E). 180 m in length with a maximum draught forward of 8⋅4 m
Isolotto Madote Light (15°34′⋅8N, 39°45′⋅7E) (7.42). and aft of 8⋅8 m.

211
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7

Local weather Pilotage

7.160
1 Winds. Land and sea breezes prevail throughout the year.
The sea breezes blow from the NE and are always stronger
than the land breezes.
Strong SE winds raise a swell causing flooding of the
causeways joining the peninsulas and islands.
2 In summer, when the sea breezes are usually light, there
are many days of calms with very high temperatures. During
this period, sudden squalls, forewarned by dense curtains of
sand, come down from the hills such that vessels should be
securely moored. During winter these squalls are rare.
In winter, W winds prevail in the morning, SE winds in
the afternoon, and S winds in the evening.
In summer, N winds prevail in the morning, NE winds in
the afternoon, and E winds in the evening.
7.161
1 Climate. Heat and humidity are serious problems.
Temperatures are at their highest from June to September
when they are accompanied by the greatest humidity.
The climate, despite intense heat, is generally not
unhealthy, but fevers appear to be prevalent at about the end
of April and in the early part of May.
7.162
1 Climatic table. See 1.275 and 1.281.
7.169
1 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 100 grt and is
available between sunrise and sunset only.
The pilot boards about 7 cables E of the harbour entrance,
as shown on the chart.
The pilot boards from a white motor launch marked with
a black P on either bow and flying the International Code
flag H.
Tugs
7.170
1 Tugs are available. A tug is compulsory for all vessels
over 300 grt.
Regulations
7.171
1 Sufficient crew must be kept on board during the vessels
stay to enable the vessel to be moved at any time.
Main engines must not be immobilised without the
permission of the port manager.
Refuse must not be discharged overboard.
Landing from ships boats on the off-lying islands is
strictly prohibited.
Special regulations are in force for vessels carrying
dangerous cargoes.

Signals
Arrival information 7.172
1 By day the following International Code flag signals are
Caution flown, and by night the following light signals are displayed
7.163 from the signal station:−
1 Navigational aids are unreliable. They may be unlit, out
of position, or missing.

Port operations
7.164
1 Only one vessel at a time may manoeuvre within the
harbour.

Port radio
7.165
1 There is a port radio at Massawa which is reported to
normally operate between 0700 and 1800.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).

Notice of ETA
7.166
1 Vessels should notify their ETA 72, 48 and 24 hours in
advance of their arrival.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).

Outer anchorage
7.167
1 If advised to anchor by the port authorities then
anchorage, with good holding, may be obtained, as shown
on the chart, between 8 cables and 1 mile ENE of Ras
Mudur (15°36′⋅6N, 39°28′⋅9E) in about 32 m, mud.
Caution. Foul ground has been reported N of the
entrance leading line.
7.168
1 Prohibited anchorage. An area, as shown on the chart,
in which anchorage is prohibited lies across the entrance to
Khr Dakliyat (7.186). International Code flag signals (7.172)

212
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7
Massawa Harbour (7.174)
(Original dated 2000)
(Photograph − Crown Copyright)
Quarantine regulations
7.173
1 All crew members must hold a valid immunization
certificate for cholera and yellow fever.
Harbour
Chart 460 plan of Massawa Harbour
General layout
7.174
1 The entrance to the harbour lies between North Arm
Breakwater and South Arm Breakwater, both of which
extend across the coastal reef; the reef on the S side of the
entrance is the more difficult to distinguish.
Gherar Bay (15°37′⋅1N, 39°28′⋅4E) is situated on the N
side of the outer harbour and is mostly fringed by reefs; a
number of piers extend from the shores of the bay.
2 Taulud Bay (15°36′⋅7N, 39°27′⋅8E), which forms the
inner part of Massawa Harbour, is approached through a
narrow channel which lies between the N end of Taulud
Island (7.145) and the Gherar Peninsula (7.145). The bay is
bordered by reefs and shoals; several piers extend from the
shores of the bay.
3 Within the harbour there are six quays for handling
general cargo, a tanker berth, a berth for handling salt, and
two Ro-Ro ramps.
The main general cargo quay extends nearly 5 cables SW
from close within the harbour entrance.
An oil pier extends NW from the S side of the entrance
of Khr Dakliyat (7.186).
A salt pier extends 110 m SSE from the Gherar Peninsula
into the N side of the outer harbour.
4 Two Ro-Ro ramps are situated at the W end of the
harbour.
Directions for entering harbour
(continued from 7.31, 7.42 and 7.115)
Approach
7.175
1 From a position in Massawa Channel, about 7 miles
NNW of Secca Mugiunia (15°36′N, 39°43′E) (7.42), the
approach leads WSW to the vicinity of the pilot boarding
position, as shown on the chart.
Entry
7.176
1 The entry to Massawa then leads WSW clear of a wreck,
which lies close NW of the entry leading line.
213
Leading lights:
Front light (white metal framework tower, black bands
on white square concrete base, 10 m in height)
(15°36′⋅6N, 39°28′⋅2E).
Rear light (similar construction on white square
concrete base, 15 m in height) (128 m from front).
2 The alignment (243°) of these leading lights leads
through the centre of the entrance, passing (with positions
given from Ras Mudur Light (15°36′⋅6N, 39°28′⋅9E)):
3 SSE of Ras Abd-el-Kader (6 cables N) and the North
Arm Breakwater Light (4 cables N) (white concrete
tower, green bands, 5 m in height) which is
exhibited from the SSE end of the N entrance
breakwater. A wreck, swept to a depth of 10⋅7 m,
lies on the leading line between the heads of the
two breakwaters. Thence:
4 NNW of South Arm Breakwater Light (2 cables NNW)
(white concrete tower, red bands, 2 m in height)
which is exhibited from the NNW end of the S
entrance breakwater, thence:
To the main port area.
Berths
Anchorage
7.177
1 Anchorage may be obtained within the port, with the
permission of the port authorities, in depths from 11 to
16⋅5 m, mud. The holding ground is good, but the swinging
room is restricted.
A number of mooring buoys are laid within the harbour.
Berths
7.178
1 Massawa Island. The main line of berths lies on the NW
side of Massawa Island which is faced with stone and is well
provided with mooring bollards. The line of the quay
provides six well-fendered berths which are numbered from
the SW to the NE. The longest berth is No 1 Berth with a
length of 179 m.
Vessels are usually berthed facing NE.
No 6 Berth with a depth alongside of 9⋅0 m is used as the
explosives berth; advance notice is required for its use.
7.179
1 Two Ro-Ro ramps are situated at the W end of the quays
with ramp widths of 16 m and 18 m.
7.180
1 A salt pier extends about 110m SSE from the SE corner
of the Gherar Peninsula. The berth can accommodate vessels
up to 8⋅8 m draught; vessels usually drop an anchor before
berthing.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7
7.181
1 Oil Pier (Marine Pier) (7.187) is a tanker berth situated on
the S side of the entrance to Khr Dakliyat (7.186), the
berth can handle vessels up to a maximum draught of 9⋅1 m.
Harggo Bahir Selat’ Tanker Berth (7.190) is situated in
the NW corner of Harggo Bahir Selat’ and handles vessels
up to a usual maximum draught of 9⋅0 m.
Port services
Repairs
7.182
1 Minor engine repairs; slipway available for vessels up to
900 dwt.
Other facilities
7.183
1 Hospital; Deratting Exemption Certificates issued;
quayside cranes up to 6 tonnes capacity; mobile cranes up to
100 tonnes capacity.
Supplies
7.184
1 Fuel oil available at Nos 5 and 6 Berths; diesel oil by
road tanker; limited fresh water; fresh provisions.
Communications
7.185
1 Massawa Airport, 7 km distant, which has connecting
flights with Asmara airport, 100 km distant.
There is sea communication with other Red Sea ports.
Kh r Dakliyat
Description
7.186
1 Khr Dakliyat, also known as Khr Gurgusum, is a bay
situated close N of Massawa Harbour which is entered
between Ras Dogon (15°38′⋅5N, 39°28′⋅7E) and the N end
of Oil Pier (5 cables SSW).
The entrance fairway between the reefs and shoals
extending from both entrance points is about 3 cables wide.
Dakliyat Rock stands on the reef extending from the S
side of the entrance and over which Oil Pier extends.
Berths
7.187
1 Oil Pier (Marine Pier) extends from the S entrance point
to Khr Dakliyat to a yellow square building standing on
Dakliyat Rock; it then continues a farther 2 cables NW to its
berthing face.
Tankers moor with both anchors down and their stern
secured both to the pier and mooring buoys. A floating hose
is taken aboard amidships.
2 Maximum permitted draught at the pier is 9⋅1 m; berthing
and unberthing are only undertaken between sunrise and
sunset.
A buoy (conical) (position unreliable) is moored about
1 cable NE of the N end of the pier.
7.188
1 American Jetty extends about 200 m from a position on
the shore about 3 cables SW of the head of Oil Pier. This
jetty is now in ruins.
A further jetty extends NW, then N from a position on
the shore about 1 cable S of American Jetty.
A number of piers extend N from the shore, E of
American Jetty. They are also in ruins.
214
2 On the N side of Khr Dakliyat a short pier extends S
from the vicinity of the cement works which stands about
3 cables W of Ras Dogon (15°38′⋅5N, 39°28′⋅7E).
Further alongside berths lie about 2 cables NNW of the
short pier, W of the cement works.
A ruined pier extends a short way SE from a position
close WSW of Ras Dogon.
7.189
1 Anchorage. Good anchorage may be obtained, as shown
on the chart, about 5 cables SSW of Ras Dogon (15°38′⋅5N,
39°28′⋅7E), NW of Oil Pier, in depths of about 9⋅6 m, mud.
Note the shoal areas which lie close W of the charted
anchorage position.
Shallow draught vessels may obtain anchorage, as shown
on the chart, in the NW arm of the bay, mud.
Prohibited anchorage. See 7.168.
Harg go Bahir Selat’
Chart 460 Approaches to Massawa and plan of Massawa
Harbour
Description
7.190
1 Harggo Bahir Selat’ (15°34′N, 39°30′E) is a bay,
situated close SSE of Massawa Harbour, which is entered
between Sheikh Said Island (15°35′⋅6N, 39°28′⋅7E) and Ras
Nauret (15°32′N, 39°32′E); a beacon stands on Ras Nauret.
Except in its SW corner, the bay is fringed by coral reefs
and shoals which extend up to 1 mile offshore. The shores
of the bay are low; a plain extends about 2 miles inland,
rising gently, to the base of a range of hills.
2 Harggo is a large village situated on the W shore of the
bay where there are a number of white houses and a
quadrangular white mosque which can be seen from a
considerable distance; a pier extends ENE into the bay from
the shore in the vicinity of the village.
3 An inlet leads from the N part of the bay, between Sheikh
Said Island (15°35′⋅6N, 39°28′⋅7E) and the reef on the E
side of Taulud Island. In the N part of this inlet a breakwater
extends about 2 cables SSE from Massawa Island; two
stranded wrecks, possibly awaiting disposal, lie close SW of
this breakwater.
Berths
7.191
1 A tanker berth is situated in the NW part of the head of
Harggo Bahir Selat’; the berth consists of a pier which
extends about 4 cables ENE from the shore. Mooring buoys
are laid between 1 and 1cables E of the head of the pier.
A pillar, to which is secured a floating hose, is situated
about 1cables ENE of the pierhead.
2 Tankers moor with their stern towards the pierhead, both
anchors down, and secured aft to the two mooring buoys.
The floating hose is taken aboard amidships.
Maximum permitted draught at the pier is usually 9⋅0 m
but vessels up to a draught of 9⋅6 m have been berthed;
berthing and unberthing are only undertaken between sunrise
and sunset.
Massawa South Anchorage
7.192
1 Approach. Massawa South Anchorage is situated at the
NW head of Harggo Bahir Selat’, NNE of the tanker berth.
The approach to the anchorage is somewhat encumbered
with shoals whose positions are best seen on the chart.
A buoy (white conical) is moored about 100 m S of the
shoal, with a least depth over it of 3 m, which lies about
5 cables SSE of Sheikh Said Island (15°35′⋅6N, 39°28′⋅7E).
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7
2 A post (concrete, 1 m in height) stands about 4cables
SE of the S end of Taulud Island (15°36′N, 39°28′E), on a
shallow shoal area off the coral reef; a buoy (conical) is
moored close SW of this shoal area.
A buoy (white conical) marks the S side of an area of
shoal water, with a least depth over it of 5⋅9 m, which lies
about 8cables S of the S end of Taulud Island.
7.193
1 Anchorage. The anchorage is entered between the S end
of Taulud Island (15°36′N, 39°28′E) and a point on the
mainland shore 1 miles SW.
2 The two anchor berths, as shown on the chart, lie 2 cables
W, and 4 cables WSW of the S end of Taulud Island, within
an area of detached shoals and a detached reef. Anchorage
may be obtained in depths of about 11⋅7 m, mud.
RAS SHAKHS TO RAS RAHEITA
General information
Chart 143
Route
7.196
1 The inshore route described in this section extends about
165 miles SE along the W side of the S end of the Red Sea
from a position NE of Ras Shakhs (14°37′N, 41°12′E) to
Ras Raheita (12°44′N, 43°07′E) (4.82).
Topography
7.197
1 Between Ras Shakhs and Ras Terma Zerf Ch’af (13°14′N,
42°33′E) ranges of high volcanic mountains slope towards
the coast.
2 From Ras Terma Zerf Ch’af to Ras Loma, 16 miles SE,
the coast is low and fringed by a reef which extends up to
1 mile offshore in places. A small range of hills, from 15 m
to 24 m in height, lie 7 miles SSE of Ras Terma Zerf Ch’af
about 1 mile inland.
The general aspect of the land between Ras Terma Zerf
Ch’af and Ras Raheita is given at 4.73.
Landmarks
7.198
1 Monte Ghedele (14°28′N, 41°14′E) is the E extremity
of a hilly range which extends 10 miles W. This
range, which has remarkable jagged peaks, may
often be seen when the higher and more distant
mountains are obscured by haze. Also, from Monte
Ghedele a further range of hills extends 23 miles
SE, parallel with the coast, and a short distance
inland.
2 Monte Cosar (14°21′N, 41°15′E) is an isolated peak,
that shows up well from the N, at the SE end of a
range which extends about 13 miles S from Monte
Anrata; a lower peak stands 2 miles ENE.
Directions
(continued from 7.45)
Ras Shakhs to South West Haycock
7.199
1 From a position about 10 miles NE of Ras Shakhs
(14°37′N, 41°12′E) the track leads SE for about 106 miles
along the W side of the S end of the Red Sea, passing:
2 NE of Ras Cosar (14°28′N, 41°20′E) a small
projection on the N side of the mouth of a stream.
A dangerous rocky spit extends 3cables from the
215
3 No 10 Buoy (white conical) is moored, about 3 cables
NW of the S end of Taulud Island, marking the S side of an
area of detached coral reef at the head of the anchorage. A
stranded wreck, the position of which is approximate, lies
close S of a pier which extends about 1 cable SSE of the
head of the bay.
7.194
1 Prohibited anchorage. An area, as shown on the chart,
in which anchorage is prohibited, lies between Sheikh Said
Island (15°35′⋅6N, 39°28′⋅7E) and Massawa Island (6 cables
NNW).
7.195
1 Anchorage may also be obtained off the head of the bay,
as shown on the chart, about 5 cables NW of the head of
Harggo village pier, in depths of 15 m, mud.
shore from a position 5 cables NW of Ras Cosar.
Thence:
NE of Ras Nammeita (14°21′N, 41°24′E), thence:
NE of Ras Sirbut (14°15′N, 41°29′E), thence:
3 NE of Kordumu’t Dest (14°06′N, 41°40′E) a rugged,
bluff, volcanic island lying about 3 miles offshore.
A reef, with a least depth over it of 4⋅6 m, extends
1 miles W from the island; there is an above-water
rock 1cables N, and a similar rock close S.
Thence:
4 NE of Kordumu’t (14°04′N, 41°39′E) which consists
of a group of small islets and rocks lying on a
shallow bank about 2 miles SSW of Kordumu’t
Dest, the highest of which rises to an elevation of
40 m. The channels between Kordumu’t Dest and
Kordumu’t, and between the islets and the coast,
should not be used.
NE of Ras Busedda (14°02′N, 41°39′E), thence:
5 NE of Dad Ye Midir Zerf Ch’af (13°56′N, 41°43′E) a
projection from the coast which forms the S side of
d Bay, a shallow bay. d is a village at the head
of the bay standing on a sandy plain; a few white
stone buildings stand at the W end of the village,
and a small mosque with a minaret is situated at its
NE end. Anchorage is not recommended in the bay
as the holding is bad. There is very little shelter
from SE winds and the approach to the shore is
encumbered with shoals and banks.
7.200
1 From a position NE of Dad Ye Midir Zerf Ch’af the
track continues SE, passing:
NE of an isolated shoal (14°03′N, 41°54′E), with a
least depth over it of 18⋅4 m, which lies close to the
50 m depth contour, thence:
2 NE of Barn (13°58′N, 41°52′E) an islet fringed by a
steep-to bank extending 2 cables from it. A rocky
shoal, with a least depth over it of 7⋅4 m, lies
1 miles NNE. Ras Alob is a promontory on the
coast (4 miles SW) fronted by a rocky, sandy spit
over which there are dangerous shoal depths; the
spit extends about 1
miles NE from the point.
Cod-Ali is an islet lying on the NE edge of this
spit. Cod-Ali Est (2 miles S) is a steep-to rock.
Thence:
3 NE of Abeilat (13°53′N, 41°59′E) a volcanic island
with three hummocks on it, of which the SW is the
highest and attains an elevation of 120 m. The
island is fringed by a rocky reef and a bank, with a
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7

least depth over it of 8 m, which extends 1 mile SW the SE end of the islet. Thence:−
from the SW end of the island and for a similar 7 NE of Ras Rachmat (13°38′N, 42°14′E) which forms
distance on its NW side. Sadla (7.269) lies 2 miles the NE elbow of the Cabija Peninsula (7.273),
W on the coastal bank, thence: thence:
4 NE of Sl bayil Dest (13°51′N, 42°02′E), a rock
rising to a height of 18 m, and fringed by a bank,
with a least depth over it of 17 m, which extends
about 8 cables W, thence:
5 NE of Fanaadir Islands (13°45′N, 42°10′E) which
consist of North-east Fanaadir, North-west Fanaadir
and South Fanaadir, three white rocky islets which
lie about 5 miles NE of Ras Bungen ye Midir Zerf
Ch’af (7.269). Fanaadir Rock, a drying rock, lies
3 miles ENE of Ras Bungen ye Midir Zerf Ch’af
and is generally visible; depths of less than 10 m lie
close to the rock. Thence:
6 NE of Tekay Dest (13°40′N, 42°13′E) the SE
entrance point to Bera’isol Bahir Selat’ (7.272) A
pillar stands on the summit of Tekay Dest which
rises to a height of 68 m; an isolated hillock rises at
 SEB
General information
Chart 1926
Position
7.202
NE of a wreck (13°37′N, 42°25′E) (position
approximate) with a safe clearance depth over it of
15 m, thence:
SW of South West Rocks (13°38′N, 42°36′E) (4.17).
See caution at 4.7. Thence:
SSW of South West Haycock (13°32′N, 42°36′E)
(4.18). See caution at 4.7.
(Directions continue at 4.18)
Anchorage
7.201
1 Anchorage may be obtained, as shown on the chart, about
1 mile SW of Kordumu’t Dest (14°06′N, 41°40′E) (7.199)
in a depth of about 26 m. This berth is not sheltered from
the wind and should only be used during periods of calm
weather.
Approach and entry
7.208
1 The approach to the pilot station, which is made from N,
leads S initially from a position about 5 miles NW of
Fieramosca Shoal (13°07′N, 42°51′E) (4.18), for about
1 The port of seb (13°00′N, 42°45′E) is situated on the W 10 miles, passing clear of Bosanquet Shoal (13°05′N,
side of the Red Sea close within its S entrance. 42°47′E) (7.234) and the shoal, with a least depth over it of
8⋅4 m, which lies 1 miles NW.
Description Entry is made through the N part of Mrgbla Channel
7.203 (7.252) which lies on the W side of the entrance to seb
1 seb is the only town in this area and is one of the Bay, passing between Ras Loma (13°02′N, 42°44′E) and
principal ports of Eritrea. Umm-al-Sciora (4 miles SE).
The port area mostly lies S of Ras Buja (13°00′⋅6N,
42°44′⋅9E) and consists of a number of white buildings and Traffic
huts. 7.209
1 In 1995 the port was visited by a total of 107 vessels.
Function
7.204 Port Authority
1 The port of seb is the second port, after Massawa, of 7.210
Eritrea. The port mainly serves Ethiopia with approximately 1 The harbour is administered by the seb Port Authority,
95% of the cargo handled being bound for that country. PO Box 58, seb, Eritrea.

Trade Aids to navigation

7.205
1 The principal exports are hides, skins, linseed, castor oil
seeds, neuk seeds, coffee, cereals and dried fish.
The principal imports include crude oil and refined
products in bulk, oil in drums, general merchandise,
machinery, transport equipment and cement.
Topography
7.206
7.211
1 Lights:
Ras Gombo Light (white tower, black bands, 13 m in
height) (13°01′⋅4N, 42°44′⋅9E) exhibited from an
unnamed point about 2cables N of Ras Gombo.
Ras Fatuma Light (13°02′⋅5N, 42°52′⋅5E) (4.82).
Landmarks
7.212
1 Tag Terara (13°03′N, 42°39′E) (4.73).
1 seb lies on the NW side of seb Bay which is entered Gangadebub Terara (13°01′N, 42°43′E) a hill, which
between Ras Loma (13°02′N, 42°44′E) and Ras Dehaneba rises to a height of 192 m close NW of seb; a
(18 miles SE) (4.82). radio mast stands on the peak. Gangasimn Terara, a
similar hill, stands close NE.
Port limits
Sla Terara (13°00′N, 42°42′E) (4.73).
7.207
1 The harbour limits, as shown on the chart, are bounded
Limiting conditions
on the N by a line joining Ras Gombo (13°01′⋅2N,
42°44′⋅9E) and the N tip of Umm-
l-Bahar Dest Controlling depth
(12°59′⋅0N, 42°46′⋅3E) (7.251); and on the S by a line 7.213
joining Ras Marcanah (12°57′⋅5N, 42°44′⋅4E) and the SW 1 The harbour will accept vessels up to a draught of
tip of Umm-
l-Bahar Dest. 10⋅3 m.

216
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7

Deepest and longest berths and Ras Caribale (1
miles S), as shown on the chart.
7.214 Vessels may be permitted to anchor within this prohibited
1 The longest alongside berths are No 1 and No 7 Berths area on instructions from the pilot.
with lengths of 185 m. Anchorage is also prohibited N of a line, as shown on the
The deepest alongside berth is No 1 Berth with a depth chart, from Ras Loma (13°02′N, 42°44′E) and the NW
alongside of 10⋅4 m. See 7.233. extremity of Fatuma Dest (6 miles E).
7.225
Tidal levels 1 Quarantine anchorage. The quarantine anchorage, as
7.215 shown on the chart, is centred about 1 mile E of Ras Buja.
1 The tidal rise at seb is negligible; the diurnal range is
about 0⋅5 m. Pilotage
7.226
Density of water 1 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 100 nrt and is
7.216 available 24 hours in the commercial port, and between
1 Density 1⋅030 g/cm3. 0600 hours and 1800 hours local time in the Oil Harbour.
The pilot boards, as shown on the chart, about 7 cables E
Maximum size of vessel handled of Ras Buja (13°00′⋅6N, 42°44′⋅9E).
7.217 The pilots boards from a grey launch with white
1 It is reported that the commercial port can handle vessels upper-works.
up to 26 000 dwt, 210 m in length, 24 m beam and 10⋅3 m
draught. Tugs
7.227
Local weather 1 Tugs are available.
7.218 A tug is compulsory for all vessels over 300 grt.
1 During the summer, from May to September, the climate
is particularly unpleasant being hot and humid though there Regulations
is generally a N breeze between 8 o’clock in the morning 7.228
and 8 o’clock in the evening which affords some relief. 1 Main engines must not be immobilised without the
From October to April winds of between 11 kn and 27 kn permission of the port manager.
blow continuously from the SE, ceasing only for short Refuse must not be discharged overboard.
periods at dawn and dusk. The higher wind speeds during Landing from ships boats on the off-lying islands is
these winter months are mainly experienced between strictly prohibited; boats approaching these islands may be
December and February. fired on without warning.
7.219 Special regulations are in force for vessels carrying
1 Climatic table. See 1.275 and 1.282. dangerous cargoes.
Quarantine regulations
Arrival information 7.229
Depths 1 Vessels with an infection on board should inform the port
health officer by radio and anchor within the quarantine
7.220
anchorage (7.225).
1 Caution. Mariners are advised to proceed with caution
when navigating within the whole area of seb Bay. The Pratique is not granted by radio but usually granted after
the vessel has berthed. Occasionally it may be granted at the
area is inadequately surveyed and uncharted shoals may
anchorage.
exist, especially off the reef edges.
Signals
Port radio
7.230
7.221
1 By day the following signals are shown, and, by night the
1 There is a port radio at seb which can be used by
following light signals are displayed from the signal station
vessels to contact their agents in the port.
situated 1 cable SSW of Ras Buja (13°00′⋅6N, 42°44′⋅9E):
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).

Notice of ETA
7.222
1 Vessels should notify their ETA 72, 48 and 24 hours in
advance of their arrival.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).

Outer anchorage
7.223
1 A good sheltered anchorage may be obtained in seb International Code flag signals (7.230)
Bay, SW of Umm-al Assal (12°56′N, 42°50′E), in depths
from 7⋅7 to 11 m, sand.
Harbour
Another good anchorage berth lies about 1 mile offshore
E of the village of Mrgbla (12°54′N, 42°45′E). General layout
7.224 7.231
1 Prohibited anchorage. Anchorage is prohibited in the 1 A detached breakwater, about 4 cables long, is situated
area E of the port, between Ras Buja (13°00′⋅6N, 42°44′⋅9E) close SE of the harbour. A light is exhibited from the N end

217
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7

of the breakwater (white round tower, red bands); a light is 1 miles N of Ras Degay
. A narrow channel lies
also exhibited from the S end (white round tower, green between the point and the coral bank, thence:
bands). 3 E of Ras Loma (1 mile NNW) the W entrance point to
North Jetty extends 3 cables SSE from the shore close S
of Ras Buja; a light (white round tower, green bands) is
exhibited from the SE extremity of the jetty. A small islet,
surrounded by shoal water, lies on the E side of the jetty
about 1 cable N of the light.
2 South Jetty lies 1cables SW of North Jetty and extends
a similar distance from the shore; a Ro-Ro berth is situated
at the head of South Jetty.
A small boat harbour lies close W of the W side of the
root of South Jetty.
Lighter moorings are laid close SW of South Jetty.
3 An Oil Terminal consisting of a submarine oil pipeline,
which extends 6 cables ENE from the shore and marked at
its outer end by a buoy (pillar), and four mooring buoys, lies
about 4 cables S of the SSW end of the detached breakwater.
Coastal Tanker Jetty projects about 2 cables ENE from the
shore close NW of Ras Caribale (13°59′⋅0N, 42°44′⋅5E).
An Oil Products Berth, which consists of a jetty with a
large concrete hut standing at its head, projects 2 cables SE
from a position 1 cable S of Ras Caribale.
4 A disused salt loading terminal, connected to the shore
SW by an aerial ropeway, lies 5 cables S of Ras Caribale. In
1982 its condition was reported to be deteriorating rapidly.
Landmarks
7.232
1 A conspicuous church, with three domes about 30 m
high, stands 1 miles S of Ras Loma (13°02′N,
42°44′E). A prominent white two-storey building,
with a large square tower, stands N of this church; a
prominent white single-storey building stands S
of it.
2 Several ruined buildings stand on Ras Caribale
(13°59′⋅0N, 42°44′⋅5E). An oil flare (position
approximate) situated about 1 mile W of the point is
reported to be visible at a distance of at least
20 miles.
Harbour depths
7.233
1 Alongside depths are reported to be less than charted. The
10 m patch off the S end of North Jetty has been caused by
concrete crumbling from the jetty.
In 1998, as shown on the chart, less water than charted
was reported in the S part of the harbour W of
Umm-
l-Bahar Dest (12°58′N, 42°46′E) (7.251).
The port authorities should be contacted for the latest
information.
Directions for entering harbour
7.234
1 From a position about 7 miles NW of Fieramosca Shoal
(13°07′N, 42°51′E), the track leads S to the pilot boarding
position, passing (with positions given from Ras Gombo
Light (13°01′⋅4N, 42°44′⋅9E)):
W of Fieramosca Shoal (4.18), thence:
W of the detached shoal (5 miles NNE) with a least
depth over it of 8⋅4 m, thence:
2 W of Bosanquet Shoal (4 miles NE) which is
composed of sand and broken shells. The position
of the shoal is indicated by discoloured water.
Thence:
E of Sanahor Dest (4 miles NNW) a prominent islet
lying on a shallow coral bank situated about
218
seb Bay, thence:
E of Ras Gombo Light (7.211), and Ras Gombo which
lies 2 cables S of the light. Thence:
To the pilot boarding position (7.226).
Berths
Commercial port
7.235
1 North Jetty consists of a line of 3 berths, numbered 1, 2
and 3, from their outer end which lies along the inner side
of North Jetty. Vessels are usually berthed heading SE.
7.236
1 South Jetty consists of a line of 5 berths, numbered 4, 5,
6, 7 and 7A, from their inner end which lies along the inner
side of South Jetty. Vessels are usually berthed heading SE.
Berth 7A can accommodate Ro-Ro vessels.
7.237
1 Oil Terminal is a sea berth, comprising 4 mooring buoys
laid at the head of a submarine oil pipeline, situated about
4 cables S of the SSW end of the detached breakwater.
The berth can handle tankers up to 185 m length, 11⋅6 m
draught and up to 35 000 dwt.
Approach. Note the two detached shoal areas, with least
depths over them of 7⋅6 m (position approximate) and 9⋅6 m,
which lie E of the oil terminal close off the main area of
shoal water off Umm-
l-Bahar Dest (12°58′N, 42°46′E)
(7.251).
7.238
1 Coastal Tanker Jetty is a berth, with two mooring
buoys, at the head of a jetty which lies close NW of Ras
Caribale (13°59′⋅0N, 42°44′⋅5E).
The berth can handle tankers up to 105 m length and 9 m
draught for the loading or discharging of clean products.
7.239
1 Oil Products Berth consists of a jetty about 1 cable S of
Ras Caribale; mooring dolphins lie close NE and SW of its
head.
The berth can handle tankers up to 183 m length, 8⋅5 m
draught, and up to 18 000 dwt.
Tankers berth with their bows S, both anchors down, and
secured aft to the two dolphins with their sterns about 60 m
from the head of the jetty.
In 1995 the jetty was reported to be in poor condition.
2 Caution. A shoal rock, with a least depth over it of
9⋅1 m, lies about 2
cables SE of the berth; foul ground lies
about 2cables ESE of the head of the jetty; an obstruction,
the depth over which unknown, lies 4 cables E.
Current. The current at the berth is reported to set SW at
 kn during the summer, and N at 1 kn during the winter.
Port services
Repairs
7.240
1 Minor repairs.
Other facilities
7.241
1 Mobile cranes up to 60 tonnes capacity; hospital; oily
waste reception; Deratting Exemption Certificates.
Supplies
7.242
1 Fuel oil; fresh water; fresh provisions in small quantities.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7

Communications Lah leb Des t

7.243 7.249
1 Airport situated 11 km NW of the port which has 1 Lah
leb Dest (12°58′N, 42°51′E) is the largest of a
connecting flights with Addis Ababa. group of islands and islets, which includes Darm
kia,
There is sea communication with other Red Sea ports and Umm-al-Assal, Gurna, Heri, and Umm-al Sciora, which lie
Aden. in the NW part of the bay.
Heri, and Umm-al Sciora islets are low and wooded,
Darm
kia is wooded; all the islands and islets of the group
 SEB BAY are fringed by reefs.

General information Halba Des t

7.250
Charts 1926, 1925 1 Halba Dest (12°56′N, 42°56′E) is the largest island in
Position seb Bay; it is low, partly covered with jungle type
7.244 vegetation, and fringed by a reef. The W side of the island
1 seb Bay (12°55′N, 42°50′E) lies on the W side of the
Red Sea, close N of the Straits of Bab el Mandeb (4.71).
The bay is entered between Ras Loma (13°02′N,
42°44′E) and Ras Dehaneba (18 miles SE) (4.82).
Description
7.245
encloses a lagoon in which there are depths of about 2⋅4 m.
Huiheb is an islet lying close NW of Halba Dest which
is also fringed by a reef. The islet forms the NW side of a
lagoon, which is enclosed by the NW end of Halba Dest
and a further unnamed islet, in which there are depths of
4⋅3 m.
2 Ras Mukwar (12°57′N, 42°59′E) (4.82) is the NE point
1 The port of seb (7.202) is situated on the NW shore of of some detached islets which lie on the reef E of Halba
seb Bay. Dest.
The shore of the bay is low, sandy and swampy, with the The head of seb Bay, between Halba Dest, and the
land in the inner part of the bay being inundated at high coast SW, is encumbered with several sandy islets, mostly
tides. The shores are mostly fringed by reefs. covered with jungle type vegetation and fringed by coral
2 seb Bay affords good sheltered anchorage, to a large reefs.
extent being protected from the swell by the islands and
islets which lie within the bay. During the NE monsoon, Umm- l-Bahar Des t
strong SE winds which prevail during the day, cause a sea 7.251
which causes some inconvenience to boats. 1 Umm-
l-Bahar Dest (12°58′N, 42°46′E) consists of two
Ras Gombo Light (13°01′⋅4N, 42°44′⋅9E) (7.211) is sandy islets, and a few small islets, lying on a coral reef on
exhibited from close within the W side of the entrance to the the W side of the bay, SE of the Port of seb.
bay. A shoal, with a least depth over it of 3 m, lies about
3 The coastal reef, on the SE side of the approach to seb 5 cables WNW of the N islet; a wreck and an obstruction lie
Bay between Ras Dehaneba (12°53′N, 43°01′E) (4.82) and about 4 cables SSW of the shoal.
Ras Sintian (4 miles SE) (4.82), extends 3 miles offshore. A wreck, with a least depth over it of 6⋅5 m, lies about
Then, as far as Ras Raheita (4.82), 7 miles farther SE, it is 5 cables N of the S end of the S islet.
fringed by a coral reef which makes landing difficult.
M rg bla Channel
Depths
7.246 Description
1 The whole of seb Bay is inadequately surveyed and
mariners are advised to proceed with caution when
navigating within the bay as uncharted shoals may exist
especially off the edges of the reefs.
7.252
1 Mrgbla Channel (12°59′N, 42°47′E) leads between
Umm-
l-Bahar Dest on its W side and Umm-al Sciora and
Gurna on its E side.
The channel, with depths between 10⋅0 and 15⋅5 m in the
Landmarks
7.247
1 Ambarughli Kebr (12°47′N, 42°48′E) and Ambarughli
Saghr (3 miles E) are two isolated conical peaks standing
within 3 miles of the S shore of the bay and are good marks.
fairway, is the best route into the S part of seb Bay.
The unnamed channel W of Lah
leb Dest (12°58′N,
42°51′E) has a least depth in the fairway of 9⋅6 m; a further
unnamed channel E of Lah
leb Dest has a least depth at the
S end of the fairway of 10⋅8 m.

Islands and islets within  seb Bay Rubetino Channel

Fatuma Des t Description
7.248 7.253
1 Fatuma Dest (13°01′N, 42°51′E) is a low, wooded island 1 Rubetino Channel (13°00′N, 42°51′E) leads between
situated in the middle of the entrance to seb Bay.
Ras Fatuma (4.82) forms the NE extremity of the island
and attains an elevation of 15 m. Ras Fatuma Light
(13°02′⋅5N, 42°52′⋅5E) (4.82) is exhibited from a position
5 cables NW of the point; a disused light-structure stands
nearby.
Dercos, a wooded islet, lies close to the SE end of a reef
which extends about 5 miles SE from Fatuma Dest; Scilla
Shoals (13°00′N, 43°00′E) (4.82) lie E of Dercos.
219
Fatuma Dest and Dercos on its NE side, and Huiheb and
Halba Dest on its SW side.
The channel has a least depth of 6⋅0 m in the fairway, but
much lesser shoal depths lie in the SE part of the channel
and render the channel intricate. For this reason, and because
the channel is liable to change, it has no navigational aids.
7.254
1 Local knowledge. Rubetino Channel should not be
attempted without local knowledge.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7
7.255
1 Current. Off the SE entrance to Rubetino Channel, over
the shoal area situated 1 miles ENE of Ras Mukwar, the
INLETS AND BAYS
Port Smyth
Charts 168 plan of Port Smyth, 460
Description
7.256
1 Port Smyth (15°32′N, 39°59′E) is an opening in the
coastal reef in the middle of the SW side of Shumma (7.43).
The inlet is entered between the extremity of the reef on
the SE side of the entrance, and a dangerous coral patch
1 cable NNW.
2 The entrance fairway is about 110 m wide and has a least
depth in the fairway of 7⋅2 m, between the shoal water on
each side of the entrance.
A pier extends SW from the shore close SE of the front
leading beacon.
Caution. In 1993 the buoys and beacons were reported
missing and the rear beacon was just a pile of stones.
Directions for entry
7.257
1 Entry leading beacons:
Front beacon (white stone pyramid, white staff
topmark, 2 m in height) (15°32′⋅3N, 39°59′⋅7E).
Rear beacon (stone pyramid, black and white stripes,
white staff topmark, 2 m in height) (600 m from
front).
2 From a position about 1
miles W of Shumma Light
(15°32′N, 40°00′E), the alignment (055
°) of these leading
beacons leads through the entrance channel, passing (with
positions from the front leading beacon):
3 NW of a buoy (conical, green; position approximate)
(4cables SW), and a beacon (can topmark) (50 m
E), which mark the shoal water on the SE side of
the entrance channel, thence:
4 SE of a buoy (conical, red; position approximate)
(4 cables WSW) marking the edge of the shoal
water on the NW side of the entrance channel, and
a beacon (60 m NE) marking the S side of a
dangerous shoal patch. Two further buoys are
moored, 45 m apart, near the edge of the reef on the
NW side of the entrance. Thence:
5 WNW of a beacon (pole, can topmark) (3 cables SW)
marking a dangerous rocky patch with a least depth
over it of 0⋅3 m, thence:
To the anchorage.
Anchorage
7.258
1 Anchorage may be obtained in good holding ground, in
depths from 6 to 10 m, sand and weed, 2
cables W of the
front leading beacon as shown on the chart or as convenient.
Anfile Bay
current has been observed to attain a rate of 4 kn during
strong SE winds.
Anfile is fringed by a reef, and from NNE has the
appearance of an island.
Arassan, M’da and Sahl are villages situated on the
shores of the bay.
2 A large plain, dotted with small hills, extends W and SW
of the head of the bay. A range of hills stands 5 miles SW
of the head of the bay, and a ridge of hills stands 11 miles
SSW of Ras Anfile.
3 The coast on the S side of the approach to the bay,
between Ras Anfile (14°44′N, 40°54′E) and Shab Shakhs
(13 miles ESE) (7.45), is low and sandy. There are several
shallow bays on this stretch of coast but they are not visible
from seaward from where the coast shows as an unbroken
line. Several shoals, which include Shbshab (7.45), lie
within 3 miles of this stretch of coast.
Outer anchorage
7.260
1 During fine weather anchorage may be obtained between
Ras Gurmal (14°57′N, 40°38′E) and Ras Midir (10 miles
SE), in depths from 10 to 25 m, from 1 to 3 miles
offshore.
Landmark
7.261
1 Monte Faraon (14°49′N, 40°42′E) (Chart 171), which
consists of three isolated black cones rising from the
W side of the bay shows up well in clear weather;
the SE cone of Monte Faraon is the highest, the N
appearing truncated.
Islands within the bay
7.262
1 Midir (14°52′N, 40°46′E) (7.44) is a coral island situated
on the coastal reef, which, in this vicinity, extends up to
2 miles offshore.
A narrow boat channel leads through the coastal reef,
close W of Midir, to a good boat harbour. The NW
extremity of Midir, in line with the SE peak of Monte
Faraon (14°49′N, 40°42′E) (7.261), bearing 215°, leads to
the entrance to the channel.
2 Crulli is an islet which lies about 8 cables ESE of Ras
Midir, the SE extremity of Midir, to which it is connected
by a reef.
7.263
1 Barm al Agi Islands (14°50′N, 40°50′E) (7.45), which
consist of Seil and Estam Aghe, lie in the N part of the
entrance to Anfile Bay.
Anchorage. During periods of S winds anchorage may be
obtained about 1 mile W of Seil, as shown on the chart, in a
depth of 13⋅4 m, sand and mud.
Anchorage is also obtainable about 4cables S of the
SW extremity of Estam Aghe (7.45), as shown on the chart,
in a depth of 16⋅5 m, mud.
7.264
Charts 171, 168 plan of Anfile Bay 1 dahula Dest (14°49′N, 40°46′E) lies on the edge of the
Description coastal reef on the W side of the bay. Mangroves fringe the
7.259 W and S sides of the island.
1 Anfile Bay (14°48′N, 40°50′E) is a bay encumbered with A channel, about 4 cables wide, leads between dahula
islands and shoals which is entered between Ras Midir Dest and Ras Midir into a shallow inlet.
(14°51′N, 40°46′E) and Ras Anfile (10 miles SE). Ras Alaulli, a small islet, lies on the coastal reef 2 miles S.

220
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7
7.265
1 H
nda Dest (14°47′N, 40°48′E) and H
nt Dest
(1 miles S) are two islands which lie close to the centre of
the bay; both are fringed by coral reefs which extend WSW
to the shore. W of the islands the bay is shallow and
encumbered with shoals.
2 Anchorage. Small vessels may obtain anchorage W of
H
nt Dest in depths from 2⋅1 to 6⋅0 m. The area is
encumbered by shoals and local knowledge is required.
Anchorage is also obtainable about 6cables ESE of the
SE point of H
nt Dest, in depths of 8 m, mud and sand, as
shown on the chart, but the bottom in this vicinity is very
irregular.
7.266
1 Alet (14°44′N, 40°48′E) is a small islet on which there is
a village, off the S shore of the bay.
The islet lies in the middle of a shallow passage which
leads from the anchorage ESE of H
nt Dest to Mda Bahir
Selat’, a small shallow inlet in the mainland entered about
1 mile SW of Alet.
Ras Dagdere is the N entrance point to the inlet; the
point, and the inlet, are mostly fringed by mangroves.
7.267
1 Mantola Dest (14°44′N, 40°50′E) is an islet lying on the
coastal reef N of the village of Sahl (7.259). A village is
situated on the SW side of the islet; the islet is partially
fringed by mangroves.
Abakere is another islet on the coastal reef (1 mile SW)
and is also partially fringed by mangroves.
7.268
1 Derbsasa Dest (14°45′N, 40°53′E) (7.45) lies 1 mile N
of Ras Anfile on the SE side of the entrance to the bay. A
beacon (triangular topmark, apex up, 8 m in height) stands
on the SW part of the island.
2 Anchorage. Good anchorage may be obtained off the
NW side of Derbsasa Dest, as shown on the chart, in
depths from 12 to 15 m, sand, with the W extremity of the
islet bearing 172°, distant 8 cables. If approaching the
anchorage from E do not close Derbsasa Dest within
6 cables as depths of less than 10 m extend 4 cables N of its
NE point.
Anchorage may also be obtained, as shown on the chart,
about 5 cables from the head of a small bay on the W side
of Ras Anfile (14°44′N, 40°54′E), in depths from 5 to 9 m.
Mersa Dudo
Chart 143
Description
7.269
1 Mersa Dudo (13°52′N, 41°53′E) lies 11 miles ESE of
Dad Ye Midir Zerf Ch’af, on the W side of a promontory
of which Monte Dudo, surmounted by a pillar, is the
summit.
2 The coast on either side of Mersa Dudo, from Dad Ye
Midir Zerf Ch’af to Ras Bugen ye Midir Zerf Ch’af
(25 miles SE), is mostly rocky and has some slight
indentations. A small bay on the E side of Dad Ye Midir
Zerf Ch’af is separated from d Bay (7.199) by a
promontory of black, rocky lava between 10 m to 15 m in
height.
3 A range of hills lies between Mersa Dudo and Picco
Aguzzo (7.270). From these hills, land, about 300 m in
221
height, extends SE between 5 miles and 12 miles inland; this
land is intersected by valleys but appears level from seaward.
4 Ras Sceraier (13°46′N, 42°02′E), situated 4 miles NW
of Ras Bugen ye Midir Zerf Ch’af, forms the N extremity
of a promontory of lava on which stands Monte Ascoma, a
coastal hillock. A spit, with a depth of 6⋅4 m over its outer
end, extends about 2 miles off the coast between Ras
Sceraier and Ras Sachic. Standing on the coast at Ras
Sceraier is a remarkable brown volcanic hill, with a flat
summit about 60 m in height; near the S side of this brown
hill stands a sandhill.
5 Secca Scilla, a spit with a depth over its outer end of
6⋅3 m, extends about 2 miles off the coast from a position
close W of Mersa Dudo.
Sadla (13°53′N, 41°56′E) is a volcanic island situated on
the coastal bank, NE of Mersa Dudo. A saddle-shaped hill
stands near its NE end, and a pillar stands on a hill at the S
end of the island.
6 Abeilat (7.200), another volcanic island, lies 2 miles E of
Sadla; a channel lies between the coastal bank and the bank
surrounding Abeilat.
Landmarks
7.270
1 Monte Endel (13°50′N, 41°55′E), which stands close
SE of Mersa Dudo, is conical in shape and
surmounted by a pillar. Two lower conical hills
stand close NE, and on a WSW bearing when all
three hills are in line, they appear as one.
2 Monte Sachsohe (13°49′N, 41°57′E) lies 3 miles SE of
Monte Endel and is also conical and surmounted by
a pillar; a coastal hillock lies 3 miles farther SE.
Monte Muselali (13°50′N, 41°41′E) stands 12 miles W
of Mersa Dudo and has a saddle-shaped summit
which is often obscured, but, if visible, makes a
good landmark. On its W side there is a remarkable
crater; on its E side it falls away steeply.
3 Picco Aguzzo (13°35′N, 41°49′E) is a mountain,
1625 m in height, with a conical summit, which
stands 18 miles SSW of Mersa Dudo, at the NNE
end of a line of three mountain peaks. The middle
mountain (5 miles SSW), with a sharp peak on its
SW end, rises to a height of 1602 m; and the
S-most mountain (12 miles SSW) has a
smooth-topped peak and rises to an elevation of
2218 m.
Anchorage
7.271
1 Good anchorage may be obtained, in good holding, off
Mersa Dudo in depths from 12 to 15 m, mud and sand, with
Monte Endel (7.270) bearing about 160°, and the N
extremity of Sadla (7.269) bearing about 080°. Local
knowledge is required for the use of this anchorage.
2 A somewhat sheltered anchorage, during periods of NW
winds, may be obtained S of Sadla, in depths from 14 to
20 m, in good holding ground. This anchorage should be
approached from the E, passing S of Abeilat (7.200), with
Monte Dudo (7.269) bearing 270°.
3 Anchorage, with moderate shelter from N winds, may
also be obtained SE of Abeilat on moderately good holding
ground. It is necessary to anchor in depths of not less than
30 m as depths decrease rapidly towards the island.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 7
Bera’isol Bahir Selat’
Charts 143, 168 plan of Bera’isolÏ Bahir Selat’Ï
Description
7.272
1 Bera’isol Bahir Selat’ is a bay entered between Ras
Bugen ye Midir Zerf Ch’af (13°43′N, 42°05′E) (7.269) and
Tekay Dest (8 miles ESE) (7.200), and is encumbered with
islets and rocks. From a distance the islets in the bay appear
to be a continuation of the range of hills which lie between
Mersa Dudo (7.269) and Picco Aguzzo (7.270).
2 Between Ras Sceraier (13°46′N, 42°02′E) and Ras Bugen
ye Midir Zerf Ch’af (4 miles SE) the coast is sandy; the
coastal bank, with depths of less than 10 m over it, extends
up to 1 mile offshore.
The SW shore of Bera’isol Bahir Selat’, for 3 miles SE
of Ras Bugen ye Midir Zerf Ch’af first consists of blackish
lava, followed by a low sandy stretch covered with dunes
and bushes. The S shore of the bay rises gradually to the
high land described at 7.269.
3 Bera’isol is a village standing on a point of lava at the
head of the bay; a white sandhill is situated W of the
village. A shallow lagoon, partially fringed with mangroves,
extends 8 miles SE from the E side of the point.
The Fanaadir Islands (13°45′N, 42°10′E) (7.200) lie about
5 miles NE of Ras Bungen ye Midir Zerf Ch’af in the N
approaches to the bay; Fanaadir Rock (7.200) lies about
1 miles SW of the islands.
4 Seil Sèlafi (13°41′N, 42°08′E), a rock 11 m in height,
stands on the N edge of a shoal, with a least depth over it of
2⋅5 m, which extends 3 cables S of the rock.
Karanas Dest is an islet lying 2 miles SE of Ras
Bungen ye Midir Zerf Ch’af and is connected to the coast
2 miles SE, by a bank with depths of less than 5 m over it.
Sèlafi, another islet, lies 2 miles SE, close N of the village of
Bera’isol.
7.273
1 The N end of the Cabija Peninsula (13°35′N, 42°15′E),
which is bordered by a drying coral reef and on which lie
several islets, forms the E side of the bay. Dannabah lies at
the NW end of the peninsula and is partially covered with
mangroves. Auagudur lies on the SW side of the drying
reef; it is low and sandy and completely covered with
mangroves. Tekay Dest (7.200) lies on the N part of this
reef.
2 East Abullen and West Abullen are two small islets lying
on the coral reef off the N side of Dannabah; East Abullen
is joined to Dannabah by a narrow neck of land. Seil
Abullen, an above-water rock, lies 3 cables WNW of West
Abullen.
Ras Rachmat (7.200) forms the NE elbow of the Cabija
Peninsula.
Anchorage
7.274
1 During periods of SE winds good anchorage may be
obtained in Bera’isol Bahir Selat’ in the position shown on
the chart.
Small vessels may obtain good anchorage anywhere N of
a line joining the N extremity of Tekay Dest (7.200) and
Seil Sèlafi (7.272) in depths from 6⋅3 to 9 m.
222
Anchorage is also available in depths of about 6⋅4 m, SE
and W of Seil Sèlafi, having regard to the shoal which
extends S of the rock.
B ylul Bahir Selat’
Charts 143, 453, 1925
Description
7.275
1 Bylul Bahir Selat’ is a bay entered between Ras Terma
Zerf Ch’af 13°14′N, 42°33′E) and the coast 10 miles W.
The coast between Bera’isol Bahir Selat’ (7.272) and
Bylul Bahir Selat’ is backed by a low, bare, sandy desert
which extends a considerable distance inland. The only
elevation anywhere near the coast that may be visible from a
passing vessel is Beheta Ali (13°27′N, 42°16′E) a black
volcanic hill on which stands a pillar. This whole of this
stretch of coast is fringed by a coral reef.
2 The bay is easily identified from the N by a remarkable
large white sandy patch on the side of the hills on the S side
of the bay, about 4 miles SW of Ras Terma Zerf Ch’af.
This sandy patch is a good landmark by both day and night.
A bearing (180°) of its centre, leads into the bay.
A large dangerous reef, with a least depth over it of
1⋅4 m, lies in the middle of the bay; two detached shoals lie
off the NE edge of the main shoal area.
3 Bianco Islet lies on a shallow spit in the SE corner of the
bay.
Bylul is a village situated close within the coast in the
SW corner of the bay, which is the only part of the bay
fronted by a reef.
A conspicuous stranded wreck lies on the coastal reef
about 10 miles N of Bylul.
Sayal Island (13°20′N, 42°34′E) the SW-most island of
the Muhabbaka Islands (4.70) lies in the NE approaches to
the bay. See 4.7.
Landmarks
7.276
1 Mount Darma (13°13′N, 42°32′E) standing 1 mile
WSW of Ras Terma Zerf Ch’af (7.275) rises to a
height of 93 m; the hill slopes SW and fronts the E
side of the bay. A pillar stands on its summit.
Mount Hassalili (13°10′N, 42°28′E) stands close within
the head of the bay; lower, bare, black lava hills lie
W of Mount Hassalili, while within the W side of
the bay is a flat, clay plain.
Anchorage
7.277
1 Bylul Bahir Selat’ affords good anchorage which is
sheltered from the strong SE winds which prevail in winter,
but the bay is open to N winds. The best berth is in the E
part of the bay, in depths from 15 to 17 m with Bianco Islet
bearing 216°, distant 1 miles and 6 cables offshore.
Dhows anchor in the W part of the bay.
S winds impede, and sometimes prevent, the working of
boats.
Supplies
7.278
1 Small quantities of fresh provisions may be obtained at
Alali, a village situated 4
miles SSW of Ras Terma Zerf
Ch’af.
Home Contents Index

NOTES

223
Home Contents Index

Chapter 8 - Gulf of 'Aqaba

34° 30' 35°

ISRAEL
12 8.81
Eilat
El 'Aqaba
30' 8.120 J O R DA N 30'

801
801
801 El 'Aqaba Industrial Port
8.167

EG YPT
29° 29°
Nuweiba el Muzeina

8. 5 5

S AU D I
ARABIA

30' Dahab 30'

801
k
r ta
Fa
’s
Ra
n

2375
Tira¯

28° 28°
it of
8.40
Stra

-
Tiran
801

2132
Sharm el
Sheikh
8. 8

Râs Muhammad

Longitude 34° East from Greenwich 30' 35°

0205

224
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 8
RED SEA — NORTH PART — THE SOUTH−EAST COAST OF
THE SINAI PENINSULA FROM RÂS MUHAMMAD TO RÂS NURÂNI
AND THE GULF OF ‘AQABA
GENERAL INFORMATION
Chart 12
Scope of the chapter
8.1
1 This chapter describes the N part of the Red Sea from
Râs Muhammad (27°44′N, 34°15′E) to Râs Nurâni
(27°58′N, 34°25′E) (17 miles NNE), the Strait of Tr
n
(27°59′N, 34°28′E) and the Gulf of ‘Aqaba including the
ports of El ‘Aqaba (29°31′N, 35°00′E) (8.120) and Eilat
(29°33′N, 34°57′E) (8.81).
Topography
8.2
1 Between Râs Muhammad (3.42) and Râs Nurâni the
coast is high and precipitous.
RÂS MUHAMMAD TO RÂS NU
RÂNI
General information
Charts 2375, 801 plan of approaches to Strait of Tiran
Route
8.3
1 The short route described in this section leads from a
position SW of Râs Muhammad (27°44′N, 34°15′E) and
clear of the S end of the S bound lane of the Gulf of Suez
and Strait of Gubal TSS (3.18), for about 35 miles NNE, to
a position at the S end of the N bound lane of the Strait of
Tr
n TSS (8.32).
Depths
8.4
1 Depths in this N part of the Red Sea generally exceed
1000 m. Closer inshore the coast is fringed by a white reef,
which is usually covered, with the sea breaking over its
outer edge. This reef renders approach to the shore
dangerous, even for boats, except at those few places which
are described later.
Outside this reef, the water, due to its great depth, is of
an intensely blue colour.
Protected area
8.5
1 The coral reefs surrounding the Egyptian Coast between
Râs Muhammad (27°44′N, 34°15′E) and Râs Nurâni
(27°58′N, 34°25′E) have been declared protected areas.
The use of anchors on, or adjacent to, protected coral
reefs is prohibited except in cases of emergency or force
majeure.
2 Moorings have been laid as described in Appendix III and
its accompanying chartlets.
No anchoring is allowed in this S part of the Sinai
Peninsula without clearance from the authorities at the
customs pier in Sharm el Sheikh (8.9).
225
2 The Gulf of ‘Aqaba, which is entered between Râs
Nurâni (27°58′N, 34°25′E) and Ra’s Qibah (11 miles
ENE), extends about 100 miles NNE to the ports of El
‘Aqaba and Eilat, both of which are situated at its head. The
gulf has a maximum width of 15 miles between shores that
are mostly steep-to.
3 The physical structure of the gulf is a continuation S of
W
di al ‘Araba, a sandy valley flanked by high mountains,
through which flows the River Jordan and in which lies the
Dead Sea (31°30′N, 35°30′E).
Areas to be avoided
8.6
1 In order to avoid the risk of severe damage to critical
ecosystems, the environment and the economy of the area,
all vessels carrying dangerous or toxic cargoes, or any other
vessel exceeding 500 grt should avoid the areas indicated on
the charts.
The Râs Muhammad National Park “area to be avoided”
centred on 27°43′N, 34°12′E, and the adjacent “area to be
avoided”, centred on 27°53′N, 34°21′E have both been
adopted by IMO. For further information, see IMO Ships
Routeing, 8th Edition (2003).
2 An area encircling Tr
n Island has also been designated
as an “area to be avoided”, as shown on the chart. This area
has not been adopted by IMO.
Principal marks
8.7
1 Major lights:
Râs Muhammad Light (27°44′N, 34°15′E) (3.35).
Râs Umm Sidd Light (white rectangle on framework
tower, 17 m in height, racon) (27°51′⋅0N,
34°18′⋅9E). Red lights are exhibited from a radio
mast 2 miles NNW.
Directions
(continued from 3.42)
8.8
1 From a position clear of the S end of the S bound lane of
the Gulf of Suez TSS the track leads NNE, passing (with
positions given from Râs Muhammad (27°44′N, 34°15′E)):
ESE of Beacon Rock (6
miles W) (3.42) from which
Beacon Rock Light is exhibited, thence:
2 ESE of Râs Muhammad (3.42) from which Râs
Muhammad Light (3.35) is exhibited, thence:
ESE of Râs Umm Sidd, a point on the N side of the
approaches to Sharm el Sheikh (8.9) and from
which Râs Umm Sidd Light (8.7) is exhibited,
thence:
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 8
3 To the S end of Grafton Passage (8.30), the N bound
lane of the Strait of Tr
n TSS (8.32).
(Directions continue at 8.40)
Sharm el Sheikh
Charts 2132 plan of Sharm el Sheikh, 2375
General information
8.9
1 Function. Sharm el Sheikh (27°51′N, 34°17′E) is a
tourist resort; the port is used mainly by passenger vessels. It
is a port of entry, with customs and immigration facilities.
Port limits. Sharm el Sheikh port limits extend 7 miles S
from a position on the coast NE of the port; thence 5 miles
W to a position on the coast close N of Sandy Point (8.16),
as shown on the chart.
2 Approach and entry. The approach to the bay is clear,
and the bay is free from dangers. The harbour is entered W
of a rocky point which forms the S end of the promontory
separating Sharm el Sheikh from Sharm el-Moiya (8.17).
3 Râs Umm Sidd Lighthouse (8.7) and the hotel situated
nearby are prominent marks, as are the buildings within
Sharm el Sheikh.
Limiting conditions
8.10
1 Maximum size of vessel handled: 30 000 dwt, draught
9 m, LOA 250 m.
Arrival information
8.11
1 Port radio. There is a port radio at Sharm el Sheikh. For
further information, see Admiralty List of Radio Signals,
Volume 6 (3).
Pilotage is compulsory; the pilot boards S of the entrance
to the bay in position 27°50′N, 34°17′E.
Harbour
8.12
1 General layout. The E side of the bay is quayed; in
2000 work was in progress in this area. Two jetties extend
from the shore NW of the root of the quay.
Natural conditions. In the late afternoon a SW breeze
creates a short chop in the bay, but it usually falls calm at
night.
Directions
8.13
1 The bay is approached directly from seaward on a NW
heading, keeping clear of the area to be avoided (8.6) shown
on the charts.
2 A light-beacon (starboard hand) (27°51′⋅0N, 34°17′⋅2E) is
exhibited on the NE side of the entrance to the bay from the
W side of the promontory separating Sharm el Sheikh from
Sharm el-Moiya; a further light-beacon (port hand)
(3 cables SW) is exhibited from the SW side of the
entrance to the bay.
Berths
8.14
1 Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels in the NE
corner of the bay, clear of any moorings that may be laid, in
depths of about 26 m, sand. Caution is necessary as depths
increase suddenly towards the W.
Berths. The quay is over 400 m in length; depths
alongside are reported to be from 7⋅5 to 8⋅0 m.
226
Port services
8.15
1 Supplies. Fresh water; fresh provisions.
Communications. Airport; ferry service to Hurghada
(3.367).
Inlets and bays
Chart 2375
Mersa Bareika
8.16
1 Description. Mersa Bareika (27°47′N, 34°14′E) lies on
the NE side of the isthmus connecting Râs Muhammad
(3.42) with the Sinai Peninsula. The bay is entered about
3 miles N of Râs Muhammad between an unnamed point, on
the S side of its entrance, and Sandy Point, which lies about
1 miles N.
2 The bay is reported to be one of the most beautiful places
in the Red Sea, especially at sunrise and sunset.
Approach and Entry. The approach and entry into the
bay is very straightforward.
Depths within the bay are in excess of 100 m for the
most part.
3 Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels within the
small inlet in the NW corner of the bay which provides
good shelter from the NW.
Note. See protected area 8.5.
Moorings. Mooring buoys are laid on the S side of the
head of the bay.
Caution. The bay lies within a military controlled area,
landing on the shore is not recommended.
Sharm el-Moiya
8.17
1 Description. Sharm el-Moiya (27°52′N, 34°18′E) is
entered E of the rocky point which forms the S end of the
promontory separating Sharm el-Moiya from Sharm el
Sheikh (8.9).
The approach to Sharm el-Moiya is clear but within the
inlet it is encumbered with coral patches; the coral reef on
the NW side of the entrance was reported, a number of years
ago, to be extending farther offshore.
2 The inlet is well sheltered from all but S winds, but is
only suitable for use by small vessels with a draught not
exceeding 3 m; vessels of deeper draught can pass between
the coral patches but only with great caution.
8.18
1 Anchorage. Sharm el-Moiya is unsuitable for use as an
anchorage.
Caution. See protected area 8.5.
Chart 2375
Merset et ‘At
8.19
1 Description. Merset et ‘At (27°55′N, 34°20′E) is a small
bay, entered about 3 miles NNE of Râs Umm Sidd Light
(8.7), which provides shelter for small vessels with local
knowledge; the approach to the bay is clear.
The buildings around the bay are conspicuous. An
Environmental Conservation Institute and an emergency
diving centre are reported to be situated within the bay.
8.20
1 Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels in the NW
part of the bay in depths of about 5 m, sand, with good
holding. Caution should be exercised as this berth could be
dangerous in a S blow when there can be a backwash off
the steeply shelving beach.
2 Caution. See protected area 8.5.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 8
STRAIT OF TR N TO THE HEAD OF THE GULF OF ‘AQABA
GENERAL INFORMATION
Chart 12
Route
8.21
1 The overall route described in this section leads from a
position at the S end of the N bound lane of the Strait of
Tr
n TSS (8.32) to the head of the Gulf of ‘Aqaba.
Topography
8.22
1 Mountainous ridges, mostly of granite, extend SSW from
the Dead Sea and closely approach the shores of the Gulf of
‘Aqaba. In many places they rise like a wall with the passes
over them being extremely difficult.
Political boundaries
8.23
1 The W side of the Gulf of ‘Aqaba is mainly Egyptian
territory. Eilat (8.81), situated on the W side of the head of
the gulf, is an Israeli port; El ‘Aqaba (8.120), situated
opposite Eilat on the E side of the head of the gulf, is the
only port serving Jordan; the rest of the E side of the gulf,
except for about 10 miles S of El ‘Aqaba, is the territory of
Saudi Arabia.
Tidal stream
8.24
1 High water in the Gulf of ‘Aqaba is nearly simultaneous
over the whole of the gulf occurring 1 to 1 hours after HW
at Shaker Island (3.42).
There is a spring range over the gulf of between 0⋅6 m
and 1⋅2 m.
Dead Sea
8.25
1 The Dead Sea (31°30′N, 35°30′E) lies N of the head of
the Gulf of ‘Aqaba. The sea, which is over 50 miles in
length with a maximum width of 11 miles, has an area of
393 square miles with a deepest sounding of 399 m.
The shore of the sea is 392 m below the level of the
Mediterranean Sea and is the lowest level of the earths land
surface.
2 The waters of the River Jordan and of six other streams,
flow into the Dead Sea. It has no outlet, the surplus water
being carried off by evaporation. The water is intensely
saline with solid content of 25% as compared with 4% to
6% for sea water.
Protected area
8.26
1 In order to protect the resources of the coral reefs and
reduce and eliminate damage to protected coral reef habitats
the coral reefs surrounding the Egyptian coast of the Gulf of
‘Aqaba and Tr
n Island (8.31) have been declared protected
areas.
The use of anchors on, or adjacent to, protected coral
reefs is prohibited except in cases of emergency or force
majeure.
Moorings have been laid as described in Appendix III and
shown on the accompanying chartlets.
Areas to be avoided
8.27
1 In order to avoid the risk of severe damage to critical
ecosystems, the environment and the economy of the area,
all vessels carrying dangerous or toxic cargoes, or any other
227
vessel exceeding 500 grt should avoid the areas indicated on
the charts.
2 The “area to be avoided” N of the Straits of Tr
n
extends from the N end of the TSS (8.32) to 28°46′N on the
W side of the Gulf of Aqaba, as shown on the chart. For
further information, see IMO Ships Routeing, Eighth
Edition (2003).
3 The “area to be avoided” extends N from 28°46′N almost
to the head of the Gulf of ‘Aqaba, as shown on the chart;
this extension has not been adopted by IMO.
For details of the “area to be avoided” encircling Tr
n
Island, see 8.6.
Local weather
8.28
1 During the greater part of the year NNE winds prevail in
the gulf sometimes blowing with considerable force. In April
and May they are generally more moderate with an
occasional change to S winds.
At the end of August, N winds, light to moderate in
strength, have been experienced.
During the winter S winds sometimes suddenly arise and
may blow for a day.
STRAIT OF TR N
General information
Chart 801 plan of approaches to Strait of Tiran
Route
8.29
1 The route described in this sub-section leads from a
position about 3 miles WSW of Chisholm Point (27°57′N,
34°30′E), through the N bound lane of the Strait of Tr
n
TSS (8.32), into the S end of the Gulf of ‘Aqaba (8.48).
Description
8.30
1 The Strait of Tr
n (28°00′N, 34°28′E) lies between the
Sinai Peninsula to the W, and Tr
n Island (8.31) to the E.
The channel through the strait is divided into two
passages by four reefs, named from the S as, Gordon Reef,
Thomas Reef, Woodhouse Reef and Jackson Reef, all of
which lie across the central part of the fairway of the strait.
These reefs are awash at the summer level of low water;
several large drying boulders stand on the reefs.
2 Grafton Passage forms the N bound lane of the Strait of
Tr
n TSS and Enterprise Passage the S bound lane. Both
passages are deep and free from dangers; the edges of the
reefs on either hand are steep-to and are clearly visible.
The passages between the reefs which lie within the
separation zone of the TSS are deep and free of dangers.
They are narrow and a dangerous current often sets across
them.
Topography
8.31
1 West side of the strait. A flat plain of sand and coral
rises gradually to the foot of the mountains which rise from
the Sinai Peninsula.
East side of the strait. Tr
n Island (27°57′N, 34°33′E)
lies in the centre of the entrance to the Gulf of ‘Aqaba and
forms the E side of the strait.
2 Jabal Tr
n is a mountain which rises from the centre of
the S part of Tr
n Island and forms the summit of the
island; the remainder of the island consists of a low, sandy
plain from which a number of hills rise, in places. Two
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 8
prominent hills, which rise to heights of 51 m and 87 m,
stand on the middle part of the W side of the island about
1 miles S of Johnson Point (8.40).
3 The N part of Tr
n Island consists of a peninsula,
bordered by extensive reefs, which is connected to the main
body of the island by an isthmus.
Between Champlain Point (27°56′N, 34°37′E), which
forms the SE extremity of the island, and Chisholm Point
(6 miles WNW) the coast is steep-to.
Traffic separation scheme
8.32
1 The Strait of Tr
n TSS is adopted by IMO and Rule 10
of The International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at
Sea (1972) applies.
Vessel Traffic Service
8.33
1 Vessel Traffic Service Scheme is in operation to help to
provide safe navigation within the Strait of Tr
n TSS and to
give navigational assistance and advice, if required, to
vessels transiting through the scheme.
2 The VTS station (28°01′⋅0N, 34°26′⋅2E) is situated on the
Egyptian mainland about 2 miles N of Râs Nurâni Light,
and monitors traffic movements up to 15 miles N and S of
the station.
See Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3) for
further information.
8.34
1 Radar navigational assistance is available for vessels
proceeding through the Strait of Tr
n TSS from the radar
control centre situated near Nabq.
See Admiralty List of Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3) for
further information.
Caution
8.35
1 In 1986 it was reported that when transiting Enterprise
Passage (8.30) at night, vessels should be guided by bearings
of the lights marking the passage in preference to radar
distances from the nearby coastline.
Vessel identification
8.36
1 Vessels should hoist their signal letters when transiting the
Strait of Tr
n TSS.
Natural conditions
8.37
1 Tidal streams. The direction of the tidal streams in the S
approach to the Gulf of ‘Aqaba is uncertain but the streams
can sometimes attain considerable rates.
A number of years ago a N-going set of about 3 kn was
experienced in Enterprise Passage (8.30) about 1 hour after
HW Tr
n; a S wind force 4 to 6 was experienced at the
time. A few years later a S-going set of 1 kn was
experienced in the same channel about 2 hours after HW at
Tr
n; a NNE wind force 5 was blowing.
8.38
1 Local weather. The wind in the Strait of Tr
n (8.29) is
very strong and there is a heavy swell in the passages at
times causing considerable tide-rips.
Gales, which spring up suddenly, are reported to occur
frequently at night within the strait.
228
Principal marks
8.39
1 Major light:
Râs Nurâni Light (green GRP tower, 10 m high,
racon; synchronised with Gordon Reef Light (8.40))
(27°58′⋅8N, 34°26′⋅1E) is exhibited from the edge
of the coastal reef on the W side of Enterprise
Passage (8.30).
2 Landmarks:
3 A prominent water tower (27°58′⋅4N, 34°22′⋅8E)
(position approximate) stands near the W side of
Râs Nurâni Airfield, W of Enterprise Passage;
some prominent buildings (position approximate)
stand about 1 miles NE of the water tower.
A prominent signal station (28°00′⋅4N, 34°26′⋅0E),
which is no longer in use, with a large hut S of it,
stands W of the N end of Enterprise Passage.
4 A further signal station (28°01′⋅0N, 34°26′⋅2E) (8.33)
has been established N of the signal station
(disused).
Directions
(continued from 8.8)
Chart 801 plan of approaches to Strait of Tiran, and plan of
Strait of Tiran
8.40
1 From a position 3 miles WSW of Chisholm Point
(27°57′N, 34°30′E) the track leads NNE through Grafton
Passage (8.30) which forms the N bound lane of the Strait
of Tr
n TSS passing, (with positions given from Chisholm
Point Light (27°56′⋅7N, 34°30′⋅2E)):
WNW of Chisholm Point Light (white GRP beacon,
10 m high; racon) which is exhibited from
Chisholm Point, a steep and cliffy point fringed by
a coral reef; the point forms the SW extremity of
Tr
n Island (8.31), thence:
2 ESE of Râs Nurâni (4
miles WNW) the SW
entrance point to Enterprise Passage (8.30) which
forms the S bound lane of the Strait of Tr
n TSS,
thence:
3 ESE of Râs Nurâni Light (4 miles WNW) (8.39)
exhibited from a position about 1 miles NE of Râs
Nurâni on the edge of the coastal reef, which, in
this area, extends about 5 cables offshore. Two red
lights, vertically disposed, are exhibited from a
position about 2 miles W of Râs Nurâni Light in
the N part of Râs Nurâni Airfield; red and white
lights, vertically disposed, are exhibited from a
position 1 miles NNW of the light. Thence:
4 ESE of Gordon Reef Light (red and white GRP
beacon, 10 m high, synchronised with Râs Nurâni
Light (8.39), racon) (3
miles NW) which is
exhibited from the SW extremity of Gordon Reef.
A stranded wreck lies on the NW edge of Gordon
Reef, about 3 cables NE of the light structure; the
wreck is reported to be radar conspicuous, thence:
ESE of Thomas Reef (3 miles NW), thence:
5 WNW of the light-buoy (2
miles NNW) (W cardinal,
racon) which is moored on the E side of Grafton
Passage about 1 cable W of a shoal with a least
depth over it of 4⋅6 m, and on which stands a
dangerous rock. Thence:
ESE of Woodhouse Reef (4 miles NNW), thence:
6 WNW of Johnson Point West Light (green GRP tower,
5 m high, synchronised with Jackson Reef Light)
(3 miles NNW) which is exhibited from the edge
of the reef, thence:
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 8
WNW of Johnson Point (3 miles N) which is low,
flat and consists of sand and dead coral; elsewhere
in this locality there are low, undercut, coral cliffs.
Thence:
7 ESE of Jackson Reef Light (red GRP tower, 5 m high,
synchronised with Johnson Point West Light)
(4 miles NNW) which is exhibited from the E side
of Jackson Reef. A stranded wreck lies on the N
edge of the reef 2 cables NNW of Jackson Reef
Light, thence:
WNW of Johnson Point North West Light (white GRP
tower, green top, 6 m high) (4 miles NNW) which
is exhibited from the edge of the reef, thence:
Into the S end of the Gulf of ‘Aqaba (8.48).
(Directions continue at 8.55)
Marsa Shabir
Chart 801 plan of Strait of Tiran
Description
8.41
1 Marsa Shabir (27°59′⋅7N, 34°29′⋅6E) is an opening within
the coastal reef that surrounds the N part of Tr
n Island
(8.31), S of Johnson Point (28°00′⋅0N, 34°29′⋅7E).
8.42
1 Anchorage is obtainable by small vessels within Marsa
Shabir about 4 cables S of Johnson Point (8.40), as shown
on the chart. The anchorage is well sheltered from the N and
W, but the anchorage (8.44) situated W of Champlain Point
is better and more sheltered.
The anchorage is approached from the S, a route which is
encumbered with coral patches, but, for the most part, with
the sun astern, they are visible. To some extent, these patches
shelter the anchorage from the S.
2 A good anchorage berth may be obtained in a depth of
12 m, sand and clay, with the NW extremity of Johnson
Point (28°00′⋅0N, 34°29′⋅7E) bearing 009°, 4 cables
distant, where there is about 240 m of swinging room
outside the 10 m depth contour.
3 Small vessels may also obtain anchorage, over a sand
bottom, within the unnamed lagoon which lies about
7 cables NNW of Johnson Point and is entered S of Johnson
Point North West Light (28°01′N, 34°29′E) (8.40). The
lagoon has a least depth of about 9⋅1 m between the reefs on
either side of the entrance, but depths increase to between
12 m to 15 m once inside the inlet; a shoal patch, with a
least depth over it of 2⋅7 m, lies in the central part of the
lagoon.
Caution. See protected area (8.26).
South and east side of T r n Island
Charts 12, 2375
Description
8.43
1 Between Champlain Point (27°56′N, 34°37′E), the SE
extremity of Tr
n Island (8.31), and Arab Point (1 miles
NW), on which stand some black rocks that show up well
against the yellow background, then a further mile NW to
Eagle Rocks (27°57′⋅3N, 34°35′⋅1E), which lie about
1 cables offshore, the coast is a sloping sandy beach
fringed by a reef.
Foul Bay (27°59′N, 34°32′E) lies E of the isthmus
connecting the two parts of Tr
n Island.
8.44
1 Anchorage for small vessels may be obtained in a bight
W of Champlain Point. The coastal reef extends some
229
distance offshore from both the E and W entrance points to
this bight but the shore, at the head of the bight, is steep-to
and sandy.
A prominent hump, 177 m high, situated about 7 cables
WSW of Champlain Point bearing 342°, leads into the
anchorage from seaward.
2 Anchorage may be obtained about 3 cables offshore in a
depth of 22 m, sand and coral, with the W entrance point in
line with the S extremity of Tr
n Island bearing 268°. The
holding ground is good, making this the best and most
sheltered anchorage in this vicinity, especially from N winds.
It was reported a number of years ago that there were
depths of not less than 9 m within 1 cables of the shore.
Small vessels may also obtain anchorage E of Champlain
Point, as shown on the chart, over sand and coral.
Caution. See protected area (8.26).
Jaz rat an f r
Chart 12
Description
8.45
1 Jazrat an
fr (27°56′N, 34°42′E) is an uninhabited
island separated from the SE extremity of Tr
n Island (8.31)
by a passage about 1 miles wide.
Numerous limestone hills, with jagged peaks, rise to
heights of about 100 m near the SE extremity of the island.
A hill, 43 m high, stands about 3 cables E of Râs an
fr the
SW extremity of the W part of the island.
2 The W side of the island is fringed with patches of coral
reef.
Several dangerous coral reefs, whose positions are
doubtful, lie up to 7 miles off the NE coast of the island.
8.46
1 Tidal streams. A number of years ago it was reported
that the tidal streams in the passage between Tr
n Island
(8.31) and Jazrat an
fr set N with the in-going stream and
S with the out-going stream.
8.47
1 Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels in the bay,
entered 1 miles E of Râs an
fr, in depths of 12⋅8 m,
sand. The entrance channel between the reefs which extend
from both sides of the entrance is narrow; the anchorage is
exposed to S winds.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
GULF OF ‘AQABA
General information
Chart 12
Route
8.48
1 The route described in this sub-section extends from a
position clear of the N end of the N bound lane of the Strait
of Tr
n TSS, NW of Johnson Point North West Light
(28°01′N, 34°29′E), about 93 miles NNE to a position at the
head of the Gulf of ‘Aqaba in the vicinity of the various
pilot boarding stations for El ‘Aqaba (8.120) and Eilat
(8.81).
Topography
8.49
1 The coast on the W side of the entrance to the gulf,
between Nabq (28°05′N, 34°25′E) and El Kurâ (25 miles
NNE), is fringed by a white reef, which is usually covered
but the sea breaks over its outer edge. This reef renders
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 8
approach to the shore dangerous, even for boats. Outside the
reef the water, due to its great depth, is of an intensely blue
colour.
2 On the E side of the entrance, between Ra’s Qibah
(28°02′N, 34°37′E) the E entrance point to the gulf and Ra’s
Fartak (4 miles NNW), the coast is fringed by an indented
reef. Some above-water and some dangerous below-water
rocks lie on the coral reef, which extends from the N side of
Tr
n Island (8.31), between 1 and 3 miles SW of Ra’s
Fartak.
Hazards
8.50
1 Mariners are warned that navigational hazards not located
during survey work will exist along most of the offshore
coastal area of the E side of the Gulf of ‘Aqaba, especially
in shallow coral waters.
See note and source data diagram on British Admiralty
Chart 12.
Protected areas and areas to be avoided
8.51
1 See 8.26 and 8.27.
Local magnetic anomaly
8.52
1 In 1938 a local magnetic anomaly of between 2° and
3° E was reported along the whole length of the E side of
the Gulf of ‘Aqaba.
Principal marks
8.53
1 Major lights:
Dahab Light (white round GRP tower, black band,
10 m high, racon) (28°30′N, 34°31′E) exhibited
from a position on the coast E of Dahab village
(8.56).
2 Nuweiba Light (white round GRP tower, 10 m high,
racon) (29°02′N, 34°39′E) exhibited from a position
close SW of Wâsi.
8.54
1 Landmark:
Gebel Sukhn (28°45′N, 34°35′E) is a hill, which
stands in from the coast, about 8 miles N of Râs
Abu Galûm; a radio mast, from which a light is
exhibited, stands on the hill. At night, the area
surrounding the mast is floodlit; a radar aerial stands
nearby but it is not as prominent as the mast.
Directions
(continued from 8.40)
Charts 12, 801 plan of the approaches to Strait of Tiran
ah Island (29°13′N, 34°54′E), 17 m
8.55
1 From a position about 3 cables NW of Johnson Point
North West Light (28°01′N, 34°29′E), the track leads NNE,
passing:
ESE of Nabq Light (black GRP tower, yellow band,
6 m high) (28°03′⋅5N, 34°26′⋅2E) exhibited from a
position about 1 miles SSE of the village of Nabq
(8.58) which stands in the N part of a bight situated
on the W side of the entrance to the gulf, thence:
230
2 ESE of the stranded wreck (28°03′⋅6N, 34°26′⋅7E)
which lies between two other stranded wrecks, on
the coastal reef close SE of Al Fawz and from
which a light (black beacon, yellow band, E
cardinal topmark) is exhibited. The edge of the
coastal reef in this vicinity is only a few metres
wide and a lagoon is formed within it; in rough
weather the sea breaks over the reef. In calm
weather numerous rocks, coral heads, and overfalls
have been observed, thence:
3 WNW of Ra’s Fartak (28°05′⋅2N, 34°34′⋅4E) and Ra’s
ash Shaykh Humayd (5 cables NNW) both of which
lie at the SW end of a short peninsula; a
conspicuous radio mast (position approximate)
stands about 5 cables ENE of Ra’s Fartak. Thence:
4 ESE of Wâdi Kid Light (black round GRP tower,
yellow band, 9 m high, racon, visible 192°−293°)
(28°10′⋅3N, 34°26′⋅9E) which is exhibited from a
position on the coast 5 miles SSE of Râs Atantûr. A
stranded wreck (radar conspicuous) lies on the edge
of the coastal reef about 1 mile N of the light.
Chart 12
8.56
1 Thence, the track continues ENE, passing:
ESE of Qabr el Bnaiya (28°21′N, 34°26′E), thence:
ESE of Dahab Light (28°30′N, 34°31′E) (8.53)
exhibited from the N part of a low promontory,
which lies on the E side of Dahab village and
which also forms the E side of El Kurâ (8.62),
thence:
2 ESE of Râs Abu Galûm (28°37′N, 24°34′E) a sandy
promontory the N part of which is fringed by a
reef. Thence:
WNW of Ra’s Suwayhil al Kabr (28°40′N, 34°47′E),
thence:
3 ESE of El Hibîq (28°52′N, 34°39′E) a low sandy
point on which grow some trees; within the point a
flat plain of sand and stones rises gradually to the
base of the mountains which closely approach the
shores of the gulf. The coast in the immediate
vicinity is steep-to within 2 cables of the shore, but,
1 miles SW of the point, foul ground extends
some distance offshore, thence:
4 WNW of Ra’s Suwayhil a Saghr (28°53′N, 34°49′E)
a sandy point fringed by rocks. Dangerous rocks lie
up to about 1 miles SSE of the point within an
area in which it is considered unsafe to navigate.
Thence:
5 ESE of El Qarnûs (28°59′N, 34°41′E) a low, sandy
promontory covered with low bushes and sandhills;
scattered rocks lie close N and E of the promontory;
a palm grove is situated 2 miles SW. A conspicuous
radio mast stands on the promontory. The Egyptian
port of Nuweiba ‘el Muzeina (8.64) lies on the S
side of the promontory, thence:
ESE of Râs el Burqa‘ (29°13′N, 34°44′E), thence:
6 WNW of umay
high, which lies in the middle of the entrance to a
small bay, and is connected with the mainland NE
by a partly above-water reef; the N part of the bay
is encumbered with rocks. The island is difficult to
identify and should not be confused with a
table-topped point situated 2 miles farther N. A
number of years ago the island was reported to be
of a greyish colour contrasting with the pink colour
of the cliffs in the background. The village of
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 8
umay
ah lies at the head of a small bay 2 miles 2 Small vessels may anchor in depths of about 22 m, in a
NE of the island. Thence:
7 To the various pilot boarding positions which serve the
berths and terminals of the ports of El ‘Aqaba
(8.120) and Eilat (8.81).
Inlets, bays and other prominent features
Caution
8.57
1 Protected areas. See 8.26 for information regarding the
protection of the coral reefs which lie off the Egyptian
shores of the Gulf of ‘Aqaba.
Chart 801 plan of approaches to Strait of Tiran
Nabq
8.58
1 Description. Nabq (28°05′N, 34°26′E) is a village which
stands in the N part of a bight situated on the W side of the
the Gulf of ‘Aqaba, close within the N entrance to the Strait
of Tr
n (8.29).
A bay, with depths from 3 to 5 m, is formed within the
coastal reef about 1 mile SSE of Nabq village, close NW of
Al Fawz (8.55).
Chart 12
Sharm Mujawwan
8.59
1 Description. Sharm Mujawwan (28°10′N, 34°37′E) is a
cove entered about 6 miles NNE of Ra’s Fartak (8.55); a
sandspit lies in the centre of the cove.
The water within the cove is discoloured; the entrance
channel should be sounded before entering.
8.60
1 Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels within the
cove in depths of about 4⋅6 m.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Sharm Dabbah
8.61
1 Description. Sharm Dabbah (28°15′N, 34°40′E) is a cove
entered about 11 miles NNE of Ra’s Fartak (8.55) over a
bar, with a least depth over it of 0⋅6 m.
The water within the cove is discoloured; the channel
should be sounded before entering.
El Kurâ
8.62
1 Description. El Kurâ (28°29′N, 34°28′E) lies on the S
side of a sandy promontory which is fringed by a reef
awash; a low, sandy and barren spit extends from the SE
end of the promontory. A reef, which dries, extends 3 cables
SSW from the S extremity of the spit.
2 The W extremity of the spit, on which stands a heap of
brown stones, is fringed by a reef. A shoal, with a least
depth over it of 4⋅9 m, lies 1
cables W of this heap of
stones; and a shoal, with a least depth over it of 8⋅3 m, lies a
farther 2 cables WSW.
The N shore of the bay is fringed by a reef over which
there are dangerous shoal depths; a village together with a
hotel stands on the N shore of the bay.
8.63
1 Anchorage may be obtained by larger vessels off El Kurâ
in depths of about 30 m, sand and coral, with the W
extremity of the low, sandy spit bearing 030°, distant
3 cables. This anchorage is well sheltered from the N
and E.
231
good holding ground with good shelter, with the W
extremity of the low, sandy spit bearing about 232°, distant
140 m, but care should be taken to avoid a bank, with a
least depth over it of 2⋅1 m, which extends about 90 m W
and NW of the extremity of the spit.
3 Small vessels may also obtain anchorage SW of Râs Abu
Galûm (28°37′N, 24°34′E) (8.56). Local knowledge is
required for the use of this anchorage.
Mooring buoys are laid W of the E end of the low,
sandy spit.
Caution. See protected area (8.26).
Nuweiba ‘el Muzeina
8.64
1 Description. Nuweiba ‘el Muzeina (28°58′N, 34°40′E)
extends along the NW side of a cove situated about 2 miles
SW of El Qarnûs (8.56). There is a quay, with three berths,
which has alongside depths of up to 8 m; Ro-Ro ferries
maintain a frequent service with El ‘Aqaba (8.120).
A good, sandy beach, sheltered from N winds is situated
at the E end of Nuweiba ‘el Muzeina; below-water rocks
border the coast for 1 mile SW of the beach.
2 A fort stands about 1 miles NNW of Wâsi (29°02′N,
34°40′E), close S of Nuweiba ‘el Tarabîn. The fort is not
visible from the S if close inshore, but it is otherwise visible
farther offshore from a distance of some 5 miles.
A conspicuous hotel stands near the coast approximately
halfway between the port of Nuweiba ‘el Muzeina and El
Qarnûs; a conspicuous pyramid-shaped customs hall stands
within the port area.
3 Facilities. Nuweiba ‘el Muzeina is a port of entry for
traffic from El ‘Aqaba only.
A tug is stationed at the port.
8.65
1 Anchorage, which is well sheltered from N winds, may
be obtained off Nuweiba ‘el Muzeina in depths of about
12 m to 14 m, sand and coral. Care must be taken to avoid
several dangerous coral reefs which lie in the W part of the
roadstead.
This anchorage is not good during periods of S winds as
there is insufficient swinging room and the bottom shelves
steeply. Discoloured water may be seen in the anchorage due
to sand from the land being washed down by heavy rains.
2 Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Anchorage may also be obtained S of El Hibîq (28°52′N,
34°39′E) (8.56) with shelter from N winds, but this
anchorage is only recommended for very small vessels which
could lie within 1 cable of the shore in bad weather. Good
shelter can only be obtained close inshore as both the N
wind, and the swell, follow the contour of the land around
the point.
3 Somewhat larger vessels may obtain anchorage in a depth
of 33 m, sand and coral, about 1 cables offshore with the E
extremity of El Hibîq bearing 051°, 4 cables distant. When
approaching this anchorage berth care must be taken to
avoid the foul ground which lies about 1 mile farther S.
Caution. See protected area (8.26).
Merset Mahash el Asfal
8.66
1 Description. Merset Mahash el Asfal (29°10′N, 34°43′E)
is a small bay entered S of Abu Ramla which forms the NE
entrance point to the bay. The bay may be identified by a
remarkable white patch of sand situated on the coastal range
of mountains near Râs el Burqa‘ (8.56) which lies 2 miles
NNE of Abu Ramla.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 8
8.67
1 Anchorage, which is well sheltered from N winds, may
be obtained by small vessels on the SW side of Abu Ramla.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Anchorage may also be obtained about 6 miles NNE of
Râs el Burqa‘ (29°13′N, 34°44′E), and about 3 cables ENE
of a prominent red conical hill, where there is fair shelter
from N winds in depths of about 18 m, sand and coral.
2 During periods of good weather anchorage may also be
obtained within 2 miles N or S of the position off Râs el
Burqa‘.
Caution. See protected area (8.26).
 aql
8.68
1 aql (29°18′N, 34°57′E) is a town situated about
3 miles S of the international boundary (8.129) between
Jordan and Saudi Arabia.
The town can be identified by some prominent tanks
standing near the coast, close W of the town; a prominent
radio mast stands about 1 miles SSE of the town.
An airfield is situated close S of the town.
Chart 801 plan of approaches to Eilat and El ‘Aqaba
Mersa el Muqâbila
8.69
1 Mersa el Muqâbila (29°22′N, 34°48′E) is clear in its
approach from the SE; the coast road, backed by mountains,
runs close by the W side of the bay.
8.70
1 Anchorage, with reasonable shelter from N winds, may
be obtained in depths from 7 to 10 m, sand and rock, in the
NW corner of the bay.
Caution. See protected area (8.26).
Mersa Himeira
8.71
1 Mersa Himeira (29°24′N, 34°49′E) is a bay, with a clear
approach from the SE, which is entered about 2 miles NE of
Mersa el Muqâbila (8.69).
The bay is a favourite destination for tripper boats from
Eilat (8.81).
8.72
1 Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels close
inshore, in the NW corner of the bay, in depths from 5 to
6 m. The holding is reported to be good but the wind can be
gusty; it may be prudent to moor with two anchors to limit
the amount of swing.
Mersa Morâkh
8.73
1 Description. Mersa Morâkh (29°26′N, 34°50′E) is a small
inlet extending about 2 cables NW.
The entrance is obstructed by a coral reef through which
there is a channel, about 45 m wide, which lies close to the
ah Island (29°13′N, 34°54′E) and
N shore of the inlet; there is a least depth over several coral
heads within the channel of 2⋅1 m.
8.74
1 Anchorage. A depth of 5⋅5 m lies in the middle of the
ah Island bearing 322°, and the S entrance point to
inlet.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Caution. See protected area (8.26).
Gezîret Fara‘ûn
8.75
1 Description. Gezîret Fara‘ûn (29°28′N, 34°51′E) is an
island lying about 1 cables offshore which is fringed by a
232
reef and separated from the mainland by a channel, about
1 cable wide, in which there is a least depth of about 8 m.
A highly conspicuous Frankish fort stands on the island
which is floodlit at night; a tower stands on the S part of the
island.
2 Gezîret Fara‘ûn, also known as Pharaoh’s Island, sheltered
the Phoenician fleet sent by King Solomon to explore the
Red Sea, the fortress being built in the 12th century AD.
The island became a Crusader pirate base before the
Christians were later defeated by Islamic forces.
8.76
1 Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels either N or
S of the island according to the direction of the wind, but
with strong S winds neither anchorage is recommended,
except for very small vessels, as there is little shelter.
A good berth for a moderate size vessel may be obtained
in a depth of 33 m with the N extremity of the island
bearing 197°, 1 cables distant; or in depths of 33 m, sand,
with the S extremity of the island bearing 008°, 1 cables
distant.
2 Larger vessels may find anchorage in a depth of 35 m
with the N extremity of the island bearing 213°, 3 cables
distant.
An anchorage berth may also be obtained, in good
holding ground, about 1 cable SW of the island in the
vicinity of a mooring buoy.
During periods of S winds, small vessels may obtain
anchorage about 50 m off the beach which lies N of the jetty
which extends W from the NW corner of the island.
3 It is necessary to obtain the permission from the Egyptian
Authorities at Sharm el Sheikh (8.9) for the use of these
anchorages off Gezîret Fara‘ûn.
A mooring buoy is laid about 4 cables NNE of the island.
Caution. See protected area (8.26).
Anchorages
Chart 801 plan of approaches to Strait of Tiran
8.77
1 A good anchorage can be obtained by small vessels S of
Ra’s Fartak (28°05′⋅2N, 34°34′⋅4E).
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Chart 12
8.78
1 Small vessels may also obtain anchorage, which is well
sheltered from N winds, in depths of about 11 m, S of Ra’s
Suwayhil a Saghr (28°53′N, 34°49′E).
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
8.79
1 A good anchorage, sheltered from all winds, may be
obtained between umay
the mainland; this anchorage must be approached from the
SW. An anchorage berth for small vessels, in depths of
55 m, sand and coral, may be obtained with the summit of
umay
the small bay, situated 2 miles NE of the island, bearing
225°.
8.80
1 The other anchorages in the Gulf of ‘Aqaba are described
at Sharm Mujawwan (8.60), El Kurâ (8.63), Nuweiba ‘el
Muzeina (8.65), Merset Mahash el Asfal (8.67), Mersa el
Muqâbila (8.70), Mersa Himeira (8.72), Mersa Morâkh (8.74)
and Gezîret Fara‘ûn (8.76).
Caution. See protected area (8.26).
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 8

EILAT
General information
Chart 801 plan of Eilat and El ‘Aqaba
Position
8.81
1 The port of Eilat (29°33′N, 34°57′E) is situated on the
NW shore of the head of the Gulf of ‘Aqaba opposite the
Jordanian port of El ‘Aqaba (8.120).
Description
8.82
1 Eilat is an open roadstead in the NW corner of the Gulf
of ‘Aqaba.
The major facilities devoted to seagoing vessels are
situated along the W shore of the port.
Berthing at Eilat presents no difficulties except during
periods of strong S winds when small vessels may need to
depart the alongside berths and proceed to the anchorage, or
to sea.
Depths
8.83
1 The approaches to Eilat are deep; the only limitation in
the size of vessels that the port can handle is the alongside
depth at the individual quay or berth.
Function
8.84
1 The port of Eilat flourished during the 10th century BC
in the reign of King Solomon.
The port has been developed for Israeli trade between
Asia and East Africa.
Large quantities of minerals for export are mined in
Negev, 60 miles N of Eilat.
The port is also a popular coastal holiday resort with first
class amenities.
In 1999 the population of Eilat was about 35 000.
8.85
1 Trade. The principal exports are minerals, phosphates,
potash and ores.
The principal imports include timber, building materials
and foodstuffs.
Port limits
8.86
1 The limits of the inner harbour of the port of Eilat extend
from the Israeli border with Jordan (8.90) SW to the vicinity
of Râs el Mari (29°29′N, 34°54′E) as shown on the chart.
The outer harbour lies to seaward of this limit.
Approach and entry
8.87
1 The approach to the port of Eilat is made from the head
of the Red Sea, passing through the Strait of Tr
n (8.29)
and thence to the head of the Gulf of ‘Aqaba.
Entry to the port of Eilat, or to Katza Oil Terminal
(8.112), presents no difficulties, the pilot boarding station in
both instances being a short distance S of the berthing
installations.
Traffic
8.88
1 In 2003 the port was visited by a total of 65 vessels.
Port Authority
8.89
1 The harbour is administered by: The Israeli Ports and
Railways Authority, Port of Eilat, PO Box 37, Eilat 88100,
Israel.
International boundaries
8.90
1 The international boundary separating Egypt from Israel
reaches the coast in the vicinity of Râs el Mari (29°29′N,
34°54′E).
A buoy (red and white barrel-shaped, can topmark, with a
white board inscribed ‘Caution Frontier Ahead’) is moored
about 1 cables offshore.
8.91
1 The international boundary separating Israel from Jordan
reaches the coast at the head of the Gulf of ‘Aqaba in the
approximate vicinity of 29°32′⋅6N, 34°58′⋅7E. The boundary
then continues, as shown on the chart, in a SSW direction
through the waters at the head of the Gulf of ‘Aqaba.
Buoys (red and white barrel-shaped, can topmark, with a
white board inscribed ‘Caution Frontier Ahead’) are moored
on the W side of the international boundary, between the
shore and the 50 m depth contour.
Fishing area
8.92
1 A fishing area (29°32′⋅6N, 34°58′⋅4E) lies close off the
Israeli shore at the head of the gulf, close W of the
Jordanian border. Mariners are warned not to enter this area,
in which fishing nets, marked by buoys and ropes, present a
hazard to vessels.
Marine farms
8.93
1 Three marine farms, marked by buoys, are situated about
3 cables E, and 2 cables SE, of Anchor Berth No 2
(29°32′⋅4N, 34°58′⋅0E). A fish haven consisting of an
artificial reef lies close E of the Naval Base (8.110).
Marine nature reserve
8.94
1 A marine nature reserve, with an artificial reef and
underwater observatory, is situated 3 miles SSW of Eilat.
Principal marks
8.95
1 Major Lights:
Eilat Light (white concrete tower, black bands)
(29°30′⋅0N, 34°54′⋅8E).
El ‘Aqaba Control Tower Light (29°30′⋅8N, 34°59′⋅8E)
(8.132).
8.96
1 Landmarks:
Bulk loading tower (29°31′⋅8N, 34°56′⋅4E) standing at
the S end of South Quay (8.111).
Hotel (29°30′⋅8N, 34°55′⋅4E) standing near the coast
close S of the Katza Oil Terminal (8.112).
2 An aero light (29°33′⋅0N, 34°57′⋅4E) exhibited from
the roof of a building close E of the NW corner of
the head of the Gulf of ‘Aqaba; this light is a useful
mark for vessels approaching the quays of the main
port.
A group of radio masts (29°33′⋅4N, 34°57′⋅9E), 20 m
high, stand N of the E end of the marina and are
marked by obstruction lights.
Landmarks at El ‘Aqaba are given at 8.133.

233
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 8
Limiting conditions
Controlling depth
8.97
1 The main general, bulk cargo, and container berths have
alongside depths of up to 13⋅0 m.
South Oil Jetty (8.114) has a maximum alongside depth
of 28⋅6 m.
Deepest and longest berths
8.98
1 The main general quay has a total length of 528 m; it can
handle vessels up to a maximum draught of 11⋅9 m, but
vessels may load to 12⋅1 m when using fenders and
intending to sail on a high tide.
Tidal levels
8.99
1 See information in Admiralty Tide Tables, Volume 3. Mean
spring range about 0⋅8 m.
Maximum size of vessel handled
8.100
1 South Oil Jetty (8.114) at the Katza Oil Terminal can
handle vessels up to 500 000 dwt with a maximum draught
of 25⋅8 m.
Local weather
8.101
1 Because the head of the Gulf of ‘Aqaba is situated at the
base of the geographical trench which divides Jordan, winds
can funnel rapidly into the area and create hazardous
conditions for vessels at anchor. Under normal conditions the
gulf is protected by its high sides and is usually calm.
2 A fresh offshore wind almost invariably blows during the
afternoon, inconveniencing boat work, but not normally
preventing it.
There can be sudden squalls at night of up to force 6,
which usually begin about 2 hours after sunset blowing
mainly from between NNW and NNE.
3 Sometimes, during the winter months, winds of between
force 6 to 7 blowing from SSW, accompanied by a high
swell and a heavy sea, can develop within two hours. Under
these conditions vessels may have to leave the anchorage
until the weather moderates; it may also be necessary for
small vessels to leave their alongside berths. A warning of
these impending conditions is usually given by a sharp fall
in the barometer.
8.102
1 Temperature and humidity. There is a very low
humidity level throughout the year.
Between June and September the maximum temperatures
are in excess of 38°C; between November and March
temperatures are between 16°and 27°C.
Climatic table. See 1.275 and 1.283.
234
Arrival information
Port radio
8.103
1 There is a port operations radio for the general port and
the oil terminal. For further information, see Admiralty List
of Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Israeli ship reporting system
8.104
1 A ship reporting system for all vessels is in operation for
vessels calling at Israeli ports.
All vessels should establish contact with the Israeli Navy
on VHF and a position report should be sent when 25 miles
from the coast.
Smaller vessels should maintain a listening watch on VHF
whilst within 100 miles of the Israeli coast.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Anchorage
8.105
1 Anchorage may be obtained in nine numbered anchor
berths off the N shore of the port; their positions are best
seen on the chart.
The anchorage is exposed to S winds and care must be
taken to allow sufficient swinging room. See also 8.101.
Anchorage berths are assigned by Port Control.
8.106
1 Mooring buoys are laid in the N part of the anchorage,
as shown on the chart.
Mooring buoys are also laid about 2 cables off the shore,
NE of Râs el Mari (29°29′N, 34°54′E).
8.107
1 Prohibited anchorage. An area in which anchorage is
prohibited owing to the existence of submarine power cables,
extends across the gulf 7 miles SSW of Eilat, as shown on
the chart.
Pilotage
8.108
1 Pilotage is compulsory. The pilot for Katza Oil Terminal
boards 5 cables SE of Eilat Light (29°30′⋅0N, 34°54′⋅8E);
the pilot for Eilat boards about 3 cables SE of North Oil
Jetty (29°31′⋅4N, 34°56′⋅2E).
The pilot launch has a red hull with buff superstructure.
For further information see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Tugs
8.109
1 Tugs are available.
Berths
Naval Base
8.110
1 Naval Base Quay, previously known as North Quay, lies
close SSW of the NW corner of the head of the Gulf of
‘Aqaba. The quay is the location of an Israeli Naval Base
and ship repair facilities.
A ship lift (8.116) is situated in the SE corner of the
quay; a conspicuous ship repair shed stands close NNE.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 8

Eilat Naval Base (8.110)

(Original dated 1998)
(Photograph − Crown Copyright)

A detached quay lies about 50 m off the NE part of the
main quay.
2 An area into which entry is prohibited surrounds the
Naval Base quay; mooring to the buoys marking the limits
of this area is prohibited. A dangerous wreck lies in the NE
corner of the prohibited area.
An area in which nets are laid, marked at its outer end by
light-buoys (special), lies about 1 cable NNE of the N end of
the Naval Base Quay.
Port of Eilat
8.111
1 Port of Eilat previously known as South Quay which lies
about 6 cables SW of North Quay is a quay with three
numbered berths, 1 to 3, on its seaward face. The quay is
the main port area of the Port of Eilat and has a total
berthing length of 528 m and depths alongside of up to
13⋅0 m.
Facilities for the handling of containers are situated at the
N end of the quay.
2 A light is exhibited from the NW corner of a pier, which
extends NNE from the N end of South Quay and forms the
E side of a small boat basin at the N end of South Quay; a
further light is exhibited from the shore on the NW side of
the entrance to the basin.
A light-buoy (red and blue, barrel) is moored about
1 cables NNE of the N end of the quay.
A berth, about 200 m in length, lies close N of South
Quay and can accommodate vessels up to 6 m draught.
Buoys (special) are laid close NE of this berth.
3 There is an elevator for the bulk loading of phosphate
and potash with an operating capacity of 800 tonnes per
hour. The elevator has a maximum vertical clearance of
11⋅5 m which can be increased to 14⋅5 m if advance notice
given.
Katza Oil Terminal
8.112
1 North Oil Jetty (29°31′⋅4N, 34°56′⋅2E), which projects
about 1 cable SSE from the shore, has a reverse L-shaped

Eilat Commercial Port (8.111)

(Original dated 1998)
(Photograph − Crown Copyright)

235
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 8
head; a number of dolphins lie in the vicinity of the berth
and are used for berthing at the facility.
A number of light-buoys are moored in the vicinity of
North Oil Jetty whose positions are best seen on the chart.
The berth can handle tankers up to 125 000 dwt and a
maximum draught of 17⋅0 m.
8.113
1 Restricted area. A restricted area surrounds both North
Oil Jetty and South Oil Jetty (8.114). Vessels must not enter
this area without permission.
8.114
1 South Oil Jetty, which lies about 4 cables SW of North
Oil Jetty, consists of a T-headed jetty extending about
1 cables from the shore. The berth is flanked by ten
dolphins joined to the jetty head by arms, extending about
300 m NE and 200 m SW.
Lights are exhibited from both ends of the jetty head,
from the N-most and S-most dolphins and also from the
inner part of the berth.
2 A light-buoy (white pillar) is moored about 1 cables S
of the S-most dolphin in the vicinity of a floating boom.
The berth can handle vessels up to 500 000 dwt with a
maximum draught of 25⋅8 m.
Restricted area see 8.113.
8.115
1 Approach. From a position E of Eilat Light (29°30′⋅0N,
34°54′⋅8E) the approach to South Oil Jetty is made on the
EL ‘AQABA
General information
Chart 801 plan of Eilat and El ‘Aqaba
Position
8.120
1 The port of El ‘Aqaba (29°31′N, 35°00′E) is situated at
the NE side of the head of the Gulf of ‘Aqaba opposite the
Israeli port of Eilat (8.81).
Description
8.121
1 The commercial sea port of El ‘Aqaba is the only outlet
to the sea for the Hashemite Kingdom of Jordan. The port is
similar to Eilat being an open roadstead situated in the NE
corner of the head of the Gulf of ‘Aqaba. The immediate
hinterland, E of the town, is high and barren.
The town of El ‘Aqaba stands in an extensive date grove
with the main general cargo port area, and the phosphate
export berths, extending about 1 mile S from the town.
2 A promenade, with a small fishing boat pier at its S end,
fronts part of the shoreline W of the town between Victoria
Pier and the general port area. Datum Rock, a drying rock,
lies between the promenade and Victoria Pier.
The port facilities stretch along the E shore of the gulf
from E of the town of El‘ Aqaba to El‘ Aqaba Industrial
Port (8.167) which lies close N of the border of Jordan with
Saudi Arabia.
3 A power station (29°29′⋅3N, 35°59′⋅2E) stands close to
the coast between the main port area and Moutah Floating
Berth.
Moutah (8.156) and Moshterak (8.157) Floating Berths lie
a farther 1 miles S of the phosphate berths; the Container
236
alignment (012°) of a pair of leading lights.
Leading lights:
Front light, exhibited from the N-most dolphin of
South Oil Jetty, (29°31′⋅3N, 34°56′⋅0E).
Rear light (620 m from front).
Port services
Repairs
8.116
1 All afloat deck and engine repairs can be undertaken by
local workshops; there is a 1800 tonnes capacity ship hoist.
Other facilities
8.117
1 Hospital; deratting facilities; limited facilities for the
disposal of oily wastes to road tanker.
Supplies
8.118
1 Fuel oil; fresh water; fresh provisions.
Communications
8.119
1 Airport close to the town which has connecting flights
with other parts of Israel.
Regular communication by sea with ports in East Africa
and Asia.
Terminal and Ro-Ro Berth (8.158) are situated about
5 cables farther S; Yarmouk Floating Berth (8.160) lies close
S of the Container Terminal.
4 El ‘Aqaba Industrial Port (8.167) lies 9 miles S of the
town and is where El ‘Aqaba Oil Terminal (8.170), the
Timber Jetty (8.172) and the Jordan Fertilizer Industry (JFI)
Phosphates Terminal (8.173) are situated.
Depths
8.122
1 The approaches to the port of El ‘Aqaba are deep. The
bottom consists of sand, gravel and coral.
Function
8.123
1 The shoreline of the Kingdom of Jordan stretches for
about 13 miles, mainly S, from the international border of
the country with Israel (8.91) to its border with Saudi Arabia
(8.129).
In 1999 El ‘Aqaba had a population of 88 800.
8.124
1 Trade. The principal exports are phosphates; tar products;
cement; fruit.
The principal imports include general cargo; building
materials; grain; machinery.
Port limits
8.125
1 The S limit of the port of El ‘Aqaba is an imaginary line,
not charted, drawn in a 270° direction, from the international
boundary between Saudi Arabia and Jordan (8.129).
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 8

Approach and entry

8.126
1 The approach to the port of El ‘Aqaba is made from the
head of the Red Sea, passing through the Strait of Tr
n
(8.29) and then to the E side of the head of the Gulf of
‘Aqaba.
The close approach and entry to the port is deep with no
obstructions, even close to the shore.
Traffic
8.127
1 In 2003 the port was visited by a total of 717 vessels.

Port Authority
8.128
1 The harbour is administered by: The Ports Corporation,
PO Box 115, El ‘Aqaba, Jordan.
International boundary
8.129
1 The international boundary separating Jordan from Saudi
Arabia reaches the coast about 10 miles S of the NE corner
of the head of the Gulf of ‘Aqaba in the approximate
vicinity of 29°21′⋅4N, 34°57′⋅6E.
See also 8.91.
Magnetic anomaly
8.130
1 See 8.52.
Marine Peace Park
8.131
1 The Marine Peace Park lies between the parallels of
29°27′⋅6N and 29°23′⋅8N and extends 250 m off the
Jordanian shore between the S end of Yarmouk Floating
Berth (8.160) and a position 8 cables N of El ‘Aqaba Oil
Terminal (8.170). The outer limits of the park are marked by
buoys (white), spaced 250 m apart, which follow the 70 m
depth contour. El Aqaba Control Tower from SW (8.132)
2 Anchoring is prohibited within the Marine Peace Park, (Original dated 2003)
and vessels should reduce speed when in its vicinity so as (Photograph − Crown Copyright)
not to create a damaging wake.

Principal marks unnamed point about 1 mile SSW of Yarmouk

8.132
1 Major lights:
Eilat Light (29°30′⋅0N, 34°54′⋅8E) (8.95).
El ‘Aqaba Control Tower Light (a white round tower,
72 m high) (29°30′⋅8N, 34°59′⋅8E) is exhibited from
El ‘Aqaba Port Control Tower which stands close S
of General Cargo Berth No 10. The tower is very
conspicuous.
8.133
1 Landmarks:
A radio mast (red framework tower; red obstruction
lights) (29°32′⋅3N, 34°59′⋅1E) stands near the root
of Royal Jetty. Three further radio masts (red
obstruction lights) stand close NE.
2 A small fort (29°31′⋅6N, 35°00′⋅4E) and radio mast
stand within the town.
A tank farm (29°30′⋅2N, 34°59′⋅8E) is situated close E
of the Phosphate and Bulk Exports Berths.
See also 8.96.
Floating Berth (8.160).
2 A light is exhibited from a mast (red framework)
(29°32′⋅3N, 34°59′⋅2E) which stands close NE of
the root of Royal Jetty (8.144).
Limiting conditions
Controlling depths
8.135
1 The main general cargo berths (8.152) have a maximum
charted alongside depth of 12⋅5 m. The port should be
contacted for the latest information.
The Phosphate Loading Berths (8.153) can handle vessels
up to a maximum draught of 14⋅4 m.
The Container Terminal (8.158) can handle vessels up to
a maximum draught of 14⋅0 m.
The Ro-Ro Berth (8.158), situated at the N end of the
container terminal, can handle Ro-Ro vessels up to a
maximum draught of 10⋅0 m.

Aids to navigation Deepest and longest berths

8.134 8.136
1 Lights: 1 The main general cargo quay, between Berths Nos 1 to 6,
El ‘Aqaba South Light (white metal structure) has a total length of 1060 m and can handle vessels up to a
(29°26′⋅8N, 34°58′⋅1E) is exhibited from an maximum draught of 12⋅5 m.

237
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 8
Tidal levels
8.137
1 See information in Admiralty Tide Tables, Volume 3. Mean
spring range about 0⋅8 m.
Density of water
8.138
1 Density 1⋅031 g/cm3.
Maximum size of vessel handled
8.139
1 El ‘Aqaba Oil Terminal (8.170) can handle vessels up to
a maximum tonnage of 406 000 dwt, a maximum length of
400 m, and a maximum draught of 24⋅0 m.
The maximum size of vessel that can be handled in the
general port is 70 000 dwt with a maximum draught of
10⋅8 m.
Local weather
8.140
1 During periods of strong winds vessels with a full load of
deck cargo, or a full load of containers, may find the outer
anchorages untenable.
In the event of a S winter gale vessels should not hesitate
to leave the anchorage until the weather moderates.
See also 8.101.
Climatic table. See 1.275 and 1.284.
Arrival information
Port radio
8.141
1 There is a port radio at El ‘Aqaba. For further
information, see Admiralty List of Radio Signals,
Volume 6 (3).
Notice of ETA
8.142
1 ETA should be sent 12 hours in advance, with
confirmation by VHF 2 hours in advance.
Anchorage berths
8.143
1 Anchorage may be obtained in one of eight numbered
anchor berths off the N shore of the port on a good holding
ground of sand and coral. The positions of the anchorage
berths are best seen on the chart.
Berths Nos 2, 4 and 8 are in charted depths of 50 m or
less; the remainder are in greater depths from 50 to 100 m.
2 Vessels working lighters use Anchor Berths Nos 1 to 4,
known as the Near Anchorage; those vessels awaiting an
alongside berth use Anchor Berths Nos 5 to 7, known as the
Far Anchorage; No 8 Anchor Berth is allocated to small
vessels. An area of foul ground lies about 2 cables N of
Anchor Berth No 6.
3 During periods of congestion at the port, vessels may be
allocated other anchor berths to seaward of the 100 m depth
contour.
The whole anchorage is exposed to S winds and care
must be taken to allow sufficient swinging room.
8.144
1 Prohibited anchorages. Anchorage is prohibited within
6 cables of Royal Jetty (29°32′⋅3N, 34°59′⋅1E) and vessels
must keep this distance off the jetty.
An area in which anchorage is prohibited extends across
the gulf from the Egyptian shore to the Jordanian shore; see
8.107.
238
8.145
1 Mooring buoys for the use of LASH vessels are laid SW
of Victoria Pier and the yacht harbour.
8.146
1 Cargo is worked in the anchorage using lighters, of
which there are about 16 available with capacities of up to
500 tonnes.
Explosives are discharged in the anchorage and are only
worked during daylight hours.
Gas pipeline
8.147
1 A gas pipeline is landed in a small bay (29°22′⋅4N,
34°57′⋅7E) between the Timber Jetty and the JFI Phosphates
Terminal. See 1.21.
Pilotage
8.148
1 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels above 150 nrt which
are bound for the port of El ‘Aqaba for the purpose of
berthing, unberthing or entering the Near and Far Anchorage
areas. Under normal conditions berthing and unberthing in
the main port area is undertaken 24 hours a day.
Pilotage is not compulsory for vessels proceeding to sea
from the anchorages.
2 Pilotage is reported to be compulsory for vessels
instructed to anchor in the Far Anchorage as well as those in
the Near Anchorage; it is reported to be only available
during daylight hours.
One hours notice of ETD should be given to Port Control
for a pilot.
The pilot boat is black hulled with white superstructure.
8.149
1 The pilot boarding position depends on the intended
berthing arrangements.
The pilot for the general cargo berths (8.152), the
Phosphate Berths (8.153) and the anchorages
(8.143) boards in position 29°29′⋅8N, 34°58′⋅2E.
The pilot for Moshterak (8.157) and Moutah (8.156)
Floating Berths boards in position 29°28′⋅5N,
34°58′⋅1E.
2 The pilot for the Container Terminal and Ro-Ro Berth
(8.158) boards in position 29°27′⋅8N, 34°57′⋅9E.
The pilot for Yarmouk Floating Berth (8.160) boards
in position 29°27′⋅1N, 34°57′⋅7E.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Tugs
8.150
1 Three tugs are available and their use is compulsory.
Eight mooring and towing boats are available.
Regulations concerning entry
8.151
1 Vessels arriving after 2000 are not permitted to enter
Jordanian territorial waters unless berthing arrangements have
been made.
Vessels carrying dangerous cargo and radioactive elements
should inform the Port Authority of all the relevant details to
enable the port to take the necessary precautions and safety
measures for their discharge.
2 It has been reported that arriving vessels bound for the
general port area, or the container terminal and Ro-Ro berth,
that, if an alongside berth is not immediately available they
should obtain inward clearance at the pilot station.
Vessels carrying IMO class 1⋅1 explosives, ammonium
nitrate, radioactive materials or potassium chloride are
prohibited from berthing alongside.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 8
3 The berthing of tankers, and vessels carrying dangerous
goods, is prohibited during the hours of darkness (usually
1800 to 0600).
Berths
General cargo berths
8.152
1 The general cargo berths (29°30′⋅7N, 34°59′⋅7E) consist
of a quay, 1060 m in length and orientated in a NNE/SSW
direction, situated off the SW part of the town of El ‘Aqaba.
The quay provides 10 berths: Berths Nos 1 to 6 lie on its
seaward face; Berth No 7 lies across the N end of the quay;
and Berths Nos 8 to 10 lie on its inner part. Berths Nos 1 to
6 can handle vessels up to 40 000 dwt, though it is reported
that Berth No 1 can handle a vessel up to 70 000 dwt with a
maximum draught of 10⋅8 m.
2 The quay is provided with six cargo sheds, cold storage,
and an extensive area for open storage.
From the root of Berth No 10 the line of the quay extends
generally NE with lighter berths, tug berths and a small
slipway. A breakwater, on which there is berthing for lighters
on its W side and for small vessels on its E side, extends
about 175 m NNW from close E of the slipway.
3 LASH lighters anchor in the designated anchorage
between Berth No 7 and the shore NNE, as shown on the
chart.
Phosphate Loading Berths
8.153
1 The Phosphate Loading Berths are used for the export of
raw phosphate rock mined from the mines at Eshidiya in SE
Jordan, and from the mines at El Abiad and El Hassa in
central Jordan. Jordan is the worlds second largest exporter
of phosphate rock.
8.154
1 Berth A which is situated close S of the general cargo
quay (8.152) is a dolphin berth, 220 m in length, that can
accommodate vessels up to 20 000 dwt and a draught of
11⋅0 m.
The berth consists of a loading tower, which incorporates
a ship-loader with a loading rate of 1000 tonnes per hour,
situated between two wood-sheathed berthing dolphins; a
rubber fendered mooring dolphin is situated at the N end of
the berth with two further similar dolphins situated at its S
end.
2 A large, conspicuous, grain storage facility stands close E
of the berth.
This berth is also used for the discharge of vegetable oils,
and for the discharge of oil tanker cargoes during daylight
hours only. The berth is connected by pipeline to the tank
farm situated 3 cables SE. These pipelines are also used for
the supply of bunker oil.
8.155
1 Berth B, which is situated close S of Berth A, can
accommodate vessels up to 100 000 dwt, a length of 220 m
and a draught of 14⋅4 m.
The berth is 180 m in length with mooring dolphins
situated a farther 60 m N and S of each end of the main
berth. Loading rates of up to 2200 tonnes per hour can be
achieved by two travelling ship-loaders.
Bagged goods may discharged to road transport.
A large, conspicuous, storage shed stands immediately E
of the berth.
239
Moutah Floating Berth
8.156
1 Moutah Floating Berth is situated about 2 miles SSW of
the town of El ‘Aqaba.
The berth, which is 150 m long, can accommodate vessels
up to 40 000 dwt, 150 m in length and 15⋅0 m draught, is
used mainly for the import of rice but can also handle
wheat, corn, barley, soya, and similar products.
Ro-Ro traffic may also be handled at the berth.
The facility consists of three berths, one each on its N, S,
and W faces.
Moshterak Berth
8.157
1 Moshterak Berth is situated about 2 cables SSW of
Moutah Floating Berth (8.156) and can accommodate
vessels, of up to 120 000 dwt; the berth has an alongside
depth of 11⋅0 m.
2 The berth consists of two dolphins, 120 m apart. A ship
loader and conveyor belt are situated between the two
dolphins and are connected to two conspicuous white domes
with a storage capacity of 30 000 tonnes. The berth is used
for the handling bulk cement exports to other countries in
the Middle East and Asia.
The berth is also used for the export of oil.
Container Terminal and Ro-Ro Berth
8.158
1 The Container Terminal and Ro-Ro Berth are situated
about 3 cables SSW of Moshterak Berth (8.157).
The container terminal consists of a quay, 540 m in
length, which can accommodate vessels up to 230 m in
length, 55 000 dwt with a maximum draught of 14⋅0 m;
expansion plans at the terminal envisage the handling of
container vessels up to 85 000 dwt.
The terminal is occasionally used for general cargo,
livestock and passenger traffic.
8.159
1 The Ro-Ro berth has a 40 m ramp and lies at the N end
of the Container Terminal. As well as other wheeled traffic,
it is used for the import of cars. The berth can accommodate
vessels up to 25 000 dwt, 180 m in length, and a draught of
10 m.
Yarmouk Floating Berth
8.160
1 Yarmouk Floating Berth, which is situated about 2 cables
SSW of the Container Terminal (8.158), handles passenger
vessels, ferries and Ro-Ro traffic, and, at busy times, even
container vessels.
2 The outer berth is 150 m in length but it can
accommodate vessels up to 170 m in length with a
maximum draught of 10⋅0 m if the smaller berths situated on
its N and S ends, are unoccupied. Larger cruise liners tend to
use the main port facilities.
3 The main users of the facility are ferries, including fast
catamaran ferries, which ply between El ‘Aqaba and the
Egyptian port of Nuweiba ‘el Muzeina (8.64) several times a
day.
A passenger terminal building stands about 550 m SSE of
the berth, near the marine science station.
Mooring buoys (positions approximate) are laid N and S
of the berth.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 8

Port services exhibited from the approach arm to the JFI

Repairs
8.161
1 Minor repairs can be undertaken by local workshops;
slipway with a lifting capacity of 300 tonnes.
Other facilities
8.162
1 A duty free zone is situated about 18 km N of the port
area; hospital; limited dental facilities; vegetable oil storage
facilities.
Supplies
8.163
1 Fuel oil in limited quantities; lubricating oils; limited
supplies of fresh water; fresh provisions.
Communications
8.164
1 El ‘Aqaba Airport, 11 km distant, has regular flights to
‘Amman, the capital of Jordan.
Harbour regulations
8.165
1 Repairs may only be carried out with the permission of
the Harbour Master.
Because of the possibility of sudden changes in the
weather, vessels may not immobilise their main engines
without the permission of the Harbour Master.
Regulations have been introduced prohibiting vessels of
more than 15 years old, with certain exceptions, from
discharging or loading cargo at El ‘Aqaba.
8.166
1 Lights:
A light (white round tower, red top) (29°31′⋅8N,
34°59′⋅9E) is exhibited from the N side of the NW
entrance to the larger basins, from the head of the
short breakwater extending from the shore.
A further light (white round tower, green top)
(29°31′⋅8N, 34°59′⋅9E) is exhibited from the S side
of the NW entrance to the larger basins, from the
NE end of the outer breakwater.
El ‘Aqaba Industrial Port
Chart 801 plan of El ‘Aqaba Industrial Port
Description
8.167
1 El ‘Aqaba Industrial Port lies between 8 and 10 miles S
of the town of El ‘Aqaba.
The port handles the export of oil and the import and
export of fertilisers and potash.
Several tall chimneys stand E of the port area and serve
to identify its position.
8.168
1 Lights:
Lights are exhibited from each end of the Jordan
Fertilizer Industry (JFI) Phosphates Terminal
(29°22′⋅0N, 34°57′⋅5E) (8.173).
A light (white triangle topmark, apex up, on white
metal column, red stripes) (29°22′⋅1N, 34°57′⋅6E) is
Phosphate Terminal; red lights are exhibited from
three chimneys (yellow and white) (position
approximate) which stand about 1 mile NE.
8.169
1 Landmarks:
Two chimneys (red and white) (29°22′⋅4N, 34°58′⋅3E)
which stand about 7 cables ENE of the JFI
Phosphate Terminal (8.173).
El ‘Aqaba Oil Terminal
8.170
1 El ‘Aqaba Oil Terminal lies in the N part of the industrial
port and consists of four dolphins situated at the W end of a
150 m approach arm.
The berth can accommodate tankers up to 400 000 dwt,
370 m in length, and a draught of 25⋅0 m. It is used for the
handling of both oil and chemical cargoes.
Tankers may only berth or depart, during daylight hours
only, with the aid of tugs.
8.171
1 Arrival information. Vessels bound for the terminal
should inform the authorities at least 15 days prior to their
arrival.
The ETA should be confirmed 5 days before arrival and
every day thereafter.
Timber Jetty
8.172
1 The Timber Jetty, which is operated by the Jordan
Fertilizer Industry, is the middle berthing facility of El
‘Aqaba Industrial Port; the facility is now mainly used for
the import of livestock.
The jetty is 85 m in length and can accommodate vessels
up to 14 000 dwt, 120 m length. The facility has a charted
depth alongside of 6⋅8 m.
The berth can also accommodate suitable Ro-Ro vessels.
Jordan Fertilizer Industry Phosphates Terminal
8.173
1 Jordan Fertilizer Industry (JFI) Phosphates Terminal,
which forms the S berthing facility of El ‘Aqaba Industrial
Port, is a L-shaped jetty.
The West Berth (also called the seaward or outer berth) of
the facility is 220 m long and 40 m wide and can
accommodate vessels up to 50 000 dwt, with a length not
exceeding 230 m, a draught of 15 m, and a height above the
water not exceeding 23 m.
2 The East Berth (also called the landward or inner berth),
can accommodate vessels up to 30 000 dwt, with a length
not exceeding 190 m, a draught of 11 m, and a height above
the water not exceeding 23 m.
Facilities. The terminal is equipped with two ship-loaders
with a capacity of 2000 tonnes per hour; and an evacuator
with a capacity of 500 tonnes per hour.
3 Arrival information. Vessels bound for the terminal
should inform the authorities 7 days prior to their arrival.
The ETA should be confirmed 4 days before arrival and
every day thereafter.

240
Home Contents Index

NOTES

241
Home Contents Index

Chapter 9 - Red Sea - east side. Ras Qi=bah to Jeddah

35° 36° 37° 38° 39°

28° 9.47 28°

Ash Sharmah
12

Port of ‹ubº 12
9.64
9.92
‹ubº Bulk Plant Terminal 12
9.1

12
1

27° 12 27°

S AU D I
ARABIA

Ra’s Kharºbah
26° 26°
9.1

25° 25°
10

Ra’s Abø Madd

158 Shi’b Shu’aybah

327
9.158
9.190 Yanbu’ al Ba5r 327
24° 24°
Minº’ al Malik Fahd
9.
11

328 9.201
1

89
9.1

Gezîret
Zabargad

326

23° 159 Ra’s Mastørah 23°

64

Rºbigh 64
9.306
2659
9.265

22° Ra’s Hadºrba 22°

2658
9.397
Jeddah
9.342
8
39 2577
9. 2599

35° 36° Longitude 37° East from Greenwich 39°

0205

242
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
RED SEA — EAST SIDE — RA’S QIBAH TO JEDDAH
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 158, 159
Scope of the chapter
9.1
1 The area described in this chapter covers that part of the
coast of Saudi Arabia which lies in the N part of the E side
of the Red Sea, from Ra’s Qibah (28°02′N, 34°37′E) (8.2)
to Ar Ra’s al Aswad (470 miles SSE) (9.266). The chapter
also includes descriptions of the ports of
ub
(27°34′N, to 70 miles distant, the most conspicuous being Jabal al
35°33′E) (9.64), Yanbu‘ al Bar (24°04′N, 38°04′E) (9.158),
Mn
’ al Malik Fahd (23°57′N, 38°13′E) (9.201), R
bigh
(22°44′N, 39°00′E) (9.306) and Jeddah (21°28′N, 39°10′E)
(9.342).
2 The area described includes almost the whole of the coast
of the province of Al Hij
z in which are situated the sacred
cities of Makkah (Mecca) (21°25′N, 39°50′E) and Al
Madnah (24°28′N, 39°36′E).
Topography
9.2
1 The mountains of Arabia back the coast of Saudi Arabia
RA’S QIBAH TO RA’S KHAR BAH
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 12, 159
Route
9.4
1 The route described in this section extends about
153 miles SE from a position clear of the S end of the S
bound lane of the Strait of Tr
n TSS (8.32), WSW of
Chisholm Point Light (27°57′N, 34°30′E) (8.40), to a
position about 20 miles SW of Ra’s Khar
bah (26°09′N,
36°29′E) (9.12).
Topography
9.5
1 Overall the coast between Ra’s Qibah (28°02′N,
34°37′E) and Ra’s Khar
bah (150 miles SE) is from 15 m to
30 m high. There are almost no beaches and only slight
indentations in the line of the coast.
Between Ra’s Qibah and Ra’s Ab Mas
rib (82 miles
SE) (9.12) the coast is fronted by coral reefs and islets out
to a distance of about 11 miles offshore.
2 The first section of the coast from Ra’s Qibah as far as
Khalj ‘Aynnah (30 miles E) (9.27) is low and sandy and
fronted by coral reefs which have narrow, intricate channels
between them. The area between Ra’s Qibah and Ra’s Ab
Sayf (12 miles E), which includes the two inlets of Ghubbat
al W
yjil (28°06′N, 34°48′E) and Al Kar
mah (2 miles E),
both of which are encumbered with rocks and small islets, is
also much encumbered by below-water reefs.
3 The section of the coast E of Ra’s Ab Sayf is also
deeply indented and rises gradually inland to Jabal az Zuhd
(28°19′N, 35°18′E) (9.10) which stands at the NW end of a
range of mountains that extends about 27 miles SE.
4 Caution. In 1986, a report supported by aerial
photography, suggested that a number of uncharted dangers
may lie within the area which lies between Jazrat an
fr
243
from the head of the Gulf of ‘Aqaba (8.48) to the Straits of
Bab el Mandeb (4.71). Extending over a distance of some
1150 miles, they form a prominent feature throughout the
whole of this chapter. These mountains, which stand between
12 miles and 60 miles inland, present a range of peaked
summits of bare rock rising to heights between 1500 m and
2450 m. In clear weather the mountains are visible 40 miles
Muwajli (9.6), and Jabal ub (9.107).
9.3
1 The reefs fronting this part of the coast either extend in
ridges and are almost steep-to, or they lie on extensive
banks. These reefs vary from about 140 m to 3 miles in
length. There is no heavy surf over most of the reefs under
any conditions of weather.
2 Entrances to the inlets which lie along this section of the
coast are difficult to distinguish, but they are convenient
stopping places for small vessels, with local knowledge,
proceeding up and down the Red Sea.
(27°56′N, 34°42′E) (8.45) and Al Kar
mah (28°06′N,
34°50′E).
9.6
1 Between Umm Qur (27°57′N, 35°12′E) and Al
Muwayli (20 miles SE) the patches of reef off the coast lie
farther apart, and deep water extends to within a short
distance of the coast, in places.
Mountains in this locality lie between 10 miles and
17 miles inland; Jabal Dabb
gh (27°52′N, 35°44′E) stands
about 30 miles ESE of Umm Qur.
2 Jabal al Muwajli is a range of mountains which extends
about 16 miles SE from a position about 23 miles E of Umm
Qur; the range consists of very sharp ridges which appear
as peaks on some bearings, especially from the S when they
have an irregular column appearance with chasms between.
From the NW, most of the peaks overlap each other and the
range then appears as a narrow ridge. Jabal Sh
r (27°38′N,
35°45′E), which rises to a height of 1874 m, stands at the
SE end of the range and is a prominent peak.
3 The coast between Ra’s Dhahak
n (27°23′N, 35°39′E)
and Ra’s Ab Mas
rib (16 miles SSE) remains low, the land
rising gradually to the base of the steep mountains which
stands about 10 miles inland.
9.7
1 Between Ra’s Ab Mas
rib (27°09′N, 35°47′E) and Ra’s
Khar
bah (70 miles SSE) low hills closely approach the
coast. Off the coast, large patches of coral reef lie between
2 miles and 8 miles offshore; deep channels lead between the
reefs.
Local knowledge. These large reefs should not be
approached without local knowledge.
2 This stretch of coast, SSE from Ra’s Ab Mas
rib, is
fronted by steep overhanging cliffs of coral and sandstone. A
level ledge of rocks, the outer part of which nearly dries and
rises like a wall from a considerable depth, extends nearly
40 m from the base of these cliffs. Against this ledge the sea
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
breaks with violence at times and produces a surf which
renders landing impracticable between the various inlets.
3 Between Ra’s Ab Mas
rib and Sharm Jazzah (14 miles
SE) (9.33) the coast is fringed by a reef; from a position
about 2 miles SE of Sharm Jazzah the fringing reef is
steep-to, for the next 18 miles.
9.8
1 From a position on the coast, E of the S end of An
Nu’m
n (27°06′N, 35°46′E) (9.21), an offshore bank, up to
2 miles offshore, extends for about the next 11 miles SE;
several dangerous rocks lie on this bank.
Anchorage. In moderate weather small vessels may
obtain anchorage on this bank.
2 A low wooded point, about 3 miles SSE of Ra’s Ab
Mas
rib (27°09′N, 35°47′E) (9.12), affords shelter for small
vessels during strong NW winds.
Local knowledge is required for the use of these two
anchorages.
Depths
9.9
1 Caution. Mariners are warned that in many parts of the
waters covered by this section navigational hazards, not
located during survey work, may well exist especially in the
shallow, coral waters.
See the source data diagram on the relevant charts.
Principal marks
9.10
1 Landmarks:
Jabal az Zuhd, 2014 m in height (28°19′N, 35°18′E)
stands at the NW end of a range of mountains that
extends about 30 miles SE.
Jabal Lib
n (26°34′N, 36°26′E) stands about 10 miles
E of Sharm ‘Antar (9.40) and forms a good mark;
two small peaks, near the centre of the mountain,
serve to identify it from seaward.
Jabal ar Ra’al (25°56′N, 37°09′E) is a prominent
isolated mountain with a broad summit.
Directions
(Directions for the Strait of TØrºn are given at 8.40)
Chart 12
9.11
1 From a position clear of the S end of the S bound lane of
the Strait of Tr
n TSS (8.32) the track leads SE, passing:
SW of Chisholm Point (27°57′N, 34°30′E) (8.40) the
SW extremity of Tr
n Island (8.31), thence:
SW of Jazrat an
fr (27°56′N, 34°42′E) (8.45),
thence:
SW of the detached shoal patch (27°54′N, 34°52′E),
with a least depth over it of 28 m, which lies about
2 miles SW of Jazrat Ab Shshah (9.13). Thence:
2 SW of an isolated shoal patch (27°50′N, 34°59′E),
with a least depth over it of 24⋅5 m, which lies
about 6 miles SW of Burq
n (9.15), thence:
SW of Jaz
’ir ila’ (27°39′N, 35°17′E) (9.19) which
consists of a group of low coral islets lying on a
dangerous reef. Jaz
’ir ila’ Light (9.19) is
exhibited from a beacon standing on the SW side of
the group, thence:
3 SW of the dangerous shoal area (27°33′N, 35°25′E),
which is marked by light-buoys and on which there
are drying rocks, situated about 5 miles W of the
Port of
ub
(9.64). Thence: from the N part of the island.
244
Chart 159
9.12
1 Passing:
SW of An-Nu’m
n (27°06′N, 35°46′E) (9.21) which
lies about 2 miles W of Ra’s Ab Mas
rib
(27°09′N, 35°47′E), thence:
SW of Shi‘b Mas
wik (26°55′N, 35°50′E) (9.26) a
group of rocks and shoals which lie at the NW end
of a chain of banks that extend about 36 miles SE
and on which lie numerous dangerous rocks, thence:
2 SW of An-Nuwayshizyah (26°36′N, 36°06′E) (9.24) a
small islet standing on a reef at the S end of the
chain of banks which extend SE from Shi‘b
Mas
wik. Thence:
SW of the area of reefs (26°23′N, 36°17′E) which lie
about 4 miles W of Ra’s Mar
bi (9.40), thence:
3 SW of Jazrat Muraykhah (R
yikhah) (26°11′N,
36°22′E) which lies close to the W end of a bank,
that extends about 7 miles WNW from about 1 mile
W of Ra’s Khar
bah. The islet is rocky and rises
gradually from its E end to elevations of 15 m in its
central part and in its W end. Some islets and
dangerous rocks also lie on this bank, thence:
4 SW of Ra’s Khar
bah (26°09′N, 36°29′E) which is
fringed by the coastal reef. A small shoal patch,
which is not always visible, lies a short distance off
the coastal reef near an opening in the reef which
allows for a good landing.
(Directions continue at 9.110)
Off-lying islands
Chart 12
Jaz rat Ab Sh shah
9.13
1 Description. Jazrat Ab Shshah (27°56′N, 34°54′E) is a
small island lying on the SW part of a detached coral reef
situated about 9 miles SSE of Ra’s Ab Sayf (9.5). The
island, which is composed of red and yellow sandstone
mixed with coral, gradually rises to a bluff about 97 m high
at its S end; on E and W bearings the island appears
wedge-shaped.
Jazrat Ab Shshah Light (metal structure, 1 m in height)
is exhibited from the SW end of the island.
9.14
1 Anchorage. Small vessels may obtain anchorage in
depths from about 12 to 18 m, sand and rock, on the bank
which extends about 1 miles NE of the island.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Chart 12 plan of Approaches to Ash Sharmah
Burq n
9.15
1 Description. Burq
n (27°54′N, 35°04′E) is an island
situated on the SE part of a coral reef which lies about
15 miles SE of Ra’s Ab Sayf (9.5). The island, which is
about 36 m high, consists of two parts connected by a low,
sandy isthmus. From the offing the island appears like two
wedge-shaped islands, but, from closer in, it appears broken
and rugged.
2 An oil production platform, which is radar conspicuous,
stands about 1 mile N of the N end of the island; two further
platforms are situated about 5 cables SE of the SE part of
the island.
Burq
n Light (metal structure, 1 m in height) is exhibited
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
9.16
1 Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels in a depth
of about 24 m, sand, near the SE extremity of Burq
n; the
anchorage is well sheltered from NW winds.
Anchorage may also be obtained E of the isthmus joining
the two parts of the island, in depths from about 13 to 27 m.
If bound for this anchorage from the S, then, when rounding
the S part of the island, a good clearance must be given; a
good lookout from aloft is also necessary as uncharted
navigational hazards may well exist, especially in shallow
waters. See 9.9.
Umm Qu
 r
9.17
1 Description. Umm Qur (27°57′N, 35°12′E) is situated
on a reef which lies NNW of Ash Sharmah (9.47)
encumbering the S approach to Khalj ‘Aynnah (9.27).
Yub‘
9.18
1 Description. Yub‘
(27°47′N, 35°08′E) is an island
situated on the SE side of the outer part of the entrance
channel to Ash Sharmah (9.47). The island is 112 m high,
precipitous and cliffy at its N end. It then gradually slopes
towards its SE end.
The SW side of the island is fringed by a reef on which
there are two islets and some above-water rocks. A
dangerous steep-to shoal rock lies about 1 mile SSE of the
SE end of the island.
2 W
lih, an islet fringed on its N and E part by a coral
reef, lies about 1 mile E of Yub‘

Julayjilah is a small islet situated on a reef about 8 cables
farther SE; a further small islet lies close by.
Chart 12 plan of Approaches to ‹ubº
Jaz ’ir ila
9.19
1 Description. Jaz
’ir ila (27°39′N, 35°17′E) is a small
group of islets standing on the SE side of a detached
dangerous reef which extends about 5 miles NW/SE.
Jaz
’ir ila Light (racon) is exhibited from a beacon
standing on the SW side of the group.
ila Shoal Light-buoy (S cardinal) marks a detached
shoal, which lies about 1 mile SE of the SE end of the reef.
9.20
1 alq al Kal
wah (27°42′N, 35°21′E) is a drying reef,
lying about 4 miles ENE of Jaz
’ir ila, on a bank with
depths over it from 9 to 20 m; a drying rock lies on the E
part of this bank.
An-Nu‘m n
9.21
1 Description. An-Nu‘m
n (27°06′N, 35°46′E) is a low
island which is sandy at its N end from where it rises
gradually to its highest point in abrupt red limestone cliffs
and hills which stand at its S end. The hills are fringed by a
few bushes but are otherwise destitute of vegetation and
present a very rugged appearance.
A stranded wreck lies on the drying reef which extends S
from the S extremity of the island.
Chart 159
An Nabq yah
9.22
1 Description. An Nabqyah (26°44′N, 36°02′E) (not
charted by name) is an small islet situated W of Ra’s
al’Ubayd near the mid part of the chain of off-lying rocky
banks, S of Shi‘b Mas
wik (9.26).
ub
Bulk Plant
The islet, which is low, sandy and covered with bushes, is
fringed by a reef.
9.23
1 Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels on the SE
side of the islet.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
An-Nuwayshiz yah
9.24
1 Description. An-Nuwayshizyah (26°36′N, 36°06′E) is a
low and sandy islet on the E side of a fairly extensive reef
which is situated near the S end of the chain of off-lying
rocky banks S of Shi‘b Mas
wik (9.26).
9.25
1 Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels on the E
side of the islet.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Off-lying reefs
Shi‘b Mas wik
9.26
1 Description. Shi‘b Mas
wik (26°55′N, 35°50′E) is a
group of rocks and shoals at the NW end of a chain of
off-lying banks, reefs and islets which extends 36 miles SE.
Numerous dangerous rocks lie on these banks.
Inlets and bays
Chart 12
Khal j ‘Ayn nah
9.27
1 Description. Khalj ‘Aynnah (28°03′N, 35°06′E) is a
bay, encumbered by an extensive reef, situated about 9 miles
NE of Burq
n (9.15).
Al Khuraybah is a settlement on the NE shore of the bay
which has a landing place reached by a tortuous channel
through the reefs.
2 W
d ‘Aynnah, which enters the head of the bay, lies
between two barren, rocky hills standing about 1 miles
inland. A long line of cliffs rises from the plain farther
inland and forms the outer edge of an extensive tableland.
The appearance of this luxuriant, though uncultivated, tract
of land contrasts strangely with the wild sterility of the
neighbouring scenery. Ruins lie on both sides of W
d
‘Aynnah and, between it and the beach, stand the remains
of an aqueduct.
3 Local knowledge is required to enter the bay.
Chart 12 plan of Approaches to ‹ubº
Sharm al  arr
9.28
1 Description. Sharm al arr (27°37′N, 35°31′E) is an inlet
entered about 4 miles SE of Al Muwayli (9.62). The inlet is
difficult to identify as the coast in this vicinity is low-lying
and its shores are fringed by reefs.
Sharm al Bad is a further inlet entered about 2 miles S
of Sharm al arr.
9.29
1 Anchorage may be obtained about 1
cables within the
entrance to the inlet, in depths from 11 to 15 m. The
anchorage is well sheltered from the prevailing winds.
Sharm Qaf fah
9.30
1 Description. Sharm Qaf
fah (27°21′N, 35°42′E) is an
inlet entered about 2 miles WNW of
245
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
(Tanker) Terminal (9.92), close ESE of the fishing village of
ub

A small wooden jetty on the NW side of the inlet affords
a good landing; a conspicuous white building stands on the
N side of the inlet.
Sharm an Nu‘m n
9.31
1 Description. Sharm an Nu‘m
n (27°05′⋅4N, 35°46′⋅4E) is
an inlet situated on the E side of the island of An Nu‘m
n
(9.21).
9.32
1 Anchorage. Good anchorage may be obtained within the
inlet in depths from about 8 to 15 m, coral. This anchorage
is sheltered from all winds as the sides of the inlet rise
almost vertically from the sea to elevations of between 24 m
and 30 m.
It is recommended to buoy your anchor if anchoring
within the inlet, given the nature of the bottom.
Chart 159
Sharm Jazzah
9.33
1 Description. Sharm Jazzah (26°58′N, 35°58′E) is a small
inlet entered about 14 miles SSE of Ra’s Ab Mas
rib
(27°09′N, 35°47′E) (9.12); a dangerous rock lies in the
entrance to the inlet.
The land in the vicinity of the inlet is barren. A strata of
black stone, on the surface of the neighbouring hills and
plains, gives the area a black and desolate appearance.
9.34
1 Anchorage. The inlet should offer a protected anchorage
once through the entrance channel.
Marsá Zubaydah
9.35
1 Description. Marsá Zubaydah (26°53′N, 36°02′E) is an
inlet, fringed by the coastal reef, which is entered about
6 miles SSE of Sharm Jazzah (9.33). The inlet is situated E
of an islet which stands on the coastal reef which dries in
this vicinity.
9.36
1 Anchorage may be obtained within the inlet in depths
from 18 to 55 m. The holding ground is reported to be bad.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Sharm Dumaygh
9.37
1 Description. Sharm Dumaygh (26°39′N, 36°12′E) is
entered about 17 miles SSE of Marsá Zubaydah (9.35)
between points fringed by reefs. The shores of the inlet are
fringed by a bank on which lie some rocks.
Just within the S entrance point is a drying lagoon which
is separated from the inlet by a reef.
2 A small projection from the centre of the N side of the
inlet is fringed by rocks; there are several coral patches lying
within 1 cables of this projection.
There is no vegetation in the vicinity of the inlet except
for a few bushes.
9.38
1 Directions for entry. From a position about 1 mile
offshore, and about 7 miles SSE of the inlet, steer NNW
keeping 1 mile offshore.
When a remarkable hill with a rugged peak, known as
Punches Cap, is in line with Mark Rock, a remarkable white
rock situated on the NE shore of Sharm Dumaygh, bearing
246
040°, then this line of bearing leads through the fairway of
the entrance to the inlet.
The best time to enter is with the sun high or astern, and
at low water, as the reefs are then visible.
2 Local knowledge. A vessel, without the benefit of local
knowledge, should mark the channel before entering in order
to avoid the coral patches near the middle of the inlet and
the bank extending 5 cables E from the W side of its
entrance.
9.39
1 Anchorage, which is well sheltered, may be obtained in
the NW part of the inlet in good holding ground, in depths
from 16 to 24 m, sand and coral.
Sharm ‘Antar
9.40
1 Description. Sharm ‘Antar (26°35′N, 36°15′E) is a small
cove entered about 1 miles SSE of Sharm Dumaygh
(9.37).
Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels within the
cove.
2 Good anchorage is also obtainable on the E side of the
bank which extends about 5 miles SSE, from a position on
the coast about 12 miles S of Sharm ‘Antar in the vicinity of
Ra’s Mar
bi, (26°23′N, 36°22′E); several coral patches and
rocks lie on this bank.
Local knowledge is required for the use of both of these
anchorages.
Marsá Za‘am
9.41
1 Description. Marsá Za‘am (26°17′N, 36°25′E) is a small
cove entered about 7 miles S of Ra’s Mar
bi (9.40) through
a gap near the S end of the coastal reef. This gap appears to
be deep and free from dangers; there is apparently good
landing on a sandy beach within the cove. This cove is not
named on Chart 159.
Sharm al Wajh
9.42
1 Description. Sharm al Wajh (26°13′N, 36°28′E) is a bay
entered about 25 miles SSE of Sharm ‘Antar (9.40); the
approach to the bay is free from dangers. Jazrat Muraykhah
(9.12) lies 5 miles WSW of the entrance and forms a good
landmark if making for the bay.
2 The coast in this vicinity consists of coral cliffs between
15 m and 21 m in height. Between these cliffs, and the steep
hills which lie 3 or 4 miles inland, lies a low, salt-encrusted
plain which is marshy near the coast. A fort, nearly
surrounded by hills, lies about 6 miles E of the head of the
inlet.
3 The shores of Sharm al Wajh are fringed by reefs; the
entrance channel has a fairway about 240 m wide.
Al Wajh is a town on the NW shore of the inlet
consisting of some stone houses, minarets and a fort; two
jetties, both of which are in ruins, extend into the inlet from
near the SW end of the town.
9.43
1 Other aids to navigation.
A radio tower stands close NE of the inlet.
An airport, from which an aero light is exhibited, lies
about 2 miles SE of the inlet.
9.44
1 Anchorages. Large vessels may obtain anchorage of
indifferent quality, in depths of about 58 m, in a position
about 5 cables SW of the entrance to Sharm al Wajh.
Within the inlet good anchorage may be obtained by
small vessels. The best berth is in a depth of about 13 m a
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9

little over a cable SSE of the SE extremity of the town; a For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
NW swell sets into the inlet. Signals, Volume 6 (3).
2 There is room for one vessel, moored head and stern,
close inside the N entrance point where there is a clay Tug
bottom and where it is sheltered from the swell which sets 9.53
across the entrance. This berth is safe should the wind shift 1 A tug is available.
S and SE, which often occurs suddenly.
9.45
1 A good anchorage may be obtained on the bank W of Directions for entering the harbour
Ra’s Khar
bah (26°09′N, 36°29′E) (9.12), S of the 9.54
dangerous rocks situated on the bank between Jazrat 1 From a position SW of Shi‘b Pelham (27°49′N, 35°06′E)
Muraykhah (R
yikhah) (26°11′N, 36°22′E) (9.12) and the the track leads NNE, passing:
islets to the E. SSE of No 2 Light-buoy (red can, cylindrical topmark)
Local knowledge is required for the use of this (27°48′⋅8N, 35°06′⋅0E) which marks the SW end of
anchorage. Shi‘b Pelham, a drying shoal on the NW side of the
9.46 buoyed channel, thence:
1 Small vessels may also obtain anchorage near several of 2 NNW of the light-buoy (red and white conical,
the sandy islets which stand on the off-lying banks between spherical topmark) (27°47′⋅8N, 35°07′⋅3E) which is
Ra’s Ab Mas
rib (27°09′N, 35°47′E) (9.12) and Ra’s moored close NNW of No 1 Light-buoy (green
Kurkm
(90 miles SSE) (9.113). conical, triangular topmark) which marks the N end
Local knowledge is required for the use of these of Yub‘
(9.18), thence:
anchorages. NNW of the detached shoal area (27°48′⋅8N,
35°08′⋅6E) with a least depth over it of 25 m.
Thence:
3 SSE of the detached shoal area (27°52′N, 35°08′E),
ASH SHARMAH
with a least depth over it of 19⋅4 m and on which
stand dangerous below-water rocks, thence:
General information NNW of No 3 Light-buoy (green conical, triangular
topmark) (27°49′⋅6N, 35°10′⋅2E) which marks the
Chart 12 plan of Ash Sharmah NW end of an unnamed shoal on the SE side of the
Position fairway, thence:
9.47 4 SSE of No 4 Light-buoy (red can, cylindrical topmark)
1 Ash Sharmah (27°56′N, 35°16′E) is situated on the E side (27°51′⋅9N, 35°11′⋅2E) which marks the SE side of
of the head of the Red Sea, about 45 miles E of the Strait of an unnamed shoal with a least depth over it of
Tr
n (8.29). 9⋅4 m. Thence:
NNW of the detached shoal area (27°51′⋅4N,
Description 35°13′⋅1E), with a least depth over it of 45 m,
9.48 thence:
1 Ash Sharmah is an open roadstead and small subsidiary 9.55
port under the control of the port of Yanbu‘ al Bar (9.158). 1 Ash Sharmah Leading Lights:
Front light (white, orange band, standing on the centre
Port Authority of the head of the oil jetty) (27°55′⋅7N, 35°16′⋅5E).
9.49 Rear light (white, orange band) (336 m from front).
1 See 9.164. From a position about 6 cables S of No 6 Light-buoy
(27°52′⋅8N, 35°13′⋅6E) the alignment (036°) of the leading
Approach lights leads towards the port, passing (with positions given
9.50 from Ash Sharmah Front Leading Light):
1 From a position SW of Shi‘b Pelham (27°49′N, 35°06′E) 2 SE of No 6 Light-buoy (red can, cylindrical topmark)
(9.54) the outer approach channel leads about 10 miles NNE, (3
miles SW) which marks the S end of an area of
through a wide buoyed channel to the outer end of the inner shoals which extends S from Umm Qur (27°57′N,
approach channel. 35°12′E) (9.17), thence:
The inner channel, which is marked on its NW side by 3 SE of No 8 Light-buoy (red can, cylindrical topmark)
light-buoys and is indicated by a line of leading lights, leads (3 miles SW) which marks the SE side of the area
to the vicinity of the port. of shoals which extends S from Umm Qur,
thence:
Port radio 4 SE of No 10 Light-buoy (red can, cylindrical topmark)
9.51 (2 miles SW) which is moored on the E side of a
1 There is a port radio station which is operational when a patch of deeper water which lies close inside the SE
vessel is expected. side of the area of shoals. Thence:
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio To the vicinity of the port.
Signals, Volume 6 (3).

Pilotage Berths
9.52
1 Pilotage is compulsory and is only available during the Oil jetty
hours of daylight. 9.56
The pilot boards in the vicinity of No 6 Light-buoy 1 A T-headed oil jetty extends about 1 cable W from the
(27°52′⋅8N, 35°13′⋅6E) as shown on the plan. shore about 7 cables SSE of the town.

247
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9

New berth three sides by hills and fringed in places by reefs, which is
9.57 entered about 15 miles NW of the town of ub
(27°21′N,
1 In 1980 it was reported that a new berth, 380 m in length 35°41′E).
and with an alongside depth of 10 m, was under construction ub
Bulk Plant Terminal (9.92) lies about 2 miles SE
at Ash Sharmah. of the town of ub


Pontoon berth Function

9.58 9.66
1 A grounded pontoon, 130 m in length, provides a berth 1 The port is intended to provide additional facilities when
for vessels of up to 7⋅8 m draught. the volume of traffic through Yanbu‘ al Bar (9.158) and
Jeddah (9.342) becomes excessive.
Port services The port is mainly used for the export of cement in bulk
and the import of livestock, foodstuffs and general cargo, as
Supplies well as for passenger traffic from Egypt and Sudan.
9.59
1 Neither fresh water nor fuel are available. Traffic
9.67
Facilities 1 In 2003 the port was visited by a total of 13 vessels.
9.60
1 There is a small hospital. Entry
9.68
Anchorage 1 The inlet, in which lies the Port of ub
, is entered
9.61 through a dredged channel cut through the coastal reef.
1 Anchorage may be obtained off the port in depths from
30 to 35 m. Approach
9.69
1 The Port of ub
is best approached from the S, from an
AL MUWAYLI initial position SW of the light-buoy (W cardinal) in position
Chart 12 27°26′⋅2N, 35°31′⋅1E (9.80); thence N, passing E of the
Description off-lying shoals which extend SE from Jaz
’ir ila’
9.62 (27°39′N, 35°17′E) (9.19).
1 Al Muwayli (27°41′N, 35°29′E) is a village near the Port Authority
coast situated about 10 miles SSE of the promontory of Ra’s 9.70
W
d Tarm; a conspicuous fort, together with a minaret, 1 The harbour is administered by the Seaports Authority of
stand on the E side of the village. Saudi Arabia, (SEAPA), PO Box 5162, Riyadh, Saudi
A detached reef lies about 1 miles off the coast between Arabia.
the shore W of Al Muwayli and Halq al Kal
wah
(27°41′N, 35°21′E). Caution
2 A spit, on which stand some palm trees, extends WSW 9.71
from the vicinity of the fort. The spit continues below water 1 High speed craft operate from the Port of ub
; mariners
and, under favourable light conditions, it is clearly visible are advised to maintain a good lookout for such craft.
such that, when approaching Al Muwayli it can be For further information, see Annual Summary of
rounded by eye. Admiralty Notices to Mariners No 23.
Anchorage Limiting conditions
9.63
1 During periods of light winds small vessels may obtain Controlling depth
anchorage among the shoal patches which lie on the 9.72
off-lying banks. A recommended temporary anchorage off Al 1 The maximum draught allowed through the entrance
Muwayli, in a depth of about 9⋅0 m, may be obtained with channel is 9⋅5 m.
the minaret, within the fort, bearing 111°, distant 3 miles.
Local knowledge is required for the use of any of these Tidal levels
anchorages. 9.73
1 Maximum tidal range is about 0⋅8 m.

PORT OF  UB Density of water

9.74
General information 1 1⋅025 g/cm3.
Chart 12 plan of Approaches to ‹ubº Local weather
Position 9.75
9.64 1 The prevailing winds are from the NW.
1 The Port of ub
(27°34′N, 35°33′E) is situated on the E See also 4.4.
side of the head of the Red Sea, about 62 miles ESE of the
Strait of Tr
n (8.29). Arrival information
Description Notice of ETA
9.65 9.76
1 The Port of ub
is a new port situated within Sharm 1 Vessels should inform the port authority of their ETA
Jubbah, an inlet which forms a natural harbour, protected on 5 days in advance of their arrival.

248
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9

Vessels should then confirm their ETA 48 hours and SSW of the light-buoy (7 miles ESE) (S cardinal)
24 hours before arrival. marking the S side of a shoal with a least depth
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio over it of 14 m, thence:
Signals, Volume 6 (3). 2 SSW of a shoal (8 miles ESE), with a least depth
over it of 15 m, thence:
Outer anchorage NNE of the light-buoy (N cardinal) (9 miles ESE)
9.77 which is moored on the NNE side of a dangerous
1 The recommended anchorage position is SE of ila’ shoal area. A further light-buoy (S cardinal) (9.81)
Shoal Light-buoy (S cardinal) (27°37′⋅8N, 35°19′⋅3E). marks the S end of this area of dangerous shoals;
another light-buoy marks its SE side. Thence:
Pilotage To the pilot boarding position.
9.78
1 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels above 150 nrt and Chart 12 plan of the Port of ‹ubº
the pilot boards in position 27°34′⋅3N, 35°29′⋅6E, as shown Entrance channel
on the chart. 9.84
Berthing and unberthing are undertaken during the hours 1 The entrance channel into Sharm Jubbah and the port area
of daylight only. extends about 7 cables E; the channel is 95 m wide and is
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio dredged to a depth of 11 m (1989); the channel is marked
Signals, Volume 6 (3). by three pairs of light-beacons.

Tugs Berths
9.79
Main quay
1 Tugs are available.
9.85
1 The main quay, which lies on the E side of the port, is
Directions about 600 m long and orientated in a N/S direction. In
addition to a passenger terminal, the quay consists of three
Approach
berths, each of 200 m length, with alongside depths of
9.80
10⋅5 m.
1 A deep channel lies between the coast and the reefs W of
the Port of ub
. Ro-Ro berth
The coast should initially be approached in the vicinity N 9.86
of Ra’s Dhahak
n (27°23′N, 35°39′E). 1 A Ro-Ro facility is situated at the S end of the main
The approach to the deep channel should then be made quay.
on a NNW heading to a position SE of the light-buoy (W
cardinal) (27°26′⋅2N, 35°31′⋅1E). Service quay
9.81 9.87
1 The track then leads NNW for about 12 miles, passing 1 A quay, for use by service vessels, lies about 220 m SW
(with positions from the unnamed entrance point on the S of the Ro-Ro berth, in the SE part of the harbour.
side of the entrance channel (27°33′⋅6N, 35°31′⋅9E) to the Fishing quay
Port of ub
):
9.88
WNW of the light-buoy (W cardinal) (7 miles S) 1 A quay for use by fishing vessels lies in the S extremity
which marks the NW side of a coral reef, thence: of the E part of the harbour.
2 ENE of the light-buoy (S cardinal) (5 miles SW)
which marks the S end of the area of shoals which Coast Guard quay
extend SE from Jaz
’ir ila’ (27°39′N, 35°17′E) 9.89
(9.19), thence: 1 A quay, for the use of the coast guard, lies in the NE part
ENE of the light-buoy (E cardinal) (4 miles SW) of the inner harbour.
which marks the SE corner of the area of shoals
which extend SE from Jaz
’ir ila’. Thence: Port services
3 ENE of the detached shoal (3 miles WSW), with a
Supplies
least depth over it of 22 m, and thence:
9.90
To the pilot boarding position.
1 Fresh water available from the quay or by barge; fuel oil
Alternative approach not available.
9.82 Communications
1 An alternative approach from the W leads about 12 miles 9.91
ESE through a buoyed channel which leads through the 1 There is an airport at Tabuk 180 km distant.
off-lying reefs and shoals which lie W of the Port of ub

Caution. Further dangers may lie in this approach, and,
as such, this approach is not recommended.  UB BULK PLANT TERMINAL
9.83
General information
1 From a position about 1 miles S of Jaz
’ir ila
Light-beacon (27°39′N, 35°17′E) (9.19) the track leads ESE Chart 12
to the Port of ub
, passing (with positions given from Position
Jaz
’ir ila Light-beacon): 9.92
Clear of the shoal (2 miles SE), with a least depth 1 The ub
Bulk Plant (Tanker) Terminal (27°19′N,
over it of 4 m, which is marked on its SE side by a 35°44′E) is situated on the E side of the head of the Red
light-buoy (S cardinal), thence: Sea, about 78 miles ESE of the Strait of Tr
n (8.29).

249
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9

Description Pilotage
9.93 9.98
1 ub
Bulk Plant (Tanker) Terminal is situated about 1 Pilotage is compulsory.
2 miles ESE of the village of ub
and consists of a bulk The pilot boards in position 27°15′⋅7N, 35°42′⋅5E, as
tank farm served by a pier extending across the coastal reef shown on the chart, and remains on board throughout the
to a berthing facility comprising of a number of mooring time of the vessels stay.
buoys. Berthing and unberthing is undertaken during the hours
2 A further pier, attached to an unnamed facility, extends of daylight only.
part way across the coastal reef about 8 cables WNW of the For further information see Admiralty List of Radio
terminal. Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Mooring buoys are laid in a small, unnamed inlet in the
coastal reef situated about 4 cables ESE of the head of the Tugs
terminal pier. 9.99
1 A tug and a mooring boat are available.
Approach
9.94 Berth
1 From the S, the suggested approach to the pilot boarding
position is on a NE course, passing between the drying reef Chart 12 plan of ‹ubº Bulk Plant Terminal
extending NW from An Nu’m
n (27°06′N, 35°46′E) (9.21), 9.100
and the drying reefs which lie to the NW. 1 The berth lies at the outer end of a pier which extends
about 340 m from the shore across the coastal reef.
Limiting conditions Tankers make fast to a number of mooring buoys, whose
positions are best seen on the chart, and to two concrete
Maximum size of vessel handled piles, North Bollard and South Bollard, which stand on the
9.95 coastal reef approximately 200 m NW and SE of the pier.
1 The facility can handle vessels up to 10 000 dwt. Cargo is handled through two floating hoses which lie off
the S end of the pier; one is used for diesel the other for
Local weather premium gasoline.
9.96
1 See 9.75. Port services
Arrival information Supplies
9.101
Outer anchorage 1 Neither fresh water nor fuel are available.
9.97
1 The recommended anchorage position lies 5 miles NW of Communications
An Nu’m
n (27°06′N, 35°46′E) (9.21) in the vicinity of the 9.102
charted depth of 16⋅2 m. 1 See 9.91.

RA’S KHAR BAH TO RA’S MAST RAH

GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 159, 158
Route
9.103
1 The route described in this section initially leads SSE for
a distance of about 110 miles, from a position about 20 miles
SW of Ra’s Khar
bah (26°09′N, 36°29′E) (9.12), to a
position about 10 miles WSW of Shi‘b Shu’aybah (24°26′N,
37°11′E) (9.110).
The route then continues for a further 124 miles SE to a
position about 30 miles SW of Ra’s Mastrah (23°02′N,
38°48′E) (9.111).
Topography
9.104
1 Between Ra’s Kurkm
(25°51′N, 36°39′E) (9.113) and
Ra’s Ab Madd (68 miles SSE) a low, sandy point, the coast
is much indented and is fronted by low, sandy islets and
(23°33′N, 38°32′E) to
reefs which extend from 3 miles to 20 miles offshore. These
islets are studded with rocks and are connected by extensive
banks. Channels lie between these islets and reefs but they
are only suitable for use by boats, not by larger vessels.
2 From a position about 33 miles NE of Ra’s Ab Madd
(24°50′N, 37°09′E) a range of mountains, which stands
about 15 miles inland, extends 38 miles S. This range, which
varies in elevation from about 410 m to 650 m, is broken
into detached pyramidal peaks.
A second range of mountains extends SE from the same
area to the vicinity of Yanbu‘ al Bar (24°04′N, 38°04′E)
(9.158).
9.105
1 From Ra’s Ab Madd to Ra’s Mah
r (8 miles SSE)
(9.110) the land near the coast is low and sandy in some
places, but in others it is higher and rocky.
SE of Ra’s Mah
r the land gradually rises to an elevation
of between 30 m and 60 m and forms an extensive tableland;
the W side of this slope is intersected by numerous water
courses.
2 Between Ra’s Jarb 24°14′N, 37°45′E) and Yanbu‘ al
Bar (20 miles SE) the coast is low, sandy and fringed by a
reef; uncharted offshore dangers may well exist along this
stretch of the coast.
The coast from Ar Ra’s al Abya
Ra’s Mastrah (33 miles SE) is fringed by a reef.
Depths
9.106
1 Caution. The depths and features of the coastal waters
described in this section were either surveyed many years
ago, or else they are based on a general survey conducted

250
 Home Contents Index
during the 1980s. Navigational hazards may well exist in
these areas especially in shallow coral waters.
See the source data diagram on the relevant charts.
Principal marks
9.107
1 Landmark:
Jabal ub (23°38′N, 39°08′E) which rises to a height
of 1890 m, stands about 33 miles E of Ar Ra’s al
Abya
(9.105). The mountain is the highest point
on the coast, before the mass of the interior
mountains, between Yanbu‘ al Bar (9.158) and
Jeddah (9.342).
9.108
1 Major light:
Yanbu‘ South Light (white, round, metal tower, red
bands; racon) (23°28′⋅1N, 38°25′⋅5E) is exhibited
from the SE corner of a rocky bank situated on the
W side of the S approaches to Madnat Yanbu‘ A
in
‘yah (9.201).
Other aids to navigation
9.109
1 The coast between Ra’s Ab Madd (24°50′N, 37°09′E)
(9.104) and Sharm asy (16 miles SE) (9.151) is reported to
be radar conspicuous.
Directions
(continued from 9.12)
9.110
1 From a position SW of Ra’s Khar
bah (26°09′N,
36°29′E) (9.12) the track leads initially to a position about
10 miles WSW of Shi‘b Shu’aybah (24°26′N, 37°11′E),
passing:
WSW of Mash
bih (25°38′N, 36°31′E) (9.118) and the
coral reefs and shoal waters which extend about
16 miles SSE of the island, thence:
2 WSW of the isolated coral reef (25°20′N, 36°46′E)
which lies about 6 miles SW of Shayb
r
, a low
island composed of sand and coral and on which
many bushes grow. Reefs and numerous coral islets
lie between Mash
bih and Shayb
ra. The N end of
a large detached area of reefs, shoals and dangerous
rocks lies about 4 miles S of Shayb
ra and extends
about 14 miles SSE parallel to the coast, thence:
3 WSW of Shi‘b as Sufl
n (24°59′N, 36°57′E) which is
the outer-most reef of the three largest reefs of a
chain of reefs which extend between 3 miles and
9 miles W of Al as
n (9.121) These three reefs
are awash and the sea generally breaks over them.
Thence:
WSW of Shi‘b Ashayzeniyat (24°52′N, 37°00′E) a reef
over which the sea breaks when there is any wind,
thence:
4 WSW of Shi‘b M
’Mub
rak (24°46′N, 37°05′E) and
Ab Mat
r 1 miles SE) (9.145), two dangerous
reefs lying WNW of Ra’s Mah
r (24°42′N,
37°13′E). Ra’s Mah
r is about 24 m high and rocky
with its upper part considerably overhanging its
base; a small patch of rock extends off the point. A
short distance SE of Ra’s Mah
r stands a similar
bluff which rises to a height of about 50 m; another
unnamed, rocky, coral patch, awash, lies 3 miles
SW of the point, thence:
CHAPTER 9
5 WSW of the detached shoal area (24°38′N, 37°09′E)
which lies about 5 miles SW of Ra’s Mah
r, thence:
WSW of the detached drying coral reef (24°30′N,
37°07′E) marked by No 3 Light-beacon (black pile,
red band; isolated danger), thence:
6 WSW of Shi‘b Shu’aybah (24°26′N, 37°11′E), a
dangerous shoal, on which stand a number of
drying reefs, which extends from 14 miles to
20 miles S of Ra’s Mah
r. No 7 Light-beacon (N
cardinal) marks the NW end of this shoal; No 9
Light-beacon (E cardinal) marks its E extremity;
No 11 Light-beacon (black pile, red band; isolated
danger) marks a drying reef at the S end of Shi‘b
Shu’aybah. A stranded wreck (position approximate,
radar conspicuous) lies on the W edge of the shoal
about 3 miles SSW of No 7 Light-beacon.
9.111
1 The track then continues SE to a position about 30 miles
SW of Ra’s Mastrah (23°02′N, 38°48′E), passing:
SW of Shi‘b al Qursh (24°21N, 37°23′E) a
dangerous, detached reef, marked by No 13
Light-beacon (isolated danger) lying 4 miles WSW
of Ra’s al Lakk (9.147). A shoal area, with a least
depth over it of 30 m, lies close W of the reef.
Thence:
2 SW of Ra’s Bardi (24°16′N, 37°31′E) a low and
sandy point; a cement factory stands about 1 mile
ENE of the point, and a cement silo and two
chimneys stand about 2 miles E; both the factory
and the silo have been reported to be radar
conspicuous. An isolated shoal (position
approximate, reported 1967), with a least depth over
it of 29 m, lies about 6 miles WSW of the point; a
shoal area, with a least depth over it of 28 m, lies
about 2 miles N of the isolated shoal, thence:
3 SW of Shi‘b as Sab’ah (23°48′N, 37°56′E) which is a
group of steep-to reefs, over which the sea breaks,
which lie about 16 miles SSW of Yanbu‘ al Bar
(24°04′N, 38°04′E) (9.158). No 32 Light-beacon (N
cardinal) marks the N end of the group; No 34
Light-beacon (S cardinal) stands on the W part of
the reef; No 35 Light-beacon (N cardinal) stands on
the E part of the reef; and No 39 Light-beacon (E
cardinal) marks the S end of the reef, thence:
4 SW of Mansi (23°39′N, 38°02′E) a drying reef which
dries between 0⋅6 m and 0⋅9 m. The reef is steep-to
and is marked by No 41 Light-beacon (isolated
danger). Thence:
SW of Shi‘b as Sufl
n (23°31′N, 38°14′E) a drying,
steep-to reef which is marked by No 44
Light-beacon (S cardinal). The red sector (visible
090°−140°) of Yanbu‘ South Light (9.108) covers
the reef, thence:
5 SW of Yanbu‘ South Light (23°28′N, 38°26′E) (9.108)
which is exhibited from the SE corner of a rocky
bank lying on the W side of the S approaches to
Madnat Yanbu‘ A in
‘yah (9.201), thence:
SW of Shi‘b al Kharra (Kharrar Reefs) (22°58′N,
38°41′E) which consists of a number of dangerous
reefs situated on a bank; the S edge of these reefs
dry. A channel, between 1 miles and 2 miles
wide, separates the inner edge of the bank from the
coast. Thence:
6 SW of Ra’s Mastrah (23°02′N, 38°48′E) which rises
to a height of 20 m; the point is reported to give a
good radar return.
(Directions continue at 9.265)
251
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
Off-lying islands lying between Ra’s Kar bah
and Ra’s Ab Madd
Mard nah
9.112
1 Description. Mardnah (26°04′N, 36°29′E) is a coral
islet, situated about 5 miles S of Ra’s Khar
bah (9.12); the
islet consists of a coral ridge, in detached pointed masses,
rising to a height of about 60 m.
Ash Shaykh Mirb

9.113
1 Description. Ash Shaykh Mirb
 (25°53′N, 36°36′E) is a
low, coral islet situated about 3 miles W of Ra’s Kurkm

The islet is fringed by a reef; a conspicuous tomb stands on
the islet.
A rock, about 4 m high, lies close to the W end of the
islet; another rock, about 0⋅3 m high, lies about a further
7 cables WNW.
2 The approach to the islet is safe as the fringing reef and
the reef situated to the S are visible.
Ra’s Kurkm
is fringed by the coastal reef; within the
point, the land rises gradually to Jabal Kurkm
which has
an elevation of 122 m about 2 miles E of the point.
9.114
1 Caution. It is reported that strong currents can run within
the channels in the vicinity of the islet, and, even in good
light, the water is not always clear enough for good
observation of the bottom when navigating within the
adjacent channels.
9.115
1 Anchorage. A good anchorage may be obtained by small
vessels about 5 cables SE of Ash Shaykh Mirb
.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Hawar Island
9.116
1 Description. Hawar Island (25°48′N, 36°33′E) is a low
and sandy island situated about 8 miles SW of Ra’s
Kurkm
(9.113) on a reef extending about 6 miles NNE
from Umm Urmah (9.117).
Umm Ur mah
9.117
1 Description. Umm Urmah (25°45′N, 36°33′E) is a large
island situated about 1 mile S of Hawar Island (9.116).
The island is low, sandy and covered with bushes;
another unnamed island lies close SE.
Mash bih
9.118
1 Description. Mash
bih (25°38′N, 36°30′E) is a large
island, rising to heights of between 5 m and 6 m, situated
about 5 miles SSW of Umm Urmah (9.117).
The island is composed of coral. Its W coast is composed
of coral cliffs; the reef fringing the W side is steep-to and
there are no outlying dangers W of the island.
Two unnamed islets stand on the reef which extends
between Mash
bih and Umm Urmah.
Wugh d The islet, covered with sparse vegetation, is fringed by a
9.119
1 Description. Wugh
d 25°20′N, 36°58′E) is a low, coral
island situated about 4 miles SE of Shayb
r
(9.110).
Between Wugh
d and Al as
n (22 miles SSE) (9.121)
is a drying reef lying about 3 miles SW of
there are numerous rocky patches.
252
9.120
1 Anchorage. Good anchorage may be obtained on the
bank E of Wugh
d
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Al  as n
9.121
1 Description. Al as
n (24°58′N, 37°05′E) is an island
fringed by coral reefs. The sea around the island is very
clear, and, in certain lights, shoal patches, with depths of less
than 9 m over them, show up well; the bottom is generally
visible in depths of less than 18 m.
Two hills, both of which rise to heights of 150 m, stand
on the W side of the island. They fall away steeply on their
W sides, but, on their E sides, they slope away gradually to
a plain.
2 A patch of sand near the SE end of the island is
conspicuous. A gap in the coral reef fringing the E side of
the island enables a boat to effect a landing on a sandy
beach near a tomb situated about 4 cables from the SE
extremity of the island. The tomb, and a white house
standing about 2 cables N of the SE extremity of the island,
make good marks.
3 A reef lies N of the island; a further reef extends about
3 miles ENE from the NE side of the island. Malah is a
sandy cay, on which grows a little scrub, situated on the E
end of the reef extending from the NE side of the island.
Foul ground, with numerous coral heads and dangerous
rocks, extends NNE from the N side of the island; this foul
ground continues to the mainland shore; there does not
appear to be a channel through this area of foul ground.
4 A reef extends about 2 miles S of the SW extremity of Al
as
n; a remarkable sandspit extends along its centre at its
inner end; coral patches and rocks lie between the S
extremity of this reef and the SE extremity of the island.
9.122
1 Anchorage may be obtained, in fair holding ground,
5 cables from the E side of Al as
n, in depths of about
15 m, sand and coral, with the SE extremity of the island
bearing 227°, and a small, white house situated about
2 cables farther N bearing about 270°.
2 The only known anchorage W of Al as
n is in a depth
of 26 m, S of the NE end of the inner-most reef of the three
largest reefs of the chain of reefs, of which Shi‘b as Sufl
n
(9.110) is the outermost.
Caution. A good lookout is required when approaching
this anchorage for any detached rocks lying SE of the reef.
Lib nah
9.123
1 Description. Lib
nah (24°58′N, 37°03′E) is a islet, rising
to a height of 76 m, which lies about 6 cables W of Al
as
n (9.121). The islet is fringed by a reef except on its
NE side, which, on its S side, extends about 5 cables S.
Between Lib
nah and Al as
n there are a number of
dangerous rocks.
Umm Sihr
9.124
1 Description. Umm Sihr (24°56′N, 37°11′E) is an islet
situated about 3 miles E of the S end of Al as
n (9.121).
reef, except at its E extremity.
A rock, 1 m high, stands near the NW end of this
fringing reef.
Shi‘b Abaya
Umm Sihr on an area of foul ground. Foul ground, on
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
which there are a number of dangerous rocks, also lies
between the reef and the mainland shore, about 4 miles S.
Channels between
Ra’s Kurk m and Wugh d between about 2 cables E to 1 mile E, of Shi‘b al Guak;
Description
9.125
1 There are two navigable entrance channels to the area of
reefs and islets which lies between Ra’s Kurkm
(25°51′N,
36°39′E) (9.113) and Wugh
d (35 miles SSE) (9.119).
Current
9.126
1 An E-going current of between 1 kn and 1 kn has been
experienced at the N end of the inner channel about
2 miles W of Ra’s Kurkm
(25°51′N, 36°39′E).
Northern entrance
9.127
1 The N entrance channel to this area of reefs and islets lies
close S of Ash Shaykh Mirb
 (25°53′N, 36°36′E) (9.113); it
is approached from the W by a tortuous channel in which
the water is murky.
In 1976 a depth of 3⋅7 m was reported to lie about
2 miles SE of Ash Shaykh Mirb
.
Southern entrance
9.128
1 The S entrance channel (25°33′N, 36°40′E) to this area of
reefs and islets is situated between two islets which lie
between 10 and 13 miles NW of the N end of Shayb
r

(25°25′N, 36°52′E) (9.110).
The S entrance channel is approached from the SSE
through a channel encumbered with coral patches.
Inner channel
9.129
1 An inner channel, which is entered from N between Ash
Shaykh Mirb
 (25°53′N, 36°36′E) (9.113) and Ra’s
Kurkm
(25°51′N, 36°39′E) (9.113), leads S between the
reefs to Wugh
d (9.119).
From S, this channel is approached between Shayb
r

(25°25′N, 36°52′E) and Wugh
d through a gap among the
inner reefs which is used by local boats. This gap is too
narrow for use by larger vessels.
9.130
1 Anchorage. Good anchorage may be obtained within this
inner channel, though no vessel should pass through the
reefs except to take up a temporary anchorage.
Local knowledge is required for the use of the
anchorages within this inner channel.
Caution. The channels through the reefs are not suitable
for use by vessels of any size.
Approach to Al  as n and Umm Lajj
Description
9.131
1 Umm Lajj (25°02′N, 37°16′E) is a small village on the
mainland shore situated about 9 miles ENE of Al as
n
(9.121); a conspicuous white minaret stands within the
village.
Nipple Hill is a cone-shaped peak in the coastal range
rising to a height of 187 m which stands about 2 miles E
of Umm Lajj. This peak is the highest in the vicinity but it
is rather difficult to distinguish.
253
Off-lying dangers
9.132
1 Shi‘b al Guak (24°59′N, 37°13′E) is a drying reef
situated 4 miles SW of Umm Lajj; further reefs lie from
the sea sometimes breaks over these reefs but no reliance can
be placed on the reefs being visible.
A dangerous reef lies 1 mile SE of Shi‘b al Guak.
Current
9.133
1 It is reported that a constant current sets N and E between
Al as
n (24°58′N, 37°05′E) and Ra’s Ab Madd (8 miles
SSE).
Anchorages
9.134
1 The only safe anchorage for larger vessels is situated near
Umm Lajj on the bank on which Shi‘b al Guak stands. A
good berth, with fair holding ground, in depths from 13 to
18 m, sand and coral, is with the minaret at Umm Lajj
bearing 051°, distant 2 miles.
9.135
1 An indifferent anchorage may be obtained by small
vessels within the small bay on which the village of Umm
Lajj stands, in a position about 150 m off the coastal reef in
depths from 18 to 27 m; depths W of this anchorage increase
rapidly.
Local knowledge is required for the use of these
anchorages.
Directions
9.136
1 South-west approach. From the SW keep well outside
the offshore reefs until the summit of Al as
n (24°58′N,
37°05′E) (9.121) bears between 050° and 080°, then steer to
pass between Shi‘b as Sufl
n (24°59′N, 36°57′E) (9.110)
and Shi‘b Ashayzeniyat (8 miles SSE) (9.110).
2 Entrance channel. When Nipple Hill (25°02′N, 37°18′E)
(9.131) is in line with the N summit of Jabal Qanz
(25°11′N, 37°39′E), an inland peak which rises to a height
of 1110 m, bearing 062°, then steer for Nipple Hill on that
line of bearing. When the tomb on Al as
n bears 332°
alter course for the anchorage (9.122) off the E side of the
island.
3 Gateway Channel. If bound for Umm Lajj (9.131) then
steer NE until Nipple Hill is in line with the S summit of
Jabal Qanz bearing 062°, which line of bearing leads
through the fairway of Gateway Channel lying between
Malah (24°59′N, 37°08′E) (9.121) and Umm Sihr (3 miles
SE) (9.124).
4 Gateway Channel is narrow with a least depth on the
leading line of 11⋅9 m; dangerous shoals lie within 5 cables
on both sides of the track.
After clearing the channel proceed to the anchorage off
Umm Lajj (9.134).
9.137
1 Northern approach. A N entry channel to Umm Lajj is
situated about 11 miles NNE of Al as
n (24°58′N,
37°05′E) (9.121).
In 1976 a least depth of 5⋅5 m was reported to lie in this
channel.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
Inlets and bays situated between Ra’s
Kar bah and Ra’s Ab Madd
Marsá W di al Miy h
9.138
1 Description. Marsá W
d al Miy
h (26°06′N, 36°30′E)
(not charted by name) is situated about 1 miles SSE of
Ra’s Khar
bah (9.12) and may be identified from the N by a
bluff sloping towards the low-lying coast which is covered
with scrub, S of this bluff.
Another bluff lies farther S and is covered with black soil
or stones and is not so prominent.
9.139
1 Anchorage may be obtained in depths from 31 m to
37 m off the entrance to Marsá W
d al Miy
h.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Sharm  abb n
9.140
1 Description. Sharm abb
n (26°04′N, 36°34′E) is a
narrow inlet, whose shores are fringed by reefs, situated
about 6 miles SE of Ra’s Khar
bah (9.12).
Two projections off fringing reefs of the inlet extend
1
cables and 1 cable, respectively, from the SE side of the
inlet; a detached reef, visible in good light, lies near the
centre of the entrance. The positions of the reef and the two
projections are indicated by discoloured water.
2 The coast between Sharm abb
n and Ra’s Kurkm

(13 miles SSE) (9.113) is low and sandy with low coral
cliffs, in places.
9.141
1 Entry. Pass NW of the detached reef which lies in the
entrance to the inlet, taking care to clear a projection
extending from the fringing reef which lies off the S
entrance point.
9.142
1 Anchorage. Small vessels may obtain a good landlocked
anchorage in depths from 7 to 9 m, sand and mud, within
Sharm abb
n, passing NW of the detached reef lying in the
entrance to the inlet.
Sharm Munaybirah
9.143
1 Description. Sharm Munaybirah (26°03′N, 36°37′E) is
entered about 2 miles E of Sharm abb
n (9.140); an
above-water rock lies within the inlet.
Another inlet, which lies between Sharm abb
n and
Sharm Munaybirah, also has an above-water rock lying
within.
9.144
1 Anchorage may be obtained in depths from 22 to 55 m,
sheltered from NW winds, near the coast in the vicinity of
Sharm Munaybirah.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Off-lying dangers between Ra’s
Ab Madd and Yanbu‘
Ab Mat r
9.145
1 Description. Ab Mat
r (24°43′N, 37°09′E) is a
dangerous reef, situated close SE of Shi‘b M
’Mub
rak
(9.110), which extends about 4 miles SE.
A shoal area, through which it is dangerous to navigate,
lies about 1 mile N of Shi‘b M
’Mub
rak; a dangerous rock
lies at its NE end. Though this dangerous area is steep-to,
254
the sea does not break, even in a moderate swell; this area of
shoal water is only visible from a short distance off.
2 An unnamed area of reefs and dangerous rocks lies about
3 miles S of Ab Mat
r
9.146
1 Anchorage may be obtained between Shi‘b M
’Mub
rak
and Ab Mat
r; small vessels may also obtain anchorage off
the NE and SE sides of Ab Mat
r.
Local knowledge is required for the use of these
anchorages.
Offshore dangers between
Ra’s Mah r and Ra’s al Lakk
9.147
1 Description. An unnamed coastal bank lies close offshore
from a position about 7 miles SE of Ra’s Mah
r (24°42′N,
37°13′E) (9.110) to Ra’s al Lakk (22 miles SSE); No 12
Light-beacon (W cardinal) (24°24′N, 37°23′E) marks the W
edge of the S part of this bank.
Light-beacons numbered 4, 5, 6 and 8, mark various
dangers within the coastal bank.
2 No 2 Light-beacon (S cardinal) (24°31′N, 37°18′E) marks
a detached reef close off the W side of the N part of the
coastal bank.
No 13 Light-beacon (9.111) marks a detached reef lying
close off the SW corner of the coastal bank.
9.148
1 Anchorage. Indifferent anchorage for small vessels may
be obtained on the coastal bank.
There is good anchorage for small vessels on the E side
of the large reef near the N end of the coastal bank.
Local knowledge is required for the use of anchorages on
this coastal bank.
Inlets and bays situated between
Ra’s Ab Madd and Yanbu‘
Sharm Mah r
9.149
1 Description. Sharm Mah
r (24°40′N, 37°18′E) is a small
inlet entered about 3 miles ESE of Ra’s Mah
r (9.110).
2 Moderately high tablelands closely approach the coast in
the vicinity of Sharm Mah
r; a deep valley in these
tablelands forms a remarkable gap which marks the inlet.
The valley is extensive and spreads out over a considerable
width as it penetrates the interior; its lower part is covered
with bushes and along the valley, about 1 mile inland, there
are a few palm trees. The valley appears like the dry bed of
a river; the upper part of the hills on either side considerably
overhang the valley and many large fragments of them lie
scattered within it.
9.150
1 Anchorage. Small vessels may obtain anchorage within
the inlet, which is sheltered from NW winds, in depths of
about 13 m, sand.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Indifferent shelter from strong S breezes is sometimes
obtained by local craft in the lee of a small patch of rock
which extends off Ra’s Mah
r. Winds often shift suddenly N,
so this shelter is only used in an emergency.
Sharm  asy
9.151
1 Description. Sharm asy (24°38′N, 37°20′E) is entered
8 miles SSE of Ra’s Mah
r (9.110); the inlet is fringed by
reefs which, on their E side, extend up to 3 cables offshore.
The N half of the inlet is shallow and encumbered with
reefs.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
9.152
1 Anchorage in the outer part of Sharm asy is not
recommended as the channel is contracted and the bottom
foul, but there is good anchorage for small vessels in the
inner part of the inlet although the N half of the inlet is
shallow.
Charts 158, 327
Sharm al Khawr
9.153
1 Description. Sharm al Khawr (24°16′N, 37°40′E) is
entered about 10 miles E of Ra’s Bardi (9.111) and W of
Ra’s Jarb which forms the E entrance point to the bay; the
bay is encumbered with dangers.
2 No 20 Light-beacon (red pile) (24°14′⋅2N, 37°39′⋅0E)
stands on the SE part of the reef extending from the W
entrance point to Sharm al Khawr; No 21 Light-beacon (N
cardinal) (24°13′⋅8N, 37°39′⋅3E) stands about 5 cables farther
SE; further light-beacons mark the passage into the bay.
3 A bank, on which there are numerous dangers, extends
about 13 miles SE from the W entrance point to the bay.
No 23 Light-beacon (S cardinal) (24°11′⋅3N, 37°39′⋅7E)
marks the S side of a reef situated near the central part of
this dangerous bank; No 26 Light-beacon (E cardinal)
(24°08′⋅5N, 37°43′⋅6E) stands in the centre of a reef situated
towards the SW end of this bank. A detached shoal, with a
least depth over it of 7 m, lies about 1
miles SW of No 23
Light-beacon. East Reef Light-buoy (E cardinal) (24°05′⋅6N,
37°47′⋅2E) (9.193) marks the SE end of this bank.
4 Caution. Mariners are warned that in the waters covered
by this paragraph, navigational hazards may exist that were
not located during survey work.
See the source data diagram on the chart.
9.154
1 Local topography. Between Ra’s al Lakk (24°24′N,
37°24′E) and the W entrance point to Sharm al Khawr
YANBU‘ AL BA R
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 158, 326, 327
Position
9.158
1 Yanbu‘ al Bar (24°04′N, 38°04′E) is situated on the E
side of the N central part of the Red Sea, about 12 miles
NW of Mn
’ al Malik Fahd (King Fahd Port) (23°57′N,
38°13′E) (9.201).
Function
9.159
1 Yanbu‘ al Bar is the second largest port on the W coast
of Saudi Arabia.
In 1992 the population of Yanbu‘ al Bar was
approximately 40 000.
Trade. The principal imports are grain and cement.
Description
9.160
1 Yanbu‘ al Bar, often referred to as just Yanbu‘, is the
port of the holy city of Al Madnah and has rapidly grown
in importance.
Yanbu‘ is a natural harbour sheltered by the mainland to
the N and E, and by coral reefs to the S and SE; it is
approached through a channel about 1 mile long.
255
(14 miles SE), the coast is composed of steep coral cliffs
except for that part of the coast in the vicinity of Ra’s Bardi
(9.111).
Caution. It has been reported on a number of occasions
that the coastline between Ra’s al Lakk and Ra’s Bardi is
not radar conspicuous and that it does not show up until
within about 20 miles of the shore.
2 Care should be exercised not to confuse the higher
ground, which lies about 10 miles inland and can be detected
on radar at ranges in excess of 35 miles, with that of the true
coastline.
9.155
1 Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels W of the
reef fringing Ra’s Jarb and S of the islets extending from
the W side of the bay.
Local knowledge. Any attempt to enter or to anchor
within Sharm al Khawr without previous examination, or
without local knowledge, would be dangerous.
Sharm Yanbu‘
9.156
1 Description. Sharm Yanbu‘ (24°10′N, 37°57′E) is entered
about 11 miles SE of Ra’s Jarb (9.153) through a gap in
the coastal reef.
No 27 Light-beacon (red pile) (24°08′⋅5N, 37°55′⋅5E)
marks the outer end of the W side of the entrance to the
inlet; No 28 Light-beacon (green pile) (24°08′⋅4N,
37°55′⋅8E) marks the outer end of the E side.
2 In 1976 a depth of 12⋅8 m was reported to lie in the
entrance to Sharm Yanbu‘; depths of 12⋅8 and 18⋅3 m were
reported within the inlet.
9.157
1 Anchorage. Small vessels may obtain good anchorage
within the inlet in depths from 12 to 15 m, hard sand.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
2 The town stands on the N side of the port on low, sandy
land, destitute of vegetation and fringed, in places, by a coral
reef.
The older houses within the town are of a rough
construction of limestone and coral.
Port limits
9.161
1 The port limits for Mn
’ al Malik Fahd (9.205) cover the
approaches to Yanbu‘ al Bar, as shown on the chart.
The port of Yanbu‘ al Bar lies immediately outside the
N limit of the port limits of Mn
’ al Malik Fahd.
Approaches
9.162
1 Yanbu‘ is approached through one of two designated
approach channels, as shown on the charts. These channels
are about 3 miles wide and lead either 42 miles NNE, or
47 miles E, from the central part of the Red Sea.
The use of these channels, which were surveyed in 1981,
is obligatory. All vessels who should keep within the
channel limits, which are shown on the charts.
Caution. Those areas outside the limits shown on the
chart are largely unsurveyed. See the individual chart source
data diagrams.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
Traffic
9.163
1 In 2003 the port of Yanbu‘ was visited by a total of 433
vessels.
Port Authority
9.164
1 The harbour is administered by the Seaports Authority of
Saudi Arabia (SEAPA), Yanbu‘ Port Management, PO Box
30325, Madnat Yanbu‘ Al in
‘yah, Yanbu‘, Saudi Arabia.
Off-lying dangers
9.165
1 Shi‘b al-Qirn (23°53′N, 38°04′E) is a reef lying about
9 miles SE of Shi‘b al-Qariyyah (9.193) on an area of shoal
water on the SW side of the dangerous off-lying bank which
extends NW from Yanbu‘ South Light (23°28′N, 38°26′E)
(9.108). There are many other rocky patches situated on this
off-lying bank; further uncharted dangers may well exist.
No 33 Light-beacon (E cardinal; black pile, yellow band)
(23°52′⋅5N, 38°04′⋅6E) is exhibited from the ESE end of
Shi‘b al-Qirn.
2 No 31 Light-beacon (N cardinal; yellow pile, black top)
(23°54′⋅8N, 38°01′⋅8E) is exhibited from an unnamed reef
which lies near the NW end of Shi‘b al-Qirn.
No 30 Light-beacon (isolated danger; black pile, red band)
(23°57′⋅2N, 37°57′⋅6E) is exhibited from an unnamed,
isolated coral patch which lies on the off-lying bank about
3 miles S of Shi‘b al-Qariyyah.
9.166
1 A reef, marked on its W side by No 36 Light-beacon (W
cardinal) (23°50′⋅4N, 38°08′⋅1E) lies on the SW side of the
off-lying bank.
A shoal, with a least depth over it of 15⋅6 m, lies about
1 miles W of No 36 Light-beacon.
9.167
1 No 42 Light-beacon (W cardinal; yellow pile, black band)
(23°39′N, 38°18′E) is exhibited from close NW of an
unnamed coral patch situated on the W side of the off-lying
bank, about 13 miles NNW of Yanbu‘ South Light (9.108).
No 43 Light-beacon (W cardinal; yellow pile, black band)
(23°31′N, 38°21′E) is exhibited from the W corner of an
unnamed reef situated on the W side of the off-lying bank,
about 5 miles NW of Yanbu‘ South Light.
Limiting conditions
Controlling depth
9.168
1 Both the entrance channel to the inner basin, and the
main harbour area are dredged to 12⋅0 m (1979).
Deepest and longest berths
9.169
1 Berths Nos 5 to 9 have depths alongside of 12⋅0 m;
Berths Nos 5 to 7 have a combined total length of about
800 m.
Tidal levels
9.170
1 See information in Admiralty Tide Tables, Volume 3. Mean
spring range about 0⋅3 m.
Abnormal levels
9.171
1 Though the tidal range at Yanbu‘ is small, fluctuations
caused by gales can result in a fall of mean sea level of up
to 0⋅6 m during the period of bad weather, followed by a
256
significant increase in the mean sea level after the gale has
passed or as it moderates.
Density
9.172
1 1⋅025 g/cm3.
Local weather
9.173
1 A diurnal sea breeze/land breeze cycle occurs most days
throughout the year with wind speeds of 10 kn and above
blowing from the NW during the late afternoon.
Gales occur as frequently as every 5 to 10 days and can
sometimes last as long as 2 weeks.
2 Although there is little drop in barometric pressure, and
very rarely any precipitation during these gales, wind speeds
of up to 30 kn may blow from the N or NW.
The incidence of fog is rare but, should it occur, it is
most likely during the period from November to April.
3 During the summer months between May and September
the incidence of poor visibility (less than 5 miles) can be
quite high, due to mist and haze or dust particles held in
suspension in the atmosphere. Dust storms may occur
throughout the year obscuring the coastline.
Currents
9.174
1 Currents in this vicinity are influenced by the local wind
conditions, the tide, and the general circulatory pattern of
currents within the Red Sea.
Within the port, currents of less than  kn have been
observed running parallel to the coast.
Anchorage
9.175
1 Due to the considerable depths, strong NW winds and the
heavy swell experienced, safe anchorage cannot be obtained
off Yanbu‘. For anchorage berths off Mn
’ al Malik Fahd
(23°57′N, 38°13′E) see 9.235.
Caution. Any vessel which obtains temporary anchorage
off Yanbu‘ should keep its main engines at short notice.
Arrival information
Saudi Ship Reporting System
9.176
1 The Saudi Ship Reporting System (SSRS) is a voluntary
service for vessels in the Red Sea. Reports should be sent to
Jeddah (HZH) addressed to Saudi Ship Reporting System
(SSRS) Jeddah.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 1.
Vessel Traffic Service and Reporting System
9.177
1 A Vessel Traffic Service and Reporting System operates
for the ports of Yanbu‘ al Bar and Mn
’ al Malik Fahd
(King Fahd Port) (9.201).
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Port radio
9.178
1 Yanbu‘ Commercial Port Control radio station controls the
operations of the port and will liaise with terminal operators
and emergency services; vessels should contact Yanbu‘ Port
Control 2 hours before arrival.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
Notice of ETA
9.179
1 Vessels should notify their ETA at the outer pilot
boarding position 10 days, 48 hours, and 24 hours in advance
of their arrival.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Pilotage
9.180
1 Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 300 grt using the
N entrance, and for all vessels using the S entrance.
Pilotage is available 24 hours a day.
The area in which pilotage is compulsory lies from N of
Yanbu‘ to S of Mn
’ al Malik Fahd (9.201). The N limit is
an imaginary line drawn from Shi‘b ash-Sharm Light
(24°03′⋅3N, 37°51′⋅5E) 065° to the coast; the S limit is an
imaginary line drawn from S10 Light-buoy (23°49′⋅1N,
38°17′⋅8E) 044° to the coast.
2 For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
9.181
1 Northern entrance. Vessels approaching Yanbu‘ through
one of the two designated approach channels (9.162), which
lead to the Outer North Entrance pilot boarding position
(24°02′N, 37°44′E), should advise Mn
’ al Malik Fahd Port
Control (9.177) of their ETA at the station.
2 The pilot will usually board in the vicinity of the Inner
North Entrance pilot boarding position (24°05′N, 37°55′E),
but vessels should wait at the outer pilot boarding position
for instructions before proceeding to the inner pilot station.
The actual position of boarding will be at the discretion of
the pilot.
9.182
1 Southern entrance. Vessels approaching Yanbu‘ or Mn
’
al Malik Fahd (9.201) from the S should advise Mn
’ al
Malik Fahd Port Control of their ETA at the Outer South
Entrance pilot boarding position (23°26′⋅6N, 38°27′⋅2E).
2 The pilot will usually board in the vicinity of the Inner
South Entrance pilot boarding position (23°50′N, 38°19′E),
but vessels should wait at the outer pilot boarding position
for instructions before proceeding to the inner pilot station.
The actual position of boarding will be at the discretion of
the pilot.
3 It has been reported that vessels using the S entrance to
Yanbu‘ and Mn
’ al Malik Fahd should have a boat rope
rigged for use by the pilot boat.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Tugs
9.183
1 Tugs are available and will usually meet an incoming
vessel at the NE end of the entrance channel, off No 8
Light-buoy (24°04′⋅4N, 38°03′⋅5E).
Local direction of buoyage
9.184
1 The local direction of buoyage is from N to S.
This direction reverses in the vicinity of the CZS
reporting position (23°52′N, 38°16′E) which lies at the N
end of the S part of the Approaches to Yanbu‘ TSS (9.192).
Regulations concerning entry
9.185
1 Vessels not cleared to enter either Yanbu‘, or Mn
’ al
Malik Fahd (9.201), must remain outside the territorial
waters of Saudi Arabia.
257
The Ports Authority of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
advise that ships proceeding outside the approach channels,
or contravening the rules of the Approaches to Yanbu‘ TSS
in order to save time, will be fined and their Masters held
individually responsible.
Harbour
Chart 327 plan of Yanbu‘ Al BaÖr
General layout
9.186
1 The port of Yanbu‘ Al Bar is entered N of Umm
Nukth (24°01′⋅4N, 38°02′⋅3E) (9.194) through a channel
dredged to 12 m which leads to a turning area and the
harbour basin.
The main commercial quays all lie on the N side of this
inner basin.
The SW side of the dredged inner basin of the harbour is
marked by No 9 and No 11 Light-buoys (conical); No 13
Light-buoy (spar) marks the corner of an indentation in the
limits of the dredged area on the E side of the harbour.
Natural conditions
9.187
1 In the early morning, mist may obscure the hinterland of
the port.
After about 0900, the sun is sufficiently high for the
surrounding reefs to be easily seen.
Principal marks
9.188
1 Landmarks:
A water tower (24°04′⋅7N, 38°03′⋅6E) which stands
near the Harbour Master’s office (white building)
close W of No 1 Berth is conspicuous.
Two cement silos (24°04′⋅9N, 38°04′⋅0E) which stand
N of the main berthing area are conspicuous; a
water tower (3 cables NE) is also conspicuous.
Directions
(Directions for the central part of the
Red Sea are given at 4.14)
Outer approaches
9.189
1 Southern Approach Channel. From a position in the
central part of the Red Sea, in the vicinity of 23°20′N,
37°28′E, the southern approach leads NNE for about
42 miles to the Outer North Entrance pilot boarding position
(9.181) at the N end of the Approaches to Yanbu‘ TSS
(9.192) as shown on the chart.
2 In 1983 a shoal, with a least depth over it of 52 m, was
reported to lie near the W edge of the Southern Approach
Channel, about 18 miles SW of Shi‘b ash-Sharm (Schermo
Reef) Light (24°03′N, 37°52′E) (9.193).
See also 9.162.
9.190
1 Northern approach channel. From a position in the
central part of the Red Sea, in the vicinity of 24°03′N,
36°52′E, the northern approach leads E for about 47 miles to
the Outer North Entrance pilot boarding position (9.181) at
the N end of the Approaches to Yanbu‘ TSS (9.192), as
shown on the chart.
See also 9.162.
Caution
9.191
1 When making an approach to Yanbu‘ care should be
taken not to mistake the lights of the cement works and silo
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
situated about 2 miles E of Ra’s Bardi (24°16′N, 37°31′E)
(9.111) for those of the town of Yanbu‘.
Traffic separation scheme
9.192
1 The Approaches to Yanbu‘ TSS, which is not IMO
adopted, leads generally E for about 20 miles from a position
6 miles W of Shi‘b ash-Sharm Light (24°03′N, 37°52′E)
(9.193) to Yanbu‘.
The scheme then continues SE for a further 7 miles to
the N part of the approaches to Mn
’ al Malik Fahd.
2 The S part of this TSS leads generally N for about
33 miles from a position about 5 miles S of Yanbu‘ South
Light (23°28′⋅1N, 38°25′⋅5E) (9.108) to the S part of the
approaches to Mn
’ al Malik Fahd (9.201).
Chart 327
Inner approaches
9.193
1 From the Outer North Entrance the inner approaches lead,
initially NE, through the TSS, passing, (with positions given
from Shi‘b ash-Sharm Light (24°03′N, 37°52′E)):
SE of West Reef Light-buoy (S cardinal) (6 miles
WNW) which marks the S side of the bank which
extends 13 miles SE from the W entrance point to
Sharm al Khawr (9.153), thence:
2 SE of East Reef Light-buoy (E cardinal) (4 miles
WNW) which marks the SE corner of the bank
extending SE from the W entrance point to Sharm
Khawr, and NW of the detached shoal (2 miles
SSW), with a least depth over it of 15⋅3 m, which
lies off the SW side of Shi‘b ash-Sharm, thence:
3 NW of Shi‘b ash-Sharm Light (mast on concrete
block; racon) which is exhibited from Shi‘b
ash-Sharm, an extensive bank on which lie three
drying reefs. A radio mast stands close NW of the
light. Thence:
N of Shi‘b ash-Sharm Light-buoy (Schermo Reef
Light-buoy) (N cardinal) (1 mile NNW) which
marks the N end of Shi‘b ash-Sharm; a wreck, with
a least depth over it of 10 m, lies close S of the
light-buoy, thence:
4 SW of the entrance to Sharm Yanbu‘ (6 miles NE)
(9.156), thence:
NE of No 29 Light-beacon (S cardinal) (3 miles SSE)
which marks the S end of a reef which lies at the
SSE end of the bank that extends SSE from Shi‘b
ash-Sharm. Thence:
5 NE of Shi‘b al-Qariyyah No 1Q Light-buoy (N
cardinal) (6 miles ESE) which marks the NW
corner of Shi‘b al-Qariyyah, a drying reef which
lies near the NW end of the off-lying bank, which
extends about 42 miles NW from Yanbu‘ South
Light (23°28′N, 38°26′E) (9.108), thence:
NE of Shi‘b al-Qariyyah No 3Q Light-buoy (starboard
hand) (7 miles ESE) moored on the NE side of
Shi‘b al-Qariyyah, thence:
(Directions continue for Yanbu‘ at 9.194 and for
MØnº’ al Malik Fahd at 9.195)
9.194
1 A designated crossing lane leads from the SE bound lane
of the Approaches to Yanbu‘ TSS from the vicinity of
No 3Q Light-buoy (24°01′N, 37°59′E), about 3 miles NE
across the NW bound lane and into the short approach lane
which leads to the outer end of the entrance channel for
Yanbu‘, passing (with positions given from Umm Nukth
Light-beacon (24°01′⋅4N, 38°02′⋅3E)):
258
2 NW of Umm Nukth Light-beacon (black beacon, red
band; isolated danger) which is exhibited from the
middle part of Umm Nukth, a drying reef. Umm
Nukth No 2Q Light-buoy (S cardinal) is moored
near the SE end of the shoal which extends SE
from Umm Nukth. Thence:
3 NW of Umm Nukth No 1 Light-buoy (8 cables N) (N
cardinal) moored on the N side of Umm Nukth,
thence:
4 Across the NE bound lane of the TSS and into the
short approach spur of the Approaches to Yanbu‘
TSS (9.192) which leads to the outer end of Yanbu‘
Harbour entrance channel.
(Directions continue for Yanbu‘ at 9.196
and for MØnº’ al Malik Fahd at 9.195)
Yanbu‘ al Bar to M n ’ al Malik Fahd
9.195
1 From the vicinity of No 3Q Light-buoy (24°01′N,
37°59′E) the track from Yanbu‘ to Mn
’ al Malik Fahd
(9.201) leads SE for about 12 miles through the S part of the
Approaches to Yanbu‘ TSS (9.192) to a position in the
approaches to the commercial port and container terminal,
passing, (with positions given from Umm Nukth
Light-beacon (24°01′⋅4N, 38°02′⋅3E)):
2 NNE of the shoal area (2 miles SW), with a least depth
over it of 10⋅1 m, which lies at the N end of the
off-lying bank which extends NW from Yanbu‘
South Light (23°28′N, 38°26′E) (9.108), thence:
3 SSW of Umm Nukth No 2Q Light-buoy (S cardinal)
(5 cables SSE) which is moored near the SE end of
the shoal on which stands Umm Nukth (9.194),
thence:
4 NE of No 3 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (3 miles
SE) which is moored at the N end of a shoal area,
with a least depth over it of 15 m. Note the shoal
area, with a least depth over it of 33 m, which lies
about 9 cables NNW of the light-buoy, in the
middle of the fairway of the ESE bound lane of the
TSS. Thence:
5 SW of No 4 Light-buoy (port hand) (4 miles ESE)
which is moored at the NW end of a shoal area,
with a least depth over it of 12 m, thence:
SW of No 6 Light-buoy (port hand) (5 miles SE)
which is moored on the SW side of the shoal area,
with a least depth over it of 12 m, thence:
6 NE of No 5 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (6 miles
SE) which is moored at the NW end of an area of
shoals situated at the SW end of the TSS; a least
depth of 16 m lies close SE of the light-buoy.
Thence:
7 S of No 8 Light-buoy (port hand) (6
miles SE)
which is moored at the SE end of a shoal area with
a least depth over it of 33 m, and thence to the
outer end of the entrance channel which leads to the
commercial port and container terminal of Mn
’ al
Malik Fahd (9.201).
(Directions for entry into
MØnº’ al Malik Fahd commercial port and
container terminal are given at 9.232)
Chart 327 plan of Yanbu‘ Al BaÖr
Entrance channel to Yanbu‘ al Bar
9.196
1 From a position in the short approach spur of the
Approaches to Yanbu‘ TSS (9.192), the track leads through
the spur and into the entrance channel for Yanbu‘ al Bar
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
Port, passing, (with positions given from No 6 Light-beacon
(24°04′⋅3N, 38°03′⋅3E)):
2 NW of No 1A Light-buoy (7 cables SW) (starboard
hand) which is moored off the W corner of a
detached reef which lies W of the coastal reef which
fronts the port; dangerous rocks lie between this
detached reef and the coastal reef. Thence:
3 SE of No 2 Light-beacon (6 cables SW) marking the
SE edge of the coastal reef on the NW side of the
entrance. A radio mast stands on the outer end of a
short peninsula about 250 m NNE of the beacon,
thence:
NW of No 1 Light-beacon (5 m high) (4 cables SW)
and No 3 Light-buoy (starboard hand) close NNE,
thence:
4 SE of No 4 Light-buoy (3 cables SW) (port hand).
Thence:
SE of No 6 Light-beacon exhibited from the SE side
of a small island situated on the NW side of the
entrance channel, thence:
5 NW of No 5 Light-buoy (1 cables SE) (starboard
hand), thence:
SE of No 8 Light-buoy (2 cables ENE) (port hand).
Thence:
NW of No 7 Light-buoy (4 cables ENE) (starboard
hand) and then into the basin which forms the port
of Yanbu‘.
Berths
Alongside berths
9.197
1 The N side of the harbour provides a total length of
MN ’ AL MALIK FAHD
Charts 158, 326, 328
GENERAL INFORMATION
Position
9.201
1 Mn
’ al Malik Fahd (King Fahd Port) (23°57′N,
38°13′E) is situated at Madnat Yanbu‘ A in
‘yah on the
E side of the N central part of the Red Sea, about 12 miles
SE of Yanbu‘.
Function
9.202
1 Mn
’ al Malik Fahd is a major oil and general cargo port
linked to the 1200 km long pipeline which carries crude oil
from the E province of Saudi Arabia.
The port, which was officially opened in 1982, includes
an oil refinery, a natural gas fractioning plant, a
petrochemical complex, an industrial facility and numerous
other manufacturing and light industries.
Description
9.203
1 Mn
’ al Malik Fahd comprises seven separate terminals.
Topography
9.204
1 The coast between Yanbu‘ al Bar (24°04′N, 38°04′E)
and Ar-Ra’s al Abay
(42 miles SE) (9.227) is fringed by a Traffic
reef; the land is lower than farther N, marshy, and thickly
covered with mangroves.
259
about 1900 m of berthing space, with berths numbered from
No 1 to No 9. Nos 5 − 9 include Ro-Ro facilities.
Port services
Facilities
9.198
1 Hospital; mechanical lift dock 3396 tonnes; minor repairs
can be undertaken; a number of 300-tonne self-propelled
barges and a number of 200-tonne lighters available; floating
crane 200 tonnes capacity; mobile cranes up to 90 tonnes
lifting capacity plus one of 200 tonnes capacity; cement
unloader and storage silos.
Supplies
9.199
1 Fresh water; bunker fuel available by barge or road
tanker; fresh and frozen provisions.
Communications
9.200
1 Airport N of the town which has connecting flights with
other parts of Saudi Arabia; international flights are made via
Jeddah (9.342) or Riyadh.
There is regular communication by sea with other Red
Sea ports.
2 Inland the country appears to consist of fine, light sand,
which has filled the valleys and then blown up the SW sides
of the numerous hills which rise to sharp conical peaks.
Though several of these hills are between 150 m and 300 m
high, the sand reaches the summit of the highest, but, in
many cases, leaves the upper parts of the black peaks
discernible.
Port limits
9.205
1 The seaward limits of Mn
’ al Malik Fahd, which
include the approaches to Yanbu‘, are shown on the charts.
Approach from north
9.206
1 Mn
’ Malik Fahd may be approached from the N passing
through either the Northern or Southern Outer Approach
Channels, then through the northern part of the Approaches
to Yanbu‘ TSS.
See 9.189 and 9.193.
Approach from south
9.207
1 Mn
’ al Malik Fahd may also be approached from the S
passing through the S part of the Approaches to Yanbu‘ TSS
which is entered S of Yanbu‘ South Light (23°28′⋅1N,
38°25′⋅5E) (9.108).
9.208
1 See 9.163.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9

Port Authority Notice of ETA

9.209
1 The harbour is administered by Seaports Authority of
Saudi Arabia (SEAPA), King Fahd Industrial Port, PO Box
30325, Madnat Yanbu‘ Al in
yah, Saudi Arabia.
Limiting conditions
Controlling depths
9.210
1 Main port area. That part of the entrance channel, which
leads SW of the General Cargo and Container Terminal
towards the Port Control Tower, is dredged to 14⋅0 m.
Bulk Terminal. That area of the port, from that part of
the outer approaches NW of the Crude Terminal to the Bulk
Terminal, is dredged to 15⋅5 m.
Export Refinery Terminal. The inner basin of the
Export Refinery Terminal is dredged to 13⋅5 m (1984).
2 The channel between the outer berths of the Export
Refinery Terminal and the Crude Oil Terminal is dredged to
18⋅5 m (1984).
Crude Oil Terminal can handle vessels up to a
maximum draught of 28⋅9 m.
NGL Terminal can handle vessels up to a maximum
draught of 16⋅2 m.
3 Yanbu‘ Petromin Refinery Terminal. The inner berths
and turning basin have been dredged to 11⋅5 m (1984).
The outer berths have been dredged to 16⋅0 m (1984).
9.219
1 Vessels should notify their ETA at the pilot boarding
position 5 days, 72 hours, 48 hours, and 24 hours in advance
of their arrival. Any subsequent change of more than 2 hours
should be notified.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Pilotage
9.220
1 Pilotage is provided by Yanbu‘ al Bar; see 9.180.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Tugs
9.221
1 Tugs and mooring boats are available.
Tugs are allocated by the Harbour Master and meet
incoming vessels in the vicinity of No 14 Light-buoy
(23°54′⋅9N, 38°12′⋅9E) (9.230).
Regulations concerning entry
9.222
1 Pilots boarding in-bound vessels will present the Master
with a letter of instructions and conditions for the use of all
berths within the port. The letter will need to be signed and
acknowledged before the vessel is allowed to enter.

Deepest and longest berth Harbour

9.211
1 See 9.243. General layout
9.223
Tidal levels 1 A line of shoals, which front the controlled area off Mn
’
9.212 al Malik Fahd, lies parallel to, and about 2 miles from, the
1 See information in Admiralty Tide Tables, Volume 3. Mean shore. A deep channel, about 1 miles wide, lies between
spring range about 0⋅3 m. these shoals and the shoals which lie closer inshore off the
main port area.
Maximum size of vessel handled The Commercial Port and Container Terminal (9.239) lie
9.213 in the NW part of the main port area and are approached
1 The Crude Oil Terminal Berth No 62 can handle tankers through a channel which leads through the off-lying shoals
up to 500 000 dwt. and reefs.
2 The Bulk Terminal (9.241), the Export Refinery Terminal
Local weather (9.242), and the Crude Oil Terminal (9.243) are all situated
9.214 in the SE part of the main port area.
1 See 9.173. The NGL Terminal (9.244) and the Yanbu‘ Petromin
Refinery Terminal (9.245) both extend SSW from the coast
Currents ESE of the main port area.
9.215
1 See 9.174. Local regulations
9.224
Arrival information 1 Vessels are normally on 10 minutes notice to depart their
berths.
Saudi Ship Reporting System Special permission is required to undertake repairs.
9.216
1 See 9.176. Principal marks
9.225
Vessel Traffic Service and Reporting System 1 Landmarks:
9.217 The Port Control Tower (23°57′⋅2N, 38°13′⋅0E) is a
1 See 9.177. prominent tower standing on the SE side of the
entrance to the Service Harbour (9.240).
Port radio A prominent radio mast (24°00′⋅7N, 38°13′⋅1E) (60 m
9.218 high) stands about 3 miles N of the Port Control
1 King Fahd Port Control radio station controls the Tower.
operations of the port. A group of six conspicuous flares stand near the root
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio of the NGL Terminal Pier (23°57′N, 38°15′E)
Signals, Volume 6 (3). (9.244).

260
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
2 A tower (23°59′⋅0N, 38°13′⋅2E), from which a strobe
light is exhibited, stands about 1
miles N of the
Port Control Tower; it has been reported that this
light has been sighted from a distance of 32 miles.
Two chimneys (23°52′N, 38°22′E) stand, in close
proximity, near the desalination plant which is
situated on the coast between the Construction
Support Terminal (9.246) and Ra’s al Ma‘ajjiz
(9.229).
9.226
1 Major light:
Yanbu‘ South Light (23°28′⋅1N, 38°25′⋅5E) (9.108) is
exhibited from near the S end of the off-lying bank
which extends about 42 miles NW to Shi‘b al
Qariyyah (9.193).
Directions
(Directions for the central part of the
Red Sea are given at 4.14)
Chart 326
Approach from south
9.227
1 From a position about 5 miles S of Yanbu‘ South Light
(23°28′⋅1N, 38°25′⋅5E) (9.108) exhibited from near the S
end of the S part of the Approaches to Yanbu‘ TSS, the
track leads generally N for about 33 miles, between the
off-lying bank and the coast, passing (with positions given
from SR1 Beacon (23°31′⋅7N, 38°25′⋅9W)):
2 WNW of S1 Light-buoy (W cardinal) (6 miles SSE)
marking the NW corner of a detached shoal area
with a least depth over it of 23⋅5 m, thence:
ESE of S2 Light-buoy (port hand) (3
miles S) which
marks the E end of the shoal water extending ESE
from Yanbu‘ South Light (9.108), thence:
3 ESE of SR1 Beacon (white and blue bands). Thence:
WNW of S3 Light-beacon (starboard hand) (3
miles
E) standing on the W side of a steep-to drying reef,
thence:
WNW of Ar-Ra’s al Abaya
(6 miles E) a low and which marks the S corner of the 10 m maximum
sandy point, thence:
E of S4 Light-buoy (port hand) (3 miles NE) moored
on the E side of a shoal, with a least depth over it
of 14⋅2 m, which lies at the E-most extremity of the
off-lying bank.
9.228
1 The track continues, passing (with positions given from
S6 Light-beacon (23°38′⋅4N, 38°25′⋅2E)):
WSW of S5 Light-buoy (W cardinal) (6 miles ESE)
moored on the edge of the coastal bank, thence:
ENE of SR2 Beacon (white and blue bands; racon)
(4 miles SSE) which stands close to the E-most
extremity of the off-lying bank, about 5 cables
WNW of S4 Light-buoy, thence:
2 WSW of the entrance to Sharm Burayqah (5 miles E)
(9.251). Thence:
ENE of No S6 Light-beacon (port hand), thence:
WSW of Ra’s al ‘A
y
(4 miles ENE), thence:
WSW of S7 Light-beacon (starboard hand) (4 miles
NE). Thence:
3 ENE of SR3 Beacon (white and blue bands; racon)
(4
miles NNW). No 40 Light-beacon (N cardinal)
stands 2 miles W, thence:
WSW of S9 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (7 miles N)
which is moored on the S side of a shoal, with a
least depth over it of 12⋅1 m, which lies just outside
the designated N bound traffic lane.
261
9.229
1 The track continues, passing (with positions given from
No 37 Light-beacon (23°45′⋅7N, 38°17′⋅1E)):
NE of S8 Light-buoy (port hand) (5
miles ESE),
thence:
SW of Ra’s al Ma‘ajjiz (7 miles ENE); Ra’s al
Ma‘ajjiz Oil Loading Terminal (9.247) lies off the
coastal reef about 5 cables SW of Ra’s al Ma‘ajjiz,
thence:
2 NE of No 37 Light-beacon (S cardinal) which stands
on the SW side of the mid-part of the off-lying
bank which lies between Yanbu‘ South Light
(23°28′⋅1N, 38°25′⋅5E) (9.108) and Shi‘b
al-Qariyyah (42 miles NW) (9.193). Thence:
NE of S10 Light-buoy (N cardinal) (3 miles NNE),
thence:
3 SW of S11 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (5
miles
NNE) which is moored near the mid-part of a bank,
with a shoal depth of 20⋅5 m over it, on the NE
side of the fairway, thence:
NE of CZS Light-buoy (5 miles NNW) which is
moored 4 cables NE of Eljar Beacon and then into
the outer area of Mn
’ al Malik Fahd.
(Directions continue at 9.230)
Chart 328
Main channel through the inner approaches to M n ’
al Malik Fahd
9.230
1 From a position at the N end of the S part of the
Approaches to Yanbu‘ TSS (9.192), the track continues for
about 10 miles NW to the S end of the N part of the TSS,
passing (with positions given from the Port Control Tower
(23°57′⋅2N, 38°13′⋅0E)):
SSW of No 18 Light-buoy (E cardinal) (4 miles SE)
which is moored on the SE side of a shoal area,
with a least depth over it of 32 m, thence:
2 SSW of No 16 Light-buoy (S cardinal) (3 miles SSE)
draught anchorage area, thence:
NNE of No 11 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (4 miles S)
moored near the edge of the line of shoals and reefs
which lie opposite Mn
’ al Malik Fahd. Thence:
3 SSW of No 14 Light-buoy (E cardinal) (2 miles S)
which is moored at the ESE end of a detached
shoal area, with a least depth over it of 21 m; W
Light-buoy (isolated danger) is moored about
4 cables WNW on the SW side of this shoal area,
thence:
4 SSW of No 12 Light-buoy (isolated danger) (2 miles
SSW) moored on the SW side of the area of shoals
which extends SE from the E side of the inner
entrance channel to Mn
’ al Malik Fahd
Commercial and Container Port; a least depth of
16 m lies close N of the buoy. Thence:
9.231
1 The track continues, passing (with positions given from
No 2C Light-beacon (23°56′⋅8N, 38°10′⋅5E)):
NNE of No 9 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (2 miles
S) moored near the edge of the line of shoals and
reefs which lie opposite Mn
’ al Malik Fahd,
thence:
2 SSW of No 10 Light-buoy (S cardinal) (1 mile SE)
moored on the SW side of the area of shoals which
extends SE from the E side of the inner entrance
channel to Mn
’ al Malik Fahd Commercial and
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
Container Port; a least depth of 14 m lies close N of
the buoy, thence:
3 SSW of No 1C Light-buoy (W cardinal) (2 cables
SE) which marks the outer end of the E side of the
entrance channel to Mn
’ al Malik Fahd
Commercial and Container Port; No 2C
Light-beacon stands 2 cables NW. Thence:
4 NNE of No 7 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (2 miles
SW) moored near the edge of the line of shoals and
reefs which lie opposite Mn
’ al Malik Fahd,
thence:
SSW of No 8 Light-buoy (port hand) (2 miles WNW)
(9.195) and then into the S end of the N part of the
Approaches to Yanbu‘ TSS.
(Directions for Yanbu‘ are given at 9.195, for
entry into MØnº’ al Malik Fahd commercial
port and container terminal at 9.232)
North-west entrance channel to the main port
9.232
1 From a position SW of the outer end of the entrance
channel to Mn
’ al Malik Fahd Commercial and Container
port the track leads initially NNE then SE for about 4 miles,
to a position off the Port Control Tower.
Leading lights:
Front light No 37 Light-beacon (black triangle, apex
up, white stripe, on red and white structure)
(23°57′⋅9N, 38°11′⋅6E).
Rear light No 38 Light-beacon (similar construction)
(220 m from front).
2 The alignment (037
°) of these leading lights leads
through the first reach of the entrance channel, passing (with
positions given from the Port Control Tower (23°57′⋅2N,
38°13′⋅0E)):
NW of No 1C Light-buoy (2 miles WSW) (9.231)
which is moored W of a shoal area, with a least
depth over it of 4 m, which lies on the SE side of
the outer end of the entrance channel. Thence:
3 SE of No 2C Light-beacon (S cardinal) (2 miles
WSW) which is moored at the SE end of an area of
reefs and shoals and marks the W side of the outer
end of the entrance channel; No 1A Light-buoy (N
cardinal), moored 7 cables NNW, marks the NW
end of this area of reefs and shoals, thence:
4 NW of No 3C Light-beacon (starboard hand) (1
miles
W) which stands on the NW corner of a reef
situated on the SE side of the entrance channel,
thence:
NW of No 5C Light-buoy (starboard hand) (1 miles
W). Thence:
9.233
1 Leading lights:
Front light No 39 Light-beacon (red and white post)
(23°58′⋅4N, 38°11′⋅5E).
Rear light No 40 Light-beacon (similar construction)
(close NNE of front).
The alignment (015°) of these leading lights leads
through the second reach of the entrance channel, passing
(with positions from the Port Control Tower (23°57′⋅2N,
38°13′⋅0E)):
2 ESE of No 4C Light-beacon (port hand) (1
miles
WNW), thence:
(23°33′N, 38°32′E) where local craft may
Between No 7C Light-buoy (starboard hand) (1 miles
WNW), and No 6C Light-buoy (port hand) moored
1 cables WNW, which leads into the turning basin
at the NW end of the Commercial and Container
Port, thence:
262
9.234
1 From a position in the turning basin at the head of the
entrance channel the track then continues through the
channel which lies inside the barrier reef and is dredged to a
depth of 14 m, for about 1
miles SE to a position off the
Port Control Tower, passing (with positions given from Port
Control Tower (23°57′⋅2N, 38°13′⋅0E)):
2 SW of No 14C Light-beacon (port hand) (1 miles
NW) which stands close W of the NW end of No 1
Berth, thence:
NE of No 9C Light-beacon (W cardinal) (1 miles
WNW) which stands at the NW end of the ribbon
of reef which lies parallel to the Commercial and
Container Port area, thence:
3 NE of No 11C Light-buoy (starboard hand) (1 miles
WNW). Thence:
NE of No 38 Light-beacon (starboard hand) (1 miles
WNW), thence:
4 SW of No 16C Light-beacon (port hand) (8 cables
NW) which stands close off the SE end of No 7
Berth and NE of No 13C Light-beacon (starboard
hand) standing 1 cables SW, and thence into the
inner turning basin, the NE and SW limits of which
are marked by light-buoys whose position are best
seen on the chart. Thence:
5 SW of No 24C Light-beacon (port hand) (3 cables
WNW) and NE of No 21C Light-buoy (starboard
hand), thence:
SW of the Port Control Tower (9.225) and NW of
No 23C Light-beacon (E cardinal) which stands off
the ESE end of the ribbon of reef that lies parallel
to the Commercial and Container Port area. Thence:
Into that area of the port which lies off the Bulk
Terminal (9.241).
Anchorages
9.235
1 Anchorage berths N1 to N5 are situated between about
1 miles WSW and 1
miles S of the Port Control Tower
(23°57′⋅2N, 38°13′⋅0E) and are suitable for vessels of the
draughts shown.
N1, draught 15 m.
N2 and N3, draught 16 m.
N4 and N5 draught 22 m.
Anchorages N4 and N5 are suitable for use by fully laden
VLCCs.
9.236
1 A designated anchorage, for vessels up to a maximum
draught of 10 m, is situated about 1 miles S of the NGL
Terminal (9.244), as shown on the chart.
9.237
1 A designated anchorage for freighters is situated about
5 cables NW of the Pioneer Light-buoy (S cardinal)
(23°53′⋅7N, 38°17′⋅8E) which marks the WSW side of a
shoal area, with a least depth over it of 14⋅8 m.
Light-buoy No 8R (pillar, special) (23°54′⋅1N, 38°17′⋅2E)
is moored on the W side of this anchorage.
9.238
1 Local craft. There are occasional breaks in the coastal
reef between Yanbu‘ Al Bar (24°04′N, 38°04′E) and Ar
Ra’s al Abya
obtain shelter.
An inlet within the coastal reef S of Ra’s al Ma‘ajjiz
(9.229) affords anchorage for small vessels.
Local knowledge is required for the use of the anchorage
S of Ra’s al Ma‘ajjiz.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
Alongside berths
9.239
1 General Cargo and Container Terminal (23°58′N,
38°12′E), which consists of seven alongside berths numbered
from the NW, is situated in the NW part of the port, NW of
the Port Control Tower (9.225).
2 The terminal is protected by a ribbon of off-lying reefs
which lies SW of the berths; the reefs extend about 1 miles
NW from a position 3 cables WSW of the Port Control
Tower.
A turning basin, dredged to 15⋅0 m, is situated W of No 1
Berth; a further turning basin dredged to 14⋅0 m, lies S of
the S end of No 7 Berth.
3 Facilities. The terminal is equipped with three mobile
cranes of 40 tonnes capacity.
9.240
1 Service Harbour consists of a basin, dredged to 8⋅0 m,
entered close NW of the Port Control Tower (23°57′⋅2N,
38°13′⋅0E).
9.241
1 Bulk Terminal (23°57′N, 38°13′E) consists of two
alongside berths, numbered 21 and 22 from the W; the
facility can handle bulk carriers up to 60 000 dwt, and up to
a maximum draught of 13⋅9 m.
9.242
1 Export Refinery Terminal (23°57′N, 38°14′E) consists
of five alongside berths situated ESE of the Port Control
Tower (9.225).
Berths Nos 41 and 42 are situated within an inner basin,
dredged to 13⋅5 m; a turning basin, marked by light-beacons,
lies in the W part of this inner basin.
A L-shaped jetty extends a short distance SSW from the
shore, S of the inner basin. The jetty, which then extends
about 825 m WNW, has Nos 54 and 55 Berths on its SSW
face.
2 No 41 Chemical Berth can accommodate vessels from
5000 to 35 000 dwt up to a maximum draught of 12⋅2 m
and a maximum overall length of 220 m.
No 42 Short Haul Berth can accommodate vessels from
5000 to 35 000 dwt up to a maximum draught of 12⋅2 m
and a maximum overall length of 200 m.
3 No 40 Chemical Berth, an additional chemical berthing
facility, has been completed (2000) close W of No 41 berth;
the berth comprises of six breasting dolphins and four
mooring dolphins. This new facility can accommodate
chemical tankers of between 5000 and 50 000 dwt with a
maximum draught of 12⋅15 m.
4 Suez Berth West No 54 Berth can accommodate vessels
from 30 000 to 150 000 dwt up to a maximum draught of
16⋅65 m.
Suez Berth West No 55 Berth can accommodate vessels
from 30 000 to 150 000 dwt up to a maximum draught of
16⋅65 m.
All the berths at the Export Refinery Terminals may
accept tankers with a dwt of less than the minimum specified
provided certain dimensions are acceptable.
9.243
1 Crude Oil Terminal (23°56′N, 38°14′E) consists of a
T-shaped jetty situated about 2 cables SW of the outer-most
berth of the Export Refinery Terminal. The jetty provides
four berths on its outer face, but only two vessels can be
loaded simultaneously.
The approach to the terminal is made E of No 14
Light-buoy, then NNE, as required, to the terminal.
Berthing and unberthing may be undertaken at the
terminal, by day or by night, with winds of 20 kn or less.
263
2 No 61 Berth, the NW-most berth, can accommodate
tankers between 80 000 dwt and 275 000 dwt with a
maximum draught of 25⋅3 m.
No 62 Berth, the NW inner berth, can accommodate
tankers between 275 000 dwt and 500 000 dwt with a
maximum draught of 28⋅95 m.
No 63 Berth, the SE inner berth, can accommodate
tankers between 120 000 dwt and 275 000 dwt with a
maximum draught of 24⋅7 m.
3 No 64 Berth, the SE-most berth, can accommodate tankers
between 100 000 dwt and 400 000 dwt with a maximum
draught of 23⋅1 m.
All the berths at the Crude Oil Terminal may accept
tankers with a dwt of less than the minimum specified
provided certain other dimensions are acceptable.
9.244
1 NGL Terminal (23°56′N, 38°15′E) is a facility for the
export of refrigerated LPG. The terminal consists of two
berths on the outer face of a L-shaped jetty which extends,
via an island, over 1 mile from the shore.
It is reported that there is no vehicular access to the jetty,
it being normally accessed by boat.
Berth No 71 comprises the SE berth of the complex, and
Berth No 72 the NW berth; both berths can accommodate
vessels with draughts of up to 16⋅2 m.
9.245
1 Yanbu‘ Petromin Refinery Terminal (23°55′N, 38°17′E)
consists of four berths situated on the arm of a L-shaped
quay which extends over 1 mile from the shore; other
projections extend from the main run of the quay between
its head and the shore.
Two berths are situated on the inner face of the outer arm
of the jetty with two further berths situated on its outer face.
Lights are exhibited from each end of all four berths.
2 Berths Nos 91 and 92 lie on the outer face of the quay
and can accommodate vessels of between 20 000 and
80 000 dwt; it has been reported that Berth No 91 will be
extended to take vessels up to 150 000 dwt and a draught of
20 m.
Berth Nos 93 and 94 lie on the inner face of the quay
and can accommodate vessels up to 20 000 dwt.
A turning basin lies E of, and in the approach to, Nos 93
and 94 Berths; light-beacons mark the extent of the turning
basin and the approach to these inner berths.
9.246
1 Construction Support Terminal (23°54′N, 38°18′E)
consists of a L-shaped pier and a ramp which extends about
5 cables WSW from the shore. The facility is now defunct,
but it is reported that it could be reactivated if required.
2 Vessels of up to 205 m in length may berth on the inner
face of the pier, and up to 250 m on its outer face. Bulk
carriers up to 75 000 dwt with a draught of up to 11 m, or
general cargo vessels up to 50 000 dwt with a draught of
11⋅5 m may use the berths.
The ramp berth, which was used for the discharge of
heavy lifts, can accommodate vessels up to 6 m draught.
Chart 326
9.247
1 Ra’s al Ma‘ajjiz Terminal (23°48′N, 38°24′E) consists
of a trestle jetty, on which are situated three berths, joined to
the shore by a causeway which extends about 4 cables SW
from Ra’s al Ma‘ajjiz over the coastal reef.
Breasting dolphins front the berths; mooring dolphins,
from which lights are exhibited, lie NW and SE of the
berths.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
Tankers bound for the terminal should embark their pilot
in the S pilot boarding position (9.182).
2 There are no facilities for the disposal of oily wastes at
the terminal.
Berth No 101, the SE-most berth, can accommodate
tankers of between 35 000 and 300 000 dwt with a
maximum length of 347 m, a maximum beam of 61 m and a
maximum draught of 26⋅2 m.
Berth No 102, the middle berth, can accommodate tankers
of between 100 000 and 500 000 dwt with a maximum
length of 421 m, a maximum beam of 61 m and a maximum
draught of 29⋅6 m.
3 Berth No 103, the NW-most berth, can accommodate
tankers of between 35 000 and 300 000 dwt with a
maximum length of 347 m, a maximum beam of 61 m and a
maximum draught of 26⋅2 m.
Port services
Facilities
9.248
1 Hospital; private medical clinic; reception facilities for
oily wastes available at berth Nos 42, 54, 55, 91, 92, 93 and
94; no facilities for major repairs but minor repairs can be
undertaken by local workshops.
(9.227); the bay, which is encumbered with reefs, has
Supplies
9.249
1 Fresh water; bunker fuel available at the General Cargo
and Container Terminal, Bulk Terminal and Export Refinery
Terminal; fresh provisions.
RA’S MAST RAH TO AR RA’S AL ASWAD
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 158, 2659
Route
9.255
1 The route described in this section extends 91 miles S
from a position about 30 miles SW of Ra’s Mastrah
(23°02′N, 38°48′E) (9.111) to a position about 28 miles W
of Ar Ra’s al Aswad (21°20′N, 39°06′E) (9.266).
Topography
9.256
1 Between Ra’s Mastrah (23°02′N, 38°48′E) (9.111) and
Sharm R
bigh (21 miles SSE) (9.307) the coast is only
partially fringed by the coastal reef; between Ra’s Mastrah
and Ra’s Makhlq (46 miles SSE) (9.265) the coast is
backed by sandy desert on which there are low hills that
closely approach the coast.
2 South of Ra’s Khurmah (22°24′N, 39°04′E), a low, sandy
promontory known locally as Ra’s Zanabga, the coast is
bordered by a rocky bank that extends S to a position about
5 miles S of Ra’s Abur (21°42′N, 39°05′E) (9.270). A
number of islets, and numerous reefs, lie on this bank;
channels between the reefs are usable by small vessels, but
local knowledge is required for their use.
9.257
1 Between Ra’s Makhlq (22°19′N, 39°06′E) and Sharm
Abur (36 miles S) the high land, which backs the coast, has
no conspicuous features.
264
Communications
9.250
1 See 9.200.
Sharm Burayqah
Chart 326
9.251
1 Description. Sharm Burayqah (23°38′N, 38°32′E) is
entered about 13 miles SSE of Ra’s al Ma‘ajjiz (9.229),
between steeply rising rocks which lie on both sides of an
entrance approximately 46 m wide; the inlet dries for about
1 miles from its head.
The ruins of a fort stand N of the head of the inlet; the
ruins of a town lie a little farther N.
9.252
1 Anchorage. may be obtained by small vessels within the
inlet in depths from 5⋅5 to 11 m.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Ghubbat ar Ru’ays
Chart 158
9.253
1 Description. Ghubbat ar Ru’ays (23°33′N, 38°35′E),
known locally as Marsa Sabir, is entered E of Ar-Ra’s al
Abay
an islet near its centre.
9.254
1 Anchorage. A safe anchorage may be obtained by small
vessels within the bay.
Local knowledge is essential for the use of this
anchorage.
Depths
9.258
1 Caution. The depths and features of the coastal waters
described in this section were based on a general survey of
the area. Navigational hazards not located during the survey
may well exist, especially in the shallow coral waters.
See the source data diagram on the relevant charts.
Cautions
9.259
1 A wide berth should be given to the reefs lying on the
rocky bank which borders the coast S of Ra’s Khurmah
(22°24′N, 39°04′E) (9.256). Mariners are advised that
uncharted coral heads may exist within the 100 m depth
contour.
9.260
1 Reefs dry on this rocky bank during the summer months
when N winds are prevalent, but they are covered by up to
1 m of water when S winds are blowing.
Hazard
9.261
1 Reported Reefs. Two extensive reefs have been reported
to exist between 21°21′⋅7N, 38°48′⋅0E and 21°26′⋅0N,
38°54′⋅7E. See note on chart.
Although the presence of these two reefs has not been
disproved their existence is considered to be doubtful;
nevertheless, mariners should proceed with particular caution
when in this area.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
Current
9.262
1 During February many years ago, between Yanbu‘
(24°04′N, 38°04′E) and Jeddah (168 miles SSE),
NNW-going currents, with rates of between  kn and 1 kn,
mah (9.285), thence:
were experienced.
Charts 158, 2659
Principal marks
mah, thence:
9.263
1 Landmarks:
Jabal Faras
n (22°33′N, 39°25′E), which rises to a
height of 725 m, stands about 20 miles NE of
Sharm R
bigh (9.307). The mountain has a double
peak, precipitous sides, and forms the summit of a
range extending 8 miles NNW and about a similar
distance SSE.
Jabal al Qa’rah (21°46′N, 39°19′E), also known as
North Sister, is a peak rising to 593 m standing
ENE of Sharm Abur (9.270).
2 Jabal Qunt (21°43′N, 39°20′E), also known as South
Sister, is a peak rising to 529 m standing 3 miles
SSE of Jabal al Qa’rah. Both Jabal al Qa’rah and
Jabal Qunt are good marks; they are the farthest N
of the mountains which stand near the coast in this
vicinity.
3 Jabal Umm Arar (21°40′N, 39°14′E) rises to a height
of 158 m about 8 miles ESE of Sharm Abur
(9.270). The peak shows up as the W-most hill
when approaching from the S, and is the
termination of some spurs extending W from the
inland mountains.
Charts 64, 158, 2658
9.264
1 Major lights:
Shi‘b al Khamsa No 12 Light-beacon (22°45′N,
38°37′E) (S cardinal; black beacon, yellow top;
racon) exhibited from the S end of Shi‘b al Khamsa
(9.265).
2 Shi‘b al Kabr Light (21°41′N, 38°50′E) (white tripod,
red band; racon) exhibited from Shi‘b al Kabr
(9.266). A beacon (orange, rectangular topmark)
stands about 3 cables WSW of the light on the W
side of the reef.
3 Shi‘b Mismar Light (Mismar Reef Light) (21°20′N,
39°02′E) (black rectangle topmark on white
structure; racon) is exhibited from Mismar Reef
(9.281).
Directions
(continued from 9.111)
Charts 158, 2659
9.265
1 From a position SW of Ra’s Mastrah (23°02′N, 38°48′E)
the track leads S to a position about 28 miles W of Ar Ra’s
al Aswad (21°20′N, 39°06′E), passing:
2 W of Shi‘b al Khamsa (22°46′N, 38°37′E) a group of
three steep-to reefs, the N part of which dries,
which lie on the N side of the outer approaches to
R
bigh (9.306). Shi‘b al Khamsa Light (9.264) is
exhibited from the S end of the S-most reef. An
unnamed, steep-to reef lies about 3 miles NE of
Shi‘b al Khamsa between it and the S end of Shi‘b
al Kharra (9.111), thence:
3 W of a narrow reef on which there are a number of
dangerous and drying rocks; the W edge of the reef
265
is steep-to. Two stranded wrecks are situated on this
reef. In 1984 it was reported that the S wreck was
radar conspicuous at about 10 miles distant and that
it made a useful aid when approaching Mn
al
Qa
4 W of Shi‘b Nazar (22°20′N, 38°51′E), a drying reef. A
light-buoy (port hand) is moored off the S end of
Shi‘b Nazar, marking the outer end of the entrance
channel to Mn
al Qa
5 W of Ab Madafi’ (22°05′N, 38°47′E) (9.274) a
dangerous drying reef near the NW extremity of a
bank which extends S, from W of Ra’s Makhlq
(22°19′N, 39°06′E), and continues for about a
further 30 miles SSE from Ab Madafi’. Thence:
9.266
1 The track then continues S, passing:
W of Qia’ Dukais (21°57′N, 38°51′E) (9.276) which
lies on the NW part of a bank, about 6 miles W of
Ra’s abah (22°02′N, 38°56′E). From its N end
the bank extends about 10 miles SSE to the NE
corner of Eliza Shoals (9.279). Reefs, dangerous
and drying rocks lie on Qia’ Dukais, and also on
an unnamed dangerous shoal area which lies close
SE, thence:
2 W of Ab Far
mish (21°52′N, 38°45′E) (9.277) which
consists of two reefs, which dry in places, thence:
3 W of Shi‘b al Kabr (21°41′N, 38°50′E), a reef
standing on a bank on which there are dangerous
and drying rocks. Shi‘b al Kabr Light (9.264) is
exhibited from the W side of the S part of the reef;
a beacon stands on the SW edge of the reef about
3 cables WSW of the light. A light-buoy (W
cardinal) is moored about 8 cables NNW of the N
end of the reef; a stranded wreck lies about 3 cables
farther NNW on the SE side of a dangerous
below-water rock. Thence:
4 W of Shi‘b Mismar Mismar Reef) (21°20′N,
39°02′E) (9.281) a drying reef which is steep-to on
its W side and over which the sea breaks; Shi‘b
Mismar Light (9.264) is exhibited from the reef,
thence:
5 W of Ar Ra’s al Aswad (21°20′N, 39°06′E) which lies
about 3 miles SSW of Ra’s al Aswad the N
extremity of Shi‘b W
sil, a low sandy projection.
Jazrat Ghur
b is an island situated on the coastal
reef, about 1
miles SSW of Ra’s al Aswad; the
stranded wreck (position approximate) of a large
vessel lies on the coastal reef about 7 cables SW of
the island; a further stranded wreck (position
approximate) lies about 9 cables farther N. A
number of radio masts (red obstruction lights) stand
on the coast SE of Ar Ra’s al Aswad.
(Directions continue at 10.9)
(Directions for Jeddah are given at 9.397 and 9.398)
Inlets
Chart 158
Marsa Dhunayb
9.267
1 Description. Marsa Dhunayb (22°36′N, 39°04′E) is an
inlet entered about 10 miles S of R
bigh (9.306); a
dangerous rock lies in the entrance to the inlet.
9.268
1 Anchorage. Small vessels may obtain anchorage within
the inlet in depths from about 13 m to 18 m.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
Chart 2659
Marsa Umm Misk
9.269
1 Description. Marsa Umm Misk (22°18′N, 39°06′E) is an
inlet entered on the SE side of Ra’s Makhlq (9.265); the
inlet is encumbered with rocks and shoals.
Charts 2658, 2659
Sharm Abur
9.270
1 Description. Sharm Abur (21°43′N, 39°06′E) is an inlet
entered about 20 miles SSE of Ra’s abah (9.266) through
a deep, but narrow entrance which lies immediately N of
Ra’s Abur.
2 Except for a rocky point about 5 cables within its
entrance and the reefs which are situated along part of its
shores, the inlet is free from dangers. A bank, whose
extremity can be easily seen, extends off the rocky point;
this bank should be rounded as closely as prudence allows.
3 A marsh leads several miles inland from the head of the
inlet.
A number of piers extend into the inlet from both shores.
Landmark. A factory with a chimney stands about
6 miles S of the entrance to the inlet and serves as a good
landmark.
9.271
1 Anchorage. Small vessels may obtain anchorage within
the inlet with the best berth situated on the NW side of the
inlet, about 1 cable past the rocky point.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Inshore channel
Chart 2659
9.272
1 A deep inshore channel lies between the low, sandy coast
S of Ra’s abah (22°02′N, 38°56′E) (9.266) and the
off-lying bank on which lie Eliza Shoals (9.279) and Qia’
Dukais (9.276).
The channel is entered at its N end, about 5 miles SE of
Ab Madafi’ (22°05′N, 38°47′E) (9.274) and leads about
24 miles ESE to its S entrance close SW of Sharm Abur
(9.270).
2 The channel is steep-to and between 1 mile and 3 miles
wide.
3 A shoal, with a least depth over it of 17 m, lies in the
middle of the N entrance to the channel about 4 miles
WSW of Ra’s abah; a beacon (red) (22°01′N, 38°54′E)
stands on the S extremity of a large coral reef situated on the
E side of the N entrance to the channel. A drying rock
(existence doubtful) lies on the E side of the S entrance,
about 1 miles SSW of Ra’s Abur (21°42′N, 39°05′E)
(9.270).
4 Caution. The channel may be used if the sun is in a
favourable position. Its use is not recommended except in a
case of emergency for those who have no experience of
navigating amongst coral reefs.
9.273
1 Anchorage may be obtained, as convenient, under the lee
of any of the reefs on the W side of the channel bearing in
mind that those reefs which afford sheltered anchorage end
about 17 miles S of Ra’s abah. Reefs on the bank SSE of
this do not afford good shelter from NW winds.
266
Off-lying shoals
Ab Madafi’
9.274
1 Ab Madafi’ (22°05′N, 38°47′E) is a dangerous drying
reef near the NW extremity of a bank which extends S from
W of Ra’s Makhlq (22°19′N, 39°06′E) (9.265) and then
continues for about 30 miles farther SSE from Ab Madafi’.
Several reefs lie on this bank, some of which dry and others
over which the sea breaks.
2 The W edge of this bank is steep-to and lies up to
12 miles offshore. A further small dangerous drying reef lies
about 3 miles ENE of the N end of Ab Madafi’.
In 1990 two conspicuous stranded wrecks lay on the NW
side of Ab Madafi’, the N-most of these wrecks is radar
conspicuous.
9.275
1 Anchorage. Small vessels may obtain good anchorage,
sheltered from NW winds, off the SE side of Ab Madafi’.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Qi
a’ Dukais
9.276
1 Qia’ Dukais (21°57′N, 38°51′E) is an area of reefs
situated on the W side of the N end of the off-lying bank
which forms the W side of the inshore channel (9.272).
Reefs, and dangerous and drying rocks, lie on Qia’ Dukais,
and also on an unnamed dangerous shoal area, which lies on
the off-lying bank, close SE.
Ab Far mish
9.277
1 Ab Far
mish (21°52′N, 38°45′E) consists of two reefs,
which dry in places, standing on a dangerous bank.
A stranded wreck lies on the E side of the N part of Ab
Far
mish; a drying rock is situated off the E side of the N
end of the reef.
9.278
1 Anchorage. Small vessels may obtain good anchorage off
the middle of the E side of Ab Far
mish.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Charts 2658, 2659
Eliza Shoals
9.279
1 Eliza Shoals (21°42′N, 38°53′E), parts of which dry, are
situated in the SW part of the off-lying bank which forms
the W side of the inshore channel (9.272) which extends
from a position SE of Ab Madafi’ (9.274) to a position SW
of Sharm Abur (9.270).
2 A light-buoy (W cardinal) is moored on the W side of
this area of shoals, about 8 cables NNW of the N end of
Shi‘b al Kabr (21°41′N, 38°50′E) (9.266); Shi‘b al Kabr
Light (9.264) is exhibited from the W side of the S part of
the reef.
9.280
1 Caution. The area of reefs lying E and N of Shi‘b al
Kabr should be given a wide berth, uncharted coral heads
may exist within the 100 m depth contour in this area.
See 9.260.
Charts 2658, 2599
Shi‘b Mismar
9.281
1 Shi‘b Mismar Mismar Reef) (21°20′N, 39°02′E) a
drying reef which is steep-to on its W side and over which
the sea breaks. Shi‘b Mismar Light (9.264) is exhibited
from the reef.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9

2 Dangerous detached shoals and reefs, over which the sea end of Shi‘b Nazar; and a further light-buoy (starboard hand)
breaks during periods of strong W winds, lie close N of the marking the W side of a drying rock which lies close S of
reef; a further detached reef lies about 5 cables ENE of the the designated channel.
light.
A light-buoy is moored on the E edge of the reef, about Limiting conditions
2 cables E of Shi‘b Mismar Light (9.264); a stranded wreck
lies at the N end of the area of detached shoals, about Controlling depth
6 cables N of the light. 9.291
9.282 1 The inner approach channel which leads to the pilot
1 Caution. The area of reefs lying S of Shi‘b Mismar boarding position was swept to a depth of 14 m (1978).
should be given a wide berth. Uncharted coral heads may
exist within the 100 m depth contour in this area. Arrival information
See 9.260 and 9.345. Port operations
9.283 9.292
1 Current. Many years ago approaching Shi‘b Mismar on 1 The port is used almost exclusively by military traffic.
an E course, during a period of N winds of force 3, a
S-going current of 1 kn was experienced. Port radio
9.284 9.293
1 Anchorage may be obtained in periods of calm weather, 1 There is a port radio at Mn
al Qa
mah; the port radio
as shown on the chart, in a position with Shi‘b Mismar is operational during the hours of daylight only.
Light (9.264) bearing 210°, distant 6 cables, in depths of For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
about 27 m, sand and coral. Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Anchorage may also be obtained, as shown on the chart,
in a position with Shi‘b Mismar Light bearing 015°, distant Outer anchorages
2
cables, in depths of about 24 m. 9.294
1 Anchorage may be obtained, as shown on the chart, in a
position W of the inner coastal reef, close N of the pilot
MN ’AL QA MAH boarding position (22°21′N, 39°04′E), in depths from 15 to
20 m.
General information 9.295
Chart 2659 1 Small vessels may obtain indifferent anchorage off the NE
Position side of Shi‘b Nazar (22°20′N, 38°51′E) (9.265); foul ground,
9.285 and a drying reef, extend about 1 miles E from the middle
1 Mn
al Qa
mah (22°21′N, 39°06′E) is situated on the E of the narrow reef which lies along the W side of the
side of the middle part of the Red Sea, about 53 miles N of off-lying bank (9.325).
the port of Jeddah (9.342). 9.296
1 Several anchorages, suitable for use by small vessels, are
Function situated off the coast between Ra’s Makhlq (22°19′N,
9.286 39°06′E) (9.265) and Ra’s abah (20 miles SSW) (9.266).
1 Mn
al Qa
mah is principally used for the unloading of They are difficult to approach owing to the off-lying dangers
military equipment; except in an emergency, no commercial along this part of the coast.
vessels call at the port. Local knowledge is required for the use of these
anchorages.
Topography
9.287 Pilotage
1 The coast in the vicinity of Mn
al Qa
mah, between 9.297
Ra’s Khurmah (22°24′N, 39°04′E) (9.256) and Ra’s 1 The pilot boards W of the inner coastal reef in position
Makhlq (5 miles S) (9.265), is low and sandy. 22°21′N, 39°04′E, as shown on the chart, near the inner end
of the second reach of the designated entrance channel.
Port Authority Pilotage is compulsory and is only available during the
9.288 hours of daylight.
1 The harbour is administered by the Seaports Authority of For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Saudi Arabia (SEAPA), PO Box 5162, Riyadh, Saudi Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Arabia.
Tugs
Local regulations 9.298
9.289 1 Tugs are available.
1 The harbour is a closed area within which landing is
prohibited. Regulations concerning entry
9.299
Approach and entry 1 Before entering the approach channel permission should
9.290 be obtained from Mn
al Qa
mah Port Control.
1 The port is approached through a designated channel
about 5 cables wide, as shown on the chart, which initially Harbour
leads about 6 miles ENE, then 4 miles ESE, to the pilot
boarding position (22°21′N, 39°04′E). General layout
2 The outer approach channel is entered SE of the S end of 9.300
Shi‘b Nazar (22°20′N, 38°51′E) (9.265), between a 1 The main quay is constructed on the reef on the E side of
light-buoy (port hand) moored off the SE corner of the S the harbour.

267
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
Directions for entering harbour
Entrance channel
9.301
1 From a position about 2 miles WSW of the S end of
Shi‘b Nazar (22°20′N, 38°51′E) (9.265) the track leads
through the designated entrance channel, passing (with
positions given from P−05 Light-beacon (22°20′⋅0N,
39°04′⋅1E)):
SSE of the light-buoy (port hand) (11
miles W)
moored close SE of the S end of Shi‘b Nazar,
thence:
NNW of the light-buoy (starboard hand) (10
miles
W) marking the W side of a drying rock, thence:
2 NNW of the beacon (6 miles W) (position
approximate; racon) which stands near the W edge
of the shoal water on the S side of the outer
approach channel. Thence:
Clear of the light-buoy (safe water mark) (4
miles
WNW) and into the narrower inner reach of the
approach channel.
9.302
1 Leading beacons:
Front light-beacon P−02 (cylinder topmark)
(22°20′⋅0N, 39°04′⋅8E) which stands about 4 miles
S of Ra’s Khurmah (9.256) near the W edge of the
coastal reef.
Rear beacon (cone, point down topmark) (about
1 cable from front light-beacon).
2 The alignment (103°) of these leading beacons, as shown
on the chart, leads through the inner reach of the approach
channel, passing (with positions given from P−06
Light-beacon (22°21′⋅7N, 39°05′⋅7E)):
SSW of the light-buoy (port hand) (2
miles WSW),
thence:
R BIGH
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 64, 158
Position
9.306
1 R
bigh (22°44′N, 39°00′E) is situated on the E side of
the middle part of the Red Sea, about 76 miles N of the port
of Jeddah (9.342).
Function
9.307
1 Sharm R
bigh was an inlet dredged to allow the
construction of R
bigh Industrial Port, which comprises a
berthing facility for the loading of VLCCs handling the oil
and oil products of the large oil refinery situated close S of
the harbour.
Approach and entry
9.308
1 The port of R
bigh is approached passing S of Shi‘b al
Khamsa (22°46′N, 38°37′E) (9.265); and S of the line, as
shown on the chart, which joins Shi‘b al Khamsa Light
(9.264) with a point about 8 cables SE of the beacon
standing on the S end of Shi‘b al Bayda (22°44′N, 38°48′E)
(9.330). See caution at 9.326.
2 The approach then continues ENE, through the designated
approach channel, as shown on the chart, passing N of Tanta
Rock (22°43′⋅6N, 38°56′⋅0E) (9.331); then SE to a position
off the harbour entrance.
268
NNE of the light-buoy (starboard hand) (2
miles
WSW) and then to the pilot boarding position
(9.297), thence:
3 NNE of P−05 Light-beacon (2 miles SW), and SSW
of P−04 Light-beacon (1
miles SW), which stand
on each side of the gap in the coastal reef. The gap
leads to a short channel, marked by beacons, which
leads NNE to the vicinity of the harbour. A small
islet stands on the coastal reef about 4 cables S of
P−05 Light-beacon.
Berths
Alongside berths
9.303
1 The main quay, situated on the E side of the harbour, is
about 400 m long, with depths alongside from 13 to 14 m.
The NE side of the main quay is about 200 m long with
alongside depths of 7 m alongside.
Two pontoons, each about 150 m long and 25 m wide,
project WNW from the W face of the quay.
Ro-Ro facilities are situated at the S end of the quay.
Port services
Facilities
9.304
1 Mobile cranes; floating crane with a lifting capacity of
150 tonnes.
Supplies
9.305
1 Provisions are not available. It is recommended to have
ample stocks of provisions and fresh water as there may be
long delays before berthing.
The harbour is then entered to the NE, passing between
Ra’s el Auliya (22°44′⋅4N, 38°59′⋅3E) (9.332) and Ra’s Abu
Disba (5 cables S) (9.332).
Traffic
9.309
1 In 2003 the port was visited by a total of 42 vessels.
Port Authority
9.310
1 The harbour is administered by Petromin Petrola R
bigh
Refinery Co, PO Box 180, R
bigh 21911, Saudi Arabia.
Cautions
9.311
1 The vicinity of R
bigh lies within the IALA Maritime
Buoyage System Region A (red to port). Mariners are
advised that some buoys and beacons may not conform to
the IALA system.
2 Mariners are warned that several rocks, rocks awash, and
underwater rocks dangerous to navigation (ED) have been
reported (2004) in the approaches to Rabigh. The port
authorities should be contacted for the latest information.
Limiting conditions
Controlling depth
9.312
1 The turning basin in the NW part of the harbour is
dredged to 26 m.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9

Deepest and longest berth 3 Small vessel anchorage. Five anchorage berths for small
9.313 vessels, designated S1 to S5, have been established, as
1 Liquid Cargo Berths Nos 2 and 3 have depths alongside shown on the chart, SE of Tanta Rock (22°43′⋅6N,
of 26 m, and can handle vessels up to a maximum length of 38°56′⋅0E) (9.331), in depths from about 10 m to over 50 m,
400 m. sand and coral.
9.321
1 Small vessels may obtain anchorage among the reefs on
Tidal levels the off-lying bank (9.325) which extends S from Tanta Rock
9.314 (22°43′⋅6N, 38°56′⋅0E) (9.331).
1 See information in Admiralty Tide Tables, Volume 3. Mean Small vessels may also obtain anchorage SW of the coral
spring range about 0⋅4 m. heads which lie on Ab Sahim (22°39′N, 38°53′E) (9.331).
Local knowledge is required for the use of these outer
small vessel anchorages.
Maximum size of vessel handled 9.322
9.315 1 Small vessels may also obtain a well sheltered anchorage
1 The Liquid Cargo Berths can handle tankers up to at the head of the harbour in depths from 10 to 20 m, sand
325 000 dwt. and coral.

Local weather Pilotage

9.316
1 The prevailing winds are from NW with an average
strength of between force 3 and force 5.
Gales from the S or SW, accompanied by poor visibility,
occur most frequently between December and March.
Arrival information
Port operations
9.317
1 The port of R
bigh provides alongside berthing facilities
for VLCCs.
Port radio
9.318
1 R
bigh Port Control radio station controls the operations
of the port; vessels should confirm their ETA at least 3 hours
before arrival.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
mah (9.285). A deep channel lies between the E edge of
Notice of ETA
9.319
1 Vessels should notify their ETA at the outer pilot
boarding position 5 days, 48 hours, and 24 hours in advance
of their arrival.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Outer anchorages
9.320
1 ULCC anchorage. An anchorage for ULCCs has been
established about 1 mile ENE of No 15 Light-buoy
(22°44′⋅6N, 38°55′⋅9E) (9.331), in depths of about 65 m,
mud and coral.
2 Large vessel anchorage. Six anchorage berths for large
vessels, designated L1 to L6, have been established, as
shown on the chart, SE of the entrance to the main port in
the channel between the refinery and the off-lying reef, in
depths from about 60 to 90 m.
A buoy (port hand) is moored on the E side of the area
designated for L6 anchorage; a further buoy (red and white
spherical) is moored close outside of the SW corner of the
large vessel anchorage area.
9.323
1 Pilotage is compulsory and is available throughout
24 hours.
The pilot boards, as shown on the chart, in the approach
channel about 2 miles W of No 15 Light-buoy (22°44′⋅6N,
38°55′⋅9E) (9.331).
Vessels should not proceed E of the pilot boarding
position without a pilot embarked.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Tugs
9.324
1 Tugs are available; mooring boats are available.
Off-lying bank
9.325
1 An unnamed off-lying bank, on which lie numerous reefs,
extends S from W of the entrance to R
bigh Industrial Port
to a position close N of the entrance channel to Mn
al
Qa
this bank and the coast.
2 The E side of this bank is steep-to and is marked near its
E extremity, which lies near the S end of the large vessel
anchorage (9.320), by No 11 Light-beacon (E cardinal).
No 21 Light-buoy (E cardinal) is moored on the E side of
the N part of the bank about 2 miles SSW of the entrance to
R
bigh Industrial Port.
3 Shi‘b Nazar (22°20′N, 38°51′E) (9.265) is situated at the
S end of this bank; Qia’ al Kirsh (22°26′N, 39°00′E) is a
drying rocky shoal situated in the middle of the S end of the
deep channel which lies between the E edge of the bank and
the coast.
Caution
9.326
1 Deep draught vessels should pass at least 7 cables S of
Shi‘b al Bayda No 13 Light-beacon (22°42′⋅8N, 38°48′⋅2E)
(9.330).
Regulations concerning entry
9.327
1 Prior to entry to the port the master is required to sign a
letter entitled “Instructions to Vessels and Conditions of Use
of all Berths” which will be presented by the pilot. The letter

269
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
Pioneer Port
Rábigh (9.328)
(Original dated 1999)
(Photograph − Crown Copyright)
gives the responsibilities of the master, and his owners, for
any pollution originating from his vessel.
Customs officials may board in the anchorage or at the
berth.
Harbour
Chart 64 plan of Rºbigh Industrial Port
General layout
9.328
1 The port of R
bigh is entered NE of the Fairway
Light-buoy (22°43′⋅5N, 38°58′⋅0E) (9.331), through a short
entrance channel marked by light-beacons, which leads into a
turning basin situated in the NW part of the inner harbour
basin.
The Liquid Cargo Berths lie on the NE side of the inner
basin.
2 The Pioneer Port lies on the S side of the inner end of
the entrance channel, close W of the Port Control Tower
(22°44′⋅2N, 38°59′⋅8E).
A Dry Cargo Pier lies about 240 m S of No 3
Light-beacon.
Tidal streams
9.329
1 Tidal streams within the harbour are weak and scarcely
perceptible.
Directions for entering harbour
Chart 64
Approaches
9.330
1 From an initial position about 4 miles SW of Shi‘b al
Khamsa Light-beacon (22°45′N, 38°37′E) (9.264) the track
leads about 24 miles generally E, passing:
2 S of Shi‘b al Khamsa No 12 Light-beacon (9.264)
which stands on the S end of Shi‘b al Khamsa
(9.265), and S of the line, as shown on the chart
which joins Shi‘b al Khamsa No 12 Light-beacon
and a point about 8 cables SE of the beacon
standing on the S end of Shi‘b al Bayda (22°44′N,
38°48′E). See caution at 9.326. Thence:
3 S of Shi‘b al Bayda No 13 Light-beacon (S cardinal)
(22°42′⋅8N, 38°48′⋅2E) which is exhibited from the
S end of Shi‘b al Bayda, a drying reef which is
steep-to but is connected to Ab Sahim (9.331) by
a below-water ridge, thence:
4 Clear of the shoal patch (22°41′⋅8N, 38°49′⋅0E) with a
depth of 31 m over it which lies at the outer end of
the designated approach channel to R
bigh, on an
underwater ridge joining Shi‘b al Bayda and Ab
270
Control Tower No 5 Light beacon
Sahim (9.331), noting the shoal, with a least depth
over it of 12⋅7 m, which lies close off the SE end
of the S end of Shi‘b al Bayda.
9.331
1 The track then continues ENE through the approach
channel, passing (with positions given from Tanta Rock
(22°43′⋅6N, 38°56′⋅0E)):
NNW of Ab Sahim (5 miles SSW), a reef on which
there are several coral heads, some of which dry,
thence:
NNW of a detached shoal patch (2 miles WSW) with
a least depth over it of 32 m, thence:
2 NNW of Tanta Rock which stands on the N end of a
collection of reefs that lie at the N end of the
off-lying bank which extends about 25 miles S to
Shi‘b Nazar (9.265). A small detached reef lies
about 100 m N of the Tanta Rock. Tanta Rock
No 14 Light-beacon (N cardinal) stands near the
centre of the reef. Thence:
3 N of No 15 Light-buoy (N cardinal) (1 mile N) which
marks the N end of the off-lying bank, thence:
NE of Tanta Rock, thence:
SW of Shaab Naaly No 18 Beacon (W cardinal)
(2 miles ENE) which stands on the edge of the
coastal reef NW of the entrance to R
bigh Industrial
Port, then to the vicinity of the Fairway Light-buoy
(special) (1
miles E).
Entrance channel
9.332
1 From the vicinity of the Fairway Light-buoy (22°43′⋅5N,
38°58′⋅0E) the track leads about 2 miles ENE through the
entrance channel, marked by a buoy and light-beacons
(lateral), to the turning basin situated NW of the Liquid
Cargo Port, passing (with positions given from No 3
Light-beacon (22°44′⋅2N, 38°59′⋅4E)):
2 SSE of a light-buoy (8 cables WSW) which marks the
SW extremity of shoal water which extends off the
S side of the coastal reef, thence:
SSE of No 2 Buoy (4 cables WSW) moored S of
Kad el Sheik, which forms part of the coastal reef,
and:
3 NNW of the edge of the coastal reef which extends W
of Ra’s Abu Disba, thence:
SSE of Ra’s el Auliya (2 cables N) the extremity of a
peninsula formed by a low ridge of hard sand,
thence:
4 NNW of R
bigh Port Control Tower (4 cables E)
which stands on the peninsula separating the
Pioneer Port from the Liquid Cargo Port, thence:
Into the turning basin which is marked at its NW
extremity by No 7 Light-beacon (S cardinal)
(7 cables NNE), and at its E extremity by No 9
Light-beacon (starboard hand) (8 cables ENE).
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
Berths
Chart 64 plan of Rºbigh Industrial Port
Alongside berths
9.333
1 Dry Cargo Pier (22°44′⋅1N, 38°59′⋅4E) is 80 m in length
with an alongside depth of 6⋅5 m; the pier is used for the
handling of both dry cargo and Ro-Ro traffic.
During periods of strong W winds, to which the berth is
exposed, berthing may be impossible even with the aid of
tugs.
9.334
1 Pioneer Port (22°44′⋅2N, 38°59′⋅6E) has depths of about
14 m over most of its area. Four concrete piers, with
alongside depths from 7 to 14 m, extend N from the S side
of the basin.
The port is used by tugs and other small vessels.
9.335
1 Liquid Cargo Port (22°44′⋅3N, 39°00′⋅2E) is a large
basin in the SE part of R
bigh Industrial Port; this port area
generally has depths of over 25 m.
Liquid Cargo Berths Nos 2 and 3 are situated on the NE
side of the basin; both berths consist of a concrete T-headed
jetty from which breasting dolphins extend SE and NW;
mooring dolphins also extend about 220 m SE and NW of
the berths.
2 Both berths can handle tankers from 30 000 dwt to
325 000 dwt with a maximum permissible alongside draught
of 23⋅5 m.
Two new berths are under construction on the SW side of
the basin for vessels up to 80 000 dwt.
9.336
1 Dry Cargo Port (22°45′⋅0N, 39°00′⋅3E) is a basin in the
NE part of the port which is dredged to depths from 10 m to
13 m.
The basin is entered between No 8 Light-beacon (red) and
No 9 Light-beacon (green); No 10 Light-beacon marks the
edge of the reef at the NE end of the basin.
JEDDAH
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 158, 2658, 2659, 2599
Position
9.342
1 Jeddah (21°28′N, 39°10′E) is situated on the E side of
the central part of the Red Sea, about 77 miles S of R
bigh
(9.306).
Function
9.343
1 Jeddah is the port of Makkah (Mecca) which is situated
about 38 miles E.
Jeddah is the principal port of the Al Hij
z region. It is
also the main commercial centre for Saudi Arabia.
The town consists mainly of large modern buildings with
a few older, traditional houses preserved amongst them. Both
the town and the port have undergone extensive
development, a process which continues.
The reputed Tomb of Eve, ‘the mother of mankind’, is
situated in Jeddah.
271
2 This basin forms the non-commercial area of the harbour.
The R
bigh Custom House stands on the N side of the
Dry Cargo Port, about 2 cables NW of No 10
Light-beacon.
Mooring buoys are laid on the S side of the NE part of
the basin; two buoys (red spherical) are laid near the middle
of the N side of the basin close off the reef.
9.337
1 Power Station Oil Berth (22°39′⋅3N, 39°01′⋅6E) consists
of a pier, which extends about 240 m W from the shore
from a position about 5 miles SSE of the entrance to R
bigh
Industrial Port, close S of the large vessel anchorage (9.320).
The berth services the nearby power station and can
handle vessels up to 100 000 dwt.
Port services
Repairs
9.338
1 There are no repair facilities at R
bigh.
Facilities
9.339
1 Hospital; mobile cranes up to 90 tonnes capacity; floating
cranes up to 200 tonnes capacity; cargo lighters; facilities for
the discharge of oily waste.
Supplies
9.340
1 Bunker fuel available at Liquid Cargo Berths Nos 2 and 3
and by lighter; fresh water in limited quantities also available
by lighter; fresh provisions in limited quantities.
Communications
9.341
1 International airport at Jeddah, 155 km distant.
Off-lying reefs
9.344
1 Jeddah is so well sheltered by lines of reefs that the sea
within them is comparatively smooth whatever the force and
direction of the wind. These off-lying reefs form three nearly
parallel lines, about 10 miles long, which lie in a N/S
direction between Ra’s al Ja
z (21°32′N, 39°07′E) and
Ra’s al Aswad (10 miles S). There are also many off-lying
shoal patches.
The channels between these off-lying reefs are navigated
by the local pilots, but only the recognised passages through
the reefs are described in this section.
2 Local knowledge. No attempt should be made to use
channels through the reefs, other than those described,
without local knowledge.
9.345
1 Caution. A good berth should be given to all the reefs in
the vicinity of Jeddah.
Mariners are advised that uncharted coral heads may exist
within the 100 m depth contour especially South of Shi‘b
Mismar (21°20′N, 39°02′E) (9.281).
Mariners are warned that several rocks, rocks awash, and
underwater rocks dangerous to navigation (ED) have been
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
reported (2004) in the approaches to Jeddah. The port
authorities should be contacted for the latest information.
See also 9.280.
Topography
9.346
1 Jeddah stands on a low, sandy plain which extends to the
base of a range of hills which rise between 5 miles and
10 miles inland.
The mountains which lie beyond these hills are so rugged
and uneven that it is difficult to identify the peaks and they
are often obscured.
2 It should be noted that landmarks in the immediate
hinterland of Jeddah are not easily identified from a distance
by a stranger.
9.347
1 Local landmarks:
Jabal Shibayrim (Hadda) (21°30′N, 39°31′E) is a
saddle-shaped mountain, with a double peak, which
rises to a height of 817 m (2680 ft). It is the highest
and most prominent of the mountains situated close
to Jeddah, and, as the higher range of mountains
which rise E of Mecca is seldom visible, Jabal
Hadda is generally the highest land to be seen.
2 Round Mountain (21°34′N, 39°37′E), which stands
7 miles ENE of Jabal Hadda, has a remarkable
rounded summit and rises to 775 m.
Jabal Kath
nch (21°24′N, 39°20′E) is a flat summit
with a small, but remarkable, nipple standing about
7 miles S of Jabal al Yamanya. The hill presents
the same aspect from all directions.
Port limits
9.348
1 The limits of the Port of Jeddah are shown on the charts.
Approach and entry
9.349
1 Northern approach. From a position about 10 miles SW
of Shi‘b al Kabr (21°41′N, 38°50′E) (9.266) the port is
initially approached on an E heading.
When within the N white sector (128°−178°(50°)) of
Shi‘b Qaam Light (21°27′⋅2N, 39°06′⋅6E) (9.399) the port
and the N pilot boarding position, should be approached to
the SW keeping within this white sector of Shi‘b Qaam
Light.
2 The N entry is then made through Al arq (9.401), the
outer end of a dredged channel marked by light-buoys and
light-beacons, which leads to the main commercial port of
Jeddah.
9.350
1 Southern approach. From the S, the port and the S pilot
boarding position should be approached on an E heading
passing N of Shi‘b Mismar (21°20′N, 39°02′E) (9.281), and
S of Rocky Bank (9.439) which is marked on its SE corner
by No 2 Light-buoy (21°26′⋅1N, 39°04′⋅3E).
The S entry is then made through an outer dredged
channel, marked by light-buoys, which leads to the outer
ends of the channels which lead to either the JRD Tanker
Terminals (9.426), the Royal Saudi Naval Facility (9.428), or
the Ammunition Pier (9.429).
Traffic
9.351
1 In 2003 the port was visited by a total of 2217 vessels.
272
Port Authority
9.352
1 The harbour is administered by the Seaports Authority of
Saudi Arabia SEAPA), Jeddah Islamic Port Management, PO
Box 9285, Jeddah 21188, Saudi Arabia.
Cautions
9.353
1 Radar should be used with caution due to the difficulty of
identifying the radar picture when at a safe distance from the
off-lying dangers which lie in the approaches to Jeddah, and
also the prevalence of anomalous propagation.
It has been reported that vessels in the anchorages may
obscure navigation marks and confuse the radar picture.
9.354
1 Great care should be taken not to confuse the lights of
Jeddah International Airport (21°41′N, 39°09′E) which are
visible for some distance from seaward, for those of the city
of Jeddah which lies about 14 miles farther S.
Certain of the stranded wrecks in the approaches to
Jeddah are conspicuous and care should be taken not to
mistake any of these stranded wrecks on the reefs in the
vicinity of the port for vessels under way or at anchor.
Currents
9.355
1 Though the currents between Shi‘b Nazar (22°20′N,
38°51′E) and Qia’ Kidan (84 miles S) may predominantly
be weak and variable, with many eddies imposed on the
overall pattern of flow, coastal sets can also be experienced
with a locally increased rate due to water shallowing near
reefs and shoals.
2 A number of years ago, during a period of force 4 NW
winds, a current of 1 kn was experienced between Shi‘b
Qaam (21°27′⋅2N, 39°06′⋅6E) (9.399) and Baw
bat al
Mamarral Wusá (1 miles NE) (9.401). See also 9.371.
Caution. Great care should be taken at all times when
making for Jeddah owing to the strong and variable currents
that may be experienced in the approaches.
Limiting conditions
Controlling depths
9.356
1 Al arq (9.401), Baw
bat al Mamarral Wusá (9.401)
and Baw
bat al Mamarr ad D
khilyah (9.401), all form part
of the N entry channel to the main commercial port of
Jeddah; they are swept to 16 m, but note the shoal area, with
a least depth over it of 15⋅1 m, which lies on the N side of
Al arq, 5 cables N of No 15 Light-buoy (21°27′⋅6N,
39°07′⋅0E). A maximum draught of 14⋅5 m within the N
entry channel allows about a 10% under-keel clearance and
this is the suggested maximum draught.
2 The outer SW part of the commercial port is dredged to
15⋅5 m.
9.357
1 The outer S entry channel, which leads to the JRD Tanker
Terminals (9.426), is dredged to 16⋅6 m.
The N part of Restah (9.409), which forms the entrance
to the JRD Tanker Terminals, is dredged to 16⋅4 m; but note
the shoal with a depth of 13⋅9 m over it which lies close off
the N end of the S entrance breakwater.
The JRD Inner Harbour Approach Channel (9.414) is
dredged to 13⋅4 m (1990).
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
Deepest and longest berths
9.358
1 Berths Nos 1 to 3, situated on the N side of the entrance
to the commercial port, have a combined length of 700 m
and are dredged to 15 m (2002).
Berth Nos 50 to 56, situated in the outer SW part of the
main commercial port, have alongside depths of 15⋅5 m.
Berth Nos 51 to 56 have a combined berthing face of
1⋅5 km.
Tidal levels
9.359
1 See information in Admiralty Tide Tables, Volume 3. Mean
spring range about 0⋅2 m.
Fluctuations, caused by storms, can increase this range to
0⋅5 m.
Abnormal levels
9.360
1 The summer low water levels are about 0⋅6 m below
those of winter.
During summer, when N winds prevail, many of the
banks dry. There is usually about 0⋅9 m less water than
during the period of S winds which prevail over the S part
of the Red Sea in winter.
Many years ago, during a N gale which lasted for five
days, the water level fell about 1⋅5 m.
Density of water
9.361
1 1⋅030 g/cm3.
Maximum size of vessel handled
9.362
1 The normal maximum permissible draught is 13⋅5 m;
vessels up to 300 m in length are berthed regularly. There
are no other restrictions on size of vessel.
The largest vessel to berth in the port had a beam of over
43 m.
Local weather
9.363
1 Climate. The climate, though hot, is not unhealthy; sea
breezes cool the air. The rainy season is during the months
of November and December and is limited to a few showers.
The average rainfall taken over a four year period was
3⋅2 mm.
Local weather lore says that when the wind remains N
during the night, a strong N wind may be expected the
following day; when the wind inclines to the E in the early
morning, the breeze will be light and the weather fine.
9.364
1 Temperature. In winter the air temperature range is
between 25°C during the day and about 12°C at night. In
summer the range is between 35°C during the day and about
25°C at night.
273
The most extreme air temperatures recorded in recent
years in Jeddah have been 49°C in May, and 6°C in
February.
Temperatures offshore are generally several degrees lower.
9.365
1 Relative humidity. The relative humidity varies
throughout the year with average values between 65% and
70% in winter and 50% to 55% in summer, but values of
100% may occur for short periods around dawn.
9.366
1 Winds. The prevailing winds throughout the year are
from the N or NW with a speed of about 15 kn increasing
during the afternoon.
2 Storms occur as frequently as every 5 to 10 days and
sometimes can last as long as two weeks. Although there is
little fall in the barometric pressure during these storms, and
very rarely any precipitation, wind speeds of up to 40 kn
may occur from the N or NW. During the winter months,
sudden changes of wind direction may occur from N or NW
to S. Sometimes sudden changes of wind direction occur in
summer, usually in August, with speeds of up to 40 kn
which may last for about 3 days.
9.367
1 Sea conditions can vary considerably within the port
limits; there is no distinct seasonal change in this variation.
Wave heights in the port area are usually lower than
0⋅4 m during sea breezes, but during storms waves in excess
of 2⋅0 m are common outside the offshore reefs, whilst
waves exceeding 1⋅0 m are common within the port area.
9.368
1 Sea-water temperature rises similarly with air
temperature and ranges between 20°C and 31°C.
9.369
1 Visibility. The incidence of fog is rare, but should it
occur, it is more likely during the period November to April.
During the summer months between May and September
the incidence of poor visibility, of less than 5 miles, can be
quite high due to mist and haze.
Dust storms, obscuring the coastline, may occur
throughout the year.
9.370
1 Climatic table. See 1.275 and 1.285.
Currents
9.371
1 General remarks. Local wind conditions, tide, and the
general circulatory pattern of the Red Sea influence currents
in the area.
Generally currents within the port have been observed at
less than  kn and set parallel to the coast. They are
considerably influenced by surface wind activity.
9.372
1 Winter. Many years ago, during the months of November
and December, outside the off-lying reefs in the approaches
to Jeddah, a constant N-going current was experienced.
Within the reefs the currents experienced were weak and
irregular.
In March, a number of years ago, during a period of NW
winds, in a position about 10 miles seaward of the outer line
of the off-lying reefs off Jeddah, a SE-going current of about
 kn was experienced.
9.373
1 Summer. In April, a number of years ago, during a
period of a N wind of force 3, in a position about 8 miles
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
seaward of the outer line of the off-lying reefs off Jeddah, a
S-going current of about 1 kn was experienced.
In May many years ago, during a period of N winds, an
E-going current of 2 kn was experienced in the approaches
to Jeddah. In the month of September, a similar number of
years ago, during a period of N winds, a N-going current
was experienced.
Arrival information
Port operations
9.374
1 The port of Jeddah was built on land reclaimed from the
coastal reefs; the port has numerous alongside berths with
depths alongside of up 15⋅5 m.
There are facilities in the port for the handling of
container and Ro-Ro traffic, general cargo and livestock;
there is a ship repair yard, an oil terminal, a naval harbour
and further extensive commercial berthing.
Jeddah is a major bunkering port, vessels calling for
bunkers account for the majority of shipping calling at the
port.
Port radio
9.375
1 Jeddah Port Control radio station controls the operations
of the port; vessels should contact Jeddah Port Control when
within VHF range.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Notice of ETA
9.376
1 Vessels should notify their ETA 5 days, 4 days and 3
days in advance of their arrival.
Vessels should then confirm their ETA 48 hours and
24 hours before arrival through Jeddah Radio (HZH).
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Outer anchorages
9.377
1 General remarks. Before receiving any service at the
anchorage, clearance must first be received from Jeddah Port
Control.
Anchorage is only available for vessels awaiting bunkers,
stores, quarantine clearance or crew changes.
2 Bulk carriers and all other vessels are not permitted to
anchor off the port, so such vessels must adjust their ETA to
allow for berthing on arrival. The Port Authority may fine
the agent if this instruction is not complied with. If a bulk
carrier gives an ETA and its intended berth is not free, it
will usually be instructed to steam at slow speed outside the
port limits to arrive off the port when the berth has become
available.
9.378
1 Anchorage areas have been established off Jeddah as
shown on the charts; their position, description and
allocation are as follows:
Anchorage A (21°28′⋅5N, 39°08′⋅5E) lies W of the
Jeddah Ship Repair Yard (9.430); the anchorage has depths
generally from 8 m to 22 m, over mainly sand and shell.
2 A wreck, with a least depth over it of 7⋅6 m, lies in the
middle of the E side of the anchorage; a shoal, with a least
274
depth over it of 6⋅4 m and marked by Buoy C (conical,
yellow), lies close WNW of the wreck.
Buoy A (21°28′⋅4N, 39°08′⋅1E) (conical, yellow) and
Buoy B (4 cables NE) (conical, yellow) mark reefs and
shoals on the NW side of the anchorage.
3 Several anchors have been lost in the area of foul ground,
coral and rock, which lies in the SE part of the anchorage,
about 2 cables S of the charted wreck.
This anchorage lies within the port limits and may only
be used by authorised vessels with the aid of a pilot.
9.379
1 Anchorage B (21°27′⋅0N, 39°07′⋅2E) lies E of Shi‘b
Qaam (21°27′⋅2N, 39°06′⋅6E) (9.399); the anchorage has
depths generally from 18 m to 49 m, over coral, mud, sand
and shell.
A shoal, with a least depth over it of 9 m, lies in the SE
part of the anchorage; a dangerous wreck lies just outside the
NW corner of the anchorage, close SE of No 15 Light-buoy
on an area of shoal water with a least depth over it of
10⋅1 m.
2 A shoal area, with a least depth over it of 5 m, lies close
outside the NE corner of the anchorage; No 13 Light-buoy
marks this area of shoals.
This anchorage lies within the port limits and may only
be used by authorised vessels with the aid of a pilot.
9.380
1 Anchorage W1 (21°27′⋅2N, 39°08′⋅6E) lies between Ab

rith (9.403) and the shoals extending S of ’Irq al Lt
(9.403); the anchorage has depths generally from 16 to 35 m,
over coral, mud, sand and shell.
2 A danger area lies in the NW part of the anchorage, about
5
cables SW of Baw
bat al Mamarr ad D
khilyah (Inner
Gateway) South Light-beacon which stands on the N end of
Ab 
rith; shoals, with least depths over them from 8 to
9 m, lie on the E side of the N part of the anchorage.
3 This is a working anchorage within the port limits and
may only be used with the aid of a pilot.
9.381
1 Anchorage C (21°27′⋅3N, 39°04′⋅0E) lies E of Al
Kharrbah al Baryah (9.443); the anchorage has depths
generally from 25 m to 60 m.
A shoal, with a least depth over it of 16 m, lies in the
NW corner of the anchorage. No 3 Light-buoy (N cardinal)
is moored in the S part of the anchorage about 1
cables N
of Al Wast
n (9.444), a dangerous underwater rock, over
which the sea breaks when there is any swell.
2 This anchorage lies outside the port limits and is
designated for use by vessels with dangerous cargoes.
9.382
1 Anchorage D (21°27′⋅3N, 39°05′⋅2E) lies E of
Anchorage C; the anchorage has depths generally from 40 m
to 82 m.
The E part of the anchorage is a foul area where coral
heads are known to exist.
This anchorage lies outside the port limits and is
designated for use by dry cargo vessels.
9.383
1 Anchorage E (21°23′⋅9N, 39°05′⋅0E) lies W of Ash
Shi‘bayn (21°24′N, 39°06′E) (9.409) which itself lies S of
the S entry channel (9.350) to the port. The anchorage has
depths from 30 m to 82 m.
The JRD pilot boarding position (9.400) is situated near
the centre of the anchorage.
This anchorage lies outside the port limits and is
designated for use by tankers and also as an overflow
anchorage.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
9.384
1 Vessels using C, D or E Anchorages, which all lie outside
of the Jeddah port limits, may still be required by Jeddah
Port Control to anchor in a specified position.
9.385
1 See also 9.284.
9.386
1 Prohibited anchorage. An area, as shown on the chart,
in which anchorage is prohibited lies S of Anchorage E.
Pilotage
9.387
1 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels above 150 nrt
entering, navigating within, or leaving the port. It is available
throughout 24 hours, except for tankers for which pilots are
available between 0700 and 1600.
The pilot boards from one of two modern, fast orange
launches with a white superstructure; a doctor boards with
the pilot.
2 In the N approach (9.349) the pilot boarding position, as
shown on the chart, lies 1 mile NW of Shi‘b Qaam Light
(21°27′⋅2N, 39°06′⋅6E) (9.399) for inbound vessels. It is
reported that the pilot usually boards just outside Baw
bat al
Mamarral Wusá (Middle Gateway) (9.401).
3 In the S approach (9.350) the pilot boards 5 cables WSW
of No 9 Light-buoy (21°24′⋅2N, 39°05′⋅5E) for vessels of
5⋅5 m draught or less, as shown on the chart.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Tugs
9.388
1 Tugs are available.
Regulations concerning entry
9.389
1 Vessels are forbidden to enter, or navigate within the port
limits of Jeddah (9.348), without the permission of Jeddah
Port Control.
Vessels carrying explosives should fly the appropriate flag
of the International Code and declare their cargo to the
authorities who will then allocate a suitable berth.
Quarantine
9.390
1 There is no radio pratique; a doctor boards on arrival and
grants Free Pratique.
All arrivals from yellow fever infected or endemic areas
are required to submit a valid vaccination certificate in
accordance with international regulations.
Harbour
General layout
9.391
1 There are a total of 58 numbered berths within the main
commercial sector of the port which forms the whole of the
N part of the Port of Jeddah.
Chyoda Island Oil Terminal (21°26′⋅6N, 39°08′⋅9E)
(9.425) lies in the outer part of the harbour, S of Ab 
rith
(9.403), between the main commercial port and the JRD
Tanker Terminal (9.426).
2 JRD Tanker Terminals (21°26′⋅2N, 39°09′⋅2E) lie on the
outer face of a long outer arm which extends about 1500 m
S on the W side of the basin forming JRD Inner Harbour
(9.427).
275
Al Q
‘idat al Baryah al Malakyah as Su‘dyah
(21°25′⋅8N, 39°10′⋅3E) the Royal Saudi Naval Facility
(9.428) lies in the SE corner of the the port.
3 An Ammunition Pier (21°23′⋅3N, 39°10′⋅0E) (9.429),
connected by a causeway to the shore, is situated about
2 miles S of the Royal Saudi Naval Facility.
Prohibited area
9.392
1 A prohibited area has been established W and S of Ra’s
al Ja
z (21°32′N, 39°07′E) (9.397), as shown on the chart.
Submarine cables extend W from Ra’s al Ja
z,
through the prohibited area, into the central part of the Red
Sea.
Anchorages
9.393
1 See 9.377.
Principal marks
9.394
1 Landmarks:
Jeddah Port Administration Building (21°29′⋅0N,
39°10′⋅4E) is a very conspicuous tower block.
The Jeddah Intercontinental Hotel (21°31′⋅2N,
39°09′⋅2E) is a conspicuous building standing about
2 miles N of the commercial port area.
2 A conspicuous spherical water tower (21°33′⋅3N,
39°08′⋅0E) stands about 2 miles NNW of the
Jeddah Intercontinental Hotel.
A conspicuous round water tower surmounted by a
point (21°28′⋅7N, 39°12′⋅3E) stands about 2 miles E
of the Jeddah Port Administration Building.
3 Conspicuous silos (21°27′⋅6N, 39°10′⋅2E) stand on the
E side of the main commercial harbour.
See views of conspicuous landmarks on Admiralty Charts
2577 and 2599.
9.395
1 Major lights:
Port of Jeddah Control Tower Light (21°28′⋅1N,
39°09′⋅0E) which is exhibited from the Port of
Jeddah Control Tower, a remarkable spherical
construction standing on twin pillars on the N side
of Baw
bat al Mamarr ad D
khilyah (Inner
Gateway) (9.401). See views of conspicuous
landmarks on Admiralty Charts 2577 and 2599.
2 Shi‘b Jah
n Light (white structure, red rectangular
topmark; sectored light) (21°28′⋅6N, 39°07′⋅1E)
which is exhibited from the S part of the E side of
the drying part of Shi‘b Jah
n (9.402).
Directions for entering harbour
(Directions for the central part of the
Red Sea are given at 4.14)
Charts 2658, 2659
General remarks
9.396
1 From a distance of 30 to 40 miles W of Jeddah, the
mountains in the vicinity of the port can occasionally be
clearly distinguished from about half an hour before sunrise
to about half an hour after, allowing a reliable visual fix to
be obtained.
2 From this distance off the coast, Jabal Shibayrim (Hadda)
(21°30′N, 39°31′E) (9.347) is liable to be mistaken for Jabal
al Qa’rah (21°46′N, 39°19′E) (9.263), Jabal Hadda should be
identified by its proximity to Round Mountain (21°34′N,
39°37′E) (9.347).
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
3 A visual approach between sunrise and mid-morning is
difficult due to the glare of the sun. In summer the visibility
is often poor due to dust in the atmosphere, such that the
shore marks may not be visible from the vicinity of Rocky
Bank (9.439).
4 The best time for entering Jeddah is towards noon as the
below-water reefs appear as dark green shadows below the
surface, because of the clarity of the water. When the sun is
low in the E or in thick, hazy, or cloudy weather, there is so
much glare that the reefs are not visible until close to.
Charts 2658, 2599
Northern approach
(Directions for the east side of this part of the Red Sea are
given at 9.265)
9.397
1 Directions. From a position about 10 miles SW of Shi‘b
al Kabr (21°41′N, 38°50′E) the approach leads about
25 miles generally E, passing:
S of Shi‘b al Kabr (9.266) from which Shi‘b al Kabr
Light (9.264) is exhibited. Thence:
S of an unnamed, detached, dangerous shoal area
(21°40′N, 38°53′E) which consists of coral reefs,
and dangerous and drying rocks. See cautions at
9.259 regarding dangers over reefs and drying reefs,
thence:
2 S of the S end of the off-lying bank (21°40′N,
39°00′E) on which are situated coral reefs,
dangerous rocks and shoal depths. This part of the
off-lying bank, SW of Eliza Shoals (9.279), forms
the S end of the W side of the inshore channel
described at 9.272, thence:
3 SW of Ra’s al Ja
z (21°32′N, 39°07′E). A jetty
(radar conspicuous) extends about 3 cables WSW
from the point; a desalination plant, with two
conspicuous chimneys, which are also radar
conspicuous, stands about 1 mile NNW of the point;
a conspicuous, spherical water tower (9.394) stands
1 miles N of the point. An area into which entry
is prohibited (9.392) lies W and S of Ra’s al
Ja
z. Thence:
4 NE of No 8 Light-buoy (E cardinal) (21°28′⋅4N,
39°04′⋅8E) which is moored about 4 cables E of
Ab al Yahd (9.440) the NE-most named shoal on
Rocky Bank (9.439) which extends about 2 miles
WSW from the vicinity of the light-buoy, thence:
SE of a detached shoal area (21°29′⋅0N, 39°05′⋅7E),
with a least depth over it of 16⋅5 m, and thence:
To the pilot boarding position.
(Directions continue at 9.402)
Southern approach
(Directions for the east side of this part of the Red Sea are
given at 9.265)
9.398
1 Directions. From a position NW of Shi‘b Mismar
(21°20′N, 39°02′E) the track leads generally ENE for about
10 miles to the N-most pilot boarding position, passing:
NNW of Shi‘b Mismar (21°20′N, 39°02′E) (9.281)
from which Shi‘b Mismar Light (9.264) is
exhibited, thence:
2 SSE of a detached shoal patch (21°25′⋅7N, 39°02′⋅8E),
with a least depth over it of 17⋅1 m, which lies off
the SW corner of Rocky Bank (9.439) in the W
approaches to Al arq (9.401), thence:
3 NW of Murawwas (21°24′⋅4N, 39°05′⋅7E) a drying
reef which lies close off the NE side of Anchorage
276
E (9.383); No 9 Light-buoy (W cardinal) is moored
on the SW side of a shoal, with a least depth over
it of 6⋅8 m, which lies about 2 cables SW of the
reef. An area, through which it would be unsafe to
navigate, lies 1 cable NNW of the light-buoy.
Thence:
4 SE of No 2 Light-buoy (S cardinal) (21°26′⋅1N,
39°04′⋅3E) which is moored off the SE corner of
Rocky Bank, thence:
9.399
1 Passing:
NW of A amdyah (21°25′⋅4N, 39°06′⋅1E) a reef on
the E side of the channel between Rocky Bank
(9.439) and the off-lying reefs W of Jeddah, thence:
2 ESE of the Rocky Bank (21°27′⋅5N, 39°04′⋅0E), which
extends about 3 miles SSW across the outer
approaches to Jeddah. A number of named shoals,
marked by light-buoys, lie on this bank. Red sectors
of Shi‘b Jah
n Light (9.395), Shi‘b Qaam Light
and Shi‘b Mismar Light (9.264) cover the shoals
on the bank. Thence:
3 WNW of Shi‘b Jeddah (21°26′⋅6N, 39°06′⋅4E), a
narrow, drying reef which extends about 6 cables
in a N/S direction, situated on the E side of the
channel. A stranded wreck on an even keel, which
is radar conspicuous, lies on the W side of the
middle part of the reef; a dangerous wreck, marked
by a buoy (green conical), lies about 1 cable E of
the E side of the reef. Umm al Qa’, another reef,
lies close S of Shi‘b Jeddah, thence:
4 WNW of Shi‘b Qaam (21°27′⋅2N, 39°06′⋅6E) a
drying reef which lies on the S side of Al arq
(9.401). Shi‘b Qaam Light (white structure, black
rectangle topmark; racon) stands on the NE side of
the reef. A stranded wreck lies close off the N
extremity of the reef. Thence:
To the N pilot boarding position.
(Directions continue at 9.402)
Approach to the southern pilot boarding position
9.400
1 Directions. The approach to the JRD Tanker Terminals
(9.426), or southern pilot boarding position, is made passing
between Shi‘b Mismar (21°20′N, 39°02′E) (9.281) and the
S end of Rocky Bank (9.439) which lies across the outer
approaches to Jeddah; then to the pilot boarding position at
the N end of Anchorage E (9.383) as shown on the chart.
(Directions continue at 9.409)
Chart 2577
Northern entrance through to main commercial port
9.401
1 General remarks. Al arq (21°28′N, 39°07′E), Baw
bat
al Mamarral Wusá (Middle Gateway) (1 mile E) and
Baw
bat al Mamarr ad D
khilyah (Inner Gateway) (2 miles
E) form the principal channel through the off-lying reefs for
entry into the Port of Jeddah.
9.402
1 Directions. (continued from 9.397 and 9.399) The
channel leads about 2 miles E, passing (with positions
given from Baw
bat al Mamarral Wusá (Middle Gateway)
North Light-beacon (21°28′⋅0N, 39°07′⋅9E)):
2 N of the shoal area (1 miles WSW), with a least
depth over it of 9 m, which lies on the S side of Al
arq and N of the N end of Shi‘b Qaam (9.399);
the sea breaks over the outlying dangers which lie
N and S of Al arq. Thence:
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
3 S of the shoal patch (9 cables W), with a least depth
over it of 15⋅1 m, which lies in the N part of Al
arq, thence:
N of No 15 Light-buoy (9 cables WSW) (pillar, green)
which marks a dangerous wreck close S of the
fairway, thence:
4 S of the light-buoy (7 cables WNW) which is moored,
on the N edge of the dredged area of Al arq, S
of Shi‘b Jah
n. Shi‘b Jah
n is a partially drying reef
which extends about 8 cables in a N/S direction;
Shi‘b Jah
n Light (9.395) stands on the S part of
the E side of the drying part of Shi‘b Jah
n.
9.403
1 The channel continues E, passing:
S of Baw
bat al Mamarral Wusá (Middle Gateway)
North Light-beacon (red metal post, concrete base,
red square topmark) standing on the S end of Shi‘b
Falay
t, a reef which partly dries, thence:
2 N of Baw
bat al Mamarral Wusá (Middle Gateway)
South Light-beacon (black metal post, concrete base,
green triangular topmark) (2
cables SE) standing
on the N part of an unnamed coral reef situated on
the same bank as ’Irq al Lt, a coral reef about
1 cables S, thence:
3 S of Baw
bat al Mamarr ad D
khilyah (Inner
Gateway) North Light-beacon (red metal post,
concrete base, red square topmark) (9 cables E)
standing on the SW extremity of Bahri, a drying
reef that extends WSW from the S end of the
breakwater on the W side of the Service Harbour
(9.431). A light-buoy (red pillar) is moored 1 cable
ENE of the light-beacon. Thence:
4 N of Baw
bat al Mamarr ad D
khilyah (Inner
Gateway) South Light-beacon (black metal post,
concrete base, green triangular topmark) (1 mile
ESE) standing on the N end of Ab 
rith, a
drying reef which extends over 1 mile N/S, on the
W side of the South West Basin of the main
commercial port, thence:
5 S of Port of Jeddah Control Tower (1 mile E) which
stands on the S end of the breakwater situated on
the W side of the Service Harbour (9.431); Port of
Jeddah Control Tower Light (9.395) is exhibited
from the control tower. Thence:
Into the main commercial harbour of the Port of
Jeddah.
Minor Gateways
9.404
1 North Gateway (21°28′⋅0N, 39°07′⋅8E) and South
Gateway (1 mile S), lie N and S of Baw
bat al Mamarral
Wusá (Middle Gateway) (9.401); these two entrances are not
marked with navigational aids.
Local knowledge. The use of these two Gateways is not
recommended without local knowledge.
Middle entrance through to the oil terminals
9.405
1 Chyoda Island Oil Terminal (9.425) and JRD Tanker
Terminal (9.426) may be approached through an area
dredged to 16⋅4 m (1996) (21°26′⋅3N, 39°08′⋅0E), as shown
on the chart, which extends W from the entrance between
the breakwaters which leads to the JRD Tanker Terminals.
9.406
1 Caution. A shoal depth of 13⋅9 m lies within the area
dredged to 16⋅4 m in position 21°26′⋅4N, 39°08′⋅9E, close
off the head of the breakwater which lies on the S side of
the entrance to the JRD Tanker Terminals (9.426).
277
Approach from Al  ar q to the oil terminals
9.407
1 Directions. (Directions for the northern approach to
Jeddah are given at 9.397). From a position in Al arq
(9.401) the track leads initially S for about 2 miles through
the N part of Anchorage B (9.379), passing (with positions
given from Shi‘b Qaam Light (21°27′⋅2N, 39°06′⋅6E)):
E of No 15 Light-buoy (5
cables NE), thence:
2 W of No 13 Light-buoy (E cardinal) (9 cables ENE)
which marks the E side of a shoal, with a least
depth over it of 8⋅5 m, which lies about 4 cables W
of ’Irq al Lt (9.403). A shoal, with a least depth
over it of 5 m, lies 1 cables NNW of the
light-buoy. Thence:
E of Shi‘b Qaam Light (9.399) which stands on
Shi‘b Qaam, thence:
3 SW of No 8AP Buoy (red conical) (1 miles ESE)
which marks the W side of a shoal, with a least
depth over it of 3⋅6 m, that lies at the S end of a
line of shoals extending S from ’Irq al Lt, thence:
NE of No 7AP Buoy (green conical) (1 miles ESE)
which marks the N side of a shoal, with a least
depth over it of 7⋅5 m, that lies about 1 cable NE of
’Irq al Kabr. Thence:
4 S of No 8P Buoy (red can) (1
miles ESE) which is
moored on the boundary of the 16⋅4 m dredged area
fronting the entrance to the JRD Tanker Terminals
(9.426); and S of ’Irq Huwwah, a reef. Thence:
5 Proceed either to Chyoda Island Oil Terminal (9.425)
or through the breakwaters to the JRD Tanker
Terminals (9.426). See caution at 9.406. JRD Inner
Harbour (9.427), the Royal Saudi Naval Facility
(9.428) and the Ammunition Pier (9.429) may also
be approached from the N end of Restah (9.409).
(Directions for JRD Inner Harbour Approach Channel
are given at 9.414, for the Royal Saudi Naval Facility
Approach Channel at 9.416, and for the Ammunition
Pier Approach Channel at 9.418)
Approach from Baw bat al Mamarral Wus
á (Middle
Gateway) to the oil terminals
9.408
1 Directions. (Directions for the northern entrance to the
main commercial port passing through Bawºbat al
Mamarral Wusòá (Middle Gateway) are given at 9.402).
From a position in Baw
bat al Mamarral Wusá (Middle
Gateway) (9.401), the Chyoda Island Oil Terminal (9.425) or
the JRD Tanker Terminals (9.426), may also be approached
through Anchorage W1 (9.380).
2 The track leads mainly S for about 2 miles, passing (with
positions given from Baw
bat al Mamarr ad D
khilyah
(Inner Gateway) South Light-beacon (21°27′⋅8N,
39°08′⋅9E)):
E of Baw
bat al Mamarral Wusá (Middle Gateway)
South Light-beacon (8 cables W) (9.403), thence:
W of Baw
bat al Mamarr ad D
khilyah (Inner
Gateway) South Light-beacon (9.403), thence:
3 E of the unnamed coral reef (7 cables WSW) situated
near the E end of a ridge, on which there are
dangerous rocks, that extends E from ’Irq al Lt
(9.403). Thence:
W of a detached shoal (3 cables SSW), with a least
depth over it of 8 m, which lies off the W side of
Ab 
rith (9.403); and W of the two shoal areas
which lie 1 cable and 6 cables S, with least depths
over them of 9 m, that extend W from the W side
of Ab 
rith, thence:
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
4 Clear of the danger area (5
cables SW) which lies in
the NW part of Anchorage W1 (9.380), thence:
E of the dangerous below-water rock (7 cables SW)
which lies on the E side of a shoal, with a least
depth over it of 3⋅7 m; and E of the shoals which
lie up to 4 cables S. Thence:
5 E of ’Irq Huwwah (1 mile SSW) (9.407). Thence
proceed either to Chyoda Island Oil Terminal
(9.425) or through the breakwaters to the JRD
Tanker Terminals (9.426). See caution at 9.406. JRD
Inner Harbour (9.427), the Royal Saudi Naval
Facility (9.428) and the Ammunition Pier (9.429)
may also be approached through Restah (9.409).
(Directions for JRD Inner Harbour Approach Channel
are given at 9.414, for the Royal Saudi Naval Facility
Approach Channel at 9.416, and for the
Ammunition Pier Approach Channel at 9.418)
Southern Entrance Channel to the south end of Restah
9.409
1 Directions (continued from 9.400). From a position about
7 cables WSW of Murawwas (21°24′⋅4N, 39°05′⋅7E) (9.398)
in the vicinity of the JRD Tanker Terminals pilot boarding
position, the track leads ENE for about 3 miles, through a
channel dredged to 16⋅6 m, to the S end of Restah, the wide
inner channel which leads N through the reefs fronting
Jeddah, passing (with positions given from No 2B
Light-beacon (21°24′⋅1N, 39°07′⋅8E)):
S of No 9 Light-buoy (W cardinal) (2 miles W),
thence:
2 SSE of No 2 Light-buoy (red pillar) (1 miles WNW)
moored on the N side of the outer end of the
dredged channel which leads to Restah, and NNW
of No 1 Light-buoy (green pillar) (1 miles W)
moored on the S side of the outer end of the
dredged channel, N of Ash Shi‘bayn, an area of
reefs lying on a bank where there are a number of
dangerous rocks; a shoal, with a least depth over it
of 6⋅2 m, lies about 1 cable E of the light-buoy just
iyah
outside the S boundary of the dredged channel,
thence:
3 SSE of No 2A Light-buoy (red cylindrical) (1 miles
WNW) moored on the S end of a shoal, with a
least depth over it of 1 m; a dangerous wreck lies
on the W side of this shoal, thence:
4 NNW of No 1A Light-buoy (green conical) (1 miles
W) moored on the S side of the dredged channel.
Thence:
5 SSE of a dangerous below-water rock (1 miles
WNW) which lies close S of the S end of Umm as
Sayl, a reef on a bank on which there are a number
of other dangerous rocks, thence:
SSE of a shoal (1 mile NW), with a least depth over it
of 9 m, thence:
9.410
1 Passing:
SSE of No 4 Light-buoy (red pillar) (8 cables NW) and
NNW of No 3 Light-buoy (green pillar) (6
cables
WNW), thence:
SSE of an unnamed reef (8 cables NNW) which lies
about 1 cable NNW of the N boundary of the
dredged channel, thence:
2 NNW of Shi‘b Mamd (1 cables N) a coral reef
situated on the SSE side of the inner end of the
dredged channel, thence:
278
SSE of Qia Shi‘b Mamd (8 cables N) a coral reef
situated on the N side of the inner end of the
dredged channel, thence:
NNW of No 5 Light-buoy (green pillar) (5 cables
NNE) moored on the S side of the inner end of the
dredged channel, thence:
3 SSE of No 6 Light-buoy (red pillar) (8 cables N)
moored on the N side of the inner end of the
dredged channel, then into the S end of Restah.
(Directions for JRD Inner Harbour Approach Channel
are given at 9.414, for the Royal Saudi Naval Facility
Approach Channel at 9.416, and for the Ammunition
Pier Approach Channel at 9.418)
Alternative approach to the south end of Restah
9.411
1 The S end of Restah (9.409) can also be approached
through a channel, about 6 cables wide, which leads S of
Ash Shi‘bayn (9.409) and Shi‘b Mamd (9.410). This
channel is probably mainly used by vessels of the Royal
Saudi Navy and by vessels bound for the Ammunition Pier
(9.429).
2 The channel is marked on the S side of its outer end by
No 1A Light-beacon (21°22′⋅8N, 39°06′⋅5E). A shoal, with a
least depth over it of 6⋅6 m, lies close N of the light-beacon.
A further light-beacon (6 cables N) marks the N side of the
outer end of the channel. A shoal, with a least depth over it
of 10 m, lies close S of the light-beacon.
3 The inner end of the channel is marked on its S side by
No 2A Light-beacon (21°23′⋅5N, 39°07′⋅9E). A buoy (black
and white conical) is moored about 1 cables SSW on the
edge of the adjacent reef; No 2B Light-beacon (6 cables N)
marks the N side of the inner end of the channel.
4 A least depth in the channel of 15 m can be found by
initially favouring the N side of the outer end of the channel,
then passing S of an unmarked shoal, with a least depth over
it of 7 m, which lies about 2
cables SSW of No 2B
Light-beacon.
Wa
9.412
1 Wayah (21°25′⋅4N, 39°07′⋅7E) is a reef situated on the
W side of Restah (9.409); shoal water, on which there are
other reefs and dangerous rocks, extends both N and S of
Wayah.
A conspicuous stranded wreck lies on the W side of
Wayah. No 6P Buoy (red pillar) is moored about 1 cables
E of the reef.
Butaylat al Wayah is a small chain of reefs extending
about 4 cables SSW from off the W side of Wayah.
9.413
1 Caution. A number of unnamed reefs and dangerous
rocks, whose positions are best seen on the chart, lie W of
Wayah, between the S end of Anchorage B (9.379) and
Southern Entrance Channel (9.409).
JRD Inner Harbour Approach Channel
9.414
1 Directions (continued from 9.410). From a position E of
the inner end of the Southern Entrance Channel (9.409),
which leads to the S end of Restah (9.409), the track extends
generally NE for about 2 miles, through the JRD Inner
Harbour Approach Channel, which is dredged to a least
depth of 13⋅4 m (1996) towards JRD Inner Harbour (9.427),
passing (with positions given from No 6 Light-beacon
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
situated in Royal Saudi Naval Facility Main Approach
Channel (21°25′⋅4N, 39°09′⋅8E)):
2 NNW of No 17 Light-buoy (isolated danger) (1 mile
WSW) which is moored on the SW part of a shoal
area, with a least depth of 9⋅5 m over it, and
through which it is considered dangerous to
navigate, thence:
3 SSE of No 8 Light-buoy (red pillar) (1 mile WSW)
which marks the N side of the outer end of the
dredged channel. The light-buoy is moored about
400 m SW of a coral reef which extends S from the
island of Shi‘b as Sayf which itself extends about
8 cables S from the S end of the breakwater
opposite JRD Tanker Terminal No 2 (9.426), and:
4 NNE of No 7 Light-buoy (green conical) (1 mile
WSW) which marks the S side of the outer end of
the dredged channel, thence:
SSE of No 10 Light-buoy (red cylindrical) (7 cables
WSW) and NNE of No 9 Light-buoy (green
conical) (7 cables WSW), thence:
5 SSE of No 12 Light-buoy (red conical) (6 cables
WSW). Thence:
9.415
1 Passing:
NW of No 11 Light-buoy (green conical) (4 cables
WSW) and WNW of No 11A Light-buoy (green
conical) (2 cables W) both of which mark the SE
side of the channel, thence:
2 ESE of No 14 Light-buoy (red pillar) (4 cables
WNW). Light-buoys No R10 (red pillar) and No R8
(red pillar) lie 1 cable and 2 cables, respectively,
NW of No 14 Light-buoy on the NE side of a
narrow channel which leads from the JRD Inner
Harbour Approach Channel to the vicinity of JRD
Tanker Terminal No 3 (9.426). Thence:
3 W of No 13 Light-buoy (green pillar) (3 cables NW)
and No 15 Light-buoy (green conical) (4 cables
NNW) which mark the E side of the channel and
the W side of the shoals and reef on which stands
Jabal Ab a’ad, an island situated between the
JRD Inner Harbour Approach Channel and the
Royal Saudi Naval Facility (9.428). Thence:
4 E of No R6 Light-buoy (port hand) (5 cables NW),
and No 6 Buoy (port hand) which lies close NNW.
No 16 Light-buoy (port hand) lies farther NNE. All
these three buoys are moored on the W side of the
channel, off the SE end of the quay which services
the JRD Tanker Terminal Berths (9.426). Thence:
5 E of No 18 Light-buoy (red pillar) (7 cables NNW),
and W of No 17 Light-buoy (green pillar), then into
the turning basin, marked by Light-buoys Nos 19
and 20 (yellow conical), which front the berths of
JRD Inner Harbour (9.427).
Royal Saudi Naval Facility Main Approach Channel
9.416
1 Directions (continued from 9.410). From a position E of
the inner end of the Southern Entrance Channel (9.409),
which leads to the S end of Restah (9.409), the track extends
NE for about 2 miles, through the Royal Saudi Naval
Facility Approach Channel, which is dredged to 11⋅6 m
(1981) passing (with positions given from No 6 Light-beacon
(21°25′⋅4N, 39°09′⋅8E)):
SSW of No 17 Light-buoy (isolated danger) (1 mile
WSW), thence:
279
2 NW of No 1E Light-beacon (green) (1 mile SW); and
SE of No 2E Light-beacon (red) (1 mile SW),
thence:
NW of No 1 Light-buoy (green pillar) (7 cables SW);
and SE of No 2 Light-buoy (red pillar) (7 cables
SW). Thence:
NW of No 3 Light-buoy (green pillar) (4 cables SW);
and SE of No 4 Light-buoy (red pillar) (3 cables
SW), thence:
3 NW of No 5 Light-beacon (green) (120 m SSE), and
SE of No 6 Light-beacon (red), thence:
SE of No R14 Light-buoy (red pillar) (1 cable NE);
and NW of a light-beacon (2 cables E). Thence:
SE of No 8 Light (2 cables NE) which stands on the
edge of the shoal water SE of Jabal Ab a’ad,
then into the dredged area which lies opposite the
Royal Saudi Naval Facility (9.428), and is marked
by lights and light-buoys.
Link Channel
9.417
1 Link Channel (21°25′⋅9N, 39°09′⋅7E) is a channel which
leads about 4 cables NE from the JRD Inner Harbour
Approach Channel (9.414) to the Royal Saudi Naval Facility
(9.428).
The channel is entered from its SW end N of No 15
Light-buoy, passing NW of Jabal Ab a’ad.
2 The Link Channel enters the area of the Naval Harbour at
the N end of the dredged area fronting the Royal Saudi
Naval Facility, between No R12 Light-buoy (red pillar) and
No R11 Light-buoy (black pillar).
Ammunition Pier Approach Channel
9.418
1 The Ammunition Pier (21°23′⋅3N, 39°10′⋅0E) (9.429) is
approached from the NW, through the off-lying reefs, by a
designated approach channel in which there is a least depth
of 6 m, though a depth of 4⋅5 m is charted on the N edge of
the channel.
9.419
1 Directions (continued from 9.410). From its outer end in
the SE corner of Restah (9.409) the approach channel leads
1 miles ESE, passing (with positions given from the head
of the Ammunition Pier (21°23′⋅3N, 39°10′⋅0E)):
SSW of A2E Light (1 miles WNW) which marks the
N side of the outer end of the approach channel,
thence:
2 NNE of A1E Light (1 miles WNW) which marks the
S side of the outer end of the approach channel,
thence:
SSW of Shi‘b Wusá (1 mile NW) a large area of coral
reef; further smaller, unnamed coral reefs and
dangerous rocks lie outside the N side of the
approach channel. Jabal al Wusá, a small island,
stands on the SE corner of the Shi‘b Wusá.
Thence:
3 NNE of a dangerous rock (1 mile WNW) which lies
about 1 cables NE of the N end of Shi‘bat ’Al, a
large area of coral reef; further smaller, unnamed
coral reefs and dangerous rocks lie outside the S
side of the approach channel. Jazrat ’Al, a small
island, stands on the SE corner of Shi‘bat ’Al,
thence:
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
4 SSW of an unnamed reef (5 cables NW) situated about
2 cables SW of Shi‘b Ab ufrah; a small thin
island lies on the E side of Shi‘b Ab ufrah,
thence:
Between the two parts of Shi‘b urratayn (3 cables
NNW and 5 cables W) a reef which lies on both
sides of the approach channel; and then to the
Ammunition Pier (9.429).
Berths
Commercial port
9.420
1 The main commercial port (21°28′⋅0N, 39°09′⋅5E) caters
for a variety of cargo types and consists of 58 numbered
berths in three separate basins.
9.421
1 North Basin. The North Basin consists of numbered
berths Nos 1 to 21; the basin is dredged to 15⋅0 m (2002),
with alongside depths from 5 m to 14 m which are best seen
on the chart.
Berths Nos 4 to 7, situated on the W and N sides of the
basin, have a total quay length of 1000 m and comprise the
Jeddah Northern Container Terminal.
2 Ro-Ro terminals are situated between Berths Nos 6 and 7,
between Berths Nos 8 and 9, and at berths Nos 15 to 20.
Bulk grain is also handled at Berths Nos 1 to 6. A
two-storey combined pilgrim hall and transit shed is situated
abreast No 21 Berth.
Small vessel berths and a slip are situated in two small
basins, dredged to 5⋅0 m, which lie in the SE corner of
North Basin.
9.422
1 South East Basin. The South East Basin consists of
numbered Berths Nos 22 to 49; the basin is dredged to
12⋅0 m, with alongside depths from 11 to 12 m which are
best seen on the chart.
A container terminal is situated in the SE corner of the
basin; bulk cement is handled at No 37 Berth.
9.423
1 South West Basin. The South West Basin has berthing
on its S and E sides; its W side is formed by Ab 
rith
(9.403); the basin consists of numbered Berths Nos 50 to 58
and is dredged to 15⋅5 m with alongside depths of from 15⋅5
to 14⋅0 m which are best seen on the chart.
A container terminal forms the E side of the basin; a
livestock terminal is situated at Nos 57 and 58 Berths, which
can handle up to 59 000 animals per day, and forms the S
side of the basin.
2 A channel, about 160 m wide and dredged to 14 m, leads
from the SW corner of the basin to the vicinity of the JRD
Tanker Terminals (9.426). A submarine pipeline (9.425)
crosses the S end of this channel.
Oil terminals
9.424
1 Berthing and unberthing is only permitted at the oil
terminals between 0700 and 1600 hours.
9.425
1 Chyoda Island Oil Terminal (21°26′⋅6N, 39°08′⋅9E) is
situated close S of Ab 
rith (9.403).
Vessels berth with two anchors down and the stern
secured to mooring buoys; loading hoses are embarked
amidships with crude oil delivered to the port side and
bunker oil to the starboard.
2 Berthing and unberthing is carried out at any state of the
tide; a minimum of two tugs is normally required, with three
280
used for larger vessels. Tugs attend about 4 cables SW of the
entrance to the JRD Tanker Terminals (9.426).
Submarine pipeline. A submarine pipeline is laid ENE
from the terminal, across the N end of the basin containing
the JRD Tanker Terminals.
See 1.21.
9.426
1 JRD Tanker Terminals (21°26′⋅2N, 39°09′⋅2E) consist
of three dolphin-type berths situated off the W side of the
causeway which extends about 8 cables S and forms the W
side of JRD Inner Harbour (9.427).
The facility is used for the loading of crude oil; the berths
can handle tankers up to 100 000 dwt, 260 m LOA and up
to 12⋅8 m draught.
9.427
1 JRD Inner Harbour (21°26′⋅5N, 39°09′⋅5E) is a basin,
entered through JRD Inner Harbour Approach Channel
(9.414), which contains JRD Inner Harbour Berths Nos 1 to
8; the facility can handle up to eight vessels between 6000
and 49 000 dwt, berthed stern-to with one, or both, anchors
down.
2 Depths within the basin are generally from 10 to 14 m,
but less alongside depths lie W of Berth No 1.
Royal Saudi Naval Facility
9.428
1 Al Q
‘idat al Baryah al Malakyah as Su‘dyah
(21°25′⋅8N, 39°10′⋅3E) is the Royal Saudi Naval Facility.
The base, which is fronted by a basin, is situated in the SE
corner of the the port.
The base is approached through Royal Saudi Naval
Facility Approach Channel (9.416).
Ammunition Pier
9.429
1 An Ammunition Pier (21°23′⋅3N, 39°10′⋅0E) is situated in
the SE corner of the port and is connected by a causeway
which extends about 1400 m WNW from the shore.
The pier is approached through Ammunition Pier
Approach Channel (9.418) which is entered from the S end
of Restah (9.409).
Jeddah Ship Repair Yard
9.430
1 Jeddah Ship Repair Yard (21°28′⋅7N, 39°09′⋅1E) lies on
the W side of the North Basin (9.421) of the commercial
port, within an area dredged to 8⋅0 m.
The yard is approached through Anchorage A (9.378).
The yard has two repair jetties each equipped with a
15 tonnes capacity crane and also two floating docks.
Lights are exhibited from the seaward ends of both
floating docks; further lights are exhibited from dolphins
situated about 80 m W of both repair jetty heads.
Obstruction lights are exhibited from the crane heads.
Service Harbour
9.431
1 A Service Harbour (21°28′⋅3N, 39°09′⋅0E) for harbour
craft which is entered NE of Baw
bat al Mamarr ad
D
khilyah (Inner Gateway) (9.401) lies immediately S of
the ship repair yard.
Port services
Repairs
9.432
1 A 24 hour repair service is available from Jeddah Ship
Repair Yard (9.430) where there are two floating docks of
19 000 tonnes and 11 000 tonnes lifting capacity.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 9
Slipways for small vessels are situated within the small
craft basin located in the SE corner of the North Basin
(9.421) of the main commercial port.
Facilities
9.433
1 Rail mounted quay cranes between 3 and 6 tonnes
capacity; mobile cranes; floating crane 200 tonnes capacity;
lighters; fire-fighting tugs; medical facilities; hospital; dental
facilities.
Supplies
9.434
1 Fuel oil; diesel oil; fresh water (rather hard) from quay or
barge but supplies are limited; fresh provisions.
Both fuel and diesel oil can be supplied by barge to
vessels anchored in Anchorage B (9.379), the usual
designated anchorage position for vessels requiring bunkers
is about 5 cables E of Shi‘b Qaam Light (21°27′⋅2N,
39°06′⋅6E) (9.399).
Communications
9.435
1 International airport at Jeddah situated about 19 km N of
the port.
Regular communication by sea with all parts of the world.
Harbour regulations
9.436
1 A guard is placed at the gangway and no crew member
or other person is allowed to go ashore without prior
ar (21°27′⋅9N, 39°03′⋅5E) lies on the NW
permission.
Photography is prohibited within the port area; no
photographs are allowed to be taken without written
permission of the Port Authority.
Failure to place ratguards on mooring ropes is liable to
ar.
result in a penalty.
2 Any stowaway discovered on board must be kept under
guard, under no circumstances must they be allowed to
disembark in Saudi Arabia.
Vessels calling at Jeddah are forbidden to carry dogs.
Vessels may not immobilise their main engines without
permission from the Jeddah Port Authority.
3 No vessel is allowed to depart Jeddah unless all outward
clearance formalities are completed. This regulation also
applies to vessels calling at Anchorage B (9.379) for
bunkers.
9.437
1 Alcohol and tobacco. Customs regulations strictly
prohibit the landing of alcohol. During a vessels stay in port
stocks of alcohol and tobacco may only be held on board
under seal. There is no exception to this rule.
Vessels are liable to be thoroughly searched without
notice. Any container of alcohol, whatsoever, found out of
the sealed store can result in considerable trouble and incur
heavy penalties.
Rescue
9.438
1 A MRCC has been established at Jeddah. See 1.69.
For further details, see Admiralty List of Radio Signals,
Volume 5.
281
Rocky Bank
Chart 2599
9.439
1 A bank (21°28′N, 39°04′E), charted as Rocky Bank, lies
in the W approaches to Jeddah (9.342), about 3 miles W of
Al arq (9.401). There are seven named shoals situated on
this bank; on one of which there is a dangerous rock and,
over the others, a least depth of 2⋅5 m.
The shoals are marked by light-buoys and are covered by
the red sectors of Shi‘b Mismar Reef Light (21°20′N,
39°02′E) (9.264), Shi‘b Jah
n Reef Light (21°28′⋅6N,
39°07′⋅1E) (9.395) and Shi‘b Qaam Reef Light (21°27′⋅2N,
39°06′⋅6E) (9.399).
Ab al Yah d
9.440
1 Ab al Yahd (21°28′⋅4N, 39°04′⋅4E), with a least depth
over it of 5⋅2 m, is the NE-most shoal lying on Rocky Bank;
No 8 Light-buoy is moored about 3 cables E of the shoal.
’Irq as Sunn yah
9.441
1 ’Irq as Sunnyah (21°28′⋅3N, 39°03′⋅9E) lies on the N
part of Rocky Bank; No 1 Light-buoy (N cardinal) is
moored 3 cables WNW of the shoal, and No 7 Light-buoy (S
cardinal) is moored 2 cables S.
A shoal area, with a least depth over it of 5 m and
through which it is unsafe to navigate, lies close N of No 7
Light-buoy.
Ab al Akh ar
9.442
1 Ab al Akh
part of the bank; a stranded wreck (position approximate),
which is radar conspicuous, lies on the E side of the reef.
Al Fawq
n, with a least depth over it of 8⋅6 m, is another
named reef on Rocky Bank situated close W of Ab al
Akh
Al Kharr bah al Bar yah
9.443
1 Al Kharrbah al Baryah (21°27′⋅6N, 39°03′⋅0E) consists
of two shoal areas on the W side of Rocky Bank; there is a
least depth of 5 m over the NE end of the larger of the
shoals.
No 5 Light-buoy (W cardinal) is moored over the middle
part of the S end of the larger shoal; No 6 Light-buoy (S
cardinal) is moored about 3
cables S.
Ab Nalhah
9.444
1 Ab Nalhah (21°26′⋅5N, 39°03′⋅7E), over which the sea
breaks if there is any swell, lies on the S part of Rocky
Bank.
Further shoals lie up to 1 mile SW; the SW-most of these
shoals has a least depth over it of 17⋅1 m.
2 No 4 Light-buoy (W cardinal) is moored over the W side
of the shoal; No 2 Light-buoy (S cardinal) is moored about
1 mile SE, E of a shoal area with a least depth over it of
18 m.
Al Wast
n is a shoal area, over which the sea breaks if
there is any swell, which lies close N of Ab Nalhah; a
dangerous rock lies on the shoal; No 3 Light-buoy (N
cardinal) is moored about 1 cable NNE of Al Wast
n in the
S part of Anchorage C (9.381).
Home Contents Index

¯ Farasan
Chapter 10 - Red Sea - east side. Jeddah to Oreste Point, including Jaza'ir ¯

38° 39° 40° 41° 42° 43°

22° 22°

2599

Jeddah
2577

2658
21° 21°

2659

S AU D I
ARABIA

157
20° 20°
10
.9

19° 19°

- Reef
Abu Kulur

18° -
Ras Qassar 18°
10

10.2
158 00
.65

17° 17°
16 10.174
Jizºn
-
Farasan
Islands
10

10
.2

.17
32

0
int e
Po rest
O

ERITREA
15

16° 16°
143

38° 39° Longitude 40° East from Greenwich 42° 43°

0205

282
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 10
RED SEA — EAST SIDE — JEDDAH TO ORESTE POINT
GENERAL INFORMATION
Chart 4704
Scope of the chapter
10.1
1 The area described in this chapter covers that part of the
coast of Saudi Arabia which lies in the central part of the E
side of the Red Sea between Ar Ra’s al Aswad (21°20′N,
39°06′E) (9.266) and Oreste Point 364 miles SE (10.234).
This chapter also includes a description of the port of
Jz
n (16°54′N, 42°32′E) (10.174).
AR RA’S AL ASWAD TO ABU KUL R REEF
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 157, 158, 2659
Route
10.3
1 The route described in this section extends from a
position about 28 miles W of Ar Ra’s al Aswad (21°20′N,
39°06′E) (9.266), SSE for 182 miles, to a position about
30 miles WSW of Abu Kulr Reef (18°41′N, 40°36′E)
(10.13).
Topography
10.4
1 The coast between Ra’s al Aswad (21°22′N, 39°08′E)
(9.266) and Ab Shawk Inlet (30 miles SSE) (10.48) is low
and fringed by a reef which extends over 1 mile offshore, in
places. Many detached reefs also lie off this stretch of the
coast.
10.5
1 Between Ab Shawk Inlet (20°55′N, 39°22′E) and Al
Lth (70 miles SE) the coast is again fringed by reefs; Shi‘ab
Ab Shawk (20°48′N, 39°19′E) (10.10), the farthest N of
which lie about 5 miles SSW of Ab Shawk, are a line of
offshore dangerous reefs which extend about 14 miles SSE
to Tawl Raghw
n (10.10).
A deep channel is situated between the coast and these
offshore reefs. Several dangerous rocks lie within this
channel.
2 Caution. No attempt whatsoever should be made to pass
across this line of dangerous offshore reefs. See 10.49 for a
description of the approach passage to Ab Shawk Inlet.
10.6
1 That part of the mainland which lies in the vicinity of Al
Lth (20°09′N, 40°16′E) and within about 20 miles of the
coast, is backed by a number of hills and smaller mountains.
Higher mountains rise behind, which are also backed by the
main escarpment of the interior mountains.
2 This main escarpment, which is not always visible,
(20°33′N, 40°13′E). Jabal Akt
f
extends from a position about 100 miles E of Ra’s al Aswad
(21°22′N, 39°08′E) (9.266), 45 miles S, to the vicinity of
Jabal ‘Unsar (20°38′N, 40°56′E) (not charted by name) from
where, masked by a mass of high mountains, the escarpment
283
Topography
10.2
1 Between Jeddah (21°28′N, 39°10′E) (9.342) and Jazrat
Kamar
n (Kamar
n Island) (420 miles SSE) (11.12) the coast
of Saudi Arabia is bordered by reefs and banks; S of Al Lth
(20°09′N, 40°16′E) these reefs and banks extend up to
60 miles offshore.
2 Caution. The Faras
n Bank (10.14), which embraces this
area of offshore dangers, is encumbered with imperfectly
charted reefs such that it is dangerous to attempt to cross
over the bank throughout most of its length.
turns SE; the summit of Jabal ‘Unsar shows over this main
escarpment.
Caution
10.7
1 The area of reefs lying S of Shi‘b Mismar (21°20′N,
39°02′E) (9.281) should be given a wide berth. Uncharted
coral heads may exist within the 100 m depth contour in this
area.
A good clearance should be given to all charted reefs.
Reefs which dry during the summer months when N winds
are blowing may be covered by 1 m of water when S winds
blow. See 9.259.
Chart 158
Principal marks
10.8
1 Landmarks:
2 Jabal Ab 
di’ (20°26′N, 40°00′E) stands about
2 miles SW of Jabal Al Jizmah and has a
remarkable sharp peak resembling a tower, but,
from the SSE, the summit has the appearance of a
rugged double peak and of being much larger than
when seen from the W. Jabal Ab 
di’ rises near
the W extremity of a branch of the range of
mountains which extend S from Jabal arqafah
(20°47′N, 40°06′E).
3 Jabal Dabarah (20°25′N, 40°10′E) has a double peak;
another double peak stands about 2 miles SSW.
From the W, these two double peaks appear to be
the summits of two sloping wedge-shaped
mountains.
Jabal al Jabb
ra (20°20′N, 40°30′E), which is not
named on chart 158, rises to 595 m and stands
about 17 miles NE of Al Lth; the mountain is triple
peaked and forms a good mark.
4 Jabal Musamma (20°09′N, 40°32′E) is a conspicuous,
isolated, rocky hill standing about 15 miles E of Al
Lth.
Jabal Al Abaya
(20°48′N, 39°53′E), Jabal An Natif (20°38′N,
40°40′E), Jabal Nuq (20°23′N, 40°05′E) and Jabal
Shir
f (20°33′N, 40°04′E) are all prominent
charted peaks.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 10
Directions
(continued from 9.266)
Charts 158, 2658, 2659
10.9
1 From a position about 28 miles W of Ar Ra’s al Aswad
(21°20′N, 39°06′E) (9.266) the track leads SSE, passing:
WSW of ’Irq al Ghur
b (21°16′N, 39°01′E) a drying
reef which is steep-to on its W side; the sea nearly
always breaks over this reef. See caution at 10.7.
Thence:
2 WSW of Kobbein Reef (21°13′N, 39°03′E) a
dangerous reef standing on the N part of an
off-lying bank which extends from a position about
Humais (20°15′N, 39°29′E) (4.15)
7 miles SW of Ar Ra’s al Aswad for about 24 miles
SSE, parallel with the coast. In 1988, a small
stranded wreck was reported to lie on the E side of
this bank, about 2 miles SE of the N end of
Kobbein Reef. Shoal areas, with least depths over
them from 13 to 18 m, lie 2 miles and 2 miles W,
respectively, of the reef, thence:
3 WSW of Al Qar ash Sh
myah (21°10′N, 39°03′E) a
further dangerous reef over which the sea breaks,
which lies on the N part of the off-lying bank. A
dangerous area lies off the S side of the reef in
which there are several dangerous rocks; other
dangerous rocks and reefs lie between Kobbein Reef
and Al Qar ash Sh
myah, thence:
4 WSW of Al Qar al Yam
nyah (21°06′N, 39°02′E)
another dangerous reef over which the sea breaks,
situated on the NW part of the off-lying bank.
Shoal areas, with least depths over them from 19⋅0
to 19⋅9 m, lie 2 miles N and 2 miles NW,
respectively, of the reef. Thence:
5 WSW of a dangerous rock (21°03′N, 38°58′E)
(existence doubtful) which lies about 4 miles SW
of Al Qar al Yam
nyah. A shoal area, with a least
depth over it of 14⋅6 m, lies about 9 miles E,
thence:
6 WSW of Qi’at a afiyah (21°01′N, 39°11′E) a
dangerous reef, on which there are a number of
dangerous rocks, which lies on the NE side of the
off-lying bank. Two detached and dangerous rocks
lie about 1 mile SSE (reported 1923) (position
approximate) and 2 miles SE of the reef, within
the channel (10.51) which lies between the off-lying
bank and the coast. It is inadvisable to attempt to
cross this bank between Al Qar al Yam
nyah and
Qi’at a afiyah as this area has not been properly
examined. See caution at 10.7, thence:
7 WSW of Qia’ Kidan (20°56′N, 39°11′E) which lies
on the SW side of the off-lying bank and consists
of a group of dangerous reefs over which the sea
breaks. A shoal (reported 1906) with a least depth
over it of 5⋅5 m, lies about 1
miles WNW of the
N end of the group; an area of dangerous coral lies
close S of the shoal. Thence:
Chart 158
10.10
1 Passing:
WSW of Shi‘ab Ab Shawk (20°48′N, 39°19′E) the
N-most end of a line of dangerous off-lying reefs
which extend about 14 miles SSE to awl
Raghw
n. No attempt should be made to pass
through this line of reefs. Thence:
2 WSW of awl Raghw
n (20°37′N, 39°23′E) a
dangerous reef which is the S-most of the line of
284
dangerous reefs which extends S from Shi‘ab Ab
Shawk. A patch of discoloured water, with a least
depth over it of 18⋅3 m, (reported 1916) lies about
10 miles SE of Tawl Raghw
n. Note this reported
shoal patch has not been examined and there may
well be less water over it than reported, thence:
3 WSW of Shi‘b ash-Shaj‘ah (20°21′N, 39°31′E), a reef
with a drying rock close N, situated about 5 miles
WSW of the coastal settlement of Makram; an
extensive shallow bank, with a least depth over it of
2⋅8 m and on which there are a number of
dangerous rocks and reefs, lies between Shi‘b
ash-Shaj‘ah and the shore, thence:
4 WSW of Qa
which consists of a series of low, sandy islets
standing on two steep-to reefs. Thence:
WSW of Shi‘b at-Taw
m
n (20°11′N, 39°49′E) a
drying, steep-to reef, on which stands a sandy cay.
Between the reef and the coast to the N lies the S
end of the extensive off-lying shallow bank, thence:
Charts 157, 158
10.11
1 Passing:
WSW of Shi‘b Jan
b (19°55′N, 39°57′E) a reef at the
N end of the Faras
n Bank (10.14) which dries near
its centre and over which the sea breaks. Shi‘b
Sulaym is a drying reef which lies about 2 miles E
of Shi‘b Jan
b; Shi‘b Sahabak is another drying
reef which lies about 2 miles SSE of Shi‘b Jan
b
and on which there are two remarkable brown
patches about 2 miles within its SE extremity. The
positions of these three adjacent reefs are doubtful;
the currents in their vicinity are strong, and
uncertain in direction; depths are too great for
anchorage. Thence:
2 WSW of Dohra Islet (19°50′N, 39°54′E), a low islet
covered with scrub which lies on the NE edge of a
small coral reef. Marmar (Abu Handal) is a coral
islet lying about 1 miles E of Dohra Islet; this islet
is low and sandy with a prominent clump of bushes
near its SW extremity; it is surrounded by a coral
reef, thence:
3 WSW of an unnamed reef (19°46′N, 39°53′E) which
lies about 3 miles W of Al Jadr Islet, a sandy islet
fringed by a coral reef, thence:
WSW of Malta Islet (19°45′N, 39°55′E) which lies on
the E side of a small coral reef; the islet is low and
sandy, of a whitish appearance and may be
identified by some white graves. A drying rock lies
about 3 miles ENE. Thence:
4 WSW of Shi‘b as Sabah (19°38′N, 40°01′E) a
dangerous reef. Shi‘b Sha’r, another coral reef on
which there are some dangerous rocks, lies about
5 cables SE of the S end of Shi‘b as Sab’ah. Shi‘b
al Girb lies a farther 5 miles ESE. Further unnamed
coral reefs and dangers lie in this vicinity, thence:
10.12
1 Passing:
WSW of Shi‘b ’Amm
r, (19°34′N, 40°00′E) a
horseshoe-shaped reef, thence:
WSW of Danak Islet (19°32′N, 40°02′E) a coral islet,
about 4 m high which is fringed by a reef and
covered with bushes. Two cairns each about 3 m
high stand on the N and the SE sides of the islet. A
drying rock lies about 5 cables SSE of the islet;
further unnamed reefs and drying rocks lie NE of
the islet, thence:
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 10
2 WSW of Shi‘b Mudharr (19°28′N, 40°02′E) a coral
reef, thence:
WSW of Jabb
ra Islet (19°27′N, 40°03′E) a low,
sandy, coral islet which is fringed by a steep-to reef.
Shi‘b al Ma’dhn is a further reef situated about
2 miles NE on which stands a sandy cay; further
unnamed reefs and drying rocks lie in this vicinity,
thence:
WSW of Shi‘b as S
qah (19°22′N, 40°07′E) a reef on
which lies a coral islet, thence:
3 WSW of a shoal area (19°20′N, 39°58′E), with a least
depth over it of 31 m, mud. Thence:
WSW of Shi‘b Dauqa (19°13′N, 40°09′E) a coral reef
over which the sea breaks; further unnamed reefs
and drying rocks lie in this vicinity, thence:
10.13
1 Passing:
WSW of Mubarak (19°00′N, 40°08′E) (4.16) which
lies close to the W edge of the N end of the
FARAS N BANK — NORTHERN PART
GENERAL INFORMATION
Chart 157
Description
10.14
1 The Faras
n Bank (18°00′N, 41°00′E), the N extremity of
which lies about 12 miles SW of Al Lth (20°09′N, 40°16′E)
extends about 320 miles SSE to a position SW of Kamar
n
Island (15°21′N, 42°35′E) (11.12).
For the most part the bank has a width of about 50 miles.
The Faras
n Bank is encumbered with many dangers; the
charted positions of these dangers are considered to be
doubtful.
See caution at 10.20.
10.15
1 Inner Channel. An Inner Channel Route (10.21) extends
along the E side of the Faras
n Bank from the vicinity of Al
Lth (20°09′N, 40°16′E) to the vicinity of Ma
q Kamar
n
(15°18′N, 42°39′E) (11.14) at its S end, which lies about
65 miles S of Oreste Point (10.234).
The Inner Channel is encumbered with many dangers; the
fairway varies in width from about 5 cables to 12 miles.
Depths
10.16
1 In winter and early spring the level of the Red Sea is
higher than in summer. This difference in sea level, though
small, is such that it has a considerable effect on the
visibility of the reefs; those reefs which dry in summer are
usually covered in winter and show as light green water.
Shoals which lie in the deeper parts of the Inner Channel
are generally found near the 40 m depth contour. Depths of
less than 40 m should therefore be approached with caution.
Passages across Faras n Bank
10.17
1 In an emergency, if it is necessary to pass from seaward
over the Faras
n Bank to the Inner Channel (10.21), the
bank should be approached at such a time so as to complete
the crossing during the hours of daylight. Some of the
below-water dangers on the bank are only visible in clear
weather with the sun astern.
2 There are no known recommended navigable channels
across the Faras
n Bank other than the Jz
n North Approach
285
Faras
n Bank (10.14), thence:
WSW of Mur
bit al Khail (19°01′N, 40°20′E) which
consists of two separate coral reefs over which the
sea breaks, thence:
2 WSW of Shi‘b al Kh
tim (Ring Reef) (18°58′N,
40°22′E) a coral reef over whose outer edge the sea
breaks; within the reef there is apparently deep
water. Thence:
WSW of Shi‘b Mar
s (18°52′N, 40°22′E), a dangerous
reef over which the sea breaks, and the dangerous
rocks and shoals which lie SSW of it. Zuq
q
(Shakir) is a low and sandy islet, fringed by a coral
reef, with some bushes growing on it, which lies
close NE of Shi‘b Mar
s, thence:
3 WSW of an unnamed reef (18°46′N, 40°29′E), thence:
WSW of Abu Kulr Reef (18°41′N, 40°36′E) which is
situated in the central part of Faras
n Bank (10.14)
and over which the sea breaks.
(Directions continue at 10.65)
Route (10.197). However, it has been successfully crossed
near its NW end, and N of the Jz
n North Approach Route.
The Jz
n South Approach Route (10.205) is now no
longer in existence.
10.18
1 Note. Reefs in this part of the Red Sea differ generally
from those off-lying reefs situated nearer the coast in that
they are more regularly defined, are of a lighter colour, and
are usually steep-to on all sides.
10.19
1 Caution. Whilst it is considered that crossing the Faras
n
Bank is not quite impracticable any contemplated crossing
should only be attempted under very exceptional
circumstances.
See caution at 10.20.
Caution
10.20
1 Mariners are advised that uncharted coral heads exist
within the Faras
n Bank, and also between Shi‘ab Ab
Shawk (20°48′N, 39°19′E) (10.10) and the N end of the
bank.
The only recommended and marked channel across the
Faras
n Bank is the Jz
n North Approach Route (10.197).
INNER CHANNEL
General information
Chart 157
Description
10.21
1 The full length of the Inner Channel Route extends from
a position off the N end of the Faras
n Bank, W of Al Lth
(20°09′N, 40°16′E) for about 390 miles SSE to a position W
of ‘Uqb
n (15°30′N, 42°23′E) (11.11).
Anchorages
10.22
1 There are a number of good anchorages along the Inner
Channel Route.
Caution
10.23
1 In many places along the Inner Channel the charted
details may be inaccurate and incomplete.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 10
10.24
1 The reefs throughout the Inner Channel Route are all
clearly visible. Between Shi‘b Subaikha (19°56′N, 40°27′E)
which lies on the NE side of the Inner Channel Route about
5 miles WNW of Jal
jil, and a position about 1 mile N of
the N end of Enterprise Channel (19°48′N, 40°33′E) (not
charted by name), the water is muddy and the bottom is
scarcely visible even in depths of about 9 m.
See caution at 10.20.
Natural conditions
10.25
1 Visibility from January to May is generally very good;
mountains up to 50 miles distant show up well. At other
times hazy weather frequently renders visual navigation
difficult.
10.26
1 Sea water visibility. Sometimes red and green
discolouration of the sea water, caused by algae, adds to the
difficulty of navigation by making the discolourations of the
sea water caused by the reefs less noticeable.
10.27
1 Currents. From January to June inclusive, when NW
winds prevail, the current in the Inner Channel is mostly
N-going, except if the winds are strong, when, for a short
time, it may set S. On such occasions, the water banks up in
narrow channels, and, when the wind falls, the N-going
current becomes stronger. It seldom attains a rate of more
than
kn.
10.28
1 Winds. In summer there are occasional W and SW gales
during which the sea in the Inner Channel becomes very
confused and renders navigation difficult as a result.
Inner Channel Route — northern part
Chart 157
Route
10.29
1 The route through the N part of the Inner Channel
covered by this section leads generally SE for about
145 miles from a position about 8 miles WSW of Shi′b
at-Taw
man (20°11′N, 39°49′E) (10.10), to a position about
6 miles SW of Ras al (18°35′N, 41°17′E).
Local knowledge
10.30
1 Local knowledge is required for the use of the N part of
the Inner Channel Route.
Topography
10.31
1 The hills on At Tih
ma, the coastal plain E and SE of Al
Lth (20°09′N, 40°16′E) are useful for navigation being
more often visible than the higher mountains which stand
inland as they may well be obscured by the haze which is
prevalent in summer and autumn.
Lesser ranges of coastal mountains, with heights of
between 600 m and 1200 m, rise steeply behind the plain of
At Tih
ma; these ranges have numerous well defined
summits.
2 The main range, which rises behind the lesser ranges of
the coastal mountains, stands behind the plain of At Tih
ma.
This main range, which rises from between 40 miles and
50 miles inland, is a lofty escarpment which forms the
principal watershed of the country.
3 It rises to heights of between 1800 m and 2100 m then
falls abruptly to an intricate mass of hills and valleys which
286
are seldom clearly visible from seaward. This broken country
is bounded on its SW side by the lesser range of coastal
mountains. From the vicinity of Jabal Shift
(20°35′N,
40°56′E) the escarpment is more or less of even height to
the vicinity of Jabal Hajra (26 miles SE).
Principal marks
10.32
1 Landmarks:
Jabal Afar (20°01′N, 40°41′E) is a conspicuous hill
which can be identified by the two mounds at its
base, one standing on its N side and the other on its
S side.
Sugarloaf (19°59′N, 40°46′E) is a sharp conspicuous
cone with a lower mound standing N of it.
Twin Cones (20°03′N, 40°47′E) has a prominent low
double peak.
2 Jabal Nadesh (19°58′N, 41°10′E), which rises to a
height of 1335 m, has two summits and is visible
through a break in the coastal mountain range
which is filled with many low hills. There is a
much higher peak, with a detached pillar rock,
standing farther inland; the position and elevation of
this second and higher peak have not yet been
accurately established.
3 Jabal Shad
(19°44′N, 41°14′E) consists of two rather
flat-topped ridges.
ISLANDS SITUATED ON THE NORTHERN
PART OF FARAS N BANK
Chart 157
Abu Latt
10.33
1 Description. Abu Latt (19°58′N, 40°08′E) lies about
10 miles ENE of Shi‘b Jan
b (10.11) and is the N-most
island situated on the Faras
n Bank (10.14); the island is
uninhabited.
The island is radar conspicuous and initially shows as two
separate echoes about 1 mile apart.
2 The summit of the island attains an elevation of 30 m
near its S end; a conspicuous detached conical rock, 28 m
high, stands about 1 miles NW of the summit.
The E side of the S part of the island is rugged; the W
side of the S part is precipitous. Farther N the island is low
and sandy with several rocky knolls between 3 m and 6 m
high.
3 Abu Latt is bordered by a drying reef on its W side on
which stands an islet, 8 m high; a further islet lies 6 cables
SSE; a sandy cay, over which the sea breaks, lies a farther
7 cables SSE. Three steep rocks, the highest rising to 15 m,
lie on the reef off the NE side of the island; a remarkable
mushroom-shaped rock lies about 6 cables SSE closer to the
islands coast.
10.34
1 Anchorage. A good anchorage, sheltered from N and
NW winds, may be obtained in depths of 26 m off the SE
side of the island.
Sirrayn
10.35
1 Description. Sirrayn (19°37′N, 40°37′E) has a
conspicuous summit rising to 61 m: a remarkable truncated
cone, about 30 m high, stands between this summit and the
W-most hill, which is flat-topped. The island is uninhabited.
2 The high ground of the island is very rugged and consists
mostly of elevated coral reefs over a base of steeply rising
red sandstone which outcrops on the S coast. Both ends of
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 10
the island are low-lying, the W end being marshy; there are
a few clumps of mangroves on its NE side.
3 The island is bordered by a coral reef on which stand
several above-water rocks; Sirrayn Patches extends about
5 miles N from this bordering reef.
D s q ya Islet
10.36
1 Description. Ds
qya Islet (18°53′N, 40°45′E) is a low
islet situated about 6 miles ESE of Tidhk
r Islet (10.37).
An unnamed islet, 4 m high, lies about 8 miles ENE of
Ds
qya Islet; a further unnamed islet, about 3 m high, lies
8 miles E.
Tidhk r Islet
10.37
1 Description. Tidhk
r Islet (18°57′N, 40°36′E) is a low
islet with a few bushes growing on it.
A dangerous rock lies at the S end of a shoal area which
extends S from the islet; further dangerous rocks, over which
the sea breaks, lie in the vicinity of the islet.
Muskah
10.38
1 Description. Muskah (18°49′N, 40°38′E) is a low islet
standing on a steep-to coral reef which lies about 7 miles S
of Tidhk
r Islet (10.37).
Sharbain Islet
10.39
1 Description. Sharbain Islet (18°43′N, 40°39′E), which is
situated about 6 miles S of Muskah (10.38), is a low, sandy,
coral islet, on which a few bushes grow.
Ablo Islet
10.40
1 Description. Ablo Islet (18°39′N, 40°50′E), which is
surrounded by a reef, lies in an area full of dangerous rocks
and shoals situated within the SE part, of the N half, of the
Faras
n Bank (10.14), about 15 miles SSE of Ds
qya Islet
(10.36).
Ab Zahrah
10.41
1 Description. Ab Zahrah (18°35′N, 40°48′E) stands on a
reef which extends about 1 mile S of it; the reef close N of
the islet drops steeply to depths of over 360 m.
Jabb
rah lies about 5 miles ESE of Ab Zahrah and is
also fringed by a reef; several other dangerous rocks and
reefs lie in the vicinity of both of these islets.
Jabal ab y
10.42
1 Description. Jabal ab
y
(18°35′N, 41°03′E) is an
island, fringed by a reef on its E side, lying about 13 miles
W of Ras al (Hali Point) (18°35′N, 41°17′E).
There is an abandoned village on the SE side of Jabal
ab
y
; a salt lake is situated at the N end of the island.
Qu

10.43
1 Description. Qu‘ (18°30′N, 41°04′E), an island, lies
2 miles SSE of Jabal Sab
y
(10.42) on the N part of a
coral reef; the island is composed of coral and sand.
Qu‘ Seghir is an above-water rock situated about
1 miles E of the S part of the island; further islets and
rocks lie off the E side of the island and also near the S end
of the coral reef.
287
Dorish Islet
10.44
1 Description. Dorish Islet (18°31′N, 40°40′E) lies about
9 miles WSW of Ab Zahrah (10.41) and is fringed by a
reef. The islet is low, sandy and covered in bushes.
OTHER DANGERS SITUATED ON THE
NORTHERN PART OF FARAS N BANK
Chart 157
Shi‘b Murabba‘
10.45
1 Description. Shi‘b Murabba‘ (19°43′N, 40°15′E) is
situated within the N edge of a mass of reefs through which
there is no known passage; the NW side of this foul ground
lies about 17 miles SE of Shi‘b Sulaym (19°55′N, 40°00′E)
(10.11).
Shi‘b Murabba‘ consists of two well-defined reefs of a
brownish colour.
A line of reefs, with deep passages between, extends
about 20 miles NNW, from close NW of Shi‘b Murabba‘ to
Shi‘b Jan
b (19°55′N, 39°57′E) (10.11).
Abu Saiy l Reef
10.46
1 Description. Abu Saiy
l Reef (18°41′N, 40°42′E) lies
near the mid part of the Faras
n Bank (10.14) with its N
extremity situated about 10 miles S of Ds
qya Islet (10.36).
A number of dangerous rocks lie on Abu Saiy
l Reef; the
sea breaks over the reef.
Abu Musha Shoals
10.47
1 Description. Abu Musha Shoals are a number of
dangerous shoals and rocks which lie approximately within a
4 mile radius of 18°43′N, 40°49′E.
Ablo Islet (10.40) lies on the SW side of this dangerous
area.
INLETS
Charts 2659, 158
Ab Shawk
10.48
1 Description. Ab Shawk Inlet (20°55′N, 39°22′E) has a
very narrow entrance situated between the reefs which
extend off the inlet.
10.49
1 Approach. There is a passage from seaward which leads
between Qia’ Kidan (20°56′N, 39°11′E) (10.9) and the
drying rock lying off the NW corner of Shi‘ab Ab Shawk
(6 miles SSE) (10.10) to the S end of the inner channel
(10.51) which lies close off the coast in this vicinity.
2 Jabal Ab Shawk (20°55′N, 39°29′E) (not charted) is a
small two-knobbed hill and is the easiest mark to identify in
this area; it forms the best landmark when using this
passage.
In 1976, a least depth of 18⋅3 m was reported to lie in the
fairway of this passage.
10.50
1 Anchorage. Small vessels may obtain anchorage within
Ab Shawk, in depths of 11 m, with Jabal Ab Shawk
bearing about 073°.
10.51
1 Inner channel. An inner channel lies in this area of the
coast between the mainland and the offshore bank on which
there are several coral reefs.
This inner channel extends parallel to the coast from E of
Kobbein Reef (21°13′N, 39°03′E) (10.9) to W of Ab
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 10
Shawk, it may be used during the hours of daylight, keeping
1 mile off the coastal reef which is visible.
2 Topography. The coast N of Hayyirah (21°06′N,
39°12′E) is low-lying, liable to inundation and is fronted by
a dangerous coral reef.
3 Landmarks. Four tall radio towers, each exhibiting white
quick flashing, high-intensity lights, stand between 5 miles
and 6 miles SSE of Ar Ra’s al Aswad (21°20′N, 39°06′E)
(9.266); these masts are reported to be radar conspicuous.
Conspicuous towers, 72 m high, (21°07′⋅5N, 39°13′⋅0E),
also stand on this section of the coast.
Chart 158
Ab D dah
10.52
1 Description. Ab Ddah (20°34′N, 39°34′E) is a small
unsurveyed inlet entered about 22 miles SE of Ab Shawk
(10.48).
Qia Abu Ddah is a dangerous rock (not charted by
name) which lies about 3 miles WNW of the entrance to the
inlet.
2 There is a tight bend in the inner part of the entrance; the
inlet should only be entered when the sun is in a favourable
position to identify the coral reefs which lie both within the
entrance to the inlet and within the inlet itself.
10.53
1 Anchorage. It is reported that anchorage may be obtained
for small boats within the inlet.
Caution. Uncharted coral heads are reported to lie in the
approaches to the inlet and within the entrance channel.
Ash Shar fa
10.54
1 Description. Ash Sharfa (20°15′N, 40°05′E) is an
elongated bay, fronted by Jazrat Qishr
n, which is itself
fronted by Shi‘b al Jiffn; the bay is entered through Marsa
Qishr
n.
Da‘ama Island (20°09′⋅7N, 40°12′⋅4E) (not charted by
name) lies ESE of the E end of Qishr
n Island and
encumbers the E entrance to the bay.
2 The bottom of the bay is not visible in depths greater
than 2⋅0 m.
A bar, which obstructs Marsa Qishr
n, has a least depth
over it of 5⋅5 m; dangerous rocks lie on both sides of the
entrance fairway.
10.55
1 Local knowledge. Ash Sharfa is only suitable for use by
small vessels with the aid of local knowledge.
10.56
1 Anchorage may be obtained about 1
miles off the
entrance to Marsa Qishr
n in depths from 46 to 86 m.
Sum r Anchorage lies within an unnamed gap formed in
the off-lying reef at the WNW end of Shi‘b al Jiffn and S
of the entrance to Marsa Qishr
n, about 7 cables WNW of
Sum
r Islet (20°14′N, 40°00′E) (charted as a rock awash).
Anchorage may be obtained within this gap in the reef in
depths of about 11 m, mud.
Chart 157
Ghubbat al  asan
10.57
1 Description. Ghubbat al asan (Ghubbat al Mah
sin) is a
large bay entered between Ras Kinnateis (19°45′N, 40°41′E)
and Ras al asan (8 miles SE); a chain of coral reefs and
low-lying islets extends across the mouth of the bay.
2 The coast in the NW part of Ghubbat al asan, between
Ras al Hum
ra (19°48′N, 40°37′E) and Ras Kinnateis
(4 miles SE) forms the SW side of a peninsula which is
288
composed of low sand dunes, with a belt of mangroves
growing on each side of it. Two above-water rocks, on
which bushes grow, stand on the coastal reef about 5 cables
SE of Ras Kinnateis.
3 Gheibisa Islet (19°43′N, 40°41′E) (not charted by name)
lies about 1 miles SSE of Ras Kinnateis and is the N-most
of a chain of three islands which lie between the point and
the Umm al Ghar
nq Islands (19°40′N, 40°45′E). Gheibisa
Islet together with Umm Ibsas Islet and Minzak Islet, (not
charted by name), the two other islets of the chain, are low
and sandy and lie on a coral reef which extends SSE of the
point.
4 The Umm al Ghar
nq Islands lie on the N side of South
Channel which forms the S entrance channel to the bay; the
islands are thickly bordered with mangroves. Qadd al
Ghubba is a low, sandy islet standing on a coral reef about
5 cables SW of the S-most end of the Umm al Ghar
nq
Islands.
5 Ras al asan (19°37′N, 40°47′E) the S entrance point to
the bay, is a low and sandy point covered with scrub; a
clump of mangroves lies on its W side. The land from the
point rises to Mah
sin Bluff (not charted) (1 miles SSE) a
cliff about 11 m high.
10.58
1 Umm al Qandl (19°45′N, 40°41′E) a low islet bordered
by a thick belt of mangroves, stands on a drying reef about
1 mile ENE of Ras Kinnateis. The drying reef, which
extends about 8 cables ENE from the SE side of the islet,
has a well defined edge; an above-water rock, covered with
bushes, lies on a further reef which extends about 4 cables
NNE from the NE corner of the islet.
2 The E side of Ghubbat al asan is low and backed by
sandhills which terminate at Ras Ahmar (19°40′N, 40°48′E);
there are some scattered clumps of mangroves along the
shores of the bay.
The water within the bay is muddy, such that the bottom
is not clearly visible in depths of over 9 m.
Anchorage
10.59
1 A sheltered anchorage may be obtained about 2 cables NE
of the above-water rock which lies off the NE corner of
Umm al Qandl (19°45′N, 40°41′E) (10.58), in depths from
about 13 to 15 m, coral and mud.
Ghubbat al Qina
10.60
1 Description. Ghubbat al Qina (19°04′N, 41°07′E) is the
bay (not charted by name) situated between the town of Al
Qunfudhah (19°08′N, 41°05′E) and Ras Mak
sir (11 miles
SSE).
The coast of the bay is low and sandy, and, in its N part,
covered with scrub; a reef fringes the majority of the shores
of the bay. Some white sandhills, about 5 m high, stand at
the head of the bay about 5 miles ESE of Al Qunfudhah.
2 An unnamed islet, 1⋅5 m high, stands on a reef on the N
side of the entrance to the bay, about 2
miles SSE of Al
Qunfudhah. Shi‘b Qina, which consists of a number of
detached reefs, lies in the SE part of the head of the bay.
The coast S of the bay, between Ras Mak
sir (18°57′N,
41°07′E) and Ras Ab Matnah (4 miles SSE), is also low
and sandy and covered with scrub.
10.61
1 Landmark.
Jabal Hali (18°51′N, 41°34′E) stands about 24 miles E
of Ras Ab Matnah (18°52′N, 41°10′E). The
mountain appears pyramidal in shape from the
vicinity of Al Qunfudhah and farther N, but S of Al
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 10
Qunfudhah its appearance alters quickly such that,
from S of Ras Ab Matnah it shows as an oblong
mountain with its N part abruptly rounded off.
10.62
1 Anchorage may be obtained off Umm as Saifa (19°02′N,
41°02′E), a sandy islet (not charted by name), about 2 m
ABU KUL R REEF TO ORESTE POINT
GENERAL INFORMATION
Chart 157
Route
10.63
1 The route described in this section extends about
182 miles SSE from a position about 30 miles WSW of Abu
Kulr Reef (18°41′N, 40°36′E) (10.13) to a position about
65 miles WSW of Oreste Point (16°23′N, 42°46′E) (10.234).
International boundary
10.64
1 The international boundary between Saudi Arabia and the
Republic of Yemen reaches the coast in the vicinity of
Oreste Point (16°23′N, 42°46′E).
Directions
(continued from 10.13)
10.65
1 From a position about 30 miles WSW of Abu Kulr Reef
(18°41′N, 40°36′E) (10.13) the track leads SSE, passing:
WSW of Dorish Islet (18°31′N, 40°40′E) (10.44); a
reef together with a number of dangerous rocks and
islets lies about 12 miles SE. Thence:
2 WSW of Maghabiya Islet (18°15′N, 40°44′E) a sand
and coral islet. abya lies about 1 miles ENE and
is similar to Maghabiya Islet but covered in bushes.
An unnamed reef, on which lies a dangerous rock,
lies about 5 miles ENE of abya; farther to the E
the Faras
n Bank (10.14) is encumbered with
dangerous rocks, shoals and reefs, thence:
3 WSW of Al 
lah (18°13′N, 40°44′E) a sand cay.
Mafsubber Islet, which is fringed by a reef, lies
about 9 miles E; a dangerous reef lies between these
two islets. Further dangerous rocks and reefs lie in
this vicinity, thence:
4 WSW of Zuq
q Islet (18°04′N, 40°48′E) which
consists of a low sandbank on the NW side of
Shi‘b Mar
s, and of a chain of reefs which extends
both N and S of Zuq
q Islet; Shi‘b Rabid (2 miles
ENE) is a reef over which the sea breaks on its N
and S parts. ahrat Mar
y
(18°02′N, 40°58′E)
consists of two islets which lie farther E; both islets
are sandy but the E-most islet is fringed by a reef
over which the sea breaks. Shi‘b Ali, which lies
about 9 miles ENE of Zuq
q Islet, is another
dangerous reef over which the sea breaks. Thence:
a
y
(16°53′N, 41°28′E), and ansh
5 WSW of an area of shoals and dangerous rocks
(18°01′N, 40°44′E), which lies about 4 miles WSW
of Shi‘b Mar
s. ahrat Ab Ma
l on the E side of
Shi‘b Mar
s is a low sandbank, thence:
WSW of an isolated dangerous rock (17°51′N,
40°41′E) which lies at the SW end of a chain of
dangerous rocks and shoals which extends about
12 miles NE to the S end of Shi‘b Mar
s, thence:
289
high and covered with bushes, which lies on the E edge of a
coral reef about 3 miles W of the mouth of Ghubbat al Qina,
in depths from 24 to 27 m over a good holding ground.
2 Small vessels may also obtain an anchorage, well
sheltered from S winds, within a small inlet on the N side of
Ras Mak
sir (18°57′N, 41°07′E).
10.66
1 Passing:
WSW of an isolated dangerous rock (17°42′N,
40°50′E) which lies about 12 miles W of the
N-most islet of the Wasalyat Islets (17°41′N,
41°02′E) (4.16). The Wasalyat Islets consist of two
low, sandy islets standing on a coral bank. Between
these two islets and the NW end of Shi‘b Faras
n
(50 miles SSE) there are a number of shoal patches
and other dangers lying within about 10 miles of
the W side of the Faras
n Bank. Thence:
2 WSW of Shi‘b al Jum
(17°37′N, 40°51′E) a
dangerous reef, thence:
WSW of a charted depth of 46 m (17°24′N, 40°51′E)
(reported 1966) which lies close within the W edge
of the Faras
n Bank, thence:
WSW of a shoal (17°14′N, 40°54′E) (reported 1966),
with a least depth over it of 51 m, which lies close
SW of the edge of the Faras
n Bank. Thence:
Charts 15, 157
10.67
1 Passing:
WSW of a detached shoal area (17°08′N, 41°09′E),
with a least depth over it of 12⋅5 m, which lies off
the W side of an area of shoals over which there is
a least depth of 6⋅1 m. Further shoals, over which
there are similar depths, lie in this vicinity. Thence:
2 WSW of MAK Light-buoy (W cardinal) (17°02′N,
41°13′E) which marks the W side of a shoal area,
with a least depth over it of 11 m, which lies on the
NW side of the entrance to Jz
n North Approach
Route (10.197), thence:
3 WSW of Jz
n North Light-buoy (safe water; racon)
(16°57′N, 41°17′E) which is moored about
6 miles W of Al Baghlah and marks the entrance
to the Jz
n North Approach Route (10.197), thence:
4 WSW of Al Baghlah (16°57′N, 41°24′E) (10.200) a
low and sandy island which stands on the N part of
a coral reef situated at the N end of Shi‘b Faras
n
(10.167). Al Baghlah Light (white tripod, 12 m
high) (16°56′⋅6N, 41°23′⋅5E) is exhibited from the
W extremity of the surrounding coral reef. Another
light (white beacon, 7 m high) (8 cables NE) marks
the NW side of the island. Thence:
5 WSW of Dh
(6 cables SE) a small islet; both islets are low and
sandy and stand on the NW part of a coral reef
which lies on the W side of Sarad Sarso. Sarad
Sarso (16°51′N, 41°35′E) and Sindi Sarso, which
lies close ENE, lie on the E edge of Shi‘b Faras
n.
Both islands are of coral formation; sharp coral
points show above the surface of the land on Sarad
Sarso Island, thence:
 Home Contents Index
6 WSW of a group of three unnamed sandy islets
(16°47′N, 41°32′E) which stand on a dangerous
bank SW of Sarad Sarso, thence:
10.68
1 Passing:
2 WSW of Shuma (16°41′N, 41°36′E), which lies on the
N part of a coral reef situated in the middle part of
Shi‘b Faras
n (10.167), about 8 miles WNW of the
Stewart Islets. The Stewart Islets lie on the NE side
of Shi‘b Faras
n about 3 miles SSW of Zuf
f
(16°43′N, 41°46′E) (10.144). Thence:
3 WSW of Taw
sila (16°28′N, 41°53′E) which is the
NW-most islet of a group of five islets all of which
lie on a shallow bank at the SE end of Shi‘b
Faras
n, NW of the Pearly Gates (10.206). Other
islets are Marr
k (3 miles SSE) which is low and ill
defined, Mahama (4 miles NNE) and Umm az Zahl
(4
miles E). Many other islets, dangerous rocks
and shoals lie on Shi‘b Faras
n between Dh
a
y
and Marr
k, thence:
4 WSW of Dhu Hirab (Dawhar
b) (16°19′N, 41°58′E)
which lies on a coral reef on the SE side of the
Pearly Gates. The island is low and sandy and is
surrounded by dangerous rocky shoals. Dhu Hirab
(Dawhar
b) Light (green daymark) is exhibited from
the N extremity of the island. A stranded wreck
(position approximate) lies about 2 miles SSE of the
SE corner of Dhu Hirab; in 1978 this wreck was
reported to be conspicuous; another wreck lies on
the SW corner of the island, thence:
5 WSW of Sana Island (16°07′N, 42°16′E) a low, white
and sandy island which lies about 32 miles WSW of
Oreste Point (16°23′N, 42°46′E) (10.234).
(Directions continue at 11.11)
MINOR HARBOURS, INLETS
AND ANCHORAGES
Khawr Nuh d
Chart 157
Description
10.69
1 Khawr Nuhd (18°17′N, 41°29′E) is an inlet divided into
two parts by a projection extending S into its N part; both
parts are almost filled by the coastal reef.
The coastal reef also extends about 7 cables SSE from its
N entrance point. A shoal area, on which there a number of
dangerous rocks, also extends a similar distance S from a
position close W of this extension of the coastal reef from
the N entrance point.
2 Between Ras al (18°35′N, 41°17′E) and Khawr Nuhd
(22 miles SSE) the coast is indented and fringed by reefs, in
places; from Khawr Nuhd to Khasa (22 miles SSE) the
coast is fringed by reefs which extend up to 3 miles offshore.
10.70
1 Landmarks:
Jabal Ts Sh
m (18°22′N, 41°34′E) stands about
6 miles NE of Khawr Nuhd at the SW end of the
mountain range which approaches the coast in this
vicinity.
Jabal Ts Yaman (18°19′N, 41°36′E) stands about
7 miles E of Khawr Nuhd, and, together with Jabal
Ts Sh
m stand higher than other peaks in this
vicinity.
CHAPTER 10
Anchorage
10.71
1 Good anchorage may be obtained within the inlet in
depths of about 13 m.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Khawr al Birk
Description
10.72
1 Khawr al Birk (18°14′N, 41°31′E), in which lies the
settlement of Ali-Birk, is entered about 3 miles S of Khawr
Nuhd (10.69); an area of dangerous rocks, which extends
about 1 miles SW from the coast, lies between these two
inlets.
The passage into Khawr al Birk is reported to be tortuous
and narrow.
2 From the vicinity of Khawr al Birk the landmarks
described at 10.70 appear to be part of the N part of the
coastal mountain range and may be identified by a detached
summit to the S. Jabal Ts Yaman is likely to be mistaken
for this detached summit and is also likely to be mistaken
for Jabal Ts Sh
m.
Anchorages
10.73
1 Anchorage may be obtained within the entrance to Khawr
al Birk.
A sheltered anchorage may also be obtained within the
inlet, in depths of 12 m, mud.
Local knowledge is required for the use of the anchorage
within the inlet.
10.74
1 The unnamed inlet, situated on the E side of a dangerous
spur of the coastal reef which extends about 2 miles SSW
from the S entrance point to Khawr al Birk, affords shelter
to small vessels.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
North Al Wasm
Description
10.75
1 North Al Wasm (18°02′N, 41°35′E) (not charted by
name) has a sand-bar across its entrance; two small islets
stand on an area of dangerous rocks which extends about
1 miles SSW from the coast NW of the entrance to the
inlet.
Dangerous rocks lie in the whole of this vicinity and also
between the inlet and South Al Wasm (18°00′N, 41°36′E)
which is entered close S.
Khasa (17°56′N, 41°42′E) is a small village situated about
4 miles SE of South Al Wasm.
10.76
1 Landmark:
Jabal Wasm (18°01′N, 41°39′E) is a steep hill situated
near the coast on the peninsula which separates
North Al Wasm from South Al Wasm. On SE and
E bearings it appears to be a round hill with a peak
on its N slope, but on NE bearings it appears to be
pointed.
Anchorage
10.77
1 Anchorage has been obtained in depths of 20 m off the
entrance to North Al Wasm.
290
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 10

Small vessels may obtain a good sheltered anchorage in
both North Al Wasm and South Al Wasm.
Local knowledge is required for the use of the
anchorages within these two inlets.
Khawr al’ Makrah
Description
10.78
1 Khawr al’ Makrah (17°49′N, 41°52′E) is a small break in
the coastal reef which lies on the SW side of Jabal Husn
M
jiz.
10.79
Landmark:
1 Jabal Husn M
jiz (17°50′N, 41°54′E) is a hill which
stands about 9 miles ESE of Jabal Baqara (17°52′N,
41°48′E) (10.96). The hill rises from a position
close in from the coast; it has a steep peak on its N
side and a fort stands on its summit.
Khawr ‘Itwad
Description
10.80
1 Khawr ‘Itwad (17°35′N, 42°08′E) is a small inlet entered
about 11 miles SW of the large village of Ad Darb.
A dangerous reef lies about 8 cables SW of the SE
entrance point to the inlet.
A detached shoal, with a least depth over it of 11⋅4 m,
marked on its W side by a light-buoy (W cardinal) lies about
7 miles WSW of the entrance to the inlet.
Khawr Ab as Sab ’
Chart 15
Description
10.81
1 Khawr Ab as Sab
’ (17°05′N, 42°25′E) is entered E of
Ra’s a arf
(Ras Turfa) (17°01′N, 42°22′E) which forms
the S extremity of a narrow strip of low land, covered with
bushes; this strip of land forms the W side of the inlet.
The inlet is encumbered with shoals which extend about
8 miles S from its head in Khawr al Ja‘
firah, an extension
of the inlet to the N.
2 The E shore of the inlet is foul throughout its length.
A steep-to point is situated on the W side of the inlet,
about 1 miles N of Ra’s a arf
; a bushy islet lies about
5 cables farther N.
A vessel entering Khawr Ab as Sab‘
may pass on
either side of Fur
fir.
Qarn al Wad
(17°00′N, 42°33′E) is a shallow bay
situated on the E side of the entrance to the inlet about
10 miles E of Ra’s a arf
.
N12 Light-buoy (safe water) is moored about 2
miles S
of Ra’s a arf
in the approaches to the inlet.
10.82
1 Fur fir (16°59′N, 42°25′E) is an island lying on the
coastal bank in the entrance to Khawr Ab as Sab‘
, about
1
miles ESE of Ras Turfa.
Three small islets stand on the reef fringing the SW side
of the island but they are difficult to distinguish from a
distance and appear as one islet.
Anchorage
10.83
1 Anchorage may be obtained in depths from 7 to 15 m in
the outer part of Khawr Ab as Sab‘
, S of the bar.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this anchorage.
Further anchorages
Chart 157
10.84
1 In general, anchorage may be obtained off most of the
stretch of coast which lies between Wid
n (17°51′N,
41°47′E) and a position about 10 miles N of Ra’s a arf

(10.81).
10.85
1 Small vessels may obtain anchorage within the small inlet
on whose shores the village of Wid
n is situated, in depths
from about 5 to 7 m; this anchorage is only sheltered from S
winds.
Chart 15
10.86
1 Anchorage for small vessels, with good protection from S
winds, may also be obtained towards the S end of the
narrow channel which lies between Sarad Sarso (16°51′N,
41°35′E) (10.67) and Sindi Sarso (close E) (10.67).
10.87
1 Small vessels may also obtain anchorage between the reef
surrounding the E side of (Dhu Hirab) (Dawhar
b) (16°19′N,
41°58′E) (10.68) and the small unnamed islet which lies
close E, in depths of 3 m, sand. Some protection from N
winds is given by the proximity of shoal water NW of the
anchorage.

FARAS N BANK — SOUTHERN PART

GENERAL INFORMATION Caution

10.91
Chart 157 1 Mariners are strongly advised to adhere closely to the
Description Jz
n North Approach Route (10.197) when approaching
10.88 Jz
n (10.174). See 10.20.
1 See 10.14.

Depths INNER CHANNEL

10.89
1 See 10.16. Chart 157
General information
Passages across Faras n Bank 10.92
10.90 1 See 10.21 to 10.28 for general remarks regarding the
1 See 10.17. Inner Channel.

291
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 10

Inner Channel Route — middle part Ash Shuqayq

Chart 157
Route Description
10.93 10.101
1 The route through the middle part of the Inner Channel 1 Ash Shuqayq (17°43′N, 42°01′E) is a large village
covered by this section leads for about 163 miles in a SSE situated about 9 miles SE of Khawr al’ Makrah (10.78).
direction from a position about 6 miles SW of Ras al The village is surrounded by fertile country; the coast
(18°35′N, 41°17′E) to a position about 8 miles W of Oreste NW of the village has some low sandhills standing on it.
Point (16°23′N, 42°46′E) (10.234).
The southern part of the Inner Channel Route is described Facilities
at 11.140. 10.102
1 Self-propelled lighters are available for the discharge of
Topography cargo in the anchorage.
10.94 Anchorage
1 The coast between Khasa (17°56′N, 41°42′E) and Oreste 10.103
Point (115 miles SSE) is fronted for up to 60 miles offshore 1 Anchorage may be obtained off the village in a depth of
by the Faras
n Bank (10.14) and Jaz
‘ir Faras
n (Faras
n about 9⋅4 m.
Islands) (10.111).
Between Khasa and Ra’s a arf
(67 miles SE) (10.81) Notice of ETA
the Inner Channel lies between the E edge of the Faras
n 10.104
Bank and the off-lying coastal dangers. 1 Vessels intending to use this anchorage should inform
Jeddah Radio (HZH) 72 hours in advance of their ETA.
Local knowledge
10.95
ISLANDS SITUATED ON THE SOUTHERN
1 Local knowledge is required for the use of the middle
PART OF FARAS N BANK
part of the Inner Channel Route. Chart 157
 a rah
Landmark 10.105
10.96 1 Description. a

rah (18°25′N, 41°13′E) lies near the N
1 Jabal Baqara (17°52′N, 41°48′E), which stands close to end of a reef which extends about 6 miles SE from the
the coast, is a part coloured hill rising to a height of island; a number of dangers lie on this reef.
122 m. The hill has dark lava on its N and W Barton Islet (3 miles SE), and another unnamed islet,
slopes, and a white sandy slope on its S side; the which lies 1 miles farther ESE, stand on the SE part of this
hill shows up well on N bearings. reef; both islets are low, sandy and covered with bushes.
Kutumbul
Anchorages 10.106
10.97 1 Description. Kutumbul (17°54′⋅0N, 41°38′⋅0E), an islet,
1 Good anchorage may be obtained in Jaff Bay lies close off the coast about 2 miles S of the village of
(18°31′N, 41°24′E) in depths from 9 to 18 m; this anchorage Khasa (10.75).
is well sheltered from N and E winds. The islet is of volcanic origin and rises to a small rugged
A good anchorage may also be obtained within the wedge-shaped peak 101 m high. The N side of this peak is
unnamed bay which lies E of Ra’s ali (18°35′N, 41°17′E), steep but it is the only accessible part of the islet; the E side
in depths from about 9 to 13 m; this anchorage is again well forms a steep slope and the S and W sides fall vertically.
sheltered from N and E winds. A reef extends about 6 cables SSW of the islet; a sand
10.98 and mud shoal, with a least depth over it of 2⋅7 m, lies
1 Anchorage has been obtained, about 3 miles W of Khawr about 7 cables E of the islet; note this shoal is not visible.
Nuhd (18°17′N, 41°29′E) (10.69), on the NE part of the 10.107
extensive bank on which stands Mark
(18°14′N, 41°19′E) 1 In 1976, the patch of discoloured water lying 5 miles W
and its surrounding reef, in a depth of about 13 m. of the islet was not sighted.
Anchorage can also be obtained on this same bank, about Zahrat Sumayr
8 miles farther S, in depths from 13 to 15 m. 10.108
10.99 1 Description. Zahrat Sumayr (17°49′N, 41°10′E) is an
1 Anchorage may be obtained within an inlet formed by the islet, fringed by a reef, which lies in the middle of the S end
coastal reef between Hasr Islet (18°09′N, 41°32′E) (not of the Faras
n Bank (10.14).
charted by name) and Jabal Islet (3 miles SE) (not charted Several dangerous rocks and shoals lie in the vicinity of
by name) in depths of about 11 m. In 1930 it was reported the island.
that depths within this inlet were less and in 1976 the
anchorage was reported to be of poor quality. Sumayr
10.109
1 Description. Sumayr (17°47′N, 41°26′E) is a low island
Off-lying bank composed of coral and sand.
A shoal bank, on which stand some dangerous rocks,
Al Ghar f Bank surrounds the island; further dangerous rocks and shoals lie
10.100 S of the island.
1 Description. Al Gharf Bank (18°18′N, 41°07′E) is a 10.110
large shoal bank situated on the Faras
n Bank (10.14) on 1 Anchorage may be obtained on the bank NE of Sumayr
which there are a number of dangerous rocks. or off its W side.

292
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 10
Local knowledge is required for the use of the anchorage
NE of the island.
Jaz ‘ir Faras n Group
Chart 15
10.111
1 Jaz
‘ir Faras
n (Faras
n Islands) (16°45′N, 42°00′E) are a
group of islands which contain the largest islands situated on
the E side of the Red Sea.
Faras n al Kab r and Saj d
10.112
1 Description. Faras
n al Kabr (16°42′N, 42°00′E), and
Sajd which lies partly in a bay formed by the N side of
Faras
n al Kabr, are the two largest islands of Jaz
‘ir
Faras
n and are, for all intents and purposes, one island.
Both islands have hills formed of coral rock; both have
plains and valleys within their interior.
The NW part of Faras
n al Kabr is high and rocky.
Both islands are surrounded by numerous coral
formations, rocks and shoals whose position and extent may
best be seen on the chart.
10.113
1 North of Saj d. Ra’s R
hib is the WNW extremity of a
long and narrow unnamed island which lies close off the NE
corner of Sajd.
This unnamed island is fronted on both sides by several
islets; along its SW side lie Ludhwar Ri
k, Ri
k Kabr, Ri
k
ajhr and Safara Islets.
10.114
1 South-west side of Faras n al Kab r. Jan
bah Bay
(10.130) lies in the SW part of the island between Mary
Point (16°40′N, 41°59′E) and Ra’s Shiddah (5 miles ESE).
Qumm
 (10.150) encumbers the middle part of the entrance
to Jan
bah Bay which is entered from between the E side of
the island and Ra’s Shiddah.
From the vicinity of Ra’s Shiddah (16°38′N, 42°04′E) to
Ra’s Abarah (7 miles ESE), an indefinite point, the coast of
the island is low.
10.115
1 East side of Faras n al Kab r. Between Ra’s al Jass
(16°49′N, 42°05′E) and Ra’s Maraba (8 miles SE) lies an
unnamed bay (16°45′N, 42°10′E) formed by the NE side of
Faras
n al Kabr and a reef which extends about 3 miles
NE from the vicinity of Ra’s Maraba.
2 Sulain Islet (16°45′N, 42°13′E), Maraba Islet (1 miles
SSW) and a number of other unnamed islets all stand on this
reef.
A narrow channel leads through the coastal reef close E
of Ra’s Maraba and is marked by F5 Light-buoy (starboard
hand) and F4 Light-buoy (port hand).
10.116
1 The Abulad Islets lie between 4 miles and 5 miles N of
Ra’s Maraba on a below-water extension of the reef; there is
a remarkable knob or bluff on the S end of the central island
of this group. F3 Light-buoy (16°47′N, 42°13′E) is moored
on the N side of the channel which leads over this extension
of the reef which lies between Sulain Islet and the Abulad
Islets.
2 South Sulain Islet, which lies close SSW of Sulain Islet,
is the highest islet in this vicinity. It has a flat summit on
which stands a fort; from the N this islet appears to be part
of Faras
n al Kabr.
293
Ab Shar‘ah (16°43′N, 42°16′E) are a small, rocky
group of islets lying near the edge of the coastal bank, E of
Ra’s Maraba.
10.117
1 An area of foul ground extends E from the E side of
Faras
n al Kabr, between Ra’s Maraba (16°43′N, 42°11′E)
and Ra’s Abarah (8 miles S), to the NW side of Strawbridge
Strait (10.154). As well as the numerous dangerous rocks
and coral reefs which lie on this foul ground there are a
number of named and unnamed islets.
2 A passage, previously known as Dahlia Passage, lies
between the bank bordering the E coast of Faras
n al Kabr,
N of Ra’s Abarah, and the off-lying islets and dangers.
10.118
1 Anchorage. Small vessels may obtain anchorage in the
unnamed bay (16°45′N, 42°10′E) off a small village situated
about 5 miles SSE of Ra’s al Jass (16°49′N, 42°05′E).
It is advisable to anchor in depths of not less than 37 m
as in lesser depths the bottom appears to be very uneven.
A conspicuous fort (16°43′N, 42°07′E), which stands
about 1 km NNE of the village of Faras
n, is a good
landmark from the N when making for this anchorage.
10.119
1 Mandhar (16°50′N, 42°01′E) lies on the N edge of the
coastal reef which borders the SE side of Sajd (10.112).
Mandhar forms the S side of the entrance channel which
leads through to Khawr Sajd (10.125).
Jabal Mandhar rises from the E end of the island to an
elevation of 35 m.
10.120
1 Dh hik (16°55′N, 42°06′E) is a 6 m high coral islet
which lies about 7 miles NE of the entrance to Khawr Sajd
(10.125).
A dangerous shoal, with a least depth over it of 2 m, lies
about 1 mile SE of the islet; a further shoal, with a least
depth over it of 3 m, lies 2 miles WNW; a dangerous rock
lies in the approach to Khawr Sajd about 3 miles WSW of
the islet.
Inlets and bays in the Jaz ‘ir Faras n Group
Chart 15
Khawr al Ma‘ d
10.121
1 Description. Khawr al Ma‘
d (16°46′N, 41°55′E) is a
bay situated on the NE side of Faras
n al Kabr (10.112)
which is almost totally enclosed by Faras
n al Kabr on its
SW side, and Sajd (10.112) on its NE side.
2 The bay is entered from the NW between Ra’s Faras
n
(16°54′N, 41°45′E) and Ra’s ‘Amy
‘ (5 miles ENE) the NW
extremity of Sajd; its shores are fringed by reefs which
extend 2 miles from its head.
Sayr, 4 miles SE of Ra’s Faras
n, is one of several
villages on the SW shore of Khawr al Ma‘
d; these villages
are probably uninhabited except during the date picking
season.
10.122
1 Directions. Approach the bay from the NW, passing
between Wishkah (17°00′⋅5N, 41°39′⋅0E) (10.137) and Safan
(2 miles SE) (10.140). Then steer SE towards the entrance
to Khawr al Ma‘
d having due regard to the dangers on
both sides of the fairway which are best seen on the chart.
10.123
1 Caution. Note the dangerous rock (position approximate)
which lies in the middle of the fairway 2
miles ESE of
Safan.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 10
It should also be noted that a dangerous shoal depth is
reported to lie just within the bay, about 6
miles SE of
Ra’s Faras
n.
10.124
1 Anchorage may be obtained near the entrance to the
inlet, about 1 miles E of Ra’s Faras
n, in depths from 29
to 37 m.
Khawr Saj d
10.125
1 Description. Khawr Sajd (16°50′N, 41°58′E) is an inlet
on the SE side of Sajd (10.112) which is entered from the
NE, passing N of Mandhar (10.119); a coral reef fringes the
shores of the inlet from which it extends about 1 mile from
the shore, in places.
There are a number of rocks awash, dangerous rocks and
coral reefs lying within the approaches to Khawr Sajd; their
positions are best seen on the chart.
2 An unnamed islet lies about 5 cables SE of the N
entrance point to the inlet; a dangerous rock lies close off
the coral reef on the N side of the inner end of the entrance
channel, about 7 cables WSW of the unnamed islet.
Further unnamed islets lie on the coral reef on the N side,
of the outer end, of the entrance channel.
3 Sajd village is a ruined village which stands on the NW
shore of the inlet, along with a grove of date palms. At the
W end of Khawr Sajd there is an opening in the coral reef,
about 16 m wide; the S edge of the date palm grove bearing
294° leads into this opening.
10.126
1 Anchorage. A good anchorage may be obtained within
Khawr Sajd, which is completely sheltered from wind and
sea, in depths of about 20 m.
Al Qabr
10.127
1 Description. Al Qabr (16°46′N, 42°02′E) is entered E of
Mandhar (10.119) and extends about 7 miles S, thence about
3 miles E.
Coral reefs border both sides of the inlet with some rocky
islets standing on the W reef.
2 The islets of Sayl Sherra Kebr and Sayl Sherra aghr
both stand on the reef on the E side of the entrance which
fronts Ra’s al Jass (16°49′N, 42°05′E) the N extremity of
Faras
n al Kabr (10.112).
The fairway through Al Qabr is encumbered with rocks,
from about 1 to 1 miles S of Mandhar, but there is a
narrow, tortuous channel through the inlet in which there is a
least depth of 5⋅5 m.
Al Ham ra
10.128
1 Description. Al Ham
ra (16°50′N, 41°47′E) is a small
bay entered between Ra’s Faras
n and Kaira (10.143).
10.129
1 Anchorage, which is mainly used by local craft, may be
obtained within the bay.
Jan bah Bay
10.130
1 Description. Jan
bah Bay is situated on the SW part of
Faras
n al Kabr (10.112) between Mary Point (16°40′N,
41°59′E) and Ra’s Shiddah (5 miles ESE), but is entered
between Ra’s Shiddah and the E side of Qumm
 (10.150)
which encumbers the middle of the mouth of the bay.
10.131
1 Anchorage may be obtained in the E part of the bay.
294
North—west islands of the Faras n Group
Ma
raayn
10.132
1 Description. Maraayn (17°09′N, 41°37′E) is a small
islet formed by a group of dark rocks, about 3 m high.
Jabal Muhammad Island
10.133
1 Description. Jabal Muhammad Island (17°03′N, 41°45′E)
consists of sand and coral which rise in its E part to a dark
wedge-shaped hill, about 46 m high.
‘Akbayn
10.134
1 Description. ‘Akbayn (17°05′⋅2N, 41°55′⋅8E) is the
N-most islet of the numerous rocky islets which lie on a
bank initially extending NE, then turning NW, from the N
part of Sajd (10.112).
Sayr ‘Abd
10.135
1 Description. Sayr ‘Abd (17°01′⋅2N, 42°00′⋅1E) is the
E-most islet on the bank extending NE, then NW, from the
N part of Sajd (10.112).
The islet is a small, round, mushroom-shaped coral rock
about 6 m high.
 ahrat Ma
raayn
10.136
1 Description. ahrat Maraayn (17°02′⋅5N, 41°32′⋅7E) is
a dark, rocky islet, about 6 m high, fringed by a reef; this
islet is usually identified visually at a distance of about
15 miles.
Wishkah
10.137
1 Description. Wishkah (17°00′⋅5N, 41°39′⋅0E) is a sand
and coral islet which rises to a height of 18 m and is
surrounded by a coral reef.
In 1981 the islet was reported to be covered in scrub.
Ad Diss n
10.138
1 Description. Ad Diss
n (16°55′⋅5N, 41°41′⋅0E) is a flat
island rising gradually towards its centre; the NE side of the
island is rocky with one or two remarkable sandy patches
situated about 1 mile from its N extremity.
Jabal Diss
n rises in the S part of the island and forms a
prominent hummock about 67 m high; a cairn stands on the
S part of the island.
2 A prominent rock is reported to lie 4 cables off the SW
side of the island.
Abtain Bay is a small bay on the NE side of the island.
A coral reef, on which there are a number of islets,
connects the island with Ra’s Faras
n, the NW extremity of
Faras
n al Kabr (10.112).
10.139
1 Anchorage, which is sheltered from S winds, may be
obtained in Abtain Anchorage off the NE side of Ad Diss
n.
In 1930 it was reported that the holding ground was poor
and that Abtain Bay was foul.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Anchorage has also been obtained, in a depth of about
46 m, about 3 cables offshore with the conspicuous white
sand patch on the NE side of the island, bearing 151°.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 10
Safan
10.140
1 Description. Safan (16°58′⋅4N, 41°40′⋅4E) lies close off
the N extremity of Ad Diss
n (10.138) and is composed of
coral. The islet is about 6 m high.
10.141
1 Anchorage may obtained by small vessels, sheltered from
N winds, within the channel between Ad Diss
n and Safan.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
West Mandhur
10.142
1 Description. West Mandhur (16°58′N, 41°48′E), which is
surrounded by a coral reef, is an island lying about 3 miles
NW of Ra’s ‘Amy
‘ the NW extremity of Sajd (10.112).
Akbaya, Ab Shawk, and Hasib Islet, are three low coral
islets which lie up to 2 miles N and NW of West Mandhur.
Islands south-west of Faras n al Kab r
Kaira
10.143
1 Description. Kaira (16°48′N, 41°45′E) is a small wooded
islet surrounded by a coral reef.
Zuf f
10.144
1 Description. Zuf
f (Dh
Al Fayf) (16°43′N, 41°46′E) is
an island which shows up well.
A cove indents the NE side of the island between a
conspicuous sandspit, 9 cables from the SE extremity of the
island, and a point about 1
miles farther NW. A
conspicuous white cliff stands near the centre of the SW
shore of the cove.
2 The cove may be approached between the NW end of
Doewa Reef, a dangerous reef, and a shallow coral bank
extending 4 cables SE from the NE entrance point to the
cove. A rock awash lies 3 cables S of the NE entrance point
to the cove; an above-water rock lies 2 cables NNW of the
white cliff.
10.145
1 Anchorage. It has been reported that anchorage may be
obtained about 2 cables N of the N end of the island, in a
depth of about 18 m.
Anchorage may also be obtained W and NW of Doewa
Reef in depths of less than 20 m.
Dushuk
10.146
1 Description. Dushuk (16°38′N, 41°52′E) is a high coral
island standing on the coral reef extending SE from Zuf
f.
Sayr Haggar is an islet lying at the outer end of a bank
which extends about 4 miles W from the N end of Dushuk
Island; several other unnamed islets also stand on this bank.
Akbar  qayl 2
10.147
1 Description. Akbar qayl (16°38′N, 41°55′E), which lies
between Dushuk and Salbah, is a high coral island
surrounded by a reef.
Sal bah
10.148
1 Description. Salbah (16°35′N, 41°59′E) lies on a
shallow bank close SW of Qumm
 (10.150). The island is
high and composed of coral.
295
10.149
1 Anchorage may be obtained on the shallow bank off the
N side of the island in depths of about 10 m; though the
nature of the bottom is not known, it is reported to be a
good holding ground during S winds.
Qumm
10.150
1 Description. Qumm
 (16°38′N, 42°01′E) lies across the
entrance to Jan
bah Bay (10.130); the island is steep-to on
parts of its E and W sides, but its NW side is connected
with Faras
n al Kabr (10.112) by a shallow bank.
A fairly conspicuous peak, 45 m high, stands about
7 cables NNW of Black Point, the W entrance point to an
inlet entered from the S side of the island; Slick Point forms
the E entrance point to this inlet.
2 The inlet on the S side of the island has rocky, steep-to
shores for about 1 mile within its entrance; a shallow bay on
the W side of the inlet is entered S of a point formed by a
series of peculiar rocks, which, bearing 342°, makes a good
mark for entering the inlet.
10.151
1 Anchorage. Good anchorage may be obtained within this
inlet, in depths from about 14 to 17 m, with Sagg Point (not
charted by name) which lies 1 mile NNW of Slick Point,
bearing 071°.
Dumsuq
10.152
1 Description. Dumsuq (16°33′N, 42°03′E) lies about
3 miles SE of Salbah (10.148) on the same shallow bank;
the island is high and almost divided into two by a narrow
inlet.
An above-water rock is reported to lie about 5 cables off
its SE side.
Islands south of Faras n al Kab r
Mazarkiff Islands
10.153
1 Description. Mazarkiff Islands (16°35′N, 42°21′E) are a
group of islands of which the main three are Ghuzeh,
Mazagnef and Maserlein, all of which lie E of Ra’s Abarah
(10.117); all of these islands are fringed by reefs.
Dangerous shoal banks lie SE and SW of the islands;
another shoal bank, with a least depth over it of 5 m, lies
about 3 miles ENE of Ghuzeh Island.
Mazarkiff Islands Light-beacon (red daymark) (16°34′⋅5N,
42°21′⋅6E) marks the SE end of Ghuzeh, the largest island
of the group.
10.154
1 Strawbridge Strait (16°35′N, 42°18′E) lies between the
coastal bank extending E and SE of Faras
n al Kabr
(10.112), on its W side, and on its E side, the Mazarkiff
Islands (10.153) and the dangerous detached, rocky, shoal
bank which extends 3 miles SW of Maserlein.
In 1978 it was reported that there were least depths of
3⋅7 m within the passage.
Sumayr (16°31′N, 42°15′E) is a low islet with a reef
extending SW of it which lies on the W side of the S end of
the strait. In 1978 shoaling was reported between Sumayr
and a sand cay lying on a bank situated 2 miles N.
Local knowledge is required for the use of Strawbridge
Strait.
 ahrat Sumayr
10.155
1 Description. ahrat Sumayr (16°29′N, 42°18′E) is a low
islet, composed of coral and fringed by a reef.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 10
A stranded wreck lies on the edge of the reef about
1
miles SSW of the island.
(16°19′N, 42°35′E) is a
Rumayn
10.156
1 Description. Rumayn (16°26′N, 42°16′E) lies towards the
NW end of a bank which extends SE to Murayn (10.158).
;
The island is sandy and fringed by a reef; the highest point
of the island lies in its NW end.
10.157
and Buklan (10.164).
1 Anchorage, sheltered from S winds, may be obtained off
the NE side of Rumayn Island.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Murayn
10.158
1 Description. Murayn (16°23′N, 42°18′E) lies on the same
bank as Rumayn (10.156); a white cross stands on the E
extremity of the islet.
Barri Islands
10.159

’ (16°15′N, 42°32′E) lies on the shallow bank,
1 Description. Rafa Barri (16°18′N, 42°12′E) and Barri
(1 miles E) stand on the W end of the bank which includes
Rumayn (10.156) and Zamhar (10.161).
These islands do not show up as well as the dark rocky

’.
islands which lie in their vicinity; a small islet lies off the S
end of Rafa Barri and some rocks lie between their S ends.
Sayl Ruba
10.160
1 Description. Sayl Ruba (16°23′N, 42°21′E) is a small
islet composed of coral, surrounded by a coral reef, lying on
the mid-part of the same bank as Rumayn (10.156).
Dh Dafr and Zurt lie between 3 miles and 5 miles
NE on an extension of this bank to the N; dangerous rocks
and an unnamed islet lie on this extension, and also on a
more extensive extension of the bank to the N.
Zamhar
10.161
1 Description. Zamhar (16°18′N, 42°20′E) is almost
surrounded by a reef; a small village is situated on the W
side of the island.
Ar
ayn, surrounded by a reef, lies about 1 mile ESE of
Zamhar and is rather high; an islet lies between these two
islands.
Sayl as Siya
10.162
1 Description. Sayl as Siya (16°25′N, 42°30′E) is a low
and sandy islet which lies on a shallow bank which extends
N of Buklan (10.164), along with other dangers.
An unnamed detached bank, on which there are numerous
dangerous rocks, lies about 2 miles E of Sayl as Siya.
Further isolated dangerous rocks, one existence doubtful,
lie NW of Sayl as Siya off the NW edge of the extension of
the shallow bank N of Buklan; more isolated dangerous
rocks lies farther N.
2 ashsh Reef (5 miles WSW), which is generally below
water in winter, also lies on the extension of the shallow
bank to the N. Al ‘Unur
t and Rukada, both of which are
islets surrounded by reefs, lie 2 miles and 5 miles,
respectively, ESE of ashsh Reef.
296
Umm al  umm
10.163
1 Description. Umm al umm

coral islet, nearly surrounded by a coral reef, lying near the
edge of the Faras
n Bank (10.14); an unnamed islet
surrounded by a reef, lies about 1 mile NNW. A coral reef
lies towards the edge of the bank, E of Umm al umm

dangerous below-water rocks lie in this vicinity.
Man
is, an islet surrounded by a coral reef, lies midway
between Umm al umm

Duqaylah Islands
10.164
1 Description. The Duqaylah Islands (16°17′N, 42°29′E)
are a group of rocky islands which lie on the SW side of the
shallow bank on which also stand Umm al umm

(10.163), Man
is (10.163), ashsh Reef (10.162), Al
‘Unur
t (10.162) and Rukada (10.162).
Buklan, which is the largest island of the group, is mostly
surrounded by a reef, and rises to a height of about 9 m; a
village and a mosque stand on the island.
2 Duqaylah lies close S of Buklan; the island is higher
rising to 27 m, and it is again mostly surrounded by a reef.
Al Bay
SE of Buklan and is surrounded by a large coral reef; the
islet is high and prominent. A large coral reef and a small
coral reef, on each of which there is a small islet, lie
between Duqaylah and Al Bay
10.165
1 Anchorage may be obtained off the NW side of Buklan
in a depth of about 5 m.
Charts 15, 157
Fasht Island
10.166
1 Description. Fasht Island (16°12′N, 42°21′E) is a high
island with a small village and a mosque situated near its
centre.
A reef, over which the sea breaks, extends about 4 miles
S from the island terminating in a shoal patch, with a depth
of 3⋅7 m over it. Two islets lie on this reef.
2 Jabal Jink and Maflaqayn, both of which are high and
rocky, lie on a reef situated between Buklan (10.164) and
Fasht Island; a dangerous rock lies E of the reef on which
the islets stand.
Sana Island (16°07′N, 42°16′E) (10.68) lies about 5 miles
WSW of Fasht Island.
Shi‘b Faras n
Chart 15
Description
10.167
1 Shi‘b Faras
n (16°40′N, 41°40′E) is a line of reefs,
islands and shoals which lies within the SW edge of the
Faras
n Bank (10.14) which extends from about the vicinity
of the Jz
n North Approach Route (10.197) about 50 miles
SE to the Pearly Gates Passage (10.206).
Numerous Islands and shoals lie on Shi‘b Faras
n; no
navigable channel is known to exist over the bank.
A deep channel lies between Shi‘b Faras
n and the Jaz
‘ir
Faras
n (10.111) group of islands which lie between 2 miles
and 5 miles NE.
2 As well as the named islands and islets described in the
text several small islets and reefs lie within the area which
lies between 6 miles S and 10 miles SE of the Stewart Islets
(16°39′N, 41°44′E). A stranded wreck lies on Shi‘b Faras
n
about 11 miles SE of the Stewart Islets.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 10

TRACK ACROSS THE FARAS N BANK
SOUTH — WEST OF JAZ ’IR FARAS N
Chart 15
Local knowledge
10.168
1 This route, which leads between the islands NE and E of
Shi‘b Faras
n (10.167), should not be attempted unless in
possession of local knowledge.
Caution
10.169
1 A strong current is sometimes experienced in the narrow
channel between Qumm
 (16°38′N, 42°01′E) (10.150) and
Salbah (1 mile SW) (10.148).
Tide-rips caused by the uneven bottom may be mistaken
for reefs.
Directions
10.170
1 From a position about 1 miles W of ahrat Maraayn
(17°02′⋅5N, 41°32′⋅7E) the track leads generally SE for
about 52 miles, passing (with positions given from Jabal
Diss
n (16°54′⋅1N, 41°41′⋅5E)):
SW of ahrat Maraayn (12 miles NW) (10.136).
Thence:
NE of a large detached shoal (7 miles NW), with a
least depth over it of 4 m. A shoal, with a least
depth over it of 9⋅1 m, lies between the S side of
the large detached shoal and the N end of Sarad
Sarso (10.67), thence:
2 SW of Wishkah (7 miles NNW) (10.137), thence:
WSW of Safan (4 miles N) (10.140). Thence:
W of the W extremity of Ad Diss
n (2 miles WNW)
(10.138), thence:
NE of Sindi Sarso (5 miles WSW) (10.67), thence:
10.171
1 From a position SW of Jabal Diss
n (16°54′⋅1N,
41°41′⋅5E), the track continues on an E heading, steering for
Jabal Hegena (16°51′⋅7N, 41°47′⋅2E) which rises to a height
of 53 m about 2 miles SE of Ra’s Faras
n (10.121),
entering the bay formed by Ad Diss
n, the NW corner of
Faras
n al Kabr (10.112) and Kaira (10.143) and passing
(with positions given from Mary Point (16°40′⋅0N,
41°59′⋅2E)):
2 Through the narrow channel which lies between the E
extremity of Kaira (16 miles NW) and the W-most
point of Faras
n al Kabr; then along the SW side
of Faras
n al Kabr. Thence:
NE of Zuf
f (Dh
Al Fayf) (12 miles WNW) (10.144),
thence:
NE of Doewa Reef (9 miles WNW) (10.144) which
lies close off the SE end of Zuf
f, thence:
3 NE of Dushuk (7 miles W) (10.146). Thence:
NE of Akbar qayl (4 miles SW) (10.147), thence:
SW of Mary Point (10.114), thence:
10.172
1 From a position SW of Mary Point (16°40′⋅0N,
41°59′⋅2E) the track continues SE, passing (with positions
given from Ra’s Shiddah (16°37′⋅9N, 42°04′⋅4E)):
Through the narrow channel (4 miles WSW) which lies
between the SW side of Qumm
 (10.150) and the
reef extending NE from the NE point of Salbah
(10.148), favouring the Qumm
 side of the
channel which is steep-to. Thence:
2 SW of Black Point (3 miles WSW) (10.150), thence:
SSW of Ra’s Shiddah (10.114), thence:
NNE of Dumsuq (5 miles SSW) (10.152). Thence:
SW of Slick Point (3 miles SW) (10.150), thence:
SSW of the shoal spur (6 miles SE), with a least depth
over it of 4 m, which extends about 2 miles SW
from an unnamed point on the coast about 1
miles
W of Ra’s Abarah, thence:
3 SSW of Ra’s Abarah (7 miles ESE) (10.117); note
the detached shoal (reported 1978), with a least
depth over it of 8⋅2 m, which lies 3
miles SSW of
the point.
10.173
1 Strawbridge Strait, which lies E of Ra’s Abarah, is
described at 10.154.

JZ N
GENERAL INFORMATION Between the E entrance point to Khawr Ab as Sab‘

(10.81) and Jz
n (9 miles S), the coast is flat and sandy.
Chart 15 The hills, which stand close behind Jz
n, rise to a height of
Position about 60 m. They make a good mark being the only high
10.174 land in this vicinity.
1 Jz
n (Gizan) (16°54′N, 42°32′E) is situated on the E side 2 The coast between Jz
n and Oreste Point (33 miles SSE)
of the S part of the Red Sea, about 260 miles N of Bab el (10.234) consists of rocky cliffs backed by jungle.
Mandeb (4.71). Qarn al Shrah is a small bushy point which lies on this
stretch of coast, about 4 miles SSE of Jz
n.
Function
Port limits
10.175
10.178
1 Jz
n is a developing port serving the S areas of Saudi
1 The limits of the Port of Jz
n extend about 9 miles W
Arabia.
from Qarn al Wad
(17°00′N, 42°33′E) to Fur
fir (16°59′N,
10.176
42°25′E), thence about 7 miles S to Hibar (16°53′N,
1 Trade. The main imports include livestock, barley and
42°25′E), thence about 5 miles SSE to Umm al Kathb
general cargo.
(16°49′N, 42°28′E), and then finally 7 miles ENE to a point
The main exports include general cargo, foodstuffs and
on the shore near Qarn al Shrah (16°50′N, 42°35′E).
cement clinker.
Approach and entry
Topography 10.179
10.177 1 Approach. The approach described is made from a
1 Jz
n is situated on a small promontory about 12 miles SE position in the central part of the Red Sea about 10 miles
of Ra’s a arf
(17°01′N, 42°22′E) (10.81). WSW of Jz
n North Light-buoy (16°57′N, 41°17′E) (10.67)

297
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 10

and leads through the Jz
n Northern Approach Route For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
(10.197) to the pilot boarding position (10.193) which lies in Signals, Volume 6 (3).
the vicinity of N13 Light-buoy (16°53′⋅6N, 42°26′⋅2E)
(10.203). Notice of ETA
2 Entry to the port is made through a buoyed inner 10.190
channel which leads about 5 miles E from the vicinity of 1 Vessels should give notice, through their agent, of their
N13 Light-buoy, across the off-lying bank to the entrance to ETA 5 days, 2 days and 1 day in advance of their arrival.
the port formed by the NW and S breakwaters.
Outer anchorages
Traffic 10.191
10.180 1 Anchorage A (16°54′⋅5N, 42°28′⋅0E), for use by general
1 In 2003 the port was used by 73 vessels. cargo vessels, lies about 4 miles WNW of the harbour
entrance.
Port Authority A shoal, with a least depth over it of 6⋅4 m, lies close N
10.181 of the designated position for Anchorage A. This shoal is
1 The harbour is administered by Jz
n Port Management: not easily discernible.
PO Box 16, Jz
n, Saudi Arabia. Anchorage B (16°51′⋅8N, 42°28′⋅2E), for use by tankers,
lies about 3 miles WSW of the harbour entrance.
10.192
LIMITING CONDITIONS 1 Prohibited area. An area within which anchoring and
Charts 15, 16 fishing is prohibited, and navigation is restricted to vessels
Controlling depth under pilotage, extends between the shore and the two SPM
10.182 berths (10.224), as shown on the chart.
1 The inner entrance channel is dredged to a depth of Four red spar buoys mark the seaward limit of this
13⋅5 m (1994). prohibited area.

Deepest and longest berths Pilotage

10.183 10.193
1 The Container and Ro-Ro Berths Nos 11 and 12, situated 1 Pilotage is compulsory and is available throughout
on East Quay (10.210), are 216 m in length and have depths 24 hours.
alongside of 10⋅7 m. The pilot boards in position 16°53′⋅7N, 42°26′⋅6E, E of
N13 Light-buoy (10.203).
Tidal levels
10.184 Tugs
1 See information in Admiralty Tide Tables, Volume 3. 10.194
Mean spring range about 0⋅8 m; mean neap range about 1 Tugs are available.
0⋅5 m. The use of two tugs for all vessels manoeuvring within
the harbour is mandatory.
Density of water
10.185
1 Density 1⋅026 g/cm3. HARBOUR
Maximum size of vessel handled Chart 16
10.186 General layout
1 The Port of Jz
n can handle vessels up to 220 m in
10.195
length with a maximum draught of 10⋅5 m.
1 The main harbour comprises a large basin, about 850 m
The Jz
n Oil Terminal SPM Mooring Berths (10.224)
long and 300 m wide, with depths from 8⋅8 to 10⋅7 m.
can handle vessels up to 220 m in length with a maximum
The harbour is formed on its seaward side by North-West
draught of 16⋅3 m.
Breakwater. On its inner side lies West Quay; East Quay lies
Local weather on the E side of the basin N of the Container Terminal.
2 A turning basin, about 400 m in diameter, in which there
10.187
are depths of 12⋅4 m, is protected on its S side by the South
1 The prevailing winds in the port of Jz
n are from the
NW in summer and from the SE in winter. Breakwater which extends about 8 cables from the shore, in
a curve. Light-buoy A (special) is moored close S of Berth
No 1 (10.208) marking a shoal patch, with a least depth over
ARRIVAL INFORMATION it of 6⋅2 m, which lies in the NW part of the turning basin;
Light-buoys B and C (green pillar) mark the extent of the
Port operations shoal water, on the S side of the turning basin, which
10.188 extends N from the N side of the South Breakwater.
1 There are facilities in the port for the handling of 3 A small basin lies E of the turning basin; South Quay is
break-bulk, container, Ro-Ro and bulk cement cargoes. situated on the N side of the approach to this basin.
Coastguard Harbour (10.213), an enclosed basin, lies in
Port radio the N part of the port area.
10.189 Three buoys (cylindrical) are laid seaward of the North
1 Jz
n Port Control radio station controls the operations of West Breakwater.
the port; vessels should contact Jz
n Port Control 2 hours in It has been reported that major dredging work is being
advance of their arrival. undertaken within the port (2004).

298
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 10
Landmark
10.196
1 A conspicuous fort (16°53′⋅3N, 42°32′⋅7E) overlooks the
Port of Jz
n from the summit of a hilly ridge E of the port
area. Three radio towers stand in close vicinity of the fort.
JZ N NORTHERN APPROACH ROUTE
Chart 15
General remarks
10.197
1 In 1997 the Jz
n Northern Approach Route was reported
to be the only route recommended for approaching the Port
of Jz
n.
It was also reported that there was a minimum depth on
this route of 12⋅8 m which made it available for vessels up
to a draught of 11⋅8 m after making due allowance for the
height of tide and the prevailing conditions.
Cautions
10.198
1 The position of the buoyage marking the Jz
n Northern
Approach Route cannot be relied on. It is therefore
recommended that all vessels should contact Jz
n Port
Control (10.189) before entering the approach channel to
obtain the latest information regarding any changes there
may be in the buoyage pattern.
10.199
1 Mariners are cautioned not to proceed outside the limits
of the buoyed channel due to the numerous dangerous rocks
and shoals which lie adjacent to this route.
In 2001 it was reported that due to discrepancies in the
seabed and the suspect geographical positions of some of the
islands a major survey project will be carried out in the
approaches to the port.
See also 10.20.
2 Major dredging work is currently being undertaken in
Jz
n Harbour and Approach Channel. It has also been
reported that there is a discrepancy of up to 2⋅5° in the
charted alignment of Jz
n Approach Channel. Mariners
should exercise extreme caution when entering the Port of
Jz
n and seek advice from the local authorities.
Directions
10.200
1 From a position about 10 miles WSW of Jz
n North
Light-buoy (16°57′N, 41°17′E) the track leads initially NE
for about 92 miles, passing:
Clear of Jz
n North Light-buoy (10.67) which marks
the outer end of Jz
n Northern Approach Route; a
shoal, with a least depth over it of 14 m, lies about
5 cables SE of the buoy. Thence:
2 SE of N2 Light-buoy (port hand) (16°59′⋅8N,
41°19′⋅5E) which marks the NE corner of a shoal,
with a least depth over it of 13⋅1 m. A larger shoal,
over which there is a danger area and which is
marked on its W extremity by MAK Light-buoy
(6 miles WNW) (10.67), lies close NW. Note the
shoal (1 mile SW) (position approximate), with a
least depth over it of 20 m, which lies in the middle
of the outer end of the approach fairway, thence:
3 NW of Al Baghlah Light (16°56′⋅6N, 41°23′⋅5E)
(10.67) which is exhibited from the W extremity of
the reef which surrounds Al Baghlah, a low and
sandy island which stands on the N part of a coral
reef, situated at the N end of Shi‘b Faras
n
(10.167), and on which there are a number of other
299
dangerous rocks; another light-beacon (10.67) is
exhibited from the NW corner of the island. A
stranded wreck, which is radar conspicuous, lies
near the NW edge of the surrounding reef, about
3 miles NNW of the island; in 1981 this wreck was
reported to be easily mistaken for a vessel at anchor,
and:
4 NW of N1 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (16°59′⋅7N,
41°20′⋅8E) which is moored on the NW corner of a
large shoal area, with a least depth over it of 5⋅9 m,
through which it is considered unsafe to navigate.
Note the shoal, with a least depth over it of 12⋅8 m,
which lies in the middle of the fairway about
1 miles N of N1 Light-buoy. Thence:
5 NW of N3 Light-buoy (W cardinal) (17°02′⋅2N,
41°22′⋅8E) which is moored on the NW corner of a
shoal, with a least depth over it of 8 m. In 2000 a
shoal, with a least depth over it of 12⋅5 m, was
reported to lie about 5 cables NW of the buoy.
Thence:
6 SE of N4 Light-buoy (S cardinal) (17°05′⋅9N,
41°24′⋅6E) which is moored on the SE corner of a
shoal, with a least depth over it of 9 m, and NW of
an isolated shoal (3 miles SE), with a least depth
over it of 9⋅1 m. Thence:
10.201
1 Passing:
NW of ahrat Maraayn (17°02′⋅5N, 41°32′⋅7E)
(10.136) and the area of shoals and dangerous
rocks, which lies up to 4 miles N of the islet,
thence:
NW of the shoal (17°09′⋅3N, 41°31′⋅2E) with a least
depth over it of 9 m, thence:
2 SE of an isolated shoal (17°13′⋅3N, 41°28′⋅8E)
(reported 1983) with a least depth over it of 11 m.
Thence:
NW of the detached dangerous rocks which are centred
on 17°12′⋅2N, 41°34′⋅9E; Maraayn (17°09′⋅1N,
41°37′⋅0E) (10.132) lies about 4 miles SE, thence:
3 SE of N6 Light-buoy (port hand) (17°14′⋅4N,
41°33′⋅3E) which is moored on the SE side of a
shoal, with a least depth over it of 8⋅2 m. Note that
further shoals have been reported in this vicinity; in
1982 less water was reported N of the track
between N6 and N7 Light-buoys and E of No 2
Middle Light-beacon, thence:
4 NNW of N5 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (17°13′⋅6N,
41°34′⋅5E) which is moored NW of an area of
detached shoals, with a least depth over them of
8⋅5 m. Thence:
SSE of No 2 Middle Light-beacon (red daymark;
racon) (17°16′⋅8N, 41°33′⋅4E) which stands within
an area of shoal water; a detached shoal, with a
least depth over it of 5⋅5 m (position approximate),
lies 8 cables SE of the light, thence:
5 SSE of a dangerous rock (17°18′⋅3N, 41°38′⋅5E); and
NNW of a shoal (4 miles SSE), with a least depth
over it of 7⋅9 m, thence:
10.202
1 Passing:
SSE of a shoal area (17°19′N, 41°39′E) with a least
depth over it of 8⋅7 m, and the dangerous rock close
SW, thence:
NE of N7 Light-buoy (N cardinal) (17°17′⋅2N,
41°42′⋅6E), thence:
NE of a shoal (17°15′⋅6N, 41°43′⋅2E) (reported 1980),
with a least depth over it of 7⋅3 m, which lies at the
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 10
NW end of a line of dangerous rocks and shoals
which lie along the SW side of the fairway, and:
2 SW of a detached shoal (17°20′⋅0N, 41°46′⋅2E), with a
least depth over it of 8⋅7 m, which lies between two
larger areas of shoal water. The NW larger shoal
area has a least depth over it of 5 m; the SE larger
shoal area has a least depth over it of 6⋅7 m but also
has some dangerous rocks lying on its E side. It is
considered unsafe to navigate through either of
these two larger shoal areas. Thence:
3 NE of a detached shoal area (17°13′⋅5N, 41°46′⋅8E)
over which the depth is unknown but through
which it is considered dangerous to navigate,
thence:
SW of a detached shoal (17°13′⋅3N, 41°54′⋅2E)
(position approximate), with a least depth over it of
9⋅1 m, thence:
4 SW of a dangerous rock (17°11′⋅2N, 42°54′⋅5E)
(reported 1967) standing on a detached area of
shoal water near the middle of the fairway of the
Northern Approach Channel, and clear of N10
Light-buoy (safe water) (1 mile SW). A shoal area,
on which lie a number of dangerous rocks, lies on
the NE side of the channel about 3 miles ENE of
the dangerous rock. Thence:
5 NE of ‘Akbayn (17°05′⋅2N, 41°55′⋅8E) (10.134) and
the chain of reefs and small islets which extend
about 7 miles SE, thence:
10.203
1 Passing:
SW of North Ghur
b (17°06′⋅4N, 42°04′⋅0E) which is
light brown in colour and is surrounded by a reef,
both of which are situated on the SW edge of a
shoal bank of sand and mud which extends SE and
NW from the islet; a small black rock lies 3 cables
NW of the islet. North Ghur
b Light-beacon (red
beacon; racon) stands on the SW edge of the islet.
Thence:
2 SSW of the light-buoy (E cardinal) (17°05′⋅1N,
42°08′⋅9E) which marks the E end of the shoal
bank of sand and mud on which stands North
Ghur
b, and:
NNE of a detached shoal (17°00′⋅2N, 42°07′⋅4E), with
a least depth over it of 9⋅2 m, which lies at the N
end of a chain of similar detached shoals which
extends S to the vicinity of Ra’s al Jass (10.115);
Dh
hik (10.120) stands in the middle part of this
chain of detached shoals. Thence:
3 SSW of the detached shoal bank (17°04′N, 42°14′E),
with a least depth over it of 3⋅5m, which lies
between Sha‘rah and North Ghur
b (14 miles
WNW), thence:
4 SSW of Sha‘rah (17°02′⋅5N, 42°18′⋅2E) which is dark
brown and rocky but with a very white beach and
stands on the SE end of a bank of rocks and sand.
In 1981 Sha‘rah was reported to be covered with
green bushes with four huts situated on its E side.
Note also the detached shoal, with a least depth
over it of 9⋅9 m, which lies about 8 cables SE of the
islet. Thence:
5 NNE of Ab Shuqar (16°55′⋅5N, 42°17′⋅4E) the
NE-most islet on Ab Shuqar Bank. The islet is
covered with trees and makes a good mark; from a
distance, especially on NW bearings, it appears as
two separate islets. Ab Shuqar Bank (16°53′⋅0N,
42°17′⋅0E) is encumbered with several islets, reefs
and shoal heads; depths over the bank are very
300
irregular and it is considered unsafe to navigate over
it. ahrat Dur
kah is the S-most islet of the bank
which shows as a sandy cay during the summer, but
at other times the sea breaks over it. Two Sisters,
Flop Islet and Dur
ka are three other islets situated
on this bank, thence:
6 SSW of N12 Light-buoy (safe water) (16°58′⋅1N,
42°22′⋅8E) which is moored about 2 miles SW of
Fur
fir (10.82), thence:
NE of Hibar (16°53′⋅0N, 42°24′⋅6E) which is fringed
by a reef. Thence:
NE of N13 Light-buoy (safe water) (16°53′⋅6N,
42°26′⋅2E) and thence to the pilot boarding position
(10.193) which lies about 4 cables E.
Chart 16
Entrance Channel
10.204
1 Directions. From the pilot boarding position in the
vicinity of N13 Light-buoy the track through the Jz
n
Entrance Channel leads E for about 5 miles.
Leading lights:
Front light (16°52′⋅9N, 42°32′⋅2E) situated at the root
of the South Breakwater.
Rear light (300 m from front).
2 The alignment (096°) of these leading lights, as shown
on the chart, leads through the entrance channel, through the
outer breakwaters and into the Port of Jz
n, passing (with
positions given from South Breakwater Head Light
(16°53′⋅0N, 42°31′⋅5E)):
Between G1 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (3 miles W),
and G2 Light-buoy (port hand) which lies about
1 cables N, thence:
Between G3 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (1 miles
W), and G4 Light-buoy (port hand) which lies
about 1 cables N, thence:
3 N of G5 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (4 cables W),
thence:
S of G6 Light-buoy (port hand) (3 cables NW), thence:
N of South Breakwater Head Light (green metal
framework tower), thence:
S of NW Breakwater Head Light (red metal framework
tower) (2 cables NE); Jz
n Port Control Tower lies
close ENE of the light; thence into the main port
area.
JZ N SOUTHERN APPROACH ROUTE
Chart 15
General remarks
10.205
1 In 1983 the Port of Jz
n Southern Approach Route was
closed to all vessels until further survey work was completed
to establish a safe, deeper route. In January 2003 the Saudi
Ports Authority announced the installation of a number of
light-buoys intended only to facilitate a new survey of the
Southern Approach Route, and not for the use of general
commercial vessels.
2 All vessels bound for Jz
n should continue to use the
Jz
n Northern Approach Route (10.197) until further notice.
Pearly Gates
10.206
1 Description. The Pearly Gates (16°20′N, 41°52′E) is the
named outer channel which lies between the SE edge of
Shi‘b Faras
n (10.167) and the dangers NW of Dhu Hirab
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 10

(Dawhar
b) (10.68). The passage provides the outer entrance cranes; self propelled barges; grain elevator of 200 tonnes
to the Jz
n Southern Approach Route, which is being capacity; harbour launches with one equipped for fire
re-surveyed (2003). fighting.
In 1953 less water than charted was reported to lie in this
channel. Supplies
10.216
1 Fresh water but no barge supply; diesel available by road
BERTHS tanker; small quantities of fresh provisions available.
Chart 16 Communications
Anchorages 10.217
10.207 1 Jz
n Airport, situated close E of the town, offers internal
1 See 10.191. air services and international services via Jeddah or Riyadh
Alongside berths International Airports.
10.208
1 The alongside berths in Jz
n are numbered clockwise in JZ N OIL TERMINAL
sequence from the control tower. The positions and
configurations of the berths can best be seen from the chart. General layout
West Quay has five berths. The longest is Berth 1, 10.218
(16°53′⋅1N, 42°31′⋅9E) which is 199 m in length with depths 1 Jz
n Oil Terminal (16°50′N, 42°30′E) consists of two
of 10⋅7 m alongside. SPM Buoys, SPM−1 and SPM−2, moored about 4 miles SW
10.209 of the main harbour area.
1 Head of the harbour has two berths. The longest is Jz
n Jetty (10.225) extends SW from Rushdi Point
Berth 6, (16°53′⋅5N, 42°31′⋅9E) which is 183 m in length (16°52′⋅3N, 42°33′⋅3E).
with depths of 8⋅8 m alongside. It is used for general cargo Lights are exhibited from both SPM Buoys and from the
and livestock. head of the jetty.
10.210 Operating Authority
1 East Quay has five berths. The longest are Berths 11 and 10.219
12, (16°53′⋅2N, 42°32′⋅1E) which are 216 m in length each 1 The facility is operated by Saudi Aramco.
with depths of 10⋅7 m alongside. They are used for
containers and Ro-Ro. Pilotage
10.211 10.220
1 South Quay has one berth. It is numbered Berth 13 1 Pilotage is compulsory; pilots board in the vicinity of
(16°53′⋅1N, 42°32′⋅1E) and is 205 m in length with a depth N13 Light-buoy (16°53′⋅6N, 42°26′⋅2E) (10.203) or in the
of 8 m alongside. It is used for coastal traffic. anchorage; see 10.193.
10.212 If bound for Jz
n Jetty (10.225) the pilot boards
1 Service Quay. A service quay is situated on the W side approximately 1 mile W of the entry light-buoy (yellow can).
of the small basin which lies in the SE part of the harbour;
the quay has a depth alongside of 8⋅0 m. Tugs
10.213 10.221
1 Coastguard Harbour. The Coastguard Harbour, which 1 Two tugs are available; a mooring boat is also available.
lies close NE of the main harbour, is a small basin, enclosed Submarine pipelines
on its NW side by a breakwater. 10.222
The harbour is entered from the W, through an entrance 1 Submarine oil pipelines extend NE from the SPM berths
situated near its SW corner, between the enclosing to land ashore in a position close E of Rushdi Point, in the
breakwater and a small breakwater spur extending a short vicinity of a tank farm.
distance N from a position on the S side of the harbour; Six light-beacons, numbered 1 to 6 from seaward, mark
lights are exhibited from the head of the breakwater and the the line of the submarine pipeline within the 10 m depth
NW corner of the small spur. contour.
2 Three buoys (cylindrical) are laid within the harbour. See 1.21.
In 1982 a cement factory ship was permanently moored,
with bows NW, alongside the small promontory which Prohibited area
projects NW from the N end of Coastguard Harbour. 10.223
Again, in 1982 a stranded wreck was reported, probably 1 An area, as shown on the chart, in which fishing and
one of the two charted lying close together about 2 cables anchoring is prohibited, encloses Jz
n Oil Terminal; spar
N of the N end of the small promontory, as being prominent buoys (non-IALA) indicate the extent of the prohibited area.
with its bows S and with a port list.
Mooring berths
10.224
PORT SERVICES 1 The two SPM Berths are suitable for use by vessels of
Repairs between 10 000 dwt and 49 000 dwt, with a maximum LOA
10.214 of 220 m, a maximum beam of 35 m, and a maximum
1 Minor repairs only. draught of 16⋅3 m; lights are exhibited from both SPM
buoys.
Other facilities 2 A number of obstructions and areas of foul ground,
10.215 whose positions may best be seen on the chart, lie in the
1 Doctors and hospital; floating crane up to 200 tonnes vicinity of the SPM berths. An obstruction, with a least
capacity; quay side cranes up to 42 tonnes capacity; mobile depth over it of 12⋅7 m, lies 4 cables N of SPM−1; a further

301
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 10

obstruction, with a least depth over it of 15⋅8 m, lies about
3 cables E of SPM−2.
3 A light-buoy (yellow cylindrical) is moored E of the SPM
berths at the junction of the submarine pipelines which
extend from the mooring berths with the main submarine
pipeline which leads NE to the shore.
Caution. See 10.197 for minimum depth on the Jz
n
Northern Approach Route.
J z n Jetty
Description
10.225
1 A jetty, which is used by small tankers up to 5000 dwt
with a maximum draught of 5⋅5 m, extends about 7 cables
SW from Rushdi Point (16°52′⋅3N, 42°33′⋅3E). Note the
shoal depths of 4⋅0 and 4⋅3 m which lie close off the outer
end of the jetty.
2 This berth consists of a working platform with breasting
dolphins on either side, two mooring dolphins are situated at
each end of the berth, all of which are inter-connected by
walkways.
Lights are exhibited from the jetty head; mooring buoys
are laid close to the W end of the head of the jetty.
Directions
10.226
1 Vessels instructed to proceed directly to the fixed jetty
should make for the pilot boarding position 2 miles W of
head of the jetty, before proceeding to the berth.
See Pilotage (10.220).
Supplies
10.227
1 Neither fresh water nor bunkers are available at the jetty.
Small harbour
10.228
1 A small harbour, approached through a dredged channel,
lies off Rushdi Point (16°52′⋅3N, 42°33′⋅3E) and is entered
W of the root of Jz
n Jetty.

INNER CHANNEL CONTINUED

RA’S A  ARF TO ORESTE POINT them of less than 5 m, lie NW and SE respectively
and passing SW of Anchorage B (10.191), the
General information tanker anchorage for the Port of Jz
n. Note the
11⋅9 m depth which lies in the fairway about
Charts 15, 16
2 miles ESE of the E extremity of Hibar, thence:
General remarks 4 ENE of Umm al Qarb (5 miles SW) an island,
10.229 surrounded by a reef, situated on a sand and coral
1 See 10.21 to 10.28 for general remarks regarding the bank; Umm al ‘Asal, a small islet which is almost
Inner Channel Route. surrounded by a reef, lies close W. Note the spar
Route buoys (red; non-IALA) which mark the SW end of
10.230 the prohibited area (10.223) surrounding Jz
n Oil
1 The continuation of the Inner Channel Route (10.21) Terminal (10.218), thence:
from Ra’s a arf
(17°01′N, 42°22′E) (10.81) to Oreste 5 ENE of Umm al Kathb (5
miles SW) an island,
Point (16°23′N, 42°46′E) (10.234) passes between the Port surrounded by a reef, situated on a sand and coral
of Jz
n and the E side of the Faras
n Bank (10.14). bank; Umm al Kidf, a small islet which is almost
The route leads generally SSE for about 45 miles passing surrounded by the same reef, lies close NW, and
W of the Port of Jz
n (10.174). WSW of the SPM buoys (10.224) which form the
berths for Jz
n Oil Terminal. Thence:
Caution
10.231
1 Mariners should be aware that uncharted shoals may exist
along this section of the Inner Channel.
See both the caution regarding depths and also the Source
6 ENE of minah (6 miles SW), an islet situated on a
partly drying reef; two dangerous rocks (position
approximate) and two shoals, with least depths over
them of 2⋅8 m and less than 5 m, lie up to nearly
1 mile E of the islet, thence:
Data Diagram on Chart 15. ENE of South minah (7
miles SSW) which is
situated near the S end of the partly drying reef on
Directions
10.232
1 From a position about 2 miles W of Ra’s a arf

(17°01′N, 42°22′E) the track initially leads SE, passing (with
positions given from Jz
n South Breakwater Head Light
(16°53′⋅0N, 42°31′⋅5E)):
SW of N12 Light-buoy (safe water) (10 miles WNW)
which is moored about 2 miles SW of Fur
fir
(10.82), thence:
2 NE of Hibar (6 miles W) which is fringed by a reef,
thence:
Clear of N13 Light-buoy (safe water) (5 miles W)
which is moored about 2 miles W of the W end of
the buoyed entrance channel to the Port of Jz
n
and passing SW of Anchorage A (10.191), the
general cargo anchorage for the port. Thence:
3 ENE of the shoal (5 miles WSW) with a least depth
over it of 1⋅9 m; further shoals, with depths over
302
which also stands minah, thence:
ENE of a shoal (7 miles SSW), with a least depth over
it of 9⋅1 m, thence:
10.233
1 Passing:
WSW of the stranded wreck (7
miles SSE); a shoal
with a least depth over it of 5⋅5 m (reported 1932),
lies 1 miles E of the wreck. Thence:
Clear of the dangerous wreck (9 miles S) (position
approximate) which lies within the fairway of the
route, thence:
2 WSW of Kathryah (9
miles SSE) an islet situated on
the E side of the N part of a shallow bank; the islet
is covered with bushes and makes a good mark.
Kathryah is the first islet to be seen, of the group
of islets in this vicinity, thence:
ENE of the E extremity of a shoal (13
miles SSW),
which lies at the NE end of Strawbridge Strait
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 10

(10.154) and over which there is a least depth of
13⋅5 m, at its E end; some dangerous rocks lie on
this shoal. Thence:
3 WSW of Ja‘far (12 miles S) an islet, surrounded by a
reef, which lies near the S end of the shallow bank
on which stands Kathryah. Ja‘far is covered with
bushes and makes a good mark, thence:
SW of ahrat Ja‘far (13 miles SSE) a small, sand cay
fringed by a reef situated on the SE extremity of
the shallow bank; the cay is only visible at low
water.
Chart 15
10.234
1 Passing (with positions given from Oreste Point (16°23′N,
42°46′E)):
NE of a shoal bank (18 miles NW), with a least depth
over it of 0⋅9 m, thence:
SW of an unnamed islet (11
miles NNW) which lies
close off an area of coastal sand dunes and from
which the coastal reef extends a farther 1 mile SW,
thence:
ENE of a detached shoal (10 miles NW), with a least
depth over it of 3⋅2 m. Thence:
depth over it of 3⋅2 m, and W of ‘shiq Bank,
thence:
3 WSW of Oreste Point. Oreste Shoal extends about
2 miles W of Oreste Point and dries as far as
1 miles offshore; this shoal does not show up
well. See 10.64.
Khawr Wahl n
Description
10.235
1 Khawr Wahl
n (16°44′N, 42°42′E) is a shallow inlet,
entered through a narrow entrance S of Tower Point.
Both shores of the inlet are fringed by drying banks.
The S extremity of the belt of mangroves at the entrance
is distinct and forms a good mark. A conspicuous sand patch
is situated on the coast about 4 cables SE of the mangroves.
Harrier Reef (16°43′N, 42°41′E), a coral reef, lies across
the S approaches to the inlet.
Anchorages
10.236
1 Small vessels may obtain anchorage W of the entrance to
Khawr Wahl
n (10.235), between about 5 cables to 6 cables
offshore, in depths of about 4⋅6 m.
2 ENE of ‘shiq (7 miles WNW), an islet, which is Anchorage may also be obtained farther S in a position
nearly surrounded by a reef and lies near on the N about 7 cables NNE of Harrier Reef (10.235), in a similar
end of ‘shiq Bank, a shallow bank which extends depth. This latter anchorage would appear to be the most
about 4 miles S, thence: favourable berth in this vicinity.
ENE of ahrat ‘shiq (6 miles W), a sand cay, which 10.237
lies at the S end of ‘shiq Bank. Note the track 1 Anchorage may be obtained with the NE extremity of
through the Inner Channel may lead W of the ‘shiq (16°25′⋅5N, 42°38′⋅5E) bearing 300°, distant 4 cables,
detached shoal (16°29′⋅4N, 42°37′⋅5E), with a least in a depth of about 18 m, sand.

303
Home Contents Index

Chapter 11 - Red Sea - east side. Oreste Point to Straits of Bab el Mandeb

41° 42° 43° 44° 45°

157
18° S AU D I 18°
ARABIA

15

17° 17°
- -
Jizan
-
Farasan
Islands

Oreste Point

Sana Island

16° 16°
143
548

Jazirat at¸ Ta'ir

¸- 9
11.3
- Island
Kamaran - Hr. 1955
Kamaran

143 1955 YEMEN

11
.1

Jabal Zubayr Island

1

15° 15°

542
542 Al –udaydah
542 11.185
6

1925
453
14° Jabal Zuqar Island 14°

452
1955 Al Mukhº
ERI TREA 11.243

13° 13°

Dumeira
Island - Island
Mayyun
452
157

41° 42° Longitude 43° East from Greenwich 44° 45°

0205

304
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 11
RED SEA — EAST SIDE — ORESTE POINT TO RA’S SHAYKH SAD AND THE
STRAITS OF BAB EL MANDEB
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 157, 452, 1925, 1955, 4704
Scope of the chapter
11.1
1 The area described in this chapter covers that part of the
coast of Yemen which lies in the S part of the E side of the
Red Sea, between Oreste Point (16°23′N, 42°46′E) (10.234)
and Ra’s Shaykh Sa‘d (225 miles S) (4.92).
This chapter also includes a description of the Port of
udaydah (14°50′N, 42°56′E) (11.185) and the Port of Al
Mukh
(13°19′N, 43°14′E) (11.243).
The Straits of Bab el Mandeb, which are entered W of
Ra’s Shaykh Sa‘d, are described at 4.71.
Topography
11.2
1 Habl to Al Luayyah. From a position about 4 miles S
of Habl (16°08′N, 42°49′E) (11.168) to Al Luayyah
(27 miles SSW) (11.146) the coast is bordered with
mangroves and backed by sandy slopes covered with scrub.
Between Oreste Point (16°23′N, 42°46′E) (10.234) and Al
Luayyah (39 miles S) the coast is fringed by a reef
extending up to 3miles offshore.
11.3
1 Khawr Ghulayfiqah to Ra’s al Ghuwarraq. Between
Kitf al Makh
yish (14°26′N, 43°00′E) (11.112) and Ra’s al
Ghuwarraq (31 miles SSE) the coast consists of a range of
low hills backed by mountains.
11.4
1 Ra’s al Ghuwarraq to Al Mukh The coast between
Ra’s al Ghuwarraq (13°57′N, 43°10′E) and Al Mukh

ORESTE POINT TO STRAITS OF BAB EL MANDEB
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 143, 157
Route
11.8
1 The route described in this section extends from a
position about 65 miles WSW of Oreste Point (16°23′N,
42°46′E) (10.234) about 123 miles SSE to the N end of Ab
‘Al Channel (14°04′N, 42°48′E) (4.45).
Directions through Ab ‘Al Channel, and thence to the
Straits of Bab el Mandeb, are given at 4.20.
Caution
11.9
1 The area in the vicinity of Penguin Shoal (14°57′N,
42°21′E) (4.17) has not been thoroughly surveyed and there
may be other similar shoals in this vicinity.
The passage E of Jaz
’ir az Zubayr (4.29) is not
recommended unless proceeding to Kamar
n Harbour
(11.46), Ra’s ‘sá Marine Terminal (11.81) or the Port of
udaydah (11.185).
305
(38 miles SSE) (11.243) forms a slight indentation; between
Ab Zahr (13°50′N, 43°14′E) and Al Mukh
there are many
coastal villages all of which have one or two mosques; the
villages are usually surrounded by trees.
11.5
1 Between Al Mukh
(13°19′N, 43°14′E) and the NE
entrance to the Straits of Bab el Mandeb (40 miles SSE)
(4.71) the coast is backed by a sandy plain, covered with
scrub, which rises gradually to the base of the mountains
which lie about 15 miles inland. In places, hills and low
hummocks rise from this sandy plain.
The mountains, which stand behind this stretch of coast,
are visible in clear weather to vessels approaching the Straits
of Bab el Mandeb and are described at 4.74.
11.6
1 The coast between the S end of Khawr az Zay
d
(13°17′N, 43°14′E) (11.126) and the village of Dhub
b
(21miles SSE) (11.280) is fringed by a narrow coastal
reef.
Depths
11.7
1 The depths in many of the areas covered by this chapter
have not been systematically surveyed. Depths in these areas
are from miscellaneous lines of passage soundings or old
leadline surveys. Uncharted shoals and patches of coral may
exist.
For further details see the individual Source Diagram for
each chart and The Mariner’s Handbook which contains
guidance on the interpretation of source data.
Principal mark
11.10
1 Major light:
Mayyn Island High Light (12°39′N, 43°26′E) (4.81).
DIRECTIONS
(continued from 10.68)
Charts 143, 157
11.11
1 From a position about 33 miles WSW of Sana Island
(16°07′N, 42°16′E) (10.68), which lies about 32 miles WSW
of Oreste Point (16°23′N, 42°46′E), the track leads SSE,
passing:
SW of a detached shoal (15°44′N, 41°59′E)
(unexamined) with a least depth over it of 35 m,
thence:
2 SW of Labw
n (15°52′N, 42°17′E) which lies on the
N end of a coral reef which extends about 2miles
SSE. The islet, which shows up well, rises to a
height of about 3⋅7 m and is composed of coral
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 11
rock covered with earth and sand, and with
overhanging cliffs about 3 m high. Passage is not
recommended through the channel which lies
between the islet and the bank (6 miles SW) over
which there is a least depth of 13 m and over which
a patch of discoloured water has been reported, and:
(11.17). The islet is
3 NE of Jazrat a
’ir (15°33′N, 41°50′E) (4.26).
Jazrat a
’ir Light (4.13) is exhibited from the W
side of the summit of the island but the light is not
visible from the E side of the island. Thence:
4 SW of Kut
mah (15°41′N, 42°17′E) which lies on the
N side of the W approach to Al Luayyah (11.146).
The island is composed of coral rock and sand with
a ridge of hills on its E side rising to an elevation
of 29 m. The W side of the island is low and sandy
and is fronted by a rocky shallow bank which
extends up to 2miles W; dangerous rocks lie on
the N part of this bank. The E side of the island is
formed of low cliffs and is apparently steep-to,
thence:
5 SW of ‘Uqb
n (15°30′N, 42°23′E), which lies on the
S side of the W approach to Al Luayyah. The
island is nearly divided into two parts close to its
central axis, where it is low and sandy. In its N part
the island is flat with a conspicuous summit, 17 m
high; North Point forms the N-most extremity of
the island; dangerous rocks lie up to 6 cables NNW
of North Point. The S part of the island is a flat
tableland, about 5 m high at its N end then rising to
an elevation of 20 m near its S extremity, with steep
cliffs of between 12 and 18 m high, on its NE side.
A rocky islet lies off the E side of the N part of the
island. ‘Uqb
n Light (white round tower) is
exhibited from the S part of the island, thence:
(Directions for passing N of
Kamarºn Island are given at 11.38)
11.12
1 Passing:
NE of Quoin Island (15°12′N, 42°03′E) (4.31), thence:
NE of Haycock Island (15°10′N, 42°07′E) (4.32),
Rugged Island (1miles SSW) (4.33) and Saddle
Island (3 miles S) (4.33) and their adjacent islands.
Thence:
2 SW of Clematis Shoal (15°20′N, 42°24′E) a detached
shoal; owing to the weed growing on the shoal it is
not easily seen. A detached shoal area, with a least
depth over it of 10 m, lies about 1 miles N of the
shoal, thence:
q Kamar
n (15°18′N, 42°39′E) is the name given to
3 NE of East Rocks (15°07′N, 42°12′E) (4.35), thence:
NE of Jabal Zubayr Island (15°03′N, 42°11′E) (4.37);
and Centre Peak Island (1 mile SW). Centre Peak
Island Light (4.16) is exhibited from the middle of
the SE end of Centre Peak Island. Thence:
4 SW of Kamar
n Island (15°21′N, 42°35′E) which is
(15°15′N, 42°37′E) (11.17) and Ra’s al
composed of rock and sand and is mostly low and
sandy in appearance, rising a little towards its S end
where there are four hillocks. Jabal al Yaman, the
highest point of the island, rises in its S part to an
elevation of 20 m and is conspicuous. Jabal al
Yaman Light (black rectangle, white band, on
tubular framework tower standing on three concrete
q
pillars, 18 m high) (15°17′⋅3N, 42°34′⋅9E) is
exhibited from the summit. Ra’s al Yaman (11.17)
forms the S extremity of the island, thence:
5 SW of Arab Shoal (15°14′N, 42°32′E) a sand and
coral detached reef, with a least depth over it of
306
4⋅9 m; the reef, which lies off the S end of Kamar
n
Island, is fairly steep-to and plainly visible, thence:
11.13
1 Passing:
SW of Rashshah (15°10′N, 42°34′E), which lies about
5 miles SSW of Ra’s al Bay

sandy and partially covered with scrub; a tomb,
situated on the E part of the islet, is only visible
from the N. A shoal bank, with depths of less than
10 m over it, extends about 1 mile N, and 1miles
SSE; during strong S winds the sea breaks heavily
over the S part of the shoal bank. Rashshah Islet
Light (white rectangle, black top, on metal
framework tower standing on concrete pillars, 8 m
high) is exhibited from near the centre of the island.
Ra’s ‘sá Marine Terminal (11.81) lies 3miles
SSE of the island. Thence:
2 NE of Penguin Shoal (14°57′N, 42°21′E) (4.17); see
caution at 11.9, thence:
WSW of South East Patches (15°01′N, 42°39′E) a
group of banks, which lie S of, and within 12 miles
distant of, Ra’s ‘sá (11.107), thence:
WSW of Lily Shoal (15°51′N, 42°45′E) which lies
about 9 miles WSW of Ra’s al Katb (11.218); the
shoal is generally visible. Thence:
3 WSW of Jazrat al Muj
milah (14°37′N, 42°55′E)
(11.116) which lies about 5 miles W of the
settlement of Shujayrah, thence:
WSW of Avocet Rock (14°22′N, 42°42′E) (4.17).
Caution. During the period of the NE monsoon there is
often a heavy sea between about 15 miles N of the Ab ‘Al
Islands (4.43) and 15 miles NW. Thence:
ENE of the isolated shoal sounding (14°14′N,
42°27′E) (reported 1987), with a least depth over it
of 10 m.
(Directions for the Straits of Bab El Mandeb by
way of Abø ‘AlØ Channel are given at 4.20)
MA Q KAMAR N
General information
Chart 548
Description
11.14
1 Ma
the passage which lies between the E side of Kamar
n Island
(11.12) and the settlement of A alf (11.60).
The passage is entered either from the N between Ra’s ad
Dawba‘ (15°34′N, 42°42′E) (11.35) and the NE extremity
of Kamar
n Island (7 miles SSW); or from the S between
Ra’s al Bay

Yaman (1miles WNW) (11.17) the S extremity of
Kamar
n Island.
Natural conditions
11.15
1 Tidal stream. At springs the NE-going stream in Ma
Kamar
n attains a rate of about 1kn, with the SW-going
stream attaining a rate of about
kn. In both cases the
streams set almost straight through the passage.
The rise and fall of the tides is greatly influenced by the
direction of the wind; the level of the water sometimes
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 11
remaining unchanged for several hours during periods of S
winds.
11.16
1 Local weather. The climate is said to be healthy, though
hot.
q Kamar
n may be obtained N of Rashshah (15°10′N,
Strong winds, sometimes reaching gale force, occur
between October and April the cool season.
During the hot season cool breezes from the N prevail
after mid-day.
2 Thunder may often be heard over the mainland but
rain-bearing thunderstorms rarely reach Kamar
n Island
(11.12). Sandstorms are common during the hot season; they
are experienced chiefly during periods of W and NW winds,
but occasionally with NE winds.
3 During August and September electrical disturbances take
place which are accompanied by strong winds from the NE
and ENE along with a little rain. If at anchor these storms
must be guarded against as they occur without warning and
may cause dragging onto a lee shore. They are of short
duration. Cyclones occasionally occur.
Chart 1955 Southern Entrance to MaÊØq Kamarºn
Southern entrance to Ma q Kamar n
11.17
1 Ma
q Kamar
n may be entered through a channel which
lies between Ra’s al Yaman (15°15′⋅8N, 42°35′⋅3E), the S
extremity of Kamar
n Island (11.12), and Ra’s al Bay

(1miles ESE).
The fairway through the channel is marked on its NW
side by a light-buoy (red can) (8 cables SE), and on its SE
side by a further light-buoy (green can) (1miles ESE).
2 Both the light-buoys are reported to be liable to break
adrift.
A beacon (red steel framework tower, 8 m high)
(15°15′⋅8N, 42°35′⋅3E) stands close E of Ra’s al Yaman; in
1969 this beacon was reported to be in ruins. A conspicuous
white house stands in the village of Al Yaman about
4cables NW of Ra’s al Yaman.
11.18
1 Leading line:
The alignment (060°) of A alf Blockhouse
(15°17′⋅9N, 42°40′⋅8E) (11.72) with the monument
(3 cables WSW) leads through the fairway of the S
entrance to Ma
q Kamar
n in a least depth of 11 m
(reported 1977).
In 1986 the monument was reported to be in ruins.
11.19
1 Caution. See Regulations at 11.38.
11.20
1 Discoloured water. The discolouration of the water near
the S entrance to Ma
q Kamar
n is very noticeable, 7⋅3 m, lies 1miles SW of the islet.
especially to the NE when the NE-going stream is strong, as,
at that time, an area of light and dark water extends NE
sometimes for nearly 1 mile. The light part of the water
extends right across the channel with the dark part being in
Ghubb Diknaw (11.56).
2 This discolouration of the water is not just confined to the
entrance to Ma
q Kamar
n but extends from Rashshah 1 Deeny Patches (15°36′N, 42°28′E) are two shoal areas,
(15°10′N, 42°34′E) (11.13) and Arab Shoal (15°14′N,
42°32′E) (11.12) in the SW to Ra’s Ma‘ram (15°19′N,
42°37′E) the S entrance point to Khawr Ma‘ram, an inlet
which is entered from within Ma
q Kamar
n. which lies about 3
miles NE of North Point (11.11), the N
This discolouration of the water gives no indication of the
depth. At times the water can be dark-coloured over the
4⋅9 m patch situated on Arab Shoal (11.12), but then very
light-coloured in depths of 40 m.
‘ (11.31).
307
Chart 548
Anchorage
11.21
1 A fairly good temporary anchorage in the S approach to
Ma
42°34′E) (11.13) in depths from 5 to 10 m.
Islands and dangers in the north-west
approach to Ma q Kamar n
Caution
11.22
1 See 11.136.
Al Murk
11.23
1 Description. Al Murk (15°38′N, 42°36′E), which rises to
an elevation of about 5 m, lies about 7 miles SW of Al
Luayyah (11.146); the island is low, sandy and uninhabited.
A ruined mosque, which stands in the middle of the NE
side of the island, has a wall resembling a tower; a further
mosque stands on the SW side of the island.
A shoal spur, with a least depth over it of 4⋅5 m, extends
about 8 cables NW from the NW corner of the island.
11.24
1 Anchorage may be obtained anywhere off the NE side of
Al Murk, having regard to a detached coral patch, with a
least depth over it of 4⋅5 m, which lies about 7 cables NW of
the E extremity of the island.
2 A good anchorage berth may be obtained, as shown on
the chart, in depths from 14 to 17 m with a conspicuous
palm tree standing near the centre of the island bearing about
227°, and the NE extremity of the island bearing 304°. This
anchorage is well protected from S winds, but is open to
NW winds which can raise a considerable swell.
Kadam n
11.25
1 Description. Kadam
n (15°34′N, 42°33′E) is a sandy
island lying on a reef lying about 4 miles SW of Al Murk
(11.23).
Some bushes grow on the summit of the island which
rises to a height of about 3⋅7 m near its centre.
Bowen Patches lie off the W side of the reef surrounding
Kadam
n.
Hataban
11.26
1 aab
n (15°35′N, 42°30′E) is a sandy islet, fringed by a
reef, which lies about 2
miles NW of the SW end of
Kadam
n.
An unnamed coral shoal, with a least depth over it of
Dangers west of Kadam n
11.27
1 Merlin Shoal (15°38′N, 42°26′E) is a detached shoal,
which lies about 4miles S of Tiqf
sh (11.183).
11.28
which lie about 2 miles NW of aab
n (11.26).
11.29
1 Passmore Shoal (15°35′N, 42°25′E) is a detached shoal,
extremity of ‘Uqb
n.
11.30
1 Hennessey Shoal (15°32′N, 42°28′E) is a sand and coral
shoal, which lies about 2
miles NW of Al Ba
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 11
Al Ba ‘
11.31
1 Description. Al Ba
‘ (15°30′N, 42°30′E) is a low, sandy over its N end of 7 m, which extends NW from the
island, bordered by a reef.
A lagoon indents the S side of the island which may be
entered by local craft with a shallow draught that enables
them to cross the surrounding reef, passing W of the
‘ (11.31). Thence:
unnamed islet which lies in the entrance to the lagoon.
11.32
1 North West Patches (15°28′N, 42°33′E) are a chain of
coral patches which extends about 3 miles SSE of the S end
of Al Ba
‘ (11.31); a dangerous coral patch lies near the N
end of this chain.
North West Patches Light (red topmark on white round
tower on piles) is exhibited from the S end of the chain of
coral patches.
Dangers north east of Al Ba ‘
11.33
1 Lansdown Shoal (15°31′N, 42°33′E) lies about 1miles
NE of the E end of Al Ba
‘ (11.31). bank about 8 cables WNW of the point, thence:
Lansdown Shoal Light (black topmark on white round
tower on piles) is exhibited from the shoal.
11.34
1 Endeavour Shoal (15°32′N, 42°35′E) is a detached coral
shoal, which lies between Al Ba
‘ (11.31) and Shab coast close NNE of the light, thence:
Bodinjan (11.35).
11.35
1 Shab Bodinjan (15°33′N, 42°39′E) is a group of drying
coral shoals which lie about 3 miles W of Ra’s ad Dawba‘,
a low, sandy point fringed with mangroves.
Within about 1 mile SE of Ra’s ad Dawba‘ three
conspicuous mangrove trees stand on the coast.
A ridge of sandhills 6 m to 9 m high, on which stands a
q
white tomb, extends about 2 miles SE from Ra’s ad Dawba‘.
‘Uqb n agh r
11.36
1 Description. ‘Uqb
n aghr (15°25′N, 42°31′E) is a
sandy islet, about 3 m high, which lies on the NE side of a
spur of shoal water, with a least depth over its outer end of
7 m, which extends about 5 miles NW from the NW part of
Kamar
n Island (11.12); a small, unnamed islet lies on a
coral reef, which itself stands on the shoal spur, close off
q Kamar
n (11.14), N of Ra’s arafah (15°22′N,
Kamar
n Island.
‘Uqb
n aghr Light (black round tower, red bands) is
exhibited from the summit of the islet.
11.37
1 Dahlia Shoal (3
miles SW) is a sand and coral shoal;
during periods of strong S winds the sea breaks over the
shoal making it identifiable from a considerable distance.
Directions
Regulations
11.38
1 It is now obligatory to approach A alf (Saleef) (11.60)
from the N.
Approach passing north of Kamar n Island
11.39
1 From a position about 1miles S of the SE extremity of
‘Uqb
n (11.11), the N approach route to Ma
q Kamar
n 11.42
(11.14) leads mainly E, for about 18 miles, passing (with
positions given from ‘Uqb
n aghr Light (15°25′⋅1N,
42°31′⋅4E)):
308
N of Dahlia Shoal (3miles SW) (11.37), thence:
N of the shoal spur (1
miles NW), with a least depth
W side of ‘Uqb
n aghr (11.36), thence:
2 S of the coral reef (4 miles NNW), which dries in
places and which extends about 1 mile S of Al
Ba
N of ‘Uqb
n aghr (11.36) from which ‘Uqb
n
aghr Light (11.36) is exhibited, thence:
S of North West Patches (3miles NNE) (11.32) from
which North West Patches Light is exhibited,
thence:
11.40
1 Passing:
SE of North West Patches Light (3 miles NE) (11.32).
Thence:
NW of Ra’s al Ghusm (4miles ENE) the N entrance
point to Khawr Muh
sir, an inlet situated in the NW
part of Kamar
n Island (11.12). Note the shoal with
a depth of 3⋅7 m over it, which lies on the coastal
2 NW of Kamar
n Island North Light (6miles ENE)
(white round tower on concrete base, 6 m high)
which is exhibited from the N end of Kamar
n
Island. A conspicuous white tomb stands on the
N of the N end of Kamar
n Island (7 miles ENE).
Thence:
3 SW of Harrison Shoal (10miles ENE). Harrison
Shoal Light (red topmark on white round tower on
piles) is exhibited from the S side of the shoal,
thence:
NE of Douglas Point (7miles E) (11.44), thence:
W of Lazaretto Shoal (10 miles E) and into Ma
Kamar
n (11.14).
Bar Ibn ‘Abb s
Description
11.41
1 Bar Ibn ‘Abb
s (15°20′N, 42°45′E) is a large bay,
mainly unsurveyed, which is entered from the E side of
Ma
42°42′E) the E-most point of the peninsula which extends
NNE from A alf (11.60) and which forms the NE
extremity of Ma
sinah which is the peninsula that forms the
W side of the bay.
2 A shoal spur, with a least depth over it of 6⋅4 m, extends
about 1miles NE of Ra’s arafah; an isolated shoal, with
a least depth over it of 9⋅8 m, lies 1miles N of the point.
The E side of the bay is bordered by a reef which
extends up to 4 miles offshore; the W side of the bay, on the
E side of Ma
sinah, is also fringed by a reef which extends
up to 4 cables offshore.
3 Ibn ‘Abb
s is a coastal village situated about 13 miles
SSE of Ra’s ad Dawba‘ (11.35); a mosque, with three or
four domes, stands on the NW side of the village.
Al Qaryah (15°19′N, 42°41′E) is a village, situated on the
E side of Ma
sinah, which consists of a number of huts
and two mosques.
Dangers lying in the entrance to Bar Ibn ‘Abb s
1 Wickham Patches (15°27′N, 42°43′E) are a group of
shoals, which lie on the N side of the entrance to Bar Ibn
‘Abb
s (11.41).
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 11
Ibn ‘Abb s Reef (15°25′N, 42°45′E) is a drying reef
lying about 1 mile off the coast on the N side of the
entrance to the bay.
Barlow Patches (15°25′N, 42°44′E) lie close W of Ibn
‘Abb
s Reef.
Al Khawbah Fishing Harbour
Description
11.43
1 Al Khawbah Fishing Harbour (15°32′N, 42°45′E) which
lies close S of the village of Al Khawbah, is entered about
3 miles SE of Ra’s ad Dawba‘ (11.35).
The harbour is protected by a L-shaped breakwater
extending about 2 cables WSW from the coast, thence a
short distance SSE; a Fish Pier extends SSE from the main
arm of the breakwater.
2 Al Khawbah Fishing Harbour Light is exhibited from the
head of the breakwater.
The coast in this vicinity, between Ra’s ad Dawba‘
(15°34′N, 42°42′E) and the entrance to Bar Ibn ‘Abb
s
(7miles SSE), is low-lying and fringed with mangroves in
places; a coral reef extends up to 1miles offshore.
Khawr Tuways
Description
11.44
1 Khawr Tuways is the S arm of an inlet in the N part of
Kamar
n Island (11.12) entered between Douglas Point
(15°26′N, 42°39′E) and Ra’s Tuways (2miles S). Khawr
Tuways affords a good boat harbour but it contains several
coral heads and patches.
2 Jazrat ‘Uthm
n R
miz lies about 2 miles SSW of
Douglas Point. The islet, which stands on that part of the
coastal reef which divides the two arms of the inlet, is sandy
and covered with coarse scrub.
The unnamed N arm of the inlet is encumbered with reefs
and, is bordered by mangroves in its W part.
11.45
1 Anchorage may be obtained within the inlet by craft of
shallow draught.
 am d yah Harbour (15°23′N, 42°38′E), which dries
about 2 cables from its head, is entered N of Ra’s H
d Bin
Msá.
1 A prominent tower stands 4cables SW of Ra’s H
d
Bin Msá; several other groups of buildings are situated on
the coast between that point and North Point (15°20′N,
42°37′E), the N entrance point to Kamar
n Harbour (11.46).
Kamar n Harbour
Chart 1955 plan of Kamarºn Harbour
Description
11.46
1 Kamar
n Harbour (15°20′N, 42°37′E) is entered from the
W side of Ma
q Kamar
n (11.14) between North Point and 1 Cargo lighters; 2 tonnes capacity crane on Coal Pier;
Milton Point which lies about 3cables SSW; the harbour
extends about 5 cables W.
The town of Kamar
n stands on the SW side of the
harbour and consists of several brick and stone buildings; a
low mosque with a small white dome stands in the town but
it is not conspicuous.
2 On the N side of the harbour are situated condensers and
ice factories.
3 A mosque, with three white domes, stands about 1 mile
NW of North Point; two small piers, which afford good
309
landing, project from the coast about 3 and 6 cables NNW
of the point.
11.47
1 On the coastal reef surrounding Kamar
n Island (11.12),
S of Kamar
n Harbour between Ra’s Ma‘ram (15°19′N,
42°37′E) and Ra’s al Yaman (3
miles SSW), there are
numerous drying coral heads; shallow passages lie between
these coral heads.
Landmark
11.48
1 Two radio towers (15°20′⋅4N, 42°36′⋅6E) (positions
approximate) stand about 6 cables WNW of North
Point (11.46).
Piers
11.49
1 Commissioners Pier is situated about 600 m W of North
Point (15°20′N, 42°37′E) and extends about 75 m SSW to
the edge of the coastal reef; the pier has a depth alongside
its head of 0⋅6 m. The pier is painted white and has a white
hut with a red roof, about 4 m high, standing on its S
extremity. This hut is prominent and shows up well against
the rising ground behind it.
Boats intending to use Commissioners Pier should
approach on a course parallel with the line of the pier.
11.50
1 Coal Pier, which extends about 110 m SSE from the
shore about 380 m W of Commissioners Pier, is used by
local craft; the pier has depths alongside of 1⋅2 m.
A buoy (black spherical) is moored close SE of the
pierhead; lighter moorings are also laid off the head of the
pier.
11.51
1 Town Pier situated on the SW side of the harbour
projects about 50 m NE from the NE part of the town of
Kamar
n; the pier, which extends across the coastal reef,
dries at its head.
A flagstaff stands about 135 m S of the root of the pier.
Anchorages
11.52
1 As shown on the chart, anchorage may be obtained within
the harbour with the centre of the bridge at the head of the
harbour bearing 288° and a prominent tall chimney on the N
side of the harbour bearing 339°. This berth affords
swinging room of about 135 m in depths of not less than
10 m, mud; good holding ground.
2 Anchorage may also be obtained outside the harbour
entrance, as shown on the chart, about 2cables SSE of
North Point (15°20′N, 42°37′E), in depths of about 16⋅2 m.
In 1959 it was reported that a vessel of moderate size
obtained anchorage about 360 m ESE of North Point
(15°20′N, 42°37′E) in a depth of 16⋅5 m, sand and shell.
Facilities
11.53
doctor.
Supplies
11.54
1 Fresh water is available from Commissioners Pier (11.49).
Communications
11.55
1 There is an airfield about 2 miles N of the town; coastal
vessels call frequently.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 11

Ghubb Diknaw 3 There are large rock salt deposits in the vicinity of the
town.
Chart 1955 Southern Entrance to MaÊØq Kamarºn
Description Traffic
11.56 11.64
1 Ghubb Diknaw (15°15′N, 42°39′E) is a deep bay entered 1 In 2001 the port was used by 2 vessels.
between Ra’s al Bay

(15°15′⋅2N, 42°36′⋅5E) (11.17) and
A alf (4
miles NE) (11.60). Port Authority
The shores of the bay are low and sandy. 11.65
1 Port Authority of A alf, Ports and Marine Affairs
Marks Corp, P.O. Box 3183, Al udaydah, Yemen.
11.57
1 Landmark: Limiting conditions
Jabal Ma‘rab (15°14′⋅1N, 42°40′⋅7E) stands 4 miles S
of A alf (11.60) and rises to a elevation of 30 m. Deepest and longest berth
11.58 11.66
1 Beacons: 1 The Deep Water Berth (11.76) has an overall length of
A beacon (square stone pillar, black and white bands; about 450 m.
6 m high) (15°14′⋅5N, 42°36′⋅8E) stands about The outer face of the Offshore Berth (11.73) has
7 cables SSE of Ra’s al Bay

(11.17) on a coral alongside depths of about 18 m.
mound about 8 m high. This beacon is obscured by
palm trees until within 2 miles of the beacon; a Maximum size of vessel handled
white square building stands about 5 cables S of the 11.67
point. 1 Vessels up to 50 000 dwt can be berthed on the outer face
2 A further beacon (red steel framework; 8 m high) of the Offshore Berth.
(15°15′⋅1N, 42°36′⋅3E) reported in ruins, stands
3 cables WSW of Ra’s al Bay

 Local weather
11.68
Anchorage 1 The wind in the vicinity of A alf usually picks up
11.59 during the day; this increase in the wind strength can delay
1 Good anchorage is available within Ghubb Diknaw. The berthing if the strength of the wind rises above force 4.
best berth, during periods of strong S winds where the water
is smooth, is off the S shore in depths from 31 to 37 m. Arrival information
Port radio
A ALF 11.69
1 A alf Port Control radio station controls the operations
General information of the port.
Chart 1955 Southern Entrance to MaÊØq Kamarºn Vessels should send their ETA 72 hours, 48 hours and
Position 24 hours in advance of their arrival through Al udaydah
11.60 (11.185) to the agents.
1 A alf (Saleef) (15°18′N, 42°40′E) is situated on the E For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
side of Ma
q Kamar
n (11.14), W of Jabal al Ma
sinah Signals, Volume 6 (3).
(11.72).
Pilotage
Function 11.70
11.61 1 Pilots are available during the hours of daylight only;
1 The port exports bulk salt and imports grain and some pilots board in the anchorage (11.78).
general cargo. The pilot boat, some years ago, was reported to be about
30 m in length with a black hull and buff superstructure.
Topography
11.62 Tugs
1 Ra’s a alf (15°19′N, 42°40′E) forms the WSW end of 11.71
A alf Deep Water Berth (11.76); Ra’s a alf Light 1 A tug is available but it not used for berthing; the pilot
(white round tower, 6 m high) is exhibited from close ESE boat is used for handling mooring lines.
of the point.
Harbour
Description
11.63 Landmarks
1 The port of A alf is a natural, deep-water and open 11.72
port approached through Ma
q Kamar
n (11.14) and 1 A alf Blockhouse (15°17′⋅9N, 42°40′⋅8E), 8 m high,
sheltered by Kamar
n Island (11.12). stands at an elevation of 44 m on the SE slope of
2 The town of A alf is not usually identified until within Jabal al Ma
sinah.
the S entrance to Ma
q Kamar
n when it may be identified 2 A conspicuous monument consisting of an obelisk,
by its hospital, a conspicuous white single storey building about 15 m high, stands WSW of the blockhouse
which stands about 1400 m NNW of the charted monument near the coast. In 1986 it was reported that the
standing near the shore S of the town. A school, which monument was in ruins, but the remains, being of a
consists of a low brown building in a walled yard, stands a lighter coloured rock than that of the surrounding
farther 400 m NNW and is also conspicuous. area, could be seen at a distance of about 4 miles.

310
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 11

3 Jabal al Ma
sinah (15°18′N, 42°41′E) stands about RA’S ‘SÁ MARINE TERMINAL
1 mile SSE of Ra’s a alf (11.62), ESE of the
main town; the hill has two summits of over 30 m General information
elevation which are prominent on a clear day. Chart 143, 542, 548
Position
11.81
Berths
1 Ra’s ‘sá Marine Terminal (15°07′N, 42°36′E) is situated
on the E side of the S part of the Red Sea between Kamar
n
Offshore Wharf
Island (11.12) and Al udaydah (11.185) about 3miles
11.73
SSE of Rashshah (11.13).
1 An offshore berth about 93 m in length and orientated in
a NNW/SSE direction, lies off a quay situated about 8 cables Description
S of Ra’s a alf (11.62) and to which it is connected by a 11.82
10 m wide trestle bridge; there is a depth alongside the 1 The terminal consists of the FSO Safer, 400 000 dwt,
wharf of about 18 m. which is permanently moored to a fixed turret mooring buoy
Two dolphins are situated off the NNW end of the berth at the SSW end of a submarine oil pipeline which extends
on the same alignment; pairs of mooring buoys are laid from the shore. F1 SBM is moored 1 miles NNE of the
NNW and SSE of the wharf on a similar alignment. FSO.
2 Vessels up to 50 000 dwt can be berthed on the outer face
of the berth; vessels of less than 3000 dwt may berth on the Local topography
inner face. 11.83
It has been reported that the best time for berthing at this 1 Between Ra’s al Bay

(15°15′N, 42°37′E) (11.17) and
facility is at about 1400 hours. Ra’s ‘sá (5miles SE) (11.107) the SE extremity of the
11.74 peninsula which forms the SW side of Ghubb Diknaw
1 Local knowledge. Vessels should approach the berth head (11.56), the coast is low and fringed by a reef. Some breaks
to wind, letting go the offshore anchor before berthing. in this coastal reef form boat harbours where villages may be
found.
11.84
Ro-Ro Terminal
1 Landmark:
11.75
A conspicuous white building (15°12′⋅4N, 42°37′⋅1E)
1 A Ro-Ro Terminal is situated near the root of the main
stands near the coast about 3 miles S of Ra’s al
quay which leads to the offshore berth.
Bay

(11.17).
Deep Water Berth Function
11.76 11.85
1 A Deep Water Berth extends about 450 m ENE of Ra’s a 1 The terminal is an export loading facility for crude oil
alf (15°19′N, 42°40′E); in 1996 the berth was reported to cargoes.
be dredged to 13 m.
A breakwater lies close S of the W corner of the Deep
Approach and entry
11.86
Water Berth which encloses a service berth.
1 The terminal may be approached from the S passing E of
Penguin Shoal (4.17) and W of South East Patches (11.13).
Cement Berth The terminal may also be approached from the N passing
11.77 NE of Jaz
’ir az Zubayr (4.29) and SW of Clematis Shoal
1 A Cement Berth which consists of a small open basin, (11.12).
lies close E of the grain berth; six silos stand close SE of the 2 Caution. see 11.9.
berth in the vicinity of a cement works.
A pier extends about 100 m N from the E end of the W Traffic
part of the cement berth; two mooring buoys are laid N of 11.87
the berth. 1 In 2001 the terminal was used by 17 vessels.
It is reported that a vessel of about 30 000 dwt has used
the facility.
Terminal Authority
11.88
1 Yemen Hunt Oil Co., P.O. Box 481, Sana‘a, Yemen.
Anchorage
11.78 Limiting conditions
1 Vessels may anchor as convenient off the offshore wharf.
Controlling depth
11.89
Port services 1 Depths in excess of 30 m lie in the immediate approaches
to the terminal; a least depth of 31 m lies about 10 miles S
Facilities of Rashshah (15°10′N, 42°34′E) (11.13).
11.79
Deepest berth
1 Doctor; hospital in Al udaydah (11.185); no repair
11.90
facilities available.
1 In the vicinity of the berth there is a least depth of 33 m
situated about 4 cables NE of the FSO vessel.
Supplies
11.80 Tidal levels
1 Fresh water available but expensive; provisions available 11.91
but difficult to obtain; fuel is not available. 1 See information in Admiralty Tide Tables, Volume 3.

311
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 11
Maximum size of vessels handled
11.92
1 Vessels of up to 307 000 dwt can be accepted alongside
the FSO; a maximum dwt of 285 000 dwt can be accepted if
vessels are moored in tandem, that is with the loading tanker
lying astern of the Safer.
The maximum permitted LOA at the berth is 350⋅6 m,
with a maximum beam of 56⋅4 m and a maximum freeboard
of 18⋅3 m.
The minimum size of vessel accepted at the facility is
80 000 dwt.
Submarine pipeline
11.93
1 A submarine oil pipeline extends NNE from the berth to
land ashore about 2 miles W of Ra’s ‘sá (11.107).
A light-buoy (SPM type) is moored over a small
alteration of the lay of the submarine pipeline which lies just
within the NNE part of the restricted area.
See 1.21.
Local weather
11.94
1 Winds. In the summer months, between May and
September, the prevailing winds are between NE and NW
with wind speeds of mainly less than 10 kn, only rarely
reaching 20 kn.
2 During the winter months the prevailing winds are mainly
between SE and SW with wind speeds of between 10 and
25 kn, but they can be strong, reaching speeds of between
30 and 35 kn, occasionally reaching 40 kn. Calm weather in
winter with wind speeds of 1 to 6 kn rarely lasts for 2 or
3 days.
3 Sea. Waves are generally between 2⋅4 and 3⋅6 m,
sometimes reaching 4⋅5 m.
Arrival information
Port operations
11.95
1 The facility operates 24 hours a day.
Arrival draught and trim. Tankers should arrive
trimmed no more than 3 m by the stern, with the propeller
fully immersed.
Port radio
11.96
1 Both the Port of Al udaydah Port Control (11.202) and
Safer/Ra’s ‘sá Marine should be contacted on VHF when
within range for anchoring and pilot boarding instructions.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Notice of ETA
11.97
1 Vessels should send an ETA on departure from previous
port, or if at sea, as soon as orders are received to proceed to
the terminal; and 72 hours, 48 hours and 24 hours in advance
through Al udaydah (11.185).
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Anchorage
11.98
1 The Ra’s ‘sá Marine Terminal Holding Anchorage is
centred on the geographical position 15°04′N, 42°34′E,
about 3miles SSW of the FSO as shown on the chart.
312
Vessels are not permitted to enter the Ra’s ‘sá Marine
Terminal Holding Anchorage without prior approval from
the terminal authorities.
Pilotage
11.99
1 Pilotage is compulsory and is arranged through Al
udaydah Port Control (11.202).
The pilot usually boards in the holding anchorage (11.98)
about 3miles SW of the terminal.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Tugs
11.100
1 Tugs are available.
Restricted area
11.101
1 A circular restricted area, as shown on the chart, with a
radius of 2 miles, has been established centred on the FSO.
Only those vessels loading at the facility and with a pilot
embarked may enter the restricted area.
Berth
General description
11.102
1 Ra’s ‘sá Marine Terminal Berth is situated about 26 miles
NW of the Port of Al udaydah (11.185) and consists of
Safer, a floating, storage and offloading vessel (FSO)
(11.82).
The berth is somewhat protected to the N by Rashshah
(11.13) and Kamar
n Island (11.12) and to the E by the
mainland; it is open to the S and W.
11.103
1 Alongside berthing. The normal berthing procedure is
with the loading tanker to moor with its port side alongside
the starboard side of Safer on which side the Safer is fitted
with large pneumatic fenders.
11.104
1 Tandem berthing. The tandem mooring arrangement,
with the loading tanker lying astern of the Safer, will be
utilized if it is deemed necessary because of the weather and
sea conditions, or the requirements of the loading vessel.
Port services
Facilities
11.105
1 Urgent medical assistance can be arranged; repair facilities
not available; no facilities for the reception of dirty ballast.
Supplies
11.106
1 Neither fresh water nor fuel are available.
KHALJ ‘SÁ
General information
Chart 542 MaÊØq Kamarºn to Al –udaydah
Description
11.107
1 Khalj ‘sá (15°06′N, 42°47′E) is a bay which is entered
between Ra’s ‘sá (15°11′N, 42°40′E) and Ra’s Marsá
(17 miles SE).
The bay lies E of Ra’s ‘sá Marine Terminal (11.81); the
Port of udaydah (11.185) is approached passing S of the
entrance to the bay and WSW of Ra’s Marsá (15°00′N,
42°53′E).
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 11
2 The coast of the bay is low and sandy, and is backed by
sandhills.
The coast S of Ra’s Marsá is also low, sandy and backed
by sandhills though with a certain amount of vegetation.
A dangerous wreck lies about 2 miles W of Ra’s Marsá.
Landmark
11.108
1 A disused lighthouse (black and white framework
tower, 23 m high) (15°00′⋅2N, 52°53′⋅1E) stands on
Ra’s Marsá (11.107).
Caution
11.109
1 Owing to the frequent discolouration of the water due to
the large amount of sand in suspension the usual indications
of shoal water may be misleading and no reliance should be
placed on seeing any shoals in this locality.
Anchorage
11.110
1 An anchorage which is well sheltered from both N and W
winds, may be obtained within the bay, as shown on the
chart, in a position about 1miles E of a remarkable
three-domed mosque situated close N of Qaryat ‘sá
(15°11′N, 42°40′E), in depths from about 15 to 17 m, sand.
Caution. A number of detached shoal patches, with a
least depth over them of 6⋅7 m, lie in the S approach to this
anchorage.
KHAWR GHULAYFIQAH
General information
Chart 143
Description
11.111
1 Khawr Ghulayfiqah (14°33′N, 42°59′E) is an inlet formed
by the mainland on its E side and, on its W side, by a
peninsula extending about 6 miles NNW from the head of
the inlet and also by Shi‘b (14°33′N, 42°57′E) a low and
sandy island which lies close NNW of the N end of the
peninsula.
2 The inlet is entered between an unnamed point on the
mainland, about 10 miles S of Al udaydah Fishing Harbour
(11.235), and the N end of Shi‘b, the low and sandy island.
Shujayrah (Shuraim) is a coastal village situated about
2 miles SE of the E entrance point to the inlet.
11.112
1 Landmark:
Kitf al Makh
yish (14°26′N, 43°00′E) is a sandhill,
about 12 m high, resembling a haycock which
stands at the SE end of the peninsula enclosing the
S end of Khawr Ghulayfiqah. The hill may be
identified if approaching from the S.
Approach
11.113
1 The recommended approach to Khawr Ghulayfiqah is
from the NW or W, with Ra’s Muj
milah (11.116), which is
visible from a distance of a few miles only, bearing between
100° and 140°, or, with the unnamed sandhill (14°38′N,
43°00′E) situated N of Shujayrah, about 30 m high, bearing
090°.
Caution. The inlet should be approached with caution
taking care to pass NW of the off-lying dangers.
313
Anchorage
11.114
1 Anchorage, sheltered from S winds, may be obtained off
the N end of Shi’b (11.111) in depths from 5⋅8 to 11⋅0 m.
11.115
1 Khawr Ghulayfiqah itself affords extensive and sheltered
anchorage, in depths from 5⋅5 to 7⋅3 m, but the inlet is
thought to be gradually silting up.
Local knowledge is required for the use of the
anchorages within Khawr Ghulayfiqah.
Jaz rat al Muj milah
11.116
1 Description. Jazrat al Muj
milah (14°37′N, 42°55′E) is
an island situated in the NW approach to Khawr
Ghulayfiqah (11.111); Ra’s Muj
milah is a low point which
forms the NNW extremity of the island and is only visible
from close-to.
Current. In the vicinity of Ras Muj
milah little or no
current was experienced during the months of October,
November and December although S winds were blowing
almost constantly.
11.117
1 Anchorage may be obtained within the bay E of Ra’s
Muj
milah in a good holding ground sheltered from S winds
in depths of about 5 m, sand and mud.
An anchorage, sheltered from N and NW winds, may also
be obtained S of the spit which forms the SE side of this
bay, sand and shell.
MINOR INLETS AND BAYS
Marsa al Mujaylis
Chart 143
Description
11.118
1 Marsa al Mujaylis (14°14′N, 43°04′E) is entered about
14 miles SSE of Kitf al Makh
yish (11.112). The inlet,
which lies at the mouth of a small river, forms a good boat
harbour. A long spit, extending NW from the coast, shelters
the inlet from S winds.
A thick grove of palm trees extends a short distance E of
the inlet; detached clumps of trees extend N; high reeds
growing along the river bank are visible from seaward over
the foreshore.
2 Ra’s al isy (14°04′N, 43°06′E) lies about 9miles S of
the entrance to Marsa al Mujaylis; a reef, over which the sea
breaks, lies between about 5 cables SW and 1 mile S of the
point.
11.119
1 Landmark. Kitf Qoraish (Keft Koreish) stands about
3miles ENE of the N end of the inlet and from the S
appears as an island. From a vessel abreast Kitf Qoraish it
still appears as an island and to be standing well clear of the
land, probably because it is lower and of darker colour than
the coastal hills in the neighbourhood. The summit is conical
with a wedge-shaped piece of land close to its N side.
Although this is an indifferent landmark it is the best
available in this vicinity.
Caution. It would be difficult, and even dangerous, to
attempt to land on the coast in this vicinity with any surf
present.
11.120
1 Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels, in depths
of 8⋅2 m, within Marsa al Fai-is which is entered about
5 miles S of Marsa al Mujaylis.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 11

Ab Zahr Khawr az Zay d

Charts 1925, 1955 Al Mukhº
Description
Chart 1925 11.126
Description 1 Khawr az Zay
d (13°17′N, 43°14′E) is an extensive inlet
11.121 situated SSE of Al Mukh
(11.243); the coastline of the inlet
1 Ab Zahr (13°50′N, 43°14′E) is a small village situated is largely unsurveyed.
on the E side of an unnamed inlet entered about 4miles Jazrat az Zay
d, which extends S from a position about
SSE of Ra’s al aymah, a small projection near the mouth 3 cables S of the Port of Al Mukh
, forms the NW part of
of W
d Marr. the inlet.
The village of Qa
bah lies about midway between Ab 11.127
Zahr and Ra’s al aymah; the larger village of Al 1 Caution. Jazrat az Zay
d is largely unsurveyed and dries
Khawkhah (11.133) lies about 1miles SSE. in patches at low water.
The approach to the inlet from N or S is clear except for 11.128
the sandspit projecting N from the point forming its W 1 Entry. Directions for entry, and whether it is safe to do
entrance; entry at night is not recommended. so, are unknown.
11.122
1 Facilities. The area is reported to be promoted as a Khawr Ghurayrah
holiday resort but facilities are minimal; some repairs are
Chart 452
available.
Supplies. Water, fuel and provisions are reported to be Description
available. 11.129
11.123 1 Khawr Ghurayrah (12°43′N, 43°28′E) is a lagoon
1 Anchorage. Small vessels may also obtain anchorage in extending about halfway through the Bab el Mandab
depths from 5 to 8 m off the village, but the holding ground Peninsula.
is reported to be poor. The anchorage, which is reported to 11.130
provide good shelter from S and SE winds, is used by 1 Tidal stream. The tidal stream in the entrance to Khawr
fishing boats and local craft. Ghurayrah attains rates of between 3 kn and 4 kn.
Shelter may be obtained from N winds during the
summer months off the village of Qa
bah. ANCHORAGES SOUTH OF
Local knowledge is required for the use of this KITF AL MAKH YISH
anchorage.
Chart 1925
General information
11.131
1 In general, anchorage may be obtained by vessels of
suitable size in any convenient depth off the various villages
Marsa al Fajrah standing on the coast between Ra’s al Ghuwarraq (13°57′N,
43°10′E) (11.3) and Al Mukh
(38 miles SSE) (11.243).
Local knowledge is required for the use of these various
Description anchorages.
11.124 Caution is necessary when approaching any of these
1 Marsa al Fajrah (13°36′N, 43°17′E) is a small bay; the anchorages as they appear to have been only cursorily
SW side of the bay is formed by a small projection from the examined.
coast, fringed by a reef. Chart 143
The coast both N and S of the inlet has many rocks and Anchorages
coral patches for a considerable distance offshore; there may
11.132
be less water in the approaches than charted. 1 Small vessels may obtain an open anchorage off the coast
2 Mawshij is a village (7 miles N), situated at the mouth of
about 11 miles S of Kitf al Makh
yish (11.112); the village
W
d ‘Urf
n, in which there are some prominent buildings,
of Al Q
(Guh) lies about 4 miles inland from the vicinity of
one of which is a large and conspicuous mosque with a this anchorage.
cupola and several minarets. A tower (position approximate)
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
stands about 1400 m farther SSE of the mosque. anchorage.
3 Between Marsa al Fajrah and Yakhtul (9 miles S) the
numerous sand and coral patches near the coast give the sea Chart 1925
a dark grey colour. 11.133
The village of Yakhtul is situated at the head of a small 1 During the winter months small vessels may obtain
inlet and consists of a few white houses, huts and a mosque anchorage from between 1 mile and 2 miles NW of the
which is not easily identified. village of Al Khawkhah (13°48′N, 43°15′E), but the holding
11.125 ground is poor.
1 Landmark: 2 A high tower rises from among the many white buildings
Al Jabalayn (Jabal Ms
 (13°40′N, 43°23′E), which which stand within the village which all show up well
stands about 7 miles NE of Marsa al Fajrah against the dark background of a large grove of palm trees;
(11.124), consists of three small black hills which two white factories and some huts are situated about 2 miles
should not be confused with the distant high land; SSE of the village.
on a SE bearing Jabal Ms
appears to have only Local knowledge is required for the use of this
two peaks. anchorage.

314
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 11

SOUTHERN END OF THE FARAS N BANK

GENERAL INFORMATION of the Faras
n Bank to re-enter the main part of the Red Sea
W of ‘Uqb
n (15°30′N, 42°23′E) (11.11).
Charts 15, 157
General description Local knowledge
11.134 11.142
1 The area described in this section covers that part of the 1 Local knowledge is required for the use of the S part of
Faras
n Bank (10.14) which lies S of a line drawn WSW the Inner Channel Route.
from Oreste Point (16°23′N, 42°46′E) (10.234) passing N of
Tawq (16°20′N, 42°41′E) (11.167); thence S of Umm al Mars Baqlah
umm

(16°19′N, 42°35′E) (10.163), Al Bay

’ (16°15′N, Chart 15
42°32′E) (10.164) and Fasht Island (16°12′N, 42°21′E) Position
(10.166) and the shoals and islets which extend S from it; 11.143
thence N of Majur (16°06′N, 42°25′E) and the shoals and 1 Mars
Baqlah (16°21′N, 42°47′E) is an inlet entered S of
drying rock which lie WSW of the islet. Bushy Point which lies about 1
miles SE of Oreste Point
See also 10.14. (10.234).

Depths Description
11.135 11.144
1 See 10.16. 1 Mars
Baqlah acts as the port of Md a prominent
village situated on the summit of a hill which stands about
Charts 157, 548 2 miles SSE of the inlet. The village consists of mainly
Caution small buildings, but a square tower stands near its centre.
11.136 A remarkable white fort stands on another hill about
1 Mariners are advised to proceed with particular caution 1300 m NNW of the village.
when navigating N of a line joining the S end of the The coast between Bushy Point and Oreste Point
Faras
n Bank (15°37′N, 42°15′E), the N point of Tiqf
sh (1miles NNW) is backed by a ridge of white sandhills
(15°45′N, 42°23′E), and then E approximately along the which rise to a height of about 6 m.
parallel of 15°45′N to the mainland. 11.145
This area is inadequately surveyed and uncharted shoals 1 Caution. A drying mud bank, which extends about
may exist. 5 cables S of Bushy Point, was reported to have several
11.137 shallow rocky patches on its W side and S of the mud bank
1 The passage between Labw
n (15°52′N, 42°17′E) (11.11) there was less water than charted.
and Kut
mah (10 miles S) (11.11) is known to be Note dangerous rocks lie in this vicinity.
encumbered with dangers; its use is not recommended.
See also 10.20. Al Luayyah
Chart 548
Position
INNER CHANNEL 11.146
Chart 157 1 Al Luayyah (15°42′N, 42°41′E) stands close to the coast
General information on the W side of a ridge of hills which lie on the N side of
11.138 a shallow bay, bordered by mangroves, near the S end of the
1 See 10.21 to 10.28 for general remarks regarding the S part of the Inner Channel Route (11.140).
Inner Channel. The town consists of some stone houses and a large
mosque with a white minaret.
Natural conditions Description
11.139 11.147
1 See 10.25. 1 The NW side of the shallow bay is formed by a narrow
spit of mangroves with a sandy summit, 8 m high, rising at
Inner Channel Route — southern part its S end and known as Spit Summit.
A coral reef extends about 2miles SW from the vicinity
Route of Spit Summit; a black rock, 1⋅2 m high, stands on this reef
11.140 about 7 cables SW of the summit. In 1938 this black rock
1 The route through the S part of the Inner Channel leads was not identified.
initially S then WSW for about 83 miles from a position The E side of the bay is formed by low mangrove
about 4 miles W Oreste Point (16°23′N, 42°46′E) (10.234), swamps which are fringed by a coral reef and backed by a
to a position W of ‘Uqb
n (15°30′N, 42°23′E) (11.11). barren desert.
11.148
Topography 1 Jahar (15°37′N, 42°43′E) (not charted) is a village
11.141
standing near the coast about 6 miles SSE of Al Luayyah;
1 See 11.2.
the low, sandy plain in the vicinity of the village probably
Between Oreste Point (16°23′N, 42°46′E) (10.234) and Al becomes a swamp during the winter.
Luayyah (41 miles S) (11.146) the S part of the Inner
Channel Route lies between the E edge of the Faras
n Bank Topography
and the mainland. 11.149
From Al Luayyah the track then continues generally 1 Inland from Al Luayyah there are some high mountains
WSW through the islands and shoals which lie at the S end but they are seldom visible from seaward.

315
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 11
Principal marks
11.150
1 Landmarks:
Al Luayyah Hill Fort (15°42′⋅1N, 42°41′⋅7E) is a
conspicuous mass of ruins, with a tower 12 m high
standing at an elevation of 45 m, on the ridge of
hills behind Al Luayyah.
2 Jabal al Mil (15°40′⋅3N, 42°49′⋅2E), though small, is
one of the few hills near the coast in this vicinity
making it a prominent feature; a fort stands on its
NW side.
Jabal Jud
‘ (15°36′⋅2N, 42°47⋅′4E) is another small,
isolated but prominent hill in this locality.
Approach
11.151
1 Route. From a position about 7 miles WSW of ‘Uqb
n
(15°30′N, 42°23′E) (11.11) the track mainly follows the
S-most section of the S part of the Inner Channel Route
(11.140), for about 28 miles generally ENE, to the anchorage
N of the E extremity of Al Murk (11.23).
11.152
1 Directions. The line of bearing 075° of the conspicuous
summit at the N end of ‘Uqb
n (15°30′N, 42°23′E), leads
from the initial position, passing S of the S end of the
Faras
n Bank, towards ‘Uqb
n.
The track then leads NNE, passing (with positions given
from North Point, the N extremity of ‘Uqb
n (15°30′N,
42°23′E)):
WNW of North Point (11.11), and:
2 ESE of the E edge of the S end of the Faras
n Bank
(4 miles WNW). The conspicuous summit of
Tiqf
sh (11.183) bearing 022°, leads through this
initial reach of the approach. Thence:
SE of Kut
mah (10 miles NNW) (11.11), thence:
NW of Passmore Shoal (4 miles NE) (11.29), thence:
SSE of Six Foot Rocks (8miles N) (11.184).
Thence:
11.153
1 Passing:
NNW of Merlin Shoal (7miles NE) (11.27) and SSE
of Tiqf
sh (11.183). When the conspicuous summit
situated in the SW corner of Tiqf
sh is on a NNW
bearing then Al Luayyah Hill Fort (ruins) (11.150)
should be seen bearing about 078°, midway
between Baw
rid (11.182) and Al Murk (11.23).
The fort may then be steered for on this bearing.
Thence:
2 NNW of Deeny Patches (7
miles NE) (11.28),
thence:
SSE of Baw
rid (15 miles NE) and NNW of Al Murk.
When N of Al Murk steer ESE for the anchorage
situated NNE of the E end of the island (11.156).
11.154
1 Navigational information. During periods of poor
visibility the only marks which are likely to be useful in the
approach to Al Luayyah are the N extremity of ‘Uqb
n
(11.11), Six Foot Rocks (11.184) and the charted palm tree
(11.24) on Al Murk Island.
2 Tiqf
sh (11.183), Baw
rid (11.182) and Al Murk (11.23)
would probably not be visible beyond a distance of 2 miles
and the two former have no prominent features.
Kadam
n (11.25) and aab
n (11.26) would probably
not be identifiable when conditions of visibility are poor.
316
Entry
11.155
1 The shallow bay S of Al Luayyah is entered through a
channel which, at its outer end, lies between the S extremity
of the reef, which extends about 2miles SW, from the
vicinity of Spit Summit, and forms the NW side of the entry
channel, and a detached reef situated about 6 cables SE close
off the coastal reef.
2 Note the small, detached coral reef which lies in the
middle of the entrance channel fairway.
The immediate vicinity of the town is reached from the N
part of the shallow bay through a narrow winding channel
which leads between the coastal reef on its E side, and the
narrow mangrove swamp, on which stands Spit Summit
(11.147) on its W side.
Anchorage
11.156
1 During the summer, when the prevalent winds are from
the W and NW, good anchorage may be obtained, as shown
on the chart, with the hill fort situated on the E side of Al
Luayyah (11.150) bearing 038°, distant 4miles, in a
depth of about 12⋅5 m, sand and shell.
2 Small vessels may obtain anchorage within the entrance to
the bay, about 3miles SSW of the hill fort (11.150), in
depths of about 2⋅5 m. Note the detached coral reef (11.155)
which lies in the middle of the entrance channel in this
vicinity.
Supplies
11.157
1 Small quantities of fresh provisions are available.
Anchorages at the southern end
of the Faras n Bank
Chart 15
11.158
1 A good anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of about
7 m, with the conspicuous tower NW of Bushy Point
(16°22′N, 42°47′E) (11.143) bearing 050°, distant 1 mile.
Caution. See 11.145.
11.159
1 Small vessels may obtain a sheltered anchorage N of a
sandspit, covered only at high water in winter, which extends
2 cables E from Tawq (16°20′N, 42°41′E) (11.167).
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Chart 157
11.160
1 There is reported to be good anchorage NE of Ghur
b
Islet (16°10′N, 42°40′E) (11.168) with the NE extremity of
the islet bearing 240°, distant 1 mile.
Caution. The approach to this anchorage requires great
care.
11.161
1 Small vessels may obtain anchorage N of ahr al
Fawq
nyah (16°08′N, 42°42′E) (11.169) noting the
dangerous reef which lies between ahr al Fawq
nyah and
Ab Shajarsh Islet (1miles W) (11.169).
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
11.162
1 Anchorage may be obtained near Habl (16°08′N,
42°49′E) (11.168) in depths of about 8 m, mud, in a position
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 11
about 1miles off the coastal reef with the town bearing
097°.
Approach. An approach to this anchorage may be made
from a position about 5 miles offshore with the town bearing
100°. Depths along this track decrease gradually.
11.163
1 Good anchorage may be obtained by small vessels about
3 cables SW of Rakl (15°59′N, 42°38′E) (11.173) in a depth
of about 31 m.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Chart 548
11.164
1 There is good anchorage for moderate sized vessels off
the SE side of a low, shifting sandspit at the NE end of
umar (15°45′N, 42°37′E) (11.180).
During strong S winds anchorage may also be obtained
off the NW side of the island.
11.165
1 Good anchorage may be obtained about 2cables off the
N coast of Tiqf
sh (15°43′N, 42°26′E) (11.183), except in
the vicinity of the dangerous bank which projects about
1 mile N from the middle part of this coast, in depths from
about 22 to 26 m, mud and sand.
This anchorage is somewhat exposed to NW winds.
11.166
1 Moderate sized vessels may obtain good anchorage, as
shown on the chart, with the N summit of ‘Uqb
n (15°30′N,
42°23′E) (11.11) bearing 240°, distant 4 cables, in depths
from 14 to 27 m. This anchorage is well sheltered from the
prevailing winds but the bottom is coral and the depths are
very irregular.
Local knowledge. Small vessels with local knowledge
may obtain anchorage, somewhat exposed to S winds, inside
the islets off the island in depths of about 5 m, sand, but
depths are irregular.
Islands, cays, sandbanks and shoals at the
southern end of the Faras n Bank
Chart 15
Tawq
11.167
1 Description. Tawq (16°20′N, 42°41′E) is about 9 m high
and composed of coral; the coasts of the island consist of
overhanging cliffs, about 3 m high, fringed by a reef.
Chart 157
Ghur b Islet
11.168
1 Description. Ghur
b Islet (16°10′N, 42°40′E) is a low,
uninhabited islet standing W of the small town of Habl
(16°08′N, 42°49′E) (not charted by name) which stands on a
slight elevation on the mainland; a prominent white house is
situated within the town.
 ahr al Fawq n yah
11.169
1 Description. ahr al Fawq
nyah (Hoot Islet) (16°08′N,
42°42′E) is a small sand cay which stands near the E edge
of a dangerous shoal area on which lie numerous dangerous
rocks.
Ab Shajarsh Islet (2 miles W) is a sandy and awash islet;
Abu Shadd Islet, which is covered with bushes, lies a farther
2 miles WNW.
317
‘Aww f
11.170
1 Description. ‘Aww
f (Uwaf Islet) (16°05′N, 42°42′E) is a
sandy cay fringed by a reef which lies at the N end of a foul
bank on which there are numerous dangerous rocks; Buay
stands on the S end of this bank.
In 1967 the reef was reported to extend 1 mile NE of the
islet.
Buays
11.171
1 Description. Buays (Buhais Islet) (16°01′N, 42°42′E) is
low and sandy.
Both ‘Aww
f and Buay lie near the E edge of the
Faras
n Bank; numerous rocky heads and shoals lie in their
vicinity and for up to 2 miles S of Buais.
Buay Village (15°59′N, 42°50′E) stands near the coast
ESE of the islet; the coastal reef, on which there are
dangerous rocks, extends up to 2miles offshore in this
vicinity.
Zayha’
11.172
1 Description. Zayha’ (16°00′N, 42°35′E) is a moderate
sized, low and sandy islet situated about 8 miles W of
Buais (11.171).
Dayy (Zajj Islet) is a similar small, low and sandy islet
which lies about 1miles NE.
Depths in the vicinity of both of these two islets are
irregular.
Chart 143
Rakl
11.173
1 Description. Rakl (An Nal) (15°59′N, 42°38′E) (not
charted by name) is a low sand cay; a tomb stands on the
NE end of the islet.
Jurayb
11.174
1 Jurayb (Jurab) (not charted by name) is the small sand
cay surrounded by reefs, which lies on the E side of bank,
about 1 mile S of Rakl.
Stone cairns were reported to stand on both Rakl and
Jurayb Islets, but in 1978 neither of these cairns were
sighted.
Zurb t
11.175
1 Description. Zurb
t (15°55′N, 42°36′E) is bordered on its
W side by mangroves; a shallow bank, with a least depth
over it of 3 m, extends about 3 miles NNW from the N end
of the island.
Further shallow banks extend N as far as Zaya’ (11.172)
(5 miles N); it is considered inadvisable to pass either N or
W of Zurb
t.
Chart 548
Ad Dah ‘ir
11.176
1 Description. Ad Dah
‘ir (15°53′N, 42°41′E) consists of
four small sand cays, two of which lie close together. These
cays are each fringed by a reef and are sometimes below
water.
Funnel Islet, the E-most cay of the group, is the largest
and highest; a beacon stands on its NW part. The cays are
surrounded by foul ground which extends SE to the coastal
reef fronting the mainland shore.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 11
Juw
11.177
1 Description. Juw
(Ajusak Island) (15°51′N, 42°34′E)
lies on a bank of foul ground which extends NNE to Zurb
t
(11.175) and SW to Zuraymah.
Bryony Shoal
11.178
1 Description. Bryony Shoal (15°47′N, 42°40′E) is usually
difficult to distinguish; the shoal lies off the SW corner of
foul ground which extends N to Ad Dah
‘ir (11.176).
Tal w n
11.179
1 Description. Tal
wn (15°46′N, 42°27′E) is a small sandy
island situated on a coral reef, which is usually visible, about
2miles N of the middle part of Tiqf
sh (11.183).
 umar
11.180
1 Description. umar (15°45′N, 42°37′E) is a sandy island
with bushes growing near its centre; its SW end rises to 6 m
and is cliffy. Note the shoal, with a least depth over it of
9⋅5 m, which lies about 5 cables W of the NE end of the
island.
The island is fringed by a reef, which extends 4 cables
SW. Its extremity is often difficult to distinguish.
Note the shoal bank, with a least depth over it of 2⋅5 m,
which extends over 1 mile SSW of umar.
11.181
1 Caution. A strong E set has been reported in the passage
between umar and Bryony Shoal (1
miles ENE) (11.178).
PORT OF  UDAYDAH
GENERAL INFORMATION
Chart 542 MaÊØq Kamarºn to Al –udaydah
Position
11.185
1 The Port of udaydah (14°50′N, 42°56′E) is situated on
the E side of the S part of the Red Sea at the S end of
Khawr Katb (11.229), about 135 miles N of the Straits of
Bab el Mandeb (4.71).
Function
11.186
1 The Port of udaydah is the principal port for the N part
of Yemen.
11.187
1 Trade. The main exports are coffee, hides and skins,
myrrh, sesame oil and seeds, raisins, almonds, walnuts and
tobacco.
The main imports are rice, grain, flour, fuel oil and
petroleum, metals, hardware, timber, building materials and
machinery.
318
Baw rid
11.182
1 Description. Baw
rid (15°42′N, 42°33′E) is a bare, flat
island composed of sand and coral. A remarkable cliff, about
3 m high, rises at the W extremity of the island; the islands
summit, which rises to 7 m, is situated near its E end.
Shoal water, with a least depth over its E end of 8⋅5 m,
extends about 5 cables E of the E end of Baw
rid.
Zabn is a sandy islet, with a few bushes growing near its
centre, which lies about 1miles WNW of the W end of
Baw
rid.
Tiqf sh
11.183
1 Description. Tiqf
sh (15°43′N, 42°26′E) is the largest
island in this vicinity. The island, which is uninhabited, is
flat and covered with bushes and coarse grass except in its
SW end where there is a hill formed of coral rock, 35 m
high.
Foul ground extends about 2 miles NNW of the NW
corner of the island; this foul ground should be given a wide
berth as it is not easily distinguished.
Quur lies on a coral reef close NE of the NE corner of
Tiqf
sh.
Six Foot Rocks
11.184
1 Description. Six Foot Rocks (15°40′N, 42°23′E) are a
group of above and below-water rocks which lie about
1miles S of the SW corner of Tiqf
sh (11.183). These
rocks are black and remarkable; they may resemble the hull
of a ship against the grey background of the island.
Topography
11.188
1 See 11.233.
Approach and entry
11.189
1 The approach to the Port of udaydah is made through a
dredged and buoyed channel which is entered about
5
miles WNW of Ra’s ash Shamm (14°57′N, 42°56′E)
(11.218).
The approach channel, which is marked at its seaward end
by the Fairway Light-buoy (safe water) (14°58′N, 42°50′E),
is 200 m wide and dredged to 9⋅4 m (1988).
The approach channel leads through Khawr Katb
(11.229) to the Port of udaydah which is situated at the S
end of the bay.
11.190
1 Caution. In 1974 less water than charted was reported to
lie over the shoal bank, with a least charted depth over it of
2⋅6 m, which lies on the SW side of the outer end of the
buoyed entrance channel, NW of Ra’s al Katb (14°55′⋅0N,
42°53′⋅6E) (11.218).
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 11

Traffic Port radio

11.191 11.202
1 In 2003, the port was used by 282 vessels. 1 The Port of udaydah Port Control radio station controls
the operations of the port.
Port Authority For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
11.192 Signals, Volume 6 (3).
1 The harbour is administered by:
The Port of udaydah Port Authority, Port Operations, Notice of ETA
Port and Marine Affairs Corporation, PO Box 3183, 11.203
udaydah, Yemen. 1 Vessels should give notice of their ETA 72 hours,
48 hours and 24 hours in advance of their arrival.
Limiting conditions For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Chart 542 Approaches to Port of –udaydah
Controlling depth Arrival anchorage
11.193 11.204
1 The approach channel and the major part of the basin off 1 Vessels awaiting to embark a pilot should anchor in the
the alongside berths is dredged to 9⋅4 m (1988). designated anchorage area which lies E of the dredged
The maximum permissible arrival draught is 9⋅75 m approach channel, between No 8 Light-buoy (port hand)
which can be accommodated at HW. (14°57′⋅3N, 42°52′⋅7E) and a point on the E side of the
channel opposite No 11 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (2 miles
Deepest and longest berths SSE) as shown on the chart.
11.194 Anchorage is available within the arrival anchorage in
1 Berths Nos 5, 6 and 7 have depths alongside of 9⋅4 m. depths from 8⋅2 to 9⋅8 m in a good holding ground, mud.
Berths Nos 6 and 7 have a combined quay length of 11.205
about 500 m. 1 Caution. In 1990 it was reported that the depth of water
in the S part of the arrival anchorage was less than charted.
Tidal levels
11.195 Pilotage
1 See information in Admiralty Tide Tables, Volume 3. 11.206
Mean spring range about 0⋅8 m; mean neap range about 1 Pilotage is compulsory within the dredged channel SE of
0⋅4 m. No 11 Light-buoy; pilots are available during daylight hours
only.
Density of water The pilot boards in the vicinity of No 11 Light-buoy
11.196 (14°55′⋅7N, 42°53′⋅6E).
1 Density 1⋅025 gms/cm3. For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Maximum size of vessel handled 11.207
11.197 1 Vessels with an arrival draught of 9⋅45 m are not allowed
1 The normal permitted maximum length handled is 180 m. to enter the approach channel without a pilot; if they arrive
at night they should anchor W of the Fairway Light-buoy
Local weather (14°58′⋅3N, 42°50′⋅1E) (11.189) and await further
11.198 instructions.
1 The vicinity of the Port of udaydah has a hot desert If a vessel arrives during daylight it may well still be
climate throughout the year. required to anchor to await HW when a pilot will embark to
The average temperature in winter is 33°C, maximum take the vessel through the approach channel.
summer temperatures may go as high as 46°C and minimum
temperatures may go down to 15°C. Tugs
There is a relative humidity of between 58 and 65 percent 11.208
throughout the year. 1 Tugs are available.
Rainfall is scarce; sporadic rainfall occurs between July
and September and in the months of December and January. Submarine pipelines
11.199 11.209
1 Winds. Strong SW winds, often reaching gale force, 1 A submarine oil pipeline (position approximate) extends
prevail during the winter between October to April. from a position about 1
miles ESE of Ra’s Marsá
In the summer cool N breezes prevail during the (15°00′N, 42°53′E) (11.107) about 1miles SW to the
afternoon, but sand storms and occasional violent squalls vicinity of two mooring buoys.
blowing off the land are common, especially between August Submarine oil pipelines also extend along the SW side of
and September. the harbour basin connecting the Tanker Berth (11.224) with
11.200 the shore SSW of No 1 Berth.
1 Climatic table. See 1.275 and 1.286. See 1.21.

Arrival information Regulations concerning entry

11.210
Port operations 1 A vessel is only considered to have arrived at the port on
11.201 anchoring in the arrival anchorage.
1 There are facilities in the port for the handling of Vessels waiting for daylight in order to anchor may lose
break-bulk; container, Ro-Ro and tankers. their turn in the order for berthing.

319
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 11
Harbour
Chart 542 Port of –udaydah
General layout
11.211
1 The Port of udaydah, which lies at the S end of Khawr
Katb, consists of a basin with an area of about 18 hectares.
A concrete quay forms the NE and SE sides of the
harbour basin; a large warehouse and a number of other
buildings stand on this quay.
A dolphin oil berth is situated on the NW side of the
harbour basin.
11.212
1 Two mooring buoys are laid at the end of a submarine
pipeline (11.209) which extends about 1miles SW from
the shore in the vicinity of a power station (11.213) situated
SE of Ra’s Marsá (11.107).
Principal marks
11.213
1 Landmarks:
Grain silos (65 m high) (14°50′⋅1N, 42°56′⋅3E) which
stand within the port, close SE of No 5 Berth are
conspicuous.
2 A power station (14°59′⋅3N, 42°54′⋅7E) situated near
the coast, about 1
miles SE of Ra’s Marsá
(11.107) is conspicuous, along with its associated
buildings and chimneys. Two piers, which extend
about 2cables SW from the coast in the vicinity
of the station contain the stations cooling water
intakes; the power station is also radar conspicuous.
3 The radar installation (14°49′⋅6N, 42°55′⋅1E) which
stands on the S part of the peninsula between the
main port and the coast together with some trees in
close proximity, is fairly conspicuous on what is
otherwise very flat surrounding land.
Directions for entering harbour
Charts 143, 542 Approaches to Port of –udaydah
Approach
11.214
1 From a position about 13 miles SE of Penguin Shoal
(14°57′N, 42°21′E) (4.17) the track leads about 23 miles
ENE to the vicinity of the Fairway Light-buoy (safe water),
passing:
SSE of South East Patches (15°01′N, 42°39′E) (11.13),
thence:
NNW of Lily Shoal (15°51′N, 42°45′E) (11.13),
thence:
SSE of a detached shoal patch (14°57′N, 42°42′E)
with a least depth over it of 15⋅8 m. Thence:
2 NNW of the shoal (14°53′N, 42°46′E), with a least
depth over it of 7⋅3 m, which lies close off the W
corner of the coastal bank, thence:
To the vicinity of the Fairway Light-buoy.
Entrance channel
11.215
1 From a position in the vicinity of the Fairway Light-buoy
(14°58′⋅3N, 42°50′⋅1E) (safe water) the track through the
entrance channel leads generally SE for about 10miles.
Leading line:
The line of bearing 106° of Ra’s ash Shamm disused
lighthouse (14°56′⋅7N, 42°55′⋅8E) leads through the
first reach of the entrance channel, passing (with
positions given from Ra’s al Katb (14°55′⋅0N,
42°53′⋅6E)):
320
11.216
1 Between No 1 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (3
miles
NNW) and No 2 Light-buoy (port hand) (close
NNE), a depth of 6⋅3 m lies on the N edge of the
channel, about 1cables ESE of No 2 Light-buoy.
Thence:
2 Between No 3 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (3miles
NNW) and No 4 Light-buoy (port hand) (close
NNE) thence:
NE of No 5 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (3 miles
NNW), thence:
11.217
1 Leading beacons:
Front beacon (black framework tower, 15 m high)
(14°49′⋅8N, 42°57′⋅2E).
Rear beacon (black framework tower, 30 m high)
(2600 m SSE).
The alignment (149°) of these leading beacons leads
through the second reach of the entrance channel, passing
(with positions given from Ra’s al Katb (14°55′⋅0N,
42°53′⋅6E)):
Caution. During the summer months these beacons may
be obscured by haze.
11.218
1 Between No 7 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (2miles
NNW) and No 8 Light-buoy, (port hand) (close
NE). Thence:
2 ENE of a detached shoal (2 miles NNW) (reported
1968), with a least depth over it of 4⋅5 m, which
lies close S of a shoal spur which extends about
1cables E from the coastal bank, thence:
ENE of No 9 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (1miles
NNW), thence:
3 ENE of No 11 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (1miles
NNW), the pilot boarding position (11.206) lies
close NE of this buoy at the S end of the arrival
anchorage (11.204). Thence:
4 WSW of Ra’s ash Shamm disused lighthouse
(2
miles NE) which stands on Ra’s ash Shamm, a
low point; a spur of the coastal reef extends about
7 cables WSW of the point. The disused lighthouse
(black and white framework tower, 15 m high) is
reported to be hard to identify. In 1984 a
conspicuous stranded wreck, lying about 7 cables
WSW of the point, was reported to have the
appearance of a vessel at anchor; another stranded
wreck lies 4 cables farther N, thence:
5 ENE of Ra’s al Katb, a low and sandy point which
forms the NE extremity of a peninsula, liable to
inundation and which forms the SW and S sides of
Khawr Katb (11.229). A black beacon stands about
1 mile W of the point, thence:
11.219
1 Passing:
Between No 13 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (6 cables
ESE) and No 14 Light-buoy (port hand) (close NE).
A dangerous shoal, with a least depth over it of
0⋅9 m, lies about 3 cables NE of No 14 Light-buoy;
a further similar shoal (existence doubtful) lies a
farther 1cables ENE. Thence:
NNE of a drying patch (8 cables SE) which dries
0⋅3 m, thence:
2 Between No 15 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (1miles
SE) and No 16 Light-buoy (port hand) (close NE);
coral reefs lie close to both sides of the entrance
channel in this vicinity. Hajara, a low sand cay
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 11
surrounded by a drying bank, lies ENE of No 16
Light-buoy, thence:
3 Between No 17 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (2 miles
SSE) and No 18 Light-buoy (port hand) (close NE).
Thence:
4 Between No 19 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (2
miles
SSE) and No 20 Light-buoy (port hand) (close NE).
The entrance channel then passes close ENE of the
NE extremity of the peninsula which is liable to
inundation and which forms the SW and S sides of
Khawr Katb (11.229); and SSW of an unnamed
island surrounded by a coral reef which lies close
NW of a similar unnamed island surrounded by a
drying bank, thence:
5 Between No 21 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (3miles
SSE) and No 22 Light-buoy (port hand) (close NE)
thence:
Between No 23 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (4 miles
SSE) and No 24 Light-buoy (port hand) (close NE).
Thence:
11.220
1 Passing (with positions given from the corner of the quay
between No 7 and No 8 Berths (14°50′⋅4N, 42°56′⋅1E)):
W of No 26 Light-buoy (W cardinal without topmark)
(1 mile N), thence:
Between No 29 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (1 cable
WNW) and No 30 Light-buoy (port hand) (close N)
which is moored NW of the middle of No 8 Berth,
thence:
W of the corner of the quay between No 7 and No 8
Berths and into the basin of the Port of udaydah.
Berths
Chart 542 Port of –udaydah
Anchorages
11.221
1 See 11.204.
Alongside berths
11.222
1 SE side of the basin has five berths. The longest are
Berths Nos 2, 3, 4 and 5 which are 150 m in length. Berth
No 5 has a depth of 9⋅4 m alongside.
11.223
1 NE side of the basin has three berths. The longest and
deepest is Berth No 7, which is 300 m in length and has a
depth of 9⋅4 m alongside.
It is reported that No 8 Berth is to be developed for use
by vessels of up to 30 000 dwt. handling container, Ro-Ro
and general cargoes.
11.224
1 Tanker Berth. A tanker berth, consisting of a number of
dolphins and two mooring buoys is situated on the NW side
of the basin; submarine oil pipelines (11.209) connect the
berth with the shore.
The berth, which has alongside depths of 9⋅4 m, has a
maximum allowable draught of 9⋅1 m; the facility can handle
tankers up to 15 000 dwt.
Port services
Repairs
11.225
1 There is a slipway of 500 tonnes capacity situated in the
SW corner of the basin; divers available.
321
Facilities
11.226
1 Hospital; mobile cranes on quay of 5 tonnes and
30 tonnes capacity; floating crane of 75 tonnes capacity.
Supplies
11.227
1 Fresh water (reported as brackish); fuel oil can be
supplied; fresh provisions may be obtained within the town
of Al udaydah.
Communications
11.228
1 Al udaydah Airport is situated SE of the town of Al
udaydah.
KHAWR KATB
Chart 542
Description
11.229
1 Khawr Katb (14°53′N, 42°55′E) is a large bay entered
between Ra’s ash Shamm (14°57′N, 42°56′E) (11.218) and
Ra’s al Katb (2
miles SW) (11.218) and consists of a
series of basins interconnected by narrow channels.
The inlet is encumbered with islets, reefs and sandbanks
through which a channel has been dredged which leads to
the Port of udaydah (11.185) situated at the S end of the
bay.
2 A peninsula which extends on its W side from Ra’s al
Katb (14°55′⋅0N, 42°53′⋅6E) to Kitf al Manhalah (6miles
SSE) (11.235) forms the W side of Khawr Katb; this
peninsula is liable to inundation. Ra’s al Jadr lies on the W
side of the peninsula approximately midway between Ra’s al
Katb and Kitf al Manhalah; Sabine Rock (1⋅8 m high) lies
about 1miles SSW of Ra’s al Jadr; further drying rocks
lie between it and the coast.
3 Al Jab
nah (14°55′⋅6N, 42°56′⋅7E) is a small village
situated on the E shore of the bay about 1miles SSE of
Ra’s ash Shamm.
Chart 542 Approaches to Port of –udaydah
Minor port
11.230
1 A pontoon berth set on 12 piles, 28 m wide and 290 m in
length, extends S from the S side of Ra’s al Katb (11.218).
Vessels may be berthed on both sides of the pontoon which
has a deck height above sea level of 4⋅2 m and a least
charted alongside depth of 6⋅7 m.
In 1995 the berth was reported to be used by the pilot
boat and as a naval base.
An obstruction (position approximate) lies about
1cables W of the root of the pontoon.
11.231
1 Facilities. In 1982 a mobile crane of 20 tonnes capacity
was available.
AL  UDAYDAH
General information
Chart 542
Description
11.232
1 The town of Al udaydah (14°47′N, 42°57′E) is situated
on the coast S of the Port of udaydah (11.185).
2 The town, which had a population of about 148 000 in
1985, appears as a compact mass of buildings from seaward.
The houses are built of stone or brick which are high and
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 11
have reed huts erected on their flat roofs. The old town
stands close to the coast and is surrounded on its landward
side by a wall; the Government Offices and the Court are
housed in a prominent whitewashed building, with a cupola,
situated near the coast within the town.
3 In the immediate vicinity of the town lie extensive palm
groves and gardens but beyond that most of the surrounding
countryside is sterile.
Topography
11.233
1 The coast in the vicinity of Al udaydah is mostly low
and sandy but is backed by a ridge of low hills.
Principal marks
11.234
1 Landmarks:
A fort (14°47′N, 42°57′E), which is now in ruins,
stands on the coast near the S end of the town and
shows up well from seaward.
A tomb, which stands about 7 cables S of the fort is
reported to be a good landmark in the afternoon
and evening, appearing almost white.
Fishing harbour
Description
11.235
1 Al udaydah Fishing Harbour which fronts the S end of
the town of Al udaydah (11.232) lies about 2miles SE
of Kitf al Manhalah (14°49′N, 42°55′E) a small headland
which extends SW from a narrow neck of land, close SW of
the extreme S part of Khawr Katb (11.229).
The harbour, which is formed by two breakwaters, is
entered from the N. A fish quay and a boatyard are situated
on the SE side of the harbour.
2 Al udaydah Fishing Harbour Breakwater Head Light
(15°46′⋅9N, 42°56′⋅8E) is exhibited from the W-most
breakwater head.
A quay extends about 1
cables W from the coast, in the
vicinity of the fort (11.234), about 1cables N of the
fishing harbour.
Al  udaydah Roadstead
Charts 143, 542 MaÊØq Kamarºn to Al –udaydah
Description
11.236
1 Al udaydah Roadstead is the area of open anchorage
which lies about 2miles SW of the town of Al udaydah
(11.232). The roadstead affords good protection from winds
from between NE and SE since Jazrat al Muj
milah
AL MUKH
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 143, 452, 1955 Al Mukhº
Position
11.243
1 The Port of Al Mukh
(Mokha) (13°19′N, 43°14′E) is
situated on the E side of the S end of the Red Sea, about
40 miles N of the Straits of Bab el Mandeb (4.71).
322
(14°37′N, 42°55′E) (11.116), which lies about 10 miles S of
the town, and the shoals which bordering it, breaks the force
of the sea.
2 With proper precautions a vessel may ride out a S gale in
the roadstead.
Local weather
11.237
1 NE winds prevail between April and September; strong
SW winds may be expected during the remainder of the
year.
2 In August and September violent squalls, which blow off
the land and veer quickly S, are frequently experienced and
usually occur during the evenings. These squalls are reported
to occur occasionally from May to September.
3 A number of years ago, during the period from May to
September, it was reported that light NE winds prevailed,
accompanied by occasional violent squalls, and also by
sandstorms blowing off the land which are most frequently
experienced between August and September. Between
October and April in that same year strong SW winds were
experienced in the anchorage causing a heavy swell making
boat work difficult and dangerous.
Approach
11.238
1 If approaching Al udaydah Roadstead a wide berth
should be given to all off-lying shoals which includes Ziesel
Reef (14°47′N, 42°55′E), a drying reef, which lies on a spit
which extends SSW from Kitf al Manhalah (11.235).
Under normal weather conditions no difficulty should be
experienced in identifying both the town and the roadstead.
Anchorage
11.239
1 Anchorage may be obtained, as shown on the chart, about
2
miles WSW of the entrance to Al udaydah Fishing
Harbour (11.235) in depths of about 7 m, coarse black sand
and shell.
A recommended anchorage berth lies in a position with
Al udaydah Fishing Harbour Breakwater Head Light
(11.235) bearing 074°, distant 2 miles, in a depth of about
6 m.
2 During periods of fine weather small vessels may proceed
closer inshore and anchor in a convenient depth.
Port services
11.240
1 Facilities. Local craft are available for working cargo;
hospital.
11.241
1 Supplies. Fresh provisions can be obtained.
11.242
1 Communications. See 11.228.
Description
11.244
1 Al Mukh
Bay is entered between a low unnamed point,
fringed by a drying reef, on which stands North Fort
(13°19′⋅8N, 43°14′⋅1E) (11.270); and the head of Al Mukh

Breakwater (1 mile SSW) which fronts the town of Al
Mukh

 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 11

11.245 Deepest and longest berth

1 The town of Al Mukh
stands on the E side of Al 11.255
Mukh
Bay. In 1957 it was reported that the town consisted 1 The main jetty berth has a length of 150 m with depths
of about 30 buildings and that only a trace of the former alongside of 8⋅5 m.
surrounding town walls now remained; the only notable
buildings at that time were the mosques, some of which had Tidal levels
high minarets. 11.256
1 See information in Admiralty Tide Tables, Volume 3.
Approach and entry Mean spring range about 0⋅5 m; mean neap range
11.246 negligible.
1 The Port of Al Mukh
is approached from the central part Density of water
of the S-most end of the Red Sea. 11.257
Directions for this part of the Red Sea, from Jaz
’ir az 1 Density 1⋅025 gms/cm3.
Zubayr to the Straits of Bab El Mandeb are given at 4.19.
11.247 Maximum size of vessel handled
1 The entry to the Port of Al Mukh
is made through a 11.258
dredged and buoyed channel which is entered about 1 The maximum length of vessel handled is 175 m LOA
1 miles NW of the main port area. with a maximum draught of 7⋅93 m.
The entry channel is marked at its seaward end by the
Fairway Light-buoy (safe water) (13°20′N, 42°13′E). It was Local weather
reported in 1979 that the channel was dredged to 7⋅8 m and 11.259
had a width of 110 m. Shoaling was reported (1990) in the 1 Climate. The heat and humidity in this vicinity are
channel about 2 cables NW of Nos 3 and 4 Light-buoys excessive at times.
(lateral). 11.260
11.248 1 Winds. From May to September the winds are mainly
1 Caution. In 1990 it was reported that shoaling had light from the NW with occasional violent squalls and
occurred in the inner part of the entrance channel. sandstorms blowing off the land. Between October to March
they are from SE, and in the months of April and May they
are from the W.
Off-lying dangers
Occasional sandstorms may occur in the afternoon and
11.249
evening causing some haze; sandstorms are more frequent
1 North Shoals (13°19′N, 43°13′E) lie on the SW side of
during the months of August and September.
the entrance channel.
Strong SW winds cause rough seas.
Two stranded wrecks lie on the W side of North Shoals.
In 1979 the N-most wreck (position approximate) was
reported to be in two halves of which the N half was radar
Arrival information
conspicuous; the S-most wreck (position approximate), which
is marked by a light-buoy (port hand), lies about 1 mile W Port operations
of Al Mukh
Breakwater Head Light. 11.261
11.250 1 There are facilities in the port for the handling of
1 South Shoals (13°17′N, 43°11′E) lie about 2 miles SSW break-bulk, Ro-Ro and tanker cargoes.
of North Shoals.
A channel, which leads between South Shoals and the Port radio
coastal bank, has a least depth in the centre of its fairway of 11.262
8⋅5 m. 1 The Port of Al Mukh
Port Control radio station controls
11.251 the operations of the port.
1 Current. In the deep water outside of North and South For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Shoals the current sets N during the winter. Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Notice of ETA
Traffic 11.263
11.252 1 Vessels should give notice of their ETA 72 hours,
1 In 2003 the port was used by 100 vessels. 48 hours and 24 hours in advance of their arrival through Al
udaydah (11.185).
Port Authority For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
11.253 Signals, Volume 6 (3).
1 The harbour is administered by the Port Authority of Al
Mukh
, Port and Marine Affairs Corporation, Al Mukh
, Anchorage
udaydah, Yemen. 11.264
1 Anchorage may be obtained in the roadstead SW of the
dredged channel in depths from 6 to 7 m, sand and shell, as
shown on the chart.
Limiting conditions Vessels with a draught that makes the use of the
designated anchorage unsuitable may anchor farther offshore.
Chart 1955 Al Mukhº 11.265
Controlling depth 1 Cautions. As there are shoal areas in the approach to the
11.254 designated anchorage area, whose positions are best seen on
1 The approach channel and the major part of the basin off the chart, care is necessary when proceeding to the
the alongside berths is dredged to 7⋅8 m (1979). anchorage.

323
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 11
In view of the tidal streams experienced in this vicinity,
which can attain rates of between 1 kn and 2 kn, vessels are
recommended to moor to two anchors.
Pilotage
11.266
1 Pilotage is compulsory within the dredged channel; there
are no specific times for the availability of pilots.
The pilot boards in the vicinity of the Fairway Light-buoy
(13°20′N, 43°13′E).
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Tugs
11.267
1 Tugs are available.
Harbour
General layout
11.268
1 The Port of Al Mukh
is situated in the SSW corner of
Al Mukh
Bay, WSW of the town of Al Mukh
.
A breakwater projects about 2cables, in a mainly N
direction, from the S corner of Al Mukh
Bay; the
breakwater forms the protection from the W for a basin
which lies on the E side of the breakwater, and for a jetty
which extends 150 m NNW from a position about 250 m E
of the root of the breakwater.
The basin has a turning area of 420 m diameter.
Tidal stream
11.269
1 During the period of spring tides there is often only one
high water and one low water every 24 hours; during neaps
there are two tides every 24 hours but times are irregular.
The tidal streams set N with the in-going tide, and S with
the out-going, at rates of between 1 and 2 kn. The duration
of the streams is very much affected by winds.
During periods of strong winds and close inshore, the
out-going S stream often runs for 16 hours at one time; with
the in-going N stream running for between 6 hours and
8 hours only.
Principal marks
11.270
1 Landmarks:
A large power station building (13°21′⋅4N, 43°15′⋅1E)
(position approximate) with four tall chimneys (red
obstruction lights); conspicuous power cables extend
E from the power station. Both the power station
and the power cables are radar conspicuous.
2 North Fort (13°19′⋅8N, 43°14′⋅1E), which is in ruins
but conspicuous, stands on a drying reef which
extends W from an unnamed point that forms the
NNE entrance point to Al Mukh
Bay.
A minaret (13°19′⋅3N, 43°14′⋅8E), 36 m high, situated
in the N part of the main town is conspicuous.
3 Four floodlit towers (13°18′⋅7N, 43°13′⋅9E), 30 m
high, stand on the main jetty. Their lights are
reported to be visible for up to 20 miles at night.
324
Fuel tanks (13°18′⋅3N, 43°13′⋅9E), set in two groups,
are situated about 800 m S of the main jetty.
Directions for entering harbour
Entrance channel
11.271
1 From a position in the vicinity of the Fairway Light-buoy
(13°20′N, 43°13′E), the pilot boarding position (11.266), the
track through the entrance channel leads about SE for about
1miles.
11.272
1 Leading lights:
Front light (13°18′⋅7N, 43°14′⋅1E).
Rear light (370 m from front).
The alignment (137°) of these leading lights leads through
the fairway of the entrance channel, passing (with positions
given from Al Mukh
Breakwater Head Light (13°18′⋅9N,
43°13′⋅6E)):
11.273
1 Between No 1 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (1 mile
NW); and No 2 Light-buoy (port hand) which lies
close NE. A stranded wreck (position approximate)
lies close E of No 2 Light-buoy. Thence:
SW of a detached shoal patch (6 cables NNW), with a
least depth over it of 4⋅8 m, which lies about 180 m
NE of the NE channel margin, thence:
2 NE of the harbour breakwater head, which extends
about 3 cables N from the SSW part of the harbour
and from which Al Mukh
Breakwater Head Light
is exhibited, thence:
Into the harbour basin.
Berths
11.274
1 Main Jetty. The main jetty is situated in the S part of the
harbour turning area; the jetty is 150 m in length, 45 m wide
and has depths alongside each side of 8⋅5 m.
The berths can handle vessels up to 15 000 dwt with a
maximum length of 175 m.
Ro-Ro vessels can be accepted at the head of the jetty.
11.275
1 Tanker Berth. Tankers of up to 12 000 dwt may be
handled by facilities situated on the E side of the breakwater
which included moorings of buoyed anchors laid E of the
breakwater allowing for the handling of cargoes through a
pipeline laid along the breakwater.
11.276
1 Coastal Berth. Coastal vessels may berth alongside the E
side of the breakwater which has alongside dredged depths
of 3⋅5 m.
Port services
Facilities
11.277
1 Large lighter available for vessels working cargo in the
anchorage; 18 tonnes mobile crane on the main jetty.
Supplies
11.278
1 Neither fuel oil nor fresh water are available; stores
unobtainable.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 11

Communications Anchorage
11.279 11.281
1 The nearest airport is at Ta‘izz situated about 97 km ENE. 1 Small vessels may obtain anchorage, in depths of about
4 m with good holding and shelter from the SE, off the N
side of the promontory of Dhub
b in an opening in the reef
which lies between 5 and 7 cables N of Dhub
b.
A hook reef, which extends N from the tip of the
promontory, forms the W side of this anchorage; the
DHUB B
anchorage should be approached with care especially from
the S.
Charts 452, 1925 Landing
Description 11.282
11.280 1 Landing can be effected in boats through the opening in
1 Dhub
b (12°57′N, 43°24′E) is a village which stands on the reef N of Dhub
b; there is also a landing place close S
a small rocky projection about 15 miles N of Ra’s Shaykh of the village.
Sa’d (12°42′N, 43°27′E) (4.92).
A conspicuous white fort stands on a white sandhill, 20 m Off-lying danger
high, which is situated on the inner part of the N side of this 11.283
projection. 1 Chiltern Shoal (12°53′N, 43°25′E) lies about 3miles S
Another conspicuous fort stands on Zi Hill (4.74). of Dhub
b.

325
Home Contents Index

Chapter 12 - South coast of Arabia - Straits of Bab el Mandeb to Ra’s Fartak

44° 45° 46° 47° 48° 49° 50° 51° 52°

17° 17°

16° 16°

Ra’s Fartak

15° 15°
YEMEN
3784
12.158 6 Ash S5ihr Terminal
Al Mukallº 12.205
2970
3784

1 51
12.
326

1925 12.153 Ra’s al Kalb

14° Rudum 14°

3784
452
3 66
2L 36
ittle 60
Ad
13° en 13°
In

O
n

9
12.14
er .

il H
Hr

r
.

Aden
Mayyøn I. 7 12.26
452

1 2. 1 7
‘Abd al KørØ

12° 12°
3661
Raas Caseyr

44° 45° 46° 47° Longitude 48° East from Greenwich 50° 51° 52°
0205
 Home Contents Index

CHAPTER 12
ARABIA — SOUTH COAST — STRAITS OF BAB EL MANDEB TO RA’S FARTAK

GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 6, 3784
Scope of the chapter
12.1
1 The area described in this chapter, which lies mainly
within the Gulf of Aden, covers the S coast of Yemen from
Warner Point (12°40′N, 43°30′E) (4.92) to Ra’s Fartak
(545 miles ENE) (12.152).
2 This chapter also includes a description of the Port of
Aden (12°47′N, 44°57′E) (12.26) and of the oil terminals at
Rudum (13°59′N, 47°55′E) (12.153) in Ghubbat al ‘Ayn
(12.240), and at Ash Sihr (14°41′N, 49°31′E) (12.205) and
also of the small port of Al Mukall
(14°31′N, 49°09′E)
(12.158).
The Straits of Bab el Mandeb, which lie at the W end of
the area described in this chapter, are described at 4.71.
Topography
12.2
1 The S coast of Arabia is principally a wide sterile plain
backed along most of its length by high sterile mountains
which approach the coast in places.
Off-lying dangers
12.3
1 Except for the dangers which lie off the coast between the
Straits of Bab el Mandeb (12°40′N, 43°20′E) (4.71) and
Aden (90 miles E) (12.26) there are few other off-lying
dangers along this stretch of coast.
Anchorages
12.4
1 Temporary anchorage may be obtained under the lee of
most of the prominent capes along this stretch of coast.
Flow
12.5
1 The currents throughout this area are monsoonal in
character.
Between the months of June and September, the flow is
ENE throughout the Gulf of Aden, then, between October
and April, the flow is reversed, May being a month of
transition between the two flows.
In October 1985, in the vicinity of 14°00′N, 51°00′E, it
was reported that a vessel on an ENE heading experienced a
strong NNE set of about 2kn.
12.6
1 Rates are generally less than 1 kn, though 3 kn may be
encountered in the Straits of Bab el Mandeb (4.71); local
variations exist throughout the area.
Submarine cables
12.7
1 Submarine cables are laid between the Straits of Bab el
Mandeb (4.71) and Djibouti (14.86), and between Djibouti
and Aden (12.26), as shown on the chart.

STRAITS OF BAB EL MANDEB TO RA’S MARSHAQ

GENERAL INFORMATION 2 A steep-to and dangerous rock lies about 2 miles SE of
the S-most extremity of Arabia which is formed by a small
Chart 3661 projection from the coast; a rock awash lies close off the
Route coast about 1 mile ESE of the point.
12.8 3 Several vessels have been wrecked in this locality but a
1 The route described in this section extends from a safe offing in thick weather can be achieved by sounding; in
position about 4 miles NNE of Kadda Dâbali (12°28′N, normal circumstances, it is inadvisable to approach within a
43°26′E) (4.83) about 96 miles, in a mainly E direction, to a depth of 30 m by day in hazy weather, or 40 m at night. The
position about 4 miles SSE of Ra’s Marshaq (12°46′N, water in this area is often discoloured.
45°03′E) (12.19). 12.11
1 Between Khawr am ‘Umayrah (12°38′N, 44°10′E) and
Topography Ra’s Qa‘wah (15 miles ENE) (12.18) offshore depths are
12.9 irregular and it is recommended that vessels should keep at
1 Between Ra’s al ‘rah (12°36′N, 43°55′E) (12.17) and
Ra’s Qa‘wah (30 miles ENE) (12.18) the coast is low and
sandy with a few bushy scrubs; there are some rocky points,
and cliffs of hard sand, rising in places to between 6 and
9 m in height.
Off-lying dangers
12.10
least 5 miles offshore in depths of not less than 40 m.
2 Note both Rambler Knoll (12°33′N, 44°10′E) (12.18) and
Parseval Rock (12 miles ENE) (12.18) are off-lying dangers
in this area.
Spoil ground
12.12
1 A spoil ground centred on 12°39′N, 44°59′E lies about
6 miles SSW of the Aden Peninsula; a disused spoil ground
1 Between Ra’s al ‘rah (12°36′N, 43°55′E) (12.17) and lies close N.
the entrance to Khawr am ‘Umayrah (12 miles E) (12.11)
there is a steep-to bank of hard sand, which extends up to Ammunition dumping ground
3 miles offshore; the bank has depths along its outer edge of 12.13
between 5 and 10 m. In heavy weather the sea breaks over 1 An ammunition dumping ground (12°36′N, 45°08′E) lies
the bank in places. about 11 miles SSE of Ra’s Marshaq (12.19).

327
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12

Current 1967) with a least depth over it of 34 m, which lies

12.14
1 From October to May, the flow is W along the S coast of
Yemen, then NW through the Straits of Bab el Mandeb at
rates of up to
kn; rates of up to 3 kn may be encountered
on occasions.
From June to August, the usual flow is SE through the
Straits of Bab el Mandeb, then E along the S coast of
Yemen at rates of up to 1 kn, but W currents of up to
kn
may also be encountered.
close to the track in this vicinity, thence:
3 S of Al ayo (12°40′N, 43°50′E) a further settlement
on the shores of Ghubbat al Haykah; a bank
between 3 and 5 m high lies WNW of the
settlement, and an overhanging ledge lies close to
the shore of the bay, close SE of the settlement.
Note a further isolated shoal patch (12°31′N,
43°47′E) (reported 1977), with a least depth over it
of 31 m, which lies close to the track in this
vicinity. Thence:
4 S of Ra’s al ‘rah (12°36′N, 43°55′E) a low, sandy,
Principal marks rounded point which is difficult to identify; the
12.15 coast in this region is liable to inundation. A fort
1 Landmarks: stands on the coast about 2miles N of the point.
Jabal Kharaz (12°44′N, 44°09′E) which stands about Note the shoal (12°22′N, 43°58′E) (position
15 miles ENE of Ra’s al ‘rah (12.17) is the 850 m
high summit of a mountainous ridge of limestone
and granite which extends to within 1 mile of the
coast. A ruin of roughly hewn stone stands on the
W side of the summit.
2 Jabal am San
mah (12°43′N, 44°20′E) is a prominent
sandhill with a dark summit which rises to a height
of 168 m about 5miles WNW of Ra’s Qa‘wah
(12.18).
3 Jabal am Birkah (12°42′N, 44°22′E) is a prominent
double-peaked, saddle shaped, sandhill, with two
dark summits, rising to elevations of 208 m and
190 m respectively, which stands between Jabal am
San
mah and Ra’s Qa‘wah. Smaller hills lie
between Jabal am Birkah and the coast.
12.16
1 Major lights:
Mayyn Island High Light (12°39′⋅2N, 43°26′⋅0E)
(4.81).
2 Elephants Back Light (white, round, stone building,
4 m high) (12°45′⋅8N, 44°59′⋅4E) exhibited from
the summit of the Elephants Back (12.19) which
lies in the entrance to Aden Harbour (12.26). Light
sectors (Red 306°– 322°(16°), White 322°− 061°
(99°), Red 061°– 119°(58°)).
3 Ra’s Marshaq Light (white tower, black band, 26 m
high) (12°45′⋅7N, 45°03′⋅3E) which is exhibited
from Ra’s Marshaq (12.19). The light is obscured to
the W by Ra’s Taih (12.129).
DIRECTIONS
(continued from 4.83)
Chart 3661
12.17
1 From a position about 4 miles NNE of Kadda Dâbali
(12°28′N, 43°26′E) (4.83) the track leads initially E, passing:
S of Warner Point (12°40′N, 43°30′E) (4.92); Jabal al
Manhal (4.81) stands about 1 mile NW of the
point. Thence:
S of Jabal ass (12°41′N, 43°32′E) a hill promontory
which forms the W entrance point to Ghubbat al
Haykah (12.20); Jabal as Sunnyah (4.81) stands
about 1
miles NNW of the point, thence:
2 S of Al ajaf (12°42′N, 43°45′E) a settlement situated
on the shore of Ghubbat al Haykah; a bank,
between 6 and 9 m high, extends about 1 mile ESE
from a position close SE of the settlement. Note the
isolated shoal patch (12°31′N, 43°42′E) (reported
328
approximate) (reported 1984), with a least depth
over it of 56 m, which lies about 9 miles S of the
track, thence:
12.18
1 Passing:
S of Rambler Knoll (12°33′N, 44°10′E) an isolated
shoal of sand and shell, which lies about 6 miles
SSE of the entrance to Khawr am ‘Umayrah
(12.11), thence:
S of Parseval Rock (12°37′N, 44°22′E); a further rock,
with a least depth over it of 8⋅2 m lies about
2 cables ESE, thence:
2 S of Ra’s Qa‘wah (12°40′N, 44°25′E) a small
projection which shows as a black well-defined
bluff. A chain of dangerous rocks, over which the
sea nearly always breaks, extends about 3miles
between SW and W of the point. Thence:
SSE of Jabal ‘Azz (12°44′N, 44°43′E) a small rocky
island which rises to a height of 107 m; three rocks
of considerable elevation lie within 3 cables of its
W side, thence:
(Directions for the western approach to
Aden are given at 12.76)
12.19
1 Passing:
SSE of Ra’s ‘Imr
n (12°44′N, 44°43′E) a high rocky
promontory which lies close ENE of Jabal ‘Azz,
thence:
SSE of Jazrat al Juhub (12°44′N, 44°46′E) a round
islet situated in the entrance to Bandar Fuqum
(12.25); a drying rock lies 3 cables ESE of the islet.
Thence:
2 SSE of Ra’s al A‘raja (12°43′N, 44°51′E) the S-most
point of Little Aden (12.29), thence:
SSE of Ra’s Mukallab H
d (12°43′N, 44°52′E) the W
entrance point to Bandar Shaykh (12.120), thence:
SSE of Ra’s Ab Qiy
mah (12°44′N, 44°54′E) which
is readily identifiable by the conspicuous fort which
stands on its summit. Thence:
3 SSE of Jazrat Sall (12°44′N, 44°55′E) (12.132) an
islet situated on the W side of the entrance to Aden
Harbour (12.26), thence:
SSE of Elephants Back (12°46′N, 44°59′E) the NW
entrance point to Conquest Bay (12.128). Elephants
Back Light (12.16) is exhibited from the summit of
the promontory. Thence:
4 SSE of Round Island (12°45′N, 45°00′E) (12.136)
which is connected to the coast of the Aden
Peninsula (12.30) by a reef and shallow bank,
thence:
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12
SSE of Ra’s Antuk (12°45′N, 45°02′E) the S-most
point of the Aden Peninsula, thence:
5 SSE of Ra’s Marshaq (12°46′N, 45°03′E) which lies at
the S end of a narrow promontory which forms the
S shore of Holkat Bay (12.131); the point also
forms the E entrance point to Fishermans Bay
(12.129). Ra’s Marshaq Light (12.16) is exhibited
from a position about 2 cables N of the point.
(Directions continue at 12.149, directions for the eastern
approach to Aden are given at 12.79)
INLETS AND BAYS
Ghubbat al Haykah
Chart 3661
Description
12.20
1 Ghubbat al Haykah (12°40′N, 43°45′E) is a large bay
entered between Jabal ass (12°41′N, 43°32′E) (12.17) and
Bandar ‘Imr n
Description
12.23
1 Bandar ‘Imr
n (12°45′N, 44°37′E) is entered between
Ra’s Qa‘wah (12°40′N, 44°25′E) (12.18) and Ra’s ‘Imr
n
(18 miles ENE) (12.19).
2 The coast of the bay is low and sandy and for the first
10 miles is backed by a sandy plain covered with bushes. A
village is situated on the E shore of the bay, N of Ra’s
‘Imr
n; a jetty extends into the bay from the village from a
position close S of a large building standing near the
foreshore.
3 Jabal ‘Azz (12.18), a small, rocky island lies close SW of
Ra’s ‘Imr
n on the E side of the entrance to the bay. There
are depths in excess of 20 m close SW of the SW-most of
the off-lying rocks which lie W of the island; the narrow
channel between Ra’s ‘Imr
n and Jabal ‘Azz is encumbered
with rocks.
Anchorage
Ra’s al ‘rah (23 miles E) (12.17).
The shores of Ghubbat al Haykah are low and sandy; the
hills of the Jabal Hajar Range (4.75) and the mountains of
the Jabal ‘Arar Range (4.75) rise from the sandy plain which
backs the shore of the bay.
Caution
12.21
1 It is recommended that in order to avoid the dangers and
the several shoal banks, with least depths over them of
4⋅6 m, which lie on the coastal bank fringing the shores of
Ghubbat al Haykah, vessels should not approach the coast
within a depth of 20 m by day, or 25 m by night.
Anchorage
12.22
1 A good anchorage may be obtained in the E part of
Ghubbat al Haykah, as shown on the chart, in depths of
about 11 m, mud and sand. This anchorage is sheltered from
NE winds; the coast is rather steep-to.
Jabal am Wusid (12°49′N, 43°55′E) (4.75) bearing
between 003° and 007° leads towards this anchorage.
Local knowledge. Convenient and smooth anchorage
may be obtained within Ghubbat al Haykah by small vessels
with local knowledge.
ADEN
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 7, 3661
Position
12.26
1 Aden (12°47′N, 44°57′E) is situated on the N side of the
Gulf of Aden on the S coast of the Republic of Yemen,
about 90 miles E of the S end of the Straits of Bab el
Mandeb (4.71).
Function
12.27
1 Aden is essentially a transhipment port and an important
fuelling station.
The principal exports from Aden are coffee, hides, salt,
gums, petroleum products, cotton, cotton seed and fish.
The principal imports are cotton and silk goods, grain,
livestock, metals, foodstuffs of all kinds, crude oil and
petroleum products.
329
12.24
1 Anchorage, which is well sheltered from E winds, may be
found within Bandar ‘Imr
n, as shown on the chart. The
recommended anchorage berths lie between about 5 cables
and 2 miles offshore NW of Ra’s ‘Imr
n (12°44′N,
44°43′E), in depths from about 5 to 9 m, sand and shell.
2 Caution. Note the shoal, with a least depth over it of
4⋅3 m, which lies about 5 miles NW of Ra’s ‘Imr
n.
Bandar Fuqum
Description
12.25
1 Bandar Fuqum (12°45′N, 44°47′E) is entered between
Ra’s ‘Imr
n (12°44′N, 44°43′E) (12.19) and Ra’s Fuqum
(5miles E) which forms the W extremity of the Little
Aden Peninsula (12.29); the shores of the bay are low and
swampy.
2 The tomb of Shaikh Sammara stands along with a few
other small buildings on the W side of the bay.
Jazrat Ab Shammah (12°45′N, 44°45′E) is a
dark-coloured islet, with a smaller islet close S, lying about a
cable offshore in the vicinity of the tomb. Jazrat al Juhub
(1miles SE) (12.19) lies in the entrance to the bay.
Topography
12.28
1 Aden Outer Harbour (12.67) (Bandar at Taw
h) is
entered between the twin volcanic peninsulas of Aden and
Little Aden which are linked by a strip of sandy coastline.
12.29
1 Little Aden Peninsula extends about 5miles E from
Ra’s Fuqum (12°44′N, 44°49′E) to Little Aden Oil Harbour
(12.86). The peninsula is a mountainous mass of granite,
somewhat similar in appearance to that of the Aden
Peninsula (12.30) which appears as an island from a
distance. A deep ravine winds from Bandar Fuqum (12.25)
through the centre of the peninsula for about 3miles; the E
part of the peninsula is low-lying, with the exception of its
extremity.
12.30
1 Aden Peninsula is high, rocky, and of volcanic formation
which appears as an island from a distance. The town of
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12
Khormaksar stands on the isthmus connecting the peninsula
with the mainland; several radio masts (obstruction lights)
stand on the S part of this isthmus.
Shams
n South (12°46′⋅2N, 45°00′⋅7E) is the highest
point of the peninsula rising to a height of 553 m; Shams
n,
which is only slightly less in elevation, stands 4 cables NNW
and is surmounted by a disused signal station.
12.31
1 Local townships. Madnat ash Sha‘b (12°50′N, 44°56′E)
is a major town situated on the mainland between the two
peninsulas.
The town of Aden (12°47′N, 45°02′E), known locally as
Crater, is situated on the NE part of the Aden Peninsula
(12.30) and consists of a large number of white-washed
stone or mud built houses built on a plain, with steep rocky
hills on all except the seaward side; the town is the main
business centre for the Aden Peninsula.
2 At Taw
h (12°47′N, 44°59′E) is a comparatively modern
town situated in the NW corner of the Aden Peninsula.
Ma‘allah (12°47′N, 45°00′E) lies close E of At Taw
h on
the N side of the Aden Peninsula.
12.32
1 Being situated between the promontories of Aden (12.30)
and Little Aden (12.29) which help protect it from the NE
and SW Monsoons, the Port of Aden is able to operate
without restriction throughout the year.
Currents
12.33
1 During the NE Monsoon the current appears to set WNW
at a rate of about 2 kn between the Aden Peninsula (12.30)
and the 200 m depth contour which lies about 10 miles S.
On the E side of the Aden Peninsula allowance must be
made for the current (12.239) which sets N during the
monsoons.
Health
12.34
1 The area is exceptionally free from infectious diseases and
epidemics.
Port limits
12.35
1 The boundary limits of the Port of Aden, as shown on
the chart, extend about 1
miles SSE from Ra’s Ab
Qiy
mah (12°44′N, 44°54′E) (12.19) to position 12°42′N,
44°54′E, thence due E to position 12°42′N, 45°00′E; the
limits then lead N for about a farther 3miles to Round
Island (12°45′N, 45°00′E) (12.136).
Approach and entry
12.36
1 Approach. Generally, the approach to the Port of Aden is
made either from the W, having passed through the Straits of
Bab el Mandeb TSS (4.76), thence along the NW part of the
Gulf of Aden to a position off the entrance to the port.
Or, from the E, after passage from the N part of the
Arabian Sea and through the central part of the Gulf of
Aden.
12.37
1 Entry. The entry to the port is made through a buoyed
channel which leads between the Aden Peninsula (12.30)
and the Little Aden Peninsula (12.29).
A fork, or bifurcation of the channel, lies less than a mile
within its outer entrance. The track then continues either
WNW or NNE; the WNW arm leads towards Little Aden
Oil Harbour (12.86), and the NNE arm leads towards the
Inner Harbour (12.93) and the Aden Peninsula.
330
Traffic
12.38
1 In 2003 the port was used by 382 vessels.
Port Authority
12.39
1 The harbour is administered by Yemen Ports Authority,
PO Box 1316, Steamer Point, Aden, Republic of Yemen.
12.40
1 The Aden Port Authority Offices are situated close SE of
the root of Ra’s Marb Breakwater (12°47′⋅3N, 44°58′⋅3E)
(12.85).
LIMITING CONDITIONS
Chart 7
Controlling depths
12.41
1 Little Aden Oil Harbour. The entrance channel to Little
Aden Oil Harbour (12.86) is dredged to a depth of 14⋅7 m
(1987).
12.42
1 Aden Inner Harbour. The entrance channel to the Inner
Harbour (12.93), and also the W part of the Inner Harbour
itself are both dredged to 15 m (1998).
This inner section of the entrance channel is 183 m wide,
sand and mud.
Tankers whose draught exceeds 9⋅1 m cannot enter the
harbour at night.
12.43
1 Under-keel clearance. In both Little Aden Oil Harbour
(12.86) and Aden Inner Harbour (12.93) vessels are required
to have a minimum under-keel clearance of 0⋅6 m, or, if the
vessel has a draught of 11⋅3 m or above, an under-keel
clearance of 1⋅2 m.
Deepest and longest berths
12.44
1 Little Aden Oil Harbour. Little Aden Oil Harbour
(12.86) Berth No 4 has an alongside depth of 15⋅8 m.
2 Inner Harbour. The Aden Container Terminal (12.104)
Berths Nos 1 and 2 have a combined berthing face of 700 m
and alongside depths of 16⋅0 m (1998).
Tidal levels
12.45
1 See information in Admiralty Tide Tables, Volume 3.
Mean spring range about 1⋅7 m; mean neap range about
1⋅0 m.
Maximum size of vessels handled
12.46
1 Little Aden Oil Harbour.
LOA 286 m, draught 15 m (with favourable tide and
special permission from the Harbour Master),
100 000 dwt.
Aden Harbour Mooring Buoy Berths.
LOA 275 m, draught 12⋅2 m, 50 000 dwt.
2 Aden Container Terminal.
LOA 350 m, draught 14⋅5 m, 100 000 dwt.
Ma‘allah Wharf.
LOA 190 m, draught 10⋅7 m (with favourable tide and
special permission from the Harbour Master),
40 000 dwt.
Tidal streams — Inner Harbour
12.47
1 The tides are subject to a large diurnal inequality which
may increase or decrease the height of tide by 0⋅3 m or
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12
more. At about the time of the quarter moon there is
frequently only one HW and one LW in any one 24 hour
period.
2 During the period of both of the monsoons the in-going
stream sets strongly NE past Ra’s Marb Breakwater
(12°47′⋅4N, 44°58′⋅2E) (12.85) until it is checked by the
drying sandbank, the rubble mound and the reclaimed area
which lie on the N side of the harbour. The stream is then
deflected E and NE past Aliya Island (12°48′⋅9N, 44°59′⋅7E)
and through to the upper reaches of the harbour.
3 The out-going stream curves W by Jerama Beacon
(12°47′⋅8N, 44°59′⋅8E) (12.93) and then flows along the S
side of the harbour trending more to the S after passing Ra’s
Marb.
The estimated average maximum rate of the stream at
springs is 1
kn but it depends on the strength and direction
of the monsoon.
An automatic tide gauge is situated on the head of Post
Office Pier (12.111).
Density of water
12.48
1 Density 1⋅025 gms/cm3.
Local weather
12.49
1 North East Monsoon (October to May). During the NE
Monsoon the climate of Aden is cool and pleasant especially
from November to January. During this time there is a weak
sea breeze lasting from about noon to about 1700 hours
when a land breeze sets in, sometimes suddenly with gusts
of between force 4 and 6 continuing until about midnight.
12.50
1 South West Monsoon (June to September). During the
SW Monsoon the climate is very hot, damp and oppressive;
hot, sandy winds prevail on the Aden Peninsula (12.30) but
on its W side the breezes are from seaward and are fairly
cool. The sea breeze is from S or SE; a land breeze may set
in suddenly at about 1700 as it would during the period of
the NE Monsoon.
2 A dry N wind occasionally blows in the Gulf of Aden
during the SW Monsoon without any warning being given
either by the appearance of the weather or the behaviour of
the barometer. This dry wind only blows violently about
three or four times a year; usually the monsoon wind fails
then the dry wind comes on suddenly with great violence
from between the NW and the NE raising clouds of sand,
with much lightning but no thunder; the barometer rises
quickly about 4 millibars. The wind usually continues for
three or four hours and occasionally comes on again from
the E, the barometer rising and falling with the wind.
3 At times during August dense mists occur making the
high land only visible for a distance of about 1 mile.
Towards the end of the SW Monsoon squalls from the N
occur near Aden. These squalls carry no sand, are less
violent and the barometer does not rise; the clouds are dark
coloured.
12.51
1 Sandstorms occur between May and August; they come
at sunset from the N or NNW and at times blow very hard
until about 2200. The air is then so thick with sand and the
visibility is so affected that it is impossible to see for more
than a short distance.
2 Little forewarning is given of the arrival of these squalls
except for a dense cloud of sand banking up from the N and
NW one or two hours before sunset.
331
3 About two hours after the commencement of a sandstorm
there is a calm, then, after a short interval the wind blows
from the S with great force for a further two hours or so.
The sand then clears and the wind lessens.
12.52
1 Sea temperature. Considerable and often sudden changes
of sea surface temperature occur in this vicinity, particularly
W of Aden.
12.53
1 Climatic table. See 1.275 and 1.287.
ARRIVAL INFORMATION
Charts 7, 3660
Port operations
12.54
1 There are facilities in the port for the handling of
break-bulk, container, Ro-Ro, bulk and oil cargoes.
Port radio
12.55
1 Aden Port Control Radio controls the operations of the
port.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Notice of ETA
12.56
1 Vessels should give notice of their ETA at least 24 hours
in advance of their arrival, or immediately after the calling of
the vessel at Aden has become inevitable.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Anchorages
12.57
1 A large anchorage area is available for vessels within the
Outer Harbour of the Port of Aden in depths from about 6
to 20 m provided they do not anchor in the dredged entrance
channels which lead to Little Aden Oil Harbour (12.86) or
Aden Inner Harbour (12.93).
An anchorage for deep draught vessels (12°44′⋅5N,
44°55′⋅8E) may be obtained W of the channel entrance and
S of the Oil Harbour Approach Channel, as shown on the
chart.
2 Smaller vessels may anchor N of the Oil Harbour
Approach Channel and W of the Inner Harbour Approach
Channel.
Caution. See caution regarding submarine cables at
12.65.
12.58
1 Prohibited area. Anchoring is prohibited within a circle
of radius 5 cables centred on the outer entrance to the Outer
Harbour Entry Channel, as shown on the chart, and within
2 cables of any port approach channel.
Inner Harbour anchorages
12.59
1 Yachts and craft of the Republic of Yemen awaiting
clearance, both inward and outward, should anchor in the
Inner Harbour (12.93) in the area S of the outer end of the
rubble mound, as shown on the chart.
2 Anchorage may also be obtained by small local craft at
the Head of the Inner Harbour, SW of Marzuk Kabr
(12°48′⋅2N, 45°00′⋅6E) (12.96), also in the vicinity of the
lighter moorings which are laid NE of the dredged channel
which leads to the quays E of Ma‘allah Wharf (12.103) in
depths from 3⋅0 to 3⋅7 m.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12
3 Anchorage for vessels of shallow draught may also be
obtained in the dredged area N of Ra’s Hedjuff (12°47′⋅8N,
44°59′⋅8E) (12.106).
Pilotage
12.60
1 In normal circumstances pilotage into Little Aden Harbour
(12.86) and the Inner Harbour (12.93) presents no special
difficulties, but during the SW Monsoon sandstorms may
occur suddenly and with violence. See 12.51.
Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 200 grt
entering or leaving the port; pilots are available throughout
24 hours.
The pilot usually boards on the port side; pilot boats have
red hulls with yellow superstructures.
12.61
1 Pilot boarding position. The pilot boards all vessels
bound for Little Aden Oil Harbour (12.86) or for Aden
Inner Harbour (12.93) in position 12°44′N, 44°57′E, as
shown on the chart, unless otherwise advised by the Port
Control, about  mile S of the outer end of the buoyed
Outer Harbour Entrance Channel (12.82).
12.62
1 Pilot ladders. The pilot ladder should usually be rigged
on the port side of the vessel during the NE Monsoon
period (mid September to May). During the SW Monsoon
(June to mid September) the pilot ladder should usually be
rigged on the port side for ships approaching from the W
and on the starboard side for ships approaching from the E.
Tugs
12.63
1 Tugs are available; mooring boats are also available.
Two tugs are required for berthing of vessels of up to
35 000 dwt; three tugs are used for larger vessels.
Regulation concerning entry
12.64
1 All vessels must fly at the foremast the national flag of
Yemen.
2 All vessels within the limits of the Port of Aden shall
take up such berths as may be allocated to them by
the Harbour Master and shall shift their berths or
leave when required to do so by the Harbour
Master.
3 There are local regulations regarding dangerous goods
and explosives, and vessels carrying them must
give 24 hours notice of their arrival. Tankers
carrying petroleum with a flash point below 73°F
(22⋅8°C), and those not gas free, are not permitted
to enter the Inner Harbour (12.93) during the hours
of darkness.
4 Vessels are not to pass each other under way in the
Inner Harbour, or in the approach channel to it.
A vessel following another in the approach channels to
the Oil Harbour (12.86) or the Inner Harbour
(12.93) shall not close within 4 cables.
5 No vessel shall be navigated in the Inner Harbour, Oil
Harbour, or the approach channels to these
harbours, except with the permission of the
Harbour Master, without a depth of 0⋅6 m or more
below her keel, or, in the case of a vessel drawing
more than 11⋅3 m, without a depth of 1⋅2 m below
her keel.
6 No vessel may enter the approach channels to the Oil
Harbour or the Inner Harbour, or leave her
moorings, unless the Channel Control Signals
(12.69) show that the channel is clear.
332
7 Vessels of 3⋅7 m or more draught must not remain at
single anchor in the Inner Harbour without
permission.
8 Immobilisation of main engines may be permitted
alongside in Aden Oil Harbour; requests, giving
brief reasons, should be made to the Marine
Superintendent prior to arrival.
9 Tankers manoeuvring within the limits of the port shall
be ballasted to a mean draught of not less than half
the summer draught, and the trim by the stern shall
not exceed 1⋅8 m.
Submarine cables
12.65
1 A submarine cable is laid from Gold Mohur Bay
(12°46′N, 44°59′E) (12.127) in a generally SSW direction
into the Gulf of Aden.
Caution. Numerous disused submarine cables exist within
the area SE of a line drawn between Ra’s Tarshayn
(12°46′⋅7N, 44°58′⋅2E) (12.125) and Jazrat Sall (4 miles
SW) (12.132).
HARBOUR
Charts 7, 3660, 3662
General layout
12.66
1 Aden Harbour is a fine, natural harbour entered between
the Little Aden Peninsula (12.29) and the Aden Peninsula
(12.30).
The harbour consists of three main commercial areas:
1. Outer Harbour (12°47′N, 44°57′E) (12.67) which lies
between the mainland coast and the Little Aden and Aden
Peninsulas.
2 2. Inner Harbour (12°48′N, 44°59′E) (12.93) which is
situated on the NW part of the Aden Peninsula, NE of the
Outer Harbour and is entered N of the breakwater which
extends NW from Ra’s Marb (12.85).
3. Little Aden Oil Harbour (12°46′N, 44°55′E) (12.86),
which is situated on the NE corner of the Little Aden
Peninsula, SW of the Outer Harbour, is approached through
a channel dredged to 14⋅7 m leading to four dolphin berths
with alongside depths from 11⋅6 to 15⋅8 m.
12.67
1 Aden Outer Harbour includes all the area N of the line,
shown on the chart, which designates the Southern Limit of
the Port of Aden (12.35), and a line, also shown on the
chart, drawn on about 309° from the head of Ra’s Marb
Breakwater (12°47′⋅4N, 44°58′⋅2E).
12.68
1 Aden Inner Harbour, which lies E of the line drawn on
about 309° from the head of Ra’s Marb Breakwater
(12.85) is divided into two parts by a drying sandbank
which extends about 1miles S from the N shore of the
harbour and by the Aden Container Terminal (12.104) which
extends about 1 mile WSW on reclaimed land from the S
end of the drying sandbank. The harbour has 9 main
alongside berths, 6 buoy berths and 3 dolphin bunker berths.
Traffic signals
12.69
1 The Outer Harbour Entrance Channels. The following
traffic control signals are used for the control of traffic in the
dredged channels through the Outer Harbour (12.82); they
are shown from the top-mast of the Port Authority Signal
Station (12°47′⋅3N, 44°58′⋅4E) which stands close SSE of
Ra’s Marb.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12

A conspicuous flare (12°44′⋅8N, 44°52′⋅7E) standing

on the Little Aden Peninsula about 6 cables N of
the head of Bandar Shaykh (12.120).
2 Four conspicuous chimneys (12°44′⋅9N, 44°53′⋅2E)
standing on the Little Aden Peninsula on the W
side of the head of Khawr Ghadr (12.122).
A conspicuous fort (12°44′⋅0N, 44°53′⋅5E) standing on
the summit of Ra’s Ab Qiy
mah (12.19).
Jabal Is
n (12°45′⋅4N, 44°54′⋅4E) is a double peak of
Arden Outer Hr. vessel traffic control signals (12.69) granite rock, rising to a height of 215 m, standing
close to the E end of the Little Aden Peninsula.
12.70
12.74
1 Vessels entering or leaving Aden Inner Harbour (12.93)
1 A radio mast (red and white stripes, framework
by the dredged channels through the Outer Harbour should
structure) (12°46′⋅6N, 44°59′⋅6E) which stands on
display the following International Code of Signals flags, or,
Amen Khal, a peak rising to 304 m on the SW side
by night, show the following prescribed light signals.
of Aden Inner Harbour.
The Port Authority Signal Station (12°47′⋅3N,
44°58′⋅4E), a framework structure, 46 m high.
2 A flag staff (12°47′⋅1N, 44°58′⋅5E) standing at an
elevation of 42 m in the E part of Fort Marb
A clock tower (12°47′⋅4N, 44°58′⋅9E) 43 m high
standing on a hill close S of Inner Harbour (12.93).
Two chimneys (12°47′⋅6N, 45°00′⋅0E) standing about
2cables SE of Ra’s Hedjuff (12.106).

DIRECTIONS
Arden Inner Harbour. vessel signals (12.70)
Approaches
Magnetic anomaly
12.71 Chart 3661
1 Local magnetic anomalies exist in the vicinity of Aden. 12.75
See chart. 1 The Aden Peninsula (12.30) and the Little Aden
Peninsula (12.29) are so prominent that there is little
Principal marks difficulty in identifying the approach to Bandar at Taw
h
12.72 (12.28) or Aden Outer Harbour (12.67), which lies between
1 Light: these two features.
Elephants Back Light (12°45′⋅8N, 44°59′⋅4E) (12.16). Approaching from west
12.73
1 Landmarks: (continued from 12.18)
Jabal al Muzalqam (Sugarloaf) (12°45′⋅3N, 44°52′⋅0E) 12.76
rises to 374 m and is the highest peak of the Little 1 From a position about 7 miles S of Jabal ‘Azz (12°44′N,
Aden Peninsula (12.29). 44°43′E) (12.18) the approach leads ENE keeping at least
Amen Khal Radio Mast Ra’s Marbøò Military Pier

Aden Harbour view over Ra’s Marb (12.66)

(Original dated 2002)

333
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12

1 mile off the S side of the Little Aden Peninsula (12.29), (with positions given from Jazrat Sall Light (12°44′⋅3N,
passing: 44°55′⋅0E)):
SSE of Jabal ‘Azz (12°44′N, 44°43′E) (12.18). Between the pair of No 1 Light-buoys (1
miles E)
Thence: (port and starboard hand) which are moored about
SSE of Ra’s ‘Imr
n (12°44′N, 44°43′E) (12.19), 1cables apart, thence:
thence: 2 Between the pair of No 2 Light-buoys (1
miles ENE)
2 SSE of Jazrat al Juhub (12°44′N, 44°46′E) (12.19), (port and starboard hand) which are moored about
thence: 1cables apart, thence proceed either to the Little
SSE of Ra’s al A‘raja (12°43′N, 44°51′E) (12.19). Aden Oil Harbour (12.86) or the Inner Harbour
Thence: (12.93).
SSE of Ra’s Mukallab H
d (12°43′N, 44°52′E) (Directions for the Inner Harbour Entrance
(12.19), thence: Channel are given at 12.85 and for the
SSE of Ra’s Ab Qiy
mah (12°44′N, 44°54′E) Oil Harbour Entrance Channel at 12.83)
(12.19), thence:
3 SSE of Jazrat Sall (12°44′N, 44°55′E) (12.132) and Little Aden Oil Harbour Entrance Channel
then to the outer end of the Outer Harbour Entrance (continued from 12.82)
Channel (12.82). 12.83
(continued at 12.82) 1 The track, as shown on the chart, leads through the Little
12.77 Aden Oil Harbour Entrance Channel, passing (with positions
1 Night. If approaching from the W at night, the entrance given from Breakwater Head Light (12°45′⋅9N, 44°55′⋅3E)):
to the dredged channel may be approached with the SW of No 3 Light-buoy (S cardinal) (1miles ESE)
Elephants Back Light (12°45′⋅8N, 44°59′⋅4E) (12.16) on a which marks the bifurcation of the channel between
line of bearing of not less than 061°. the arm which leads to Little Aden Oil Harbour
12.78 (12.86) and the arm which leads to Inner Harbour
1 Caution. Note the wreck (12°43′⋅7N, 44°56′⋅9E), with a (12.93). Thence:
least depth over it of 15⋅3 m, which lies S of the entrance to 2 ENE of No 3 Light-buoy (port hand) (1miles ESE),
the dredged entry channel. thence:
Between the pair of No 4 Light-buoys (port and
Approaching from east starboard hand) (6cables ESE) which are moored
(continued from 12.19) about 1cables apart, thence:
12.79 ENE of Breakwater Head Light (red GRP column, 6 m
1 From a position about 4 miles SSE of Ra’s Marshaq Light high).
(12°46′N, 45°03′E) the approach leads WNW, passing: 3 From a position ENE of the breakwater, the track leads
SSW of Ra’s Marshaq Light (12°46′N, 45°03′E) into Little Aden Oil Harbour, passing:
(12.16). Thence: Between the pair of No 5 Light-buoys (port and
SSW of Ra’s Antuk (12°45′N, 45°02′E) (12.19), starboard hand) (close NNE and 2 cables NNE)
thence: which are moored about 1cables apart, thence
2 SSW of Round Island (12°45′N, 45°00′E) (12.136), into the Oil Harbour Basin the extremities of which
thence: are marked by further light-buoys.
SSW of the Elephants Back (12°46′N, 44°59′E)
(12.19) from which the Elephants Back Light Useful marks
(12.16) is exhibited. Thence: 12.84
To the outer end of the Outer Harbour Entrance 1 A beacon (white, square topmark) (12°45′⋅7N,
Channel (12.82). 44°54′⋅6E) stands at an elevation of 56 m about
(continued at 12.82) 7 cables WSW of the breakwater head; a further
12.80 beacon stands 5 cables W.
1 Caution. See 12.78.
Aden Inner Harbour Entrance Channel
Useful lights Charts 7, 3660
12.81 (continued from 12.82)
1 Aero lights: 12.85
An aero light, 63 m high, exhibited from a structure in 1 From a position in the Outer Harbour Entrance Channel
position 12°52′N, 45°00′E. (12.82) SSE of No 3 Light-buoy (12°45′⋅4N, 44°56′⋅6E), the
Another aero light, 46 m high, exhibited from a track continues, mainly NE, for about 3 miles, through the
structure in position 12°51′N, 45°03′E. Inner Harbour Entrance Channel, passing (with positions
given from Ra’s Marb Breakwater Light (12°47′⋅4N,
Entry 44°58′⋅2E)):
2 ESE of No 3 Light-buoy (S cardinal) (2miles SW)
which marks the bifurcation of the channel between
Chart 7 the arm which leads to the Little Aden Oil Harbour
Outer Harbour Entrance Channel (12.86) and the arm which leads to the Inner
(continued from the western approach to Aden 12.76, or the Harbour (12.93), thence:
eastern approach to Aden 12.79) Between the pair of No 1 Light-buoys (port and
12.82 starboard hand) (1
miles SW) which are moored
1 From a position about 2miles SW of the Elephants about 1 cable apart, thence:
Back (12°46′N, 44°59′E) (12.19), in the vicinity of the pilot 3 Between the pair of No 2 Light-buoys (port and
boarding position (12.61), the track through the Outer starboard hand) (9 cables SW) which are moored
Harbour Entrance Channel leads about 1 mile NNW, passing about 1 cable apart. A wreck, marked by a

334
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12
No1 Berth Pinnacle Rock
Aden Oil Harbour (12.86)
(Original dated 1995)
(Photograph − Crown Copyright)
light-buoy (spar, isolated danger) lies about 4 cables
NNW of No 2 Light-buoy (port hand). Thence:
Between the pair of No 3 Light-buoys (port and
starboard hand) (3 cables WSW) which are moored
about 1 cable apart, thence:
4 SE of No 4 Light-buoy (port hand) (1cables NW),
thence:
NW of Ra’s Marb Breakwater Light (green GRP
tower) exhibited from the outer end of the
breakwater which extends about 1
cables NE from
Ra’s Marb. Thence:
5 NNW of No 4 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (140 m
NE); numerous mooring buoys are laid E of the
light-buoy. A stranded wreck lies about 1cables
ENE of the head of Ra’s Marb Breakwater,
thence:
SSE of No 5 Light-buoy (port hand) (2cables NE)
and thence into the main body of the Inner Harbour.
BASINS AND BERTHS
Little Aden Oil Harbour
Chart 3662
Description
12.86
1 Little Aden Oil Harbour (12°46′N, 44°55′E) is protected
from the S by a triangular shaped breakwater extending
about 6cables NE from the NE corner of the Little Aden
Peninsula (12.29).
The N part of the harbour is dredged to 14⋅7 m (1987),
the limits of which are marked by Nos 6, 7 and 8
Light-buoys (starboard hand). Further Light-buoys, Nos 9
and 10 (starboard hand), mark the limits of the area dredged
to 11⋅0 m (1993) which lies off the Dry Cargo (12.90) and
LPG berths (12.91).
2 A designated turning basin lies close S of No 7
Light-buoy.
The main function of the harbour is to receive crude oil
in bulk for processing by the oil refinery and to export the
resulting refined petroleum products.
The Harbour Masters office, fire station and other harbour
offices are situated NW of the root of the pier serving No 3
and No 4 Berths.
12.87
1 Berthing and unberthing are carried out at any time of the
day or night.
335
Peaked Rock Square Island
Alongside berths
12.88
1 Tanker berths. There are four berths which can
accommodate tankers, all four of which can handle vessels
up to 229 m in length.
Berths Nos 1 and 2 lie on the N side of the breakwater
and consist of two T-headed jetties with mooring dolphins
situated both ENE, WSW of the berthing jetties, and
between the two.
2 Berths Nos 3 and 4 are situated on both sides of a pier
which projects about 280 m NE from the SW side of the Oil
Harbour basin. Lights are exhibited from a dolphin situated
about 130 m NE of the outer end of the pier.
12.89
1 Ro-Ro berth. A berth for the handling of Ro-Ro traffic
lies in the NW corner of the basin. Depth alongside 11⋅0 m.
12.90
1 Dry cargo berth. Berth No 5 is a dry cargo facility,
about 200 m in length, situated in the NW part of the Oil
Harbour close W of the Ro-Ro Berth.
12.91
1 LPG berth. Berth No 6, about 120 m in length, is used
for the handling of LPG cargoes.
Deepest and longest berth
12.92
1 The deepest berth is Berth No 4 with a depth alongside
of 15⋅8 m.
Aden Inner Harbour
Chart 3660
Description
12.93
1 Aden Inner Harbour (12°48′N, 44°59′E) is entered N of
the breakwater extending NW from Ra’s Marb (12°47′⋅3N,
44°58′⋅3E) (12.85).
The Inner Harbour is divided into two parts by a
sandbank and a reclaimed area on which is situated a
container terminal and oil installations.
2 The fairway through the Inner Harbour, and the limits of
the swinging basin off the main container terminal, are both
marked by light-buoys whose shape and position are best
seen on the chart; this main area of the port is dredged to
15⋅0 m (1998). That part of the port which lies off Berths
Nos 1 to 4 of Ma‘allah Wharf (12.100) is dredged to 11⋅0 m
(1989) which reduces to 6⋅7 m at the SE end of the wharf
off Berths Nos 5 and 6; the limits of this dredged area are
again marked by light-buoys.
3 Jerama Beacon, 5 m high, (12°47′⋅8N, 44°59′⋅8E) stands
on an above-water rock marking a drying shoal area situated
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12
on the S side of the Inner Harbour close N of Ra’s Hedjuff
(12.106).
12.94
1 Berthing and unberthing are carried out at any time of the
day or night.
Submarine pipelines
12.95
1 Numerous submarine pipelines which serve the oil fuel
terminal berths and moorings are laid from both sides of the
Inner Harbour. The areas in which they are laid and the
restricted areas surrounding the pipelines are best seen on the
chart.
See 1.21.
Harbour Islands
12.96
1 Flint Island (12°47′⋅6N, 44°59′⋅2E) lies on the S side of
the Inner Harbour close ESE of Oil Berth No 6 (Inward)
(12.99); a single story building stands on the island.
Marzuk Kab r (Twin Rocks) (12°48′⋅2N, 45°00′⋅6E) is
an islet situated in the SE part of the harbour, about
3cables W of the S end of Jazrat Al-Ummal. A pier
extends from the S side of the islet.
2 Jaz rat Al-Ummal (Jazrat al‘Abd) lies on a drying
bank about 3cables E of Marzuk Kabr; a beacon (5 m
high) stands on the summit of the island. The island is
joined by an extension causeway from the main Khormaksar
Causeway which lies ENE of the island; two piers extend W
from the W side of the island.
3 Vessels about to be scrapped are often beached on the W
coast of the island.
Kais al Hamman and Qulfetein Island together with
another unnamed islet lie on a drying spit which extends
about 3 cables S from Jazrat Al-Ummal.
Jam Ali is an islet, standing on the sandbank which
divides the harbour, close NW of Aliya Island (12°48′⋅9N,
44°59′⋅7E).
Mooring berths
12.97
1 Numerous mooring buoys are laid on both sides of the
inner end of the Inner Harbour, their position, number and
type designation are best seen on the chart. The mooring
buoys used for cargo berths should not be confused for
mooring buoys used for the oil terminals, as the latter lie
adjacent to the light-buoys (special) which mark the ends of
the oil pipelines.
2 These mooring berths are used for both the working of
cargo and for fuelling; they can handle vessels up to
60 000 dwt with a maximum length of 275 m and with a
maximum draught of 12⋅2 m. The mooring system is based
on the use of mooring buoys and breast buoys; in cargo
mooring berths vessels are secured with one or two anchors
down and stern lines to a buoy.
3 Fuel oil terminal moorings also fringe both sides of the
harbour where vessels are secured with one anchor down
and head ropes to a breast buoy, with the stern secured to a
mooring buoy and a breast buoy. The end of the oil pipeline
serving the fuelling berth is marked by a light-buoy
(special).
Moorings for lighters are situated close N of the dredged
area which lies off Ma‘allah Wharf (12°47′⋅8N, 45°00′⋅5E)
(12.100).
12.98
1 Caution. Vessels lying at moorings within the Inner
Harbour between May and August should be well secured to
the mooring buoys having regard to the sandstorms which
336
occur during this period. If at anchor, both anchors should
be used.
See 12.51.
Fuel Oil Terminal alongside berths
12.99
1 At the alongside fuel oil terminal berths vessels are
secured to dolphins and to mooring buoys both forward and
aft; the oil pipelines serving the berths extend to the dolphin.
Oil Terminal Berth No 6 (Outward) is situated on the S
side of the Inner Harbour, about 1 cable N of Abkari Pier
(12.112); the berth can handle vessels up to 274 m in length
and has alongside depths of 11⋅9 m.
2 Oil Terminal Berth No 6 (Inward) is situated on the S
side of the Inner Harbour, close NW of Flint Island (12.96);
the berth can handle vessels up to 244 m in length and has
alongside depths of 11⋅5 m.
Oil Terminal Berth No 7 is situated on the N side of the
Inner Harbour; the berth can handle vessels up to 228 m in
length and has alongside depths of 11⋅9 m.
Alongside berths
12.100
1 Ma‘allah Wharf (12°47′⋅8N, 45°00′⋅5E) has a quay
about 1 km long on which there are 6 numbered berths; the
berth can accept vessels up to a maximum dwt of
40 000 tonnes.
Four container cranes of 50 tonnes capacity are available
at the container terminal.
12.101
1 Longest and deepest berth. The longest berths are
Berths Nos 1 to 5, each 187⋅5 m in length, with a depth
alongside of 11 m.
12.102
1 Ro-Ro Berth. A Ro-Ro Berth, 150 m in length with an
alongside depth of 7⋅6 m and a ramp width of 20 m, lies
along the NW face of Ma‘allah Wharf (12.100).
12.103
1 Quays east of Ma‘allah Wharf. There is about 800 m of
lighter and local craft quays, numbered 15 to 21, situated E
of No 6 Berth; the quays have alongside depths from 1⋅8 to
2⋅7 m.
Aden Container Terminal
12.104
1 Aden Container Terminal (12°48′⋅3N, 44°59′⋅7E) is a
new facility situated on the N side of the Inner Harbour at
the S end of the drying bank which divides the harbour into
two parts.
The terminal has a quay length of about 700 m on which
there are two numbered berths each equipped with two
container cranes of 50 tonnes capacity.
The terminal has alongside depths of 16⋅0 m (1998).
Ship repair yard
12.105
1 A ship repair yard (12°47′⋅8N, 45°00′⋅1E) lies between
the W end of Ma‘allah Wharf (12.100) and Ra’s Hedjuff
(12.106).
The area NE of the ship repair yard was dredged to 2⋅7 m
(1954), but there is a least charted alongside depth on this
face of the facility of 1⋅5 m; similar depths lie off its NW
face.
A small basin, enclosed by a pier extending NW then
NE, lies off the NW side of the yard.
Fish Harbour
12.106
1 A Fish Harbour (12°47′⋅8N, 44°59′⋅7E) lies on the W
side of Ra’s Hedjuff. The N face of the harbour has a quay
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12

Water Stage

Ra’s Hedjuff
Aden Harbour (12.93)
(Original dated 2002)
Aden Container Terminal

Ship Repair Yard

Aden Harbour (12.93)
(Original dated 2002)

length of about 160 m with depths alongside from 6⋅6 to 12.112

7⋅8 m; along its E side, it has a quay length of about 310 m
with alongside depths from 6⋅0 to 7⋅8 m.
12.107
1 Floating dock. A floating dock lies in the SW corner of
the dredged area W of the main fish harbour quay.
Minor quays and piers
12.108
1 Water Stage. A water stage and quay (12°48′⋅2N,
44°59′⋅1E), with alongside depths from 1⋅8 to 2⋅1 m, lies on
the N side of the Inner Harbour in the vicinity of a water
storage tank.
12.109
1 Pilots Pier. A pier for the use of pilot vessels lies close E
of Ra’s Marb (12°47′⋅3N, 44°58′⋅4E); the pier has a least
alongside depth of 3 m at its head.
12.110
1 Yemen Navy Pier (12°47′⋅4N, 44°58′⋅6E) extends about
260 m NNE from the S side of the Inner Harbour; the pier
has alongside depths at its inner end of 2⋅4 m, and along its
NW outer face of 6⋅7 m.
Slips are situated on the inner end of the E side of the
pier.
12.111
1 Post Office Pier lies close E of the Yemen Navy Pier and
has depths from 2⋅1 to 2⋅7 m alongside at its head.
1 Tourist Pier (12°47′⋅5N, 44°58′⋅9E) lies at the W end of
a quay whose E end is known as Abkari Pier. Tourist Pier
has alongside depths of 2⋅7 m on its outer face.
The Aden Customs House is situated close S of the
Tourist Pier.
12.113
1 Petroleum Pier (12°47′⋅8N, 45°01′⋅3E) lies E of
Qulfetein Island (12.96) in a shallow basin formed by Jazrat
Al-Ummal (12.96) and the islands and drying bank which
extend S from its S end.
Petroleum Pier has depths of 1⋅8 m alongside its NW
face.
12.114
1 Obstruction Pier (12°48′⋅0N, 45°01′⋅3E) lies within the
same shallow basin as Petroleum Pier; the pier has depths of
1⋅2 m alongside its outer face.
PORT SERVICES
Chart 3660
Repairs
12.115
1 Heavy and minor repairs to the hull and machinery can
be carried out; electrical repairs can also be undertaken; there
are several slips for small vessels up to a maximum capacity

337
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12

Marzuk Kabír

Ma’allah Wharf
Aden Harbour (12.93)
(Original dated 2002)

Jazírat Al’Abíd

Qulfetein Island
Aden Harbour (12.93)
(Original dated 2002)

of 900 tonnes on a transverse slip and 800 tonnes on a Harbour and by pipeline in Little Aden Oil Harbour;
patent slip. provisions are available.
Divers are available.
12.116 Communications
1 Floating Docks. There are two floating docks. Ten days 12.119
notice of any docking requirement is necessary. 1 There is an international airport at Khormaksar (12.30).
Larger Dock. The larger dock lies about 3 cables W There is frequent communication by sea with the principal
of Marzuk Kabr (12°48′⋅2N, 45°00′⋅6E) (12.96). world ports.
This dock has an overall length of 137 m, a width
of 24 m and a lifting capacity of 4500 tonnes. INLETS AND BAYS
Smaller dock. The smaller dock lies at the head of the
Fish Harbour (12.106). The dock has a lifting Little Aden Peninsula
capacity of 1500 tonnes. Chart 7
Other facilities Bandar Shaykh
12.117 12.120
1 Hospital; deratting; numerous lighters; a floating crane of 1 Description. Bandar Shaykh (12°44′⋅0N, 44°52′⋅8E) is a
30 tonnes capacity; mobile cranes up to 50 tonnes capacity; bay on the S side of the Little Aden Peninsula (12.29)
limited facilities for the disposal of oily waste in Little Aden which is entered between Ra’s Mukallab H
d (12.19) and
Oil Harbour (12.86); compulsory garbage collection; the S extremity of an unnamed peninsula which extends
repatriation; marine and engineering surveyors; electronic about 4 cables S from the shore, close W of Ra’s Ab
repairs. Qiy
mah (12.19).
Part of the head of the bay is enclosed by breakwaters
Supplies which form a small basin.
12.118 12.121
1 Fuel oil is available at oil terminal berths or by barge; 1 Anchorage may be obtained within the bay, during
diesel oil; fresh water available by water boat in the Inner periods of offshore winds, in depths from about 5 to 10 m.

338
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12
Khawr Ghad r
12.122
1 Description. Khawr Ghadr (12°44′⋅6N, 44°53′⋅6E) lies
on the SE side of the Little Aden Peninsula (12.29) and is
entered between Ra’s Ab Qiy
mah (12.19) and an unnamed
promontory about 1 mile E.
An unnamed islet, 22 m high, lies on the E side of the
entrance to the bay, about 3 cables S of the unnamed
promontory to which it is connected by a shallow spit.
2 A white mosque stands on the W side of the bay about
5cables NNW of Ra’s Ab Qiy
mah; four jetties and a
power station intake extend from the shore on the W side of
the head of the bay.
Little Ghad r, a small bay, lies close E of the unnamed
promontory on the E side of Khawr Ghadr.
Currency Bay, a small bay, lies on the E side of a small
peninsula which divides these two small bays.
12.123
1 Anchorage may be obtained within Khawr Ghadr, in
depths from about 5 to 16 m, sand.
Khawr Bi‘r Ahmad
12.124
1 Description. Khawr Bi‘r Ahmad (12°46′N, 44°53′E) is a
creek which lies between the N coast of the Little Aden
Peninsula (12.29) and the mainland.
The creek is entered between two drying banks.
A road bridge, with a vertical clearance of 3⋅4 m, spans
the creek about 7 cables within its entrance.
2 The channel leading to the inner part of Khawr Bi‘r
Ahmad is narrow and shallow, with drying sandbanks
extending from both sides of the inlet. The inner part of the
inlet has not been examined, but its shores are low and
sandy, and covered with small scrub; on its N side there are
extensive salt pans.
Aden Peninsula
Sapper Bay
12.125
1 Description. Sapper Bay (12°47′⋅0N, 44°58′⋅4E) is
entered between Ra’s Marb (12.85) and Ra’s Tarshayn
(6 cables SSW).
Telegraph Bay
12.126
1 Description. Telegraph Bay (12°46′⋅6N, 44°58′⋅7E) is
entered between an unnamed headland, on which stands Fort
Tarshayn and Ra’s Baradli.
Gold Mohur Bay
12.127
1 Description. Gold Mohur Bay (12°46′⋅2N, 44°59′⋅1E) lies
on the SW side of the peninsula and is entered between the
Elephants Back (12.19) and an unnamed point about 2 cables
ESE of Ra’s Baradli. Elephants Back Light (12.16) is
exhibited from the Elephants Back.
2 The Elephants Trunk is a short peninsula which extends
about 1cables WSW from the centre of the head of the
bay; an enclosed camber lies in that part of the bay
immediately N of the inner end of the Elephants Trunk.
Conquest Bay
12.128
1 Description. Conquest Bay (12°45′⋅7N, 44°59′⋅6E) lies
on the SW side of the peninsula and is entered between a
high unnamed promontory and the Elephants Back (8 cables
WNW) (12.19).
339
The bay is fringed partly by steep cliffs and partly by
sandy shores.
Fishermans Bay
12.129
1 Description. Fishermans Bay (12°45′⋅7N, 45°02′⋅8E) lies
on the SE side of the peninsula and is entered between Ra’s
Marshaq (12.19) and Ra’s Taih (1 mile WSW).
The bay is fringed partly by steep cliffs and partly by
sandy shores.
12.130
1 Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels, in depths
from about 3⋅7 to 6⋅7 m, within the bay, which is sheltered
by Ra’s Marshaq.
Holkat Bay
12.131
1 Description. Holkat Bay (12°46′⋅3N, 45°02′⋅9E) lies on
the E side of the peninsula and is entered between the
promontory of Ma‘quilein and the NE corner of the
peninsula of which Ra’s Marshaq (12.19) is its S extremity.
The head of the bay is a sandy shore.
OFF-LYING ISLANDS AND DANGERS
Little Aden Peninsula
Chart 7
Jaz rat Sal l
12.132
1 Description. Jazrat Sall (12°44′⋅3N, 44°55′⋅0E) is an
islet situated on the W side of the entrance to Aden Outer
Harbour (12.67), about 4 cables S of Ra’s Sall.
Two above-water rocks, a drying rock and two rocks
awash lie within about 1 cable E and ESE of the islet.
Jazrat Sall Light (white tower, 4 m high) is exhibited
from the summit of the islet; the light is reported to be
difficult to distinguish.
Square Island
12.133
1 Description. Square Island (12°45′⋅3N, 44°55′⋅1E) lies
close off the E coast of the Little Aden Peninsula (12.29)
and is connected to the shore by a bank, with a least depth
over it of 0⋅6 m; a beacon stands on the NE part of the
island.
Chart 3662
Low Island
12.134
1 Description. Low Island (12°45′⋅6N, 44°55′⋅1E) lies
about 2cables N of Square Island (12.133), close off the
SE side of the triangular shaped breakwater on the S side of
Little Aden Oil Harbour (12.86).
Peaked Rock
12.135
1 Peaked Rock lies about 2cables ESE of Low Island
near the S end of a shallow bank extending W and S from
Pinnacle Rock which is prominent; a beacon stands on the S
part of Pinnacle Rock. A drying rock lies on the E edge of
the bank which lies between Pinnacle Rock and Peaked
Rock.
Aden Peninsula
Chart 7
Round Island
12.136
1 Description. Round Island (12°45′⋅2N, 45°00′⋅4E) which
lies off the S side of the Aden Peninsula (12.30) is
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12
connected to the shore of the peninsula by a reef and a
shallow bank.
An unnamed bay is entered close N of the island between
two unnamed steep points; sandy shores lie at the head of
the bay.
 rah Island
12.137
1 Description. rah Island (12°46′⋅8N, 45°03′⋅0E) lies on
the E side of Front Bay and forms its E extremity; the island
is connected to the shore fronting the town of Aden by a
drying bank which fills Front Bay, and also by a causeway
RA’S MARSHAQ TO RA’S FARTAK
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 6, 3784
Route
12.139
1 The route described in this section extends from a
position about 4 miles SSE of Ra’s Marshaq (12°46′N,
45°03′E) (12.19), about 456 miles ENE, to a position about
15 miles SSE of Ra’s Fartak (15°38′N, 52°14′E) (12.152).
Topography
12.140
1 The coast between Maq
inal Kabr (13°24′N, 46°27′E)
(12.251) and Ra’s al Qusaym (86 miles ENE) (12.150) is
low and sandy, with small rocky points.
The coastal plain is low but there is a high mountain
range of very irregular outline about 35 miles inland.
12.141
1 A most remarkable feature along the stretch of coast
between Ra’s Marshaq (12.19) and Ra’s Fartak (12.152) is a
series of three horizontal basalt effusions situated on the
plains between Ra’s Quay‘ir (14°55′N, 50°20′E) (12.152)
and the mouth of W
d al Maslah (49 miles ENE) (12.273).
These effusions are called Harik in Arabic meaning burnt
place.
2 Each effusion has one or more cones about 30 m above
the level of the surrounding area, and around each cone is a
low field or tract of basalt, to a varying extent.
This basalt is so strikingly defined by its blackness
against the light colour of the plain over which it has spread
that it might be mistaken for a semi-fluid mass of lava, but
for the lack of any active signs of eruption.
12.142
extending from the SW corner of the island.
A round tower stands on the summit of the island.
12.138
1 Anchorage. The depths NE of rah Island and the town
of Aden are regular such that anchorage may be obtained as
convenient, sand and mud.
2 During the NE Monsoon a heavy swell sets in, but from
June to August during W winds, good anchorage may be
obtained in smooth water under the lee of rah Island.
During these months, this anchorage may be found to be
convenient with it being close to the town., for vessels only
wishing to communicate with the authorities. The hot dry
gusts blowing from over the hills are usually strong.
12.144
1 The coast for 30 miles E of Ra’s Quay‘ir (14°55′N,
50°20′E) (12.152) is low, sandy and uncultivated.
Caution
12.145
1 It is advisable to avoid the vicinity of Palinurus Shoal
(14°56′N, 50°43′E) (12.152) either by keeping well inshore,
or keeping well offshore at a distance of not less than
12 miles.
The depths around the shoal, and off the coast for
23 miles E of Ra’s Quay‘ir (14°55′N, 50°20′E) (12.152),
are irregular and appear to be connected with the basalt
effusions (12.141). Such irregularities in the sea bed do not
exist anywhere else off this coast.
Current
12.146
1 In accordance with the monsoons, currents generally set
NE from April to September at a mean rate of 1 kn and SW
from October to March at a mean rate of
kn, but the
currents are subject to variability.
See also 12.5.
Chart 6
Principal marks
12.147
1 Landmarks — Ra’s Marshaq to Ra’s al Kalb:
Jabal Mawfajah (13°40′N, 45°18′E) is a mountain,
2250 m in height, which stands at the W end of a
range of mountains which extends about 60 miles E.
2 Jabal al ‘Urays (13°31′N, 45°55′E) rises to 1732 m
and forms the highest point of Jib
l al Mar
qishah,
a lofty range of mountains which extends about
1 The W tract of this area, in the vicinity of Raydat l
‘Abd al Wadd (15°02′N, 50°29′E) (12.272), has four cones
in its centre. This effusion, having taken place over ground
for the most part about 30 m in elevation, has found its way
into water courses and appears at their openings on the coast
in black rocks which contrast strongly with the white
limestone situated on both sides.
2 The plains of the lower mountains in this vicinity also
appear to be darkened, perhaps by ashes ejected from the
cones or craters. There is hardly any trace of vegetation here.
12.143
1 The central effusion is situated about 9 miles farther E
35 miles E and which is broken by peaks and bluff
points. From the S, Jabal al ‘Urays is easily
identified as a sharp peak, but from the E it is well
to the left of the apparently highest part of the
range and it has a flat or concave summit. The
mountain valleys throughout the range are covered
with dense vegetation.
Chart 3784
12.148
1 Landmarks — Ra’s al Kalb to Ra’s Fartak:
Jabal Asad (15°22′N, 50°45′E) stands W of W
d al
from Raydat l ‘Abd al Wadd (12.272) and about 2 miles
inland.
The E effusion is from the W side of the mouth of W
d
al Maslah (12.273) and extends from near this w
d in its E
part to join with the central effusion in its W part.
340
Maslah (12.273) and rises to a height of 1447 m
(charted as about 1200 m). W
d Shakh
w lies SW
of Jabal Asad and can easily be identified by a
remarkable gap in the mountains which
encompasses the w
d.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12
DIRECTIONS
(continued from 12.19)
Ra’s Marshaq to Ra’s al Kalb
Chart 6
12.149
1 From a position about 4 miles SSE of Ra’s Marshaq
(12°46′N, 45°03′E) (12.19) the track leads initially about
227 miles ENE to a position about 15 miles SSE of Ra’s al
Kalb (14°03′N, 48°41′E) (12.150), passing:
2 SSE of Ra’s Sayl
n (13°04′N, 45°23′E) a low, round
and sandy point with a few date trees growing near
it. W
d Ban
and W
d ass
n enter the sea NE of
the point; the River Ban
flows through W
d Ban

and flows constantly from May to October; it is dry
for part of the year, but, occasionally, during the dry
season, it reaches the sea after abnormal floods
inland. Thence:
3 SSE of Barrow Rocks (13°19′N, 45°40′E) which
consist of two dangerous rocks which lie between
3 miles and 5 miles SW of Shaqr
’ (12.229), thence:
SSE of Al Khabr (13°26′N, 46°11′E), a town situated
on the coast S of Jib
l al Mar
qishah (12.147),
thence:
4 SSE of Maq
inal Kabr (13°25′N, 46°27′E) (12.251)
which is now in ruins and off which lie four
above-water rocks which appear white from guano
deposits, but, if covered in sea birds, appear black
in colour. These rocks lie on a rocky spit which
extends about 4 cables S from the coast. Thence:
SSE of Al Mabrak (13°27′N, 46°45′E) a town situated
on the coast S of Awar, thence:
5 SSE of Dives Shoal (13°31′N, 47°04′E) a detached
sand shoal, which lies about 3miles off the coast,
thence:
SSE of a detached shoal (13°25′N, 47°08′E) (reported
1948) with a least depth over it of 33 m. Thence:
12.150
1 Passing:
SSE of Ra’s al Qusaym (13°56′N, 47°49′E) a low,
round and sandy point; Rudum Oil Terminal
(12.153) lies about 7 miles NE of the point, thence:
2 SSE of Ra’s al ‘Uaydah (13°58′N, 48°12′E), a
steep-to headland from which three small rocky
points project. About 3 cables inland from the point
the land rises to a dark, rocky and conical hill, 49 m
high. A conspicuous radio mast stands about 5 miles
NE of the point. The coast between Ra’s al
‘Uaydah and Ra’s Majdaah (16 miles E) (12.261)
is very irregular with many projecting points and
small bays, thence:
3 SSE of Ra’s ar Ral (13°59′N, 48°15′E) a remarkable
round volcanic promontory of considerable elevation
with an apparently extinct volcanic crater in its
middle. Thence:
4 SSE of Hill
nyah (13°59′N, 48°19′E), an islet which
is composed of rocky limestone and from which
several rocky points project; a bank, with a least
depth over it of 3⋅7 m, extends from its E side,
thence:
SSE of Sikha Island (13°56′N, 48°23′E) which is
steep-to and has a humpbacked appearance; the
summit of the island is white with guano, thence:
5 SSE of the detached shoal (13°52′N, 48°30′E)
(reported 1979) with a least depth over it of 14⋅5 m;
341
a further shoal, with a least depth over it of 25 m,
(reported 1964) lies close SW. And:
6 SSE of Barr
qah (13°59′N, 48°28′E) an islet of
limestone rock situated close S of Ra’s Majdaah
(12.261); the islet is 180 m high and precipitous; its
summit is formed by a crater which is white with
guano. From the S, the islet appears square with a
flat summit and steep sides; from the E or W it
appears to slope from its S cliffs to its summit at its
N end. Thence:
7 SSE of Ra’s al Kalb (14°03′N, 48°41′E) a low, round
and sandy point; the point is not easily seen at
night but warning of an approach to the coast in
this vicinity can be obtained by constant sounding.
A stranded wreck (radar conspicuous) lies close off
the point; in 1985 the wreck was reported to be
conspicuous with bows WNW with the
superstructure and one mast visible. The coast
between Ra’s Majdaah and Ra’s al Kalb is low and
sandy.
Ra’s al Kalb to Ra’s Fartak
Chart 3784
12.151
1 From a position about 15 miles SSE of Ra’s al Kalb
(14°03′N, 48°41′E) (12.150) the track leads ENE for about
229 miles to a position about 15 miles SSE of Ra’s Fartak
(15°38′N, 52°14′E) (12.152), passing:
SSE of the detached shoal (14°02′N, 48°44′E)
(reported 1947), with a least depth over it of 25 m,
which lies about 3 miles ESE of Ra’s al Kalb.
Thence:
2 SSE of Ra’s Muwaysah (14°09′N, 48°49′E) the NE
entrance point to Marsá ilbah; Ra’s al umra lies
about 1miles NE, thence:
SSE of Ra’s uayah (14°12′N, 48°52′E) a rocky
point; a rugged range of hills extends some distance
inland from behind the point. Between Ra’s
uayah and a low bluff (3miles NE) lies a
small bay with a village at its head, thence:
3 SSE of Ra’s Burm (14°20′N, 49°00′E) which is a
bold, dark and craggy point, composed principally
of limestone, which attains a height of 335 m; an
above-water rock lies close off the point; a rocky
ledge extends between 2 and 3 cables E of the rock.
Ra’s ulmah lies on the SW corner of the
headland of which Ra’s Burm forms the N corner.
Thence:
4 SSE of Ra’s al Mukall
(14°31′N, 49°10′E) the E-most
point of the Mukall
Promontory which forms the E
side of Mukall
Bay (12.159) and on which is
situated Khalf Harbour (12.195). Hills stand on the
promontory, which extend inland and rise to
elevations of more than 1000 m; the hills slope
steeply to within a short distance of the coast which
itself is low. Rocky Bank lies about 8 cables S of
Ra’s al Mukall
, thence:
5 SSE of Ash Sihr Terminal (14°41′N, 49°32′E)
(12.205), thence:
6 SSE of Ra’s Sharmah (14°49′N, 50°02′E) which lies
4miles ESE of in al Muayni‘ah where an old
ruined fort stands on a rocky hill on the N shore of
Sharmah Bay; Dis is a walled town situated 2 miles
NNE of the hill. Jazrat Sharmah a rocky islet, and
a further unnamed islet, lie close W of the point.
Between Ra’s Sharmah and Ra’s B
Ghashwah
(8 miles E) the coast presents a succession of
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12
limestone and chalk cliffs rising almost vertically to
elevations of between 90 m and 120 m. Some rocky
patches lie about 3 cables offshore about 3 cables W
of Ra’s B
Ghashwah. Thence:
7 SSE of Ra’s B
Ghashwah (14°50′N, 50°11′E) a rocky
point; some remarkable ruins lie close to the cliff,
thence:
12.152
1 Passing:
SSE of Ra’s Quay‘ir (14°55′N, 50°20′E) a low and
rocky point with a rocky shoal, parts of which dry,
which extends 4 cables S from the point. The coast
between Ra’s B
Ghashwah and Ra’s Quay‘ir is
low and sandy, thence:
2 SSE of Palinurus Shoal (14°56′N, 50°43′E) a patch of
rocks and coral; see caution at 12.145. Thence:
SSE of Ra’s ‘Uq
b (15°14′N, 51°22′E) a high, red,
sloping and rocky point, thence:
SSE of Ra’s Rakhwayt (15°15′N, 51°25′E) a bluff
point, thence:
3 SSE of Ra’s ‘It
b (15°16′N, 51°28′E) which is
moderately high but terminates in a low point.
Thence:
SSE of Ra’s Sharwayn (15°20′N, 51°40′E) a steep-to
point which forms the WSW entrance point to
Qishn Bay (12.248), thence:
4 SSE of Ra’s Darjah (15°27′N, 51°51′E) another
steep-to point which forms the ENE entrance point
to Qishn Bay. The point is formed by precipitous
cliffs between 60 m and 120 m high; when viewed
from the S, a horizontal cleft can be seen near the
top of the cliff face. The sea breaks on Ra’s Darjah
with great force during the SW Monsoon and has
formed large caves at its base which is of limestone
formation, thence:
5 SSE of Ra’s Fartak (15°38′N, 52°14′E) which is the
highest and largest promontory on this coast except
for Ra’s Sajir (13.19); a conspicuous radio mast
stands near the S end of the point. From a position
30 miles S, Ra’s Fartak appears like an island with a
gap in the middle; it is supposed to be the ancient
Syagros from its resemblance to a boars head when
seen from distances of between 20 miles and
30 miles SW or E.
(Directions continue at 13.19)
RUDUM OIL TERMINAL
General information
Chart 6
Position
12.153
1 Rudum Oil Terminal (13°59′N, 47°55′E) is situated on
the N side of the Gulf of Aden on the NW side of Ghubbat
al ‘Ayn (12.240), about 190 miles ENE of the Port of Aden
(12.26).
Description
12.154
1 The terminal consists of a SPM buoy connected to a
submarine oil pipeline which leads about 1miles NW to
the coast.
342
Tidal levels
12.155
1 See information in Admiralty Tide Tables, Volume 3.
Mean spring range at Bal
f (13°58′N, 48°11′E) (12.241)
is about 1⋅5 m; mean neap range about 0⋅4 m.
Maximum size of vessel handled
12.156
1 The SPM buoy can handle vessels up to 20 000 dwt.
Prohibited anchorage
12.157
1 Vessels should not anchor N of, nor within 1 mile of, the
SPM buoy.
AL MUKALL
General information
Chart 3784 plan of Al Mukallº
Position
12.158
1 The Port of Al Mukall
(14°31′N, 49°09′E) is situated on
the N side of the Gulf of Aden, about 265 miles ENE of the
Port of Aden (12.26).
Description
12.159
1 Mukall Bay is entered W of Ra’s Marb
 (14°30′⋅5N,
49°09′⋅6E) which forms the SW extremity of Mukall

Promontory.
The sea within the bay, when smooth and calm, is very
clear; the bottom is then plainly visible in depths from 22 to
27 m.
2 A small rock projection extends about 3 cables S from the
head of the bay, E of the town of Al Mukall
; a quay is
situated on the W side of this peninsula. Two stranded
wrecks lie on a shoal finger, with a least depth over it of
0⋅9 m, which extends S from the head of the bay between
the rocky projection and the prohibited area (12.169).
12.160
1 Al Mukall is the principal seaport and the main town
for the region; it is the seat of government of the Qaiti State
of the Republic of Yemen.
The town is built partly on a rocky projection and partly
to the N of it; this latter part stands in terraces on a slope at
the base of a range of reddish limestone cliffs, about 90 m
high, which rises immediately from the back of the town.
The coast W of the town is low and sandy and is backed
by hills which slope to within about 400 m of the shore. E
of the town the coast is rocky.
2 Several high towers of ruined forts stand NE and NW of
the town; the N part of the town is enclosed on its W side
by a wall extending from the cliffs to the coast with only
one entrance gate. The Governors house, a large square
building, stands just inside this gate; the houses of the town
are mainly of stone and are between four and five storeys
high. Several minarets stand in the town but none of them is
conspicuous.
3 A fort, the ruined tower of which rises to a height of
59 m, stands in the NW part of the town.
Between Ra’s Marb
 (14°30′⋅5N, 49°09′⋅6E) and Ra’s
Kodar (7 cables ESE) a white tomb, which is not
conspicuous, stands on the coast.
Function
12.161
1 In 1971 the population of Al Mukall
was estimated to be
72 000.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12

A considerable trade is carried out from the port with
India, Oman, and ports on the Somali coast and also within
the Red Sea.
Cargo is worked in the anchorage by lighters between the
months of October and May.
12.162
1 Trade. The main exports are gums, hides, senna and a
small quantity of coffee.
The main imports are cotton goods, metals, crockery and
rice from Bombay; dates and dried fruit from Musqa; coffee,
maize and millet from Aden; sheep, aloes, frankincense,
coffee and dyes from Berbera (14.162) and other African
ports.
Prohibited area
12.169
1 A prohibited area extends about 6 cables SSW from the
shore on the S side of the town of Al Mukall
, as shown on
the chart.
The area encloses a submarine pipeline which leads to
some offshore diffusers which protrude from the seabed and
over which there is a least depth of 4 m.
Current
12.170
1 The current off the coast between Ra’s al Kalb (14°03′N,
48°41′E) (12.150) and Mukallá Bay (37 miles NE) sets
towards the coast to some extent.

Topography Limiting conditions

12.163 Controlling depth
1 Between Ra’s al Kalb (14°03′N, 48°41′E) (12.150) and 12.171
Mukall
Bay (37 miles NE) (12.159) the coast is very barren 1 There is a depth of 8⋅5 m lying close within the
and forbidding in aspect at first, with sandhills extending breakwater heads.
some miles inland.
2 The purple-veined mountains in the interior, the summits Deepest berth
of which are sometimes covered in snow in the cold season, 12.172
have an equally forbidding appearance but are relieved by a 1 Both No 1 and No 2 Berths have alongside depths of
very irregular outline of peaks and bluffs, rising almost 9⋅1 m.
precipitously to elevations of between 600 m and 1200 m. Tidal levels
The valleys are well-cultivated and beautiful. 12.173
The immediate vicinity of Al Mukall
is particularly
1 See information in Admiralty Tide Tables, Volume 3.
barren, but, about 1 mile W of the town, there are large date Mean spring range about 1⋅2 m; mean neap range about
groves and gardens. 0⋅4 m.
12.164
1 A village is situated behind sandhills in a large break in Maximum size of vessels handled
the coastal range about 3 miles NE of Ra’s al Kalb 12.174
(14°03′N, 48°41′E); there is a large fort at the W end of the 1 The port can accommodate vessels of up to 10 000 dwt,
village; four prominent white two-storey houses stand near with an overall length of 145 m and a maximum draught of
the coast at its E end. There is considerable vegetation and a 8⋅5 m.
brackish lake in this vicinity; a grey stone tomb stands on a
hillock ENE of the village. Density of water
12.165 12.175
1 The coast between Bandar Burm (14°22′N, 48°59′E) 1 Density 1⋅025 gms/cm3.
(12.244) and Al Mukall
(14 miles NE) is low, sandy and Local weather
backed by high mountains; there are no off-lying dangers 12.176
but the coast is fringed by a shallow bank which extends up 1 The SW Monsoon blows fresh in this area, but, when the
to 1 mile offshore. sun is lower in the sky and its strength declines, the wind
Fuwwah is a village situated just in from the coast about and seas abate; during this season, strong NW winds often
9 miles NNE of Bandar Burm. In the village stands a white occur. It is exceedingly hot in the middle of the day.
house; two dome-roofed tombs lie in the NE part of the From October to April, and often in June and July, the
village. Some palm trees grow between the village and the land and sea breezes bring relief, accompanied by occasional
coast. showers.
12.177
1 Climatic table. See 1.275 and 1.288.
Port limits
12.166 Arrival information
1 The limits of the Port of Al Mukall
extend W from the
vicinity of Ra’s Marb
 (14°30′⋅5N, 49°09′⋅6E), as shown on Port operations
the chart, for a distance of 2miles, then N to a position on 12.178
the coast W of the town. 1 There are facilities within the port for the handling of
general cargo; there is also a fisheries quay situated within
the port.
Traffic Cargo is also worked into lighters from the anchorage
12.167 between October and May. This anchorage is exposed to the
1 In 2003 the port was used by 75 vessels. SW Monsoon such that during this period lighterage work is
often directed to the secure anchorage at Bandar Burm
(12.245).
Port Authority 2 Al Mukall
Oil Terminal (12.197), consisting of two
12.168 mooring buoys situated at the seaward end of a submarine
1 The harbour is administered by Yemen Ports Authority, pipeline, lies about 1 cables offshore, close SE of Khalf
PO Box 1316, Steamer Point, Aden, Yemen. Harbour (12.195).

343
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12
Port radio
12.179
1 The Port of Al Mukall
Port Control Radio Station
controls the operations of the port.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Notice of ETA
12.180
1 Vessels should give 96 hours notice of their ETA through
Aden Radio.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Outer anchorage
12.181
1 There are three anchorage positions shown on the chart;
the recommended position lies in depths of about 31 m,
about 4 cables SSW of the unnamed rocky projection on
which stands the town of Al Mukall
(12.160).
The anchorages are used by vessels over 10 000 dwt for
working cargo into lighters.
Smaller vessels may anchor farther NW, noting the two
stranded wrecks which lie on the shoal area W of the rocky
projection and the prohibited area (12.169) which lies farther
W.
12.182
1 Cautions. A wreck, which is considered dangerous to
surface navigation, lies close SSE of the designated
anchorages.
The anchorage is exposed to the SW Monsoon, and, for
this reason, may be closed from May to October; see both
12.178 and further caution at 12.190.
It has been reported that the anchorage can only
accommodate three vessels with safety during the period of
the SW Monsoon.
12.183
1 Landing. A landing may be effected at a jetty situated on
the W side of the rocky projection (12.159), about 2 cables
SSW of the NW-most tower (166 m high). This jetty lies
close to the custom house and has depths alongside from 0⋅3
to 0⋅9 m.
12.184
1 Prohibited anchorage. A prohibited area (12.169), as
shown on the chart, in which anchorage is prohibited,
extends SSW from the shore on both sides of a submarine
pipeline.
12.185
1 Anchorage North of Ra’s al Mukall . Anchorage,
sheltered from the SW Monsoon, may also be obtained by
small vessels in the bay N of Ra’s Al Mukall
(14°31′N,
49°10′E) in depths from about 7 to 11 m.
Caution. Depths increase rapidly to seaward.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Pilotage
12.186
1 Pilotage for Khalf Harbour (12.195) is compulsory and is
available during the hours of daylight only; the pilot boards
about 3 cables WSW of the harbour entrance.
Pilotage for the Outer Harbour and Al Mukall
Oil
Terminal (12.197) is optional; it is reported that a launch,
with a copy of a large scale chart of the oil terminal, meets
344
any vessel bound for the terminal in order to allow the
master to make an inspection of the chart before berthing.
Tugs
12.187
1 A tug is available in Khalf Harbour.
General layout
12.188
1 The harbour consists of three distinct parts, Khalf Harbour
(12.195), the Outer Anchorages (12.181) and Al Mukall
Oil
Terminal (12.197).
Khalf Harbour is a small harbour, protected by
breakwaters, which is entered from its W side.
The three designated Outer Anchorages lie SW of the
entrance to Khalf Harbour, and S of the rocky projection on
which the town of Al Mukall
stands.
Al Mukall
Oil Terminal (12.197) lies close SE of Khalf
Harbour.
Tidal stream
12.189
1 The tidal stream in Al Mukall
Bay sets SW with the
in-coming stream.
12.190
1 Caution. A vessel reported a number of years ago that,
after experiencing a weak W-going stream, an E-going
stream suddenly set in with considerable strength causing her
to drag her anchor and ground.
Principal marks
12.191
1 Landmarks:
Jabal al Q
ra (14°32′⋅1N, 49°08′⋅3E) which stands
behind the town, rises to an elevation of 390 m and
is a conspicuous mark. A radio mast (red
obstruction lights) stands close to the summit.
A conspicuous minaret (14°31′⋅8N, 49°07′⋅6E)
(position approximate) stands on the foreshore in
the centre part of the town.
2 The white tower of a ruined fort (14°31′⋅8N,
49°08′⋅4E) which stands on the N side of the town
and is the NW-most of a line of three other similar
towers. All four of these towers are conspicuous
and make good landmarks.
Oil Tanks (14°31′⋅1N, 49°09′⋅3E) situated close SE of
Khalf Harbour (12.195).
The ruins of a white house (14°30′⋅6N, 49°09′⋅6E)
standing on Ra’s Marb
 (12.159) are conspicuous.
12.192
1 Major light:
Al Mukall
Southern Breakwater Head Light (white
round tower, green bands) (14°31′⋅2N, 49°09′⋅0E).
Directions for entering harbour
Approach
12.193
1 From a position about 4miles SSE of Ra’s Burm
(14°20′N, 49°00′E) (12.151) the approach to Al Mukall

Harbour leads about 5 miles N to a position 1 mile W of
Ra’s Marb
 (14°30′⋅5N, 49°09′⋅6E) (12.159).
Entry
12.194
1 The pilot boarding position for Khalf Harbour (12.195)
lies W of the harbour entrance.
The harbour entrance lies close ENE between two
breakwater heads.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12
Basins and berths
Khalf Harbour
12.195
1 Description. Khalf Harbour forms the port for Al
Mukall
and is entered about 9 cables NW of Ra’s Marb

(14°30′⋅5N, 49°09′⋅6E) (12.159).
The port can accommodate vessels of up to 10 000 dwt,
145 m in length and 8⋅5 m draught; during the SW monsoon
the normal accepted length is 75 m. A request to the port
authorities may allow larger vessels to be accepted.
2 The harbour is entered between two breakwaters; the S
breakwater extends NW from reclaimed land on the W side
of the promontory, about 7 cables NW of Ra’s Marb
; the N
breakwater extends SSW from a position on the coast
3cables farther NW.
Al Mukall
S Breakwater Head Light (12.192) is
exhibited from the S breakwater head; a further light is
exhibited from the N breakwater head.
3 Depths in the middle of the harbour entrance are about
10 m, and in the swinging area within the harbour about
8⋅5 m.
12.196
1 Berths. There are two commercial berths within the port:
No 1 Berth is situated on the NE side of the S
breakwater; the berth is 177 m in length and has an
alongside depth of 9⋅1 m in its SE corner.
2 No 2 Berth is situated on the reclaimed land on the
SE side of the harbour; the berth is 184 m in length
and has an alongside depth of 9⋅1 m.
A Fisheries Berth is situated at the NE end of the
reclaimed land on the SE side of the harbour; the
berth has a length of 160 m with alongside depths
of 4⋅5 m.
Al Mukall Oil Terminal
12.197
1 Description. Al Mukall
Oil Terminal is situated on the
W side of the promontory, close S of Khalf Harbour.
The facility consists of two mooring buoys laid at the
seaward end of a submarine oil pipeline which extends about
1cables SW from a position on the shore about 5cables
NNW of Ra’s Marb
 (14°30′⋅5N, 49°09′⋅6E).
The terminal is used only from the beginning of October
to the middle of May.
12.198
1 Berthing is undertaken during daylight only; unberthing
is at the masters discretion.
Pilotage is optional. See 12.186.
12.199
1 Local weather. Strong SW winds may be experienced at
times; wind and current conditions are most favourable for
berthing early in the morning.
12.200
1 Caution. Vessels have experienced difficulty with jellyfish
choking the main engine intakes. This normally only occurs
at the beginning of the NE Monsoon.
12.201
1 Directions for berthing. Approach the berth, as shown
on the chart, on a course of 117° with Ra’s Marb

(14°30′⋅5N, 49°09′⋅6E) just open on the port bow; both
anchors are used and are dropped on the alignment of a
common rear beacon, standing near the shore about 6 cables
NW of Ra’s Marb
, and two separate and individual front
beacons.
The depth of water in the anchorage positions is about
37 m.
345
2 Starboard anchor. The starboard anchor should be let
go when the common rear beacon is bearing 042°
and in line with the NW-most of the two front
beacons.
Port anchor. The port anchor should be let go when
the common rear beacon is bearing 025° and in line
with the SE-most of the two front beacons; two
beacons standing near the shore, about 3 cables
NNW of Ra’s Marb
, are on an alignment (085°)
close to this anchor position.
3 Better positioning on the berth may be achieved by
slightly over-running the transit lines as they are seen from
the forecastle before letting the anchors go.
Port services
Facilities
12.202
1 Cargo lighters with capacities between 60 and 400 tonnes;
mobile cranes; medical facilities.
Supplies
12.203
1 Fuel oils; fresh water; fresh provisions are all available.
Communications
12.204
1 There is an airport at Ar Rayy
n 22 km NE of Al
Mukall
; there are sea communications with Aden, India, the
Persian Gulf and European ports.
ASH S IHR OIL TERMINAL
General information
Chart 3784 plan of Ash SÖihr Terminal
Position
12.205
1 Ash Sihr Oil Terminal (14°41′N, 49°31′E) is situated on
the N side of the Gulf of Aden, about 24 miles ENE of Al
Mukall
(12.158) and 5 miles SW of the small town of Ash
Sihr (14°45′N, 49°37′E); Marr, which stands 2miles
WSW of the town is a ruin.
Description
12.206
1 The terminal consists of two SPM buoys connected to
submarine oil pipelines which lead NW to land on the coast
 mile and 1 miles ENE of the service boat harbour
(12.224).
Three light-buoys (special) are moored between the SPMs
and the shore; the buoys mark the 27 m depth contour.
Topography
12.207
1 The coast between Ra’s al Mukall
(14°31′N, 49°10′E)
(12.151) and the town of Ash Sihr (28 miles ENE) is an
almost unbroken line of low sand. Apart from the oil
terminal the coast is free from off-lying dangers.
A range of high mountains extends E from N of Al
Mukall
(12.158) lying parallel with the coast between 10
and 15 miles inland.
2 Buwaysh (14°35′N, 49°13′E) is a village which stands in
from the coast in a valley surrounded by date groves;
another village, situated a farther 3 miles SE, has a large and
ancient mosque.
Ar Rayy
n (14°39′N, 49°20′E) is another coastal village
along this stretch of coast.
3 Shuhayr (14°41′N, 49°24′E) is a ruined village situated
4 miles NE of Ar Rayy
n; an old fort stands near the village
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12

and makes a good mark. A small town, about 4 miles N of arrival and if there is any change of their ETA in excess of
the village, has some mosques standing within it that are 3 hours.
visible from seaward. Az Zaghfah (8 miles ENE) is another For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
coastal village in this vicinity. Signals, Volume 6 (3).
A low brown hill stands about 1miles N of Ash Sihr.
12.208 Outer anchorages
1 From the town of Ash Sihr the coast continues low and 12.219
sandy as far as 
m (13 miles ENE) with no off-lying 1 Ash Sihr Oil Terminal. There is no recommended
dangers; there are cliffs rising from the coast at 
m. waiting anchorage off the terminal; any chosen anchorage
A ruined village stands close to the coast about 5 miles berth should be well clear and to leeward of the oil terminal
ENE of Ash Sihr. and its facilities.
Seabed soil characteristics within the terminal area are
Port limits dolomite limestone and are not suitable for anchoring.
12.209 Prohibited anchorage. It is prohibited to anchor within
1 The limits of the terminal extend about 5 miles SSE from the limits of the terminal (12.209), as shown on the chart.
the coast on both sides of the terminal facility. 12.220
1 Ash Sihr. An open anchorage may be obtained between
Approach 7 cables and 1 mile off the town of Ash Sihr (12.205) in
12.210 depths from about 13 to 22 m, sand and shell.
1 The terminal is approached directly from the Gulf of
Aden. Pilotage
12.221
Traffic 1 Pilotage is compulsory; the mooring master boards in
12.211 position 14°39′⋅1N, 49°29′⋅9E which lies about 2 miles SW
1 In 2003 the port was used by 23 vessels. of SPM1, or in an agreed position with regard to the
prevailing weather conditions.
Port Authority
12.212 Tugs
1 The harbour is administered by Canadian Nexen 12.222
Petroleum Yemen Ltd., PO Box 52137, Al Mukallá, 1 A tug is available.
Hadhramout, Republic of Yemen.
Regulations concerning entry
Limiting conditions 12.223
1 Draught upon arrival. Vessels must arrive at the
Controlling depth terminal with sufficient ballast or cargo on board to ensure
12.213 the safe manoeuvring of the vessel and to be trimmed no
1 There is a least charted depth in the vicinity of the SPMs more than 4 m by the stern with the propeller submerged.
of 36 m. Vessels will not be berthed with excessive trim or
insufficient ballast.
Maximum size of vessel handled 2 Pilots. Vessels are not allowed within 2 miles of the
12.214 SPMs unless a pilot is onboard.
1 The facility can handle vessels up to 400 000 dwt but is Restricted area. A restricted area encloses both SPMs, as
limited to a loading restriction of 265 000 tonnes. shown on the chart. Only vessels using the terminal are
The minimum size of vessel handled is 80 000 dwt. permitted to enter this area.
Local weather
12.215 Harbour
1 During the period of the SW Monsoon berthing may be General layout
restricted to daylight only. 12.224
1 The terminal has two SPMs; SPM1 is moored in position
Arrival information 14°40′⋅6N, 49°31′⋅2E and SPM2 lies 1 miles NE. Three
light-buoys (special) are moored between the SPM buoys
Port operations
and the shore: the buoys mark the 27 m depth contour.
12.216
2 Ash Sihr service boat harbour (14°41′⋅5N, 49°29′⋅2E)
1 Berthing of vessels starts in the early morning, after
lies off the shore SSE of the main terminal production plant.
sunrise. Vessels must arrive in ample time to allow the
The harbour is formed on its W side by a L-shaped
berthing operation to be completed before sunset.
breakwater extending about 400 m SSE, and on its E side by
The terminal operates 24 hours a day.
a breakwater extending 300 m SSE, the entrance lying in the
Port radio SE corner of the harbour between the two breakwater heads.
12.217 Lights are exhibited from the heads of both breakwaters.
1 Ash Sihr Oil Terminal Port Control Centre, call sign An outer sand-trap breakwater, which also protects the
“Operations Control”, controls the operations of the port. harbour entrance, extends about 600 m SSE from the coast
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio about 500 m ENE of the E side of the harbour.
Signals, Volume 6 (3). 12.225
1 Mooring buoys, designated A and B, for use by harbour
Notice of ETA required service craft, are laid about 3cables SE, and 6cables
12.218 SSE, from the harbour entrance.
1 Vessels should send their ETA at the terminal 10 days, A tug mooring buoy, designated C, has been laid
72 hours, 48 hours, 24 hours and 12 hours prior to their 7 cables NNW of SPM 2.

346
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12

Landmark Anchorage
12.226 12.234
1 Jabal ubbah (14°43′N, 49°29′E) stands about 1 mile 1 Good anchorage may be obtained about 1 mile offshore
inland and makes a good landmark being isolated, oblong with the Sheikh’s House bearing 010°, about 1mile
and table-topped. distant, in depths from about 13 to 16 m.
A number of years ago a survey ship approached Shaqr
’
with the Sheikh’s House bearing 002°, and anchored on this
Port services bearing in a depth of 14⋅6 m with Qarn al Kul
s (12.232)
bearing 278°.
Facilities 12.235
12.227 1 Tidal streams in the area of the anchorage set W with the
1 There are no ballast reception facilities at the terminal. in-coming tidal stream.

Supplies Boat harbour

12.228
1 Neither fuel oil nor fresh water are available at the
terminal.
MINOR PORT
Shaqr ’
Chart 6
Position
12.229
1 Shaqr
’ (13°21′N, 45°41′E) is situated about 52 miles NE
of Aden (12.26) and is the capital and principal port of
Fadhl State of the Republic of Yemen.
Description
12.230
1 The town is divided by a strip of sand into three parts.
The Sheikhs House, the largest mosque and the principal
buildings of the town stand in its central part. There is a
small minaret on the foreshore at the E end of the town.
Midway between the Sheikh’s House and the E minaret there
is a long, oblong, brown building known as the Sultans
House.
2 A white mosque with a conspicuous minaret, 20 m high,
stands immediately W of the Sheikhs house; a salt works,
which is well lit at night, is situated 1 mile E of the town.
There is a large date palm grove in the vicinity of the
town.
Topography
12.231
1 From Ra’s Sayl
n (13°04′N, 45°23′E) (12.149) to Shaqr
’
the coast is sandy.
Between Shaqr
’ and Maq
inal Kabr (44 miles E)
(12.251) the coast is backed by a plain extending to the base
of the coastal range; this part of the country is mostly
mountainous.
Landmark
12.232
1 Qarn al Kul
s (13°21′N, 45°37′E) a conspicuous and
good landmark which resembles a dark sugarloaf, when
approaching Shaqr
’ on a N heading.
Off-lying dangers
12.233
1 Barrow Rocks (13°19′N, 45°40′E) (12.149) are dangerous
rocks lying between 3 miles and 5 miles SW of the town.
There is a channel, in which there is a least depth of
6⋅4 m, between the rocks and the coastal reef.
12.236
1 A boat harbour, formed by a gap in the coastal reef, lies
immediately S of Shaqr
’. It is clearly visible from seaward;
small, shallow-draught vessels may obtain anchorage within
this gap in depths from about 3 to 4 m, sand.
Supplies
12.237
1 A limited quantity of fresh provisions can usually be
obtained from Shaqr
’.
BAYS
Ghubbat Sayl n
Chart 6
Description
12.238
1 Ghubbat Sayl
n (12°55′N, 45°12′E) is a bay entered
between Ra’s Sayl
n (13°04′N, 45°23′E) (12.149) and Ra’s
Marshaq (26 miles SW) (12.19).
The shores of the bay are flat and sandy, but rise
gradually towards Ra’s Sayl
n. A low plain, with numerous
sand hummocks, some stunted bushes, and a few low trees,
extends some distance inland; the entrances to the ravines are
ill defined.
2 The country NW of Ra’s Sayl
n is mountainous with
numerous valleys.
Between Ra’s Sayl
n and Shaqr
‘ (13°21′N, 45°41′E)
(12.229) which lies about 25 miles NE, the coast is sandy.
Shaykh ‘Abd All
h is a village situated on the coast about
1 miles NE of Ra’s Sayl
n.
Current
12.239
1 During both monsoons a current sometimes sets round
Ra’s Marshaq (12.19) and N into Ghubbat Sayl
n at a rate
of between 2 kn and 4 kn. All vessels, especially those
bound W, should be on their guard against it; several vessels
have been wrecked in this vicinity in the past.
Ghubbat al ‘Ayn
Description
12.240
1 Ghubbat al ‘Ayn (14°00′N, 48°00′E) is a bay entered
between Ra’s al Qusaym (13°56′N, 47°49′E) (12.150) and
Ra’s al ‘Uaydah (22 miles E) (12.150).
Jil‘ah is a village situated on the NE side of Ghubbat al
‘Ayn; a number of other villages are situated on the shores
of the bay.
W
d Mayfa‘ah, which reaches the sea close SW of Ra’s
al Qusaym, is an extensive valley.
12.241
1 Bal f (13°58′N, 48°11′E) is a small town at the head of
a small bay entered from the E side of Ghubbat al ‘Ayn’, W

347
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12
of Ra’s al ‘Uaydah (12.150); the town shows up well from
the W but is not visible when bearing less than 040°.
There is a prominent tower in the town, with a smaller
tower close S of it; a third tower stands about 4 cables N of
the town near the coast.
Anchorage
12.242
1 A good anchorage, sheltered from E winds, may be
obtained within the small bay off Bal
f.
A good anchorage berth is with the prominent tower in
the town bearing 007°, distant about 2 cables, in depths of
about 16 m or greater.
12.243
1 Oil Terminal. Rudum Oil Terminal (12.153) is situated in
the NW part of the bay.
Bandar Bur m
Description
12.244
1 Bandar Burm is a small bay entered between Ra’s
Burm (14°20′N, 49°00′E) (12.151) and Radham Bluff
(1
miles NNW); the shores of the bay are fringed by a
reef.
Current close outside the bay sets continuously NE.
Landing is difficult at times due to the surf and the rocks
on the beach.
Supplies. A small quantity of fresh provisions may be
obtained.
Anchorages
12.245
1 Bandar Burm affords safe anchorage during the SW
Monsoon but the bay is open to E and NE winds.
During the SW Monsoon anchorage may be obtained SE
of the town of Burm in depths from about 9 to 13 m, in
good holding ground but ground swell rolls in.
In the early part of the last century, a good anchorage was
obtained within the bay with the SE extremity of Radham
Bluff bearing 329°, distant 5cables, in a depth of 20 m.
12.246
1 An indifferent anchorage may be obtained by small
vessels within a small bay situated on the SW side of Ra’s
Burm in depths from about 5 to 13 m.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Bur m
12.247
1 Burm is a small town situated on the NW shore of
Bandar Burm. The town is surrounded by date palms and
lies at the foot of a range of hills which extends to the coast
in this vicinity. A tomb is situated W of the S end of the
town, but is obscured by hills when near the anchorage.
Function. Tobacco and dates are the chief products of the
town; a brisk trade is done during the SW Monsoon when
Burm becomes a port of refuge.
Qishn Bay
Chart 3784
Description
12.248
1 Qishn Bay (15°25′N, 51°45′E) is a bay entered between
Ra’s Sharwayn (15°20′N, 51°40′E) (12.152) and Ra’s Darjah
(12 miles ENE) (12.152).
348
The coast between these two points is low and sandy
with a range of hills rising a few miles inland and a barren
tract of undulating sandhills lying between.
2 A prominent conical peak, 581 m high, stands about
2 miles W of Ra’s Sharwayn. A feature, known as the Asses
Ears, stands on the W shoulder of this peak and consists of
two remarkable sugarloaf peaks, 551 m high, situated close
together; they show their characteristic features when bearing
less than 022°, and are obscured when less than 295°.
The land behind the Asses Ears rises gradually in a
narrow wedge shaped formation, with numerous peaks and
ravines, until it joins the coastal range.
3 Qishn is a village situated about 5 miles N of Ra’s
Sharwayn but has only a few inhabitants. The Sultan of
Mahri Sultanate of Qishn and Suqurá has a residence in the
village but normally resides at adboh (15.66), the capital
of Suqurá.
The village of Sq is situated about 2 miles ENE of
Qishn. Near the village are a salt water lagoon and a few
date trees. Akhd, another village, lies close WSW of Qishn.
12.249
1 Caution. Ra’s Sharwayn (15°20′N, 51°40′E) and Ra’s
Darjah (12 miles ENE) are similar in appearance, each
having a large quantity of sand blown up on the W side of
the hills in its vicinity, and, as currents in this area are
somewhat variable, care should be taken in thick weather not
to confuse one point with the other.
12.250
1 Anchorage. The best anchorage within Qishn Bay may
be obtained in Bandar Lask which is a smaller bay situated
in the SW part of Qishn Bay.
2 A good anchorage berth is about 7cables offshore in
depths from about 7 to 9 m with Ra’s Sharwayn (15°20′N,
51°40′E) bearing 158°, distant 1miles. During the SW
Monsoon, vessels lying in this berth are well sheltered and
in comparatively smooth water, but in other parts of the bay
a heavy swell sets in.
3 During the NE Monsoon, there is a heavy ground swell
and surf on the shores of Qishn Bay which renders landing
dangerous except in a cove W of Ra’s Darjah (15°27′N,
51°51′E) (12.152) which forms the E entrance point to the
bay.
ANCHORAGES
Chart 6
Maq
inal Kab r
12.251
1 Description. Maq
inal Kabr (13°25′N, 46°27′E) was a
settlement of which no trace now remains except a black
ruin which looks like a low heap of stones standing about
2 cables N of the inner end of a rocky spit which extends
4 cables S from the coast. Four above-water rocks, white
with guano, stand on this spit, but, a number of years ago,
sea birds roosting on them made them appear black against
the sandy coast.
2 Maq
inal Kabr can be easily identified by two black
hills which stand in this vicinity.
12.252
1 Anchorage. Small vessels may obtain anchorage,
sheltered from NE winds, on the W side of the above-water
rocks standing on the spit.
Many years ago, a survey ship approached Maq
inal
Kabr with the S extremity of the N-most of the above-water
rocks bearing 045°, and anchored in a depth of 11 m with
this rock bearing 045°, 4 cables distant.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
12.253
1 Tidal streams in the area of the anchorage set W with
arayn Islet (14°00′N, 48°23′E) and Ra’s
the in-coming tidal stream.
 awr ’ as Suflá
12.254
1 Description. awr
’ as Suflá (13°49′N, 47°35′E) is a
arayn Islets are two islets which lie on the W
village which stands in from a slightly projecting point on
the coast which itself is thinly covered with bushes on its
outer end. Two square towers, each 15 m high, stand on a
mound within the village.
‘Irqah (17 miles SW) is a small village on the coast with
a mosque which is not prominent. A small, square tower
which stands on the coast 2 miles E of the village makes a
good mark when it has been identified. The village, mosque
and tower all stand on a low, round, sandy projection.
Landmark
12.255
1 Jabal B
Ja‘ash (13°53′N, 47°39′E) is a projecting bluff
of whitish appearance, veined by dark strata, which rises to a
height of 61 m. The bluff terminates in sandhills with a
dangerous offshore rock close SW of them; a stranded wreck
lies E of the bluff. Jabal B
Ja‘ash, though a good mark,
especially in hazy weather, may be difficult to identify
particularly if the sun is behind it.
12.256
1 Anchorage. Small vessels may obtain anchorage in a
slight indentation in the coast between the slightly projecting
point off awr
’ as Suflá and Jabal B
Ja‘ash.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Ra’s ar Ra
l
12.257
1 Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels either side
of Ra’s ar Ral (13°59′N, 48°15′E) (12.150); the wind can
funnel across the sandy isthmus N of the crater making the
anchorages gusty on either side of the point.
Local knowledge is required for the use of these
anchorages.
Bir ‘Al Al Qarn, which is situated on the NE shore of the bay, in
12.258
1 Bir ‘Al (14°02′N, 48°21′E) is a village situated at the
head of an inlet in which there are large coral heads over
sand on its W side, the E half of the inlet being encumbered
with a dangerous reef.
A square tower stands within the village of Bir ‘Al; other
villages are situated in this area.
12.259
1 Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels within the
W half of the inlet which leads to Bir ‘Al about 2cables
offshore in a depth of about 7 m; during the SW Monsoon
anchorage should be obtained farther W.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
12.260
1 Small vessels may also obtain anchorage in this area off
the W side of Hill
nyah (13°59′N, 48°19′E) (12.150) which
ay‘ir
gives moderate shelter from E winds.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
349
Ra’s Majdaah
12.261
1 Majdaah Bay (not named on chart) is entered between
the E-most Gha
Majdaah (3 miles E); the horns of a crescent-shaped
half-crater extend 3 cables from the head of the bay.
A dangerous rock lies in the centre of the head of the bay
about 5 cables offshore; apart from this rock the bay is free
of dangers.
2 The Gha
side of the entrance to the bay, close off the mainland shore;
a navigable passage lies between the two islets and the coast,
but the channel between the islets almost dries.
Ra’s Majdaah, the E entrance point to the bay, is a dark,
moderately high promontory, which forms the termination of
a broken range of hills extending about 10 miles inland.
Barr
qah (12.150) lies about 1 mile S of Ra’s Majdaah.
12.262
1 Anchorage, which is sheltered from E winds, may be
obtained by small vessels within Majdaah Bay.
A good anchorage berth is with a white, square tower
standing on the W side of Ra’s Majdaah bearing 055°,
about 3 cables distant, in a depth of about 15 m, sand. This
tower forms a good leading mark.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Chart 3784
North-west of Ra’s Sharmah
12.263
1 Anchorage may be found in the unnamed bay, previously
known as Sharmah Bay, which is entered between the E end
of the cliffs at 
m (14°48′N, 49°50′E) (12.281) and Ra’s
Sharmah (11 miles E) (12.151). A good anchorage berth can
be obtained with Ra’s Sharmah bearing 157°, about 5 cables
distant, in depths from about 7 to 9 m.
Tidal stream sets W with the in-going tide.
2 Topography. A range of hills extends from a bluff in a
position about 6 cables NE of Ra’s Sharmah (14°49′N,
50°02′E) and a further bluff about 1miles N of the point.
A sandhill stands about 8 miles NNE of Ra’s Sharmah on
the summit of which grow a few trees; a few trees also grow
on the sides of the mountains in this area, otherwise the
country is barren and uncultivated.
12.264
1 Small vessels may find a safe anchorage off the village of
depths from about 4 to 7 m; this is the most frequented
anchorage within the bay.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
East of Ra’s Sharmah
12.265
1 Small vessels may obtain anchorage off the village of
Dhafghan (14°51′N, 50°06′E) which lies on the coast
between Ra’s Sharmah (14°49′N, 50°02′E) (12.151) and Ra’s
B
Ghashwah (14°50′N, 50°11′E) (12.151). The village is
situated in a gap in the cliffs, fronted by a sandy beach; the
land in this vicinity is cultivated.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
South and west of Ra’s Qu
12.266
1 An open anchorage may be obtained S of Ra’s Quay‘ir
(14°55′N, 50°20′E) (12.152) in depths from 22 to 26 m;
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12
noting the dangerous rock which lies close SSW of the
point.
Anchorage may also be obtained W of the point in depths
of about 13 m but depths decrease rapidly towards the coast.
12.267
1 Boats may obtain shelter E of two rocky islets which lie
2 cables NW of the point, and under the lee of a reef about
7 cables NE of the point.
A heavy surf is always running in this vicinity and
landing is difficult.
12.268
1 Topography. The village of Al Qurayan is a straggling
village situated about 1
miles NW of Ra’s Quay‘ir.
Quay‘ir, which lies 1 mile N of the point, is a small
town walled on three sides; a square ruined fort, adjacent to
a date grove, stands 3 cables NNW of the town.
Landmark
12.269
1 At the village of arrah (15°00′N, 50°25′E) which lies
about 7 miles NE of Ra’s Quay‘ir (12.152) there is a round
tower which makes a good mark. The village of Sar
r lies
about 2 miles farther NE where there are numerous date
palms.
Mu
ayni‘ah
12.270
1 An exposed and temporary anchorage may be obtained
off Muayni‘ah (15°04′N, 50°38′E), the site of a large,
ruined, ancient town; the land in this vicinity is swampy
with numerous mangrove trees.
A temporary anchorage, which is exposed, may be
obtained about 1miles offshore in depths of about 11 m,
mud and sand.
The village of Tamnum, which is situated inland from the
coast, lies between the black peak and the cone (12.271).
Principal marks
12.271
1 Landmarks:
A prominent white fort stands within a village situated
about 450 m inland of Muayni‘ah (15°04′N,
50°38′E).
2 A black peak, 76 m high, stands about 7 miles ENE of
Muayni‘ah at the W end of a low coastal ridge of
hills which extends 31 miles ENE and shows black
against the sand-coloured mountains which rise
farther inland. A cone, 152 m high, stands about
10 miles ENE of the black peak and forms the
highest point of this ridge.
12.272
ayt
Say t
12.273
1 Description. Sayt (15°12′N, 51°15′E) is a town
situated on the coast in which there are some stone houses
and mosques.
2 W
d al Maslah reaches the coast about 7 miles WSW of
the town and is the largest valley opening on the coast and
appears to divide the mountainous land into separate tracts,
to which the land rises gradually from the coast. The sides
of W
d al Maslah are high and their summits are usually
obscured by clouds; in the valley there are numerous villages
and date palms. The valley is used as a communication route
between the coast and the inland towns; a ruined fort stands
on each side of its S entrance.
3 The village of Sharkh
t, which is situated on the coast
about 6 miles WSW of W
d al Maslah, is deserted.
12.274
1 Anchorage. The anchorage off Sayt is an open
roadstead. A good berth may be obtained about 1miles
offshore in a depth of 10 m, mud, with a large white house
in Sayt bearing 315°, and the S extremity of Ra’s
Sharwayn (15°20′N, 51°40′E) (12.152) bearing about 070°
and just a little open of Ra’s ‘Uq
b (15°14′N, 51°22′E)
(12.152).
East of Ra’s Darjah
12.275
1 Description. Between the cliffs of Ra’s Darjah (15°27′N,
51°51′E) (12.152) and those of Ra’s Fartak (24 miles ENE)
(12.152) the coast is low and sandy. Sandhills rise gradually
to a high range of hills which stand farther inland, the area
is barren except for some stunted bushes and cultivated
patches near the villages.
2 The Fartak Range of mountains extends W from Ra’s
Fartak rising to heights of between 610 m and 915 m.
aqr (15°32′N, 51°57′E) which lies about 8 miles NE of
Ra’s Darjah is situated within a date grove; a large white
mosque stands on a low cliff SSW of the village. A fortified
house stands about 3 miles ENE of aqr at the W end of
another unnamed village.
12.276
1 Anchorage. A good anchorage may be obtained by small
vessels between Ra’s Darjah and a dangerous rock lying
about 4 miles NNE of the point and about 1 mile offshore.
This anchorage is completely sheltered from the SW
Monsoon.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Khay
1 Anchorage off Raydat l ‘Abd al Wadd (15°02′N,
50°29′E), a small town which lies about 1 mile inland from
the coast, between Ra’s Quay‘ir (14°55′N, 50°20′E)
(12.152) and Muayni‘ah (15°04′N, 50°38′E), is not
recommended, although many years ago a survey ship did
manage to anchor about 2cables offshore with the centre
of the town bearing 333°, in a depth of 22 m, black mud.
Depths of 40 m lie within about 2cables of the beach and
close inshore there is a deep hole, probably an ancient crater,
in which there are depths from 220 to 230 m with depths
from 37 to 47 m around its edge.
2 Landmark:
A large white watch tower stands on the coast W of
12.277
1 Description. Khayayt (15°38′N, 52°08′E) is situated
some little way inland from the coast at the mouth of a
valley at the base of the high land on the W side of Ra’s
Fartak (12.152). The anchorage port of Khayayt is the port
for Al W
d a town farther up the valley containing three or
four forts.
Some date groves stand 1miles N of Khayayt.
The village of awayn stands on the coast SW of
Khayayt; some date palms grow near the village.
12.278
1 Anchorage may be obtained off Khayayt; the port does
a considerable trade and this anchorage is much used by
the town of Raydat l ‘Abd al Wadd near a coasting craft.
landing place; a ruined fort stands about 2 miles Local knowledge is required for the use of this
NNW of the town. anchorage.

350
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 12
Chart 6
Maq
inal Sagh r
12.279
1 Description. Maq
inal Saghr (13°25′N, 46°21′E) (not
charted by name) is an anchorage formed by a projecting
point; a spit, on which lies a dangerous rock, extends about
5 cables SSW of the point.
Chart 3784
East of Ra’s ‘Uq b
12.280
1 Description. Between Ra’s ‘Uq
b (15°14′N, 51°22′E)
(12.152) and Ra’s ‘It
b (6 miles ENE) (12.152) there are two
bluffs and some small bays, with sandy beaches, which
afford shelter for boats during the NE Monsoon.
2 Topography. The coast between Ra’s ‘It
b and Ra’s
Sharwayn (13 miles ENE) (12.152) is sandy and rises
gradually inland; in places the sand is blown high up on the
351
hills. With a fresh sea breeze there is considerable surf on
this stretch of coast.
3 The town of ‘It
b is situated about 4 miles NNE of Ra’s
‘It
b, the town contains three mosques the W-most one has a
minaret; a palm grove stands 1 mile W of the town.
 m
12.281
1 Description. The village of 
m (14°48′N, 49°50′E) is
situated in a ravine at the foot of a dark, double hill; a date
grove and other cultivated ground lies in the vicinity of the
village.
12.282
1 Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels off 
m
about 1 mile offshore in depths from about 13 to 15 m.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Supplies. Limited quantities of fresh provisions can be
obtained.
Home Contents Index

Chapter 13 - south coast of Arabia - Ra's Fartak to to Ra's al Junayz

51° 52° 53° 54° 55° 56° 57° 58° 59° 60°

22° 22°

38

Ra’s Qumaylah

229
13.
21° 2854
21°

2854
3519
Al Masirah
¸
13.180

1 3 .17
3519
2851 Ra’s Abu-
20° Rasas
¸ ¸
20°

4
.14
13
19° 19°
352

3785 Madrakah Anch. Ra’s al Madrakah

OMAN

18° 18°
3784 03
.1
13
¸ - - I.
Juzur Al Halaniyat
378
5 Ma
YEM EN rbº
tB Ra’s Nuss
¸¸
13.61 ay
17° 2896 P. Salalah 17°
(Minº Raysøt)
2896
2895

3785

16° 16°
13.30
9
3784 Nishtøn 13.1
Ra’s Fartak

51° 52° 53° 54° 55° Longitude 56° East from Greenwich 58° 59° 60°
0205
 Home Contents Index

CHAPTER 13
ARABIA — SOUTH COAST — RA’S FARTAK TO RA’S AL JUNAYZ

GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 2851, 3784, 3785, 4705
Scope of the chapter
13.1
1 The area described in this chapter lies in the NW part of
the Arabian Sea; it first describes the S coast of Yemen from
Ra’s Fartak (15°38′N, 52°14′E) (12.152) to Ra’s
arbat ‘Al During the night, the wind occasionally falls to calm for
(78 miles NE) which lies close to the position where the
international boundary (13.2) between the Republic of
Yemen and the Sultanate of Oman reaches the coast.
2 The area described then continues along the SE coast of
Oman from Ra’s
arbat ‘Al 16°38′N, 53°05′E) to Ra’s Al sufficiently strong to raise a heavy sea a little distance
Junayz (546 miles NE) (13.230) an area which includes the
Juzur Al al
niy
t Islands (Kuria Muria Islands) (17°30′N,
56°00′E) (13.122) and Marah (20°30′N, 58°50′E) (13.180).
This chapter also includes a description of Port Salalah
(16°56′N, 54°00′E) (13.61).
International boundary
13.2
1 The international boundary between the Republic of
Yemen and the Sultanate of Oman reaches the coast in the
vicinity of Ra’s
arbat ‘Al 16°38′N, 53°05′E). mean rate of about  kn, but there is a considerable amount
Exercise areas
13.3
1 Firing practice areas lie off Ra’s Hamar (16°54′N,
53°57′E) (13.20), Ra’s Marb
 (16°59′N, 54°41′E) (13.20),
Gharzaut (17°37′N, 56°08′E) (13.136) and Ra’s Ab Ra

(20°10′N, 58°38′E) (13.145) as shown on the chart.
Notice of firing practices and the areas involved are
promulgated by Coastal Warning Messages and local Notices
to Mariners.
See Appendix II.
Weather
13.4
1 The SW Monsoon is at its strongest and the sea at its
heaviest, especially in July, between Ra’s Marb
 (16°59′N,
54°41′E) (13.20) and Marah (300 miles NE) (13.180).
During the SW Monsoon season there is always a long S
swell on the coast of Arabia, but the sea is not usually so
heavy inshore as it is farther seaward.
The weather during this period is generally very hazy,
though the sky is clear; consequently, the land does not
become visible until quite close inshore.
13.5
1 During the months of November and December, a strong
NE breeze, with a short choppy sea, is not uncommon.
2 Strong winds, known as Belats (1.268), are experienced
between the middle of December and the middle of March.
about an hour after which time violent squalls from the
mountains occur at intervals of a few minutes, for a period
of up to 5 or 6 hours. These squalls give no warning except
for the noise they make passing over the water; they are
offshore. In some years they are rare, whilst in others they
are frequent and very violent. The Belat may be succeeded
by strong SE winds causing a considerable sea.
Currents
13.6
1 The currents in the area covered by this chapter between
Ra’s Fartak (15°38′N, 52°14′E) and Marah (480 miles NE)
set in accordance with the prevailing monsoons.
From April to September, the currents set NE at a mean
rate of about 1 kn, and from October to March SW at a
of variation.
2 In the area which lies farther NE, between Marah
(20°30′N, 58°50′E) and Ra’s al add (130 miles NNE), the
sets are variable and the rates generally less than  kn, the
most common set being E from February to October, and W
from November to January.
Caution
13.7
1 Owing to the imperfect nature of the surveys in this area
mariners are warned that great care must be taken when
navigating between Ra’s Marb
 (16°59′N, 54°41′E) (13.20)
and Ra’s awqirah (128 miles ENE).
See source data diagram on Chart 3785.
Off-lying dangers
13.8
1 Except in the approaches to Khalj Marah (19°40′N,
58°00′E) (13.146) there are few off-lying dangers along this
stretch of coast.
Anchorage
13.9
1 Temporary anchorage along this stretch of coast may be
obtained under the lee of most of the prominent capes.

RA’S FARTAK TO RA’S NU

GENERAL INFORMATION 52°14′E) (12.152), about 202 miles ENE, to a position about
20 miles SSE of Ra’s Nu (17°15′N, 55°16′E) (13.20).
Chart 3784 Topography
Route 13.11
13.10 1 From Ra’s Fartak (15°38′N, 52°14′E) (12.152) the cliffs
1 The route described in this section extends, from a extend about 8 miles N, rising vertically to elevations of
position about 15 miles SSE of Ra’s Fartak (15°38′N, about 670 m, after which they became lower and more

353
 Home Contents Index
irregular, being about 15 m high at Khalft (15°51′N,
52°10′E) which lies about 14 miles NNW of Ra’s Fartak; the
cliffs terminate between 4 miles or 5 miles farther N.
2 These high cliffs are by far the boldest escarpment on the
SE coast of Arabia, being vertical from base to summit for a
distance of 6 miles N from Ra’s Fartak. No part of these
heights has any vegetation except near their summits, and,
what there is, grows chiefly on their W sides where the land
slopes gradually to the low plain which backs the coast on
the W side of Ghubbat Al Qamar (13.21).
3 The coast between Ra’s Fartak and abt (19 miles N)
has several rocky projections; the small bays between these
projections appear to be free from dangers.
From SE of the settlement of Ash Shaykh al Jawhar
(16°28′N, 52°29′E), near which stands a white tomb and a
few huts, as far as Ra’s
arbat ‘Al 37 miles ENE) the coast 2 During this period, the coastal plains become very hot
is almost straight; mountains rise abruptly behind the coast.
There are occasional small patches of sand along this stretch
of coast.
13.12
1 Between Ra’s
arbat ‘Al 16°38′N, 53°05′E) and Ra’s may sometimes bring swarms of locusts with it.
Sajir (32 miles ENE) (13.19) the coast is backed by Jabal Al
Qamar, a range of mountains which rises up to heights of
1411 m and which approach close to the coast at Ra’s Sajir.
During the SW Monsoon these mountains are often
completely enveloped in clouds for weeks. It is reported that
the sun is often not visible for days. This may explain the
extremely fertile nature of these mountains, which, although
appearing sterile from a distance, are, in fact, covered with
trees from base to summit.
2 A bluff, 3 miles NNE of Ra’s
arbat ‘Al, rises to an rate is about 1 kn.
elevation of 1204 m and shows up prominently when viewed
from the SW. At Dhalqut (16°42′N, 53°15′E), 10 miles ENE
of Ra’s
arbat ‘Al, there is a grove of date trees. Lights are
exhibited from the breakwaters (16°42′⋅2N, 53°15′⋅3E) and
the Heliport lying close N.
The coast between Mn
Rayst (16°56′N, 54°01′E) and
Ra’s Marb
 (40 miles E) (13.20) is low and sandy for the
first 24 miles. It then becomes cliffy. From the town of
Salalah (17°01′N, 54°06′E) to about 4 miles E, the coast is a
succession of fields and coconut groves.
3 Near the coast, about 2 miles E of the group of
conspicuous white buildings at Salalah, there is a fresh water
lake thickly covered with bulrushes which is reported to
have depths of about 2 m in the dry season; the entrance to
this lake has silted up. The position of the lake may be
identified by a hill and some ruins situated at the E end of a
large grove of coconut trees.
13.13
1 The coast between
qah (17°02′N, 54°24′E) (13.63), a
village with groves of coconut trees and cultivated ground
lying close W, and Marb
 (18 miles E), is a succession of
limestone cliffs about 30 m high with the Jabal Sam
n
Range (13.56) rising gradually from about 1 mile inland.
Caves are situated on the precipices of the cliffs facing the
sea.
2 Between Ra’s Marb
 (16°59′N, 54°41′E) (13.20) and
Ra’s Nu (38 miles ENE) (13.20) the coast is low, rocky
and irregular.
alawt is the name given to the plain which extends E
from Marb
 Bay, between the coast and Jabal Sam
n, to
Ra’s Nu. The plain is mostly low and barren, but a few
hills of moderate elevation rise from its surface.
13.14
1 The coast between Ra’s Marb
 (16°59′N, 54°41′E) and
the entrance to Bandar Qinqar (19 miles E) (13.28) has
CHAPTER 13
several rocky points with isolated rocks lying close to them;
small bays lie between these rocky points.
Between Jabal Musayrah (17°09′N, 55°11′E), which
stands about 15 miles NE of Bandar Qinqar and Jabal Nu
(5 miles NNE) (13.17), there is a valley in which there is
some brushwood.
Weather
13.15
1 From about the middle of June, the SW Monsoon blows
strongly and raises a heavy sea; the swell in advance of the
monsoon begins to roll into Ghubbat al Qamar (13.21) in
early April causing a heavy surf on the coast.
and oppressive; most of the inhabitants of the plains retire to
the cooler atmosphere of the mountains.
From June to September the wind occasionally blows
from the N; in the months of July and August this wind
Currents
13.16
1 The current, which begins to set ENE along the SE coast
of Arabia early in April, is apparently deflected NNE near
Ra’s Fartak (15°38′N, 52°14′E) (12.152) towards the coast at
about the position of Damqawt (66 miles NNE); its average
During the NE Monsoon the current runs in the opposite
direction at a rate of 1 kn, but may set against the wind at
times.
2 In November 1984, in an approximate position of
16°52′N, 54°08′E, a current was observed to set due W at
1 kn over a six hour period; the prevailing wind was light
from the SE.
Principal marks
13.17
1 Landmarks:
Jabal Qinqar (17°02′N, 55°00′E) is a conical hill
which makes a good mark. The hill rises close N of
Bandar Qinqar (13.28) and is composed of
limestone traversed by veins of chalk and gypsum.
Brown Hill, which rises to 149 m, stands about
6miles WSW.
Jabal Musayrah (17°09′N, 55°11′E) stands about
12 miles NE of Jabal Qinqar and is of similar
formation.
2 Jabal Nu (17°13′N, 55°13′E), which stands about
3 miles SW of Ra’s Nu (13.20), forms the E-most
extremity of the Jabal Sam
n Range (13.56). The
peak resembles a bluff and is the highest and most
precipitous part of the range. Jabal Nu is more
prominent than Jabal Musayrah especially when
viewed from the E; a radio mast stands about
2 miles NNE of the peak.
13.18
1 Major light:
Nishtn Port Light (red tower with white band, 11 m
high) (15°49′N, 52°12′E) exhibited from a position
about 1 cable E of the root of the SE breakwater.
354
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 13
DIRECTIONS
(continued from 12.152)
Chart 3784
13.19
1 From a position about 15 miles SSE of Ra’s Fartak
(15°38′N, 52°14′E) (12.152) the route leads ENE for about
202 miles, passing:
SSE of Ra’s Fin
s (15°47′N, 52°13′E) which is
formed by a 61 m high bluff, surmounted by a
conical hill; the high land recedes from the coast in
this vicinity and extends NW. Thence:
2 SSE of Nishtn Port Light (15°49′N, 52°14′E) (13.18),
thence:
SSE of Ra’s
arbat ‘Al 16°38′N, 53°05′E), a small 13.21
rocky point, about 61 m high, which lies about
3 miles E of the village of awf in which stands a
tower; see 13.2, thence:
3 SSE of Ra’s Sajir (16°45′N, 53°35′E), a steep, rounded
cape which attains an elevation of 844 m; the
arbat ‘Al (78 miles NE) (13.19), there is
summit of Jabal Al Qamar (13.12) is a level
table-land, 1106 m high, in this vicinity. The E side
of Ra’s Sajir is vertically scarped, but it is not so
high as on its SW side as the strata dip towards the
E; the SW side descends in three or four large steps
to the coast. The ledges of these steps are so narrow
that the summit can only be seen when about
5 cables from its base. The bluff of the cape rises
vertically from the sea. The villages of Hasaman
and Rakhyt lie, 5 miles and 10 miles W,
respectively, of Ra’s Sajir; a stranded wreck is
reported to lie close off the SW side of the cape.
Thence:
13.20
1 Passing:
2 SSE of Ra’s Hamar (16°54′N, 53°57′E) a rocky bluff
of irregular hills projecting from the high mountain
range which lies just within the coast in this
vicinity. Jabal amar is a peak rising to 270 m
which stands just over 6 cables W of the bluff; the
peak is a remarkable needle shape with a notch
between it and a smaller peak. An explosives
dumping ground, as shown on the chart, lies about
20 miles SSE of the point. Thence:
3 SSE of Ra’s Rayst (16°56′N, 54°01′E) a rocky bluff,
about 30 m high, which is composed of white and
grey limestone, much scarped and very irregular
ib is a village situated under some projecting rocks
near its summit; the ruins of a small tower stand on
its summit; on the ridge farther inland is an ancient
cemetery. Port Salalah (13.61) is situated close N of
the bluff. Port Salalah E Breakwater Head Light
(13.93) is exhibited from the outer end of a
breakwater which extends about 7 cables NNE of
the bluff, thence:
4 SSE of Ra’s Marb
 (16°59′N, 54°41′E); a fort stands
near the coast about 6 cables ESE of the point; a
ruined tomb, which is only visible from the W, lies
between the two. The stranded wreck of a fishing
vessel lies on the S side of a small unnamed island,
about 4 miles ESE of the point, thence:
5 SSE of Bandar Qinqar (17°00′N, 55°00′E) (13.28), an
inlet entered about 18 miles E of Ra’s Marb
.
Thence:
SSE of Jabal Musayrah (17°09′N, 55°11′E) (13.17),
thence:
6 SSE of Ra’s Nu (17°15′N, 55°16′E) a low, rocky
ah (16°12′N, 52°11′E), the largest town in this
and prominent cape which can easily be identified
355
by Jabal Nu (13.17) which stands immediately to
the SW of the cape. Also, there is a large mass of
rock, shaped like a tub, situated close offshore
which aids in its identification. Near Ra’s Nu there
is a ravine, with some date palms, through which a
stream flows after heavy rain.
(Directions continue at 13.103)
INLETS AND BAYS
Ghubbat al Qamar
Chart 3784
Description
1 Ghubbat al Qamar is a large bay entered between Ra’s
Fartak (15°38′N, 52°14′E) (12.152) and Ra’s Sajir (103 miles
NE) (13.19).
Along the shores of Ghubbat al Qamar, between Ra’s
Fartak and Ra’s
hardly any sign of cultivation.
The Port of Nishtn (15°49′N, 52°12′E) (13.30) is
entered from the SW side of the bay.
2 abt and Hayrt are two villages situated on the W side
of the bay about 8 miles and 10 miles respectively N of
Nishtn; a small saddle-shaped hill rises between these two
villages.
Jarb (16°22′N, 52°21′E) is a village situated near the
shore of the bay. Abd All
h Gharb, 3 miles SW, is the
position of a tomb situated near the coast with some date
trees growing in its vicinity; Ash Shaykh al Jawhar, is
another tomb, white in colour; a few huts stand near-by.
13.22
1 Damqawt (16°34′N, 52°50′E) is a small port on the N
side of Ghubbat al Qamar which lies on an uneven plain in
a valley at the W end of Jabal Al Qamar (13.12); the port is
surrounded by almost inaccessible mountains except near the
coast.
On the W side of the plain lies a salt water lagoon with a
few date trees around it; a ruined fort stands on a cliff which
rises immediately over the town.
2 A reef, over which the sea breaks, extends about
1cables from the coast fronting Damqawt; there is a good
landing on the E side of this reef when the SW swell is not
very heavy, but, at the same time, the W side may be almost
unapproachable.
J

about 9 miles ENE of Damqawt.
Tidal streams
13.23
1 The tidal streams between Khalft (15°51′N, 52°10′E)
and Jarb (32 miles NNE) are very weak but are
accompanied by strong ripples in places.
Anchorage
13.24
1 Anchorage may be obtained during periods of offshore
winds in any part of Ghubbat al Qamar where the depths are
convenient, but there is no shelter within the bay.
Anchorage may also be obtained, as shown on the chart,
off the village of Khalft; during the SW Monsoon.
13.25
1 Between February and April small vessels may obtain
anchorage on a sandy bottom, about 1 mile offshore, off Al
Ghay
vicinity.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 13

Small quantities of fresh provisions may be obtained from (concrete pillar, 2 m high) is exhibited from the head of the
Al Ghay
ah. SE breakwater.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Function
13.32
1 The port is mainly used for the import of basic
Ghubbat al Fiz yi commodities into the E parts of Yemen.
Description Approximately 25 000 tonnes of dry cargo are handled
13.26 annually.
1 Ghubbat al Fiz
yi is slight indentation in the coast Topography
which is entered between Ra’s Sajir (16°45′N, 53°35′E) 13.33
(13.19) and Ra’s Hamar (24 miles ENE) (13.20). 1 See 13.11.
The shores of the bay are rocky; a rocky islet, near which
there are a number of dangerous rocks, lies close offshore Port Authority
about 8 miles NE of Ra’s Sajir. 13.34
1 The harbour is administered by Yemen Ports Authority,
Firing practice area PO Box 1316, Steamer Point, Aden, Yemen.
13.27
1 Firing practice areas lie seaward of Ghubbat al Fiz
yi; Limiting conditions
see 13.3.
Controlling depth
These areas are operated using a clear range procedure;
13.35
firing and exercises only take place when the ranges are
1 The 5 m depth contour extends E across the harbour from
clear of all shipping.
the head of the W breakwater to the inner part of the E
Notice of firing practices are promulgated by Oman
breakwater.
Notices to Mariners in most cases, and, if necessary, by radio
navigational warnings. Deepest berth
13.36
Bandar Qinqar 1 The commercial berths, situated at the outer end of the E
breakwater, can handle vessels up to a maximum draught of
Description 5⋅5 m.
13.28
1 Bandar Qinqar (17°00′N, 55°00′E) is entered Tidal levels
approximately midway along the stretch of coast which lies 13.37
between Ra’s Marb
 (16°59′N, 54°41′E) (13.20) and Ra’s 1 See information in Admiralty Tide Tables, Volume 3.
Nu (37 miles ENE) (13.20); the entrance to the inlet is Mean spring range about 1⋅3 m; mean neap range about
about 2 miles wide and it extends about 1 miles N. 0⋅4 m.
A dangerous rock lies on the E side of the inlet. Maximum size of vessels handled
The coastal village of ad is situated about 4 miles NE 13.38
of the inlet. 1 The port can accommodate vessels of up to 3000 dwt,
Anchorage with an overall length of 90 m and a draught of 5⋅5 m.
13.29 Local weather
1 Small vessels may obtain anchorage, sheltered from the 13.39
NE and E but open to the S and SW, within the inlet, in 1 Strong SW Monsoon winds are experienced between the
depths from about 15 to 29 m, rock and sand. middle of May and the middle of September; during this
Local knowledge is required for the use of this period waves may break over the E breakwater.
anchorage. Between October and April the prevailing winds are from
the NE.
Between July and September Nishtn is exposed to heavy
NISHT N
sandstorms.
2 Caution. During the SW Monsoon the swell penetrates
General information
the harbour and vessels are advised to put out extra
Chart 3784 plan of Nishtøn moorings and to maintain a continuous deck watch.
Position See also 13.4 and 13.15.
13.30
1 The Port of Nishtn (15°49′N, 52°12′E) is situated in the Arrival information
NW corner of the Arabian Sea, on the S coast of the Port operations
Republic of Yemen, about 455 miles ENE of the Port of 13.40
Aden (12.26). 1 Cargo may be worked throughout the year within the
harbour, but it may be affected by strong winds during the
Description SW Monsoon.
13.31
1 Nishtn is a small commercial and fishing port, protected Port radio
by two breakwaters, situated on the NE side of a small 13.41
sandy bay about 11 miles N of Ra’s Fartak (15°38′N, 1 The Port of Nishtn Radio, which controls the operations
52°14′E) (12.152). of the port, may be contacted between the hours of 0700
Nishtn Port Light (15°49′N, 52°12′E) (13.18) is and 1400. For further information, see Admiralty List of
exhibited from a position close E of the port; a further light Radio Signals, Volume 6 (3).

356
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 13

Notice of ETA Port services

13.42
1 Vessels should give 24 hours notice of their ETA.
Supplies
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio 13.52
Signals, Volume 6 (3). 1 Fresh water is available in limited quantities; fuel oil is
not available.
Outer anchorage
Communications
13.43
13.53
1 Vessels waiting for a berth may anchor between 4 cables
1 See 12.204.
and 5 cables SE of Nishtn Port Light (15°49′N, 52°12′E)
(13.18) and clear of the harbour entrance.
See also 13.24. MARB
Pilotage General information
13.44
1 Pilotage for Nishtn is compulsory for all vessels over Chart 3785 plan of MarbºòBay
200 grt; pilots are available during the hours of daylight Position
only. 13.54
Pilots may be contacted on Channel 16 and a suitable 1 The town and the fishing port of Marb
 (16°59′N,
embarkation position established. 54°41′E) are situated on the E side of Marb
 Bay a small
bay fringed by a reef and a short distance NNE of Ra’s
Tugs Marb
 (13.20).
13.45
1 No tugs are available. Description
13.55
General layout 1 The town of Marb
 consists of a number of stone houses
13.46 and smaller buildings.
1 Nishtn Harbour is protected by two breakwaters with the A fort, with a flagstaff standing in front of it, is situated
main commercial quay situated on the NW side of the outer near the coast at the N end of the town; a white domed
end of the main breakwater. mosque stands close S. A second fort, the residence of the
The inner end of the main breakwater quay is used by local governor, stands about 220 m SE of the white domed
fishing vessels and local craft. mosque.
A slip is situated in the N corner of the harbour.
Topography
Tidal stream 13.56
13.47 1 Jabal Sam
n Range extends about 35 miles ENE from a
1 See 13.23. position N of Marb
 to Jabal Nu (17°13′N, 55°13′E)
(13.17). This range is often completely enveloped in cloud
Principal mark for weeks such that the sun may not be visible for days,
13.48 which may account for the extremely fertile nature of these
1 Major light: mountains and the remarkable growth of trees and tall green
Nishtn Port Light (15°49′N, 52°12′E) (13.18). grasses.
General layout
Directions for entering harbour 13.57
1 The fishing harbour at Marb
 is protected by a
Approach
breakwater extending about 2 cables NNW from a position
13.49
on the coast close SW of the town; a light (post, 2 m high)
1 Nishtn is approached from a position in the Arabian Sea,
is exhibited from the head of the breakwater.
ESE of Ra’s Fartak (15°38′N, 52°14′E) (12.152), thence
The harbour provides moorings and a wharf, 50 m long,
passing through the SW part of Ghubbat Al Qamar (13.21).
for the use of fishing craft.
Entry Caution
13.50 13.58
1 The port is entered passing S of, and then W of, the outer 1 Care should be taken when rounding Ra’s Marb
 (13.20)
end of the main breakwater. to avoid the effects of a reported NNW-going current with a
rate of 1 kn.
Basins and berths
Principal marks
Nisht n Harbour 13.59
13.51 1 Landmarks:
1 Description. Nishtn Harbour is a small port situated on Jabal Ali (17°00′⋅1N, 54°41′⋅3E) is a conspicuous hill
the NE side of a bight about 3 miles N of Ra’s Fin
s situated just over 1 km N of the town of Marb
. A
(15°47′N, 52°13′E). conspicuous radio mast (red obstruction lights)
The port can accommodate vessels of up to 3000 dwt stands about 100 m SSW of the summit of the hill.
(13.38); a request to the port authorities may allow larger 2 Jabal Daw‘an (17°04′⋅3N, 54°40′⋅1E) stands about
vessels to be accepted. 5 miles N of Ra’s Marb
; this prominent peak at
Caution. In 1987 less water than charted was reported off the W end of the Jabal Sam
n Range (13.56) is
the outer end of the NW face of the main breakwater. the best landmark for identifying Marb
.

357
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 13
Salalah − Ra’s Hamar from ENE (13.20)
(Original dated 2004)
(Photograph − Crown Copyright)
A radio mast (red obstruction lights) (16°59′⋅1N,
54°41′⋅7E) stands about 1 km NE of Ra’s Marb

(13.20). A ruined tomb and a fort lie ESE of Ra’s
Marb
.
Anchorages
13.60
1 Marb
 Bay affords good sheltered anchorage except from
winds between S and W. The best anchorage, as shown on
PORT SALALAH
General information
Charts 2895, 2896
Position
13.61
1 Port Salalah (Mn
Rayst) (Port Rayst) (16°56′N,
54°00′E) is situated in the NW part of the Arabian Sea on
the S coast of the Sultanate of Oman, about 39 miles W of
Ra’s Marb
 (13.20).
Function
13.62
1 Port Salalah is the deep-water port for the town of Salalah
which lies about 6 miles NE. The main imports include
building materials, cattle feed, grain, steel pipes, sodium
chloride, bulk fuel and general cargoes. The main exports
include bulk cement, bagged cement and mud products.
The port also provides berths for smaller vessels and
fishing craft.
Topography
13.63
1 Between Mn
Rayst (16°56′N, 54°01′E) and Salalah
(6 miles NE) the coast is a succession of green fields,
coconut groves and buildings; mountains rise in the interior.
Considerable construction work has taken place along this
stretch of coast.
2 Dhuf
r Plain lies N of Port Salalah and Salalah and is
bounded on the W by the high land which lies within Ra’s
358
the chart, lies off the town with Ra’s Marb
 (13.20) bearing
about 188°, distant 7 cables, in depths from about 13 to
15 m.
2 A sugarloaf peak (not charted), which stands about
8 miles E of Jabal Daw‘an (13.59), bearing 057°, leads
towards the anchorage in Marb
 Bay. This peak makes a
good landmark but it does not stand as high as the rest of
the Jabal Sam
n Range (13.56).
Hamar (16°54′N, 53°57′E) (13.20), and on the E by the
high land which lies within the village of
qah (28 miles
ENE), and on the N by the curve of the coastal range of
mountains. The plain is the largest of the lowland tracts
which lie between the coast and the mountains along this
coast; it is one of the most fertile districts on the S coast of
Arabia.
13.64
1 Salalah (17°01′N, 54°06′E) is the principal trading centre
and the seat of Government for Dhuf
r Province; the town
consists of stone buildings surrounded by palm groves
which, from seaward, give the coast in this vicinity a fresh
green appearance.
13.65
1 Ad Dahariz (17°01′N, 54°10′E) is a village situated on
the coast and is surrounded by several watch towers; on its
W side there are some cotton fields and a grove of coconut
trees.
East Khawr, a salt water lagoon, is situated close E of Ad
Dahariz.
2 From Ad Dahariz as far as
qah (14 miles E) there is no
cultivation on the coast, the ground is swampy and covered
with mangroves.
Khawr Sawl, a fresh water lake, lies W of
qah; Khawr
Rawr, a similar but brackish lake which has a perceptible
tidal rise and fall, lies 2 miles E of the town. The lake is
separated from the sea by a narrow ridge of sand.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 13

Port limits Local weather

13.66 13.78
1 The limits of the Port of Salalah extend due S from a 1 Weather. During the SW Monsoon, which blows from
point on the shore where the meridian 54°04′E crosses the about mid-June to about mid-October, the atmosphere of
coast to the parallel of 16°55′N; the limits then extend due Dhuf
r Plain (13.63) is most oppressive. In the lower valleys
W to a further point on the shore where the parallel of the air is stifling by day and very damp at night; near the
16°55′N crosses the coast. The delineation of the port limits sea the air is moist and steamy; this period is characterised
then follows the coast back to its original point of by low cloud, poor visibility, steady rainfall and a spate of
commencement. green vegetation.
2 It has been reported that dense fog prevails in the outer
Traffic port area during the SW Monsoon.
13.67 Climatic table. See 1.275 and 1.289.
1 In 2003 the port was used by 201 vessels.
Arrival information
Port Authority
13.68 Port operations
1 Directorate General of Ports and Maritime Affairs, PO 13.79
Box 369, Salalah, Sultanate of Oman. 1 There are facilities in the port for the handling of
container, Ro-Ro, general cargo, bulk and oil cargoes.
Prohibited area
13.69 Port radio
1 An area into which entry is prohibited lies to seaward of 13.80
the Royal Palace at Al Hisn; the area is bounded by the 1 The Port of Salalah Radio controls the operations of the
meridians of 54°04′E and 54°08′E and the parallel of port.
16°58′N and the foreshore. When in port all vessels should maintain watch on
channel 12 VHF.
Current For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
13.70 Signals, Volume 6 (3).
1 It was reported that during the onset of the NE Monsoon
a SW set of 3 kn was experienced about 5 miles from the Notice of ETA
port; at a similar time, there was negligible set close off the 13.81
port. 1 Vessels should give notice of their ETA 48 hours,
36 hours and 24 hours in advance of their arrival through
Exercise areas their agent, or by telex/fax.
13.71 ETA should be confirmed by VHF on either channel 16
1 See 13.3. or channel 12 between 3 hours and 4 hours before arrival.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Explosives dumping ground Signals, Volume 6 (3).
13.72
1 An explosives dumping ground, (disused 1996) as shown Anchorage
on the chart, lies about 20 miles SSE of the port. 13.82
1 Three anchorage areas designated A, B and C, as shown
on the chart, have been established SW of the port area in
Limiting conditions the approximate positions (with positions given from Ra’s
Chart 2896 Rayst (16°56′N, 54°01′E)):
Controlling depths Anchorage A (2 miles E) for vessels awaiting a berth.
13.73 Anchorage B (2 miles ESE) for vessels requiring
1 The main harbour area is dredged to a depth of 16⋅0 m; offshore services.
the entrance channel is dredged to 16⋅5 m (1998). Anchorage C (2
miles SE) for vessels requiring
bunkers, or ship to shore services.
Deepest and longest berth 2 Depths within these anchorage areas vary from about 23
13.74 to 42 m; the anchorage is reported to have good holding
1 The main container quay is about 1240 m in length, with except during the SW Monsoon.
alongside depths of 16⋅0 m. 13.83
1 Generally good anchorage may be obtained, about
Tidal levels 8 cables off the coast, between Mn
Rayst (16°56′N,
13.75 54°01′E) and Ra’s Marb
 (39 miles E) in depths from 10 to
1 See information in Admiralty Tide Tables, Volume 3. 13 m.
Mean spring range about 1⋅1 m; mean neap range about There is usually surf breaking along this beach even in
0⋅3 m. calm weather.

Density of water Pilotage

13.76 13.84
1 Density 1⋅025 gms/cm3. 1 Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 150 nrt; pilots are
available throughout 24 hours.
Maximum size of vessel handled Pilots embark either about 3 miles E of the breakwater
13.77 head or as directed by Port Salalah Control Radio.
1 The port has handled vessels up to 45 000 dwt and 192 m The pilot vessel has a green hull with white
in length. superstructure.

359
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 13

Tugs Principal marks

13.85 13.90
1 Tugs are available. 1 Landmarks:
A radio mast (152 m high; red obstruction lights)
(17°17′N, 54°05′E) stands at an elevation of
Regulations of the port
1039 m about 21 miles NNE of the port.
13.86
2 A radio mast (red obstruction lights) (16°59′⋅6N,
1 Every merchant vessel, between sunrise and sunset, when
54°01′⋅8E) stands near the coast W of Khawr
berthed in the Port of Salalah shall fly its national flag and
Awqad; a radio tower (red obstruction lights) stands
the national flag of the Sultanate of Oman.
just over 1 km NNE. A further radio tower (red
obstruction lights) (16°56′⋅3N, 53°58′⋅9E) stands W
Quarantine of the main port area.
13.87 3 Three radio masts (25 m high) (16°59′⋅8N, 54°04′⋅8E)
1 Upon arrival vessels must fly the International Code Flag stand near the foreshore in front of Salalah, W of a
Q until completion of all quarantine procedures. group of conspicuous white buildings.

Directions for entering harbour

Harbour
General layout
13.88
1 The Port of Salalah is a deep-water port situated on the
W side of a shallow indentation in the S coast of Oman,
WSW of the town of Salalah.
A breakwater projects about 5 cables NNE from the SE
corner of the harbour and forms the protection for the E side
of the main harbour basin; an oil pier is situated on the inner
side of this breakwater. A light (13.93) is exhibited from the
head of the breakwater.
2 A container terminal is situated on the NW side of the
main basin; further berthing facilities, including a Ro-Ro
berth, are situated in the SW part of the harbour, W of the
root of the breakwater.
Development
13.89
1 It has been reported (2004) that two new berths will
shortly be constructed and the breakwater will be extended.
Chart 2895
Approach
13.91
1 From a position about 10 miles SE of Ra’s Hamar
(16°54′N, 53°57′E) (13.20) the approach to the pilot
boarding position for Port Salalah leads about 10 miles N to
a position 3 miles E of the head of the breakwater.
Chart 2896
Entry
13.92
1 From the pilot boarding position the entry to Port Salalah
leads 3 miles W, passing:
Clear of the light-buoy (safe water) (16°57′⋅0N,
54°02′⋅7E).
2 Thence the line of bearing (267°) of the centre of the
overlap of the white sectors of the N Channel Lead Light
(16°56′⋅9N, 54°00′⋅6E), exhibited from the E end of the
Container Terminal, and the S Channel Lead Light (close
SSE) leads through the entrance channel, marked by
light-buoys (lateral), to the harbour entrance. Both lights are
reported to be difficult to identify.
Container Terminal

Breakwater Entrance
Port Salalah from E (13.88)
(Original dated 2003)
(Photograph − Crown Copyright)

360
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 13

3 Caution. It is reported that a current sets across the berths, numbered 21 to 28, with alongside depths from 9⋅5
harbour entrance from S to N which should be carefully to 4⋅6 m.
monitored during the monsoon period.

Useful mark Oil Pier

13.93 13.97
1 Port Salalah E Breakwater Head Light (red metal mast) 1 An oil pier, 130 m in length with dolphins, is situated on
(16°56′⋅8N, 54°00′⋅9E) is exhibited from the outer the W side of the inner end of the main breakwater; the
end of the main breakwater. berth has alongside depths of 12 m and can handle tankers
up to 35 000 dwt.
Berths
Chart 2896 plan of Port Salalah Port services
Container terminal
13.94
1 A container terminal consisting of 4 berths, numbered 1
Facilities
to 4 and with a combined length of nearly 1 km, is 13.98
situated on the NNW side of the main harbour basin. 1 Hospital (at Salalah); divers available; quay side cranes;
A light (yellow beacon) (16°56′⋅6N, 54°00′⋅0E) stands on mobile cranes; 350 dwt pontoon barge; minor repair facilities.
W end of the container terminal quay.
Supplies
Ro-Ro berth 13.99
13.95 1 Fuel oil is available (with prior notice); diesel oil in
1 A Ro-Ro facility, with alongside depths from 2⋅9 to 3⋅1 m limited quantities; fresh provisions (limited supplies); fresh
is situated at No 29 Berth in a small basin in the SW part of water.
the harbour.

Alongside berths Communications

13.96 13.100
1 A large spur quay extends WNW into the harbour from 1 The nearest airport is Salalah Airport 25 km distant with
the root of the main breakwater. This spur provides eight services to Muscat and Dubai.

RA’S NU TO RA’S AL MADRAKAH

GENERAL INFORMATION
Chart 3785
Route
13.101
1 The route described in this section extends from a
position about 20 miles SSE of Ra’s Nu (17°15′N,
55°16′E) (13.20), initially for about 63 miles ENE to a
position about 10 miles SSE of Al Qiblyah (17°30′N,
56°20′E) (13.137). It then continues NE for a farther
129 miles to a position about 15 miles SE of Ra’s al
Madrakah (19°00′N, 57°50′E) (13.104).
Topography
13.102
1 Between Ra’s Sharbith
t (17°55′N, 56°21′E) and Ra’s
awqirah (18 miles NE) the coast consists of precipitous
limestone cliffs, over 180 m high, with a level table-land at
their summit; when the sun shines on the cliffs they appear
like clay.
DIRECTIONS
(continued from 13.20)
Chart 3785
13.103
1 From a position about 20 miles SSE of Ra’s Nu
(17°15′N, 55°16′E) (13.20) the track leads ENE and NE for
about 192 miles, passing:
SSE of Ra’s 
sik (17°24′N, 55°18′E) a small rocky
projection. Thence:
SSE of Al 
sikyah (17°28′N, 55°36′E) (13.126) the
W-most island of the Kuria Muria Group of Islands
(13.122), thence:
2 SSE of As Sawd
‘ (17°30′N, 55°51′E) (13.127) the
second largest island of the Kuria Muria Group of
Islands, thence:
SSE of Al all
nyah (17°30′N, 56°00′E) (13.130) the
largest island of the Kuria Muria Group of Islands.
Thence:
13.104
1 SSE of Well Rock (17°29′N, 56°19′E) which lies
about 5 cables SSW of the SW extremity of Al
Qiblyah (13.137). The rock, which is a small
above-water rock, is so named from it having a
natural well filled with salt water, thence:
SSE of Al Qiblyah (17°30′N, 56°20′E) (13.137) the
E-most island of the Kuria Muria Group of Islands
(13.122), thence:
2 SE of Ra’s Sharbith
t (17°55′N, 56°21′E) a precipitous
bluff with an even table-topped surface and a deep
notch in its face. Thence:
SE of Ra’s awqirah (18°08′N, 56°33′E) a prominent
bluff, which, from the NE, has the appearance of a
perfect bluff; a stranded wreck lies close N of the
point, thence:
3 SE of Ra’s Khushayyim (18°58′N, 57°48′E) a bluff
point which rises to an elevation of 101 m and
forms the S end of a range of flat-topped hills
which extend about 11 miles W of Ra’s al
Madrakah. A prominent, nipple-shaped feature,
formed of eroded sandstone, stands on the summit
of a coastal hill near Ra’s Khushayyim at an

361
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 13
elevation of 91 m. It is especially conspicuous when
the sun shines on it, thence:
4 SE of Ra’s al Madrakah (19°00′N, 57°50′E) a dark
steep-to cape, with a rocky islet close NE of it,
which is situated about 3 miles NE of Ra’s
Khushayyim; a stranded wreck lies close NNW of
the point. The land in the vicinity of this cape
consists of black volcanic peaks with flat-topped
hills, about 137 m high, in the background; from
seaward Ra’s al Madrakah appears like an island.
Lookout Hill, which stands about 400 m W of the
extremity of the cape, is a remarkable circular
hummock, 140 m high, which forms the summit of
the cape. From a distance the land nearby appears
to consist of small detached hummocks, but, from
closer, these hummocks are seen to be connected
with Lookout Hill.
(Directions continue at 13.144)
Anchorage
Chart 3785 plan of Madrakah Anchorage
13.105
1 During the SW Monsoon, good anchorage may be
obtained N of Ra’s al Madrakah (19°00′N, 57°50′E), as
shown on the plan, with the N extremity of the rocky islet
distant about 4 cables.
The stranded wreck of a tug lies on the coastal bank
about 1 miles NW of the rocky islet.
Local knowledge. Small vessels, with the aid of local
knowledge, may anchor closer in but a long swell may be
experienced in this area.
INLETS AND BAYS
Khal j Al  al niy t (Kuria Muria Bay)
Chart 3785
Description
13.106
1 Khalj Al al
niy
t (Kuria Muria Bay) (17°45′N,
55°50′E) is entered between Ra’s Nu (17°15′N, 55°16′E)
(13.20) and Ra’s Sharbith
t (75 miles NE) (13.104).
The Juzur Al al
niy
t group of islands, which lie in the
approach to the bay, are described at 13.122.
Topography
13.107
1 The shores of the bay are a succession of limestones cliffs
and sandy beaches; there are no villages of any importance
within the bay.
The coast of the bay between Ra’s Nu (17°15′N,
55°16′E) and Ra’s 
sik (10 miles N) is steep-to; a wooded
valley lies in the vicinity of Ra’s Hallan (not charted by
name), a point which lies about 4 miles NNE of Ra’s as
Sam
n (13.113).
2 The coast in the vicinity of Ra’s 
sik (17°24′N,
55°18′E) presents a striking scene comprised of unbroken
limestone mountains, with the sharp peaks of granite ranges.
This part of the coast has a barren appearance from seaward,
no vegetation being visible, but, when on shore, the valleys
are seen to be well-wooded and watered.
3 Bandar 
sik is a small bay on the N side of Ra’s 
sik
(13.103). In a valley near the head of the bay is a marsh
which was formerly an inlet but is now separated from the
sea by a ridge of sand. A few stunted trees are scattered
about this marsh, while the valley situated higher up is
densely wooded. 
sik is a village situated in this valley.
362
4 Steep cliffs terminate about 7 miles N of Ra’s Muntajib
(17°41′N, 55°23′E), a bluff headland which forms the N
entrance point to Ghubbat ad Dawm (13.115). The high land
then recedes to between 2 miles to 3 miles inland from the
coast from where a beach extends 13 miles E; an abandoned
fishing village lies near-by. A distinctive white sandhill is
piled up against the cliff at the W end of the beach where
there is a rock reef which affords the only shelter for the
launching of boats in a heavy swell.
5 The land behind the abandoned village is a low plateau,
30 m high, dipping towards the E and reaching the coastal
plain level at a position 4 miles E at which point (17°51′N,
55°29′E) there lies a conspicuous stranded wreck. Behind the
plateau are low foothills fronting the distinctive, high,
limestone cliffs of Jabal Zaulaul. The plain to the E is
mostly gravel dotted with bushes.
13.108
1 The village of Shuw
myah (17°53′N, 55°36′E) is the
only centre of population in this area; a distinctive minaret
stands at the W end of the village. The plain E of the village
is mainly sand with isolated caps of sandstone.
Dark Point of Shuw
myah (17°53′N, 55°43′E) (not
charted) presumably named because of its dark appearance,
is a high, bluff headland which should not be confused with
Ra’s ash Shuw
myah which lies about 9 miles farther E; a
white stone building is situated about 4 miles WNW of the
point.
2 Between Dark Point of Shuw
myah and Ra’s Minji
(22 miles E) the coast is steep-to and is formed of steep
cliffs backed by a tableland between about 180 and 220 m
high. There are tidal overfalls between Ra’s ash Shuw
myah
(17°53′N, 55°53′E) and Ra’s Minji (12 miles E) a slightly
projecting bluff which rises to an elevation of about 210 m.
3 The coast E of Ra’s Minji (17°55′N, 56°06′E) is fronted
by a bank, with a least depth over it of 3⋅7 m, which extends
about 13 miles E and up to 1 miles offshore.
From a position about 2 miles E of Ra’s Minji the cliffs
gradually decrease in height, and, after 2 miles they terminate
about 1 mile inland. The next 7 miles of coast, nearly as far
as Ra’s Qarw
w, is low and sandy and forms Bandar
Sharbith
t (not charted by name).
4 Ra’s Qarw
w (17°56′N, 56°16′E) is a bluff table-topped
headland over 240 m high with precipitous sides. It is
composed of a type of sandstone over a horizontal stratum
of chalk. A tongue of sand runs down the cliffs close W of
Ra’s Qarw
w which are here fronted by a strip of low land
with off-lying rocks. A small, bright red, salt water lake is
situated at the W end of this strip of low land.
Weather
13.109
1 The winds and weather in Khalj Al al
niy
t (17°45′N,
55°50′E) appear to be more boisterous and variable than
elsewhere on this coast. The N wind, known as the Belat, is
strong and changes of wind may be sudden, giving little or
no warning.
2 In the vicinity of Khalj Al al
niy
t the SW Monsoon is
said by the local inhabitants to set in with heavy squalls, rain
and thunderstorms. During this period the local inhabitants
do not go to sea; larger craft do go to sea early in June, after
the first burst of the monsoon, and again towards the end of
August when the monsoon is considered to be finished.
Anchorage
13.110
1 Anchorage has been obtained with Dark Point of
Shuw
myah (17°53′N, 55°43′E) (13.108) bearing 082°,
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 13
distant 3 miles, and about 5 cables offshore, in a depth of
20 m, but inshore of this position depths decrease rapidly.
13.111
1 Small vessels may obtain shelter during periods of N
winds close S of Ra’s 
sik (17°24′N, 55°18′E) (13.103).
Small vessels may also obtain anchorage, sheltered from S
winds, in Bandar 
sik (13.107) in a position close offshore
in depths from 9 to 22 m.
Local knowledge is required for the use of both of these
anchorages.
13.112
1 Good anchorage for small vessels may also be obtained in
Bandar Sharbith
t (13.108) in depths from 9 to 18 m, sand.
Local craft often anchor here to shelter from N winds.
Anchorage has been obtained about 6 miles E of Ra’s
Minji (17°55′N, 56°06′E) and 1 mile offshore in a depth of
about 13 m, sand and weed.
Local knowledge is required for the use of the
anchorages within Bandar Sharbith
t.
Bandar Nu
about 3 miles N of Ra’s awqirah (18°08′N, 56°33′E)
Description
13.113
1 Bandar Nu is a small bay entered between Ra’s Nu
(17°15′N, 55°16′E) (13.20) and Ra’s as Sam
n (3 miles
N) (not charted by name); a village is situated on its shore.
Ra’s as Sam
n is a low and rocky point, fringed by a
reef; the ruins of a tomb lie in a valley 2 miles N of the
point and about 1 mile inland.
Anchorage
13.114
1 Small vessels may obtain anchorage, sheltered from S and
W winds, within Bandar Nu about 2 cables offshore in
depths of 16⋅5 m.
Local knowledge is required for use of the anchorage
within the bay.
Ghubbat ad Dawm
Description
13.115
1 Ghubbat ad Dawm (17°32′N, 55°17′E) is a bay situated
on the W side of Khalj Al al
niy
t (13.106) which is
entered between Ra’s 
sik (17°24′N, 55°18′E) (13.103) and
Ra’s Muntajib (18 miles NNE) (13.107).
The shores of the bay are backed by a high precipitous
table-land intersected by three remarkable valleys.
2 Khr ar Raikht (not charted by name) is a sandy cove
situated about 2 miles NNW of Ra’s 
sik; this cove fronts
a w
di, which has a brackish lake at its entrance and is
reported to extend a considerable distance W. It appears to
be densely wooded. The breadth of the water course, and the
huge masses of rock that have been swept down it, denote
strong torrents after heavy rainfall.
3 There is a sandy spot on the coast of the bay just N of
Ra’s Attabarran (not charted by name) which is situated
about 12 miles N of Ra’s 
sik (17°24′N, 55°18′E).
Dawat awqirah
Description
13.116
1 Dawat awqirah (18°40′N, 57°00′E) is a large bay
entered between Ra’s awqirah (18°08′N, 56°33′E) (13.104)
and Ra’s Khushayyim (88 miles NE) (13.104).
363
The shores of the bay are low and sandy with a few
mangrove bushes; the village of Qayad, is situated about
12 miles N of Ra’s awqirah, otherwise this part of the coast
is sparsely populated.
2 A shoal bank, which borders the coast from about 6 miles
N of Ra’s awqirah as far as Ra’s Khushayyim, has depths
over it of less than 20 m with depths of 11 m close to its
outer edge which lies up to nearly 13 miles offshore; there
are usually strong ripples over this bank. Ruqq al J
zir is a
rocky part of the W side of the shoal bank, that nearly dries;
in 1987 less water than charted was reported to lie over the
bank.
Weather
13.117
1 During the NE Monsoon there is always a heavy swell in
Dawat awqirah with a surf on the coast.
Al Lakbi
13.118
1 Al Lakbi (18°11′N, 56°33′E) is a fishing harbour situated
(13.104); a breakwater protects the harbour from the S.
A light (red metal pole; 6 m high) is exhibited from the
head of the breakwater.
Anchorage
13.119
1 Anchorage has been obtained about 3 cables offshore
about 15 miles W of Ra’s Khushayyim (18°58′N, 57°48′E)
(13.104) in a depth of 7⋅6 m.
Bandar Jaz rah
Description
13.120
1 Bandar Jazrah (18°57′N, 57°46′E) is a small, sandy bay
on the W side of Ra’s Khushayyim (18°58′N, 57°48′E)
(13.104).
Anchorage
13.121
1 Small vessels may obtain anchorage on a sand and mud
bottom within the bay.
If the wind shifts SW and blows hard, it may be
necessary to move to an anchorage on the N side of Ra’s al
Madrakah (19°00′N, 57°50′E) (13.105).
Local knowledge is required for use of the anchorage
within the bay.
JUZUR AL  AL NIY T
(KURIA MURIA ISLANDS)
General information
Chart 3785
Description
13.122
1 The Juzur Al al
niy
t (Kuria Muria Islands) (17°30′N,
56°00′E) are part of the territory of the Sultanate of Oman
and consist of the main island of Al all
nyah (17°30′N,
56°00′E) (13.130) along with Al 
sikyah (17°28′N,
55°36′E) (13.126) and As Sawd
‘ (17°30′N, 55°51′E)
(13.127) which lie to the W; Gharzaut (17°37′N, 56°08′E)
(13.136) lies to the NE; and Al Qiblyah (17°30′N, 56°20′E)
(13.137) lies to the E.
2 The islands are mostly bold and rocky, rising in regular
conical peaks.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 13
In 1985 the islands were being generally developed with
construction being undertaken on fishing harbours, schools
and hospitals.
Current
13.123
1 The currents in the vicinity of Juzur Al al
niy
t vary
greatly, but frequently set NW.
Tidal stream
13.124
1 During the period of the in-going tidal stream its direction
is E-going S of the Juzur Al al
niy
t and W-going N of
the islands.
Exercise area
13.125
1 See 13.3.
Al  sik yah
Description
13.126
1 Al 
sikyah (17°28′N, 55°36′E) is the W-most island of
the Juzur Al al
niy
t group of islands (13.122) and rises in
conical peaks at its SW end to an elevation of about 155 m,
from where a rocky elevated plateau extends NE. Al

sikyah is mainly composed of granite with bands of
volcanic conglomerate.
2 A drying rocky shoal lies about 5 cables from the NW
side of the island; depths of 29 m lie between the shoal and
the island. A shoal, with a least depth over it of 18⋅3 m,
extends N from the N side of the island.
The only landing place on the island is in a bay, with two
hills on its E side, situated near the S end of the SE side of
the island; there are off-lying rocks in the bay, and a fine,
steep-to, gravel beach at its head.
3 No fresh water has been found on the island though water
courses, falling from the rocky elevated plateau through
rocky gullies and gorges to the shore, evidently run strongly
at times.
The island forms a breeding colony for the masked
booby, a sea bird; fish abound in the waters surrounding the
island.
As Sawd ‘
Description
13.127
1 As Sawd
‘ (17°30′N, 55°51′E) lies about 12 miles E of
Al 
sikyah (13.126) and rises to an elevation of 399 m
near its middle, which then slopes irregularly towards the
coasts.
The island is barren, with no trees except tamarisks, with
only a small quantity of grass and moss growing near its
summit.
2 Many small points project from the shores of the island,
with reefs extending from about 90 to 270 m off them,
forming coves.
A small bay on the S side of the island has a ledge of
rocks which extends 3 cables SW of its E entrance point;
there is a below-water rock a short distance from its W
entrance point. In the middle of the bay there are depths of
18 m, decreasing towards the shore.
Passage between As Sawd ‘ and Al  sik yah
13.128
1 If passing between As Sawd
‘ and Al 
sikyah
(17°28′N, 55°36′E) (13.126) keep close to As Sawd
‘ which
364
may be approached to within 5 cables to avoid the
below-water rocks which extend up to 3 miles W from the
W end of Al 
sikyah.
Depths in the centre of this passage are irregular.
Anchorage
13.129
1 Small vessels may obtain good anchorage in the small
bay on the S side of the island. This anchorage is sheltered
except from winds between S and WSW.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Al  all n yah
Description
13.130
1 Al all
nyah (17°30′N, 56°00′E) is the largest island of
the Juzur Al al
niy
t group of islands and has a generally
rugged appearance. The middle part of the island has granite
peaks the highest of which has an elevation of 503 m.
The island is extremely barren, the only trees being
tamarisks; there is a little grass on its E side.
2 Ra’s al all
nyah (17°33′N, 56°03′E) forms the N
extremity of the island and also its summit, being itself a
bold, projecting, limestone bluff; the coast in this vicinity is
rugged and nearly vertical for 1 mile on each side of this
point. A bank, with a least depth over it of 5⋅5 m extends up
to 1 mile NW from the coast on the SW side of Ra’s al
all
nyah.
3 Erekhi Frahunt (not charted by name) forms the W
extremity of the island; the point is comparatively low with
some small islets and many dangers lying up to 3 miles W
of the point.
Shoals and rocks lie off the S coast of the island; a reef
fringes the SE side of the island.
13.131
1 Communications. A airstrip is situated on the W
extremity of Al all
nyah, from where flights connect with
Salalah (13.64).
Anchorage
13.132
1 The best anchorage off Al all
nyah lies off its N side
about 3 miles WSW of Ra’s al all
nyah (17°33′N,
56°03′E) and 2 cables off a sandy cove, but this anchorage
is open to E winds, through N to W. A conical peak rises
from the W entrance to the cove; in 1967 there was a flag
staff on its summit. In 1965, this anchorage was approached
on a course of 150°, the bottom shelving uniformly in this
approach.
2 In 1967 anchorage was obtained with Ra’s al all
nyah
bearing 065°, and the conical peak on the W side of the
sandy cove bearing 196°. This anchorage berth was 2 cables
offshore on a bottom of sand with some coral patches; little
or no tidal stream was experienced.
13.133
1 The landing beach in the sandy cove is steep-to; there is
another landing place with gentle gradients in a small cove
entered about 7cables farther ENE.
Sea snakes, stingrays and barracuda were all observed
close inshore in this vicinity.
Ghubbat ar Rahib
13.134
1 Ghubbat ar Rahib (not charted by name) is a bay entered
N of Ra’s Sayyir (17°30′N, 56°05′E) the low E extremity of
Al all
nyah; some dangerous rocks are reported to lie NW
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 13
of Ra’s Sayyir on the S side of the bay; a dangerous wreck
also lies in this area.
13.135
1 Anchorage. Small vessels may obtain good anchorage
within Ghubbat ar Rahib which is sheltered from the SE,
through S, to the NW, in depths from 13 to 26 m.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
During the height of the SW Monsoon, heavy SW squalls
blow down from the gully between the hills and a
considerable sea sets into the bay, at which time the
anchorage off the N side of the island is preferable.
Gharzaut
Description
13.136
1 Gharzaut (17°37′N, 56°08′E), which lies about 6 miles
NE of Ra’s al all
nyah (17°33′N, 56°03′E), is a rocky
islet, with a double peak 70 m high; the base of this islet
consists of four red granite rocks grouped closely together.
A dangerous below-water rock lies 1 cables WNW of
Gharzaut; a further dangerous rock lies about 140 m NW of
the island. There are depths from about 14 to 30 m between
the islet and this outer rock.
Drying rocks are situated close off the SE part of the
islet.
Al Qibl yah
Description
13.137
1 Al Qiblyah (17°30′N, 56°20′E) which lies about 13 miles
E of Al all
nyah (17°30′N, 56°00′E) (13.130) is a barren
and rocky island except for a small sandy bay at its NW
point.
There are several limestone peaks on this island which
show up well from all directions, the highest of which
attains an elevation of 171 m.
2 Four Peaked Rock, which lies 1 mile NNW of Al
Qiblyah, is 30 m high, and is so named from its shape. The
channel between Al Qiblyah and Four Peaked Rock is
rocky with depths from 3⋅7 to 5⋅5 m lying within it; a rocky
ledge, on which stand four above-water rocks, extends
5 cables NW of Four Peaked Rock.
13.138
1 Well Rock (13.104) lies 5 cables SSW of the SW
extremity of Al Qiblyah.
Tilly Rock (not charted by name), which lies 1 miles E
of Al Qiblyah, has a least depth over it of 5⋅5 m; a drying
rock, over which the sea usually breaks, lies 2 miles
farther E.
Care must be taken to give these two rocks a wide berth
as they are steep-to and the depths in their vicinity are
irregular. Four Peaked Rock, bearing less than 280°, and
well open N of Al Qiblyah, clears them to the N.
Anchorage
13.139
1 Small vessels may obtain anchorage on the N side of Al
Qiblyah. A long scope of cable is required as the bottom is
loose decayed coral and is an indifferent holding ground.
Similar anchorage may be obtained off the S side off Al
Qiblyah in depths of 22 m with Well Rock (13.104) bearing
about 248° and the W extremity of the island bearing 293°.
Local knowledge is required for the use of both of these
anchorages.

RA’S AL MADRAKAH TO RA’S AL Y’
GENERAL INFORMATION
Chart 3785
Route
13.140
1 The route described in this section extends from a
position about 15 miles SE of Ra’s al Madrakah (19°00′N,
57°50′E) (13.104) 83 miles NE to a position about 20 miles
SE of Ra’s Ab Ra
 (20°10′N, 58°38′E) (13.145). It then
continues for a farther 34 miles NNE to a position about
10 miles ESE of Ra’s al Y
’ (20°31′N, 58°58′E) (13.145).
Topography
13.141
ila (19°04′N, 57°49′E) a small rocky
1 Between Ra’s al Madrakah (19°00′N, 57°50′E) and Ra’s
Markaz (10 miles NNW) the coast is sandy with hills
immediately backing it until about 3 miles SSE of Ra’s
Markaz where it then becomes precipitous.
See also 13.147.
Current
13.142
1 From April to September the current between Ra’s al
Madrakah (19°00′N, 57°50′E) and Ra’s al add (235 miles
NNE) usually sets parallel to the coast at a rate of about
2 kn.
The currents off Ra’s al add, which are strong and
variable, are generally influenced by the prevailing winds.
365
Caution
13.143
1 Vessels should not anchor on any of the shoals which lie
off Marah (13.180), because the sea is likely to break
heavily over them, even with a slight swell.
DIRECTIONS
(continued from 13.104)
Charts 3785, 3519
13.144
1 From a position about 15 miles SE of Ra’s al Madrakah
(19°00′N, 57°50′E) (13.104) the track leads NE then ENE,
for about 117 miles, passing:
2 SE of Ra’s a
projection, rising to 210 m, which is the beginning
of a uniform line of tableland extending about
37 miles N to Ghubbat Quwayr
t (13.156). A
stranded wreck lies close SE of the point; a further
stranded wreck lies about 2 miles NNW of the
point. A dish aerial stands close SW of the point.
Thence:
3 SE of Ra’s Markaz (19°09′N, 57°48′E) a projecting
bluff 146 m high, thence:
4 SE of Shi‘b Kudn or San Carlos Banks (19°27′N,
58°00′E) a line of shoal banks on which stand
many dangerous rocks. The banks lie in the S part
of Khalj Marah (13.146) with their S end about
20 miles N of Ra’s al Madrakah (19°00′N, 57°50′E)
from where they extend about 18 miles NE. A
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 13
considerable swell sets over these dangers such that,
in bad weather, the sea probably breaks over the
shallower parts, and:
5 SE of a shoal (19°17′N, 58°17′E) (reported 2001) with
a least depth over it of 24 m; a further shoal
(position approximate) (reported 1975), with a least
depth over it of 16⋅5 m lies about 4 miles W. In
2001 it was reported that less water than charted lies
Between Ra’s Markaz (19°09′N, 57°48′E) (13.144) and
Ra’s Khaisat al Liykh (3 miles NW) there is a small bay,
with a sandy beach, having lofty cliffs a short distance
within it; this part of the coast is fringed by a drying
sandbank. Ra’s Khaisat al Liykh is a bluff which is difficult
to identify until close to it.
2 From Ra’s Khaisat al Liykh (19°12′N, 57°45′E) the
coast is steep-to and extends in an unbroken line of vertical
over the whole of this area. A shoal with a least cliffs for 14 miles N to Ra’s al ‘ni, a bluff projection 85 m
depth over it of 18⋅7 m (2004) lies in 19°41′⋅7N, high. The line of cliffs then continues to Ra’s Matt
h,
58°09′⋅3E. Thence: another, but smaller, bluff projection, 70 m high, which lies
6 SE of Shi‘b Bu Sifa (19°55′N, 58°15′E) an extensive,
dangerous coral reef on which there are many
dangerous rocks, which lies in the N part of Khalj
Marah (13.146); shoal depths lie between the bank
and Ra’s Ab Ra
 (13.145). Thence:
13.145
1 Passing:
SE of a detached shoal (19°57′N, 58°25′E), with a
least depth over it of 18⋅4 m; a further detached
shoal, with least depth over it of 17⋅8 m lies about
5 miles NNE, thence:
2 SE of Ra’s Ab Ra
 (20°10′N, 58°38′E) a low,
barren point, fringed with low-lying dangerous
rocks; the point forms the S extremity of Marah
(13.180). A dangerous wreck lies 6 cables ENE of
the point; Jabal al ilm (South Cone) stands 2 miles
NNE of the point, thence:
SE of Ra’s Dharri (Ra’s arr) (20°13′N, 58°43′E), a
small rocky projection. Thence:
3 SE of Ra’s Kaydah (20°17′N, 58°47′E), another small
rocky projection; a remarkable conical hill, about
20 m high, rises close to the point; from the E, this
hill appears to have two peaks. A coral shoal, with
a least depth over it of 5⋅1 m, lies about 1 miles E
of the point; when the sea is smooth there is no
indication of the presence of shoal water, but, with
the slightest swell, the sea breaks heavily on it. See
tidal streams at 13.183 and caution at 13.143,
thence:
4 SE of Ra’s R

um (20°26′N, 58°50′E), thence:
SE of Ra’s al Y
’ (20°31′N, 58°58′E) a prominent
bluff which forms the E-most extremity of Marah
(13.180); the bluff rises to a ridge of hills which
extend W to the middle of the island. Drying and
dangerous off-lying rocks lie between Ra’s al Y
’
and Ra’s Za‘farn
t (1
miles SSW); a sandy beach
lies about 1 mile WSW of Ra’s Za‘farn
t. A
conspicuous white house is situated about 1500 m
WNW of Ra’s al Y
’.
(Directions continue at 13.229)
INLETS AND BAYS
Khal j Ma
rah numerous banks which lie within.
Chart 3785
Description
13.146
1 Khalj Marah (19°40′N, 58°00′E) is a large gulf entered
between Ra’s al Madrakah (19°00′N, 57°50′E) (13.104) and
Ra’s Ab Ra
 (84 miles NE) (13.145).
Topography
13.147
1 The shores of the gulf are desolate and are sparsely
populated.
366
about 3 miles NNW of Ra’s al ‘ni. The cliffs then
continue for a farther 9 miles N to the cape of Ra’s Duqm
(Ra’s Quwayr
t); from 5 miles N of Ras Matt
h, the cliffs
are fringed by a sandy beach. A low peninsula, with a small
mound on its N end, extends a short distance N of Ra’s
Duqm; the cape is easily identified by this feature.
3 Duqm (19°40′N, 57°42′E) is an important village situated
close W of Ra’s Duqm.
13.148
1 Between Nafun (19°48′N, 57°44′E) and Ra’s Saidarah
(5 miles NNE) the coast is alternately sandy and cliffy. Ra’s
Saidarah is low and inconspicuous; a village, with a date
grove, stands on the point. Immediately inland there are
several groups of conical hills.
2 The coast is sandy for about 2 miles N of Ra’s Saidarah
(19°53′N, 57°46′E) and is then cliffy as far as Ra’s Nakharir
(Ra’s Naqrair) (6 miles NNE); a steep bluff, 160 m high,
stands a short distance SW of Ra’s Nakharir.
3 Between Ra’s Nakharir (19°59′N, 57°49′E) and Ra’s
Sarab (Ra’s ir
b) (13 miles N), a low, sandy and
inconspicuous point with a village situated nearby, the coast
consists of a sandy beach with a range of hills between
215 m and 240 m high rising steeply inland from it.
Off-lying islet
13.149
1 Hamr an Nafur (amar an Nafr) (19°47′N, 57°48′E) is
a small islet which lies about 4 miles E of Nafun (13.148).
The islet has vertical limestone cliffs; its summit, which
attains an elevation of 90 m, is flat and split in all directions;
many seabirds roost here.
Some below-water rocks lie close offshore on its E and
W sides.
The channel between the islet and the coast has depths in
the fairway from 5⋅5 to 11 m and is free from dangers.
Cautions
13.150
1 A near approach to Khalj Marah should be avoided
when navigating along the SE coast of Oman.
At times, especially during the period of the in-going tide,
there is an in-draught in the vicinity of the many dangers
that lie within the gulf.
During strong winds there is always a heavy swell in the
gulf causing the sea to break heavily over many parts of the
13.151
1 A bank, with a least depth of 5⋅8 m over it, extends
WSW from Ra’s Ab Ra
 (20°10′N, 58°38′E) (13.145) to
Shi‘b Bu Sifa (21 miles WSW) (13.144). Mariners are
advised to navigate with extreme caution in waters of charted
depths of less than 50 m.
See the source data diagram on Chart 3785.
Flow
13.152
1 Current. Between April and September, the current
usually sets N along and parallel with, the coast from Ra’s al
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 13
Madrakah (19°00′N, 57°50′E) (13.104) to Ra’s al Junayz
(22°25′N, 59°50′E) (13.230) at rates of up to about 2 kn.
13.153
1 Tidal stream. The tidal streams in Khalj Marah set
between NNW and NW at a rate of about 1 kn during the
period of the in-going stream; and the opposite direction at a
similar rate during the period of the out-going stream.
Where the depths are over 200 m the tidal streams set
parallel with the coast but their effect is probably lost in the
prevailing current.
Exercise area
13.154
1 See 13.3.
Anchorage
13.155
1 A safe anchorage may be obtained in the small bay
(13.147) which is entered between Ra’s Markaz (19°09′N,
57°48′E) and Ra’s Khaisat al Liykh (3 miles NW) in depths
from 11 to 13 m, sand, with good shelter from S and SW
winds.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Ghubbat Quwayr t
Description
13.156
1 Ghubbat Quwayr
t (19°43′N, 57°41′E) is a bay entered
between Ra’s Duqm (19°39′N, 57°43′E) and Surayr (9 miles
N) (not charted by name) a low, rocky point situated ESE of
Nafun (13.148) close off which lie two above-water rocks.
Ghubbat Quwayr
t is free of dangers.
The coast here is a sandy plain, thinly covered with
mangroves.
Bandar Ar Ra’s
Description
13.157
1 Bandar Ar Ra’s is a small bay entered close N of Ra’s al
Aqit (Ra’s al Aqt) (20°03′N, 57°49′E), a low and sandy
point.
Ghubbat Sarab
Description
13.158
1 Ghubbat Sarab (Ghubbat ir
b) is entered between Ra’s
Hadud (Ra’s al Ghubbah) (20°08′N, 57°50′E) and Ra’s
Bintawt (15 miles NE) a low, broad and sandy point; a
dangerous rock lies 3 cables ENE of the point.
Ra’s al Hallat (Ra’s Halat) and Ra’s Sarab (13.148) are
two points in the SW part of the bay.
Al Ghalil is the name given to the stretch of coast which
lies in the NW part of the bay between Ra’s al Hallat and
Ra’s Bintawt.
Off-lying dangers
13.159
1 Shi‘b al Ghubab (20°11′N, 57°58′E) is a rocky shoal,
with a least depth over its N part of 4⋅2 m, which lies in the
approaches to Ghubbat Sarab; a rock awash, over which the
sea breaks, stands on the shoal near its mid part.
A detached, rocky shoal, with a least depth over it of
3⋅3 m, lies between Shi‘b al Ghub
b and the entrance to
Ghubbat Sarab.
367
Ghubbat Bintawt
Description
13.160
1 Ghubbat Bintawt is entered between Ra’s Bintawt
(20°21′N, 57°58′E) (13.158) and Ra’s Abana (8 miles NE);
the bay has sandy shores and is generally free from dangers
except for the dangerous rock lying close off Ra’s Bintawt
and the drying patch situated about 1 mile N of the point. Al
Khaluf is a settlement situated close N of Ra’s Abana.
A low range of hills extends WSW from Ra’s Abana.
Ghubbat Hashish
Description
13.161
1 Ghubbat Hashish (Ghubbat ashsh) is entered from the
head of Khalj Marah (13.146) between Ra’s Abana
(20°27′N, 58°04′E) and Ra’s Shajrit (Ra’s ash Shajar
t)
(8 miles ESE) a low, sandy point with an above-water rock
lying close off it.
2 The shores of the bay are low, sandy and desolate; a reef
fringes the E side of the bay. On the W side of the bay, a
little distance inland, stands a low range of hills; a pyramidal
hill, 37 m high, rises close to the coast about 1
miles N of
Ra’s Abana. Ra’s Dubr is a point on the W side of Ghubbat
Hashish; salt marshes lie on the N and E side of the bay.
3 The head of Ghubbat Hashish dries about 2 miles from
its head; a rocky spit then extends about 4 miles farther S
dividing the bay into two parts. Abb is a low and rocky islet
which lies at the S end of this spit; an above-water rock lies
close off the SW side of Abb, a drying rock lies close NNE
and a dangerous rock lies 3 cables NNW.
13.162
1 East shore. Ra’s Shajrit (20°26′N, 58°12′E) forms the
SW extremity of the peninsula of Barr al Hikman, the S
coast of which forms the N shore of Khalj Marah
(13.146); the peninsula is low, sandy, desolate and covered
with bushes. Ra’s al Mishayu (Ra’s al Mish
y), 14 miles
ESE, is a low, sandy point which forms the SE extremity of
this peninsula.
2 A bank, on which there are shoal areas with least depths
of 2⋅6 m, extends S from Barr al ikm
n; there are
occasional overfalls between this bank and Shi‘b Bu Sifa
(17 miles S) (13.144).
A dangerous rock lies about 1 miles N of Ra’s Shajrit.
13.163
1 Landing anywhere within Ghubbat Hashish is difficult
except at high water.
Tidal stream
13.164
1 During the period of the in-going tide the stream sets
NNW into Ghubbat ashsh at a rate of about
kn; during
the period of the out-going tide the set is in the opposite
direction at a similar rate.
Shi‘b Iziyat
13.165
1 Shi‘b Iziyat (20°27′N, 58°06′E) is a dangerous rock
situated on the W side of the entrance to the bay about
2 miles ESE of Ra’s Abana.
Maawt
13.166
1 Maawt (20°34′N, 58°10′E) is an islet, situated near the
head of Ghubbat ashsh; the islet is low, sandy and thickly
covered with shrubs and mangroves.
A village is situated on the islet; fresh provisions have
sometimes been procured at this village.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 13
KHAWR MARAH
General information
Charts 3785, 2854, 3519
Position
13.167
1 Khawr Marah (20°20′N, 58°35′E) lies between the W
coast of the island of Marah (13.180) and the mainland
coast between Ra’s al Mish
y (20°21′N, 58°27′E) and Ra’s
an Nuqdah (29 miles NNE).
Description
13.168
1 The channel is shallow and is encumbered with islets and
dangers, leaving only narrow passages between.
2 Bay

Dimnah is a reef, the greater part of which dries,
which borders the W coast of Khawr Marah from a
position 10 miles NE of Ra’s al Mish
y (20°21′N, 58°27′E)
to Ra’s an Nuqdah (20°45′N, 58°44′E) and extends up to
5 miles offshore. Jazrat Ma‘awil (20°43′N, 58°42′E) is a low
and wooded islet standing on Bay

Dimnah about 3 miles 2 WSW of a detached shoal bank (4 miles SW) with a
SW of Ra’s an Nuqdah and 5 cables offshore.
3 Beyond Bay

Dimnah lies an extensive sandbank which
extends ESE and over which there are depths of less than
5 m.
Topography
13.169
1 West side. For the first 14 miles, the coast NE of Ra’s al
Mish
y (20°21′N, 58°27′E) (13.162) is low and rocky with
some sandy patches; thence, as far as Ra’s an Nuqdah which
lies about 16 miles farther NNE, it is low and sandy with
scattered bushes.
East side. See 13.182.
Local knowledge
13.170
1 Khawr Marah is only suitable for use by small vessels
with local knowledge; parts of the channel are unsurveyed.
Tidal stream
13.171
1 In the S entrance to Khawr Marah the tidal stream sets
N with the in-going tide and S with the out-going; at
springs, both attain rates of up to 3 kn.
N of Ra’s Qudfah (20°41′N, 58°55′E) (13.186), near the
Approach Light-buoy (20°42′⋅9N, 58°54′⋅2E) (13.211), the
tidal streams set predominantly WNW with the in-going
stream and ESE with the out-going at rates that can exceed
2 kn at springs.
2 Off Ra’s ilf (20°41′⋅4N, 58°52′⋅3E) (13.188) at the N
end of Khawr Marah, the N-going stream reaches its
maximum rate 3 hours after local high water when it attains
rates of between 1 kn and 3 kn; the maximum S-going rate
is between 1 kn and 2 kn and occurs about 2 hours after
local low water.
Caution
13.172
1 In 1995 shoal water was reported in the S entrance to
Khawr Marah, both W and NW of Ra’s Ab Ra

(20°10′N, 58°38′E) (13.145).
See source data diagram on Chart 3519.
Landmark
13.173
1 Jabal Q
rin (20°22′⋅6N, 58°41′⋅2E) is a double peaked
hill which is not easily identified from the S.
Directions
Passage
13.174
1 The passage through Khawr Marah is made following
the recommended tracks, as shown on the chart, which lead
through the channel to the anchorages situated WNW of
Ra’s Shaghaf (20°31′⋅1N, 58°47′⋅1E) and WNW of the
settlement of Dawwah (20°33′N, 58°48′E) (13.189).
Route
13.175
1 From a position about 13 miles S of Ra’s Ab Ra

(20°10′N, 58°38′E) the track initially leads through the S
part of Khawr Marah, passing (with positions given from
Ra’s usayl
fah (20°12′⋅5N, 58°37′⋅8E)):
WSW of Shi‘b Ab Ra
 (3 miles S) on which
there is a drying rock and rocks awash and over
which the sea breaks; a shoal, with a least depth
over it of 4⋅9 m, lies about 1 miles SSW of Shi‘b
Ab Ra
. Thence:
least depth over it of 3⋅8 m and WSW of Shi‘b
Mara a dangerous shoal bank which lies about
1 mile ENE and on which there stands a dangerous
rock on its W part; even in otherwise calm
conditions there is a large swell, with breakers, over
Shi‘b Mara, thence:
3 WSW of a detached shoal bank (3
miles SW) with a
least depth over it of 4⋅4 m and ENE of another
detached shoal bank (4
miles SW) with a least
depth over it of 4⋅3 m, thence:
Between a shoal bank (3 miles WSW) with a least
depth over it of 4⋅0 m and another shoal bank, with
a least depth over it of 5⋅0 m, which lies about
8 cables W. Thence:
4 WNW of Shi‘b anfah (2
miles W) a dangerous
drying reef; uncharted coral heads exist within the
5 m contour on both sides of the channel in this
vicinity, thence:
13.176
1 Continuing along the recommended track, passing:
ESE of a detached shoal bank (3
miles WNW) with
a least depth over it of 4⋅0 m. Al Wuday
(20°20′⋅7N, 58°38′⋅0E) bearing 024° (ahead) leads
through this reach of the fairway. Thence:
2 WNW of Ra’s anaghah (1 mile NNW) the N entry
point to Rounders Bay (13.201). Ban
t Murshid
(13.201) lies near the SSW end of a dangerous
shoal bank which extends about 1 miles SSW of
the point, thence:
3 ESE of an area of many shoals (4
miles NW) with
depths of less than 5 m over them, thence:
WNW of Ra’s Gh
b (2
miles N); a drying reef and
rocks awash lie off the point; numerous other coral
heads lie close off the coast of Marah (13.180)
between Ra’s Gh
b and Ra’s anaghah. Thence:
13.177
1 Continuing along the recommended track, passing (with
positions given from Al Wuday (20°20′⋅7N, 58°38′⋅0E)):
E of a detached shoal (3
miles SSW) with a least
depth over it of 4⋅3 m, and W of Ra’s Munzilah
(3 miles S). Jazrat Kalb
n is a low islet standing
on the coastal reef, close N of Ra’s Munzilah.
Jazrat Umm al Kids bearing 008° (ahead) leads
through this reach of the fairway, thence:
2 E of Zanatiy
t (3 miles SW) a group of three detached
rocks which dry or are awash standing on a bank.
368
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 13

This bank, on which lie other numerous dangers, Population

extends both NNE and SSW of the rocks, thence: 13.181
E of a detached shoal (2 miles WSW) with a least 1 In 1990 the population of the island was reported to be
depth over it of 1⋅1 m. Thence: more than 5000, most of whom were employed at the
3 W and NNW of a shoal bank (1 mile WSW) which airfield situated at the N end of the island. Others were
lies in the middle of the fairway of the navigable employed in fishing industry and in the export of fish.
channel and over which there are shoal depths from
3⋅4 to 4⋅0 m; Jabal Q
rin (20°22′⋅6N, 58°41′⋅2E) Description
(13.173) bearing 064° (ahead) leads through the
13.182
next short reach of the fairway and W of Al
1 West coast. Between Ra’s Ab Ra
 (20°10′N, 58°38′E)
Wuday, thence:
(13.145) and Al Wuday, 11 miles N, the W coast of
4 SSE of Jazrat Umm al Kids (1 miles WNW) the
Marah is low and sandy, with several rocky points and
S-most islet of the Oyster Islets, a group of
small sandy bays; the shores of most of these bays are
numerous islets and rocks which extend NNW.
fringed with rocks, but, with care, landing can be effected at
From SW, Jazrat Umm al Kids has the appearance
most states of the tide.
of a patch of sand; a cairn stands in the centre of
2 From Al Wuday (20°20′⋅7N, 58°38′⋅0E) to Ra’s al
the islet and can be identified from a distance of
Kham (6 miles NE) the coast continues to be low and
about 9 miles. Thence:
sandy, with fringing reefs, rocky points and sandy bays
13.178
similar to those which lie farther S.
1 Continuing along the recommended track, passing:
Between Ra’s al Kham (20°25′⋅7N, 58°42′⋅2E) and Ra’s
E of Sells Rock (1
miles NW) a drying rock. Jazrat
Shaghaf (7 miles NE) the coast recedes into Umm ar Ra

fah (20°23′⋅5N, 58°38′⋅0E) bearing 008° (ahead)
Bight (13.196) which is encumbered by a drying bank.
leads through this next reach of the fairway, thence:
3 The coast from Ra’s Shaghaf (20°31′⋅1N, 58°47′⋅1E) and
2 E of Jazrat al 
r (2 miles NW) an islet which is part
Ra’s ilf (11 miles NNE) (13.188) is fringed by a coastal
of the Oyster Islets Group and is surrounded by a
reef; landing anywhere along this coast is difficult on
reef; numerous dangerous rocks and rocks awash lie
account of this reef.
between 4 cables and 8 cables ENE of the islet.
13.183
Jazrat Umm al Kids (20°21′⋅1N, 58°36′⋅8E) bearing
1 East coast. Shoals, with depths over them of about 5 m
219° (astern) leads through the next reach of the
and less, lie up to 2 miles offshore between Ra’s Ab Ra

fairway, thence:
(20°10′N, 58°38′E) (13.145) and Ra’s Kaydah (10 miles
3 SE of Jazrat fah (2
miles N) is another islet of the
NE) (13.145); uncharted coral heads exist within the 5 m
Oyster Islets Group which is again surrounded by a
depth contour, and, as such, this stretch of coast should be
reef; further dangerous rocks, rocks awash and
given a wide berth.
shoals lie between WSW and N of the islet. There
2 There are several rocky points, fringed with rocks,
are occasional overfalls between Jazrat fah and
situated along this stretch of coast; small, sandy bays lie
Jazrat al 
r. Thence:
between. Landing is difficult, except in a flat calm or at high
4 SE of a shoal bank (3
miles NNE) which lies in the
water, and, even then, care is required as there is usually a
fairway of the navigable channel and over which
slight swell.
there is a least depth of 2⋅1 m; this shoal bank does
3 Tidal streams often set strongly along this part of the
not show up until close to, thence:
coast.
13.179
A coral shoal (13.145) with a least depth over it of 5⋅1 m,
1 Continuing along the recommended track, passing (with
lies about 1 miles E of Ra’s Kaydah; vessels should not
positions given from Ra’s al Kham (20°25′⋅7N,
anchor on this or any other shoal around the island; see
58°42′⋅2E)):
caution at 13.143.
NW of Ra’s al Kham and the coral reef which
13.184
extends NE from the point, thence:
1 Between Ra’s Kaydah (20°17′N, 58°47′E) (13.145) and
SE of Sawar Walad Hermal (2 miles NW) a
Ra’s Za‘farn
t (16 miles NNE), a rocky point with hills
dangerous rock. Thence:
rising abruptly from close within it, the coast is formed by a
2 NW of Jazrat A‘ Shaghpah (3 miles NE) a low, sandy
low, rocky beach; landing here is difficult, particularly with
island, covered with scrub and low bushes, which
the wind against the tide. This stretch of coast should be
stands on the dangerous bank which encumbers
given a wide berth.
Umm ar Ra
 Bight (13.196), thence:
2 Qaryat aql (20°22′N, 58°47′E) is a village situated
NW of Ra’s Shaghaf (7 miles NE) and thence to the
within a date grove and an area of cultivation about
anchorage berth off Ra’s Shaghaf or the berth off
1 miles SW of Ra’s Ka‘bah; Qaryat M
ghilah is a similar
Dawwah (13.189).
village situated close NW of Ra’s ad D
m (20°23′⋅8N,
58°49′⋅2E).
3 Between Ra’s al Y
‘ (20°31′N, 58°58′E) and Ra’s al
MARAH Jazrah (3 miles NNW) a dangerous rocky bank extends
about 4 cables from the coast. Ra’s al Jazrah is a rocky
General information point on which there is a remarkable black patch.
13.185
Charts 2854, 3519 1 Jazrat Thukhayr (20°34′⋅8N, 58°56′⋅2E) is a sandy islet
Position which stands on a drying reef close N of Ra’s al Jazrah; the
13.180 reef is connected to the shore. Dangerous rocks fringe the
1 Marah (Marah Island) (20°30′N, 58°50′E) is a large reef to a distance of about 2 cables except on its SW side
island situated at the NE end of Khalj Marah (13.146) where ummat al Mukhatt
r, an inlet, indents the coastal
between about 8 miles and 12 miles off the mainland shore. reef; Jazrat Thukhayr is a useful navigational feature.

369
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 13
2 Between Ra’s al Jazrah (20°34′⋅4N, 58°56′⋅3E) and Ra’s
Qudfah (7 miles NNW) the coast forms a bay, fringed by a
shallow bank, which extends up to 1miles offshore and
over which there are depths of less than 10 m.
A dangerous rock lies on the SE part of the shallow
bank, about 2 miles NNW of Jazrat Thukhayr; the sea
breaks over this rock and the shallow bank with a moderate
swell.
13.186
1 North coast. Ra’s Qudfah (20°41′N, 58°55′E) is a rocky
point which forms the NE extremity of Marah; Jabal
Qudfah, which stands about 750 m W of the point, is black
topped and rises to an elevation of 46 m.
Between Ra’s Qudfah and West Horn Reef (1 miles
WNW) the coast is fringed by rocky outcrops, reefs and
isolated rocks, with fissured inlets running between them to
the high waterline.
13.187
1 East Horn Reef (20°41′⋅7N, 58°54′⋅4E) is a reef
promontory NW of Ra’s Qudfah. Radio towers stand on the
coast S of the reef; a group of three radio towers (red lights,
107 m high) stand close to the coast and are particularly
conspicuous.
2 West Horn Reef (20°41′⋅9N, 58°53′⋅6E) is a reef
promontory situated off the N extremity of Marah, ENE of
Ra’s ilf (13.188). A beacon stands on the coast between
these reefs near the change of the direction of the oil
pipeline which serves the offshore tanker berth (13.210); a
further beacon stands 650 m SSW.
3 The foreshore between West Horn Reef and Ra’s ilf is
sand with occasional isolated rocks about 1 cable offshore;
with the influence of tides and weather this stretch of the
coast is liable to inundation and change.
13.188
1 Island Reef (20°42′⋅2N, 58°53′⋅4E) is a drying reef
situated about 1 miles ENE of Ra’s ilf and on which the
sea breaks in most weather conditions; a dangerous wreck
awash lies about 1 cables NNE of the reef.
Ra’s ilf (20°41′⋅4N, 58°52′⋅3E) forms the NW corner of
Marah, and, due to the effect of wind and weather, is liable
to rapid change. On the N side of the point lies a small
drying area of foul ground which contains masonry blocks
and steel structures. A conspicuous tank farm (13.194) stands
on the point.
Topography
13.189
1 The island, which is barren and sterile, is mostly hilly,
especially on its E side where a range of hills of volcanic

Bight
formation extend for nearly its entire length being separated
from the coast by a narrow sandy plain. There is a
remarkable steep plateau near the middle of this range on the
NE side of the island.
2 On the W side of the island, between its S extremity and
Dawwah (20°33′N, 58°48′E) there are a few outcrops of low
hills which are separated from the E range by an extensive
sandy plain on which there are several hillocks.
3 Between Dawwah, one of the main villages of Marah
which stands in a date grove close to the coast and Jabal
ilf (5 miles NNE) (13.194); there is a flat plain extending
to the NE hills.
13.190
1 Vegetation is very sparse, brackish water is reported
obtainable by digging in the inland wadis; there are a few
springs in the centre of the island.
370
At night, in the spring, very large numbers of turtles
come ashore to lay their eggs.
Sperm whales, sharks, barracuda and crayfish are reported
to be numerous in the waters off the island.
Lizards, snakes and scorpions exist on the island; in the S
part there is a small, protected, herd of gazelle. There are
also a few sheep, goats, camels and donkeys on the island.
Government
13.191
1 An Administrator for the island is appointed by the
Sultanate of Oman. A hereditary Sheikh has dwellings on
the E coast of the island.
Local weather
13.192
1 The climate of Marah between November and March is
both agreeable and healthy, being pleasantly hot during the
day but cool at night when a heavy dew forms.
During the SW Monsoon, the climate is similar to other
places in Arabia being hot, humid and rather unpleasant.
13.193
1 Climatic table. See 1.275 and 1.290.
Principal marks
13.194
1 Landmarks:
Jabal ash Shabbah (20°31′⋅9N, 58°54′⋅1E) stands on
the N part of Marah and is a prominent feature
when seen from the N or NE; Jabal Madhrb
(2 miles NW) is a rounded hill, 150 m high.
2 Jabal ilf (20°39′⋅6N, 58°52′⋅8E) is a prominent hill of
a blackish colour which stands on the W side of the
N tip of Marah. Two conspicuous radar scanners
are situated close together on the N slope of the hill
about 300 m NW of its summit.
A tank farm (20°41′⋅3N, 58°52′⋅5E) close E of Ra’s
ilf (13.188) is conspicuous from seaward and
gives a good radar return.
13.195
1 Light:
An aero light (20°40′⋅3N, 58°53′⋅3E) is exhibited from
the control tower of the airfield which occupies the
N end of Marah. There are numerous radio towers
and masts all of which are marked by red lights.
These lights are generally lost in the background
glow from the airfield.
Umm ar Ra
Chart 3519
Description
13.196
1 Umm ar Ra
 Bight (20°27′N, 58°45′E) is a bay situated
in the middle of the W side of Marah (13.180). The bight,
which is encumbered by a drying bank, is shallow with
small boat channels leading through the dangers which lie
within.
2 Jazrat A‘ Shaghpah (13.179) is an islet within the bight
standing on the drying bank.
Qaryat r Marah (20°25′N, 58°44′E) is a village, with
a mosque, situated close in from the coast on the S side of
the bight; af
‘iq, Al am and Umm ar Ruay are further
villages on the E side of the bight. The existence of the
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 13

charted ruin close NW of Al am has been reported to be Jaz rat Bin Quwaysim
doubtful. Chart 2854
13.197
Description
1 Khawr umr as Saghrah (20°25′⋅6N, 58°44′⋅7E) is a
13.203
small bay situated in the S part of Umm ar Ra
 Bight.
1 Jazrat Bin Quwaysim (20°37′N, 58°48′E) is a small islet
which lies about 2 miles off the NW coast of Marah
(13.180) on the E side of an extensive reef, most of which
Landmark dries.
13.198
1 Jabal af
‘iq (20°26′⋅3N, 58°46′⋅8E) a conical hill Kin sat  ilf
which shows up well from the W.
Description
13.204
1 Kin
sat ilf (20°41′⋅2N, 58°50′⋅2E) is a shoal, parts of
Anchorages
which dry, which lies at the S end of the coastal flat
13.199
opposite Ra’s ilf (13.188).
1 Anchorage for small vessels may be obtained about
3 miles NNW of the village of Umm ar Ruay (20°28′⋅4N,  ilf
58°47′⋅3E) in a depth of about 5⋅5 m with a ruined tower
close SE of the village bearing 142°, and Jabal Q
rin Position
(20°22′⋅7N, 58°41′⋅2E) (13.173) bearing 207°, or in depths 13.205
of about 7 to 8 m a little farther offshore. 1 The town of ilf (20°39′N, 58°52′E) is situated on the W
2 Small vessels may also obtain anchorage in depths from side of the N end of Marah (13.180).
5⋅2 to 5⋅5 m, as shown on the chart, about 8 cables WNW of Description
Ra’s Shaghaf (20°31′⋅1N, 58°47′⋅1E). 13.206
An anchorage, used by local craft, lies in the SW part of 1 ilf is a small, modern commercial town and fishing port.
Umm ar Ra
 Bight. The port is formed by a rubble breakwater which extends
Local knowledge is required for the use of these about 3 cables NW from the shore close S of the town; the
anchorages. outer end of the breakwater curves N then E to form a small
13.200 harbour which serves the fish factory situated at the root of
1 Good anchorage may also be obtained a short distance the breakwater.
offshore from the village of Dawwah (13.189), in depths of 2 A pier, with a T-head, for use by trawlers and coasters,
about 5⋅5 m, with the palm trees close N of the village extends NW from the outer knuckle of the breakwater; lights
bearing 112°. Shoal patches, with depths of less than 5 m are exhibited from both the breakwater and the jetty.
over them lie close to this anchorage berth.
Topography
13.207
1 See 13.182.
Rounders Bay Local weather
13.208
1 During the SW Monsoon between May and September,
Description and during N gales which occur between November and
13.201 March, a swell up to 3 m high prevails N of Marah
1 Rounders Bay lies in the SW part of Marah (13.180) (13.180).
and is entered between Ra’s usayl
fah (20°12′⋅5N, Caution. Charted depths may be significantly reduced
58°37′⋅8E) and Ra’s anaghah (1 mile NNW) (13.176). The due to this heavy swell; mariners are advised against
bay is shallow and is encumbered by a number of dangers. attempting passage to Ra’s ilf Inner Anchorage (13.216)
A number of huts are situated on the shore in the SE part under these conditions.
of the bay. See also 13.4 and 13.15.
Ra’s Ab Zabl is a point of land near the middle of the Communications
head of the bay. 13.209
2 Ban
t Murshid (20°12′⋅7N, 58°37′⋅1E) is an above-water 1 An airfield is situated across the N end of Marah.
rock which lies in the approaches to Rounders Bay, about
7 cables WNW of Ra’s usayl
fah; the rock is surrounded Ra’s  ilf Tanker Berth
by drying and dangerous rocks over which the sea breaks
Position
except in a flat calm. Another small islet, 0⋅6 m high, lies
13.210
about 4 cables ESE of Ban
t Murshid and NW of Ra’s
1 Ra’s ilf Tanker Berth (20°42′⋅8N, 58°54′⋅5E) is situated
usayl
fah.
off the N tip of Marah (13.180) about 1 miles NNW of
Ra’s Qudfah (13.186).
Anchorage Description
13.202 13.211
1 A good anchorage for small vessels may be obtained, as 1 The berth consists of a submarine pipeline, marked by a
shown on the chart, in the SW approach to Rounders Bay buoy (red spherical), which extends just over 1 mile NNE
about 4 cables SE of Ban
t Murshid (20°12′⋅7N, 58°37′⋅1E) from the N coast of Marah.
in depths from about 9⋅0 to 11⋅0 m. Two further buoys (orange spherical) are moored about
Local knowledge is required for the use of this 1 cable ENE and 1 cable S; mooring buoys are laid close W
anchorage. of the outer end of the pipeline.

371
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 13
An Approach Light-buoy (red and white spherical, sphere
topmark) is moored 3 cables WNW of the outer end of the
pipeline.
13.212
1 Beacons. A beacon (triangular topmark, apex up)
(20°41′⋅7N, 58°54′⋅0E) stands near the coast between East
Horn Reef (13.187), and West Horn Reef (13.187).
A further beacon (square topmark) stands about 650 m
SSW.
Approaches
13.213
1 Off-lying danger. A coastal flat, over which there are
depths of less than 5 m, extends N from the N end of
Marah to E of Ra’s ar Ru‘ays (20°57′N, 58°48′E) and
forms the principal danger in the approach from the N to
Ra’s ilf Tanker Berth; the sea breaks heavily over this flat
during the NE Monsoon and during periods of bad weather.
Shoals, with least depths over them of 2⋅1 m, lie on the
coastal flat, N of the tip of Marah.
13.214
1 Directions. In 1982 it was reported that making the
approach from the NNE the three conspicuous radio towers
(13.187) which stand close SW of East Horn Reef (13.187)
bearing 205°, ahead, leads E of the shoal dangers on the E
side of the coastal flat towards the vicinity of the tanker
berth.
Berthing
13.215
1 Tankers berth on a heading of 110° with 7 shackles on
each anchor and the stern secured to the two mooring buoys
which are laid close W of the outer end of the submarine
pipeline.
Ra’s  ilf Inner Anchorage
Description
13.216
1 Ra’s ilf Inner Anchorage lies, as shown on the chart,
about 6 cables W of Ra’s ilf (20°41′⋅4N, 58°52′⋅3E)
(13.188) on a bottom of sand over coral.
In 1990 a safe anchorage was obtained in Ra’s ilf Inner
Anchorage by a vessel of 1500 dwt and 60 m in length with
gusts to force 8 and in spite of the strong tidal streams.
Approach and entry
13.217
1 The approach to Ra’s ilf Inner Anchorage crosses the S
part of the coastal flat (13.213) passing N of the N end of
Marah (13.180). There is a least depth in the fairway of
6⋅2 m; shoals lie on both sides of the marked channel.
13.218
1 Ra’s ilf Inner Anchorage can only be approached by
passing N of Marah; the S part of the N section of Khalj
Marah (13.146) has not been adequately surveyed. See the
source data diagram on the chart.
Caution
13.219
1 An approach to the anchorage should only be attempted
in good visibility with the aid of radar, and, if possible, in
the morning, when the shoals show up best.
372
Care should be taken, with a N-going tidal stream, to
avoid being set N towards the shoals which lie close N of
the buoyed fairway.
Landmark
13.220
1 ilf Fish Factory (20°38′⋅7N, 58°52′⋅1E), a low, black
building with a conspicuous black tower is situated
at the root of the rubble breakwater which extends
about 3 cables NW from the shore close S of the
town of ilf (13.205).
Directions
13.221
1 From the N, the principle danger is the coastal flat. To
avoid this flat, keep well to seaward until Ra’s Qudfah
(20°41′N, 58°55′E) (13.186) can be approached from NE.
See 13.213.
When about 2 miles N of Ra’s Qudfah alter course to
approach a position close N of Ra’s ilf Tanker Berth
Approach Light-buoy (20°42′⋅9N, 58°54′⋅2E) (13.211).
13.222
1 The track then leads initially WSW, passing (with
positions given from Milcon Jetty SW corner light
(20°41′⋅2N, 58°52′⋅2E)):
NW of the wreck awash (1 miles NE) which lies
close N of Island Reef (13.188). Thence:
Between No 1 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (1 miles
NNE) and No 2 Light-buoy (port hand) moored
about 1 cables SSE. Shoals lie close to both sides
of the fairway in this area, thence:
2 SE of No 3 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (1 miles N)
which is moored close SW of a shoal with a least
depth over it of 4⋅7 m, thence:
N of No 4 Light-buoy (port hand) (1 miles N) and
NW of the shoal bank which extends N from the
NW part of the N tip of Marah (13.180). Thence:
NW of Ra’s ilf (2 cables NNE) (13.188) and to the
inner anchorage berth.
Milcon Jetty
Description
13.223
1 Milcon Jetty (20°41′⋅2N, 58°52′⋅2E) lies at the end of a
pier which extends about 1 cables W from the end of a
rubble and concrete causeway situated close S of Ra’s ilf
(13.188).
Milcon Jetty Light (SW corner) (20°41′⋅2N, 58°52′⋅2E) is
exhibited from the jetty; further lights are exhibited from
dolphins situated 50 m N and S of the jetty.
2 In 1991 a rubble breakwater, to protect a desalination
plant, was reported to be under construction which will
extend 1 cable N from the root of the pier, when completed.
A short ramp, with breasting dolphins on its N side, lies
close WSW of the root of the pier connecting the Milcon
Jetty with the shore.
A disused concrete jetty lies close S of the root of Milcon
Jetty.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 13

RA’S AL Y’ TO RA’S AL JUNAYZ
GENERAL INFORMATION
Chart 2851
Route
13.224
1 The route described in this section extends from a
position about 10 miles ESE of Ra’s al Y
’ (20°31′N,
58°58′E) (13.145) for 121 miles NNE to a position about
15 miles E of Ra’s al Junayz (22°25′N, 59°50′E) (13.230) at
the S end of the TSS off Ra’s al add (22°32′N, 59°48′E).
Topography
13.225
1 Between Ra’s ar Nuqdah (20°45′N, 58°44′E) and Ra’s ar
Ru‘ays (13 miles NNE) the coast is low, sandy and covered
with bushes; a reef fringes the first part of this stretch of
coast extending up to about 1 mile offshore.
2 From Ra’s ar Ru‘ays (20°57′N, 58°48′E) to Ra’s Jibsh
(43 miles NE) (13.229) the coast for the first 13 miles
consists of cliffs from 9 m to 21 m high, with sandy spaces
between. The remainder of this stretch presents an unvaried
line of low sand dunes without the slightest trace of
vegetation; heavy surf renders landing impracticable on this
coast.
3 Between Ra’s Jibsh (21°27′N, 59°21′E) and Ra’s al
Khabbah (53 miles NNE) the coast is low, sandy and of
desolate aspect. There is no vegetation near the coast, but, in
the interior there are extensive date groves and running
streams with patches of cultivation. A small bay on the N
side of Ra’s Jibsh affords landing during periods of S winds.
A coral bank, with a least depth over it of 3⋅7 m, extends up
to about 2 miles offshore between Ra’s Qumaylah (21°56′N,
59°39′E) and Ra’s ar Ru‘ays (15 miles NNE) (13.230);
overfalls occur over this bank.
4 The coast from Ra’s al Khabbah (22°13′N, 59°48′E) to
Ra’s al Junayz (12 miles N) (13.230) consists of cliffs
between 15 m and 60 m high in which there are a few small
breaks. One of these breaks, about 7 miles N of Ra’s al
Khabbah, is conspicuous.
Current
13.226
1 See 13.152.
Traffic separation scheme
13.227
1 A TSS is established off Ra’s al add (22°32′N,
59°48′E). The scheme is IMO adopted and is described in
NP 63 Persian Gulf Pilot.
Principal marks
13.228
1 Landmarks:
Jabal al Jif
n (21°42′N, 59°27′E) is one of several
isolated hills which stand near this stretch of coast;
the hill is of rounded form.
Jabal Say (21°52′N, 59°26′E) a black, oblong hill
which stands about 6 miles inland; on a WNW
bearing it appears saddle-shaped.
Jabal Qar
r (21°54′N, 59°28′E) a conical hill which
stands about 3 miles NNE of Jabal Say
Jabal Qumaylah (21°56′N, 59°35′E) is a conical hill
which is not easily identified from the NE.
2 Jabal Ja‘al
n (22°12′N, 59°22′E) is a prominent peak
rising 6 miles SSW of Jabal Khams; some towns
373
are situated on its S slope. From the vicinity of Ra’s
Jibsh (13.229) it appears wedge-shaped.
Jabal Khams (22°18′N, 59°26′E) is a dark, rugged
peak which rises about 23 miles WNW of Ra’s al
Khabbah (13.230); a range of mountains stands
9 miles W of the peak.
3 Jabal as Saff
n (22°23′N, 59°48′E) (not charted by
name) whose South Peak rises to a height of 250 m
stands about 1 mile inland 10 miles N of Ra’s al
Khabbah; North Peak (not charted) stands 2 miles N
of South Peak at a slightly lower elevation. There is
a gap, well defined from seaward, on the N side of
Jabal as Saff
n. It has been reported that this peak
gives a good radar return.
DIRECTIONS
(continued from 13.145)
Charts 2851, 2854
13.229
1 From a position about 10 miles ESE of Ra’s al Y
’
(20°31′N, 58°58′E) the track initially leads NE for about
80 miles to a position ESE of Ra’s al Jif
n (21°42′N,
59°29′E), passing:
SE of Ra’s Qudfah (20°41′N, 58°55′E) (13.186).
Thence:
SE of Ra’s ar Ru‘ays (20°57′N, 58°48′E); a settlement
is situated close in from the point, thence:
2 SE of Ra’s Jibsh (21°27′N, 59°21′E), a small sandy
projection. A hill, about 30 m high, which stands
close within the point, is almost covered with white
drift sand but three small dark peaks are visible; a
small village is situated on the SW side of the hill.
A conspicuous stranded wreck lies close off the
point, thence:
3 SE of Ra’s Sagala (21°30′N, 59°23′E); note the depth
of 25 m (reported 1969) (position approximate)
which lies 10 miles ESE of the point. Thence:
SE of Ra’s ash Sharik (21°39′N, 59°28′E), thence:
SE of Ra’s al Jif
n (21°42′N, 59°29′E) a point close N
of Jabal al Jif
n (13.228), thence:
13.230
1 From a position SE of Ra’s al Jif
n (21°42′N, 59°29′E)
the track continues N for a further 56 miles, to a position at
the S end of the N-bound lanes of the TSS (13.227) off Ra’s
al add (22°32′N, 59°48′E), passing:
E of Al Ashkharah (20°50′N, 59°35′E) a straggling
village with a fort, which lies close W of a rocky
point forming a small bay. Jabal Say (13.228)
makes a good landmark for making Al Ashkharah.
Thence:
2 E of Ra’s Qumaylah (21°56′N, 59°39′E) a low and
sandy point backed by a range of low hills, one of
which is Jabal Qumaylah (13.228), thence:
E of Ra’s ar Ru‘ays (22°11′N, 59°46′E) a low and
rocky point on which there are a few sandy
hillocks. A conspicuous stranded wreck lies below
the point near which there is a village, thence:
E of Ra’s al Khabbah (22°13′N, 59°48′E) a low and
rocky point. Thence:
3 E of Ra’s ad Daffah (22°19′N, 59°49′E), thence:
E of Ra’s al Wudayyah (22°22′N, 59°49′E), thence:
E of Ra’s al Junayz (22°25′N, 59°50′E) a low cliff
which forms the E extremity of Arabia. Jabal as
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 13

Saff
n (13.228) makes a good landmark for
identifying the point.
(Directions NE of Ra’s al Junayz
continue in NP 63 Persian Gulf Pilot)
Anchorages
13.231
1 Anchorage has been obtained in depths of about 13 m
between 5 cables and 7 cables offshore from the small bay
which lies NE of the village of Al Ashkharah. The depths
here decrease gradually towards the shore; the colour of the
water in this vicinity is very changeable.
2 Landing can sometimes be effected without difficulty in
the bay although the surf breaks heavily on the coast either
side of it.
13.232
1 Anchorage may also be obtained in depths of 11 m,
which is fairly sheltered from N winds, about 1 mile NE of
Ra’s ar Ru‘ays (22°11′N, 59°46′E) (13.230).

374
Home Contents Index

NOTES

375
Home Contents Index

Chapter 14 - Gulf of Aden - south side. Straits of Bab el Mandeb to Raas Binna

43° 44° 45° 46° 47° 48° 49° 50° 51° 52°
14° 14°

YE M E N

13° 13°
100

Aden
- I.
25

Mayyun
3M

1925
ou
.d

14.15
eT

’Abd al KørØ
376

adj

2950
12° mo 12°
Caluula & Da
our

2950
Port d'Obock 253 3661 14.159 Raas Felug Anch. Olog
ah

262 29 2950

la
Ent. to 50

uu
Golfe de 29

14.1
2 95

r
Ghoubbet 50

al
B

ey
Tadjourah 0 B C s
Ca

14 as
Kharab 29 5 an C 2950 as

os 334 o
Djibouti 253 da Ra

61
as

14 ela
253 0 L

.20 so
rG
aas Ra

e
âda

. y
14.86 q aa

6
1 4 o ra Qandala
mb

.31 y

de
14.351
‘A

ad
e

na 1
6
.d

d
11° .1 11°

dc
ou

ru
M 253 S u Ca 14s Bin
3 as as a
25 Ra Ra Ra
iir
ans

3530
Kh

Berbera
as
Ra

14.162 SOMALIA
6
10° 2970 10°
43° 44° 45° 46° Longitude 47° East from Greenwich 49° 50° 51° 52°
0205
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14
GULF OF ADEN — SOUTH SIDE — THE COAST OF AFRICA FROM THE STRAITS
OF BAB EL MANDEB TO RAAS CASEYR AND THENCE SOUTH TO RAAS BINNA
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 6, 2970
Scope of the chapter
14.1
1 This chapter covers passages following the coast of the
Republic of Djibouti from Ras Siyyân (12°29′N, 43°20′E)
(4.83) to the village of Loyada (61 miles S) which stands
close W of the international boundary (14.2) separating the
Republic of Djibouti from Somalia.
2 This chapter then covers the N coast of Somalia as far
as Raas Caseyr (11°50′N, 51°17′E) (14.160) the NE-most
point of the Horn of Africa; it then continues for a farther
41 miles S to Raas Binna (11°09′N, 51°11′E) (14.161).
3 This chapter also includes descriptions of the port of
Djibouti (11°36′N 43°09′E) (14.86) and of the smaller ports
of Berbera (10°26′N, 45°00′E) (14.162) and Boosaaso
(11°17′N, 49°11′E) (14.206).
International boundary
14.2
1 The international boundary between the Republic of
Djibouti and Somalia reaches the coast in the vicinity of
the village of Loyada (11°28′N, 43°15′E).
Topography
14.3
1 The coast on the S side of the Gulf of Aden is generally
low and sandy as far E as Berbera (10°26′N, 45°00′E)
(14.162); it then becomes moderately high with the coastal
hills being backed by limestone mountains.
Off-lying dangers
14.4
1 Except for the outlying reefs in the approaches to, and S
of Saylac (11°21′N, 43°28′E) (14.265), the coast is clear of
dangers and can be approached closely, for the most part.
Piracy and armed robbery
14.5
1 Piracy and armed robbery. Mariners should be aware
that several incidents have been reported by vessels on
passage up to 55 miles off the coast of Somalia.
Vessels are advised to keep at least 75 miles, and, if
possible, 100 miles from the Somali coast. Radio
communications, including the use of VHF, should be kept
to a minimum whilst in Somali waters. See 1.15.
377
Anchorages
14.6
1 There are a number of fair weather anchorages off the
smaller ports, in moderate depths, along this stretch of
coast, but many of them require local knowledge.
Weather
14.7
1 The winds in the Gulf of Aden are governed by the
monsoons of the Arabian Sea and Indian Ocean; the
African coast of the Gulf of Aden is subject to Kharif
winds (1.268).
2 Between October and May, the period of the NE
Monsoon, the winds generally blow from the E and ENE
following the direction of the gulf. During the SW
Monsoon, between June and September, steady SW winds
prevail throughout the Gulf of Aden as far as Suqurá
(12°30′N, 54°00′E) joining the SW Monsoon in the
Arabian Sea.
3 From about the middle of June to August, between Bab
el Mandeb (12°40′N, 43°20′E) (4.71) and Jasiired Maydh
(11°13′N, 47°14′E) (14.221) there are strong W or SW
winds. Near the coast of Africa during this period, there
are occasional violent SSW squalls off the land. These
squalls, which generally occur between midnight and
daybreak, last for about an hour.
4 During September the W winds cease, being replaced by
land and sea breezes which continue throughout October;
nights are calm and sultry.
Currents
14.8
1 The rate and direction of the current in this area is
mainly influenced by the NE and SW Monsoons; the rate
generally ranges between about  kn and
kn depending
on the strength of the wind.
2 Between October and April, the currents in the Gulf of
Aden set SW at rates of between  kn and 1 kn. From
June to September the current reverses, May being a month
of transition, setting ENE at a rate of about 1 kn near the
middle of the gulf, and at a maximum rate of 3 kn along
the African coast during the months of July and August.
See also 4.77.
Local trade
14.9
1 Local trade on the S side of the Gulf of Aden is chiefly
carried out during the months of October and March, the
period of the NE Monsoon.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14
RAS SIYYÂN TO BANKA ARAB
General information
Charts 6, 253, 452, 3661
Route
14.10
1 The route described in this section extends, from a
position about 8 miles ENE of Ras Siyyân (12°29′N,
43°20′E) (4.83) at the SE end of the S-bound lane of the
Straits of Bab el Mandeb TSS (see 4.76), 57 miles SSE, to
a position about 10 miles E of Banka Arab (11°39′N,
43°40′E) (14.15).
Topography — approaches to Golfe de Tadjourah
14.11
1 That part of the coast of the Republic of Djibouti
between Ras Siyyân (12°29′N, 43°20′E) (4.83) and Râs Bir
(30 miles S) (14.15) is low, sandy, covered with jungle and
fringed by a coral reef.
2 On the S side of the Golfe de Tadjourah (14.20) the
coast between Plateau du Héron (11°37′N, 53°09′E)
(14.123), which forms the S entrance point to the Golfe de
Tadjourah, and Râs Gumarlah (11 miles SE) (14.27) is
low and thickly covered with mangrove jungle; the coast is
indented and fringed by a reef.
3 Between Râs Gumarlah (11°29′N, 43°17′E) and Saylac
(14 miles ESE) (14.265) the coast is fronted by islands,
reefs, and shoals extending up to 10 miles offshore; the
coast itself is bare and swampy.
Caution
14.12
1 Between Râs Gumarlah (11°29′N, 43°17′E) (14.27) and
Saylac (14 miles ESE) (14.265), as far offshore as Banka
Arab (11°39′N, 43°40′E) (14.15), there are no navigational
marks or other objects suitable for the visual fixing of a
vessels position; a few useful marks lie at lesser distances
offshore.
Considerable caution is necessary when approaching the
coast in this vicinity.
Currents
14.13
1 Once, during two days in February with light N and NE
winds, a current was observed to set SE over Banka Arab
(11°39′N, 43°40′E) (14.15) at rates of between 1 kn and
1 kn.
Principal mark
14.14
1 Major light:
Râs Bir Light (white tower, red top; 50 m high)
(11°58′⋅6N, 43°21′⋅7E) exhibited from a position
about 300 m inland from Râs Bir (14.15).
Directions
(continued from 4.83)
Charts 253, 3661
14.15
1 From a position about 8 miles ENE of Ras Siyyân
(12°29′N, 43°20′E) the track leads SSE for about 57 miles,
passing:
ENE of Ras Siyyân (12°29′N, 43°20′E) (4.83).
Thence:
ENE of Kadda Dâbali (12°28′N, 43°26′E) (4.83),
thence:
378
2 ENE of Horod le Rhale (12°27′N, 43°26′E) (4.84),
thence:
ENE of Rhounda Komaytou (12°27′N, 43°27′E)
(4.84). Thence:
ENE of Khor Angar (12°22′N, 43°22′E) (14.16),
thence:
3 ENE of Djebel-Jan (12°14′N, 43°23′E), a hill which
stands close to the coast and forms the highest
point of some ranges of tableland which closely
approach the coast in this vicinity; a beacon stands
on the S part of this summit, thence:
ENE of Râs Bir (11°59′N, 43°22′E) a cliffy point
fringed by a steep-to reef; Râs Bir Light (14.14) is
exhibited from the point. Thence:
4 ENE of Banka Arab (11°39′N, 43°40′E) is a detached
bank which lies off the coastal bank; the bank is
not clearly visible. See also 14.13.
(Directions continue at 14.159)
Khor Angar
Chart 3661
Position
14.16
1 Khor Angar (Crique d’Anghar) (12°22′N, 43°22′E) lies
about 6 miles SSE of Ras Siyyân (4.83).
Description
14.17
1 Khor Angar is a shallow inlet surrounded by casuarina,
a species of shrub, and trees.
A grey, cubical, masonry guard-house, which shows up
well, stands on the NE side of the entrance.
Topography
14.18
1 The coast S of Djebel-Jan (12°14′N, 43°23′E) (14.15) is
low and sandy until within 5 miles of Râs Bir (14.15),
when it begins to rise towards the point.
Saday is an extensive plain covered with mangroves and
brushwood which lies between the coast and the interior
mountains.
Anchorage
14.19
1 Open anchorage may be obtained off the E coast of the
Republic of Djibouti, E of Djebel-Jan (14.15).
GOLFE DE TADJOURAH
General information
Charts 253, 262
Position
14.20
1 Golfe de Tadjourah is a gulf entered between Râs Bir
(11°59′N, 43°22′E) (14.15) and Plateau du Héron (25 miles
SSW) (14.123).
Description
14.21
1 The Golfe de Tadjourah is entered from the W end of
the Gulf of Aden and extends W to Ghoubbet Kharab
(14.60) a nearly totally enclosed inlet which is entered
from the head of the gulf.
Îles Moucha (14.76), and a number of extensive coral
reefs, lie on the S side of the entrance to the gulf.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14
2 Except in a few places the shores of the gulf are high; a
short distance inland the country is mountainous. The
shores of the gulf are barren but the interior is fertile.
The mountains on the NW side of the gulf between Port
d’Obock (11°58′N, 43°18′E) and Râs Duan (17 miles SW)
are prominent. These mountains are thickly covered with
trees and the valleys appear fertile.
14.22
1 North coast. Between Cap Obock (11°58′N, 43°18′E)
(14.40) and Alat Ela (3 miles W) the coast consists of
cliffs between 19 and 26 m in height which are broken in
several places by ravines. SE of Alat Ela is a low
projection with a shallow bank of mud and sand extending
S from it.
The coast as far as Râs Duan (14.37) which lies a
farther 13 miles SW, consists of a beach backed by
precipitous cliffs; a shallow bank partly fringes this coast.
There are some reefs on the coast, in places.
2 Between Râs Duan (11°49′N, 43°03′E) and the entrance
to Ghoubbet Kharab (27 miles SW) (14.60), the coast is
almost entirely low and sandy; it is formed by the edge of
a plain which rises gradually to the spurs of Massif de
Goda, a range of mountains which stands about 20 miles W
of Râs Duan. The plain, which begins about 7 miles WSW
of Râs Duan, is up to 2 miles wide; it is wooded
throughout with mimosas prevailing, which form thick
coppices in places.
3 Massif de Goda (11°45′N, 42°38′E) is a mountain range
of tableland which rises to elevations of over 1500 m from
the NW side of Golfe de Tadjourah.
An unnamed bay indents the coast between Râs Duan
and Râs Ali (7 miles WSW) (14.23).
14.23
1 Anse Reissale (Khr Raysâli) (11°46′N, 42°56′E) is a
narrow inlet, with a sandy beach on its E side, entered
between two cliffs close W of Râs Ali.
The coast between Râs Ali (11°46′N, 42°57′E) and
Tadjourah (3 miles WNW) (14.51) is rocky, precipitous
and steep-to initially. It then becomes low and sandy.
2 Between Tadjourah (11°47′N, 43°53′E) and the entrance
to Ghoubbet Kharab (18 miles SW) (14.60), the coast is
low and sandy. It is exposed to E winds and boats can only
land with difficulty, except in periods of calm.
Near Tadjourah, and for 9 miles W, the mountains recede
from the coast, but farther W they approach it again.
3 Ambabbo (11°45′N, 42°49′E) is a village on the coast
about 4 miles WSW of Tadjourah and can be identified by
a group of palm trees in its vicinity.
Between Ambabbo and Pointe des Palmiers (6 miles
SW) (14.38) the coast is fringed by a bank of sand and
coral extending up to 2 cables offshore.
14.24
1 South coast. Between Mangadafo (Pointe Noire)
(11°36′N, 43°04′E) (14.89) and ‘Ambâda (3 miles W)
(14.83) the coast is fringed by a shallow, rocky bank. The
first mile of the coast is low and swampy. It is then
composed of steep cliffs between 120 m and 150 m high.
A rock, about 2 m high, stands close off the coast about
2 miles ESE of Daba Libâ (14.38) which lies about
9 miles W of ‘Ambâda.
2 Baie de Dorâlé (11°35′N, 43°03′E) is entered about
1 mile W of Mangadafo. The bay is encumbered with reefs
through the middle of which lies a passage. This passage is
so narrow it is difficult to find.
Between Daba Libâ (11°36′N, 42°51′E) and Râs Korali
(3 miles WSW) the coast is indented and steep-to; the spurs
379
from the interior mountains closely approach this section of
the coast.
3 The coast from Râs Korali and an unnamed point about
3 miles WSW is mainly fringed by a bank with depths of
less than 20 m over it. Thence, as far as the point on the
coast S of Îlot des Boutres (11°33′N, 42°42′E) (14.38), the
coast rises gradually and presents several summits. The
shore SW of Îlot des Boutres is sandy and stony, and,
within it, lies a plain covered with mimosas.
Off-lying reefs and banks
14.25
1 Banc du Levant (Lebnaan Bank) (11°37′N, 43°23′E)
lies about 14 miles E of Plateau du Héron (14.123).
14.26
1 Banc Somali (Somalia Bank) (11°38′N, 43°22′E) lies
about 12 miles E of Plateau du Héron (14.123).
14.27
1 Moidubis Kebir (11°34′N, 43°17′E) and Moidubis
Séghir (2 miles S) are two partly drying reefs, which are
always visible; both reefs lie N of Râs Gumarlah (11°29′N,
43°17′E), a low, sandy point of irregular shape.
Banc Gutta Tella, a bank on which stands a dangerous
rock, lies 1
miles WNW of Moidubis Séghir.
Anchorages (north side)
14.28
1 Anchorage, sheltered from N winds and in a good
holding ground, may be obtained in depths of about 20 m
SE of the low projection which lies SE of Alat Ela
(11°58′N, 43°14′E) (14.22).
14.29
1 Anchorage may also be obtained farther SW off this part
of the coast, about 3 miles NE of Râs Duan (11°49′N,
43°03′E) (14.37), where landing can be effected on a
beach; a similar anchorage may also be obtained 2 miles
farther SW.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
14.30
1 Small vessels may obtain anchorage within Anse
Reissale (11°46′N, 42°56′E) (14.23), and within the bar
over which there is a least depth of 2⋅7 m, in depths from
about 11 to 13 m, mud. This anchorage is sheltered from
all winds.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
14.31
1 A fairly good anchorage for use in fine weather, or with
offshore winds, lies about 2 cables offshore with Ambabbo
village (11°45′N, 42°49′E) bearing 335°, in depths from 26
to 40 m, sand and mud.
There are depths from about 5 to 7 m lying close to the
coast in this vicinity; depths increase quickly seaward.
Anchorages (south side)
14.32
1 Anchorage may be obtained within a small bay close W
of the peninsula of Daba Libâ (11°36′N, 42°51′E) (14.38).
Shelter from NE winds can be found close to this peninsula
in a depth of about 29 m. The holding ground is reported
to be indifferent.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14
Chart 253 plan Entrance to Ghoubbet Kharab
14.33
1 Anchorage may be obtained, as shown on the chart, in
Mouillage des Boutres close inshore W of Îlot des Boutres
(11°33′N, 42°42′E) (14.38) in depths of about 30 m; this
anchorage is exposed to NE winds but is otherwise
sheltered. A dangerous rock (position approximate) lies
about 4 cables WSW of the indicated anchorage berth.
Principal marks
14.34
1 Landmarks (north side):
‘As‘ale (Morne Rouge) (12°00′N, 43°12′E), which
rises to 130 m in height, has three round summits
formed of reddish stones.
Inhai-Ali (11°58′N, 43°07′E) stands about 5 miles
WSW of ‘As‘ale rising to a elevation of 430 m.
2 Monts Mabla (11°56′N, 43°02′E) is a group of peaks
whose S-most peak stands about 8 miles N of Râs
Duan (14.37) and rises to a height of 845 m; the
N-most peak stands about 3 miles farther N and
rises to a height of 1057 m. Sono Ali (11°57′N,
42°59′E) reaches a height of 1247 m and forms the
highest peak of Monts Mabla.
14.35
1 Landmarks (south side):
Oreilles d‘Ane (‘Êrole) (11°26′N, 42°59′E) is a hill,
513 m high, which stands about 9 miles SSW of
‘Ambâda (14.83).
Directions
(Directions for the western end of the
Gulf of Aden are given at 14.15)
14.36
1 From a position about 20 miles E of Râs Bir (11°59′N,
43°22′E) (14.15) the track through the gulf leads about
65 miles WSW to the entrance to Ghoubbet Kharab (14.60)
passing (with positions given from Râs Bir Light
(11°58′⋅6N, 43°21′⋅7E)):
NNW of Banka Arab (26 miles SE) (14.15), thence:
2 SSE of Râs Bir (14.15) from which Râs Bir Light
(14.14) is exhibited. Thence:
SSE of a detached shoal (reported 1941) (position
approximate) (2
miles WSW), with a least depth
over it of 4⋅6 m, which lies close SE of Banc du
Surcouf (14.45), thence:
3 SSE of Cap Obock (4
miles WSW) (14.40), thence:
NNW of Banc Dankali (16 miles S), a sand and coral
bank which lies E of Île Moucha (14.77).
14.37
1 Thence, the track continues WSW, passing (with
positions given from Île Maskali Light (11°42′⋅8N,
43°09′⋅0′E):
NNW of Île Moucha (3 miles ENE) (14.77) the
E-most island of the Îles Moucha (14.76); Île
Moucha Light (metal framework tower on house;
17 m high) (11°43′⋅8N, 43°12′⋅8E) is exhibited
from Plateau du Scorpion which lies in the NE
part of the island. Thence:
2 NNW of a beacon (red; 5 m high) (2 miles NNE)
which stands on the NW extremity of the reef on
which lie the Îles Moucha (14.76), thence:
3 SSE of Râs Duan (8 miles NW) a steep cliff point,
within which there are several higher plateaux
extending towards Monts Mabla (14.34). On the S
side of the cape is a beach where boats can land
during the NE Monsoon when there is a heavy
380
swell on the coast between Râs Duan and Tagarré
(15 miles N). Thence:
4 NNW of Récif du Météore (4 miles SW), which lies
on the W side of the approach to Djibouti (14.86),
thence:
NNW of Banc du El-Hadj (6 miles SW), thence:
14.38
1 Passing (with positions given from Râs Ali (11°46′N,
42°57′E)):
SSE of Râs Ali (14.23), thence:
NNW of Daba Libâ Râs Eiro) (11 miles SSW) a
narrow, high projection, covered with bushes,
which is connected with the mainland by a sandy
isthmus, thence:
2 NNW of Râs Korali (13 miles SW) (14.24), thence:
SSE of Pointe des Palmiers (12miles WSW) a
slightly projecting sandy point; a clump of palm
trees stands about 45 m within the point. Thence:
NNW of Îlot des Boutres (19 miles SW), thence to
the entrance to Ghoubbet Kharab (14.60).
(Directions for Petite Passe, the entrance to
Ghoubbet Kharab, are given at 14.66)
Port d’Obock
Chart 253 plan of Port d’Obock
Position
14.39
1 Port d’Obock (11°58′N, 43°18′E) is situated on the N
side of Golfe de Tadjourah (14.20), W of Râs Bir (14.15).
Description
14.40
1 Port d’Obock is formed by a bend in the coast between
Anse Buret (11°58′⋅7N, 43°19′⋅6E) and Cap Obock
(2 miles SW); the bay is sheltered from the SE and S by
coral reefs which extend up to 1 miles offshore.
The harbour is divided into two parts, separated from
each other by banks; the SW part is called Port du Sud and
the NE part Port du Nord-Est.
The N shore of the harbour is an almost vertical cliff of
coral rock, about 24 m high, within which a large plain
extends to the mountains which stand inland.
2 On the W shore near Cap Obock there is a similar cliff,
about 12 m high, rising at the end of a large plain.
The NW shore, between these cliffs, is a sandy beach,
terminating in a ravine, the soil of which is alluvial clay,
and which is inundated, in places, by the sea at the highest
of the tides; it is reported that there are a number of
mangroves within this ravine. A sandbank fringes this
beach and mostly dries.
3 The Oubouki River (Rivière d’Obock) flows into the
harbour about 5 cables NE of Cap Obock; it is little more
than a stream and dries in summer.
Function
14.41
1 The settlement of Obock is situated on Cap Obock
(14.40) and was once the capital of French Somaliland but
is now only a small village. The former Residency is a
large, square, white building, with a flagstaff, standing
about 120 m inland from the cape.
Local weather
14.42
1 A dry, scorching N wind, loaded with sand, may spring
up suddenly, chiefly during the SW Monsoon, and blow
very hard on occasions.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14
A SW wind generally prevails in the morning; the N
wind rises suddenly in the afternoon and lasts until to the
middle of the night; sometimes it continues through the
night, decreasing in force, but resuming greater strength
towards 0700 hours and 0800 hours, blowing in this manner
constantly for three or four days.
2 The coming of the N wind is always indicated by the
whirlwinds of sand which it raises on the plateau between
Obock and the mountains inland, and in the valley which
extends NW from Port d’Obock.
Landmarks
14.43
1 A ruined penitentiary (11°58′⋅7N, 43°17′⋅9E), which
consists of a white building, enclosed by walls,
stands just over 1⋅2 miles NNE of Cap Obock
(14.40).
A mosque (11°58′⋅8N, 43°17′⋅8E) stands close NNW
of the ruined penitentiary.
Port du Sud
14.44
1 Position. Port du Sud (11°57′⋅8N, 43°18′⋅2E) is entered
between the E end of Banc de la Clocheterie which extends
about 6 cables E from Cap Obock (14.40) and the W
extremity of Banc du Surcouf which lies about 3 cables E.
14.45
1 Description. Banc de la Clocheterie, parts of which dry,
has some large boulders standing on it; Banc de la
Clocheterie Light (white, square tower, red top, with its
name on its side) (11°57′⋅6N, 43°18′⋅1E), is exhibited from
the NE extremity of the bank. Banc du Surcouf (11°57′⋅8N,
43°19′⋅2E) is a very shallow bank over most of which it is
unsafe to navigate.
2 Passe du Sud is the channel which lies between Banc de
la Clocheterie and Banc du Surcouf; this channel is deep
and free from dangers.
Îlot Sud (‘Ounda Kômaytou) and Îlot Nord are two
small islets standing on the coastal bank about 2 cables
NE of Cap Obock (14.40).
3 A jetty, for use by shallow draught vessels, extends
about 2cables from the coast, passing through Îlot Nord.
A disused pier extends a similar distance SSE from a point
on the coast about 950 m farther NNE; a dangerous wreck
lies close SSE of the outer end of this pier.
14.46
1 Directions. If making an approach to Port du Sud from
NE then steer to pass well S of Banc du Surcouf so as to
avoid the detached shoal patch (11°57′⋅6N, 43°19′⋅5E)
(14.36).
When the S extremity of Cap Obock (11°57′⋅6N,
43°17′⋅5E) (14.40) bears 290°, then steer for it on that
bearing until in a position SSE of Passe du Sud (14.45).
From a position about 5 cables SSE of the outer part of
Passe du Sud the approach to the entry channel then leads
NNW.
14.47
1 Passe du Sud Leading Lights:
Front light exhibited from a black and white
chequered minaret standing within the mosque
(11°58′⋅8N, 43°17′⋅8E) (14.43).
Rear light exhibited from a white tower (7 m high)
(700 m from front).
The alignment (337
°) of these lights leads through
Passe du Sud into Port du Sud (14.44).
14.48
1 Anchorage may be obtained within Port du Sud (14.44)
in a depth of about 27 m, mud. This anchorage is protected
381
from all except S winds which sometimes blow strongly
and render this berth dangerous.
Vessels can anchor on, or near, the leading line close to
the middle of the harbour, SE of the mooring buoy laid
within the harbour, as indicated on the chart.
Port du Nord-Est
14.49
1 Position. Port du Nord-Est (11°58′⋅5N, 43°19′⋅0E),
which is approached through Port du Sud (14.44), is
entered by a fairly straight, but narrow, channel, which lies
between Banc du Surcouf (14.45) on its S side, and Banc
des Perles and Banc du Milieu on its N side. The channel
has a least depth in the main fairway of 14 m, but note the
much lesser depths which lie close outside the fairway.
2 If entering Port du Nord-Est then the channel should be
buoyed beforehand, or else navigation should be carried out
from aloft with the sun in a favourable position.
The only approach and entrance to Port du Nord-Est is
as described; Passe de l’Est, which lies between Banc du
Surcouf on its S side and Banc du Curieux on its N side,
is impracticable.
14.50
1 Anchorage may be obtained in bad weather within a
more roomy berth than Port du Sud in depths of about
10 m.
An easy landing may be effected on the sandy beach
within Anse Buret (14.40) which lies ENE of the harbour.
Tadjourah
Chart 253 plan of Mouillage de Tadjourah
Position
14.51
1 Tadjourah (11°47′N, 43°53′E) is situated on the N side
of Golfe de Tadjourah (14.20), W of Râs Ali (14.23).
Description
14.52
1 Tadjourah is a small town standing close to the shore of
a small bay entered between Pointe Sher Mahamat
(11°46′⋅9N, 42°53′⋅2E) a sandy point, and Pointe Agaraf
(1 mile WNW).
2 The shores of this bay are fringed by a bank extending
up to 2 cables offshore; a drying rock stands on this bank
in front of the town, about 100 m W of the head of the
jetty. A drying rock lies about 1
cables ESE of Pointe
Agaraf; a dangerous rock lies between this drying rock and
the point.
A shoal (existence doubtful), with a least depth over it
of 6 m, lies about 2 cables SSW of the S end of the jetty
(14.54).
Landmarks
14.53
1 The Residency (11°47′⋅2N, 42°53′⋅1E) with a tower is
prominent.
The Great Mosque, which stands about 240 m SW of
the Residency and about 80 m in from the shore,
is also prominent. Two other mosques in the town
are also prominent.
A lighted beacon tower (white with yellow band)
(11°46′⋅9N, 42°53′⋅0E).
Jetty
14.54
1 A L-shaped jetty extends S and ESE from the shore at
the W end of the town, to the head of an inlet formed by a
break in the coastal reef.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14
14.55
1 Port de Tadjourah Leading Lights. The alignment
(003°) of Port de Tadjourah Leading Lights leads towards
the L-shaped jetty:
Front light (exhibited from L-shaped jetty elbow)
(11°47′⋅0N, 42°52′⋅9E).
Rear light (110 m from front).
Anchorages
14.56
1 General. The holding ground off Tadjourah is reported
to be good but the steepness of the bottom necessitates
anchoring close inshore. During the SW Monsoon sudden
and violent squalls make anchoring in this vicinity
dangerous.
2 When approaching the anchorage berths care must be
taken to avoid the shallow spit which extends about
2 cables SSW from the shore, about 1 mile E of
Tadjourah, and a rock (existence doubtful), with a least
depth over it of 6 m, which lies about 4 cables WSW of
Pointe Sher Mahamat (14.52).
14.57
1 Anchorage may be obtained with the Residency tower
bearing 020° and in line with a mosque standing near the
shore; and the leading lights bearing 003°.
With E winds, vessels of not more than 115 m in length
can anchor on the same alignment of the Residency tower
and the mosque, about 2 cables from the mosque, in depths
of about 40 m.
Small vessels can anchor about 140 m S of the head of
the jetty in depths from 11 to 22 m, as indicated on the
chart.
14.58
1 Mooring buoys. A mooring buoy, intended for use by
vessels of less than 500 tonnes and 50 m in length, is laid
on the alignment (003°) of the leading lights about 150 m
from the front light.
A further mooring buoy is laid about 2
cables ESE of
Pointe Agaraf (14.52).
14.59
1 Landing can be effected in good weather E of the jetty,
or alongside its outer part.
Ghoubbet Kharab
Chart 253 and plan of Entrance to Ghoubbet Kharab
Position
14.60
1 Ghoubbet Kharab (11°32′N, 42°36′E) is entered through
a narrow passage from the head of Golfe de Tadjourah
(14.20).
Topography
14.61
1 Ghoubbet Kharab is a nearly totally enclosed inlet which
is almost surrounded by steep cliffs of volcanic formation.
Entrance
14.62
1 The entrance to Ghoubbet Kharab (11°33′N, 42°41′E) is
divided into two passages by Abou Mâya, a small islet
from which cliffs rise about 5 m on its E side and from
which a shallow bank extends about 1
cables SSE.
A depth of 12 m lies in the approaches to the inlet about
1 mile ENE of Abou Mâya at the N end of a bank which
extends about 1 mile N of Îlot des Boutres (14.38).
382
14.63
1 Grande Passe is the S-most passage and is only
practicable for small vessels with a draught of less than
1⋅8 m.
With any wind the strong tidal streams cause waves in
the middle of this passage which are large enough to
endanger small craft.
Local knowledge is required for the use of Grande
Passe.
14.64
1 Petite Passe is the N-most passage and lies between
steep shores; the passage is practical for use by a suitably
sized vessel.
14.65
1 Tidal streams rush through both Grande and Petite
Passes with great force causing whirls and rippling and
give the streams a dangerous appearance. In Petite Passe
they can attain a rate of 7 kn.
Directions for Petite Passe
14.66
1 Passage through Petite Passe is sometimes difficult but,
it is never impracticable by day for vessels with a speed of
10 kn except in very unusual conditions.
There is no difficulty in entering during the in-going
stream; when the stream is strong several eddies form in
the passage but they do not affect a vessels steering.
2 Entering during the out-going stream is more difficult,
especially when it is strong, and a fresh wind is blowing in
the same direction. At such times the sea in the approach
to Petite Passe becomes very rough, covered with foam,
and resembles breakers.
Departing Ghoubbet Kharab is always easier than
entering.
14.67
1 To enter Petite Passe at slack high or low water one
should approach the entrance about 45 minutes after high or
low water at Port d’Obock (14.39). With the passage well
within sight the time to transit the passage is when the
eddies have ceased and the water is smooth which can
easily be seen. Slack water is usually brief generally lasting
only between 5 and 10 minutes.
Description (north side)
14.68
1 The N side of the inlet consists of precipitous limestone
cliffs which are intersected by ravines in which lie masses
of rock and large uprooted trees which have evidently been
carried down by mountain torrents.
2 The N shore, for about 7 cables WNW of the entrance,
is a vertical, rocky, steep wall; thence to the E entrance
point of Baie de l’Étoile, which lies 7 cables farther W, it
forms an open sandy bay bordered by a narrow coral reef.
14.69
1 Baie de l’Étoile (11°34′N, 42°39′E) is a narrow inlet
entered E of Pointe de l’Étoile the shores of which are not
very high at its entrance, but farther in they consist of
steep rocky cliffs attaining an elevation of about 40 m on
its NE side, and of nearly 60 m on its SW side. At the
head of the inlet lies a sand and coral beach. Mimosas
grow on the shore at the head of the inlet.
2 If approaching Baie de l’Étoile from E, pass not less
than 1 cables S of an unnamed islet lying on the coastal
bank about 4 cables E of Pointe de l’Étoile; if approaching
from W, pass a similar distance S of Pointe de l’Étoile.
Drying shoals lie off the NE side of the inlet up to about
4 cables NW of the unnamed islet.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14
After altering course into Baie de l’Étoile, keep towards
the SW shore until 3 cables within Pointe de l’Étoile,
thence steer a mid-channel course to the anchorage.
3 Anchorage may be obtained within the inner part of
Baie de l’Étoile in depths from 20 to 29 m, mud and sand.
This anchorage berth is the best in Ghoubbet Kharab
being sheltered from all winds.
14.70
1 Baie Blondeau (11°34′N, 42°36′E) is a bay entered
about 2 miles W of Baie de l’Étoile, the shores of which
are moderately high; a beach is situated at its head. On its
NW side the coastal bank extends about 2 cables
offshore.
Open country, which rises quickly and on which grow a
few trees, extends inland from the beach.
Île Blondeau is a rocky islet fringed by a bank of coral
and sand standing on a finger of the coastal bank which
extends about 6 cables SE from the NW shore of the bay.
14.71
1 Baie du Lac Salé (11°35′N, 42°32′E) lies in the NW
corner of Ghoubbet Kharab. The NE side of the bay rises
to a height of more than 200 m within about 1 km of the
head of the bay. At first, the shores of the bay consist of
moderately high sand dunes changing gradually to steep
cliffs.
2 A narrow, rocky peninsula extends about 2 cables ESE
from the N side of the bay.
The SW side of the bay is low, broken and composed of
lava and black scoriae; the head of the bay is very shallow.
A small basin, which lies on the W side of the head of
the bay, has depths within it from 11 to 27 m; its entrance
is closed by a ridge of rocks. The water always runs out of
this basin even during a rising tide.
3 Anchorage may be obtained, as shown on the chart, off
the W side of the head of the bay in depths of about 13 m,
sand and mud. This anchorage is open to E winds which
cause a choppy sea and frequently sufficient swell to
prevent landing by boats on the beach.
Description (west side)
14.72
1 The W side of Ghoubbet Kharab is volcanic and
indented.
Guinni Koma (Grande Île du Diable) (11°32′N, 42°32′E)
is a small island which lies about 4 cables offshore from
the W side of the inlet; the island has a yellowish-red
appearance rising to a height of 159 m making it
precipitous and inaccessible.
2 Petite Île du Diable, which lies about 1 cables NW of
Guinni Koma and close off Anse Gabrielle, is a conical
volcanic islet rising to 80 m; the lava on its coasts is
clearly visible.
3 The channel between the island and the islet has
moderate depths within it, but, at its SW end, there is a
shoal, with a least depth over it of 8⋅5 m; a shallow coral
bank, which extends about 140 m S and SW of Petite Île
du Diable, is always visible.
14.73
1 Anchorage may be obtained, as shown on the chart,
about 1 cables W of Guinni Koma in depths of about
29 m. This anchorage is very limited owing to a coral reef
and a sandbank which extend about 90 m W from Guinni
Koma and to the considerable depths close W of the
position given. The berth is sheltered and even with fresh E
winds it is smooth; violent squalls often blow from the
direction of Guinni Koma.
383
2 Small vessels may obtain anchorage within Anse
Gabrielle in depths from about 15 to 20 m.
A drying rock lies about 1 cables offshore in the W
part of the unnamed bay formed by the coast and Guinni
Koma.
Description (south side)
14.74
1 The S side of Ghoubbet Kharab is a vertical, volcanic
wall which is highest at its E end. A valley situated in
about the middle part of this side is strewn with lava and
volcanic remains; the lava extends between 2 miles or
3 miles inland to the foot of the range of sandhills which
rise between 60 m and 90 m above the plain.
2 From the S entrance point to the inlet, the coast, which
is cliffy, extends about 2 miles SW and is fringed by a
shallow coral bank.
The unnamed bay, which forms the SE corner of
Ghoubbet Kharab, is deep and free from dangers.
3 The coast, from the SW entrance point to the unnamed
bay, is composed of cliffs decreasing in elevation towards
the W for about 7 miles WNW, and is broken only by the
valley in its mid part where there are some trees. An
unnamed islet, lying close offshore and close W of the
entrance to this valley, is bare and rocky.
Local weather
14.75
1 On the S side of Ghoubbet Kharab, where the winds are
usually stronger than in other parts of Golfe de Tadjourah
(14.20), the high cliffs deflect NE winds to E or SE.
Îles Moucha
Charts 253, 262
Position
14.76
1 Îles Moucha (11°43′N, 43°12′E) are a group of coral
islands and islets which lie on the S side of the middle part
of the entrance to Golfe de Tadjourah (14.20); the islands,
which attain an elevation of about 12 m, stand on drying
coral reefs.
Grand Récif is that part of the reefs surrounding the
group which lies NE of Îles Moucha and within the
Territorial Park (14.79).
Île Moucha
14.77
1 Description. Île Moucha is the E-most island of the Îles
Moucha Group (14.76) and is the most prominent of the
islands. From seaward, the island, which is very
conspicuous has the appearance of a dark-coloured plateau,
about 12 m high, with Île Moucha Lighthouse (14.37)
standing on its NE corner; there are some clumps of
mangroves growing on the island. The island is reported to
give a good radar return.
2 Pointe du Scorpion is the W extremity of Plateau du
Scorpion (14.37) which forms the N part of the island.
Pointe Noire forms the SE corner of the island; Ile du
Large is a small islet situated 6 cables SE of Point Noire.
14.78
1 The W part of the island, previously known as Middle
Island, is connected to its E part by a narrow neck of
drying land on which grow some mangroves. Plateau de
l‘Euphorbe is the area immediately W of this narrow neck
of land; Plateau du Grand Signal forms the W part of this
part of the island. Pointe du Grand Signal is its W
extremity.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14
A beacon (14.37) stands on the NW extremity of the
reef which extends N of the island.
14.79
1 Territorial Park whose limits are shown on the chart,
encloses part of the coral reefs N and E of Île Moucha.
Fishing, the removal of coral, and the collection of
shells are prohibited within the park.
14.80
1 Anchorage may be obtained, as shown on the chart, in
a depth of about 17 m, sand, within a gap in the
surrounding reefs about 7 cables N of Pointe du Scorpion
(14.77) with Île Moucha Light (14.37) bearing about 130°.
This berth affords good shelter during all seasons, but a
good lookout is necessary when approaching the berth so
as to avoid the rocky shoals which lie on both sides of the
entrance to this gap in the reef.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
14.81
1 Marine Reserve, the limits of which are shown on the
chart, encloses the coral reefs S of Île Maskali.
All marine and submarine activity is prohibited within
the reserve.
14.82
1 Anchorage may be obtained, as shown on the chart,
during the NE Monsoon with Île Maskali Light bearing
about 213° and distant about 1 mile, in depths of over
30 m, sand.
‘Ambâda
Chart 253 plan of Mouillage De ‘Ambâda
Position
14.83
1 ‘Ambâda (Khor Ambadu) (11°36′N, 43°00′E) is an inlet
entered on the S side of the Golfe de Tadjourah (14.20).
Description
14.84
1 ‘Ambâda is fronted by numerous shoals, with depths of
about 2 m over them, lying within 6 cables of the coast.
A detached reef, which partly dries, lies about 9 cables
W of the entrance to the inlet.
The inlet extends 5 cables SE between two high, dark,
volcanic cliffs on which grow bushes and shrubs; the inlet
is filled with the coastal reef which dries.
Black Rocks stand close offshore, off the W entrance
point to the inlet.
Anchorage
14.85
1 A good anchorage may be obtained, as shown on the
chart, about 4 cables WNW of the E entrance point to the
inlet, in depths from 24 to 27 m, sand and mud.
This anchorage provides good shelter in both monsoons
and boats can always obtain a landing. After a day of
strong NE winds a vessel may roll heavily at night after
swinging to the light land breeze. This can be avoided by
using a kedge anchor to keep the vessels head ENE.
384
DJIBOUTI
General information
Charts 253, 262 with plan of Port of Djibouti
Position
14.86
1 Djibouti (11°36′N, 43°09′E) is situated in the W part of
the Gulf of Aden, on the S side of the entrance to the
Golfe de Tadjourah (14.20).
Function
14.87
1 Djibouti is an important port and the seat of
Government for the Republic of Djibouti.
In 1999 the population of the town of Djibouti was
about 523 000.
14.88
1 Trade. The main imports consist of all types of
manufactured goods.
The main exports include pulses, beans, oil seeds, oil
cake, hides and skins and the transit of coffee.
Djibouti is an important bunkering port.
Duty Free Zone. A duty free zone is situated close E of
the port area.
Topography
14.89
1 The Port of Djibouti is approached between Plateau du
Héron (11°37′⋅4N, 53°09′⋅0E) (14.123) and Mangadafo
(Pointe Noire) (4
miles WSW).
The town stands on a peninsula formed by plateaux of
coral rocks which stand between 6 m and 7m in height.
Mangadafo is a low point which terminates in two small
hills of a brownish colour.
Oued Ambouli enters the sea over a drying coral reef
close W of Djibouti.
14.90
1 Ouaramous (Bourdêro) (11°33′N, 43°11′E) is an island
standing on the coastal reef at the outer end of a sandy spit
about 5 miles SSE of Plateau du Héron (14.123).
Port limits
14.91
1 The limits of the Port of Djibouti extend 5 miles N from
Mangadafo (11°36′N, 43°04′E) thence 9 miles E, 3 miles
S and 5 miles WSW to Pointe du Héron, as shown on
Chart 262.
Traffic
14.92
1 In 2003 the port was used by 314 vessels.
Port Authority
14.93
1 Port Autonome International de Djibouti, PO Box 2107,
Djibouti, Republic of Djibouti.
The Harbour Master’s office stands at the NE end of
Jetée du Large near the signal station (14.116).
Prohibited areas
14.94
1 A prohibited area, whose limits are shown on the chart,
in which anchoring, dredging and trawling are prohibited
surrounds an area of submarine cables which extends about
8 miles E from the peninsula on which the town of
Djibouti stands; then it extends NE for a further 8 miles
passing W of Banc Somali (14.26) and into the Gulf of
Aden.
14.95
1 A further prohibited area, as shown on the chart, extends
3 miles offshore between a position about 3 miles SSE of
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14
Plateau du Héron (14.123) and the international boundary
separating the Republic of Djibouti from Somalia which
lies about 8 miles farther SE.
Caution
14.96
1 Lights in the vicinity of Djibouti are reported to be
unreliable.
Limiting conditions
Controlling depth
14.97
1 Charted depths of less than 10 m exist off Môle du
Fontainebleau (14.134).
Deepest and longest berth
14.98
1 Deepest berth is Berth No 12 (14.135); Berth No 14
(14.137) is the longest.
Tidal levels
14.99
1 Mean spring range about 1⋅4 m; mean neap range about
0⋅4 m. See information in Admiralty Tide Tables, Volume 3.
Density of water
14.100
1 Density is 1⋅027 g/cm3.
Maximum size of vessel handled
14.101
1 The port can handle vessels up to 300 m in length and
with a maximum draught of 12 m.
Local weather
14.102
1 Winds. During May and the first half of June there is
almost complete calm. Winds from the N are very rare at
Djibouti and the sea is nearly always smooth so the
anchorage is considered safe.
2 The prevailing winds for most of the year are from the
E or NE but rarely reach more than 20 kn. The wind
generally blows initially, weakly from the S or SW, then
turning to the E during the morning, attaining a maximum
strength during the afternoon before reducing during the
night.
3 Gusts of wind called the Khamsin (1.268) frequently
blow from between W and NW between the latter part of
May to mid-September, but they may not start before the
middle of June. The Khamsin is strong, dry, dusty and hot,
never exceeding 30 kn; it is generally experienced on about
50 occasions during a typical summer. The Khamsin may
occur at any time during its prevalent season but will
usually not blow during the afternoon when a sea breeze
prevails.
4 When the Khamsin is blowing at full force the berthing
of vessels may be suspended because of the heavy swell in
the roadstead.
During the SW Monsoon a short choppy sea is
sometimes, but rarely, experienced; it is caused by the
swell on the N side of Golfe de Tadjourah (14.20) being
deflected and entering the anchorages from the NE.
14.103
1 Climatic table. See 1.275 and 1.291.
385
Arrival information
Port operations
14.104
1 Both entry and departure may be made at any time, but
in 1987 it was reported that the best time to berth may be
just before dawn, or just after dark, to avoid the strong
winds which may occur during the hours of daylight.
Port radio
14.105
1 The Port of Djibouti Radio, call sign Comport Djibouti,
controls the operations of the port.
Vessels inward bound should establish a continuous
listening watch on VHF when abeam of Île Maskali Light
(11°42′⋅8N, 43°09′⋅0E).
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Notice of ETA
14.106
1 Vessels should give 48 hours and 8 hours notice of their
ETA; the expected arrival draught should be included in the
initial ETA message.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Anchorages
14.107
1 A waiting anchorage for vessels wishing to anchor
outside the harbour, or for vessels awaiting a pilot, lies
between Banc du Pingouin (11°38′⋅3N, 43°06′⋅9E) and
Récif d’Ambouli, 1 miles S, as shown on the chart.
The anchorage provides good holding in depths of about
20 m, mud and sand.
14.108
1 An anchorage for LASH vessels lies between Récif
d’Ambouli and Môle du Fontainebleau (6 cables ESE) in a
depth of about 15 m, mud, as shown on the chart.
14.109
1 Prohibited anchorage. Anchoring is prohibited, as
shown on the chart, in an area extending about 5 cables
either side of the 184° leading line (14.123) E of Banc
du Pingouin and Récif d’Ambouli. The N limit of the area
is latitude 11°41′N.
Pilotage
14.110
1 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 300 grt and is
available throughout 24 hours.
The pilot boarding position lies 1 cable SW of
No 2 Light-buoy (11°37′⋅6N, 43°07′⋅9E).
The pilot boat is painted white and displays flag H of
the International Code of Signals.
Tugs
14.111
1 Tugs are available. The pilot decides on the number of
tugs required for each movement. During the period from
October to May one tug is the more usual, but from July to
September, two tugs may be required.
Traffic regulations
14.112
1 Restricted area. Small craft are prohibited from entering
an area, shown on the chart, which includes the main port
area and the SW part of Banc du Héron to a position close
SW of No 2 Light-buoy (11°37′⋅6N, 43°07′⋅9E).
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14
Quarantine
14.113
1 Pratique is granted by radio, and should be requested
between 12 hours and 4 hours before arrival.
The Port Health Officer may board with the pilot, or on
arrival alongside.
Harbour
General layout
14.114
1 The Port of Djibouti comprises principally of a main
basin bounded on its NE side by the Jetée du Marabout
(not named on chart) and on its NW side by Jetée du
Large (14.135) which both lie S of Môle Nord (14.136).
Môle du Fontainebleau (14.134) lies at the SW end of
Jetée du Large; Môle du Fontainebleau NW Light (metal
framework tower) is exhibited from the NW corner of the
mole.
2 Môle Sud (14.132) bounds the SE side of the basin.
Jetée du Gouvernement (14.133) extends about
3 cables NW from a causeway connecting the port to a
position on the coast close W of the town of Djibouti; a
fishing harbour lies 3
cables farther SW.
Development
14.115
1 Horizon Terminal Djibouti, which will handle bulk
cargoes, is under construction (2004). It is situated 5 miles
W of Djibouti.
Traffic signals
14.116
1 Traffic signals are shown from a signal station
(11°36′⋅7N, 43°08′⋅1E), a blue building with a flagstaff at
the NE end of Jetée du Large.
14.117
1 Departure signal. If a vessel is about to depart and is
unable to contact the port control station on VHF to
request a pilot, she should sound three long blasts on her
whistle half an hour before the estimated time of departure;
this signal will also summon the tugs and mooring gang.
Tidal streams
14.118
1 The tidal streams in the approaches to Djibouti are
scarcely perceptible.
The out-going stream sets generally E and the in-going
W, at rates rarely attaining 1 kn.
Principal marks
14.119
1 Landmarks:
Gisi (11°29′N, 43°07′E), a hill which stands about
7 miles SSW of Djibouti and is reported to be
easily identified from about 10 miles N of the port.
A pyramid-shaped beacon (11°33′N, 43°05′E)
standing on Fârah ’Ad, a hill which rises to 134 m
about 4 miles SW of Djibouti.
2 Two radio masts (red obstruction lights) (11°36′⋅6N,
43°08′⋅8E) standing on the NW part of Plateau du
Marabout. The tank farms situated on the coast
between these radio masts and Môle Nord are also
prominent.
A prominent water tower, 31m in height, (11°36′⋅2N,
43°09′⋅2E) which stands on Plateau du Serpent.
3 A prominent framework tower (red obstruction lights,
22m in height) (11°37′⋅3N, 43°09′⋅1E), which
stands on the E part of Plateau du Héron.
386
The four gantry cranes (11°36′⋅3N, 43°08′⋅3E) of the
container terminal situated on the S side of Môle
Sud.
Middle Hill (11°21′N, 43°15′E), 135 m in height.
14.120
1 Major lights:
Djibouti International Airport Aero Light (11°33N,
43°09′E) exhibited from a hangar at Djibouti
International Airport.
Leading lights (11°34′N, 43°07′E) (14.123) exhibited
from Ambouli and Hayyâbleï.
Directions
Approaches
14.121
1 Passe Nord lies N of the Îles Moucha (14.76) and is
wide and free from dangers. This passage presents little
difficulty in entering the port to the vicinity of the
anchorage either by day or by night, and is the only
approach which should be used.
For a vessel approaching from the N, the white houses
of the town are very visible especially those on the N part
of the Plateau du Serpent.
14.122
1 Passe Est lies S of the Îles Moucha (14.76) and is only
used by local craft, and, in good visibility, by vessels with
good local knowledge. The use of this passage by
inward-bound vessels is not recommended as landfall E of
Îles Moucha is difficult in poor visibility.
2 Vessels using this passage should pass at least 1 mile N
of Banc du Héron (14.123); and join or leave the main
entrance channel E of Banc du Pingouin (14.123). A
wreck, with a least depth over it of 5 m, lies on the N side
of the passage about 1
miles SSW of Pointe Noire
(14.77) on the S side of Île Moucha.
Entry
14.123
1 Port de Djibouti Leading Lights:
Front light: Ambouli Light (white chevrons on panel,
red top) (11°33′⋅7N, 43°07′⋅4E).
Rear light: Hayyâbleï Light (panel with white bands
and red ends) (5 cables from front).
2 A pyramid-shaped beacon (11°35′⋅2N, 43°07′⋅5E)
standing close to the coast about 1 miles N of the front
light stands in line with the leading lights and with the
E-most summit of Gisi (14.119).
3 From a position about 2 miles NW of the beacon
(11°44′⋅6N, 43°10′⋅1E) standing at the NW extremity of
Îles Moucha (14.76), the alignment (184°) of these lights
leads in the approaches to Djibouti, passing (with positions
given from Môle du Fontainebleau NW Light (11°36′⋅4N,
43°07′⋅9E)):
4 W of Île Maskali Light (red metal tower; 20 m high)
(6 miles N) which is exhibited from the W end
of Île Maskali, the W-most island of Îles Moucha;
this light is liable to be obscured by sandstorms.
Thence:
5 W of Banc Maskali (5 miles N). No 0 Light-buoy
(port hand) is moored off the W end of this bank.
Thence:
E of Récif du Météore (3 miles NNW) (14.37),
thence:
6 E of No 1 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (2 miles
NNW) which is moored about 2 cables E of the
E end of Banc du Pingouin, a coral bank with a
least depth over it of 2⋅8 m, thence:
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14
7 W of No 2 Light-buoy (port hand) (1 miles N)
moored off the NW corner of Banc du Héron, a
drying coral reef which extends about 1 mile W of
Pointe du Héron, the W extremity of Plateau du
Héron (11°37′N, 53°09′E), thence:
8 E of No 3 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (8 cables NW).
14.124
1 The track then continues S through the outer part of the
Port of Djibouti, passing:
W of No 4 Light-buoy (port hand) (4 cables N); a
wreck, with a least depth over it of 3⋅6 m, lies
about 1 cable NNE of the light-buoy close off the
SW corner of Banc du Héron. Thence:
2 W of a light-beacon (white) (3 cables N) which
stands on the SW part of a detached drying reef
which lies close off the SW corner of Banc du
Héron, thence:
3 E of Récif d’Ambouli Light-beacon (green and white
pyramidal tower, name on side) (6 cables WNW)
which stands on E extremity of Récif d’Ambouli, a
detached drying reef; depths of less than 10 m lie
up to 3 cables off the N side of this reef. Ruined
beacons stand 1 cable WNW of the light and at the
W end of the reef; these beacons are not
conspicuous and it is reported that within about
3 hours of high water they appear like black can
buoys. A dangerous wreck, with a least depth over
it of 1 m, lies close off the W end of Récif
d’Ambouli. A further wreck lies about 1 cable
NNW.
4 Thence, as required for berthing.
14.125
1 The 184° lead may easily be seen at night as the
height and characteristics of the rear light allow it to be
easily recognised, but the front light might not be identified
until the vessel is about level with No 2 Light-buoy
(11°37′⋅6N, 43°07′⋅9E).
2 Should the leading lights be obscured by sandstorms,
then, when W of Île Maskali (14.123), Pointe du Héron
(11°37′⋅2N, 43°08′⋅8E) can be brought into line with the
prominent water tower (11°36′⋅2N, 43°09′⋅2E). The
alignment (161°) of these marks leads clear of all dangers
and can be followed to a prudent distance from Plateau du
Héron (14.123) during which time the leading lights may
be identified.
Passe Ouest
14.126
1 It is also possible to approach Djibouti from the W by
Passe Ouest, a channel little more than 1 cable wide, which
leads between Récif d’Ambouli (14.124) and Banc des
Salines (14.127). Passe Ouest must only be used by vessels
of less than 500 grt.
14.127
1 Leading marks:
Front light: Jetée du Gouvernement Light (metal
framework tower) (11°36′⋅1N, 43°08′⋅2E).
Rear mark: Cathedral belfry (11°36′⋅0N, 43°09′⋅1E),
which stands about 8 cables E of Jetée du
Gouvernement Light.
2 The alignment (099°) of these marks, within the green
sector (098°−099°) of Jetée du Gouvernement Light, leads
through Passe Ouest; it should be noted that the white
sector (099°−100
°) of the light leads N of the leading
line. The track leads to the entrance to the main basin
387
(14.129), passing (with positions given from Môle du
Fontainebleau NW Light (11°36′⋅4N, 43°07′⋅9E)):
3 S of Banc de l’Étoile (2
miles WNW), thence:
4 S of Récif d’Ambouli (1 mile WNW). A bank, with
depths of less than 5 m over it, extends S from the
S side of Récif d’Ambouli. And:
5 N of Banc des Salines (1 mile WSW), a drying bank
which lies about 3 cables S of Récif d’Ambouli;
this bank is marked at its W end by a ruined
beacon (white, stone cube, 3m in height), thence:
N of a detached bank (7 cables WSW) with a least
depth of 3⋅8 m over it; a shoal with a depth of
5⋅8 m over it, lies 1 cable farther E. Thence:
6 N of Banc des Salines Light (white, square beacon
with name on side) (3 cables SW); several other
shoals and drying reefs lie between the light and
the bank.
7 A dangerous wreck lies about 1 cables ESE of the
light; a mooring buoy is laid about 1 cables S of
the dangerous wreck. Further wrecks lie between
the mooring buoy and the shore.
Useful marks
14.128
1 Leading lights:
Front light (metal framework tower) (11°36′⋅9N,
43°08′⋅7E).
Rear light (similar structure) (210 m from front).
2 The alignment (073°) of these lights indicates the
approach to Berths Nos 13 to 15 (14.137), passing clear of
an obstruction with a depth of 10⋅1 m over it (1 mile WSW
of front light) which lies close S of the leading line.
Two pylons (white tops) stand between the leading lights
and on the same alignment.
Basins and berths
Chart 262 plan of Djibouti
Main basin
14.129
1 The main basin (11°36′⋅5N, 43°08′⋅1E) is entered
between the SE corner of Môle du Fontainebleau (14.134),
from which Môle du Fontainebleau SE Head Light (metal
framework tower) is exhibited, and the Ro-Ro berth
situated on the SW corner Môle Sud (14.132).
2 The W part of the main basin is dredged; the E part of
the basin, part of which dries, is a dhow anchorage.
A slip is situated in the NE corner of the basin; a cold
store is situated on Berth No 8.
14.130
1 Lights in line:
Front light (11°36′⋅5N, 43°08′⋅2E).
Rear light (61 m from front light).
The alignment (023°) of these lights marks the E limit
of the dredged area.
14.131
1 Berths. There are 8 berths with depths alongside from
1⋅4 to 8⋅3 m. Berth No 6 is 263 m long with an alongside
depth of 8⋅3 m.
Môle Sud
14.132
1 A container terminal with 2 berths is situated on the S
side of Môle Sud (11°36′⋅3N, 43°08′⋅3E); a Ro-Ro berth is
situated in the SW corner of the mole. Berth No 2 is 220 m
long and has a depth of 9⋅9 m alongside.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14
Jetée du Gouvernement
14.133
1 Jetée du Gouvernement extends about 3 cables NW
from a causeway connecting the port with the town of
Djibouti.
2 A Ferry Wharf extends about 75 m N from the N side
of Jetée du Gouvernement, about 120 m from its head; a
channel, dredged to 3⋅0 m, leads to the wharf from a
position S of Môle Sud (14.132).
Môle du Fontainebleau
14.134
1 Môle du Fontainebleau is the SW face of Jetée du Large
(14.135) and is so named as it was built over the wreck of
a ship of that name. The berth is 200 m in length and has a
least depth of 7⋅7 m alongside. Foul ground lies close SW
of the berth, and an obstruction, with a least depth over it
of 10⋅3 m, lies close W.
Jetée du Large
14.135
1 Jetée du Large extends SW along the NW side of the
main basin (14.129) between Môle Nord (14.136) and Môle
du Fontainebleau (14.134).
Berth No 10 is a dolphin berth; Berths No 11 and No 12
are jetties of concrete construction about 90 m long and
22 m wide. All 3 berths are 270 m in length, but Berth
No 12 can accommodate vessels up to 300 m LOA if Berth
No 11 is unoccupied. Berth No 12 is deepest, with 10⋅8 m
alongside.
2 Caution. A line of submerged piles is reported to exist
between the line of the Berths Nos 10, 11 and 12 and the
face of Berth No 13 on Môle Nord.
During the period of the SW Monsoon swells of up to
2⋅5 m have been reported at these berths.
An obstruction with a least depth over it of 9⋅6 m lies
midway between Berth No 11 and Berth No 10.
Port du Héron
14.136
1 Port du Héron (11°36′⋅8N, 43°08′⋅3E) is situated on the
N side of Môle Nord which forms the NNE side of the
main basin.
An area 150 m wide, dredged to 12⋅0 m, lies off the
berths within Port du Héron, although it should be noted
BANKA ARAB TO RAAS CASEYR THENCE SOUTH TO RAAS BINNA
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 6, 2970
Route
14.143
1 The route described in this section initially extends E
from a position about 10 miles E of Banka Arab (11°39′N,
43°40′E) (14.15) which lies in the SE approaches to the
Golfe de Tadjourah (14.20), to a position about 12 miles
NE of Raas Caseyr (11°50′N, 51°17′E) (14.160).
The route then continues S to a position about 15 miles
E of Raas Binna (11°09′N, 51°11′E) (14.161).
14.144
1 The E coast of Africa, S of Raas Binna, is described in
Africa Pilot, Volume III.
388
that considerable shoaling has taken place (2004) in the NE
part of the dredged area.
14.137
1 Berths. There are 3 berths of which Berth No 14, 290 m
in length and with a depth of 12⋅0 m alongside, is the
longest and deepest.
Port services
Repairs
14.138
1 Small repairs can be undertaken; there is a slipway with
a lifting capacity of 400 tonnes in the NE part of the main
basin. A fully equipped salvage vessel is normally stationed
in the port.
Facilities
14.139
1 Deratting and exemption certificates; hospital.
Supplies
14.140
1 Fuel oil and diesel available at all berths except Nos 5
and 6; fresh water available at all berths at all times; fresh
and dry provisions are all available.
Communications
14.141
1 There is an international airport at Djibouti which is
situated on the S side of the town, and there are regular
sea communications with all parts of the world.
Harbour regulations
14.142
1 1. The national flag of the Republic of Djibouti must
be flown as a courtesy ensign during the hours of
daylight throughout the vessel’s stay.
2. Main engines should not be immobilised without
the permission of the Harbour Master.
2 3. Refuse must not be discharged overboard.
4. Bilges must not be pumped out within the port
limits.
5. Spillage of oil during bunkering operations renders
the master liable to a heavy fine.
Topography — Saylac to Boosaaso
14.145
1 Between Saylac (11°21′N, 43°28′E) (14.265) and
Berbera (106 miles SE) (14.162) the coast is low and
sandy, but, within it, the country rises gradually towards
the mountains which stand, on average, about 18 miles to
20 miles inland. The mountains approach the coast 40 miles
W of Berbera, and again at Berbera itself; the recession of
the mountains from the coast between these two points
forms so deep a curve that, from the offing, it appears to
be a large bay.
2 That part of the coast between Saylac and Raas Maskan
(11 miles SSE) (14.272) is low, swampy, and fringed by a
reef; the coast is backed by a range of sandhills between 9
and 12 m high.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14
14.146
1 Between Berbera (10°26′N, 45°00′E) (14.162) and Raas
Khansiir (54 miles ENE) (14.159) the coast is low and
sandy; there are many hills along this section of the coast
at moderate distances inland.
2 From Raas Khansiir (10°52′N, 45°48′E) to Raas Surud
(105 miles ENE) (14.159) the coast is backed by Jebel
Warsangeleh, a range of mountains covered with
frankincense and myrrh trees, which extends about
130 miles farther E from Pyramid Peak (10°42′N, 46°58′E)
which rises to a height of 1480 m. Jebel Warsangeleh lies
between 10 miles and 20 miles inland; it has no
conspicuous peaks being generally even along the whole
range of its summits. Surud Cad (Shimbiris) (10°44′N,
47°15′E), which stands about 16 miles E from Pyramid
Peak, is the highest point of the range and attains a height
of 2410 m; this section of the range is also named Buuraha
Aroor.
3 For at least half of its extent Jebel Warsangeleh is a
limestone ridge, precipitous on its N side, but sloping
gradually on its S. At both ends, and towards the lower
hills between it and the coast, the range descends in steps,
forming generally vertical precipices between 240 m and
300 m high.
4 The coast for 6 miles NE of Raas Jilbo (10°58′N,
47°01′E) (14.233) is sandy, after which it is cliffy as far as
Raas Xatib (4 miles NE) (14.159).
14.147
1 The coast between Raas Surud (11°11′N, 47°32′E)
(14.159) and Raas Kalweyn (27 miles E) (14.159) is low,
sandy and thinly covered with bushes for a short distance
inland.
2 Between Waqaduriya (11°07′N, 47°47′E) (14.242) and
Qoow (71 miles E) (14.340) there is a belt of level ground
near the coast which is thinly sprinkled with bushes
growing on a plain of white sand; inland of this belt the
country is thickly wooded as far as the mountains.
3 Between Raas Kalweyn (11°08′N, 47°55′E) and Raas
Laas Macaan (20 miles ENE) (14.159) the coast continues
to be low and sandy; it is backed a short distance inland
by ranges of undulating hills, two of which are remarkable
from the rough appearance of their cliffs.
14.148
1 Between Raas Lass Macaan (11°12′N, 48°15′E) and
Raas Cadcadde (24 miles ENE) (14.160) the coast is
generally low with an occasional hill, and is backed by
Jebel Warsangeleh (14.146), which, along this section of
the range is called Buuraha Cal Madow.
2 The coast between Raas Cadcadde (11°20′N, 48°40′E)
and Boosaaso (31 miles E) (14.206) is mostly low with
occasional hills. Close E of the group of hills near Raas
Cadcadde, a black tableland of basalt and volcanic rock
approaches the coast in this vicinity; the Jebel Warsangeleh
Range lies between about 18 miles and 21 miles inland.
Chart 2970
Topography — Boosaaso to Raas Caseyr
14.149
1 Between Boosaaso (Bandar Cassim) (11°17′N, 49°11′E)
(14.206) and Raas Axmar (8 miles ENE) (14.160) the coast
continues mostly low with occasional hills.
2 From Raas Axmar (11°20′N, 49°19′E) to Raas Aantaara
(16 miles ENE) (14.160) the coast is sandy, with the
exception of Raas Buur Gaaban; it is backed by a range of
hills, one of which is Bur Madà Marodi (5 miles SE) which
rises to 872 m (2860 ft).
389
The coast between Raas Antaara (11°27′N, 49°34′E) and
Raas Goraggii (Ras Coraghe) (8 miles E) (14.160) is again
sandy and covered with bushes.
14.150
1 Between Raas Goraggii (11°29′N, 49°41′E) and Qandala
(11 miles E) (14.351) the coast is almost steep-to. A ridge
of limestone mountains extends about 32 miles ENE from a
position 17 miles E of Raas Goraggii, following the
direction of the coast to Burraha Dhaxsi (Bur Dhasi) from
where it turns SSE.
2 Between Bandar Murcaayo (Bandar Meraio) (11°41′N,
50°28′E) (14.363) and Raas Felug (Capo Elefante)
(18 miles NE) (14.160) the coast is low and sandy; from
Raas Felug to Raas Caluula (Ras Alula) (14.160), a farther
9 miles ENE, it is low and rocky, and covered in sand.
3 The coast between Raas Caluula (11°59′N, 50°47′E) and
Raas Caseyr (31 miles ESE) (14.160) is fairly straight, a
few rocky points project slightly, with small bays between;
for the first 12 miles ESE from Raas Caluula the coast is
low.
Chart 100
Topography — Raas Caseyr to Raas Binna
14.151
1 The coast between Raas Caseyr (11°50′N, 51°17′E)
(14.160) and Raas Shannaqiif (10 miles S) (14.161) is for
the first 6 miles a fertile valley, full of mimosa trees, with
a stream running through it.
2 The village of Tooxin (Tohen) is situated on the S side
of the stream and consists of about a dozen masonry
houses, three mosques and about 100 other dwellings; the
village shows up well from seaward. Landing can be
effected at the village.
3 Raas Shannaqiif (11°41′N, 51°15′E) (14.161) is the bluff
termination of a tableland over 900 m high. On its seaward
side this tableland falls precipitously for about 120 m;
immediately over the headland the ground from the bottom
of the precipice is much broken in its slope to the sea and
is deeply scoured with rocks.
4 The tableland extends about 5 miles NW of Raas
Shannaqiif to a conspicuous knob. Buur Daralehe (Bur
Daralet) (11°45′N, 51°10′E) a sharp peak, 890 m high,
stands about 2 miles farther N of this knob with a deep
ravine lying between them. Between this sharp peak and
Raas Caseyr the hills recede still farther from the coast, the
land between being undulating, light-coloured ground
resembling coarse sand, rising in a gradual slope from the
coast. This recession of the high land, combined with the
light colour of the slope between it and Raas Caseyr,
causes difficulty in making out any land N of Raas
Shannaqiif at night; this fact has led to many disasters; see
14.157.
14.152
1 The land near Raas Shannaqiif (11°41′N, 51°15′E)
(14.161) and S of it, is dark, contrasting greatly with the
greyish white colour of that between it and Raas Caseyr
(14.160). Cliffs continue from Raas Shannaqiif for 4 miles
SSW.
2 Buuraha Guri Cal (Monti Gural), of which Raas
Shannaqiif is the NE extremity, is a range of mountains in
two parts, with a valley between them, which extends SW
and S.
Buur Xambi (11°34′N, 51°06′E), which rises to a height
of 840 m, stands about 11 miles SW of Raas Shannaqiif;
the mountain appears remarkable from the S owing to the
sudden fall of its S end.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14
3 Buur Qoroloho (Bur Goroloho Albero) (11°26′N,
51°01′E) stands near the N end of the S part of Buuraha
Guri Cal rising to 751 m and is conspicuous.
Buur Hamber (11°20′N, 51°03′E), 113 m high, is a
conspicuous hill.
Togga Ceel Unkud (Wadi Abdehan) enters the sea about
12 miles SSW of Raas Shannaqiif; Egadur is a small
village situated on the coast a short distance farther S.
Charts 6, 2970
Currents
14.153
1 North-east Monsoon. It has been reported that during
the NE Monsoon a S-going current, with rates of between
 kn and 1 kn, was frequently experienced along the S
side of the Gulf of Aden between Djibouti (11°36′N,
43°09′E) (14.86) and Raas Caseyr (480 miles E) (14.160).
During this period a counter-current occasionally sets E
along the African coast between the island of Jasiired
Maydh (11°13′N, 47°14′E) (14.221) and the meridian of
49°E, at rates of between  kn and 2 kn.
14.154
1 At the end of February, in the early part of the last
century, no current was experienced between Berbera
(10°26′N, 45°00′E) (14.162) and Laasqoray (195 miles
ENE) (14.319) except for a slight W-going set off Jasiired
Maydh (14.221).
Somewhat earlier in the century between March and
May variable currents were experienced off the Somali
coast, but usually setting W at a rate of about  kn with
occasional counter-currents near the coast.
14.155
1 South-west Monsoon. During the SW Monsoon an eddy
current sets W along the African coast, at a rate of about
1 kn to a position near the meridian of 45°E. This current
is not continuous and E and S going sets are experienced.
The strongest W-going currents reported along this stretch
of coast during the years 1910 and 1928 were between the
meridians of 48°E and 50°E at rates of about
kn.
2 Again, in the early part of the last century, during the
month of August and about 30 miles offshore in Gubed
Rugguuda (10°50′N, 46°30′E) (14.233), a S-going current
of about 1 kn was experienced, but there was very little
W-going current; yet, at about the same time a WNW
current of about 2 kn was experienced when approaching
Laasqoray (14.319) from the W.
14.156
1 Raas Caseyr. The currents in the vicinity of Raas
Caseyr (11°50′N, 51°17′E) (14.160) are influenced by the
tidal streams, which are irregular, and by the winds, which
are monsoonal in character; see 14.8.
2 During the period of the SW Monsoon the set is
predominantly NE, whilst during the NE Monsoon the set
is W or NW. Rates of up to 2 kn have been reported.
Counter-currents may be experienced close inshore around
the point.
Chart 100
Precautions when rounding Raas Caseyr from south
14.157
1 Many wrecks have occurred on the stretch of coast
which lies S of Raas Caseyr (11°50′N, 51°17′E) (14.160)
and great caution is necessary when steering NW and N
towards and past this headland during the SW Monsoon
when the weather is stormy, the seas heavy, a strong
current is setting and the land is generally obscured by a
thick haze.
390
2 A resemblance exists in the profiles of Raas Caseyr and
Raas Shannaqiif (10 miles SSW) (14.161), but Raas
Shannaqiif rises to a height of about 927 m and Raas
Caseyr to a height of only about 282 m; a broad and
comparatively low sand plain lies between the two points.
3 In hazy weather, at night, the steep fall of Raas
Shannaqiif may perhaps be dimly seen. When the point
bears less than about 270° it often happens that Raas
Caseyr has not been sighted as the haze is thickest near sea
level and the light colour of the point renders it difficult to
see and identify. Under such conditions vessels have
mistaken Raas Shannaqiif for Raas Caseyr and have altered
course W towards the low coast which lies between these
two headlands and have consequently been wrecked.
4 By day, there is usually a gradual change in the colour
of the water from blue to dark green as the land is
approached in this vicinity; the sea also becomes smoother
and the swell tends to come from E of S, to the N and W
of Raas Xafuun (10°27′N, 51°25′E) which lies about
85 miles S of Raas Caseyr. When the land cannot be seen
and identified, extreme caution is necessary.
Principal mark
14.158
1 Major light:
Raas Caseyr Light (round, masonry tower; 20 m in
height) (11°50′⋅0N, 51°16′⋅9E) exhibited from the
summit of Raas Caseyr (14.160) which reaches an
elevation of 282 m.
DIRECTIONS
(continued from 14.15)
Charts 6, 2970
Banka Arab to Raas Caseyr
14.159
1 From a position about 10 miles E of Banka Arab
(11°39′N, 43°40′E) (14.15) the route leads initially about
420 miles E to a position N of Raas Caluula (11°59′N,
50°47′E) (14.160). It then continues for another 40 miles
ESE to a position about 12 miles NE of Raas Caseyr
(11°50′N, 51°17′E) (14.160), passing:
2 N of Raas Khansiir (10°52′N, 45°48′E) which lies
about 3 miles NE of Karin (14.302); the point is
low and rocky with sandy beaches on both its
sides and is easily identified from the NW by a
large, conspicuous, white triangular patch of sand
situated close by, which is itself backed by a dark
hill. Thence:
3 N of Raas Xatib (11°04′N, 47°09′E). The coast for
about 20 miles ENE of the point is low, sandy and
scantily covered with bushes for a short distance
inland. Thence:
N of Jasiired Maydh (11°13′N, 47°14′E) (14.221),
thence:
4 N of Raas Surud (11°11′N, 47°32′E) a low bluff,
thence:
N of Raas Kalweyn (11°08′N, 47°55′E), which lies
about 2 miles ENE of Geelwayte (14.243), is a low
and sandy point; a spur from Jebel Warsangeleh
(14.146) slopes down to the point. Thence:
5 N of Raas Laas Macaan (11°12′N, 48°14′E), which
lies 3 miles NE of Laasqoray (14.319), and is a
low and sandy point. A conspicuous white tower,
numerous other dwellings along with several small
sandhills, all stand on the point. A brackish creek,
which is little more than a swamp, lies close SW
of the point. Thence:
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14
6 N of Raas Gacaan (11°16′N, 48°21′E) a low and
sandy point. Bandar Gaan (14.326) is a small
village situated on the SW side of the point; there
are several inlets in the vicinity of the point, a
fresh water lake is situated close inland from the
village, thence:
7 N of Raas Dhoftille (11°19′N, 48°31′E) is another
low and sandy point; Buur Dhoftille stands close S
of the point and is a remarkable isolated tableland,
149 m high, which appears as an island from a
distance W, thence:
14.160
1 Passing:
N of Raas Cadcadde (Ras Adado) (11°20′N, 48°40′E)
is a rocky cliff, 12 m high, which lies about
3miles ENE of the village of Cadcadde; a little
inland stands a group of hills, and on its E side
there is a flat-topped hill 105 m high. Thence:
2 N of Raas Axmar (11°20′N, 49°19′E) is a remarkable
rocky promontory about 91 m high which appears
red from the W, thence:
3 N of Raas Aantaara (11°27′N, 49°34′E) a high and
rocky point which rises inland to Jebel Antara a
range of mountains, which attains an elevation of
about 1300 m (4265 ft), covered with frankincense
and gum trees. Raas Buur Gaaban is a high, rocky
point situated about 2 miles SW. Thence:
4 N of Raas Goraggii (Ras Coraghe) (11°29′N,
49°41′E) a steep-to, high, rocky point which rises
to a range of limestone table mountains which
extend ESE and attain an elevation of about
1400 m; the sides of these mountains are covered
with frankincense trees. Thence:
5 N of Point Osbolei (11°31′N, 49°57′E) situated about
5 miles ENE of Qandala (14.351), thence:
6 N of Raas Felug (Capo Elefante) (11°56′N, 50°38′E)
a steep-to promontory, 277 m high, which is
prominent and can be seen from a distance of
26 miles, giving a strong radar return at 30 miles.
From E or W it appears like an island, the land in
its vicinity being low; a lagoon and the bed of a
water-course lie in a valley on its E side. A
beacon (three vertically arranged prism-shaped
blocks, black and white bands; 6 m high) stands on
the N part, and summit, of the cape. Thence:
7 N of Raas Caluula (Ras Alula) (11°59′N, 50°47′E) a
low and sandy point. Within Raas Caluula the
plain rises gradually to the high range of
mountains inland. See caution at 14.381.
8 NE of Raas Caseyr (Cape Guardafui) (11°50′N,
51°17′E) which forms the NE extremity of the
Horn of Africa. The cape is steep-to, greyish in
colour, precipitous, rocky, and, from the SE,
appears with a moderate slope to seaward; it is
frequently enveloped in thick haze causing
difficulty in estimating distance from the point.
The summit is covered by a light-coloured sand; a
sandy bay lies W of the point. Raas Caseyr Light
(14.158) is exhibited from the summit of the cape.
(Directions passing north of Suquòrá are given at 15.6
and passing south of Suquòrá at 15.11)
Chart 100
Raas Caseyr to Raas Binna
14.161
1 From a position about 12 miles NE of Raas Caseyr
(11°50′N, 51°17′E) (14.160) the route leads 50 miles S to a
391
position about 15 miles E of Raas Binna (11°09′N,
51°11′E), passing:
2 E of Raas Shannaqiif (11°41′N, 51°15′E) which is
rounded, rocky and steep; it appears as a
remarkably bold and rugged headland, especially
from the SE. Cliffs begin 2 miles N of the cape
which is itself steep-to. Thence:
3 E of Raas Binna (11°09′N, 51°11′E) a steep cliff,
154 m high, situated at the E end of a promontory
which, from the N, appears as an island; the cape
is steep-to.
(Directions south of Raas Binna are
given in Africa Pilot, Volume III)
BERBERA
General information
Charts 6, 3530
Position
14.162
1 Berbera (10°26′N, 45°00′E) is situated in the SW corner
of the Gulf of Aden at the head of an unnamed inlet.
Description
14.163
1 The harbour of Berbera is formed by a low, sandy spit
which extends about 1 miles WSW from the N end of the
town of Berbera and terminates at Raastamar (Tamar Point)
(10°26′⋅7N, 44°58′⋅8E); the area dries that lies on the S
side of the spit.
The SE side of the harbour is fringed by a reef which
extends up to about 2 cables offshore.
14.164
1 The majority of the houses within the town of Berbera
are constructed of masonry.
The custom house, a long two-storey white building,
fronts the shore at the head of the harbour; the police
barracks, also white, stand S of the custom house.
14.165
1 The Shaab (10°26′⋅1N, 45°00′⋅4E) is a residential
quarter of stone houses, surrounded by a wall about 5 m in
height, situated close S of the town of Berbera.
Topography
14.166
1 Raas Calveyn (10°30′N, 45°05′E) is a low, sandy point
situated about 7 miles ENE of Raastamar (14.163).
Buuraha Dubar (Dubriyaad) (10°21′N, 45°08′E) is a
named peak which stands 10 miles SE of Raastamar and
rises to a height of 925 m. Buur Biyoguure rises to a
height of 1005 m about 5 miles NE of Buuraha Dubar.
14.167
1 The coast from abreast Galangareet (10°57′N, 43°45′E)
(14.229) to Berbera (80 miles ESE) has not been closely
examined; there is no known danger except for Galangareet
itself. The coast is mostly steep-to, but great care should be
exercised in approaching it.
Function
14.168
1 Trade. The main imports include cotton goods, sugar,
rice and dates.
The main exports include skins, ghee, gums, sheep and
goats.
14.169
1 Population. The population of Berbera is estimated to
vary between about 15 000 and 30 000 according to the
season.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14

Port limits Arrival information

14.170
Port radio
1 The limits of the Port of Berbera extend, as shown on
14.180
the chart, in a S direction from Raastamar Light (Tamar
1 Berbera Port Control Radio controls the operations of
Point Light) (10°26′⋅6N, 44°58′⋅9E) (14.194) to the position
the port.
on the shore close N of an unnamed light (10°25′⋅2N,
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
44°58′⋅5E) exhibited from the S side of the harbour.
Signals, Volume 6 (3).
Port Authority Notice of ETA
14.171 14.181
1 Somali Ports Authority, PO Box 141, Berbera, Somalia. 1 Vessels should give 48 hours notice of their ETA.
For further information, see Admiralty List of Radio
Tidal streams Signals, Volume 6 (3).
14.172 Outer anchorage
1 The tidal streams within the harbour are almost 14.182
imperceptible. 1 A designated anchorage area, as shown on the chart, is
centred on position 10°26′⋅2N, 45°58′⋅3E about 8 cables
Caution SW of Raastamar Light (14.194).
14.173
1 In 1992 it was reported that all the charted lights within, Pilotage
and in the approaches to, Berbera were extinguished and 14.183
that the charted light-buoys have been removed. Mariners 1 Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 200 nrt; pilots
are advised to proceed with caution. are available throughout 24 hours.
2 It has subsequently been reported that new light-buoys As shown on the chart, in good weather the pilot
have been established in the following positions: embarks from a position within the designated outer
10°26′⋅8N, 44°58′⋅3E. anchorage (14.182) about 9 cables SW of Raastamar Light
10°26′⋅5N, 44°58′⋅8E. (14.194); during periods of bad weather the pilot embarks
10°26′⋅0N, 44°58′⋅8E. within the area of the inner anchorage (14.195) about
10°26′⋅6N, 45°00′⋅1E. 5 cables SE of Raastamar Light.
Chart 3530 will be updated in due course, when further The pilot boards from a tug.
details become available. Tugs
14.184
1 A tug is available; there are also some towing launches.
Limiting conditions
Quarantine
Chart 3530 14.185
Controlling depth 1 Vessels arriving from an infected area must fly the
14.174 International Code Flag Q by day, and two red lights,
1 Controlling depth in the approach is about 12 m. vertically disposed, by night.
All vessels are boarded on arrival by the port medical
Deepest and longest berth authorities; no communication with boats or with the shore
14.175 is permitted until pratique has been granted.
1 The main quay is about 640 m in length, with a least
charted alongside depth of 9⋅0 m. Harbour
General layout
Tidal levels 14.186
14.176 1 The main facilities of the port are situated on the S side
1 See information in Admiralty Tide Tables, Volume 3. of the harbour.
Mean spring range about 1⋅5 m; mean neap range about
0⋅5 m.
Principal marks
14.187
1 Landmarks:
Density of water A ruined white house (10°27′⋅1N, 44°59′⋅6E) which
14.177 stands on the N side, of the middle part, of the
1 Density 1⋅025 gms/cm3. sandy spit which forms the N side of the harbour.
A sheikh’s tomb (10°26′⋅9N, 44°59′⋅7E) which stands
Local weather on a small island on the N side of the harbour,
14.178 about 400 m SSE of the ruined white house.
1 Though the climate is intensely hot during the period of 2 A conspicuous tank farm (10°25′⋅8N, 44°59′⋅7E)
the SW Monsoon, it is not unhealthy; during the NE situated on the S shore of the harbour, SE of the
Monsoon it is comparatively cool and agreeable. Oil Terminal Berth (14.197). The tanks are
During the NE Monsoon, even with a good breeze illuminated at night; they are reported to be radar
blowing outside the harbour, it is generally calm within the conspicuous.
harbour. 3 A mosque (10°26′⋅0N, 45°00′⋅4E) with a conspicuous
14.179 minaret stands close outside the SW corner of The
1 Climatic table. See 1.275 and 1.292. Shaab (14.165).

392
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14
A conspicuous minaret (10°26′⋅6N, 45°00′⋅5E) stands
within the town of Berbera.
Directions for entering harbour
(Directions for the southern side of the
Gulf of Aden are given at 14.159)
Approach
14.188
1 From a position in the vicinity of 10°35′N, 44°55′E,
about 10 miles NNW of the entrance to Berbera Harbour,
the approach leads SSE, passing W of a light-buoy (red
and white can) (10°27′⋅1N, 45°58′⋅2E) and W of a further
light-buoy (green and red spar) (10°26′⋅5N, 45°58′⋅3E)
moored about 5cables W of Raastamar Light (14.194),
thence through the Outer Anchorage area (14.182) to the
fair weather pilot boarding position (14.183).
14.189
1 Cautions. The navigational buoys are not maintained by
the port authorities; all navigational aids are reported to be
unreliable and should be used with caution.
14.190
1 Great care is necessary when approaching Berbera for
the first time as the navigational lights may not be visible,
owing to frequent dust-storms.
14.191
1 During the trading season, from October to March, the
navigational lights at the entrance to the harbour may be
difficult to distinguish from the riding lights of local craft
anchored close inshore nearby.
Entry
14.192
1 From the fair weather pilot boarding position (14.183)
the track to the inner harbour leads about 2 miles E,
passing (with positions given from Raastamar Light
(10°26′⋅6N, 44°58′⋅9E)) (14.194):
S of light-buoy (red spar) (2 cables SSW), and:
N of light-buoy (green and red spar) (6
cables
SSW), thence:
14.193
1 Berbera Leading Lights:
Front light (red and white framework tower, 12 m in
height) (10°26′⋅6N, 45°00′⋅4E) exhibited from the
outer end of the Customs Pier.
Rear light (similar structure, 16 m in height) (190 m
from front).
The alignment (068°) of these lights leads through the
harbour, passing (with positions given from front leading
light):
2 SSW of Raastamar Light (1 miles W) (14.194) and
the S extremity of the sandy spit, thence:
NNW of the Oil Terminal (1 mile WSW) (14.197)
and SSW of the inner anchorage area (14.195) and
the bad weather pilot boarding position (14.183);
thence:
3 To the area of the harbour off the main commercial
quay (6 cables SW) (14.198).
Caution. In 1975 it was reported that the marks on the
leading lights were difficult to distinguish by day.
Useful marks
14.194
1 Raastamar Light (Tamar Point Light) (white column,
red bands) (10°26′⋅6N, 44°58′⋅9E) exhibited from
the W end of the sandy spit which forms the N
side of the harbour.
393
Light (white tower, black bands) (10°25′⋅2N,
44°58′⋅5E) on S side of harbour.
Berths
Inner anchorage
14.195
1 A designated Inner Anchorage, as shown on the chart,
which affords good anchorage sheltered from all but W
winds, lies on the N side of the harbour, ESE of Raastamar
Light (10°26′⋅6N, 44°58′⋅9E) (14.194).
In 1993 silting was reported in the E part of the inner
anchorage area.
Two mooring buoys are laid in the N part of the
anchorage.
14.196
1 Cautions. Care should be taken to anchor such that,
whatever the direction of the wind, the vessel lies clear and
N of the entry leading line (14.193).
Though the holding ground in the anchorage is reported
to be good, between the months of June and September, an
anchor berth should be chosen with plenty of room to pay
out more cable if necessary on account of the frequency of
the Kharif Winds (1.268).
Oil Terminal
14.197
1 Berbera Oil Terminal Berth consists of a steel pier
which extends about 2 cables NW from the S shore of
the harbour, close within the entrance to the port, and close
NW of the conspicuous tank farm (14.187).
Eight mooring buoys are laid off the head of the
terminal pier.
2 In 1983 it was reported that tankers, with a draught up
to 10⋅7 m, moored bows N with both anchors down and
secured amidships and aft to four of the mooring buoys.
Cargoes are then discharged over the vessels stern, through
a floating hose, connected to the platform at the head of
the jetty.
3 It was also reported that shallow draught tankers with
draughts of up to 7⋅6 m moor between the mooring buoys
and discharge from amidships.
In 1987 it was reported that the terminal is unusable
between November and April because of the prevailing
weather conditions.
4 In 1993 it was reported that the oil terminal was
damaged and the storage facilities were non operational due
to lack of power; it was also reported at this time that
some of the mooring buoys were partially submerged.
Commercial Quay
14.198
1 The Commercial Quay, 640 m in length, is situated on
the S side of the harbour, about 6 cables NW of The
Shaab; the quay is connected to the shore by bridges and
causeways.
There is a least charted depth alongside the quay of
9⋅0 m.
2 A jetty extends 100 m N from the NE end of the
commercial quay; a wreck lies off its E side.
Ro-Ro Berth. A Ro-Ro berth is situated at the W end
of the commercial quay where vessels berth with two
anchors down.
Shaab Pier
14.199
1 Shaab Pier extends NNW from the S side of the shore
NNW of The Shaab; there is a depth of 5⋅8 m off the head
of the pier.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14

A number of wrecks are reported to lie in the close Dangers

vicinity of the pier; others are reported within the inner 14.209
harbour. 1 Dangerous coral reefs extend up to 3 cables offshore in
the vicinity of Boosaaso.
Military Jetty
14.200 Climatic table
1 The Military Jetty is connected by a sandspit to the 14.210
shore E of the root of Shaab Pier; a small pier which dries 1 See 1.275 and 1.293.
on both sides extends about 30 m NNW from near the E
end of the jetty; a mooring buoy is laid NE of the jetty. Arrival information
Customs Pier Outer anchorages
14.201 14.211
The Customs Pier is a stone pier which extends about 1 An open anchorage may be obtained off Boosaaso; the
120 m WSW from a drying wharf situated at the head of best berth is about 1 miles offshore, in depths of about
the harbour. 18⋅3 m (60 ft).
Depths decrease regularly from this position to the shore
and anchorage is reported to be good about 6 cables
Port services offshore in depths of about 12 m (39 ft).
2 Anchorage may also be obtained about 2 cables NW of
Facilities the molehead light in a depth of about 8⋅0 m (26 ft), as
14.202 shown on the plan.
1 Workshop for minor repairs; hospital; dental facilities.
14.203
Harbour
1 In 1993 damage was reported to much of the facilities
of the port including the administration building, workshop, General layout
transit sheds, craneage and mechanical equipment. 14.212
1 The Port of Boosaaso consists of an inner basin, aligned
Supplies N/S, protected from N by a mole which extends about
14.204 420 m W; a light (red column with ladder) is exhibited
1 Fresh water is available at the commercial quay only; from the head of the mole. On the W side of the port a
(between June and September fresh water may not be breakwater extends about 200 m NE from the shore.
available); fresh provisions (limited supplies).
Fuel oil is not available. Directions for entering harbour
Communications Approach
14.205 14.213
1 The nearest commercial airport is at Hargeisa 160 km 1 From a position in the vicinity of 11°30′N, 49°10′E the
SW of the port; a military airport is located about 6 km approach leads about 12 miles S to a position on the line of
SW of The Shaab; regular sea communication with Aden. the leading lights (14.214).

Entrance channel
14.214
BOOSAASO
1 Leading lights:
Front (red triangle, point up, white bands; on white
General information post with platform) (11°17′⋅1N, 49°10′⋅8E).
Rear (red triangle, point down, white bands; on
Charts 2950 plan of Bosasso, 2970 similar structure) (about 90 m from front).
Position 2 The alignment (138°) of these lights leads to a position
14.206 W of the harbour entrance. Mariners should note that the
1 Boosaaso (Bosasso) (Bandar Cassim) (Bender Cassim on former 148° leading line shown on the plan is no longer in
Chart 2970) (11°17′N, 49°11′E) is situated in the SE part use; the lights have been extinguished, although the
of the Gulf of Aden. structures remain. The track passes (with positions given
from front light):
Description SW of a shoal patch (8 cables NNW) with a least
14.207 depth over it of 10⋅4 m (34 ft), thence:
1 The town of Boosaaso consists of a large number of 3 Between the seaward ends of the mole and the
masonry houses and many other dwellings with several breakwater (3 cables NW).
forts and towers which appear light brown or white from Caution. Mariners are advised to keep slightly NE of
seaward. The town itself is easily identified by the broad the leading line to avoid a shoal with depths of less than
plain in its vicinity; there is a remarkable gap in the coastal 2 m (6 ft) over it which extends NE from the end of the
range near-by. breakwater.
It has been reported that a new breakwater exists on the
Topography W side of Boosasso Harbour. The breakwater extends NE
14.208 from the shore to approximate position 11°17′⋅3N,
1 The bed of a stream, which flows after heavy rain, 49°10′⋅6E.
reaches the sea about 1 miles W of the town. Chart 2950 will be updated with this information when
See also 14.148 and 14.149. more details become available.

394
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14

14.215 Currents
1 The S end of the approach and entry channel is 14.223
generally indicated by two or three dhows being anchored 1 For currents in the vicinity of Jasiired Maydh, see
in this vicinity. 14.153.

Landing beach Anchorages in the vicinity of Jasiired Maydh

14.216
1 There is a good landing beach situated at the S end of
an inner approach channel, in which there are depths from
0⋅6 to 4⋅6 m, which leads between the off-lying coastal
reefs, from the S end of the main approach and entry
channel (14.214).
During NE winds the sea breaks heavily on this coast
and completely stops any communication with the shore by
boat.
Berths
Anchorage
14.217
1 Small vessels with local knowledge may obtain
anchorage about 2 cables NNW of the front light in depths
from 2⋅4 to 3⋅4 m (8 ft and 11 ft), sand and soft mud.
Alongside berths
14.218
1 The main berth is on the S side of the mole and is
153 m in length with a depth of 6⋅5 m alongside. There is
also a Ro-Ro berth with a similar depth alongside.
In the inner basin are three berths, each with an
alongside depth of 3⋅5 m.
Caution. It has been reported that the berths are being
upgraded and Chart 2950 will be amended with this
information when it becomes available.
Port services
Facilities
14.219
1 In 1993 it was reported that there was no port
equipment, and that shore structures and the administration
block had all been destroyed.
Supplies
14.220
1 Fresh supplies of mutton and fish are reported to be
available.
JASIIRED MAYDH
Chart 6
Position
14.221
1 Jasiired Maydh (Maydh Island) (11°13′N, 47°14′E) lies
about 11 miles NNE of Raas Xatib (14.159).
Description
14.222
1 Jasiired Maydh is an island rising to 131 m in height
and covered with guano.
There is a remarkable cove in the S side of the island
the entrance to which is blocked by large stones which
have fallen from the cliffs above.
A spit, with a least depth over it of 3⋅7 m, extends about
1 cable from the E extremity of the island.
14.224
1 Small vessels may obtain good anchorage about 1 cable
off Raas Xatib (11°04′N, 47°09′E) (14.159) in depths of
22 m, sand.
14.225
1 Senacca. Excellent anchorage is available for small
vessels off Senacca (not charted by name) which lies
5 miles ENE of Raas Xatib. This anchorage is sheltered by
a sandspit extending from the coast; the spit is low and
difficult to make out from seaward, but, by steering for the
coast, about 5 cables E of a prominent strip of shrubs, it
will soon be visible.
2 Topography. Raas Xumbays (11°08′N, 47°17′E), which
lies 4 miles ENE of Senacca, is a low and sandy point.
Quoin Hill, (not charted) which rises to 795 m, stands
about 7 miles ESE of Raas Xumbays but can only be
identified from N.
3 Landing is very good at Senacca as the spit affords
complete shelter from the sea when the NE Monsoon is
blowing.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
INLETS AND BAYS
Kh r Salbal
Chart 253
Description
14.226
1 Khr Salbal (11°07′N, 43°35′E) (not charted by name) is
an inlet reported to be connected by a swamp or backwater
with Khoor Galangareet (8 miles SSE) (14.228).
The coast between these two inlets is low and sandy
with a range of sandhills rising between 1 mile and 2 miles
within the coast.
A dangerous shoal, over which the sea breaks heavily at
times, lies about 1 miles ESE of the entrance to the inlet.
Anchorage
14.227
1 An anchorage within the inlet is much frequented during
moderate weather by small vessels.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Khoor Galangareet
Description
14.228
1 Khoor Galangareet (11°00′N, 43°39′E) (not charted by
name) may be entered by small vessels, but only at high
water.
A low, sandy plain extends from the inlet to the base of
the mountains about 20 miles inland.
Off-lying dangers
14.229
1 Shacaabi Salbaal (11°03′N, 43°41′E) is a dangerous reef
which lies 3 miles NNE of Khoor Galangareet; the S part
of the reef dries.
Galangareet (10°57′N, 43°45′E) is another dangerous
reef which lies 6 miles SE of Khoor Galangareet.

395
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14
Gubed Canqor
Chart 6
Description
14.230
1 Gubed Canqor (10°50′N, 46°00′E) is a bay, formed by a
slight recession of the coast, which is entered between Raas
Khansiir (10°52′N, 45°48′E) (14.159) and Ankhor (24 miles
ESE), a ruined village situated on the coast.
The shores of the bay are low and sandy with bushes
growing on them.
Khoor Shoora
14.231
1 Khoor Shoora (10°49′N, 45°52′E) is a shallow lagoon
entered about 3 miles SE of Raas Khansiir (10°52′N,
45°48′E) (14.159).
Anchorage
14.232
1 Anchorage may be obtained within Gubed Canqor, the
best berth being in the vicinity in Raas Khansiir over sand.
Anchorage may also be obtained off Ankhor (14.230)
about 6 cables offshore in depths of about 13 m, sand and
coral; a drying rock lies close offshore in this vicinity.
Local knowledge is required for the use of both these
anchorages.
Gubed Rugguuda
Description
14.233
1 Gubed Rugguuda (10°45′N, 46°30′E) is a bay entered
between Ankhor (10°47′N, 46°12′E) and Raas Jilbo
(50 miles ENE), a steep-to, low and sandy point.
The coast is low, sandy, and, a short distance inland, is
backed, by ranges of undulating hills.
A considerable swell sets into the bay at times, even
during the NE Monsoon, rendering landing dangerous. The
shores of the bay are fringed in places by a shallow bank.
14.234
1 Raguda (Ragguuda) (10°42′N, 46°37′E) is a village
which stands about 2 miles in from the coast; a ruined
village stands close to the shore N of Raguda. There is a
large lagoon in this vicinity and a lot of vegetation.
Togga Nasiga (W
di Nasuja) is a deep ravine, with a
stream running through it which enters the bay about
15 miles ESE of Ankhor (14.230); several other small
streams reach the sea in this vicinity.
14.235
1 Mulaax Beyle (10°46′N, 46°43′E) is a village on the
coast standing on Raas Shuula. The village, which consists
of a few stone buildings and a number of other dwellings,
stands at the mouth a stream and can be identified by the
vegetation in the vicinity; the village is inhabited during the
trading season from October to May.
Landing can be effected at the village.
14.236
1 Xiis (10°54′N, 46°55′E) is a village situated on the
shore of a small bay situated about 15 miles ENE of Raas
Shuula; the village, which consists of some stone houses
and other dwellings, has been abandoned. A white house
and a fort are the most prominent structures within the
village.
Landing can be effected near the village at any state of
the tide.
396
14.237
1 Jasiired Xiis (Xiis Islet) forms the NE side of the small
bay off the village of Xiis; the islet is 52 m high and rocky
and is connected with the mainland by a causeway which
dries about 0⋅6 m. A dangerous rock lies about 140 m N of
the islet; a conspicuous above-water rock is situated close S
of the islet.
2 Gees Salweyn is a bluff which stands about  km SE of
Jasiired Xiis and rises to a height of 171 m; a steep ridge
extends SW of the bluff to a gap SE of the village.
Some coral reefs lie awash near the SW end of a bank
which fronts the shore of the anchorage off Xiis.
Principal marks
14.238
1 Landmarks:
Haycock (10°40′N, 46°34′E) is a peak which rises to
320 m about 11 miles SW of Mulaax Beyle
(14.235).
Finger Peak (10°44′N, 46°47′E) is a pointed peak
which stands 4 miles SSE of Mulaax Beyle.
Pyramid Peak (10°42′N, 46°58′E) (14.146) stands
about 12 miles S of Xiis (14.236) and rises to a
height of 1480 m.
Anchorages
14.239
1 Anchorage has been obtained off that part of the coast
in the vicinity of Ragguuda (10°42′N, 46°37′E) (14.234), in
depths of about 13 m; the holding ground in this vicinity is
reported to be exceptionally good.
2 Anchorage may also be obtained off Mulaax Beyle
(14.235), in a depth of about 24 m, with Finger Peak
(14.238) bearing 130°, and Jasiired Xiis (14.237) bearing
060°.
An anchorage, sheltered from winds from E of NE, is
obtainable with the centre of Jasiired Xiis bearing 057°, in
depths of 22 m.
14.240
1 A number of years ago anchorage was obtained by a
moderate sized vessel, sheltered from strong N winds, in a
depth of about 13 m in a good holding ground, with the
centre of Jasiired Xiis bearing 041°, distant 1 cables.
Some time later a similar sized vessel anchored in
depths of 23 m with Jasiired Xiis bearing 053° and the fort
in the village bearing 165°.
Ghubbet Kalweyn
Description
14.241
1 Ghubbet Kalweyn (11°10′N, 47°40′E) is a moderate
sized bay entered between Raas Surud (11°11′N, 47°32′E)
(14.159) and the village of Waqaduriya (15 miles ESE).
14.242
1 Waqaduriya (11°07′N, 47°47′E) is an inconspicuous
village consisting of two forts and a large number of other
dwellings which is inhabited during the trading season
between the months of October and May.
A bank, with depths of less than 5⋅5 m over it, fringes
the coast from a point about 3 miles ENE of Waqaduriya
for a farther 8 miles E, extending up to about 1 mile
offshore.
14.243
1 Geelwayte (11°07′N, 47°55′E) is a village situated about
7miles E of Waqaduriya; the village consists of a few
dwellings, which are only inhabited during the trading
season; the village shows up fairly well from seaward.
Landing at Geelwayte is bad.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14
Principal mark
14.244
1 Landmark:
Buur Waliga (11°01′N, 47°36′E) is a prominent
feature which stands about 11 miles SSE of Raas
Surud (14.159).
Anchorages
14.245
1 Anchorage may be obtained off Waqaduriya (14.242)
which is sheltered from winds from E of ENE in depths of
about 18 m.
When approaching this anchorage care must be taken to
avoid a rocky spit, which is not easily seen, projecting
from the coast fronting the village.
Good landing may be made W of the rocky spit.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
14.246
1 Anchorage may be obtained off Geelwayte (14.243), in
depths of 13 m, about 8 cables offshore.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Goor Felug
Chart 100
Description
14.247
1 Goor Felug (Qoor Felug) (11°50′N, 50°32′E) is an inlet
in which there is a maximum depth of 1⋅2 m, except in the
entrance where there is a depth of 2⋅4 m; the inlet is
mostly swampy and covered with mangroves.
The W side of the inlet is formed by a long, narrow,
sandy ridge; a bank, over which there are depths of less
than 5 m, fringes the coast in the vicinity of the inlet
extending up to about 8 cables offshore.
2 A stranded wreck lies close off the coast about 5 miles
N of Xabo; in 1967 the wreck was reported to be visually
and radar conspicuous.
14.248
1 Xabo (11°47′N, 50°32′E) is a village situated on the S
side of the entrance to Goor Felug; it consists of several
forts, one of which is prominent, a mosque, some stone
houses and some other dwellings.
Anchorages
14.249
1 It has been reported that good anchorage is available for
larger vessels with the prominent fort at Xabo bearing
144°, a little over 5 cables distant, in depths of about 31 m.
14.250
1 Anchorage may also be obtained 5 cables off Xabo in
depths of about 15 m, over a moderately good holding
ground, sand. A stranded wreck lies closeby.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
14.251
1 Anchorage may also be obtained with the prominent fort
at Xabo bearing about 090° in depths from about 11 to
13 m. It is reported that the mosque and the middle fort,
which stands farther N of the village, when in line, lead to
this anchor berth.
2 A good scope of cable is necessary in this berth to
prevent dragging the anchor off the bank, into the deeper
water into which the bank suddenly falls about 4 cables or
5 cables offshore. Depths here are irregular, increasing
suddenly from about 13 to 22 m and 46 m; it is reported
397
that a vessel which anchored in a depth of about 13 m
found a depth of 31 m at her stern.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
14.252
1 Small vessels may be obtain excellent anchorage off the
entrance to Goor Felug in depths of about 10 m.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Khor Galuen
Chart 2950 plan of Alula
Description
14.253
1 Khor Galuen (11°59′N, 50°46′E) is a lagoon which is
separated from the Gulf of Aden by a narrow finger of
land extending from the coast about 3 miles ENE of
Caluula (14.378); Raas Caluula (14.160) forms the NW
point of this narrow finger.
14.254
1 Local knowledge is required to enter the lagoon.
Gubed Binna
Chart 100
Description
14.255
1 Gubed Binna (Ghubbat Binnah) (11°15′N, 51°08′E) is a
bay entered between a shallow point E of Buur Runyo
(14.262), a sandhill; and Raas Binna (18 miles SSE)
(14.161).
The coast of the bay consists of a plain covered with
bushes backed about 4 miles inland by the S part of
Buuraha Guri Cal.
14.256
1 Xoor Binna (11°09′N, 51°08′E) is a lagoon situated
close W of Raas Binna (14.161).
Local weather
14.257
1 A dangerous surf is experienced on the shores of Gubed
Binna when the NE Monsoon is blowing in this area. The
wind resembles a land and sea breeze. In the early hours of
the morning it is light from the NNW and gradually veers
NE; at about 0900 it commences to blow strongly from the
NE and continues until 2200 when it becomes light from
the W.
Landing
14.258
1 Landing can be effected easily in the bay between
1 hour before and 2 hours after sunrise.
Bargaal
14.259
1 Bargaal (11°17′N, 51°05′E) is one of several villages,
with forts, which stand on the shores of Gubed Binna; the
village consists of about 50 dwellings, the ruins of several
stone houses and the old residence of the Sultan.
Many prominent oases of date palms stand N and W of
Bargaal; the village can also be identified by a steep bluff
at the mouth of a wadi.
2 A ruined fort stands about 2 miles S of Bargaal;
between the fort and the wadi Togga Gondole, which enters
the bay 6 miles farther S, there are several ruined villages.
14.260
1 Landing can be effected in fine weather within a small
bay at Bargaal.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14
14.261
1 Anchorage may be obtained about 4 cables off Bargaal
in depths from 5 to 10 m, but this berth is open to both
monsoons and the holding ground of stones is poor.
Principal mark
14.262
1 Landmark:
Buur Runyo (11°25′N, 51°04′E) a rounded sandhill
which stands near the coast about 18 miles SSW
of Raas Shannaqiif (14.161). The hill is well
detached from the mountains which rise farther
inland; a large tract of sand extending N of this
sandhill also makes a good landmark as it is the
only white sand in this locality.
Anchorage
14.263
1 Anchorage may be found off the mouth of the wadi
Togga Gondole which enters the S part of the bay about
4 miles W of Raas Binna (14.161); the village of
Gondole which formally stood in the area no longer exists.
This anchorage is the best within Gubed Binna and may be
obtained in a depth of not less than about 13 m; the berth
is sheltered from S winds.
2 The anchorage is not often subject to heavy squalls from
the high land, but squalls from the SW are probably not
uncommon between June and September.
14.264
1 Landing can be effected in this locality without
difficulty between 1 hour before sunrise and 2 hours after.
COASTAL SETTLEMENTS
Saylac
Chart 253
Description
14.265
1 Saylac (Zeila) (11°21′N, 43°28′E) is a small town built
on a low, sandy spit situated about 24 miles SE of Djibouti
(14.86) and consists of a number of stone houses and other
dwellings.
The land in the vicinity of Saylac is low; shoals extend
a considerable distance offshore.
Caution
14.266
1 There are no distinct landmarks by which to visually fix
a vessels position until close off the off-lying reefs and
shoals.
Landmarks
14.267
1 From about 1 mile seaward of Shaab Filfil (11°27′N,
43°35′E) (14.274), given a sufficient height of eye, the
following landmarks, as well as the town of Saylac itself,
should be visible:
A beacon (sand-coloured truncated cone; black ball
topmark) (11°30′⋅8N, 43°28′⋅0E) which stands on
the N part of Ceebaad (14.268); the beacon is
usually only visible when the sun is in a
favourable position.
2 Saacada Diin (11°26′N, 43°28′E) (14.269) which is
usually the first off-lying island to be identified.
398
Conical Hill (11°17′⋅6N, 43°17′⋅9E), which stands
about 11 miles WSW of Saylac and rises to a
height of 118 m, may be useful in periods of clear
weather.
Off-lying islands
14.268
1 Ceebaad (11°30′N, 43°27′E) is a low and sandy island,
covered with bushes, situated about 8 miles N of Saylac
(14.265); it lies on the W part of an extensive reef which
dries in places.
A beacon (14.267) stands on the N part of the island.
14.269
1 Saacada Diin (11°26′N, 43°28′E) is a low, coral island
which is situated about 2 miles S of Ceebaad; it is mostly
covered in bushes the tops of which attain an elevation of
about 6 m. The island lies on a drying bank of coral, mud,
and sand.
2 The passage S of the island, which lies between it and
Raas Tokhoshi (11°23′N, 43°25′E), a point situated
3 miles SW, is almost completely blocked by a line of
drying sandbanks.
The village of Tokhoshi lies close SE of the point.
14.270
1 Mosheykh (11°26′N, 43°22′E) consists of two main
islets, and a further smaller islet off their SW side, all of
which lie on the coastal reef about 6 miles ESE of Râs
Gumarlah (14.27); both main islets are covered with
bushes.
A boat channel passes N of the islets.
Off-lying dangers
14.271
1 From the SE part of the edge of the coastal reef fronting
the E side of Râs Gumarlah (11°29′N, 43°17′E) (14.27) a
narrow sandbank, which partially covers at high water,
extends about 5 miles NNE. There is a clump of bushes
growing on the sandbank about 1
miles from its inner
end; bushes probably grow on other parts of the bank; less
water than charted is reported off the E side of the
sandbank.
2 Shaab Turuxaad is a drying reef off the NNE end of the
narrow sandbank; dangerous rocks lie between the bank
and the reef.
14.272
1 Shacaabi Shiikh Yacquub (11°18′N, 43°33′E) is a
dangerous shoal which lies about 5 miles ESE of Saylac
(14.265), a number of dangerous rocks stand on the shoal.
A rocky shoal, with a least depth over it of 4 m, lies
midway between Shacaabi Shiikh Yacquub and the coast.
2 A dangerous reef lies 3 miles ENE of Raas Maskan
(11°11′N, 43°33′E) a promontory situated about 11 miles
SSE of Saylac. The coast between the promontory and
Khr Salbal (4 miles SSE) (14.226) is fringed by a rocky
bank.
14.273
1 Channel Reef (11°28′N, 43°33′E) lies in the NE
approaches to the anchorage in Saylac roadstead (14.283).
The reef, which is composed of coral, is marked on its E
side by a buoy (white conical, white can topmark).
14.274
1 Shaab Filfil (11°27′N, 43°35′E) is a reef which lies in
the E approaches to the anchorage (14.283); the reef never
dries but depths over it are very shallow.
Caution. Neither Shaab Filfil (14.274) nor Siigaale
(14.275) are clearly visible; the passage between them
should not be attempted.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14

14.275 Landing
1 Siigaale (Sea Gull Shoal) (11°25′N, 43°36′E), which lies 14.284
about 1 miles SE of Shaab Filfil, is another reef which 1 A stone pier is situated at the NW end of the town; the
never dries; another detached reef lies about 1 mile W. pier is inaccessible by boats within 3 hours of low water.
See caution at 14.274. The customs house stands at the root of the pier.
Facilities
Tidal streams 14.285
14.276 1 Small hospital; dispensary.
1 At springs, the tidal streams usually set W through
Saylac roadstead during the period of the in-going stream,
Supplies
14.286
and E during the out-going stream, at rates of about  kn,
1 Water is available but is of indifferent quality and is
but the direction is much influenced by the winds.
difficult to obtain.

Current Lughaye
14.277 Chart 6
1 A current, the direction of which is usually with the Position
wind, but not always, often sets along the coast off Saylac; 14.287
this current sometimes attains a rate of
kn. 1 Lughaye (10°41′N, 43°56′E) is situated about 20 miles
In Saylac roadstead, the current often sets against the SE of Galangareet (14.229).
wind although the latter may be fairly strong.
Description
14.288
Climate 1 Lughaye is a settlement near the coast and is also the
14.278 name given to the surrounding district.
1 The heat at Saylac is excessive during the SW Monsoon; The settlement may be identified by two small clumps
more than half of the local population move to the higher of palm trees which show up well from both the SE and
land of the interior during this period. NW.
A dangerous shoal bank fringes the coast off Lughaye
Approaches extending up to about 7 cables offshore.
14.279 Topography
1 Saylac is approached passing either side of Channel 14.289
Reef (14.273); the best time for entry to the roadstead is in 1 The coast from abreast Galangareet (10°57′N, 43°45′E)
the morning. (14.229) to Lughaye is mostly steep-to, but great care
14.280 should be exercised in approaching it.
1 Approaching from N, it is advisable to make for The low coast in this vicinity is covered with brushwood
Ceebaad (14.268) as its beacon, poor as it is, is the best for many miles.
mark available.
Landmark
From a position E of the beacon on Ceebaad, and the
14.290
partially drying reef which surrounds the island, steer SSW
1 Jebel Almis (10°22′N, 44°13′E) which stands near the
passing WNW of Channel Reef (14.273) keeping in the
coast, about 25 miles SE of Lughaye, is rugged
deeper water until E of the S extremity of Saacada Diin
and irregular.
(14.269) when course should be altered WSW for the
anchorage. Anchorage
14.281 14.291
1 If approaching from the SE, keep in depths of not less 1 Small vessels may obtain anchorage about 8 cables
than 40 m until the beacon standing on Ceebaad bears offshore, just outside of the dangerous bank fringing the
about 290°, when it should be steered for on that bearing settlement, in depths of about 12 m.
and closed to a distance of about 5 miles keeping clear of 14.292
the partially drying reef which surrounds the island. Course 1 A further anchorage, again suitable for use by small
should then be altered to the SSW and proceed as directed vessels, may be obtained in a depth of 11 m about
as if approaching from the N (14.280). 7 cables offshore from Sabawanaag, another settlement on
14.282 the coast situated about 13 miles SSE of Lughaye. The
1 Cautions. When within a line joining Ceebaad and settlement of Sabawanaag may be identified by a clump of
Siigaale the water is very discoloured, rendering it date palms growing near the coast.
impossible to distinguish between the deeper water and the Local knowledge is required for the use of these
shallow water, as can easily be done to seaward and in anchorages.
most of the adjacent bays.
Less water than charted has been reported to lie in the Bullaxaar
approaches to Saylac between Saacada Diin (14.269) and Position
Siigaale (14.275). 14.293
1 Bullaxaar (10°23′N, 44°25′E) is situated about 35 miles
Anchorage W of Berbera (14.162).
14.283 Description
1 Anchorage may be obtained in a good holding ground, 14.294
as shown on the chart, about 2 miles N of the town in 1 Bullaxaar was formerly a town of considerable size but
Saylac roadstead, in a depth of about 7⋅3 m, sand and mud. is now practically deserted.

399
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14
Jebel Almis (14.290) and some date palms close E of
the town, which are the only trees growing near the coast
between Bullaxaar and Berbera, make good landmarks for a
vessel approaching Bullaxaar.
2 The town itself is difficult to distinguish, especially if
the sun is behind it; the old residency is the first building
to be seen when the sun is high. It was reported earlier in
the last century that the best time to approach Bullaxaar is
at dawn, or shortly after, when the white houses of the
town stand out well.
Landing
14.295
1 The smoothest water for landing may be obtained by
passing round the W extremity of the off-lying sandbank;
small boats can pass over this bank at high water.
There is very heavy surf on the coast between Bullaxaar
and Berbera throughout the year; during periods of bad
weather communication with the shore is impossible,
sometimes for up to 10 days.
Anchorage
14.296
1 Anchorage off Bullaxaar is not safe during the greater
part of the SW Monsoon.
In 1939, a smaller sized vessel obtained anchorage with
the old residency bearing 155°, distant 900 m, in a depth of
about 13 m; anchorage may also be obtained about 300 m
SW of this berth in depths from 11 to 13 m.
Siyara
Position
14.297
1 Siyara (10°35′N, 45°16′E) is situated about 12 miles
ENE of Raas Calveyn (14.166).
Description
14.298
1 Siyara is a ruined town standing on the coast; a number
of graves lie in the vicinity of the town.
Topography
14.299
1 Raas Xatiib (Ras Khatib) (10°39′N, 45°19′E), which lies
about 5 miles NNE of Siyara, is a low and sandy point.
The coast NE of Siyara between Raas Xatiib and Raas
Cuuda (17 miles ENE), a low and rocky point off which lie
dangerous rocks, recedes a little to form a bay; Raas
Valxum is a low and sandy point projecting from the shore
near the middle of the bay which is itself fringed by a
bank.
2 Buur Akloo (10°36′N, 45°21′E) rises to a height of
365 m about 5 miles E of Siyara; it is the E-most of two
sharp, conical peaks of similar height but standing about
1 miles apart.
Anchorage
14.300
1 Anchorage may be obtained about 5 cables offshore at
Siyara, in a depth of about 18 m, but this anchorage is
open to winds from seaward.
14.301
1 Adjacent anchorages. Depths offshore, between Raas
Xatiib (10°39′N, 45°19′E) and Raas Khansiir (31 miles
ENE) (14.159) are more suitable for anchoring than those
either W of Raas Xatiib or E of Raas Khansiir. The bottom
near the coast is sand and shell; farther offshore it is
composed of sand and coral.
400
Karin
Position
14.302
1 Karin (10°50′N, 45°46′E) is situated about 3 miles SW
of Raas Khansiir (14.159).
Description
14.303
1 Karin is a deserted village similar in size to El Darad,
(not charted), another coastal village which lies about
13 miles WSW, close SW of Raas Cuuda (14.299).
There is a sand patch on the SW side of the valley in
which Karin is situated; a reef and sandspit extend about
5 cables offshore from the coast W of the village, a drying
rock stands on this spit.
Topography
14.304
1 Raas Xamra (10°48′N, 45°42′E) is situated about 5 miles
SW of Karin and rises to an elevation of 72 m. It has a
blackish appearance and shows up well from the W.
Anchorages
14.305
1 Anchorage may be obtained W of Karin between
6 cables and 8 cables offshore in depths from 7 to 18 m,
sand, where there is moderately good shelter from E winds.
14.306
1 Anchorage may also be obtained in a fair anchorage
berth about 1 mile and 1 miles offshore at El Darad
(14.303) in depths from about 11 to 15 m. Note the
dangerous rocks which lie off Raas Cuuda (14.299).
14.307
1 Small vessels may obtain shelter from E winds within
the bay on whose shores stand El Darad; the bay is
reported to recede more that the chart shows.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Maydh
Position
14.308
1 Maydh (11°00′N, 47°07′E) is situated about 4 miles
SSW of Raas Xatib (14.159).
Description
14.309
1 Maydh is a small village with a few inhabitants standing
on a plain bounded by the W part of Jebel Warsangeleh
(14.146) which, in this vicinity, approaches to within about
12 miles of the coast.
14.310
1 Marso Saneekhaat (11°03′N, 47°06′E) is a small bay,
entered about 3 miles NE of Maydh, formed by a sandspit
projecting SW from the coast.
Landing in Marso Saneekhaat is reported to be good.
Function
14.311
1 A small amount of trade is carried out from the village
with Aden (12.26) and Al Mukall
(12.158).
Landing
14.312
1 Landing at Maydh is generally bad, but landing has been
effected on this coast W of a cliff about 3 m high, where
there is practically no surf.
See 14.310.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14
Anchorages
14.313
1 Small vessels may obtain anchorage NNE of Maydh, in
deep water close in to the coast; and WSW of the village,
between 4 cables and 5 cables offshore in depths from 11 to
13 m; both these berths are sheltered from winds from E of
NE.
Local knowledge is required for the use of these
anchorages.
14.314
1 Anchorage has been obtained 5 cables W of the village
of Maydh, about 4 cables offshore, in depths of about
24 m. When the vessel in question swung to a WNW wind
the stern was found to be in a depth of only about 14 m.
14.315
1 Good anchorage for small vessels is also available
within Marso Saneekhaat (14.310) about 1 cable offshore in
depths from about 13 to 22 m. This berth is well sheltered
from winds from E of NE and appears to be frequently
used by local craft.
Bandar Xarshow
Position
14.316
1 Bandar Xarshow (11°10′N, 47°27′E) is situated 10 miles
ENE of Raas Xumbays (14.225).
Description
14.317
1 Bandar Xarshow is a small village which is only
inhabited during the trading season from October to May; a
sugarloaf-shaped hill stands 3 hills SSW of the village.
A bank extends about 5 cables offshore abreast Bandar
Xarshow; a reef, on which the sea breaks in places, extends
between 1 cable and 2 cables offshore from a position about
1 miles W of Bandar Xarshow, as far E as Raas Surud
(5 miles E) (14.159).
Topography
14.318
1 The coast in the vicinity of Bandar Xarshow is low,
sandy and is scantily covered with bushes, a short distance
inland; from about 1 mile E of Bandar Xarshow, as far as
Raas Surud, it consists of low cliffs backed by a range of
undulating hills.
Laasqoray
Charts 6, 2950 plan of Las Khoreh
Position
14.319
1 Laasqoray (Las Khoreh) (11°10′N, 48°12′E) is situated
about 17 miles E of Raas Kalweyn (14.159).
Description
14.320
1 Laasqoray consists of two large villages situated on the
coast about 700 m apart.
Topography
14.321
1 Sand hummocks, over 1 m high, lie between the two
villages; NE of the NE-most village lies a flat sandy plain.
Buur Godad Minanie (11°06′N, 48°25′E) is a conical
mountain, which stands about 12 miles SE of Raas Laas
Macaan (14.159), and rises to a height of 1250 m; the peak
shows up well on SW bearings.
401
Two hills, which stand about 8 miles E of Raas Laas
Macaan and 1 miles inland, appear from the W as one
conical hill and form a good landmark.
Landmarks
14.322
1 A bluff, situated about 1 miles NE of Laasqoray
(11°10′N, 48°12′E), shows up well. It appears dark
against the background and is visible from a long
distance W.
A conical hill which stands at the end of a ridge ESE
of the two villages, but is only visible on SSE
bearings.
2 The Gerad’s Palace and two stone forts which are
easily distinguished from among the mat huts of
the SW-most of the two villages.
A conspicuous white fort (ruins) which stands in the
NE-most village, 740 m ENE of the Gerad’s
Palace, and consists of a square building
surmounted by a square tower.
Landing
14.323
1 There is always heavy surf in this vicinity, especially
during the SW Monsoon; any boat should be anchored
about 30 m from the coast.
At high water the best landing may be achieved abreast
a high tower standing in the NE-most village.
At low water the best landing is near the fort at the S
end of the SW-most village.
Anchorages
14.324
1 Anchorage berths are shown on the plan, NW of the N
end of the SW-most village; and N of the NE-most village.
14.325
1 An anchor berth was obtained a number of years ago
about 8 cables offshore, in depths of about 13 m, with the
SW-most village bearing 145° and the NE-most village
105°.
Good anchorage may also be obtained between 4 cables
and 7 cables NW of the SW-most village, in depths from
about 9 to 17 m, sand or soft sandstone rock, but there is
no shelter here from offshore winds.
2 Many years ago anchorage was obtained about
5 cables offshore in a depth of about 17 m with the
Gerad’s palace bearing 131° and in line with a gap in the
hills 5 cables farther inland; little swell is usually
experienced here during the NE Monsoon. Anchorage has
also been obtained 500 m offshore, in a depth of about
9 m, with the palace bearing 134° and again in line with
the gap in the foothills.
3 Good anchorage is also available about 730 m N of the
mosque situated in the NE-most village, in the position
indicated on the plan in a depth from 9 to 11 m.
Gacaan
Charts 6, 2950 plan of Bandar Gaan
Position
14.326
1 Gacaan (Bandar Gaan) (11°15′N, 48°21′E) is situated
about 2 miles SW of Raas Gacaan (14.159).
Description
14.327
1 Gacaan is a small ruined village with a fort; a fresh
water lake is situated close inland of the village.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14

Drying sandbanks front the coast for about 600 m each A conspicuous tower which forms part of a brown
side of the fort; inside these sandbanks is situated a fort with a yellow top, resembling a castle, stands
shallow lagoon. at the W end of the village.
14.328 2 A brown tower, part of the ruins of a fort, stands
1 Ruins and some palm trees stand on the coast about about 100 m E of the brown and yellow fort.
6 miles ENE of Gacaan and form a rather prominent mark. A conspicuous white tower, the smallest of the three
towers, is part of a conspicuous white house which
Anchorage stands at the E end of the village.
14.329
Landing
1 Anchorage off Gacaan is reported to be bad on a rocky
14.337
bottom; depths of about 22 m (72 ft) may be found about
1 Landing may be effected at Ceelayo.
3 cables offshore.
Anchorages
14.338
Durduri 1 Anchorage may be obtained 5 cables offshore with the
Chart 6 W tower of the village (14.336) bearing 168°, in depths of
11 m; farther E, there is an appearance of shoaler water.
Position
Anchorage is also obtainable in depths of 26 m, sand,
14.330
with the W tower of the village bearing 207°, distant
1 Durduri (11°18′N, 48°35′E) is situated about 5 miles
1 mile.
WSW of Raas Cadcadde (14.160).
14.339
1 In general anchorage can be obtained along and near
Description
this coast in depths from 9 to 18 m, sand and rock. The
14.331
anchorage is quite open.
1 Durduri, which lies close E of the entrance to Khr
Durdureh (14.332), is a village containing a large, yellow Qoow
building in its centre, and two white forts one at each end
of the village. Chart 6
Landing at the village is bad, the surf being broken and Position
dangerous. 14.340
14.332 1 Qoow (Bender Siyaada) (11°14′N, 48°58′E) is situated
1 Kh r Durdureh is a creek, entered about 4 miles E of about 5 miles E of Ceelayo (14.334).
Raas Dhoftille (14.159), the entrance of which is usually Description
blocked by a sandbank. 14.341
Between Khr Durdureh and Cadcadde (1 miles E) 1 Qoow is a small town with three prominent forts, a few
(14.160), a much larger village than Durduri, several rocks white masonry houses and a large number of other
lie a short distance offshore. dwellings.
A stream, which reaches the sea about 3 miles E of
Anchorage the village, is navigable by boats for about its first 3 miles;
14.333 during the rainy season the water is fresh.
1 Anchorage has been obtained off Durduri with the
W-most fort bearing 195°, distant 7 cables, in a depth of Landmark
about 19 m. 14.342
1 Buur Geeljoogo (11°06′N, 48°52′E) stands about
20 miles SE of Raas Cadcadde (14.160) It is a
Ceelayo double peaked mountain rising to 633 m and forms
a prominent mark. The peak is one of several
Charts 6, 2950 plan of Elayu peaks along a range of mountains which stand
Position inland of the low and broken range of hills rising
14.334 near the coast. A remarkable gap in the coastal
1 Ceelayo (Elayu) (11°14′N, 48°53′E) is situated about range is situated about 19 miles ESE of Raas
15 miles ESE of Raas Cadcadde (14.160). Cadcadde.

Description Anchorage
14.335 14.343
1 Ceelayo is an easily identified village as it lies at the E 1 Anchorage may be obtained with the middle fort of
end of a black tableland (14.148). Qoow bearing 168°, distant about 1 miles, in depths of
A water course, which becomes a large stream after rain, 22 m, sand and rock, or nearer to this fort, on the same
reaches the sea about 2 miles WNW of the village. bearing, in depths of about 13 m.
Within the village, which consists mainly of huts, a Caution. Inshore of this latter anchorage berth the
ridge on which stand numerous cairns rises to a elevation depths shoal rapidly.
of about 60 m. A square, white mosque stands on a low
cliff above the foreshore. Bacaad
Chart 2970
Landmarks Position
14.336 14.344
1 The following landmarks, as shown on the chart, stand 1 Bacaad (11°21′N, 49°27′E) is situated about 1 mile SE
within the village. of Raas Buur Gaaban (14.160).

402
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14

Description Anchorage
14.345 14.356
1 Bacaad is a small village on the coast which consists of 1 Anchorage may be obtained, as shown on the chart, with
a fort and a few dwellings; a shoal, with a least depth over the residency bearing 136°, 1 mile distant, in depths of
it of 2⋅8 m (9 ft), lies about 5 cables NNW of the village. about 15 m.
14.346 Extensive anchorage may also be obtained about
1 Togga Mareero (not charted by name) is a stream on 6 cables off Qandala in depths from 8 to 11 m in fairly
the W side of Raas Axmar (14.160); it is usually dry but good holding ground. Depths in this vicinity decrease
flows after heavy rain. regularly towards the shore.
14.347 Local knowledge is required for the use of these
1 Buur Gaaban is another village (not charted) consisting anchorages.
of a few stone houses and some dwellings situated on the 14.357
coast about 1 miles E of Bacaad. 1 Caution. It is dangerous for vessels to remain anchored
Buruc is a further village consisting of a fort and a few in this roadstead when the SW Monsoon is blowing
dwellings, situated on the coast about 15 miles ENE of strongly.
Bacaad and close W of Raas Goraggii (Ras Coraghe)
(11°29′N, 49°41′E) (14.160). Qooringa Butiyaalo (Khor di Botiala)
14.358
Landmark 1 Description. Qooringa Butiyaalo (Khor di Botiala) is a
14.348 creek which extends about 4 miles, generally SE, and
1 Bur Madà Marodi (11°18′N, 49°23′E) (14.149) is a reaches the sea about 3 miles ENE of Qandala (14.351)
mountain, 872 m (2860 ft) high, standing close to after passing between two ranges of hills.
the coast between Raas Axmar (14.160) and During the rainy season there is a considerable flow of
Bacaad. water in the creek, but the creek dries at its mouth.
2 Bandar Ciadid (not charted) is a village at the mouth of
Anchorage the creek; Botiala is another village on the SW side of the
14.349 creek about 2 miles within its entrance, Botiala is not
1 Good anchorage, sheltered from offshore winds, is visible from seaward.
obtainable about 1 miles offshore between Bacaad and The entrance to the creek shows better when
Raas Buur Gaaban (14.160), a high rocky point about approaching it from the W than the E. The best landmark
2 miles NE of Bacaad. from the W is the village of Qandala; and, from the E, a
14.350 low, white sandhill, on which grows a conspicuous bush,
1 There is open anchorage, with good holding ground, off which is situated about 1 miles E of the entrance to the
Raas Aantaara (11°27′N, 49°34′E) (14.160). creek.
14.359
1 Anchorage. Good anchorage is available during offshore
Qandala winds, about 1 miles off the entrance to Khor di Botiala,
in depths from 11 to 18 m.
Charts 6, 2950 plan of Candala Local knowledge is required for the use of this
Position anchorage.
14.351
1 Qandala (Candala) (11°28′N, 49°52′E) is situated about
11 miles E of Raas Goraggii (14.160).
Dhurbo
Chart 2970
Description Position
14.352 14.360
1 Qandala is an important village, consisting of a fort, a 1 Dhurbo (Durbo) (11°37′N, 50°21′E) is situated about
residency, several masonry houses and a number of other 25 miles ENE of Point Osbolei (14.160).
dwellings: the village lies behind some sandhills.
The fort stands E of a group of trees which make good Description
marks if approaching from the W. 14.361
1 Dhurbo is a village on the coast about 2 miles ENE of
Function Raas Dhurbo (Gees Maqaasiiro), a small, rocky point which
14.353 is difficult to identify from seaward.
1 Incense and gum, obtained from the interior mountains, The village, which consists of some masonry houses, a
are exported from the village. mosque and a number of other dwellings, stands on a low
plain at the mouth of a valley. A group of palm trees close
Principal marks NE of the village is visible from some distance from
14.354 seaward.
1 Landmark:
Baxaya (11°20′N, 49°45′E) rises to a height of Anchorage
2083 m (6835 ft) about 8 miles SSE of Raas 14.362
Goraggii. It is the highest mountain in this vicinity. 1 Small vessels may obtain anchorage about 5 cables off
14.355 Dhurbo in depths of 10 m (33 ft); this anchorage is
1 Light: frequented by local craft.
A light (11°28′⋅3N, 49°52′⋅2E) is exhibited from the Local knowledge is required for the use of this
W corner of the residency. anchorage.

403
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14

Bandar Murcaayo Description

Charts 100, 2970
Position
14.363
1 Bandar Murcaayo (Meraio) (11°41′N, 50°28′E) is
situated about 18 miles SW of Raas Felug (14.160).
Description
14.364
1 Bandar Murcaayo is the principal village in this vicinity;
it extends along the coast within a line of sand dunes,
about 5 m high, and consists of a number of masonry
houses, other dwellings, a fort with white battlements and a
mosque.
There are only a few inhabitants in the village during
the hot season.
14.365
1 Bandar Hatra (charted as a fort) is a village about 1 mile
NE of Bandar Murcaayo and consists mainly of a fort, a
mosque and a few other dwellings.
Garsa (11°42′N, 50°29′E) is another village consisting of
some masonry houses; the village can be identified by two
clumps of high palm trees which stand SSW of it.
Function
14.366
1 During the cool season a considerable trade in incense
and gum is carried out from the village.
Caution
14.367
1 A dangerous rock and an area through which it is unsafe
to navigate, lies W of the village.
Landmarks
14.368
1 A precipitous red hill, 274 m high, with a hole
through its upper part, is situated close S of
Bandar Murcaayo.
Three groups of palm trees, a mangrove swamp, and
the bed of a water-course in which there are some
acacia and mimosa trees are situated NE of the
village.
Anchorage
14.369
1 Anchorage berth may be obtained in a good holding
ground, between about 5 cables and 8 cables offshore at
Bandar Murcaayo, with the mosque in the village bearing
151°, in depths from 9 to 18 m, sand.
See caution at 14.367.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
14.370
1 Anchorage off Garsa (14.365) is reported to be bad even
though the bottom is of sand with fairly good holding
ground.
Geesaley
Chart 100
Position
14.371
1 Geesaley (Ghesselei) (11°45′N, 50°30′E) is a village
situated about 13 miles SSW of Raas Felug (14.160).
14.372
1 The village consists of some masonry houses and
numerous other dwellings; a fort and a large house, which
stand in the NE part of the village, make good marks.
The vicinity of the village may also be identified by a
large group of palm trees, standing on high ground, which
show up well from seaward in contrast to the surrounding
barren coast.
Anchorage
14.373
1 Anchorage off Geesaley is reported to be bad even
though the bottom is of sand with a fairly good holding
ground; it is reported that there are depths of more than
10 m about 5 cables offshore from the village.
Afkala Haya
Charts 100, 2950 plan of Capo Elefante Anchorage
Position
14.374
1 Afkala Haya (Bandar Gedid) (11°54′N, 50°35′E) is
situated about 3
miles SW of Raas Felug (Capo Elefante)
(14.160).
Description
14.375
1 Afkala Haya is a village on the coast situated within the
coastal sand dunes which are about 1 m or so high in this
vicinity. The village consists of a fort, a couple of masonry
houses and a number of other dwellings.
Landing
14.376
1 Good landing is reported between 4 miles and 5 miles
E of Raas Felug (14.160) where the beach shelves gently.
Anchorage
14.377
1 Good anchorage, as shown on the plan, may be obtained
by small vessels in a small bay on the W side of Raas
Felug, in depths of 9 m (30 ft), with the beacon standing on
the point (14.160) bearing about 077°, distant about
7 cables. This berth is sheltered from both E and S winds
but, NE winds cause a swell in the bay with surf at its
head.
Strong winds from the SW raise a heavy sea in the bay
owing to its low, sandy, S shore from which the coast rises
gradually.
2 Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Caluula
Charts 100, 2950 plan of Alula
Position
14.378
1 Caluula (Alula) (11°58′N, 50°45′E) is situated about
2 miles SW of Raas Caluula (14.160).
Description
14.379
1 Caluula is a small town consisting of a few masonry
houses and a much larger number of other dwellings. There
are also several ruined towers within the town; there is a
large cemetery near the S end of the town.
The residency, with its flagstaff, is situated on a sand
dune at the SW end of the town.

404
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 14

Function which the mountains form a steep bluff and turn abruptly
14.380 SW. At low water, there is a narrow, sandy beach which is
1 The main exports of the town include gums, hides, used for communication between Bereeda and Olog
pearls and sponges. (10 miles ESE).
The main imports include cotton goods, rice, sugar and Current
tea. 14.390
Caution 1 A number of years ago a current setting WNW at a rate
14.381 of 2 kn was observed between Raas Caseyr (11°50′N,
1 Currents setting towards the coast have been experienced 51°17′E) (14.160) and Raas Caluula (31 miles WNW)
in the neighbourhood of Raas Caluula (14.160); a WSW set (14.160) at a distance of about 5 miles offshore.
of about 2 kn has been reported when steaming E past Landing
the point. 14.391
1 Landing at Bereeda is bad but it is generally practicable
Landing W of the village.
14.382
1 Landing is reported to be easy at Caluula. Anchorage
14.392
Principal mark 1 There is a good anchorage obtainable about 4 cables
14.383 NW of the Sultan’s residence in depths of about 8⋅2 m;
1 Light: depths in the approach to the anchorage appear to be
A light (white metal framework tower; 13 m high) irregular and the bottom rocky.
(11°57′⋅8N, 50°45′⋅3E) is exhibited from the NW Local knowledge is required for the use of this
corner of the residency. anchorage.

Anchorages Olog
14.384 Charts 100, 2950 plan of Oloch and Damo
1 Anchorage may be obtained off Caluula in three anchor Position
berths, as shown on the chart; in all of the berths Raas 14.393
Caluula (14.160) bears about 054°. 1 Olog (Olod or Oloch) (11°51′N, 51°13′E) is situated
In the NE-most berth the residency bears 202° in a about 4 miles W of Raas Caseyr (14.160).
depth from about 14 to 18 m (47 ft to 59 ft).
2 In the middle berth the residency bears 180° in Description
depths from about 11 to 18 m (36 ft to 59 ft). 14.394
In the SW-most berth the residency bears about 140° 1 Olog is a village consisting of about a hundred
in depths from about 9 to 14 m (29 ft to 44 ft). dwellings and a fort which stands on a slightly undulating
14.385 sandy stretch of the coast.
1 Caution. In 1988 less water was reported in the seaward 14.395
approaches to these anchorages. 1 Damo is a village consisting of a stone house, about a
hundred other dwellings, and a fort, all situated about
Bereeda 1
miles ESE of Olog.

Chart 100 Topography

Position
14.386
1 Bereeda (11°52′N, 51°03′E) is situated about 14 miles W
of Raas Caseyr (14.160).
Description
14.387
1 Bereeda is a village, consisting of a few stone houses
and about a hundred other dwellings, scattered along the
coast at the foot of the coastal mountains.
The residence of the Sultan is a large, white, fortified
stone house, two storeys high, with a central tower; the
residence shows up well from seaward.
The local inhabitants farm cattle and sheep.
14.388
1 A small fort stands on the coast at Wareegsimo which
lies about 5 miles WNW.
Topography
14.389
1 From a position about 10 miles WNW of Bereeda to
Raas Caseyr (14.160) the coast is closely backed by
mountains except at two or three places where the coast is
sandy and covered with bushes.
A short distance E of Bereeda there is a rocky point and
the coast becomes high and steep for about 7 miles, after
14.396
1 Picco Oloch is a peak which rises to a height of 374 m
(1227 ft) which stands about 7 cables WSW of Olog; a
sandhill, 190 m (623 ft) high, stands about 1 mile SE of the
village.
Picco Damo is a peak which stands about  mile SE of
the village of Damo.
From the steep bluff close W of Olog the land forms a
level ridge as far as Raas Caseyr (14.160).
Landing
14.397
1 There is fairly good landing at both Olog and Damo,
especially in a small bay which is situated 4 cables E of
Damo.
Anchorage
14.398
1 Good anchorage may be obtained between about
5 cables and 6 cables off both Olog and Damo, in depths
from about 13 to 15 m (42 ft to 48 ft), sand, in a good
holding ground which is well sheltered from S winds.
2 Anchorage berths off Damo are shown on the chart; the
W-most berth may be approached with Picco Damo
(14.396) bearing 150°, and open SE of the village of
Damo; or, if coming from the E, by steering for Olog and
anchoring when the fort at Damo bears 163°.

405
Home Contents Index

Chapter 15 - Islands eastward of Raas Caseyr. 'Abd Al Kuri,

¯ ¯ The Brothers and Suqutrá

30' 51° 30' 52° 30' 53° 30' 54° 30' 55°
14° 14°

30' 30'

13° 13°
100

1 5 .6
406

¸- - -
Sabuniyah
15.36 -
Rhiy di - Irisal
30' 30'
S uqutrá
Kal Farun
15.26 15.36

Abd al Køri
15.14 The Brothers
12° 15.29 12°
15.11

Raas Caseyr
14.160

30' 30'
30' 51° 30' 52° 30' Longitude 53° East from Greenwich 54° 30' 55°
0205
 Home Contents Index

CHAPTER 15
ISLANDS EASTWARD OF RAAS CASEYR — ‘ABD AL KR,
THE BROTHERS AND SUQU RÁ

GENERAL INFORMATION
Chart 2970
Scope of the chapter
15.1
1 The islands described in this chapter lie off the E side of
the Horn of Africa, ENE of Raas Caseyr (11°50′N, 51°17′E)
(14.160).
The routes described in this chapter pass N and S of the
off-lying islands, thence into the Arabian Sea.
There are no ports situated within this area.
Tidal streams
15.2
1 The tidal streams through the passages between the
various islands E of Raas Caseyr (11°50′N, 51°17′E) set N
with the in-going stream flowing into the Gulf of Aden and
S with the out-going stream, but the flow is much influenced
by the current generated by the prevailing monsoon.
When not influenced by the monsoon current the rate is
reported to be between 1 kn and 2 kn.

RAAS CALUULA TO RHIY DI-IRSAL — PASSING NORTH OF SUQU RÁ

GENERAL INFORMATION
Chart 2970
Route
15.3
1 The route described in this section extends about
222 miles E from a position about 15 miles N of Raas
Caluula (11°59′N, 50°47′E) (14.160), the N-most point of
the Horn of Africa, passing N of Suqurá (15.37) to a
position about 15 miles N of Rhiy di-Irisal (12°33′N,
54°32′E) (15.8).
Currents
15.4
1 The currents around Raas Caseyr (11°50′N, 51°17′E) are
influenced by the tidal streams, which are irregular, and by
oh (12°39′N, 53°24′E) a steep-to
the monsoon.
During the SW Monsoon the set is predominantly NE,
whilst the NE Monsoon produces W or NW sets. Rates of
up to 2 kn have been reported.
Counter-currents may be experienced close inshore around
Raas Caseyr.
15.5
1 The currents close around the off-lying islands are also
influenced by the monsoon being from the NNE in
December and January, and from the SW between June and
August.
These currents generally set with the wind after it has
blown hard from the same direction for some time, rates of
up to 2 kn have been reported.
See also 14.8 and 14.153.
DIRECTIONS
Charts 5, 100
15.6
1 From a position about 15 miles N of Raas Caluula
(11°59′N, 50°47′E) (14.160) the track leads initially ENE
passing:
NNW of a shoal patch (12°13′N, 51°00′E) with a least
ub (15.64). Thence:
depth over it of 31 m (reported 1975) (sounding of
doubtful depth), thence:
2 NNW of Coral Bank (12°18′N, 51°56′E), situated
about 8 miles WNW of the W extremity of ‘Abd Al
Kr (15.14). A shoal, with a least depth over it of
5⋅5 m, (reported 1956) (position approximate), lies
about 1 mile N of the bank, thence:
3 NNW of Kal Farun (12°26′N, 52°08′E) (15.26) which
comprises two rocky islets situated about 12 miles N
of ‘Abd Al Kr on the NW part of a bank, over
which there is a least depth of 12 m. Thence:
NNW of 
bnyah (12°38′N, 53°10′E) (15.36), a
small island which lies about 11 miles NW of the
W extremity of Suqurá (15.37), thence:
4 NNW of Rhiy di-!a’b (12°32′N, 53°18′E), the W
extremity of Suqurá which is steep-to on its W and
SW sides; a reef fringes its NE side extending up to
2 cables offshore. The cape, which forms the SW
point to Bindar di-!a’b (15.56), rises to Jabal Sha
b
which stands close inland from the point, thence:
5 NNW of Rhiy di-Bi
bluff, 91 m high, which forms the NNE entrance
point to Bindar di-!a‘b, and also the W extremity
of Ma‘lh, a peak rising to a height of 685 m.
Thence:
6 NNW of Ra’s Qalansyah (12°42′N, 53°29′E) a point
which rises to four small, granite peaks by which it
may be identified; the point may also be recognised
by some hills which rise close by and which are
covered with sand, in places.
15.7
1 Thence the track leads E, passing:
N of Rhiy di-Bashrah (12°43′N, 53°33′E) the N
extremity of Suqurá (15.37); a pyramidal rock lies
close off the point to which it is connected by a
narrow neck of land, 45 m long. Thence:
N of Rhiy di-Qad
mah (12°42′N, 53°39′E) a low point
with the termination of a high bluff standing close
within it, thence:
2 N of Rhiy di-!a’b (12°39′N, 53°54′E); the coast in
this vicinity is fringed by a reef which extends up
to 2 cables offshore, thence:
N of Rhiy di-b
q (12°39′N, 53°58′E) a bold,
vertical and rocky point which forms the E entrance
point of Ghubbat Q

3 N of Rhiy di-awlaf (12°42′N, 54°05′E) the extremity
of a low, rounded projection which rises gradually
inland and consists chiefly of undulating sandhills
covered with prickly bushes; the coast of the
projection consists of small rocky points with sandy

407
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 15
beaches lying between them; a reef fringes the W
side of the projection. A village, with two white
houses and a mosque, is situated 1 mile S of Rhiy
di-awlaf. The point forms the E entrance point of
Ghubbah di-adboh (15.66).
15.8
1 Thence the track continues E, passing:
N of Rhiy di-Hamr (12°41′N, 54°12′E) the N
extremity of a narrow peninsula on which stand two
remarkable reddish hills, the N-most of which rises
to about 40 m; the point may be identified by these
two hills. A dangerous steep-to rock lies close N of
the cape; a rocky spit extends about 2 cables W
from the cape. Thence:
2 N of Ra’s Hammadara (12°39′N, 54°16′E) a low and
rocky point; a reef, which nearly dries, extends
2 miles ENE of the point, thence:
N of Rhiy di-Adhoh (12°37′N, 54°18′E) the W
entrance point to Ghubbat Timbar (15.77), thence:
N of Rhiy di-q (12°36′N, 54°22′E) the E entrance
point to Ghubbat Timbar. Thence:
RAAS CASEYR TO RHIY DI-IRSAL — PASSING SOUTH OF SUQU RÁ
GENERAL INFORMATION
Charts 5, 100
Route
15.9
1 The route described in this section extends about
180 miles E from a position about 12 miles NE of Raas
Caseyr (Cape Guardafui) (11°50′N, 51°17′E) (14.160), the
E-most point of the N extremity of the Horn of Africa,
passing S of Suqura (15.37) to a position about 35 miles S
of Rhiy di-Irisal (12°33′N, 54°32′E) (15.8).
Currents
15.10
1 See 15.4.
DIRECTIONS
(Directions for the S side of the Gulf of Aden from
Banka Arab to Raas Caseyr are given at 14.159)
Charts 5, 100
15.11
1 From a position about 12 miles NE of Raas Caseyr
(11°50′N, 51°17′E) (14.160) the track leads E, passing:
S of Coral Bank (12°18′N, 51°56′E) (15.6), thence:
2 S of Ra’s Khaisat en naum (12°14′N, 52°04′E) which
forms the W extremity of ‘Abd Al Kr (15.14) and
consists of two sharp, rocky points about 5 cables
apart. A rocky spit, with a least depth over its outer
end of 3⋅7 m, extends W from the N-most point;
two islets stand on this spit close off the point.
Thence:
3 S of Ra’s Hattan (12°13′N, 52°06′E) a bluff point; a
shoal depth of 36 m lies 1 miles SW of the point,
thence:
408
3 N of Rhiy di-Ddum (12°35′N, 54°25′E), a rocky point
about 76 m high, which appears to be the E
boundary of the fertile part of Suqurá (15.37); E of
the point hardly a shrub is to be seen and only a
few trees, but, W of the point, both hills and valleys
are covered with luxuriant vegetation, thence:
4 N of Rhiy di-Irsal (Ras Radressa) (12°33′N, 54°32′E)
a comparatively low cape forming the E extremity
of Suqurá. The E side of the cape is fringed by a
reef which extends about 3 cables NNE of its N
extremity, and 2 cables SE of its S extremity; shoal
depths of less than 10 m extend up to about
5 cables E and S of the point. There are strong
tide-rips over that part of the reef extending NNE of
the cape. A drying reef, over which a heavy sea
generally breaks, lies about 6 cables SE of the
S-most part of the point; a stranded wreck lies on
this reef, which, in 1975, had the appearance of a
vessel afloat and not in any danger. See caution at
15.53.
S of Ra’s Lubaynah (Ra’s Labaineh) (12°10′N,
52°15′E), the E entrance point to Bandar 
li
(15.24), thence:
S of Ra’s Anjara (12°12′N, 52°24′E) a rocky point on
which stands a sandhill.
15.12
1 Thence, the track continues E, passing:
S of an isolated shoal (12°07′N, 52°32′E) (reported
1969), over which the depth is unknown but is
surrounded by a danger circle, thence:
N of an isolated shoal (11°54′N, 52°35′E) (reported
1982) with a least depth over it of 20 m, thence:
2 S of a shoal (12°07′N, 52°44′E) (reported 1969) with
a least depth over it of 11 m; a further shoal
(reported 1971), with a least depth over it of 20 m,
lies 6 cables W. Tide-rips and overfalls occur close
S of these shoals. Thence:
S of a shoal (12°09′N, 52°55′E) (position approximate)
over which there is a least depth of 16⋅5 m, thence:
3 S of Jazrat Samah (12°10′N, 52°58′E) (15.34) the W
island of The Brothers (15.29), thence:
S of a shoal (12°08′N, 53°07′E) (reported 1977) over
which there is a least depth of 9 m.
15.13
1 The track then continues E, passing:
S of Jazrat Darsa (12°07′N, 53°17′E) (15.35) the E
island of The Brothers (15.29), thence:
S of Rhiy di-Qaanhin (12°21′N, 53°33′E) a vertical
bluff rising to an elevation of 511 m which forms
the W extremity of Di-Dya‘ah; the bluff has a
similar appearance when viewed from both its E
and W sides. Thence:
2 S of Rhiy di-Diblih (12°21′N, 54°01′E) a point
situated on an area of coast covered with
mangroves, thence:
3 S of Ra’s Falanj (12°30′N, 54°27′E) which, from some
distance W, appears as a bluff, but, when close-to, is
seen as a low point with a bay on each side of it.
The point is seen to project SE with a steep-to reef,
partially above water, extending SE. Thence:
S of Rhiy di-Irsal (12°33′N, 54°32′E) (15.8).
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 15
MAIN ISLANDS
‘ABD AL K R
General information
Charts 5, 100
Position
15.14
1 The island of ‘Abd al Kr (12°11′N, 52°15′E) lies about
52 miles ENE of Raas Caseyr (14.160).
Function
15.15
1 The island forms part of the Republic of Yemen.
Description
15.16
1 A range of mountains and hills extends along the length
of ‘Abd al Kr except for the middle of the island which is
low-lying.
The hills in the W part attain elevations up to 243 m; in
the E stand mountains of which there are two main summits,
the W rising to 573 m, and the E to 558 m.
Sheep and goats roam the island and fish are plentiful in
the surrounding waters; fresh water is only available from a
number of shallow wells.
15.17
1 North and east coast. The N coast of ‘Abd al Kr
consists chiefly of a sandy beach with a few rocky points.
Ra’s Khaisat en naum (12°14′N, 52°04′E) (15.11) forms
the W extremity of ‘Abd Al Kr; Ra’s Haimera (5 miles E)
is a small and rocky point; dangerous rocks lie close off the
coast close W of the point.
2 The N coast between Ra’s Haimera (12°14′N, 52°09′E)
and Ra’s Tarum (8 miles E) consists of small, rocky points
with sandy beaches lying between. A dangerous rock lies
close offshore about 2 miles ESE of Ra’s Haimera; a spit,
with depths of less than 5⋅5 m over it, extends about 8 cables
N from the coast close to this rock. Further dangerous rocks
lie off the N coast farther E.
3 Between Ra’s Tarum (12°13′N, 52°17′E) and Ra’s Anjara
(7 miles E) (15.11) the coast is low and sandy with some
below-water rocks lying close offshore; a few huts stand on
this shore.
Between Ra’s Anjara and the SE extremity of ‘Abd al
Kr (2 miles SSW) lies an unnamed bay with a sandy
beach; above-water rocks lie about 5 cables SW of Ra’s
Anjara, close offshore.
The SE extremity of ‘Abd al Kr is low and rocky; the
E mountain range rises in a slope from the point.
15.18
1 South coast. The S coast of ‘Abd al Kr is mainly
steep-to and is composed of abrupt cliffs with one small
beach; the S side of the island is not cultivated and some
years ago was reported to appear barren and desolate.
A rocky islet lies in a bay, close off the coast, about
2 miles E of Ra’s Hattan (12°13′N, 52°06′E) (15.11); a
cove, encumbered with below-water rocks, lies within this
islet. Further islets and dangerous rocks lie within this bay.
2 A dangerous shoal area (reported 1965), in which lie
dangerous rocks, extends about 1
miles SE from an area on
the coast close E of Ra’s Lubaynah (12°10′N, 52°15′E)
(15.11).
409
Between Ra’s Lubaynah and the SE extremity of ‘Abd al
Kr (8 miles E) the coast consists of steep cliffs and is
mainly steep-to.
Approach
15.19
1 If approaching ‘Abd al Kr from the E or the S the
mountains, when sighted, appear as two islands; the W-most
hills, which would be sighted later, appear as a chain of
islands.
Currents
15.20
1 It has been reported that the current in the month of May
set ENE at rates of between  kn and 1 kn; numerous
ripples were observed in the vicinity of shoal water.
It has also been reported that when the NE Monsoon was
well established, a NNW-going current with a rate of 1 kn
was experienced between Raas Caseyr (11°50′N, 51°17′E)
and ‘Abd al Kr.
Cautions
15.21
1 Owing to the higher hills being some distance inland
from the W extremity of ‘Abd al Kr it is difficult to
estimate the distance off the point correctly; this should be
borne in mind, especially at night.
In 1967 it was reported that particular caution must be
exercised when approaching the island during the period of
the SW Monsoon.
Communication
15.22
1 During the SW Monsoon communication with the island
by sea is not usually possible.
Anchorage
15.23
1 Anchorage off the N side of ‘Abd al Kr is reported to
be indifferent, but, during August, an anchorage berth, in a
good holding ground, was obtained with Ra’s Haimera
(12°14′N, 52°09′E) bearing 136° in a depth of 16⋅5 m, sand.
A number of years ago a medium sized warship obtained
anchorage, in a good holding ground, about 1 miles NNW
of Ra’s Haimera, in a depth of 44 m, grey mud.
A small warship, a similar number of years ago, obtained
anchorage about 4 miles E of Ra’s Haimera in a depth of
about 9 m.
See also 15.25.
Bandar  li
Description
15.24
1 Bandar 
li is a bay entered on the S side of ‘Abd al
Kr (15.14) between Ra’s Lubaynah (12°10′N, 52°15′E)
(15.11) and Ra’s Ambar (4
miles WNW).
The bay lies between the ranges which lie in the E and
W parts of the island; N of the bay stand moderately high
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 15
sandhills. It was reported a number of years ago that the W
part of the bay appeared to be encumbered with shoals.
A stranded wreck lies in the middle part of the bay.
15.25
1 Anchorage. During the NE Monsoon good anchorage
may be obtained within Bandar 
li, between 2 cables
and 5 cables offshore, in depths from about 11 to 18 m,
coral.
Off-lying islands
Position
15.26
1 Kal Farun (Kaal Firaon) (12°26′N, 52°08′E) consists of
two rocky islets which lie on the NE part of a shoal bank,
with a least depth over it of 12 m, situated about 12 miles N
of ‘Abd Al Kr (15.14).
Description
15.27
1 The islets are steep-to and separated from each other by a
narrow channel in which lie many below-water rocks.
The larger E islet has one peak 86 m high together with
two smaller ones; the W islet also has one peak of a similar
height, and one smaller peak. From different directions they
show as several peaks, all covered with guano.
Off-lying bank
Bacchus Bank
15.28
1 Bacchus Bank (12°13′N, 52°25′E), lies about 2 miles NE
of Ra’s Anjara (15.11).
The wind blowing against the tidal stream causes a big
ripple over the bank.
THE BROTHERS
General information
Charts 5, 100, 2970
Position
15.29
1 The Brothers (12°08′N, 53°10′E) are two small islands
which lie about 35 miles E of ‘Abd al Kr (15.14) and
about 20 miles SW of the SW side of Suqurá (15.37).
Description
15.30
1 The islands lie on an extensive bank which connects them
with Suqurá; the exact extent of this bank is not known as
the locality of the islands has not been thoroughly examined;
see chart source data diagram.
Off-lying dangers
15.31
1 Shoal water has several times been reported about
15 miles W of Jazrat Samah (12°10′N, 52°58′E) (15.34)
near the centre of the passage between the island and ‘Abd
al Kr (15.14). The least depth so far reported of 11 m
(12°07′N, 52°44′E) was reported in 1969.
With the exception of Bacchus Bank, no other dangers
are known to exist in this passage.
15.32
1 Reported shoals. Several shoals have been reported to
exist in the area, as shown on the chart, SW of The
Brothers. Some of these shoals have been disproved and are
not charted. Nevertheless, mariners should proceed with
particular caution when in this area.
410
Local knowledge
15.33
1 Both Jazrat Samah and Jazrat Darsa are reported to
give a good radar response at a distance of about 25 miles.
Jaz rat Samah
Description
15.34
1 Jazrat Samah (12°10′N, 52°58′E) the W island of The
Brothers (15.29) rises to a small hill near its W extremity
and to a table-topped mountain which extends nearly half the
length of the island. The summit of the mountain is situated
near the centre of the island and towards its S coast; its N
extremity is a well defined bluff.
2 The coasts of Jazrat Samah are rocky. On its S side
cliffs rise vertically from the sea.
Dangerous rocks lie on the coastal reef which extends
about 5 cables W of the island.
A drying reef fringes parts of Jazrat Samah; two small
islets lie about 4 cables off the SE side of the island.
Landing may be made on the N coast of Jazrat Samah
providing great care is taken.
Jaz rat Darsa
Description
15.35
1 Jazrat Darsa (12°07′N, 53°17′E), the E island of The
Brothers (15.29), for the most part rises vertically from the
sea to an even, table-topped summit, 392 m high.
At its N extremity the coast of the island projects about
650 m from the foot of the table land.
The island is uninhabited. A large number of rats are
reported to be present on the island.
 B NYAH
Description
15.36
1 
bnyah (12°38′N, 53°10′E) is a small island situated
about 11 miles NW of the W extremity of Suqurá (15.37).
The island, which is white, consists of three granite peaks,
the highest attaining an elevation of 69 m. From a distance
the island resembles two vessels under sail. From N it has a
wedge-shaped appearance.
The passage between the island and Suqurá is deep and
free from dangers.
SUQU RÁ
Chart 5
Position
15.37
1 Suqurá (Socotra) (12°30′N, 53°55′E) is situated about
126 miles ENE of Raas Caseyr (14.160) and is the largest of
the islands lying off the Horn of Africa.
Description
15.38
1 The island of Suqurá is about 70 miles long, 20 miles
wide with a land area of about 1400 square miles; the island
is part of the territory of the Republic of Yemen.
Except for a few headlands, from which reefs project, the
coasts of Suqurá are bold with moderate depths extending
for some distance offshore in places.
2 The island of Suqurá is situated near the tracks of
shipping entering or leaving the S side of the Gulf of Aden.
The island is exposed to both monsoons. It has no safe
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 15
harbours or anchorages and is therefore seldom visited by
sea.
The Sultan of Qishn and Suqurá resides at adboh
(15.66) a small town on the N side of the island.
15.39
1 North coast. The N coast of the island, between Ra’s
Qalansyah (12°42′N, 53°29′E) (15.6) and a position
2 miles farther ENE forms an indentation which is filled
by a sandbank, nearly all of which dries; a mangrove swamp
lies in the middle of the bank.
2 From E of the sandbank to Rhiy di-Bashrah (12°43′N,
53°33′E) (15.7) mountains rise almost vertically from the
coast, in places. Part of the mountain sides here are covered
with sand and the shore is fronted by a rocky beach.
3 Between Rhiy di-Hamr (12°41′N, 54°12′E) (15.8) and
Ra’s Hammadara (4 miles ESE) (15.8) the coast is low. It
is mostly fringed by a reef and has a few rocky points with
sandy bays lying between them.
4 From Ra’s Hammadara (12°39′N, 54°16′E) to Rhiy
di-Ddum (10 miles ESE) (15.8) a few rocky points project
from the coast, with sand and shingle in the intervening
bays. Date groves grow along this stretch of the coast which
is backed by high land.
15.40
1 South coast. A table-topped limestone range extends
parallel with the S coast of Suqurá, generally rising a short
distance inland, stretching almost to the E extremity of the
island. It is in several parts, each with its own name, and
each nearly separated from the others by mountain passes.
The range rises like a wall from the plain of Njid (15.42).
2 Between Ghubbah di-N (12°26′N, 53°28′E) (15.82) and
Rhiy di-Qaanhin (6 miles SE) (15.13) the coast is rocky
and precipitous.
3 r Miy
f (12°27′N, 54°18′E) is the mouth of W
d
Falanj which is situated about 14 miles ENE of the village
of Aq
rh (not charted by name) at the S entrance to the
pass between Jabal Sharbi (not charted by name), 387 m
high, (12°28′N, 54°18′E), and Jabal Falanj (3 miles E). The
coast in the vicinity of or Miy
f is low and sandy,
changing to rocky cliffs about 5 cables E.
Topography
15.41
1 ajhir, a range of mountain peaks, rises about 30 miles W
of the E extremity of Suqurá; M
shanig (12°36′N, 54°03′E),
1519 m high, is the SW-most peak of the range.
The SW part of Suqurá is arid and barren, but much of
the remainder is comparatively fertile being well watered by
the monsoon rains of July and December.
2 The S coast preserves a nearly unbroken line but the N
and W coasts are broken into a succession of small bays,
generally with streams at their head and affording anchorage
according to season, but none of them is considered safe at
all times of the year.
3 Over a broad area of the island, hills rise abruptly in
vertical cliffs between 100 m and 200 m high, but, in other
places, there are plains which attain a breadth of up to
5 miles between the base of the hills and the coast.
15.42
1 Njid is situated on the S side of the island and is the
largest plain on the island; it extends nearly the whole length
of Suqurá and for miles it is covered with drift sand, but
also affords pasture. On the N side of the island plains
similar to Njid occur chiefly at the mouths of streams and
are the site of the only places which may be called towns.
2 In general, the internal part of Suqurá is broad,
undulating and intersected by limestone plateaux. These
411
plateaux, with an average elevation of over 300 m, flank the
W, S and E side of a nucleus of granite peaks which attain
elevations of more than 1200 m. These peaks are seldom free
from cloud, but, when the weather is clear, their appearance
is broken and picturesque.
3 The whole of this elevated region is deeply intersected by
ravines and valleys which are occupied by roaring torrents in
the rainy seasons of June, November and December. The
majority are empty in the dry season, although there are
many perennial streams, especially in the central region. Few
of them reach the coast in the dry season.
In the plain between ajhir and the N coast there are
several valleys. In those in which streams flow there are
extensive groves of date trees and some cultivated areas.
Fauna
15.43
1 The only wild animal on Suqurá is the civet cat.
Scorpions, centipedes and a large and venomous variety of
spider called by the local name of nargub are all common
on the low parts of the island.
Language
15.44
A language, peculiar to the island, is in general use
among the inhabitants. Arabic is spoken by the local traders
when transacting business.
Trade
15.45
1 The trade of the island is small and is carried on by local
craft from the Arabian coast which call at the island in
January en-route to Zanzibar.
Local knowledge
15.46
1 Suqurá is reported to give a good radar response at a
distance of about 25 miles.
Local weather
15.47
1 Though Suqurá is not very far from either Africa or
Arabia it enjoys a remarkably temperate and cool climate
compared to either of these two great land masses. This
micro-climate is due to the fact both monsoons reach the
island after blowing over large expanses of water.
The climate in the hills is very healthy, but, on the plains,
especially at the period of change of the monsoon, fever is
reported to be prevalent.
2 During both December and January, NNE winds prevail
and blow in violent gusts for several days at a time such that
the N side of the island should be given a wide berth.
Fine weather prevails over the island between February
and May at which time the anchorages on the N side of the
island are considered safe.
3 In June, July and August the SW Monsoon is reported to
blow in hard and violent gusts on the N coasts of the island;
on the S coast the wind is steadier and not so strong, but
there is a very heavy surf. Rain falls occasionally.
During September, October and the first part of
November light land and sea breezes prevail over the island,
which become more steady from the N towards the end of
November.
15.48
1 Climatic table. See 1.275 and 1.294.
Currents
15.49
1 The currents close to the island of Suqurá are influenced
by the tidal streams which are very irregular, and by the
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 15
monsoon, being from the NNE in December and January
and from the SW from June to August. The currents
generally set with the wind after it has blown hard from the
same direction for some time; rates of up to 2 kn have
been reported.
2 In the early part of the twentieth century, when the NE
Monsoon was well established, a NW-going current with a
rate of 2 kn was reported between the W extremity of
Suqurá and a position 23 miles WSW of the E extremity of
oh (9 miles NE) (15.6).
the island, and 1 mile offshore.
Tidal streams
15.50
1 The tidal streams are very irregular, sometimes running in
one direction for 16 hours, at other times for only 6 hours,
depending greatly on the strength and direction of the
oh.
prevailing wind; see also currents at 15.49.
The tidal streams on the S side of the island set W with
the in-going stream, and E with the out-going stream at a
rate of about 1 kn, but this rate is much dependent on the
wind.
On the N side of the island the stream sets E with the
in-going stream, and W with the out-going stream.
Overfalls occur in places off the S coast of Suqurá.
Anchorages
15.51
1 There are several anchorages which afford protection
according to the prevailing monsoon, but none afford shelter
at all times of the year.
2 Anchorages on the N side of Suqurá are considered safe
in the fine weather season from February to May, when the
NE Monsoon is nearing its end. During the SW Monsoon
there is fair anchorage in all the bays E of Rhiy di-Qad
mah
(12°42′N, 53°39′E) (15.7). These anchorages are usually on
a narrow bank of sand or rock, sloping rapidly into deep
oh (15.6) and Ra’s Qalansyah (3 miles ENE)
water.
3 Anchorage may be obtained anywhere along the S coast
of Suqurá, about 1 mile offshore, in depths from 16 to
22 m, sand and coral. As this coast has few inhabitants and
very little water, it is seldom visited.
Cautions
15.52
1 Owing to the imperfect nature of the surveys, navigation
in the vicinity of Suqurá should be undertaken with caution.
15.53
1 It is dangerous for vessels with a non-operational radar to
make Rhiy di-Irsal (12°33′N, 54°32′E) (15.8) at any time of
the year. During the SW Monsoon the lower land E of the
mountain range is often obscured by haze and depths give
no indication of approach. During the NE Monsoon the land
may be obscured at about the time of sunset by heavy rain
squalls.
15.54
1 It is also necessary, during the NE Monsoon, to take great
care when making Rhiy di-!a’b (12°32′N, 53°18′E) (15.6)
which forms the W extremity of the island as it has been
reported that, at about the time of sunset, it may be obscured
by heavy rain squalls. The point is probably even more
obscured during the period of the SW Monsoon.
Off-lying shoals
15.55
1 A number of detached shoals, with least depths over them
from 34 to 55 m, lie between about 8 miles and 12 miles
NNW of adboh (15.66), and also farther off the coast.
412
This area has not been recently surveyed. See source data
diagram on Chart 5.
Bays
Bindar di- a’b
15.56
1 Description. Bindar di-!a’b (12°35′N, 53°22′E) is a bay
entered between Rhiy di-!a’b (12°32′N, 53°18′E) (15.6) and
Rhiy di-Bi
A salt water lagoon is reported to lie about 5 miles ENE
of Rhiy di-!a’b. The lagoon is separated from the sea by a
bank of sand about 3 cables wide; it is reported to rise and
fall with the tide although it has no apparent connection with
the sea. Some mangroves grow on its banks.
2 Rhiy di-Isfir is a small point on the E shore of the bay
situated about 3 miles S of Rhiy di-Bi
A wreck (position approximate) lies about 1 miles
offshore in the S part of the bay; tide-rips occur W of this
wreck.
15.57
1 Anchorage. Bindar di-!a’b is quite exposed to the wind
during the SW Monsoon, but affords good shelter with
smooth water during the NE Monsoon, though strong squalls
are experienced at times. There are no known dangers, and
the bottom is generally sand or rock.
2 The best anchorage berth, with smooth water during
periods of NE winds, is 4
miles NE of Rhiy di-!a’b
(12°32′N, 53°18′E) (15.6) in a depth of 20 m, white sand.
This berth lies 7 cables offshore, off some mangrove trees
growing N of the lagoon.
Ghubbat Qalans yah
15.58
1 Description. Ghubbat Qalansyah (12°41′N, 53°28′E) is
entered between an unnamed point about 3 miles ENE of
Rhiy di-Bi
(15.6).
2 The shores of the bay are fringed by a reef, most of
which dries; depths in the bay are irregular. There are tidal
overfalls within the bay.
A village, with a mosque, (not charted) stands close to the
coast just over 1 km S of Ra’s Qalansyah in a grove of date
and coconut trees. A lake lies close S of the village.
15.59
1 The coast between Ra’s Qalansyah and an unnamed point
(3 miles ENE) forms a bight which is foul; from the
unnamed point to Rhiy di-Bashrah (12°43′N, 53°33′E)
(15.7) the coast is rocky and backed by high mountains
which rise steeply from the sea.
15.60
1 Anchorage. Ghubbat Qalansyah affords shelter during
the NE Monsoon, but it is exposed during the SW
Monsoon.
2 The best anchorage berth, for a small vessel, is with the
N granite peak above Ra’s Qalansyah bearing 062° and the
mosque bearing 124°, in a depth of about 7 m, about
4 cables off a sandy beach which affords the best landing in
the bay.
Larger vessels may anchor with the mosque bearing 135°,
distant 1 mile, in depths from 13 to 18 m.
Ghubbah di-Qormih
15.61
1 Description. Ghubbah di-Qormih (12°39′N, 53°47′E) is a
bay entered between Rhiy di-Qad
mah (12°42′N, 53°39′E)
(15.7) and Rhiy di-Qormih (14 miles ESE), a low, sandy
point fringed by a reef which extends up to 2 cables
offshore.
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 15
2 The shores of the bay are low and sandy, and are backed
by a range of mountains with an opening near its middle;
another pass through the mountain range lies S of Rhiy
di-Qad
mah.
15.62
1 r Girmah (12°37′N, 53°47′E) is a salt water lagoon,
with its entrance blocked, lying just within the coast near the
head of the bay; the lagoon is bounded by moderately high
cliffs.
15.63
1 Anchorage. The best anchorage berth in Ghubbah
di-Qormih is with Rhiy di-Qormih bearing about 055°,
distant 1 miles. This berth is a little more than 5 cables
offshore, in depths from 9 to 11 m, sand and coral.
2 During the SW Monsoon a heavy swell is felt in the
anchorage when the wind is in the W. During the NE
Monsoon there is a considerable swell in the W part of
Ghubbah di-Qormih.
Ghubbat Q ub
15.64
1 Description. Ghubbat Q

ub is a bay entered between The jetty, which has a depth alongside of 5 m, is suitable
Rhiy di-!a’b (12°39′N, 53°54′E) (15.7), a point on the N
coast of the island, and Rhiy di-b
q (4 miles E) (15.7).
A reef fringes the coast for 3 miles ESE of Rhiy di-!a’b
extending over 1 cable from the shore.
2 An airfield is situated about 3 km S of Rhiy di-!a’b.
15.65
1 Anchorage may be obtained within Ghubbat Q

ub 1 Landing. Landing on the shore is reported to be possible
during the SW Monsoon.
Ghubbah di- ad boh
15.66
1 Description. Ghubbah di-adboh is a bay entered
between Rhiy di-b
q (12°39′N, 53°58′E) (15.7) and Rhiy
di-awlaf (7 miles ENE) (15.7).
The bay is free from dangers. Three mountain streams
flow into the bay.
2 adboh, which stands on the shore of the bay about
3 miles E of Rhiy di-awlaf (12°42′N, 54°05′E), is the
capital of Suqurá. The town consists of a number of white
stone houses built around a larger house, which is the
residence of the Sultan, all of which are surrounded by a
date grove. A palm plantation lies 1 miles E of the town.
3 The village of Shiq lies E of adboh.
Principal marks
15.67
1 Landmarks:
ajhir (12°36′N, 54°03′E) (15.41).
aw
r (12°40′N, 54°05′E) is a prominent twin-peaked
hill. The E half of the hill is composed of yellow
sand and the W half of brown rock. The boundary
between these two halves is a sharp and noticeable
line. On a SE bearing, at a distance of between
about 10 miles and 12 miles, the hill appears like a
white cliff sloping towards the S.
15.68
1 Anchorage. During the SW Monsoon, anchorage within
Ghubbah di-adboh is exposed to strong squalls from the
mountains and a heavy swell sets in when the wind is well
in the W, making good ground tackle necessary. Holding
ground within the bay is fair and is made up of sand and
stones with patches of mud.
2 When the SW Monsoon is unusually violent, small
vessels may obtain shelter within Ghubbah di-adboh,
particularly if the wind is well to the S, when the sea in the
bay will be comparatively smooth.
413
3 Ghubbah di-adboh is particularly unsafe during the first
half of the NE Monsoon from November to January when
heavy squalls from the N are frequent; February to May is
considered to be the better season.
It was reported a number of years ago that when
approaching an anchorage berth in Ghubbah di-adboh
during the forenoon, and when at anchor in a depth of about
13 m, the bottom was clearly visible.
15.69
1 A good anchor berth in the bay is with Rhiy di-awlaf
(12°42′N, 54°05′E) (15.7) bearing 067° and the Sultan’s
residence bearing about 175° in a depth of 16⋅5 m.
2 Good shelter may be obtained close under Rhiy
di-awlaf, in depths from 9 to 11 m, where it is free from
all winds E of NE; landing on the beach in this vicinity is
reported to be comparatively easy even when the sea may be
breaking off adboh.
15.70
1 Jetty. A reclaimed rock jetty, with a T-shaped head of
concrete blocks, extends about 270 m from the shore about
1 miles SSW of Rhiy di-awlaf.
for use, by vessels up to 42 m in length, 4⋅5 m draught and
a width of 10 m during periods of calm weather only.
2 Prohibited area. It is reported that navigation in the
vicinity of the jetty is forbidden between June and the end
of August, the period of the SW Monsoon.
15.71
on a shingle beach which lies close to the E end of the town
of adboh (15.66) and abreast some date palms.
During the NE Monsoon, when the wind is fresh from
seaward, the surf on the beach is heavy and renders landing
difficult and dangerous.
15.72
1 Supplies. The town of adboh (15.66) is the most
convenient place on the island for obtaining supplies, but at
times they are scarce. It is reported that water, fish and meat
can usually be obtained.
Communications. There is an airfield (15.64) situated
about 11 km W of the town.
Bindar Dibn
15.73
1 Description. Bindar Dibn is a bay entered W of Rhiy
di-Hamr (12°41′N, 54°12′E) (15.8).
The bay is free from dangers apart from a spit, on which
there are dangerous rocks and which extends up to 2 cables
N and W of the cape.
15.74
1 Anchorage sheltered from E winds is obtainable by small
vessels with Rhiy di-Hamr bearing about 067°, SW of the
spit, in depths of about 6 m.
2 Good anchorage may also be obtained in Bindar
di-Lshah (not charted by name), which forms the W part of
Bindar Dibn anywhere near the shore. This is the most
sheltered anchorage that may be obtained off Suqurá during
the SW Monsoon; a good berth is reported to be between
3 cables and 5 cables offshore, with a sandhill reported as
standing on the coast about 2 miles W of Rhiy di-Hamr
(12°41′N, 54°12′E), bearing 180°
3 Local knowledge is required for the use of these two
anchorage berths.
Bindar Qaryih
15.75
1 Description. Bindar Qaryih is a bay entered E of Rhiy
di-Hamr (12°41′N, 54°12′E) (15.8); r Qaryih is a creek
 Home Contents Index
CHAPTER 15
which nearly dries entered about 2 miles SE of Rhiy
di-Hamr.
15.76
1 Anchorage may be obtained between 2 cables and
5 cables offshore, in depths from 11 to 18 m; this berth is
well sheltered from the SW Monsoon.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Ghubbat Timbar
15.77
1 Description. Ghubbat Timbar is a bay entered between
Rhiy di-Adhoh (12°37′N, 54°18′E) and Rhiy di-q
(4 miles E) (15.8).
Bindar Fikhah
15.78
1 Description. Bindar Fikhah is a bay entered between
Rhiy di-Ddum (12°35′N, 54°25′E) (15.8) and an unnamed
point (5 miles E) situated about 1 miles W of Rhiy
di-Irsal (12°33′N, 54°32′E) (15.8).
The shores of the bay are low and sandy and are backed
by moderately high mountains. In the centre of the shore
stand two double peaked sandhills with a few trees.
2 Rhiy di-Mm (12°33′N, 54°30′E) stands inland from the
SE part of the bay, about 2 miles W of Rhiy di-Irsal, the E
extremity of Suqurá. The summit is a sharp, high bluff,
274 m high, which forms the E end of a range of mountains
extending along the length of the island. This bluff is visible
in clear weather from a considerable distance even when the
lower land E of the summit is not visible. From Rhiy
di-Mm the land falls away E to a moderately high granite
peak, thence to several small granite hills between 55 m and
61 m high.
3 A dangerous spit, which extends about 4 cables N from
the E entrance point to Bindar Fikhah, shelters the E part of
the bay from E winds.
414
15.79
1 Caution is required when rounding the dangerous spit off
the E entrance point to the bay, as, unless it is blowing
strongly, the outer danger, which usually breaks and has a
depth of 9⋅1 m close to it, is not always visible.
15.80
1 Anchorage. The best anchorage berth is about 5 cables
offshore, in depths from 16 to 22 m with the N extremity of
the E entrance point to the bay bearing 070°, 8 cables
distant.
15.81
1 Small vessels may obtain anchorage in the E part of the
bay, in the shelter of the dangerous spit extending N from
the E entrance point to the bay; local craft may anchor here
in April and May, when W winds prevail.
Local knowledge is required for the use of this
anchorage.
Ghubbah di-N

15.82
1 Description. Ghubbah di-N (12°26′N, 53°28′E) is a
small bay entered about 10 miles ESE of Rhiy di-!a’b
(12°32′N, 53°18′E) (15.6). A small village is situated on the
N shore of the bay; a sandhill stands close N of the NW
entrance point of the bay.
Anchorage may be obtained off the village during the
NE Monsoon.
Bindar di-Ir sal
15.83
1 Description. Bindar di-Irsal is a bay entered between
Ra’s Falanj (12°30′N, 54°27′E) (15.13) and Rhiy di-Irsal
(6 miles ENE) (15.8).
Anchorage. Temporary anchorage may be obtained about
5 cables offshore in the middle of Bindar di-Irsal, in smooth
water during the NE Monsoon, in depths of about 16⋅5 m.
Home Contents Index

APPENDIX I

MINE DANGER AREAS

Gulf of suez and approaches

The area bounded by lines joining the following positions is declared dangerous to mines.
Charts 2373, 2374
(a) 28°38′⋅5N, 32°51′E.
(b) 28°38′⋅5N, 32°53′E.
(c) 28°35′⋅0N, 32°56′E.
(d) 28°33′⋅5N, 32°55′E.

415
Home Contents Index

APPENDIX II

OMAN − FIRING PRACTICE AREAS

Gunnery and missile practice firings, and other defensive exercises, take place in several areas off the Oman coast. The
principal gunnery and missile firing areas within the limits of this book are as follows:

Area Jazirat Ghazaut (D57)

Chart 3785
The area bounded by the arc of a circle of radius 10 miles, as shown on the chart, which is centred on position 17°36′⋅42N,
56°08′⋅12E close off Gharzaut (13.136).

Area Marbat (D65)

Charts 2895, 3784
The area of a rectangle bounded by positions (i) 16°53′N, 54°30′E, (ii) 16°53′N, 55°10′E, (iii) 16°13′N, 55°10′E, (iv) 16°13′N,
54°30′E.

Area Ra’s Hamar (D67)

Charts 2895, 3784
The area bounded by positions (i) 16°42′N, 53°55′E, (ii) 16°40′N, 53°34′E, (iii) 16°25′N, 53°37′E, (iv) 16°28′N, 53°58′E.

Area Abu Rasas (D20)

Chart 3785
The area bounded by positions (i) 20°15′⋅5N, 58°32′⋅1E, (ii) 19°54′⋅0N, 58°09′⋅1E, (iii) 19°43′⋅2N, 58°21′⋅0E, (iv) 20°04′⋅7N,
58°43′⋅9E.

416
Home Contents Index

APPENDIX III

MOORING SITES ON PROTECTED REEFS IN EGYPTIAN WATERS WITHIN THE GULF OF

SUEZ, GULF OF ‘AQABA AND RED SEA

Charts 12, 158, 159, 2375 F 29°12′⋅5N, Ras Borka 3

34°45′⋅5E
Chartlet Position Name Moorings H 27°21′⋅0N, Um Gamar 7
A 27°44′⋅0N, Old Quay 3 33°54′⋅5E
34°14′⋅6E H 27°20′⋅0N, Shab Ruhr 10
B 27°43′⋅5N, Yolande Reef 1 33°55′⋅0E
34°15′⋅8E H 27°18′⋅5N, Careless Reef 6
B 27°43′⋅5N, Shark Reef 4 33°56′⋅5E
34°15′⋅8E H 27°12′⋅2N, Erg Somaya 3
B 27°43′⋅5N, Anemone Reef 1 33°59′⋅3E
34°15′⋅8E H 27°11′⋅0N, Small Giftun 19
B 27°45′⋅0N, Jack Fish Alley 4 33°59′⋅0E SE
34°15′⋅5E H 27°10′⋅5N, Small Ramada 2
B 27°46′⋅5N, South Bareika 4 33°59′⋅0E N
34°13′⋅0E H 27°09′0N, Erg Abu 2
B 27°49′⋅0N, Marsa Ghoslani 5 33°59′⋅0E Ramada
34°16′⋅3E H 27°07′0N, Abu Ramada 10
B 27°50′⋅7N, Ras Cathy 3 33°59′⋅3E SE
34°18′⋅0E H 27°06′⋅5N, Abu Ramada 8
B 27°50′⋅7N, Temple 5 33°58′⋅5E SW
34°18′⋅0E H 27°04′⋅0N, Abu Ramada 14
B 27°51′⋅0N, Ras Um Sid 2 33°56′⋅0E Gota
34°18′⋅7E H 27°08′⋅0N, El Aruk−Troyal 15
B 27°52′⋅3N, Amphorous 2 33°55′⋅0E
34°19′⋅5E H 27°12′⋅5N, G.C. Shaab 8
B 27°54′⋅5N, Near Garden 3 33°57′⋅5E Sbina
34°21′⋅0E H 27°12′⋅0N, G.C. Shaab 2
B 27°54′⋅5N, Middle Garden 7 33°57′⋅0E Aabina
34°21′⋅0E H 27°12′⋅5N, G.C. Shaab 7
B 27°54′⋅5N, Far Garden 3 33°57′⋅0E Torfa
34°21′⋅0E H 27°12′⋅0N, G.C. Shaab 4
B 27°54′⋅5N, Tiger Bay 1 33°57′⋅5E Frasha
34°21′⋅0E H 27°14′⋅5N, Stone Beach 2
B 27°55′⋅7N, Shark’s Bay 1 33°56′⋅0E
34°22′⋅3E H 27°16′⋅0N, Turtle Beach 9
B 27°57′⋅0N, White Night 2 33°53′⋅5E
34°23′⋅3E H 27°16′⋅5N, Fanus E−Middle 9
C 28°01′⋅5N, Gordon Reef 12 33°53′⋅1E Erg
34°28′⋅0E H 27°15′⋅7N, Fanus W 4
C 28°01′⋅5N, Tomas Reef 3 33°52′⋅3E
34°28′⋅0E H 27°24′⋅3N, Shaab El Erg 7
C 28°01′⋅5N, Jackson Reef 9 33°51′⋅0E
34°28′⋅0E H 27°26′⋅0N, Gota Dir 8
C 28°02′⋅0N, North Lagona 2 33°44′⋅3E
34°29′⋅0E H 27°18′⋅5N, El Fanadir 5
D 28°04′⋅1N, El Gose 1 33°50′⋅0E
34°26′⋅5E H 27°10′⋅0N, Shaab Ishta 3
D 28°18′⋅0N, Shorat El 1 33°53′⋅5E
34°26′⋅0E Manqata H 27°10′⋅0N, Erg Bridget 2
D 28°27′⋅0N, Sandner 1 33°53′⋅5E
34°30′⋅0E H 27°06′⋅0N, Petra Reef 5
E 28°30′⋅0N, El Masbat 1 33°50′⋅0E
34°32′⋅0E H 27°03′⋅0N, Shaab Disha 5
E 28°37′⋅3N, Ras Abu Galum 1 33°54′⋅0E
34°33′⋅0E H 27°01′⋅0N, Abu Hashish 7
E 28°43′⋅5N, Ras Mamlah 1 33°56′⋅0E
34°38′⋅0E H 27°09′⋅0N, Erg Ali 2
E 28°51′⋅3N, Hebak 2 33°55′⋅0E
34°39′⋅0E

417
Home Contents Index
APPENDIX III

H 27°09′⋅5N, Magawish 5 S 26°48′⋅8N, Sandy Island 2

33°52′⋅5E 33°59′⋅8E
H 27°08′⋅0N, Erg Adel 2 S 26°48′⋅3N, Tobia Kebir 2
33°52′⋅0E 33°59′⋅8E
H 27°12′⋅0N, Ben El Gebal 3 S 26°47′⋅8N, Gamal Saghir 2
33°58′⋅0E 1 33°59′⋅0E
H 27°11′⋅5N, Ben El Gebal 2 S 26°47′⋅5N, Gamal Kebir 2
33°58′⋅1E 2 33°59′⋅5E
H 27°11′⋅0N, Ben El Gebal 2 S 26°45′⋅0N, Panorama 3
33°58′⋅2E 3 34°05′⋅0E Reef
H 27°10′⋅5N, Ben El Gebal 2 S 26°42′⋅0N, Middle Reef 2
33°58′⋅3E 4 34°05′⋅5E
S 26°55′⋅0N, Shaab Saiman 2 S 26°39′⋅5N, Shaab Claude 1
33°59′⋅3E 34°03′⋅8E
S 26°51′⋅0N, Ras Abu Soma 5 S 26°39′⋅3N, Shaab Sheer 3
34°00′⋅5E 34°02′⋅3E
S 26°49′⋅8N, Tobia Arba 3 1 All mooring buoys are rated at 20 000 kg and are of the
33°59′⋅3E Manta or Reef Pin design.
S 26°49′⋅3N, Tobia Hamra 3
33°59′⋅0E

418
Home Contents Index
APPENDIX III

34° 30´ 35°

30° 30°

ELAT
'AQABA
30´ 30´

29° 29°
EL QUARNÛS
A
A B
' A Q
O F

E
L F
G U

30´ EL KURÂ 30´

NABQ

28° 28°
TIRAN
S C
T
R
A
IT
RÂS MUHAMMAD
O NATIONAL PARK
F B
G A
U
B
A
L
R E D S E A

30´ 30´
Longitude 34° East from Greenwich 30´ 35°

Protected reefs on the Egyptian coastline - Sinai Peninsula and Gulf of 'Aqaba

419
Home Contents Index
APPENDIX III

34° 35° 36° 37°

28° 28°

H
HURGHADA

27° 27°

SAFÂGA S

EL AKHAWEIN (The Brothers)

(see 4.24)

26° 26°

R E D S E A

25° 25°
ABU EL KIZÂN (Daedalus Reef)
(see 4.26)

GEZÎRAT WÂDI GIMÂL (see 5.169)

(see 5.168)
QUL'ÂN ISLANDS

24° 24°
RÂS BANIYÂS

GEZÎRET ZABARGAD
(see 4.15)
(see 5.11)

23° 23°

(see 5.11)

GEZÎRAT
HALAIB

22° RÂS HADARBA 22°

Longitude 34° East from Greenwich 36° 37°

Protected reefs on the Egyptian coastline - The Red Sea

420
Home Contents Index

Distance table - Red Sea and Gulf of Aden

Note: For further information and notes on

distances, see Admiralty Distance Tables
Indian Ocean Table 2 and Index Chart 2.
en

th

b
Ad

de
Li

en
ab
Al

M
635
Aq

sa

1246 el

a
688
As

er

so
b

150 499 1105

Ba

rb

aa
Be

100 535 1142 50

ti
os

ou
138 701 1308 216 166
Bo

ah
ib

wa
421

264 888 1495 403 353 270 Dj

dd

.
sa
130 615 1222 130 80 156 377

ch
la
Je

la
as

la

An
al
701 148 569 566 602 768 955 682

n
Sa
M

da
uk
399 308 896 254 292 458 645 372 366

ib
Su
M

rt

ar
277 912 1519 427 377 343 189 404 979 669

Po

Gh
rt
596 1231 1838 746 696 658 436 722 1298 988 333

Po

.
ga

Is
s

hr
658 170 639 524 561 727 914 641 154 307 938 1257

Ra

fa

Ba
er
1203 649 191 1066 1103 1269 1456 1183 531 854 1480 1799 596

Sa

ak

al
1109 553 179 969 1006 1172 1359 1086 436 757 1383 1702 508 123

Sh

ez

u`
1132 578 130 995 1032 1198 1385 1112 460 784 1409 1728 694 71 53

Su

nb
1307 746 276 1164 1200 1366 1553 1280 628 973 1577 1896 694 98 233 168

Ya
883 329 413 747 783 949 1136 863 209 545 1160 1479 299 377 285 306 475
Home Contents Index
Names without a paragraph number are for gazetteer purposes only
A‘ Shaghpah, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.179
Aantaara, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.160
Abakere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.267
Abana, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.160
Abarah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.117
Abaya
 Jabal Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8 Ab 
di’, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8
Abaya
 Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.124 Ab Sahim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.331
Abb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.161
Abbaguba, Isolotto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.80
Abd All
h Gharb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.21
‘Abd al Kr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.14
Abdehan, Wadi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.152
Abd el Kader Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . 7.145
Abd−el−Kader, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.176
Abdur, Monte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.55
Abeilat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.200
Abur, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.270
Abur, Sharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.270
Abington Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14
Ablo Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.40
Abou Mâya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.62
Abrhud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
Abtain Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.138
Ab ‘Al Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.45
Ab ‘Al Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.43
Ab al Akh
ar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.442 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.13
Ab al Yahd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.440
Abu ‘Asal, Khr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.243
Ab as Sab
‘, Khawr . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.81
Ab Bakr, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38
Abu Dabbâb, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.44
Abu Dara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19
Abu Disba, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.332
Abu Diyâb, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.47
Ab Ddah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.52
Abu Durba, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.235
Abu Durba Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.235
Abu el Darag Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37
Abu el Darag, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Abu el Khosu, Shab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.44
Abu el Kizân . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.24
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
Ab Far
mish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.277
Abu Fatma, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19
Abu Fendera, Sha’ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.166
Abu Galûm, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.56
Abu Gosha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.266
Abu Gurdi, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.143
Abu Handal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Ab 
rith . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.403
Ab ufrah, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.419
Abu Huswa, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.235
Abu ‘Im
ma, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.252
Abu ‘Im
ma, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.251
INDEX
Ab Ra
 Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.175
Abu Rimâthi, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.383
Abu Rimâthi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.390
Abu Rudeis, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.252
Ab a’ad, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.415
Agwatiri, Khr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.297
Ahmar, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.58
Abu Saiy
l Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.46
Ab Sayf, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
Abu Sha‘r Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.361
Abu Shar el Qibli, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . 3.323
Abu Shadd Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.169
Ab Shagr
b, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16
Ab Shajarsh Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.169
Ab Shammah, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.25
Abu Sha‘r, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.337
Ab Shar‘ah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.116
Ab Shawk Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.48
Ab Shawk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.142
Ab Shawk, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.49
Abu Sherayu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.103
Abu Shiban, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.333
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.333
Ab Shuqar Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.203
Ab Shuqar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.203
Ab Shshah, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.13
Alaulli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.264
Abu Sma, R
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
Abu Sul, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.352
Abu Suweira, R
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37
Abu Terrda Islets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.217
Abu Tig Marina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.362
Abu Tiyûr, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.41
Abu Yabis, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.346
Ab Zabl, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.201
Ab Zahr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.121
Ab Zahrah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.41
Abu Zenîma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.289
Abu Zenîma, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.289
Abulad Islets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.116
Acbaro Kebr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.82
Acbaro Seghr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.82
Achelo, Monte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.72
Ad Dah
‘ir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.176
Ad Dahariz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.65
Ad Darb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.80
Ad Diss
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.138
‘Adabîya Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.259
‘Adabîya Harbour, El
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.272
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.276
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.261
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.278
‘Adabîya, Râs el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.259
Adado, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.160
Adjuz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.75
Aduali, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.73
Adulis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.50
Afkala Haya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.374
Agaraf, Pointe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.52
Aids to Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27
Ain Sukhna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.101
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.101
Ajusak Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.177
Akbar qayl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.147
Akbaya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.142
‘Akbayn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.134
Akhawein, El− . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.22
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
Akhd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.248
Akloo, Buur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.299
Akrab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.96
Akt
f, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8
Al = the definite article; see proper name.
Al, W
d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.277
al‘Abd, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.96
Alali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.278
Alat Ela . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.22
Aleita, Monte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.51
Alet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.266
Ali, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.59
’Al Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.419
Ali, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.23
Ali, Shab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.122
Ali, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.41
Oilfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.68
Ali, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.65
Ali−Birk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.72
Alibarate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.51
Alid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.72
Aliya Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.47
Almis, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.290
Alob, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.200
Alula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.378
Alula, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.160
Amal Oilfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.64
’Amar
t Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.329
Amas, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.50
Ambabbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.23
‘Ambâda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.83
Ambadu, Khor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.83
Ambar, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.24
Amrac, Khr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.136
Ambarughli Kebr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.247
Ambarughli Saghr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.247
Ambouli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.120
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.123
Abu Kulr Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13 dahula Dest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.264 Amen Khal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.74
Abu Latt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.33 Adbara Kebir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.115 Amer Oilfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.54
Ab Madafi’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.274
Ab Madd, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.104
Abu Marina Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.353
Ab Mas
rib, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12
Ab Mat
r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.145
Ab Matnah, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.60
Abu Minqâr Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.369
Ab Mukh
dij, Mars
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.33
Abu Musha Shoals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.47
Ab Nalhah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.444
Adbara Seghir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.115
Addar Ail Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.60
Aden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.26
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.54
Basins and berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.86
Directions
Approaches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.75
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.82
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.26
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.66
minah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.232
’Amman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.134
’Amm
r, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.12
‘Amy
‘, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.121
An Nabqyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.22
An Nal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.173
An−Nu‘m
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.21
an Nu‘m
n, Sharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.31
An−Nuwayshizyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.24
Anbar, Sha‘ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142
Abu Nigara, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.338 Inner Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.93 ndeba Ye Midir Zerf Ch’af . . . . . . . . . 7.44
Abu Nuhâs, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Ab Qiy
mah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.19
Abu Rabah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.92
Abu Ramla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.66
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.41
Little Aden Oil Harbour . . . . . . . . . 12.86
Little Aden Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . 12.29
Outer Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.67
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.115
ndber Dest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.127
Anfile Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.259
Anfile, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.259
Angar, Khor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.16
Angarosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16
Ab Ra
 Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.145 Aden Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.30 ‘ni, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.147

422
Home Contents Index
Anjara, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.11
Ankhor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.230
Anrata, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.45
Anse = bay; see proper name.
Antalo, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.119
‘Antar, Sharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.40
Antara, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.160
Antuk, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.19
‘Aqaba, El
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.141
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.152
Control Tower Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.132
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.120
INDEX
Ash Shaykh al Jawhar . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.21
Ash Shaykh Mirb
 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.113
Ash Shi’bayn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.409
Ash Sihr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.205
Ash Sihr Oil Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . 12.205
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.217
General information . . . . . . . . . . . 12.205
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.224
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 12.213
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.227
Ash Shuqayq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.101
Ashayzeniyat, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.110
Ashgar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.113
Bahari, Sharm el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.38
Bahdr Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.344
Bahr el Qulzum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.202
‘Atâqa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.249
Anchorages in Bahr el Qulzum . . . . 2.222
Group A anchorages . . . . . . . . . . 2.228
Group B anchorages . . . . . . . . . . 2.230
Group C anchorages . . . . . . . . . . 2.233
Group D anchorages . . . . . . . . . . 2.236
Group H anchorages . . . . . . . . . . 2.238
Channels through Bahr el Qulzum
Eastern Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.217
Newport Rock Channel . . . . . . . 2.221
Industrial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.167 ‘shiq Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.234 Western Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.220
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.135
Marine Peace Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.131
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.161
Royal Jetty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.144
South Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.134
Aqt, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.157
Aqit, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.157
Aq
rh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.40
Aqrab Islets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.353
Ar, Ra’s, Bandar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.157
Ar Ra’s al Aswad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.266
Ar Ra’s al Abya
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.105 Assarca Islets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.42
Ar Rayy
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.207
Ar−Ar, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.129
Ar−Ra’s al Abaya
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.227 Aswad, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.266
‘Arab, Sharm el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.34
Arab Petroleum Pipeline Company . . . 3.107
Arab Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.43
Arab Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.12
‘Araba, W
di al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Arafali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.50
‘shiq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.234
Ashkharah, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.230
Ashrâfi Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.339
Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.313
Oilfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.70
Reef Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
Ashrâfi, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.313
Asis, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.325
Asmara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.108
Asoteriba, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17
Astrib
, Jib
l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.180
Baie = bay; see proper name.
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.42
Asses Ears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.248
Balfe Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.83
Aswân High Dam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.89
‘At, Merset et . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.19
At Tih
ma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.31
Ata, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.302
Ata, Sha‘ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.132
Atantûr, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55
El ‘Adabîya Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . 2.261
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.202
Gûnet el ‘Adabîya . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.259
Marsa Badr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.256
Oil Berth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.240
Vegetable Oil Berth . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.245
Bar Ibn ‘Abb
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.41
Bahri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.403
Bahriya Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.353
Bahriya Tawîla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.358
Baia di Brassy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14
Baka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.80
Balaan, Khr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.135
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.83
Bal
f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.241
Ban
 River . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.149
Ban
 W
d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.149
Banâs, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14
Ban
t Murshid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.201
‘rah, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.17
A‘raja, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.19
Arakiyai, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.286
Aranat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.125
’Arar Range, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.75
Arassan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.259
Arb, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.31
Ar
ayn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.161
Aroor, Buuraha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.146
Arpha Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.97
Artau, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.51
‘Ars, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.297
A alf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.60
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.69
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.73
Cement Berth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.77
Deep Water Berth . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.76
Offshore Berth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.73
Ro−Ro Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.75
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.60
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.72
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.66
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.79
A alf Blockhouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.72
A amdyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.399
As Sawd
‘ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.127
Asad, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.148
‘As‘ale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.34
Asbab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112
Ascoma, Monte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.269
‘Atâqa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.249
‘Atâqa, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.203
‘Atâqa Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.260
‘Atâqa, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.260
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.260
Atbara, River . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.104
‘A
y
 Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.228
Attabarran, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.115
Auagudur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.273
Aucan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.139
Auliya, Ra’s el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.332
Avocet Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17
Awali Hutub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.92
Awali Shaura . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.92
Aweitir, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.289
Awqad, Khawr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.90
‘Aww
f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.170
Axmar, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.160
‘Ayn, Ghubbat al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.240
‘Aynnah, W
d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.27
Ayrat Areel, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.98
Az Zaghfah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.207
Azalea Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.97
Azalea Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.97
‘Azz, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.18
Azov Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.326
B
Ghashwah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.151
Banc = bank; see proper name.
Banco Erc Abdulla−Abu−Madda . . . . . 7.42
Bandar = bay, harbour, port; see proper
name.
Banka Arab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.15
Baqara, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.96
Baqlah, Mars
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.143
Baradli, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.127
Baradu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.115
Baranlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.48
Bareika, Mersa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.16
Bargaal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.259
Bardi, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.111
Barlow Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.42
Barm al Agi Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.45
Barn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.200
Barn Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.75
Barôk, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.352
Barr al Hikman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.162
Barr
Ms
Kebir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19
Barr
Ms
Saqir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19
Barracouta Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.353
Barr
qah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.150
Barri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.159
Barrow Rocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.149
Barton Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.105
Bashayer Oil Terminal
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.94
Berth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.105
Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.109
seb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.202 B
Ja‘ash, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.255 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.83
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.220 B
b el Mandeb, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.92 Harbour entrance light . . . . . . . . . . 6.111
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.235 Bab el Mandeb, Straits of . . . . . . . . . . . 4.71 Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.88
Directions for entering harbour . . . 7.234 Bacaad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.344 Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.112
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.231 Bacchus Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.28 Bathing Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.266
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.213 Ba
‘ Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.31 Batûga, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.159
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.240 Badr, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.256 Baw
bat al Mamarr ad D
khilyah . . . 9.401
seb Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.244
Asfar, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.32
Ash Sharfa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.54
Ash Sharmah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.47
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.56
Dimnah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.168
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.47
 Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.59

’, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.164
Badri Oilfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.58
Baeki, Monte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
Bad Sharm al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28
Baghdâdi, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
Baghlah, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.200
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.67
Bahar, Râs el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.216
423
Baw
bat al Mamarral Wusá . . . . . . . . 9.401
Baw
rid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.182
Bawati, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.180
Baxaya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.354
Bay

Bay

Bay
Home Contents Index
Bayda, Shi‘b al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.330
No 13 Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.330
B
yer, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.170
Beacon Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Beheta Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.275
Belayim, El . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.297
Belayim Oilfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Bender Siyaada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.340
Bender Cassim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.206
Bera’isol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.272
Bera’isol Bahir Selat’ . . . . . . . . . . . 7.272
Berbera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.162
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.180
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.195
Directions for entering harbour . . 14.188
General information . . . . . . . . . . . 14.162
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.186
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 14.174
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.202
Bereeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.386
Berenice, Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.140
Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.144
Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.145
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.140
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.154
Inner Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.155
Leading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.153
Middle Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.147
North Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.151
South Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.152
Town of Berenice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.141
Bey Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.298
Bylul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.275
Bylul Bahir Selat’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.275
Bianco Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.275
Bin Quwaysim, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . 13.203
Billoisin, Monte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.85
Bindar di−Irsal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.83
Bindar di−Lshah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.74
Bindar di−!a’b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.56
Bindar Dibn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.73
Bindar Fikhah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.78
Bindar Qaryih . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.75
Binnah, Ghubbat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.255
Binna, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.161
Bintawt, Ghubbat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.160
Bintawt, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.158
Bir ‘Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.258
Bi‘r Ahmad, Khawr . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.124
Bîr Esel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16
Bîr Odeib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.93
Bir Quei’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
Bir, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.15
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.14
Birk, Khawr al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.72
Birkah, Jabal am . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.15
Birket Misallât . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.216
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.216
Biyoguure, Buur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.166
Black Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Black Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.150
Black Rocks: ‘Ambâda . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.84
Black Rocks: Khr Nawarat . . . . . . . . 6.336
Blind Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Blondeau, Baie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.70
Blondeau, Île . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.70
Bluff Point: Gûbâl Saghîra . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
Bluff Point: Khr Nawarat . . . . . . . . . 6.333
Bodinjan, Shab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.35
Bodkin Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.164
Bonito Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.210
Boosaaso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.206
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.211
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.217
Directions for entering harbour . . 14.213
General information . . . . . . . . . . . 14.206
INDEX
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.212
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.219
Bosanquet Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.234
Bosasso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.206
Botiala . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.358
Botiala, Khor di . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.358
Bourdêro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.90
Bowen Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.25
Brandon Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.168
Bream Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.210
Brisbane Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18
Brothers, The: Red Sea . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.22
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
Brothers, The: Suqurá . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.29
Brown Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.17
Bryony Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.178
Bu Sifa, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.144
Budran, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.234
Oil Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.252
Bugen ye Midir Zerf Ch’af, Ras . . . . 7.269
Buhais Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.171
Buay Village . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.171
Buays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.171
Buheiret el Timsâh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.152
Buja, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.203
Buklan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.164
Bullaxaar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.293
Bullissar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.139
Bulul, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.132
Bur Daralet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.151
Bur Dhasi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.150
Bur Goroloho Albero . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.152
Bur Madà Marodi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.149
Bûr el Suweis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.280
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.289
Basins and berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.304
Bûr Ibrâhîm Basin . . . . . . . . . . . 2.304
El Mînâ’ el Gedîda . . . . . . . . . . . 2.317
Petroleum Basin . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.322
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.280
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.302
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.285
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.330
Traffic regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.295
Bûr Fu’âd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.139
Bûr Sa‘îd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Bûr Tawfîq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.196
South Basin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.198
Burayqah, Ra’s al− . . . . (23°38′N, 38°32′E)
Burayqah, Sharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.251
Buret, Anse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.40
Burkt Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.64
Burkt, Sha‘ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.64
Burns Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.207
Burqa‘, Râs el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.56
Burq
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.15
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.15
Buruc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.347
Burm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.247
Burm, Bandar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.244
Burm, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.151
Bûs, Ghubbet el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.101
Busedda, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.199
Bushy Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.343
Bushy Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.143
Butaylat al Maqq
’ . . . . (21°30′N, 39°08′E)
Butaylat al Wayah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.412
Buur, burraha = hill(s), mountain(s); see
proper name.
Buwaysh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.207
Cabija Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.273
Cabul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
Cadcadde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.160
Cadcadde, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.160
Cairn Point: Abu Zenîma . . . . . . . . . . 3.289
Cairn Point: Marsa esh Sheikh Ibrahim 6.309
424
Cairo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.79
Cal Madow, Buuraha . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.148
Callida . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.82
Caluula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.378
Caluula, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.160
Calveyn, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.166
Cambit, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.137
Canale di Dissei . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.66
Canara Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142
Candala . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.351
Cannon Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.113
Cap Obock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.40
Caribale, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.232
Carless Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.338
Caseyr, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.160
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.158
Cassim, Bandar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.206
Cavally Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.353
Ceel Unkud, Togga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.152
Ceebaad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.268
Ceelayo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.334
Centre Peak Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.40
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16
Champlain Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.43
Channel Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.273
Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22
Chevalier Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.155
Chevalier Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.102
Chiltern Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.283
Chisholm Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.40
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.40
Chor Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.64
Chyoda Island Oil Terminal . . . . . . . . 9.425
Ciadid, Bandar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.358
Clematis Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.12
Clocheterie, Banc de la . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.45
Cod−Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.200
Cod−Ali Est . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.200
Condenser Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.155
Conical Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.267
Connected Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.36
Conquest Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.128
Conry Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36
Light−float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36
Coraghe, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.160
Coral Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6
Corali, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.42
Corner Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.209
Cosar, Monte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.198
Cosar, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.199
Countries and ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.79
Djibouti . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.180
Egypt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.79
Eritrea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.108
Israel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.122
Jordan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.134
Oman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.168
Saudi Arabia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.144
Somalia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.192
Sudan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.94
Yemen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.154
Crazirat Irj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.344
Crique d’Anghar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.16
Crulli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.262
Cundabil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.127
Curieux, Banc du . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.49
Currency Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.122
Cust Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.64
Cuuda, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.299
Cygnet Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.210
Cygnet Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.149
CZS Light−buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.229
Da‘ama Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.54
Daba Libâ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.38
Dabanet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.115
Dabarah, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8
Dabb
gh, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
Home Contents Index
Dabbah, Sharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.61
Dabranqa, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.327
Dad Ye Midir Zerf Ch’af . . . . . . . . . . 7.199
Daedalus Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.24
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
Daffah, Ra’s ad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.230
Dagdere, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.266
Dahab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.56
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.53
Dahlak Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.87
East central part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.94
North East Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.105
North part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.91
South East of Dehalak’ Dest . . . . . 7.138
West central part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.101
Dahlak Reefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43
Dahleid, Banco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.75
Dahleid, Isolotto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.74
Dahlia Passage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.117
Dahlia Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.37
Dahrat ‘Abid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20
Dahrat Asis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.353
Dahrat Ed Dak Hillat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20
Dahrat Ed Dakhla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20
Dahrat Qab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.352
a
y
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.67
Dahret: North East Channel . . . . . . . . 7.113
Dahret: North Massawa Channel . . . . . 7.31
Dahret Dulke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.120
Dahret Kabari . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.95
Dakliyat, Khr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.186
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.187
Dakliyat Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.186
Dalcus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.115
D
m, Ra’s ad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.184
Damath, Sha‘ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.305
Dama Dama Oil Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . 6.76
Damma Damma Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.66
Damo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.395
Damon Pythias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.142
Damqawt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.22
Danak Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.12
Danger Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.182
Dankali, Banc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.36
Dannabah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.273
Darad, El . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.303
Dar Ah Teras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.353
Dar Ottun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.115
Dar Solum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.97
oh, Rhiy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6 Duan, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.37
D
ra Lagoon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.290
ub
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.64
Daralehe, Buur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.151
arbat ‘Al Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.19
Darjah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.152
Dark Point of Shuw
myah . . . . . . . . 13.108
Darr, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.298
Darm
kia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.249
Darraka: Dahlak Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.121
Darraka: Saw
kin Group . . . . . . . . . . 6.353
ub
village . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.93
Darraka el Bahr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.121
ub
Bulk Plant (Tanker) Terminal . . . 9.92
Darsa, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.35
Datum Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.121
Dauqa, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.12
Daw‘an, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.59
Dawba‘ Ra’s ad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.35
Dawhar
b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.68
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.68
ubbah, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.226
Dawat awqirah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.116
Dawm, Ghubbat ad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.115
Dawoureet, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.191
ila, Ra’s a
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.144 Dudo, Mersa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.269
Dawwah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.189
Daydalib, Sha‘ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.216
Dayy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.172
Dead Sea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.25
Debel Ali, Isolotto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.79
Deeny Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.28
Deep Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.354
Degay
 Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.234
Dehalak’ Dest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.116
Dehalak’ Kebr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.137
Dehaneba, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.82
INDEX
Dehret Segala . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.121
Deir Umm Diheis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.363
Delesen, Isolotto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.80
Deqayeq, Sha‘b ed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.329
Dercos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.248
Derbsasa Dest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.45
Dergamman Kebr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.77
Dergamman Seghr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.44
Dergoman Kebir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.120
Dergoman Seghir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.120
Derom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.96
Deversoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.172
Deversoir By−pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.169
East Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.170
West Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.171
Dh
Al Fayf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.144
Dhahak
n, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.80
Dha−n−nafarik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.120
Dhafghan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.265
Dh
hik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.120
Dhalqut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.12
Dhanab al Qirsh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.210
Dharri, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.145
Dhaxsi, Buuraha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.150
Dh
Jetée du Large . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.135
Dhoftille, Buur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.159
Dhoftille, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.159
Dh Dafr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.160
Dhu Hirab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.68
Dhu Hirab Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.68
Dhu Nishab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.121
Dhu−l−ankibat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.96
Dhu−l−bia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.120
Dhu−l−fidol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.96
Dhu−l−kuff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.120
Dhu−l−kurush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.139
Dhu−lalam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.96
Dhu−rijrij . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.126
Dhub
b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.280
Dhuf
r Plain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.63
Dhuladhiya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.95
Dhulakal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.121
Dhunayb, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.267
Dhurbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.360
Dhurbo, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.361
di−Adhoh, Rhiy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8
di−Bashrah, Rhiy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7
di−Bi
di−Diblih, Rhiy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.13
di−Ddum, Rhiy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8
Di−Dya‘ah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.13
di−Hamr Rhiy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8
Diamond Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.328
Dîb, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Dibia, Gezîret el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15
Dibsel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19
Difnein . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
di-adboh, Ghubbah . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.66
di−awlaf, Rhiy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7
di−b
q, Rhiy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7
Diheisa, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36
di−q, Rhiy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8
di−Irsal, Rhiy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8
di−Isfir, Rhiy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.56
Diknaw, Ghubb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.56
Dilemmi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.61
di−Mm Rhiy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.78
di−N, Ghubbah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.82
di−Qad
mah, Rhiy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7
di−Qaanhin, Rhiy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.13
di−Qormih, Ghubbah . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.61
di−Qormih, Rhiy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.61
Dirbait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
Dirra, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.51
Dirtit, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.334
Dis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.151
425
di−!a’b, Rhiy: N coast Suqutrá . . . . . . . 15.7
di−!a’b, Rhiy: W extremity Suqutrá . . . 15.6
Dishet Abu Hurghada . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.361
Dishet Abu Minqâr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.369
Dishet el−Dhaba . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.32
Diss
n, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.138
Dissei . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.63
Dissei, Isola . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.63
Dissei, Monte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.63
Distress and Rescue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.69
Rescue services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.70
Dives Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.149
Djebel−Jan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.15
Djibouti . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.86
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.104
Basins and berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.129
Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.121
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.86
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.114
Horizon Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.115
International airport . . . . . . . . . . . 14.141
Aero Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.120
Jetée du Gouvernement . . . . . . . . 14.133
Jetée du Gouvernement Light . . . . 14.127
Jetée du Marabout . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.114
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.97
Môle du Fontainebleau . . . . . . . . . 14.134
NW Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.123
SE Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.129
Môle Nord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.136
Môle Sud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.132
Port du Héron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.136
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.138
Doewa Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.144
Dofueur, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.125
Dogon, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.186
Dohra Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Dohul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.115
Dohul Bahut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.31
Dolphin Cove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.55
Dmesh Sheikh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19
Dorâlé, Baie de . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.24
Dorish Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.44
Double Peak Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.65
Douglas Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.44
Du−Barr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.122
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.76
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.85
Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.80
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.64
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.72
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.90
Town of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.65
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.97
Berth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.100
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.92
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.95
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.101
Dubar, Buuraha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.166
Dubr, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.161
Dubriyaad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.166
Dufare Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.77
Dule, Monte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.48
Duliacus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.115
Dumaygh, Sharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.37
Dumeira Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.82
Dumeira, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.82
Dumsuq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.152
Dungun
b Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.266
Duqaylah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.164
Duqm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.147
Duqm, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.147
Home Contents Index
Dur Gaam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.115
Dur Ghella . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.115
Durbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.360
Dur
ka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.203
Durdureh, Khr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.332
Durduri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.330
Durrum Seghir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.103
Ds
qya Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.36
Dushuk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.146
Eagle Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.323
Eagle Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.322
Eagle Rocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.43
East Abullen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.273
East Horn Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.187
East Khawr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.65
East Point: Jabal Zuqar Island . . . . . . . . 4.48
East Rocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.35
East Tanka Oilfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.49
East Zeit Oilfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.67
Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.183
d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.199
d Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.199
Ed Domesh Shesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19
Egadur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.152
Egela, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.44
Egyptian General Petroleum
Corporation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.137
Eilat
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.103
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.110
Katza Oil Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.112
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.81
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.95
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.97
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.116
Eiro, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.38
Eitwid Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.209
El = the definite article; see proper name.
‘Elba, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17
Elayu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.334
Elba Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16
Elbow Buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.360
Eleaf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.137
Elefante, Capo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.160
Elephants Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.19
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.16
Elephants Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.127
Eliza Shoals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.279
Eljar Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.229
Elphinstone Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
Endeavour Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.334
Endeavour Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.147
Endeavour Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.34
Endeavour Shoals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.210
Endel, Monte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.270
Endu, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43
Enta−idell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.114
Entaasnu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112
Entaentor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112
Entatu, Ghubbet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.125
Enteara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.127
Enterprise Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.24
Enterprise Passage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.30
Entesila . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.30
Entoghodof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.115
Entrance Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.315
Entrance Shoals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.336
Entufash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.114
Entvedul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.113
Erba, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.165
Erekhi Frahunt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.130
arayn Islets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.261
Ererir, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.70
Erfan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.137
‘Erg Riyâh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.298
Erg, Sha‘b el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.333
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.333
‘Êrole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.35
Erwa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.119
INDEX
Erwa, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.119
‘Esh, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.323
E‘sh, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.337
Esso Suez Incorporated . . . . . . . . . . . 3.185
Estam Aghe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.45
Étoile, Baie de l’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.69
Étoile, Banc de l’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.127
Étoile, Pointe de l’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.69
Etuleh Shoals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.205
Eucus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.115
Evans Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.39
Fai−is, Marsa al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.120
Fairway Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.214
Fajrah, Marsa al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.124
Falay
t, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.403
Falamingu, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.82
Falanj, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.40
Falanj, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.13
Falanj, W
d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.40
Falcon Reefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.173
Falcon Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.351
False Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.98
False Râs Ghârib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Fanaadir Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.200
Fanaadir Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.200
Fanâdîr Islands, El . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.379
Fanâdîr, Sha‘b el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.379
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.380
Fârah ‘Ad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.119
Farana, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
Faraon, Monte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.261
Faras
n al Kabr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.112
Faras
n Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.14
Faras
n Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.111
Faras
n, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.263
Faras
n, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.121
Faras
n, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.167
Fara‘ûn, Gezîret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.75
Farâyid, Gebel el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.160
Farcha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.121
Fareiyid, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.161
Farida Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.148
Farquhar Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.349
Farr
jn Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.342
Fartak Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.275
Fartak, Ra’s: Gulf of ‘Aqaba . . . . . . . . . 8.55
Fartak, Ra’s: North side of the
Gulf of Aden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.152
Fasht Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.166
Fasmat al Waladab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.207
Fat, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.50
Fatma, Mersa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.82
Fatuma Dest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.248
Fatuma, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.82
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.82
Fawn Cove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.333
Fawn Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
Fawn Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.54
Fawn Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43
Fawq
n Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.442
Fawz, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55
Fede Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.134
Feirân, Wâdi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.271
Oil Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.271
Felix Jones Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40
Fellowes Rocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.98
Light−buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.98
Felug, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.160
Fieramosca Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18
Figg
, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.291
Fij
b, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.291
Fikheeb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.143
Filfil, Shaab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.274
Finger Peak (10°44′N, 46°47′E) . . . . 14.238
Finger Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.182
Fin
s, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.19
426
Fishermans Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.129
Fiz
yi, Ghubbat al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.26
Flat Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.70
Flint Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.96
Flop Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.203
Fontainebleau, Môle du . . . . . . . . . . 14.134
NW Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.114
SE Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.129
Fort Marb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.74
Fort Tarshayn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.126
Fouad, Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.139
Foul Bay: Râs Banâs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.157
Foul Bay: Tr
n Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.43
Four Peaked Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.137
Franken Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.369
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.380
Franks Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.350
Front Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.137
Funnel Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.176
Fuqum, Bandar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.25
Fuqum, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.25
Fur
fir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.82
Fury Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18
Fuwwah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.165
Gaaban, Buur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.347
Gaaban, Raas Buur . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.160
Gaan, Bandar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.326
Gable Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.228
Gabrielle, Anse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.72
Gacaan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.326
Gacaan, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.159
Gad Mesharifa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.167
Gafatir, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.249
Galâla el Baharîya, Gebel el . . . . . . . . . 3.73
Galâla el Qiblîya, Gebel el . . . . . . . . . . 3.73
Galangareet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.229
Galangareet, Khoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.228
Galdina, Isolotto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.79
Galuen, Khor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.253
Ganadà . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
Gangadebub Terara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.212
Gangasimn Terara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.212
Gannet Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
Gap Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.221
Garara, Ras el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.146
Garra, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.235
Garra, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.235
Garsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.365
Gash Amir, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17
Gateway Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.136
Gazeirat Kalafiyya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.342
Gazirat ’Iri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.345
Gazirat Abid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.346
Gebel = hill; see proper name.
Gedid, Bandar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.374
Geeljoogo, Buur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.342
Geelwayte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.243
Gees Salweyn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.237
Geesaley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.371
Geisum Oilfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.71
Gemsa, Ghubbet el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.360
Gemsa, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.319
Gemsa, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.312
Gezîrat Showârît . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.68
Gezîrat Siyùl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.68
Gezîrat Wâdi Gimâl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.65
Gezîret = hill; see proper name
Ghab Miyn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20
Gh
b, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.176
Ghabbi Hu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.99
Gha
Ghadeira, Sha’b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
Ghadr, Khawr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.122
Ghalil, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.158
Ghânim Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.213
Ghânim, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.215
Gharib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.121
Ghârib, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.74
Home Contents Index
Ghârib, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Oil Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.131
Ghârib Oilfield, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.55
Gharf Bank, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.100
Gharzaut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.136
Ghay
ah, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.25 Gulf of Suez . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Ghedele, Monte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.198
Ghedem, Monte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.48
Gheibisa Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.57
Gherar Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.174
Gherar Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.145
Ghesselei . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.371
Ghidir−as−ale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.137
Ghilifilli, Monte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.72
Ghoubbet Kharab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.60
Ghub, Râs el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.235
Ghubab, Shi‘b al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.159
Ghubb, ghubbat, ghubbet = bay; see proper
name.
Ghubbah, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.158
Ghulayfiqah, Khawr . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.111
Ghur
b Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.168
Ghur
b, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.266
Ghurayrah, Khawr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.129
Ghusm, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.40
Ghuwarraq, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3
Ghuzeh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.153
Gifâtîn Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.390
Giftûn Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.370

rah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.105 
Giftûn el Kebîr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.390
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.379
Giftûn el Saghîr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.390
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
Gihân, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39
Gihânîya, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.123
Gimeida . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.161
Girb, Shi‘b al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Girîd, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.222
Gisi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.119
Gizan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.174
Godad Minanie, Buur . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.321
Gold Mohur Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.127
Golfe de Tadjourah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.20
Gombo, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.234
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.211
Gondole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.263
Gondole, Togga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.259
Goor Felug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.247
Goragii, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.160
Gordon Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.40
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.40
Gospel Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.289
Gouna, El . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.362
Grafton Passage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.30
Grafton Reef Light−beacon . . . . . . . . 3.298
Graham Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.147
Grande Passe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.63
Grand Récif . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.76
Grand Signal, Pointe du . . . . . . . . . . . 14.78
Grande Île du Diable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.72
Great Bitter Lake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.174
Abu Sultân Landing Stage . . . . . . . 2.174
Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.178
East Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.176
Fanâra Oil Jetty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.174
West Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.177
Green Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.206
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.206
Green Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.210
Guak, Shi‘b al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.132
Guardafui, Cape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.160
Gûbâl Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Gûbâl Saghîra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Gûbâl, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.357
Guban Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.340
Gubbet Mus Nefit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.129
Gubed Binna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.255
Gubed Canqor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.230
INDEX
Gubed Rugguuda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.233
Guh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.132
Guinni Koma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.72
Gulbub, Mersa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.34
Gulf of ‘Aqaba . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.48
Gulf of Aden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
ansh a ughrá . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.53
No 1 Light−float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36
No 2 Light−float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36
North AS Lanby Light−buoy . . . . . . 3.37
South AS Lanby Light−buoy . . . . . . 3.37
Traffic Separation Scheme . . . . . . . . 3.18
Gumaderiba, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.179
Gumarlah, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.27
Gûnet el ‘Adabîya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.259
Gural, Monti . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.152
Gurgusum, Khr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.186
Guri Cal, Buuraha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.152
Gurna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.249
Gurmal, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.44
Gutta Tella, Banc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.27
Gwilaib, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.240
Gwiyai, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.81
abb
n, Sharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.140
Habl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.168
Had
d Gab
 Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.207
a
arrah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.269
Hadaraweb Spit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.198
Hadarba, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
add, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.224
Hadda, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.347
Haddeh, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.310
H
d Bin Msá, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.45
adboh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.66
adboh, Ghubbah di− . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.66
Hadj, Banc du El− . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.37
Hadud, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.158
Hagar Islets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.341
Hai Dugah Islets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.341
Haimera, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.17
ajaf, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.17
Hajar, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.75
Hajara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.219
ajhir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.41
Hajra, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.31

lah, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.65
Halaib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.224
Halaib, Gezîret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.224
Halaib, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.224
Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.231
Halaka, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.256
Halaka, Sha‘ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16
Halat, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.158
Halba Dest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.250
Hali, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.61
Hali Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.42
al Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.42
Hallan, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.107
all
nyah, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.130
all
nyah, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.130
Hallat, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.158
alq al Kal
wah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.20
Halt, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.301
Hamamit, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.264
amar an Nafr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.149
amar, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.20
Hamar, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.20
Hamâta, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.143
Hamber, Buur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.152

m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.281
amdyah Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.45
Hammadara, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8
Hammâm Fara’ûn, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . 3.234
Hammâm, Mersa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.286
Hammâm Saidna Mûsa, Gebel . . . . . . 3.235
Hamr an Nafur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.149
427
Ham
ra, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.128
Hamra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.84
Hamra, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.42
Hamsiat, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.245
H
nda Dest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.265
ansh al Kubrá . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.61
ansh group of islands . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.46
ansh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.67
H
nt Dest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.265
aql . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.68

r, Jazrat al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.178
arafah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.41
Hara, Sha‘b al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.160
Haral, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.113
Harat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.31
Harat Reefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.31
Harbi Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18
Hareeq, Sha‘ab al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.143
Harees, Marsa ain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.106
Hargeisa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.205
Harggo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.190
Harggo Bahir Selat’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.190
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.191
arq, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.401
Harmil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112
Harorayeet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.210
arqafah, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8
arr, Sharm al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28
Harrier Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.235
Harris Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.103
Harrison Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.40
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.40
Hasa, Sha‘b el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39
Hasaman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.19
asan, Ghubbat al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.57
asan, Ras al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.57
as
n Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.121
ashsh, Ghubbat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.161
Hashish, Ghubbat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.161
ashsh Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.162
Hasib Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.142

sik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.107

sik, Bandar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.107

sik, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.103

sikyah, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.126
ass, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.17
Hasmet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15
Hasr Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.99
ass
n, W
d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.149
awayn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.277
asy, Sharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.151
aab
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.26
abah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.266
am, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.196
Hatitau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.122
Hatra, Bandar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.365
Hattan, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.11
Hawar Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.116
aw
r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.67
Hawatib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.96
Hawatib Kebir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.96
awf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.19
awr
’ as Suflá . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.254
Haycock (10°40′N, 46°34′E) . . . . . . 14.238
Haycock Island: ansh al Kubrá . . . . . 4.57
Haycock Island: Jaz
’ir az Zubayr . . . . 4.32
Haycocks, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.69
Haykah, Ghubbat al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.20
aymah, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.121
ayo, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.17
Hayrt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.21
Hayyâbleï . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.120
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.123
Hayyirah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.51
Hayyis, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.326
Hedan Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.83
Hedjuff, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.106
Home Contents Index
Hegena, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.171
Hennessey Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.30
Herbe, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.44
Heri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.249
Héron, Banc du . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.123
Héron, Plateau du . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.123
Héron, Pointe du . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.123
Hibar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.203
Hibîq, El . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.56
High Island
Ab ‘Al Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20
Muhabbaka Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18
High Point: Little Bitter Lake . . . . . . . 2.182
Hij
z, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Hilal Oilfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.69
ilbah, Marsá . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.151
ilf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.205
Fish factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.220
ilf, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.194
ilf, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.188
Hill
nyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.150
Hillat ’Agig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.326
ilm, Jabal al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.145
Himeira, Mersa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.71
Hind Kadam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18
Hindi Gidir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18
Hindi Seil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19
Hisn, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.69
in al Muayni‘ah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.151
isy, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.118
Holkat Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.131
Hommed Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.114
Hommed Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.114
Hommed Nuuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.114
Homra el Girigâb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.323
Honkorâb, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
Hoot Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.169
r Girmah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.62
r Miy
f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.40
r Qaryih . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.75
Horod le Rhale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.84
Horseshoe Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.147
Howakil Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.69
Howakil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.77
Howeit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.122
udaydah
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.201
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.221
Directions for entering harbour . . 11.214
Fairway Light−buoy . . . . . . . . . . . 11.189
General information . . . . . . . . . . . 11.185
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.211
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 11.193
Port of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.185
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.225
udaydah, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.232
Fishing Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.235
Breakwater Light . . . . . . . . . . . 11.235
ib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.22
Roadstead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.236
Huiheb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.250
Hukale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112
umar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.180
Hum
ra, Ras al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.57
umay
ah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.56 Jaff Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.97
umay
ah Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.56 Ja
z, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.397
ummat al Mukhatt
r . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.185
umr as Saghrah, Khawr . . . . . . . . . 13.197
umra, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.151
Hurghada
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.376
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.385
Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.379
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.367
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.373
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.387
uayah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.151
Husn M
jiz, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.79
Hyndman Reefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.114
INDEX
Ibn ‘Abb
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.41
Ibn ‘Abb
s Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.42
Ibn Abbas Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.344
Ibrahim, Mersa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.33
Is
n, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.73
Île du Large . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.77
Marine Reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.81
Île Moucha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.77
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.37
Territorial Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.79
Îles Moucha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.76
Ilet, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.132
Îlot des Boutres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.38
Im Ium, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.118
Imbârak, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.43
mbereme Tomb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.31
‘Imr
n, Bandar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.23
‘Imr
n, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.19
Inhai−Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.34
Inkeifal, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.277
Inner Channel
East side of Red Sea . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.21
Strait of Gûbâl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.326
West side of Red Sea . . . . . . . . . . . 6.156
Inner Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.401
Irbid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.142
’Irq al Ghur
b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9
’Irq al Kabr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.407
’Irq al Lt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.403
’Irq as Sunnyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.441
’Irq Huwwah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.407
‘Irqah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.254
‘sá, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.107
Island Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.188
Ismailia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.155
Ismâ‘ilîya, El . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.155
Isratu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.113
Istahi, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.331
‘It
b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.280
‘It
b, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.152
Itûla, Sha’b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.205
‘Itwad, Khawr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.80
Iziyat, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.165
Ja−Ilua, Monte− . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.48
Ja‘
firah, Khawr al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.81
Ja‘al
n, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.228
Ja‘far . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.233
Jabalayn Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.125
Jabal = hill, mountain; see proper name.
Jab
nah, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.229
Jabal Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.99
Jabb
ra Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.12
Jabb
ra, Jabal al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8
Jabb
rah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.41
Jackson Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.40
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.40
J

Jizmah, Jabal Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8
Jadr Islet, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Jadr, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.229
Jah
n, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.402
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.395
Jahar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.148
Juhub, Jazrat al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.19
Julayjilah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.18
Jal
jil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.24
Jam Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.96
James Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.102
James Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.224
Jan
b, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Jan
bah Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.130
Jarb Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.153
Jarb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.21
Jasiired Maydh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.221
Jasiired Xiis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.237
Jass, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.115
Jaz
‘ir Faras
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.111
Jaz
’ir az Zubayr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.29
428
Jaz
’ir Seba . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.84
Jaz
’ir ila . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.19
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.19
Jazrah, Bandar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.120
Jazrah, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.184
Jazrat = island; see proper name.
Jazzah, Sharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.33
Jebel = mountain, hill; see proper name.
Jeddah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.342
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.374
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.420
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.342
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.391
Inner Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.401
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.356
Middle Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.401
North Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.404
Port Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.432
South Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.404
Jeddah, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.399
Jeddah Ship Repair Yard . . . . . . . . . . . 9.430
Jerama Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.93
Jerom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.102
Jerusalem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.122
Jezirat Hamdan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.30
Jib
l Ad
r Aweb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.200
Jib
l al Mar
qishah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.147
Jib
l Astrib
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.180
Jib
l Da‘nab al Abyad . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.180
Jib
l Êwêt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.180
Jibal Hidariba . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.334
Jib
l Hr
nb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.180
Jib
l Warat
b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.200
Jibna, Sha‘ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142
Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142
Jibsh, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.229
Jif
n, Jabal al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.228
Jif
n, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.229
Jiffn, Shi‘b al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.54
Jil‘ah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.240
Jilbo, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.233
Jmhl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.118
Jink, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.166
Jinniya Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.209
Jz
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.174
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.188
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.207
Entrance Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.204
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.195
Jetty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.225
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 10.182
No 2 Middle Light−beacon . . . . . . 10.201
North Light−buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.67
Northern Approach Route . . . . . . 10.197
Oil Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.218
Port Control Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.204
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.214
Southern Approach Route . . . . . . 10.205
Johnson Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.40
North West Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.40
West Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.40
Jubbah, Sharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.65
Jud
‘, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.150
July Oilfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.57
Jum
 Shi‘b al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.66
Junayz, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.230
Jurab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.174
Jurayb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.174
Juw
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.177
Juzur Al al
niy
t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.122
Juzur Tl
t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.168
Kaal Firaon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.26
Ka‘bah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.184
Kabr, Shi‘b al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.266
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.264
Home Contents Index
Kabrît Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.352
Kabrît Branch Channels . . . . . . . . . . . 2.186
East Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.188
West Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.189
Kabrît, El . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.173
Kabrît, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.352
Kabrît Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.352
Kad el Sheik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.332
Kad Entoghodof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.115
Kad Jerom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.102
Kad Larbut Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.217
Kad Norah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.97
Kad−hu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.102
Kadam
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.25
Kadda Dâbali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.83
Kaff, El . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.119
Kaira . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.143
Kais al Hamman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.96
Kal Farun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.26
Kalb, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.150
Kalb
n, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.177
Kalweyn, Ghubbet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.241
Kalweyn, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.159
Kamar
n Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.46
Coal Pier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.50
Commissioners Pier . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.49
North Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.46
Town Pier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.51
Kamar
n Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.12
North Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.40
Kandellai . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
Karai Berer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.167
Karam Masamirit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
Kar
mah, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
Karambura, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.152
Karanas Dest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.272
Karb Islets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.353
Karin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.302
q Kamar
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14
Kath
nch, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.347
Katherîna, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.90
Kathryah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.233
Katb, Khawr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.229
Katb, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.218
Katza Oil Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.112
North Oil Jetty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.112
South Oil Jetty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.114
Kavet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
Disused lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13
Kaydah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.145
Keary Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142
Keedan Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.166
Keedan, Ras al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.161
Keft Koreish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.119
Kenîsa, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.235
Kennedy Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
Khabbah, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.230
Khabr, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.149
Khaisat, Ra’s en naum . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.11
Khaisat al Liykh, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . 13.147
Khalft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.24
Khalig ’Agig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.324
Khalîg el Suweis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Khalj ‘Aynnah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.27
Khalj ‘sá . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.107
Khalj Al al
niy
t . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.106
Khalj Marah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.146
Khalkh
lah, Shi‘b Umm al . . . . . (21°29′N,
39°08′E)
Khaluf, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.160
Khams, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.228
Khamsa, Shi‘b al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.265
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.264
Khansiir, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.159
Khar
bah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12
Kharaz, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.15
Karra, Shi’b al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.111
Kharrar Reefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.111
Kharrbah al Baryah, Al . . . . . . . . . 9.443
Khasa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.75
INDEX
Khartoum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.94
Khatib, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.299
Kh
tim, Shi‘b al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13
Kham, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.179
Khawbah, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.43
Fishing Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.43
Fishing Harbour Light . . . . . . . . . . 11.43
Khawkhah, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.133
Khawr = inlet, cove; see proper name
Khawr, Sharm al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.153
Khayayt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.277
Khr, khoor = inlet, cove; see proper name
Khormaksar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.30
Khurmah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.256
Khuraybah, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.27
Khushayyim, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.104
Kid, Wâdi, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55
Kilebiya al Dhahariya, Al . . . . . . . . . . 6.191
Kin
sat ilf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.204
King Fahd Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.201
King Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18
Kinnateis, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.57
Kira’ el Hartiwâi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.64
Kitf al Makh
yish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.112
Kitf al Manhalah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.235
Kitf Qoraish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.119
Kobbein Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9
Kodar, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.160
Korali, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.24
Kordumu’t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.199
Kordumu’t Dest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.199
Kosseir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.116
Kowarat Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.343
Kuba, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.30
Kudn, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.144
Kunbeiba . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.125
Kurâ, El . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.62
Kuria Muria Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.106
Kuria Muria Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.122
Kurkm
 Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.113
Kurkm
 Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.113
Kurne, Sha‘ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.217
Kusum, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.118
Kut
mah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.11
Kutumbul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.106
Kuwai, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.305
Kwolala, Gezîret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.224
Laas Macaan, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.159
Laasqoray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.319
Labaineh, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.11
Labw
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.11
Lah
leb Dest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.249
Lac Salé, Baie du . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.71
Lagia, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38
Lahata Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33
Lakbi, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.118
Lake Timsah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.152
By−pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.164
West Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.160
Lakk, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.147
Laksu, Isolotto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.77
Lang Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.102
Lansdown Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.33
Large Strait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.86
Las Khoreh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.319
Lask, Bandar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.250
Lazaretto Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.40
Le Mercier Shoals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.190
Lebnaan Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.25
Lee Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.83
Levant, Banc du . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.25
Lib
n, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10
Lib
nah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.123
Lily Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.13
Lth, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2
Little Aden Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.29
Little Bitter Lake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.182
429
Little Ghadr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.122
Logan Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142
Loka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.352
Loka, Sha’
b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.352
Loma, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.234
Long Island: Shubuk Channel . . . . . . 6.216
Lookout Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.104
Low Island: ansh a ughrá . . . . . . . 4.54
Low Island: Jaz
’ir az Zubayr . . . . . . . . 4.33
Low Island: Little Aden Peninsula . . 12.134
Low Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.214
Loyada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2
Lubaynah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.11
Luayyah, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.146
Hill Fort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.150
Ludhwar Ri
k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.113
Lug, Sha‘b el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.384
Lughaye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.287
Lûli, Sharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.53
Ma‘
d Khawr al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.121
Ma‘ajjiz, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.229
Ma‘allah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.31
Ma‘lh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6
M
’Mub
rak, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.110
Ma‘quilein . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.131
Ma‘awil, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.168
Mabrak, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.149
Macannile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.51
Madaba . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.142
Madfa, Sharm el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.168
Madhrb, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.194
Ma’dhn, Shi‘b al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.12
Madnah, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Madnat ash Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.31
Madnat Yanbu‘ A in
‘yah . . . . . . 9.201
Madîq Gûbâl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.311
Ma
Madkhal ash Sham
l Al (21°30′N, 39°08′E)
Madote, Isolotto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.58
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.42
Madrakah, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.104
Maflaqayn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.166
Mafsubber Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.65
Magarsam, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.167
Magellih, Mersa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
Maghabiya Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.65
Mahâbîs Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.68
Mahama . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.68
Mah
r, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.110
Mah
r, Sharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.149
Maharib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.121
Mahash el Asfal, Merset . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.66
Mah
sin Bluff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.57
Mah
sin, Ghubbat al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.57
Ma
sinah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.41
Ma
sinah, Jabal al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.72
Maawt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.166
Mahmûd, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Mamd, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.410
Mahun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.96
Majdaah Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.261
Majdaah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.261
Majur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.134
Mak
sir, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.60
Makhba Ra’s al . . . . . . (21°30′N, 39°08′E)
Makhlq, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.265
Makkah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Makrah, Khawr al’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.78
Makram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10
Mal’ab, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38
Malak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.103
Malathu Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Malcatto, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.50
Malcomma, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.125
Malah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.121
Mallagu, Monte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.72
Mallâha Light, El . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Manrec, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.44
Home Contents Index
Man
is . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.163
Mandhar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.119
Mangadafo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.89
Manhal Jabal al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.81
Mansi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.111
Mansîya, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.260
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.260
Mansooriya, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.143
No 8 Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.143
Mantola Dest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.267
Maqaasiiro, Gees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.361
Maq
inal Kabr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.251
Maq
inal Saghr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.279
Maqdam, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.322
Maqdam Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.214
Maqdam, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.322
Ma‘rab, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.57
Maraba Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.115
Maraba, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.115
Marabout, Jetée du . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.114
Mar
bi Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.40
Ma‘rafâi, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.161
Ma‘ram, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.20
Ma‘ram, Khawr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.20
Mar
s, Shi‘b (18°52′N, 40°22′E) . . . . 10.13
Mar
s, Shi‘b (18°02′N, 40°49′E) . . . . 10.65
Marb
 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.54
Marb
 Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.54
Marb
:, Ra’s: Marb
 Bay . . . . . . . . . 13.20
Marb
:, Ra’s: Mukall
Bay . . . . . . . 12.159
Marb, Fort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.74
Marb: Ra’s: Aden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.85
Mardnah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.112
Mareero, Togga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.346
Marescaux Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.64
Marine Peace Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.131
Marr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.205
Marr, W
d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.121
Mark Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.38
Mark
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.98
Markaz, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.144
Markha, El . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.234
Marmar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Mar‘ob, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.238
Marr
k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.68
Marsa = anchorage, harbour; see proper
name
Marsá, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.107
Marshaq, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.19
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.16
Marso Saneekhaat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.310
Martaban . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.96
Mary Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.114
Marzuk Kabr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.96
Masamirit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
Mas
wik, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.26
Maserlein . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.153
Mash
bih . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.118
M
shanig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.41
Mashilagha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.139
Maslah, W
d al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.273
Marah, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.180
Marah, Khawr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.167
Maskali, Banc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.123
Maskali, Île . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.123
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.123
Maskan, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.272
mah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.285 Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.178
Mari, Râs el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.86
Massawa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.141
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.163
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.177
Directions for entering harbour . . . 7.175
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.174
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.155
North Arm Breakwater Light . . . . . 7.176
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.182
South Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.192
South Arm Breakwater Light . . . . . 7.176
INDEX
Massawa Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18
Massawa Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.178
Massif de Goda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.22
Mastrah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.111
Matârma, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37
Mara Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.175
Maraayn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.132
Matt
h, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.147
Mawfajah, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.147
Mawshij . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.124
Maydh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.308
Maydh Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.221
Maydh Jasiired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.221
Mayfa‘ah, W
d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.240
M
ytb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.169
M
ytb, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.173
Mayyn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.96
High Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.81
Mayyn Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.102
Mazagnef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.153
Mazarkiff Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.153
Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.153
Mecca . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Medat, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.133
Medecheri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.133
Meibar, El . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.160
Melahat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23
Melana Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.333
Melangweib, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.179
Melill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.125
Melill, Khor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.125
Melita Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.53
Melita Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.210
Melita Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.215
Mensiya Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.260
Meqeeda, Sha‘b el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.329
Mrgbla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.223
Mrgbla Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.252
Meraio, Bandar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.363
Merlin Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.369
Merlin Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.173
Merlin Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.27
Mersa = anchorage, harbour; see proper
name
Merset = harbour; see proper name.
Mesharifa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.167
Meteor Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.353
Mezra‘îya, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.323
M’da . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.259
M’da Bahir Selat’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.266
Mid Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.66
Middit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
Middle Haycock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.69
Middle Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.119
Middle Reef: Jaz
’ir az Zubayr . . . . . . . 4.34
Middle Reef: Safâga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
Middle Shoal, Sha‘ab el Shubuk . . . . . 6.209
Middle Shoal: Marsa Abu ‘Im
ma . . . 6.254
Md . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.144
Midir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.44
Midir, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.262
Milcon Jetty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.223
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.223
Mil Jabal al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.150
Milieu, Banc du . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.49
Millân, Râs el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.329
Milton Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.46
Mn
’al Qa
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.292
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.303
Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.301
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.285
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.300
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.291
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.304
Mîna amrâwein . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20
Mn
Rayst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.61
Mn
’ al Malik Fahd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.201
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.216
430
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.239
Construction Support Terminal . . . . 9.246
Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.227
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.201
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.223
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.210
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.248
Mînâ’ el Gedîda, El . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.317
Minear Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Minji, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.108
Minqâr Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.370
Minzak Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.57
Mirear Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.165
Misalla, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.234
Misallat, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.207
Mish
y Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.162
Mishayu, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.162
Mismar Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.281
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.264
Mismar Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.281
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.264
Mits’iwa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.141
Miyum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20
Mobayeed, Sha‘ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.166
Mobiyet, Sha‘ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142
Mogadishu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.192
Moidubis Kebir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.27
Moidubis Séghir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.27
Moiya, Sharm el− . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.17
Mojeidi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.139
Mokha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.243
Monte = mountain, hill; see proper name.
Monts Mabla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.34
Morâkh, Mersa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.73
Moresby Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40
Morewood Light−beacon, El . . . . . . . . 5.98
Morgan Oilfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.60
Morne Rouge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.34
Mosheykh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.270
Moslem festivals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.205
Moslem calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.205
Religious holidays . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.206
Mouillage des Boutres . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.33
Mount Darma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.276
Mount Hassalili . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.276
Mountains of Berenice . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.160
Mubarak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16
Mubârak, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.42
Mubarak, Mersa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.32
Mudharr, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.12
Mudur, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.145
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.151
Muhabbaka Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.70
Muhaggara, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Muhammad Island, Jabal . . . . . . . . . 10.133
Muammad Qol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.271
Muhammad, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
National Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.322
Muhammed, Shab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.44
Muh
sir, Khawr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.40
Muj
milah, Jazrat al . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.116
Muj
milah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.116
Mujawwan, Sharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.59
Mujaylis, Marsa al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.118
Mukall
 Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.158
Basins and berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.195
Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.159
Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.193
General information . . . . . . . . . . . 12.158
Khalf Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.195
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 12.171
Oil Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.197
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.202
Mukall
Promontory . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.151
Mukall
 Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.151
Mukallab H
d Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.19
Home Contents Index
Mukawwa‘, Gezîret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18
Mukawwar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.167
Mukden, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.315
Mukh
 Al
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.261
Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.244
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.274
Directions for entering harbour . . 11.271
General information . . . . . . . . . . . 11.243
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.268
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 11.254
North Fort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.270
North Shoals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.249
Port of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.243
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.277
South Shoals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.250
Town of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.245
Mukowarat, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.339
Mukwar, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.82
Mulaax Beyle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.235
Munaybirah, Sharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.143
Munzilah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.177
Munkar, Sha‘ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.350
Muntajib, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.107
Muqâbila, Mersa el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.69
Murabba‘, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.45
Mur
bit al Khail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13
Murawwas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.398
Muraykhah, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12
Murayn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.158
Murcaayo, Bandar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.363
Murk, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.23
Murray Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.102
Murray Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.102
Mûsa, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.90
Ms
 Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.125
Musali, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.81
Musamma, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8
Muayni‘ah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.270
Musayrah, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.17
Muselali, Monte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.270
Museri, Isola . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.137
Mush
jirah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21
Muskah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.38
Mustamila . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.122
Muwajli Jabal al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
Muwayli Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.62
Muwaysah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.151
Muzalqam, Jabal al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.73
Naaly, Shaab, No 18 Beacon . . . . . . . 9.331
Nabq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.58
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55
Nadesh, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.32
Nafun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.148
Naheleg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.95
Nakari, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.51
Nakari, Wadi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.51
Nakhalat al Qaseer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.143
Nakharir, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.148
Nammeita, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.199
Nâqa, Sharm el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.34
Naqrair, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.148
Nar, Jabal an . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.74
Nasiga, Togga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.234
Nasiracurra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.51
Nasiracurra, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.53
Nasuja, W
di . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.234
Natif, Jabal An . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8
Natural conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.229
Climate and weather . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.252
Climatic tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.275
Currents, tidal streams and flow . . . 1.236
Maritime topography . . . . . . . . . . . 1.229
Sea and swell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.247
Sea level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.246
Sea water characteristics . . . . . . . . . 1.250
Nauret, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.190
INDEX
Navigation and regulations . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Limits of the book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Suez Canal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.68
Navigational dangers and hazards . . . . 1.10
Navigation amongst coral . . . . . . . . . 1.10
Mined areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14
Piracy and armed robbery . . . . . . . . . 1.15
Nawarat, Khr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.331
Nazar, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.265
Near Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51
Neghileh Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.139
Nessim Oilfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.62
N Ghubbah di− . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.82
Newport Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.208
Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.208
Nifîsha Lagoon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.158
Nimra Talata Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.63
Nimule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.104
Nipple Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.131
Nishtn
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.40
Basins and berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.51
Directions for entering harbour . . . 13.49
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.30
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.35
Port Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.18
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.52
Noh−rat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
Noire, Pointe: Île Moucha . . . . . . . . . . 14.77
Noire, Pointe: Mangadafo . . . . . . . . . . 14.89
Njid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.42
Nokra Dest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.129
Norah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.95
Norah Adasi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.113
North Al Wasm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.75
North Amer Oilfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.51
North Anchorage, Marsa Halaib . . . . . 6.234
North Bay: Marsa Abu ‘Im
ma . . . . . 6.254
North Cove, Port Berenice . . . . . . . . . 5.154
North East Channel:
Dahlak Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.105
North East Haycock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.69
North Fairway Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.111
North Ghur
b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.203
Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.203
North Island: El−Akhawein . . . . . . . . . 4.22
North Jumna Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142
Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142
North Massawa Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22
North Peak: Jabal Zubayr Island . . . . . . 4.37
North Point: Jabal Zuqar Island . . . . . . 4.20
North Qeisûm Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.71
North Round Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.64
North Shoals: Al Mukh
. . . . . . . . . . 11.249
North Sister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.263
North Tawîla Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.358
North Towartit Reefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.65
North West Bay:
Marsa Abu ‘Im
ma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.254
North West Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.32
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.32
North West Rock: Marsa Halaib . . . . . 6.224
North West Rock: Dolphin Cove . . . . . 7.55
North−east Fanaadir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.200
North−west Fanaadir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.200
Nugrus, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.52
Nuhd, Khawr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.69
Nuq, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8
Nuqdah, Ra’s an . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.169
Nuqdah, Ra’s ar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.225
Nurâni, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.40
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.39
Nu Bandar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.113
Nu Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.17
Nu Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.20
Nuweiba ‘el Muzeina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.64
Nuweiba ’el Tarabîn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.64
Nuweiba Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.53
431
Obock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.41
Obock,
Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.40
Port d’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.39
Îlot Nord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.45
Îlot Sud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.45
Passe du Sud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.45
Port du Nord−Est . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.49
Port du Sud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.44
Rivière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.40
Obstruction Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.97
October Oilfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50
Oda, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.179
Odeib, Bîr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.93
Old Saw
kin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.119
Oloch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.393
Olod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.393
Olog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.393
Oreilles d‘Ane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.35
Oreste Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.234
Oreste Shoal: Mits’iwa Channel . . . . . . 7.31
Oreste Shoal: South of Jz
n . . . . . . . 10.234
Osbolei, Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.160
Oseif, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.243
Osman Digna Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.149
Ota, Isola . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.65
Ouaramous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.90
Oubouki River . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.40
Oued Ambouli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.89
‘Ounda Kômaytou . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.45
Owen Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18
Oyster Islets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.177
Palinurus Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.152
Palmiers, Pointe des . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.38
Panorama Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
Parkin Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21
Parseval Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.18
Passage Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.214
Passe de l’Est . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.49
Passe Est . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.122
Passe Ouest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.126
Passe Nord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.121
Passmore Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.29
Peaked Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.135
Peaky Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.64
Pearly Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.206
Pelham, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.54
Pender Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.350
Penguin Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17
Penisola di Buri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.42
Penzance Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.64
Perles, Banc des . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.49
Peshwa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.65
Petite Île du Diable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.72
Petite Passe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.64
Petrojet Jetty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.226
Pharaohs Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.75
Philadelphus Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.150
Picco Aguzzo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.270
Picco Damo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.396
Picco Oloch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.396
Pile Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.43
Pilotage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.31
Pin Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.64
Pingouin, Banc du . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.123
Pinnacle Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.135
Pirie Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.83
Plateau de l‘Euphorbe . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.78
Plateau du Grand Signal . . . . . . . . . . . 14.78
Plateau du Héron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.123
Plateau du Marabout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.119
Plateau du Scorpion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.37
Plateau du Serpent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.119
Platforms
AMAL−9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.64
ASMA−B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40
Dal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.235
Home Contents Index
D 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
FF−83−2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.51
G−16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.345
Gemsa 4/5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.354
GG−83−2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.51
GH−376 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.69
GS−277 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56
GS−327 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.60
GS−345 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.62
GS−365 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.66
HB 77−5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.48
ub, Ghubbat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.64
J−29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.57
J−62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.57
M−72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.60
NJ−1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.57
SB−305 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56
SG300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.57
SIDKI B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.66
WHP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.41
WP−C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.345
WP−D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.345
WP−E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.358
Yuval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.235
Pointe = point; see proper name.
Port Fouad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.139
Port Rayst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.61
Port of Suez . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.280
Port Said . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Port Salalah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.61
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.79
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.94
Directions for entering harbour . . . 13.91
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.61
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.88
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.73
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.98
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.218
Deratting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.226
Docking facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.218
Measured distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.228
Port Smyth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.256
Port Sudan
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.42
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.69
Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.63
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.66
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.26
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.55
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.35
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.77
Port Sudan Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.66
Port Tewfik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.196
Powell Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.168
Poynder Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.41
Preserver Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.64
Princess Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.102
Principal ports harbours and
anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.208
Djibouti . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.216
Egypt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.208
Eritrea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.210
Israel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.211
Jordan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.212
Oman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.215
Saudi Arabia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.213
Somalia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.217
Sudan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.209
Yemen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.214
Production Platforms
Protector Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.64
Punches Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.38
Pyramid Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.146
Q
 Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.132
Qab Miyum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20
um, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.145
Qabr, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.127
Qabr el Bnaiya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.56
Q
d Eitwid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.207
Q
d Eitwid Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.208
INDEX
Qâd el Marâkib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.199
Q
d Hogit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.210
Qâd Ibn Haddân . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
Qâd Mal’ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38
Qâd Yahya, Merset el . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.328
Qadd al Ghubba . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.57
Qâdd el Tawîla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33
Qadd Humais . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
Q

Khr Nawarat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.334
Qaf
fah, Sharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.30
Qaam, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.399
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.399
Q
‘idat al Baryah al Malakyah
as Su‘dyah, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.428
Qal‘a Kebîra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.206
Qalansyah, Ghubbat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.58
Qalansyah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6
Qamar, Ghubbat al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.21
Qamar, Jabal al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.12
Qanât el Suweis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Qandala . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.351
Qantara, El . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.145
Qanz, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.136
Q
ra, Jabal al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.191
Qa’rah, Jabal al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.263
Qar
r Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.228
Q
rin, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.173
Qarn, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.264
Qarn al Kul
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.232
Qarn al Shrah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.177
Qarn al Wad
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.81
Qarnûs, El . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.56
Qarw
w, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.108
Qaryah, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.41
Qaryat ‘sá . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.110
Qaryat aql . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.184
Qaryat M
ghilah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.184
Qaryat r Marah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.196
Qar al Yam
nyah, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9
Qar ash Sh
myah, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9
Qariyyah, Shi‘b al− . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.193
Qass
r, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20
Qa
bah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.121
Qa‘wah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.18
Qayad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.116
Qeisûm Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.348
Qena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.388
Qiblyah, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.137
Qina, Ghubbat al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.60
Qina, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.60
Qinqar Bandar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.28
Qinqar Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.17
Qirn, Shi‘b al− . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.165
Qibah Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Qishn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.248
Qishn Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.248
Qishr
n, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.54
Qishr
n, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.54
Qi’at a afiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9
Qia Abu Ddah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.52
Qia al Kirsh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.325
Qita el Bann
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18
Qia Shi’b Mamd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.410
Qita Teronbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.315
Qia’ Dukais . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.276
Qita’ Kan
sha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.318
Qia’ Kidan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9
Qoor Felug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.247
Qooringa Butiyaalo . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.358
Qoow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.340
Qormih, Ghubbah di− . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.61
Qoroloho, Buur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.152
Quarantine Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.155
Qubbat ‘sa, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15
Qudfah, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.186
Qudfah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.186
Qul‘ân Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.68
432
Qul‘ân, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18
Qul‘ân Cove, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.56
Qulfetein Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.96
Qumaylah, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.228
Qumaylah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.230
Qumeira, Sha‘ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16
Qumm
 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.150
Qunfudhah, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.60
Qunt, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.263
Quoin Hill
Khr Shin‘
b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.264
Raas Xumbays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.225
Quoin Island
Ab ‘Al Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20
ansh al Kubrá . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21
Jaz
’ir az Zubayr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.31
Qurayan, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.268
Qurein ’Atût . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.235
Qursh, Shi‘b al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.111
Quay‘ir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.268
Quay‘ir, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.152
Qusaym, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.150
Queir, El
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.127
Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.133
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.116
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.134
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.117
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.124
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.137
Quseir, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.123
Quseir, Sha‘ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.143
Quur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.183
Qub, Sha‘ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.64
Qu‘ Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.43
Qu‘ Seghir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.43
Quwayr
t, Ghubbat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.156
Quwayr
t, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.147
Raas = cape, point; see proper name.
Ra’s ‘sá Marine Terminal . . . . . . . . . . 11.81
Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.98
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.95
Berth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.102
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.81
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.89
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.105
FSO Safer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.82
Ra’s ilf Inner Anchorage . . . . . . . . 13.216
Ra’s ilf Tanker Berth . . . . . . . . . . . 13.210
Approach Light−buoy . . . . . . . . . 13.211
Ra’al, Jabal ar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10
Raastamar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.163
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.194
Rabid, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.65
R
bigh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.306
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.317
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.333
Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.330
Fairway Light−buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.331
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.306
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.328
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.312
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.338
R
bigh, Sharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.307
Rachmat, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.200
Radham Bluff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.244
Radio facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.34
Electronic position fixing systems . . 1.34
Radio navigation warnings and weather
services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.37
Radressa, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8
R

Rafa Barri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.159
Ragguuda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.234
Raguda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.234
Raheita . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.82
Home Contents Index
Raheita, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.82
Rahib, Ghubbat ar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.134
R
hib, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.113
Raia, Shab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.126
Raikht, Khr ar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.115
Raka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.121
Rakhwayt, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.152
Rakhyt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.19
Rakl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.173
Ramadan Oilfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56
Rambler Knoll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.18
Rambler Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.214
Ra’s, râs, r
s, ras = cape, point; see proper
name.
Râs Sadat Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.98
Rashshah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.13
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.13
Rasîf Fanâra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.174
Ral, Ra’s ar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.150
Raw
ya Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.270
Rawr, Khawr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.65
INDEX
Rushdi Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.218
Ruwabîl Islets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
Sa‘al Hashîsh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.32
Saacada Diin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.269
Saba Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.36
Sab’ah, Shi‘b as (23°48′N, 37°56′E) . . 9.111
Sab’ah, Shi‘b as (19°38′N, 40°01′E) . . 10.11
Sabawanaag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.292
ab
y
 Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.42
Sabine Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.229
Sabir, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.253
abya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.65

bnyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.36
Sachic, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.269
Sachsohe, Monte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.270
Saday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.18
Saddle Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33
ad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.28
Sadla Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.269
Sana’a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.154
Sana Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.68
an
fr, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.45
anaghah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.176
Sanahor Dest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.234
San
mah, Jabal am . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.15
Sandhills Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.215
Sandy Islet: Ashrâfi Channel . . . . . . . 3.342
Sandy Islet: Marsa Halaib . . . . . . . . . . 6.224
Sandy Islet: Safâga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.110
Sandy Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.150
Sandy Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.16
anfah, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.175
Sanganeb Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.21
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14
Sapper Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.125
S
qah, Shi‘b as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.12
aqr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.275
Sarab, Ghubbat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.158
Sarab, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.148
Sarad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.126
Raydat l ‘Abd al Wadd . . . . . . . . . 12.272
R
yikhah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12
Rayis, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.328
Raysâli, Khr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.23
Rayst, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.20
Récif d’Ambouli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.124
Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.124
Récif du Météore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.37
Red Sea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Reef Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.215
Reef Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.63
Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.40
Egyptian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.44
Eritrean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.62
International regulations . . . . . . . . . . 1.40
Israeli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.46
Oman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.63
Saudi Arabian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.47
Reissale, Anse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.23
Restah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.409
Rhama Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.178
Rhiy = cape, point; see proper name
Rhounda Dâbali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.84
Rhounda Komaytou . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.84
Ri
k Kabr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.113
Ri
k ajhr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.113
Rijyuma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.121
Ring Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13
Rivière d‘Obock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.40
Riyadh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.144
Riyâh, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.308
Rock Cod Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.351
Rocky Bank: Jeddah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.439
Rocky Bank: Ra’s al Mukall
. . . . . . 12.151
Rocky Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14
Rocky Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.66
Romiya Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112
Round Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.235
Round Island: ansh al Kubrá . . . . . . . 4.21
Round Island: Aden Peninsula . . . . . 12.136
Round Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.214
Round Mountain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.347
Rounders Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.201
Royal Saudi Naval Facility . . . . . . . . . 9.428
Ruahmi, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Ru’ays, Ghubbat ar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.253
Ru‘ays, Ra’s ar (20°57′N, 58°48′E) . 13.229
Ru‘ays, Ra’s ar (22°11′N, 59°46′E) . 13.230
Rubetino Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.253
Rudum Oil Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.153
Rugged Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33
Rukada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.162
Rumayn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.156
Rumi, Sha‘ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.186
Runyo, Buur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.262
Ruqq al J
zir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.116
Sael, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.134
af
‘iq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.196
af
‘iq, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.198
Safâga
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.90
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.100
Commercial Wharf . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.100
Directional Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.99
Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.97
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.70
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.84
Phosphate Berth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.101
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.107
Safâga, Gezîret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.112
Safâga Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.112
Directional Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . 5.79
Safâga Ulbur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.35
Safan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.140
Safara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.113
Saff
n, Jabal as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.228
Safna Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20
Sagala, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.229
Sagg Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.151
Saghîr tal Umm Qamar, Sha‘b . . . . . . 3.338
Saghûm, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.179
Sahabak, Shi’b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Sahara, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.323
Sahelia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.95
Sahl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.259
Said, Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Saidarah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.148
Saint John’s Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.162
Sajd village . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.125
Sajd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.112
Sajd, Khawr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.125
Sajir, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.19
akhra el Beida’, El . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.163
Salak, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.281
Salalah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.64
Salbal, Khr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.226
Saleef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.60
alf, Ra’s a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.62
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.62

li Bandar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.24
Sall, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.132
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.132
Sall, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.132
Salima . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.122
Salines, Banc des . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.127
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.127
Salbah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.148
Samadâi, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
Samadrisat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
Samah, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.34
Sam
n, Jabal Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.56
Sam
n, Ra’s as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.113
San Carlos Banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.144
433
Sarad Sarso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.67
Sar
r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.269
Sararat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.266
Saunders Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
Saw
bi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.84
Saw
kin
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.130
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.149
Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.144
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.118
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.138
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.126
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.151
Saw
kin Channel,
No 1 Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.110
Saw
kin Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.347
Sawar Walad Hermal . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.179
Sawl Khawr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.65
awqirah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.104
Sayal Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.70
Sayf, Shi‘b as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.414
Say Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.228
Sayt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.273
Sayin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.120
Sayl as Siya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.162
Sayl Ruba . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.160
Sayl Sherra Kebr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.127
Sayl Sherra aghr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.127
Saylac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.265
Roadstead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.283
Sayl
n, Ghubbat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.238
Sayl
n, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.149
Sayr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.121
Sayr ‘Abd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.135
Sayr Haggar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.146
Sayyir, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.134
Sceraier, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.269
Schermo Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.193
Scilla Shoals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.82
Scoglio Est . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.68
Scoglio Nord Ovest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.77
Scoglio Ovest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.68
Scoglio Sud−Est . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.77
Scoglio Tauanich . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.80
Scorpion, Pointe du . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.77
Sea Gull Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.275
Sea Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.224
Sebîl, Râs el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.235
Sebîl, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.235
Secca Indore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.67
Secca Mugiunia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.42
Secca Scilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.269
Secca Tahara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.76
Sed Daaf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.125
Segala . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.121
Seil: North Massawa Channel . . . . . . . 7.103
Home Contents Index
Seil ‘Ada Kebr Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.349
Seil ‘Adá aghr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.349
Seil Abullen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.273
Seil Adasi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.113
Seil Anber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112
Seil Arabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.120
Seil Badira . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.31
Seil Bahr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.346
Seil Bayus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.125
Seil Betta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.97
Seil Harmil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112
Seil Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.66
Seil Norah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.97
Seil Sèlafi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.272
Seil Sikan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.120
Seil Umm Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.137
Seil Wusta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.102
Seil: Anfile Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.45
INDEX
Sharmah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.151
Sharwayn, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.152
Shatira Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.331
Shatt, El− . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.193
Shayb
r
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.110
Shaykh ‘Abd All
h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.238
Shaykh, Bandar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.120
Shaykh Birkhud, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.97
Shaykh Humayd, Ra’s ash . . . . . . . . . . 8.55
Shaykh M
l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.92
Shaykh Sa‘d, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.92
Shear, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
Sheikh el Abu Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.31
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.31
Sheikh el Bitân, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56
Sheikh Ibrahim, Marsa esh . . . . . . . . . 6.307
Sheikh Mahmud Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.216
Sheikh, Marsa esh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.310
Sindi Sarso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.67
Sinn Bîshr, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.234
Sintian, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.82
ir
b, Ghubbat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.158
ir
b, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.148
rah Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.137
Sirbut, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.199
Sirrayn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.35
Sirrayn Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.35
Sitarab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.216
Six Foot Rocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.184
Siyâl Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.167
Siyara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.297
Siyul el Soghira Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.332
Siyûl Kebîra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
Siyyân . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.83
Siyyân Himâr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.83
Sl bayil Dest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.200
Sla Terara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.73
Sèlafi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.272
Sells Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.178
Senacca . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.225
Senach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.121
Seril Badira . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.103
Seven Fathom Banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.45
Sha‘ab, shaab, shab, sha‘b = reef; see proper
name.
Sha‘ab Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.217
Sha’ab, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.171
Sha‘rah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.203
Sha
b, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6
Shaab The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.165
Shaba, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.320
Shabarango, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.220
Shabbah, Jabal ash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.194
Shabir, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.41
Sheikh Riyâh Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.308
Sheikh Said Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.153
Sheikh, Sharm el− . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9
Shekub, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.325
Shellâl, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.233
Shendidai, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17
Sher Mahamat, Pointe . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.52
Sherâtîb, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38
Sherâtîb Shoals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39
Shi‘ab Ab Shawk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10
Shi‘b = reef; see proper name.
Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.111
Shi‘bat ’Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.419
Shbayrim, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.347
Shbshab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.45
Shiddah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.114
Shift
 Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.31
Shmbiris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.146
Shin‘
b, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.264
Siyyân, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.83
Skenat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
Slick Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.150
Small Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18
Small Strait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.91
Socotra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.37
Soguri, Khr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.135
Sokhna Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.76
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.83
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.91
Directions for entering harbour . . . . 3.89
Gas tanker terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.93
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.76
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.80
Somali, Banc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.26
Somalia Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.26
Sono Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.34
South Al Wasm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.75
Shacaabi Salbaal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.229
Shacaabi Shiikh Yacquub . . . . . . . . . 14.272
Shad
 Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.32
Shadd el ‘Uyûn, Ghubbet . . . . . . . . . . 2.281
Shadwân Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.331
Shag Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
Shaghaf, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.179
Shaikh Barghth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.28
Sha’r, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Shajar
t, Ra’s ash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.161
Shaj‘ah, Shi‘b ash− . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10
Shajrit, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.161
Shaker Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
Shakh
w W
d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.148
Shakhs, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.45
Shakhs, Shab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.45
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.45
Shakir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13
Shamm, Ra’s ash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.218
Shams
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.30
Shams
n South . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.30
Shand Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.102
Shannaqiif, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.161
Shap Ras Bnas Light−beacon . . . . . . . 5.151
Shaqr
’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.229
Sh
r, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
Sharbain Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.39
Sharbi, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.40
Sharbith
t, Bandar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.108
Sharbith
t, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.104
Sharik, Ra’s ash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.229
Shark Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51
Shark Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.42
Sharkh
t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.273
Sharm = cove; see proper name.
Sharm, Shi‘b ash− . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.193
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.193
Sharmah Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.151
Sharmah, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.151
Shin‘
b, Khr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.259
Shin‘
b, Sha‘ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.261
Ship Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.66
Shiq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.66
Shir
f, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8
Shoe Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.36
Shoke, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.119
Shoora, Khoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.231
Shu’aybah, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.110
Shubuk Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.212
Shubuk, Sha‘ab el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.214
Shuhayr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.207
Shujayrah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.111
Shukheir, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Light−float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40
LPG Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.176
Oil Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.152
Shuma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.68
Shumma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43
Shuraim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.111
Shuula, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.235
Shuw
myah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.108
Shuw
myah, Ra’s ash . . . . . . . . . . . 13.108
fah, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.178
Signal Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.98
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.64
Storm signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.66
Traffic signals
Harbour movements . . . . . . . . . . . 1.65
Suez Canal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.64
Siigaale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.275
Sikeit, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.55
Sikha Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.150
ila Shoal, Light−buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.19
Silayet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.191
Silayet al Shubuk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.209
Silayet South End Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.63
Simbel, Sha‘ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.217
Sinai Peninsular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.90
434
South minah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.232
South Anchorage, Marsa Halaib . . . . . 6.234
South Bay, Jabal Zuqar Island . . . . . . . 4.48
South Belayim Oilfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.63
South Cone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.145
South East Bay: ansh al Kubrá . . . . . 4.61
South East Bay:
Marsa Abu ‘Im
ma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.254
South East Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.13
South East Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.209
South Fairway Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.111
South Fanaadir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.200
South Island: El−Akhawein . . . . . . . . . 4.22
South Massawa Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.35
South Point: Trinkitat Harbour . . . . . . 6.315
South Qeisûm Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.357
South Rakau Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.333
South Shoal: Centre Peak Island . . . . . . 4.42
South Shoal: Gulf of Suez . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37
Light−buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37
South Shoals, Al Mukh
. . . . . . . . . . 11.250
South Sister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.263
South Sulain Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.116
South Tawîla Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.358
South West Haycock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17
South West Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.208
South West Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.355
South West Rock: Dolphin Cove . . . . . 7.55
South West Rocks: ansh el Kubrá . . 4.17
Spit Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.99
Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.99
Spit Summit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.147
Square Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.133
Starkey Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.350
Stewart Islets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.68
Strait of Gubal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.311
Strawbridge Strait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.154
Strickland Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.73
Su‘
di, Sha‘ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.183
Subaikha, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.24
Home Contents Index
ub Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.107
Sudr, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.239
Oil Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.239
Suez Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.202
‘Atâqa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.249
Anchorages in Suez Bay . . . . . . . . . 2.222
Group A anchorages . . . . . . . . . . 2.228
Group B anchorages . . . . . . . . . . 2.230
Group C anchorages . . . . . . . . . . 2.233
Group D anchorages . . . . . . . . . . 2.236
Group H anchorages . . . . . . . . . . 2.238
Channels through Suez Bay
Eastern Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.217
Newport Rock Channel . . . . . . . 2.221
Western Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.220
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.202
Gûnet el ‘Adabîya . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.259
Marsa Badr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.256
Oil Berth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.240
Vegetable Oil Berth . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.245
Suez Canal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Ahmed Hamdy Tunnel . . . . . . . . . . 2.191
Bûr Sa‘d By−pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.141
Bûr Sa‘d West Branch . . . . . . . . . . 2.140
Bûr Tawfîq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.196
Currents and tidal streams . . . . . . . 2.126
El Ballâh East Branch . . . . . . . . . . . 2.148
El Ballâh West Branch . . . . . . . . . . 2.149
El Câp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.144
El Dars Basin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.194
El Gineifa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.190
El Qantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.145
El Shallûfa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.190
El Tîna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.144
Gebel Maryam War Memorial . . . . 2.166
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Navigation in the Suez Canal
Convoy system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32
Mooring in the Suez Canal . . . . . . 2.75
Pilotage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48
Projector and lighting . . . . . . . . . . 2.80
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.84
Ship handling in the Suez Canal . . 2.99
Signals in the Suez Canal . . . . . . . 2.85
Aids to navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.68
Tugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.66
Passage requirements
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20
Permissible dimensions . . . . . . . . 2.27
Passage through Suez Canal . . . . . . 2.135
Bûr Sa‘d to El Qantara . . . . . . . 2.139
El Qantara to Lake Timsah . . . . . 2.145
Great and Little Bitter Lakes . . . 2.173
Lake Timsah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.152
Lake Timsah to Great Bitter Lake 2.166
Regulations for navigation . . . . . . . 2.105
Sirâbiyûm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.166
Tûsûn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.166
Waiting anchorages
Northern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
Southern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14
Deep draught . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14
Main anchorage . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
Transhipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15
Suez Oil Company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.197
Suez, Port of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.280
Sufl
n Shi‘b as (23°31′N, 38°14′E) . 9.111
Sufl
n Shi‘b as (24°59′N, 36°57′E) . 9.110
Sugarloaf: (19°59′N, 40°46′E) . . . . . . 10.32
Sugarloaf: (12°45′N, 44°52′E) . . . . . . 12.73
Sukhn, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.54
ukhûr Quei’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
Sulain Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.115
Sulaym, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Sum
r Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.56
Sumar Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.221
Sum
r Islet: Ash Sharifa . . . . . . . . . . . 10.56
Sumar Islet: Sha’ab el Shubuk . . . . . . 6.215
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.163
Sumayr (Faras
n Bank) . . . . . . . . . . 10.109
INDEX
Sumayr: Jaz
ir Faras
n . . . . . . . . . . . 10.154
Sunnyah, Jabal as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.81
Sq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.248
Suqurá . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.37
Surayr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.156
Surcouf, Banc du . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.45
Surud Cad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.146
Surud, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.159
Surûr, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.314
Suwayhil al Kabr, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.56
Suwayhil a Saghr, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.56
Suweis, El . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.304
Suyl ansh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.66
Sweet Water Canal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Syagros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.152
T’’o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.45
Table Peak Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33
abt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.21
Taclai . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
Taclai, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16
Tad−hib
Adl Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.145
Tadjourah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.51
Tagarré . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.37
Tag Terara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.73
Tagwiai, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.180
Taih, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.129

’ir, Jazrat a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.26
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
Tal
wn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.179
Talla Talla Kebir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.351
Talla Talla Saqir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.210
Tallai Mira . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.299
Tamar Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.163
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.194
Tamarshira Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.351
Tamnum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.270
Tanam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.102
Tanka, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.234
Tankf
l, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.280
Tanta Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.331

qah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.63
Taqdara, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.327
Tarafaniya al Kabira, Al . . . . . . . . . . . 6.190
Tarafaniya al Saghira, Al . . . . . . . . . . 6.190
arâfi, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.45
Tarba, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.127
arf
 Ra’s a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.81
Tarm, Ra’s W
d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.62
Tarshayn, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.125
Tarum, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.17
Taulud Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.174
Taulud Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.145
Taw
h Bandar at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.28
Taw
m
n, Shi‘b at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10
Taw
sila . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.68
awl Raghw
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10
awl, Ra’s a (12°37′⋅9N, 43°25′⋅9E) . . 4.98
awl, Ra’s a (12°38′⋅8N, 43°23′⋅5E) . . 4.83
awl, Sha‘ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.350
Tawîla Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.356
Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.332
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.332
Tawîla, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.337
Tawîla, Sharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.334
Tawq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.167
Tayiba, Wâdi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.234
Teeta, Sha‘ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.217
Teetai Aweeb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.166
Tekay Dest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.200
Tel Aviv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.122
Telegraph Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.126
Tep−sa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
Terma Zerf Ch’af, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.275
Termab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23
Tewfik Port of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.196
Thâl, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.234
Thawb
n Jabal ath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.74
The Haycocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.69
435
The Paps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
Thelemet, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.230
Thelemet, Mersa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.228
Thomas Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.40
Three Fathom Bank: Dahlak Bank . . . . 7.92
Three Fathom Banks:
South Massawa Channel . . . . . . . . . . . 7.45
Three Foot Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.66
Thukhayr, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.185
Tidhk
r Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.37
Tîh, Gebel el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.234
Tilly Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.138
Timbar, Ghubbat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.77
Tîna, El . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.144
Tiqf
sh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.183
Tr
n, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.31
Tr
n, Strait of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.29
Tr
n Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.31
Togga = dry watercourse, watercourse; see
proper name.
Tohen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.151
Tokar Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.315
Tokhoshi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.269
Tokhoshi, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.269
Tolka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.84
Tongue Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.52
Tooxin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.151
Tor Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40
Tor Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.122
Toronbi, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.40
Toronbi, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16
Towartit Reefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.65
Elbow Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.109
No 4 Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.110
No 5 Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.111
No 9 Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.143
North Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.46
Towartit Reefs Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . 6.46
East Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.47
North Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.109
South Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.48
Towartit, Sha‘b, No 5 Light−beacon . . 6.111
Tower Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.235
Traffic and Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16
Exercise areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16
Marine exploitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17
Trinkitat Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.315
Tuhdat, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.165
Tûbya, Gezîret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.110
Tumble−down Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.53
Tundaba, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.48
Tûr, El . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.298
Tûr, El, Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.298
Tur‘et el Abbâsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Turfa, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.81
Turning Buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.360
urratayn, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.419
Turrik, Ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23
Turuxaad, Shaab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.271
usayl
fah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.201
Ts Sh
m Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.70
Ts Yaman Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.70
Tuways, Khawr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.44
Tuways, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.44
Twin Cones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.32
Twin Rocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.96
Two Fathom Bank: Dahlak Bank . . . . . 7.92
Two Islets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.210
Two Sisters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.203
Ubayd, Ra’s al’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.22
’Umar Jabal al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.74
‘Umayrah, Khawr am . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11
Umbeila, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.236
Um Etli, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.159
Umm Agâwish el Kebîr . . . . . . . . . . . 3.383
Umm al ‘Asal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.232
Umm al Ghar
nq Islands . . . . . . . . . . 10.57
Umm al umm

Umm al Kathb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.232
Home Contents Index
Umm al Kidf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.232
Umm al Kids, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.177
Umm al Qandl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.58
Umm al Qarb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.232
Umm al Qa’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.399
Umm Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.115
Umm ar Ra
 Bight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.196
Umm ar Ruay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.196
Umm Arar, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.263
Umm as Saifa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.62
Umm as Sayl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.409
Umm az Zahl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.68
Umm Dirra, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.323
Umm el Heimât . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.350
Umm el Heimât Passage . . . . . . . . . . . 3.350
Umm el Heimât Saghîra Island . . . . . . 3.348
Umm el Heimât, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.350
Umm el Kimân . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.41
Umm en Nayim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.122
Umm es Sahrig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.81
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.44
Umm es Seil: Howakil Bay . . . . . . . . . . 7.79
Umm es Seil:
INDEX
Wajh, Sharm al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.42
Waladab al Beedh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.207
Waliga, Buur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.244
W
lih . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.18
Waly Oilfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.65
Waqaduriya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.242
Wareegsimo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.388
Warner Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.92
Warsangeleh, Jebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.146
Wasalyat Islets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16
W
si‘, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.247
W
sil, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.266
Wâsi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.64
Wayah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.412
Wasm, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.76
Wast
n Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.444
W
yjil, Ghubbat al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
Weihemehi Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.292
Well Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.104
West Abullen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.273
West Horn Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.187
West Mandhur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.142
West Point: Jabal Zuqar Island . . . . . . . 4.48
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.158
Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.186
Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.168
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.198
West Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.193
Yanbu‘, Sharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.156
Yanbu‘ South Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.108
Yermalkau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.120
Younis Oilfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.63
Yub‘
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.18
Zaafarana Oilfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.48
Za‘am, Marsá . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.41
Zabâra, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.52
Zabargad, Gezîret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14
Zabn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.182
Za’farâna, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Za’farâna Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.125
Za‘farn
t, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.145
Zaharat, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.208
ahr al Fawq
nyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.169
North East Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.97
Umm Huweiât, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.35
Umm Ibsas Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.57
Umm Kujura, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21
Umm Lajj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.131
Umm Lasaf, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.41
Umm Misk, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.269
Umm Namus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43
Umm Nukth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.194
Umm Qamar Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.333
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.324
Umm Qur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.17
Umm Shaddâd, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.41
Umm Sidd, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7
Umm Sihr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.124
Umm Tenâssib, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.73
Umm Urmah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.117
Umm ’Usk, Sha‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Umm−al Sciora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.249
Umm−al−Assal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.249
Umm−
l−Bahar Dest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.251
Ummal, Jazrat Al− . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.96
‘Unsar, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6
‘Unur
t, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.162
‘Uq
b, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.152
‘Uqb
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.11
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.11
North Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.11
‘Uqb
n aghr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.36
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.36
‘Urays, Jabal al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.147
‘Urf
n, W
d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.124
‘Uaydah, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.150
‘Utâf, Sha‘b el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
‘Utbah, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.92
‘Uthm
n R
miz, Jazrat . . . . . . . . . . . 11.44
Uwaf Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.170
Valxum, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.299
W
d " river, stream; see proper name.
W
d al Miy
h, Marsá . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.138
Wâdi Lahami, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.61
Wahl
n, Khawr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.235
Wajh, Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.42
West Rakau Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.337
White Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.163
Wickham Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.42
Wid
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.84
William Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.102
Williamson Shoal: Jabal Zubayr Island . 4.39
Williamson Shoals: Towartit Reefs . . . 6.143
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.143
Wingate Reefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.191
Wishkah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.137
Withr, Gebel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.271
Wizr, Marsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.39
Woodhouse Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.40
Wuday Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.177
Wudayyah, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.230
Wugh
d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.119
Wusid, Jabal am . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.75
Wusool Abu Mahmûd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Wusta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.102
Wusá, Jabal al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.419
Wusá, Shi‘b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.419
Xaafuun, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.157
Xabo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.248
Xambi, Buur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.152
Xamra, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.304
Xarshow, Bandar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.316
Xatib, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.159
Xatiib, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.299
Xiis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.236
Xiis Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.237
Xoor Binna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.256
Xumbays, Raas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.225
Y
’, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.145
Yakhtul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.124
Yaman, Jabal al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.12
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.12
Yaman, Ra’s al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17
Yamanya, Jabal al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.347
Yanbu‘ al Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.158
Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.176
Berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.197
Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.189
East Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.193
436
ahrat ‘shiq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.234
ahrat Ab Ma
l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.65
ahrat Dur
kah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.203
ahrat Ja‘far . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.233
ahrat Mar
y
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.65
ahrat Maraayn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.136
Zahrat Sumayr: Faras
n Bank . . . . . . 10.108
ahrat Sumayr: Jaz
ir Faras
n . . . . . 10.155
Zajj Islet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.172
alawt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.13
Zamhar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.161
Zanabga, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.256
Zanatiy
t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.177
arr Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.145
Zaraba, Mersa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.330
Zauber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.122
Zaulaul, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.107
Zay
d Jazrat az . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.126
Zay
d Khawr az . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.126
Zayha’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.172
Zeila . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.265
Zeit Bay Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.194
LPG Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.212
Zeit Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.345
Zeit, Gebel el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.74
Zeit, Ghubbet el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.213
Zeit Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.213
Zeit, Râs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Zeitîya, Mersa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.232
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Zenobia Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.208
Zi Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.74
Ziesel Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.238
Zubaydah, Marsá . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.35
Zubayr Island, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37
Zuf
f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.144
Zuhd, Jabal az . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10
Zula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.50
Zula Bahir Selat’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.47
ulmah, Ra’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.151
Zuq
q (18°51′N, 40°25′E) . . . . . . . . . 10.13
Zuq
q Island (18°04′N, 40°48′E) . . . . 10.65
Zuqar Island, Jabal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.48
Zuraymah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.177
Zurb
t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.175
Zurt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.160
Home Contents Index

PUBLICATIONS OF THE
UNITED KINGDOM HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE

A complete list of Sailing Directions, Charts and other works published by the United Kingdom Hydrographic Office, together
with a list of Agents for their sale, is contained in the “Catalogue of Admiralty Charts and Publications”, published annually.
The list of Admiralty Distributors is also on the UKHO website (www.ukho.gov.uk), or it can be obtained from:

The United Kingdom Hydrographic Office,

Admiralty Way,
Taunton, Somerset
TA1 2DN

Produced in the United Kingdom

for UKHO by Pindar plc
Home Contents Index

CD−ROM Instructions
See Status, Disclaimer and Copyright at Explanatory The opening screen should appear within a few seconds.
Notes at Page vii. If the opening screen does not appear after 15 seconds,
The CD−ROM below contains the following: try the following:
Text of this volume in Portable Document Format Double−left click: “My Computer”.
(PDF). Double−left click CD−ROM icon: NPxx (D:).
Software to install Adobe Acrobat Reader. Double−left click html file: “index”.
A link to the UKHO website: www.ukho.gov.uk. The CD−ROM is designed to work with the following
Photographs in PDF, if they are available for the area software:
covered by this volume. Windows 98
Avoid touching or scratching the silver side of the Windows 2000
CD−ROM. To protect it from damage or loss, return it to Windows ME
the envelope after use. Windows NT4.0 SP5
Place the CD−ROM in a compact disc drive. Windows XP